Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

ADDENDUM

TO THE NOVEMBER 1998

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

PARTS ONE, TWO, THREE AND FOUR

FEBRUARY 2000 DHU AL-QADHA 1420

Table of Contents

PREAMBLE

ADDENDUM TO THE MOC NOVEMBER 1998 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD

AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION- PARTS ONE, TWO, THREE AND FOUR

- This book is an addendum to the MOC November 1998 General Specifications. It

contains special directions, provision, modifications or/and requirements pertaining to
matters not covered or detailed in the General Specifications.
- When there is discordance between the stipulations of the Special Specifications of
the Project and this addendum, the content of the Special Specifications of the
particular project shall govern.
Table of Contents

ADDENDEM TO THE MOC NOVEMBER 1998 GENERAL SPECIFICATION

PARTS ONE, TWO, THREE AND FOUR

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1.09 Supervision Staff Facilities

1.09.5 Project Laboratory

Section 2.06 Untreated Subgrade

2.06.2 Materials

Section 4.01 Bituminous Materials

4.01.1 Description
4.01.2 Grades

Section 4.02 Bituminous Prime Coat, Tack Coat and Fog Seal

4.02.8 Measurement
4.02.9 Payment

Section 4.05 Bituminous Concrete Pavement

4.05.1 Description
4.05.2 Materials
4.05.6 Construction Requirement
4.05.10 Method of Measurement
4.05.11 Payment

Section 4.06 Hot-Mixed Recycled Bituminous Concrete

4.06.2 Materials
4.06.4 Equipment
4.06.6 Construction Requirements
4.06.9 Method of Measurement
4.06.10 Payment
Table of Contents

Section 4.07 Bituminous Concrete Friction Course

4.07.2 Materials

Section 4.09 Cold-Mix Recycled Bituminous Base

4.09.1 Description
4.09.2 Materials
4.09.9 Method of Measurement
4.09.10 Payment

Section 4.16 Bituminous Stone Matrix Asphalt (SMA) (New Section)

4.16.1 Description
4.16.2 Materials
4.16.3 Mineral Filler
4.16.4 Fiber
4.16.5 The Mix Gradation
4.16.6 Construction
4.16.7 Quality Assurance Procedures
4.16.8 Method of Measurement
4.16.9 Payment

Section 4.17 Micro-Surfacing (New Section)

4.17.1 Description
4.17.2 Materials Requirements
4.17.3 Construction Requirements
4.17.4 Method of Measurement
4.17.5 Payment

Section 4.18 Porous Bituminous Concrete (New Section)

4.18.1 Description
4.18.2 Materials
4.18.3 Mineral Filler
4.18.4 Fiber
4.18.5 The Mix Gradation
4.18.6 Construction
4.18.7 Quality Assurance Procedures
4.18.8 Method of Measurement
4.18.9 Payment
Table of Contents

ADDENDUM TO THE MOC NOVEMBER 1998 GENERALSPECIFICATIONS

PART ONE

GENERAL
Table of Contents

SECTION 1.09 SUPERVISION STAFF FACILITIES

1.09.5 Project Laboratory

1.09.5.5 Testing Equipment, Test and Specifications

Add the following:

Contractor shall furnish the following Superpave Quality Control Test equipment as part
of the Project Laboratory.

Asphalt Content Ignition Furnace

Nuclear Density Gauge (Thin Layer)
Programmable Rotational Viscometer

1.09.5.5.1 Equipment Specifications for Superpave Asphalt Content Ignition Furnace

1.09.5.5.1.1 General

The Asphalt Content Ignition Furnace shall rapidly determine asphalt content without the
use of solvents and allowing the determination of the aggregate gradation. It shall also include an
accurate weighing system to continuously measure the weight loss of the bituminous mixture
during combustion and automatically display the percent asphalt content.

1.09.5.5.1.2 Asphalt Content Ignition Furnace Specifications

Performance

Sample size 3500 grams

Scale readout resolution : + 0 Grams
Precision at 6% AC for 1250 grams: + 0.06%
Test Time: 30 to 45 minutes

Electrical

Power source: 08/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Peak power consumption: 6400/8500 watt
Amps: 31/36
Heat up time: 25 to 550 °C in 25 min
Furnace operating temperature: 25 to 800°C
After burner temperature: above 900°C
Plug: NEMA 6-50 P

Software

Data Storage: Up to 300 test results/correction factors

Positive or negative aggregate correction factor
Programmable weight loss limit for measurement
Interface: RS-232 for data transfer to computer or printer
Baud Rate: 600 to 9600 Baud
Automatic startup and shut down timer

1-1
Table of Contents

Mechanical

Width Depth Height

Outside
Dimensions 61 cm (24 in.) 81 cm (32 in.) 92.25 cm (37.5 in)
Chamber
Dimensions 30.5 cm (12 in.) 45.7 cm (18 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.)
Weight: 94.12 kg (208 lbs)

1.09.5.5.1.3 Standard Accessory Equipment

• One set of 3 sample trays

• Printer
• One pair of high temperature insulated gloves
• One face shield
• One sample heat protection cage
• One sample cool down tray
• Data collection and storage console
• One sample carrying fixture
• 10 ft. (4” diameter) metal exhaust pipe

1.09.5.5.2 Equipment Specifications for a Nuclear Testing Gauge (Thin Layer)

1.09.5.5.2.1 General

The Nuclear Testing Gauge shall provide fast and efficient measurement of the in
place density of aggregates and asphalt pavements including thin layer asphalt overlays in
accordance with ASTM Test Methods D2922, D3017 and D2950.

1.09.5.5.2.2 Detailed Equipment Specifications

Detailed equipment specifications can be obtained from the MOC materials and
Research Department.

1.09.5.5.3 Equipment Specifications for Programmable Rotational Viscometer

1.09.5.5.3.1 Background

A rotational viscometer is used to determine the apparent viscosity of asphalts at

various elevated temperatures other than those used for viscosity measurements in ASTM
D4402. The specimen test temperature must be closely controlled and monitored and can be
achieved through the use of a thermosel device.

1-2
Table of Contents

1.09.5.5.3.4 General Requirements

The rotational viscometer must function as a stand-alone device and also have
the capability of being controlled and operated remotely through the use of a computer. The
rotational viscometer shall be able to perform the testing as required in AASHTO TP48 and
include the following functions and capabilities:

1. A built-in microprocessor for test data storage and analysis.

2. Built-in user friendly programming
3. Test data display to include – spindle number, RPM, specimen temperature,
viscosity, shear rate, and sear stress.
4. Included computer interface and software (IBM PC compatible).
5. Test specimen temperature control and monitoring system.

1.09.5.5.3.3 Software and Other Programmable Rotation Viscometer Specifications

Operating software to control rotational viscometer and thermosel, collect and

store test data, perform data analysis from any IBM or compatible computer via RS232 serial
port.

Provide a clear and simple, operating and instruction manual for software,
viscometer, and temperature controller equipment.

SUBSET EQUIPMENT QUANTITIES WHICH TOGETHER COMPRISE ONE COMPLETE

PROGRAMMABLE ROTATIONAL VISCOMETER SYSTEM

Description of Subsets Quantities

Rotational Viscometer, Programmable Each

Base with Power Supply Each
Laboratory Stand Each
Signal Output Cable Each
Carrying Case Each
Programmable Temperature Controller (Thermosel) Each
Sample Chamber Each
Operating Software Each
Spindles – (Required do determine viscosity from
20 mPaS to 500,000 mPaS) Sets

1.09.5.5.3.4 Detailed Programmable Rotational Viscometer Equipment Specifications

Detailed equipment specifications can be obtained from the MOC Materials and
Research Department.

1-3
Table of Contents

ADDENDUM TO THE MOC NOVEMBER 1998 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

PART TWO

EARTHWORK
Table of Contents

Section 2.06 UNTREATED SUBGRADE

2.06.2 Materials

Replace requirement 1 with the following:

1. Material classified by MRDTM 210 as A-1-a(0), A-1-b(0) A-2-4(0) having no rock fragments
larger than one third (1/3) the layer thickness after compaction.

2-1
Table of Contents

ADDENDUM TO THE NOVEMBER 1998 MOC GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

PART 4

BITUMINOUS CONSTRUCTION
Table of Contents

SECTION 4.01 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

4.01.1 Description

Add the following:

6. Performance Graded (PG) bituminous materials

4.01.2 Grades
Add the following

4.01.2.6 Performance Graded (PG) Bituminous Materials

Performance graded Bituminous materials shall conform to AASHTO Performance

Graded (PG) Binder Specification MP1 (provisional specification) for PG 76-10, as a
minimum. It should be noted, however, that bituminous material conforming to
requirements for PG 82-10 is highly desirable and should be used wherever it is available,
especially on Roads with heavy traffic.

The Contractor shall submit a certificate of analysis showing conformance with

either PG 76-10 or PG 82-10 binder specification MP1 as stated below.

ORIGINAL BINDER

Test PG 76-10 PG 82-10

Flash point temp, T48 230°C minimum 230°C minimum
Viscosity, ASTM D4402: 135° C 135° C
Maximum, 3 Pa•s 2 Test Temperature of,
Dynamic Shear, TP5; 76°C 82°C
G*/sin δ, Minimum, 1.00 kPa
Test Temp @ 10 rad/s

ROLLING THIN FILM OVEN (T240) or THIN FILM OVEN (T179) RESIDUE
PG 76-10 PG 82-10
Mass loss, Maximum 1% 1%
Dynamic Shear, TP5; 76 °C 82 °C
G*/sin δ, Minimum, 2.20 kPa
Test Temp @ 10 rad/s

PRESSURE AGING VESSEL RESIDUE

PG 76-10 PG 82-10
PAV Aging Temperature 110 °C 110 °C
Dynamic Shear, TP5 37°C 40° C
G*/sin δ, Minimum, 5000 kPa
Test Temp @ 10 rad/s
Physical Hardening Report
Creep Stiffness, TP1 0°C 0°C
Stiffness, Maximum, 300.0 MPa @ 60 seconds
m-value, Minimum, 0.300 @ 60 seconds
Test Temp
Direct Tension, TP3 0°C 0°C
Failure Strain, Minimum, 1.0% (loading rate of
1.0 mm/min)
Test Temp
Table of Contents

G* -- Shear modulus; δ -- phase angle; G*sin δ (for fatigue); G*/sin δ (for rutting) ;
m—rate of change in the creep stiffness.

The Contractor is only required to perform viscosity Quality Control Testing on the Performance
Graded Binder. The Ministry of Communication Materials and Research Department Materials
laboratory is equipped with the remaining equipment for the complete Performance Graded
Binder Quality Assurance testing.
Table of Contents

SECTION 4.02 BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT, TACK COAT AND FOG SEAL

4.02.8 Measurement

This Subsection is amended to provide that bituminous tack coat shall not be measured
for payment.

4.02.9 Payment

Replace the first sentence with the following:

Bituminous tack coat will not be paid for directly as it is subsidiary to the Pay Item for the
surface being tacked.
Table of Contents

Section 4.05 Bituminous concrete pavement

4.05.1 Description

Add the following:

Bituminous overlay Work shall consist of the construction of one course of hot-
mixed, hot-laid bituminous mixture conforming to the requirements of this section, spread
and compacted on an approved surface, in compliance with the lines, grades and cross
sections indicated on the plans or as directed. The exact limits of construction and the
widths and thicknesses of bituminous overlay will be confirmed by the Engineer, and will
be based on the job conditions prevailing at the time the Work is performed.

For the purpose of this section, when the term "bituminous wearing course" or
“surface course” is used, it shall mean "bituminous wearing course and/or bituminous
leveling course and/or bituminous overlay", as applicable.

4.05.2 Materials
4.05.2.1 Bituminous Materials

Replace with the following:

Bituminous Material for bituminous concrete pavements including bituminous

concrete friction course, hot mixed, recycled bituminous concrete, bituminous stone matrix
asphalt (SMA) and porous bituminous concrete (PBC) shall be performance graded (PG) asphalt
cement meeting the requirements of Paragraph 4.01.2.6 – “Performance Graded (PG)
Bituminous Materials” in this Addendum to the General Specifications.

4.05.2.2 Aggregate

Add the following immediately below Table 4.05-2:

Improvement of the resistance to loss of Marshall Stability of the bituminous

mixture, by increasing the asphalt content, shall not be attempted; instead, this shall be
accomplished by improving the quality of aggregate and in particular the portion passing a
4.75 mm (AASHTO No. 4) sieve.

4.05.2.4 Chemical Admixtures a nd Asphalt Modifiers

Replace the third paragraph with the following:

The contractor shall add an approved polymer material to all bituminous

concrete mixtures in accordance with the following criteria:

4.05.6 Construction Requirements

4.05.6.5 Preparation of Surface

Add the following :

4. When an overlay is to be built, and as soon as practicable after

receiving the site, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer cored samples of the
Table of Contents

existing bituminous pavement. The samples shall be cored at the locations specified by
the Engineer. Samples shall be obtained in sets of two (2), cut from the same location on
the existing bituminous pavement. Two (2) sets of samples per traffic lane-kilometer to be
overlaid, or fraction thereof, shall be obtained and all test holes shall be filled and
compacted by the Contractor at his own expense.

The Contractor shall perform all tests that may be required to assist the
Engineer in his evaluation of the properties of the existing pavement and the verification
of the thickness of the bituminous wearing course to be constructed. Should the resulting
total thickness of the bituminous layers, including the layer to be constructed, exceed two
hundred and fifty (250) millimeters, the matter shall be referred to the Maintenance
Department of the Ministry. A detailed report containing the findings of the foregoing
investigation, the specific problems encountered, and the proposed solutions
accompanied by cost estimates shall be submitted to the said Department by the
Engineer. Within fifteen (15) days from receipt of the Engineer’s proposal, the Ministry
shall advise the Engineer of its decision, that shall be final and binding to the Contractor
under the provisions of the Contract.

The Contractor shall perform all sampling and testing at his own
expense and in the presence of the Engineer.

Sections of existing, old failed base may, if so directed, be replaced by

aggregate base course material, in accordance with General Specifications Section 3.03 -
Aggregate Bases. This work shall be paid at the unit rate bid per cubic meter for
"Aggregate Base Course" as specified in the Bill of Quantities.

Catch basin grates, drop inlet grates, manhole covers, etc., that must be
adjusted to match the new surface grade, shall be paid at the Contract unit price bid per each
item for such adjustment, as specified in the Bill of Quantities.

7. When the bituminous wearing course is to be placed on Portland

cement concrete bridge decks or Portland cement concrete pavement, the surface shall be
prepared and primed as specified in Section 4.02 - Bituminous Prime Coat, Tack Coat and
Fog Seal.

4.05.10 Method of Measurement

Replace the last paragraph with the following:

Antistripping agents, mineral fillers, fibers and chemical admixture/asphalt modifiers other
than polymers used by the contractor to meet the job mix formula (JMF) requirements will be
considered subsidiary to the Bituminous Concrete Pay Items in the General Specifications and in
this Addendum to the General Specifications and will not be measured separately unless
specifically stated in the special specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities. Polymer
chemical admixture/asphalt modifiers shall be measured separately by the kilogram.

4.05.11 Payment

Replace the third paragraph with the following:

Antistripping agents, mineral fillers, fibers and chemical admixture/asphalt

modifiers other than polymers will not be paid for separately as they are subsidiary to the
Bituminous Concrete Pay Items in the General Specifications and in this Addendum to the
General Specifications unless specifically specified in the Special Specifications and
listed Bill of Quantities. Polymer chemical admixture/Asphalt modifiers will be paid for
Table of Contents

separately when measures in accordance with subsection 4.05.10 Method of Measurement

in this Addendum to the General Specifications. Under Pay Item No. 4050802 chemical
admixture/asphalt modifier, polymer.
Table of Contents

SECTION 4.06 - HOT-MIX RECYCLED BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

4.06.2 Materials

Replace Paragraph 4.06.2.1 -- Bituminous Material with the following:

4.06.2.1 Bituminous Material

Bituminous Material for hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete shall be performance
graded (PG) asphalt cement meeting the requirements of Paragraph 4.01.2.6 “Performance
Graded (PG) Bituminous Materials” in this Addendum to the General Specifications.

4.06.4 Equipment

Add the following:

Equipment shall be dependent upon the recycling method to be used as specified

below. The basic equipment for each method shall be accompanied by the required
number of dump trucks, liquid asphalt tanker and distributor, steel-wheel and pneumatic-
tired rollers, power broom, air compressor with blower, traffic control devices, and all
necessary hand tools.

4.06.4.1 First Method - Hot Recycling in Central Mixing Plant

4.06.4.1.1 Milling Machine and Crusher
The milling machine shall be as specified in General Specifications
Subsection 4.11.2 – “Equipment”. When entire layers are being removed as approved by the
Engineer, the reclaimed materials shall be reduced to the required sizes in a central crushing
plant, suitable for the intended purpose. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, none of the
fines shall be removed from the reclaimed materials and the crusher shall not produce an
increase in fine size materials or new fractured faces.
4.06.4.1.2 Central Mixing Plant
1. Batch Plant Type. The batch plant shall prepare the mixture with
heat transfer and may employ one of the methods described herein.
The first method shall utilize a long belt conveyor with brake
motor and a feeder bin for reclaimed materials. A chute shall be attached to the batching tower to
direct the reclaimed material from the incline conveyor into the weigh hopper. The control system
on the plant shall be modified with additional presets so that the feeder bin and incline are
handled like a fifth aggregate. When adding reclaimed materials, the fifth preset shall
automatically turn on the incline conveyor and the recycle bin and run the material into the weigh
hopper until the desired weight is reached.
The second method shall utilize a feeder bin for reclaimed
material that continuously feeds a separate bucket elevator that dumps the material in a special
hopper attached to the tower. This hopper shall be equipped with a gate to release the materials
on demand into the weigh hopper as needed for each batch.
2. Drum Mix Plant Type. This type of plant shall be specifically
designed to produce a recycled bituminous mix. Its cold feeder system shall consist of at least
five cold bins capable of accurate control of the materials supplied. The feeder system shall be
automatic, linked to the main control system of the plant. Heating of the reclaimed materials shall
be done in the drum in such a manner as to prevent any deterioration of the bituminous binder.
The plant shall be provided with a mix storage system with a capacity of not less than forty (40)
tons.
Table of Contents

4.06.4.2 Second Method - In-Situ Hot Recycling of Bituminous Pavement Surface

Course
4.06.4.2.1 Heater/Scarifier/Repaver
Equipment shall be as specified in Subsection 4.12.4 – “Equipment” in
the General Specifications.
4.06.4.2.2 Mobile Recycling and Blending Unit
This unit shall be fully independent, capable of treating the surface layer
in place and furnished with an additional heater. The unit shall be complete with an integral
system for adding the bitumen modifier in a uniform and controlled manner. The mobile blending
unit shall be equipped with a coordinated system for adding and mixing with the old materials to
be recycled, new aggregate, bitumen, asphalt modifier or new bituminous mixture at the required
quantities. The unit shall be capable of disposing any surplus materials prior to the mixing
process.

4.06.4.3 Third Method - In-Site Hot Recycling of Bituminous Pavement Layers

4.06.4.3.1 Milling Machine

The milling machine shall be as specified in Subparagraph 4.06.4.1.1
“Milling Machine and Crusher” in this Addendum to the General Specifications.

4.06.4.3.2 Mobile Pickup/Recycling and Blending Unit

The unit shall be capable of picking the reclaimed materials and the new
aggregate, heating the mixture, adding asphalt modifier and/or asphalt cement separately and
mixing. Materials shall be heated in a drum-type plant in such a manner as to prevent damage to
the bituminous binder in the reclaimed materials. The unit shall be capable of cleaning the
surface and applying asphalt emulsion thereon after picking up the materials for heating and prior
to spreading.

4.06.6 Construction Requirements

Add the following:

Th
e exact locations of the areas to be recycled along with the respective thicknesses thereof
shall be determined and delineated by the Engineer immediately prior to the start of the
Work. The process shall involve controlled removal of the existing pavement layer and the
addition and mixing in place or at a central plant of any required new aggregate, new
asphalt and asphalt modifiers. The resultant hot mixture shall be spread, compacted and,
when directed or shown on the plans, sealed with a surface treatment or an overlay. When
such a treatment or an overlay is required, it shall be carried out and paid for separately as
specified in other sections of the specifications.

4.06.6.1 First Method - Hot Recycling in Central Mixing Plant

4.06.6.1.1 Bituminous Pavement Layers Removal and Storage
The existing bituminous pavement layer shall be removed in such a manner as to
prevent or minimize the mixing of the asphalt-bound materials with untreated base course or
subgrade materials. Removal shall be by milling or controlled excavation. Should untreated base
course or subgrade materials be removed, they shall be stored separately as directed. Work to
remain in place that has been damaged by the Contractor during the removal operations, as
Table of Contents

determined by the Engineer, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense and prior to
the placement of the recycled layer. Deficient parts of base course or subgrade that are to be
restored, as shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer prior to start of the removal
operations, shall be repaired and paid for separately as specified in the pertinent sections of the
General Specifications and this Addendum to the General Specifications.

4.06.6.1.2 Size Reduction and Preparation

Reclaimed bituminous pavement materials shall be reduced to a size smaller
than 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inch) as specified in Subparagraph 4.06.2.6.1.1 above. Size reduction shall
be by milling or by excavation and subsequent crushing using the equipment and procedures
specified in Subparagraph 4.06.4.1.1 above. Reclaimed aggregate, after being reduced to the
required size and prior to their use in the recycled mixture, shall be segregated into at least two
lots; one for fine aggregate with at least eighty percent (80%), by weight, passing a 4.75 mm (No.
4) sieve; and another for coarse aggregate with less than forty percent (40%), by weight, passing
a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.
4.06.6.1.3 Adding New Materials, Heating and Mixing
1. When a batch-type plant is used, the new aggregate shall be
proportioned in the cold feed bins and super heated in the dryer. From there they shall be
conveyed to the hot storage bins. The reclaimed materials, without heating or drying, shall be
conveyed to the weigh hopper and join the super heated new aggregate. Heating of the recycled
mixture shall take place in the pugmill by heat transfer between new and reclaimed materials.
2. When the drum-type plant is used, the new aggregate shall enter
at the burner end, and shall be dried and super heated. The reclaimed materials, without heating
or drying, shall enter the drum near its center through openings in the shell, at a point far enough
from the burner, and join the new aggregate. Heating and mixing of the recycled mixture shall
then take place in the lower end of the drum.
The mixing plant to be used shall be equipped with a facility to
allow addition of new asphalt cement, recycling agent, and mineral filler to be added separately, if
needed. The mixing process shall produce full coverage to the aggregate. The Engineer may
increase the mixing time as necessary to obtain a homogeneous mixture and good aggregate
cover. The water content in the mixture immediately upon its spreading shall not exceed one and
one-half percent (1.5%), by weight.
4.06.6.1.4 Prime Coat and Tack Coat
Placing prime coat and tack coat, as shown or as directed, shall be in
accordance with Subsection 4.02.5 – “Construction” in the General Specifications.

4.06.6.2 Second Method - In-Situ Hot Recycling of Bituminous Pavement Surface

Course

Refer to General Specifications Subsection 4.12.7 – “Construction.”

4.06.6.3 Third Method - In-Situ Hot Recycling of Bituminous Pavement Layers

4.06.6.3.1 Size Reduction
Bituminous pavement layers shall be removed by milling to produce a uniform
gradation as close as possible to that specified in General Specifications Paragraph 4.06.2.6 .
“RAP”
Table of Contents

4.06.6.3.2 Adding New Materials, Heating and Mixing

Reclaimed materials shall be picked up, and mixed with new aggregate, new
asphalt cement and recycling agents in a drum-type plant as detailed in Subparagraph 4.06.6.1.3
above. The heating temperature and the overall mixing time shall be suitable for drying, heating,
mixing, and covering the aggregate in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. The heating
temperature shall be kept within the limits of one hundred-fifty (150) and one hundred-sixty (160)
degrees Celsius. The water content in the mixture immediately upon its spreading shall not
exceed one and one-half percent (1.5%), by weight.

4.06.9 Method of Measurement

Replace the fourth paragraph with the following:

Antistripping agents, mineral fillers, fibers and chemical admixture/Asphalt

modifiers other than polymers used by the contractor to meet the Job Mix Formula (JMF)
requirements will be considered subsidiary to the construction of the hot-mix recycled
bituminous concrete pavement and will not be measured separately unless specifically
stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities. Polymer chemical
admixture/Asphalt modifiers shall be measured separately by the kilogram.

4.06.10 Payment

Replace the paragraph with the following:

Antistripping agents, minerals fillers, fibers and chemical admixture/asphalt modifiers

other than polymers used by the contractor to meet the Job Mix Formula requirement shall
be considered subsidiary to the construction of hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete and
shall not be paid for separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and
listed in the Bill of Quantities. Polymer chemical admixture/asphalt modifiers will be paid
for in accordance with subsection 4.05.11 “Payment” in this Addendum to the General
Specificatons.
Table of Contents

Section 4.07 Bituminous Concrete Friction Course

4.07.2 Materials
Replace Paragraph 4.07.2.1 -- Bituminous Material with the following:
4.07.2.1 Bituminous Material
Bituminous Material for bituminous concrete friction course shall be performance
graded (PG) asphalt cement meeting the requirements of paragraph 4.01.2.6 “Performance
Graded (PG) Bituminous Materials” in this Addendum to the General Specifications.

4.07.9 Measurement

Replace the last paragraph with the following:

Antistripping agents, mineral fillers, fibers and chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers

other than polymers will be considered subsidiary to the construction of the bituminous concrete
friction course and will not be measured separately unless specifically stated in the Special
Specification and listed in the Bill Quantities. Polymer chemical admixture/asphalt modifiers
shall be measured separately by the kilogram.

4.07.10 Payment

Replace the fourth paragraph with the following:

Asphalt cement modified asphalt cement, antistripping agents, mineral fillers, fibers
and chemical additive/asphalt modifiers other than polymers will not paid for separately as they
are considered subsidiary to the construction of the bituminous concrete friction course in the
General Specifications and this Addendum to the General Specification. Polymer chemical
admixture/asphalt modifiers will be paid for separately in accordance with Subsection 4.05.11
“Payment” in this Addendum to the General Specifications.
Table of Contents

Section 4.09 - cold-mix recycled bituminous base

4.09.1 Description

Add the following:

This Work shall also consist of constructing and repairing a cold-mix bituminous
base course using existing stockpiled milled material, in accordance with these
Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

SUPPLEMENTAL PAY ITEMS

Cold Reuse of Stockpiled Milled Material

Repair of Asphalt Layers Constructed from Milled Materials

4.09.2 Materials

4.09.2.4 Liquid and Emulsified Bituminous Materials

Add the following:

Cutback asphalt shall be medium-curing grade MC-30, MC-70 or MC-250;

emulsified asphalt shall be medium- or slow-setting, depending on the aggregate
gradation directed and the weather conditions.

4.09.9 Method of Measurement

Add the following:

Cold reuse of stockpiled milled material shall be measured by the cubic meter of
completed and accepted base course, in place.

Repair of Asphalt Layers constructed from milled materials shall be measured by the
square meter of the accepted repair work.

4.09.10 Payment

Add the following:

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING SUPPLEMENTAL

PAY ITEMS WHEN THEY ARE INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT BILL OF QUANTITIES:

ITEM No. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

40951 Cold Reuse of Stockpiled Milled Materials Cubic Meter
40952 Repair of Asphalt Layers Constructed from Milled Square Meter
Materials
Table of Contents

SECTION 4.16 BITUMINOUS STONE MATRIX ASPHALT (SMA)

4.16.1 Description

This work shall consist of placing Bituminous Stone Matrix Asphalt (SMA) as
shown on the plans, and in accordance with these specifications, the General
Specifications and as directed by the Engineer. The SMA may be produced in batch or
drum mix plant.

The SMA is a gap graded hot mix asphalt mixture consisting of crushed coarse
and fine aggregates, mineral filler, asphalt cement, and stabilizing agent. The stabilizing
agent typically consists of fibers and / or polymers.

Supplemental Pay Items

Bituminous Stone matrix Asphalt (SMA)

4.16.2 Materials
The materials shall conform to the following requirements:

Bituminous Material

Bituminous material shall be Performance Graded (PG) asphalt cement conforming to the
requirements in Paragraph 4.01.2.6 “Performance Graded Bituminous Materials” in this
Addendum to the General Specifications

4.16.2.2 Aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to the following criteria:

4.16.2.2.1 Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate for SMA shall meet the requirements in the General
Specifications with the following additions or changes:

Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T96) 60% min

L.A. Abrasion Loss (AASHTO T96) 30% max
Sodium Sulphate Soundness Loss (T104) 12% max
Coarse and Fine Durability (T210) 40 min
Polish Value 0.4 min
Friction (at the completion of construction) 40 min
Two or more crushed faces 100%
Flat and Elongated 3 to 1 (ASTM D 4791) 20%
5 to 1 5%

4.16.2.2.2 Fine Aggregate

Fine aggregate shall meet the following requirements:

SODIUM SULPHAT SOUNDNESS LOSS (T104) 12% MAX

Crushed aggregate 100%

Plasticity (T109) 0%
Table of Contents

4.16.3 Mineral Filler

Mineral Filler shall be rock dust, crushed lime stone, portland cement or other
suitable filler material and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M17. Additionally,
plasticity index (T90) of mineral filler shall not exceed 4%. Filler shall be kept as dry as
possible, but in not case the moisture shall exceed 10%.

4.16.4 Fiber

The cellulose fibers which meet the following requirements shall be uniformly
dispersed in the SMA mixture. Fiber content shall be between 0.3-0.4% of the total mix (lower
limit for cellulose, higher for mineral fibers). [local fine aggregate is not acceptable as a fiber].

Property Requirement
Sieve Analysis
1
Method A – Alpine Sieve Analysis
Fiber Length 6 mm ( 0.25 in) Maximum
Passing 0.150 mm (No. 100 sieve) 70 + 10 %
2
Method B – Mesh Screen Analysis
Fiber Length 6 mm ( 0.25 in) Maximum
Passing 0.850 – mm (No. 20) sieve 85 + 10 %
0.425 – mm (No. 40 ) sieve 65 + 10 %
0.106 – mm (No. 140) sieve 30 + 10 %
3
Ash Content 18 + 5 non-volatile
4
PH 7.5 + 1.0
5
Oil Absorption 5.0 + 1.0 (times fiber mass)
6
Moisture Content Less than 5 % (by mass)

(1) Method A – Alpine Sieve Analysis. This test is performed using and Alpine Air Jet Sieve
(Type 200 LS). A representative five gram sample of fiber is sieved for 14 minutes at a
controlled vacuum of 5 kPa (11 psi) of water. The portion remaining on the screen is
weighed.

(2) Method B – Mesh Screen Analysis. This test is performed using standard 0.850, 0.425,
0.250, 0.180, 0.150, and 0.106 mm sieves, nylon brushes, and a shaker. A representative 10
gram sample of fiber is sieved, using a shaker and two nylon brushes on each screen. The
amount retained on each sieve is weighed and the percentage passing calculated.
Repeatability of this method is suspect and needs to be verified.

(3) Ash Content – A representative 2 – 3 gram sample of fiber is placed in a tarred crucible and
heated between 595 and 650 C (1100 and 1200F) for not less than two hours. The crucible
and ash are cooked in a desiccator and weighed.

(4) Ph Test – Five grams of fiber is added to 100 ml of distilled water, stirred and let sit for 30
minutes. The Ph is determined with a probe calibrated with a Ph 7.0 buffer.

(5) Oil Absorption Test – Five grams of fiber is accurately weighed and suspended in an excess
of mineral spirits for not less than 5 minutes to ensure total saturation. It is then placed in a
2
screen mesh strainer (approximately 0,5 mm opening size) and shaken on a wrist action
shaker for 10 minutes (approximately 32 mm (1 ¼ in) motion at 240 shakes per minutes).
The shaken mass is then transferred without touching to a tarred container and weighed.
Results are reported as to the amount (number of times its own weight) the fibers are able to
absorb.
Table of Contents

(6) Moisture Content – Ten grams of fiber is weighed and placed in a 121 C (250 F) forced air
oven for two hours. The sample is then re-weighed immediately upon removal form the
oven.

4.16.4.1 Introduction of Fibers for batch plants

Fibers may be introduced manually or mechanically.

1) Manual Introduction. Pre-weighed packaged fibers may be added directly

to the pugmill during dry mixing time.

2) Automated introduction. Using a fiber machine, loose fibers may be added

directly to the pugmill during dry mixing time.

When fibers are used in batch plant, dry mixing time is increased by 5 – 7 seconds and
wet mixing times increased by at least 5 seconds for thorough mixing.

4.16.4.2 Introduction of Fibers for drum plants

Fibers may be introduced to the drum only using mechanical methods.

1) Introduction of loose fibers Loose fibers may be added using a fiber machine.
2) Introduction of pallet fibers Fibers in pellet form may be introduce using the
RAP conveyor.

4.16.5 The Mix Gradation

SMA gradation shall be based on the maximum nominal size (one size above
the sieve that retains at least 10% of the material by weight.

15.6 mm SMA shall meet the following gradation:

Sieve Size Percentage of sieve passing Authorized limits

15.6 mm 100 -
12.5 mm 90 –99 + 5%
9.5 mm 70-85 + 5%
4.75 mm 30 – 50 + 4%
2.36 mm 20 – 30 + 4%
0.075 mm 8 – 11 + 2%

19.0 mm SMA shall meet the following gradation:

Sieve Size Percentage of sieve passing Authorized limits

19 mm 100 + 5%

12.5 mm 82 – 88 + 5%

9.5 mm 55 + 4%
4.75 mm 22 – 30
2.36 mm 14 – 20 + 4%
0.075 mm 9 – 11 + 2%
Table of Contents

4.16.5.1 Marshall Mix Design criteria. SMA mixture shall conform to the following criteria:

Test Requirement
Stability 635 kg
Voids in mineral aggregate, VMA 17% minimum (18% desirable)
Air Voids in the mix 3 % minimum (4% recommended for
warmer climates)
Voids in coarse aggregate mix, VCA Less than VCA of the coarse aggregate
(T19)
Draindown @ production temperature 0.30% maximum
TSR (D4867) 80% min
Compaction blows 50 both sides

4.16.5.2 Asphalt Cement: Asphalt cement content during the design phase shall be a
minimum of 6% and no greater than a maximum of 7%.

4.16.5.3 Determination of Mixing and Compacting Temperatures

The mix design mixing and compacting temperatures shall be according to AASHTO
T-245 Subsections 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 or according to the recommendations of the polymer
manufacturer in the case of using polymer modified binders.

4.16.5.4 Antistripping Additives

Antistripping additives will be added as needed to meet Marshal Mix Design Quality
Requirements in General Specifications Section 4.05 Bituminous Concrete Pavement.

4.16.6 Construction

4.16.6.1 Demonstration

Before proceeding with the actual work, the contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer
that a satisfactory mix can be produced, placed, and compacted to determine the compactive
effort needed. A minimum of 100 tons shall be placed at a site that simulates the actual project
conditions.

4.16.6.2 Hauling Units

A liquid detergent shall be placed on the truck beds and any extra liquid shall be drained
before loading with the mix.

The mix shall not be stored at the plant for more than 30 minutes.

4.16.6.3 Mix Temperature at the site

The compaction temperature is established during the design. However, it should be

noted that mix will not compact after its temperature drops below 115°C - 127°C for polymer
modified mixes). Therefore, the initial temperature of the mix at the job site should not be less
than 140°C. The haul time between the mixing plant and job site should preferably be kept to not
more than one hour.
Table of Contents

4.16.6.4 Pavement Thickness

Pavement layer thickness be as specified in the contract documents. It should be noted

that SMA is generally not placed thicker than 40 mm.

4.16.6.5 Weather

Placement of SMA shall be permitted only when the ambient and pavement temperature
are at least 10°C.

4.16.6.6 Tack Coat

If SMA is placed on an existing pavement a tack coat of a slow setting emulsion shall
be applied. The application rate for the tack coat shall be between 0.14 and 0.21 l/m².

4.16.6.7 Compaction

Rolling shall be performed using a minimum of three steel-wheeled static rollers, each
weighing 12 tons. The rolling shall commence immediately after placement and all rollers will
remain within 150 meters of the paver.

The rollers shall be equipped with a watering or soapy watering system that prevents
material from sticking to the roller wheels. Roller speed shall be between 1.6 and 4.8 kph. Mix
shall be compacted to 94% of the theoretical maximum density. Rolling shall be completed before
mat is cooled below 110°C.

No vibrator roller in the vibratory mode or rubber tire roller will be allowed.

4.16.7 Quality Assurance Procedures

The Quality Assurance procedures in Subsection 4.05.8 – “Quality Assurance

Procedures” in the General Specifications shall be applied to the acceptance of
Bituminous Concrete Stone Matrix Asphalt (SMA).

4.16.8 Method of Measurement

Bituminous Stone Matrix Asphalt (SMA) shall be measured by the cubic meter of mix
acceptably placed and evaluated in accordance with the General Specifications and this
Addendum to the General Specifications.

4.16.9 Payment

The amount of Bituminous Stone Matrix Asphalt (SMA) actually incorporated in to the
work, and measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit prices in the Bill of
Quantities.

Prices and payment made under this section shall cover and be full compensation for
furnishing labor, equipment, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to complete all the work
involved as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 “Scope of Payment” in the General Specifications
except for polymer chemical admixture/asphalt modifiers which shall be paid for separately in
accordance with Paragraph 4.05.11 “Payment” in this Addendum to the General Specifications.
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING SUPPLEMENTAL

PAY ITEMS WHEN THEY ARE INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT BILL OF QUANTITIES.

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

41651 Bituminous Stone Matrix Asphalt (SMA) Cubic Meter
Table of Contents

Section 4.17 MICRO-SURFACING

4.17.1 Description

This work includes providing micro-surfacing systems in accordance with this Addendum
to the General Specifications and the plan dimensions.

SUPPLEMENTAL PAY ITEMS

Micro-Surfacing Layer
Micro-Surfacing Rut-Fill

4.17.2 Materials Requirements

The contractor shall furnish an asphalt emulsion, polymer modifier one hundred (100)
percent crushed mineral aggregate meeting the Type III Slurry Seal Aggregate requirements in
General Specifications Paragraph 4.10.2.2. Mineral filler, water and other additives are optional.
A signed and dated certification that the materials meet or exceed the following criteria shall be
submitted by the contractor as part of his mix design submission.

AGGREGATE

AASHTO T 176 Sand Equivalent 60 min.

(ASTM D 2419)

AASHTO T 104 Soundness 15% max. for sodium sulphate

(ASTM C 88) 25% max. for magnesium
sulphate
AASHTO T 96 Abrasion 30% max.
(ASTM C 131)

ASPHALT EMULSION

AASHTO T 59 Viscosity 20 min. 100% max.

(ASTM D 244)

AASHTO T 59 Sieve Analysis 0.1% max.

(ASTM D 244)

AASHTO T 59 Asphalt Residual 62% min.

(ASTM D 244) Content

ASPHALT RESIDUE

ASTM D 2171 Absolute Viscosity 8000 poises, min.

AASHTO T 53 Softening Point 57°C, min.

AASHTO T 49 Penetration 55 min and 90 max.

(ASTM D 2397)

ASTM D 113 Ductility 70 min

Table of Contents

MIXTURE

The following mixture properties are recommended by the International Slurry Seal
Association (ISSA). Document any deviation for the recommended mixture criteria and provide
such documentation to the Ministry.

ISSA TB-139 Wet Cohesion @

30 minutes 12 kg-cm, min.
60 minutes 20 kg-cm, min.

ISSA TB-109 * Asphalt Content,

2
Loaded Wheel Test 540 g/m ,max

ISSA TB-100 * Asphalt Content, Wet

Track Abrasion Loss
2
1-hour soak 540 g/m , max.
2
6-day soak 810 g/m , max

ISSA TB-147 A,B Lat. Displace. 5% max.

Vert. Displace 10% max.

ISSA TB-144 Compatibility 11 grade points, min

* Tests ISSA TB-109 and TB-100 are used to determine optimum asphalt content. In
lieu of these test, the Ministry may require the use of a modified Marshall Stability Test
(ISSA TB-140) or Hveem Cohesionmeter Test (ASTM D 1560) to determine optimum
asphalt content.

4.17.3 Construction Requirements

4.17.3.1 Acceptance Criteria

Thickness The Contractor shall lace surface treatment to a minimum application

2
rate of eleven (11) kg/m .
2
Finished Surface The Contractor shall finish any twenty-five (25) m of surface to a
uniform texture to have:

1. No more than four (4) tear marks greater than thirteen (1) mm wide and or
hundred (100) mm long.

2. No tear marks grater than twenty-five (25) mm wide and seventy five (75) mm
long

3. No transverse ripples or longitudinal streaks of five (5) mm or more in depth, as

measured with a 3-meter straight edge.

Surface Friction The Contractor shall provide a uniform surface with a skid number
measured by ASTM E 274 at sixty-five (65) km/h, of at least forty (40).

Joints Longitudinal and transverse joints shall appear neat and uniform without buildup,
uncovered areas, or unsightly appearance.
Table of Contents

Longitudinal joints shall be placed on lane lines with less than fifty (50) mm overlap on
adjacent passes and no more than six (6) mm difference in elevation between the adjacent
passes as measured with a 3-meter straight edge.

Transverse joints shall be restricted to five (5) per six thousand (6000) m of lane.
Construct transverse joints with no more than three (3) mm difference in elevation across the joint
as measured with a 3-meter straight edge.

Edges Edges shall appear neat and uniform along the roadway lane, shoulder, and
curb lines. Edges along curbs shall have no tolerance. Edges shall have no more than fifty (50)
mm horizontal variance in any thirty (30) m, along the roadway lane and shoulder.

Opening to Traffic Layers shall be open to traffic no sooner than one (1) hour after
placement. Filled ruts shall not be open to traffic for two (2) hours after placement.

Cross Section Cross section with a 3-meter straight edge. Filled ruts shall have no
depressions. Ruts shall not be more than three (3) mm per twenty five (25) mm.

If existing ruts are greater than six (6) mm, the ruts shall be filled by separate application
of micro-surfacing prior to the surface application. Ruts of six (6) mm or less may be filled during
the surface application.

Bleeding and Flushing Limit high severity bleeding and flushing in any one hundred
2
(100) m area to no more than two (2) percent by the end of the warranty period. No bleeding at
joints is allowed.

4.17.3.2 Execution Requirements

The Contractor will supply all material and labor to perform installation and repair work at
no additional cost to the agency and shall provide a certification that the materials and mixture
meet or exceed the requirements of Section 4.17.2 “Materials Requirements” in this Addendum to
the General Specifications.

Work shall include repairs, permanent replacement, traffic control, and tests in
accordance with the requirements in the General and Special Maintenance Specifications. Traffic
control for work operations shall be in accordance with section 9.02 – “Traffic Control Through
Work Zones” in the General Specifications and these Special Specifications. Areas shall be
repaired within thirty working days of notification by the agency, that do not meet the acceptance
criteria.

Temporary repairs shall be performed when the climatic conditions temporarily prohibit
permanent repairs. Temporary repairs shall be replaced with permanent repairs as soon as
weather allows.

The Contractor shall replace any 400 m lane segment that has repairs or defects
exceeding five (5) percent of the area.

4.17.4 Method of Measurement

The layer application of micro-surfacing shall be measured by the square meter for the
area upon which the micro-surfacing was actually placed. Tack coat and water used to cover the
surface to be sealed shall not be measured separately as they are considered subsidiary to the
micro-surfacing item.
Table of Contents

The filing of ruts with micro-surfacing shall be measured by the kilogram of the
aggregate/ modified asphalt emulsion mixture used to fill the ruts by separate application of
micro-surfacing prior to the surface application.

4.17.5 Payment

The layer application of micro-surfacing completed as specified and measured shall be

paid for at the contract unit price per square meter. Separate applications of micro-surfacing for
rut filling as specified and measured shall be paid for by the kilogram for aggregate modified
asphalt emulsion mixture. Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures and asphalt modifiers used to
meet the mix design requirements shall be considered subsidiary and shall not be paid for
separately unless stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Prices and payment made under this section shall cover and be full compensation for
furnishing labor, equipment, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to complete all the work
involved as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 “Scope of Payment” in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING SUPPLEMENTAL

ITEMS WHEN THEY ARE LISTED IN THE CONTRACT BILL OF QUANTITITES.

ITEM No. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

41751 Micro-surfacing Layer Square-Meter

41752 Micro-surfacing, Rut fill Kilogram

Table of Contents

SECTION 4.18 POROUS BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

4.18.1 Description

This work shall consist of placing Porous Bituminous Concrete (PBC) as shown on the
plans, and in accordance with these specifications, the General Specifications and as directed by
the Engineer. The PBC may be produced in batch or drum mix plant.

The PBC is an open graded hot mix asphalt mixture consisting of crushed coarse and
fine aggregates, mineral filler, and asphalt cement. A stabilizing agent will also be needed and
typically consists of fibers and / or polymers.

Supplemental Pay Items

Porous Bituminous Concrete (PBC)

4.18.2 Materials
The materials shall conform to the following requirements:

4.18.2.1 Bituminous Material

Bituminous material shall be a Performance Graded (PG) asphalt cement and shall be
in conformance with the requirements in Paragraph 4.01.2.6 “Performance Graded (PG)
Bituminous Materials” of this Addendum to the General Specifications.

Required bituminous gradation will be noted in the contract documents.

4.18.2.2 Aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to the following criteria:

4.18.2.2.1 Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate for PBC shall meet the requirements in the General Specifications
with the following additions or changes:

L.A. Abrasion Loss (AASHTO T96) 30% max

Sodium Sulphate Soundness Loss (T104) 12% max
Coarse and Fine Durability (T210) 40 min
One or more crushed faces (ASTM D5821) 100%
Two or more crushed faces 90%
Flat and Elongated (ASTM D 4791)
3 to 1 20%
5 to 1 5%
Flakiness 25% maximum
Sand Equivalent (T176) 50 minimum
Absorption (T85) 2% max
Polish Value (ASTM D3319) 0.40 minimum

Note: Only polish resistant aggregate will be used for PBC. Polish value and testing
method requirement will be as noted above unless stated otherwise.

Note: Ministry may require a minimum surface friction number of at least 40 [ASTM E274
at 65 km/h] at the completion of construction. If required it will be noted in the contract
documents.
 Table of Contents

4.18.2.2.2 Fine Aggregate

Fine aggregate shall meet the following requirements:

Sodium Sulphate Soundness Loss (T104) 12% max

Crushed aggregate 100%
Plasticity (T109) 0%

4.18.3 Mineral Filler

Mineral Filler shall be rock dust, crushed lime stone, portland cement or other suitable
filler material and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M17. Additionally, plasticity index
(T90) of mineral filler shall not exceed 4%. Filler shall be kept as dry as possible, but in no case
the moisture content in filler shall exceed 10%.

4.18.3.1 Introduction of Mineral Filler

Either a mineral filler silo with a mechanical delivery system or cold feed bins may be
used for introduction of filler. If a silo system is used the filler is blown into the weigh hopper or
pugmill of a batch plant or into the drum of a drum mix plant. The delivery system must be able to
handle filler loads including metering of the proper amount of filler.

If a conveyor system is used the extra care will be needed to control the filler amount and
dusty conditions during windy days.

4.18.4 Fiber

Unless otherwise noted, the PBC shall incorporate a stabilizer (cellulose fibers) to
prevent/reduce the draindown. The draindown shall not exceed 0.3% of the mass (test method
attached). Fiber content shall be between 0.2-0.3% of the total mix (plant tolerance will be ±0.1).
Limits closed to 0.3 are preferred, however, the use and amount of fibers should be based on
combination of the design mix evaluation, draindown test results, hauling distance, and the
demonstration strip evaluation. [local fine aggregate is not acceptable as a fiber].

Fibers shall be uniformly dispersed in the PBC mixture, and meet the following requirements.

Property Requirement
Sieve Analysis
1
Method A – Alpine Sieve Analysis
Fiber Length 6 mm Maximum
Passing 0.150 mm (No. 100 sieve) 70 + 10 %
2
Method B – Mesh Screen Analysis
Fiber Length 6 mm Maximum
Passing 0.850 mm (No. 20) sieve 85 + 10 %
0.425 mm (No. 40 ) sieve 65 + 10 %
0.106 mm (No. 140) sieve 30 + 10 %
3
Ash Content 18 + 5 non-volatile
4
PH 7.5 + 1.0
5
Oil Absorption 5.0 + 1.0 (times fiber mass)
6
Moisture Content Less than 5 % (by mass)
Table of Contents

(1) Method A – Alpine Sieve Analysis. This test is performed using and Alpine Air Jet Sieve
(Type 200 LS). A representative five gram sample of fiber is sieved for 14 minutes at a
controlled vacuum of 5 kPa (11 psi) of water. The portion remaining on the screen is
weighed.

(2) Method B – Mesh Screen Analysis. This test is performed using standard 0.850, 0.425,
0.250, 0.180, 0.150, and 0.106 mm sieves, nylon brushes, and a shaker. A representative
10 gram sample of fiber is sieved, using a shaker and two nylon brushes on each screen.
The amount retained on each sieve is weighed and the percentage passing calculated.
Repeatability of this method is suspect and needs to be verified.

(3) Ash Content – A representative 2 – 3 gram sample of fiber is placed in a tarred crucible and
heated between 595 and 650 C (1100 and 1200F) for not less than two hours. The crucible
and ash are cooked in a desiccator and weighed.

(4) Ph Test – Five grams of fiber is added to 100 ml of distilled water, stirred and let sit for 30
minutes. The Ph is determined with a probe calibrated with a Ph 7.0 buffer.

(5) Oil Absorption Test – Five grams of fiber is accurately weighed and suspended in an excess
of mineral spirits for not less than 5 minutes to ensure total saturation. It is then placed in a
2
screen mesh strainer (approximately 0,5 mm opening size) and shaken on a wrist action
shaker for 10 minutes (approximately 32 mm (1 ¼ in) motion at 240 shakes per minutes).
The shaken mass is then transferred without touching to a tarred container and weighed.
Results are reported as to the amount (number of times its own weight) the fibers are able to
absorb.

(6) Moisture Content – Ten grams of fiber is weighed and placed in a 121 C (250 F) forced air
oven for two hours. The sample is then re-weighed immediately upon removal form the
oven.

4.18.4.1 Introduction of Fibers. A separate system for feeding fibers shall be used to: 1)
proportion the required amount into the mixture, and 2) achieve a uniform distribution.

Introduction of Fibers for batch plant: Fibers may be introduced manually or

mechanically. The automated supply system shall include low level and no–flow
indicators, and a printout of status of feed rate in kg/min. The filler supply line shall
include a section of transparent pipe for visually observing consistency of feed.

1) Manual Introduction. Pre-weighed packaged fibers may be added directly to the

pugmill. These should be added during dry mixing time so that a uniform dispersion
could be achieved prior to injection of asphalt cement into the mixture.

2) Automated introduction. Using a fiber machine, loose fibers may be added directly
to the pugmill or weigh hopper during dry mixing time.

When fibers are used in batch plant, dry mixing time is increased by 3 – 4 seconds and
wet mixing times increased by at least 5 - 10 seconds for thorough mixing.

Introduction of Fibers for drum plants. Fibers may be introduced to the drum by only
using mechanical methods. These shall be added to the drum in a manner that prevents
the fibers from becoming entangled in the exhaust system.

1) Introduction of loose fibers - Loose fibers may be added using a fiber machine.
Table of Contents

2) Introduction of pellet fibers - Fibers in pellet form may be introduced using the
RAP conveyor

4.18.5 The Mix Gradation

PBC gradation shall be based on the required thickness for the surfacing course. The
maximum nominal size (one size above the sieve that retains at least 10% of the material
by weight) of the gradation shall be 16.0 mm.

For 40 mm thick course, PBC shall meet the following gradation:

Sieve Size Percentage of sieve passing Authorized limits

15.6 mm 100

12.5 mm 85– 100 -5%

9.5 mm 50 – 80 + 5%
4.75 mm 20– 30 + 4%
2.36 mm 12– 15 + 2%
0.075 mm 2–4 + 1%

For 50 mm thick course, the PBC shall have the following gradation:
Sieve Size Percentage of sieve passing Authorized limits
15.6 mm 95-100 -5%

12.5 mm 75–90 + 5%

9.5 mm 45-65 + 5%
4.75 mm 20– 30 + 4%
2.36 mm 10 – 15 + 2%
0.075 mm 3–4 + 1%

4.18.5.1 PBC mix design criteria. The Marshall method is used to compact PBC mixtures in the
laboratory, and to prepare samples for further analysis. In the PBC design the determination of
specific gravity and void content is more important than stability and flow values. Major
requirements are noted below. Note: Additional mixture design requirements and details shall be
provided by the Ministry.

Test Requirement
Stability NA (635 kg desirable)
Flow Value, 0.25 mm N/A (8-16 desirable)
Air Voids in the mix (compacted sample, 50 18-22% [20% minimum is desirable]
blows Marshall, per side)
Voids in coarse aggregate mix, VCA Less than VCA of the coarse aggregate
(T19)
Draindown @ mixing temperature 0.30% maximum
(test method is attached)
TSR (D4867) 80% min

Note: Ministry may require a permeability test during design and at the end of construction to
determine drainage rate for PBC. Details on Permeability Test and minimum permeability
requirement will be provided by the Ministry.
Table of Contents

4.18.5.2 Asphalt cement content

AC content for PBC shall be determined during the design. Initial binder content can
be estimated using an aggregate surface capacity test procedures (as noted for friction course).
This initial AC content is then optimized to provide thick asphalt coating (usual binder film
thickness 20-40 micron) within the air void limits without resulting in drain down. Note: Optimum
AC content will normally be in the range of 5-6.5%.

4.18.5.3 Mixing and Compaction Temperatures

These temperatures shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO T 245,

sections 3.3.1,2, or that recommended by the producer when polymer-modified binders are used.
[Mixing temperature is generally in the range that will correspond to asphalt cement viscosities of
700-900 centistokes] Mixes with polymer modification and fibers can generally be produced at
about 140-160C. If fibers are used mixing time is extended by about 15-25 seconds as noted
earlier]

4.18.5.4 Anti stripping Additives

If needed anti stripping additives will be added in accordance with General

Specifications.

4.18.6 Construction

4.18.6.1 Demonstration

Before proceeding with the actual work, the contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that a
satisfactory mix can be produced, placed, and compacted to determine the compactive effort
needed. A minimum of 150 meters shall be placed at a site that simulates the actual project
conditions.

4.18.6.2 Hauling Units.

To prevent mix sticking on the truck beds, a suitable release agent (such as dry soap powder or a
liquid detergent) shall be placed on the truck beds. Any extra liquid shall be drained before
loading with the mix.

The mix shall not be stored at the plant for more than 30 minutes.

4.18.6.3 Mix Temperature at the site.

The compaction temperature is established during the design. However, it should be noted that
mix will not compact after its temperature drops below 115°C for conventional PBC and 125°C for
polymer modified PBC. Therefore, the initial temperature of the mix at the job site should not be
less than 135°C. The haul time between the mixing plant and job site should be kept to not more
than one hour to prevent mix cooling and draindown.

Each load should be covered with a full tarp to prevent loss of temperature.

4.18.6.4 Pavement Thickness.

Pavement layer thickness be as specified in the contract documents. It should be noted that PBC
is generally placed at thicknesses of 40-50 mm.
Table of Contents

4.18.6.5 Weather

Placement of PBC shall be permitted only when the ambient and pavement
temperature are at least 15°C.

4.18.6.6 Tack Coat.

The surface on which PBC is placed should be impervious and sloped about 2%
towards the edge of the road. A strong, durable bond of the PBC to the pavement surface is
essential. A heavier tack coat or a SAMI-like seal coat is preferred.

A tack coat of a slow setting emulsion (diluted with 50% water) shall be applied at a
rate of 0.35 and 0.50 l/m² to seal the underlying surface. Note: Application rate may have to be
adjusted based on the field conditions. [if a SAMI is used the application rate will be in the range
of 0.8-1.5 l/m²; and cover aggregate will be 6 to 9.5 mm size]

4.18.6.7 Compaction.

Rolling shall be performed using a minimum of three steel-wheeled static rollers,

each weighing 12 tons. The rolling shall commence immediately after placement and all rollers
will remain within 152 meters of the paver.

The rollers shall be equipped with a watering or soapy watering system that prevents
material from sticking to the roller wheels. Roller speed shall be between 1.6 and 4.8 kph. All
rolling shall be completed before mat is cooled below 115°C.

No vibrator roller in the vibratory mode or rubber tire roller will be allowed.

4.18.7 Quality Assurance Procedures

The Quality Assurance procedures in Subsection 4.05.8 – “Quality Assurance

Procedures” in the General Specifications shall be applied to the acceptance of PBC.

4.18.7.1 Paving Profile (ride quality)

The finished surface of the PBC pavement when placed as a wearing course shall
conform to Ministry ride quality standards contained in Subsection 4.05.8 – “Quality Assurance
Procedures” in the General Specifications.

4.18.8 Method of Measurement

PBC shall be measured by the cubic meter of mix acceptably placed and evaluated in
accordance with the General Specifications, this Addendum and certified by the Engineer.

4.18.9 Payment

The amount of PBC actually incorporated in to the work, and measure as provided
above, will be paid for at the contract unit prices in the Bill of Quantities.

Prices and payment made under this section shall cover and be full compensation for
furnishing labor, equipment, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to complete all the work
involved as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 “Scope of Payment” in the General Specifications,
except for polymer chemical admixture/asphalt modifier which shall be paid for separately in
accordance with Paragraph 4.05.11 “Payment” in this Addendum to the General Specifications.
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING SUPPLEMENTAL

PAY ITEMS WHEN THEY ARE INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT BILL OF QUANTITIES.

Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit

41851 Porous Bituminous Concrete (PBC) Cubic Meter
Table of Contents
Table of Contents

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Ministry of Communications

Highway Materials Manual

Volume I
Part 1 General
Table of Contents

Foreword
Good materials control is a most important part of any construction project. Good materials
control can only be maintained when the materials involved are properly sampled and accurately
tested. It is an often repeated axiom that one test is worth a thousand opinions. The truth of this
statement can only survive so long as that test is properly performed.

This materials manual has been prepared for the purpose of instructing and standardizing test
methods and acceptance procedures for all materials used in construction which is under the
supervision of the Ministry of Communications (MOC). It is intended that this manual be used in
all project and MOC laboratories for guidance, reference, and instruction.

1-1
Table of Contents
Introduction

A. Background
The test methods presented in this Materials Manual were adapted from the latest edition of the Standard Specifications for
Transportation Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing of the American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials (AASHTO), the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), the Saudi Arabian
Standards Organization (SASO), The Asphalt Institute, the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute
and the British Standards Society. The adaptations were made as necessary to suit the specific needs of the Kingdom. Since
all these sources are routinely revised and updated, it shall be necessary that this manual be periodically updated to reflect
the latest methods. However, should discrepancies exist between the manual and the latest editions of the above referenced
sources, the manual shall govern unless otherwise countermanded by the Ministry of Communications.

The loose leaf form was chosen because it facilitates revisions of the individual test methods and additions of new methods
when developed, without reprinting the whole manual. While there are obvious advantages to this system, there is also one
weakness that must be mentioned. That is the failure of some individuals in keeping all the manuals up to date. Additions
and revisions will be distributed by the MOC; however, it shall be the responsibility of the individual holders of the manuals
to see that their manuals are kept up to date. Each manual will be individually numbered and a record kept of the user and
user's address so that any revisions may be properly distributed. Such revisions shall be dated in the upper right corner of
each page.

Each test method is identified as a MRDTM, which stands for Materials and Research Department Test Method.

B. Content of Manual
This is Volume I of a series of three volumes comprising the Materials Manual.
The subjects of each volume are as follows:

Volume I
Part 1 Introduction
List of Work Sheets (WS) and Report Sheets (RS)
List of MRDTM's
Glossary
Sampling and testing frequency guide
List of field laboratory equipment
Table of conversion factors
List of MRDTM's general to several test methods
Test methods for general application
Part 2 A general discussion of soils and soil testing
List of MRDTM's for soils
Test methods for soils control

Volume II
Part 3 A general discussion of aggregates and aggregate testing
List of MRDTM's for aggregates
Test methods for aggregate control
Part 4 A general discussion of bituminous materials and mix properties
List of MRDTM's for bituminous materials
Test methods for bituminous materials and mix designs

Volume III
Part 5 A general discussion of portland cement concrete materials and design
List of MRDTM's for concrete, steel and miscellaneous materials
Test methods for portland cement concrete materials, concrete, steel, and miscellaneous materials
Part 6 Discussion of acceptance by certification
Typical examples of mill certifications
Procedure for laboratory standardization

1-3
Table of Contents
Also included for each Test Method as applicable are examples of completed work sheets and test reports showing typical
results. It is strongly recommended that the proper work sheets and test reports be used and that all data be carefully and
accurately entered. These work sheets and test reports will constitute a valuable part of the documentation for all projects
for which the Ministry of Communications is responsible.

C. Relations to Other Manuals and Specifications

This manual is one of a series of manuals distributed by the Ministry of Communications. Included are:
Highway Design Manual
Highway Construction Manual
Highway Maintenance Manual
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
General Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction

Briefly, the contents of these manuals include the following:

Highway Design Manual-Standard plans and details of standard highway features.

Highway Construction Manual-Contract administration, construction procedures and project control methods.

Highway Maintenance Manual-Administration of highway maintenance operations and a guide to good maintenance
practices.

Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices-Signing and lighting standards for proper traffic control including
signalization.

General Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction-General provisions, directions and requirements for the per-
formance of the work.

It is expected that reference to these other manuals will be necessary for the successful accomplisment of the materials
control program. Every effort has been made to coordinate the manuals, but should any discrepancies be found, they should
be brought to the attention of the proper authorities for resolution.

1-4
Table of Contents

List of Report Sheets

Number Title

MRDTR 200/300 ........................... Soils and Aggregates

MRDTR 400A ............................... Asphalt Cements and Cutback Asphalts
MRDTR 400B ................................ Bituminous Mixtures
MRDTR 400C ................................ Emulsified Asphalt
MRDTR 426 A,B,C&D ................. Design of Bituminous Plant Mix Friction Courses
MRDTR 500 .................................. Test Results on Portland Cement
MRDTR 528 .................................. Portland Cement Concrete Cylinders

List of Work Sheets

Number Title

MRDWS 203 .................................. Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soil

MRDWS 204 .................................. Gradation of Aggregates and Soils
MRDWS 204/205 .......................... Soils Gradation Chart
MRDWS 205 .................................. Hydrometer and Mechanical Analysis of Soils
MRDWS 206 .................................. Material Finer Than 0.075 mm Sieve
MRDWS 207 .................................. Soil Specific Gravity
MRDWS 208/209 .......................... Soils Classification/Atterburg Limits
MRDWS 212 .................................. Moisture-Density Relationship of Soils
MRDWS 213 .................................. California Bearing Ratio
MRDWS 214 .................................. Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils
MRDWS 215 .................................. Sand Cone Density Test
MRDWS 216 .................................. Density Corrections for Coarse Particles
MRDWS 303 .................................. Specific Gravity and Surface Moisture of Aggregates
MRDWS 307 .................................. Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler
MRDWS 308 .................................. Unit Mass and Voids in Aggregates
MRDWS 309 .................................. Los Angeles Abrasion
MRDWS 310 .................................. Determination of Percentage of Crushed Aggregates
MRDWS 311 .................................. Soundness of Aggregates
MRDWS 312 .................................. Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates
MRDWS 313 .................................. Sand Equivalent
MRDWS 314 .................................. Production of Plastic Fines in Aggregates
MRDWS 402 .................................. Solubility of Bituminous Material in Organic Solvent
MRDWS 407 .................................. Specific Gravity of Semisolid Asphalt Materials
MRDWS 409 .................................. Effect of Heat and Air on Asphalt Materials
MRDWS 410A ............................... Determination of Laboratory Batch Masses for Asphalt Mix Design
MRDWS 410B ............................... Marshall Asphalt Mix Design Data
MRDWS 410C ............................... Marshall Mix Design Graphs
MRDWS 411 .................................. Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
MRDWS 412 .................................. Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
MRDWS 414 .................................. Compressive Strength of Bituminous Mixtures
MRDWS 415 .................................. Effect of Water on Cohesion of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
MRDWS 416 .................................. Moisture Content and Volatile Distillates in Bituminous Paving Mixtures
MRDWS 418 .................................. Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt from Asphalt Paving Mixtures
MRDWS 422 .................................. Distillation of Cut-Back Asphalt Materials
MRDWS 423 .................................. Flakiness Index and Average Least Dimension of Cover Aggregates
MRDWS 425 .................................. Surface Treatment Design
MRDWS 427 .................................. Slurry Seal Design
MRDWS 515A ............................... Concrete Aggregates
MRDWS 515B ............................... Portland Cement Concrete Design
MRDWS 518 .................................. Mass Per Cubic Meter, Yield and Air Content

1-5
Table of Contents
List of Each Materials and Research
Department Test Method (MRDTM)
Table 1 provides a list of test methods in numerical order, listing the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of
Communications, Materials and Research Department, Standard Method of Test (MRDTM) and the MRDTM name.

Table 2 provides a list of MRDTM test numbers in numerical order, followed by the number of the appropriate test
equivalent as published by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), the
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), or the Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO).

Table 1
List of MRDTM Test Methods

MRDTM Number MRDTM Test Name

Volume I-Part 1-General

101 ............................ Sieves for Testing Purposes
102 ............................ Weights and Balances Used in Testing of Highway Materials
103 ............................ Terms Relating to Density and Specific Gravity of Solids, Liquids, and Gases
104 ............................ Verification of Testing Machines
Volume I-Part 2-Soils
201 ............................ Dry Preparation of Disturbed Soil and Soil-Aggregate Samples
202 ............................ Wet Preparation of Disturbed Soil Samples for Test
203 ............................ Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Soils
204 ............................ Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
205 ............................ Particle Size Analysis of Soils
206 ............................ Amount of Material Finer than 0.075 mm Sieve in Aggregate
207 ............................ Specific Gravity of Soils
208 ............................ Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils
209 ............................ Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils
210 ............................ The Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway
Construction Purposes
211 ............................ Vacant
212 ............................ Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10 lb) Rammer
and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop
213 ............................ The California Bearing Ratio
214 ............................ Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils
215 ............................ Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method
216 ............................ Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction Test
217 ............................ Determination of Moisture in Soils by Means of a Calcium Carbide
Gas Pressure Moisture Tester
218 ............................ Density and Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in-Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
219 ............................ Vacant
220 ............................ Vacant
221 ............................ Vacant
222 ............................ Vacant
223 ............................ Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Borings
224 ............................ Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils
225 ............................ Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils
226 ............................ Diamond Core Drilling for Site Investigation
227 ............................ Field Vane Shear Test in Cohesive Soils
228 ............................ Determining Expansive Soils and Remedial Actions
229 ............................ Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soils
230 ............................ One Dimensional Consolidation Properties of Soils
231 ............................ Triaxial Compressive Strength of Undrained Rock Core Specimens
Without Pore Pressure Measurements

1-7
Table of Contents
MRDTM Number MRDTM Test Name

List of MRDTM Test Methods (Continued)

232 ............................ Strength Parameters of Soils by Triaxial Compression
233 ............................ Direct Shear Test of Soils Under Consolidated Drained Conditions
234 ............................ Bearing Capacity of Soil for Static Load on Spread Footings
235 ............................ Measurements of Pore Pressure in Soils
236 ............................ Installing, Monitoring, and Processing Data of the Travelling Type Slope Inclinometer
237 ............................ Repetitive Static Plate Load Tests of Soils and Flexible Pavement Components for Use in
Evaluation and Design of Highway Pavements
238 ............................ Pavement Deflection Measurements
239 ............................ Permeability of Granular Soils (Constant Head)
240 ............................ Deep, Quasi-static, Cone and Friction Cone Penetration Tests of Soil

Volume 11-Part 3-Aggregates

301 ............................ Sampling Stone, Gravel, and Sand for Use as Highway Materials
302 ............................ Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size
303 ............................ Total Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying
304 ............................ Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
305 ............................ Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
306 ............................ Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate
307 ............................ Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler
308 ............................ Unit Mass and Voids in Aggregates
309 ............................ Resistance to Abrasion of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Use of the Los Angeles Machine
310 ............................ Determination of Percentage of Crushed Aggregate
311 ............................ Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
312 ............................ Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregate
313 ............................ Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test
314 ............................ Vacant
315 ............................ Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete
316 ............................ Acid Insoluble Residue in Carbonate Aggregates
317 ............................ Accelerated Polish Test for Coarse Aggregates
318 ............................ Determination of Sulfate Content in Aggregates
319 ............................ Chloride Determination in Aggregates
320 ............................ Total Soluble Salt Content in Aggregates

Volume 11-Part 4-Bituminous Materials

401 .............................Sampling Bituminous Materials
402 .............................Solubility of Bituminous Materials in Organic Solvents
403 .............................Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup
404 .............................Penetration of Asphalt Materials
405 .............................Ductility of Asphalt Materials
406 .............................Softening Point of Asphalt in Ethylene Glycol (Ring-and-Ball)
407 .............................Specific Gravity of Semisolid Asphalt Materials
408 .............................Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts
409 .............................Effect of Heat and Air on Asphalt Materials (Thin Film Oven Test)
410 .............................Design of Asphalt Concrete Mixtures Using Marshall Procedures
411 .............................Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
412 .............................Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
413 .............................Coating and Stripping of Bitumen-Aggregate Mixtures
414 .............................Compressive Strength of Bituminous Mixtures
415 .............................Effect of Water on Cohesion of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
416 .............................Moisture or Volatile Distillates in Bituminous Paving Mixtures
417 .............................Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
418 .............................Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt from Asphalt Paving Mixtures
419 .............................Mechanical Analysis of Extracted Aggregate
420 .............................Flash Point With Tag Open Cup Apparatus
421 .............................Saybolt Viscosity
422 Distillation of Cutback Asphalt Materials
1-8
Table of Contents

MRDTM Number MRDTM Test Name

List of MRDTM Test Methods (Continued)

423 .............................Flakiness Index and Average Least Dimension of Aggregates
424 .............................Testing Emulsified Asphalt
425 .............................Design of Bituminous Surface Treatments
426 .............................Design of Bituminous Plant Mix Friction Courses
427 .............................Design and Testing of Slurry Seal

Volume III-Part 5-Portland Cement Concrete Materials, Steel, and Miscellaneous

Materials
501 .....................Sampling Hydraulic Cement
502 .....................Vacant
503 .....................Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by the 0.045 mm (No. 325) Sieve
504 .....................Physical Testing of Portland Cement
505 .....................Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement
506 .....................Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes and Mortars of Plastic Consistency
507 .....................Vacant
508 .....................False Set of Portland Cement (Paste Method)
509 .....................Air Content of Hydraulic Cement Mortar
510 .....................Vacant
511 .....................Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Gillmore Needles
512 .....................Vacant
513 .....................Vacant
514 .....................Quality of Water to be Used in Portland Cement Concrete
515 .....................Design of Portland Cement Concrete Mixes
516 .....................Sampling Fresh Concrete
517 .....................Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
518 .....................Mass Per Cubic Meter, Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
519 .....................Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
520 .....................Vacant
521 .....................Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Chace Indicator
522 .....................Vacant
523 .....................Making and Curing Concrete Compressive Test Specimens in the Field and in the Laboratory
524 .....................Moist Cabinets, Moist Rooms, and Water Storage Tanks Used in the Testing of Hydraulic Cements
and Concretes
525 .....................Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores of Concrete
526 .....................Vacant
527 .....................Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
528 .....................Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
529 .....................Sampling Hydrated Lime
530 .....................Specific Gravity of Hydraulic Cement
531 to 551 ..........Vacant
552 .....................Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
553 to 569 ..........Vacant
570 .....................Mass of Coating on Zinc-Coated Iron or Steel Articles

1-9
Table of Contents Table 2

Test Method Cross Reference

MRDTM-AASHTO-ASTM-SASO

Test Equivalent Test Equivalent

MRDTM AASHTO ASTM SASO NIRDTM AASHTO ASTNI SASO
101 227 and 316 D 3042
228 319 D 1411
102 M 231 401 T 40
103 M 131 402 T 44
104 211 403 25
201 T 87 404 T 49
202 T 146 405 T 51
203 D 2216 406 T53
204 T 27 407 T 228
205 T 88 408 126
206 T 11 409 T 179
207 T 100 410 T 245
208 T 90 411 T 166
209 T 89 412 T 209
210 M 145 413 T 182
212 T 180 414 T 167
213 D 1883 415 T 165
214 D 2049 416 T 110
215 T 191 417 T 168
216 T 224 418 T 164
217 T 217 419 T 30
218 T 238 and 420 T 79
T 239 421 T 72
223 T 203 422 T 78
224 T 206 424 T 59
225 T 207 427 D 3910
226 T 225 501 T 127
227 T 223 503 T 192
228 T 258 504 142
229 T 208 505 T 105
230 T 216 506 T 162
231 T 226 508 T 186
232 T 234 509 T 137
233 T 236 511 T 154
234 T 235 514 T 26
235 T 252 516 T 141
236 T 254 517 T 119
237 T 221 518 T 121
238 T 256 519 T 152
239 T 215 521 T 199
240 D 3441 523 T 23 and
301 T2 T 126
302 T 248 524 M 201
303 T 255 525 T 24
304 T 85 527 T 231
305 T 84 528 T 22
306 T 142 529 T 218
307 T 37 530 T 133
308 T 19 and 107
T 20 157
309 T 96 552 175
311 T 104 189
312 T 112 207
313 T 176 570 T 65
315 T 21

1-11
Table of Contents
Glossary

Abrasion-Wearing away by friction.

Abrasive-Sharp granular material used to reduce or prevent slippery road surfaces.
Abscissa-The distance measure in the 'Y' or horizontal direction on a graph.
Absorption-The process by which a liquid is drawn into and tends to fill permeable pores in a porous solid body.
Accuracy-The degree of agreement between a measured value and a true value.
Acidity-The degree of strength of an acid. A liquid is said to be acid if it has a pH factor less than seven.
Active Pressure on Walls-The horizontal pressure exerted on the back of a retaining wall by earth loads and water, if
present.
Adhesion-Molecular attraction exerted between the surfaces of two bodies; the force by which different substances cling to
one another.
Admixture (Additive)-A substance added to a mixture to impart a specific characteristic, such as pozzolith in concrete,
anti-stripping agents in bituminous mixes, calcium chloride or sodium chloride to clay, etc.
Addendum-A written amendment or revision to the Contract Documents or plans issued to bidders subsequent to the date
of advertisement and prior to the final date and time for submission of Tenders indicated in the "Instructions to Tender."
Aeolian Deposits-Wind deposited material such as dune sands and loess deposits.
Aggregates-An aggregation of sand, gravel, crushed stone, or other material of mineral composition, used either alone or in
combination with a binding medium to form bituminous and portland cement concrete, mortar, plaster,etc.
Aggregates (Coarse)-Aggregates predominantly retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.
Aggregates (Fine)-Aggregates passing the 9.5 mm (3/8 in.) sieve and almost entirely passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve,
and predominantly retained on the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.
Air-Dry Material-Materials dried by a natural method such as exposure under ambient atmospheric conditions or by an
artificial method which simulates exposure to the atmosphere.
Air Entraining Agent-An admixture used in portland cement concrete to entrain air in the mixture.
Air-Voids-The space in a compacted mixture not filled with solids or liquids.
Aliquot-A portion of a known volume of liquid whose ratio to the total volume is the reciprocal of a whole number.
Alkalinity-The degree of strength of an alkali. A liquid is said to be alkaline if it has a pH factor greater than seven.
Alluvium-Soil, the constituents of which have been transported in suspension by flowing water and subsequently deposited
by sedimentation.
AASHTO-Abbreviation for American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
ASTM-Abbreviation for American Society for Testing and Materials.
Anhydrous-Free from water.
Angle of Internal Friction-The angle whose tangent is the ratio between the resistance offered to sliding along any plane
in the soil and the component of the applied force acting normal to that plane. Values are given in degrees.
Angle of Repose-The angle between the horizontal and the maximum slope that a soil assumes through natural processes.
For dry granular soils the effect of the height of slope is negligible; for cohesive soils the effect of height of slope is so great
that the angle of repose is meaningless.
Aromatic Solvents-A chemical group of organic solvents which includes benzene, naptha, and xylene.
Asphalt-A dark brown to black cementitious material; solid, semisolid, or liquid in consistency; in which the predominating
constituents are bitumens which occur in nature as such or which are obtained as residue in refining petroleum.
Asphaltenes-The components of the bitumen in petroleums, petroleum products, and asphalt cements which are soluble in
paraffin napthas.
Asphalt Cement-A fluxed or unfluxed asphalt especially prepared as to quality and consistency for direct use in bituminous
pavements, and having a penetration at 25 C of between 5 and 300 under a load of 100 g applied for 5 s.
Asphalt Concrete-See Bituminous Concrete.
Asphalt Emulsion-See Emulsified Asphalt.
Asphaltic Material-See Bituminous Material.
Asphalt Overlay-A bituminous paving course placed over an existing surface to provide smoothness and increase strength.
Aspirator-A device which uses flowing water to create a suction or vacuum.

1-13
Table of Contents

B
Backfill-Material used to replace, or the act of replacing, material removed during construction; also denotes material
placed, or the act of placing, material adjacent to structures.
Backslope-In cuts, the slope from the bottom of the ditch to the top of cut.
Balance-(I) An instrument used for weighing; (2) To design a section of highway such that the volume of earth necessary
for embankment equals the volume of excavation.
Ballast-(I) Gravel, broken stone, granular materials, etc., used to provide added stability. (2) A device used with an electric
discharge lamp to obtain the necessary circuit conditions (voltage, current, and waveform) for starting and operating the
lamp.
Base Course-The layer, or layers, of specified or selected material of designed thickness placed on a subbase or a subgrade
to support a surface course.
Beaker-A flat bottomed, cylindrical vessel usually with a pouring lip used especially for testing purposes.
Bedrock-Rock of relatively great thickness and extent in its native location.
Binder-Material used to stabilize or bind together loose soil or aggregates.
Binder Course-A plant mix of graded aggregate and bituminous material which is placed between the base course and a
bituminous surface course.
Biodegradable-A substance, which will rot or decay under the action of weather, bacteria, or other natural agents.
Bitumen-(I) A hydrocarbon material, obtained from natural asphalts or refined petroleum, which is completely soluble in
carbon disulfide. (2) Bitumen is a common synonym for asphalt cement.
Bituminous Concrete-A combination of mineral aggregates and asphalt cement, mixed in a central plant which is usually
mixed, laid, and compacted while hot.
Bituminous Material-(I) Material containing bitumen. (2) A general term encompassing asphalt cements, cutbacks, and
emulsified asphalts.
Bituminous Pavement-A pavement composed of crushed rock or other aggregate cemented together with bitumen.
Bituminous Plant Mix Friction Course-A combination of mineral aggregate and bituminous material mixed in a central
plant, laid and compacted while hot. This type of course is usually laid in very thin layers.
Bituminous Surface Treatment-The application of liquified bituminous material and aggregate to an existing road surface.
Bleeding (Asphalt)-The flushing to the surface of excess bitumen in bituminous pavement caused by heat or the use of
excessive quantities of bituminous material in construction, patching, or resurfacing.
Bleeding (Concrete)-The flow of water toward the surface of freshly placed concrete or mortar.
Bond (Tack Coat)-The application of a liquid bitumen to cause a new surface to adhere to an existing hard surface.
Borrow-That material necessary to construct the embankment which is not available from the design excavation.
Boulder-A rock fragment, usually rounded by weathering or abrasion, with an average diameter of 75 mm or more.
Bulking-(I) The increase in volume of a material due to manipulation. Rock bulks upon being excavated; damp sand bulks
if loosely deposited, as by dumping, because the apparent cohesion prevents movement of the soil particles to form a
reduced volume. (2) The act of fine material solidifying in a plant bin so as not to discharge freely when the gates are open.

C
Calcareous-Material containing or like calcium carbonate or lime.
Calcium Chloride-A white salt, in the form of flakes, pellets, or granules which are soluble in water and are used to lay
dust, or to stabilize gravel surfaces.
Calcium Magnesium Chloride Solution (Brine)-Calcium chloride, either alone or in combination with magnesium or
sodium chloride, in a liquid state, and obtained from natural or concentrated brine, used to stabilize gravel surfaces and as
an aid in dust control.
Calibrate-(I) To determine settings of the plant which will provide correct proportions of the components of plant-mixed
materials. (2) To compare with a standard or check the graduations of a gauge or other measuring devices.
California Bearing Ratio (CBR)-The ratio of the force required to penetrate a soil mass with a circular piston of 5 cm
diameter to the force required to penetrate a mass of high quality crushed stone with the same piston. The rate of penetration
in both cases is 1.27 mm per minute.
Capillary Moisture-Moisture which clings to soil particles by surface tension and reaches the particles by surface tension
either when free water passes through the soil or by capillary attraction from a wetter stratum. Within limits, it can move in
any direction.
Cationic Emulsion-An asphalt emulsion which contains positively charged particles which are attracted to a negative
electrode (cathode).
Centipoise-A unit of absolute viscosity.
1-14
Table of Contents
Centistoke-A unit of kinematic viscosity.
Certificate of Guarantee-A signed statement by a person having legal authority to bind a company or supplier to its
product. Such certificate shall state that the material specifications and test results are in compliance with the specified
requirements of the pertinent MOC, AASHTO, ASTM, and/or other designations.
Chips-Small angular fragments of aggregate containing no dust.
Classification-The grouping of highways, materials, soils, etc., according to similar traffic or physical characteristics.
Clay-A fine-textured soil, usually plastic and sticky when wet, which usually breaks into hard lumps when dry. When the
moist soil is pinched between the thumb and finger, it will form a long, flexible ribbon.
Clay Sized-That portion of the soil finer than 0.002 mm.
Coagulate-To unite into a coherent mass.
Cohesion-That property of material that tends to make its particles stick together.
Cohesionless Soil-A soil that, when unconfined, has little or no strength when air dried, and little or no cohesion when
submerged. Sand is an example of cohesionless soil.
Cohesive Soil-A soil that when unconfined has considerable strength when air dried and that has significant cohesion when
submerged.
Cold Patch-A mixture of bituminous material and aggregate used for general maintenance pavement patching and applied
at ambient temperatures.
Colloids-That portion of the soil finer than 0.001 mm.
Compaction-The artificial densification of a mass by rolling, tamping, vibrating, or other means.
Compressibility-The property of a material which enables it to remain compressed after compaction.
Compressive Stress-The stress produced in a member when the forces acting on it tend to push the particles together.
Concrete (Bituminous)-See Bituminous Concrete.
Concrete (Portland Cement)-A mixture of portland cement, water, fine aggregate, and coarse aggregate with or without
an admixture.
Consistency-The degree of cohesiveness or resistance to movement of constituent particles in a mass of material. Some of
the terms used to express consistency are: firm, hard, friable (easily crumbled), sticky, or soft.
Consolidate-To densify by compaction or natural means.
Consolidation Test-A test in which a saturated soil specimen is laterally confined in a ring and is compressed between
porous plates.
Constraint-Any restriction to the deformation of a body.
Contract and Contract Documents-The written agreement between the MOC and the Contractor setting forth the
obligations of the parties thereunder, including, but not limited to, the performance of the work, the furnishing of labor and
materials, and the basis of payment. The contract documents include the invitation for tenders, instructions to tenderers, the
tender, notice of award, form of contract, contract bond, general conditions and special conditions, general specifications,
supplemental specifications, special specifications, plans, addenda, directives, change orders and supplemental agreements
that are required to complete the work, all of which constitute one instrument.
Correlation-A comparison of the relationship between two properties.
Corrugated Metal-A sheet of metal that has been formed into a series of small regular parallel undulations.
Course-A layer of road material separately compacted, used as a wearing surface or as base for a wearing surface. (2) One
element of the pavement structure of finite depth, e.g. bituminous wearing course.
Crack Filler-Asphalt material used to fill and sealcracks.
Crash Cushion (Impact Attenuator)-A device placed before a fixed roadside object to absorb and dissipate collision
energy, thus reducing the severity of injuries and property damage.
Creep-The slow movement of a material under stress usually imperceptible except to observations of long duration.
Crushed Gravel-The product resulting from the crushing of ordinary gravel with substantially all fragments having one or
more faces resulting from fracture.
Crushed Stone-The product resulting from the crushing of fragments of bedrock or large stones with all fragments having
all faces resulting from fracture.
Curing Material-A material, such as saturated burlap, polyethelene sheets, or a sprayable compound, that prevents the
evaporation of mixing water from portland cement concrete.
Cutback Asphalt-A mixture of asphalt cement and a diluent blended to provide viscosities suitable for spraying at
relatively low temperatures. The diluents vary from naphtha and gasoline for rapid curing cutbacks, to kerosene for medium
curing cutbacks to low volatile oils for slow curing mixtures.
Cut Section-That part of the roadway which, when constructed, is lower in elevation than the original ground.

1-15
Table of Contents

D
Decant-To pour liquid from one vessel to another without disturbing the sediment or lower liquid level.
Degree of Saturation-The ratio of the volume of water to the volume of voids. It is usually expressed as a percentage.
Dehydrate-To remove water from a solid.
Deleterious-Harmful.
Delineator-A visual device for defining the alignment of a roadway.
Dense Graded-A well graded aggregate with sufficient fine material to nearly fill all voids.
Density-(I) The mass per unit volume of a material, usually expressed in kg per cubic m or g per cubic cm. (2) The number
of vehicles per kilometer on the traveled way at a given instant.
Design Subgrade Value-The subgrade strength value that is equal to or less than approximately 90% of all test values in
the section.
Design Thickness-The total thickness of asphalt concrete determined from the thickness design chart as adequate for a
given Design Traffic Number and subgrade strength value.
Desiccator-A glass jar fitted with an airtight cover and containing a drying agent (desiccant).
Direct Shear Test-A shear test in which soil under an applied normal load is stressed to failure by moving one section of
the soil container relative to the other section.
Dry Masonry-Stone laid without mortar.
Ductility (Bituminous)-The measured distance which a bituminous briquet of standard dimensions will elongate before
breaking when pulled apart at specified conditions of temperature and speed.
Ductility (Steel)-The ability of a material to deform plastically under tensile forces before fracturing.
Durability-That property which enables a material to resist disruptive forces of nature and those applied in service over an
extended period of time.
Dust Palliative-Any material used to control dust.

E
Elasticity-That property of a material which permits it to return approximately to its original dimensions upon the removal
of an applied load.
Elastic Limit-The greatest stress which a material is capable of sustaining without any permanent deformation remaining
upon complete release of the stress.
Elongation-The increase in gauge length of a tension test specimen, usually expressed as a percentage of the original gauge
length.
Embankment-A raised earth structure on which the roadway pavement structure is placed.
Embankment Foundation-The material below the original ground surface, the physical characteristics of which affect the
support of the embankment.
Empirical-Developed from experience or observations without regard to science and theory.
Emulsified Asphalt-A mixture of asphalt cement and water mixed with an emulsifying agent.
Emulsified Asphalt Break-Coalescence (uniting) of asphalt globules. The time required for asphalt to separate from the
water phase is called breaking or setting time.
Emulsified Asphalt Treated Base-A base consisting of a mixture of mineral aggregate and emulsified asphalt spread on a
prepared surface to support a surface course.
Emulsion-A suspension of small droplets of one liquid material in another, the two liquids being mutually insoluble, in the
presence of an emulsifying agent.
Encroachment-Unauthorized use of the right-of-way or easements as for signs; fences, buildings, etc.
Engineer-The duly authorized representative of the Ministry of Communications at the project site, acting directly or
through his duly authorized representatives, who is responsible for engineering supervision of the work.
Entrained Air-Air bubbles of extremely small size in diameter ranging from about 0.02 to 0.08 mm which are usually
incorporated into a portland cement concrete mix through the use of an air entraining agent.
Erosion-A slow wearing away of the surface by natural action of wind or water.
Excavation-(1) The act of taking out material. (2) The materials taken out. (3) The cavity remaining after materials have
been removed.
Expansion-The increase in volume of a material due to increase in temperature.
Expansion Joint-A narrow space left between two parts of a concrete structure to allow for expansion and contraction of
the concrete with changes in temperature and loading.
Extensometer-A device for measuring linear strain.

1-16
Table of Contents
F
Factor of Safety (Safety Factor, Cut and Fill Slopes)-That factor by which the shear strength may be reduced in order to
bring the slope into a state of limiting equilibrium along a given slip surface.
Fabricating Plant-A plant where component parts are formed, welded, or bolted together to form assembled units, such as
beams, trusses, or other parts of metal structures.
False Set-The rapid development of rigidity in a mixed portland cement paste, mortar, or concrete which can be dispelled
by further mixing without the addition of water.
Family of Curves-A group of similar moisture-density curves assuming a characteristic shape. The higher unit mass soil or
soilaggregate materials assume steep slopes, while the lower unit mass soil, or soil aggregate materials assume a conical
shape of curve with higher optimum moisture contents. Usually a "Family of Curves" is derived from one source of supply.
Filtrate-Liquid which has passed through a filter.
Fill Section-See Embankment.
Fill Slope-In fills, the slope from the top of the subgrade to the toe of fill.
Fineness Modulus-An index of the fineness or coarseness of an aggregate; the summation of the cumulative percentages of
the material retained on a specified series of sieves divided by 100. It is not an indication of grading. Sizes range from 0.15
mm (No. 100) to 37.5 mm (1 ½ in.), and larger, increasing in the ratio of 2 to 1.
Fines-(1) Aggregates-Portion finer than the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve. (2) Soils-Portion of a soil finer than a 0.075 mm (No.
200) sieve.
Flash Point-That temperature at which a material gives off a flammable vapor in sufficient quantity to cause fire
immediately when a flame or spark comes near.
Flexible Base-A base with low resistance to bending enabling it to stay in contact with the underlying structure. This type
of base distributes loads to the subbase. Examples are dense graded aggregate bases and asphalt treated bases.
Flexible Pavement-A pavement structure which maintains intimate contact with and distributes loads to the subgrade and
depends on aggregate intergranular particle friction, and cohesion for stability.
Floc-Loose open-structured mass formed in a liquid suspension by the aggregation of minute particles.
Flushing-See Bleeding (Asphalt).
Fog Seal-A thin application of bituminous material without cover aggregate.
Footing-Portion of the foundation of a structure that transmits loads directly to the soil.
Foundation-Lower part of a structure that transmits loads directly to the soil.
Friable Soil-A soil that can be easily broken and crushed by moderate finger pressure.
Fuel Oil-A light oil, similar to kerosene, used as a solvent for asphalt cutbacks of type MC.

G
Gap-Graded-An aggregate gradation of predominately two types with little or no in between sizes.
Gasoline-An inflammable liquid produced from petroleum, which is used as a motor fuel and as a solvent for asphalt
cutbacks of type RC.
Gauge Length-The original length of that portion of a test specimen over which strain or change of length is determined.
Geotechnical Engineering-The application of scientific methods and engineering principles to the acquisition,
interpretation, and evaluation of subsurface data to predict the behavior of the materials of the earth's crust. It encompasses
the fields of soil mechanics, rock mechanics, geological engineering, geophysics, and related fields, such as pavement
design.
Gradation-A general term used to describe the composition of an aggregate, soil, or other granular materials. Gradation is
usually expressed as the proportions (percents) of the aggregate that will pass each of several sieves of different sizes.
Grade-(l) The profile of the center of the roadway, or its rate of ascent or descent. (2) To shape or reshape an earth road by
means of cutting or filling. (3) To arrange according to size. (4) Elevation.
Grading-(I) Construction of the earthwork portion of the highway. (2) Planing or smoothing the surface of various parts of
the road by means of a motor-driven adjustable steel blade.
Gravel-Aggregate composed of hard, durable stones or pebbles, crushed or uncrushed, often intermixed with sand.
Ground Water-Free water contained in the zone below the water table.
Grout-Mortar, composed of sand, cement ' and water, of such consistency that it can be easily worked.
Gunite (Shoterete)-A type of portland cement mortar blown into place by compressed air. The materials are mixed while
being forced through a nozzle.

1-17
Table of Contents

H
Hardpan-Layer of extremely dense soil.
Heterogeneous-Composed of parts of different kinds; having widely dissimilar elements or constituents.
Homogeneous-Having a uniform composition throughout.
Horizon (Soils)-One of the layers of the soil profile, distinguished principally by its texture, color, structure, and chemical
contents.
Hot Mix-A general term used for hot plantmixed bituminous concrete and sheet asphalt mixtures which are manufactured
and laid at temperatures ranging from 120 to 190 Celsius.
Humidity (Relative)-The amount of moisture in the air compared with the amount that the air could hold if saturated at that
temperature.
Humus-A brown or black material formed by the partial decomposition of vegetable or animal matter; the organic portion
of soil.
Hveem Stabilometer-A laboratory instrument used to measure the lateral pressure transmitted by a soil or aggregate
subjected to a vertical load. The pressure thus obtained is used to compute the "R" value of that material.
Hydrated Lime-A dry powder obtained by treating quick-lime with enough water to satisfy its chemical affinity for water
under the conditions of its hydration.
Hydrometer-A floating instrument used for determining the specific gravity of liquids and solutions.
Hydrophilic-Tending to attract water.
Hydrophobic-Tending to repel water.
Hydrostatic Pressure-The pressure in a liquid under static conditions; the product of the unit weight of the liquid and the
difference in elevation between the given point and the free water elevation.
Hygroscopic Moisture (Water)-Water retained by soil after gravitational and capillary moisture are removed. It is held by
each soil grain in the form of a very thin film and has both a physical and chemical affinity for the soil grain. Also, it is
spoken of as the air dry moisture content. This film is in equilibrium with the moisture content of the air and increases or
decreases as the moisture content (humidity) of the air increases or decreases. The hygroscopic moisture content of a soil
also varies with the grain size. As the grain size decreases, the hygroscopic moisture content increases.

I
Igneous Rock-Those rocks formed by the cooling and consolidation of complex silicious solutions (magmas) newly risen
from some deeperlevel.
Impervious-Resistant to the penetration of a liquid or gas.
Improved Material-A material whose engineering properties have been enhanced by processing, blending, or additives.
Infiltration-The ability of the soil of a drainage area to absorb water, expressed in centimeters per hour.
Insoluble-Incapable of being dissolved.
Inspector-The Engineer's authorized representative assigned to make detailed inspections of the Work.
Internal Friction-The resistance to sliding within the soil mass.

J
Job Mix-The exact proportions of all components of a bituminous or other type mix, determined by laboratory tests.

K
Kinematic Viscosity-A measure of the time for a fixed volume of liquid to flow through a calibrated capillary tube at a
specified temperature.

L
Laboratory-The field testing laboratories or any other testing laboratories which may be designated by the Engineer.
Ledge Rock-A layer of stone in a quarry.
Leveling Course-The layer of material placed on an existing surface to eliminate irregularities prior to placing an
overlaying course.
Lime-A general term which includes the various chemical and physical forms of quicklime, hydrated lime, and hydraulic
lime used for any purpose.
1-18
Table of Contents
Liquid Asphalt-Cutbacks or emulsified asphalts.
Lithology-A geological term dealing with the physical properties of rocks and their structure.
Loam-A mixture of sand, silt or clay, or a combination of any of these, with organic matter. It is sometimes called topsoil in
contrast to the subsoils that contain little or no organic matter.
Loess-A uniform wind-blown deposit of silty material having an open structure and relatively high cohesion due to
cementation of clay or calcareous material at grain contacts.
Log, Drilling-A record of underground conditions discovered by drilling test holes. A drilling log documents the thickness
and composition of underground geological formations.
Longitudinal-Running or placed lengthwise.
Longitudinal Joint-A joint which extends lengthwise of the roadway.
Lot-A finite quantity of material produced more or less continuously from a single production process.

M
Mandrel-A tool used in making bend tests by applying the bending force to the inside surface of the bend.
Marshall Stability-The maximum load sustained by a Marshall briquette when tested at 60 C.
Material Direct Cost-A monetary value which is the sum of expenditures for purchases from suppliers, and services from
outside processors and/or haulers, plus direct costs for highway department labor and equipment involved in processing,
handling, and/or hauling a specific lot or class of material.
Materials-Any substance specified for use in the construction of the project and its appurtenances.
Mechanical Analysis (Soils)-Finding the gradation of a soil by the use of specified sieves and a hydrometer.
Mesh-The square opening of a sieve.
Mineral Filler-A fine inert mineral matter such as limestone dust or portland cement, used in bituminous concrete mixtures.
Miscible-Capable of being mixed.
Modulus of Elasticity-The ratio of stress to strain for a material under given loading conditions.
Modulus of Rupture-A measure of the strength of concrete when it is broken by bending.
Moisture Content-The percentage, by mass, of water contained in soil or other material, usually based on the dry weight.
Mortar-A mixture of cement, sand, lime, and water.
Muck-An organic soil of very soft consistency.

N
Naptha-An inflammable liquid produced from petroleum. Solvent Naptha is used in the production of RC cutback asphalts.

0
Oiling-The application of a cutback asphalt material to a surface.
Open-Graded Aggregate-A graded aggregate, containing little or no fines, with a high percentage of aggregate voids.
Optimum-The best quantity, number, or condition.
Ordinate-The distance measured in the "y" or vertical direction on a graph.
Overburden-The mass of soil which overlies a source of rock, gravel, or other road material. This material is removed
before the materials are quarried to avoid contamination.
Overlaying Course (Overlay)-A bituminous surface course, either plant mixed or road mixed.

P
Passive Pressure on Walls-The horizontal pressure exerted on the front of a wall by the earth load, or water, if present.
Passive pressure opposes active pressure.
Patching-Mending; repairing; especially to repair a road surface.
Pavement Design-The arrangement of materials in depth to best accommodate the anticipated loading.
Pavement Structure-The combination of subbase, base course, and surface course placed on a subgrade to support the
traffic load and distribute it to the roadbed.
Penetration-(I) The consistency of a bituminous material expressed as the distance that a standard needle vertically
penetrates a sample of the material under known conditions of loading, time, and temperature. (2) A method of applying
bituminous binder to gravel or crushed stone roadbeds by spreading liquid bitumen over the surface and allowing it to seep
into, or penetrate, the surface.

1-19
Table of Contents
Permeability-The property of soils which permits the passage of any fluid and depends on grain size, void ratio, shape, and
arrangement of pores.
Pervious-A layer of material, through which water will move under ordinary hydrostatic pressure.
pH-A scale of numbers from 0-14 which indicate the acidity or alkalinity of a solution. Numbers below 7 indicate acidity
and numbers above 7 alkalinity.
Pipet-A small calibrated glass tube used to measure and transfer an exact volume of liquid.
Plant Mix-A term describing the mixing of mineral aggregate and asphaltic products in a mechanical mixer, after which the
finished mix is transported and laid on the road. The proportioning of aggregate constituents and asphalt is closely
controlled, and the aggregate is usually dried and heated before mixing.
Plant Mixed Bituminous Base-A base consisting of mineral aggregate and bituminous material, mixed in a central plant,
laid and compacted while hot, on subbase or subgrade, to support a surface course.
Plant Mixed Bituminous Surface Course-A combination of mineral aggregate and bituminous material mixed in a central
plant, laid, and compacted while hot, on a previously prepared base.
Plastic-A material which exhibits no recovery when molded or compressed.
Plating-The covering or confining of unstable fills with a suitable, stable material.
Plumb-Vertical.
Porous-Having many small openings, through which liquids may pass.
Portland Cement-A hydraulic cement consisting of compounds of silica, lime, and alumina; so called from its resemblance
in color, when set, to the Portland stone of England.
Portland-Pozzolan Cement-An intimate and uniform blend of portland cement and fine pozzolan, produced by either
intergrinding portland cement clinker and pozzolan or by blending portland cement and finely divided pozzolan.
Precipitate-Material that drops out of solution as a solid.
Precision-The variance of repeated measurements of a characteristic from their average.
Premix-(I) To mix in a central mixing plant, or elsewhere, previous to placing. (2) Any prepared bituminous or surfacing
material that can be applied either hot or cold.
Prestressed Concrete (Pre-Tensioned)-Reinforced concrete in which bars, wires, or cables are held in a stretched
condition during placing of the plastic concrete until the concrete has hardened. Then as the tension on the reinforcing steel
is released, it compresses the concrete.
Prestressed Concrete (Post-Tensioned)-Reinforced concrete in which the pre-stressing wires or tendons are placed in
tubes before the concrete is cast. After the concrete has hardened the wires or tendons are stretched to a pre-determined
tension by jacking and are wedged in this position. The tubes may also be pressure-grouted.
Prime Coat-The application of a low viscosity liquid bituminous material to an absorbent surface, preparatory to any
subsequent treatment, for the purpose of hardening or toughening the surface and promoting adhesion between it and the
superimposed construction.
Pugmill-A type of paddle mixer used for mixing bituminous paving materials.

Q
Quality Standard-A formally established criterion for a specific activity which: (a) describes a deficiency, condition, or
schedule that establishes the need for work; (b) outlines the work involved; (c) tells how to achieve good workmanship; and
(d) lists expected end results.
Quarry-A place from which stone is excavated, as by blasting, for construction purposes.
Quartering-Dividing into four equal parts so that each part is truly representative of the whole. Applied generally to obtain
representative samples.
Quicklime-A calcined material, the major part of which is calcium oxide or calcium oxide in natural association with a
lesser amount of magnesium oxide, capable of slaking with water.

R
Random-Without bias or regularity.
Ravelling-The progressive loosening of the aggregate in the surface course of a road.
Rebars or Reinforcing Bars-Steel bars used as reinforcement in concrete.
Recycling-The reuse, usually after some processing, of a material that has already served its first intended purpose.
Reduction of Area-The difference between the original cross sectional area of a tension test specimen and the area of the
smallest cross section after testing.
Referee Test-A test of definite procedure to be used in case of dispute.

1-20
Table of Contents
Reflection Crack-A crack appearing in a resurface or overlay caused by movement at joints or cracks in underlying base or
surface.
Reflux-To boil under a condenser so that the condensed vapors return to the original container.
Reinforced Concrete-Concrete in which steel reinforcement is embedded so that the steel and concrete act together in
resisting stress.
Repeatability-The degree to which the same operator can duplicate the results of a test or measurement in a laboratory.
Representative-Typical of a larger number of items or quantity.
Reprocessing-The working of an existing surface or shoulder material by scarifying and/or remixing with additional
materials, then reshaping to proper contour.
Reproducibility-The degree to which different operators or different laboratories can duplicate the results of a test.
Resilient Modulus-A measure of the resilient character of an untreated fine-grained soil when tested for conditions that
represent stress in pavements subjected to moving wheel loads.
Resurfacing-The placing of one or more new courses on an existing surface.
Riprap-A protective covering of graded stones, with or without mortar, to prevent erosion.
Roadbed-The graded portion of a road or highway, usually considered as the area between the intersection of top and side
slopes, upon which the base course, surface course, shoulders, and median are constructed. The top of the subgrade.
Road Mix-A method of combining surfacing materials, such as mineral aggregate combined with liquid bituminous
material, in which the materials are mixed on the road by means of discs, harrows, blades, or other approved means.
Rockwell Hardness Test-An indentation hardness test using a calibrated machine to force a diamond penetrator or a hard
steel ball under specified conditions, into the surface of the material under test in two operations, and to measure the
difference in depth of the impression under the specified conditions of minor and major loads.

S
Safety Factor (Soils)-That factor by which the shear strength may be reduced in order to bring the slope into a state of
limiting equilibrium along a given slip surface.
Sand-A fine granular material, that results from the natural disintegration of rock.
Sand Seal-An application of asphaltic material covered with fine aggregate.
Sample-A portion of material or a group of units taken in such a way as to represent a material.
Sample Splitter-A device used to reduce a sample proportionally to an amount suitable for testing.
Saybolt Furol Viscosity-The efflux time in seconds of 60 milliliters of sample flowing through a calibrated furol orifice
under specified conditions.
Seal Coat-A bituminous coating with aggregate applied to the surface of a pavement for the purpose of waterproofing and
preserving the surface, relivening a previous bituminous surface, altering the surface texture of the pavement, or providing
resistance to traffic abrasion.
Sedimentation-The action or process of depositing particles of waterborne or windborne soil, rock, or other materials.
Segregation-Separation of portions of a mixture from the mass. The localization of sizes or portions within a mixture or
mass.
Selected Material-Native material obtained from a specified source such as a particular roadway cut or borrow area, and
having specified characteristics.
Set-(I) The strain remaining after complete release of the load producing the deformation. (2) The initial hardening of
portland cement concrete.
Sieve-In laboratory work an apparatus, with definite openings for separating sizes of soils or aggregates.
Significant Digit-That digit in a calculated number which represents the highest acceptable level of accuracy obtainable
from the numbers used in the calculation.
Silt-Material passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve that is nonplastic or very slightly plastic, and exhibits little or no
strength when air dried.
Silt Size-That portion of the soil finer than the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve and larger than 0.0005 mm.
Skip-Graded Aggregate-An aggregate which lacks one or more sizes of material.
Slaking-The treatment of calcium oxide (lime) with water to make calcium hydroxide.
Slump-The measure of the consistency of portland cement concrete by consolidating in a slump cone, removing the cone,
and allowing the concrete to settle under its own mass.
Slurry-A suspension of solids in water.
Slurry Seal-A seal coat consisting of semifluid mixture of asphaltic emulsion and fine aggregate.
Soil-Sediments or other unconsolidated accumulation of solid particles produced by the natural physical and chemical
disintegration of rocks, and which may or may not contain organic matter.
Soil Classification-The arrangement of soils into classes according to their physical properties. There are several systems of
soil classifications.
1-21
Table of Contents
Soil Stabilization-Measures taken to eliminate or minimize the erosion of soil, or to improve its supporting capacity.
Soil Strength-The ability of a soil to resist displacement during cyclic or repetitive loading as compared to static loading.
Soil Support Value-A number which expresses the relative ability of a soil aggregate mixture to support traffic loads
through the pavement structure.
Solids-The portion of a liquid sample remaining after evaporation of the liquid, usually expressed as percent of the original
sample.
Solubility-The amount of a substance which will dissolve in a liquid, usually expressed as a percent.
Solute-A dissolved substance.
Solvent-A liquid used for dissolving another substance.
Spalling-Chipping along the edges, as at joints in concrete pavement and structures.
Specific Gravity-The ratio of the mass of a solid to the mass of an equal volume of water at a standard temperature. (1)
(Apparent)- The specific gravity in which only those voids or pores which cannot be penetrated by water are included in the
volume. (2) (Bulk)-The specific gravity in which the voids or pores in the material that can be penetrated by water are in-
cluded in the volume.
Special Specifications-Additions and revisions to the General and Supplemental Specifications covering conditions
peculiar to an individual project.
Specifications-The formal directions, provisions, and requirements which outline the work to be done, the way in which it
is to be done, the character of materials and mixtures to be used, or the results to be obtained.
Stability-That property of a material which determines its resistance to deformation when subjected to external loading.
Stability (Marshall)-The maximum load sustained by a Marshall briquette when tested at 60 C.
Stabilization-Modification of soils or aggregates by incorporating materials that will increase load-bearing capacity,
firmness, and resistance to weathering or displacement.
Standard-Something having recognized and usually permanent values and established as a model or criteria.
Standard Sand-A sand used in making a standard mortar for testing cement.
Stockpiles-Piles of material stored for later use.
Stone-Rock material produced from a quarry, i.e., non-gravel material.
Strain-The change in length per unit of length in a given direction.
Stratigraphy-The study of rock strata, generally by analyzing rock outcrops or drill cores.
Strength Coefficient-A factor used for expressing the relative strength, or substitution value, of layers, one to the other, for
conversion purposes in a pavement structure.
Stress-The force per unit area acting within a mass.
Stress-Strain Diagram-A diagram in which corresponding values of the stress and strain are plotted.
Stripped-Peeled off, as asphalt from aggregate or forms from concrete.
Structural Section-The planned layers of specified materials, normally consisting of subbase, base, and surface course
placed over the subgrade.
Subbase-The layer or layers of specified or selected material of designed thickness placed on a subgrade to support a base
course.
Subgrade-(I) The top layer of specified thickness of embankments or excavated areas on which the pavement structure
including shoulders is constructed. (2) The top of a roadbed upon which the pavement structure and shoulders are
constructed.
Surface Course-One or more layers of a pavement structure designed to accommodate the traffic load, the top layer of
which resists skidding, traffic abrasion, and the disintegrating effects of climate. The top layer is sometimes called Wearing
Course.
Surface Treatment-An application of bituminous material and cover aggregate.

T
Tack Coat-An application of bituminous material to an existing surface to provide bond with a superimposed course.
Tamp-To compact material by a succession of light or medium blows.
Texture-Surface appearance of a material such as smooth, rough, etc.
Titration-The volumetric addition of a solution to another solution to determine the endpoint of a reaction.
Topsoil-Surface soil, usually containing organic matter.
Toxic-Poisonous.
Triaxial Shear Test-A test in which a cylindrical specimen of soil, encased in an impervious membrane, is subjected to a
confining pressure and then loaded axially to failure.

1-22
Table of Contents

U
Undisturbed Sample-A sample that has been obtained by methods in which every precaution has been taken to minimize
disturbances to the sample.
Uniformly Graded-Material with a uniform gradation from coarse to fine.
Unstable-Natural or processed materials which readily yield to relatively small loads.
Untreated Base Course-The layer or layers of base course without mineral filler or asphaltic binder.

V
Viscosity-The property of a fluid to resist flow.
Visual Inspection-Inspection for defects which can be seen.
Vitrified Clay-Clay that has been fired to produce a glassy or glasslike surface, usually used in pipe and tile.
Voids-The empty spaces between particles in a substance or mixture.

W
Warehouse Stock-Materials stored by a producer or supplier for anticipated use on highway projects.
Waste-Excess earth, rock, vegetation, or other materials resulting from highway construction.
Waterbound-Bonded with the aid of water.
Water-Cement Ratio-The ratio of the amount of water, exclusive only of that absorbed by the aggregates, to the amount of
cement in a concrete or mortar mixture; preferably stated as a decimal by mass.
Wearing Course (Surface Course)-The top layer of a pavement.
Weathering-The decomposition of rock, shale, etc., because of the action of the weather.
Well Graded-Aggregate material of varying particle sizes which produce maximum density when mixed.
Windrow-Material deposited or manipulated into a continuous uniform row.
Wire Mesh-A network of wires used as distributed reinforcement in concrete.

Y
Yield (Concrete)-The ratio of the volume of a mixture produced to that which theoretically should be produced.
Yield Strength-The stress at which a material exhibits a specified limiting deviation from the proportionality of stress to
strain.

1-23
Table of Contents
Sampling and Testing

A. Field Quality Control and Documentation

1. Responsibility of the Engineer

The plans and specifications define the minimum requirements for the quality of materials and work to be furnished under
the contract.

The objectives of the sampling, testing, and inspection performed on construction projects are to insure that materials used
and work done will conform with the plans and specifications and to alert the Engineer and the contractor to the need for
corrective action in case of nonconformity.

The Engineer is responsible to verify that the required sampling and testing is accomplished according to standard
procedures and that the materials used and work done on the project, whether produced on the project or delivered to the
project from an outside source, comply with the contract specifications. Control of the quality of the materials used is
accomplished in one of the following ways:

a. The material is inspected or sampled and tested on the project.

b. The material is sampled on the project and the sample is sent to the Materials and Research Department for testing.
The material is sampled and tested on the project, but a part of the sample is sent to the Materials and Research De-
partment for check testing. This is to check the equipment and the testing procedure used at the project site.
d. A representative of the Materials and Research Department samples the materials at the source or observes the tak-
ing of the samples and the sample is tested either at the site or at the Materials and Research Department laboratory.
The test results are sent to the Engineer.
e. The material is accepted on the basis of a certification or guarantee furnished by the manufacturer or supplier.

The Engineer and Inspectors on the project must know which of the methods of control are to be used for each material.
Sufficient samples must be taken to represent the material that is delivered to the project for assurance that it complies with
specification requirements.

The Engineer and Inspectors must know where, when, and how to take the samples; what size they must be; what tests are
required; how they are to be performed; and which reports and records are to be used to document the results. Reports on all
materials must be kept in the project files for necessary documentation.

As an aid and guide to the Inspector and other personnel involved in the various inspection programs, the schedules for
sampling and testing in Sec B have been prepared. These schedules show the minimum number of samples to be taken;
however, a nonuniform product will require more samples than indicated in the schedule for assurance of its quality.

2. Types of Samples
Depending upon the information required on a material, the type of sample to be taken may be one of the following:

Qualifying samples
Job control samples
Split samples
Laboratory check samples
Information samples
Acceptance samples

It is important that the distinction between the six types be understood and applied by all personnel involved with sampling
and testing. A description of each is given below.

a. Qualifying Samples
Qualifying samples are taken and tested to determine the quality of a given product or general source of material.
Qualifying tests are those such as soundness, wear and deleterious substances for aggregates, and those to determine the
acceptability of an asphalt or portland cement concrete, etc. Quality and source approval tests generally have a lesser
frequency than job control tests and a substantial quantity of material may be utilized between sampling periods. While in
many instances only one test is indicated on a composite sample, it is imperative that the composite sample as prepared

1-25
Table of Contents
be truly representative of the source. If obvious visual differences exist, the minimum number of samples should be
increased and, if necessary due to failing tests, either the source shall be rejected, or those portions represented by failing
tests properly marked and placed off limits. The frequency of testing quality or source approval samples presumes
continued uniformity. At any time a change in the characteristics of the source is observed or suspected, additional
samples should be taken. Where a previously tested and approved source subsequently produces failing results, use of
that source shall immediately cease and the Engineer shall determine the corrective action to be taken.

b. Job Control Samples

Job control samples are tested at the project site, or at the site of production for the purpose of quality control of all
materials used in construction. Material samples shall be taken at the location where the material is required to meet
specification requirements. This should be at a point immediately prior to mixing the product with other materials or so
processed that its characteristics are changed, unless otherwise indicated. A minimum number of test samples are
required to represent a definite and identified lot of material presumed by the producer or contractor to be acceptable for
use. The quantity represented by each sample must be recorded as well as the test results and the test report must be
signed by the Inspector. It is important that a definite numbering system be used to identify each sample tested with a
given quantity of material inspected.

c. Split Samples
Split samples are a split part of a job control sample taken by the project personnel and sent to the Materials and Research
Department laboratory to check the results of the field control tests. The sample data sheet accompanying the split sample
shall show the job control sample number and the project test results for comparing the results obtained by both
laboratories.

d. Check Samples
Check samples are taken of materials that are used in construction work. They are similar to job control samples except
that they are taken and tested by, or in the presence of the Engineer or his designated representative. The purpose is to
check the equipment and procedures used in sampling and testing materials and to verify the reliability of the job control
test results. The results from check samples and tests do not in themselves form a basis for determining if a material or
process is in compliance with the specifications but serves to augment job control results for this purpose. This sampling
and testing is in addition to job control sampling and testing.

The personnel performing the check sampling and testing are MOC personnel other than those involved in the routine job
control sampling and testing, and may make visits to the project sites and perform one or several of the following
functions as appropriate:
1. Obtain check samples for testing at the Materials and Research Department laboratory. If possible, samples will be
taken near the location of the job control sampling.
2. Perform tests at the site.
3. Observe sampling and testing procedures and equipment utilized by site personnel.
4. Review results from job control sampling and testing.
5. Obtain occasional split samples for cooperative testing by Materials and Research Department and site laboratories.

It is the responsibility of the Engineer to review results of laboratory check testing as to compliance with governing
specifications and also to compare the results of laboratory check samples with results from job control tests. Significant
or major differences should be cause for evaluation of testing procedures or equipment.

e. Information Samples
Information samples may be any type of samples not mentioned above. These may be samples taken during production of
materials and prior to the point at which acceptance is made, gradation samples to determine the type of material
available, samples taken during the calibration of hot mix plants, and the like. The reason for taking information samples
should be clearly stated on the test report and/or sample transmittal.

f. Acceptance Samples
Acceptance samples are taken at random locations for the purpose of determining compliance with specifications and
final acceptance of the material prior to provisional handover.

1-26
Table of Contents

3. Sampling and Testing Requirements

It is the responsibility of the project personnel to sample and test all materials as frequently as is necessary to assure that all
materials being used conform to the specifications. The minimum requirements set forth in Sec B are based on experience
and/or research which has shown that, in general, reasonably uniform materials when sampled at these frequencies will
assure that the materials being used are adequately represented by the tests. Where materials exhibit nonconformity, as
shown by either visual inspection or tests, it is necessary that the frequency of sampling and testing be substantially
increased.

These frequencies are intended for average size projects. Typically, high production may result in more uniform materials
and a reduced testing frequency may be permitted so long as satisfactory results are being obtained. However, low
production rates often result in more variability of the materials and more frequent sampling and testing may be required to
ensure quality. Increased sampling and testing frequencies may be ordered by the Engineer at any time. Reduced
frequencies must be approved by the MOC and documented in the files.

Samples are considered to represent not more than a maximum quantity. The inspector must use judgement in determining
and recording the information on the quantity represented by a sample. The important item is to obtain sufficient tests to
properly represent all the materials being used.

The size of the sample will vary depending on the type of material and the tests required. It should be large enough to
provide sufficient material to conduct all of the required tests and to make check tests as desired. The information contained
in Sec B is a guide to the size of sample to submit for testing.

4. Locations for Taking Samples

The location for taking samples will vary depending on the type of material and the information desired. An information
sample will be taken at a location where the given information is needed. For example, during the production of aggregate,
material should be sampled at several intervals for proper control of the operation. Samples taken for assurance of the qual-
ity of a material to determine its acceptability shall be taken at the location where it is required to meet the specifications.
Job control samples shall be taken at a location prior to the material being mixed with other materials or so processed that
its characteristics are changed.

5. Acceptance of Materials
The Engineer is responsible to ensure that all materials incorporated into the work meet or exceed the specifications
requirements. Where job control samples or laboratory check samples indicate failing materials, that quantity of material as
represented shall be either removed and/or reworked and retested to ensure its compliance with specifications.
Numerous instances of passing density tests taken in the field immediately after compaction have failed to meet
specifications when tested during Handover. Engineers need to be cognizant that loss of moisture in a compacted layer will
not in and of itself result in a loss in density, however, loss of moisture together with subsequent traffic or vibration may
result in a loss of density in cohesionless materials. Therefore not only frequency, sample size and location, but also
timeliness are all important to ensure the end result specifications are achieved.

1-27
 B. Minimum Sampling and Testing Schedule
Table of Contents Test Frequency Sample Size and Location
General
Specifications Test Reference Quality/Source Project Control Check Quality/Source Project Control/Check
Section 2.02
Roadway and Classification MRDTM 210(1) One per source − − Fifty (50) kilogram −
Borrow Excavation sample from borrow pit
California bearing MRDTM 213(1) or material type − − or roadway excavation −
Ratio (CBR) for source approval
Moisture Density or MRDTM 212 or “ − − Use same sample −
Relative Density MRDTM 214 “ − − “ −
Embankment Moisture Density or MRDTM 212 See Roadway and One per layer per − In place immediately
Relative Density MRDTM 214 Borrow Excavation − 50,000 sq. meters − prior to placement
Field Density MRDTM 215 or “ One per layer “ of next layer
MRDTM 218 per 5,000 sq. meters “
Subgrade Classification MRDTM 210 “ One per 5,000 One per 50,000 − Fifty (50) kilogram
square meters of square meters of sample from roadway
completed subgrade completed subgrade
California bearing MRDTM 213 “ − One per 5,000 − Use same sample
Ratio (CBR) meters of
completed subgrade
Moisture Density MRDTM 212 See Roadway and − One per layer per − “
Borrow Excavation 20,000 square meters
Field Density MRDTM 215 or “ One per layer “ − In place immediately
MRDTM 218 “ per 2,000 “ − prior to placement
square meters of next layer
Section 2.04
Lime Treated Source Approval Specifications(5) One per source or Certificates of − − −
Subgrade combination of Guarantee for
sources lime
Moisture Density MRDTM 212 “ − − − Same as subgrade
Field Density MRDTM 215 or − One per layer One per layer − In place
MRDTM 218 per 2,000 per 20,000 after final
square meters square meters compacting
Section 2.05
Backfill for Classification MRDTM 210(1) See Roadway and One per layer
Structures Borrow Excavation per 5,000 − − −
square meters
Moisture Density MRDTM 212 “ − − − −
Field Density MRDTM 215 or − One per layer One per layer − In place immediately
MRDTM 218 per 2,000 per 20,000 prior to placement
square meters square meters of next layer
For explanation of notes in parentheses see last sheet.

1-28
Table of Contents

B. Minimum Sampling and Testing Schedule (Continued)

Test Frequency Sample Size and Location
General
Specifications Test Reference Quality/Source Project Control Check Quality/Source Project Control/Cbeck
Section 3.02
Untreated Sieve Analysis MRDTM 204 One per source One per 1,000 One per 10,000 Seventy-five (75) Tbirty-five (35)
Granular Sub- cubic meters cubic meters kilogram sample kilogram sample
base and Base from pit or from central
Courses crusher mix plant
Plasticity Index MRDTM 209 “ “ “ Use same sample Use same sample
Loss by Abrasion MRDTM 309 “ − “ “ “
Moisture Density MRDTM 212 “ − “ “ “
California Bearing MRDTM 213 “ − “ “ −
Ratio (CBR)
Field Density MRDTM 215 or − One per layer One per layer − In place immediately
MRDTM 218 − per 2,000 per 20,000 − prior to placement
square meters square meters of next layer
Thickness Specifications − One per completed − − In place
2,000 square meters
Fractured Faces MRDTM 310(1) One per source − One per 10,000 Use same sample Use same
cubic meters sample
Thin and Specifications(1) “ − “ “ “
Elongated Pieces
Soundness MRDTM 311(1) − “ “ “

Section 3.03
Aggregates for Sieve Analysis MRDTM 204 One per source One per 1,000 One per 10,000 Seventy-five (75) Tbirty-five (35)
Cement Treated cubic meters cubic meters kilogram sample kilogram sample
Base Course from pit or from central mix
crusher plant
Plasticity Index MRDTM 208 “ One per 5,000 One per 10,000 Use same sample Use same sample
cubic meters cubic meters “ “
Loss by Abrasion MRDTM 309 “ − “ “ “
Soluable Sulfates MRDTM 318(2) “ − One per 50,000 “ “
and Chlorides MRDTM 319(2) cubic meters
Cement for Quality Specifications “ Certificates of One per 50,000 Five (5) kilogram Five (5) kilogram
Cement TreAted Guarantee cubic meters sample from several sample from several
Base Courses of base course bags or silo bags or silo
Water for Quality MRDTM 514(2) “ − “ One (1) liter One (1) liter
Cement Treated sample from sample from
Base Courses source source
For explanation of notes in parentheses see last sheet.

1-29
Table of Contents

B. Minimum Sampling and Testing Schedule (Continued)

Test Frequency Sample Size and Location
General
Specifications Test Reference Quality/Source Project Control Check Quality/Source Project Control/Check
Section 3.03
Aggregates for
Cement Mix Verification Specifications(,) One per source or − One per 5,000 Use same sample Use same sample
Treated Combination of cubic meters
Base Courses Sources −
Moisture Density MRDTM 212 “ “ “ “
Field Density MRDTM 215 or − One per layer One per layer “ “
MRDTM 218 per 2,000 per 20,000
square meters square meters
Thickness Specifications One per completed − In place
2,000 square meters
Section 4.01 −
Asphalt Cement Quality Specifications(2) − Certificates of − −
Guarantee
Penetration MRDTM 404 − “ One per plant per − One liter sample
production week from plant line
Liquid Asphalts Quality Specifications(2) − “ − −
Section 4.03
Aggregates Sieve Analysis MRDTM 204 One per source One per One per Fifty (50) Twenty-five (25)
For Bituminous production production kilogram sample kilogram sample
Surface Treatments day week from crusher from stockpile
And Seal Coats − or pit
Flakiness MRDTM 423 “ − “ Use same sample Use same sample
Loss by Abrasion MRDTM 309 “ “ Fifty (50) Fifty (50)
kilogram sample kilogram sample
from crusher or pit from crusher or pit
Soundness MRDTM 311 “ − − Use same sample −
Stripping MRDTM 413 “ − − “ −
Section 4.04
Aggregates for Sieve Analysis MRDTM 204 One per source One per week − Twenty-five (25) Twenty-five (25)
Sand Subbase during pro- kilogram sample kilogram sample
Courses and duction and from stockpile
Open Graded stockpiling
Subbase Course
(Stockpiled)
For explanation of notes in parentheses see last sheet.

1-30
Table of Contents

B. Minimum Sampling and Testing Schedule (Continued)

Test Frequency Sample Size and Location
General
Specifications Test Reference Quality/Source Project Control Check Quality/Source Project Control/Check
Section 4.04
Aggregates for Liquid Limit(3) MRDTM 208 One per source One per week One per week Use same sample Use same sample
Sand Subbase during pro- from the cold
Courses and duction and feed during mix
Open Graded stockpiling production
Subbase Course Plasticity MRDTM 209 “ “ “ “
(Stockpiled) Index(3)
Sand Equivalent(3) MRDTM 313 “ “ “ “ “
Loss by Abrasion MRDTM 309 “ “ “ “
Stripping MRDTM 413 “ “ −
Aggregates for Sieve Analysis MRDTM 204 − One set per “ − Ten (10)
Bituminous Sand plant per Kilogram
Subbase Courses production day sample from
and Open Graded each bin
Subbase Course
(Hot bins)
Bituminous Sand Marshall Mix Design MRDTM 410 One per source − − Fifty (50) −
Subbase Courses kilogram plus
ten (10) liters
asphalt cement
Marshall Stability MRDTM 410 − One per plant per − Ten (10) kilogram
production day sample from plant
Effect of Water MRDTM 415 “ − One per plant − Fifteen (15) kilogram
production week sample from plant
Extracted Asphalt MRDTM 418 − One per 500 cubic One per 5,000 − Ten (10)
meters (not less cubic meters kilogram sample
than one per from roadway
production day) behind paver
Gradation of MRDTM 419 − “ “ − Use same sample
Extracted
Aggregate
Thickness MRDTM 417 − One core per 1,000 − − Roadway
square meters of
completed course
Field Density MRDTM 411 − “ − − Use roadway sample
Section 4.05
Aggregates for Sieve Analysis MRDTM 204 One per source − One per week Twenty-five (25) Twenty-five (25)
Bituminous Base during production kilogram sample kilogram sample
Course (Stockpiled) and stockpiling from pit or crusher from pit or crusher
For explanation of notes in parentheses see last sheet.

1-31
Table of Contents

B. Minimum Sampling and Testing Schedule (Continued)

Test Frequency Sample Size and Location
General
Specifications Test Reference Quality/Source Project Control Check Quality/Source Project Control/Check
Section 4.05 −
Aggregates for Fractured Faces MRDTM 310 One per source One per week One per week Use same sample Use same sample
Bituminous Base Sand Equivalent(3) MRDTM 313 during production from the cold “ “
Course (Stockpiled) and stockpiling feed during
mix production
Plasticity Index(3) MRDTM 208 “ “ “ “ “
Soundness MRDTM 311 “ − − “ −
Loss by Abrasion MRDTM 309 “ − One per week “
during production
and stockpiling
Thin and Elongated Specifications “ − “ “ “
Pieces
Aggregates for Stripping MRDTM 413 “ − − Ten (10) kilogram −
Bituminous sample from bins
Base Course
(Hot Bins)
Sieve Analysis MRDTM 204 − − One set per plant − Ten (10) kilogram
per production day sample from each bin
Mineral Filler Sieve Analysis MRDTM 307 One per source One per 500 tons Five (5) kilogram −
of filler sample
Bituminous Base Marshall Mix Design MRDTM 410 “ − Fifty (50) kilogram −
Course each size aggregate
and ten (10) liters
asphalt cement
Marshall Stability MRDTM 410 − One per plant per − Fifteen (15)
production day kilogram sample from
roadway behind paver
Effect of Water MRDTM 415 One per source − One per plant per − Use same sample
production week
Extracted Asphalt MRDTM 418 − One per 500 cubic One per 5,000 − Ten (10)
Content meters (not less cubic meters kilogram sample
than one per from roadway
production day behind paver
Gradation of MRDTM 419 − “ “ − Use same sample
Extracted
Aggregate
For explanation of notes in parentheses see last sheet.

1-32
Table of Contents

B. Minimum sampling and Testing Schedule (Continued)

Test Frequency Sample Size and Location
General
Specifications Test Reference Quality/Source Project Control Check Quality/Source Project Control/Check
Section 4.05
Aggregates for Thickness MRDTM 417 − One core per 1,000 − − Roadway
Bituminous Base square meters of
Course completed course
Field Density MRDTM 411 − One core per 1,000 − − Use roadway
square meters of Sample
each layer
Section 4.06 Same as Section 4.05
Section 4.07 Same as Section 4.05
Section 4.08 Same as Section 4.05
Section 5.01
Coarse Aggregate Sieve Analysis MRDTM 204 One per source One per 1,000 One per 10,000 Fifty (50) kilogram Twenty-five (25)
for Concrete cubic meters cubic meters sample from source kilogram sample
of concrete of concrete from stockpile
Loss by Abrasion MRDTM 309 “ − “ Use same sample Use same sample
Soundness MRDTM 311 “ − “ “ “
Friable particles MRDTM 312 “ − “ “ “
Specific Gravity MRDTM 304 “ − “ “ “
and Absorption
Soft Fragments AASHTO TI 13-80 “ − “ “ “
and Shale
Thin and Elongated Specifications “ “ “
Pieces −
Soluable Sulfates MRDTM 318(2) “ “ “ “
and Chlorides MRDTM 319(2)
Moisture MRDTM 303 − One per − − Use same sample
production day
Fine Aggregate Sieve Analysis MRDTM 204 One per source One per 1,000 One per 10,000 Twenty-five (25) Five (5)
for Concrete (Including Fineness cubic meters cubic meters kilogram sample Kilogram sample
Modulus) of concrete of concrete from stockpile from stockpile
Soundness MRDTM 311 “ − “ Use same sample Use same sample
Friable Particles MRDTM 312 “ − “ “ “
Organic Impurities MRDTM 315 “ − “ “ “
Sand Equivalent MRDTM 313 “ One per 1,000 One per 10,000 “ “
cubic meters cubic meters
of concrete of concrete
For explanation of notes in parentheses see last sheet.

1-33
Table of Contents

B. Minimum Sampling and Testing Schedule (Continued)

Test Frequency Sample Size and Location
General
Specifications Test Reference Quality/Source Project Control Check Quality/Source Project Control/Check
Section 5.01
Fine Aggregate Moisture MRDTM 303 One per source One per production − Use same sample −
for Concrete day
Soluable Sulfates MRDTM 318(2) “ − One per 10,000 “ Use same sample
cubic meters
Water for Quality MRDTM 514 “ − One per 10,000 One (1) liter One (1) liter
Portland cubic meters sample from sample from
Cement source source
Concrete
Portland Quality MRDTM 504(2) “ Certificates of One per 10,000 Five (5) kilogram Five (5)
Cement Guarantee cubic meters sample from kilogram sample
of concrete several bags or from several
silo bags or silo
Time of set (Vicat) MRDTM 504 − One test per shipment − Use same sample −
Portland Mix Design MRDTM 515 One per mix design − − Two hundred (200) −
Cement kilogram sample
Concrete of aggregate
Compressive MRDTM 523 One set of cylinders One set of One set of Three (3) Three (3)
Strength per mix design cylinders per 50 cylinders per cylinders from cylinders from
cubic meters. 500 cubic meters mixer or truck mixer or truck
Not less than one
per production day
Air Content MRDTM 519 or See mix design One test per 50 − 0. 1 cubic meter −
MRDTM 520 cubic meters. Not from mixer or
less than one per truck
production day
Unit Weight/ MRDTM 518 “ One test per 50 − 0.1 cubic meter −
Cement Factor cubic meters. Not from mixer or
less than one per truck
production day
Slump MRDTM 517 One test per 20 − 0.5 cubic meter −
cubic meters from mixer or truck
Mortar Same requirements as cement, fine aggregate, and water for concrete.
Section 5.02
Reinforcing Quality Specification(2) − Certificates of One sample for − One-1.5 meter
Steel Guarantee each size bar for bar each size
each 50 tons or
fraction of that
size.(4)
For explanation of notes in parentheses see last sheet.

1-34
Table of Contents

B. Minimum Sampling and Testing Schedule (Continued)

Test Frequency Sample Size and Location
General
Specifications Test Reference Quality/Source Project Control Check Quality/Source Project Control/Check
Section 5.04
Prestressing “ “ − “ One sample from − One-2 meter
Steel each spool (4) strand each spool
Section 6.09 One sample from − Ten (10) liter
Paint “ “ − “ each lot.(4) sample from
project storage
Section 6. 10
Thermoplastic Quality Specifications(2) − Certificates of One sample from − Ten (10) kilogram
Traffic Markings Guarantee each lot.(4) sample from project
storage
All other Manufacturers certificates and/or test reports covering all material. Additional tests or samples may be ordered by the Engineer.
manufactured
items
All other Sampling and testing as ordered by the Engineer and required by the specifications.
contractor
produced
materials
NOTES: (1) Not required unless the test is specifically included in the specifications.
(2)
Contractor not required to furnish facilities to perform test. Tests may be performed in an independent laboratory approved by the Ministry.
(3)
If lime is added, acceptance samples shall be taken after the addition of the slurry but before the drier. In this case, minimum acceptance sampling frequency shall be one per
production day.
(4)
Physical tests required on all samples. Chemical tests required on occasional samples selected by the Engineer.
(5)
If used for roadway structural improvement, additional design testing will be required.

1-35
Table of Contents
Field Laboratory Equipment

A. Introduction
The quality control of materials used in roadway construction projects requires specialized test equipment. Each field
laboratory shall be equipped with all necessary test equipment to control the materials to be used on the project. The test
equipment shall be in good condition and calibrated in accordance with the requirements of Part 6, of this manual.

The following listing of both general and specific test equipment is given as a check list of required items and is keyed to
the type of construction control expected on the project. The equipment listed and the number of individual items is a
minimum requirement. Many of the items are easily broken or otherwise rendered unusable and replacement should be
readily available so that control testing of critical construction is not interrupted.

No attempt is made to fully describe the various items listed; however, references are given to a MRD Test Method in
which the specific requirements of each item are given.

The list is organized to present first those items of general testing equipment which every field laboratory is expected to
have. They are items that are used in a number of different test areas. Following the list of general testing equipment are
lists of additional test equipment required in specific areas of control testing including soils analysis and compaction,
aggregate quality, bituminous materials and portland cement concrete. There may be some duplication of equipment where
one field laboratory has responsibility for two or more areas of testing, such as asphalt concrete and aggregate testing.

In addition to the items listed it is expected that each project laboratory will be supplied with necessary paper and drawing
materials, as well as rudimentary tools such as hammers, saws, pliers, screwdrivers, gloves, etc.

B. General Testing Equipment

Number Description MRDTM

Required Reference

2 Sets of Sieves, 203 mm (8 in.) diameter including ..........................................................101

the following sieve sizes:
75 mm (3 in.) 12.5 mm (1/2 in.) 0.60 mm (No. 30)
63 mm (2 1/2 in.) 9.5 mm (3/8 in.) 0.425 mm (No. 40)
50 mm (2 in.) 4.75 mm (No. 4) 0.30 mm (No. 50)
3 7.5 mm (1 1/2 in.) 2.36 mm (No. 8) 0.18 mm (No. 80)
25.0 mm (1 in.) 2.00 mm (No.10) 0.15 mm (No. 100)
19.0 mm 3/4 in.) 1. 18 mm (No. 16) 0.075 mm (No. 200)
pan and cover.
1 Set of Sieves, 305 mm (12 in.) diameter including ................................................................101
the following sieve sizes:
75 mm (3 in.) 37.5 mm (1/2 in.) 12.5 mm (1/2 in.)
63 mm (2 1/2 in.) 25.0 mm (1 in.) 9.5 mm (3/8in.)
50 mm (2 in.) 19.0 mm (3/4 in.) 4.75 mm (No. 4)
pan and cover.
1 Motorized, Dynamic Sieve Shaker for 203 mm (8 in.) sieves ................................................204
1 Timer for Motorized Sieve Shaker .........................................................................................204
1 Brass Wire Brush ....................................................................................................................204
1 Stiff Bristle Brush ...................................................................................................................204
2 Small Paint Brush ...................................................................................................................204
1 Sample Splitter, coarse ...........................................................................................................302
1 Sample Splitter, fine . ..............................................................................................................302
1 Quartering Canvas 2 x 2 m (approximately) ..........................................................................302
2 Laboratory Oven, 50 x 50 x 50 cm minimum, 110 C minimum,
2 Hot Plate, 150 mm square, 400 C,
1 Platform Scale, 115 kg capacity, sensitivity ±50 g .................................................................214
1 Balance, Class E .....................................................................................................................102
2 Balance, Class D .....................................................................................................................102
1 Balance, Class B .....................................................................................................................102

1-37
Table of Contents
1 Stop Watch, 60 minutes, graduated in one-fifth second increments.
2 Calculator, scientific,
4 Thermometer, general lab, 0-200 C, ±0.5 C ...........................................................................….205
6 Pans, metal, 50 x 30 x 10 cm (approximately),
2 Drying Pans, 60 x 90 x 10 cm (approximately),
3(ea) Beaker, glass, 250 ml, 500 ml, 1000 ml,
24(ea) Metal Tins with lids, 150 ml and 75 ml capacity ........................................................................209
1 (ea) Metal Straightedge, 30 cm and I m, with beveled edge .............................................. 517 & 212
1 Micrometer Calipers, 25 mm
2(ea) Volumetric Flask, 500 ml and 1000 ml ..................................................................................305
1 Desiccator, 200 mm (minimum) diameter ..............................................................................207
1 Aspirator ..................................................................................................................... 412 & 207
1 Testing Machine, 1375 kN, (125,000 kg) capacity .................................................... 528 & 213
12 Metal Can, 4 liter (approximately), with lids ..........................................................................215
48 Sample Sack, canvas, 50 kg capacity,
2 Wash Bottle, 1000 ml, complete,
2 Graduated Cylinder, 100 ml capacity,
2 Tamping Rod, 16 x 6 10 mm ...................................................................................... 308 & 517
3 Thermometer, armored, 250 C,
20 Distilled Water, 1 liter bottle,
10 Standard Weights, 25.0 kg,
I Calipers, 40 cm opening,
4 Mixing Bowls, stainless steel, 1 1/2 to 2 1/2 liter
2(ea) Tongs, Beaker and Crucible
2 Scoop, grain,
2 Shovel, square,
2 Brush,bench,
2 Bucket, 12 liter (approximately)
2(ea) Trowel, large and small,
3 Spoons, heavy mixing,
2 Ruler, folding or retractable, 1 m,
I Rubber Mallet, approximately 1 kg,
I Mikrotest Gauge (for galvanized coating),
I Feeler Gauge, 0.25 mm,

C. Soils Testing Equipment

Number Description MRDTM

Required Reference

1 Mortar, porcelain, 200 mrn diameter, with rubber-covered pestle ........................................ 203
1 Stirring Apparatus .................................................................................................................. 205
1 Hydrometer, 152H ................................................................................................................. 205
2 Graduated Cylinder, 1000 ml ................................................................................................. 205
1 Water Bath, thermostatically controlled ................................................................................ 205
1 Porcelain Dish, 115 mm diameter (approximately) with handle ........................................... 209
1 Liquid Limit Device, complete .............................................................................................. 209
1 Spatula, 75 mm long x 20 mm wide (approximately) ............................................................ 209
1 Vibratory Table ...................................................................................................................... 214
1 Mold, metal cylindrical, 2830 cm3 capacity ........................................................................... 214
1 Mold, metal cylindrical, 14160 cm3 capacity ......................................................................... 214
(above molds to be accompanied by guide sleeves, base plates, surcharge mass, dial
indicators, calibration bar and pouring devices),
1 Hoist, 136 kg capacity (minimum) ........................................................................................ 214
2 Pycnometer Jar with top, 500 ml capacity ............................................................................. 207
2 Pycnometer Bottle, 100 ml capacity ...................................................................................... 207
4 Mold, Proctor ......................................................................................................................... 212
1 Hammer, Proctor, 4.54 kg with 457 mm drop ....................................................................... 212
1 Sample Extruder .................................................................................................................... 212
1-38
Table of Contents
3 Mold, CBR, with plate, collar, penetration piston and expansion measuring device, 213
1 Water Tank, 1 x 2 x 1 m (approximately)............................................................................... 213
4 Sand Cone Density Apparatus ............................................................................................... 215
1 Speedy Moisture Tester, complete (optional)......................................................................... 217
1 Nuclear Moisture Density Gauge (optional) .......................................................................... 218

D. Aggregate Testing Equipment

Number Description MRDTM

Required Reference

1 Sand Equivalent Test Set, complete .......................................................................................313

4 Graduated Sand Equivalent Plastic Cylinders ........................................................................313
1 Sand Equivalent Shaker, manual or mechanical ....................................................................313
12 Stock Solution, Sand Equivalent, 240 ml bottle .....................................................................313
1 Unit Mass Measure, 30 liter capacity, with glass cover plate ................................................308
1 Set, Organic Impurities Test ...................................................................................................315
1 Sand Moisture Test Mold and Tamper ...................................................................................305
1 Wire Mesh Basket, 3500 cm3 volume (approximately) ..........................................................304
1 Los Angeles Abrasion Machine .............................................................................................309
1 Sieve, 203 mm (8 in.) diameter 4.00 mm (No. 5)....................................................................311
1 Set Brass Baskets ...................................................................................................................311
1 Glazed Porcelain Crock, 20 liter (approximately)...................................................................311
1 Pycnometer, glass ...................................................................................................................305
1 Aggregate Accelerated Polishing Machine (when specified) ................................................317
1 British Portable Pendulum Tester (when specified) ...............................................................317

E. Bituminous Test Equipment

Number Description MRDTM

Required Reference

48 Sample Can, 1 liter, with screw caps ..................................................................................... 401

6 Marshall Specimen Mold Assembly ...................................................................................... 410
1 Marshall Specimen Extractor ................................................................................................ 410
1 Marshall Compaction Hammer .............................................................................................. 410
1 Marshall Specimen Mold Holder ........................................................................................... 410
1 Marshall Breaking Head ........................................................................................................ 410
1 Marshall Ring Dynamometer Assembly ................................................................................ 410
1 Marshall Flowmeter ............................................................................................................... 410
1 Mechanical Mixing Apparatus .............................................................................................. 410
1 Water Bath, thermostatically controlled to 60 ±1 C .............................................................. 410
6 Glass Plates, 15 x 15 x 0.5 cm ............................................................................................... 415
1 Bituminous Extraction Apparatus, complete ......................................................................... 418
1 Specific Gravity Apparatus for compacted bituminous mixtures .......................................... 411
1 Laboratory Oven, 50 x 50 x 50 cm (approximately), to 200 C .............................................. 414
48 Sample Box, 30 x 30 x 10 cm, cardboard
3 Mixing Pan, rounded corners, 500 ml capacity ..................................................................... 413
3 Glass Pycnometer with top, 1000 ml capacity ....................................................................... 412
2 Specific Gravity Bottle, 24 to 30 ml capacity ........................................................................ 407
2 Thermometer, -8 to 32 C, ASTM E I No. 63 C ..................................................................... 407
1 Test Set for Penetration of Bituminous Materials ................................................................. 404
1 pH Meter ................................................................................................................................ 424
1 Core Drilling Apparatus with bits .......................................................................................... 411
6 10 1. 6 mm (4 in.) Compression Molds with top and bottom plungers ................................. 414 & 415

1-39
Table of Contents

F. Portland Cement Concrete Test Equipment

Number Description MRDTM

Required Reference

12 Cylinder Molds, 150 x 300 mm, reusable .............................................................................. 522

2 Slump Cone, complete ........................................................................................................... 517
1 Air Meter, complete ............................................................................................................... 519
1 Cylinder Capping Apparatus .................................................................................................. 527
2 Concrete Capping Compound, 23 kg bag .............................................................................. 527
1 Mixing Pan, heavy gauge metal, 0.1 m3 (approximately) ...................................................... 523
1 Core Drilling Apparatus ......................................................................................................... 525
2 Evaporating Dish, 200 ml capacity ........................................................................................ 514
1 pH Meter .............................................................................................................................. 514
1 Conductivity Meter ................................................................................................................ 514
1 Unit Mass Measure, 0.014 ml with cover plate ..................................................................... 518
1 Tube Sampler ......................................................................................................................... 501
1 Melting Pot for cylinder capping compound ......................................................................... 527
2 Cube Molds, Set of Three, 50 x 50 x 50 mm ......................................................................... 513
1 Tamper, 13 x 25 x 150 mm .................................................................................................... 513
1 Chace Air Indicator ................................................................................................................ 521
1 Quality of Water Test Set
1 Schmidt Concrete Test Hammer
1 Vicat Apparatus ..................................................................................................................... 504
1 Steel Straightedge, 46 cm ...................................................................................................... 523
1 Curing Tank, with temperature control
1 Gilmore Apparatus ................................................................................................................. 511
1 No. 325 Sieve ......................................................................................................................... 503
1 Mechanical Mixer for PCC pastes and mortars ..................................................................... 506

1-40
Table of Contents Table of Conversion Factors
U.S. Customary Units to International System (SI) of Units

To Convert From to Multiply by

acre ........................................................meter 2 (m2) .....................................................................1.233 489 x 103

atmosphere (1 kgf/cm2) ..........................pascal (Pa) .......................................................................9.806 650 x 104
fluid ounce .............................................meter3 (m3) ....................................................................2.957 353 x 10-5
foot .........................................................meter (m) .......................................................................3.048 006 x 10-1
ft2 ..........................................................meter 2 (m2) ....................................................................9.290 304 x 10-2
f3 .............................................................meter3 (m3) .....................................................................2.831685 x 10-2
gallon (U.S . liquid) ...............................meter3 (m3) .....................................................................3.785 412 x 10-3
gram-force/cm2 ......................................pascal(Pa) ........................................................................9.806 650 x 10
inch ........................................................meter (m) .......................................................................2.540000 X 10-2
in2 ...........................................................meter2 (m2) ......................................................................6.451600 x 10-4
in3 ...........................................................meter3 (m3) .....................................................................1.638 706 x 10-5
kilogram-force (kgf) ..............................newton (N) ...............................................................................9.806650
kgf•m .....................................................newton meter (N • m) ...............................................................9.806650
kg f/cm2 ..................................................pascal (Pa) ......................................................................9.806 650 x 104
kgf/m2 ....................................................pascal(Pa) .................................................................................9.806650
km/h .......................................................meter per second (m/s) ..................................................2.777 778 x 10-1
kip (1000 lbf) .........................................newton (N) ......................................................................4.448 222 x 103
kip/in2 (ksi) .............................................pascal (Pa) ......................................................................6.894 757 x 106
knot ........................................................meter per second (m/s) ..................................................5.144 444 x 10-1
liter .........................................................meter3 (m3) ...................................................................1. 000 000 X 10-3
microinch ...............................................meter (m) .......................................................................2.540 000 x 10-8
micron ....................................................meter (m) .......................................................................1.000000 X 10-6
mil ..........................................................meter (m) .......................................................................2.540 000 x 10-5
mile ........................................................meter (m) ........................................................................1.609 344 x 103
mile (U.S. nautical) ................................meter (m) ........................................................................1.852 000 x 103
mi/h ........................................................meter per second (m/s) ..................................................4.470 400 x 10-1
mi/h ........................................................kilometer per hour (km/h) ........................................................1.609344
ounce (avoirdupois) ...............................kilogram (kg) .................................................................2.834 952 x 10-2
ounce (troy) ...........................................kilogram (kg) .................................................................3.110 348 x 10-2
ounce (U.S. fluid) ..................................meter' (M3) ....................................................................2.957 353 x 10-5
poise (absolute viscosity) .......................pascal second (Pa • s) ....................................................1.000 000 x 10-1
pound (avoirdupois) ...............................kilogram (kg) .................................................................4.535 924 x 10-1
pound (troy) ...........................................kilogram (kg) .................................................................3.732 417 x 10-1
lb•ft2 (moment of inertia) .......................kilogram meter2 (kg • m2) ..............................................4.214 011 x 10-2
lb/ft2 .......................................................kilogram per meter2 (kg/m2) ......................................................4.882428
lb/ft3 .......................................................kilogram per meter3 (kg/m3) .............................................1.601 846 x 10
lb/gal(U.S . liquid) .................................kilogram per meter3 (kg/m3) ...........................................1. 198 264 x 102
lb/in3 ......................................................kilogram per meter3 (kg/m3) ............................................2.767 990 x 104
lb/yd3 ......................................................kilogram per meter3 (kg/m3) ...........................................5.932 764 x 10-1
poundal ..................................................newton (N) ....................................................................1.382 550 x 10-1
poundal/ft2 .............................................pascal(Pa) ................................................................................1.488 164
pound-force (lbf) ....................................newton (N) ...............................................................................4.448222
lbf•ft .......................................................newton meter (N • m) ..............................................................1.355 818
lbf/ft .......................................................newton per meter (N/m) ..................................................1.459 390 x 10
lbf/ft2 ......................................................pascal(Pa) ........................................................................4.788 026 x 10
lbf/in2 (psi) .............................................pascal (Pa) ......................................................................6.894 757 x 103
quart (U.S. liquid) ..................................meter3 (m3) ....................................................................9.463 529 x 10-4
stokes (kinematic viscosity) ...................meter2 per second (m2/s) ...............................................1. 000000 X 10-4
ton (long, 2240 lb) .................................kilogram (kg) ..................................................................1.016 047 x 103
ton (metric, tonne) .................................kilogram (kg) ....................................................................1.000000 x103
ton (short, 2000 lb) ................................kilogram (kg) ..................................................................9.071 847 x 102
ton-force (2000 lbf) ...............................newton (N) .....................................................................8.896444 X 103
ton (short)/yd3 ........................................kilogram per meter3 (kg/m3) ............................................1.186 553 x 103
yard ........................................................meter (m) .......................................................................9.144 000 x 10-1
yd2 ...........................................................meter 2(m2) .....................................................................8.361 274 x 10-1
yd3 ...........................................................meter 3(m3) .....................................................................7.645 549 x 10-1

1-41
Table of Contents

General

Several items are required for good quality control testing. They include representative sampling, proper test procedures and
adequate testing equipment. Sampling and test procedures are more directly related to the training and abilities of the
Engineer or technician; however, his efforts are wasted if the equipment he is using is not in good condition and accurately
calibrated in accordance with the test procedure involved. This section presents several specifications and methods used to
insure that the testing equipment described will provide consistent and accurate test results. Further information on insuring
adequate test equipment is described in Part 6 of this Materials Manual.

1-43
Table of Contents
List of Each Materials and Research
Department Test Method for General Tests

The following list provides a summary of test methods by numerical order, listing the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, Ministry of
Communications, Materials and Research Department, Standard Method of Test (MRDTM) and the MRDTM name.

MRDTM Number MRDTM Test Name

101 ................................. Sieves for Testing Purposes

102 ................................. Weights and Balances Used in Testing of Highway Materials
103 ................................. Terms Relating to Density and Specific Gravity of Solids, Liquids, and Gases
104 ................................. Verification of Testing Machines

1-45
Table of Contents
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Communications
Materials and Research Department

Standard Method of Test for

Sieves For Testing Purposes

MRD Test Method 101

(SSA 227/1981 and SSA 228/1981)

This specification consists of two parts. Part I is Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO) SSA 227/1981 Methods of
Testing of "Test Sieves" and Part 11 is SSA 228/1981 "Wire Cloth Test Sieves".

Part I
Methods of Testing of "Test Sieves"

1. Scope
1.1 This standard is concerned with methods of testing and calibration of test sieves of metal wire cloth or perforated
plate sieving mediums.

2. Definitions
2.1 Particle-A discrete part of the material regardless of its size.
2.2 Sieving Medium-A surface containing regularly arranged apertures of uniform shape and size.
2.3 Certified Test Sieve-A test sieve that has been examined and certified, by an authority accredited for the purpose,
as complying with agreed specifications.

3. Instruments
3.1 A suitable projector with magnification lenses.
3.2 A set of graduated scales specially made for test purposes.
3.3 Inside and outside vernier calipers (of an accuracy 0.02 mm).
3.4 Micrometer (of an accuracy 0.001 mm).
3.5 Limited-tapered plate gauges (flat or round).
3.6 Graduated ruler-to 0.5 mm.

4. Methods of Testing and Calibration of Wire Cloth Sieves

4.1 Visual examination of general condition of wire cloth.
4. 1.1 If an obvious defect in the screening medium or the construction of the sieve is visually apparent, to include
bends, creases, wrinkles, tears, punctures, plugged apertures, or other deficiencies such as obvious deviation from specified
measurement, the sieves shall be rejected.
4.2 Examination of the regularity of the weaving of the wire cloth (apertures).
4.2.1 Sieves with apertures greater than 9.5 mm shall be tested using vernier calipers, micrometer or flat or round
limit-tapered plate gauges. Sieves with measurements nonconforming to the values and tolerances mentioned in Saudi
Standard No. 228 "Wire Cloth Test Sieves" shall be rejected.
4.2.2 Sieves with apertures up to 9.5 mm shall be tested using a projector forming an illuminated background on a
screen to show a clear picture of the apertures of the wire cloth of the tested sieve as follows:
4.2.2.1 The sieve to be tested shall be placed on the sieve holder and held rigidly in a position with its bottom toward
the light source. The beam of light shall be perpendicular on the screen. The projected image shall be uniformly illuminated
and of constant magnification at all points within a tolerance of + 0.1%.
4.2.2.2 The linear magnification of the image on the screen shall be 100 times for fine sieves with apertures up to 1.0
mm, and 50 times for medium sieves with apertures more than I mm up to 9.5 mm.
4.2.2.3 The aperture widths and wire diameters shall be checked by measuring the image projected on the screen with
the appropriate graduated scale (Fig. 1). Sieves which do not conform to the dimensions and tolerances mentioned in Saudi
Standard No. 228 "Wire Cloth Test Sieves" shall be rejected.

5. Methods of Testing and Calibration of Perforated Plate Sieves

5.1 Visual examination of general condition of the perforated plate.
Table of Contents
5.1.1 If obvious defects in the screening medium or the construction of the sieve is visually apparent, to include
creases, wrinkles, tears, punctures, bends, plugged apertures and obvious deviation from specified measurements, the sieve
shall be rejected.
5.2 Examination of Measurement of apertures size.
5.2.1 Dimensions of individual apertures shall be checked over any selected area of the sieve plate along two straight
lines of different directions, each of 100 mm length at least and shall include five apertures.
In case of round apertures, the angle between the two selected straight lines shall be 60°. In case of square apertures the
angle between the lines shall be 90°. This test may be carried out along a straight diametrical line not less than 150 mm in
length which includes eight apertures at least.
5.2.2 Apertures of 9.5 mm or greater shall be measured by using vernier calipers, micrometer or flat or round
limit-tapered plate gauges. Apertures less than 9.5 mm shall be measured by using the projector method mentioned in 4.2.2.
Sieves which do not conform to the dimensions and tolerances mentioned in Saudi Standard No. 229 "Perforated Plate Test
Sieves," shall be rejected.
5.3 Examination of perforated plate thickness.
5.3.1 Vernier calipers or any other instrument with a suitable vernier shall be used to measure the perforated plate
thickness to ensure conformity of its dimensions to the values and tolerances mentioned in Saudi Standard No. 229
"Perforated Plate Test Sieves."

6. References
6.1 Main Reference
6.1.1 International Standard ISO 3310 "Test Sieves: Part 1/1975 "Metal Wire Cloth" Part 11/1975 "Metal Perforated
Plate."
6.2 Other References
6.2.1 American National Standards:
6.2.1.1 ANSI E 11/1977 "Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes."
6.2.1.2 ANSI E 323/1977 "Perforated Plate Sieves for Testing Purposes."
6.2.2 British Standard BS 410/1976 "Specificatons for Test Sieves."
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Part II
Wire Cloth Test Sieves

1. Scope
1. 1 This standard is concerned with test sieves with metal wire cloth as sieving medium mounted in a frame.

2. Definitions
2.1 Sieving Medium-A surface of wire cloth containing regularly arranged square apertures of uniform shape and size.
2.2 Wire Cloth-A sieving medium made of metal wires interlaced with each other to form the apertures.
2.3 Sieve-An apparatus for the purpose of sieving, consisting of a sieving medium mounted in a frame.
2.4 Test Sieve-A sieve intended for the particle size analysis of the material to be sieved.
2.5 Certified Test Sieve-A test sieve that has been examined and certified, by an authority accredited for the purpose,
as complying with agreed specifications.
2.6 Matched Test Sieve-A test sieve that reproduces the results of a master test sieve within defined tolerance limits of
a given material.
2.7 Full set of Test Sieves-A set of test sieves of a given type of sieving medium contained in a standard specification.
2.8 Regular set of Test Sieves-A number of sieves taken in regular order from a full set of test sieves, for particle size
analysis of the material.
2.9 Irregular Set of Test Sieves-A number of sieves taken in irregular order from a full set of test sieves, for particle
size analysis of the material.
2. 10 Nest of Test Sieves-A set (regular or irregular) of test sieves assembled together with a cover and receiver.
2.11 Frame-A rigid framework which supports the sieving medium and limits the spread of the material being sieved.
2.12 Cover-A lid which fits snugly over a sieve to prevent escape of the material being sieved.
2.13 Receiver-A pan which fits snugly beneath a sieve to receive the whole of the passing fraction.
2.14 Aperture Size-Dimension defining the length of an opening side.
2.15 Percentage of Sieving Area-Ratio of the area of the apertures to the total area of sieving medium, as a percentage.
2.16 Wire Diameter-Diameter of the wire in the woven cloth.
2.17 Warp-All wires running lengthwise of the cloth as woven.
2.18 Weft-All wires running crosswise of the cloth as woven.
2.19 Type of Weave-The way in which warp and weft wires cross each other.
2.19.1 Plain Weave-A weave in which every warp wire crosses alternately above and below every weft wire and vice
versa (see Fig. 1).
2.19.2 Twilled Weave-A weave in which every warp wire crosses alternately above and below every second weft wire
and vice versa (See Fig. 2).

3. Requirements
3.1 The following requirements shall be met in test sieves:
3. 1.1 Sieving medium
3. 1. 1.1 Wire cloth shall be woven from brass, phosphor bronze, steel or from any other suitable material according to
the aperture size (see Table 1). The wire shall not be coated or plated.

Table 1

Materials for Wire Cloth

Aperture size Material

Less than 250 Phosphor bronze
Micrometer
250 micrometer to Phosphor bronze or
850 micrometer brass
1.00 to 3.5 mm Phosphor bronze,
brass or steel
4.00 mm and above Brass or steel.

3.1.1.2 The wire cloth shall be woven to produce uniform square apertures.
3.1.1.3 Wire cloth shall be plain woven except in the case of 63 micrometer opening and finer where it can be twilled.
3.1.1.4 The full set of standard sieves shall be one of the sets mentioned in Table 2.
3.1.1.5 The wire cloth shall be so mounted in the frame as to be held firmly and equally taut in all directions.
Table of Contents
3.1.1.6 Both the warp and weft wires shall be crimped before weaving so as to be rigid when in use.
3.1.1.7 There shall be no punctures or other obvious defects in the wire cloth.
3.2 Aperture Size
3.2.1 The measured aperture size before the sieve is used shall comply with the nominal size within the tolerances
given in Table 2. Aperture size is measured on the center lines of the aperture (Fig. 3). The tolerances shall apply both to the
warp and weft directions separately.
3.2.2 No aperture size shall exceed the nominal value by more than the tolerance “X"
3.2.3 The average size shall not be greater or smaller than the nominal value by more than the tolerance "Y"
3.2.4 Not more than 6 percent of the measured apertures shall depart from the nominal size by more than the tolerance
"Z."

where Z = X + Y
2
3.3 Frame
3.3.1 The frame of a test sieve shall be made of brass, stainless steel or other suitable material. It shall be cylindrical in
shape and shall conform to dimensions given in Table 3.

Table 3
Frame Dimensions

Depth from Top Depth from Bottom Minimum Effective

Nominal Edge to Sieving Edge to Sieving Diameter of Aperture Size
Diameter Surface Surface Sieving Surface
D. (mm) C1 (mm) C2 (mm) (mm)
100 40 15 62 Up to 125 µm
200 50 15 175 From 150 µm
to 3.6 mm
300 75 15 275 More than 3.6 mm

3.4 Receiver
3.4.1 The receiver shall be constructed of the same metal and of the same thickness as that of the frame of the
corresponding test sieve.
3.5 Cover
3.5.1 A fitting flat cover shall be provided with the test sieve upon the purchaser's request.
3.5.2 The cover shall be constructed of the same metal and thickness of the frame of the corresponding test sieve.
3.5.3 The cover may be fitted with a handle or knob.
3.6 Sieves, receivers and covers shall be smoothly finished. The seal between frame and sieving medium shall be
formed so as to prevent lodging of the material to be sieved. There shall be no lacquer on surfaces which come into contact
with the sieved sample.

4. Marking
4.1 Each sieve shall bear a permanent metallic label attached to the frame, legibly marked with the following
information, in Arabic and/or English:
4. 1.1 The manufacturer's name or trade mark.
4.1.2 The material of the wire cloth.
4.1.3 The material of the sieve frame.
4.1.4 The nominal size of the aperture (in micrometer or mm).

5. Testing Methods
5.1 Wire cloth test sieves shall be tested according to Saudi Standard No. 227 "Methods of Testing of Test Sieves".
5.2 Tests
5.2.1 Visual inspection to examine the general condition of wire cloth.
5.2.2 Examination of the regularity of weaving of wire cloth.

6. Packaging
6.1 After testing, sieves shall be packed in polyethylene bags, then put into carton boxes to ensure that they have
adequate protection before reaching the user.
Table of Contents
Table 2
Standard Test Sieves

Values in millimetres
Nominal Sizes of Aperture
W Aperture Tolerances Wire Diameters
Maximum
Principal Supplemen- Supplemen- Tolerance Tolerance Intermediate Preferred Permissible Range of
Sizes tary Sizes tary Sizes For Any One For Average Tolerance Size Choice
R 20/3 R 20 R 40/3 Aperture Aperture Size
+X ±Y +Z d
d max d min

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

125 125 125 4.51 3.66 4.09 8 9.2 6.8
112 4.15 3.29 3.72 8 9.2 5.8
106 3.99 3.12 3.55 6.3 7.2 5.4
100 3.82 2.94 3.38 6.3 7.2 5.4

90.0 90.0 90.0 3.53 2.66 3.09 6.3 7.2 5.4

80.0 3.24 2.37 2.80 6.3 7.2 5.4
75.0 3.09 2.22 2.65 6.3 7.2 5.4
71.0 2.97 2.10 2.54 5.6 6.4 4.8

63.0 63.0 63.0 2.71 1.87 2.29 5.6 6.4 4.8

56.0 2.49 1.67 2.08 5 5.8 4.3
53.0 2.39 1.58 1.99 5 5.8 4.3
50.0 2.29 1.49 1.89 5 5.8 4.3

45.0 45.0 45.0 2.12 1.35 1.73 4.5 5.2 3.8

40.0 1.94 1.20 1.57 4.5 5.2 3.8
37.5 1.85 1.13 1.49 4.5 5.2 3.8
35.5 1.78 1.07 1.42 4 4.6 3.4

31.5 31.5 31.5 1.63 0.95 1.29 4 4.6 3.4

28.0 1.50 0.85 1.17 3.55 4.1 3
26.5 1.44 0.80 1.12 3.55 4.1 3
25.0 1.38 0.76 1.07 3.55 4.1 3

22.4 22.4 22.4 1.27 0.68 0.98 3.55 4.1 3

20.0 1.17 0.61 0.89 3.15 3.6 2.7
19.0 1.13 0.58 0.85 3.15 3.6 2.7
18.0 1.08 0.55 0.82 3.15 3.6 2.7

16.0 16.0 16.0 0.99 0.49 0.74 3.15 3.6 2.7

14.0 0.90 0.43 0.67 2.8 3.2 2.4
13.2 0.86 0.41 0.64 2.8 3.2 2.4
12.5 0.83 0.39 0.61 2.5 2.9 2.1
Table of Contents
Table 2 (contd.)

Values in millimetres
Nominal Sizes of Aperture Aperture Tolerances Wire Diameters
W (see 4.1) (see 4.2)
Maximum
Principal Supplemen- Supplemen- Tolerance Tolerance Intermediate Preferred Permissible Range of
Sizes tary Sizes Tary Sizes For AnyOne For Average Tolerance Size Choice
R 20/3 R 20 R 40/3 Aperture Aperture Size
+X ±Y +Z d
d max d min

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

11.2 11.2 11.2 0.77 0.35 0.56 2.5 2.9 2.1
10.0 0.71 0.31 0.51 2.5 2.9 2.1
9.50 0.68 0.30 0.49 2.24 2.6 1.9
9.00 0.65 0.28 0.47 2.24 2.6 1.9

8.00 8.00 8.00 0.60 0.25 0.43 2 2.3 1.7

7.10 0.55 0.22 0.38 1.8 2.1 1.5
6.70 0.53 0.21 0.37 1.8 2.1 1.5
6.30 0.51 0.20 0.35 1.8 2.1 1.5

5.60 5.60 5.60 0.47 0.18 0.32 1.6 1.9 1.3

5.00 0.43 0.16 0.29 1.6 1.9 1.3
4.75 0.41 0.15 0.28 1.6 1.9 1.3
4.50 0.40 0.14 0.27 1.4 1.7 12

4.00 4.00 4.00 0.37 0.13 0.25 1.4 1.7 1.2

3.55 0.34 0.11 0.23 1.25 1.5 1.06
3.35 0.32 0.11 0.22 1.25 1.5 1.06
3.15 0.31 0.10 0.21 1.25 1.5 1.06

2.80 2.80 2.80 0.29 0.09 0.19 1.12 1.3 0.95

2.50 0.26 0.08 0.17 1 1.15 0.85
2.36 0.25 0.08 0.17 1 1.15 0.85
2.24 0.24 0.07 0.16 0.9 1.04 0.77

2.00 2.00 2.00 0.23 0.07 0.15 0.9 1.04 0.77

1.80 0.21 0.06 0.14 0.8 0.92 0.68
1.70 0.20 0.06 0.13 0.8 0.92 0.68
1.60 0.19 0.05 0.12 0.8 0.92 0.68

1.40 1.40 1.40 0.18 0.05 0.11 0.71 0.82 0.6

1.25 0.16 0.04 0.10 0.63 0.72 0.54
1.18 0.16 0.04 0.10 0.63 0.72 0.54
1.12 0.15 0.04 0.10 0.56 0.64 0.48

1.00 1.00 1.00 0.14 0.03 0~09 0.56 0.64 0.48

Table of Contents
Table 2 (contd.)

Values in micrometres
Nominal Sizes of Aperture
W Aperture Tolerances Wire Diameters
Maximum
Principal Supplemen- Supplemen- Tolerance Tolerance Intermediate Preferred Permissible Range of
Sizes tary Sizes tary Sizes ForAnyOne forAverage Tolerance Size Choice
R 20/3 R 20 R 40/3 Aperture Aperture Size
+X ±Y +Z d
d max d min
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
900 131 31 81 500 580 430
850 127 29 78 500 580 430
800 122 28 75 450 520 380

710 710 710 112 25 69 450 520 380

630 104 22 63 400 460 340
600 101 21 61 400 460 340
560 96 20 58 355 410 300

500 500 500 89 18 54 315 360 270

450 84 16 50 280 320 240
425 81 16 48 280 320 240
400 78 15 47 250 290 210

355 355 355 72 13 43 224 260 190

315 67 12 40 200 230 170
300 65 12 38 200 230 170
280 62 11 37 180 210 150

250 250 250 58 9.9 34 160 190 130

224 54 9.0 32 160 190 130
212 52 8.7 30 140 170 120
200 50 8.3 29 140 170 120

180 180 180 47 7.6 27 125 150 106

160 44 6.9 25 112 130 95
150 43 6.6 25 100 130 95
140 41 6.3 24 100 115 85

125 125 125 38 5.8 22 90 104 77

112 36 5.4 21 80 92 68
106 35 5.2 20 71 82 60
100 34 5.0 19 71 82 60

90 90 90 32 4.6 18 63 72 54
80 30 4.3 17 56 64 48
75 29 4.1 17 50 58 43
71 28 4.0 16 50 58 43

63 63 63 26 3.7 15 45 52 38
56 25 3.5 14 40 46 34
53 24 3.4 14 36 41 31
50 23 3.3 13 36 41 31

45 45 45 22 3.1 13 32 37 27
40 - - - 32 37 27
38 - - - 30 35 24
36 - - - 30 35 24
32 32 - - - 28 33 23
28 - - - 25 - -
26 - - - 25 - -
25 - - - 25 - -
22 22 - - - 22 - -
20 20 - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
7. References
7.1 Main References
7.1.1 International Standard ISO 33101/1975 "Test Sieves-Technical Requirements and Testing-Part 1: Metal Wire
Cloth."
7.1.2 ISO 2395/1972 "Test Sieves and Test Sieving Vocabulary."
7.2 Other References
7.2.2 British Standard BS 410/1976 "Specifications for Test Sieves."
7.2.3 ANSI/ASTM E 11-70/1977 "Standard Specifications for Wire Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes."
7.2.4 Deutsche Normen
7.2.4.1 DIN 4188/1977 "Screening Surfaces; Wire Screens for Test Sieves; Dimensions."
7.2.4.2 DIN 4189/1968 "Screening Surfaces Woven Wire Cloth Made of Steel, Stainless Steel, and Nonferrous
Metals; Dimensions."
Table of Contents
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Communications
Materials and Research Department

Standard Method of Test for

Weights and Balances Used in Testing of Highway Materials

MRD Test Method 102

(Adaptation of AASHTO M 231-77)

1. Scope
1. 1 This specification covers requirements for weights and balances used in the testing of highway materials.

2. Definitions
2.1 Definitions applicable to weights are as follows:
2.1.1 Analytical Weights-Weights used for analytical work.
2.1.2 General Purpose Weights-Weights used for general laboratory weighings.
2.2 Definitions applicable to balances are as follows:
2.2.1 Readability-The smallest fraction of a division at which the index scale can be read with ease either by
estimation or by use of a vernier on a direct reading balance.
2.2.2 Sensitivity-Ability of a balance to respond to an applied load at any test point within the rated capacity.
2.2.3 Accuracy-Conformance of the indications or deliveries of a balance within applicable tolerances as determined
by tests made with suitable standards.
2.2.4 Simple Balance-A balance designed primarily for use in conjunction with a set of weights. There may or may not
be a weighbeam.
2.2.5 Direct Reading Balance-A balance on which the weights of applied loads of various magnitudes are either
automatically indicated throughout all or a portion of the weighing range of the balance measured by means of a
weighbeam.
2.2.6 Weighbeam-An element comprising one or more bars, equipped with movable poises or means for applying
counterpoise weights or both.

3. Basis of Purchase
3.1 Weights-The purchaser should specify the type of weights desired.
3.2 Balances-The purchaser should specify the type and class of balance desired.

4. Requirements
4.1 Weights shall conform to the following requirements:
4. 1.1 Analytical weights shall conform to Class S-1 requirements as described in the United States' National Bureau
of Standards Handbook 77, Part 111, and the applicable tolerances shown in Table I of this specification.
4.1.2 General purpose weights shall conform to the requirements for metric weights as described in the third edition of
the United States' National Bureau of Standards Handbook 44 and the applicable tolerances shown in Table 2 of this
specification.
4.2 Balances shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 for the type and class specified. Whenever a particular class
of balance is specified in a Test Method, any (alphabetically) higher class of balance may be substituted, provided the
balance has sufficient capacity for the weighings normally required by the Test Method.
Table of Contents
Table 1
Tolerances of Analytical Weights

Tolerances
of Weights
Weights in Use, ± mg*
Grams
100 1.0
50 0.6
30 0.45
20 0.35
10 0.25
5 0.18
2 0.13
1 0.10
Milligrams
500 0.080
300 0.070
200 0.060
100 0.050
50 0.042
30 0.038
20 0.035
10 0.030
*Two thirds of the weights in a new set must be within one
half the individual tolerances.

Table 2
Tolerances of General Purpose Weights

Weights, g Tolerances
on Weights
in Use, ± mg*
2000 0.40
1000 0.25
500 0.20
300 0.15
200 0.10
100 0.07
50 0.04
30 0.03
20 0.02
10 0.02
5 0.01
3 0.01
2 0.01
1 0.01
*The permissible tolerances of new weights shall be one
half the permissible tolerances on used weights.
Table of Contents

Table 3
Requirements for Balances

Type 1 Type 1 Recommended

Class Simple Balances Direct Reading Balances Maximum
Range
Sensitivity, Accuracy, Readability, Sensitivity, Accuracy, of Use, 1
g g g g g g
A 0.0001 0.0002 0.0001 0.0001 0.0002 200
B 0.001 0.002 0.001 0.001 0.002 200
C 0.01 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.02 1200
D 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.2 2000
E 0.5 1.0 1.0 0.5 1.0 5000
F 5.0 0.2%* 5.0 5.0 0.2%* -
*0.2 percent of total sample mass.
1
Or maximum range of use as recommended by manufacturer.
Table of Contents
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Communications
Materials and Research Department

Standard Method of Test for

Terms Relating to Density and Specific Gravity
of Solids, Liquids, and Gases

MRD Test Method 103

(Adaptation of AASHTO M 132-78)

Introduction

In scientific terminology, mass is a measure of the quantity of material in a body, and is constant regardless of geographical
location, altitude, or atmospheric conditions, so long as no material is added or taken away. Weight is the force with which
a body is attracted to the earth, and varies from place to place with the acceleration of gravity.
Density (of solids and liquids) is the mass of a unit volume of a material at a specified temperature. The units shall be stated,
such as grams per milliliter, grams per cubic centimeter, or other. If the material is a solid, the volume shall be that of the
impermeable portion. The form of expression shall be:

Density at x ....

where:
x = the temperature of the material.
Density (of gases) is the mass of a unit volume of a gas at a stated temperature and pressure. The units shall be stated. The
form of expression shall be:

Density at x, y ....

where:
x = temperature of the gas, and
y = pressure of the gas.
Apparent density (of solids and liquids) is the mass in air of a unit volume of a material at a specified temperature. The units
shall be stated. If the material is a solid, the volume shall be that of the impermeable portion. The form of expression shall
be:

Apparent density at x ....

where:
x = the temperature of the material.
Bulk density (of solids) is the mass in air of a unit volume of a permeable material (including both permeable and
impermeable voids normal to the material) at a stated temperature. The units shall be stated. The form of expression shall
be:

Bulk density at x ....

where:
x = temperature of the material.
Specific gravity (of solids and liquids) is the ratio of the mass of a unit volume of a material at a stated temperature to the
same volume of gas free distilled water at a stated temperature. If the material is a solid, the volume shall be that of the
impermeable portion. The form of expression shall be:

Specific gravity x/y, C ....

where:
x = temperature of the material, and
y = temperature of the water.
Table of Contents
Specific gravity (of gases) is the ratio of the density of a gas, under the observed conditions of temperature and pressure to
the density of dry air of normal carbon dioxide content, at the same temperature and pressure. The units shall be stated. The
form of expression shall be:

Specific gravity at x, y ....

where:
x = temperature of gas, and
y = pressure of the gas.
Apparent specific gravity, (of solids and liquids) is the ratio of the mass in air of a unit volume of a material at a stated
temperature to the mass in air of equal density of an equal volume of gas free distilled water at a stated temperature. If the
material is a solid, the volume shall be that of the impermeable portion. The form of expression shall be:

Apparent specific gravity x/y, C ....

where:
x = temperature of the material, and
y = temperature of the water.
Bulk specific gravity, (of solids) is the ratio of the mass in air of a unit volume of a permeable material (including both
permeable and impermeable voids normal to the material) at a stated temperature to the mass in air of equal density of an
equal volume of gas free distilled water at a stated temperature. The form of expression shall be:

Bulk specific gravity x/y, C ....

where:
x =temperature of the material, and
y = temperature of the water.
Table of Contents
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Communications
Materials and Research Department

Standard Method for

Load Verification of Tensile Testing Machines

MRD Test Method 104

(SSA 211/1981)

1. Scope
1.1 This standard is concerned with the methods used for load verification of tensile testing machines by one of the
following means:
Standard weights.
Standardized proving levers.
Elastic proving devices.

2. Definitions
2.1 Verification-The process of testing an instrument for the purpose of assessing the indication errors, to determine
whether the instrument complies with a prescribed specification.
2.2 Indicated Value-The value read on the graduated scale of the testing machine for the measured quantity.
2.3 True Value-The value obtained by the verification device for the measured quantity.
2.4 Error-The value obtained by subtracting the true value from the indicated value.
2.5 Percentage of Error-The ratio expressed as percentage of the error to the true value of the quantity measured.
2.6 Correction-The value obtained by subtracting the indicated value from the true value of the quantity measured, (i.e.
correction has the same magnitude as the error, but with opposite sign).
2.7 Permissible Variation (Tolerance)-The allowable error in the value of the indicated quantity expressed in terms of
percentage of error.
2.8 Capacity Range-The load range or ranges for which the testing machine is designed, (some testing machines have
more than one capacity range).
2.9 Loading Range-The range of indicated loads for each capacity range for which the testing machine gives results
within the permissible variations specified.
2.10 Proving Levers-Devices with known mechanical properties, for applying axial loads to the testing machine by
means of standard weights.
2.11 Elastic Proving Device-A device used for load verification of testing machines. It consists of an elastic member
or members to which loads may be applied, combined with a mechanism or device for indicating the magnitude of
deformation under load.
2.12 Calibration Factor-The load per unit deflection of the elastic member of the elastic proving device. It is
determined from the curve (or Table) attached to the device.

3. Requirements
3.1 The following shall be observed:
3. 1.1 Before a tensile testing machine is verified, it shall be examined to ensure that:
3. 1. 1. 1 The least graduation value of the machine scale shall permit the indicated loads to be read with the specified
accuracy.
3.1.1.2 The pointer indicates the load without lag, independent of the rate of loading specified, and returns to zero
when the machine is unloaded.
3.1.1.3 A free pointer is provided to indicate the maximum load.
3.1.1.4 Provision is made for counter balancing the weight of grips, test pieces, elastic proving devices, etc.
3.1.2 For each loading range, verify the testing machine at maximum and minimum loads and at three other test loads,
at least, approximately equally spaced on the graduated scale. The difference between any two successive test loads shall
not exceed one third of the difference between the maximum and minimum test loads.
3.1.3 If it is required to verify the lower limit of a loading range when the lower limit is less than 10 percent of the
capacity range, apply five approximately equal test loads, none of which shall differ from the smallest one by more than 5
percent.
3.1.4 All test loads shall be applied so that the resultant load is as nearly along the loading axis of the testing machine
as possible.
3.1.5 For hydraulic tensile testing machines, the position of the ram shall be changed for each series of tests if
practicable.
Table of Contents
3.1.6 The machine to be verified shall be in its normal operating condition with all attachments and recording
mechanisms in operation.

4. Verification Methods
4.1 Verification by Standard Weights
4.1.1 Verification by standard weights is the most accurate method, but it is not usually used for loads greater than 10
kN (1 ton f), and it is not applicable to horizontal testing machines.
4.1.2 Standard Weights
4.1.2.1 Standard weights used for verification tests shall be masses of suitable design and finish which have been
adjusted and certified to ensure that they are correct to within ±0.02 percent of their nominal value. Ten-kg weights are
usually convenient for use. Weights certified within less than five years shall be used.
4.1.3 Procedure
4.1.3.1 Place standard weights equal to the lowest test load on a suitable support suspended from the cross-head of the
machine in place of the test piece, so that the centre of gravity of the resulting load shall lie on the loading axis of the
machine.
4.1.3.2 Add weights in increments to obtain the test loads required for verification, as in 3.1.3. For each test load
applied, record the applied load and the corresponding indicated load (reading of the graduated scale of the machine).
4.1.3.3 Repeat the step in 4.1.3.2 by removing the weights in the same increments to obtain the testing loads in a
descending order.
4.2 Verification by Proving Levers.
4.2.1 This method involves the use of a pair of standardized proving levers together with standard weights for the
verification of mainly vertical testing machines up to 250 kN (25 ton f). (Note 1).

Note 1: The use of proving levers on horizontal testing machines involves the use of bellcrank levers. Such levers require
special methods of determination of lever ratio.
4.2. 1.1 Proving Levers-The common arrangement of proving levers is shown in Fig. I where the two levers rest on
supports on the platform of the testing machine. The supports shall move easily in a horizontal direction, which ensures that
the forces at each of the knife edges or other bearings, shall be very nearly vertical. The inner knife edges in each lever shall
bear against a suitable block in the cross-head of the testing machine. A weight hanger is suspended from each of the outer
knife edges. Proving levers and their associated weights shall be periodically calibrated at intervals not exceeding two years
or prior to any repair or adjustment. Standard weights used shall be correct to within ±O.02 percent of their nominal value.
4.2.1.2 The load applied on the testing machine by the standard weights is the load exerted by the standard weights
multiplied by the lever ratio m/n Fig. I (Note 2).

Note 2: In testing machines having a hydraulic support where the load during a test is pressing upward against the
cross-head instead of downward to the platform, the lever ratio is (m-n)/n.
4.2.2 Procedure Conduct the test by applying loads in increments, first in increasing order to the maximum load, then
in decreasing order from the maximum to the minimum load as follows:
4.2.2.1 Place the proving levers in the testing machine to be verified so that the resultant load line coincides with the
vertical line through the centre of the platform.
4.2.2.2 Balance the testing machine at zero reading with the levers in place and the weight hanger empty.
4.2.2.3 Apply standard weights in increments, half an increment on each tray. Place the weights symmetrically on the
trays with the centre of gravity of the whole weights (test load) as nearly over the centre of the tray as possible.
4.2.2.4 Record the applied load, and the indicated load for each test load applied.
4.2.2.5 Before adding or subtracting weights to obtain subsequent test loads, reset levers as near to a horizontal
position as is feasible by means of the movable head of the testing machine.
4.3 Verification by Elastic Proving Devices-This method of verification involves measurement of the elastic strain or
deflection under test load of an elastic proving device. Elastic proving devices shall be calibrated at intervals not exceeding
two years.
4.3.1 Elastic Proving Devices-Proving devices shall be supported and loaded in the testing machine, in accordance
with the instructions for use of these devices, taking care that devices are not subjected, in use, to loads in excess of their
maximum rated capacity. The true loads can be calculated from the product of the respective deflections and the calibration
factor (2.11). Proving devices shall be of such a design that they permit axial application of load, either in tension or in
compression, or both. The most generally used types of elastic proving devices are as follows:
4.3.1.1 "Steel proving bar" (solid or hollow) together with an attached strainometer is suitable principally for use in
tension for the verification of large capacity testing machines up to 2000 kN (200 ton f).
Table of Contents
4.3.1.2 "Proving ring" is used either in tension or in compression, and is made to operate in either vertical or horizontal
positions. It is used for the verification of large capacity testing machines up to 2000 kN (200 ton f). Fig. 2 shows a proving
ring while it is used for the verification of a vertical testing machine.
4.3.1.3 In order to obtain the reading under load, the central reed is set vibrating. While the reed is vibrating, the
micrometer head is rotated slowly and carefully until a very faint buzzing is produced as the micrometer tip just touches the
weight at the end of the reed. The reed should not be suddenly stopped by the contact, rather it should continue to vibrate
for two or three seconds after the buzzing starts then take the reading of the micrometer. Repeat this operation several times
to obtain the average of readings.
4.3.1.4 Standardizing Box-Standardizing boxes are used in compression for the verification of testing machines of
capacities up to 500 kN (50 ton f). The general construction of the standardizing box is shown in Fig. 3.
4.3.1.5 If the hollow cylinder (which is filled with mercury) is subjected to a purely axial compression, its volume shall
decrease forcing an amount of mercury, equal to the decrease in volume, into the capillary tube and then into the glass bulb.
Before the test is carried out, the micrometer is adjusted at zero load to bring the mercury in the capillary to a calibrated
mark. After the load is applied, the micrometer is turned to bring the mercury back to the calibrated line. Thus, the move-
ment of the micrometer screw (i.e. the difference between the micrometer reading under load and at no-load) is the measure
of decrease in volume of the cylinder and therefore, is proportional to the load. Each box shall be calibrated by the makers
with dead-weight loading.
4.3.2 Procedure
4.3.2.1 Allow the elastic proving device to remain on the platform of the testing machine a sufficient length of time
before verification test, so that the device and the machine become very nearly of the same temperature.
4.3.2.2 Immediately before test, preload the device to the maximum test load, then unload the device.
4.3.2.3 Place the proving device in the machine so that its center line coincides with the loading axis of the machine. If
proving devices are used in multiple, such as standardizing boxes, to provide a convenient means of measuring greater
loads, they shall be arranged so that the resultant applied load shall be along the loading axis of the machine.
4.3.2.4 Balance the machine with no load on the proving device and take a zero reading of the device.
4.3.2.5 Apply test loads in increasing order by adding suitable increments until the max. load is reached, and record the
indicated load of the testing machine and the applied load computed from the readings of the elastic device.
4.3.2.6 Continue the test, applying test loads in diminishing order by subtracting suitable increments till zero load.
Record the results as in 4.3.2.5.

5. Calculations and Results

5.1 Calculations
5.1.1 Calculate the average values of the indicated loads for each test load, to obtain their mean indicated load.
5.1.2 Calculate the load percentage error for each test load as follows:

Percentage error = Fi - F X 100

F
where:
F = test load
Fi = mean indicated load.

5.2 Basis of Verification

5.2.1 The percentage error for loads within the loading range of the testing machine shall not exceed ±1%. (The
loading range within which the testing machine can be used, shall be defined from the permissable tolerance)
5.2.2 In establishing the lower limit of a loading range, where the lower limit is less than 10 percent of the capacity
range (where five applications of load are required as in 3.4), the algebraic difference between the highest and lowest
percentage of error shall not exceed 1. (This means that the errors for these five readings shall not be only less than 1.0 per
cent, but also no two errors shall differ by more than 1.0 percent. Thus if the minimum error in this series is -1.0 percent, the
maximum error shall not exceed +0.0 percent, and if the minimum error is -0.5 percent, the maximum error shall not exceed
+0.5 percent, etc.).
5.2.3 In no case shall the loading range be stated as including loads below the value which is 100 times the smallest
change of load which can be estimated on the load indicating device of the testing machine. (This means that if estimations
of load can be made to 1/10 graduation division, the loading range could not extend downward to a load less than that cor-
responding to 10 graduation divisions).
5.2.4 In no case shall the loading range be stated as including loads outside the range of the loads applied during the
verification test.
5.3 Report
5.3.1 The test report shall include the following data:
Table of Contents
5.3. 1.1 The verification method used.
5.3.1.2 Manufacturer's name and serial numbers of all proving devices employed in carrying out the verification.
5.3.1.3 Calibration method, name of calibrator and date of calibrating devices used in verification of the testing
machine.
5.3.1.4 The loading range of the proving device.
5.3.1.5 The loading range of the testing machine, based upon the verification test.

6. References
6.1 Main Reference
6.1.1 International Standard ISO/R 147/1960 "Load Calibration of Testing Machines for Tensile Testing of Steel."
6.2 Other References
6.2.1 ASTM E4-72/1978 "Standard Methods of Verification of Testing Machines."
6.2.2 British Standard BS 1610/1964 "Methods for the Load Verification of Tensile Testing Machines."
6.2.3 Indian Standard IS 1828/1975 "Method for Load Verification of Tensile Testing Machines."
6.2.4 Iraqi Standard IOS 46/1970 "Methods for Load Verification of Testing Machines."
6.2.5 Egyptian Standard ES 1128/1972 "Load Calibration of Testing Machines for Tensile Testing of Steel."
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

November 1998

PART ONE
GENERAL
Table of Contents

PART ONE: GENERAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1.01 - ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS OF TERMS ........................ 1

1.01.1 ABBREVIATIONS ................................................................................. 1
1.01.2 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................... 2
1.01.3 FORMAT AND REFERENCES ........................................................... 14
1.01.3.1 Part........................................................................................ 14
1.01.3.2 Section .................................................................................. 14
1.01.3.3 Subsection ............................................................................ 14
1.01.3.4 Paragraph ............................................................................. 15
1.01.3.5 Subparagraph ....................................................................... 15
1.01.3.6 References ............................................................................ 15
1.01.4 MEANINGS OF "SHALL," "SHOULD" AND "MAY"............................. 15

SECTION 1.02 - SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................ 16

1.02.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT .................................................................... 16
1.02.2 ADDITIONAL PLANS.......................................................................... 16
1.02.3 SPECIAL WORK................................................................................. 16
1.02.4 ADDITIONS, DELETIONS AND REVISIONS IN THE WORK ............ 16
1.02.4.1 Authorization for Variations and Adjustments ....................... 17
1.02.4.1.1 Directive ................................................................. 17
1.02.4.1.2 Change Order ......................................................... 17
1.02.4.1.3 Supplemental Agreement ....................................... 17
1.02.4.1.4 Force Account ........................................................ 18
1.02.4.2 Materially Changed Work ...................................................... 18
1.02.4.2.1 Character of the Work ............................................ 18
1.02.4.2.2 Amount of Increase or Decrease ............................ 18
1.02.4.3 Value Engineering ................................................................. 18
1.02.4.3.1 Intent ..................................................................... 18
1.02.4.3.2 Proposal by Contractor ........................................... 18
1.02.4.3.3 Review and Approval.............................................. 19
1.02.4.3.4 Contract Modifications and Payment ...................... 19
1.02.4.3.5 Contract Time ......................................................... 20
1.02.5 CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE OF DETOURS ................... 20
1.02.6 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF STRUCTURES AND
OBSTRUCTIONS................................................................................ 20
1.02.7 RIGHTS IN AND USE OF MATERIALS FOUND ON THE WORK ..... 21
1.02.8 FLOODING ......................................................................................... 21
1.02.9 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY ..................................................................... 21
1.02.10 WATER SUPPLY .............................................................................. 21
1.02.11 OTHER CONTRACTORS................................................................. 21
1.02.12 CONSTRUCTION RECORDS .......................................................... 21
1.02.13 FINAL CLEAN UP ............................................................................. 22
1.02.14 FINAL CERTIFICATE ....................................................................... 22
Table of Contents

SECTION 1.03 - CONTROL OF WORK ................................................................... 23

1.03.1 AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER ..................................................... 23
1.03.2 PLANS AND WORKING DRAWINGS ................................................ 23
1.03.3 CONFORMITY WITH THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ............. 24
1.03.4 COORDINATION OF PLANS, GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND
SPECIAL ............................................................................................. 24
1.03.5 SILENCE OF SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................ 24
1.03.6 COOPERATION OF CONTRACTOR ................................................. 24
1.03.7 COOPERATION WITH UTILITIES...................................................... 25
1.03.8 CONSTRUCTION STAKES, LINES AND GRADES ........................... 25
1.03.9 DUTIES OF THE INSPECTOR ........................................................... 26
1.03.10 INSPECTION OF WORK .................................................................. 26
1.03.11 TEMPLATES AND STRAIGHTEDGES ............................................ 27
1.03.12 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AND UNAUTHORIZED WORK... 27
1.03.13 LOAD RESTRICTIONS .................................................................... 28
1.03.14 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE WORKS DURING
CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 29
1.03.15 CLAIMS FOR ADJUSTMENTS AND DISPUTES ............................. 29
1.03.16 SETTLEMENT OF DIFFERENCES .................................................. 30
1.03.17 ACCEPTANCE ................................................................................. 30
1.03.18 SIGN BOARDS ................................................................................. 30
1.03.19 MONUMENTS .................................................................................. 31
1.03.20 WATER WELLS ................................................................................ 31

SECTION 1.04 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS .......................................................... 32

1.04.1 SOURCES OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS .............. 32
1.04.2 LOCAL MATERIAL SOURCES .......................................................... 32
1.04.3 SAMPLING, TESTING AND CITED SPECIFICATIONS ..................... 33
1.04.3.1 Sampling ............................................................................... 33
1.04.3.2 Random Sampling................................................................. 33
1.04.3.2.1 Calculators or computers........................................ 33
1.04.3.2.2 A bowl of numbered chips or marbles .................... 33
1.04.3.2.3 Random number dice ............................................. 33
1.04.3.3 Use of Random Numbers to Select a Sample. ...................... 34
1.04.3.4 Application Example.............................................................. 34
1.04.3.5 Quality or Source Approval Samples and Tests. ................... 35
1.04.3.6 Contractor Quality Control Samples and Tests. .................... 35
1.04.3.7 Project Acceptance Samples and Tests................................ 36
1.04.3.8 Split Samples and Tests ....................................................... 36
1.04.3.9 Check Samples and Tests .................................................... 36
1.04.3.10 Contractor Minimum Sampling and Testing Schedule ........ 37
1.04.4 QUALITY CONTROL CHARTS .......................................................... 39
1.04.5 PLANT INSPECTION ......................................................................... 39
1.04.6 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ............................................................... 39
1.04.7 HANDLING MATERIALS .................................................................... 40
1.04.8 UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS .......................................................... 40
1.04.9 MINISTRY-FURNISHED MATERIAL .................................................. 40
Table of Contents

SECTION 1.05 - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC ...41

1.05.1 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED ................................................................. 41
1.05.2 PERMITS, LICENSES AND TAXES ................................................... 41
1.05.3 PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS AND PROCESSES .................. 41
1.05.4 ROYALTIES........................................................................................ 41
1.05.5 RESTORATION OF SURFACES OPENED BY PERMIT ................... 41
1.05.6 RELATIONS BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEE
AND HIS SUBCONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES.................................. 42
1.05.7 INSURANCE....................................................................................... 42
1.05.8 SAFETY AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION REQUIREMENTS ............ 42
1.05.9 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY ............................................ 43
1.05.10 HANDLING TRAFFIC THROUGH WORK ZONES ........................... 43
1.05.11 FOSSILS, ANTIQUITIES, ETC. ........................................................ 44
1.05.12 ALCOHOLIC DRINKS, NARCOTICS, ARMS AND AMMUNITION AND
DISCIPLINE...................................................................................... 44
1.05.13 USE OF EXPLOSIVES ..................................................................... 44
1.05.14 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY AND
LANDSCAPE.............................................................................. . . . 45
1.05.15 FURNISHING RIGHTS-OF-WAY. … … … … … … … … … …4 5
1.05.16 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS .................................... 45
1.05.17 OPENING OF SECTIONS TO TRAFFIC .......................................... 45
1.05.18 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE WORK .................. 46
1.05.19 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY PROPERTY AND
SERVICES .................................................................................... 47
1.05.20 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS .............................. 48
1.05.21 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION................................................... 48
1.05.21.1 General............................................................................. 48
1.05.21.2 Pre-Construction Requirements. ...................................... 48
1.05.21.3 Noise Abatement. ............................................................. 48
1.05.21.4 Bituminous Mixing Plants. ................................................ 48
1.05.21.5 Construction Requirements. ............................................. 49
1.05.21.6 Disposal of Unsuitable Materials. ..................................... 49
1.05.21.7 Water Quality. ................................................................... 50
1.05.21.8 Hazardous Waste Materials. ............................................ 50
1.05.21.9 Fugitive Dust..................................................................... 50
1.05.22 NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS .................................................... 50

SECTION 1.06 - PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS .............................................. 51

1.06.1 SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT........................................................... 51
1.06.2 PROGRAM AND SCHEDULE OF WORK .......................................... 51
1.06.2.1 Contract Time. .................................................................... 51
1.06.2.2 Construction Equipment. .................................................... 51
1.06.2.3 Preconstruction Conference. .............................................. 51
1.06.2.4 Conduct and Coordination. ................................................. 51
1.06.2.5 Preparation Period.............................................................. 52
1.06.2.6 Schedule of Work ............................................................... 53
1.06.2.6.1 General format and purpose of the progress schedule of
work.......................................................................................... 53
1.06.2.6.2 Contractor's NAS Representatives. ............................. 54
Table of Contents

1.06.2.6.3 Preliminary Activity Schedule (PAS). ........................... 55

1.06.2.6.4 Initial CPM Project Schedule (Initial CPM-PS). ............ 56
1.06.2.6.5 CPM-PS Updates and CPM-PS Revisions. ................. 59
1.06.2.6.6 Time Impact Analysis for Proposed Time Extensions. .61
1.06.2.6.7 Responsibility for Completion. ..................................... 64
1.06.2.6.8 Contractors Daily Log. ................................................. 65
1.06.2.6.9 As-Built Progress Documentation. ............................... 66
1.06.3 NIGHT WORK..................................................................................... 66
1.06.4 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN: METHODS AND EQUIPMENT ........ 66
1.06.4.1 Work Force ......................................................................... 66
1.06.4.2 Construction Methods......................................................... 67
1.06.5 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK........................................... 67
1.06.6 DEFECTS AND DEFAULTS ............................................................... 68
1.06.6.1 Removal of Defective Work or Materials ............................ 68
1.06.6.2 Contractor's Failure to Comply with Ministry Orders........... 68
1.06.7 DETERMINATION AND EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME ............ 68
1.06.8 DELAY PENALTY .............................................................................. .69
1.06.9 FORFEITURE OF CONTRACT AND CONDITIONS THEREOF ........ 69
1.06.10 METHOD OF ACTION IN CASE OF FORFEITURE ......................... 70
1.06.11 PAYMENT AFTER FORFEITURE .................................................... 71
1.06.12 URGENT REPAIRS .......................................................................... 71
1.06.13 TERMINATION OF CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY................ 71
1.06.14 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................ 72
1.06.15 PAYMENT......................................................................................... 72
1.06.15.1 Regular Payment Schedule .............................................. 72
1.06.15.2 Special Payment Schedule ............................................... 72
1.06.15.3 Scope of Payment ............................................................ 72

SECTION 1.07 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................ 73

1.07.1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES.................................................... 73
1.07.1.1 General............................................................................... 73
1.07.1.2 Measurements .................................................................... 73
1.07.1.3 Earthwork ........................................................................... 73
1.07.1.4 Gauge Designations ........................................................... 75
1.07.1.5 Weight .............................................................................. 75
1.07.1.6 Volume ............................................................................. 75
1.07.1.7 Bituminous Materials .......................................................... 75
1.07.1.8 Cement ............................................................................... 76
1.07.1.9 Lump Sum .......................................................................... 76
1.07.1.10 Fittings and Accessories................................................... 76
1.07.1.11 Rental Equipment ............................................................. 76
1.07.1.12 Manufactured Items .......................................................... 76
1.07.2 SCOPE OF PAYMENT ...................................................................... 76

1.07.3 COMPENSATION FOR ALTERED QUANTITIES ............................. 76

1.07.4 ELIMINATED ITEMS .......................................................................... 77
1.07.5 EXTRA AND FORCE ACCOUNT WORK .......................................... 77
1.07.6 UNAUTHORIZED WORK ................................................................ 77
1.07.7 SET PRICE ITEMS ........................................................................... 77
Table of Contents

1.07.8 SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENT........................................................ 77

1.07.9 TEMPORARY PAYMENTS ................................................................ 78
1.07.10 PREPARATION OF MONTHLY CERTIFICATES OF WORK; AND THE
MANNER OF PAYMENT THEREOF................................................ 79
1.07.11 FINAL CERTIFICATE ....................................................................... 79

SECTION 1.08 - ACCEPTANCE OF WORK ............................................................ 81

1.08.1 GENERAL........................................................................................... 81
1.08.2 VISUAL INSPECTION ........................................................................ 82
1.08.3 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE .................................................. 82
1.08.4 MEASURED OR TESTED CONFORMANCE ..................................... 83
1.08.5 STATISTICAL EVALUATION OF WORK FOR ACCEPTANCE AND
DETERMINATION OF PAY FACTOR .............................................. 83
1.08.5.1 General............................................................................... 83
1.08.5.1.1 Quality and Quantity Characteristics ...................... 83
1.08.5.1.2 Lot Size .................................................................. 83
1.08.5.1.3 Acceptance Sampling Frequency ................................ 83
1.08.5.1.4 Acceptance Sampling Location ................................... 84
1.08.5.1.5 Test Methods ............................................................... 84
1.08.5.1.6 Specification Limits ...................................................... 84
1.08.5.1.7 Category ...................................................................... 84
1.08.5.2 Acceptance......................................................................... 84
1.08.5.3 Statistical Evaluation .......................................................... 85
1.08.5.4 Pay Factor Determination (Value of the Work) ................... 86
1.08.6 INSPECTION AT THE PLANT ............................................................ 93
1.08.7 PARTIAL AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE ................................................ 93
1.08.7.1 Partial Acceptance.............................................................. 93
1.08.7.2 Final Acceptance ................................................................ 93

SECTION 1.09 - SUPERVISION STAFF FACILITIES.............................................. 94

1.09.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................... 94
1.09.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. 94
1.09.3 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS ............................................................... 95
1.09.3.1 Permanent Buildings .......................................................... 95
1.09.3.1.1 Foundations ................................................................. 95
1.09.3.1.2 Concrete ...................................................................... 95
1.09.3.1.3 Roofs .......................................................................... 95
1.09.3.1.4 Walls ............................................................................ 96
1.09.3.1.5 Floors ........................................................................... 98
1.09.3.1.6 Ceilings ........................................................................ 98
1.09.3.1.7 Fixtures and Fittings .................................................... 99
1.09.3.1.8 Painting ...................................................................... 100
1.09.3.2 Temporary Buildings......................................................... 101
1.09.3.3 Building Keys .................................................................... 101
1.09.3.4 Utilities and Services ........................................................ 101
1.09.3.4.1 Electricity ................................................................... 101
1.09.3.4.2 Water Supply and Plumbing ...................................... 102
1.09.3.4.3 Waste Disposal .......................................................... 103
1.09.3.5 Ancillary Structures........................................................... 105
Table of Contents

1.09.3.5.1 Carport ....................................................................... 105

1.09.3.5.2 Radio Antenna ........................................................... 105
1.09.3.5.3 Perimeter Fence ........................................................ 105
1.09.3.5.4 Clothes Line ............................................................... 105
1.09.3.6 Ground Improvements ...................................................... 105
1.09.3.6.1 Concrete Walks ......................................................... 105
1.09.3.6.2 Gravel Surfaces ......................................................... 105
1.09.3.6.3 Concrete Bumper Posts ............................................. 105
1.09.3.6.4 Grading .................................................................. 105
1.09.4 BUILDING FURNISHINGS ............................................................... 106
1.09.4.1 Dormitory Building ............................................................ 106
1.09.4.1.1 Bathrooms ................................................................. 106
1.09.4.1.2 Bedrooms .................................................................. 106
1.09.4.2 Office Building .................................................................. 106
1.09.4.2.1 Resident Engineer's Office ........................................ 106
1.09.4.2.2 Surveyor's Office........................................................ 106
1.09.4.2.3 Civil Engineer's, Material Engineer's and Bridge Engineer's
Offices ....................................................................... 106
1.09.4.2.4 Administrative Assistant's Office ................................ 106
1.09.4.2.5 Corridor ...................................................................... 106
1.09.4.2.6 Toilet .......................................................................... 106
1.09.4.2.7 Storeroom .................................................................. 106
1.09.4.3 Kitchen and Mess Building ............................................... 107
1.09.4.3.1 Kitchen ....................................................................... 107
1.09.4.3.2 Storeroom .................................................................. 107
1.09.4.3.3 Dining Room .............................................................. 107
1.09.4.3.4 Lounge ....................................................................... 107
1.09.4.3.5 Toilet .......................................................................... 107
1.09.4.4 Service Quarters............................................................... 107
1.09.4.4.1 Bedrooms .................................................................. 107
1.09.4.4.2 Bathroom ................................................................... 107
1.09.4.4.3 Laundry Room ........................................................... 107
1.09.4.5 Family Houses .................................................................. 107
1.09.4.5.1 Bathrooms ................................................................. 107
1.09.4.5.2 Bedrooms .................................................................. 107
1.09.4.5.3 Kitchen ....................................................................... 108
1.09.4.5.4 Living/Dining Room ................................................... 108
1.09.4.5.5 Outside ...................................................................... 108
1.09.4.6 Laboratory ........................................................................ 108
1.09.4.7 General............................................................................. 108
1.09.4.7.1 Fire Equipment .......................................................... 108
1.09.4.7.2 Weather Instruments ................................................. 108
1.09.5 PROJECT LABORATORY................................................................ 109
1.09.5.1 General............................................................................. 109
1.09.5.2 Technicians, Laborers and Drivers ................................... 109
1.09.5.3 Air Conditioning ................................................................ 109
1.09.5.4 Ownership ........................................................................ 109
1.09.5.5 Testing Equipment, Tests and Specifications ................... 109
1.09.5.6 Manuals and Standards.................................................... 109
Table of Contents

1.09.6 SURVEY EQUIPMENT ..................................................................... 109

1.09.7 COMPUTER EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 110
1.09.7.1 Software ........................................................................... 110
1.09.7.2 Hardware .......................................................................... 111
1.09.7.3 Modem Links .................................................................... 111
1.09.8 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE....................................................... 111
1.09.8.1 Maintenance ..................................................................... 111
1.09.8.2 Service ............................................................................. 111
1.09.9 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................ 112
1.09.10 PAYMENT....................................................................................... 112

TABLES
Table 1.04-1 38
Table 1.08-1 Estimated Percent of Work Outside Specification Limits ….87

Table 1.08-2 Pay Factors ….89

Table 1.08-3 Materials Subject to Statistical Based Acceptance ….. …...91

 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

PART ONE: GENERAL

SECTION 1.01 - ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

1.01.1 ABBREVIATIONS. Whenever the following abbreviations are used in the

specifications or on the plans, they are to be construed the same as the
respective expressions represented.

AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials
ACI - American Concrete Institute
ACPA - American Concrete Pavement Association
ADM - Arrow Diagram Method
AGC - American General Contractors of America
AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction
AI - Asphalt Institute
AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS - American Welding Society
BSI - British Standards Institution
BTU - British Thermal Unit
CIRIA - Construction Industry Research and Information Association
CPM-PS - Critical Path Method - Project Schedule
CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
DIN - German National Standards Organization
FHWA - Federal Highway Administration
FSS - Federal Specifications and Standards
HCM - Highway Construction Manual (M.O.C.)
HDM - Highway Design Manual (M.O.C.)
HI - Hydraulic Institute
HMM - Highway Maintenance Manual (M.O.C.)
IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc.
IES - Illuminating Engineering Society
ISSA - International Slurry Seal Association
ISO - International Standards Organization
ITE - Institute of Transportation Engineers
LSL - Lower Specification Limit
MIL - Military Specifications
MOC - Ministry of Communications
MRDMM - Materials and Research Department, Materials Manual (MOC)
MRDTM - Materials and Research Department, Standard Method of Test
MUTCD - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
1
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

NIST - National Institute of Standards and Technology
PAS - Preliminary Activity Schedule
PCA - Portland Cement Association
PCI - Prestressed Concrete Institute
PS&E - Plans, Specifications and Estimate
PTI - Post-Tensioning Institute
SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
SI - International System of Units
SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council
USL - Upper Specification Limit
USC - United States Code
VDE - Verband Deutscher Electotechiker, e.V.

1.01.2 DEFINITIONS. Whenever in the specifications or in other Contract

Documents the following terms or pronouns in place of them are used, the intent and
meaning shall be interpreted as follows:

Admixture (additive) - A substance added to a mixture to impart a specific

characteristic, such as pozzolith in concrete, antistripping agents in bituminous mixes,
calcium chloride or sodium chloride to clay, etc.

Addendum - A written amendment or revision to the Contract Documents or plans

issued to bidders subsequent to the date of advertisement and prior to the final date
and time for submission of Tenders indicated in the "Instructions to Tenderer."

Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) - The level of Lot percent defective at/or below
which the work is considered to be satisfactory.

Acceptance Program - All factors comprise the agency's determination of the

degree of compliance with contract requirements and value of a product. These factors
include agency or agency supervised sampling, testing, measuring, and inspection.
These factors should also include validated results of contractor sampling and testing.

Advertisement - The public announcement, inviting Tenders for the Work.

Aggregates - Mineral particles consisting of sand, crushed or uncrushed gravel,

crushed stone or similar materials, usually of controlled gradation, ranging in size from
seventy-five (75) millimeters to seventy-five thousandths (0.075) millimeter. Coarse
aggregates are those retained on the 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve; fine aggregates are
those passing the 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve.

Air Entraining Agent - An admixture used in Portland cement concrete to entrain

air in the mixture.

As-Built Plans - Plans prepared at the site during or immediately after construction
representing the exact executed work.

2
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Asphalt - A dark brown to black cementitious material; solid, semi-solid, or liquid

in consistency; in which the predominating constituents are bitumens which occur in
nature as such or which are obtained as residue in refining petroleum.

Asphalt Cement - A fluxed or unfluxed asphalt especially prepared as to quality

and consistency for direct use in bituminous pavements.

Asphalt Concrete - See Bituminous Concrete.

Asphalt Emulsion - See Emulsified Asphalt.

Asphaltic Material - See Bituminous Material.

Award - The official acceptance by the Ministry of the Tender submitted by the
Bidder selected to be the Contractor.

Backfill - Material used to replace, or the act of replacing, material removed during
construction; also denotes material placed, or the act of placing, material adjacent to
structures.

Backslope - In cuts, the slope from the bottom of the ditch to the top of cut.

Balance - A highway or section of highway where the available excavation material

is equal to the necessary volume of embankment without borrow or waste.

Balled - Plant transplanted with roots in a ball of earth.

Bareroot - Plant transplanted with no soil on the roots.

Base Course - The layer or layers, of specified or selected aggregate materials of

designed thickness placed on a subbase or a subgrade to support the remainder of the
pavement structure.

Bedrock - Solid rock of indefinite thickness in its native location.

Bench Mark - A permanent or semi-permanent marker of known coordinates and

elevation relative to a datum plane.

Berm - (1) A raised and elongated area of earth intended to direct the flow of water,
screen headlight glare, or redirect out-of-control vehicles. (2) Embankment widening
to provide lateral support for the roadway.

Bid - See Tender.

Bidder (tenderer) - An individual, firm or corporation submitting a Tender for the

Work.

Bill of Quantities - That portion of the Contract Documents showing all items of
Work as well as estimated quantities and contract unit prices for those items.
3
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Binder - Material used to stabilize or bind together loose soil or aggregates.

Bitumen - See Asphalt Cement.

Bituminous Concrete - A combination of mineral aggregates and asphalt cement,

mixed in a central plant which is usually mixed, laid and compacted while hot.

Bituminous Material - A general term encompassing asphalt cements, cutbacks

and emulsified asphalt.

Bituminous Pavement - A pavement composed predominantly of aggregates

cemented together with bituminous material.

Bituminous Surface Treatment - The application of thin layers of bituminous

material with or without aggregate to an existing road surface.

Bleeding (Asphalt) - The flushing to the pavement surface of excess bituminous

material, caused by heat or the use of excessive quantities of bituminous material.

Bleeding (Concrete) - The flow of water to the surface of freshly placed concrete
or mortar.

Borrow - That material necessary to construct the embankment which is not

available from the staked excavation.

Boulder - A rock fragment, usually rounded by weathering or abrasion, which will

be retained on a seventy-five (75) millimeter sieve.

Breakaway (Yielding) Supports - A support for a roadside device which yields or

collapses readily when struck by a vehicle.

Bridge - A structure exceeding six (6) meters clear span measured along the
centerline of the roadway, which carries traffic over a watercourse, other roadways or
opening.

Buyer's Risk - The probability that an acceptance plan will erroneously accept a
Lot that is truly rejectable.

Calendar Day - Every day shown on the Hegira calendar.

Calibrate - (1) To determine settings of the plant which will provide correct
proportions of the components of plant-mixed materials. (2) To compare with a
standard or check the graduations of a gauge or other measuring devices.

Camber - A slight arch designed or built into a structure to compensate for the
natural deflection after loading.

4
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Centerline - The defined and surveyed line shown on the plans from which the
highway construction is controlled.

Certificate of Guarantee - A signed statement by a person having legal authority

to bind a company or supplier to its product. Such certificate shall state that the
material specifications and test results are in compliance with the specified
requirements of the pertinent AASHTO, ASTM and/or other designations.

Compaction - The active or mechanical consolidation of a mass by rolling, tamping

or other similar means.

Consecutive Days - Two or more calendar days, one following the other.

Consolidation - The densification of a mass by compaction, vibration, passive

loading or other means.

Contract and Contract Documents - The written agreement between the MOC
and the Contractor setting forth the obligations of the parties thereunder, including, but
not limited to, the performance of the Work, the furnishing of labor and materials, and
the basis of payment. The contract documents include the invitation for tenders,
instructions to tenderers, the tender, notice of award, form of contract, contract bond,
general conditions and special conditions, general specifications, supplemental
specifications, special specifications, bill of quantities, plans, addenda, directives,
change orders, and supplemental agreements that are required to complete the Work,
all of which constitute one instrument.

Contract Item (Item of Work) - A specifically described unit of Work for which a
unit price is provided in the Contract Documents.

Change Order - A written order to the Contractor, approved by the Ministry, issued
by the Engineer authorizing additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. The Change
Order will set forth force account or negotiated unit prices, and any adjustments in the
contract price and/or contract time as appropriate to the variation in the Work.

Contract Time - The time allowed for completion of the contract, including
authorized time extensions. When a calendar date of completion is shown in the
Tender, in lieu of the number of working or calendar days, the contract time is the
period between the Process Verbal for Handing Over the Site to the date of completion.

Contractor - The individual, firm or corporation contracting with the MOC for
performance of the Work described in the Contract Documents.

Contractor Process Quality Control - All contractor activities that have to do with
making the quality of a system what it should be, including sampling and testing.

The Quality Control activities include, but are not limited to, all operational
techniques and activities that are used to fulfill the contract requirements.

5
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Creep - The slow movement of a material under stress usually imperceptible except
to the observations of long duration.

Cross Section - A transverse cutaway view of a highway, roadway or structure

showing horizontal and vertical dimensions, elevations, and/or other details.

Cross Slope - The transverse slope of the surface of the traveled way expressed
as the vertical rise or fall as a percent of the horizontal distance.

Crown - (1) The high point at the center of the cross section of the surface of the
traveled way, usually on a tangent alignment. (2) The condition where there is uniform
cross slope down and away from the center of the traveled way toward both sides.

Cutback Asphalt - A mixture of asphalt cement and a petroleum diluent blended

to provide viscosity suitable for spraying at relatively low temperatures.

Cut Section - A section of roadway where the bottom of the excavation or

subgrade is lower in elevation than the original ground.

Date - Day, month and year reckoned according to the Hegira calendar and the
applicable date corresponding to the Gregorian calendar.

Deck - The surface layer of concrete and reinforcing steel on a bridge.

Dense Graded - A well graded aggregate with sufficient fine material to nearly fill
all voids.

Density - The mass per unit volume of material, usually expressed in kilograms per
cubic meter or grams per unit centimeter.

Design Mix - See Job Mix.

Design Load - The maximum anticipated loads that must be supported by a

structure.

Detour - (1) A temporary rerouting of traffic. (2) The route of the temporary
rerouting.

Directive - An official written communication, having contractual status, from the

Engineer to the Contractor with respect to any or all phases of the Contract and Work
including, but not limited to, progress, approvals, rejections, procedures, methods,
safety, etc.

Divided Highway - A highway with separated roadways for traffic in opposite

directions.

Drawings - See Plans.

Dust Palliative - Any material used to control dust.

6
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Elevation - Height above sea level or other datum.

Embankment - A raised earth structure on which the roadway pavement structure

is placed.

Embankment Foundation - The original ground on which any embankment is

constructed.

Emulsified Asphalt - A mixture of processed asphalt cement and water mixed with
an emulsifying agent.

Engineer - The duly authorized representative of the Ministry at the project site,
acting directly or through his duly authorized representatives, who is responsible for
engineering supervision of the Work.

Equipment - All machinery and equipment, together with the necessary supplies
for upkeep and maintenance; also tools and apparatus necessary for the proper
construction and acceptable completion of the Work.

Extra Work - Additional or new work not provided for in the Contract as awarded
but subsequently ordered by the Ministry for the satisfactory completion of a project
within its intended scope.

Feasts and Holidays - All recognized feasts, holidays, days of rest, and other
religious customs officially recognized by the Kingdom.

Fill Section - A section of roadway where the subgrade is higher in elevation than
the original ground.

Fill Slope - In fills, the slope from the top of the subgrade to the toe or bottom of fill.

Final Handover - The final acceptance of the Work, by the MOC, as authorized by
the General Conditions of the Contract.

Fines - (1) Aggregates - Portion finer than the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.
(2) Soils - Portion of a soil finer than a 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.

Flushing - See Bleeding (Asphalt).

Force Majeure - An unexpected and disruptive event which may operate to excuse
a party from a contract or part thereof.

Foreslope - The slope from the top of the surfaced shoulder to the top of the
subgrade, or the bottom of the ditch in cuts.

Free Water - Water in aggregate or soil in excess of that absorbed into the surface
of the particles.

7
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Gap-Graded - An aggregate gradation of predominantly two sizes with little or no

in-between sizes.

Grade - (1) The profile of the center of the roadway, or its rate of ascent or descent.
(2) To shape or reshape an earth road by means of cutting or filling. (3) To arrange
according to size. (4) Elevation.
Grade Line, Grade Profile - See Profile Grade.

Grading - (1) Construction of the earthwork portion of the highway. (2) Planing or
smoothing the surface of various parts of the road by means of a motor grader.

Gravel - Aggregate deposited naturally by water.

Ground Water - Free water contained in the zone below the water table.

Grout - Mortar, composed of sand, cement, and water of such consistency that it
can easily be placed by pouring or pumping if necessary.

Guarantor - A bank approved by the Government of Saudi Arabia, which provides

the guarantees called for in the Contract Documents.

Guardrail - A protective cable or rail device placed along the roadway edge for the
purpose of redirecting vehicles which have left the roadway at a point of hazard.

Hardpan - Layer of extremely dense soil.

Headwall - A wall, at the end of a culvert to prevent earth from spilling into the
channel.

Highway, Street or Road - General terms denoting a public way for purposes of
vehicular travel.

Impact Attenuator - A device placed in front of a fixed object in or near the

roadway for the purpose of stopping a vehicle at a controlled rate.

Inspector - The Engineer's authorized representative assigned to make detailed

inspections of the Work.

Item of Work - See Contract Item.

Job-Mix (job-mix formula, design-mix) - The exact proportions of all components

of a bituminous or other type mix, determined by laboratory tests.

Kingdom - the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.

Laboratory - The field testing facility or other testing facility which may be
designated by the Engineer.

Ledge Rock - A layer of stone in a quarry.

8
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Leveling Course - The layer of material placed on an existing surface to eliminate

irregularities prior to placing an overlaying course.

Limit (USL, LSL) - Upper and lower specification limits outside of which the
material or work is defined to be defective.
Liquid Asphalt - Cutbacks or emulsified asphalt.

Lot - A discrete quantity of material or work to which an acceptance procedure is

applied.

Median - The portion of a divided highway separating the traveled ways for traffic
in opposite directions.

Median Barrier - A longitudinal system used to prevent a vehicle from crossing the
median of a divided highway.

Ministry - The Ministry of Communications of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.

Minor Concrete - Nonstructural concrete as designated on the plans or in the

specifications.

Moisture Content - The percentage, by weight, of water contained in soil or other

material, usually based on the dry weight.

Muck - An organic or saturated soil of very soil or liquid consistency.

Open-graded Aggregate - A graded aggregate, containing little or no fines, with

a high percentage of aggregate voids.

Overburden - The mass of soil which overlies a source of rock, gravel or other road
material. This material is removed before the materials are quarried to avoid
contamination.

Pavement Structure - The combination of subbase, base course, and surface

courses placed on a subgrade to support the traffic load and distribute it to the roadbed.

Percent Defective - Percentage of the Lot falling outside specification limits, may
refer to either the population value or the sample estimate of the population value.

Performance Guarantee - The approved form of security, executed by the

Contractor and his Surety or Sureties, guaranteeing complete execution of the Contract
and all supplemental agreements pertaining thereto, and the payment of, all legal debts
pertaining to the construction of the project.

Period of Maintenance - Period of maintenance shall mean the period of

Contractor maintenance named in the Contract, calculated from the date of completion
of the Work as certified by the Provisional Handover Committee.

9
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Pit - A natural deposit of gravel or other type of soil which has been, or may be,
excavated.

Plans (Drawings) - The approved plans (drawings), profiles, typical cross sections,
working drawings, and supplemental drawings, or exact reproductions thereof, which
show the location, character, dimensions, and details of the Work.

Plating - The covering or confining of unstable fills with a suitable, stable material.

Point - To fill the outside part of a joint in masonry with mortar.

Preconstruction Conference - A conference arranged by the Engineer between

himself and representatives of the Contractor before Work begins to discuss schedule
of progress and contract administration requirements.

Prime Coat - The application of a low viscosity liquid asphalt to an absorbent

surface, preparatory to any subsequent treatment, for the purpose of hardening or
toughening the surface and providing a transition between it and the succeeding
bituminous construction.

Process-Verbal - Any written statement of record concerning the Works of the

Contract signed by the Engineer and the Contractor.

Producer's Risk - The probability that an acceptance plan will erroneously reject
a Lot that is truly acceptable.

Profile Grade - The trace of a vertical plane intersecting the top surface of the
proposed wearing surface, along a defined point on the roadway typical section or the
longitudinal centerline of the roadway.

Program of Work - A work schedule prepared and submitted by the Contractor to

the Engineer for his approval prior to the commencement of the Work. The Program
shall show the equipment, the order of procedure, and methods which the Contractor
proposes to use to carry out the Work.

Project - An undertaking to construct a particular portion of a highway.

Provisional Handover - A conditional acceptance, by the Ministry, of a partial or

total completion of the Work as authorized in the General Conditions of the Contract.

Quality Assurance - All those planned and systematic actions necessary to

provide adequate confidence that a product or service will satisfy given requirements
for quality.

Quality Assurance Procedures - Specific sampling, testing, measuring, and

evaluation procedures for determining the degree of conformance to the quality and
quantity requirements of the Specifications.

Quality Index (Q) - A statistic computed when applying the variables acceptance
10
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

procedures to estimate the level of quality actually achieved.

Random - Without bias or regularity.

Random Sample - A sample selected in such a way that every element of the
population has an equally likely opportunity to be included in the sample.
Ravelling - The progressive loosening of the aggregate in the surface course of a
road.

Rejectable Quality Level (RQL) - The level of Lot percent defective at/or above
which the work is considered to be unacceptable.

Right-of-Way - The publicly owned land, acquired for and devoted to the highway
and its appurtenances.

Riprap - A protective covering of graded boulders, pieces of concrete or stone, with

or without mortar, to prevent erosion.

Road (Highway) - A general term denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular
travel, including the entire area within the right-of-way.

Roadbed - The graded portion of a road or highway, usually considered as the area
between the intersection of top and side slopes, upon which the base course, surface
course, shoulders, and median are constructed. The top of the subgrade.

Roadway - (1) The portion of a highway, including shoulders, for vehicular use; a
divided highway has two or more roadways. (2) During construction the portion of a
highway within the limits of construction.

Screed - A mechanical device to strike off, smooth and (at least partially)
consolidate a newly placed concrete or bituminous surface.

Segregation - Separation of portions of a mixture from the mass or the localization

of sizes or portions within a mixture or mass.

Shoulder - The portion of roadway contiguous with the traveled way for
accommodation of stopped vehicles for emergency use, and for lateral support of base
and surface courses.

Silt - Material passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve that is non-plastic or very
slightly plastic, and exhibits little or no strength when air dried.

Site - The lands and other places provided by the Ministry for the execution of the
Work.

Site Engineer - The on-site representative of the Contractor duly authorized to

receive and execute all instructions of the Engineer and to supervise and direct all of
the Contractor's construction operations in all phases of the Work.

11
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Special Specifications - Additions and revisions to the General and Supplemental

Specifications covering conditions peculiar to an individual project.

Specifications - The formal directions, provisions, and requirements which outline

the Work to be done, the way in which it is to be done, the character of materials and
mixtures to be used, or the results to be obtained.
Specified Completion Date - The calendar date on which the Work is specified to
be completed.

Spur Dike - An earth embankment projecting into the flood plain to guide water flow
into a bridge opening or culvert. Dikes may be armored by riprap to protect them from
erosion.

Station - (1) A measure of distance used for highways and railroads. In Saudi
Arabia a station is equal to one (1) kilometer. (2) A precise location along a survey line.

Statistically Based Acceptance - The analysis of all test results collectively and
statistically by quality level analysis to determine the total estimated percent defective
for acceptance.

Stone - Rock material produced from bedrock, i.e., non-gravel material.

Street or Highway - A public way that is open to the movement of vehicular traffic,
pedestrians, and transportation by other means or conveyances. The entire width
between the right-of-way lines of any way open to public traffic.

Stripped - Peeled off, as asphalt from aggregate or forms from concrete.

Subcontractor - An individual, firm or corporation to whom the Contractor sublets

part of the Work.

Subbase - The layer or layers of specified or selected aggregate materials of

designed thickness placed on a subgrade to support a base course.

Subgrade - A defined layer thickness of select material (normally thirty (30)

centimeters) on which the pavement structure, including shoulders, is constructed.

Substructure - All of that part of the structure below the bearings of simple and
continuous spans, skewbacks of arches and tops of footings of rigid frames, together
with the backwalls, wingwalls and wing protection railings.

Superelevation - The increasing of the cross slope on a curve to partially offset the
centrifugal force generated when a vehicle rounds the curve.

Superstructure - The entire structure except for the substructure.

Supplemental Agreement - A written proposal and agreement, executed by the

Ministry and the Contractor, covering Work not included in the original contract. Prices

12
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

for such Work, and extension of contract time, will be determined by good faith
negotiation.

Supplemental Specifications - Additions and revisions to the General

Specifications that are adopted subsequent to issuances of the printed book.

Surety - The corporation, partnership, or individual other than the Contractor,

executing a Tender Guarantee furnished by the Contractor.

Surface Treatment - See Bituminous Surface Treatment.

Tack Coat - An application of bituminous material to an existing surface to provide

bond with the succeeding bituminous course.

Tender - The bid or offer made by a bidder, on the prescribed form, to perform the
Work and to furnish the labor and materials at the prices quoted.

Tender Documents - The approved form on which the Ministry requires Tenders
to be prepared and submitted for the Work.

Tender Guarantee - The security furnished with a Tender to guarantee that the
bidder will enter into contract if his Tender is accepted, and includes the specified forms
on which the Contractor shall furnish required information as to his ability to perform
and finance the Work.

Tenderer - See Bidder.

Toe of Slope - The intersection of a roadway embankment side slope with the
original ground surface.

Topsoil - Naturally occurring surface soil, usually containing organic matter.

Traffic Control Devices - Signs, signals, markings, and devices placed, erected,
or authorized by proper authority having jurisdiction, for the purpose of regulating,
warning, or guiding traffic.

Traffic Lane - That portion of the traveled way for the movement of a single line of
vehicles.

Traveled Way - The portion of the roadway for the movement of vehicles, exclusive
of shoulders and auxiliary lanes.

Typical Section - A transverse section of a proposed highway showing the lateral

slopes, horizontal and vertical dimensions and functional and structural elements of the
highway.

Underdrain - Porous or perforated pipe, or graded aggregate installed under a

roadway or shoulder to provide sub-surface drainage.

13
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Uniformly Graded - Aggregate with a uniform gradation from coarse to fine.

Visual Inspection - Inspection for defects which can be seen.

Wadi - A stream or watercourse that is dry except during periods of rainfall.

Water-Cement Ratio - The ratio of the amount of water, exclusive of that absorbed
by the aggregates, to the amount of cement in a concrete or mortar mixture; preferably
stated as a decimal by mass.

Weephole - A hole through an abutment or retaining wall to relieve hydrostatic

pressure from groundwater.

Well Graded - Aggregate material of varying particle sizes which produce maximum
density when mixed.

Windrow - Material deposited or manipulated into a continuous uniform row along

the roadbed.

Work - The Work shall mean the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and
other incidentals necessary or convenient to the successful completion of the project
and the carrying out of all the duties and obligations imposed by the contract.

Working Day - A working day shall be any day upon which the Contractor can
physically and legally prosecute the Work.

Working Drawings - Stress sheets, shop drawings, erection plans, falsework

plans, framework plans, cofferdam plans, bending diagrams for reinforcing steel, or any
other supplementary plans or similar data which the Contractor is required to submit to
the Engineer for approval.

1.01.3 FORMAT AND REFERENCES.

1.01.3.1 Part. This book of General Specifications is divided into Parts, with
each Part designated by a one digit numerical figure and an upper case alphabetical
title as follows:
PART 2
EARTHWORK

1.01.3.2 Section. Each Part is divided into Sections with each Section
designated by a three digit numerical figure and an upper case alphabetical title as
follows:
Section 2.01
CLEARING AND GRUBBING

1.01.3.3 Subsection. Each Section is divided into Subsections with each

Subsection designated by a four digit numerical figure and an upper case title as
follows:
Subsection 2.01.1 MATERIALS
14
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.01.3.4 Paragraph. Each Subsection may or may not be divided into a series
of subordinate Paragraphs with each Paragraph designated by a five digit numerical
figure and a lower case title as follows:

Paragraph 2.01.1.2 Aggregates

1.01.3.5 Subparagraph. Each paragraph may or may not be further divided

into a series of subordinate subparagraphs designated by a six digit numerical figure
or a combination of six digits and alphabetical letters and a lower case title as follows:

Subparagraph 2.01.1.2.a. Fine Aggregate

Subparagraph 2.01.1.2.1. Fine Aggregate

1.01.3.6 References. The specifications for any Item of Work in the Bill of
Quantities are included in the Section corresponding to the number of that Item of Work.
All provisions of that Section, including corresponding Supplemental Specifications and
Special Specifications, shall be construed as specifications for the Item of Work, except
those provisions clearly inapplicable in the context in which they appear or unless they
are waived or modified by the Supplemental Specifications, Special Specifications,
Notes on the Plans, or by Change Order. In addition, the Plans or Specifications may
contain cross references to other Sections, Subsections, Paragraphs, etc., which shall
likewise be construed as specifications for the Item of Work.

1.01.4 MEANINGS OF "SHALL," "SHOULD" AND "MAY." In these General

Specifications the words "shall," "should" and "may" are used to describe specific
conditions concerning various requirements. To clarify the meanings intended in these
General Specifications by the use of these words, the following definitions apply:

1. SHALL - a mandatory condition. Where certain requirements in the construction

or application are described with the "shall" stipulation, it is mandatory that these
requirements be met.

2. SHOULD - an advisory condition. Where the word "should" is used it is

considered to be advisable usage, recommended but not mandatory.

3. MAY - a permissive condition. No specific requirement for construction or

application is intended.

15
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 1.02 - SCOPE OF WORK

1.02.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT. The intent of the Contract is to provide for the
construction and completion in every detail of the Work described. The Contractor shall
furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation and supplies required to
complete the Work in accordance with the plan, specifications, and terms of the
Contract Documents.

1.02.2 ADDITIONAL PLANS. The Contract plans may be supplemented, from time
to time, by the Engineer, with additional plans to illustrate particular or special parts of
the Work. These additional plans shall be considered as having the same effect as the
contract plans in the control and execution of the Contract. These additional plans will
not change the Work of the Contract but will explain it.

1.02.3 SPECIAL WORK. Special Work refers to that part of the Work which is not
satisfactorily covered by the General Specifications or Supplemental Specifications and
for which Special Specifications have been prepared. Such Special Work shall be
considered a part of the Contract.

1.02.4 ADDITIONS, DELETIONS AND REVISIONS IN THE WORK. The Ministry

reserves the right to make, at any time during the progress of the Work, such increases
or decreases in quantities and such alterations in the details of construction, including
alterations in the grade or alignment of the road or structures or both, as may be found
to be necessary or desirable. Such increases or decreases and alterations shall not
invalidate the Contract nor release the Surety, and the Contractor agrees to accept the
Work as altered, the same as if it had been a part of the original Contract. See Article
7-1 of the Conditions of Contract.

The Engineer will, upon determination of a significant change in plan quantities,

notify the Contractor in writing of the anticipated change. The Contractor shall
acknowledge this notification and perform the altered Work accordingly. Unless such
alterations and increases or decreases materially change the character of the Work to
be performed or the cost thereof, the altered Work shall be paid for at the same contract
unit prices as other parts of the Work. If, however, the character of the Work, or the
contract unit cost(s) thereof are materially changed, an adjustment will be made on
such basis as may have been mutually agreed to by Change Order, or in case no such
basis can be agreed upon in advance, then an adjustment shall be made, either for or
against the Contractor, in such amount as the Ministry may determine to be fair and
equitable. See Article 7-3 of the Conditions of Contract.

No claims shall be made by the Contractor for any loss of anticipated profits
because of any such alteration, or by reason of any variation between the approximate
quantities and the quantities of Work as done.

Payment for Work occasioned by changes or alterations will be made in accordance

with the provisions set forth under Subsection 1.07.3, "Compensation for Altered
Quantities" in these General Specifications.

16
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

If the altered or added Work is of sufficient magnitude as to require additional time

in which to complete the project, such time adjustment may be made in accordance with
the provisions of Section 1.06, "Prosecution and Progress" in these General
Specifications.

Should the Contractor encounter, or the Engineer discover during the progress of
the Work, subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from
those indicated, or unknown physical conditions at the site of an unusual nature,
differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as
inherent in Work of the character provided for in the Contract, the Engineer shall be
promptly notified in writing of such conditions before they are disturbed. The Engineer
will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if he finds they do so materially
differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost of, or the time required for
performance of the Contract, an equitable adjustment will be recommended and, with
the concurrence of the Ministry, the contract will be modified by Change Order or
Supplemental Agreement.

1.02.4.1 Authorization for Variations and Adjustments. Variations or

adjustments to the Work will be authorized by one of the following methods (see Article
7-2 of the Conditions of Contract):

1.02.4.1.1 Directive. There are two types of Directives - written orders

issued to the Contractor by the Engineer. Type I implements the Contract by providing
an order, notification, confirmation, or approval related to prosecution of the Work in the
Contract. Type II authorizes minor additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work for
which the basis of payment has been established in the Bill of Quantities and which do
not increase the total Contract Price or extend the Period of the Contract. Type III
Directives must be approved by the Ministry before they are issued. Type I Directives
may be issued without advance Ministry approval.

1.02.4.1.2 Change Order. A written order, approved by the Ministry,

issued to the Contractor by the Engineer, supplementing the Contract and authorizing
additions, deletions, revisions or material changes in the Work which they are
considered to be within the original scope of the Contract, but which increase the total
Contract Price, extend the Period of the Contract, or include items of Work for which no
basis of payment has been established in the Tender. The Change Order will set forth
all adjustments in the Contract price or unit prices based on negotiations with the
Contractor or cost estimates approved by the Engineer. The Change Order may
authorize some or all of the Work to be performed on a Force Account basis if contract
unit price(s) are deemed by the Engineer to be inappropriate. The Change Order will
also set forth any adjustment in the Period of the Contract as appropriate to the
variation in the Work.

1.02.4.1.3 Supplemental Agreement. A written mutual agreement

between the Contractor and the Ministry modifying the scope of the Contract. The
Supplemental Agreement will set forth any adjustments in the Contract price or unit
prices. The Supplemental Agreement may authorize some or all of the Work to be
performed on a Force Account basis if contract unit price(s) are deemed inappropriate.

17
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

The Supplemental Agreement will also set forth any adjustment in the Period of the
Contract appropriate to the Work authorized.

1.02.4.1.4 Force Account. If the Ministry elects, or if a Supplemental

Agreement between the Ministry and the Contractor cannot be reached, the Ministry
may direct Extra Work to be performed on a force account or day-work basis as
provided in Subsection 1.07.5, "Extra and Force Account Work" in these General
Specifications. See Article 7-4 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.02.4.2 Materially Changed Work. Unless increases and decreases in

quantities and alterations in plans materially change the character of the Work, or the
cost thereof, the altered Work shall be performed as a part of the Contract and will be
paid for at the same contract unit price(s) as for other parts of the Work. The term
"materially change," for purposes of intent under the Contract, shall be construed to
apply only to the following circumstances:

1.02.4.2.1 Character of the Work. When, in the opinion of the Engineer,

the character of any of the Work as altered differs in kind or nature from that involved
or encountered in the original proposed construction.

1.02.4.2.2 Amount of Increase or Decrease. When the total amount of

the increase or decrease exceeds twenty percent (20%) of the total estimated value of
the Contract.

If the character of the Work or the unit costs thereof are "materially
changed" as above defined, an allowance will be made on such basis as may have
been provided by Change Order or Supplemental Agreement in advance of the
performance of the Work involved or, in case no such basis has been previously agreed
upon, an equitable adjustment in the Contract Unit Price will be made.

1.02.4.3 Value Engineering.

1.02.4.3.1 Intent. The intent of value engineering is to provide an

incentive to the Contractor to initiate, develop, and present to the Engineer for
consideration, any cost reduction proposals conceived by him, involving changes in the
drawings, designs, specifications, or other requirements of the contract. These
provisions do not apply unless the proposal submitted is specifically identified by the
Contractor as being presented for consideration as a value engineering proposal.

The cost reduction proposals contemplated are those that would require a
change order modifying the contract and would produce a savings to the Ministry by
providing less costly items or methods than those specified in the contract, and/or
reducing future maintenance costs, without impairing essential functions and
characteristics such as service life, reliability, economy of operation, ease of
maintenance and necessary standardized features.

1.02.4.3.2 Proposal by Contractor. Value engineering proposals will be

processed in the same manner as prescribed for any other alterations of the contract

18
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

that would require a change order or supplemental agreement. As a minimum, the

following information shall be submitted by the Contractor with each proposal:

1. A statement that the proposal is submitted as a value engineering

proposal.

2. A description of the proposal.

3. An itemization of the requirements of the contract which must be

changed and a recommendation of how to make each change.

4. An estimate of the reduction in performance costs that will result from

adoption of the proposal.

5. A prediction of any effects the proposed changes would have on other

costs to the Ministry.

6. A statement of the time by which an agreement for adoption of the

proposal must be executed to obtain the maximum cost reduction during the remainder
of the contract and the reasoning for this time schedule.

7. A statement as to the effect the proposal would have on time for

completion of the project.

1.02.4.3.3 Review and Approval. The Ministry shall not be liable for any
delay in acting upon any proposal submitted. The Contractor may withdraw in whole
or in part, any value engineering proposal not accepted within the period specified in
his proposal. The decision of the Engineer as to the acceptance or rejection of value
engineering proposals shall be final and shall not be subjected to the provisions of
Subsection 1.03.15, "Claims for Adjustments and Disputes." The Contractor will be
notified in writing of the Ministry's decision to accept or reject each value engineering
proposal submitted under the provisions in these General Specifications.

1.02.4.3.4 Contract Modifications and Payment. If a proposal is

accepted, the necessary contract modifications will be effected by execution of a
change order, which will provide for equitable price adjustments giving the Contractor
and the Ministry proportionate shares in net savings resulting therefrom. Unless and
until a proposal is effected by such contract modification, the Contractor shall remain
obligated to perform in accordance with the terms of the existing contract.

The change order effecting the necessary contract modifications shall establish
the net savings agreed upon and shall provide for such adjustment in the contract price
as will divide the net savings equally between the Contractor and the Ministry. All
reasonably incurred costs developing the cost reduction proposal and implementing the
changes, including any increased costs to the Ministry resulting from its application, will
be deducted from the total estimated decrease in the Contractor's cost of performance
to arrive at the net savings. The Ministry reserves the right to include in the agreement
any conditions it deems appropriate for consideration, approval, and implementation of
the cost reduction proposal. The Contractor's forty percent (40%) share of the net
19
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

savings shall constitute full compensation to him for effecting all changes pursuant to
the agreement. Upon acceptance of a cost reduction proposal, any restrictions
imposed by the Contractor on its use or disclosure of the information submitted shall be
void, and the Ministry shall thereafter have the right to use, duplicate, and disclose in
whole or in part any data necessary to utilization of the proposal on this project or other
Ministry projects.

1.02.4.3.5 Contract Time. Any time savings realized by implementation

of value engineering proposals will result in a corresponding adjustment in the contract
completion time.

All time savings from any approved value engineering proposal will be to the
benefit of the Ministry.

1.02.5 CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE OF DETOURS. The Contractor will

be required to establish, construct and maintain temporary detour roads over or through
construction or to build and maintain temporary structures around or in place of bridges
in accordance with Part Nine, "Traffic Control Devices and Work Zones" in these
General Specifications. The Contractor will be required to build and maintain suitable
temporary structures around or over culverts to serve the residents living on or traffic
originating on the section of road under contract. All detour routes shall be signed,
striped, and maintained by the Contractor including traffic control devices as shown in
the Traffic Control Plan for the project and the M.O.C. Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Devices (MUTCD). If the project plans do not detail a Traffic Control Plan (TCP) the
Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer all details of his proposed Traffic
Control Plan including all detours, layouts, geometrics, pavement construction,
drainage, lighting, signing, traffic control devices including pavement marking and
existing marking removal, crashworthy safety barriers according to the M.O.C. Road
Services Department Work Zone Traffic Control Handbook and MUTCD for approval.

Payment for detour construction, maintenance costs, signs, barricades, and other
traffic control devices will be made in accordance with Section 9.02, "Control of Traffic
Through Work Zones" in these General Specifications.

1.02.6 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS.

The Contractor shall remove any and all materials not suitable for use in the Work.
This includes obstructions, fences, existing culverts, bridges, and all other structures
or parts of structures within the highway right-of-way, which are to be replaced or
interfere with the new construction, in accordance with Section 2.02, "Removal of
Structures and Obstructions" in these General Specifications, unless otherwise
specifically provided on the plans or in the Special Specifications. The Contractor shall
also remove and dispose of all foundations, debris, trash, and remains left after the
previous removal by others of vacated dwelling houses or other buildings as detailed
in Section 2.02 "Removal of Structures and Obstructions" in these General
Specifications. Such removal shall be performed at the Contractor's expense and is
considered subsidiary Work included in other items of Work performed, unless a
separate item is included in the Bill of Quantities for this Work.

20
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.02.7 RIGHTS IN AND USE OF MATERIALS FOUND ON THE WORK. The

Contractor, with the approval of the Engineer, may use on the project such stone,
gravel, sand, or other material determined suitable by the Engineer, as may be found
in the authorized excavation and will be paid both for the excavation of such materials
at the corresponding contract unit price and for the pay item for which the excavated
material is used. He shall replace at his own expense with other acceptable material
all of that portion of the excavation material so removed and used which was needed
for use in the embankments, backfills, approaches or otherwise. No charge for the
materials so used will be made against the Contractor.

The Contractor shall not excavate or remove any material from within the right-of-
way which is not within the grading limits, as indicated by the slope and grade lines,
without written authorization from the Engineer.

Unless otherwise provided, the material from any existing old structure may be used
temporarily by the Contractor in the erection of the new structure. Such material shall
not be cut or otherwise damaged except with the approval of the Engineer.

1.02.8 FLOODING. The Contractor bears all costs and expenses for the protection
of the Works which he executes from rains and flooding including the construction of
all temporary diversion banks, sumps, channels, pipes, well points and pumps, etc. The
Contractor is also responsible for insuring that all rain and flood water is discharged at
locations and in such a way as to cause no inconvenience to any third parties.

The Contractor shall submit details to the Engineer of his arrangements for keeping
the working area free from rain and flood water and of the equipment and methods he
proposes to use to dispose of any rain or flood water from the site.

It should be especially noted that much of the construction of the underpasses is

expected to be below the existing water table.

1.02.9 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, make
arrangements for the supply of electricity required for the execution of the Work.

1.02.10 WATER SUPPLY. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, make his own
arrangements for the supply of water required for execution of the Work and shall
coordinate with the concerned authorities in this respect. All water shall be obtained
from a source approved by the Engineer.

1.02.11 OTHER CONTRACTORS. The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact

that there may be other Contractors working in the area during the course of this
Contract and that his prices shall include for any disturbance or interference to his work,
in this respect.

1.02.12 CONSTRUCTION RECORDS. The Contractor shall submit at his expense

each month photographs of twenty (20) different subjects as agreed by the Engineer.
For each subject, the Contractor shall supply three (3) color prints (glossy finish) size
twenty (20) centimeter x twenty-five (25) centimeters plus negatives and, in addition,
color transparencies. Negative and transparency should be exposed and as far as
21
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

possible, should show identical scenes. Each print and transparency shall be titled and
referenced to a suitable key plan. Prints and negatives should also be suitably cross-
referenced. Video film of unique construction operations and innovative procedures
shall also be provided by the Contractor.

The furnishing of all photographic records will not be paid for separately but will be
considered subsidiary to other items in the Bill of Quantities.

1.02.13 FINAL CLEAN UP. Upon the completion of the Work and before
provisional and final handover, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall clean the
roadway and adjacent property defaced or occupied by him in connection with the
Work, of all rubbish, weeds, brush, excess materials, falsework, temporary structures,
and equipment. All parts of all types of the Work shall be left in a neat and presentable
condition and as approved by the Engineer.

1.02.14 FINAL CERTIFICATE. The Contractor shall comply with the M.O.C.
Circular No. 8404 dated 16-09/1411 (H) regarding instructions and documents that must
be attached with the final certificate.

22
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 1.03 - CONTROL OF WORK

1.03.1 AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER. The Engineer, as the duly authorized

representative of the Ministry, will decide all questions which may arise as to the quality
and acceptability of materials furnished and Work performed and as to the rate of
progress of the Work; specifications compliance; and all questions as to the acceptable
fulfillment of the Contract on the part of the Contractor. See Articles 2 and 3-4 of the
Conditions of Contract.

The Engineer will have the authority to suspend the Work wholly or in part due to
the failure of the Contractor to correct conditions unsafe for the workmen or the general
public; for failure to carry out provisions of the Contract; for failure to carry out orders;
for such periods as he may deem necessary due to unsuitable weather; for conditions
considered unsuitable for the prosecution of the Work or for any other condition or
reason deemed to be in the interest of the Ministry.

In order to provide for the protection of the Work, for the protection of the public, for
the most advantageous movement of public traffic, and to assure early completion of
the Work when more than one Contractor is involved, the Engineer shall have the right
to require the early completion or the delay of portions of the Work and to determine the
order in which the Work shall be prosecuted. His decision shall be final and he shall
have executive authority to enforce and make effective such decisions and orders that
the Contractor fails to carry out promptly.

Any Directives or written instructions to the Contractor which may be required may
be served on said Contractor or his representative, either personally or by mailing to the
address given in the Contract, or by leaving the same at said address.

1.03.2 PLANS AND WORKING DRAWINGS. The plans will show details of all
traffic control plans, lines, grades, typical cross sections of the roadway, location, and
design of all structures and a summary of items appearing on the Bill of Quantities.
Only general features will be shown for steel bridges. The Contractor shall keep one
set of plans available at the Work Site at all times.

The plans will be supplemented by such working drawings as are necessary to

adequately control the Work. Working drawings for structures shall be furnished by the
Contractor and shall consist of such detailed plans as may be required to adequately
control the Work and which are not included in the plans furnished by the Ministry.
They shall include stress sheets, shop drawings, erection plans, falsework plans,
cofferdam plans, bending diagrams for reinforcing steel, or any other supplementary
plans or similar data required of the Contractor. Working drawings for traffic control
through work zones (Traffic Control Plans) shall be furnished by the Contractor when
they are not included in the plans. These working drawings shall include Geometrics
and cross section detour layouts, signs and other traffic control device locations and
traffic handling schemes. All working drawings must be approved in writing by the
Engineer and such approval shall not operate to relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibility under the Contract for the successful completion of the Work. No related
Work may proceed until approval is obtained from the Engineer. Deviations from the
23
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

working drawings may likewise be approved in writing. Deviations without previous

approval may be cause for rejection of the Work involved. The Contract price shall
include the cost of furnishing all working drawings.

1.03.3 CONFORMITY WITH THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. All Work

performed and all materials furnished shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, cross
sections, dimensions, and material requirements, including tolerances, shown on the
plans or indicated in the specifications.

In the event the Engineer finds the materials or the finished product in which the
materials are used or the Work performed are not in conformity with the plans and
specifications and have resulted in an inferior or unsatisfactory product, the Work, or
materials shall be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by and at the expense
of the Contractor.

1.03.4 COORDINATION OF PLANS, GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND

SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS. These General Specifications, the Plans, and the
Special Specifications, and all supplementary documents are essential parts of the
Contract, and a requirement occurring in one is as binding as though occurring in all.
They are intended to be complementary and to describe and provide for a complete
Work. In case of discrepancy, conflict, or error, the Contract Documents shall be given
precedence in the order stipulated in the Form of Contract.

The provisions of the Form of Contract, General Conditions of Contract, and the
Saudi Arabian Tender Regulations shall take precedence over the provisions or
stipulations in these General Specifications. In the plans, calculated dimensions will
govern scaled dimensions. In case of discordance between the Arabic and English
versions of the Contract Documents, the Arabic version shall govern all of the Contract
Documents including the Conditions of Contract, except for the General Specifications,
Supplemental Specifications, Bill of Quantities, Special Specifications, and the Project
Plans, in which cases the English version shall govern. If no English version exists,
then the Arabic version shall govern.

The Contractor shall take no advantage of any apparent error or omission in the
plans or specifications. In the event the Contractor discovers such an error or omission,
he shall immediately notify the Engineer. The Engineer will then make such corrections
and interpretations as may be deemed necessary for fulfilling the intent of the plans and
specifications.

1.03.5 SILENCE OF SPECIFICATIONS. The apparent silence of the

specifications, plans, or other contract documents as to any detail or the apparent
omission from them of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded
as meaning that only the best generally accepted practice is to be used. All
interpretations of the specifications will be made by the Engineer on this basis.

1.03.6 COOPERATION OF CONTRACTOR. In order to coordinate the efforts of

the Contractor or the several Contractors with those of the Engineer; to facilitate the
movement of traffic; and to insure the early completion of all phases of the Work; the

24
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Contractor shall, prior to beginning the Work, confer with the Engineer to arrange for a
satisfactory Program of Work. See Article 3.5 of the Conditions of Contract.

Whenever work being done by other Contractors is contiguous or related to the

Work included in this Contract, the sequence of handling the Work shall be such that
the least delay possible will result to each Contractor and such sequence may be
designated by the Engineer. The respective rights of the various interests involved shall
be established by the Engineer, in order to secure the completion of the various
portions of the Work in general harmony.

The Contractor shall have available on the Work at all times one copy of the plans
and specifications. He shall give the Work the constant attention necessary to facilitate
the progress thereof and shall cooperate with the Engineer and other Contractors in
every way possible. The Contractor shall at all times have a competent, English
speaking, Site Engineer capable of reading and thoroughly understanding the plans and
specifications, as his agent on the Work, who shall receive instructions from the
Engineer or his authorized representatives. The Site Engineer shall have full authority
to execute the orders or directions of the Engineer without delay and to supply promptly
such materials, tools, plant equipment, and labor as may be required. The Site
Engineer shall be furnished irrespective of the amount of Work sublet. Whenever the
Contractor or his Site Engineer is not present on any part of the Work where the
Engineer may desire to give orders or directions, they shall be received and obeyed by
the Foreman or person in charge of the particular Work.

1.03.7 COOPERATION WITH UTILITIES. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary

in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Local Authorities
and Utility Owners concerning identification, new construction, relocationing, adjustment
or removal of utilities including any temporary work or lines. He shall execute such
works as directed, and perform the same in full cooperation with the Local Authorities
and Utility Owners.

It is understood that the Contractor has considered in his Tender all of the
permanent and temporary utility appurtenances in their present and relocated positions
as shown on the plans. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the utility owners and
schedule his work so as to minimize any potential delays, inconveniences, or damages
to the Work that may result from utility interferences or the operations of moving them.

1.03.8 CONSTRUCTION STAKES, LINES AND GRADES. The Engineer will

furnish the Contractor with the location of points of intersection, a list of coordinates of
all the points of tangents intersection and benchmark information. The plans indicate
the properties of horizontal and vertical curves, together with rates of superelevation
where required. The Contractor shall set construction stakes establishing lines, slopes,
and continuous profile grade in road work, and centerline and benchmarks for bridge
work, culvert work, protective and accessory structures, and appurtenances as he may
deem necessary and will furnish the Engineer with the original copy of the field notes
together with all necessary information relating to lines, slopes and grades. These
stakes and marks shall constitute the field control by and in accordance with which the
Contractor shall establish other necessary controls and perform the Work. See Article
3-7 of the Conditions of Contract.
25
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

The Contractor shall, prior to any stakeout Work, submit to the Engineer for his
approval a planned method of operations for the staking-out of the project. The plan
shall include minimum accuracy of stakes, the positions of the various types of stakes,
the method of marking stakes, the methods to be used for protecting stakes, etc. No
staking shall proceed prior to the Engineer's approval of the Contractor's staking plan.

At least twenty-four (24) hours before he intends to stakeout any portion of the
Work, the Contractor shall submit written notice to the Engineer. Such notice shall
include the time, location, and type of Work to be staked.

The Contractor will stakeout the Work and secure the Engineer's approval of his
stakeout during the preparation period before proceeding with construction. If, in the
opinion of the Engineer, modification of the line or grade is advisable, before or after
stakeout, the Engineer will issue detailed instructions to the Contractor for such
modifications and the Contractor will revise the stakeout for further approval. No
changes in the contract unit price(s) of the affected items of Work will be made for such
modifications.

The profiles and cross sections on the plans indicate the elevation of the top of road
surface or as otherwise noted on the plans. Coordinates and elevations shown on the
Drawings are in meters and are based upon an approved coordinate system.

The Contractor shall be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes and
marks. If any of the construction stakes or marks have been destroyed or disturbed,
the Contractor will replace them at his own expense. Certain established Bench Marks
are located in the vicinity of the Works and the Contractor shall ensure that they are not
damaged or disturbed by his operations.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of all lines, slopes, grades and
other survey Work.

1.03.9 DUTIES OF THE INSPECTOR. Inspectors, employed by the Engineer, will

be authorized to inspect all Work done and materials furnished. Such inspection may
extend to all or any part of the Work and to the preparation, fabrication, or manufacture
of the materials to be used. The Inspector will not be authorized to alter or waive the
provisions of the specifications. The Inspector will not be authorized to issue
instructions contrary to the plans and specifications, or to act as foreman for the
Contractor.

1.03.10 INSPECTION OF WORK. All materials and each part or detail of the Work
shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer. The Engineer, or any persons
authorized by him, shall at all times have access to the Work and all workshops and
places where Work is being prepared, or where materials, manufactured articles, or
machinery are being obtained for the Work. The Contractor shall afford every facility
for and every assistance in obtaining the right to such access.

The Contractor shall submit a written request for inspection of any portion of the
Work at least twenty-four (24) hours before such Work is to be performed. The request

26
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

shall include the date, time, location and type of Work to be performed. When approved
by the Engineer, a method of communication other than a written request may be used.

At any time before acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall remove or uncover
such portions of the finished and previously inspected Work as may be directed by the
Engineer. After examination, the Contractor shall restore said portions of the Work to
the standard required by the specifications. Should the Work thus exposed or
examined prove acceptable, the uncovering, or removing, and the replacing of the
covering or making good of the parts removed, will be paid for by the Ministry; but
should the Work so exposed or examined prove unacceptable, the uncovering, or
removing and the replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed will be
at the Contractor's expense.

Any Work done or materials used without inspection by the Engineer may be
ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense unless the Engineer failed
to inspect after having been given reasonable notice in writing that the Work was to be
performed.

The inspection function shall in no way be replaced by the sampling and testing
program used to determine the estimated percent defective and resultant value of work.

1.03.11 TEMPLATES AND STRAIGHTEDGES. The Contractor shall provide a

sufficient number of metal templates to be used by the Contractor and the Engineer to
control and check the correct shaping of finished surfaces of the Work. The templates
shall be the dimensions shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

In addition, the Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of metal straightedges,

as required by the specifications and the Engineer, for control of the longitudinal and
transverse dimensions of the Work.

Samples of the templates and straightedges shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.

The templates and straightedges shall be maintained in good condition at all times.
They will be checked from time to time by the Engineer and, if necessary, repaired,
corrected or replaced by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer.

No separate payment for templates and straightedges will be made. The cost of
these items is considered to be included in other items in the Bill of Quantities.

1.03.12 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AND UNAUTHORIZED WORK. All

work which, as determined by the Engineer, does not conform to the requirements of
the Contract and results in an inferior or unsatisfactory product, will be considered
unacceptable. Unacceptable Work, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of
defective materials, damage through carelessness or any other cause, found to exist
prior to the final acceptance of the Work, shall be removed or replaced at the
Contractor's expense.

27
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

No work shall be done without lines and grades having been approved by the
Engineer. Work done contrary to the instructions of the Engineer, Work done beyond
the lines shown on the plans, or as given, except as herein specified, or any extra work
done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and will not be paid for under
the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered removed or replaced at
the Contractor's expense.

Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply forthwith with any order of the
Engineer, made under the provisions of this article, the Engineer will have authority to
cause unacceptable Work to be remedied or removed and replaced and unauthorized
Work to be removed and to deduct the costs from any moneys due or to become due
the Contractor.

See Articles 3-4 and 6-2 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.03.13 LOAD RESTRICTIONS. The Contractor shall comply with legal load
restrictions in the hauling of materials on public roads beyond the limits of the project.
The Contractor shall use every reasonable means to prevent any of the highways or
bridges intersecting with or on the routes to the Site from being damaged or injured by
any traffic of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors, and in particular shall select
routes, choose and use vehicles, and restrict loads so that any such extraordinary traffic
as will inevitably arise from the moving of plant and materials from and to the Site shall
be limited as far as reasonably possible and so that no unnecessary damage or injury
may be caused to such highways and bridges.

Should it be found necessary for the Contractor to move one or more loads of
construction plant machinery or pre-constructed units, or parts of units of Work, over
part of a highway or bridge, the moving of which is likely to damage any highway or
bridge unless special protection or strengthening is carried out, then the Contractor
shall, before moving the load onto such highway or bridge, give notice to the Engineer
of the weight and other particulars of the load to be moved and his proposals for
protecting or strengthening the said highway or bridge. Unless within fourteen (14)
days of the receipt of such notice the Engineer shall by counter-notice direct that such
protection or strengthening is unnecessary, then the Contractor will carry out at his own
expense such proposals or any modification thereof that the Engineer shall require.

The Contractor shall bear all responsibility and liability for damages or injury
resulting from his failure to abide by these provisions except when such transport or
passage is done by special written permission of the Ministry. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all damage caused by his hauling within the limits of the Work.

Any type of equipment of such weight or so loaded as to cause damage to drainage

structures of any kind, or to any other type of construction, either being constructed or
previously constructed, will not be permitted to operate in any location where damage
would be caused. No loads shall be permitted on a pavement or base before the
expiration of the curing period.

The Contractor shall prepare proposals for routes to be taken by heavy construction
traffic, particularly for hauling in fill material for use on the site. These routes should,
28
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

where possible, avoid existing roads and built-up areas. The Contractor shall provide
and maintain signs to direct construction traffic onto haul routes. Details of haul routes
and signing shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within one (1) month of the
commencement of the Contract and the signs shall be erected within a further one (1)
month.

One-way traffic systems shall be operated on haul routes where required by the
Engineer. The Engineer may, at any time, withdraw his approval to the use of any route
until such strengthening or repair work as he considers necessary has been carried out
on that route by the Contractor.

Where it is necessary for Contractor's plant or vehicles to cross public highways,

and where required by the Engineer, all such crossings shall be equipped with manual-
controlled traffic lights. During brief stoppages of crossings by Contractor's plant, the
traffic signals shall be set to show "green" to the Public Highway. During extended
period when the Contractor's plant is not using the crossing, the traffic signals shall be
switched off, turned away from the carriageway and the advance warning signs
obscured.

Stationary vehicles, equipment, huts, heaps of materials, etc. shall be kept clear of
the crossing point so that all those using the highway and the haul road shall have a
clear view.

See Article 3-14 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.03.14 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE WORKS DURING

CONSTRUCTION. The Contractor shall protect and maintain the Work throughout the
Contract Period and until the Final Handover of the project. This protection and
maintenance shall be done with adequate equipment and forces to the end that the
roadway and structures are kept in satisfactory condition, as determined by the
Engineer, at all times.

In the case of a requirement for the placing of a course upon a course or subgrade
previously constructed, the Contractor shall maintain the previous course or subgrade
during all construction operations.

All cost of protection and maintenance Work during the Contract Period and until
the project is accepted shall be included in the contract unit price(s) on the various pay
items in the Bill of Quantities and the Contractor will not be paid an additional amount
for such Work.

1.03.15 CLAIMS FOR ADJUSTMENTS AND DISPUTES. If, in any case, the
Contractor deems that additional compensation is due him for Work or material not
clearly covered in the Contract or not ordered by the Engineer as Extra Work, as
defined herein, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of his intention to
make claim for such additional compensation before he begins the Work on which he
bases the claim. If such notification is not given, and the Engineer is not afforded
proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as required,
then the Contractor thereby agrees to waive any claim for such additional
29
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

compensation. Such notice by the Contractor, and the fact that the Engineer has kept
account of the cost as aforesaid, shall not in any way be construed as proving or
substantiating the validity of the claim. If the claim, after consideration by the Engineer,
is found to be just, it will be paid as Extra Work as provided herein for force account
Work. Nothing in this Paragraph shall be construed as establishing a claim contrary to
the terms of Section 1.02, "Scope of Work" in these General Specifications.

1.03.16 SETTLEMENT OF DIFFERENCES. Any difference or dispute between the

Ministry and the Contractor shall be reviewed by a Committee of two representatives
of the Ministry and two of the Contractor. The purpose of this Committee shall be to
help arrive at a mutual understanding between the Ministry and the Contractor. If it fails
to do so within a period of twenty-eight (28) days from the date the difference is referred
to the Committee, the matter shall be referred to the Grievance Council in Saudi Arabia,
and the decision of the Grievance Council then shall be final and binding. See Article
12 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.03.17 ACCEPTANCE. The Provisional Handover and Final Handover of the

Work will be made by the procedures authorized in the General Conditions of Contract.
The Provisional Handover procedures require that the physical tests performed on the
Works will be reviewed by a Committee designated by the Ministry. The Contractor will
be assessed deductions based on the results of these tests if the results indicate
deviations from the Specifications. The Contractor shall understand that these and
other tests required or performed by the Handover Committee, some of which may be
taken on in-situ material, sometime after construction, may yield slightly different results
than tests on the same material during construction. It is therefore important that all
Works are clearly sampled and tested during construction in compliance with these
specifications.

See Articles 5-7 and 6-4 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.03.18 SIGN BOARDS. The Contractor shall, within sixty (60) days of signing of
the Contract, provide and install two (2) metal project sign boards, written in Arabic and
English. Each board shall conform to the construction, erection and message details
shown on the Project Sign Standard Detail Drawing in the plans.

Each sign board is to be erected in a prominent and approved position, one at each
end of the length of road included in the Contract. The sign boards shall be maintained
in good order, for the duration of the Contract, by the Contractor, and at his own
expense. No separate payment will be made for the construction, erection and
maintenance or any other costs thereof of the sign boards. The costs shall be
considered as included in the prices of other items in the Bill of Quantities. At the end
of the maintenance period, the project sign boards and supports shall be dismantled
and removed from the site by the Contractor.

30
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.03.19 MONUMENTS. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying a

monument in a location selected by the local Municipality where the monument is to be
placed, to the Specifications and Drawings prepared by an artist and approved by the
Local Municipality and the Ministry. This Work is considered subsidiary to project
laboratory and office items as per the Bill of Quantities.

1.03.20 WATER WELLS. The Contractor shall make sure that Water Wells are
drilled and maintained in accordance with the specification of the Ministry of Agriculture
and Water. These water wells are to be handed over to the Ministry of Agriculture and
Water upon the completion of the project and the Contractor must attach the handing
over certificate within the final certificate.

31
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 1.04 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS

1.04.1 SOURCES OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS. All materials,

manufactured articles, and machinery incorporated in the permanent Work shall meet
all quality requirements of the Contract. They must, in all cases, be approved by the
Engineer prior to their inclusion in the Work.

In order to expedite the Work, the Contractor shall, before placing any purchase
order for materials, manufactured articles, and machinery to be a part of the permanent
works, submit for the approval of the Engineer, a complete description of such items,
the names of the firms from which he proposes to obtain such items, together with
copies of all test records proving compliance with Contract provisions. No materials,
manufactured articles, or machinery shall be ordered from any firm without the written
approval of the Engineer. When directed by the Engineer or otherwise specified in the
Contract, the Contractor shall submit samples for approval.

If it is found after trial that sources of supply for previously approved materials,
manufactured articles, or machinery do not produce specified products, the Contractor
shall replace the defective items and furnish the items from other sources approved by
the Engineer and without additional compensation.

See Article 4 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.04.2 LOCAL MATERIAL SOURCES. When material deposits are not designated
on the plans or described in the Special Specifications, the Contractor shall locate and
provide materials that meet the contract requirements.

When sources of local materials are designated on the plans and/or described in
the Special Specifications, the quality of materials in such deposits is considered to be
acceptable in general, but the Contractor shall determine for himself the quality and the
amount of equipment and work required to produce a material conforming to the
specifications. The designation of a source of material in no way relieves the
Contractor of his responsibility to produce materials conforming to the specifications.

It shall be understood that it is not feasible to ascertain from the samples the limits
for an entire deposit, and that variations shall be considered as usual and are to be
expected. The Engineer may order procurement of material from any portion of a
deposit and may reject other portions of the deposits as unacceptable.

When sources of local materials are not designated on the plans and/or described
in the Special Specifications, the Contractor shall be totally responsible for locating and
producing materials meeting the specifications. The exploring, testing of samples, and
developing of such material sources and the costs thereof are the responsibility of the
Contractor.

No material, regardless of its source, shall be incorporated in the Work until

representative samples taken and tested in an approved laboratory by or in the

32
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

presence of the Engineer, have been approved and written authority is issued by the
Engineer for the use thereof.

1.04.3 SAMPLING, TESTING AND CITED SPECIFICATIONS. All materials shall

be presented to the Engineer for inspection, testing and acceptance before
incorporation into the Work. All materials being used are subject to inspection, testing
or rejection at any time prior to incorporation into the Work.

Any Work in which untested and unaccepted materials are used without written
approval of the Engineer shall be performed at the Contractor's risk and may be
considered unacceptable, unauthorized and may not be paid for.

1.04.3.1 Sampling. All sampling shall be in accordance with standard

AASHTO procedures. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications, materials
subject to statistical based acceptance shall be sampled randomly which provides that
all units being produced have an equal chance of being selected for sampling and
testing.

When sampling a material for statistical acceptance, the samples must be

selected using an approved random number selection procedure detailed in the
following paragraph or other random number selection procedure approved by the
Engineer. At least five (5) random samples from a lot of material are needed to make
an acceptable statistical evaluation.

1.04.3.2 Random Sampling. All published sampling tables are prepared on

the assumption that samples are drawn at random; i.e., at any one time each of the
remaining uninspected units of product has an equal chance of being the next unit
selected for the sample. To conduct random sampling requires that (1) random
numbers be generated and (2) these random numbers be applied to the product at
hand.

Random numbers are available in prefabricated form in tables of random

numbers such as Table 1.04-1. One uses such a table by entering it at random (without
"looking") and then proceeding in some chosen direction (up, right, left, etc.) to obtain
random numbers for use. Numbers which cannot be applied to the product
arrangement are discarded.

Random numbers may also be generated by various devices. These include:

1.04.3.2.1 Calculators or computers: Many calculators are available

with random number routines built in. Computers are, of course, an excellent source
of random numbers. Statistical software often has random numbers built in.

1.04.3.2.2 A bowl of numbered chips or marbles: After mixing, one is

withdrawn and the number recorded. It is then replaced and the bowl is again mixed
before the next number is withdrawn.

1.04.3.2.3 Random number dice: One form is the icosahedron (20-

sided) dice. There are three of these, each of a different color, one for units, one for
33
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

tens, and one for hundreds. (Each die has the numbers from 0 to 9 appearing twice.)
Hence one throw of the three dice displays a random number within 000 to 999.

Random sampling shall be used for selecting when or where to take a

sample. In large lots, the method recommended by the Ministry is stratified
(proportional) random sampling because it prevents groupings of samples by using
sublots and spreading the sampling over the entire lot. Following are two (2) examples
on how to determine and use stratified random numbers for sample selection.

1.04.3.3 Use of Random Numbers to Select a Sample. The use of a table of

random digits by a numerical example will be illustrated based on Table 1.04-1.
Assume that it is desired to select a sample of 15 from a lot of 750 items. Each item in
the lot is identified by a number from 1 to 750. Therefore, it is necessary to select 15
random three-digit numbers from 001 to 750.

First it is necessary to determine a starting point in the table. Table 1.04-1

contains 50 rows and 10 columns of digits listed in groups of four. Assume that a pencil
point is placed at random in the table and the first two-digit number to the right from 1
to 50 determines the row to be selected. The procedure is repeated to determine which
of the 10 columns is the starting column. Assume the 40th row and the 8th column are
chosen. Assume that the decision was made in advance that the starting digit chosen
will be the first three digits of the four-digit number read to the right and that succeeding
numbers will be read down the column or columns. The following numbers are
obtained. (Numbers that are not between 001 and 750 must be discarded; these are
shown in parentheses. A number that has already occurred must also be discarded;
there are no such numbers in this example.)

482, (858), 601, 623, (953), 703, 723, 094, 582, 337, 163 (904), 187, (782),
590, (923), 544, 146, 120, 030

The selection of the sample is simplified if the 15 numbers between 001 and
750 are rearranged in order of increasing size as follows:

030, 094, 120, 146, 163, 187, 337, 482, 544, 582, 590, 601, 623, 703, 723

1.04.3.4 Application Example. Assume a bituminous concrete pavement is

being produced and it is going to be statistically sampled and tested for acceptance.
The total quantity in the Bill of Quantities is thirty-eight thousand (38,000) square
meters and the Special Specifications state that one (1) test will be taken for every lot
of five thousand (5,000) square meters placed even though these General
Specifications require five (5) tests per lot.

The contract plans show the roadbed width as eight (8) meters and the depth
of pavement as a one (1) fifty (50) millimeter lift. The contractor indicates that
pavement will be placed in four (4) meter lane widths because of traffic.

Therefore, the sampling frequency can be established as one (1) test for every
one thousand two hundred fifty (1,250) meters.

34
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Divide the total quantity square meters in the lot thirty-eight thousand (38,000)
square meters by the sampling frequency five thousand (5,000) square meters
specified. This calculation (38,000 divided by 5,000 = 7.6) indicates that there will be
eight (8) sublots and eight (8) tests.

One sublot - one test: Two (2) sets of eight (8) random numbers will be
needed. Eight (8) random numbers to determine the centerline station and eight (8)
numbers to determine the offset distance from the outside pavement shoulder at each
centerline location to each sampling site. Each set of eight (8) random numbers
between 001 and 1250 will be chosen using the procedure outlined above.

The random numbers are then multiplied by the total number of units (1250 in
this example) in each sublot and converted to longitudinal distance and offset distance.
This procedure stratifies or spreads out the samples over the entire lot by random
selecting one (1) test site per sublot.

This same procedure can also be used to statistically determine sample

locations for taking density tests of embankment, aggregate base, and subbase lifts,
and thickness measurement tests of bituminous concrete pavements, etc.

1.04.3.5 Quality or Source Approval Samples and Tests. All source

approval samples shall be taken by the Contractor with notice given to the Engineer and
opportunity afforded the Engineer to observe the sampling procedure. All source
approval tests shall be performed under the supervision of the Engineer or, when
specified, by an independent laboratory approved by the Ministry and engauged and
paid by the Contractor.

Once a source of materials has been approved, the Contractor shall develop
and produce from the source only to the extent that material is represented by the
source approval samples. The expansion of the source or the changing of sources
shall necessitate additional source approval samples and tests.

The Engineer shall periodically order new testing of previously approved

sources to verify that they continue to comply with the specifications. The Engineer
may order the new testing to be performed at the same or at a different laboratory from
the laboratory performing the original source approval tests. If new testing indicates
that a previously approved source no longer complies with the specification
requirements, the Contractor shall immediately cease production. He shall perform
additional tests as ordered by the Engineer to ascertain the magnitude of the problem.
No source shall continue to be used which does not comply with the specifications.
Stockpiles of materials not complying with specifications shall not be incorporated into
the Work.

1.04.3.6 Contractor Quality Control Samples and Tests. Contractor quality

control tests (process control) are those tests performed by the Contractor during
construction to ascertain specification compliance prior to submitting the material to the
Engineer for acceptance. The Contractor is totally responsible for sampling and testing
for process control. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the details of his
quality control testing program and cooperate in any review of that program requested
35
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

by the Engineer. While the Engineer will not normally specify the details of the
Contractor's process control testing, he may declare the program unacceptable if there
are chronic rejections of nonspecification Work as determined by the Project
Acceptance Tests (see below). The Contractor may then be ordered to improve
process control procedures, including increasing the frequency of tests and modifying
construction procedures as necessary.

1.04.3.7 Project Acceptance Samples and Tests. All project acceptance

samples shall be taken in a random manner and jointly by the Engineer and the
Contractor after the Contractor has notified the Engineer that the material is ready for
testing. These tests shall be performed in the Project Laboratory, or in-situ as
appropriate, under the supervision of the Engineer. The Engineer may order the
retesting of any material when there has been a significant delay in the construction
operations or when he believes the material may have deteriorated since its original
acceptance. Material which does not comply with the specifications as determined by
project control tests shall be rejected and removed from the Work and replaced, or
corrected at the expense of the Contractor. The Engineer may order additional testing
to ascertain the extent of non-specification material.

1.04.3.8 Split Samples and Tests. Split samples are a split part of a job-
control or acceptance sample taken by project personnel and delivered to the Materials
and Research Department Laboratory to verify the testing results of the field job control
or acceptance tests. The sample data sheet accompanying the split sample shall show
the job control or acceptance sample number and the project test results for comparing
the results obtained by both laboratories.

1.04.3.9 Check Samples and Tests. The Engineer will perform or supervise
the performance program of quality and acceptance check sampling and testing to
verify the quality of materials being incorporated into the work and the sampling, testing
and equipment. The Engineer may direct that the check tests be performed by persons
other than those normally responsible for project control testing, or he may direct the
sample be transported to the MOC Central Laboratory or to an MOC approved
independent laboratory for testing. The Contractor shall be responsible for the costs
of testing in an independent laboratory.

The cost of all materials taken as samples for testing shall be borne by the
Contractor. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall supply the Engineer with all
necessary test report forms and such expendable materials as may be removed to
perform the required tests. Copies of all test results will be furnished to the Contractor
or his representative.
All references to test methods or specifications designated by MRDTM shall be
construed to mean the Materials and Research Department Test Method specified in
the most recent edition of the Ministry of Communications' Highway Materials Manual
published prior to the date of the Contract. In case of conflict between MRDTM test
methods and specifications and corresponding, equivalent AASHTO or ASTM test
methods or specifications, the MRDTM test methods or specifications shall govern. In
case of conflict between the AASHTO and equivalent ASTM specifications and methods
of sampling and testing, AASHTO shall govern. In case of conflict between MRDTM,
AASHTO, ASTM or other test methods and specifications and corresponding,
36
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

equivalent Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO) test methods and

specifications, the SASO test methods of specifications will govern. If the specified test
or specification clearly indicates a standard of performance or quality higher than
SASO, then the specified test or specification shall govern.

Unless otherwise specified, all references to methods of test or specifications

of AASHTO, ASTM, SASO and others shall be construed to mean those methods of
test or specifications which have been most recently adopted and published prior to the
date of the Contract.

1.04.3.10 Contractor Minimum Sampling and Testing Schedule. Sampling

and testing frequencies shall be in accordance with the M.O.C. Highway Materials
Manual - Pages I-25 - I-35 unless superseded by these General Specifications or the
Special Specifications. Table 1.08.3 contains the minimum schedule for materials
subject to statistically based acceptance under Subsection 1.08.5 of these General
Specifications.

Contractor process quality control sampling and testing requirements are listed
under the "Contractor Quality Control Procedures" Subsections in each Section of these
General Specifications.

For all other materials, unless otherwise specified in the Special Specifications,
AASHTO methods of sampling and testing shall govern. In the absence of such
sampling and testing methods in the AASHTO Standard, the ASTM methods shall
govern.

In the event that there are items of Work in the Bill of Quantities for which there
are no testing frequencies listed in the Materials Manual, General Specifications or in
the Special Specifications, the Engineer will establish minimum frequencies based on
the character of the materials and the specification requirements.

37
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

TABLE 1.04-1

1306 1189 5731 3968 5606 5084 8947 3897 1636 7810
0422 2431 0649 8085 5053 4722 6598 5044 9040 5121
6597 2202 6168 5060 8656 6733 6364 7649 1871 4328
7965 6541 5645 6243 7658 6903 9911 5740 7824 8520
7695 6937 0406 8894 0441 8135 9797 7285 5905 9539

5160 7851 8464 6789 3938 4197 6511 0407 9239 2232
2961 0551 0539 8288 7478 7565 5581 5771 5442 8761
1428 4183 4312 5445 4854 9157 9158 5218 1464 3634
3666 5642 4539 1561 7849 7520 2547 0756 1206 2033
6543 6799 7454 9052 6689 1948 2574 9386 0304 7945

9975 6080 7423 3175 9377 6951 6519 8287 8994 5532
4868 0956 7545 7723 8085 4948 2228 9583 4415 7065
8239 7068 6694 5168 3117 1586 0237 6160 9585 1133
8722 9191 3386 3443 0434 4586 4150 1224 6204 0937
1330 9120 8785 8382 2929 7089 3109 6742 2468 7025

2296 2952 4764 9070 6356 9192 4012 0618 2219 1109
3582 7052 3132 4519 9250 2486 0830 8472 2160 7046
5872 9207 7222 6494 8973 3545 6967 8490 5264 9821
1134 6324 6201 3792 5651 0538 4676 2064 0584 7996
1403 4497 7390 8503 8239 4236 8022 2914 4368 4529

3393 7025 3381 3553 2128 1021 8353 6413 5161 8583
1137 7896 3602 0060 7850 7626 0854 6565 4260 6220
7437 5198 8772 6927 8527 6851 2709 5992 7383 1071
8414 8820 3917 7238 9821 6073 6658 1280 9643 7761
8398 5224 2749 7311 5740 9771 7826 9533 3800 4553

0995 8935 2939 3092 2496 0359 0318 4697 7181 4035
6657 0755 9685 4017 6581 7292 5643 5064 1142 1297
8875 8369 7868 0190 9278 1709 4253 9346 4335 3769
8399 6702 0586 6423 7985 2979 4513 1970 1989 3105
6703 1024 2064 0393 6815 8502 1375 4171 6970 1201

4730 1653 0932 0955 0957 7366 0325 5178 7958 5371
8400 6834 3187 8688 1079 1480 6776 9888 7585 9998
3647 8002 6726 0877 4552 3238 7542 7804 3933 9475
6789 5197 8037 2354 9262 5497 0005 3986 1767 7981
2630 2721 2810 2185 6323 5679 4931 8336 6662 3566

1374 8625 1644 3342 1587 0762 6057 8011 2666 3759
1572 7625 9110 4409 0239 7059 3415 5537 2250 7292
9678 2877 7579 4935 0449 8119 6969 5383 1717 6719
0882 6781 3538 4090 3092 2365 6001 3446 9985 6007
0006 4205 2389 4365 1981 8158 7784 6256 3842 5603

4661 9861 7916 9305 2074 9462 0254 4827 9198 3974
1093 3784 4190 6332 1175 8599 9735 8584 6581 7194
3374 3545 6865 8819 3342 1676 2264 6014 5012 2458
3650 9676 1436 4374 4716 5548 8276 6235 6742 2154
7292 5749 7877 7602 9205 3599 3880 9537 4423 2330

2353 8319 2850 4026 3027 1708 3518 7034 7132 6903
1094 2009 8919 5676 7283 4982 9642 7235 8167 3366
0568 4002 0587 7165 1094 2006 7471 0940 4366 9554
5608 4070 5233 4339 6543 6695 5799 5821 3953 9458
8285 7537 1181 2300 5294 6892 1627 3372 1952 3028

38
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.04.4 QUALITY CONTROL CHARTS. The quality of materials and construction

shall be controlled using control charts based on statistical techniques. The control
charts shall be prepared and kept current daily by the Contractor. These charts shall
be submitted to the Engineer every month for review and approval. The charts shall be
drawn in the form of graphs with property characteristics on the vertical axis and test
numbers on the horizontal axis.

Target line, upper and lower control and warning limits shall be drawn as directed
by the Engineer. The Engineer will divide the work and the materials into lots. Each
lot will be evaluated separately.

The Engineer may apply quality level analysis to determine the pay factor for the
monthly certificates based on the standard deviations and quality indices.

See Article 5-7 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.04.5 PLANT INSPECTION. The Engineer may undertake the inspection of

materials at the production plant.

In the event plant inspection is undertaken, the following conditions shall be met:
(1) the Engineer shall have the cooperation and assistance of the Contractor and/or
the producer with whom he has contracted for materials; (2) the Engineer shall have full
entry at all times to such parts of the plant as may concern the manufacture or
production of the materials being furnished; and (3) adequate safety measures are to
be provided and maintained.

It is understood that the Engineer reserves the right to retest all materials which
have been tested and accepted at the source of supply after delivery to the site and
prior to incorporation into the Work and to reject all materials which are obviously
defective or, when retested, do not meet the requirements of the specifications.

1.04.6 STORAGE OF MATERIALS. Materials shall be so stored as to assure the

preservation of their quality and fitness for the Work. Stored materials, even though
approved before storage, may again be located so as to facilitate their prompt
inspection. Materials shall not be stored on the right-of-way except where and as
permitted by the Engineer. Stockpiling of aggregate material within the right-of-way
shall be confined to such authorized areas as may be approved by the Engineer.
Where stockpiling is done outside the roadway on Government or private property, the
site shall be abandoned immediately upon completion of the utilization of the stockpiled
material and the natural surface shall then be restored as nearly as possible to the
original condition by the Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Any costs for the use of privately-owned land for storage and/or for the
placing of the Contractor's plant and equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.
Private property shall not be used for storage purposes without written permission and
release of the owner or lessee, and a copy of such written permission and release shall
be furnished to the Engineer prior to any use of the land by the Contractor.

Explosives shall be stored in a secure manner marked clearly in Arabic and English
"Danger Explosives." Storage shall be in compliance with Ministry of the Interior/Public
39
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Security regulations as directed in Section 2.04, "Controlled and Production Blasting"

in these General Specifications.

Where no local laws or ordinances apply, storage shall be to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and, in general, not closer than three hundred (300) meters from the road or
from any building or camping area. In no case shall the Contractor store explosives on
the site without prior approval of the local authorities or the Engineer.

The Contractor shall keep a current inventory of all explosives and explosive
devices and submit a monthly report to the Engineer, detailing the usage of all
explosives by date and location.

1.04.7 HANDLING MATERIALS. All materials shall be handled in such manner as

to preserve their quality and fitness for the Work. Aggregates shall be transported from
the storage site to the Work in tight vehicles so constructed as to prevent loss or
segregation of materials after loading and measuring in order that there may be no
inconsistencies in the quantities and qualities of materials intended for incorporation in
the Work as loaded, and in the quantities and qualities as actually received at the place
of operations.

1.04.8 UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS. All materials not conforming to the

requirements of the specifications at the time they are used shall be considered as
unacceptable and all such materials will be rejected and shall be removed immediately
from the site of the Work unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. No rejected
material, the defects of which have been corrected, shall be used until approval has
been given.

1.04.9 MINISTRY-FURNISHED MATERIAL. The Contractor shall furnish all

materials required to complete the Work, except those specified to be furnished by the
Ministry.

Material furnished by the Ministry will be delivered or made available to the

Contractor and shall be considered as included in the contract price for the item in
connection with which they are to be used.

The cost of handling and placing all materials after they are delivered to the
Contractor shall be considered included in the contract price for the item in connection
with which they are to be used.

The Contractor will be held responsible for all material delivered to him, and
deductions will be made from any moneys due him to make good any shortages and
deficiencies, from any cause whatsoever, and for any damage which may occur after
such delivery, and for any demurrage charges.

40
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 1.05 - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC

1.05.1 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED. The Contractor shall keep fully informed of all
Government laws, all local ordinances, and regulations, and all orders and decrees of
bodies or tribunals having any jurisdiction or authority, which in any manner affect those
engaged or employed on the Work, or which in any way affect the conduct of the Work.

He shall at all times observe and comply with all such laws, bylaws, ordinances,
regulations, orders, and decrees; and shall protect and indemnify the Government
and/or Ministry and its representatives against any claim or liability arising from or
based on the violation of any such law, bylaws, ordinance, regulation, order, or decree,
whether by himself, his employees, or his subcontractors.

1.05.2 PERMITS, LICENSES AND TAXES. The Contractor shall procure all
permits and licenses, pay all charges, fees, and taxes, and give all notices necessary
and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the Work.

1.05.3 PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS AND PROCESSES. If the Contractor

employs any design, device, material, or process covered by letter of patent or
copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the patentee
or owner. The Contractor and his Surety shall indemnify and save harmless the
Government and/or the Ministry, any affected third party, or political subdivision from
any and all claim for infringement by reason of the use of any such patented design,
device, material or process, or any trademark or copyright, and shall indemnify the
Government and/or Ministry for any costs, expenses, and damages which it may be
obliged to pay by reason of any infringement, at any time during the prosecution or after
the completion of the Work. See Article 3-12 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.05.4 ROYALTIES. The Contractor shall be responsible for all compensation and
royalties due in respect to quarried materials. No special payment will be made for the
compensation of royalties; the costs shall be subsidiary to all other items listed in the
Bill of Quantities. See Article 3-12 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.05.5 RESTORATION OF SURFACES OPENED BY PERMIT. Any individual,

firm, or corporation wishing to make an opening in the highway must secure a permit
from and will be required to deposit a security with the Ministry in a suitable amount to
cover the cost of making the necessary repairs, and the Contractor shall not allow any
person or persons to make an opening unless a duly authorized permit by the Ministry
is presented. All permits before becoming effective must receive the approval of the
Engineer. Until the acceptance of the Work performed under the Contract, the
Contractor shall make all necessary repairs, within the time indicated in writing by the
Engineer and in an acceptable manner, at the point or points in the roadway where
openings have been made by authority of the Ministry. Such repair Work will be paid
for by the Ministry as Extra Work and said Work shall be subject to the same conditions
as the original Work performed. Should the Contractor refuse or neglect to make said
repairs at such point or points within the time specified, the Engineer shall have the
authority to cause such repairs to be made, in which case the Contractor shall not be
relieved in any way from his responsibility for the Work performed by him.
41
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.05.6 RELATIONS BETWEEN CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES AND HIS

SUBCONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES. The Contractor shall provide adequate housing
for his and his subcontractor employees, including sanitary facilities, in accordance with
the Public Health Codes and Regulations, in especially as related to contagious
diseases without creating undue pressure on local public utilities and facilities. Violation
of this provision is punishable by fine in accordance with the law of public utilities
protection. The Contractor, in his relations with his employees, shall comply with the
regulations in force regarding compensation, medical treatment, securities, and
transportation needed, as well as other benefits specified by the Saudi Labor Code as
a minimum. The Contractor shall provide, at no profit to himself, a constant supply of
food for his employees without creating a monopoly for himself or restricting their
freedom to secure food from other sources.

The Ministry will not be liable for any damages or compensation payable at Law in
respect or in consequence of any accident or injury to any employee of the Contractor
and the Contractor shall meet all claims, demands, proceedings, costs, charges, and
expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto. See Article 3-10 of the
Conditions of Contract.

1.05.7 INSURANCE. The Contractor shall secure and maintain such insurance
from an insurance company authorized to write casualty insurance in the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia as will protect himself, his Subcontractors, the Engineer and the Ministry
from claims for bodily injury, death, or property damage which may arise from
operations under this Contract. Bodily injury and death insurance shall provide
coverage for all persons of any age. The Contractor shall not commence the Work
under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance required under this provision and
shall have filed the certificate of insurance or the certified copy of the insurance policy
with both the Engineer and the Ministry. Each insurance policy shall contain a clause
providing that it shall not be cancelled by the insurance company without ten (10) days
written notice to both the Engineer and the Ministry of the intention to cancel. The
amounts of such insurance shall be not less than that called for in the General
Conditions of the Contract. The Contractor is directed to the relevant stipulation listed
in the Conditions of Contract regarding insurance.

1.05.8 SAFETY AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION REQUIREMENTS. In

performance of the Contract, the Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws and
codes governing safety, health and sanitation. The Contractor shall provide all
safeguards, safety devices, and protective equipment, and take any other needed
actions, on his own responsibility or as the Ministry may determine, reasonably
necessary to protect the life and health of employees on the job and the safety of the
public and to protect property in connection with the performance of the Work covered
by the Contract. See Article 3-10 of the Conditions of Contract.

42
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.05.9 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY. The Contractor shall at all times
so conduct the Work as to insure the least practicable obstruction to public traffic. The
safety and convenience of the general public and the residents along the highway and
the protection of persons and property are of prime importance and shall be provided
for by the Contractor in an adequate and satisfactory manner. When it is necessary for
residents living along the project to use a portion of the road under construction, the
Contractor shall maintain, within the limits of the specifications, that portion of the road
in a suitable condition for vehicular traffic.

When it is indicated on the plans or provided in the specifications that traffic shall
be carried through construction, a suitable width shall be maintained level and smooth
to provide satisfactory passage. The width shall be periodically watered or treated with
dust control agents as directed to prevent dust nuisance. Traffic shall be maintained
over or around structures and culverts.

Materials stored upon the highway shall be placed so as to cause minimum

obstruction and danger to the traveling public.

The Contractor shall provide, and maintain in a safe condition, temporary

approaches to and crossing of intersecting highways, railroads, private entrances, and
approaches to partly constructed Work. See Article 3-13 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.05.10 HANDLING TRAFFIC THROUGH WORK ZONES. All features of the work
zone traffic control shall be in accordance with Section 9.02, "Traffic Control Through
Work Zones" in these General Specifications, and the Kingdom's Manual of Uniform
Traffic Control Devices.

The Contractor shall use every precaution to safeguard the persons and property
of the traveling public who must move through or across the work zone. The failure of
the Engineer to notify the Contractor to maintain barriers, lights, signals, or flagmen
shall not operate to relieve the Contractor from his responsibility. When the plans
specifically provide that traffic be carried through the construction, the Contractor shall
not route traffic on a longer or more arduous route without the permission of the
Engineer. If the plans do not detail a Traffic Control Plan (TCP) the contractor shall be
responsible for the development and submittal of a traffic control plan for handling of
the traffic safely during the Period of Contract.

This traffic detour plan shall be approved in advance by M.O.C. Road Safety
Department, Traffic Police Department and the local Municipality before
implementation. All detour construction and maintenance costs, including temporary
signs, lights, barricades, signals and all other devices for the maintenance and safe
regulation of traffic are included in the Section 9.02, "Traffic Control through Work
Zones," except where it is shown to be subsidiary in the Special Specifications. The
Engineer shall require additional barricades, lights, flagmen, or watchmen at any time
or at any place that, in his opinion, it is necessary for proper protection of traffic, but
approval by the Engineer of the Contractor's method of operation shall not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility of protecting the traffic.

43
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

When necessary to permit only one-way traffic, the Contractor shall station figures
to direct traffic safety through or around the Work.

Where it is necessary for residents or businesses along the road to use the road,
suitable means shall be provided for their entrance or exit.

The Contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of traffic control devices on any
individual portion of the Work included in the Contract shall continue through the
duration of the Contract.

Payment for all barricades, warning signs, lights, flagmen, and pilot car operators
and equipment, and other protective devices will be in accordance with Section 9.02,
"Traffic Control through Work Zones" in these General Specifications except where it
is shown to be subsidiary in the Special Specifications.

1.05.11 FOSSILS, ANTIQUITIES, ETC. All fossils, coins, articles of value or

antiquity and structures or other remains or things of geological or archeological interest
discovered on the site of the Work shall be considered the exclusive property of the
Ministry. The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent his workmen or
any other persons from removing or damaging such article or thing; and shall, upon
discovery of such items or things, notify the Engineer thereof within not more than
twenty-four (24) hours of such discovery, and shall carry out the Engineer's instructions
concerning special requirements to salvage such items, at the expense of the Ministry.
No interference shall occur with historical locations and buildings. The Contractor and
his subcontractors shall abide by all Royal Decrees regarding Historical Building
regulations. See Article 3-11 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.05.12 ALCOHOLIC DRINKS, NARCOTICS, ARMS AND AMMUNITION AND

DISCIPLINE. The Contractor shall not import, sell, give, barter, or otherwise handle
any alcoholic drinks or narcotics, or permit or connive such importation, sale, distribution
as gifts, barter, or use by his employees or by the employees of his Subcontractors.
See Article 3-10 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.05.13 USE OF EXPLOSIVES. When the use of explosives is necessary for the
prosecution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care not to endanger
life or property, including new Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and
all damage resulting from the use of explosives.

The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of Section 1.04, "Control of
Materials" in these General Specifications and Section 2.04, "Controlled and Production
Blasting" complying with all laws, regulations, and ordinances concerning the use of
explosives.

44
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.05.14 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY AND

LANDSCAPE. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and
private property and shall protect carefully from disturbance or damage all land
monuments and property marks until the Engineer has witnessed or otherwise
referenced their location and shall not move them until directed.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any
character, during the prosecution of the Work, resulting from any act, omission, neglect,
or misconduct in his manner or method of executing the Work, or at any time due to
defective work or materials, and said responsibility will not be released until the project
is completed and accepted.

When or where any direct or indirect damage or injury is done to public or private
property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution
of the Work, or in consequence of the nonexecution thereof by the Contractor, he shall
restore, at his own expense, such property to a condition similar or equal to that existing
before such damage or injury was done, by repairing, rebuilding, or otherwise restoring
as may be directed, or he shall make good such damage or injury in an acceptable
manner.

1.05.15 FURNISHING RIGHTS-OF-WAY. The Ministry will be responsible for the

securing of all necessary permanent rights-of-way for the Work in advance of
construction. However, the Contractor shall bear all expenses and charges for
temporary access or ownership required by him in connection with access to the Work
Site, material sources, materials, or equipment storage, or other construction operations
outside of the permanent highway right-of-way. Any exception will be indicated in the
Contract Documents.

1.05.16 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS. The Contractor shall assume

all risk and liability for accidents and damages that may occur to persons or property
during the prosecution of the Work, by reason of negligence or carelessness by himself,
his agents or employees, and shall assume also all direct or indirect damage that may
be suffered on account of any such construction or improvement, during the time
thereof and until the Work is accepted.

Where the Work of the Contractor injures or damages the property of others, the
Contractor shall negotiate with the party so damaged and pay for such damage, leaving
the Ministry of Communications free of liability. This shall, among other things, include
damage to crops, trees, bushes, and disturbance of irrigation, water sources, etc. The
Contractor shall maintain and repair damage due to his construction equipment traffic,
at his own expense, on any public road used to, from, and through the project for
construction and hauling. The acceptability of this maintenance will be as determined
by the Engineer. See Article 3-8 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.05.17 OPENING OF SECTIONS TO TRAFFIC. Opening of sections of the Work

to traffic prior to completion of the entire Contract may be desirable from a traffic service
standpoint, or may be necessary due to conditions inherent in the Work, or by changes
in the Contractor's work schedule, and may be necessary due to conditions or events
unforeseen at the time of signing the Contract. Such openings as may be necessary
45
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

due to any of the foregoing conditions shall be made when so ordered by the Engineer.
When a section of the Work is ordered opened, the Contractor shall expedite the
completion of all permanent traffic control devices and safety measures. Such devices
and measures shall be completed by the time required to open the section to traffic.
Under no condition shall such openings constitute acceptance of the Work or a part
thereof, or a waiver of any provisions of the Contract.

If the Contractor is dilatory in completing shoulders, drainage structures, or other

features of the Work, the Engineer will so notify him in writing and establish therein a
reasonable period of time in which the Work shall be completed. If the Contractor fails
to make a reasonable effort toward completion in this period of time, the Engineer may
then order all or a portion of the project opened to traffic. On such sections which are
so ordered to be opened, the Contractor shall conduct the remainder of his construction
operations so as to cause the least obstruction to traffic and shall not receive any added
compensation due to the added cost of the Work by reason of opening such section to
traffic.

1.05.18 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE WORK. Until final written

acceptance (Final Handover) of the project by the Ministry, the Contractor shall have
the charge and care thereof and shall take every precaution against injury or damage
to any part of the project. Should any injury or damage occur due to construction or
maintenance deficiencies during the guarantee period or due to the fault or negligence
of the Contractor in fulfilling any of the explicit or implicit obligations assigned to him
under the contract arising from the execution or from the nonexecution of the Work, he
shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all injuries or damages to any portion of
the Work before final acceptance at his expense. However, in the case of Force
Majeure where the injury or damage to the Work is due to unforeseeable causes
beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, or arising
from the action of others (third party), the Contractor shall not bear the involved repair
costs but shall immediately inform the client of the injury or the damages and their
causes. The client may ask the Contractor to carry out the repair works as per the unit
prices incorporated into the contract.

Any amount to be collected from culpable parties as compensation with respect to

damage to the Work because of traffic accidents during the construction/maintenance
period or the warranty period, shall become the property of the Government. The
Contractor shall have no right to claim for such amounts, whether in whole or in part.
The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all damages to any portion
of the Work occasioned by any traffic accident before final acceptance, and shall bear
the expense thereof.

An "Act of God" means an earthquake, flood, cloudburst, tornado, or other

phenomena of nature beyond the power of the Contractor to foresee or to make
preparation in defense against. A rainstorm, windstorm, or other natural phenomenon
within the range of normal intensity, based on weather records and reports for the
particular locality and for the particular season of the year in which the Work is being
prosecuted, shall not be construed as an "Act of God" and the Contractor shall bear the
expense of repairing damages therefrom and no extension of time will be granted for
the consequent delay or suspension. No extension of time will be granted for any delay
46
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

or suspension of the Work due to the fault of the Contractor. No extension of time on
account of a delay due to unforeseen causes will be granted if written application
therefore is not filed by the Contractor with the Engineer setting forth the reasons which
he believes will justify the approval of his request.

If the Contractor files a request for an extension of time, the Engineer will notify the
Contractor, in writing, whether or not an extension has been recommended and, if
recommended, include the recommended amount of such extension. If the Ministry
approves of the Engineer's recommendation, the extended date for completion shall be
considered as in effect the same as if it were the original date for completion.

In case of suspension of Work from any cause whatever, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the project and shall take such precautions as may be necessary to
prevent damage to the project, provide for normal drainage and shall erect any
necessary temporary structures, signs, or other facilities at his expense. See Article 3-9
of the Conditions of Contract.

1.05.19 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY PROPERTY AND

SERVICES. At points where the Contractor's operations are adjacent to properties of
railway, telegraph, telephone, and power agencies or companies, or are adjacent to
other property, damage to which might result in considerable expense, loss or
inconvenience, the Work shall not be commenced until all arrangements necessary for
the protection thereof have been made.

The Contractor shall cooperate with the owners of any underground or overhead
utility lines in their removal and rearrangement operations in order that these operations
may progress in a reasonable manner and that duplication of rearrangement work may
be reduced to a minimum and that services rendered by those parties will not be
unnecessarily interrupted. The Contractor must consult Services Authorities prior to the
realignment of utilities. The concerned Authorities shall either instruct the Contractor
to carry out the Work under their supervision or carry out all or part of the Work
themselves. In all cases, the Contractor shall be reimbursed at the contract unit price
rate in the Bill of Quantities. The Contractor shall be responsible for settling all
expenses incurred by the Authority which executed the relocation of the Work.

The Contractor must investigate the site for underground utilities before
commencement of the Works. Any damage to utilities shall make the Contractor liable
to repair and penalties enforced by the Authorities at that time.

The Contractor shall exercise special care as to the clearance required at locations
where the alignment of any type of road or highway crosses in plan the alignment of
overhead power lines. The minimum clearances at such locations, measured vertically
from the top of the wearing course to the point of maximum deflection of the nearest
conductor, shall be as follows:

1. For power lines with voltage ranging from 13.8 KV up to 131 KV, the
clearance shall be not less that twelve (12) meters.

47
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

2. For power lines with voltage ranging from 132 KV up to 380 KV, the
clearance shall be not less than fifteen (15) meters.

The foregoing clearances are applicable at the maximum temperature of the

conductors, eighty degrees Celsius (80 C), without wind load.

In the event that the specified clearances cannot be accommodated, the Contractor
shall notify the Engineer in writing accordingly, and shall assist the Engineer in the
preparation of sketches and taking of all measurements necessary for resolution. No
Work related to substandard clearances, as above, shall start, until an approved set of
plans is issued to the Contractor by the Engineer.

In the event of interruption to water or utility services as a result of accidental

breakage, or as a result of being exposed or unsupported, the Contractor shall promptly
notify the proper authority and shall cooperate with the said authority in the restoration
of service. If essential public utility service is interrupted, repair work shall be
continuous until the service is restored. No Work shall be undertaken around fire
hydrants until provisions for continued service have been approved by the local fire
authority.

1.05.20 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In carrying out any of

the above provisions or in exercising any power or authority granted to him by his
Contract, there shall be no liability upon said Engineer or his authorized assistants,
either personally or as an official of the Ministry, it being understood that in such matters
he acts as the agent and representative of the Ministry.

1.05.21 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

1.05.21.1 General. The Contractor shall comply with all Ministry and Municipality laws
and regulations regarding protection against pollution of the
environment.

1.05.21.2 Pre-Construction Requirements. Prior to the start of project

construction, the Contractor shall contact the Ministry or Municipality responsible for air,
noise, and water quality control regulations to determine the standards which shall be
adhered to during construction operations.

1.05.21.3 Noise Abatement. In urban or populated rural areas where

quiet conditions normally prevail, no equipment which emits noise above seventy
(70) DBA (decibels, A-scale) measured at a distance of 16 m, shall be operated
between the hours of 6:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M. except under emergency conditions
or specific authorization from the Engineer. Local requirements shall apply if they
are more stringent than the requirements in these specifications.

1.05.21.4 Bituminous Mixing Plants. The following performance

standards will apply to all stationary bituminous mixing plants:

48
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

(1) Particulate matter emissions shall be limited to the

maximum number of milligrams per cubic meter at standard conditions established by
the responsible regulatory Ministry or Municipality.

(2) An existing stationary bituminous mixing plant will be

subject to the performance standards only if a physical change to the plant or change
in the method of operating the plant causes an increase in the amount of air pollutants
emitted. Routine maintenance, repair, and replacement, relocation of a portable plant,
change of aggregate, and transfer of ownership are not considered modifications which
will require an existing plant to comply with the standards.

1.05.21.5 Construction Requirements. The Contractor shall perform

construction activities in a manner so as to prevent damage to the environment as the
result of burning, drilling, blasting, production of materials, hauling, or any other
necessary construction operations of any kind in conformity with the regulations issued
by the responsible Kingdom Ministry.

All drilling, grinding, and sawing of rock, shale, concrete, and other similar dust-
producing materials shall be performed by equipment provided with water sprays, fabric
filtered collection systems, or other suitable devices to prevent excessive dust from
becoming airborne and becoming fugitive dust.

No construction operations shall be performed without an approved Fugitive Dust and

Erosion Control Plan developed and approved in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.3.7
"Fugitive Dust and Erosion Control Plan" in these General Specifications.

When concrete and steel surfaces are designated to be blast cleaned, the blast
cleaning may be performed by either wet sandblasting, high pressure water blasting,
blasting grits, shrouded dry sandblasting with dust collectors or other methods approved
by the Engineer. The method used shall be performed so as to conform to air and
water pollution regulations applicable to the site of work and to also conform to
applicable safety and health regulations. Any method which does not consistently
provide satisfactory work and conform to the above requirements shall be discontinued
and replaced by an acceptable method. All debris of every type, including dirty water,
resulting from the blast cleaning operation shall be reasonably confined during the
performance of the blast cleaning work and shall be immediately and thoroughly
cleaned from the blast cleaned surfaces and all other areas where any escaped debris
may have accumulated.

In reconstruction areas, the old roadway asphalt will be left undisturbed, placed at least
305 mm below the finished roadbed or sideslope, recycled, stockpiled for future use,
as specified in the contract. This material shall not be disposed of outside the roadway
subgrade without placement in an approved landfill or approved burial area.

1.05.21.6 Disposal of Unsuitable Materials. Items indicated for removal

without salvage, unsuitable construction materials and debris from clearing and
grubbing are to be placed in an environmentally suitable disposal site decided upon
and coordinated with appropriate regulatory agencies by the Contractor.

49
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Borrow material, rock waste and vegetative debris, etc., cannot be placed
in wetlands or areas that will impact endangered species or archaeological resources.

Application of prime coat, tack coat and soil sterilants in roadway surfacing
must avoid soils outside the roadway prism. Contamination must be carefully avoided
in wadis, irrigation supplies, wetlands, irrigation supplies, water impoundments and live
streams.

1.05.21.7 Water Quality. All work in the vicinity of live streams, water
impoundments, wetlands or irrigation supplies must minimize vegetation removal, soil
disturbance and erosion. Crossings with heavy equipment shall be minimal.
Equipment maintenance such as refueling and cement dumping is prohibited. The
Contractor is responsible for compliance with Paragraph 2.05.3.7, "Fugitive Dust and
Soil Erosion Control Plan," in these General Specifications.

1.05.21.8 Hazardous Waste Materials. The Contractor shall be

responsible for reporting and cleanup of spills associated with project construction and
shall report and respond to spills of hazardous materials such as gasoline, diesel, motor
oils, solvents, chemicals, toxic and corrosive substances, etc., that may be a threat to
public health or the environment. The Contractor shall be responsible for reporting
discoveries of past spills and of current spills not associated with construction. Reports
shall be made immediately to the Ministry Construction Department.

1.05.21.9 Fugitive Dust. The Contractor shall take all steps necessary
to minimize the fugitive dust and other deleterious materials from entering the air from
construction operations in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.3.7, "Fugitive Dust and Soil
Erosion Control Plan," in these General Specifications.

1.05.22 NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS. Upon completion of the Work, the

Ministry will expeditiously make final inspection and notify the Contractor of acceptance.
Such final acceptance, however, shall not preclude or stop the Ministry from correcting
any measurement, estimate, or certificate made before or after the completion of the
Work, nor shall the Ministry be precluded or stopped from recovering from the
Contractor or his Surety, or both, such overpayment as it may sustain, or by failure on
the part of the Contractor to fulfill his obligations under the Contract. A waiver on the
part of the Ministry of any breach of any part of the Contract shall not be held to be a
waiver of any other or subsequent breach.

The Contractor, without prejudice to the terms of the Contract, shall be liable to
the Ministry for latent defects, fraud, or such gross mistakes as may amount to fraud,
or as regards the Ministry's rights under any warranty or guarantee.

50
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 1.06 - PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS

1.06.1 SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT. The Contractor shall not sublet, sell,

transfer, assign, or otherwise dispose of the Contract or Contracts or any portion
thereof, or of his right, title, or interest therein, without written consent of the Ministry.
In case such consent is given, the Contractor will be permitted to sublet a portion
thereof, but shall perform with his own organization Work amounting to not less than
fifty percent (50%) of the total Contract cost, except that any items designated in the
Contract as "specialty items" may be performed by subcontract and the cost of any
such specialty items so performed by subcontract may be deducted from the total
cost before computing the amount of Work required to be performed by the
Contractor within his own organization. No subcontracts, or transfer of Contract,
shall in any case release the Contractor of his liability under the Contract and bonds.
See Article 3-2A of the Conditions of Contract.

1.06.2 PROGRAM AND SCHEDULE OF WORK.

1.06.2.1 Contract Time. Contract Time shall begin on the date of the
first Process-Verbal for the Handover of the site issued by the Engineer to the
Contractor, or twenty-eight (28) days after signing of the Contract, unless otherwise
stipulated in the General Conditions. See Article 5-1 of the Conditions of Contract.

No work shall be performed until the issuance of the Process-Verbal to

the Contractor by the Engineer. The Process-Verbal will state the date when the
Work may proceed and the areas in which the Contractor may perform Work. The
Work shall be diligently prosecuted at such a rate and in such manner as is
necessary for completion within the Contract Time. Additional Process-Verbals may
be issued before completion of Work already underway if, in the opinion of the
Engineer, it is necessary to expedite other parts of the project or to allow for
completion before seasonal limitations.

1.06.2.2 Construction Equipment. The Contractor shall plan, schedule

and supply equipment of the type and number necessary to assure timely
completion of the Works in accordance with these General Specifications, the
Special Specifications, and his CPM Project Schedule.

1.06.2.3 Preconstruction Conference. After the Contract is signed

and before any Work is performed, the Engineer will call a Preconstruction
Conference between himself, as representative of the Ministry, and representatives
of the Contractor. The Engineer may furnish the Contractor an agenda in advance
of the conference. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss his Program and
Schedule of Work, proposed construction procedures, and other items on the
agenda.

1.06.2.4 Conduct and Coordination. The Contractor shall at all times

conduct the Work in such manner and in such sequence as will insure the least
practicable interference with private traffic and he shall have due regard to the
necessity for convenient detours. He shall not open up Work to the prejudice of
51
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Work already started and the Engineer may require the Contractor to finish a section
on which Work is in progress before it is started on any additional section.

The Contractor shall coordinate his Work and dispose of his materials so
as not to interfere with the operations of other Contractors engaged upon adjacent
Work, shall coordinate his Work with that of others in a cooperative manner, and
perform his Work in the proper sequence in relation to that of other Contractors, as
may be directed by the Engineer.

Each Contractor shall be responsible for any damage done by him or his
agent to the Work performed by another Contractor. Each Contractor shall so
conduct his operations and maintain the Work in such condition that adequate
drainage shall be in effect at all times.

1.06.2.5 Preparation Period. Due to the importance of planning and

preparation before the start of the project, the Contractor shall carry out during the
preparation period (first 90 days after the site is handed over to the Contractor or as
proposed and approved in the CPM-Project Schedule) the following steps:

1. Review of Contract Drawings and related documents.

2. Execute all necessary survey works including the following:

(1) Locate roadway centerline and fix bench marks.

(2) Execute cross-sections for natural ground.

(3) Prepare necessary drawings shown actual natural ground

elevations and obtain approval. All survey work shall be carried out and contoured
as three dimensional X, Y, Z and produced on floppy diskettes readable on one of
the approved computer systems.

(4) Locate areas of cut and fill along the entire roadway alignment.

(5) Locate stations for concrete structures.

(6) Identify all obstructions and structures which interfere, within the
Right-of-Way, in preparation for finding adequate solutions in coordination with
concerned parties, if any.

3. Prepare a detailed Work Program for all work items to be accomplished

under the Preliminary Activity Schedule (PAS).

4. Prepare a site workshop location and provide the minimum number of

necessary equipment.

5. Prepare Engineer's Offices and Supervision Staff Compound during the

specified period in the Contract and according to Contract Conditions.

52
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

6. Locate borrow sources and obtain approval for adequate pits sources as
well as obtain written approval of Owners or concerned agencies.

7. Conduct all laboratory tests required for materials obtained from borrow
sources.

8. Identify location of crusher, install crusher and conduct necessary test

trials for crusher materials whether for concrete or asphalt paving. These locations
must be approved before erection.

9. Commence preparation of concrete and asphalt mix designs according

to Specifications and relevant Circulars and Special Specifications.

10. Prepare the necessary materials needed for the project including
materials list showing all necessary materials such as highway road studs, barriers,
etc. and other incidental items and obtain necessary approvals for the type, brand
and sources of supply.

11. Prepare a Preliminary Activity Schedule (PAS) for the preparation period
taking into account what is mentioned above and means of executing various items
accordingly.

12. Prepare necessary traffic detours schemes and obtain approvals from
concerned agencies.

13. Submit qualifications for all proposed technical staff and Subcontractors
for approval prior to start of work.

14. Prepare necessary forms for monthly certificates, related report forms for
monthly laboratory tests, request forms for approval, and other reports which will be
utilized during the construction including all necessary items.

1.06.2.6 Schedule of Work.

1.06.2.6.1 General Format and Purpose of the Progress Schedule

of Work.

1. The progress schedule of work to be prepared by the Contractor

pursuant to this Subsection shall employ a Network Analysis System (NAS) as
described below. The Contractor shall provide information and input required for
development of the NAS for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this
provision and other related Contract provisions. The purpose of the NAS shall be to:
(1) assure the Contractor adequately plans, schedules, and executes the Work to
achieve timely completion; (2) assure coordination of the Work of the Contractor and
all subcontractors; (3) assist the Contractor and Ministry in identifying and resolving
obstacles to successful completion of the Work and evaluating proposed changes to
the Contract and the NAS; and (4) assist the Engineer and the Contractor in the
preparation and evaluation of the monthly and final certificates.

53
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

2. The Contractor-prepared NAS system shall employ the Critical Path

Method (CPM) to satisfy time, cost and resource applications and shall be called the
Critical Path Method Project Schedule (CPM-PS). It shall be provided and operated
by onsite Contractor personnel at terminals located in the Contractor's onsite office.
The system selected shall be written for an independent personal computer or small
business type computer (IBM or IBM compatible) using the latest version of
Primavera Project Planner software or approved equal. The Contractor shall provide
the necessary computer hardware capability to support the project scheduling
requirements. Onsite management personnel shall have the expertise to operate
the software and/or the computer to address all project activities and resources on a
real time or interactive basis and be capable of rapidly evaluating alternative
scenarios to optimize project management. Evidence of technical expertise of the
onsite personnel with the system selected shall be submitted for the Engineer's
approval within fifteen (15) calendar days after the site is handed over to the
Contractor.

The Contractor shall use the "activity-on-arrow" format for the arrow
diagrams or the "activity-on-node" format for precedence diagrams. The principles
used herein shall be as set forth in the Associated General Construction Managers
of America (AGC) publication, "The Use of CPM in Construction, a Manual for
General Construction Managers and the Construction Industry," Copyright 1976.

3. All costs incurred by the Contractor in preparing all versions,

revisions and updates of the CPM-PS, as required herein, shall be reimbursed under
the lump sum item as defined in this proposal at Subsection 1.06.15 "Payment" in
these General Specifications.

4. No construction work on the project (other than mobilization and

traffic control) is allowed without an approved Preliminary Activity Schedule (PAS).
No progress payments will be made until the initial CPM-PS has been approved.

5. Should the prosecution of the Work be discontinued for any reason,

the Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of
resuming operations.

1.06.2.6.2 Contractor's NAS Representatives.

1. Before the Site is handed over to the Contractor, the Contractor shall
designate in writing an individual in the Contractor's organization who shall be the
Contractor's on-site full time authorized Planning and Scheduling Representative and
who shall be responsible for the preparation, updating, and revision of the NAS. The
Representative shall review and report progress of the project with the Contractor's
Project Manager and to the Engineer. This Representative shall have a minimum of
two (2) years experience on a multi-year project of complexity similar to this project. At
least one additional full-time scheduling or construction management engineer shall be
assigned to the authorized Representative to monitor progress and daily update the
NAS in accordance with the requirements of Subparagraph 1.06.2.6.8 "Contractor's
Daily Log" below.

54
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

2. The Contractor's Representative shall be delegated in writing the

authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in filling the NAS requirements. This
authority should not be interrupted throughout the duration of the project unless
approved in writing by the Engineer.

1.06.2.6.3 Preliminary Activity Schedule (PAS).

1. Requirement to Submit - No later than five (5) days after the Site is
handed over to the Contractor, the Contractor shall submit a ninety (90) Day Preliminary
Activity Schedule (PAS) to the Engineer for review and approval.

2. Form

(1) The PAS shall be in the form of a written narrative and will provide
a detailed breakdown of all contract activities scheduled for the preparation period. (90
calendar days after the site is handed over to the Contractor).

(2) The PAS shall include mobilization, all shop drawing and sample
submittals, and the fabrication and delivery of key and long -lead procurement activities.
The PAS shall indicate intended submittal dates and realistic delivery dates for
fabrication and delivery items. The PAS shall provide sufficient time, in accordance with
Subparagraph (3) below for the Engineer to review, approve and dispatch each shop
drawing or submittal after its receipt with the required information.

(3) Review and Approval of the PAS - The Engineer will respond in
seven (7) calendar days to the PAS submission and either approve the PAS or request
revisions. The Contractor shall provide the requested revisions in seven (7) calendar
days. The Engineer shall approve the PAS unless it does not reflect the requirements
of the Contract.

(4) Effect of the PAS - The Contractor's submission and use of an

approved PAS does not relieve the Contractor from his contractual requirement to
provide and implement an approved CPM-PS.

55
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.06.2.6.4 Initial CPM Project Schedule (Initial CPM-PS). Within sixty (60)
calendar days after Award of the Contract, the Contractor shall develop a proposed
CPM-PS and submit four (4) copies of all CPM-PS documents and one backup diskette
to the Engineer for review. The following requirements shall apply to all versions,
updates, and revisions of the CPM-PS; including all related documents, as required
herein:
1. General

(1) The CPM-PS shall consist of a schedule diagram and related

documents - including a written narrative, a list of proposed submittals and drawings,
duration and productivity assumptions.

(2) The CPM-PS will cover all activities required by the Contract -
including both construction and non-construction. To the extent feasible, an activity (or
groups of activities) shall be defined and related to discrete pay items.

(3) The Engineer may agree with the Contractor to limit the number of
activities on the CPM-PS diagram, or the Engineer may require that unreflected items
be added to it, based on what the Engineer considers to be reasonable for a project of
this scope and complexity.

(4) Failure by the Contractor to include in the CPM-PS any element of

work required for performance of the Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from
completing all elements of work required for performance of the contract by the contract
completion date.

(5) The Contractor shall prepare all schedule diagrams required by

this subsection using the Arrow Diagram Method (ADM) or Precedence Diagram
Method (PDM). The schedule diagram shall depict the order and interdependence of
all activities and the sequence of the work that is to be accomplished by the Contractor
in coordination with its subcontractors. The diagram shall be followed to show how the
completion of preceding activities restrict the start of following activities.

2. CPM-PS Diagram. The CPM-PS diagram shall include the

following:

(1) Construction activities shall have durations of whole working days,

with a maximum duration of twenty-five (25) working days each, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer. Activities with longer durations shall be divided into
subgroups of activities not exceeding twenty-five (25) working days in duration.

(2) Procurement and submittal activities may have durations

exceeding twenty-five (25) working days. Procurement and submittal activities include
mobilization, all shop drawing and sample submittals, and the fabrication and delivery
of key and long-lead procurement activities. The diagram shall indicate intended
submittal dates and realistic delivery dates for fabrication and delivery activities.
CPM-PS diagram shall provide the times for review, approval, and dispatch for each
shop drawing or submittal as required by the plans, specifications and Special Contract
56
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Requirements. Where no times are specified in the contract plans, specifications or

Special Contract Specifications, the CPM-PS diagram shall provide fourteen (14)
calendar days for the Engineer to review, approve and dispatch each shop drawing or
submittal after its receipt by the Engineer, unless otherwise directed or approved by the
Engineer.

(3) The CPM-PS diagram shall include all activities covered by the
PAS.

(4)The CPM-PS diagram shall include a concise description of the

Work represented by each activity, which shall be placed at or near the event node for
each activity. If the project is of sufficient complexity that the concise description cannot
be legibly placed on the diagram, the Contractor shall submit a tabulation of all activities
by their event node numbering.

(5)The CPM-PS diagram shall indicate the total number of anticipated

working days to complete each activity of work required under contract. The CPM -PS
diagram shall reflect a Saturday through Thursday work week, and no work on religious
holidays.

(6)The Late Finish as shown on the proposed CPM-PS diagram, must

equal the contract completion date as set forth in the Contract Documents. Early finish
date schedules will not be accepted.

3. Supporting Documents. The Contractor shall submit a list of all

drawing and sample submittals required for the entire contract period. This list shall
include the following information for each item:

(1)Item Number

(2)Item Description

(3)Related Activity ID Number and Description from the CPM

Schedule

(4)Planned Date of Initial Submittal

(5)Actual Date(s) of Initial (and all Subsequent) Submittals

(6)Planned Date of Engineer's Initial Response

(7)Actual Date(s) of Engineer's Initial (and Subsequent) Responses

(8)Status of Engineer's Initial (and Subsequent) Response(s) - i.e.

Approved, Rejected, Approved As Noted, etc.

(9)Comments

This list shall be updated whenever the CPM-PS is updated.

57
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

4. Narrative. The Contractor shall provide a written narrative along

with the proposed CPM-PS diagram describing the rationale and assumptions utilized
in the development of the proposed CPM-PS diagram. The narrative will serve, in
conjunction with the diagram, as the basis for the Engineer's review and approval of the
CPM-PS.

The written narrative shall include, at a minimum:

(1)A description of the planned critical path and the general sequence
of work.

(2)Information and references to adequately define the sc ope of work

included in each major activity type (i.e., unclassified excavation, aggregate base
course). This would include such information as station numbers, location, etc.

(3)A description of the means and methods the Contractor plans to

use in the performance of the Work for each major activity type. This would include
such information as subcontractors involved, types and numbers of labor utilized,
equipment to be employed, etc.

(4)A description of the basis for the calculation of the duration for all
activities, including planned weekly output, work accomplishment quantities (e.g., cubic
meters of excavation), equipment, etc., used to calculate how long an activity will take
to perform.

(5)A description of the assumptions used in converting working days

to calendar days; including anticipated holidays or non-work days.

(6)A description of any organizational constraints such as resource

limitations and subcontractor commitments which limit scheduling flexibility.

(7)It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that there is no conflict

between the diagram and the narrative. The Engineer's approval of the CPM -PS does
not waive this responsibility.

5. Review and Approval of the Initial CPM-PS

(1)Within twenty-one (21) calendar days of the receipt of the proposed

CPM-PS, the Engineer will either approve the proposed CPM-PS or convene a Joint
Review Conference at which the Engineer and the Contractor will discuss corrections
and adjustments to the proposed CPM-PS. If any corrections or adjustments to the
proposed CPM-PS are agreed upon or directed by the Engineer based on this review,
they shall be made and the adjusted Schedule submitted by the Contractor to the
Engineer for review and approval within fourteen (14) calendar days after the date of
this meeting.

(2)If after the second submission the Engineer determines that the
Schedule is still not acceptable because it is inconsistent with the physical or
58
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Contractual requirements or the constraints of the project, then the approval process
will continue as per paragraph (3)a above.

(3)When the proposed CPM-PS receives the final approval of the

Engineer, the Contractor shall, within seven (7) calendar days, sign on the face of two
sets of the CPM-PS, indicating the Contractor's express agreement that the CPM-PS
truly represents and includes all of the Work of the Contract. After the Contractor's
signing of the CPM-PS, the Engineer will also sign on the CPM-PS, indicating his
acceptance, which is qualified as stated herein.

(4)When the Engineer approves the CPM-PS, that document will

thereupon become the CPM-PS of Record. It is then converted to a Base Line
Schedule. Thereafter, the Contractor shall be responsible for implementing and
executing the Work under the contract in accordance with that Schedule, unless a
Revision to that Schedule is approved by the Engineer in accordance with the
procedures below. An approved revised or updated CPM -PS of Record becomes the
current CPM-PS of Record. The current CPM-PS of Record will be considered the
Contractor's work plan for completing the entire contract as set forth in the contract
documents.

(5)The Engineer's review and approval of the Contractor's Schedule,

at any stage, is for conformance to the requirements of this Section only. Review and
approval by the Engineer of the Contractor's Schedule or narratives at any stage does
not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibility whatsoever for the accuracy or
feasibility of the Project Schedule, or of the Contractor's ability to meet the Contract
Completion Date and other contractual requirements, nor does such review and
approval warrant, acknowledge or admit the reasonableness of the logic, durations,
labor, or equipment loading of the Contractor's Schedule.

1.06.2.6.5 CPM-PS Updates and CPM-PS Revisions.

1. Timing of updates and revisions

Job Site Monthly Update progress meetings shall be held on a date

mutually agreed to by the Engineer and the Contractor.

Presence of Subcontractors during the progress meeting is optional

unless required by the Engineer. The Contractor is required to submit actual Activity
Start and Finish dates on the CPM-PS turnaround document along with identification
of obstacles to timely completion for each monthly progress meeting. The preliminary
Update information will be submitted to the Engineer three (3) days prior to the meeting
date. Proposed revisions to the CPM-PS shall be submitted in writing with the update
or as they are determined necessary by either party. It is the Contractor's responsibility
to propose a revision to the CPM-PS whenever a deviation from the CPM-PS of Record
is proposed, planned, or when directed by the Engineer. The proposed revision to the
CPM-PS shall include a Time Impact Analysis in accordance with below.

59
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

2. CPM-PS Updates. CPM-PS updates shall contain complete information

on and be reviewed to verify:

(1) Actual finish dates for completed activities.

(2) Remaining duration, required to complete each activity started,

or scheduled to start, but not completed.

(3) Logic, time and cost data for contract modifications and
supplemental agreements that are to be incorporated into the Arrow diagram. Changes
in activity sequence and durations which have been approved pursuant to the
provisions of CPM-PS Revisions.

(4) Percentage for completed and partially completed activities.

(5) Logic and duration revisions required by this Section of the

specifications.

The Contractor shall submit a narrative report as a part of his monthly

Update Progress Meeting and full Update, in a form agreed upon by the Contractor and
the Engineer. The narrative report shall include a description of problem areas; current
and anticipated delaying factors and their estimated impact on performance of other
activities and completion dates; and an explanation of corrective action taken or
proposed.

After each monthly update, the Contractor shall submit within seven (7)
calendar days to the Engineer four (4) copies of a revised complete CPM -PS diagram
showing all completed and partially completed activities, contract changes and logic
changes agreed to by the Engineer on the subject update. This shall become the
CPM-PS of Record.

The monthly updating of the CPM-PS is necessary to verify the certificate

upon which progress payments will be made. If the Contractor fails to provide sufficient
information for the Engineer to approve a Progress Update or Revision of the CPM -PS,
the Contractor shall not be entitled to progress payments until the necessary
information is furnished and the Engineer's approval is obtained.

3. CPM-PS Revisions. A Revised CPM-PS reflects a change to the logic

or some other modification to the schedule of planned work.

Requirements for Submitting and Executing a Proposed Revision to the

CPM-PS are as follows:

(1) Form of a Proposal to Revise the CPM-PS

1) All proposals to revise the CPM-PS shall

include a written narrative describing the changes to the critical path and any logic
revisions or modifications to the schedule, including, but not limited to, changes in the
method or manner of the work, changes in Specifications, extra work, changes in
60
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

duration, the addition or deletion of work, increased or decreased quantities, defective

work, and acceleration of the work.

2) When any delays or disruptions have

occurred, or are occurring, which impact current or future activities, the extent of these
impacts shall be depicted on the proposed CPM-PS diagram. Delays and disruptions
which are ongoing and of uncertain duration as of the date of the proposed revision
shall be so identified. In addition, if the Contractor alleges any Ministry-caused or
excusable delays during the current period for which the schedule update is made, a
Time Impact Analysis must be submitted in accordance with Subparagraph 1.06.2.6.6,
"Time Impact Analysis For Proposed Time Extensions" below.

3) When any delays or disruptions have

occurred which are the contractual responsibility of the Contractor - i.e. which do not
entitle the Contractor to a time extension under the terms of the Contract - the
Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the Contractor's proposed efforts to return the
project to a schedule consistent with the terms of the Contract - including the
commitment of additional resources or other appropriate action.

If the Contractor deems this not to be possible, the

Engineer shall be advised of the extent to which completion dates or other terms of the
Contract will not be met so that the Government may evaluate its options under the
terms of the Contract.

(2) Execution of a Proposed Revision to the CPM-PS

When the parties agree to a proposed revision to the CPM -PS,

the Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of the revised CPM-PS within seven (7) days
after the parties reach agreement. The revised CPM-PS shall include all of the items
required by Subparagraph 1.06.2.6.4, "Initial CPM Protect Schedule (Initial CPM-PS),"
above, plus a narrative description of the basis for the approved revisions to the
CPM-PS. The revised CPM-PS shall be executed in accordance with Subparagraph
1.06.2.6.4.5 "Review and Approval of the Initial CPM-PS."

(3) Effect of the Submission of a Revised or Update Schedule

Submission of an updated or revised CPM-PS Schedule shall

not in itself be considered to be Notice to the Engineer of a delay or disruption, or of any
other basis for a change under the Contract.

1.06.2.6.6 Time Impact Analysis for Proposed Time Extensions.

1. General - When Contract Modifications are initiated, delays are

experienced, or the Contractor desires to revise the Project Schedule, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer a written Time Impact Analysis as specified below.

The activities and event times in the Time Impact Analysis shall be
those included in the current CPM-PS of Record, except as the Contractor is proposing
they are affected by the situation in question.
61
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Once any Time Impact Analysis is approved by the Engineer both

parties agree to waive any rights to re-evaluate the impacts, evaluated therein, at a later
date.

2. Ministry Requested Contract Modifications - When requested by the

Ministry in connection with a proposed Contract Modification, the Contractor shall
prepare a proposed revision to the CPM-PS with a Time Impact Analysis reflecting, in
detail, the anticipated impact of the Contract Modification. This revised CPM -PS will be
used as a basis to grant any additional contract time resulting from the Contract
Modification.

3. Delays, Disruptions, or Notification of a Contractor Proposed Contract

Modification.

(1)When delays and disruptions occur, or notification of a Contractor

proposed contract modification is given, which the Contractor deems to warrant a time
extension under the terms of the Contract, such events shall be identified and the
Engineer given written notice within seven (7) calendar days after the commencement
of an alleged delay or notification. This notice shall detail the contractual basis of the
extension to which the Contractor alleges entitlement.

(2)When the Contractor submits the Contractor-proposed contract

modification or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the end of a delay and/or
disruption event which the Contractor has given notice of in accordance with (a) above,
the Contractor must submit to the Engineer a Time Impact Analysis which reflects and
analyzes the alleged delay and/or disruption event or contract modification which the
Contractor deems to warrant a time extension under the terms of the Contract.

In cases where the Contractor does not submit a Time Impact Analysis
as required above, it is mutually agreed that the particular contract modification, delay
or Contractor request does not require an extension of time to the interim milestone
date or the Contract Completion Date, and the Contractor hereby waives its right to
subsequently request a time extension.

4. Format of a Time Impact Analysis - Each Time Impact Analysis shall

include, at a minimum, the following documents or information:

(1)The current CPM-PS of Record.

(2)A Narrative Impact Analysis - A detailed narrative description of

each alleged impact event shall be provided. The alleged impact to each and every
specifically affected activity in the Current CPM-PS shall be described in detail,
including how each activity referenced in the Time Impact Analysis reflects the alleged
impact.

This narrative shall describe, at a minimum, 1) the cause of the

impact, 2) the start date of the impact, 3) the duration of the impact, specifically
describing how Contractor caused delays were deleted from the analysis, 4) the
62
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

activities affected, and 5) whatever methods the Contractor can employ, at no or

minimal cost to the Ministry, to re-sequence or reschedule the work to mitigate the
delay.

(3)Fragmentary Network Diagram (Fragnet) - The alleged impact to

each and every specifically affected activity in the Current CPM-PS shall be drawn on
the Fragmentary Network Diagram (Fragnet) which consists of only that portion of the
CPM-PS Arrow Diagram which is affected by the alleged impact.

(4)As-Properly Impacted Schedule - The Current CPM-PS of Record

shall be revised to show the impact of the activities identified above (including any
re-sequencing which would mitigate the delay). If any interim or Contract completion
date is delayed, the amount of the requested time extension shall be noted as a request
for a delay to that date.

Each Time Impact Analysis shall be consecutively numbered.

5. Analysis of a Request for an Extension of Time

(1)General

1) Any request for an extension of the contract time will be

determined by the Engineer's review of the Time Impact Analysis' effect on the current
CPM-PS of Record.

2) Activity delays shall not automatically mean that an

extension of the Interim or Final Contract Completion Date is warranted or due the
Contractor. A delay may not affect existing critical activities or cause non-critical
activities to become critical, but may result in only absorbing a part of the available total
float that may exist within an activity chain of the Network, thereby not causing any
effect on any interim completion date or the Final Contract Completion Date.

3) Only delays to activities which affect interim completion

dates or contract completion dates will be considered for a time extension. The
extension of the specified Contract Completion Date will be based upon the actual
number of calendar days the Contract Completion Date is adjusted.

4) Extensions of time to interim completion dates and the

Contract Completion Date will be granted only if requested in writing by the Contractor
within the applicable notice period.

(2)Float - No extensions of the specified Interim or Contract

Completion Dates will be issued for work performed on activities with available float.
Float is defined as the amount of time between an activity "can start" (the early start)
and when an activity "must start" (the late start). Float is a shared commodity, not for
the exclusive use or benefit of either party. Either party has the full use of the float until
it is depleted. Float may be consumed by the Contractor through routine operational
considerations; by the Ministry through Contract Modifications, or other actions which
are its responsibility; or by unusually severe weather, strikes or other actions which are
63
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

the responsibility of neither the Contractor nor the Government. Each updated or
revised Schedule shall depict float as it is currently projected. Once all or part of this
float has been consumed, it will no longer be an issue with respect to subsequent
events.

(3)Contractor's Duty to Mitigate - It is the Contractor's duty to attempt

to mitigate delay. The Contractor shall, in its analysis, discuss what measures it plans
to take to mitigate delay. These shall include, at least, those items of no cost to the
Ministry.

Any measures which are alleged to increase cost, such as additional

staffing or equipment, shall be accompanied by corresponding Rationale and
Assumptions which analyzes the additional requirements. In addition, any Time Impact
Analysis which does not include a discussion of the feasibility of re-sequencing future
work to mitigate delay at no cost to the Ministry shall be rejected.

6. Extensions to Contract Dates - The Ministry desires all contract work

(including all work associated with an approved Time Impact Analysis) to be completed
by the Contract Completion Date. Therefore, no time extensions to any contract
completion date will be granted unless agreed to by the Engineer.

7. Review and Execution of the Time Impact Analysis - The Engineer will
review the request for an extension of time in accordance with the provisions of this
Paragraph, and will respond, within twenty-one (21) calendar days after receipt unless
subsequent meetings and negotiations are necessary by either acknowledging
responsibility for the delay, or by denying responsibility and instructing the Contractor
to take appropriate action to return the project to an acceptable schedule. Following
the Engineer's review, a copy of the Time Impact Analysis, signed by the Engineer, will
be returned to the Contractor, and approved logic changes or time extensions will be
incorporated into the CPM-PS by the Contractor by or before the next monthly meeting.

1.06.2.6.7 Responsibility for Completion.

The Contractor shall furnish sufficient forces, offices, facilities and

equipment, and shall work such hours including night shift and overtime operations, as
necessary to ensure the prosecution of the Work in accordance with the current monthly
Project Schedule Update. If the Contractor falls behind in meeting the Project Schedule
as presented in the current monthly Schedule Update due to staffing or equipping the
project with fewer resources than shown on the CPM-PS Schedule of Record or his rate
of productivity falls below that planned, the Contractor shall take such steps as may be
necessary to improve its progress. The Engineer may require it to increase the hours
of work, the number of shifts, overtime operations and/or the amount of construction
plant and equipment.

Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the above

paragraph shall be a basis for determination by the Engineer that the Contractor is not
prosecuting the Work with such diligence as will ensure completion within the Contract
Completion Date. If the Schedule shows completion beyond the Contract Completion
Date, or if the Contractor's actual progress is less than that required by the Contractor's
64
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

currently approved Schedule in order to complete by the Contract Completion Date,

there will be ten percent (10%) of the amount of all progress payments withheld until
completion or until progress is improved so as to permit completion by the Contract
Completion Date. If the Contractor fails to improve progress so as to permit completion
by the Contract Completion Date, the Ministry may exercise its rights Subsection 1.06.9,
"Forfeiture of Contract and Conditions Thereof" in these General Specifications.

1.06.2.6.8 Contractors Daily Log.

The Contractor shall document, on a daily basis, progress on each

scheduled activity contained in the Contract Schedule. For the purpose of this
subsection, scheduled activity shall mean those activities contained in the latest
approved CPM schedule update which has in fact started, should start or can start on
the subject day according to the actual start or the calculated early start designation.
The elements of the daily documentation for each scheduled activity shall consist of
the following:

1. Whether any work was actually performed on that activity.

2. If work was performed, a brief description of the work performed.

3. Man power expended on that activity by craft or subcontractor.

4. Equipment resources expended by equipment type and equipment

number.

5. Deliveries of materials having an individual value in excess of SR

10,000.

6. The actual start and/or the actual completion date, if applicable.

7. Percentage of total work deemed complete for that day.

8. If no work was performed, a brief explanation as to why work was not

performed.

Within two (2) hours of the start of the first shift of the following workday,
the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a printed report containing the above
information.

Daily recording of the schedule activity progress shall continue until the
activity is determined by the Engineer to be one hundred percent (100%) complete.
This data shall be collected on a 5.25 inch or 3.5 inch MSDOS-compatible electronic
floppy disk media using the DBF format. Each month, the Contractor shall furnish to
the Owner, the progressed daily documentation data disk along with the monthly CPM
update and the monthly progress payment estimate. The current percentage complete
for each activity shall exactly match the percentage complete shown in CPM Schedule
Update reports. Compliance may be achieved through the use of Daily Log or equal.

65
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Failure to submit these complete printed reports or the required electronic

data by the date specified will be considered cause for withholding any progress
payments otherwise due under the Contract. Furthermore, failure to submit the CPM
Schedule Update and Daily reports will result in costs to the Ministry; therefore, at the
option of the Ministry, the Contractor shall pay the Ministry SR 5,000 for the first day the
submittal is late and SR 1,000 per day for each late thereafter. This amount shall be
deducted from any amount otherwise due the Contractor.

1.06.2.6.9 As-Built Progress Documentation.

Prior to provisional handover, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a
complete and fully progressed daily documentation data disk, including all the data
elements specified above. The level of detail shall be such as to enable the preparation
of as-built schedule fully synchronized with the project CPM and capable of showing
progress (or no progress) as the daily level of detail.

1.06.3 NIGHT WORK. Part Five, "Concrete, Steel and Structures" in these General
Specifications permits night concrete Work during periods with high daytime
temperatures. Otherwise, if the Work is not specifically specified in the Contract
Documents to be performed both day and night, the Contractor must request
permission to Work by night as well as by day. The Ministry may grant such permission
but the Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for so doing. Such
permission will not be denied the Contractor unless there is an equivalent practicable
method of expediting the progress of the Work. All Work at night shall be performed
without unreasonable noise and disturbance and the Contractor shall reimburse and
indemnify the Ministry for and against any damage resulting from the noise and
disturbance during the progress of the Work or because of it, as well as for all claims,
demands, costs, charges, and expenses whatsoever in regard to or in relation to such
liability. See Article 5-4 of the Conditions of Contract.

Whenever Work is being done by the Contractor in other than daylight hours, he
shall provide suitable lighting equipment, approved by the Engineer, so that the Work
can be carried on in the same manner as during the daylight hours. When public traffic
is routed through or adjacent to the Work, additional traffic control devices may be
required to maintain safety during night Work.

1.06.4 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN: METHODS AND EQUIPMENT.

1.06.4.1 Work Force. The Contractor shall at all times employ sufficient labor
and equipment for prosecuting the several classes of the Work to full completion in the
manner and time required by the specifications.

The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for employing the
laborers required for the execution of the Work. Priority should be given, however, to
citizens of the area who have the required qualifications. The Ministry may provide the
Contractor with up to fifteen percent (15%) of the laborers required for performing the
Work, and the Contractor shall be compelled to hire them for Work suitable to their
qualifications, at the rates prevailing for similar laborers, provided that this will not waive
the responsibility of the Contractor and his obligations toward these laborers regarding
66
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

setting their salaries in accordance with the regulations in force and the employment
agreement signed with them. All workmen shall have sufficient skill and experience to
perform properly the Work assigned to them. Workmen engauged in special Work or
skilled Work shall have sufficient experience in such Work and the operation of the
equipment required to perform all Work properly and satisfactorily.

Any person employed by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor who, in the

opinion of the Engineer, does not perform his Work in a proper and skillful manner, or
is intemperate or disorderly shall, at the written request of the Engineer, be removed
forthwith by the Contractor or Subcontractor employing such person, and shall not be
employed again in any portion of the Work without the approval of the Engineer.

Should the Contractor fail to remove such person or persons as required above,
or fail to furnish suitable and sufficient personnel for the proper prosecution of the Work,
the Engineer may suspend the Work by written notice until such orders are complied
with. These orders shall have no effect on Contract Time.

See Article 3-10 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.06.4.2 Construction Methods. All equipment which is proposed to be used

on the Work shall be of sufficient size and in such mechanical condition as to meet
requirements of the Work and to produce satisfactory quality of Work. Equipment used
on any portion of the project shall be such that no injury to the roadway, adjacent
property, or other highways will result from its use.

When the Contract specifies that the construction be performed by the use of
certain methods and equipment, such methods and equipment shall be used unless
others are authorized by the Engineer. If the Contractor desires to use a method or
type of equipment other than those specified in the Contract, he may request authority
from the Engineer to do so. The request shall be in writing and shall include a full
description of the methods and equipment proposed to be used and an explanation of
the reasons for desiring to make the change. If approval is given, it will be on the
condition that the Contractor will be fully responsible for producing Work in conformity
with Contract requirements. If, after trial use of the substituted methods or equipment,
the Engineer determines that the Work produced does not meet Contract requirements,
the Contractor shall discontinue the use of the substitute method or equipment and
shall complete the remaining construction with the specified methods and equipment.
The Contractor shall remove the deficient Work and replace it with Work of specified
quality, or take such other corrective action as the Engineer may direct. No change will
be made in basis of payment for the construction items involved nor in Contract Time
as a result of authorizing a change in methods or equipment under these provisions.

1.06.5 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK. The Ministry shall have the

authority to suspend the Work wholly or in part for such reasonable time period or
periods as it may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather or such other conditions
of the Work, for which suspension is provided for in the Contract, or for such time as it
is necessary due to the failure on the part of the Contractor to carry out orders given or
to perform any or all provisions of the Contract. If it should become necessary to stop
the Work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such manner
67
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

that they will not obstruct or impede the traveling public unnecessarily nor become
damaged in any way, and he shall take every precaution to prevent damage or
deterioration of the Work performed, erect temporary structures where necessary, and
provide suitable drainage of the roadway by opening ditches, shoulder drains, etc. The
Contractor shall not suspend Work without written authority. See Article 4-5 of the
Conditions of Contract.

1.06.6 DEFECTS AND DEFAULTS.

1.06.6.1 Removal of Defective Work or Materials. The Engineer shall have

power during the progress of the Work to give verbal orders, which shall be confirmed
later in writing, for the following:

Removal of any materials from the site which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
are not in accordance with the Contract.

Substitution of proper and suitable materials for the unsuitable materials.

Removal and proper reconstruction of any Work which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
is not in accordance with the Contract in respect to materials or workmanship.

1.06.6.2 Contractor's Failure to Comply with Ministry Orders. In case of

failure by the Contractor to carry out a removal order issued to him by the Ministry, the
Ministry shall have the right to employ and pay other persons to carry out the Work
involved in the order. All expenses consequent thereto and incidental thereto shall be
borne by the Contractor and shall be recoverable from him by the Ministry by deduction
from any monies due to him or from any monies which may become due to him.

See Article 4-4 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.06.7 DETERMINATION AND EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME. The time for

completion of the Work will be specified in the Tender and the Form of Contract and the
completion of the Work within the Contract Time specified is an essential part of the
Contract.

Contract Time shall begin on the date of the first Process-Verbal for the Handover
of the site issued by the Engineer to the Contractor, or twenty-eight (28) days after the
date of signing of the Contract.

Work which will require inspection of the Engineer will not be permitted on Fridays,
legal holidays, or Holy Days except that which may be necessary to preserve and
protect the Work.

The above provision relative to Friday and holiday Work may be waived but only
with the written approval of the Ministry. The above provisions relative to Fridays,
holidays, and Holy Day work do not preclude the repairing of equipment or the
performing of other minor Work which requires no inspection of the Engineer.

68
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Additional working days may be granted for Work added to the Contract. Such
additional working days will be computed by the Engineer with due regard to the nature
of the additional Work.

Additional working days may be granted to compensate for working days lost due
to causes entirely beyond the Contractor's control or for partial Contract Time lost due
to causes that hampered the normal prosecution of the Work and that were entirely
beyond the Contractor's control, provided that the following provisions are complied
with:

The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after such delays occur, and prior to
the expiration of the Contract Time period, make written request to the Engineer for an
extension in the number of working days, stating the number of working days lost or the
amount of partial Contract Time lost due causes beyond his control, together with
sufficient proof to establish his claim.

Additional working days, if authorized, will be computed by the Engineer for the
Contract as a whole and not proportioned for separate Work divisions. See Article 5-3
of the Conditions of Contract.

1.06.8 DELAY PENALTY. If the Contractor does not complete the Work within the
Contract Time, plus any approved extensions of the Contract Time, he shall be liable
for such penalty as may be called for in the Contract and the General Conditions of
Contract.

The penalty shall be computed on the basis of the final total sum of the whole
Contract if, in the opinion of the Ministry, the unfinished part makes it impossible to
safely receive full benefits from use the completed Work within the time specified,
hampers the use of any other facility, or affects directly the completed Work.

In order to receive full benefit from the completed Work, all remaining Work must
be accomplished from the shoulder with traffic control in accordance with Section 9.02,
"Traffic Control through Work Zones" in these General Specifications. If the unfinished
part does not make it impossible to safely receive full benefit from the executed Work
within the time specified, does not hamper the use of any other facility, or does not
affect directly the executed Work, the penalty shall be computed on the basis of cost
of the unfinished part of the delayed Work only.

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract, all costs of inspection for all
Work performed after the expiration of the stipulated Contract Time shall be borne by
the Contractor, and the Engineer's normal charges to the Ministry shall be deducted
from the Monthly Certificate therefor. See Article 5-6 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.06.9 FORFEITURE OF CONTRACT AND CONDITIONS THEREOF. The

Ministry shall have the right to take over the Work from the Contractor in any of the
following occurrences:

69
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1. If the Contractor has failed to pay his creditors or has become bankrupt or
presented his petition of bankruptcy or has made an engagement with, or agreed to
carry out the Contract under the direction of a committee of his creditors, or

2. If the Contractor, being a corporation, shall go into liquidation or voluntary

liquidation for the purpose of amalgamation or reconstruction, and the Ministry does not
find it in the interest of the Work to continue under such new arrangement, or

3. If, without any reasonable excuse, the Contractor has failed to commence the
Work or has slowed down the progress of the Work to the extent that leads the Ministry
to believe the Work would not be completed as scheduled, or has suspended the Work
for a period that exceeds thirty (30) days after receiving from the Engineer, written
notice to proceed, or

4. If the Contractor has failed to remove materials from the site or demolish and
replace any portion of the Work within thirty (30) days after receiving written notice from
the Engineer specifying materials to be removed or Work to be demolished and
replaced, and reasons thereof, or

5. If the Contractor has committed a breach of Contract or neglected to carry out

any of his obligations under the Contract, or

6. If the Contractor has committed any act of fraud, personally or through any of
his agents or employees, or

7. If the Contractor has assigned the whole Work of any part thereof of any of the
monies due him, without the previous written consent of the Ministry.

The Ministry will take over the Work twenty (28) days after a notice is served upon
the Contractor and the following shall take place:

(1) The Ministry will take possession of the Performance Guarantee already
submitted by the Contractor, without having to prove damages suffered. Such action
shall not prejudice the right of the Ministry to charge and obtain from the Contractor any
compensation for damages suffered.

(2) Not relieving the Contractor from his liabilities and obligations under the
Contract, and on his own account and responsiblity, the Ministry will execute the
unfinished Work or contract with another Contractor to do so through public or local
tender, negotiation, or by any other way the Ministry deems fit.

(3) If, for the portion or portions of the Work that the Contractor failed to
complete and the Ministry executed as in the previous manner, the cost therefor
exceeds those of the Contract, the Contractor shall bear such excess costs, but any
savings in cost shall be the right of the Ministry.

1.06.10 METHOD OF ACTION IN CASE OF FORFEITURE. The Engineer, will, in

the presence of the Contractor, or a representative of his, prepare a report covering the
Work completed and equipment available at the site. Materials already supplied for use
70
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

shall not be accepted until after they have been inspected and tested by the Engineer,
provided that such materials are suitable for use and in quantities that do not exceed
those quantities required for completion of the Work. The Contractor shall not remove
any of his or his subcontractor's equipment from the site.

The Engineer will make calculations of the Work executed on the account of the
Contractor as stated above, and the Contractor shall pay the Ministry any losses
suffered due to unfinished portions of the Work or any other damages in accordance
with the provisions of the Contract. However, if the Ministry concludes that failure of the
Contractor to complete the Work was not due to any of his fault, or due to carelessness,
or lack of good administration on his part (on condition that the Contractor informs the
Ministry in due time of the case and the actual reasons that caused such failure), the
Ministry may, but shall not be bound to do so, relieve the Contractor from the rights due,
or part thereof.

The Ministry shall have the right to confiscate all or part of the equipment,
instruments, and materials supplied by the Contractor and used by him for the
completion of the Work, but shall not be responsible to the Contractor, or to anyone
else, for any rent charges or expenses. The Ministry shall have the right to retain such
items until after the Final Handover.

1.06.11 PAYMENT AFTER FORFEITURE. After forfeiture, the Ministry will not pay
to the Contractor any portion of the monies due him for completed Work, or for
equipment and materials that will be used in completing the unfinished portion or
portions of the Work, until the expiry of the Period of Maintenance.

However, the Period of Maintenance shall not start for any of the completed Work
until after the Provisional Handover for the whole Work, including the completion of the
delayed portions of the Work.

1.06.12 URGENT REPAIRS. If by reason of an accident or failure, or other event

occurring to, in, or in connection with the Work or any part thereof, either during the
execution of the Work or during the Period of Maintenance, any remedial or other Work
or repair shall in the opinion of the Engineer be urgently necessary for safety or
security, and the Contractor is unable or unwilling at once to perform such Work or
repair, the Ministry may by his own or other workmen perform such Work or repair as
the Engineer may consider necessary. If the Work or repair so performed by the
Ministry is Work, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor was liable to do
at his own expense under the Contract, then all costs and charges properly incurred by
the Ministry in so doing shall, on demand, be paid by the Contractor to the Ministry, or
may be deducted by the Ministry from any monies due or which may become due to the
Contractor; provided always that the Engineer shall, as soon after the occurrence of
such emergency as may be reasonably practical, notify the Contractor thereof in writing.
See Article 11-2 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.06.13 TERMINATION OF CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY. The Contractor

shall be released from further Work on the project upon receiving a written Process-
Verbal from the Ministry notifying the Contractor of the approval of the Final Handover.
See Article 6-4 of the Conditions of Contractor.
71
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.06.14 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. "Construction Schedule" will include all

materials, computer equipment, labor, supervision, maintenance, support and incidental
items required by this Section. The lump sum price for this Work will be all inclusive for
all versions of the construction schedule specified, developed, submitted, updated,
revised and maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer in accordance with the
requirements of this Section.

1.06.15 PAYMENT.

1.06.15.1 Regular Payment Schedule. The Initial Approved CPM-PS,

Preliminary Activity Schedule, CPM-PS Revisions, and all CPM-PS Updates thereto for
maintaining the schedules, will be paid for at the lump sum price bid for Pay Item No.
10601- Construction Schedule. Twenty-five percent (25%) of the lump sum price bid
for the CPM-PS and PAS (except when the price bid exceeds one-half (1/2) of one
percent (1%) of the total contract price bid) will be paid upon approval of the initial
CPM-PS with the balance paid upon a monthly prorated sum based upon the specified
contract duration.

1.06.15.2 Special Payment Schedule. When the price bid for the CPM-PS
exceeds one-half (1/2) of one percent (1%) of the total contract price bid, the following
shall prevail; the total progress payments for the Approved CPM-PS will be limited to
one-half (1/2) of one percent (1%) of the total contract price as bid by the Contractor
and will be paid in accordance with the above. Any remaining balance (over one-half
(1/2) of one percent 1%) of the total contract price bid) will be paid upon final contract
payment.

1.06.15.3 Scope of Payment. The items of Work, measured as provided

above will be paid at the contract unit price(s) for each item as specified in the Bill of
Quantities, which price(s) shall be full compensation for furnishing all material and
furnishing, for all labor, equipment, tools, supplies and all other items necessary for
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 "Scope of Payment."

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

10601 Construction Schedule Lump Sum

72
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 1.07 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

1.07.1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES.

1.07.1.1 General. All Work completed under the Contract shall be measured
according to the Metric System.

The method of measurement and computations to be used in determination of

quantities of material furnished and of Work performed under the Contract shall be
those methods generally recognized as conforming to good engineering practice and
current MOC circulars. All methods shall be as approved or directed by the Engineer.

All field measurements shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer, including measurements for monthly pay certificate quantities and for final
quantities. Original copies of the field measurement notes, signed by the Contractor,
will be retained by the Engineer.

Quantities shall be computed by the Contractor and will be checked by the

Engineer. Copies of the quantity computations, including cross sections, shall be
delivered to the Engineer at least five (5) days prior to the date set by the Engineer for
his submittal of the pay certificate.

If the Contractor fails to or refuses to measure items of Work, the Engineer may,
at his discretion, estimate quantities for the monthly pay certificate or make no payment
certificate for the items of Work not measured and quantities not computed.
See Articles 9-1 and 9-2 of the Conditions of Contract.

1.07.1.2 Measurements. Unless otherwise specified, longitudinal

measurements for area computations shall be made horizontally, and no deductions will
be made for fixtures (manholes, etc.) having an area of one (1) square meter or less.
Unless otherwise specified, transverse measurements for area computations shall be
the neat dimensions shown on the plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer.

Structures shall be measured according to neat lines shown on the plans or as

altered by direction of the Engineer to meet field conditions.

All items which are measured by the linear meter, such as pipe culverts,
guardrail, underdrains, etc., shall be measured parallel to the base or foundation upon
which such structures are placed, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Pipe culverts
shall be measured parallel to the centerline of the pipe.

1.07.1. 3 Earthwork. In computing volumes of earthwork, the average end

area method shall be used in computing quantities, except where the error exceeds
plus or minus five percent (5%) as compared with the prismoidal formula, in which case
the Engineer will direct the use of the more accurate method. However, the Contractor
shall request such direction before he submits his quantities for approval. He will not
be allowed to ask for review of quantities previously approved in order to revise them,

73
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

if they have been submitted on the average end area basis, without prior permission to
use a more accurate method.

The quantities of excavation which will be paid for under contract unit price(s)
shall be limited to the lines shown on the plans, drawings, or standard drawings, and
will be indicated on approved cross sections. Excavation beyond lines shown on
approved cross sections will not be paid for except that ordered in writing by the
Engineer. The Engineer will adjust the angle of slopes for cuts and fills as the Work
proceeds, and make his determination of the advisable rate of slope in accordance with
his evaluation of the soil conditions. The actual lines of the cuts as made shall be duly
measured and recorded by the Contractor. The Engineer will check these records and,
where he finds them as ordered, will approve the measurement as a basis for payment.
Excavation in excess of approved cross section will not be paid for, except unsuitable
excavation ordered removed by the Engineer in writing. These areas shall be backfilled
with approved materials as directed by the Engineer. Areas of unauthorized over-
excavation shall be backfilled at the Contractor's expense.

Within sixty (60) days of the date of field staking, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for his approval, the plots of the original and final earthwork cross sections
together with the area and volumetric earthwork computations. The Contractor's cross
sections shall be on transparent cross section sheets for print reproductions. All sheets
shall have a title block and be of size designated by the Engineer. On final approval of
the Contractor's cross sections, the Contractor shall give the Engineer the original
transparent tracings and three (3) prints of the same. If the Contractor fails or refuses
to submit cross sections within the specified time, the Engineer may withhold payment
for all or any part of the earthwork quantities specified.

In case of any variations from the approved plans, the Contractor shall give the
Engineer the original and two (2) copies of cross sections and profiles of the graphical
record and the notes and computations of his stake-out, as required by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take cross sections at twenty-five (25) meter centerline intervals,
and at other locations as may be directed by the Engineer. At his option, he may
submit cross sections intermediate to these locations. The Engineer will indicate, on
one (1) copy, his approval of the proposed lines of the Work or his revision thereof and
return it to the Contractor. The Contractor shall resubmit for approval any cross
sections the Engineer may revise.

The Contractor may, as an alternate method for earthwork computations,

submit to the Ministry for approval, a proposal for the use of an electronic computer.
Such proposal shall include details of the computer hardware, the earthwork program
or programs, the input, the output, and a complete summary of the methods and
procedures to be used. The Contractor may use the electronic computer method only
with the prior approval of the Ministry, and continuance of such approval is contingent
on satisfactory results. If results from the computer are not as represented or are
otherwise deemed unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall recompute the earthwork
computations by the cross sectional method.

74
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

The Engineer may direct the Contractor to use a specific approved earthwork
program. In this case, the Contractor shall make this software program available to the
Engineer to be used in checking the earthwork calculations.

1.07.1.4 Gauge Designations. The term gauge when used in connection with
the measurement of plates, will mean the U.S. Standard Gauge, except that when
reference is made to the measurements of galvanized sheets used in the manufacture
of corrugated metal pipe, metal plate pipe culverts and arches, and metal cribbing, the
term gauge will mean that specified in AASHTO M 36 or AASHTO M 167.

When the term gauge refers to the measurement of wire, it shall mean the wire
gauge specified in AASHTO M 32.

1.07.1.5 Weight. The term ton or tonne shall mean the metric ton consisting
of one thousand (1,000) kilograms (2204.623 pounds avoirdupois). All materials which
are measured or proportioned by weight shall be weighed on accurate and approved
scales by competent and qualified personnel, at locations designated or approved by
the Engineer. If material is shipped by rail, the car weight may be accepted provided
the actual weight of material only will be paid for. However, car weights will not be
acceptable for material to be passed through mixing plants. Trucks used to haul
material being paid for by weight shall be weighed empty daily at such times as the
Engineer directs, and each truck shall bear a legible identification mark.

1.07.1.6 Volume. Materials to be measured by volume in the hauling vehicle

shall be hauled in approved vehicles and measured therein at the point of delivery.
Vehicles for this purpose may be of any size or type acceptable to the Engineer,
provided that the body is of such shape that the actual contents may be readily and
accurately determined. All vehicles shall be loaded to their level capacity and the
Engineer may require loads to be releveled when the vehicles arrive at the point of
delivery.

When requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer in writing,

material specified to be measured by the cubic meter may be weighed and such
weights will be converted to cubic meter for payment purposes. Factor for conversion
from weight measurement to volume measurement will be determined by the Engineer
and shall be agreed to by the Contractor before such method of measurement of pay
quantities is used.

1.07.1.7 Bituminous Materials. Net certified scale weights or weights based

on certified volumes in the case of rail shipments shall be used as basis of
measurement, subject to correction when bituminous material has been lost from the
car or the distributor, wasted, or otherwise not incorporated in the Work.

When bituminous materials are shipped by truck or transport, net certified

weights or volumes, subject to correction for loss or foaming, may be used for
computing quantities.

75
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

When bituminous materials are transported directly from the refinery to the
Work, measurement at the refinery may be made with temperature compensating
meters in lieu of weighing.

1.07.1.8 Cement. Cement shall be measured by the sack. The term sack shall
mean fifty (50) kilograms of cement.

1.07.1.9 Lump Sum. The term "lump sum," when used for an Item of Work,
shall include all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to complete the Work.

1.07.1.10 Fittings and Accessories. When any Item of Work is shown on the
plans as requiring miscellaneous fittings and accessories for which no separate
payment is provided, the unit (lump sum or otherwise) shall be construed to include
those fittings and accessories.

1.07.1.11 Rental Equipment. Rental of equipment shall be measured in hours

of actual working time and necessary traveling time of the equipment within the limits
of the project unless special equipment has been ordered by the Engineer in connection
with force account work, in which case travel and transportation to the project shall be
measured.

1.07.1.12 Manufactured Items. When standard manufactured items are

specified such as fence, wire, plates, rolled shapes, pipe conduit, etc., and these items
are identified by gauge, unit weight, section dimensions, etc., such identification shall
be considered to be nominal weights or dimensions. Unless more stringently controlled
by tolerances in cited specifications, manufacturing tolerances established by the
industries involved will be accepted.

1.07.2 SCOPE OF PAYMENT. The Contractor shall receive and accept

compensation provided for in the Contract as full payment for all labor, material, job
organizational costs, overhead, profit, royalties payment to others for land or use of land
or damage to property of others, incidental Work, where herein specified for the proper
completion of the Work, which is not paid for separately but is subsidiary to the Work
of payment items, including drainage to protect the Work during construction, haulage,
tools, placement of material where specified herein or directed, sheeting, shoring,
centering and supports, laboratory equipment and personnel for testing, housing for his
personnel and all other costs necessary or usual to the proper completion of the Work.

1.07.3 COMPENSATION FOR ALTERED QUANTITIES. When the accepted

quantities of Work vary from the Bill of Quantities, the Contractor shall accept as
payment in full, at the original contract unit price(s) for the accepted quantities of Work
done. No allowance, except as provided in Section 1.02, "Scope of Work" in these
General Specifications will be made for any increased expense, loss of expected
reimbursement, or loss of anticipated profits suffered or claimed by the Contractor
resulting either directly from such alternations or indirectly from unbalanced allocation
among the Contract items of overhead expense and subsequent loss of expected
reimbursement therefore or from any other cause. See Article 7-3 of the Conditions of
Contract.

76
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.07.4 ELIMINATED ITEMS. Should any items contained in the Tender be found
unnecessary for the proper completion of the Work, the Engineer may, upon written
order to the Contractor, eliminate such items from the Contract, and such action shall
in no way invalidate the Contract. When a Contractor is notified of the elimination of
items, he may make written claim for actual Work done and all costs incurred, including
mobilization of materials and equipment prior to said notification. He will be reimbursed
by Change Order for all such costs deemed valid by the Ministry.

1.07.5 EXTRA AND FORCE ACCOUNT WORK. Extra Work performed in

accordance with the requirements and provisions of Section 1.02, "Scope of Work" in
these General Specifications will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) or lump sum
stipulated in the Change Order authorizing the Work, or the Ministry may require the
Contractor to do such Work on force account (Day Work) basis, to be compensated
according to the scheduled rates submitted by the Contractor in his Tender in the
"Appendix to Bill of Quantities." Such rates include overhead and profit and all other
costs of whatever nature necessary and incidental to the performance of force account
Work and whenever ordered.

In respect to all Work executed on a force account basis, the Contractor shall,
during the continuance of such Work, deliver each day to the Engineer an exact list, in
duplicate, of the name, occupation, and time of each workman employed in such Work
and a statement, also in duplicate, giving the description and quantity of all materials
and plant used thereon or therefor (other than plant which is included in the percentage
addition in accordance with the "Appendix to Bill of Quantities" hereinbefore referred to).

One copy of each list and statement will, if correct or when agreed to, be signed by
the Engineer and returned to the Contractor. At the end of each month the Contractor
shall deliver to the Engineer a price statement based on the previous daily approved
lists of the labor, material, and plant (except as aforesaid).

1.07.6 UNAUTHORIZED WORK. Any Work performed in excess of the

requirements of the plans and specifications such as overdepth excavation, extra
thickness of base or surface courses, extra thickness or depth of concrete, extra depth
of riprap, and similar items will not be paid for as Extra Work and will not be considered
as a basis for claim for compensation for Extra Work performed unless such Extra Work
was authorized by the Engineer either by Directive or Change Order. Knowledge of the
Engineer or his representative that such excess Work is being performed will not
constitute authorization.

1.07.7 SET PRICE ITEMS. Before the opening of Tenders, where it is impossible
or impracticable to determine the amount or kind of some of the items that may be
encountered or needed to complete the Work properly, and where the Ministry has
reason to believe these items may be encountered or needed, it may set a price upon
said items in the Tender, and the prices so set shall become the unit prices for those
items, should the Contract be awarded.

1.07.8 SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENT. The Ministry may enter into a

Supplemental Agreement with the Contractor to do Special or Extra Work or certain

77
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

other Work, not included in original Tender, at the contract unit price(s) specified in the
Supplemental Agreement.

Such an agreement when executed shall immediately become a part of the original
Contract and shall be subject to all General, Supplemental, or Special Specifications
governing it.

1.07.9 TEMPORARY PAYMENTS. The Ministry may make temporary (partial)

payments to the Contractor within the limits of seventy-five percent (75%) of the
specified cost of certain materials supplied by the Contractor for use in the permanent
Work, provided that the materials are in accordance with the specifications, and have
been tentatively approved by the Engineer and, where applicable, upon receipt of the
Certificate of Guarantee stating that the material meets all requirements of the
specifications. The Contractor shall furnish proof of ownership and shall be totally
responsible for the storage of these materials and shall maintain them in safe and
sound condition as long as they are being stored, and until such time as they are
incorporated into the Work.

The amounts of temporary payments will be determined on the basis of the relevant
contract unit prices for the materials in the Bill of Quantities. If there is no contract unit
price for such materials in the Bill of Quantities, the cost of these materials shall be
determined on the basis of purchase invoices that are certified and legalized by the
Chambers of Commerce. Temporary payments for materials will be deducted from the
current Monthly Payments after the Contractor incorporates the materials into the final
Work.

Temporary payments may only be made for the following materials which are
actually imported to the site according to seventy-five percent (75%) of the market price
or seventy-five percent (75%) of the contract unit price as appropriate.

Cement
Reinforcing Steel, Prestressing Steel
Road Paint, Bearing Devices, Expansion Joints and Electrical Materials
Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals, including Guardrails, Delineators
and Signs, and Gabion Baskets.

When a temporary payment for an item or quantity of material has been received
by the Contractor, that material shall become the property of the Ministry. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the proper storage, condition, and security of the
materials regardless of ownership.

The Ministry reserves the right to refuse to make temporary (partial) payments for
justifiable reasons such as lack of progress, unacceptable procedures by the
Contractor, Royal Decrees or any similar reasons. There presently exists a Royal
Decree against making these temporary payments.

78
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.07.10 PREPARATION OF MONTHLY CERTIFICATES OF WORK; AND THE

MANNER OF PAYMENT THEREOF. At the end of each Hegira month, the Engineer
and the representative of the Contractor shall prepare a certificate of Work completed
from the beginning of the Contract until the end of such Hegira month.

The monthly certificates shall be signed by the representative of the Contractor and
by the Engineer, and shall be delivered to the Ministry before the end of the tenth day
of the following month.

The Ministry will check the certificate and, if it is found to be accurate and in
compliance with the Contract, the Ministry will deduct the following items:

The total sum paid for previous monthly certificates.

The installment for the repayment of the advance payment.

Any other deductions for taxes and charges required by Law or the Contract,
or any other requirements.

Any probable delay penalty according to provisions of the Contract Documents.

Other miscellaneous deductions that the Contractor may owe according to

provisions of the Contract Documents.

The Ministry will then, within a reasonable period from the date the monthly
certificate is received, pay the net sum to the Contractor by a pay-order payable by the
Ministry of Finance and National Economy.

By payment of the provisional monthly certificate, all of the Work paid for shall be
property of the Ministry and shall be in the custody of the Contractor until the Contract
is completed.

If, due to any reason, the certificate is defective, or if some of the items are objected
to by the Ministry, it will be returned to the Engineer for correction.

All of the quantities stipulated in the monthly certificates and the payments made
are provisional only and final and are considered to be on-account. Any mistake in
measurement and computation in the monthly certificates or in the final certificate shall
be corrected and made good. If such errors are discovered after payment of a monthly
certificate, corrections shall be made on the following monthly certificate by increasing
or decreasing the quantities as appropriate. See Article 10-2 of the Conditions of
Contract.

1.07.11 FINAL CERTIFICATE. As soon as the Provisional Handover of the

completed Work has taken place, the Engineer and the representative of the Contractor
shall together take measurements and prepare the Final Certificate for the Work
performed. The Contractor shall provide all instruments, materials, and personnel
required for measurements and preparation of the Final Certificate. The quantities and
figures that are given in the Final Certificate are final; whether or not there are
79
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

discrepancies between these figures and the quantities and figures which were stated
in the monthly certificates.

The Final Certificate, with attachments and computations, will be forwarded to the
Contractor. If the Contractor has objections they shall be submitted, in writing, to the
Engineer within ten (10) days from the date of the receipt of the Certificate. The
Contractor shall state his reasons fully, and document his objection(s) to the Final
Certificate with adequate and accurate data and records, for use by the Engineer in
investigating and determining the validity of the Contractor's objection(s). If the
Contractor does not object to the Final Certificate within the ten (10) days stipulated,
it will be considered as Final. See Article 10-4 of the Conditions of Contract.

80
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 1.08 - ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

1.08.1 GENERAL. The references to standard test methods of AASHTO, ASTM

and other recognized standards authorities refer to the methods in effect on the date
of solicitation for bids.

All shall be performed according to the contract requirements. All work lines,
grades, cross-sections, dimensions and processes or materials shall be as shown on
the plans or specified in the contract.

Plan dimensions and contract specification values are the values to be strived for
and complied with as the design values from which any deviations are allowed. Work
is to be performed and material that is uniform in character and reasonably close to the
prescribed value or within the specified tolerance range is to be provided. The purpose
of a tolerance range is to accommodate occasional minor variations from the median
zone that are unavoidable for practical reasons.

The Ministry may inspect, sample or test all work at any time before final
acceptance of the project. When the Ministry tests work, copies of test reports are
furnished to the Contractor upon request. Ministry tests may or may not be performed
at the work site. The Contractor shall not rely on the availability of Ministry test results
for process control.

Acceptable work conforming to the contract will be paid for at the contract unit
price. Four methods of determining conformity and accepting work are described in the
following Subsections 1.08.2 to 1.08.5 inclusive. The primary method of acceptance
is specified in each Section of work. However, work may be rejected at any time it is
found by any of the methods not to comply with the contract.

Work that does not conform to the contract, or to prevailing industry standards
where no specific contract requirements are noted, shall be removed and replaced at
no cost to the Ministry.

As an alternative to removal and replacement, the Contractor may submit a written

request to:

1. Have the Work accepted at a reduced price, or

2. Be given permission to perform corrective measures to bring the Work into
conformity.

The request shall contain supporting reasons and documentation for his request.
This shall include references or data justifying the proposal based on an evaluation of
test results, effect on service life, value of material or work, quality, and other tangible
engineering basis. The Engineer will determine disposition of the non-conforming work.

When standard manufactured items are specified, (such as fence, wire, plates,
rolled shapes, pipe conduits, etc. that are identified by gauge, unit weight, section
dimensions, etc.) the identification will be considered to be nominal weights or
81
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

dimensions. Unless specific contract tolerances are noted, established manufacturing

tolerances will be accepted.

1.08.2 VISUAL INSPECTION. Where appropriate Acceptance may be based on

visual inspection of the work for compliance with the contract and prevailing industry
standards.

1.08.3 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE. Acceptance is based on a Certificate

of Guarantee from a manufacturer based on an effective internal testing and inspection
system or a test certificate from an approved independent testing laboratory or service.
The independent laboratory shall be approved by the Engineer before any materials
are submitted for tests. The manufacturer shall furnish documentation of the testing
and inspection system with a Certificate of Guarantee that states the Work complies
with the specific contract requirements.

The manufacturer shall be required to furnish a "product certification" for material

commercially produced to a standard specification. The manufacturer shall clearly mark
the material or package with a unique product identification. One "product certification"
may apply to all the Work incorporated into the project.

The manufacturer shall be required to furnish a "product certification" for material

that:

1. Is specifically produced or fabricated for the project, or

2. Is produced or shipped in bulk and therefore not readily identifiable as to
manufacturer and product, or
3. Has a specific contract requirement.

A "product certification" shall accompany each shipment of material and shall

identify the date and place of manufacturer as well as the lot number or other means
of cross referencing to the inspection and testing system. The Contractor shall furnish
specific test results on material from the same lot upon request.

However, all materials delivered to the site are subject to additional laboratory
testing when requested by the Engineer, even though the materials are accompanied
by a Certificate of Guarantee or laboratory test certificate. All costs in connection with
Certificates of Guarantee and/or laboratory tests and certificates shall be borne by the
Contractor.

The issuance of a Certificate of Guarantee without having recently performed the

required tests on representative samples of the material in question shall render the
Certificate invalid.

The issuance of an invalid or erroneous Certificate of Guarantee shall be just cause

for rejection of the materials without further testing and all cost of transportation and
handling of the rejected materials shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

82
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.08.4 MEASURED OR TESTED CONFORMANCE. Acceptance shall be based

on all necessary production and processing of the Work and control performance of the
Work so that all of the work complies with the contract requirements.

Results from inspection or testing shall be used to support acceptance of the work
incorporated into the project with values within the specified tolerances or specification
limits. When no tolerance values are identified in the contract, the Work will be
accepted based on customary manufacturing and construction tolerances.

1.08.5 STATISTICAL EVALUATION OF WORK FOR ACCEPTANCE AND

DETERMINATION OF PAY FACTOR (Value of Work). Statistical evaluation of work
is a method of analyzing inspection or test results to determine conformity with the
contract requirements. When the specifications provide for material to be sampled and
tested on a statistical basis, the material will be evaluated for acceptance in accordance
with this Subsection as follows:

1.08.5.1 General. For work accepted based on statistical evaluation of random

sampling, both the Ministry and Contractor assume some risk.

The Ministry's risk is the probability that work of a rejectable quality level (RQL)
is accepted. The Contractor's risk is the probability that work produced at an
acceptable quality level (AQL) is rejected or accepted at a reduced contract price.

Acceptable quality level is the highest percentage of work outside the

specification limits that is considered acceptable for payment at contract price. There
are two (2) acceptance categories. Category I (for major characteristics) is based on
an AQL of five percent defective (5%). Category II (for minor characteristics) is based
on AQL of ten percent defective (10%). In both cases, the Contractor's risk is five
percent (5%).

The Contractor is encouraged to produce superior work yielding the highest

quality level (AQL) to offset the Contractor's risk. The final maximum obtainable pay
factor for each lot will never be greater than 1.00.

The measured characteristics to be evaluated, lot size, acceptance sampling

frequency, acceptance sampling location, test methods, specification limits and
category are as follows:

1.08.5.1.1 Quality and Quantity Characteristics. The quality and

quantity characteristics to be measured and evaluated are listed in Table 1.08-3.

1.08.5.1.2 Lot Size. A lot size is a discrete quantity of work to which the
statistical acceptance procedure is applied. The General or Special Specifications shall
specify the lot size in terms of unit quantities (eg. tons, cubic meters or square meters).

1.08.5.1.3 Acceptance Sampling Frequency. The frequency of

sampling is listed in Table 1.08-3. The frequency rate shown normally results in a
minimum of five (5) samples per lot which is the minimum number required to perform
83
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

a statistical evaluation. The maximum obtainable measured characteristic pay factor

with five (5) samples is one and one hundredths (1.01). A minimum of eight (8)
samples are required to obtain a one and five-hundredths (1.05) characteristic pay
factor.

If the sampling frequencies and quantity of work would otherwise result in

fewer than five (5) samples, a written request is required to increase the sampling
frequency to provide for a minimum of five (5) samples. The request to increase the
sampling frequency shall be submitted at least forty-eight (48) hours before beginning
production. An increase in the sampling frequency may result in a different pay factor.

1.08.5.1.4 Acceptance Sampling Location. The point of sampling is

listed in Table 1.08-3. The exact location of sampling will be based on random
sampling in accordance with Paragraph 1.04.3.8 "Random Numbers" in these General
Specifications.

1.08.5.1.5 Test Methods. The test methods used to test the sample are
listed in Table 1.08-3.

1.08.5.1.6 Specification Limits. The specification limits for the quality

characteristics are listed in the General Specifications or Special Specifications for the
work in question.

1.08.5.1.7 Category. The category for the quality characteristics to be

analyzed are listed in Table 1.08-3.

1.08.5.2 Acceptance. The Work in the lot will be accepted and paid for at a
final pay factor when all inspection or test results are completed and evaluated.

A grand or total pay item quantity lot will be used if specified in the Special
Specifications. The concept of a grand lot is based on letting the grand lot accumulate
the stream of homogenous sublots while they are exhibiting a certain level of quality.
The homogeneity can be defined by the quality level of the inspected lots in terms of
AQL. The level of homogeneity would be a minimum of fifteen percent (15%) for an
AQL that has to be maintained for consecutive sublots to be allowed to aggregate as
a grand lot. In other words, the grand lot will be allowed to agglomerate provided the
current pay factor does not fall below ninety hundredths (0.90). If the current pay factor
of a lot falls below ninety hundredths (0.90), terminate production. Production may
resume after effective actions to improve the quality of the production are taken by the
Contractor and the actions taken are approved. The Contract may state when the
accumulative lot is exhausted in terms of maximum number of samples.

A lot containing an unsatisfactory percentage of nonspecification material (less

than 1.00 pay factor) is accepted provided the pay factor is at least seventy-five
hundredths (0.75) and there are no isolated defects identified by the Engineer.

A lot containing an unsatisfactory percentage of nonspecification material that

fails to obtain at least seventy-five hundredths (0.75) pay factor will be rejected by the
Engineer. All of the rejected material shall be removed from the Work.
84
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

When approved, it is permissible to voluntarily remove defective material and

replace it with new material to avoid or minimize a pay factor of less than 1.00. New
material will be sampled, tested and evaluated for acceptance according to this
Subsection.

Any quantity of material that is determined to be defective may be rejected on

visual inspection or test results. Do not incorporate rejected material in the Work. The
results of tests run on rejected material will be excluded from the lot of acceptable tests,
if the rejected material is removed from the Work.

1.08.5.3 Statistical Evaluation. The Variability-Unknown/Standard Deviation

Method will be used to determine the estimated percentage of the lot that is outside
specification limits.

The number of significant figures used in the calculations will be according to

AASHTO R-11, Absolute Method.

The estimated percentage of work that is outside of the specification limits for
each quality characteristic will be determined in accordance with the following steps:

1. Calculate the arithmetic mean ( ) of the test values: = x

n
Where: x = summation of individual test values

n = total number of test values

2. Calculate the sample standard deviation(s):

s=
n (x2)-( x)2
n(n-1)

Where: (x2) = summation of the squares of individual test values

( x)2 = summation of the individual test values squared

3. Calculate the upper quality index (Qu): Qu = USL -

s
Where: USL =Upper Specification Limit

Note: The USL is equal to the contract specification limit or the target
value plus the allowable deviation.

4. Calculate the lower quality index (QL): QL = - LSL

s
Where: LSL = Lower Specification Limit

Note: The LSL is equal to the contract specification limit or the target value
minus the allowable deviation.
85
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

5. From Table 1.08-1, determine Pu (the estimated percentage of work

outside the USL which corresponds to a given Qu). If a USL is not specified, Pu is O.

6. From Table 1.08-1, determine P L (the estimated percentage of work within

the lot outside the LSL). P L corresponds to a given Q L. If an LSL is not specified, PL is
O.

7. Calculate the total estimated percentage of work outside the USL and LSL
(percent defective).

Percent Defective = Pu + PL

8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each quality characteristic listed for

acceptance.

1.08.5.4 Pay Factor Determination (Value of the Work). The pay factor for
a lot will be determined in accordance with the following steps:

1. From Table 1.08-2, determine the pay factor for each quality and quantity
characteristic using the total number of test values and the total estimated percentage
of work outside the specification limits from step (7) above.

2. When the measured characteristics tested for a lot are all quality
characteristics, the lot pay factor will be the lowest single pay factor for all the quality
characteristics. The maximum obtainable quality pay factor is 1.00.

3. When the measured characteristics for a lot are all quantity characteristics,
the lot pay factor will be the lowest single pay factor for all the quantity characteristics.
The maximum obtainable quantity pay factor is 1.00.

4. When the measured characteristics for a lot are both quality and quantity,
the lot pay factors will be based on the following:

(1) When any quality characteristics are less than 1.00, the lot quality pay
factor will be the lowest single pay factor for all quality characteristics. The maximum
obtainable pay quality factor is 1.00.

(2) When any quantity characteristics are less than 1.00, the lot quantity
pay factor will be the lowest single pay factor for any quantity characteristic.

5. Adjusted payment for material in a lot will be made at a price determined

by multiplying the contract unit price by the lowest quality and quantity pay factor or pay
factors as determined above.

86
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Table 1.08-1
Estimated Percent of Work Outside Specification Limits
Estimated Percent Upper Quality Index Qu or Lower Quality Index QL
Outside
Specification Limits n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=9 n=10 to n=11 n=12 to n=14
(Pu and/or PL)

0 1.72 1.88 1.98 2.07 2.13 2.20 2.28

1 1.64 1.75 1.82 1.98 1.91 1.96 2.01
2 1.58 1.66 1.72 1.75 1.76 1.81 1.84
3 1.52 1.59 1.63 1.66 1.68 1.71 1.73
4 1.47 1.52 1.56 1.58 1.60 1.62 1.64
5 1.42 1.47 1.49 1.51 1.52 1.54 1.55

6 1.36 1.41 1.43 1.46 1.46 1.47 1.48

7 1.33 1.36 1.38 1.39 1.40 1.41 1.41
8 1.28 1.31 1.33 1.33 1.34 1.35 1.35
9 1.26 1.27 1.28 1.28 1.29 1.28 1.30
10 1.21 1.23 1.23 1.24 1.24 1.24 1.26

11 1.18 1.18 1.19 1.19 1.18 1.19 1.20

12 1.14 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.15 1.15 1.15
13 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.11
14 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06
15 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.02 1.02 1.02

16 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98

17 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.96 0.94
18 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91
19 0.90 0.88 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.87 0.87
20 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84

21 0.84 0.82 0.82 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.80

22 0.81 0.79 0.79 0.76 0.76 0.77 0.77
23 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.75 0.74 0.74 0.74
24 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.71 0.71 0.70
25 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.69 0.68 0.68 0.67

26 0.68 0.67 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.64

27 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.62 0.62 0.61
28 0.62 0.61 0.60 0.58 0.59 0.59 0.58
29 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.57 0.56 0.56 0.56
30 0.56 0.55 0.54 0.54 0.53 0.53 0.55

31 0.53 0.52 0.51 0.51 0.50 0.50 0.50

32 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.47 0.47
33 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.45 0.46 0.44 0.44
34 0.45 0.43 0.43 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.41
35 0.42 0.40 0.40 0.39 0.38 0.39 0.38

36 0.38 0.38 0.37 0.37 0.36 0.36 0.36

37 0.36 0.36 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.33 0.33
38 0.33 0.32 0.32 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.30
39 0.30 0.30 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28
40 0.38 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.25

41 0.26 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23

42 0.23 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
43 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18
44 0.16 0.15 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16
45 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13

46 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10

47 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
48 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06
49 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Note: If the Value of Qu or QL does not correspond to a value in the table, use the next lower value. If Qu or QL are negative
values, Pu or PL is equal to 100 minus the table value for Pu or PL.

87
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Table 1.08-1
Estimated Percent of Work Outside Specification Limits

Estimated Percent Upper Quality Index Qu or Lower Quality Index QL

Outside Specification
Limits (Pu and/or PL) n=15 to n=17 n=18 to n=22 n=23 to n=29 n=30 to n=42 n=43 to n=66 n=67 ton=00

0 2.34 2.30 2.44 2.48 2.51 2.54

1 2.04 2.07 2.09 2.12 2.14 2.16
2 1.87 1.88 1.91 1.83 1.84 1.96
3 1.75 1.76 1.76 1.79 1.80 1.91
4 1.65 1.66 1.67 1.65 1.68 1.70
5 1.56 1.57 1.58 1.59 1.59 1.60

6 1.49 1.50 1.60 1.61 1.51 1.52

7 1.42 1.43 1.43 1.44 1.44 1.44
8 1.36 1.36 1.37 1.37 1.37 1.38
9 1.30 1.30 1.31 1.31 1.31 1.31
10 1.26 1.26 1.26 1.26 1.26 1.26

11 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20

12 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
13 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11
14 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06
15 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02

16 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98

17 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
18 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
19 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87
20 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83

21 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.90 0.80 0.78

8822 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76
23 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73
24 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
25 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.66

26 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.63

27 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.60
28 0.58 0.58 0.58 0.58 0.58 0.57
29 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.56 0.54
30 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52

31 0.49 0.49 0.48 0.49 0.48 0.49

32 0.47 0.46 0.46 0.46 0.46 0.46
33 0.44 0.44 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43
34 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.40
35 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38

36 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36

37 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.32
38 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
39 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28
40 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26

41 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23

42 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
43 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18
44 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.16 0.15 0.16
45 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13

46 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10

47 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.06 0.08 0.08
48 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.06
49 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Note: If the Value of Qu or QL does not correspond to a value in the table, use the next lower value. If Qu or QL are
negative values, Pu or PL is equal to 100 minus the table value for Pu or PL .

88
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Table 1.08-2 Pay Factors

Maximum Allowable Percent of Work Outside Specification Limits for a Given Pay Factor
PAY FACTOR (Pu + PL)

Category

I II n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=9 n=10 to n=12 to n=15 to n=18 to n=23 to n=30 to n=43 to n=67 to
n=11 n=14 n=17 n=22 n=29 n=42 n=66 00

1.05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1.04 0 1 3 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 3
1.03 0 2 4 6 8 7 7 6 5 5 4 4
1.02 1 3 6 9 11 10 9 8 7 7 6 6
1.01 0 2 5 8 11 13 12 11 10 9 8 8 7

1.00 22 20 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
0.99 24 22 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 11 10 9
0.98 26 24 22 21 20 19 18 16 15 14 13 12 10
0.97 28 26 24 23 22 21 19 18 17 16 14 13 12
0.96 30 28 26 25 24 22 21 19 18 17 16 14 13

0.95 1.00 32 29 28 26 25 24 22 21 20 18 17 16 14
0.94 0.99 33 31 29 28 27 25 24 22 21 20 18 17 15
0.93 0.98 35 33 31 29 28 27 25 24 22 21 20 18 16
0.92 0.97 37 34 32 31 30 28 27 25 24 22 21 19 18
0.91 0.96 38 36 34 32 31 30 28 26 25 24 22 21 19

0.90 0.95 39 37 35 34 33 31 29 28 26 25 23 22 20
0.89 0.94 41 38 37 35 34 32 31 29 28 26 25 23 21
0.88 0.93 42 40 38 36 35 34 32 30 29 27 26 24 22
0.87 0.92 43 41 39 38 37 35 33 32 30 29 27 25 23
0.86 0.91 45 42 41 39 38 36 34 33 31 30 28 26 24

Note: To obtain a pay factor when the estimated percent outside specifications limits from Table 1.08-1 does not correspond to a value in the table, use the next larger value (continued).

89
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents
Table 1.08-2 Pay Factors (continued)

Maximum Allowable Percent of Work Outside Specification Limits for a Given Pay Factor
PAY FACTOR (Pu + PL)

Category

I II n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=9 n=10 to n=12 to n=15 to n=18 to n=23 to n=30 to n=43 to n=67 to
n=11 n=14 n=17 n=22 n=29 n=42 n=66 00

0.85 0.90 46 44 42 40 39 38 36 34 33 31 29 28 25
0.84 0.89 47 45 43 42 40 39 37 35 34 32 30 29 27
0.83 0.88 49 46 44 43 42 40 38 36 35 33 31 30 28
0.82 0.87 50 47 46 44 43 41 39 38 36 34 33 31 29
0.81 0.86 51 49 47 45 44 42 41 39 37 36 34 32 30

0.80 0.85 52 50 48 46 45 44 42 40 38 37 35 33 31
0.79 0.84 54 51 49 48 46 45 43 41 39 38 36 34 32
0.78 0.83 55 52 50 49 48 46 44 42 41 39 37 35 33
0.77 0.82 56 54 52 50 49 47 45 43 42 40 38 36 34
0.76 0.81 57 55 53 51 50 48 46 44 43 41 39 37 35
0.75 0.80 58 56 54 52 51 49 47 46 44 42 40 38 36

0.79 60 57 55 53 52 51 48 47 45 43 41 40 37
0.78 61 58 56 55 53 52 50 48 46 44 43 41 38
0.77 62 59 57 56 54 53 51 49 47 45 44 42 39
REJECT 0.76 63 61 58 57 55 54 52 50 48 47 45 43 40
0.75 64 62 60 58 57 55 53 51 49 48 46 44 41

REJECT Values Greater Than Those Shown Above

Note: To obtain a pay factor when the estimated percent outside specifications limits from Table 1.08-1 does not correspond to a value in the table, use the next larger value.

90
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents
Table 1.08-3 Materials Subject to Statistical Based Acceptance
Characteristic
Section Material Characteristics Type Test Method Sampling Frequency Point of Sampling

2.02 Embankment Compaction Quality MRDTM 215 or Minimum of 8 nuclear gage or 5 cone In-place after compaction
MRDTM 218 density tests on each embankment lift
or portion of lift up to a maximum of
10,000 cubic meters lot

2.06 Untreated Subgrade Compaction Quality MRDTM 215 or Minimum of 8 nuclear gage or 5 sand In-place after compaction.
2.07 Lime Treated Subgrade MRDTM 218 cone density tests on each 5,000
2.08 Cement Treated Subgrade square meter lot for each layer
constructed.

Thickness Quantity Dig Test Holes Minimum 5 test holes per lot In-place after compaction

3.02 Aggregate Subbases Aggregate Gradation(1)- Tables MRDTM 204 Minimum of five (5) samples per 10,000 From the windrow or roadbed
3.03 Aggregate Bases Quality MRDTM 313 square meter lot for each layer after processing
3.02-1, 3.03-1 All Sieves(5),
3.04 Cement Treated Bases MRDTM 208 constructed
Sand Equivalent and Plasticity
Index
Quantity Dig Test Holes Minimum of (5) test holes per lot In place after compaction
Thickness
Minimum 8 nuclear gage or 5 sand In place after compaction
Quality MRDTM 215 or 218 cone density tests per lot
Compaction

4.04 Bituminous emulsion Aggregate Gradation(1)- Table Quality MRDTM 419 Minimum of 5 samples per 10,000 Behind laydown machine or from
treated base course 4.40-1 square meter lot for each layer roadway after mixing and
constructed placement
All Sieves(5)
Quantity ASTM D-3549 Minimum 5 core depths per lot In place after compaction
Thickness

Quality ASTM D-2041 or D- Minimum 5 core or 10 nuclear gage In place after compaction
Compaction
2726 density tests per lot

4.05 Bituminous concrete Bituminous material content Quality MRDTM 418 Minimum of 5 samples per 10,000 Behind laydown machine before
4.06 pavement Aggregate Gradation(1) - Quality MRDTM 419 square meter lot for each layer rolling
Hot-mix recycled constructed
Table 4.05-1, All Sieves(5)
bituminous concrete
pavement Quality ASTM D-2726 or Minimum 5 cores or 10 nuclear gage In place after compaction
Compaction ASTM D-2041 density tests per lot

Quantity ASTM D-3549 Minimum of 5 core depths per lot In place after compaction
Thickness
Quality Paragraph 4.05.8.4 Paragraph 4.05.8.4 Paragraph 4.05.8.4
Smoothness(3)

91
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Table 1.08-3 Materials Subject to Statistical Based Acceptance (continued)

Characteristic
Section Material Characteristics Type Test Method Sampling Frequency Point of Sampling

4.07 Bituminous concrete Bituminous material content Quality MRDTM 418 Minimum of 5 samples per 5,000 Hopper of laydown machine
friction course Aggregate Gradation(1) square meter per lot after discharge from plant
Table 4.07-1, All Sieves(5) Quality MRDTM 419

Thickness Quantity ASTM D-3549 Minimum 5 core depths per lot In-place after compaction

4.09 Cold Mix Recycled Aggregate Gradation Quality MRDTM 419 Minimum (5) samples per 10,000 From the roadway after mixing
Bituminous Base Table 3.03-1 or 4.04-1, square meter per lot for each layer and placement
All Sieves(5) constructed
ASTM D-2726 or
Compaction Quality ASTM D-2041 Minimum of (5) cores or 10 nuclear In place after compaction
gage density tests per lot

Thickness Quantity ASTM D-2726 In place after compaction

Minimum 5 core depths per lot

4.12 Surface Recycled Thickness Quantity ASTM D-3549 Minimum 5 core depths per 10,000 In place after compaction
Bituminous Pavement square meter lot

Compaction Quality ASTM D-2041 or D- Minimum 5 core or 10 nuclear gage In place after compaction
2726 density tests per lot

5.02 Structural concrete Compressive strength Quality MRDTM 528 and 1 set of 6 cylinders per 50 cubic meters Discharge stream at point of
523 but not less than 1 set per day placement

(1) Uses only sieves indicated for the specific gradation. Do not use maximum or nominal maximum size sieve.
(2) Characteristic applies to surface course aggregate only.
(3) Applies only to an item used as a surface course.
(4) Thickness is not a statistically based acceptance parameter unless payment is by the square meter.
(5) Category I (Major characteristics) sieves for all materials are the 0.075 mm (No. 200) and the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieves. In addition, the 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) sieve is a Category I (major
characteristic) sieve for all aggregate subbase and base materials. Also, the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve is a Category I (major characteristic) sieve for all bituminous aggregate materials. All
other sieves are Category (minor characteristic) sieves.

92
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.08.6 INSPECTION AT THE PLANT. Work may be inspected at the point of

production or fabrication. Manufacturing plants may be inspected for compliance with
specified manufacturing methods. Material samples may be obtained for laboratory
testing for compliance with quality requirements. Allow full entry at all times to the parts
of the plant producing the Work.

1.08.7 PARTIAL AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE. The Contractor shall maintain the
Work during construction and guarantee period until the project is accepted.

1.08.7.1 Partial Acceptance. When a separate portion of the project is

completed, a final inspection of that portion may be requested. If the portion is
complete and in compliance with the contract, it will be accepted and the Contractor will
be relieved of all responsibility except for maintenance of the completed portion. Partial
acceptance does not void or alter any of the terms of the contract.

When public traffic is accommodated through construction and begins using

sections of the roadway as they are completed, continue maintenance of such sections
until final acceptance.

1.08.7.2 Final Acceptance. When notified that the entire project is complete,
an inspection will be scheduled. If all work is determined complete, the inspection will
constitute the final inspection, and the Contractor will be notified in writing of final
acceptance as of the date of the final inspection. Final acceptance relieves the
Contractor of all responsibility except for the maintenance of the project throughout the
guarantee period.

If the inspection discloses any unsatisfactory work, the Contractor will receive
a list of the Work that is incomplete or requires correction. He shall immediately
complete or correct the Work and furnish notification when the Work has been
completed.

93
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 1.09 - SUPERVISION STAFF FACILITIES

1.09.1 DESCRIPTION. The supervision staff facilities shall include the Engineer's
Offices, Project Laboratory, Dormitory (Rest House), Family Houses, Mess and Kitchen,
Ancillary Structures, computers and survey equipment constructed and furnished to the
requirements of the standard drawings and these specifications. All aspects of the
facilities shall conform to national and local ordinances and regulations with respect to
sanitation, segregation of facilities, and other details.

Items in Bill of Quantities

Supervision Staff Compound
Supervision Staff Compound (Temporary)
Project Laboratory
Computers and Survey Equipment

1.09.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. The Supervision Staff facilities shall be

located as approved by the Engineer and the local municipality, adjacent to the Project,
outside the boundaries of towns and villages. The area chosen shall not be subject to
flooding or other foreseeable natural damage and shall be away from areas where there
is a health risk. The minimum area of land required for the Supervision Staff facilities
is three thousand five hundred (3,500) square meters. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs involved in the development of the land which shall be included
in the lump sum items for the various supervision staff facilities unless provided for
otherwise in the Special Specifications.

Unless the Supervision Staff facilities is specified as "Temporary" in the Bill of

Quantities or Special Specifications, all land, buildings and specified stationary
equipment shall become the property of the Ministry at the time of one hundred percent
(100%) completion and shall be maintained by the Contractor in good condition to the
final handing over of the project.

Living accommodations in the Dormitory and Family Housing shall be Type A, Type
B or modified as specified in the Special Specifications depending on the anticipated
size and character of the supervision staff.

The deduction for noncompletion of the Supervision Staff facilities within one
hundred eighty (180) days of the handing over of the location of the facilities shall be
at the rate of two thousand Saudi Riyals (SR 2000) per day of delay except that if the
Supervision Staff facilities are specified as "Temporary," the penalty for noncompletion
within one hundred twenty (120) days of the signing of the contract shall be at the rate
of five hundred Saudi Riyals (SR 500) per day of delay.

The facilities plans are not presented as a complete set of construction plans, but
rather as a set of definitive plans. Complete details for the electrical system, plumbing,
water supply, sewers, etc., are not included and shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.

94
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

The facilities and equipment, as specified, are for a basic inspection team. If the
operations of the Contractor are such that additions to the Engineer's staff are required,
the Contractor shall provide additional facilities and equipment as directed by the
Engineer. The cost of the additional facilities and equipment shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor and shall be considered subsidiary to all other pay items listed in the
Bill of Quantities.

During the period between the beginning of the Contractor's Work and the
completion of the Supervision Staff facilities, the Contractor shall furnish and maintain
approved mobile or special temporary facilities for the supervision staff depending on
the nature of the Work in progress and the required inspection and testing. The
minimum accommodations during this period shall be for four (4) men. No Contractor's
Work may proceed or be paid on monthly certificates unless adequate facilities are
provided for the Supervision Staff to inspect and test that Work.

1.09.3 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS.

1.09.3.1 Permanent Buildings. Unless the Supervision Staff facilities are

specified as "Temporary" in the Bill of Quantities or Special Specifications, all buildings
shall be permanent in construction conforming to the standard drawings and the
requirements specified herein. Details not specified shall be in accordance with
standard building construction practices and performed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

1.09.3.1.1 Foundations. Building footings shall extend a minimum of

sixty (60) centimeters below the surrounding ground elevations. Footings shall be
constructed on soil of an approved bearing capacity, compacted to ninety-five percent
(95%) of maximum density as determined by MRD Test 212. Necessary excavation
and backfill shall be in accordance with procedures in Paragraph 2.09.2.3, "Structural
Excavation for Culverts and Miscellaneous Structures" in these General Specifications.
Buildings shall be constructed such that the finished floor elevations are a minimum of
sixty (60) centimeters above the surrounding ground elevations.

1.09.3.1.2 Concrete. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of

Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete." Slabs, footings, and other nonstructural
concrete shall conform to Class B. Columns, girders and other structural concrete shall
conform to Class C and shall be constructed in accordance with Section 5.03,
"Concrete Structures" in these General Specifications. Reinforced concrete wall
columns shall be constructed at wall intersections and building corners with ground
beam and roof beam connectors. Column reinforcement shall be four (4) - fourteen (14)
millimeter diameter vertical bars with ten (10) millimeter closed stirrups at fifty (50)
centimeters centers.

1.09.3.1.3 Roofs. Roofs shall be of reinforced concrete with an overhang

of one (1) meter to the face of the outside wall. All roofs shall be constructed to a fall
of two percent (2%) with a uniform slab thickness and adequate scuppers along the low
side. The low side of each roof shall be on the side that faces the perimeter of the
compound. The upper surfaces of all roofs shall be waterproofed using materials and
methods approved by the Engineer.
95
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.09.3.1.4 Walls.

1. Masonry Work. Walls shall be constructed of hollow concrete masonry

blocks of size twenty (20) by twenty (20) by forty (40) centimeters or similar approved
material. Lintels may be precast or cast-in-place.

Mortar for masonry shall conform to the requirements of Subparagraph

5.01.3.1.2, "Mortar." All masonry Work shall be constructed plumb, square and with
level courses all carried together. No portion of any wall shall be extended more than
one and one-half (1 1/2) meters above adjacent Work, and, in every case, shall be
racked back to insure proper connection of subsequent Work.

Each masonry unit shall be shoved into a full bed of unfurrowed mortar
and all joints filled, leaving no voids. Joints shall be struck flush. Special care shall be
used in laying masonry units to keep mortar off the face of units and out of wall cavities.
Mortar that falls and is trapped between scaffold members and walls shall be removed
daily. Upon completion of the Work, exposed joints shall be pointed and the wall face
cleaned down.

Masonry Units shall have uniform joints, not more than fourteen (14)
millimeters thick. Units shall be laid in common bond. Units shall be properly bonded
at corners, connections, and intersections. Concrete brick shall be used for bearing
courses to maintain proper coursing and where standard size block units cannot be
used. All joints shall be struck flush. Where masonry units must be cut to
accommodate pipe, conduit, electrical switches or convenience outlets, and adjoining
materials, all cuts shall be made with carborundum masonry saws. Space around all
pipes extending through walls and partitions shall be tightly caulked.

Vertical joints, where masonry abuts concrete columns and walls, shall be
plumb with blocks carefully sawed on ends and joints raked out and caulked.

All anchors, ties and flashings shall be built-in at the proper locations as
the Work progresses. Not less than three (3) anchors per jamb for door frames shall
be provided. All voids around door and window frames, and voids in masonry units
where shown or required for anchorage of surface mounted items, shall be filled in solid
with mortar. The mason shall protect the Work of other trades from damage, shall
provide openings in walls for pipes, conduits, and electrical fixtures, and shall be jointly
responsible with such trades to see that the masonry walls are properly constructed and
finished. He shall consult other trades in advance and make provisions for installation
of their Work in order to avoid cutting and patching. Built-in Work specified under other
sections of the specifications shall be installed as the Work progresses. Steel lintels
shall be set in beds of mortar. Spaces behind metal window and door frames shall be
filled with mortar. Space around perimeter of frames shall be filled with plastic caulking.

2. Plastering. Internal wall surfaces shall be plastered to a smooth, fair

finish. Minimum thickness of plaster shall be fourteen (14) millimeters, including both
scratch and finish coats. Plaster materials shall be standard products approved by the
Engineer, applied or installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
96
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Surfaces shall be prepared for application of bond plaster in strict

accordance with recommendations of the bond plaster manufacturer. A temperature
of not less than ten degrees Celsius (10 C) shall be maintained in all areas during
application of plaster and until plaster has completely dried. After plaster has set hard,
free circulation of air shall be provided.

Scratch coat shall be doubled back, straightened to a true surface with rod
or darby, and left rough to receive finish coat.

Gypsum Plaster Finish shall be applied only after scratch coat has set and
seasoned. Scratch coat shall be evenly dampened by use of fog spray prior to
application of finish coat. Finish coat shall be first coated to a true and even surface,
then troweled, leaving the surface burnished smooth, free of rough areas, trowel marks,
or other blemishes. Mortar around trim and other Work shall be pointed up. Defective
and damaged plaster shall be cut out and patched. Patching of plaster shall match
existing Work in texture and finish and shall finish flush and smooth at joints with
previously applied Work.

3. Ceramic Tiles. Bathroom walls shall be tiled with ceramic tiles all
around to a height of two (2) meters from floor level. Joints shall be straight, level,
perpendicular and of even width. Vertical joints shall be maintained plumb for the entire
height of the tile Work. Tiles that are out of true plane or misplaced shall be removed
and reset. Damaged or defective tile shall be replaced.

Joints in ceramic mosaic wall tile, after the edges of tiles have been
thoroughly wet, shall be grouted full with a plastic mix of neat, white, waterproofed
Portland cement immediately after a suitable area of tile has been set and the dry set
mortar has cured sufficiently to maintain the tile in place. The joints shall be tooled
slightly concave and the excess mortar shall be cut off and wiped from the face of the
tile. Interstices or depressions in the mortar joints after the grout has been cleaned
from the surface shall be roughened at once and filled to the spring line of the cushion
edge before the mortar begins to harden.

Immediately after the grout has taken its initial set, wall surfaces shall be
given a protective coat of noncorrosive soap or other approved material and joints damp
cured for a minimum of seventy-two (72) hours.

Upon completion, wall and floor tile shall be thoroughly cleaned in such a
manner so as to not scratch or damage the surface. Acid shall not be used in the
cleaning of ceramic tile.

4. Exterior Surfaces. External walls shall be finished with a white tyrolean

finish.

97
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.09.3.1.5 Floors. With the exception of the laboratory, all floors shall be
terrazzo tiles with a ten (10) centimeter kicking tile to the skirting. Samples of tile shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval of quality, color, finish and texture prior to
placing orders for material.

Patterns shall be laid out to permit setting of tile with a minimum of cutting.
Floors shall be laid out from one side and end, with adjustments made at opposite walls.
Dimensions shall be controlled to avoid setting tile smaller than one-half (1/2) size.

Floor tile shall be installed according to well-established practices. For all

floor tile areas, straightedges shall be set to the lines established and reset at suitable
intervals to keep the joints parallel over the entire area. Tile shall be laid to the
straightedges. The tile layout shall eliminate cut tile to the greatest extent possible.
Factional changes in dimensions without varying the uniformity of joint widths will be
permitted. Where required, tile shall be cut with a suitable cutting tool and rough edges
shall be rubbed smooth. Cut tile misfits shall be replaced with properly cut tile.

Grouting of floor tile shall not be done until setting bed has hardened
sufficiently. The joints shall be completely filled with grout by screeding and brushing
grout over the tile until joints are thoroughly filled. All excess grout shall be removed.
Not less than forty-eight (48) hours shall elapse before ordinary foot traffic is permitted
on the floor. Grout shall be a thick, soupy mix of neat waterproofed Portland cement.

Before foot traffic is permitted over finished tile floors, the floors shall be
covered with building paper. Board walkways shall be laid on floors to be continuously
used as passageways by workmen. Tile floor areas to be trucked over shall have
suitable constructed continuous plank runways of required width installed over the
building paper. Cracked, broken, or damaged tile shall be removed and replaced.

1.09.3.1.6 Ceilings. With the exception of bathrooms and kitchens, all

rooms of all buildings shall have a false internal ceiling of acoustic tiles and insulation
material, strongly fixed to the concrete roof by a system of battens and hangers as
specified by the tile manufacturer. The ceiling shall be level, installed at a minimum
height of two and one-half (2.5) meters above the floor.

Acoustical Tile shall be nominal two (2) centimeters by thirty (30)

centimeters by thirty (30) centimeters finely fissured surface, mineral tile units, with
noise reduction coefficients within the ranges of seven-tenths (0.7) to eight-tenths (0.8)
for suspended application. Units shall have square edges and a white factory finish.
Units shall be kerfed for concealed splines.

Insulation shall be a minimum of seven and one-half (7.5) centimeters

thick, fiberglass batt or blanket with paper vapor barrier.

Acoustical units shall be laid out in a square pattern symmetrical about the
centerlines of each room space, or panel, unless otherwise shown on the plans. During
erection, the joints around electric outlets, ducts, pipes, and other Work extending
through the acoustical treatment shall be sealed tight with plastic caulking compound.
98
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Following completion of the acoustical treatment, joints shall be straight and true to
line, and the exposed surfaces shall be flush and level. Wood molding shall be used
at intersections of units with walls and beams. All wood components exposed in the
finished installation shall be painted white. The suspension system for installation of
acoustical units shall be as shown on the plans. Insulation material shall be stapled or
tacked to the upper side of the suspension system prior to the installation of the ceiling
tile.

Following installation, all dirty or discolored surfaces of the acoustical

panels shall be cleaned and left free from defects. Panels which are damaged or
improperly installed shall be removed and replaced as directed by the Engineer.

1.09.3.1.7 Fixtures and Fittings.

1. Windows. The size of windows shall normally be one and three tenths
(1.3) by one and two tenths (1.2) meters and they shall be located in the positions
shown on the drawings dependent on the location and opening size required for the air
conditioning units. They shall be of the aluminum type, opening internally or slide
opening, with satisfactory seals providing a complete barrier to the ingress of dust when
closed. External fine mesh fly screens and locking devices shall be fitted as standard
by the manufacturer. Internally, all windows shall have fitted venetian blinds and
curtains with the exception of bathrooms which shall have translucent "nonsee" glass.

2. Doors. External doors shall be of the aluminum type opening internally

and be complete with all lock furniture and fittings. They shall be fitted with satisfactory
seals to provide a complete barrier to the ingress of dust when closed. External doors
shall also be fitted with an additional outside screen door of a standard type made of
wood with fine mesh which shall be complete with all necessary fittings and a silent
automatic closing device.

Internal doors shall be of the wooden type complete with wood frame and
surround lock furniture. One (1) coat primer and two (2) coats gloss finish paint shall
be applied to each wooden door. Locks to bedroom doors shall be mortise locks of the
cylinder barrel type or similar of equal security.

3. Electrical Plug Sockets. All rooms shall have a minimum of two (2)
double plug sockets. Offices shall have a minimum of three (3) double sockets. The
laboratory shall have a minimum of ten (10) double sockets. These numbers are in
excess of those sockets required on separate circuits for air conditioning, ventilation
units, and required major appliances.

Sockets shall be fitted in the corridor areas and communal rooms in the
places indicated by the Engineer. They shall be of an approved standard type fully
insulated and with provision for earthing. In the case of socket units installed into
bathrooms, they shall also be fully waterproofed and steam resistant. Electrical plugs
shall be provided as required by the Engineer.

4. Ventilation Units. The main kitchen shall be fitted with two (2) exhaust
fans of adequate size suitably placed to the Engineer's satisfaction. Exhaust fans shall
99
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

also be fitted at the end of the corridor in the Dormitory Building and where required in
the Laboratory. Family houses shall have one exhaust fan fitted in the kitchen.

5. Lighting. Overhead lighting units shall be of the fluorescent tube type,

flush fitting where there is a false ceiling, of a number and location to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. External floodlighting shall be provided for the Compound at such
locations that the entire area is adequately lit. Switch units shall be located in suitable
places.

6. Cabinetwork. All items of built-in cabinetwork, including cabinets,

cases, casework, bookcases, counters, lockers, shelving, and miscellaneous
cabinetwork items shall be constructed of approved materials and as detailed on the
plans. Drawers shall have solid stock facing and frames with tongue and groove or
dove-tailed joints. Bottom of drawers shall be plywood or pressed wood inserted in
closely fitting grooves and tacked in place. Drawers shall be provided with rabbetted
sides to slide on hardwood cleats. Surfaces designated to receive laminated plastic
shall be covered with nominal one and five-tenths (1.5) millimeter thick general purpose
acid resistant alcohol-proof, wear resistant laminated plastic of the manufacturer's
standard pattern and color as selected by the Engineer. Plastic coating shall be
cemented in place with waterproof cement in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and good trade practices. Plastic trim and splash backs shall be
provided for edges and openings in counters receiving plastic protection tops. Sink
openings shall be neatly cut in countertops and shall conform to dimensions required
by plumbing fixtures to be installed.

7. Miscellaneous Fittings and Trim. The Contractor shall furnish and

install all miscellaneous items, fittings, and running and standing trim in accordance with
room finish schedule and details. This item shall include all trim, moldings, shelves,
stops, etc., required to complete the installation as detailed.

8. Hardware. The Contractor shall furnish and install all rough and finish
hardware required for the completion of the structure. Rough hardware shall consist
of all nails, bolts, anchors, and inserts necessary to complete the building. Finish
hardware shall consist of hinges, latches, catches, locks, closers, pulls, door stops, and
other miscellaneous manufactured items regularly listed for doors and built-in millwork.
All hardware shall be approved by the Engineer.

1.09.3.1.8 Painting.

1. Paint Materials. All paint shall be approved by the Engineer and shall
be products of reputable manufacturers. All paint shall be ready-mixed and delivered
to the site in manufacturer's sealed containers. Thinning shall be done only in
accordance with directions of the manufacturer. Job mixing or job tinting will not be
permitted.

Colors will be selected by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit job
samples of the different kinds of finishes and colors and, after the samples have been
approved, all Work shall be finished to match the approved samples.

100
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

2. General Requirements. Paint shall be spread on evenly and brushed

out. Enamel Work shall be spread on evenly and show no sags and runs. During
painting operations, all surrounding surfaces shall be adequately protected from
splattering and dripping of paint; any damage occurring to other Work shall be promptly
repaired. Paint shall not be applied when conditions are such that windblown dust, dirt,
debris, or insects will collect to adhere to the freshly applied paint or finished surfaces.

Hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items shall be

removed before painting to provide ample protection of such items. The above items
shall be replaced upon completion of each space. Doors shall be removed, if
necessary, to seal bottom edges.

3. Woodwork. All finish carpentry and millwork shall receive one (1) coat
primer and two (2) finish coats of semigloss enamel, except work items in closets and
storage rooms shall receive one (1) coat primer and two (2) coats of flat oil paint or as
otherwise required to match adjacent surfaces.

4. Plaster. First coat shall be limeproof sealer; the second and third coats
in toilet rooms and kitchen shall be semi-gloss enamel paint. In other areas, the second
and third coats shall be flat latex base paint.

5. Concrete. Concrete shall be primed with one (1) coat of limeproof

sealer and finished with two (2) coats of flat latex base paint.

1.09.3.2 Temporary Buildings. When the "Supervision Staff Compound" is

designated in the Special Specifications or the Bill of Quantities as "Temporary," all
buildings shall meet the general geometric and utilitarian requirements of the plans and
specifications for permanent buildings. However, the construction material and
structural system(s) used may conform to recognized standards for prefabricated or
temporary buildings approved by the Engineer.

1.09.3.3 Building Keys. The Contractor shall turn over all keys to all locks to
the Engineer upon completion of the buildings. Keys shall be supplied in the minimum
quantity of two (2) keys for each lock.

1.09.3.4 Utilities and Services.

1.09.3.4.1 Electricity.

1. General. Electricity shall, until notified by the Engineer at the

completion of the Work and the Engineer's Work, be provided by the Contractor twenty-
four (24) hours per day for the duration of the Contract and shall be one hundred twenty
(120)/two hundred forty (240) volt, sixty (60) cycle, single phase.

2. Power Supply. In order to provide continuous service, and in case of

emergency, the Contractor shall provide, maintain, and operate two (2) generators, as
specified in the list of equipment on the plans or in the Special Specifications. The
generators shall be housed in a separate building outside of the Engineer's compound
wall, and shall be used solely for the Engineer's facilities.
101
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

3. System. Within fifteen (15) days after signing the Contract, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, plans and details for the electrical
system of the camp. The plans must include supply, circuitry, fusing, wire size and
type, grounds, etc., necessary to provide for the basic electrical services as detailed on
the plans and for the equipment listed in the Special Specifications.

4. Voltage Requirements. Air conditioners (except desert coolers), space

heaters and hot water heaters shall be operated on a two hundred forty (240) volt, sixty
(60) cycle system. All other electrical equipment and outlets, except as otherwise
specified, shall be operated on a one hundred twenty (120) volt, sixty (60) cycle system.
The laboratory shall operate on a system compatible with the electrically operated
testing equipment purchased by the Contractor.

5. Concealed Conduit. All wiring below ceiling level shall be placed in

conduit embedded in the wall. Conduit shall run in a direct line with bends as long as
possible, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

6. Telephone and Facsimile (FAX). Communication lines for telephones

in each office and FAX in one office of the office and laboratory buildings shall be
provided.

7. Joints and Splices. All joints and splices shall be made in junction
boxes. Wire size to eight (8) AWG shall be made mechanically secure with vinyl
jacketed pressure spin connectors, or by twisting conductors together and soldering.
Solder joints, if used, shall not be made with acid-core solder. Joints and splices for
conductors larger than eight (8) AWG shall be made with split bolt or crimped connector
applied with a tool. All joints and splices shall be fully insulated.

1.09.3.4.2 Water Supply and Plumbing.

1. General. The Contractor, shall, until notified by the Engineer at the

completion of the Work and the Engineer's Work, provide and maintain an adequate
and continuous supply of pure filtered water for the Engineer's facilities. Prior to its use,
the source of water proposed by the Contractor must be tested for purity and approved
by the Ministry of Health. The Engineer may, at any time he deems necessary, direct
the Contractor to retest the water source. The testing of the water source shall be at
the Contractor's expense.

2. Storage. The Contractor shall construct an approved elevated storage

tank having a minimum capacity of ten thousand (10,000) liters. The elevation of the
storage tank shall be set to provide the distribution system with an operating pressure
of one (1) kilogram per square centimeter. In addition, the Contractor shall provide, for
the kitchen, an emergency water supply consisting of two (2) water tanks. Each tank
shall have a capacity of one thousand five hundred (1,500) liters and be set at roof
height (but not directly on the roof). The emergency system shall have valves and
bypasses so it may be divorced from the main distribution system in case of a
contamination emergency. Each of the storage facilities shall have an electrical pump
and riser for filling.
102
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

3. Distribution System. Within fifteen (15) days after signing the Contract,
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval, plans and details for the
water distribution system for the Engineer's facilities. The plans shall include details of
the storage tank, piping diagrams, pipe sizes, etc., and meet the following minimum
basic criteria:

- The main supply line from the water tower to the building area shall
have a minimum inside diameter of seventy-five (75) millimeters.
- The supply system within the building area shall have a minimum
inside diameter of fifty (50) millimeters.
- Water lines shall not be placed within five (5) meters of a sewer line
and under no circumstances shall a water line cross above or below a sewer line.

4. Testing. The water distribution system shall be tested for acceptance

under the supervision of the Engineer. The test procedure is as follows:

- The Contractor shall place the system under a pressure equal to the
ultimate operational pressure for a period of eight (8) hours.

- All leaks shall be repaired and the system retested. Tests for
acceptance may be conducted on each of the individual parts of the system and need
not necessarily include the entire system at one time. Tests shall be conducted prior
to the plastering over or otherwise covering up of the piping to be tested. Untested
piping which has been covered up shall be re-exposed for testing.

5. Plumbing and Fixtures. Plumbing shall be done in a neat, workmanlike

manner. Fixtures shall be of high quality and of the size and type designated in the
drawings and specifications. Fixtures shall be approved by the Engineer prior to their
installation. Fixtures broken or damaged during installation shall be replaced. On
completion of the plumbing Work, the Contractor shall clean all fixtures to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.09.3.4.3 Waste Disposal.

1. General. The Contractor shall, until notified by the Engineer at the

completion of the Work and the Engineer's Work, provide and maintain adequate septic
tanks and sewage disposal systems. He shall also provide garbage and trash removal
service at least once daily.

2. Septic Tanks. The Contractor shall construct three (3) septic tanks
located at least sixty (60) meters from the Compound. One (1) each for the laboratory
building and the kitchen and one (1) for the living quarters buildings. The service
quarters shall be connected to the kitchen tank. The septic tanks shall be dual chamber
structures with an internal wall forming a high level weir overflow separating the two (2)
chambers. Access to each chamber shall be provided by airtight inspection covers.
Inlet pipes shall be into the first chamber opposite to the overflow weir wall and the
outlet shall be at a high level at the opposite end of the second chamber. The outlet
shall be a three (3) meter pipe, diameter twenty (20) centimeters, leading into an
103
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

excavated soakaway pit which shall be filled with rock and contain no fine material. The
septic tanks shall be emptied as required.

The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning the septic tanks when, in
the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary. Outfall laterals shall be installed as noted
on the plans. Tanks and lateral systems shall be plainly marked in order to keep
vehicles from driving over them.

3. Sewer System. Within fifteen (15) days after signing the Contract, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for his approval, plans and details for an
adequate sewer system. The plans shall include piping diagrams, cleanout locations,
venting, traps, etc., and shall meet the following minimum basic criteria:

- Horizontal sewer lines within the buildings shall be minimum fifteen

(15) centimeters inside diameter, cast iron soil pipe and have a slope of between one
(1) percent minimum and three percent (3%) maximum. The lines shall be supported
or anchored at intervals not to exceed three (3) meters.
- Horizontal sewer lines outside the buildings shall be a minimum fifteen
(15) centimeters inside diameter pipe and have a slope of between six-tenths percent
(0.6%) minimum and two percent (2%) maximum.

- Outfall laterals shall be minimum fifteen (15) centimeters inside

diameter perforated pipe and have a slope of between two-tenths percent (0.2%)
minimum and four-tenths percent (0.4%) maximum. Outfall laterals shall be installed
as shown on the plans.
- Adequate vents and cleanouts shall be included in the system.
- All drains and fixtures shall be adequately trapped from sewer gas.
- Sewer lines shall be joined by "Y" connections. "T" connections shall
not be used.

4. Testing. The sewer system shall be tested for acceptance under the
supervision of the Engineer. The test procedure is as follows:

- The Contractor shall place the sewer lines system under one (1) meter
of head above the highest drain for a minimum period of four (4) hours.

- Any leaks shall be repaired and the system retested for approval. The
encasement of a leaking joint in concrete shall not be accepted as repair. Tests for
acceptance may be conducted on each of the individual parts of the system and need
not necessarily include the entire system at one time. Test shall be conducted prior to
the covering up of any portion of the system. Untested piping which has been covered
up shall be re-exposed for testing.

104
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.09.3.5 Ancillary Structures. Within the compound shall be erected the

following ancillary structures:

1.09.3.5.1 Carport. The structure shall be ten (10) centimeter posts set
in concrete with corrugated sheet roof fixed to suitable steel lathes and rails. The height
of the carport shall be specified by the Engineer. There shall be space for at least
sixteen (16) cars.

1.09.3.5.2 Radio Antenna. The radio antenna shall be constructed to the

standard drawings, complete with all necessary wires and connections to the office.

1.09.3.5.3 Perimeter Fence. The Compound shall be surrounded by a

fence of at least two (2) meters in height. It shall be four (4) centimeter mesh wire fixed
on steel "T" section posts all painted one (1) coat primer and one (1) coat gloss paint.
Vehicular access gates shall be provided together with a single person access gate.
Gate locations shall be indicated by the Engineer. The bottom three (3) centimeters
of the perimeter fence shall extend a minimum of six (6) centimeters below ground
elevation and shall be cast for the full length of the perimeter fence, except at the gate
locations.

1.09.3.5.4 Clothes Line. Close to the Service Quarters a five (5) strand
clothes line of adequate size shall be erected. Sufficient pegs shall be provided.

1.09.3.6 Ground Improvements.

1.09.3.6.1 Concrete Walks. Concrete Walks shall be constructed at

locations shown on the plans. Fourteen (14) millimeter thick expansion joints shall be
placed where walks about buildings and at distances not to exceed twenty (20) meters
in straight runs. The surface of walks shall be divided into squares by means of
contraction joints formed in the fresh concrete. Finish shall be by wood float followed
by a stiff brush or broom as required to insure nonslip characteristics. Concrete for
walks must be cured for a minimum of three (3) days or as directed by the Engineer.

1.09.3.6.2 Gravel Surfaces. Gravel Surfaces shall be screened or

natural gravel, as approved by the Engineer, and placed in the locations noted on the
drawings. The thickness of the surfacing shall be that required to eliminate dust
conditions for the particular camp site selected. Minimum thickness shall in no case be
less than fifteen (15) centimeters.

1.09.3.6.3 Concrete Bumper Posts. Concrete Bumper Posts shall be

precast to the dimensions shown on the plans and installed in the manner and location
shown on the plans. In lieu of concrete posts, the Contractor may substitute wooden
bumper posts with the approval of the Engineer.

1.09.3.6.4 Grading. The site of construction shall be graded to uniform

slopes, conforming to existing adjacent contours; properly drained without ponding; and
presenting a neat and finished appearance. All excess and unsuitable materials shall
be removed from the site and all ruts, holes, and depressions caused by construction
activities shall be filled and graded to match adjacent surfaces. During construction, the
105
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Contractor shall control grading in the vicinity of the building so the ground surface is
properly pitched to prevent water from running into excavated areas. Water entering
excavated areas shall be removed, excavations dried out, and subgrade recompacted
to its proper bearing capacity.

1.09.4 BUILDING FURNISHINGS. The buildings within the compound shall be

provided with the following permanent and temporary furnishings. Permanent
furnishing shall remain a part of permanent buildings when they are turned over to the
Ministry. Temporary furnishings shall be removed from permanent building prior to
turning the building over to the Ministry. All furnishings shall be removed as a part of
the temporary building removal.

1.09.4.1 Dormitory Building.

1.09.4.1.1 Bathrooms. Permanent - European toilet, bidet, paper holder,

shower unit (minimum head height - two (2) meters), sunken shower basin, shower
curtain rail, soap dish, large hand wash basin, mirror, shelf, towel rail, light, razor
socket, fifty (50) liter electrical water heater with waterproof switch.

1.09.4.1.2 Bedrooms. Permanent - wall mirror, coat hook on door.

Temporary - twelve thousand (12,000) BTU air conditioner.

1.09.4.2 Office Building.

1.09.4.2.1 Resident Engineer's Office. Permanent - shelves, bell to

kitchen, wall board. Temporary - eighteen thousand (18,000) BTU air conditioner.

1.09.4.2.2 Surveyor's Office. Permanent - lockable cupboard, long

bench for plans, shelves, wall board. Temporary - fourteen thousand (14,000)
BTU air conditioner.

1.09.4.2.3 Civil Engineer's, Material Engineer's and Bridge Engineer's

Offices. Permanent (each) - lockable cupboard, shelves, wall board. Temporary
(each) - eighteen thousand (18,000) BTU air conditioner.

1.09.4.2.4 Administrative Assistant's Office. Permanent - lockable

cupboard, shelves, wall board. Temporary - fourteen thousand (14,000) BTU air
conditioner.

1.09.4.2.5 Corridor. Permanent - wall board.

1.09.4.2.6 Toilet. Permanent - European toilet, hand wash basin, towel

rail.

1.09.4.2.7 Storeroom. Permanent - shelves.

106
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.09.4.3 Kitchen and Mess Building.

1.09.4.3.1 Kitchen. Permanent - sarge cupboard, shelves, two hundred

(200) liter water heater, double stainless steel sink, working table with marble slab, foot
hutch with sliding opening to dining room. Temporary - gas or electric stove with oven
to cater for at least twenty (20) people, minimum six tenths (0.6) cubic meter
refrigerator, minimum six-tenths (0.6) cubic meter freezer, two (2) twenty-four thousand
(24,000) BTU air conditioners.

1.09.4.3.2 Storeroom. Permanent - shelves. Temporary - minimum six-

tenths (0.6) cubic meter refrigerator, twelve thousand (12,000) BTU air conditioner.

1.09.4.3.3 Dining Room. Temporary - minimum of ninety and four-tenths

(90.4) cubic meter refrigerator, two (2) - twenty-four thousand (24,000) BTU air
conditioners.

1.09.4.3.4 Lounge. Permanent - shelves. Temporary - two (2) twenty-

four thousand (24,000) BTU air conditioners.

1.09.4.3.5 Toilet. Permanent - European toilet, two (2) hand wash

basins, two (2) towel rails.

1.09.4.4 Service Quarters.

1.09.4.4.1 Bedrooms. Permanent - two (2) wall mirrors, two (2) coat
hooks. Temporary - two (2) single beds each with mattress, two (2) pillows, two (2)
pairs sheets, four (4) pillow cases, two (2) blankets, two (2) towels, two (2) wardrobes
with drawers, waste basket, table with chairs, twelve thousand (12,000) BTU air
conditioner.

1.09.4.4.2 Bathroom. Permanent - Arabic toilet, hand wash basin,

shower, twenty (20) liter electric water heater.

1.09.4.4.3 Laundry Room. Permanent - shelves, counter, large sink.

Temporary - heavy duty electric washing machine, ironing table, two (2) electric irons,
two hundred (200) liter electric water heater, twelve thousand (12,000) BTU air
conditioner.

1.09.4.5 Family Houses.

1.09.4.5.1 Bathrooms - Same as bathrooms for dormitory buildings.

1.09.4.5.2 Bedrooms - Same as bedrooms for dormitory buildings.

107
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.09.4.5.3 Kitchen - Permanent - cupboard, shelves, two hundred (200)

liter electric water heater, double sink, working table with marble slab. Temporary - gas
or electric stove with oven to cater for at least four (4) people, three-tenths (0.3) cubic
meter refrigerator, twelve thousand (12,000) BTU air conditioner, electric washing
machine.

1.09.4.5.4 Living/Dining Room. Temporary - sixteen thousand (16,000)

BTU air conditioner.

1.09.4.5.5 Outside. Permanent - clothes line with steel post and three (3)
strands nylon line.

1.09.4.6 Laboratory.

Permanent - acid/alcohol resistant plastic counters, two (2) large stainless steel
basins. Temporary - two (2) eighteen thousand (18,000) BTU air conditioners. In
addition, the Contractor shall furnish all field and laboratory testing equipment required
or implied by the Highway Materials Manual for the tests designated to be performed
onsite in Section 1.04, "Control of Materials." The Contractor shall furnish spare parts
and/or repair capabilities for all equipment. The inability to accurately test highway
material for acceptance due to improper or defective equipment may result in the
suspension of operations or the withholding of payment for certain materials until testing
can be completed.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval, and within fifteen
(15) days after signing of the Contract, a complete listing of the equipment, apparatus,
and supplies he proposes to furnish for the laboratory. The list shall include the
manufacturer's name, capacity, and descriptive literature for each piece of equipment.

1.09.4.7 General.

1.09.4.7.1 Fire Equipment. Temporary - all buildings shall be provided

with a minimum of three (3) fire extinguishers which shall be maintained ready for use
at all times. They shall be of the type suitable for all types of fires. Within each kitchen
shall be installed a fire blanket and wall mounted bracket.

1.09.4.7.2 Weather Instruments. The Contractor shall furnish and

maintain in good working order for the duration of the Contract, instruments and their
necessary appurtenances to be used by the Engineer in recording weather data. The
instruments shall be installed at a location designated by the Engineer in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. All instruments shall be of professional or
paraprofessional quality approved by the Engineer and accompanied by the
manufacturer's operating instructions. The instruments required are:
- One rain gauge
- One recording anemometer
- One recording thermometer
- One wet-bulb thermometer for measuring relative humidity

108
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

If the Contractor cannot replace or repair the above equipment in one (1) week
or less, he shall provide spares or replacement parts as needed.

1.09.5 PROJECT LABORATORY.

1.09.5.1 General. The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the duration
of the Works a laboratory in good working condition with all utility services, furniture,
equipment, apparatus and fittings. The laboratory, fittings and equipment shall be
suitable for their purpose to the approval of the Engineer, and shall be operated by the
Contractor under the supervision and direction of the Engineer.

1.09.5.2 Technicians, Laborers and Drivers. The Contractor shall provide at

no cost to the Engineer, technicians, laborers, drivers, etc. in the number deemed
necessary, and approved by the Engineer, to operate the laboratory as required by the
Contractor's proposed Programme of Works. Personnel once assigned to the
laboratory shall not be removed by the Contractor unless at the direction of, or with
approval of, the Engineer.

1.09.5.3 Air Conditioning. The laboratory shall be fully air-conditioned in an

approved manner, such that the temperature within the buildings does not exceed
twenty-two degrees Celsius (22 C).

1.09.5.4 Ownership. On completion of the Works, the laboratory complete with

all fittings and utility services, furniture, equipment and apparatus shall become the
property of the Contractor.

1.09.5.5 Testing Equipment, Tests and Specifications. All shall be in

accordance with the Ministry of Communication's Materials Manual, Volume I, Page 37
- 40. The Marshall Compactor shall be automatic.

1.09.5.6 Manuals and Standards. A complete set of the relevant ASTM,

AASHTO, BS and other Standards, Construction and Materials Manuals and Codes of
Practice referred to in this Contract, or relevant thereto, shall be provided by the
Contractor for use by the Engineer.

All copies of Manuals and Standards shall become the property of the
Contractor at the end of the Project.

1.09.6 SURVEY EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall supply and maintain in full
working order and shall replace, whenever directed by the Engineer during the progress
of the Work, the surveying and other equipment scheduled below and shall provide
chainmen and other like labor in the number required from time to time in connection
with the Work. All surveying equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor.

109
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

The list below is the minimum requirement. The Contractor is to provide any other
equipment necessary for the execution of the Work as directed by the Engineer and
specified herewith. All equipment must be approved by the Engineer.

2 Complete sets of Electronic Distance Measuring Instruments with single

and triple prisms, tripod, etc.
2 Automatic Levels complete with tripods.
4 Illuminated Targets with tripods.
2 Hand Levels (Spirit) (Water)
3 4m Levelling Staffs
2 50m Steel Tapes with extra length before zero point.
2 30m Steel Tapes with extra length before zero point.
4 Steel Pocket Tapes, 5m long
4 Surveying Umbrellas
20 Ranging Rods 2.5m long
20 Level Books
20 Field Books
6 Scientific Calculators (10 digits) with all mathematical functions.
4 Plumb Bobs
1 Optical Plumb
2 Approved Programmable Electronic Calculators with peripheral storage
and printing facilities.
1 Drafting Table
1 Precise attachment for the level with direct reading to 0.1mm.

Adequate supplies of pencils, ink, scales, drawing paper, stationery, pegs, brushes,
paint, etc., and all other expendable materials to be provided as and when required by
the Engineer.

1.09.7 COMPUTER EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall supply and maintain in full
working order during the progress of the Work, Computer Software together with a
computer and compatible accessories with an adequate specification for running the
software packages provided by the Contractor.

1.09.7.1 Software. Copies of the Computer Software packages, identical to

those used by the Contractor, shall be supplied to the Ministry and to the Engineer for
the use of his staff. All computer software packages to be supplied must be approved
by the Engineer.

In choosing the software packages to be used, the Contractor must coordinate

with any adjacent Contractors to insure that the software packages used on both
contracts are the same and are compatible with software currently being used by the
Ministry.

110
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

Software packages must be supplied for the following operations:

- Word Processing.
- Spreadsheet.
- Project Programming and Resource Allocation
- Quantities Calculations

1.09.7.2 Hardware. The hardware provided must be capable of handling all of

the software packages provided without unreasonable processing delay. The absolute
minimum specification shall be as below:
- Pentium II processor at 400 MHz.
- On Board 128 MByte RAM and Internal Built-in 100 Mbyte
Zip Drive With disk.
- 10 GByte Hard Disk Drive and CD-ROM Drive 32X
- 56 K Fax & Modem
- 1.44 MByte (high density) 3.5 inch Floppy Disk Drive
- Keyboard 101 Key; English /Arabic
- Display: 15" Dimension VGA, Colored.
- Printer/plotter: 24 pin dot matrix printer capable of printing at
240 cps with graphics capability and an A4 cut sheet feeder
and a tractor for US wide standard paper.
- A AO/A1 plotter is required to output project program charts.
The Contractor must make sure that the Engineer's staff
have reasonable access, at the Contractor's expense, to a
plotting facility.

1.09.7.3 Modem Links. Modem links should be provided to link the

Contractor's Computer to the Engineer's and the Ministry's Computers. The Contractor
shall supply compatible equipment for the Engineer and the Ministry and shall arrange
for the supply of a dedicated telephone line for the use of the modem to the Engineer's
office.

1.09.8 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE.

1.09.8.1 Maintenance. The Contractor shall provide full and continuing

maintenance of the Supervision Staff facilities throughout the period of the Construction
Works, and shall include the costs of this maintenance in the item lump sum rate.

1.09.8.2 Service. The Contractor shall provide one (1) full-time twenty-four
hour (24 hour) service staff and one (1) driver for the daily running of the Supervision
Staff Compound. Accommodation for the permanent staff shall be provided within the
Supervision Staff Compound in accordance with the drawings and the Special
Specifications. All costs necessary for the provision and upkeep of the above
mentioned personnel shall be inclusive in the lump sum rate for the Supervision Staff
Compound.

111
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998

Table of Contents

1.09.9 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. "Supervision Staff Compound" and

"Supervision Staff Compound (Temporary)" will include all materials, equipment,
construction, labor, maintenance, and incidental items required by this section. The
lump sum price for this Work will be all inclusive for the compound specified,
constructed, and maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

All items described in Subparagraphs: Project Laboratory and Computers and

Survey Equipment Items which are provided for the use of the Engineer's staff only
shall be measured at the lump sum price and paid for in installments as described
below for which payments shall be full compensation for all Project laboratory,
construction, renovation, repainting, furnishing, refurbishing, maintenance and all other
work described including the supply and maintenance (including replacements where
necessary) of all furniture, equipment, fixtures, fittings, manuals, standards including
connections to and supply of utility services including telephones. It shall also include
for the provision of laboratory technicians, drivers and laborers as required by the Work
Programme and the maintenance and supply of fuel (for generators, gas for laboratory,
etc.), water, electricity, etc...and for the supply of all laboratory and computer
consumables. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Specifications, all equipment
shall be returned to the Contractor at the completion of the Final Handover.

1.09.10 PAYMENT. Payment for "Supervision Staff Compound," "Laboratory,"

"Survey and Computer Equipment" and "Vehicles" as described above shall be paid for
in installments of the bid price as follows:

- 40% Upon completion of the required Works to bring into full use as specified
or the provision and commissioning of the Supervision Staff Compound, Laboratory, the
Survey Equipment and the Computer Equipment as outlined in these General
Specifications.

- 10% Upon completion of every 20% of the Contract Value thereafter,

except that the final 10% payment shall be made with the final certificate.
Payment shall be conditional upon proper and satisfactory operation and
maintenance of the facilities as specified and approved by the Engineer.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT
10901 Supervision Staff Compound Lump Sum
10902 Supervision Staff Compound (Temporary) Lump Sum
10903 Project Laboratory Lump Sum
10904 Computers and Survey Equipment Lump Sum

112
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

November 1998

PART TWO
EARTHWORK
Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 2.01 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING............................................... 1

2.01.1 Description.................................................................................... 1
2.01.2 Construction ................................................................................. 1
2.01.3 Disposal of Removed Material ..................................................... 2
2.01.4 Method of Measurement .............................................................. 2
2.01.5 Payment ....................................................................................... 2

SECTION 2.02 - REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS....... 4

2.02.1 Description.................................................................................... 4
2.02.2 Preservation of Property............................................................... 5
2.02.3 Construction ................................................................................. 5
2.02.3.1 Miscellaneous Structures and Obstructions.............................. 5
2.02.3.2 Existing Bituminous and Cement Concrete Pavement.... 7
2.02.3.3 Wells................................................................................ 7
2.02.3.4 Bridge Structures............................................................. 7
2.02.3.5 Guardrails and Concrete Barriers.................................... 8
2.02.3.6 Impact Attenuators .......................................................... 8
2.02.3.7 Traffic Marking................................................................. 8
2.02.3.8 Pavement Markers .......................................................... 9
2.02.3.9 Rumble Strips or Speed Bumps...................................... 9
2.02.3.10 Sign Post Bases ............................................................ 9
2.02.3.11 Signs.............................................................................. 9
2.02.3.12 Breakaway Sign Posts and Kilometer Posts ............... 11
2.02.3.13 Overhead Sign Supports ............................................. 11
2.02.3.14 Delineators .................................................................. 11
2.02.4 Disposal of Removed Material ................................................... 11
2.02.5 Method of Measurement ............................................................ 11
2.02.6 Payment ..................................................................................... 14

SECTION 2.03 - EXCAVATION...................................................................... 16

2.03.1 Description.................................................................................. 16
2.03.2 Classification of Excavation........................................................ 16
2.03.2.1 Roadway Excavation..................................................... 16
2.03.2.2 Roadway Excavation - Unsuitable Material................... 17
2.03.2.3 Roadway Excavation - Channel and Ditch.................... 17
2.03.2.4 Tunnel Excavation......................................................... 17
2.03.3 Construction ............................................................................... 18
2.03.3.1 Utilization of Excavated Materials in Rural Areas.......... 18
2.03.3.2 Utilization of Excavated Materials in Municipalities (Urban
Areas) ............................................................................ 18
2.03.3.3 Roadway Excavation..................................................... 18
2.03.3.4 Roadway Excavation - Unsuitable Material................... 19
2.03.3.5 Roadway Excavation - Channel and Ditch.................... 19
2.03.3.6 Designated Materials Selected from Roadway Excavation ......... 19
Table of Contents

2.03.3.7 Roadway Excavation in Cut Sections … … … 20

2.03.3.8 Tunnel Excavation - General......................................... 20
2.03.4 Disposal of Surplus and Unsuitable Materials........................... 21
2.03.5 Quality Assurance Procedures.................................................. 21
2.03.6 Method of Measurement ............................................................ 22
2.03.6.1 Roadway Excavation..................................................... 22
2.03.6.2 Tunnel Excavation......................................................... 24
2.03.7 Payment ..................................................................................... 25

SECTION 2.04 - CONTROLLED AND PRODUCTION BLASTING............... 26

2.04.1 Description................................................................................. 26
2.04.2 Use of Explosives ....................................................................... 26
2.04.3 Product Specifications............................................................... 26
2.04.4 Blasting Plan.............................................................................. 27
2.04.5 Traffic Interruption Notification .................................................. 27
2.04.6 Safety Procedures..................................................................... 27
2.04.6.1 Type of Explosive Materials ........................................ 28
2.04.6.2 Blaster-in-Charge ........................................................ 28
2.04.6.3 Initial Safety Procedures Submittal ............................. 28
2.04.6.3.1 Blaster-In-Charge Qualifications … … … .28
2.04.6.4 Check for Misfires........................................................ 29
2.04.6.5 Misfire Handling Procedures ....................................... 30
2.04.6.6 Lightning Protection..................................................... 30
2.04.7 Execution.................................................................................... 31
2.04.7.1 Time Restrictions......................................................... 31
2.04.7.2 Pre-Blast Report.......................................................... 31
2.04.7.3 Test Blasts................................................................... 32
2.04.7.4 Production Blasting...................................................... 32
2.04.7.5 Presplitting................................................................... 33
2.04.7.6 Cushion (Trim) Blasting............................................... 35
2.04.7.7 Scaling and Stabilization ............................................. 35
2.04.8 Special Requirements ................................................................ 36
2.04.8.1 Blasting Consultant........................................................ 36
2.04.8.2 Pre-Blast Condition Survey ........................................... 36
2.04.8.3 Vibration Control Monitoring........................................ 36
2.04.8.4 Flyrock Control ............................................................ 39
2.04.8.5 Public Meetings ........................................................... 39
2.04.9 Recordkeeping ........................................................................... 40
2.04.9.1 Daily Explosive Material Consumption.......................... 40
2.04.9.2 Report of Loss ............................................................... 40
2.04.9.3 Daily Blasting Logs...................................................... 40
2.04.9.4 Video Recording of Blasts ........................................... 40
2.04.1 0 Method of Measurement ......................................................... 40
2.04.11 Payment ................................................................................... 41
Table of Contents

SECTION 2.05 - EMBANKMENT ................................................................... 42

2.05.1 Description.................................................................................. 42
2.05.2 Materials ..................................................................................... 42
2.05.2.1 Embankment Materials.................................................. 42
2.05.3 Construction ............................................................................... 42
2.05.3.1 Equipment ..................................................................... 42
2.05.3.2 Foundation Preparation................................................. 43
2.05.3.3 Imported Borrow Material.. ................................................. …44
2.05.3.4 Placement of Materials ........................................................... 45
2.05.3.5 Embankment Drainage and Slope Stability ............................ 47
2.05.3.6 Dune Sand Embankment ....................................................... 48
2.05.3.7 Fugitive Dust and Soil Erosion Control Plan ...........................48
2.05.3.7.1 General .................................................................48
2.05.3.7.2 Erosion Check Dams ........................................... 50
2.05.3.7.3 Sediment Containment Structures.. .................. …50
2.05.3.7.4 Diversion Channels .............................................. 50
2.05.3.7.5 Earth Berms.......................................................... 50
2.05.3.7.6 Slope Drains ......................................................... 50
2.05.3.7.7 Turf Establishment........................................ 50
2.05.3.7.8 Cleanup ........................................................ 50
2.05.3.7.9 Method of Measurement............................... 51
2.05.3.7.10 Basis of Payment.. .......................................... …51

2.05.4 Lift Thickness and Compaction Requirements ..................................... 52

2.05.4.1 Description ............................................................................. 52
2.05.4.2 Testing Methods..................................................................... 52
2.05.4.3 Earth Embankment Lift Thickness and Compaction ............... 53
2.05.4.4 Rock Embankment Lift Thickness and Compaction ............... 55
2.05.5 Moisture Content Control Requirements .............................................. 58
2.05.6 Compaction Test Sections ................................................................... 59
2.05.7 Quality Assurance Procedures............................................................. 59
2.05.7.1 Lift Thickness ......................................................................... 59
2.05.7.2 Compaction ............................................................................ 60
2.05.7.3 Classification .......................................................................... 60
2.05.7.4 Embankment Finishing Tolerances and Requirements .......... 61
2.05.7.5 Acceptance ............................................................................ 61
2.05.8 Method of Measurement ...................................................................... 62
2.05.9 Payment. .............................................................................................. 63

SECTION 2.06 - UNTREATED SUBGRADE ................................................. 64

2.06.1 Description.................................................................................. 64
2.06.2 Materials ..................................................................................... 64
2.06.3 Construction ............................................................................... 65
2.06.3.1 Equipment .................................................................... 65
2.06.3.2 Imported Borrow Material ............................................. 65
2.06.3.3 Placement of Materials................................................. 66
2.06.3.4 Subgrade Drainage and Slope Stability ....................... 66
Table of Contents

2.06.3.5 Subgrade on Existing Road Surfaces .......................... 66

2.06.3.6 Subgrade in Earth Cuts ................................................ 67
2.06.3.7 Subgrade in Rock Cuts ................................................ 67
2.06.3.8 Subgrade on Embankments (Including Sand Dune Areas).........68
2.06.3.9 Preparation of Existing Subgrade.................................. 68
2.06.4 Quality Assurance Procedures................................................... 68
2.06.4.1 Thickness ...................................................................... 68
2.06.4.2 Compaction ................................................................... 69
2.06.4.3 Classification, Maximum Particle Size and CBR........... 69
2.06.4.4 Finishing Tolerances and Requirements....................... 70
2.06.4.5 Acceptance.................................................................... 70
2.06.5 Maintenance and Protection....................................................... 71
2.06.6 Method of Measurement ............................................................ 71
2.06.7 Payment ..................................................................................... 72

SECTION 2.07 - LIME TREATED SUBGRADE............................................. 73

2.07.1 Description.................................................................................. 73
2.07.2 Equipment .................................................................................. 73
2.07.3 Materials ..................................................................................... 74
2.07.3.1 Lime............................................................................... 74
2.07.3.2 Water ..............................................................................74
2.07.3.3 Bituminous Curing Seal..................................................74
2.07.4 Construction Requirements.........................................................74
2.07.4.1 Preparation of Roadbed ................................................74
2.07.4.2 Application of Lime ........................................................75
2.07.4.3 Mixing ............................................................................75
2.07.4.4 Compaction and Finishing.............................................76
2.07.4.5 Curing ............................................................................76
2.07.4.6 Safety Requirements.....................................................76
2.07.5 Quality Assurance Procedures....................................................77
2.07.5.1 Thickness ......................................................................77
2.07.5.2 Compaction ...................................................................78
2.07.5.3 Classification, Maximum Particle Size and CBR...........78
2.07.5.4 Finishing Tolerances and Requirements.......................79
2.07.5.5 Lime...............................................................................79
2.07.5.6 Acceptance....................................................................79
2.07.6 Method of Measurement .............................................................80
2.07.7 Payment ......................................................................................80

SECTION 2.08 - CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE ...................................... 81

2.08.1 Description.................................................................................. 81
2.08.2 Materials ..................................................................................... 81
2.08.2.1 In-Place Material............................................................ 81
2.08.2.2 Portland Cement............................................................ 81
2.08.2.3 Water ............................................................................. 81
2.08.2.4 Bituminous Cure Seal.................................................... 81
Table of Contents

2.08.2.5 Chemical Admixtures..................................................... 81

2.08.3 Mix Design.................................................................................. 81
2.08.4 Weather Limitations.................................................................... 82
2.08.5 Traffic Control............................................................................. 82
2.08.6 Equipment .................................................................................. 82
2.08.7 Construction ............................................................................... 82
2.08.7.1 Preparation of Roadbed ............................................... 82
2.08.7.2 Application of the Cement ............................................ 83
2.08.7.3 Mixing ........................................................................... 83
2.08.7.4 Compacting and Finishing............................................ 83
2.08.7.5 Operation Time Requirement ....................................... 84
2.08.8 Curing ......................................................................................... 84
2.08.9 Quality Assurance Procedures................................................... 84
2.08.9.1 Thickness ..................................................................... 85
2.08.9.2 Compaction .................................................................. 85
2.08.9.3 Classification, Maximum Particle Size and CBR.......... 86
2.08.9.4 Finishing Tolerances and Requirements...................... 86
2.08.9.5 Cement ......................................................................... 87
2.08.9.6 Acceptance................................................................... 87
2.08.1 0 Method of Measurement ......................................................... 87
2.08.11 Payment ................................................................................... 88

SECTION 2.09 - STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL.................89

2.09.1 Description...................................................................................89
2.09.2 Construction ................................................................................89
2.09.2.1 General.........................................................................89
2.09.2.2 Structural Excavation for Bridges.................................90
2.09.2.3 Structural Excavation for Culverts and Miscellaneous..91
2.09.2.4 Foundation Pits.............................................................92
2.09.2.5 Pile Foundations...........................................................93
2.09.2.6 Cofferdams...................................................................93
2.09.2.7 Scheduling Excavation for Structures ..........................94
2.09.3 Materials ..................................................................................... 94
2.09.3.1 General......................................................................... 94
2.09.3.2 Foundation Material...................................................... 94
2.09.3.3 Structural Backfill Material............................................ 95
2.09.4 Backfilling Structures................................................................. 96
2.09.5 Compaction of Structural Backfill .............................................. 97
2.09.6 Quality Assurance Procedures.................................................. 98
2.09.7 Disposal of Unsuitable and Surplus Excavation........................ 98
2.09.8 Method of Measurement ........................................................... 98
2.09.9 Payment .................................................................................. 100

SECTION 2. 1 0 - TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL...................... 101

2.1 0.1 Description............................................................................... 101
2.10.2 Construction ............................................................................. 101
Table of Contents

2.10.2.1 General....................................................................... 101

2.10.2.2 Scheduling.................................................................. 102
2.10.2.3 Trench Excavation...................................................... 103
2.10.2.4 Unsuitable Foundation Material.................................. 103
2.10.2.5 Precast Concrete Pipe Culverts ................................. 104
2.10.2.6 Metal Pipe Culverts .................................................... 104
2.10.2.7 Cast in Place Concrete Pipe ...................................... 105
2.10.3 Bedding Materials..................................................................... 105
2.10.3.1 Sand Bedding.............................................................. 105
2.10.3.2 Soil Cement Bedding................................................... 105
2.10.4 Trench Backfill Materials .......................................................... 106
2.10.5 Quality Assurance Procedures................................................. 106
2.10.6 Method of Measurement .......................................................... 107
2.10.7 Payment ................................................................................... 107
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

PART TWO: EARTHWORK

SECTION 2.01 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING

2.01.1 Description. This work shall consist of removing all objectionable material
from within the right of way, embankment and touch grade areas, easement areas
for bridge construction, road approaches, channels and ditches, and such other
areas as may be shown on the plans or specified in the special specifications, except
objects designated to remain. It shall also include the recompaction of the cleared
and grubbed areas as specified in Paragraph 2.05.3.2, "Foundation Preparation," in
these General Specifications. Objects designated to remain or to be removed in
accordance with other sections of the specifications, adjacent public and private
property, utilities and non-highway facilities shall be protected from injury or damage
resulting from the Contractors operations. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed
in advance of grading operations and in accordance with these specifications.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Clearing and Grubbing
Individual Tree Removal

2.01.2 Construction. The Contractor, as soon as the site or part thereof has been
handed over, before commencing the clearing and grubbing shall resurvey together
with the Engineer the whole centerline of the alignment, locating the centerline at the
ground and taking cross sections along the alignment at a maximum longitudinal
spacing of twenty five (25) meters.

In case it clarifies that levels for the natural ground in a certain area differ
remarkably from what is established on the plans, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer thereof and obtain his approval to commence with the work prior to causing
a change in the natural ground levels.

Within sixty (60) days of the date of field staking the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for his approval plots of the original and staked survey cross sections
together with the corresponding plots as detailed in Paragraph 1.07.13 "Earthwork"
in these General Specifications.

Unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified in the special specifications,

the Contractor shall clear the entire length of fill and touch grade sections of the
project to the following staked widths:

1. Highway construction embankment and touch grade areas, including

structures, frontage roads, ramps, interchange loops, approaches, channels, ditches,
and other accessory roads and connections that are to be constructed. Such areas
are to extend to a width two (2) meters outside of structures and excavation and
embankment slope lines, including slope rounding.

2. Borrow sites within the right of way, or as shown on the plans, specified in the
Special Specifications and approved by the Engineer.

1
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Within the limits specified, the area above the natural ground surface shall be
cleared of vegetation growth, such as trees, stumps, plants, brush, and all other
objectionable material, except items marked by the Engineer to remain. Within the
limits of clearing, the areas below the natural ground shall be grubbed to a minimum
depth of twenty (20) centimeters, or as may be necessary, to remove tree stumps,
roots and other objectionable material.

2.01.3 Disposal of Removed Material. Cleared and grubbed material shall not be
left in or under embankments or other constructed facility. All removed materials
shall be disposed of at locations outside the right-of-way and not visible from the
roadway.

Burning shall be done in accordance with applicable laws and safety

practices, under the constant care of competent watchmen and at such times and in
a manner that anything designated to remain and adjacent property will not be
jeopardized. Residue and the effects from burning shall also be removed outside the
right-of-way and view from the roadway.

Disposal of removed materials at public and private sites away from the right
of way shall be done at the Contractors sole expense, in accordance with all laws
and regulations, after an agreement with the property owner or public agency has
been fully executed. The Engineer shall be given fifteen (I5) days prior notice and a
written release from the property owner or public agency on whose property the
materials are to be placed.

All sellable timber in the clearing area which has not been removed from the
right of way prior to the beginning of construction, shall become the property of the
Ministry, unless otherwise provided.

2.01.4 Method of Measurement. Clearing and Grubbing will be measured for

payment on a unit price basis by the square meter for the work within the limits
specified or approved by the Engineer. Measurement shall be to the nearest tenth of
a square meter along a horizontal plane and include all clearing and grubbing of
vegetation up to a tree diameter of one hundred fifty (1 50) millimeters.

Individual tree removal will be measured by the unit based upon the number
of individual trees removed. Trees less than one hundred fifty (150) millimeters in
average diameter at the cutoff will not be measured.

No measurement will be made when there is no item for Clearing and

Grubbing or Individual Tree Removal listed in the Bill of Quantities.

2.01.5 Payment. When the Bill of Quantities includes items for Clearing and
Grubbing and/or Individual Tree Removal with payment on a contract unit price
basis, payment will be made at the contract unit price per square meter and unit for
work actually completed as specified. Such payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing labor, equipment, tools and incidentals and performing all work as
specified for clearing and grubbing, disposing of removed materials and
recompacting the disturbed areas and all other elements necessary for the proper

2
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in

these General Specifications.

When the Bill of Quantities does not include items for Clearing and Grubbing
or Individual Tree Removal, such work shall be considered as subsidiary to other
items of work and all costs shall be included in the contract unit price(s) for other
items of work.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO, PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

20101 Clearing and Grubbing Square Meter
20102 Individual Tree Removal Unit

3
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 2.02 - REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

2.02.1 Description. This work shall consist of the removal and salvage or disposal,
wholly or in part, of all buildings and foundations, structures, all types of walls,
fences, gates, wells, septic tanks, abandoned utility lines, manholes, catch basins,
poles, pylons, pipe culverts, bridges, bridge components, bridge parapets and
railings, existing roadways, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, guard rails, impact attenuators,
signs, sign supports, traffic signals, slope protection, traffic paint lines, raised and
ceramic pavement markers, glare screens, rumble strips, delineators, sign post
bases, scrap yards, rubbish dumps and any other obstructions which are not
designated or permitted to remain, except for the obstructions to be removed and/or
disposed of under any other items specified in the Bill of Quantities. It shall also
include the backfilling the resulting trenches, holes, depressions and pits.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Removal of Existing Building
Removal of Boundary Wall, including Gate
Removal of Bridge Structure
Removal of Bridge Component
Removal of Box Culvert & Pipe Culvert End Section
Removal of Metal Bearing Device
Removal of Elastomeric Bearing Device
Removal of Expansion Joint
Removal of Aluminum Bridge Railing
Removal of Steel Bridge Railing
Removal of Concrete Bridge Parapet
Removal of Structural Steel or Precast Concrete Member
Removal of Underground Utility Lines
Removal of Aerial Utility Lines and Poles
Removal of Curb
Removal of Combined Curb & Gutter
Removal of Gutter
Removal of Septic Tank
Removal of Catch Basin, Manhole and Inlet
Removal of Well
Removal of Riprap, Wire-Enclosed Riprap & Gabion Slope Protection
Removal of Concrete, Paving Tile & Shotcrete Slope Protection
Removal of Pipe Culvert
Removal of Fence, including Gate
Removal of Dumped Rubbish
Removal of Sidewalk & Median Paving
Removal of Guardrail, Complete
Removal of Guardrail Terminal
Removal of New Jersey Concrete Barrier
Removal of Impact Attenuator
Removal of Steel Safety Railing
Removal of Bituminous and Cement Concrete Pavement
Removal of Traffic Paint Line & Control Marking
Removal of Ceramic & Retroreflective Raised Pavement Marker

4
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Removal of Traffic Signal & Controller

Removal of Rumble Strip or Speed Bump
Removal of Sign Post Base
Removal of Sign (Any Type)
Removal of Breakaway Sign Post
Removal of Overhead Sign Support
Removal of Glare Screen
Removal of Delineator
Removal of Telephone Cabinet

2.02.2 Preservation of Property. Existing facilities which are designated or

allowed to remain shall be protected from damage. Facilities which are damaged or
destroyed as a result of the Contractors operations shall be repaired or replaced by
the Contractor at his own expense.

Trenches, holes, depressions and pits caused by the removal of structures

and obstructions, which remain after completion of roadway excavation, shall be
backfilled with embankment material as specified in Section 2.05, "Embankment
Construction," in these General Specifications. When trenches, holes, depressions
and pits are in surfaced areas which are designated to remain undisturbed, they
shall initially be backfilled with embankment materials up to the elevation of the
bottom of the surfacing materials. The removed surfacing materials shall be
replaced with equal or better quality surfacing materials of the same layer thickness
and degree of compaction.

2.02.3 Construction.

2.02.3.1 Miscellaneous Structures and Obstructions. These facilities include

but are not limited to, buildings and foundations, gates walls, fences, septic tanks,
manholes, catch basins, utility lines, poles, rubbish dumps, drainage pipe and box
culverts, bridge railings and parapets, pipe for water supply and sewer services,
signs, signals, traffic control devices, detour roads and other facilities shown on the
plans, except bituminous and cement concrete pavements, wells and bridges which
are provided for in following Paragraphs 2.02.3.2, 2.02.3.3, 2.02.3.4 in these General
Specifications.

Miscellaneous structures and obstructions within the area to be cleared and

grubbed, or as may be designated on the plans, except utilities and facilities which
are specified elsewhere to be removed or reconstructed, shall be removed to a depth
not less than sixty (60) cm bellow the bottom of subgrade.

Immediately after receiving the site, and within the time frame specified
hereinafter, the Contractor shall identify any obstacles within the site, above- or
underground, which may interfere with the progress of the Work. These obstacles,
whether shown on the plans or not, shall be land-surveyed and described in detail in
a report. This report shall be entitled "Report on Existing Obstructions" and, along
with the survey diagrams, shall be submitted in triplicate to the Engineer for the
project records.

5
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Survey work, preparation of the report and submission thereof, removal in

whole or in part as required, and salvaging or disposal of these obstacles in an
approved location, together with any temporary work required, shall be completed
during the mobilization period of the work. This requirement may be waived by the
Engineer for specific portions of the work.

Material designated to be removed shall be removed, transported, salvaged

and stored or disposed of at places shown on the plans, as specified, or as approved
by the Engineer.

In the process of the removal work, the Contractor shall transport, clean,
package, and store the removed reusable, as identified by the Engineer, elements in
an approved storage yard. All reusable materials shall be cleaned of dirt, asphalt or
other deleterious coatings, using detergents, mineral spirits or other approved
cleaning materials. Packages shall be clearly labeled as to their contents' types,
sizes and numbers, and shall be accompanied by inventory lists approved by the
Engineer.

The elements so salvaged shall become the property of the Ministry.

Elements damaged due to the Contractor's negligence, as determined by the
Engineer, shall be declared damaged elements. All elements to be salvaged which
are damaged in removal to impair their future use, will, unless otherwise specifically
provided in Subsection 2.02.5, "Method of Measurement" below, be charged to the
Contractor at sixty (60) percent of the current prices quoted under the respective pay
items for new work, as applicable, and for an equal quantity. This amount of money
shall be deducted from any money due or to become due to the Contractor.
Alternatively, when practical and when approved by the Engineer, the Contractor
may choose to substitute the damaged elements with an equal quantity of new
elements of the same or better quality. In such a case, no deduction will be made for
those damaged elements that were successfully substituted as specified and as
approved by the Engineer.

To minimize the environmental impact of the work by controlling dust, noise or

vibration, or to minimize disturbance to people or livestock, the plans may indicate
that concrete be removed using high-pressure water as a demolition tool. This work
shall be carried out using equipment specifically designed for the intended purpose,
consisting of a high-pressure water pump, water tank, filter, feed pump, fuel tank,
remote-controlled, tire-mounted, high-pressure nozzle, and all necessary piping and
accessories.

When shown on the plans or approved by the Engineer, other methods may
be used, such chemical splitting, diamond disc saw cutting or wire cutting, or thermit
lance, provided that the work will be carried out by specialized crews with
demonstrable experience in the applicable methods. Microwave demolition methods
shall not be used.

Salvaged pipe culverts and other material shall be handled with care and
protected from damage until stored as specified. Salvaged materials and equipment
belonging to other agencies shall be handed over to their owners via a Process-
Verbal before payment for removal is made to the Contractor.

6
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Culverts and drainage facilities at locations used by traffic shall not be

removed, or their operation interrupted, before satisfactory arrangements have been
made to accommodate public traffic.

Fences enclosing farm land, or providing security to any property, shall

remain in place until the Contractor has given reasonable advance notification to
property owners of the intent to remove the fence. Temporary fencing required to
separate construction operations from public use shall be identified in the Special
Specifications. Temporary fencing shall be removed after permanent fencing is
complete.

2.02.3.2 Existing Bituminous and Cement Concrete Pavement. Unless

otherwise specified in the Special Specifications, the Contractor, at his option, may
remove, pulverize, crush, blend and process existing bituminous and cement
concrete pavement (including sidewalks, curbs, gutters and stairs) which are
specified to be removed, and use such materials in the new construction, or dispose
of the materials as specified in Subsection 2.02.4, 'Disposal of Removed Material," in
these General Specifications. All such salvaged pavement, proposed for use in new
construction, shall be processed to conform to all specified gradation and quality
requirements for the material to be placed in the new construction.

Unless bituminous surface courses are specifically designated for milling or

recycling, full-depth removal and disposal of all bituminous surface courses
irrespective of thickness, including treated base courses and bituminous plant mix
materials, shall be as specified herein.

2.02.3.3 Wells. Existing whether active or inactive, and abandoned wells within
the area to be cleared and grubbed, shall be dismantled, sealed and backfilled as
specified, required by law or as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
remove, transport and store all salvaged materials and equipment as specified in
Paragraph 2.02.3.1 "Miscellaneous Structures and Obstructions" in these General
Specifications.

Wells shall be backfilled as specified in Paragraph 2.05.3.2 'Preparation of

Original Ground" in these General Specifications.

2.02.3.4 Bridge Structures. Steel and timber bridges shall be removed, members
marked with identification numbers and letters and salvaged as specified in
Paragraph 2.02.3.1 "Miscellaneous Structures and Obstructions" in these General
Specifications.

Reinforced concrete and masonry bridge structures shall be removed and the
removed materials salvaged at the Contractor's option or disposed of as specified in
Subsection 2.02.4, "Disposal of Removed Material," in these General Specifications.

Substructures shall be removed to a depth one and half (1 -1 /2) meters below
the bottom of subgrade and thirty (30) centimeters below the streambed elevation,
unless otherwise specified. When portions of substructure interfere with construction

7
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

of a new structure, they shall be removed as may be necessary to permit satisfactory

construction of the new structures.

Blasting or other operations necessary for the removal of structures and

obstructions, which may damage new construction, shall be performed before new
construction commences.

Bridge structures in use by traffic, shall not be removed, or their operation

interrupted, until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic.

2.02.3.5 Guardrails and Concrete Barriers. This Work shall consist of removal
of beams, cables, posts, anchor terminal sections or concrete barriers of any size,
shape or type; salvaging or disposal as directed; and backfilling of the resulting
holes. Removal of concrete base shall be excluded and when required shall be
carried out and paid for separately under Pay Item No. 20237 - Removal of Sign
Post Base.

2.02.3.6 Impact Altenuators. This Work shall consist of removal of impact

attenuators of any size or type with minimum damage and salvaging or disposal as
directed. Removal of concrete base shall be excluded and when required shall be
carried out and paid for separately under Pay Item No. 20237 - Removal of Sign
Post Base.

Removal of all other elements listed herein shall be carried out in accordance
with the requirements of this section and as detailed on the plans and approved by
the Engineer.

2.02.3.7 Traffic Marking. This Work shall consist of removal of existing traffic
paint lines and traffic control markings, which are not designated or permitted to
remain.

Equipment for removal of traffic paint lines and traffic control marking shall
consist of pickup trucks, wet sandblasting machine, air compressor, and all
necessary hand tools, such as chisels, hand hammers, and brooms. When suitably
qualified crews are available as determined by the Engineer, equipment may include
commercially available excess-oxygen-system gear as specified in the HMM, Part 5-
Highway and Bridge Maintenance, Section B-Traffic Control and Safety Devices,
Paragraph 8.03. E Pavement Marking, Stripe Removal.

All striping and other traffic marking designated or directed, shall be removed
to the fullest extent possible using an approved method, as specified below, that
does not damage the surface or texture of the pavement. Over-painting no longer
appropriate markings with black paint and/or bituminous solutions will not be
permitted. The removal pattern shall be in an irregular shape that does not
perpetuate the outline of the removed marking. Any damage to the pavement
surface in connection with such removal work shall be repaired by the Contractor at
his own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

When wet sandblasting is used, removal of pavement markings will result to a

barely noticeable scar, as determined by the Engineer. Sand and debris deposited

8
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

on the pavement shall be removed as the work progresses, to prevent

accumulations which might interfere with drainage or constitute a traffic hazard.

When the excess oxygen method is used, traffic marking removal shall be
carried out in more than one passes to ensure rapid progression and to permit less
heat to be transferred to the pavement. After the first passage of the burner, the hot
flame melts the existing paint, which shall be removed with a straight hoe.
Subsequently, the residual marking shall be re-burned in multiple passes as directed
and the burned ash residue shall be brushed away each time it appears across the
marking area, until only a slight indication is left of where the marking had been.
This indication shall be as slight as possible so as to ensure that it will disappear with
traffic wear, as approved by the Engineer.

2.02.3.8 Pavement Markers. This Work shall consist of removal of reflective

raised pavement markers (cat-eyes) and/or of ceramic pavement markers, of any
size, including disposal or cleaning and salvaging of reusable markers, and
restoration of the pavement surface. Equipment for removal of pavement markers
shall consist of pickup trucks, grinding power tools, and all necessary hand tools.
When approved by the Engineer, compressor with an air hammer and chipping blade
may be used. The markers shall be removed carefully with hammer and chisel and
any residual adhesive on the road surface shall be ground smooth. All marker
surfaces shall be cleaned with suitable mineral spirits or with kerosene. Light
abrasives may be used on the exposed surfaces of markers only as approved by the
Engineer. The bottom surface of the markers shall be ground to remove any
adhesive and shall then be sanded off to a rough texture, free of gloss.

2.02.3.9 Rumble Strips or Speed Bumps. This Work shall consist of removal of
bituminous rumble strips or speed bumps and restoration of the pavement to a flat,
smooth surface. Materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 4.05,
'Bituminous Concrete Pavement' in these General Specification for Bituminous
Concrete Wearing Course, Class C. Equipment shall consist of pickup truck, dump
truck, air compressor, jack hammer with cuffing tool and tamper, and all necessary
hand tools.

Rumble strip or speed bump materials delineated for removal by the Engineer
shall be removed to full depth using a jack hammer with a spade bit, and all failed
and loose material shall be disposed of. The cut out area shall then be restored as
described in Subsection 4.05.9, "Minor Bituminous Concrete" in these General
Specifications.

2.02.3.10 Sign Post Bases. This Work shall consist of removal of sign post bases
of any size or type, along with anchor bolts and plates, disposal thereof, and
backfilling and compacting of the resulting holes to the level of the surrounding
ground using the same type of materials which are adjacent to the holes as directed.

2.02.3.11 Signs. This Work shall consist of removal of highway signs of any size,
shape or type. Signs shall be carefully detached with minimum damage and
salvaged or disposed of as directed.

9
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.02.3.12 Breakaway Sign Posts and Kilometer Posts. This Work shall consist
of removal of breakaway single sign posts of any size or type or of kilometer posts of
any size or type, including posts, sheet metal and reflectorized sheeting. Posts shall
be removed by dismantling the bolts at the breakaway connection to the concrete
base with minimum damage and salvaged or disposed of as directed.

2.02.3.13 Overhead Sign Supports. This Work shall consist of removal of

overhead sign supports in whole or in part, and of any size or type. Sign supports
shall be removed by dismantling the various members without unnecessary damage.
Members shall be match marked, unless such match marking is waived by the
Engineer. Materials so removed shall be salvaged or disposed of as directed.

2.02.3.14 Delineators. This Work shall consist of removal of delineator; salvaging

or disposal, as directed; and backfilling of the resulting holes. Removal of concrete
base shall be excluded and when required shall be carried out and paid for
separately under Pay Item No. 20237 - Removal of Sign Post Base.

2.02.4 Disposal of Removed Material. All materials removed shall be disposed of

at locations not visible from the roadway. Removed materials shall not be left in or
under embankments or other constructed facility. Burning shall be done in
accordance with applicable laws and safe practices, under the constant care of
competent watchmen and at such times and in a manner that anything designated to
remain or adjacent property is not jeopardized. Residue and other effects from
burning shall be removed and disposed of outside the view from the roadway.

Burying removed materials within the right of way shall be done in such a
manner that the removed materials are covered by at least one (1) meter of cover.
The cover material shall not erode by wind or water. The contours of the finished
area shall blend with the adjacent terrain.

Disposal of material at public and private sites away from the right of way
shall be done at the Contractor's expense in accordance with all laws and
regulations, after an agreement with the property owner has been fully executed.
The Engineer shall be given fifteen (15) days prior notice and a written release from
the property owner on whose property the materials are to be placed.

2.02.5 Method of Measurement. The quantities of the various removal items, as

accepted, shall be measured for payment according to the plans and specifications
for the several pay items appearing in the Bill of Quantities, and in terms of the
prescribed units provided for the several pay items. Only accepted Work shall be
included and the dimensions shall be those shown on the plans, measured on site or
ordered in writing by the Engineer.

Removal of existing buildings shall be measured by the square meter, based

on external ground floor dimensions, multiplied by the number of storeys, regardless
of type of the building.

Removal of boundary walls or gates shall be measured by the linear meter,

based on centerline plan dimensions, irrespective of type, height or thickness.

10
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Removal of entire bridge structures shall be measured by the square meter,

based on measured plan dimensions as authorized by the Engineer, regardless of
height of the structure. No separate measurement shall be made of reinforcement
and/or of embedded steel items.

Removal of major bridge components, such as decks, superstructure or

substructure; concrete approach slabs; and associated wingwalls; shall be measured
by the cubic meter, based on measured dimensions as authorized by the Engineer,
regardless of height of the structure. No separate measurement shall be made of
reinforcement and/or of embedded steel items.

Removal of box culverts; pipe culvert end sections; loose or grouted stone
riprap; wire-enclosed riprap; gabions; shall be measured by the cubic meter of each
respective pay item as authorized by the Engineer, regardless of height or depth. No
separate measurement shall be made of reinforcement and/or of embedded steel
items.

Removal of bearing devices shall be measured by the number of units of the

various types removed as specified.

Removal of expansion joints, aluminum and steel railing for bridges,

underground and aerial utility lines and poles, and concrete bridge parapet shall be
measured by the linear meter.

Removal of structural steel shall be measured by the metric ton, to the

nearest kilogram, as determined from the Engineers computed weights made in
accordance with Section 5.05, "Steel Structures and Miscellaneous Metalwork" in
these General Specifications, or from accurate scaled measurements witnessed by
the Engineer. For purpose of payment, all metal parts removed from a structure in
connection with this Work, such as railings, anchor bolts and nuts, expansion dams,
plates and shapes for pier protection, and similar metal items, shall, unless otherwise
specified, be measured for payment under this item.

Removal of precast concrete members shall be measured by the metric ton,

to the nearest kilogram, as determined from the Engineers computed weights
(volumetric computation times two and forty five hundredths (2.45) tons per cubic
meter) or from accurate scaled measurements witnessed by the Engineer.

Removal of glare screens; steel safety railings; curbs, gutters or combination

curband-gutter; pipe culvert barrels; and fences; shall be measured by the linear
meter of each respective pay item as authorized by the Engineer.

Removal of guardrail shall be measured by the linear meter of accepted work.

Removal of guardrail terminal sections shall be measured by the number of units
removed as shown or directed. The pay limits for guardrail removal and anchor
terminal sections removal shall be as specified in the Ministry's Standard Drawings,
Series TB-4 and TB-5. Damaged metal beams or cables shall be charged to the
Contractor at sixty (60) percent of the prices quoted under the respective pay items
for new work.

11
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Removal of New Jersey concrete barrier shall be measured by the linear

meter along the front face, including the terminal tapered segments, which shall not
be measured separately.

Removal of impact attenuators shall be measured by the number of units

authorized by the Engineer, regardless of type, height or depth.

Removal of concrete, paving tile or shotcrete slope protection; and sidewalk

and median paving; shall be measured by the square meter of each respective pay
item as authorized by the Engineer, regardless of thickness, height or depth.

Removal of traffic paint lines or traffic marking shall be measured by the

square meter of theoretical area of successfully removed traffic marking, accepted
as specified.

Removal of reflective raised or of ceramic pavement markers shall be

measured by the number of units of the various types removed as specified above
irrespective of size or color.

Removal of rumble strips and speed bumps shall be measured by the square
meter of removed material as accepted. This item shall include. the removal of
existing rumble strips/speed bumps and the restoration of the pavement with hot
plant bituminous mix material. No separate measurement shall be made of the
restoration materials or work.

Removal of sign post base shall be measured by the cubic meter of concrete
removed and accepted, which shall include all excavation and backfilling, concrete,
reinforcement, anchor bolts, embedded metal items, anchor plates, and all
incidentals in connection with these items.

Removal of signs shall be measured by the face area to the nearest one-one
hundredth (1/100) square meter for each sign and to the nearest one-tenth (1/10)
square meter for the total as specified in the Bill of Quantities. The area of each sign
shall be that of the smallest rectangular, circular, triangular, trapezoidal, or other
standard Ministry sign shape that will encompass the sign panel. No measurement
shall be made of stiffeners, that is, those needed to support smaller signs on to
larger ones, as they are considered subsidiary to the pay item of signs removal
appearing in the Bill of Quantities.

Removal of single breakaway sign post, regardless of type, shall be measured

by the number of units removed and accepted, which shall include the sign post,
hinged as required, brackets, coupling bolts, breakaway couplings, nuts, etc., or the
threaded reducer when a threaded collar detail is applicable. Removal of kilometer
posts shall be measured under the same item as single breakaway sign post, by the
number of units removed and accepted, which shall include the sign plate(s)
regardless of size, the post, the threaded reducer and all incidentals in connection
with these items.

Removal of overhead sign supports shall be measured by the metric ton as

specified in the Bill of Quantities, as determined by weighing in the presence of the

12
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Engineer on an approved, accurate set of scales, including all steel items in

connection with walkways on overhead signs, rails, brackets and fasteners onto the
tubular support, gratings and all incidentals thereof.

Removal of delineators shall be measured by the number of units removed

and accepted, irrespective of type or color.

Removal of traffic signals (head and controller) and telephone cabinets as

specified, shall be measured on unit basis.

Bituminous and cement concrete pavements, sidewalks, stairways, and other

bituminous and cement concrete surfaces which are shown on the plans or identified
in the Special Specifications and actually removed, shall be measured in square
meters within the lines delineated on the plans or ordered by the Engineer.

Wells, septic tanks, manholes, catch basins, and inlets which are removed
and backfilled or sealed as specified shall be measured on a unit basis.

Incidental excavation in connection with the foregoing items, as specified

herein, shown on the plans or authorized by the Engineer, shall be measured for
payment under Pay Item No. 20301 - Roadway Excavation.

When the bill of Quantities does not contain separate items for the removal of
structures and obstructions, no measurements will be made. Damaged elements
shall be measured for deduction as specified and deduction(s) may be applied at any
time after such damage is discovered.

2.02.6 Payment. When the Bill of Quantities lists items specified for removal, such
items which are actually removed and measured as specified in Subsection 2.02.5,
"Method of Measurement," in these General Specifications will be paid for at the
Contract price per unit of measurement.
Such payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary for removing, handling, salvaging, transporting,
storing and disposing of structures and obstructions and filling trenches, holes,
depressions and pits and all other -items necessary for proper completion of the
Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, 'Scope of Payment,' in these General
Specifications.

When the Bill of Quantities does not list items specified in this section, no
payment will be allowed for the removal of various structures and obstructions. All
costs for removal, handling, transporting, storing and disposing of structures and
obstructions shall be subsidiary to the work and all costs shall be included in contract
unit prices for other items listed in the Bill of Quantities.

13
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM No. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

20201 Removal of Existing Building Square Meter
20202 Removal of Boundary Wall, including Gate Linear Meter
20203 Removal of Bridge Structure Square Meter
20204 Removal of Bridge Component Cubic Meter
20205 Removal of Box Culvert & Pipe Culvert End Section Cubic Meter
20206 Removal of Metal Bearing Device Unit
20207 Removal of Elastomeric Bearing Device Unit
20208 Removal of Expansion Joint Linear Meter
20209 Removal of Aluminum Bridge Railing Linear Meter
20210 Removal of Steel Bridge Railing Linear Meter
20211 Removal of Concrete Bridge Parapet Linear Meter
20212 Removal of Structural Steel or Precast Concrete Ton
Member
20213 Removal of Underground Utility Lines Linear Meter
2021301 Removal of Underground Utility Lines, Water Linear Meter
2021302 Removal of Underground Utility Lines, Electrical Linear Meter
2021303 Removal of Underground Utility Lines, Storm Drain Linear Meter
2021304 Removal of Underground Utility Lines, Sanitary Sewer Linear Meter
2021305 Removal of Underground Utility Lines, Telephone Linear Meter
20214 Removal of Aerial Utility Lines and Poles Linear Meter
2021401 Removal of Aerial Utility Lines and Poles, Electrical Linear Meter
2021402 Removal of Aerial Utility Lines and Poles, Telephone Linear Meter
20215 Removal of Curb Linear Meter
20216 Removal of Combined Curb & Gutter Linear Meter
20217 Removal of Gutter Linear Meter
20218 Removal of Septic Tank Unit
20219 Removal of Catch Basin, Manhole and Inlet Unit
20220 Removal of Well Unit
20221 Removal of Riprap, Wire-Enclosed Riprap & Gabion Cubic Meter
Slope Protection
20222 Removal of Concrete, Paving Tile & Shotcrete Slope Square Meter
Protection
20223 Removal of Pipe Culvert Linear Meter
20224 Removal of Fence, including Gate Linear Meter
20225 Removal of Dumped Rubbish Cubic Meter
20226 Removal of Sidewalk & Median Paving Square Meter
20227 Removal of Guardrail, Complete Linear Meter
20228 Removal of Guardrail Terminal Unit
20229 Removal of New Jersey Concrete Barrier Linear Meter
20230 Removal of Impact Attenuator Unit
20231 Removal of Steel Safety Railing Linear Meter
20232 Removal of Bituminous and Cement Concrete Square Meter
Pavement
20233 Removal of Traffic Paint Line & Control Marking Square Meter
20234 Removal of Ceramic & Retroreflective Raised Pavement Unit
Marker
20235 Removal of Traffic Signal & Controller Unit

14
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

20236 Removal of Rumble Strip or Speed Bump Square Meter

20237 Removal of Sign Post Base Cubic Meter
20238 Removal of Sign (Any Type) Square Meter
20239 Removal of Breakaway Sign Post Unit
20240 Removal of Overhead Sign Support Ton
20241 Removal of Glare Screen Linear Meter
20242 Removal of Delineator Unit
20243 Removal of Telephone Cabinet Unit

15
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 2.03 - EXCAVATION

2.03.1 Description. Excavation, regardless of the nature or characteristics of the

materials encountered, shall consist of all excavation necessary for the construction
of roadways, tunnels, intersections, approaches, slope rounding, benching, channels
and ditches and finishing the excavation slopes in accordance with the lines, grades
and cross sections shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer and as
specified in the Special Specifications. The work also includes the removal or
disposal of unsuitable or otherwise surplus materials taken from within the limits of
work. All excavation shall be treated as a separate item for measurement and
payment purposes. Embankments and subgrades shall be constructed as specified
in Section 2.05, "Embankment," and Section 2.06, "Untreated Subgrade," in these
General Specifications and shall be treated as separate items for measurement and
payment purposes.

The Contractor shall visit the site prior to making his tender and shall
determine the nature of the earth and rock, its quantity, location and suitability to
meet the specified embankment and subgrade requirements. He shall base his bid
prices solely on his own determination of soil. conditions. After Award of Contract,
no claim for revision of contract unit prices based on alleged misrepresentation of
subsurface information will be entertained.

Any information concerning properties of the soils and other subsurface

conditions which may be shown on the plans, or obtained through discussion with
the Engineer or others, shall be considered gratis and shall not be a basis for the
Contractors determination of his prices. Engineering geological information,
including the anticipated shrink or swell of materials after compaction, from which the
quantities are estimated, is based on studies made in the field for purposes of
design, and represents the best information available to the Ministry. However, it is
recognized that in highway construction, there is often substantial variation in the
character and quantities of subsurface materials.

2.03.2 Classification of Excavation. Excavation will be classified by the Engineer

in one (1) or more of the following categories:

ITEMS IN THE BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Roadway Excavation
Tunnel Excavation
Tunnel Excavation - Main Line
Tunnel Excavation - Cross Passage

The Engineer will identify and determine the quantities of the different
classifications of excavation as are listed in the Bill of Quantities while the Work is in
progress and upon completion of the total Work.

2.03.2.1 Roadway Excavation. Roadway excavation shall include all materials

excavated from within the staked construction limits except as covered in Section
2.08, "Structural Excavation and Backfill," in these General Specifications. Roadway
Excavation - includes all material encountered regardless of its nature or
characteristics.

16
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.03.2.2 Roadway Excavation - Unsuitable Material. Unsuitable material

shall include:

1. Material classified as A-7 or A-6 according to MRDTM 21 0.

2. Unstable materials incapable of being compacted to the specified density

at optimum moisture content using ordinary compaction methods for the
equipment being used for compaction. Such materials may include, but
not be limited to, cohesionless sand, silt, organic and highly compressible
soil and sod.

3. Material too wet to be compacted and circumstances prevent suitable in-

place drying prior to incorporation into the Work. Such materials may
include muck from tide flats and coastal marshes.

4. Materials which are otherwise unsuitable for use in or under the planned
embankment. Such materials may best be characterized as having CBR
values less than three (3) as described in Paragraph 2.05.3.2, "Foundation
Preparation," in these General Specifications.

5. Dune sand shall be considered as unsuitable material for subgrade,

plating and capping.

Material specified or directed by the Engineer as unsuitable shall be

classified as Roadway Excavation.

2.03.2.3 Roadway Excavation - Channel and Ditch. Channel and ditch

excavation shall include the excavation of all natural and man-made materials
necessary for the construction of drainage facilities, including riprap and slope
protection, stream widening or relocation and all other channels within the limits and
cross sections shown on the plans, specified in the Special Specifications, or as
directed by the Engineer. Materials removed during channel and ditch excavation
shall be classified by the Engineer as Roadway Excavation.

2.03.2.4 Tunnel Excavation. Tunnel excavation shall consist of the excavation

and removal of rock, weathered or decomposed rock and/or soil within the limits of
the tunnel cross section. This work shall be done in conformity with the tunnel
grades, lines and stations shown on the Plans as established by the Engineer.
Materials removed during tunnel excavation shall be classified by the Engineer as
Tunnel Excavation.

17
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.03.3 Construction.

2.03.3.1 Utilization of Excavated Materials In Rural Areas. All suitable

materials removed from the excavation shall be used in the formation of the
embankment, subgrade, shoulders, slopes, bedding and backfill for structures and
for other purposes shown on the Plans or disposed of in a manner complying with
these General Specifications. However, the Contractor is not required to use all of
the suitable excavated materials in the construction of embankments provided the
materials which are not used in the construction of embankments are disposed of as
specified and the Contractor replaces the wasted excavation materials with borrow
material of equal or better quality at his own expense. Excavated materials which
the Contractor elects to waste shall be disposed of in accordance with the
requirements specified in Subsection 2.03.4, "Disposal of Surplus and Unsuitable
Materials," in these General Specifications. It is the Contractors responsibility to
determine if sufficient material is available for the completion of the embankments
before wasting any of the excavated materials.

2.03.3.2 Utilization of Excavated Materials in Municipalities (Urban Areas).

All suitable materials removed from the excavation shall be used in the formation of
the embankments, subgrade, shoulders, slopes, bedding and backfill for structures
and for other purposes shown on the Plans. If it is found there is excess quantities
of excavated materials, the Contractor shall dispose of the excess materials at
suitable locations subject to the approval of the Engineer and competent
governmental authorizes such as the Municipality. The disposal of such materials
shall not cause damage to any of the public or private properties, valleys and
tributaries and in accordance with the requirements specified in Subsection 2.03.4
"Disposal of Surplus and Unsuitable Materials" in these General Specifications. The
cost of transporting to and disposal of the excess excavated materials at approved
waste locations shall be considered subsidiary to the Roadway Excavation pay item
and no separate payment and measurement will be made for this Work.

2.03.3.3 Roadway Excavation. This work shall consist of excavating materials

identified and defined by the Engineer as Roadway Excavation - or the lines and
grades shown on the plans or staked by the Engineer. It shall also include
excavating below grade, removing slide material, trimming slopes, slope rounding,
stockpiling designated materials for future use and removing and disposing of
surplus and unsuitable materials.

Material outside the planned excavation limits, which is determined by the

Engineer, to be a potential slide and material which has come into the planned
excavation limits shall be excavated to lines and slopes directed by the Engineer.
Such excavated materials which are not declared by the Engineer to be unsuitable
may be used in embankment construction.

All areas of roadway excavation, during the entire period of construction

operations, shall be thoroughly drained. The excavated surfaces shall be kept
smooth and sloped to side ditches until the subgrade is finished. Side ditches
emptying from excavation to embankment shall be kept clean at all times and
constructed to protect excavation and embankment from erosion. Damage to the

18
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

work attributable to wetting through failure of the Contractor to provide adequate

drainage shall be immediately
repaired by the Contractor at his expense.

Excavation slopes shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and

grades shown on the plans and as staked by the Engineer. All loose or overhanging
material along the slopes, considered to be hazardous, shall be removed as directed
by the Engineer. The plans may designate certain materials, such as specific
quantities and/or ledges of rock or quantities of existing surfacing or other materials
to be excavated and stockpiled for a specific purpose of future use. Such materials
shall be carefully excavated and handled to exclude contamination. The stockpiles
shall be neatly and compactly constructed in an approved manner.

The Contractor shall take care not to break down, loosen or damage rock
below the grade shown on the plans and specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for his methods and any damage his rock excavation methods and
operations may cause. All blasting shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements specified in Section 2.04, "Controlled and Production Blasting," in
these General Specifications.

2.03.3.4 Roadway Excavation - Unsuitable Material. When unsuitable

material, as identified and the limits defined by the Engineer, is encountered it shall
be excavated to the lines, grades and depths directed by the Engineer and disposed
of as specified in Subsection 2.03.4, "Disposal of Surplus and Unsuitable Materials,"
in these General Specifications. The excavated areas below or outside planned
grades shall be backfilled as specified in Section 2.05, "Embankment," in these
General Specifications.

2.03.3.5 Roadway Excavation - Channel and Ditch. Before beginning

excavation, the Contractor shall establish the lines, grades and cross sections
required to determine how much material will be excavated, present the information
to the Engineer and receive approval from the Engineer to proceed.

The Contractor shall utilize equipment, tools and methods necessary to

complete the work in accordance with the plans and specifications or as approved by
the Engineer.

2.03.3.6 Designated Materials Selected From Roadway Excavation. When

the plans or specifications designate that materials from excavation are to be
stockpiled for specific future use, such materials shall be handled in a manner that
precludes contamination with undesirable material. The location of stockpiles shall
be identified in the Special Specifications or on the Plans.

When practical, and processing is not specified, such designated materials

shall be taken directly from excavation to the specified point of use.

19
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.03.3.7 Roadway Excavation in Cut Sections. In all areas of roadway excavation

in cut areas, rock and other materials in the planned subgrade layer (bottom thirty
(30) centimeters of the completed excavation) that do not conform to the
requirements specified in the Subsection 2.05.2, "Materials," in these General
Specifications, shall be excavated to a depth of thirty (30) centimeters or as may be
specified. The excavated materials shall be defined as Roadway Excavation and
shall be incorporated into the Embankment or disposed of as specified in Subsection
2.03.4, "Disposal of Surplus and Unsuitable Materials," in these General
Specifications.

In case of earth cut in sand dunes, requiring confinement for stabilization

purpose, the roadway foreslope and backslope steeper than six horizontal to one
vertical (6 H to 1 V) shall be constructed using soils of AASHTO Class A-1 -a, A-1 -b,
A-2-4 having Plasticity Index of four (4) minimum, as specified in AASHTO M145
(MRDTM 21 0) to the size and dimensions shown in the plans, or as directed by the
Engineer. Obtaining, handling, transporting and placing of these materials shall be
considered subsidiary to roadway Excavation" so that no measurement or payment
will be made for them on a separate basis.

2.03.3.8 Tunnel Excavation - General. The Contractor shall use excavation

methods that minimize excavation outside the limits of the excavation lines as
defined on the Plans. Excavation outside the excavation lines (overbreak) is the
responsibility of the Contractor. Enlargements of any underground opening for the
convenience of the Contractor will not be allowed without prior written approval of the
Engineer.

As the excavation proceeds, the Contractor shall check the crown and walls
over the unsupported lengths of tunnel after each advance, and scale all loose and
shattered material. He shall also carry out similar checks on previously excavated
sections that have not been covered with shotcrete at the end of each shift until
stability can reasonably be assumed in the opinion of the Engineer. He shall provide
the Engineer with access to crown and sidewalls in these areas at least once per
shift.

The Contractor shall maintain neat working conditions at all times inside the
tunnels and remove all muck, unusable materials and any other material not required
for the work.

Explosive excavation (blasting) shall be done in a manner to minimize air

overpressure and ground vibrations at nearby structures in accordance with Section
2.04, "Controlled and Production Blasting," in these General Specifications. The
Contractor shall use blasting procedures and curtains to provide effective
suppression of vibrations and employ other abatement measures necessary for
protection of both employees and the public. Compliance with this section will not
relieve the Contractor from responsibility for compliance with local ordinances,
regulations and other Sections.

Overbreak areas will need backfilling with shotcrete and/or cast-in-place

concrete as indicated herein and/or indicated in the plans. This extra support is

20
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

considered corrective and backfilling overbreak areas with shotcrete and/or cast-in
place concrete shall be at the Contractors expense.

Permits and Licenses. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all
applicable blasting permits and licenses required by the Ministry of Interior/Public
Security officials.

The Contractor is responsible for control of water in the tunnel during

construction and shall take any means necessary for such control. Control of water
shall include, but not limited to, furnishing, installing, operating, and maintaining
pumps and other equipment; constructing temporary drains and keeping ditches free
to carry all water quickly to sediment basins or other disposal areas; and disposal of
all water draining or pumped from the tunnel.

Tunnel drainage water shall be treated in conformance with the Kingdom and
local jurisdiction's water quality criteria before discharging water into the natural
drainage channel or stream. Petroleum residues shall be removed by oil soaks to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.

All products and materials used for rock excavation, either explosive or
nonexplosive, are subject to approval by the Engineer. Only explosives, explosive
components, and detonators commercially manufactured within the previous two (2)
years or the shelf life of the product, whichever is less, shall be used.

At all times, the Contractor shall keep sufficient materials (rock bolts, shotcrete,
etc.) near the tunnel excavation heading to provide a secure tunnel face.

The Contractor shall install and maintain twenty (20) meter station intervals in
each tunnel with a sign with numerals at least fifty (50) millimeters tall.

Work shall be performed in a manner to minimize hazards to construction

personnel. Safety in excavating shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

2.03.4 Disposal of Surplus and Unsuitable Materials. Excavated materials which

are designated by the Engineer to be surplus or unsuitable for use in the
embankment and excavated materials wasted by the Contractor for his own
convenience shall be disposed of in borrow pits, trenches, natural depressions or at
other locations outside any town approved by the Engineer. Materials disposed of at
locations outside the right of way may be compacted to the degree desired by the
Contractor or as required by the public agency or private individual who owns the
property and shall not cause any damage to abutting property. Excess rock and
other excavated materials may be placed in waste banks or spread and leveled to
present a neat appearance only with the approval of the property owner and the
Engineer and outside the view of the highway traveler. All disposal areas shall be
finished with a neat appearance with lines, grades and contours that conform to and
blend with adjacent terrain and all edges shall be trimmed to a slope no steeper than
one vertical to four horizontal (1 V to 4 H).

21
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.03.5 Quality Assurance Procedures. The total quantity of roadway excavation

shall be evaluated and accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured
or Tested Conformance," in these General Specifications. The Engineer shall
perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance measuring and testing.
Quality assurance measuring or testing shall involve verification that the roadway
excavation conforms to the lines, grades and typical cross sections shown on the
plans or established by the Engineer within the following tolerances.

1. Slopes. Slopes shall be uniformly finished and no point on the slope

shall deviate from the staked slope by more than fifteen (15) centimeters when
measured at right angles except in rock excavation where no point shall deviate
more than thirty (30) centimeters measured along any line perpendicular to the
staked slope.

2. Width. The total width between the ditch lines shall not be deficient by
more than thirty (30) centimeters from the deviations shown on the plans at any
location.

3. Bottom of Excavation. The bottom of excavation shall be completed to

within plus one (1) centimeter of the designated grade except that in rock, the
tolerance shall be plus two (2) centimeters.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of any claims from
property owners for excavation quantities removed from beyond the staked slope
and right-of-way (R.O.W.) lines.

2.03.6 Method of Measurement. When roadway and tunnel excavation pay items
are shown in the Bill of Quantities, all survey data, staking notes and computations of
the quantities of the various classes of excavation shall be checked and attested to
by the Engineer.

2.03.6.1 Roadway Excavation. - When the Bill of Quantities lists payment for
Roadway Excavation, specific Measurements will be made as follows:

1. Slope Stake Basis. Unless otherwise provided, the slope stake basis of
measurement will be used to determine the roadway excavation quantities as
follows:

Original cross-sections shall be taken before completion of clearing and

grubbing. Slope stake notes developed from the typical sections in the plans set by
the Contractor prior to construction will be used provided the Engineer has
determined that the work has been acceptably completed in conformity to the staked
lines and slopes.

If the Engineer determines that any portion of the work is acceptable but has
not been completed in conformity to the staked lines and slopes, the quantities will
be measured in accordance with method (2) below.

22
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2. Remeasurement Basis. When the remeasurement basis of

measurement is used, quantities actually excavated and accepted will be determined
in accordance with the following:

Original ground cross sections supplemented by field measurements shall be

taken of the ground surface after clearing and grubbing. Final cross sections or
comparable measurements will be taken of the completed and accepted work. No
payment will be made for unauthorized excavation or overbreakage outside the
slope lines as staked.

3. Alternative Methods of Measurement. Where it is impractical to

measure material by the cross section method due to the erratic location of isolated
deposits, acceptable methods involving three (3) dimensional measurements,
including hauling vehicle measurements, may be used.

Any materials excavated before the original cross sections are taken and
approved by the Engineer shall not be measured for payment.

The total volume of unclassified roadway excavation shall be computed from

the bottom of the staked roadway cut and ditch invert elevations as follows:

(1) The excavation of rut sections containing rock within the subgrade
zone shall be staked and measured to the bottom of the subgrade zone.

(2) The excavation of cut sections containing unsuitable materials

(i.e. Dune Sand, A-7 and A-6 material) within the subgrade zone shall be staked and
measured to a minimum of thirty (30) centimeters below the bottom of the subgrade
zone. It may be increased in additional increments of thirty (30) centimeters at the
direction of the Engineer.

(3) The excavation of cut sections containing material that is not rock
or not unsuitable shall be staked and measured to the top of the subgrade zone.

4. Computation of Roadway Excavation Volumes.

Roadway excavation will include the following volumes:

(1) Roadway prism excavation as defined in the above paragraphs

(1), (2) and (3) and shall include the following:
1) Rock material excavated and disposed of down to the bottom
of subgrade.
2) Unsuitable earth material excavated and disposed of from
within and below the bottom of subgrade as specified above.
3) Excavation material, which is neither rock nor unsuitable
shall be measured up to the top of subgrade.

(2) Unsuitable material from beneath embankment areas, if top thirty

(30) cm of the original ground does not meet the requirements for

23
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

"Embankment Materials' in Paragraph 2.05.2.1 in these General

Specifications or if there is excessive moisture present.

(3) Channels and ditches.

(4) Loose scattered rocks removed and placed as required within the
roadway.

(5) Slide slipout material not attributable to the Contractors method of

operation.

(6) Embankment benching greater than two (2) meters wide when
ordered by the Engineer.

Roadway excavation will not include the following:

1 ) Material from borrow sources.

2) Overbreakage from the backslope in rock excavation.
3) Roadbed material scarified in place and not removed.
4) Material excavated when rounding cut slopes.
5) Preparing foundations for embankment construction.
6) Embankment benches up to two (2) meters in width.
7) Slide or slipout material attributable to the Contractors method of
operation.
8) Material temporarily stockpiled at the option of the Contractor.
9) Material excavated outside the established slope limits.

The original ground and the volumes of staked excavation and unsuitable
materials removed as directed by the Engineer shall be computed from modified
original ground, cross sections and staking data using the Average End Area
Method. The volume of unsuitable material shall be listed separately for excavation
and embankment.

2.03.6.2 Tunnel Excavation. When the Bill of Quantities lists payment for
Tunnel Excavation in Cubic Meters, the volumetric measurements shall be taken as
follows:

The volume will be computed to the theoretical excavation lines including

shotcrete leveling, concrete lining, road pavement and subgrade layers and drainage
channels. Utility duct excavation below the bottom of the subgrade zone will not be
included in the tunnel excavation quantity. It will be considered part of the utility Bill
of Quantities item. Excavation beyond the theoretical excavation lines (over break)
is the responsibility of the Contractor. Partial payments of the Tunnel Excavation will
be based upon actual cross sections of acceptably completed excavation.

24
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.03.7 Payment. When Roadway Excavation is listed in the Bill of Quantities, the
pay quantity shall be measured as specified in Paragraph 2.03.6.1, "Roadway
Embankment" in these General Specifications and payment made at the contract –
unit price for accepted quantities of Roadway Excavation on a cubic meter basis.

When Tunnel Excavation is listed in the Bill of Quantities, the pay quantity shall
be measured as specified above in Paragraph 2.03.6.2, "Tunnel Excavation" in these
General Specifications, and payment made at the contract unit price for accepted
quantities of Tunnel Excavation on a cubic meter basis.

Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials,

equipment, tools and incidentals used to perform all work involved in completing
roadway and tunnel excavation as shown on the plans, specified in these General
Specifications and the Special Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.
Payment shall also include compensation for all materials, labor, equipment and
incidentals used in the disposal of surplus and unsuitable materials and the
stockpiling of specified materials for future use, cleaning up the site and performing
all surveys and computations and all other items necessary for the proper completion
of the work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General
Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

20301 Roadway Excavation Cubic Meter
20302 Tunnel Excavation Cubic Meter
2030201 Tunnel Excavation - Main Line Cubic Meter
2030302 Tunnel Excavation, Cross Passage Cubic Meter

25
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 2.04 - CONTROLLED AND PRODUCTION BLASTING

2.04.1 Description. This work shall consist of all blasting operations in quarries,
roadway excavation, demolition of structures and obstructions and all other work
associated with construction.

All rock excavation where excavation slopes are one horizontal to two vertical
(1 H to 2 V) or steeper shall incorporate controlled blasting unless otherwise ordered
by the Engineer. Controlled blasting shall be defined as the controlled use of
explosives in carefully located and aligned drill holes to establish a free surface or
shear plane in the rock at the specified excavation backslope. Production blasting
refers to rock fragmentation blasts resulting from more widely spaced production
holes throughout the main excavation area next to the controlled blast line.
Controlled blasting techniques include presplitting and cushion (trim) blasting. These
techniques @are required to minimize blast damage to the designated rock
backslope and to improve the longterm stability of the slope. The Contractor shall
carefully design and control all blasting operations using criteria and methods that
are acceptable to the Engineer and in keeping moth good blasting practice to
preserve the rock beyond the excavation limits in the soundest possible condition
and to complete the rock excavation work to the lines, grades, slopes and cross
section shown on the plans or staked by the Engineer.

2.04.2 Use of Explosives. All blasting operations, including the storage and
handling of explosives and blasting agents, shall be performed in accordance with
the applicable provisions of these General Specifications and all Kingdom Ministry of
Interior regulations.

Explosives, blasting agents and detonators shall be stored on Ministry of

Interior/Public Security or approved local property, conforming to all Ministry of
Interior laws governing explosives storage. The Contractor is required to obtain and
use copies of all Ministry of Interior/Public Security requirements applicable to
explosive storage, and will familiarize himself with their requirements.

2.04.3 Product Specifications. The delay elements in blasting caps are known to
deteriorate with age. For this reason, it is required that all blasting caps shall be
used before the expiry dates coded on the caps.

Explosives are also known to age and deliver much less than the rated energy.
For this reason, it is required that all explosives be used before their expiry date
coded on the explosives. No blasting product will be brought to the job site if the
date codes are missing.

Bulk explosives, such as ammonium nitrate and fuel oil, may not contain the
proper amount of diesel oil, due to evaporation or improper mixing. Low diesel oil
drastically reduces the energy content of the explosive and commonly produces
reddish brown or yellow fumes upon detonation even in dry blastholes. Products
that do not meet manufacturers specifications will not be used on the project.

26
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

All explosive manufacturers shall have a quality control system in effect as

required by the Ministry of Interior. This system shall include inspection, sampling
and testing. If product performance or composition deviates by more than ten
percent (10%) in any manner from the manufacturers data sheet, that lot number will
be rejected.

2.04.4 Blasting Plan. Not less than thirty (30) days before beginning any drilling or
blasting operations, or at any time that substantial changes are made to the drilling
or blasting methods, the Contractor shall submit a Blasting Plan to the Engineer for
review. This Blasting Plan shall contain full details of the drilling and blasting
procedures and controls the Contractor proposes to use for both the controlled and
production blasting. This Blasting Plan shall contain, at the least, the following
information:

1. Maximum dimensions for width, length, and depth of any shot.

2. A typical drill pattern diagram for controlled blasting and fragmentation

holes showing hole diameters, depths, spacings, and inclinations,
including tolerances on hole alignment.

3. Loading pattern diagram showing the location and amount of each type of
explosive in each hole, including primers, initiators, initiation methods,
delay methods, delay times, and overall powder factor.

4. Location, type, and depth of stemming and depth of subdrilling, if any.

5. Manufacturers data sheets for all explosives, primers, initiators, and other
blasting devices to be employed.

6. Operational procedures and safety precautions for storing, transporting,

and handling explosives and for executing a blast in accordance with
Subsection 2.04.6 "Safety" in these General Specifications.

7. Proposed Blasting Schedule. The drilling and blasting plan will be

reviewed by the Engineer for completeness and acceptability.

2.04.5 Traffic Interruption Notification. When blasting operations will require

traffic to be interrupted on adjacent roads, the Contractor shall secure the approval
from local authorities for the interruption. Before commencing blasting operations,
the Contractor shall notify the Engineer that approval of the proper authorities has
been obtained.

2.04.6 Safety Procedures. The Contractor shall take all reasonable and necessary
steps to insure the protection of persons, property and the Work. Such protection
shall be provided for adjacent or left in place trees, shrubbery, pole lines and all
objects of an aesthetic, historic or archaeological value. The purpose of all
protection is to prevent damage rather than to control damage. The following safety
procedures shall be addressed in the Blasting Plan and adhered to throughout the
length of the project.

27
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.04.6.1 Type of Explosive Materials. Explosive materials include, but are not
necessarily limited to, dynamite and other high explosives, slurries, water gels,
emulsions, blasting agents, initiating explosives, detonators and detonating cord.
The Contractor shall comply with all Kingdom Ministry of Interior regulations that
pertain to the purchase, transportation, storage and use of explosive materials.

2.04.6.2 Blaster-in-Charge. A person with the necessary experience and

qualifications shall be designated in writing by the Contractor as Blaster-in-Charge.
The Blaster-in-Charge shall have the authority and responsibility for the
transportation, security, safety, and use of all explosive materials - including the
obtaining, storing, distributing, loading, finding, disposing, and any other related
activity. The Blaster-in-Charge shall prepare and/or approve all the safety provisions
within the Contractors Blasting Plan and ensure they are strictly followed for any
blasting crew used to assist with explosive activities, including transportation and
security.

2.04.6.3 Initial Safety Procedures Submittal. At least thirty (30) days prior to
delivery or use of any explosive materials, the Contractor shall submit the following:

2.04.6.3.1 Blaster-in-Charge Qualifications:

1. Proof of a valid Blaster’ s license issued by Public Security officials.

2. Resume with current references showing not less than three (3)
years of active involvement as Blaster-in-Charge on projects with
blasting work similar in scope to this contract.

3. Blasting Crew Qualifications. Knowledge and reliability in the safe

use of explosive materials acceptable to the Blaster-in-Charge and
Ministry of Interior/Public Security officials.

4. Permits and Licenses. Copies or other proof of all applicable

permits and licenses.

5. Blasting Plan. The Blaster-in-Charge shall sign the plan to signify

his full agreement with all its safety provisions. As a minimum, the
safety aspects of the Plan shall address:

(1) Transportation. All applicable Ministry of Interior/Public

Security regulations including proposed methods for
compliance.

(2) Storage and Magazines. All applicable Ministry of

Interior/Public Security regulations including proposed
methods for compliance.

(3) Blast Site Preparations. All applicable Ministry of

Interior/Public Security regulations including proposed
methods for compliance such as: description of explosive

28
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

materials and quantities kept at blast sites; drilling and

initiating systems and equipment; methods to prevent
drilling in bootlegs or within fifteen (15) meters of any
loaded hole; loading plan with details of stemming and
tamping; firing plan; pre-blast and post-blast inspections;
handling misfires; removal and disposal of excess
explosive materials, etc.

(4) Area Security. All applicable Ministry of Interior/Public

Security regulations including proposed methods for
compliance.

Protection. Personnel safety shall be the controlling consideration in decisions

involving the use of explosive materials. The Contractor shall exercise the utmost
care not to endanger life and property. Blasting mats and other protective devices
shall be used where necessary to prevent damage to all landscape features and
historical or archaeological structures, including those under construction. Should
any damage occur, the Contractor shall make restoration as required by the
Engineer at no additional cost to the Kingdom.

Explosive System. The Contractor shall use explosive materials that

components commercially manufactured within the past year or the shelf-life of the
product, whichever is less. All explosive material shall be properly identified in
accordance with applicable requirements. The date of manufacture shall be clearly
stamped on the product container or made available from the manufacturer's
dateshift code or shipping paper.

The principal explosive shall not be a nitroglycerin based product-unless the

type of work requires otherwise, and is fully detailed in the Blasting Plan.

The use of "safety" fuse and fuse type blasting cap initiation is prohibited.

All-electric initiation systems are permissible only when the protection against
extraneous electricity (power lines, radio-transmissions, electrical storms, etc.) is
shown in the Blasting Plan. Series blasting circuits shall be used for all-electric
initiation unless the use of parallel-series circuits are described in the Blasting Plan.

Electricity from light, power circuits or batteries shall not be used for initiation
except internal batteries for capacitor discharge blasting machines.

2.04.6.4 Check for Misfires. The Contractor and Public Security officer shall
observe the entire blast area for a minimum of five (5) minutes following a blast to
guard against rock fall before commencing work in the cut. The five minute delay
between blasting and allowing anyone but the blaster and Public Security officer to
enter the area is needed to make sure that no misfires have occurred.

During the delay period, all holes should be checked to make sure that they
have detonated. If any holes have not fired, these misfires will be handled before
others enter the work area.

29
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

The Engineer shall, at all times, have the authority to prohibit or halt the
Contractors blasting operations if it is apparent that, through the methods being
employed, the required slopes are not being obtained in a stable condition or the
safety and convenience of the traveling public is being jeopardized.

2.04.6.5 Misfire Handling Procedures. Should a visual inspection indicate that

complete detonation of all charges did not take place, the following procedures will
be followed:

1. If the system was energized and no charges fired for electrical systems,
the lead wire will be tested for continuity prior to inspection of the
remainder of the blast. For nonelectric systems, the lead in or tube will be
checked to make sure that detonation has entered the blast area.

2. Should an inspection of the electrical leadline or lead in tubing-line indicate

that there is a break in the line or if the tubing did not fire, then the system
will be repaired and the blast refired. If the inspection indicates that the
leadline has fired and misfired charges remain, the blaster will do the
following:

(1) The blaster will exclude all employees except those necessary
to rectify the problem.

(2) Traffic will be closed if a premature explosion could be a hazard

to traffic on nearby roads.

(3) The blaster will correct the misfire in a safe manner. If the
misfire poses problems that cannot be safely corrected by the
blaster, a consultant or an explosive company representative
skilled in the art of correcting misfires, will be called to rectify the
problem.

2.04.6.6 Lightning Protection. The Contractor shall furnish, maintain and

operate lightning detection equipment during the entire period of blasting operations
and/or during the periods that explosives are at the site. Equipment shall be similar
or equal to the Thomas Instruments S250 Storm Alert as manufactured by D.L.
Thomas Equipment, Keene, New Hampshire, U.S.A or the VS1 12 Lightning
Forecast System manufactured by NITRO NOBEL of Sweden. When the lightning
detection device indicates a blasting hazard potential, personnel shall be evacuated
from all areas where explosives are present. When a lightning detector indicates a
blasting hazard, the following shall be performed:

1 . Clear the blasting area of all personnel.

2. Notify the Project Engineer of the potential hazards and precautions to be

taken.

3. Terminate the loading of holes and return the unused explosives to the
day storage area.

30
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

4. If blastholes are loaded and would pose a hazard to traffic if detonated,

roads will be closed until the lightning hazard has passed.

5. When the hazard dissipates, inform the Project Engineer that production
blasting will continue.

2.04.7 Execution.

2.04.7.1 Time Restrictions. Blasting shall be restricted to the times permitted

by local authorities or the Engineer.

2.04.7.2 Pre-Blast Report. In addition to the Blasting Plan, a pre-blast report

shall be prepared for each specific blast. This pre-blast report shall be presented to
the Engineer prior to the commencement of drilling of holes for that blast and will
describe the location and geometry of the blast, and all specific loading and firing
details required in items one (1) through four (4) of the Blasting Plan. This pre-blast
report shall also include the surveyed location and elevation of the collar of each
presplit or cushion blast hole. Any modifications made during the actual drilling,
loading, and filing of the blast shall be reported to the Engineer prior to firing the
shot. As soon as sufficient material has been removed from the cut face, a visual
inspection and an assessment of the success of the blast shall be carried out prior to
the loading of the next blast and prior to the drilling of any other future blasts. If, in
the judgement of the Engineer, changes appear necessary, drilling and blasting
operations shall be suspended and revised blasting procedures shall be developed.
All necessary changes shall be incorporated in the next pre-blast report. If the
changes are significant, a revised Blasting Plan shall be submitted.

Submittal of the Blasting Plan and pre-blast reports are for quality assurance
and recordkeeping purposes. The Contractor shall adopt rational blast design and
observation and documentation methods which will refine and optimize
fragmentation and controlled blasting procedures. The Contractor shall also adapt
these procedures to the changing rock conditions. Review of the Blasting Plan and
the blast reports by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
for the accuracy and adequacy of the plan when implemented in the field, nor for the
safety and damage to personnel and property caused by toxic substances, flyrock,
noise, or vibration associated with the blasts.

The Engineer shall, at all times, have the authority to prohibit or halt the
Contractors blasting operations, if smooth and stable slopes Within the required
dimensional tolerances and a minimum of backslope damage are not achieved, or
the safety and convenience of the public is being jeopardized or property or natural
features are being endangered.

31
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.04.7.3 Test Blasts. Prior to commencing full-scale blasting operations, the

Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of the proposed blast plan by drilling,
blasting and excavating short test sections, up to thirty (30) meters in length, to
determine which combination of method, hole spacing and charge works best.
When field conditions warrant, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor may
be ordered to use test section lengths less than thirty (30) meters.

Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall begin the
controlled blasting tests with the presplit blastholes spaced between eight hundred
(800) millimeters and one (1) meter apart, then adjust if needed until the Engineer
approves the spacing to be used for full-scale blasting operations.

Requirements for controlled and production blasting operations covered

elsewhere in this specification shall also apply to the blasting carried out in
conjunction with the test shots.

The Contractor will not be allowed to drill ahead of the test shot area until the
test section has been excavated and the results evaluated by the Engineer. If the
results of the test shot(s), in the opinion of the Engineer, are unsatisfactory, then
notwithstanding the Engineer's prior review of such methods, the Contractor shall
adopt such methods as are necessary to achieve the required results.
Unsatisfactory test shot results include an excessive amount of fragmentation
beyond the indicated lines and grade, excessive flyrock, or violation of other
requirements within these specifications. All costs incurred by the Contractor in
adopting revised blasting methods necessary to produce an acceptable test shot
shall be considered incidental to the contract unit prices for roadway excavation and
controlled blasting.

2.04.7.4 Production Blasting. All production blasting, including that carried out
in conjunction with the blasting test section requirements of Paragraph 2.04.3.5 'Test
Blasts" in these General Specifications, shall be performed in accordance with the
following general requirements:

Production blastholes shall be drilled on the patterns submitted by the

Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The production blastholes shall be drilled
within two (2) blasthole diameters of the staked collar location. If more than five
percent (5%) of the holes are drilled outside of this tolerance, at the option of the
Engineer, the Contractor may be required to refill these holes with crushed stone and
redrill them at the proper location.

If the blastholes are plugged or unable to be fully loaded, at the option of the
Engineer, the Contractor may be required to deepen or clean-out these holes. The
blastholes should all be checked and measured before any explosives are loaded
into any of the holes to eliminate any safety hazard resulting from drilling near loaded
holes.

All blastholes should reach their desired depth. If more than five percent (5%)
of the holes are short before loading, the Contractor may be required by the
Engineer to redrill the short holes to proper grade at the Contractors expense.

32
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Blastholes will be covered to keep overburden from falling into the holes after
drilling.

The row of production blastholes immediately adjacent to the controlled blast

line shall be drilled on a plane approximately parallel to the controlled blast line.
Production blastholes shall not be drilled closer than two (2) meters to the controlled
blast line, unless approved by the Engineer. The bottom of the production holes
shall not be lower than the bottom of the controlled blastholes. By approval of the
Engineer, the bottom of the production hole may be lower than the controlled
blastholes by the amount of subdrilling used on the production holes. Detonation of
production holes shall be on a delay sequence toward a free face. Stemming
material used in production holes shall be sand or other dry angular granular
material, all of which passes a 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) sieve.

It is the Contractors responsibility to take all necessary precautions in the

production blasting so as to minimize blast damage to the rock backslope.

Payment for the production blasting shall be incidental to the contract unit
price for roadway excavation.

Production blasting shall break up the rock to dimensions of approximately

two thirds (2/3) the lift thickness specified for rock lifts in the embankment. Any
material outside the authorized cross sections which becomes shattered or loosened
by the production blasting shall be removed during excavation at the Contractors
expense. If controlled blasting is not used, slopes shall be drilled and blasted to
create a neat and uniform surface, free from hollows or protrusions or loose or
overhanging rocks. Undercut slopes are not to be created by the drilling and
blasting.

2.04.7.5 Presplitting. The Contractor shall completely remove all overburden

soil and weathered rock longitudinally along the slope lines for a distance of at least
ten (1 0) meters beyond the drilling limits, or to the end of the excavation, whichever
is less, before drilling the presplitting holes. Particular care and attention shall be
directed to the beginning and the end of excavations to ensure complete removal of
all overburden soil and weathered rock and to expose rock to an elevation equal to
the bottom of the adjacent lift of the presplitting holes being drilled. This will allow
observation of the rock profile and permit proper design of the drilling and charging
configuration for holes located at the extremity of the blast.

Presplitting holes not less than twenty-five (25) millimeters nor greater than
seventy-five (75) millimeters in diameter shall be drilled along the proposed
excavation line at the spacing shown in the Blasting Plan. For the initial test blast,
this spacing shall not exceed one (1) meter. The spacing of presplit holes shall be
maximum that will ensure a general continuity of stress relief fractures between
adjacent holes, so as to expose the half-barrels. The Contractor shall stake the
location of presplitting holes for review by the Engineer prior to drilling.

33
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

The Contractor shall control his drilling operations by use of proper equipment
and experienced personnel so that no presplit hole shall deviate from the plane of
the staked slope by more than three hundred (300) millimeters either parallel or
normal to the slope. If more than ten percent (10%) of the presplit holes are outside
this tolerance, drilling length and lift height shall be reduced on subsequent blasts to
the point where the drilling meets this tolerance.

Maximum lift heights greater than ten (1 0) meters or less than four (4) meters
will not be allowed unless the Contractor can demonstrate he can stay within the
above tolerances and still produce a uniform and stable slope. The presplitting holes
on subsequent lifts shall be drilled as close to the final face as possible, but in no
case more than six hundred (600) millimeters from the face of the previous lift.
Drilling direction on subsequent lifts shall be adjusted to compensate for the actual
number of lifts and offset distances so that the toe of the final slope occurs within
three hundred (300) millimeters of the planned location.

Presplit faces shall be drilled and blasted prior to production blasting designed
to expose these faces. Presplitting shall not extend more than ten (1 0) meters
ahead of the zone of production blasting at any time. If a presplit line ahead of a
production blast is shot with that production blast, all production holes shall be
delayed at least one hundred (100) milliseconds more than the last presplit
detonation.

Only standard cartridge explosives prepared and packaged by explosive

manufacturing firms will be permitted for use in presplit holes. These may consist of
fractional portions of standard cartridges to be attached to detonating cord in the field
or continuous column explosives joined and attached to detonating cord or as
recommended by the manufacturer.

The maximum diameter of standard explosives used in presplit holes shall be

approximately one-half (1/2) the diameter of the presplit hole.

If fractional portions of standard explosive cartridges are used, the cartridges

shall be firmly attached to a length of detonating cord equal to the depth of the drill
hole so that the cartridges will not slip down the detonating cord nor cock across the
hole and bridge the flow of stemming material. Spacing of cartridges shall not
exceed two-hundred fifty (250) millimeters and shall be adjusted to give the desired
result.

If a continuous column type of explosive is used, the column shall be

assembled and affixed to the detonating cord in accordance with the explosive
manufacturer's instructions, a copy of which shall be included with the submitted
Blasting Plan.

The bottom charge of a presplit hole may be larger than the line charges but
shall not be large enough to cause overt>reak. The top charge of the presplitting
hole shall be placed far enough below the collar to avoid overbreaking the surface,
flyrock, or premature venting.

34
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Only standard explosives manufactured especially for presplitting shall be used

in presplit holes, unless approved in writing by the Engineer.

Before placing the charge, the Contractor shall determine that the hole is free
of obstructions for its entire depth. All necessary precautions shall be exercised so
that the placing of the charge will not cause caving of material from the walls of the
hole.

If the Blasting Plan so indicates, unloaded and unstemmed relief holes may
be drilled between loaded controlled blasting holes.

2.04.7.6 Cushion (Trim) Blasting. Where the horizontal distance from the cut
face to the existing rock face is less than five (5) meters, the Contractor may cushion
blast in lieu of presplitting. Cushion blasting is similar to presplitting except that the
detonation along the cut face shall be performed after the detonation of all
production holes.

Difference in delay time between the trim line and the nearest production row
shall not be greater than seventy (75) milliseconds nor less than twenty-five (25)
milliseconds. With the exception of this timing criterion, all requirements for
presplitting shall also apply to cushion blasting.

2.04.7.7 Scaling and Stabilization. All rock on the cut face that is loose,
hanging, or creating a dangerous situation shall be removed or stabilized, to the
Engineer's satisfaction, during or upon completion of the excavation in each lift.
Drilling of the next lift will not be allowed until this work has been completed. Scaling
shall be performed by approved methods, including handscaling with a suitable steel
mine scaling rod, barring, wedging, and light blasting, as necessary. Localized and
minor irregularities or surface variations which do not impair the facility or create a
hazard will be permitted to remain in place.

The slopes shall be scaled throughout the span of the contract and at such
frequency as required to remove all hazardous loose rock or overhangs. Payment
for scaling shall be incidental to the contract unit price for roadway excavation.

Any damage to the face which results from the Contractors blasting operations
shall be repaired or stabilized at the Contractors expense. This corrective work may
take the form of removal or rock bolting the unstable material or with shotcrete,
structural concrete, rockbolts, or other techniques ordered by the Engineer. A plan
for this stabilization shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before
beginning the corrective work.

All rockbolts, dowels, shotcrete, and other mechanical stabilization necessary

to assure the stability of each life shall be installed before blasting or removing
subsequent lifts. Shotcrete and grout shall be allowed to gain sufficient strength to
assure that these items will not be damaged by subsequent excavation.

35
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.04.8 Special Requirements.

2.04.8.1 Blasting Consultant. When called for in the contract special

provisions, the Contractor shall retain a recognized blasting consultant to assist in
the blast design. The blast design shall include both the controlled and production
blasting. The consultant shall be an expert in the field of drilling and blasting who
derives his primary source of income from providing specialized blasting and/or
blasting consulting services. The consultant shall not be an employee of the
Contractor, explosives manufacturer, or explosives distributor.

Not later than the preconstruction conference, the Contractor shall submit a
resume of the credentials of the proposed blasting consultant. The resume shall
include a list of at least 5 highway rock excavation projects on which the blasting
consultant has worked. The list shall contain a description of the projects, details of
the blast plans, and modifications made during the project. The list shall also contain
the names and telephone numbers of project owners with sufficient knowledge of the
projects to verify the submitted information. The blasting consultant must be
approved by the Engineer prior to the beginning of any drilling and blasting work.

2.04.8.2 Pro-Blast Condition Survey. When blasting near buildings, structures

or utilities, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-blast survey of any nearby
buildings, structures, or utilities which may potentially be at risk from blasting
damage. The survey method used shall be acceptable to the Contractors insurance
company. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from
blasting. The preblast survey records shall be made available to the Engineer for
review. Occupants of local buildings shall be notified by the Contractor prior to the
commencement of blasting.

2.04.8.3 Vibration Control Monitoring. When blasting near buildings,

structures or utilities which may be subject to damage from blast induced ground
vibrations, the ground vibrations shall be controlled by the use of properly designed
delay sequences and allowable charge weights per delay. Allowable charge weights
per delay shall be based on vibration levels which will not cause damage. The
allowable charge weights per delay shall be established by carrying out trial blasts
and measuring vibration levels.

When blasting is closer than three hundred (300) meters from bridges or
buildings, a risk assessment is to be done prior to actual blasting operation.
Structures and buildings are to be inspected and existing cracks and damage
recorded. The radius inside which blast vibration monitoring will be done will be
determined and a detailed vibration monitoring program will be designed and
submitted to the Engineer for approval. After blasting works, a second inspection is
to be done and the damage caused by blasting to be reviewed and the injured
parties compensated by the Contractor.

The trial blasts shall be carried out in conformance with the blasting test section
requirements of Paragraph 2.04.7.4, "Production Blasting," in these General
Specifications, modified as required to limit ground vibrations to a level which will not
cause damage. Whenever vibration damage to adjacent structures is possible, the

36
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Contractor shall monitor each blast with an approved seismograph located, as

approved, between the blast area and the closest structure subject to blast damage.
The seismograph used shall be capable of recording particle velocity for three
mutually perpendicular components of vibration in the range generally found with
controlled blasting.

The Contractors vibration monitoring program is to be formulated assuring the

peak particle velocity of each component not exceeding the safe limits contained in
Table 2.04-1 and Table 2.04-2. The Contractor shall employ a qualified vibration
specialist to measure the vibration velocities and also interpret the seismograph
records to insure that the seismograph data shall be effectively utilized in the control
of the blasting operations with respect to the existing structures. The vibration
specialist used shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.

Data recorded for each shot shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to the
next blast and shall include the following:

1. Identification of instrument used.

2. Name of qualified observer and interpreter.
3. Distance and direction of recording station from blast area.
4. Type of ground at receiving station and material on which the instrument
is sifting.
5. Maximum particle velocity in each component.
6. A dated and signed copy of seismograph readings record.

Specifics of vibration monitoring plan for the blast monitoring zones specified
below shall be submitted prior to the start of any blasting and shall include the
proposed device(s) and manufacturers' literature for each device to be used.

Blast Monitoring Equipment. Equipment for seismic and air overpressure

monitoring shall be equal to the four (4) channel (one (1) overpressure and three
(3) seismic channels) equipment shall be capable of providing a permanent
photographic record of the particle velocity and overpressure traces. The
equipment shall also have frequency response of four (4) to two hundred (200)
Hz and two (2) and two hundred (200) Hz for particle velocity and air
overpressure, respectively.

Blast Monitoring. Mandatory blast monitoring of every test blast will be required
within the distances of all structures shown in Table 2.04-2 for the type of
foundation materials involved to establish the decay of air overpressure and
ground vibrations with distance from the blast, for various explosive weights per
delay. The decay function will be established as the scaled range. If the test
blast vibrations produce peak particles greater than seventy-five percent (75%) of
those contained in Table 2.04-1, then all blasts shall be monitored.

37
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

The Contractor shall propose specific monitoring points for each structure for
the Engineer's review.

Blast Vibrations. Blasting patterns shall be maintained so peak particle velocity

does not exceed those contained in Table 2.04-2 and also in Table 2.04-1 at
frequencies greater than forty (40) Hz or one-half (1/2 ) of the peak particle
velocities in Table 2.04-1 at frequencies less than forty (40) Hz at the subject
structures.

The Engineer will review measurements to determine if the Contractors

operations are exceeding the peak particle velocity contained in Table 2.04-1 or
Table 2.04-2.

If the data indicates that the peak particle velocity limitations are not being
met, measures shall be taken to reduce particle velocity or overpressure to the
specified . levels, including such measures as reducing the size of charge,
increasing the number of delay intervals.

TABLE 2.04-1

STRUCTURE TYPE MAXIMUM PPF

(MILLIMETERS PER SECOND)
Frame Construction Timber, Frame, 50
Brick and Concrete Buildings
Reinforced Concrete Structures 100
Steel Structures 100
Buried Utilities 50
Wells & Aquifers 50
Green Concrete (less than 7 days) 25

Older residential structures or utilities and structures housing computers or

other sensitive equipment and founded on different materials may require lower peak
particle velocity limits, as shown below in Table 2.04-2. Also, buried pipelines owned
by private utility companies or bridge structures owned by other agencies are
sometimes subject to lower limiting values imposed by the owner.

38
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 2.04-2

Table 2.04-2. Permitted peak particle velocity (vertical component) as a function

of distance for structures and buildings founded on different materials. (The
structural coefficient is based on residential homes.)
Distance Soft moraine Moraine Granite
Meters (m) Sand Clay Slate Gneiss
Soft limestone Quartz
Soft sandstone Hard sandstone
Hard limestone
Wave velocities c.
1000-1 500 m/s 2000-3000 m/s 4500-6000 m/s
PERMITTED PEAK PARTICLE VELOCITY V1 (mm/s)
1 18 35 140
5 18 35 85
10 18 35 70
20 15 28 55
30 14 25 45
50 12 21 38
100 10 17 28
200 9 14 22
500 7 11 15
1000 6 9 12
2000 5 7 9

2.04.8.4 Flyrock Control. Before the firing of any blast in areas where flying
rock may result in personal injury or unacceptable damage to property or the work,
the rock to be blasted shall be covered with approved blasting mats, soil, or other
equally serviceable material, to prevent flyrock.

If flyrock leaves the construction site and lands on private property all blasting
operations will cease until a qualified blasting consultant, hired by the Contractor,
reviews the site and determines the cause and solution to the flyrock problem.
Before blasting proceeds, a written report will be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval.

2.04.8.5 Public Meetings. The Contractor shall make his qualified vibration
specialist and blasting consultant available for one (1) day if requested by the
Engineer to prepare for and participate in a public meeting conducted by the
Engineer to better inform the public about anticipated drilling and blasting operations.
The specialists shall be prepared to answer any questions dealing with the
magnitude of seismic motion, and flyrock expected to impact on the public.

39
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.04.9 Recordkeeping.

2.04.9.1 Daily Explosive Material Consumption. The Contractor shall keep a

daily record of transactions to be maintained at each storage magazine. Inventory
records shall be updated at the close of every business day. The records shall show
the class and quantities received and issued and total remaining on hand at the end
of each day. Remaining explosive inventory shall be checked each day and any
discrepancies that would indicate a theft or loss of explosive material would be
immediately reported.

2.04.9.2 Report of Loss. Should a loss or theft of explosives occur, all

circumstances and details of the loss or theft will be immediately reported to the
nearest Department of the Interior office as well as to the local law enforcement
authorities and Contractors offices representative.

2.04.9.3 Daily Blasting Logs. The Contractor shall provide the contracting
officer, on a weekly basis, a daily log of blasting operations. The log shall be
updated at the close of each business day. The log shall include the number of
blasts, times and dates of blasts. The blasting locations and patterns and all
information shown below:

1. Station limits of the shot.

2. Plan and section views of drill pattern including free face, burden,
blasthole spacing, blasthole diameters, blasthole angles, lift height, and
subdrill depth.
3. Loading diagram showing type and amount of explosive, primers,
initiators and location and depth of stemming.
4. Initiators sequence of blastholes including delay times and delay system
in each blasthole.
5. Trade names and sizes of all explosives, primers and initiators to be
employed.
6. Signature of the blaster-in-charge.

The blasting logs are for quality control and recordkeeping purposes. Review
of the blast log by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
for the accuracy and adequacy of the blasting log.

2.04.9.4 Video Recording of Blasts. If blasting problems develop and Public

Security officials' permission is obtained, video tape recordings will be taken of
several blasts. The tapes or sections of tapes will be indexed in a manner to
properly identify each blast. Copies of the video tapes of blast shall be furnished to
the Engineer.

2.04.10 Method of Measurement. When controlled blastholes is specified as a pay

item in the bid schedule, measurement shall be per linear meter of controlled
blasthole. The lineal meters of controlled blastholes to be paid for shall be the plan
length computed from hole collar elevations to a depth of six hundred (600)
millimeters below finished ditch grade. Holes whose alignment is in excess of three
hundred (300) millimeters shall not be measured for payment.

40
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.04.11 Payment. The contract unit price per linear meter for controlled blasting
shall be full pay for all materials, explosives, labor, tools, equipment, and all other
items necessary for proper completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2,
"Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications. Quantities shown in the plans
are based on eight hundred (800) millimeter hole spacing. Actual accepted
quantities will depend on field conditions, the results from test sections and the
Contractors drill control. All production blasting costs are subsidiary to the Roadway
Excavation Pay Item.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

20401 Controlled Blastholes Linear Meter

41
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 2.05 - EMBANKMENT

2.05.1 Description. This work shall consist of preparing ft original ground on which
embankment is to be constructed; loading, handling, transporting and placing
acceptable materials excavated from the roadway or imported from borrow sites in
horizontal layers of uniform thickness for the full width of the embankment;
compacting each layer, and finishing the top of the embankment in accordance with
specified tolerances. It shall also cc>nsist of maintaining and draining the
embankment layers, trimming embankment slopes, all as shown on the plans,
specified in these specifications and the special specifications or established by the
Engineer. It shall also include the placing and compacting of embankment materials
in natural depressions within the roadway area and where unsuitable material has
been excavated. R shall also include the construction of working platforms, plating
layers, edge berms and capping of embankment made of dune sand, all in
accordance with these Specifications. All embankment shall be constructed as
specified herein and shall be treated as a separate item for measurement and
payment purposes. Excavation shall be completed as specified in Section 2.03,
"Excavation," in these General Specifications, and shall be treated as a separate
item for measurement and payment purposes.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Embankment

2.05.2 Materials. Materials from roadway excavation, tunnel excavation or

imported borrow meeting the appropriate specification requirements shall be used to
construct embankments in accordance with the typical sections contained in the
plans or as staked by the Engineer.

2.05.2.1 Embankment Materials. Embankment materials shall meet the

following requirements:

1. Material classified by MRDTM 21 0 as A-5 or better.

2. In areas subject to flood and prolonged inundation of the embankment,

such as at bridge sites, the material used in the embankment, unless rock,
shall be classified by MRDTM 21 0 as A-1 -a(O), A-1 -b(O) or A-2-4(0).

No material described in Paragraph 2.03.2.2, "Roadway Excavation Unsuitable

Material" in these General Specifications, shall be used in any embankment.

2.05.3 Construction.

2.05.3.1 Equipment. The Contractor shall provide all types, sizes and numbers
of equipment which are necessary for loading, hauling, spreading, mixing, watering,
compacting and finishing material to form the embankment in accordance with the
plans, the special specifications, this specification and as directed by- the Engineer.
Compacting operations shall include adequate blading with motor graders to insure
uniformity of the layers of embankments being compacted. The number of blades
and rollers in use shall be sufficient to blade and compact adequately all materials
being delivered to the embankment. The Engineer shall have full authority to

42
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

suspend the delivery of materials to the embankment until previously delivered

materials are properly placed and satisfactorily compacted. When construction of
rock embankment is required, one (1) or more of the following additional items of
equipment shall be furnished:

1. Vibratory Rollers. Minimum eighteen thousand (18,000) kilogram impact

per vibration and minimum one thousand (1 000) vibrations per minute.

2. For Dune Sand Embankment construction, the additional equipment

furnished by the Contractor shall include vibratory rollers with minimum fourteen
thousand (14,000) kilogram impact per vibration and minimum one hundred (100)
vibrations per minute.

3. The Contractor shall limit the speed of compression rollers to a maximum

of six and one-half (6.5) kilometers per hour and shall limit the speed of vibratory
rollers to a maximum of two and one-half (2.5) kilometers per hour (kph).

2.05.3.2 Foundation Preparation. The foundation shall have been cleared and
grubbed and recompacted as specified in Section 2.01, "Clearing and Grubbing," in
these General Specifications, before the foundation is prepared to receive the
embankment. The surface upon which the embankment is to be placed shall be
scarified to a minimum depth of twenty (20) centimeters, brought to a uniform
moisture content within the specified range, and compacted to the density specified
for the overlying embankment.

Up to a depth of twenty (20) centimeters, the sod and vegetation removal is

considered subsidiary to other items. Sod and vegetable matter removal in excess
of the twenty (20) centimeter depth, as well as the removal of other noncompactible
material, will be measured for payment as roadway excavation only when ordered in
writing by the Engineer. The underlying soil shall be scarified, brought to a uniform
moisture content within the specified range, and compacted to the density specified
for the overlying embankment.

When the embankment height is less than sixty (60) centimeters, the original
ground shall be scarified to a depth of twenty (20) centimeters, watered or dried to
obtain uniform moisture content and compacted to Type 95 density if the top thirty
(30) centimeters of original ground meets the requirements for "Embankment
Materials" in Paragraph 2.05.2.1, in these General Specifications. If the top thirty (30)
centimeters of original ground does not meet these requirements or there is
excessive moisture present, the top thirty (30) centimeters shall be removed and
replaced with material meeting these requirements. This material shall be
compacted to Type 95 density after the top twenty (20) centimeters of the underlying
material is scarified, watered and compacted to Type 90 density.

When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides or where new

embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments, or where
embankment is built part width at a time, the slopes that are steeper than one
horizontal to three vertical (1 H to 3 V) when measured at right angles to the
roadway shall be continuously benched over those areas where it is required as the
Work is brought up in layers. Benching shall be of sufficient width to permit

43
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

operations of placing and compacting equipment and/or as directed by the Engineer.

Each horizontal cut shall begin at the intersection of the original ground and the
vertical sides of the previous cuts. Material thus cut out shall be recompacted along
with the new embankment material at the Contractors expense, unless the width of
the excavation required and ordered by the Engineer exceeds two (2) meters, in
which .case the excavated material for bench widths in excess of two (2) meters will
be measured and paid for as roadway excavation. Payment will include full
compensation for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals used to bench hillsides
using greater than two (2) meter bench widths.

If the original surface upon which embankment is to be placed is an old

roadbed, the surface shall be plowed, scarified, or broken up to a depth of twenty
(20) centimeters and recompacted to the density specified for the overlying
embankment. No separate payment will be made for this work as it is considered
subsidiary to the various items in the Bill of Quantities.

2.05.3.3 Imported Borrow Material. Imported Borrow Material shall be utilized

to supplement roadway excavation as may be required to complete the layers of
embankment to the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the plans, specified in
the Special Specifications and as staked by the Engineer.

Imported borrow material includes material taken from borrow sites, whether
or not shown on the plans or described in the Special Specifications and from the
widening of cuts when said widening is approved by the Engineer in writing.

Borrow sites shall not be located so that any edge is closer than three hundred
(300) meters from embankment toe of slope unless otherwise shown on the plans,
specified in the Special Specifications or approved by the Engineer.

Imported borrow material shall not be taken from any area within five hundred
(500) meters downstream of a drainage structure unless approved by the Engineer
in writing. Such borrow sites shall be backfilled and compacted, as directed by the
Engineer, at the Contractors expense.

Imported borrow material shall not be taken from flat or depressed areas or
areas that would become pits or depressions as a result of the borrow excavation,
regardless of the areas' location. All imported borrow material shall be cut from the
hills or areas with elevations higher than the surrounding existing ground level. After
the removal of the borrow material the areas excavated shall still have elevations
higher than the surrounding ground level. The excavation shall be done in a neat
and workman-like manner and the competed excavation shall be finished and
restored to a naturally appearing elevation and cross section condition acceptable to
the Engineer and the owners of the lands in accordance with the approved Site
Excavation, Regrading and Restoration Plan.

If the Contractor desires to borrow from locations within the right of way, he
shall submit a request to the Engineer with the locations and the quantity of borrow
to be removed along with a Site Excavation, Regrading and Restoration Plan for
each site. The Engineer shall review each site and site Excavation, Regarding and
Restoration Plan and when satisfied with the Plan forward the request to the

44
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

concerned municipality. The Municipality shall select the acceptable borrow

excavation sites within the right of way, determine the quantity of materials to be
removed and approve each Site Excavation, Regrading and Restoration Plan. If the
Contractor desires to import borrow materials from sites away from the right of way,
he shall submit a similar request and Site Excavation, Regrading and Restoration
Plan to the Engineer and obtain similar approvals for such imported borrow from the
Engineer and the owners of the lands at his sole and exclusive cost.

The Contractor shall obtain prior approval, in writing, from the Engineer and the
owners of the lands or the concerned Municipality for each borrow site, quantity to be
removed, and each Site Excavation, Regrading and Restoration Plan. Should the
Contractor fail to comply with this requirement he shall be solely responsible for
complete backfilling and reestablishing these excavations including native
vegetation.

The Contractor shall perform preliminary testing of all proposed sources of

imported material for embankment. The preliminary testing shall consist of test pits
and/or borings and testing of samples. This testing shall include, at the minimum,
the following tests for each soil or rock strata in each proposed source:

1. Classification - MRDTM 210 (All Required Tests)

2. Proctor - MRDTM 212 or MRDTM 214 if appropriate

3. California Bearing Ration (CBR) - MRDTM 213

The Contractor shall furnish all test data to the Engineer at least two (2) weeks
prior to taking material from the site and request preliminary approval from the
Engineer to use the borrow, site. The Engineer shall review the test information and
accept or reject the Contractors request in writing. Final approval of the material
shall be based on acceptance samples taken from each layer of embankment.

Before abandoning any borrow site located on public or private property, the
Contractor shall, at his sole expense, clean and trim the borrow site, haul roads and
all areas occupied during the work, in accordance with the approved Site Excavation,
Regrading and Restoration Plan, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer and property
owner.

2.05.3.4 Placement of Materials. Logs, trees, stumps, seeds, heavy grass,

frozen soil, or other undesirable materials, shall not be placed in the layers of
embankment.

When an embankment surface is to be constructed over an area previously

occupied by a building basement, cellar, irrigation canal, well, any previous
excavation, or other such construction that will not permit the use of normal
compaction equipment, the embankment construction shall conform to the backfilling
requirements specified in Subsection 2.09.4.5, "Backfilling Structures," in these
General Specifications, until the normal compaction equipment can be used. The
material shall be compacted to the density specified for the adjacent embankments.

45
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

The Contractor shall have in operation a sufficient number of motor graders to

properly smooth and maintain the surface of each layer of freshly placed
embankment prior to and during rolling and compacting operations.

When it is feasible, trucks, scrapers, tractors, or other heavy hauling equipment

shall be routed over the fill in such a manner as to take advantage of the compaction
afforded thereby. The Engineer shall have full authority to require at any time, the
suspension of delivery of material to the embankment until previously delivered
materials have been satisfactorily spread and uniformly compacted to the specified
density.

Embankments shall not be constructed by means of a dragline except with the

special permission of the Engineer and when special provisions are made to keep
the layers uniform and the embankment level well-drained at all times.

Materials of widely divergent characteristics shall not be mixed within the

embankment limits to produce a mixture meeting the requirements of Paragraph
2.05.2.1, "Embankment Materials" in these General Specifications. Such widely
divergent materials may be mixed, sampled and tested outside the embankment
limits and the mixture may be used as a proposed source of imported material for
embankment as outlined in Paragraph 2.05.3.3, "Imported Borrow Material" in these
General Specifications. Obtaining, handling, mixing, transporting, placing and
compacting of these materials shall not be a basis for additional payment except as
provided in the Section 2.05, "Embankment," in these General Specifications.

Where embankments are constructed across marshlands, tidal flats, or wet

ground which is soft and compressible and will not support the weight and forces of
hauling and compacting equipment, the lower part of the embankment may be
constructed by dumping successive loads in a uniformly distributed layer (bridging
lift) of a thickness not greater than necessary to support equipment hauling, and the
placing and compacting of subsequent layers. Such supporting layers shall not be
subjected to the compaction requirements specified in Subsection 2.05.4, "Lift
Thickness and Compaction Requirements," in these General Specifications. The
remainder of the embankment shall be constructed in layers as specified in this
specification.

When the roadway profile is so low that the construction of the lower part of
the embankment using a "bridging lift" will not permit the placement and compaction
of sixty (60) centimeters of acceptable embankment material, the following
procedure shall be followed:

1. The Contractor will excavate the soft and compressible material to the
minimum depth required to permit the placement of one (1) or more bridging lifts and
sixty (60) centimeters of embankment material placed and compacted in accordance
with Paragraph 2.05.4.3, "Earth Embankment Lift Thickness and Compaction
Requirements," in these General Specifications.

2. The Contractor will construct the bridging and regular embankment lifts
and complete the embankment to the specified density and finishing tolerances.

46
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Boulders and rock fragments larger than twenty (20) centimeters in maximum
dimension shall not be placed in the embankment any closer than sixty (60)
centimeters from the staked top of the embankment.

Rocks, broken concrete and other solid material having a diameter greater
than ten (1 0) centimeters shall not be placed in embankment where piling is to be
installed by driving or drilling.

When an embankment settlement period is specified in the special

specifications, the embankment shall remain in place for the required settlement
period before placing the 30 cm thick subgrade layer, excavating for abutments, wing
walls or retaining wall foundations or installing foundation piles at each location.

When embankment surcharge is to be placed as specified in the special

specifications, it shall be placed in layers of uniform thickness, using tractor
equipment compaction and shall remain in place for the full settlement period
specified. The surcharge shall be removed and disposed of at the toe of slope along
both sides of the embankment, used to construct embankment elsewhere or at
locations approved by the Engineer. When surcharge material is placed at the toe of
slope it shall be placed alternately along both sides of the embankment, to equal
elevations and compacted as specified in Subsection 2.05.4, "Compaction
Requirements," in these General Specifications.

Settlement platforms and heave stakes shall be furnished, installed and

monitored as provided in the special specifications.

2.05.3.5 Embankment Drainage and Slope Stability. When constructed next

to a hillside, the embankment surface shall slope away from or parallel to the hillside
in one (1) or more directions until such time as the subgrade is finished. At the end
of each day's operations, the Contractor shall shape and compact the embankment
surface to a uniform enough cross section that will allow water to drain and eliminate
all ruts and spots that could hold water. Dikes and slope drains shall be constructed
and maintained along the embankment edges to prevent water from spilling over the
edge and eroding the side slopes.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all embankments and
surcharges and shall replace all sections of same which, in the opinion of the
Engineer, have been damaged or displaced (slumped or slid) due to carelessness or
neglect on the part of the Contractor, or due to normally occurring natural causes,
such as erosion caused by wind or water, and not due to the unavoidable movement
of the natural ground upon which the embankment is made. When unacceptable
material has been placed in the embankment, its removal shall be at the expense of
the Contractor.

47
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.05.3.6 Dune Sand Embankment. Construction of embankments with dune

sand shall be accomplished as shown on the plans, specified in the special
specifications and this specification and as directed by the Engineer. Construction of
embankment with dune sand shall be accomplished in a series of operations as
follows:

1. Edge berms shall first be constructed along both sides of the staked
embankment, except where the embankment is to be constructed against hillsides or
existing embankment, using Class A-1 or A-2 soils from roadway excavation or
borrow which resist erosion by wind and water and are approved by the Engineer.
Edge berms shall be constructed with an external side slope as shown on the plans
or specified in the special specifications, but not steeper than one (1) vertical to six
(6) horizontal. Edge berms shall be constructed not more than forty (40) centimeters
in height and not less than two (2) meters wide at the top. The materials shall be
placed and spread in layers as specified in this specification and compacted as
required by Subsection 2.05.4, "Lift Thickness and Compaction Requirements," in
these General Specifications.

When the embankment is constructed against hillsides other than sand dunes
or existing embankment, the hillside and existing embankment shall be benched as
specified in Paragraph 2.05.3.2, "Foundation Preparation" in these General
Specifications.

2. Dune sand shall be excavated, hauled, deposited and spread within

the edge berms to the full height of the edge berms using any means other than
hydraulic sluicing.

The above series of operations shall be repeated until the embankment is

completed to an elevation thirty (30) centimeters below the staked top of
embankment. Material equal to that used to construct edge berms shall be placed
and compacted to finish the embankment. The thirty (30) centimeters thick subgrade
on top of the embankment shall be completed as specified in Section 2.06,
"Untreated Subgrade," in these General Specifications.

The dune sand at all points along the side slopes of the embankment shall be
covered with a minimum two (2) meter thickness of compacted Class A-1 or A-2 soils
which will resist erosion caused by wind and water.

2.05.3.7 Fugitive Dust and Soil Erosion Control Plan.

2.05.3.7.1 General. Prior to start of work the Contractor shall furnish the
Engineer a fugitive dust and soil erosion control plan. The plan shall detail the
proposed coordination for minimizing fugitive dust and accomplishing the temporary
and permanent erosion control work in a timely and appropriate manner. No work
shall be started until the plan has been approved and the necessary controls
installed as required for the particular operation to be in progress.

The Contractor will be directed to provide immediate fugitive dust and

permanent or temporary erosion control measures to prevent fugitive dust and soil
erosion that will adversely affect public traffic, damage adjacent properties, or cause

48
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

contamination of adjacent watercourses, ponds or other areas of water

impoundment. Such work may involve the construction of temporary berms, dikes,
dams, sediment basins, slope drains and use of temporary mulches, mats, seeding
or other control devices or methods as necessary to control erosion. Such work may
also involve water mist over dusty construction operations, tarps over hauling
trailers, chemical suppressants, wheel washing, flushing and mechanical sweeping
of paved surfaces, and installation of gravel buffer zones to minimize fugitive dust.

The Contractor shall incorporate all permanent erosion control features into
the project at the earliest practicable time as outlined in the accepted schedule to
minimize the need for temporary erosion control measures. If the Engineer
determines that the Contractor is not in compliance with the approved fugitive dust
and erosion control plan or field conditions warrant changes in the plan, the
Contractor shall submit a revised schedule for performing fugitive dust and erosion
control work and no work contingent upon the revised schedule shall be continued or
started until the revised plan has been approved.

Grubbing operations shall be so scheduled and performed that grading

operations and permanent erosion control features can follow immediately thereafter
if the project conditions permit; otherwise, temporary erosion control measures may
be required between successive construction stages.

Excavation, borrow, and embankment operations shall also be scheduled

and performed to permit permanent erosion control features to follow immediately
thereafter if project conditions permit; otherwise, temporary erosion control measures
may be required. Under no conditions shall the surface area of erodible earth
material exposed at one time by excavation, borrow, or fill exceed 70,000 square
meters without the written approval of the Engineer.

The Engineer will limit the area of grubbing, excavation, borrow and
embankment operations in progress commensurate with the Contractor’s capability
and progress in keeping the finish grading, surface ditching mulching, seeding and
other such permanent erosion and pollution control measures current in accordance
with the accepted schedule.

In the event that temporary erosion and fugitive dust control measures are
required due to the Contractor’s negligence, carelessness or failure to install
permanent controls as a part of the work as scheduled or as ordered by the
Engineer, such work shall be performed by the Contractor at no cost to the Ministry.

Temporary erosion and fugitive dust control may include construction work
outside the right-of-way where such work is necessary as a result of road
construction such as borrow pit operations, haul road construction and maintenance
and equipment storage sites.

The erosion control features installed by the Contractor shall be operated

and maintained by the Contractor in an acceptable functional condition.

49
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.05.3.7.2 Erosion Check Dams. Erosion checks, constructed with

riprap or sand bags shall be staked in place as shown on the plans or where ordered
installed by the Engineer to act as erosion filters and barriers at the toe of fills, in
ditches, at pipe inlets and outlets, or for other uses as directed.

2.05.3.7.3 Sediment Containment Structures. Settling ponds, basins,

dikes, dams or other such containment structures shall be constructed in accordance
with the details specified in the contract or designated by the Engineer.

2.05.3.7.4 Diversion Channels. Temporary diversion channels for

diverting water around an area where a culvert is to be installed shall be lined with
plastic film sheeting. The diversion channel shall be excavated to a depth and width
adequate to accommodate stream flow during the period of culvert installation. The
channel shall be reasonably smooth and free of sharp rocks, stones, roots or other
projections that may puncture the plastic liner. No longitudinal seams will be
permitted. Transverse seams shall be lapped a minimum of 1 meter in the direction
of flow. The liner shall be anchored in place using clean rock, gravel, or other
methods approved by the Engineer.

2.05.3.7.5 Earth Berms. Temporary earth berms shall be used for

diverting or channeling runoff waters to slope drains, waterways, diversion ditches,
sediment traps, or other uses as directed. Earth berms shall be constructed to the
dimensions shown on the plans and at the locations established by the Engineer.
Material shall be reasonably nonporous and shall contain no frozen material, roots,
sod or other deleterious materials.

2.05.3.7.6 Slope Drains. Temporary slope drains shall be constructed at

the intervals and locations designated by the Engineer for channeling runoff waters
down embankment slopes.

Temporary slope drains shall be adequately anchored to the slopes

and their outlets constructed or anchored to prevent erosion.

2.05.3.7.7 Turf Establishment. When it is not practical or not permitted to

perform permanent turf establishment work temporary seeding, fertilizing, liming, and
mulching shall be applied. The applicable rates and types of materials for temporary
turf establishment shall be as specified in the Special Specifications and established
by the Engineer.

2.05.3.7.8 Cleanup. After the temporary erosion and fugitive dust control
installations are no longer required, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of all
materials and restore the areas to their original appearance in a manner acceptable
to the Engineer.

50
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.05.3.7.9 Method of Measurement. When the Special Specifications and

Bill of Quantities contain pay items including estimated quantities for soil erosion and
pollution control items of work on a unit price basis, the applicable measurements
will be made as follows:

(1) Quantities to be measured on an each basis will be the actual

number and kind of units ordered installed and accepted.

(2) Linear meter quantities will be measured along the line and
grade
of the installation end-to-end as ordered installed and accepted.

(3) Square meter quantities will be measured on the ground

surface of the installation as ordered installed and accepted.

(4) Area quantities based on acres and fractions thereof will be

determined with horizontal measurements.

(5) Quantities to be measured on a weight basis will be measured

by the kilogram or ton, as applicable.

Commercially furnished products may be accepted based on the

weight as packaged by the manufacturer.

(6) Station or kilometer quantities will be measured horizontally

along the centerline of the roadbed.

(7) Quantities measured on a cubic meter basis will be measured in

the hauling vehicle at point of delivery.

2.05.3.7.10 Basis of Payment. The accepted quantities, determined as

provided above, will be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement,
respectively, for each of the particular pay items that are shown in the Bill of
Quantities, which prices and payments will be full contract compensation for the work
prescribed in this Section.

No additional payments will be made for any adjustments, cleanout and

disposal of accumulated sediments or other such maintenance work on previously
installed erosion and pollution control facilities.

No direct payment will be made for furnishing, installing, and

subsequently removing and disposing of temporary drainage structures, such as
culvert pipe or polyethylene sheeting, used for diverting of live streams around or
through work areas, but such work will be considered as a subsidiary obligation of
the Contractor.

When the Special Specifications and Bill of Quantities do not contain

estimated quantities for soil erosion and pollution control work, the work will not be
paid for directly but will be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor
under other contract items.

51
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.05.4 Lift Thickness and Compaction Requirements.

2.05.4.1 Description. This Work shall consist of the placement and

compaction of embankment by rolling or tamping or any combination of these
methods in accordance with the requirements specified for the Moisture Content
Range and Type of compaction designated on the plans, in the Special
Specifications or. ordered by the Engineer.

2.05.4.2 Testing Methods.

1. Moisture Density Test. A Moisture Density Test (MRDTM 212) and

preliminary study will be made of each type of soil to be used in the construction of
the Work to determine the Maximum Density, the Optimum Moisture content and the
Moisture Content Range required of the soil for satisfactory compaction. The Field
Density and actual Moisture Content of the compacted embankment shall be
determined by field tests according to MRDTM 215. The Maximum Dry Density as
determined by MRDTM 212 shall be adjusted by AASHTO T 244 to compensate for
differing percentages of coarse particles on the 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) Sieve in the
Field Density Test Sample.

(1) Maximum Density. The Maximum Dry Density as determined by

the Moisture-Density Test shall be the density to which the Field Density is referred
for comparison or percentage for each type of soil used in the Work.

(2) Optimum Moisture. The Optimum Moisture shall be the

moisture content corresponding to the Maximum Density on the Moisture-Density
curve.

(3) Moisture Content Range. The Moisture Content Range shall be

limits of moisture content of each 4" of soil with the Optimum as a reference.

(4) Field Density. The Field Density shall be the density of the
compacted embankment determined by the Field Density test.

(5) Moisture Content. The Moisture Content shall be the actual

content of the soil in the compacted embankment at the time of compaction.

2. Relative Density Test. For cohesionless free-draining soils for which

impact compaction will not produce a well-defined moisture density relationship
curve and the maximum density, the Test for the Relative Density of Cohesionless
Soils (MRDTM 214) shall be used to determine the relative density.

Relative density is defined as the state of compactness of a soil with respect

to the loosest and densest state at which it can be placed by the laboratory
procedures described in the MTDTM 214. The Field Density and actual Moisture
Content of the compacted embankment shall be determined by field tests according
to MRDTM 215 and 216, or by the nuclear method MRDTM 218.

52
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

(1) Relative Density. The Relative Density as determined by the

Relative Density Test shall be the standard to which the Field Density is referred for
comparison for each type of cohesionless soil used in the Work.

(2) Field Density. The Field Density shall be the density of the
compacted embankment determined by the Field Density test.

(3) Moisture Content. The Moisture Content shall be the actual

content of the soil in the compacted embankment at the time of compaction.

3. Borderline Materials. In cases where borderline materials are

encountered, both methods will be utilized and the method which results in the
higher laboratory maximum density shall be used as the standard to which the field
density is compacted.

4. Plate Load Test. In addition to the Moisture-Density Test and the

Relative Density Test, the compaction of earthwork may also be checked by a Plate
Load Test (German Method for Roads). This method is described in MRDTM 237A.
The Test shall be applicable for all soils but not rockfill. Use of the Plate Load Test
for the Dune Sand, A-3(0), shall be encouraged.

2.05.4.3 Earth Embankment Lift Thickness and Compaction Requirement.

The top sixty (60) centimeters of all embankments and all embankment layers not
meeting the Paragraph 2.05.4.4, "Rock Embankment Lift Thickness and Compaction
Requirements," for rock fill shall be constructed, controlled and compacted as earth
embankment. Earth embankment layers shall be placed in horizontal lifts not
exceeding twenty (20) centimeters (loose measurement) and shall be compacted as
specified and accepted by the Engineer before the next layer is placed. Horizontal
layers in excess of twenty (20) centimeters (loose measurement) and up to the
depths shown below may be approved by the Engineer if compaction trial sections
verify that the required density can be uniformly attained. Effective spreading
equipment shall be used on each layer to obtain uniform thickness prior to
compacting. As the compaction of each layer progresses, continuous leveling and
manipulating will be required to assure uniform density. Proper moisture content
shall be established in order to obtain and maintain the required density.
Construction equipment shall be routed uniformly over the entire surface of each
layer. A motor grader shall be used on the embankment at all times during the
placing and compacting of the earth material.

The compaction requirements as controlled by the methods of testing specified

in Paragraph 2.05.4.2, 'Testing Methods," in these General Specifications are as
follows:

1. Type 98. Compacted density of the soil shall be equal or greater than
ninety eight percent (98%) of Maximum Density or seventy-six percent (76%) of
Relative Density.

2. Type 95. Compacted density of the soil shall be equal or greater than
ninety-five percent (95%) of Maximum Density or seventy-four percent (74%) of
Relative Density.

53
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

3. Type 90. Compacted density of the soil shall be equal or greater than
ninety percent (90%) of Maximum Density or seventy percent (70%) of Relative
Density.

4. Special Compaction. Where specified on the plans or in the Special

Specifications, the embankment shall, in addition to meeting the requirements of a
specified type of compaction, be formed of a material and compacted to meet a
specified CBR (California Bearing Ratio) requirement. The material and methods of
compaction shall be as determined from tests in accordance with AASHTO T 193.

5. Specific Compaction Requirements are as follows:

Subgrade-Expressways and
Major Link Roads Type 98
Subgrade-Agricultural Roads and Links Type 95
Top 60 cm of Embankment Type 95
Bottom Portion of Embankment Type 90
Agricultural Roads and Links Embankment Type 90
Natural Ground Same type compaction requirement
as embankment layer above the
Natural Ground.
Natural Ground-Touch Grade Compaction Requirement type 5%
less than the compaction
requirement type for subgrade.

6. Special Loose Lift Thickness Maximums subject to Verified Uniform

Density during test sections and special quality requirements:

For the top sixty (60) cm of the Embankment thirty (30) cm Lifts may be
attempted subject to verified uniform density throughout the full depth of the lift.
However, A-3, A-6, and A-7 material are not permitted.

For the remaining portion of the Embankment:

MATERIAL LIFT
TYPE PERMITTED . THICKNESS
A-1 -a, A-1 -b, and A-2-4 30 cm.
A-4 and A-5 20 cm.
A-3 (0) 50 cm.

54
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.05.4.4 Rock Embankment Lift Thickness and Compaction Requirements.

The following criteria should also be followed in the acceptance of rockfill:

1. Material.

(1) The material used for rockfill embankments shall consist

predominantly of rock fragments of such size that the material can be placed in
layers of the thickness prescribed, conforming to the following requirements:

Table 2,05-1

Maximum particle size…….. 2/3 loose layer thickness

Passing 0.6 mm (No. 30 Sieve)…….25% maximum
Uniformity coefficient, Cu 5 minimum, where
Cu = D60/D10
D60 = the particle size at which 60% passes
D10 = the particle size at which 1 0% passes

(2) Rockfill material shall be obtained from roadway, underground

structures excavation or quarry and shall be sound, dense, hard and durable rock
capable of being placed and compacted as specified. Individual pieces are to be
clean and angular. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to excavate material
from rock cuts whether by blasting or other manner, so that all excavated materials
are of suitable size; large size materials will not be paid for as waste, but shall be
disposed of in an approved manner without additional compensation.

(3) The maximum permitted layer thickness shall be related to the

unit weight of the vibratory roller used for compaction as given in Table 2.05-2 below,
and shall not exceed one hundred (1 00) centimeters loose measurement.

Table 2,05-2

Maximum Thickness of Layer Minimum Roller Mass on Drum

(Loose Measurement) (kilogram/unit width,)
Centimeters
------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
40 2300-2900
60 2900-3600
80 3600-4300
100 4300-5000

** For multiple roller, this shall be assessed on the high axle load.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(4) Rockfill materials shall be placed in such a manner that the

larger rocks are well distributed and the voids are filled to the maximum practical
extent by smaller particles, each layer shall be bladed into a neat and homogenous
mass prior to compaction. Any rocks found protruding from the leveled surface shall
be removed and replaced in by smaller particles. Initial breakdown compaction shall

55
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

be performed with heavy bulldozers. After compaction each layer must be approved
by the Engineer before the next layer is placed.

(5) Depending on the type of rockfill material, water may be added

as required and approved by the Engineer to achieve a maximum compaction.

(6) Rockfill shall not be used in the top sixty (60) centimeters of the
embankment (below the bottom of the subgrade), nor shall it be used to within five
(5) meters of a structural element (next to bridge abutments, footings, etc.). The side
slopes of rockfill embankments shall be thoroughly blanketed with A-2-4 or better
material placed perpendicular to the slope in twenty (20) centimeters thickness and
compacted to "Type 95" to seal the surface.

(7) Rockfill shall not be used for sixty (60) centimeters on top and
bottom of Box and Pipe Culverts. Subgrade or trench backfill material compacted to
"Type 95" requirements shall be used in these areas up to the width excavated for
structures.

2. Compaction

(1) To ensure proper compaction of rockfill embankments, the

Contractor shall be required to conduct compaction tests using equipment and
materials available in the presence of the Engineer to develop compaction control
criteria. To conduct compaction control test the following steps shall be followed:

1) A rockfill test section shall be placed on a firm surface

approved by the Engineer, the material and layer thickness conforming @o the
requirements of Tables 2.05-1 and 2.05-2.

2) The test section shall be of sufficient dimensions to

permit the establishment of at least twenty (20) leveling points on a five (5) meters
square (5 sq.m.) grid, and no fewer than three (3) points on any line and no point
less than three (3) meters from the edge of the layer.

3) Compaction shall then commence with a minimum of

three passes of a vibratory roller conforming to the requirements of Table 2.05-2,
leveling points are then established. Short lengths of painted steel bars hammered
flush with the surface of the rockfill have been found suitable for this purpose. A
level reading is taken at each leveling point on top of a moveable thirty (30)
centimeters square flat steel plate. A hole drilled in the center of the plate will enable
a visual check to be made that the plate is located centrally over the bar each time.

4) Further readings are then taken at the leveling points.

After two (2) additional passes with the roller, if the average settlement is less than
one percent (1 %) of the average compacted layer thickness, or as determined by
the Engineer, the rockfill compaction test is completed.

5) If the average settlement is more than one percent (1 %),

two (2) additional passes of the roller are required and the leveling procedure is

56
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

repeated. If the average settlement is now less than one percent (1 %), the test is
completed. If not, this step is then repeated.

6) The total number of passes of the rolling equipment

necessary to obtain the required result will establish the minimum number of passes
to be used on the rock embankments. The Contractor shall then use this verified
procedure, that is, the equipment, rolling pattern, and number of passes, during the
construction of rock embankments. However, in no case shall the number of passes
be less than five (5).

(2) This verification procedure shall be conducted for each change

of material and at least once each week during the initial stages of construction until
reliable rolling pattern is established. The frequency then can be reduced as
approved by the Engineer.

(3) Documentation of the rockfill compaction test shall be

maintained in the project records.

3. Preparation of Natural Ground. All surfaces to receive rockfill are to be

prepared as specified in Paragraph 2.05.3.2, "Foundation Preparation" in these
General Specifications. Soil surfaces are to be scarified and recompacted to at least
ninety percent (90%) of maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T180
(Method D.) Compaction is to be to a depth of at least twenty (20) centimeters below
ground surface. Hard or smooth surfaces are to be roughened before filling is
placed. Existing road surfaces and the like are to be broken up and removed.

4. Approval of Material for Rockfill. Individual pieces are to be neither

elongated nor flat, the longest dimension not exceeding twice the shortest
dimension. At least seventy-five percent (75%) of the material shall be greater than
twenty (20) centimeters.

5. Monitoring Settlement. On completion of the embankment, the

Contractor shall carry out precise leveling of the crest of the embankment. This shall
consist of leveling transverse sections (a minimum of five (5) points) at a maximum
spacing of thirty (30) meters along the embankment. These shall be referenced to a
stable approved datum. Leveling shall be carried out at suitable time intervals until
the average rate of settlement over a period of one (1) month does not exceed 0.05
mm per day. No permanent pavement construction will be permitted until the
specific criteria is achieved.

6. Tamping. Whenever embankments are placed adjacent to structures

or at locations where it is not practicable to use a roller, the embankment materials
shall be tamped by the use of mechanical rammers or tampers. Each layer shall be
compacted to a density to or greater than obtained under the above rolling procedure
for the type of compaction designated. Each successive layer shall contain only that
amount of material which will insure proper compaction but in no instance shall any
layer be greater than twenty (20) centimeters (loose measurement) in depth. Each
layer must be approved by the Engineer before the next layer is placed. When the
quantity of Work is small, a hand tamper may be used with the permission of the
Engineer.

57
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

7. Special Provisions for Other Rollers. When special heavy rollers are
used, the loose thickness of the layer may be increased when approved by the
Engineer as long as ninety percent (90%) Maximum Density or seventy percent
(70%) of Relative Density is achieved. Satisfactory compaction is defined as
compaction which results in a uniform density throughout the entire depth of the
layer equal to or in excess of the specified density. The maximum compacted
thickness of the layer shall be established by the Engineer for each type of heavy
roller used and for the various types of soil encountered. The Engineer reserves the
right to vary the compacted thickness of the layer as the Work progresses to insure
adequate compaction or to rescind approval of the heavy rollers.

2.05.5 Moisture Content Control Requirements. The moisture content of the soil
at the time of compaction shall be such that the soil can be compacted to the
requirements of the type of compaction designated on the plans or ordered by the
Engineer. The Moisture Content Range shall be determined by the Engineer during
the Compaction Trials.

The Moisture Content Requirements required when the compaction is under

the methods of testing specified in Paragraph 2.06.2.2, "Relative Density Test," in
these General Specifications shall be the Moisture Content Range directed by the
Engineer as determined during the Compaction Trials.

When the moisture content of the soil does not fall within the required
moisture range, water shall be added and thoroughly mixed into the soil, by
approved methods or the material shall be aerated, whichever is needed to adjust
the soil to the proper moisture content.

The amount of water to be added shall be only that amount that will, as
determined by the Engineer by field tests, provide a moisture content in the soil
within the required range plus a reasonable amount to compensate for evaporation
and other unavoidable losses. Water added in excess of this amount shall be
considered as excess water and must be removed by aeration or other suitable
means as directed by the Engineer. Satisfactory methods and sufficient equipment
shall be used for the furnishing and handling of the water so that there will be no
undue loss due to evaporating or waste. If water is added to cut areas or borrow
pits, the surfaces of the areas or pits shall be maintained in such a manner that will
prevent undue loss of moisture.

From other than the results of the Moisture Content test, the moisture content
of the soil being compacted shall be considered as being too high to insure
compaction when, after repeated rollings with the sheepsfoot roller, the roller
continues to pick up excessive amounts of soil and refuses to "build up" so that the
tamping foot eventually ride the compacted surface.

When other types of rollers are used, the moisture content of the soil shall be
considered as excessive when "bridging" or "building up" of the soil occurs in front of,
or behind the rear wheels of such rollers, and/or when earth hauling equipment
produces excessive ruts in the rolled surfaces.

58
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.05.6 Compaction Test Sections. Prior to the commencement of embankment

construction, the Contractor shall make compaction test sections as directed by the
Engineer. The compaction equipment to be used shall be the one (1) specified in
the Contractors detailed program of work and approved by the Engineer. The object
of these trials is to determine the relationship between the layer thickness, field
molding moisture content of the material, field density, and the number of
compaction passes.

The Engineer may order additional compaction test sections when he deems
them necessary.

2.05.7 Quality Assurance Procedures. Embankment shall be accepted by lot

unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications. The lot size will be each
embankment lift or portion of lift up to a maximum of ten thousand (1 0,000) cubic
meters in accordance with the lift thickness requirements specified in Subsection
2.05.4, "Lift Thickness and Compaction Requirements," in these General
Specifications. The embankment shall be sampled, tested and evaluated in
accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance," in these General Specifications. The
Engineer may, during the beginning of placement of embankment, at times when test
results indicate erratic characteristics and at any other time, reduce the lot size to
sections of embankment with similar quality characteristics. This should facilitate the
isolation and modification or replacement of low-quality materials with materials of
acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength of the embankment.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality

assurance sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be
recorded by roadway, embankment height, centerline station (kilometer) and offset.
Quality assurance testing for each lot shall include:

1. Lift thickness
2. Compaction
3. Classification
4. Embankment Finishing Tolerances and Requirement
5. Acceptance

2.05.7.1 Lift Thickness. The thickness of each lift of embankment shall be

measured at the beginning and periodically during the construction of the lift.

A lot will be accepted when all lift thickness measurements are no greater
than those specified in Subsection 2.05.4, "Lift Thickness and Compaction
Requirements," in accordance with these General Specifications.

59
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.05.7.2 Compaction. The compacted density for each layer of embankment

shall be determined by the sand cone method, MRDTM 215, or by nuclear method,
MRDTM 218 using full depth penetration, at the option of the Engineer.

When the sand cone method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at five (5) randomly selected locations in each
lot.

When the nuclear method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at eight (8) randomly selected locations in
each lot. Three (3) nuclear gauge readings shall be made at each test location
within a radius of two (2) meters. The three (3) readings shall be averaged and the
average considered to be the density for that test location.

Percent relative compaction shall be computed by comparing the average

actual in-place compacted density from the eight (8) nuclear gauge or five (5) sand
cone test results with the maximum density determined by MRDTM 212. For
example, MRDTM 212 maximum density shall be determined from samples of
embankment at a sampling frequency of one (1) test per three (3) lots. The
maximum density used for determining percent compaction shall be the running
average for three (3) consecutive tests.

Any lot of embankment that has a percent relative compaction below the
minimum percent compaction specified in Subsection 2.05.4, “Lift Thickness and
Compaction Requirements," in these General Specifications, resulting in a reduced
pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5,
"Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor
(Value of Work)," in these General Specifications may be accepted on the basis of a
reduced payment if requested in writing by the Contractor. Otherwise the said lot
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Lots that have
percent relative compaction resulting in a reduced pay factor less than 0.75 shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

2.05.7.3 Classification. Classification including gradation, plastic limit and liquid

limit will be tested, and evaluated on the results of a minimum of one (1) sample per
lot for the first three (3) lots and then one (1) sample for every fifth lot when changes
in material properties is suspected by the Contractor or Engineer.

A lot will be accepted when all the classification tests representing that lot are as
specified in Subsection 2.05.2, "Materials," in these General Specifications.

60
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.05.7.4 Embankment Finishing Tolerances and Requirements.

Embankment Quality Assurance measuring or testing shall involve verification that
the embankments are constructed, timely finished and trimmed in a neat,
workmanlike manner to the lines, grades and typical cross sections shown on the
plans or staked by the Engineer within the following tolerances and deadlines:

1. Embankment slopes shall be constructed in conformance with the lines

and grades established by the Engineer. The completed slopes within one (1) meter
of top of embankment grade shall not vary by more than fifteen (1 5) centimeters
from the staked slope measured at right angles to the slope. Slopes below one (1)
meter shall not vary more than thirty (30) centimeters from the staked slope,
measured at right angles to the slope.

2. Median and side slopes which are on a one (1) vertical to six (6)
horizontal (6:1) or flatter slope in excavation as well as embankment shall be finished
in accordance with the lines and grades established by the Engineer. The
completed slopes shall not vary more than one (1) centimeter from the designated
slope, measured at right angles to the slope. Flowlines within medians shall be
carefully graded to drain and shall not vary more than five (5) centimeters) from the
grade line established by the Engineer.

3. Finished Grade of Top of Embankment. The elevation of the finished

top of embankment shall be checked under the supervision of the Engineer. Each
cross section shall be checked at each change in cross slope and intermediate
points as directed. Cross sections shall be established at maximum intervals of
twenty-five(25) meters with additional sections as directed by the Engineer. The
allowable tolerance of the finished embankment above the staked elevation shall be
two (2) centimeters.

4. Variations above the design elevation shall not result in the diminished
thickness of any subsequent layer. The allowable tolerance of the finished
embankment below the staked elevation shall be forty (40) millimeters. Isolated
variations below the staked elevation shall be compensated by additional thickness
of the following subgrade layer.

5. Embankment slopes shall be finished in a timely manner preferably

immediately following the finishing of the roadbed. In no case, however, shall any
bituminous prime coat or bituminous concrete pavement be placed before the
embankment slopes are finished and accepted.

2.05.7.5 Acceptance. Embankment construction including lift thickness

classification and surface tolerances shall be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4,
"Measured or Tested Conformance," in these General Specifications.

Compaction will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of work

for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)."

61
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.05.8 Method of Measurement. When payment is specified on a volume basis in

the Bill of Quantities, quantities of "Embankment" shall be computed by the
Contractor and checked by the Engineer. Quantity computations shall be based on
the original ground cross sections taken by the Contractor which were observed by
and attested to by the Engineer and staked elevations developed from the typical
sections in the plans and based on the Contractors staking notes which were
checked and attested to by the Engineer using the Average End Area Method.
These shall include zero area stations at inflection points between cut and all areas.
Any materials excavated or placed before these measurements have been taken
and approved by the Engineer will not be paid for.

Measurements will be made for embankment materials actually used to

replace unsuitable materials removed to obtain proper compaction in foundations to
fillsections.

Where it is impractical to measure material by the cross section method due

to the erratic location of isolated deposits, acceptable methods involving three
dimensional measurements may be used, when approved by the Engineer.

Payment for preparation of foundations for embankments shall not include the
removal of the top twenty (20) centimeters of sod and vegetable matter and
compaction of the twenty (20) centimeters thickness which is paid for under Clearing
and Grubbing, Pay Item No. 20101. Embankment bridging lifts as described in
Paragraph 2.05.3.4, "Placement of Materials" in these General Specifications, will be
measured for payment under Embankment, Pay Item No. 20501.

When material paid for as "Roadway Excavation" otherwise conforms to the

applicable specification requirements, it may be used in the "Embankment," or any
other Item of Work and also be paid under that item as provided in the specifications.

The total volume of Embankment shall be computed from the approved cross
sections based on original ground elevations after the authorized excavation of one
(1) unsuitable material in embankment areas, two (2) unsuitable material below
subgrade in cuts, three (3) authorized undercut areas in rock cuts, and four (4) other
materials ordered removed from their original position by the Engineer for
replacement or compaction of underlying layers, except those materials specifically
excluded from payment by the specifications. The approved cross sections shall not
include the volume of embankments widened solely to accommodate the disposal of
surplus materials. Embankment shall not include the volume of "Subgrade" since
separate payment is provided in the Bill of Quantities for that item.

In computing the pay quantity of Embankment, the volume occupied by

multiple barrel reinforced concrete box culverts shall be deducted from the total
volume of embankment. No deduction shall be made for the volume occupied by
pipe culverts or single barrel reinforced box culverts. No adjustments in pay
quantities based on the natural expansion or contraction of earthwork volumes as
they are excavated and compacted in embankments will be made. Estimates shown
in the plans based on assumed expansion or contraction are for information only.

62
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

There will be no adjustment in contract unit prices nor will claims for additional
payment be considered based on erroneous assumptions or representations to the
contraction of excavated or imported materials, or the suitability of those materials
for use in the embankment, regardless whether the assumptions or representations
were made by the Ministry, its representatives, or any other responsible persons.

There will be no separate payment for foundation treatment or compaction of

materials in their original position or for Work specifically included for payment under
other items of Work.

2.05.9 Payment. The amount of authorized, completed and accepted Work,

measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic
meter for Embankment, as shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price(s) shall be full
compensation for all materials, labor, equipment, tools, and all other items necessary
for the proper completion of the Work including all surveying and quantity
computations as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these
General Specifications. A ten percent (10%) retent will be held by the Engineer on
each section of Embankment until the roadbed and slopes have been finished,
trimmed and compacted.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

20501 Embankment Cubic Meter

63
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 2.06 - UNTREATED SUBGRADE

2.06.1 Description. This work shall consist of blending, mixing, loading,

transporting and placing acceptable materials excavated from the roadway or
imported from borrow sites in horizontal lifts of uniform thickness for the full width of
the subgrade; compacting each layer, and finishing the top of the untreated
subgrade layer to specified tolerances. This work shall also consist of preparation of
existing subgrade layers, consisting of removal and replacement of the top layer of
the existing material, scarification, moisture adjustment, and compaction, and
finishing the top of the untreated subgrade layer to the specified tolerances. It shall
also consist of maintaining and draining the untreated subgrade layers, trimming the
untreated subgrade slopes, all as shown on the plans, specified in these
specifications and the special specifications or established by the Engineer.
Untreated subgrade layers shall be constructed as specified herein and shall be
treated as a separate item for measurement and payment purposes. Excavation
shall be completed as specified in Section 2.03, "Excavation," in these General
Specifications, and shall be treated as a separate item for measurement and
payment purposes. Embankment shall be completed as specified in Section 2.05
"Embankment" in these General Specifications, and shall be treated as a separate
item for measurement and payment purposes. For the remainder of the Section and
for simplification purposes, Untreated Subgrade will be referred to as Subgrade.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Subgrade
Subgrade Preparation

2.06.2 Materials. Materials from roadway excavation, tunnel excavation or imported

borrow meeting the appropriate quality requirements shall be used to construct
subgrade in accordance with the typical sections contained in the plans or as staked
by the Engineer.

Subgrade layer materials shall be a minimum of thirty (30) centimeter thick

after compaction in both embankment and cut areas using materials meeting the
following requirements:

1. Material classified by MRDTM 21 0 as A-1 -a(O), A-1 -b(O) and A-2-4(0)

having
no rock fragments larger than ten (1 0) centimeters.

2. Material having a minimum soaked California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of twenty

five (25) (MRDTM 213) at maximum specified density.

3. Material being reasonably well-graded with sufficient fines to permit

compaction and compaction testing.

64
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.06.3 Construction.

2.06.3.1 Equipment. The Contractor shall provide all types, sizes and numbers of
equipment which are necessary for handling, mixing, loading, hauling, spreading,
watering, compacting and finishing material to form the subgrade layer in
accordance with the plans, the special specifications, this specification and as
directed by the Engineer.

2.06.3.2 Imported Borrow Material. The Contractor may use imported borrow
material to complete the subgrade layer to the lines, grades and cross sections
shown on the plans, specified in the Special Specifications and as staked by the
Engineer.

Imported borrow material includes material taken from borrow sites, whether or not
shown on the plans or described in the Special Specifications and from the widening
of cuts when said widening is approved by the Engineer in writing.

Borrow sites shall not be located so that any edge is closer than three
hundred (300) meters from embankment toe of slope unless otherwise shown on the
plans, specified in the Special Specifications or approved by the Engineer.

Borrow material shall not be taken from any site within five hundred (500)
meters downstream of a drainage structure unless approved by the Engineer in
writing. Such borrow sites shall be backfilled and compacted, as directed by the
Engineer, at the Contractors expense.

The Contractor may only import borrow materials from sites outside the right
of way. All such imported borrow shall be arranged by the Contractor at his sole and
exclusive cost. When the Contractor proposes to import borrow material from public
or private property he shall obtain the consent of the public agency or private owners
and present said consent agreement to the Engineer prior to beginning removal.

The Contractor shall perform preliminary testing of all proposed sources of

imported material for subgrade. The preliminary testing shall consist of test pits
and/or borings and testing of samples. This testing shall include, at the minimum,
the following tests for each soil or rock strata in each proposed source:

1. Classification - MRDTM 21 0 (All Required Tests)

2. Proctor - MRDTM 212 or MRDTM 214 if appropriate

3. California Bearing Ration (CBR) - MRDTM 213

The Contractor shall furnish all test data to the Engineer at least two (2)
weeks prior to taking material from the site and request preliminary approval from the
Engineer to use the borrow site. The Engineer shall review the test information and
accept or reject the Contractors request in writing. Final approval of the material
shall be based on acceptance samples taken from each layer of
subgrade.

65
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Before abandoning any borrow site located on public or private property, the
Contractor shall, at his sole expense, clean and trim the borrow site, haul roads and
all areas occupied during the work, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
property owner. Borrow sites shall present a neat and workmanlike natural
appearance and all edges shall be trimmed to slope no steeper than one vertical to
four horizontal (1 V to 4 H).

2.06.3.3 Placement of Materials. The Contractor shall have in operation a

sufficient number of motor graders or tractors to properly smooth and maintain the
surface of each layer of freshly placed subgrade prior to and during rolling and
compacting operations.

When it is feasible, trucks, scrapers, tractors or other heavy hauling

equipment shall be routed over the subgrade in such a manner to take advantage of
the compaction afforded thereby. The Engineer shall have full authority to require at
any time, the suspension of delivery of subgrade material until previously delivered
materials are properly placed and preceding layers are satisfactorily smooth,
uniformly compacted, and tested.

2.06.3.4 Subgrade Drainage and Slope Stability. At the end of each day's
operation, the Contractor will shape and compact to a uniform enough cross section
that will allow the surface of the subgrade allow water to drain. Dikes and slope
drains shall be constructed and maintained along the subgrade edges to prevent
water from spilling over the edge and eroding the side slopes.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all subgrade lifts and
shall replace all sections of same which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have been
damaged or displaced (slumped or slid) due to carelessness or neglect on the part of
the Contractor, or due to normally occurring natural causes, such as erosion caused
by wind or water, and not due to the unavoidable movement of the embankment
upon which the subgrade is placed. When unacceptable material has been placed in
the subgrade, its removal shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

2.06.3.5 Subgrade on Existing Road Surfaces. When an existing road surface

is shown on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, to be used as subgrade, the
adjustment of the elevation on which the subbase or base is to be placed shall be
made by a bituminous concrete leveling course constructed in accordance with the
details shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer and complying with
Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General Specifications.

When the width of the subgrade of that road under construction is greater
than the surface width of the existing roadway, that part of the subgrade which falls
on the surface of the existing road surface shall be constructed according to this
subparagraph, and that part of the subgrade which falls outside the limits of the
existing road surface shall be constructed as new construction and shall meet all
the requirements thereof.

66
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.06.3.6 Subgrade In Earth Cuts. The depth of subgrade in earth cuts shall be
thirty (30) centimeters. The material shall be Class A-1 -a(O), A-1 -b(O), or A-2-a(O)
as determined by MRDTM 21 0, and shall meet a minimum soaked CBR of twenty-
five (25) as determined by MRDTM 213 when compacted to the specified density. If
the natural material in the cut meets these requirements, then the top fifteen (1 5)
centimeters shall be removed. The bottom fifteen (15) centimeters shall be scarified,
brought to a uniform moisture content within the specified range, and compacted to
ninety-eight percent (98%) of maximum dry density. The top fifteen (1 5) centimeters
shall be replaced with the same or equivalent material, brought to a uniform moisture
content within the specified range, and compacted to the specified density.

If the natural material in the cut does not meet the above requirements for
subgrade, then the subgrade shall be subexcavated to a depth of thirty (30)
centimeters unless additional excavation is ordered by the Engineer. The twenty
(20) centimeters below the excavated area shall be scarified, brought to a uniform
moisture content within the specified range, and compacted to Type 95 density. The
excavated material shall be replaced with material meeting the requirements of
Class A-1 -1 (0), A-1 -b(O), or A-2-4(0), with a minimum soaked CBR of twenty-five
(25) at the maximum specified density. The replacement material shall be brought to
uniform moisture content within the specified range and compacted in two (2)
approximately equal layers to ninety-eight percent (98%) of maximum dry density.

2.06.3.7 Subgrade in Rock Cuts. When a cut area is identified by the Engineer
as rock for purposes of subgrade preparation, the area shall be undercut to a depth
of thirty (30) centimeters below top of subgrade. The material excavated shall be
placed in embankments or disposed of as approved by the Engineer if there is a
surplus of embankment material. Care shall be taken that undrained pockets shall
not be left in the surface of the rock. Coarse aggregate material complying with the
requirements of AASHTO M43 - Sizes of Aggregates for Road and Bridge
Construction - Size numbers one (1) through four hundred sixty-seven (467) shall be
placed in the pockets or in the undercut rock surface and consolidated. After
consolidation, the undercut subgrade surface shall be in substantial compliance with
the grade and typical section shown on the plans. Placement and consolidation of
the coarse aggregate is required to fill the voids and irregularities left in the subgrade
from the Contractors excavation operation. This operation will be considered
subsidiary to the Excavation Item and the Contractor shall not receive additional
compensation for this Work.

The excavated material shall be replaced with material meeting the requirements
of Class A-1 -1 (0), A-1 -b(O), or A-2-4(0), with a minimum soaked CBR of twenty-
five (25) at the maximum specified density. The material shall be brought to uniform
moisture content within the specified range and compacted in two (2) approximately
equal layers to ninety-eight percent (98%) of maximum dry density.

67
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.06.3.8 Subgrade on Embankments (including Sand Duns Areas). The

thirty (30) centimeters of material placed on the embankment to form the subgrade
layer shall meet the requirements of Class A-1 -a(O), A-1 -b(O), or A-24 as
determined by MRDTM 21 0, with a minimum soaked CBR of twenty-five (25) as
determined by MRDTM 213 when compacted to ninety-eight percent (98%) of
maximum dry density. The entire thirty (30) centimeters shall be compacted to the
specified density in two (2) approximately equal layers.

2.06.3.9 Preparation of Existing Subgrade. This work, whether in cut or in fill

sections, shall be carried out as specified in Paragraph 2.06.3.6 - "Subgrade in Earth
Cuts," in these General Specifications.

2.06.4 Quality Assurance Procedures. Subgrade shall be accepted by lot unless

otherwise stated in the Special Specifications. The lot shall consist of five thousand
(5,000) square meters constructed in accordance with the lift thickness requirements
specified in Subsection 2.05.4, "Lift Thickness and Compaction Requirements," in
these General Specifications. The subgrade shall be sampled, tested and evaluated
in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance," in these General Specifications. The
Engineer may, during the beginning of placement of subgrade, at times when test
results indicate erratic characteristics and at any other time, reduce the lot size to
sections of embankment with similar quality characteristics. This should facilitate the
isolation and modification or replacement of low-quality materials with materials of
acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength of the subgrade.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, embankment height, centerline station (kilometer) and offset. Quality
assurance testing for each lot shall include:

1. Thickness
2. Compaction
3. Classification Maximum Particle Size and CBR
4. Subgrade Finishing Tolerances and Requirements
5. Acceptance

2.06.4.1 Thickness. The thickness of each lot of subgrade complete as placed and
compacted, shall be measured from test holes obtained at a minimum of five (5)
random locations within the lot. The thickness of each hole shall be determined after
it is determined that the compacted density is acceptable. The average of the test
hole thickness shall be reported as the thickness of the lot.

A lot shall be accepted when the average total thickness is not less than the
Plan thickness.

Any lot of subgrade with an average thickness less than the Plan thickness
but resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in accordance with
Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination
of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications may be accepted on
the basis of reduced payment if requested in writing by the Contractor. Otherwise,
the said lot thickness shall be increased as specified in the following paragraph.

68
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

When the average thickness of a lot of subgrade is less than the plan
thickness by an amount resulting in a reduced pay factor below 0.75 the Contractor,
at his own expense, shall place and remix additional subgrade material with the
original subgrade material and recompact before new test holes are dug.

2.06.4.2 Compaction. Subgrade materials shall be compacted to the percent of

maximum density detailed in Subsection 2.05.4, "Lift Thickness and Compaction
Requirements," in these General Specifications.

The compacted density for each layer of subgrade shall be determined by the
sand cone method, MRDTM 215, or by nuclear method, MRDTM 218, using full
depth penetration, at the option of the Engineer.

When the sand cone method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at a minimum of five (5) randomly selected
locations in each lot.

When the nuclear method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the test shall be made at a minimum of eight (8) randomly selected
locations in each lot. Three (3) nuclear gauge readings shall be made at each test
location within a radius of two (2) meters. The three (3) readings shall be averaged
and the average considered to be the density for that test location.

Percent relative compaction shall be computed by comparing the average

actual in-place compacted density from the nuclear gauge or sand cone test results
with the maximum density determined by MRDTM 212. For example, MRDTM 212
maximum density shall be determined from samples of embankment at a sampling
frequency of one (1) test per three (3) lots. The maximum density used for
determining percent compaction shall be the running average for three (3)
consecutive tests.

Any lot of subgrade that has a percent relative compaction below the
minimum percent compaction specified in Subsection 2.05.4 "Lift Thickness and
Compaction Requirements" in these General Specifications, resulting in a reduced
pay factor of 0.75 or higher may be accepted on the basis of a reduced payment if
requested in writing by the Contractor. Otherwise the said lot shall be removed and
replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Lots that have percent relative
compaction resulting in a reduced pay factor less than 0.75 shall be removed and
replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

2.06.4.3 Classification, Maximum Particle Size and CBR. Classification and

CBR including gradation, plastic limit and liquid limit will be sampled, tested, and
evaluated on the results of a minimum of one (1) test result per lot for the first three
(3) lots and then one (1) test result for every fifth lot when changes in the material
properties are suspected by the Contractor or the Engineer. Maximum particle size
shall be determined by screening the entire sample as received over a ten (1 0)
centimeter square screen. The weight retained on the ten (1 0) centimeter screen
shall be recorded.

69
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

A lot will be accepted when all the classifications and maximum particle size
tests representing that lot are as specified in Subsection 2.06.2, "Materials," in these
General Specifications.

2.06.4.4 Finishing Tolerances and Requirements. Quality Assurance

measuring or testing shall involve verification that the subgrade is constructed, timely
finished and trimmed in a neat, workmanlike manner to the lines, grades and typical
cross sections shown on the Plans or staked by the Engineer within the following
tolerances and deadlines:

1. Subgrade slopes shall be constructed in conformance with the lines and

grades established by the Engineer. The completed slopes shall not vary more than
one (1) centimeter from the designated slope measured at right angles to the slope.

2. Finished Grade of Subgrade. The elevation of the top of subgrade surface

shall be checked under the supervision of the Engineer. Each cross section shall be
checked at each change in cross slope and intermediate points as directed. Cross
sections shall be established at maximum intervals of twenty-five (25) meters with
additional sections as directed by the Engineer. The allowable tolerances for the
finished grade of the top of subgrade are as follows:

(1) When bituminous concrete or bituminous concrete base is to directly

be placed on the subgrade, the finished top of subgrade at any point shall not vary
more than one (1) centimeter above or below the grade established by the Engineer.

(2) When subbase or base material (other than bituminous concrete base)
is to be placed on the subgrade, the finished top of subgrade at any point shall not
vary more than two (2) centimeters above or below the grade established by the
Engineer.

2.06.4.5 Acceptance. Subgrade construction including classification, maximum

particle size, California Bearing Ratio and finishing tolerances and requirements shall
be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance," in these
General Specifications.

Compaction and thickness will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5,

"Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor
(Value of Work)," in two (2) stages as follows: The first stage shall be the selection of
the pay factor for the quality of the subgrade relating to compaction. The second
stage involves the selection of a quantity pay factor based on the thickness of the
subgrade. The reduced thickness pay factor for the lower courses of multiple layer
courses will be applied provisionally based on the results of the depths of the holes
dug in the lower layers. Additional holes will be dug in the total depth of all subgrade
layers within the lot represented by lower layer reduced thickness pay factors. If the
total thickness depths show that the increased upper level layer thickness has
resulted in total thickness acceptability, the lower level layer reduced thickness pay
factor will be adjusted accordingly. The second stage thickness quantity pay factor
will be applied to all the individual course lots in addition to the first stage quality pay
factor.

70
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.06.5 Maintenance and Protection. Following construction of the subgrade, the

compacted course shall be maintained by the Contractor at his own expense. The
Contractor shall blade, broom, and otherwise maintain the course, keeping it free
from raveling and other defects that result in lost density until such time as the next
element of the pavement structure is placed. Water shall be applied at such times
and in such quantities as directed by the Engineer, and the Engineer shall have full
authority to require the suspension of all other work on the project to insure the
proper maintenance of previously compacted material.

The Engineer shall determine when the surface of the subgrade is in the
proper condition to permit the bituminous prime and/or surfacing to be applied. The
Contractor must continue to maintain the surface of the subgrade, including the
application of the necessary water, at his own expense until such time as the
bituminous prime and/or surfacing is applied. Any additional expense incurred by
the Contractor t>ecause of delay in applying the bituminous prime and/or surfacing
when so permitted by the Engineer will not be considered as the basis for a claim for
additional compensation.

2.06.6 Method of Measurement. When payment is specified on a volume basis in

the Bill of Quantities, quantities of "Subgrade" shall be computed by the Contractor
and checked by the Engineer. The total volume of "Subgrade" shall be computed
from the approved cross sections and shall include the volume of material in the
subgrade zone which is required to be placed, removed and replaced, or removed,
returned, and compacted, or even scarified, watered, rolled and generally left in its
original location. The total volume of "Subgrade" shall include the subgrade layer
constructed in earth cuts, rock cuts, and on embankments including all roadways,
frontage and service roads, interchanges, ramps and other incidental roads. The
volume shall not include material below the subgrade zone which is scarified,
watered, rolled, or otherwise generally left in its original location. The lateral limits of
the subgrade zone shall be those shown on the typical section or ordered in writing
by the Engineer.

Where it is impractical to measure material by the cross section method due.

to the erratic location of isolated deposits, acceptable methods involving three
dimensional measurements may be used, when approved by the Engineer.

When material paid for as Roadway Excavation otherwise conforms to the

applicable specification requirements, it may be used in the Subgrade or any other
Item of Work and also be paid under that Item as provided in these General
Specifications.

Subgrade preparation will be measured by the square meter of completed and

accepted work, on the basis of approved cross-sections and as authorized and
directed by the Engineer. Measurement shall be to the nearest tenth of a square
meter along the longitudinal profile of the road. No measurement shall be made of
unauthorized areas, as specified in Subsection 1.07.6 “Una uthorized work" in these
General Specifications.

71
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

There will be no adjustment in contract unit price(s) nor will claims for
additional payment be considered based on erroneous assumptions or
representations to the contraction of excavated or imported materials, or the
suitability of those materials for use in the subgrade, regardless whether the
assumptions or representations were made by the Ministry, its representatives, or
any other responsible persons.

2.06.7 Payment. The amount of authorized, completed, and accepted subgrade

Work, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) per
cubic meter for Subgrade as shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price(s) shall be
full compensation for all loading, hauling and the proper formation of subgrade,
trimming of slopes, cleanup, preparation, compaction and completion of subgrade
including shoulder areas, except as otherwise provided, and all other items
necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2,
"Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications, including all surveying and
quantity computations.

The amount of completed and accepted Work for Subgrade Preparation,

measured as provided above, will be paid for at the unit price bid per square meter
for such item, appearing in the Bill of Quantities, which price shall be full
compensation for all that is necessary for proper completion as specified in
subsection 1.07.2 'Scope of Payment' in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

20601 Subgrade Cubic Meter
20602 Subgrade Preparation Square Meter

72
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 2.07 - LIME TREATED SUBGRADE

2.07.1 Description. This work shall consist of preparing roadbed for lime treatment,
furnishing and applying lime, mixing lime and water with in-place material, and
spreading, compacting, curing and sealing the mixture, to the lines, grades and
dimensions shown on the plans and as specified.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Lime Treated Subgrade
Lime

2.07.2 Equipment. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, a list of equipment
which he intends to use, at least fourteen (14) days prior to beginning lime treated
construction operations. The list shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Scarifying Equipment that is capable of loosening the subgrade soil to the

depths shown on the plans or specified in the Special Specifications.

2. Pulverizing Equipment that is capable of reducing the soil clods to facilitate

adequate mixing throughout the entire depth of layer specified.

3. Lime Spreading Equipment that will spread the lime uniformly at the
specified rate of application.

4. Mixing Equipment shall be traveling pugmill, or a single or multiple cross

shaft mixer capable of uniformly mixing soil, lime and water to the depths shown on
the plans or specified in the special specifications.

5. Watering Equipment that will apply water uniformly at measured rates.

NOTE: The requirements listed above shall not be interpreted to prohibit use of a
single item of equipment that will scarify, pulverize, add water and mix to the depths
specified.

6. Compacting Equipment as specified in Paragraph 2.07.4.4, "Compaction and

Finishing" in these General Specifications.

7. Bituminous Material Distributor as specified in Subsection 4.02.4,

"Equipment" in these General Specifications.

The Engineer shall consider the equipment proposed, approve that which will
produce the results specified and require the Contractor to provide such other
equipment as may be needed. At any time during construction activities, if the work
performed by the Con-tractor fails to conform to specified requirements, the Engineer
shall order changes in equipment, construction methods or both.

73
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.07.3 Materials.

2.07.3.1 Lime. Lime shall be a commercial dry hydrated lime or granular or

palletized quicklime conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 51. When sampled
on delivery to the project, the lime shall conform to the following gradation and
quality requirements:

GRADATION

Percent Passing
Sieve Size Hydrated Lime Quicklime
19 mm (% inch) 100 100
No. 30 95-100 -
No. 100 - 30-100
No. 200 75-100 -
Test Method ASTM C 110 ASTM C 136
(Dry sieving only)

Hydrated lime shall contain not less than eighty-five percent (85%) calcium
hydroxide Ca(OH)2, as determined by ASTM C 25.

Quicklime shall contain not less than ninety-four percent (94%) total available
calcium oxide and magnesium oxide (CaO + MgO) and not less than ninety percent
(90%) total available calcium oxide (CaO) as determined by ASTM C 25.

Lime from more than one (1) source or more than one (1) type of lime may be
used on the same project, but the different limes shall not be mixed. The lime shall
be protected from exposure to moisture until used and shall be sufficiently dry to flow
freely when handled.

The supplier of lime shall provide a written Certificate of Guarantee stating

that the lime conforms to the requirements of this section. A certified copy of
shipping weight shall be submitted to the Engineer with each delivery of lime.

2.07.3.2 Water. Water used for mixing shall be capable of producing the specified
lime treated material as confirmed by laboratory testing and shall be approved by the
Engineer.

2.07.3.3 Bituminous Curing Seal. Bituminous material for curing seal shall be
SS-1 h or CSS-1h conforming to the requirements specified in Section 4. 01,
"Bituminous Materials" in these General Specifications.

2.07.4 Construction Requirements.

2.07.4.1 Preparation of Roadbed. In-place material to be lime treated shall be

scarified and thoroughly broken up for the full roadway width. The material to be
treated shall contain no rocks or clods larger than six (6) centimeters in greatest
dimension. The depth to be scarified shall be as specified in the Plans or Special
Specifications. The lime, water and in-place material shall be mixed and compacted

74
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

to the full scarified depth. The thickness of lime treated subgrade layer shall not be
more than two (2) centimeters less than the planned and staked thickness.

If the mixing machine to be used requires that the material be windrowed, the
windrows shall be of uniform cross section and limited to such size that all the
material will pass through the mixer at each operation. Otherwise, the material shall
be shaped to the required line, grade and cross section before application of lime
and mixing.

2.07.4.2 Application of Lime. Lime shall be added to the material to be treated at

a rate not varying more than ten percent (1 0%) from the rate specified in the Special
Specifications. The equipment used to distribute the lime shall be capable of
uniformly distributing the required amount of lime for the full width of the pass within
this tolerance.

Lime or lime treated material shall not be spread or mixed when the
temperature is less than five degrees Celsius (5' C) in the shade, or when conditions
are such at the temperature will fall below five degrees Celsius (50 C) within twenty-
four (24) hours.

The area on which the lime may be spread ahead of the mixing operation
shall be limited to that which the Contractor demonstrates he is capable of
thoroughly mixing by the end of the working day.

No traffic other than water trucks and mixing equipment shall be allowed on
the lime treated material until after completion of all mixing.

2.07.4.3 Mixing. The soil and lime shall be uniformly mixed with approved
equipment. Water shall be applied and mixed to produce a moisture content which
is uniform throughout the depth being mixed within two (2) percentage points of the
optimum moisture content required for compaction. The optimum moisture content
shall be established by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

Mixing and remixing operations shall continue until the material is uniformly
mixed and free of streaks or pockets of lime. The final mixture shall not contain
more than five percent (5%), by dry weight, untreated soil clods larger than three (3)
centimeters in diameter.

The lime treated material, after the initial mixing operations and before
compaction, shall be allowed to cure for a period between twenty-four (24) to forty
eight (48) hours as determined by the Engineer.

If quicklime is used for subgrade treatment, sufficient water shall be added

prior to or during the initial mixing operation to slake all of the quicklime.

When lime treated subgrade is required to be reworked more than seven (7)
days after original compaction is completed, an additional two percent (2%) lime
shall be uniformly incorporated into the mixture.

75
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.07.4.4 Compaction and Finishing. The treated mixture, after curing, shall be
spread to the lines, grades and thickness shown on the plans or specified in the
special specifications.

The thickness of a compacted layer shall not exceed thirty (30) centimeters.
When the required thickness is more than thirty (30) centimeters, the mixture shall
be spread and compacted in two (2) or more layers of approximately equal
thickness. Optimum moisture content shall be maintained by watering during the
spreading and compacting process. Unless otherwise stated in the special
specifications, the lime treated subgrade shall be compacted to a dry density not less
than ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum density determined by MRDTM 212.

Initial compaction shall be by grid, segmented or peg rollers. Final

compaction shall be accomplished by a minimum of two (2) coverages with a steel
drum or pneumatic roller. Areas inaccessible to rollers shall be compacted as
specified by tamping using equipment selected by the Contractor and acceptable to
the Engineer.

The lime treated subgrade shall be completed to the grades shown on the
plans within a tolerance of +/- two (2) centimeters.

2.07.4.5 Curing. The surface of the lime treated subgrade shall be kept moist until
covered by another layer of lime treated subgrade or until a bituminous curing seal is
placed. The bituminous curing seal shall be applied at a rate between one half (0.5)
and one (1.0) liters per square meter. The curing seal shall be applied within one (1)
hour after completion of final compaction along any portion of the roadbed having a
length of two hundred and fifty (250) meters. Curing seal shall be applied when air
temperatures are above five degrees Celsius (5' C).

Additional applications of curing seal shall be applied as necessary to

maintain a uniform, complete film of bituminous material on the lime treated
subgrade for at least seventy-two (72) hours).

No equipment or traffic will be allowed on the bituminous curing seal for at

least seventy-two (72) hours after application of the curing seal. Subsequent layers
of subbase, base or bituminous surfacing shall be placed within ten (10) days after
application of the curing seal.

2.07.4.6 Safety Requirements. The Contractor shall prepare a program for safety
of construction personnel and the public and present it to the Engineer prior to the
beginning of lime treatment operations. The program shall include training of
construction personnel, provision of safety equipment for protection of body, eyes
and nasal passages. A suitable first aid kit shall be available at the work site at all
times when lime spreading and mixing is in progress. No work shall begin until the
Engineer has received the safety program and approved it. During construction
operations the Contractor shall enforce all safety regulations and require the use of
safety equipment. When the Contractor fails to enforce all safety requirements,
construction activities shall cease.

76
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.07.5 Quality Assurance Procedures. Lime treated subgrade shall be accepted

by lot unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications. The lot shall consist of
five thousand (5,000) square meters constructed in accordance with the subgrade lift
thickness requirements specified in Subsection 2.05.4, "Lift Thickness and
Compaction Requirements," in these General Specifications. The lime treated
subgrade shall be sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08
"Acceptance" in these General Specifications. The Engineer may, during the
beginning of placement of lime treated subgrade, at times when test results indicate
erratic characteristics and at any other time, reduce the lot size to sections of
embankment with similar quality characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation
and modification or replacement of low-quality materials with materials of acceptable
quality to maintain the overall strength of the subgrade.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality

assurance sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be
recorded by roadway, embankment height, centerline station (kilometer) and offset.
Quality assurance testing for each lot shall include:

1. Thickness
2. Compaction
3. Classification Maximum Particle Size and CBR
4. Finishing Tolerances and Requirements
5. Lime
6. Acceptance

2.07.5.1 Thickness. The thickness of each lot of lime treated subgrade complete
as placed and compacted, shall be measured from test holes obtained at a minimum
of five (5) random locations within the lot. The thickness of each hole shall be
determined after it is determined that the compacted density is acceptable. The
average of the test hole thickness shall be reported as the thickness of the lot.

A lot shall be accepted when the average total thickness is not less than the
Plan thickness.

Any lot of lime treated subgrade with an average thickness less than the Plan
thickness but resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance
and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications
may be accepted on the basis of reduced payment if requested in writing by the
Contractor. Otherwise the said lot thickness shall be increased as specified in the
following paragraph.

When the average thickness of a lot of subgrade is less than the plan
thickness by an amount resulting in a reduced pay factor below 0.75 the Contractor,
at his own expense, shall place and remix additional lime treated subgrade material
with the original subgrade material and recompact before new test holes are dug.

77
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.07.5.2 Compaction. Lime treated subgrade materials shall be compacted to the

percent of maximum density detailed in Subsection 2.05.4, "Lift Thickness and
Compaction Requirements," in these General Specifications.

The compacted density for each layer of lime treated subgrade shall be
determined by the sand cone method, MRDTM 215, or by nuclear method, MRDTM
218, using full depth penetration, at the option of the Engineer.

When the sand cone method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at a minimum of five (5) randomly selected
locations in each lot.

When the nuclear method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the test shall be made at a minimum of eight (8) randomly selected
locations in each lot. Three (3) nuclear gauge readings shall be made at each test
location within a radius of two (2) meters. The three (3) readings shall be averaged
and the average considered to be the density for that test location.

Percent relative compaction shall be computed by comparing the average

actual in-place compacted density from the nuclear gauge or sand cone test results
with the maximum density determined by MRDTM 212. For example, MRDTM 212
maximum density shall be determined from samples of lime treated subgrade at a
sampling frequency of one (1) test per three (3) lots. The maximum density used for
determining percent compaction shall be the running average for three (3)
consecutive tests.

Any lot of lime treated subgrade that has a percent relative compaction below
the minimum percent compaction specified for subgrade in Subsection 2.05.4 "Lift
Thickness and Compaction Requirements" in these General Specifications, resulting
in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher may be accepted on the basis of a reduced
payment if requested in writing by the Contractor. Otherwise the said lot shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Lots that have percent
relative compaction resulting in a reduced pay factor less than 0.75 shall be removed
and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

When requested, the lime treated subgrade lift may be accepted on the basis
of reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5,
"Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor
(Value of Work)," in these General Specifications.

2.07.5.3 Classification, Maximum Particle Size and CBR. Classification and

CBR including gradation, plastic limit and liquid limit will be sampled, tested, and
evaluated on the results of a minimum of one (1) test result per lot for the first three
(3) lots and then one (1) test result for every fifth lot when changes in the material
properties are suspected by the Contractor or the Engineer. Maximum particle size
shall be determined by screening the entire sample as received over a ten (1 0)
centimeter square screen. The weight retained on the ten (1 0) centimeter screen
shall be recorded.

78
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

A lot will be accepted when all the classifications and maximum particle size
tests representing that lot are as specified in Subsection 2.07.2, "Materials," in these
General Specifications.

2.07.5.4 Finishing Tolerances and Requirements. Quality Assurance

measuring or testing shall involve verification that the lime treated subgrade is
constructed, timely finished and trimmed in a neat, workmanlike manner to the lines,
grades and typical cross sections shown on the Plans or staked by the Engineer
within the following tolerances and deadlines:

1. Lime treated subgrade slopes shall be constructed in conformance with the

lines and grades established by the Engineer. The completed slopes shall not vary
more than one (1) centimeter from the designated slope measured at right angles to
the slope.

2. Finished Grade of Lime Treated Subgrade. The elevation of the top of lime
treated subgrade surface shall be checked under the supervision of the Engineer.
Each cross section shall be checked at each change in cross slope and intermediate
points as directed. Cross sections shall be established at maximum intervals of
twenty-five (25) meters with additional sections as directed by the Engineer. The
allowable tolerances for the finished grade of the top of subgrade are as follows:

(1) When bituminous concrete or bituminous concrete base is to directly

be placed on the subgrade, the finished top of subgrade at any point shall not vary
more than one (1) centimeter above or below the grade established by the Engineer.

(2) When subbase or base material (other than bituminous concrete base)
is to be placed on the subgrade, the finished top of subgrade at any point shall not
vary more than two (2) centimeters above or below the grade established by the
Engineer.

2.07.5.5 Lime. The lime shall conform to the gradation and quality requirements in
Paragraph 2.07.3.1, "Lime," in these General Specifications based upon Certificates
of Compliance delivered with each load of lime.

2.07.5.6 Acceptance. Lime treated subgrade construction including classification,

maximum particle size, California Bearing Ratio, lime, and finishing tolerances and
requirements shall be accepted under Section 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested
Conformance," in these General Specifications.

Lime shall be accepted under Subsection 1.08.3, "Certification of

Compliance," in these General Specifications.

Compaction and thickness will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5,

"Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor
(Value of Work)," in two (2) stages as follows: The first stage shall be the selection of
the pay factor for the quality of the lime treated subgrade relating to Compaction.
The second stage involves the selection of a quantity pay factor based on the
thickness of the lime treated subgrade. The reduced thickness pay factor for the
lower courses of multiple layer courses will be applied provisionally based on the

79
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

results of the depths of the holes dug in the lower layers. Additional holes will be
dug in the total depth of all lime treated subgrade layers within the lot represented by
lower layer reduced thickness pay factors. If the total thickness depths show that the
increased upper level layer thickness has resulted in total thickness acceptability, the
lower level layer reduced thickness pay factor will be adjusted accordingly. The
second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be applied to all the individual course
lots in addition to the first stage quality pay factor.

2.07.6 Method of Measurement. The accepted lime treated subgrade shall be

measured in cubic meters based on dimensions shown on the plans or as ordered
by the Engineer. The amount of Lime incorporated into the measured and accepted
quantity of lime treated subgrade shall be measured in tons. No measurement shall
be made for materials placed outside authorized limits.

2.07.7 Payment. Lime treated subgrade shall be paid for at the contract unit price(s)
per cubic meter for Lime Treated Subgrade and per ton for Lime as listed in the
Bill of Quantities.

Such payment shall be full compensation for furnishing materials, labor,

equipment, tools and all incidentals necessary for the proper completion of the work
as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General
Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

20701 Lime Treated Subgrade Cubic Meter

80
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 2.08 - CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE

2.08.1 Description. This work shall consist of preparing roadbed for cement
treatment, furnishing and applying cement and water, mixing cement and water with
in-place material, and spreading, compacting, sealing and curing the mixture within
the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the project plans and as specified.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Cement Treated Subgrade
Cement

2.08.2 Materials.

2.08.2.1 In-Place Material. In-place material on the roadbed shall be the native
material or embankment, free of plant growth and unsuitable materials, as unsuitable
materials are defined in Section 2.03, "Excavation," or in these General
Specifications.

2.08.2.2 Portland Cement. Portland Cement shall conform to the requirements of

Paragraph 5.01.2.1 "Portland Cement" in these General Specifications.

2.08.2.3 Water. Water used for mixing shall conform to the requirements for
"Water" in Paragraph 5.01.2.3 in these General Specifications.

2.08.2.4 Bituminous Cure Seal. Bituminous material for the curing seal shall be
emulsified bituminous materials, grades SS-1 h or CSS-1 h, conforming to the
requirements of Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in these General
Specifications.

2.08.2.5 Chemical Admixtures. Set retarders shall conform to the requirements

specified in ASTM C 494.

2.08.3 Mix Design. The applicable design parameters will be specified in the
special specifications. The Contractor shall provide a mix design having proportions
of materials that, when mixed, spread and compacted as specified, the cement
treated subgrade will conform to all specified requirements. When design
parameters are not specified in the special specifications, the Contractor shall
prepare a mix design with three and one-half percent (31/2%) percent cement by dry
weight of aggregate.

At least thirty (30) days prior to the production of the mixture, the Contractor
shall submit, for the Engineers approval, design mix information as follows:

1. Source of each material to be used to produce the cement treated mixture.

2. Recommended percent cement and water contents.

3. Density of the mixture at the recommended cement and water content based
on MRDTM 212.

81
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

4. Retarder or other additive used in the design mix and proportions of each
based on the dry weight of aggregate.

In addition, thirty (30) days prior to the production of mixture, the Contractor shall
furnish the Engineer the following quantities of materials proposed for use in the
mixture:

1. Aggregate One hundred (100) kilograms

2. Cement Twenty (20) kilograms

3. Retarder or other additive, if used three (3) kilograms

Should a change in materials be made by the Contractor or should verification

testing performed by the Engineer indicate that the recommended mix design is
unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall immediately develop a new mix design and
furnish the above information prior to beginning or continuing production of cement
treated mixture.

2.08.4 Weather Limitations. Cement treated material shall not be mixed or placed
during rain, dust or sand storms, unless approved by the Engineer. When the air
temperature is below five (5) degrees Celsius or expected to reach thirty- five (35)
degrees Celsius or higher, the Contractor shall schedule his operations to place and
compact the cement treated base.

2.08.5 Traffic Control. The Contractor shall take effective action to prevent traffic,
other than necessary construction equipment, from using the cement treated
subgrade until approved by the Engineer. When public traffic uses the roadway on
which cement treated subgrade is being constructed, the Contractor shall provide all
necessary signs, barricades, flagmen and pilot cars needed to allow traffic to
proceed with minimum interruption.

2.08.6 Equipment. Equipment shall conform to the general requirements Section

2.06, "Lime Treated Subgrade," except that mixing and spreading equipment shall
be suitable for use with cement.

2.08.7 Construction.

2.08.7.1 Preparation of Roadbed. In-place material to be cement treated shall be

scarified and thoroughly broken up for the full width of treatment. The material to be
treated shall contain no rocks larger than eight (8) centimeters in any dimension.
When rocks larger than eight (8) centimeters are present in the subgrade to be
treated, the Contractor shall remove the larger rock from the full depth to be cement
treated by picking, breaking to size, raking, screening or any other means which will
result in removal of oversize rock. The depth to be scarified shall be such that when
compacted, the treated subgrade will conform to the specified thickness within plus
or minus two (± 2) centimeters.

If the mixing operation requires that the material be windrowed, the windrows
shall be of uniform cross-section and limited to a size that will allow it to all pass

82
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

through the mixer in each operation. Otherwise the material shall be shaped to the
required line, grade, and cross-section before applying the cement and mixing.

2.08.7.2 Application of the Cement. Cement shall be added to the material to be

treated at the rate specified or as determined from the approved design mix. The
actual application rate shall not vary by more than ten percent (10%) of the specified
rate. The equipment used to distribute the cement shall be as approved by the
Engineer and it shall be capable of uniformly distributing the required amount of
cement for the full width of the pass.

The area upon which cement is spread shall be limited to that which the
contractor can thoroughly mix and compact by the end of each one-half (1/2) work
shift.

2.08.7.3 Mixing. Mixing shall be accomplished with a traveling pugmill or a single

or multiple transverse shaft mixer as approved by the Engineer. Mixers shall be
equipped with a system capable of introducing water at a controlled rate during
mixing and be capable of producing a completed mixture with a uniform moisture
content. The moisture content of the completed mixture shall be within two
percentage points of the optimum moisture content of the material being treated as
determined by MRDTM 212.

The in-place material and cement shall be mixed such that cement balls are
prevented from forming when water is added. Mixing shall be continued until the
mixture is uniform and at the required moisture content.

2.08.7.4 Compacting and Finishing. The thickness of a compacted layer shall

not exceed twenty (20) centimeters. The moisture content shall be maintained as
necessary to achieve specified compaction. Unless specified otherwise, the cement
treated material shall be compacted to a density of not less ninety-five percent (95%)
percent of the maximum density as determined by MRDTM 212.

Initial compaction shall be accomplished with a sheepsfoot or grid rollers.

Final compaction shall be accomplished with steel wheel or pneumatic tired rollers.
Areas inaccessible to rollers shall be compacted to the required density as approved
by the Engineer.

The cement treated subgrade shall be finished to a reasonably smooth and ,

uniform surface and in reasonably close conformity to the lines, grades, dimensions,
and cross-sections shown on the project plans or established by the Engineer. The
surface of the treated subgrade shall not vary by more than two (2) centimeters
above or below the specified grade.

Damage to cement treated subgrade which occurs as a result of the

Contractors activities shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor at his expense.

83
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.08.7.5 Operation Time Requirement. The Contractor shall furnish and operate
sufficient equipment or limit the area of work in progress so that not more than one
(1) hour shall elapse between the time water is added to the in-place materials and
cement and the time to Completion of the final compaction after trimming, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.

2.08.8 Curing. The surface of cement treated subgrade shall be kept moist until a
curing seal is applied. Bituminous curing seal shall be applied uniformly at a rate
between one-half (0.50) and one (1.0) liter per square meter of surface. The curing
seal shall be applied on the same day that final compaction is performed and as
soon after the final compaction as is practicable.

After the curing seal has been applied, the cement treated subgrade shall be
kept free from traffic for a period of at least three (3) days.

Any damage to the curing seal or the cement treated subgrade shall be
promptly repaired by the contractor, at his expense and as directed by the Engineer,
until a subsequent subbase, base, or pavement course is placed over the cement
treated subgrade.

2.08.9 Quality Assurance Procedures. Cement treated subgrade shall be

accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications. The lot shall
consist of five thousand (5,000) square meters constructed in accordance with the lift
thickness requirements specified in Subsection 2.05.4, "Lift Thickness and
Compaction Requirements," in these General Specifications. The cement treated
subgrade shall be sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08,
"Acceptance," in these General Specifications. The Engineer may, during the
beginning of placement of cement treated subgrade, at times when test results
indicate erratic characteristics and at any other time, reduce the lot size to sections
of embankment with similar quality characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation
and modification or replacement of low-quality materials with materials of acceptable
quality to maintain the overall strength of the subgrade.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality

assurance sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be
recorded by roadway, at embankment height, centerline station (kilometer) and
offset. Quality assurance testing for each lot shall include:

1. Thickness
2. Compaction
3. Classification Maximum Particle Size and CBR
4. Subgrade Finishing Tolerances and Requirements
5. Cement
6. Acceptance

84
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.08.9.1 Thickness. The thickness of each lot of cement treated subgrade

complete as placed and compacted, shall be measured from test holes obtained at a
minimum five (5) random locations within the lot. The thickness of each hole shall be
determined after it is determined that the compacted density is acceptable. The
average of the test hole thickness shall be reported as the thickness of the lot.

A lot shall be accepted when the average total thickness is not less than the
Plan thickness.

Any lot of cement treated subgrade with an average thickness less than the
Plan thickness but resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance
and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications
may be accepted on the basis of reduced payment if requested in writing by the
Contractor. Otherwise the lot thickness shall be increased as specified in the
following paragraph.

When the average thickness of a lot of subgrade is less than the plan
thickness by an amount resulting in a reduced pay factor below 0.75 the Contractor,
at his own expense, shall place and remix additional subgrade material with the
original subgrade material and recompact before new test holes are dug.

2.08.9.2 Compaction. Cement treated subgrade materials shall be compacted to

the percent of maximum density detailed in Subsection 2.08.4, "Lift Thickness and
Compaction Requirements," in these General Specifications.

The compacted density for each layer of cement treated subgrade shall be
determined by the sand cone method, MRDTM 215, or by nuclear method, MRDTM
218, using full depth penetration, at the option of the Engineer.

When the sand cone method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at a minimum of five (5) randomly selected
locations in each lot.

When the nuclear method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the test shall be made at a minimum of eight (8) randomly selected
locations in each lot. Three (3) nuclear gauge readings shall be made at each test
location within a radius of two (2) meters. The three (3) readings shall be averaged
and the average considered to be the density for that test location.

Percent compaction shall be computed by comparing the average actual in

place compacted density from the nuclear gauge or sand cone test results with the
maximum density determined by MRDTM 212. For example, MRDTM 212 maximum
density shall be determined from samples of embankment at a sampling frequency
of one (1) test per three (3) lots. The maximum density used for determining percent
compaction shall be the running average for three (3) consecutive tests.

Any lot of cement treated subgrade that has a percent relative compaction
below the minimum percent compaction specified in Subsection 2.05.4, "Lift
Thickness and Compaction Requirements," in these General Specifications, resulting

85
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher may be accepted on the basis of a reduced
payment if requested in writing by the Contractor. Otherwise the said lot shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Lots that have percent
relative compaction resulting in a reduced pay factor less than 0.75 shall be removed
and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

When requested, the cement treated subgrade lift may be accepted on the
basis of reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5,
"Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor
(Value of Work)," in these General Specifications.

2.08.9.3 Classification, Maximum Particle Size and CBR. Classification and

CBR including gradation, plastic limit and liquid limit will be sampled, tested, and
evaluated on the results of a minimum of one (1) test result per lot for the first three
(3) lots and then one (1) test result for every fifth lot when changes in the material
properties are suspected by the Contractor or the Engineer. Maximum particle size
shall be determined by screening the entire sample as received over a ten (1 0)
centimeter square screen. The weight retained on the ten (1 0) centimeter screen
shall be recorded.

A lot will be accepted when all the classifications and maximum particle size
tests representing that lot are as specified in Subsection 2.08.2 "Materials" in these
General Specifications.

2.08.9.4 Finishing Tolerances and Requirements. Quality Assurance measuring

or testing shall involve verification that the cement treated subgrade is constructed,
timely finished and trimmed in a neat, workmanlike manner to the lines, grades and
typical cross sections shown on the Plans or staked by the Engineer within the
following tolerances and deadlines:

1. Cement treated subgrade slopes shall be constructed in conformance

with the lines and grades established by the Engineer. The completed slopes shall
not vary more than one (1) centimeter from the designated slope measured at right
angles to the slope.

2. Finished Grade of Cement Treated Subgrade. The elevation of the top

of cement treated subgrade surface shall be checked under the supervision of the
Engineer. Each cross section shall be checked at each change in cross slope and
intermediate points as directed. Cross sections shall be established at maximum
intervals of twenty-five (25) meters with additional sections as directed by the
Engineer. The allowable tolerances for the finished grade of the top of subgrade are
as follows:

(1) When bituminous concrete or bituminous concrete base is to

directly be placed on the subgrade, the finished top of subgrade at any point shall
not vary more than one (1) centimeter above or below the grade established by the
Engineer.

(2) When subbase or base material (other than bituminous concrete

base) is to be placed on the subgrade, the finished top of subgrade at any point shall

86
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

not vary more than two (2) centimeters above or below the grade established by the
Engineer.

2.08.9.5 Cement. The cement and other miscellaneous materials shall conform to
the requirements in Subsection 2.08.2, "Materials," in these General Specifications
based upon Certificates of Compliance delivered with each shipment.

2.08.9.6 Acceptance. Cement treated subgrade construction including

classification, maximum particle size, California Bearing Ratio and finishing
tolerances and requirements shall be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured
or Tested Conformance," in these General Specifications.

Cement shall be accepted under Subsection 1.08.3, "Certification of

Compliance," in these General Specifications.

Compaction and thickness will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5,

"Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor
(Value of Work)," in two (2) stages as follows: The first stage shall be the selection of
the pay factor for the quality of the cement treated subgrade relating to compaction.
The second stage involves the selection of a quantity pay factor based on the
thickness of the cement treated subgrade. The reduced thickness pay factor for the
lower courses of multiple layer courses will be applied provisionally based on the
results of the depths of the holes dug in the lower layers. Additional holes will be
dug in the total depth of all cement treated subgrade layers within the lot represented
by lower layer reduced thickness pay factors. If the total thickness depths show that
the increased upper level layer thickness has resulted in total thickness acceptability,
the lower level layer reduced thickness pay factor will be adjusted accordingly. The
second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be applied to all the individual course
lots in addition to the first stage quality pay factor.

2.08.10 Method of Measurement. Cement treated subgrade will be measured by

the cubic meter, as placed and compacted to the specified thickness and within the
lines and grades shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The amount of
cement incorporated into the measured and accepted quantities of cement treated
subgrade shall be measured in tons. No measurement shall be made for material
placed outside authorized limits.

87
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.08.11 Payment. The accepted quantity of cement treated subgrade, measured as

provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for Cement
Treated Subgrade and per ton for Cement as listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Said price and payment shall cover and be full compensation for furnishing all
equipment, labor, materials, tools and incidentals necessary for the proper
completion of the cement treated subgrade as specified in Subsection 1.07.2,
"Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

20801 Cement Treated Subgrade Cubic Meter
20802 Cement Ton

88
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 2.09 - STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

2.09.1 Description. This work shall consist of all excavation for foundations for
bridges and other structures including reinforced concrete box culverts, headwalls,
wingwalls, energy dissipators, crib walls, sign supports and retaining walls. This
work shall include necessary bailing, drainage, pumping, sheeting, and the
necessary construction of cofferdams or c-ribs, and their subsequent removal and
placing of all necessary backfill. This work includes the disposal of all material
obtained from such excavation and backfilling with the suitable material to the level
of the original ground. It shall include the furnishing and placing of approved
foundation fill material to replace unsuitable material encountered below the
foundation elevation of structures.

Temporary Shoring and Cribbing shall consist of such shoring and cribbing
required to support roadways or other public or private structures within five (5)
meters of the excavation for the duration of the excavation operations.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Structural Excavation
Structural Excavation - Bridges
Structural Excavation - Other Structures
Temporary Shoring and Cribbing

The Contractor shall visit the site and evaluate the geological make-up of the
area for himself and base his bid prices solely on his own determination of geological
conditions. Variations in the actual volume or character of structural excavation
quantities shall not be a basis for a claim for additional money or revision of bid price
by the Contractor. No allowance will be made for the classification of materials
regardless of their physical properties.

2.09.2 Construction.

2.09.2.1 General. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a sufficient time in
advance of the beginning of any excavation for structures which constitute a pay
item in the Bill of Quantities so that the Engineer may observe the cross-sectional
elevations and measurements taken of the existing ground in the area of the
structure. Any materials removed or excavated before these measurements have
been taken and approved by the Engineer will not be paid for.

The Contractor shall minimize, to the extent possible, the length of time that
excavated areas are open. He shall be solely responsible for damages due to
weather, equipment, accidents, or other causes when excavation is left open.

In areas where the excavation is adjacent to public roads and walkways, the
Contractor shall erect all barricades, barriers, enclosed walkways, and warning signs
necessary to restrict the exposure of the public to the excavation. Special
precautions shall be taken in areas where children may play. The adequacy of all
such safety measures shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

89
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

The Contractor shall take necessary precautions, including cofferdams and

other shoring, to protect employees in the excavation and on the ground above. The
Engineer will not enter excavated areas to approve the foundation and further work
unless the area is considered safe.

2.09.2.2 Structural Excavation for Bridges. The foundations for bridges shall be
excavated according to the outlines of the footings as shown on the plans and shall
be of sufficient size to permit the placing of the full width and lengths of the footings
shown with full horizontal beds. Rounded or undercut corners and edges of footings
will not be permitted.

Borings and soil tests, including chloride and sulphate content if applicable,
made prior to execution of this work, were carried out for purposes of establishing
tentative soil conditions and bearing capacity at the locations of bridge foundations
for the sake of the bridge design. The Contractor shall be responsible to conduct his
own additional geotechnical investigations, as may be required, to verify the
subsurface soil conditions, in order to ensure safe foundations for the structures.
Such additional geotechnical investigations shall not be paid for directly but shall be
considered as subsidiary to the pay item of this section.

The excavation shall be carried to the elevation shown on the plans or as

established by the Engineer. Excavation depths for bridge footing foundations shall
be only as directed by the Engineer. Borings and soil tests, made during design, and
actual investigation of the completed foundation excavation will be used to determine
final depth. No concrete shall be placed prior to the approval by the Engineer of the
excavation pit. Excavation shall be carried to a depth so that the bottom of
excavation is approximately one hundred (100) millimeters above the formation level
of foundation (level of bottom of Blinding Concrete). No further excavation shall be
carried out until the Engineer has examined the excavation and certified that at the
level of excavation, the design bearing pressure stated in the drawings can safely be
attained. After permission to proceed with the excavation is given, the Contractor
shall excavate to the formation level and place the blinding concrete immediately. K
after excavation to formation level, the placing of blinding concrete is delayed
whereby the material at formation level becomes unsuitable, then additional
excavation and backfilling with concrete shall be carried out as directed by the
Engineer. If the depth of the additional excavation is less than five (500) millimeters,
the concrete used for the backfilling shall be the same class as the concrete
specified for the footing. If the depth of the additional excavation exceeds five
hundred (500) millimeters, the concrete used for the backfilling shall be either no
Fines Concrete or Cyclopean concrete in accordance with Section 5.01, "Portland
Cement Concrete," in these General Specifications. The plan dimensions of the
such additional excavation shall be increased to allow for the spreading of load from
the footing at forty-five (45) degrees in all directions to the formation. When
unsuitable material is encountered below the level specified for bridge footings, the
Contractor at the direction of the Engineer, shall excavate such unsuitable material
and backfill with concrete. The additional excavation and backfilling shall be as
described above in this paragraph.

90
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

No payment will be made for unauthorized overdepth and overwidth

excavation and the concrete backfill-shall be at the Contractors expense. Where
excavation to rock foundation is required, the excavation shall be done in such
manner as to allow the solid rock to be exposed and prepared in horizontal beds or
properly serrated for receiving the concrete. All loose and disintegrated rock and
thin strata shall be removed.

All blasting necessary in any one (1) pier or abutment shall be performed prior
to placing any concrete. Where rock is encountered in the toe wall excavation for
concrete box culverts or concrete headwalls for pipe culverts and the rock is such
quality that will prevent erosion, part of the toe wall may be eliminated in the rock
strata as directed, but the toe wall shall be keyed into the rock strata.

Where foundation piles are used, the excavation of each pit shall be
completed before the piles are driven. All the foundation piling shall be driven in any
pier abutment before concrete is placed in any column of that pier or abutment.

2.09.2.3 Structural Excavation for Culverts and Miscellaneous Structures.

Excavation for culverts and miscellaneous structures shall be performed to the limits
required for construction and to the depth required for bedding material or removal of
unsuitable material.

When unsuitable material is encountered below foundation elevation for

reinforced concrete box structures or pipe culverts, the Contractor, at the direction of
the Engineer, shall excavate such unsuitable material and replace with suitable and
stable backfill material. The foundation stabilization, including the degree of
instability of the existing material, necessary depth of excavation, and suitability of
the proposed backfill material, shall be approved by the Engineer prior to beginning
the excavation.

The foundation material supporting the bedding or structure shall be Class A-

1 a(O), A-1 -b(O), or A-2-4 material compacted to Type 95 compaction. If the natural
material does not meet the classification requirements, it shall be subexcavated a
depth of thirty (30) centimeters and replaced with material meeting the requirements
contained in Subsection 2.09.3, "Materials," in these General Specifications. Any
rock or hardened material within fifteen (1 5) centimeters of the bottom of the
structure shall be similarly subexcavated and replaced with material meeting the
classification requirements.

If no special bedding is required, the foundation for precast and prefabricated

culverts shall be shaped to the shape of the culvert, including all protrusions. The
shaping shall extend to twenty-five percent (25%) of the normal height of the culvert.

91
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.09.2.4 Foundation Pits. When no piles are used and structures are to rest on an
excavated surface other than rock, the following shall apply:

The Contractor may excavate in open pits when:

1. Worker safety is assured.

2. Footings can be placed in dry material away from flowing water.
3. The integrity of the structure and its surroundings, including existing
pavement is not reduced.

Care shall be taken during excavation to prevent disturbing the foundation. If

ground water is encountered during excavation and a concrete seal course is not to
be used, dewatering shall be commenced and shall proceed in advance of or
concurrently with further excavation. The foundation shall be free of water at the
time footing concrete is placed, and water control shall continue as necessary to
prevent damage to the work.

All dewatering shall be performed at the Contractors sole expense and shall
be considered as included in the contract unit price(s) for the facility being
constructed. The sides of excavations may be sloped as required by soil conditions
to stabilize the sides for safe working conditions. The quantities of excavation for
said sloping will not be measured for payment and backfilling shall be done with
suitable materials, approved by the Engineer, at the Contractors expense.

If suitable foundation material has been disturbed by the Contractors

operations, has been damaged by the water or has been removed for the
Contractors convenience in dewatering the foundation, the foundation shall be
restored by the Contractor at his expense, to a condition at least equal to the
undisturbed foundation as determined by the Engineer.

When undisturbed original material at the planned grade of the excavation

does not meet the foundation material requirements as defined in Section 2.09.3.2,
"Foundation Material" or in these General Specifications, the Engineer shall order
that the unsuitable material be removed and replaced with suitable material.

When footings or masonry are to rest upon rock, the rock shall be fully
uncovered and the surface thereof shall be removed to a depth sufficient to expose
sound rock. The rock shall be leveled to cut to steps and roughened. Seams shall
be grouted under pressure or treated as the Engineer may direct.

Where rock, in either ledge or boulder formation, or other unyielding material

is encountered in one (1) portion of foundation for a concrete box culvert and a
yielding material is encountered in an adjacent are of the foundation excavation for
the same box culvert, such unyielding material shall be removed for a minimum
depth of sixty (60) centimeters and backrilled with structure backfill.

92
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.09.2.5 Pile Foundations. When footings are to be supported on piles,

excavations shall be completed to the bottom of footings before any piles are drilled
or driven therein. When swell or subsidence results from driving piles, the
Contractor shall at his expense, excavate, or backfill with suitable material, the
footing area to the grade of the bottom of footing as shown on the plans. If material
under footings is such that it would mix into the concrete during placement or would
not support the weight of the fluid concrete, the Contractor shall, at his expense,
replace the material with suitable material, install soffit forms or otherwise provide a
suitable platform on which to cast the footing.

2.09.2.6 Cofferdams. All foundation excavation within five (5) meters of the
traveled way and two (2) meters or more in depth shall be shored, cribbed, or
protected by cofferdams. All other excavation shall be shored, cribbed or protected
by cofferdams except those that meet the requirements of Paragraph 2.09.2.4,
"Foundation Pits," in these General Specifications.

Cofferdams shall be used in all excavation that is under water or affected by

ground water. A cofferdam is any water tight enclosure, sealed at the bottom, that
surrounds the excavated area of a structure.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, not less than fourteen (14) days
in advance of beginning excavation requiring shoring, cribbing or cofferdams, plans
showing proposed methods and construction details of shoring, cribbing and
cofferdams. The Contractor shall not begin construction until the Engineer has
approved the plans. The Contractor shall remain responsible for satisfactory results.

Cofferdams shall be constructed in a manner capable of resisting earth and

water pressures without appreciable displacement. Cofferdams shall be sunk to a
depth that will prevent material from flowing into the excavation. A clear space of
sixty (60) centimeters shall be provided on all sides between the footing, as shown
on the plans, and the cofferdam. Cofferdams shall not be used as a form for
footings. Cofferdams may be used as a form for concrete seal courses. Bracing for
cofferdams and shoring shall not be encased in the concrete of the structure,

At locations where concrete seal courses are shown on the plans or when the
bottom of the foundation excavation is of porous material which will not, in the
opinion of the Engineer, permit the footing to be satisfactorily constructed, concrete
seal courses shall be placed. Concrete seal courses shall consist of concrete,
conforming to the requirements for Class B concrete in Section 5.01, "Portland
Cement Concrete," in these General Specifications, placed using underwater
placement techniques and of sufficient thickness, approved by the Engineer, to
permit the cofferdam to be pumped dry.

The Contractor shall furnish and operate sufficient dewatering pumps to keep
the cofferdam dry.

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the need for a concrete seal course is due to
improper construction of the cofferdam, he may order the reconstruction of the
cofferdam, or the placement of a concrete seal course at the Contractors expense.

93
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

After the concrete seal course has set, the cofferdam shall be cleared of water
and construction of the structure completed in the dry.

All materials used in the construction and bracing of shoring, cribbing and
cofferdams shall be removed to the natural bed of the waterway or one (1) meter
below finished ground line.

2.09.2.7 Scheduling Excavation for Structures. The Contractor shall so

schedule the work that no excavation will be left in an exposed condition for a period
greater than thirty (30) days unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If the
Contractor fails to meet this requirements, the Engineer will order the Contractor to
suspend further structural excavation until the Contractors progress enables him to
meet the requirement.

In areas where the excavation is adjacent to public roads and walkways, no

excavation shall be scheduled to be left in an exposed condition more than fourteen
(14) days unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall schedule roadway excavation and embankment work

and drainage work so that they complement each other. If the Contractors earth
work progress exceeds the progress of the drainage work to the point where the
roadway becomes a dam to cross drainage, the Engineer will order the Contractor to
open adequate waterways through the roadway at the locations where drainage
structures are to be installed. Any damage to the roadway caused by water passing
through these openings shall be repaired at the Contractors expense.

2.09.3 Materials.

2.09.3.1 General. When the foundation material under Structures other than
Bridges is of an unstable nature, the Engineer may direct in writing that the
foundation be improved by excavating below the required elevation, and backfilling
with gravel or crushed stone, slurry cement, combinations of stone and slurry cement
or other suitable material approved by the Engineer.

Completed structures shall be backfilled with material free from spongy or

vegetable substances and rock or broken concrete over eight (8) centimeters in the
greatest dimension. When pervious backfill is shown on the plans or specified,
backfill material shall conform to the requirements in this section. Slurry cement
backfill may be placed to backfill structures when requested by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer. No additional compensation shall be allowed when slurry
cement backfill is requested by the Contractor and placed in lieu of other acceptable
backfill material.

2.09.3.2 Foundation Material. Material excavated from the roadway, borrow pits,
structure foundation or produced by processing shall be used in preparing the
foundation for structures when it conforms to the following requirements:

1. Material classified by AASHTO M-145 as A-1-a(O), A-1-b(O) or A-2-4(0) and

no rock fragment larger than eight (8) centimeters.

94
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2. Aggregate subbase or base materials conforming to the requirements in

Sections 3.02, "Aggregate Subbases," and 3.03, "Aggregate Bases," in these
General Specifications.

3. Slurry Cement. When shown on the plans, specified in the Special

Specifications or requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, slurry
cement may be used in preparing the foundation for structures when it conforms to
the following requirements:

(1) Aggregate.
Percentage
Sieve Size Passing
62.5 mm (1 ½ inch) 100
50 mm (1 inch) 80-100
19 mm (% inch) 60-100
9.5 mm (3/a inch) 50-100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 35-70
0. 1 50 mm (No. 100) 5-20

(2) Cement. Cement shall be Portland cement.

(3) Water. Water shall be free from oils, salts or other impurities which
would have an adverse effect on the quality of the slurry cement
material.

(4) Proportions. Proportioning may be done by weight or volume. The

cement content shall not be less than one hundred ten (110)
kilograms per cubic meter. The water content shall be sufficient to
produce a fluid, workable mix that will flow and can be pumped
without segregation of the aggregate while being placed. Materials
for slurry cement shall be thoroughly machine mixed until cement
and water are dispersed throughout the material. Slurry cement
shall be placed within forty-five (45) minutes after mixing.

4. Portland Cement Concrete, all classes, specified in Section 5.01, "Portland

Cement Concrete," in these General Specifications.

2.09.3.3 Structural Backfill Material. Material excavated from the roadway,

borrow pits, structure foundation or produced by processing shall be used for
structure backfilling when it conforms to the following requirements:

1. Gravel, crushed stone or slurry cement conforming to the requirements

specified in Paragraph 2.09.3.2, "Foundation Treatment Material" in these General
Specifications.

2. No-fines or Cyclopean Concrete conforming to the requirements specified in

Section 5.01 "Portland Cement Concrete," in these General Specifications.

95
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

3. Concrete coarse aggregate as specified in Subparagraph 5.01-2.2.2, "Coarse

Aggregate" in these General Specifications.

4. When pervious backfill material is called for on the plans or specified in the
special specifications, gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock, natural sands,
manufactured sands or combinations thereof shall be used in backfilling structures
when said material conforms to the following requirements:

Percentage
Sieve Size Passing
62.5 mm (21/2 inch) 100
0.300 mm (No. 50) 0-100
0. 1 50 mm (No. 100) 0-8
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-4

Pervious material shall be uniformly graded within the specified range. At

locations where pervious backfill material will be exposed to erosion by wind or water
it shall be covered with at least one and one-half (1 +1/2) meters of material which
resists erosion by wind and water and is approved by the Engineer.

2.09.4 Backfilling Structures. The type of material used in bedding, filling and
backfilling shall conform with the details shown on the drawings or as contained in
Subsection 2.09.3 "Materials" and shall be considered subsidiary to structural
excavation and no additional payment will be made thereof. All earth material which
has loosened or collapsed into the excavation from adjacent ground, all trash, forms,
and loose rocks larger than twenty (20) centimeters in greatest dimension shall be
removed from the excavation before backfill begins.

Backfill material shall be placed in uniform layers and brought up

simultaneously on all sides of the structure or facility. The thickness of each layer
shall not exceed thirty (30) centimeters before compaction except that when
compaction is done by ponding and jetting said thickness shall not exceed one (1)
meter. Backfilling shall extend to the original ground or to the top elevation of any
embankment, in-place or to be placed.

Backfill material may be compacted by mechanical or pneumatic tamping

devices or backfill material may be placed as a slurry. Compaction equipment or
methods which will displace or cause damage to the structure shall not be used.

Structure backfill shall not be placed until the structure footings or other
portion of the structure or facility have been inspected by the Engineer and approved
for backfilling. No backfill material shall be deposited against the back of concrete
abutments, concrete retaining walls of the outside walls of cast-in-place concrete
structures until the concrete has attained a strength of not less than one hundred
eighty (180) kilograms per square centimeter in compression, or until the concrete
has been in place twenty eight (28) days, whichever occurs first.

Backfill at the inside of bridge wingwalls and abutments shall be placed before
curbs or sidewalks are constructed over the backfill and before railings on the
wingwalls are constructed.

96
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

Pervious backfill material shall be placed in layers along with and by the same
methods specified for structure backfill. Pervious material at one (1) location shall be
approximately the same grading.

Slurry cement backfill shall be placed in uniform horizontal layers not

exceeding one (1) meter in depth. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the
slurry shall be compacted with internal vibrators. Backfilling over or placing any
material over slurry cement shall not commence until four (4) hours after the slurry
cement backfill has been placed.

The cells formed by crib members of crib walls and the space between the
crib wall and the limits designated for foundation excavation, as shown on the plans
or specified in the special specifications, including any material being removed
outside said limits, shall be backfilled with material conforming to the following
gradations, quality and placement requirements:

1. Backfill placed for crib walls shall be of such character that it will not sift or
flow through openings in the wall.

2. Material classified by AASHTO M-145 as A-1-a(O), A-1-b(O) and A-2-4(0) and

no rock fragment larger than eight (8) centimeters.

3. Class A Aggregate Subbase or Base materials conforming to the

requirements in Sections 3.02, "Aggregate Subbases,' and 3.03, "Aggregate Bases"
in these General Specifications.

4. Backfilling shall progress simultaneously with the erection of the crib wall.
Backfill shall be so placed as to not disturb or damage the crib members, shall be
placed in uniform layers before compaction not exceeding thirty (30) centimeters
thickness and shall be compacted by hand tamping, mechanical compaction or other
means approved by the Engineer.

2.09.5 Compaction of Structural Backfill. Compaction of structural backfill by

ponding and jetting will be permitted when, as determined by the Engineer, the
backfill material is of such character that it will be self-draining when compacted and
that foundation materials will not soften or be otherwise damaged by the applied
water and no damage from hydrostatic pressure will result to the structure. Ponding
and jetting of the upper one and one-half (1 %) meters below finished grade will not
be permitted. The work shall be performed without damage to the structure and
embankment, and in such manner that water will not be impounded. Ponding and
jetting methods shall be supplemented by the use of vibratory or other compaction
equipment when necessary to obtain the required compaction.

Structural backfill shall be compacted to a dry density not less than ninety-five
percent (95%) of the maximum density determined from MRDTM 212 when
compactible material is used. When materials such as concrete coarse aggregate is
used, it shall be consolidated with two (2) passes of mechanical vibratory or plate
compaction equipment.

97
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

At locations where at least one and one-half (1 '1/2) meters of material

resistant to erosion caused by wind or water is placed to cover pervious material, the
cover material shall be compacted to a dry density not less than ninety-five percent
(95%) of the maximum density determined by MRDTM 212.

2.09.6 Quality Assurance Procedures. The Contractor shall sample and test
foundation treatment material, structure backfill materials, pervious backfill, concrete
seal course and all other materials covered by the specifications as necessary to
confirm the quality of materials entering the work. Density tests, when specified, will
be performed at the rate of one (1) per compacted lift. The Contractor shall furnish
the test results to the Engineer within twenty-four (24) hours after completion of the
test.

The Engineer reserves the right to request, at any time, duplicate samples be
obtained by the Contractor for check testing performed by the Engineer. The
Engineer reserves the right to enter the work at any time and sample materials
entering the work and perform density tests.

When a discrepancy occurs between test results provided by the Contractor

and those completed by the Engineer, work on the structure backfill shall cease until
the discrepancy has been clarified.

2.09.7 Disposal of Unsuitable and Surplus Excavation. Excavated materials

which are designated by the Engineer to be surplus or unsuitable for use in
backfilling structures or construction of embankment shall be disposed of as
specified in Subsection 2.03.4 "Disposal of Unsuitable and Surplus Materials" in
these General Specifications. No surplus or unsuitable materials shall be disposed
of in or along any stream, water way, lake or other area subject to periodic water flow
or storage.

2.09.8 Method of Measurement. Measurement of Structural Excavation Bridges -

will be limited to excavation for foundations of bridge piers and bridge abutments.

Measurement of Structural Excavation - Other Structures - will be limited to

footings or foundations for retaining walls, pipe culverts, box culverts including
inlet/outlet structures and toe walls associated with box culverts and floor slabs of
underpass structures. No measurement will be made of structural excavation for
pipe culvert wingwalls, headwalls and aprons, or for ducts and storm sewers,
catchbasins, pump houses, manholes and inlets regardless of the type of pipe or
duct used or the type of material through which the excavation is made.

Excavation shown on the plans or specified in the special specifications or

measured as Roadway Excavation - Channel and Ditch will not be measured as
Foundation Excavation.

No measurement will be made nor compensation allowed for removal and use
or disposal of material which may come into an excavation from outside designated
limits or for furnishing and placing backfill material in an excavation that is below or
outside designated limits.

98
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

The quantities for payment shall be determined from limits shown on the plans
or specified in these specifications or the special specifications.

Structural excavation shall be measured by the cubic meter of material

removed, computed by the average end area. Measurements shall be made by the
Contractor, in the presence of the Engineer, in a manner approved by the Engineer.
No measurement will be made for structural excavation outside the following limits.

The pay volume of structural excavation shall be that measured with a prism
with limiting planes of (1) the bottom of the foundation as shown on the plans or
otherwise specified by the Engineer, (2) the vertical planes shown on the plans or
otherwise specified by the Engineer and (3) the upper limits as follows:

1. Fill Areas. In fill areas, the original ground surface as recorded on approved
cross sections.

2. Cut Areas. In cut areas, such as roadway cut-sections, channel changes, and
stream channel cleanouts, the top of cut grade such as top of subgrade or flow line
of channel as shown in the plans or otherwise directed by the Engineer. The volume
of excavation in the roadway cuts, channel changes, and stream cleanouts shall be
measured and will be paid for as provided in Section 2.03, "Excavation," in these
General Specifications.

When no excavation dimension detail appears in the plans, the limits of

excavation shall be as follows:

3. Bridge Footings. Excavation from upper limit plane to the formation level- of
foundation shall be limited by vertical planes three hundred (300) millimeters outside
the actual footing dimensions in the plan. The formation level of foundation is
defined as the underside of the blinding concrete. The upper limit plane shall be the
lowest of the following:

The mean existing ground level over the plan area of the footing at the time
the Contractor is given full possession of Site or the mean level of the final ground
over the plan area of the footing where general excavation such as regrading or
landscaping of the area is required, or from the bottom of subgrade elevation above
that footing, only if the Contractor has not carried out the general excavation of the
area by the time he carried out the general excavation for the footing.

In cases of high water table due to any reasons, the Contractor shall carry out
the necessary technical and practical actions to construct the foundations properly.
This includes getting rid of water by pumping or constructing sheet piles to dry the pit
to enable concreting as per Engineer instruction. All these works are subsidiary to
contract items.

4. Box Culverts. Excavation from upper limit plane to the formation level of
foundation shall be limited by vertical planes three hundred (300) millimeters outside
the culvert dimensions in plan. The definitions of formation level and upper limit
planes shall be as defined in Sub-clause 3 of this clause. Excavations for toe walls

99
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

shall be limited to the actual depth of toe walls plus the blinding concrete and vertical
planes walls three hundred (300) millimeters outside the outer faces of the toe walls.

5. Pipe Culverts. Excavation from the bottom of the pipe bedding plane to the
bottom of the unsuitable foundation material excavation shall be limited by the pipe
trench width limits contained in Subsection 2.09.2, "General," in these General
Specifications.

6. Special Conditions. When the Contractor encounters special or unusual

conditions he shall notify the Engineer who may direct special structural excavation
limits where he deems them necessary. Any additional excavation because of
special conditions, performed by the Contractor without prior approval of the
Engineer, shall be at the Contractors expense and no subsequent measurement or
payment will be made.

When included in the Bill of Quantities, "Temporary Shoring and Cribbing

Structure" shall include all Work required by the plans and specifications for a
specific structure, completed and accepted by the Engineer, and maintained by the
Contractor for the duration of its need.

2.09.9 Payment. The amount of authorized, completed and accepted Work

measured as provided in the previous Subsection will be paid at the contract unit
price(s) per cubic meter for Structural Excavation - Bridges and Structural
Excavation - Other Structures as they may appear on the Bill of Quantities, which
price(s) shall be full compensation for all excavation, trimming, cleaning, foundation
adjustment, furnishing of backfill material, backfilling, compaction, water, and the
disposal of surplus materials and the furnishing of all equipment, tools, labor, and all
other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified in
Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

When included in the Bill of Quantities, "Temporary Shoring and Cribbing.

Structure," constructed, accepted, and maintained, based on the Plans and Special
Specifications, will be paid on a lump sum basis. If significant changes to the design
are ordered by the Engineer which changes the magnitude of the Temporary Shoring
and Cribbing, required for a specific structure, an equitable adjustment to the
contract unit price for that unit will be made. If no "Temporary Shoring and Cribbing
Structure" item is included in the Bill of Quantities, then this Work, if required, will be
considered subsidiary to other items of Work.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

20901 Structural Excavation Cubic Meter
2090101 Structural Excavation-Bridges Cubic Meter
2090102 Structural Excavation-Other Structures Cubic Meter
20902 Temporary Shoring and Cribbing, Structure Lump Sum

100
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 2.10 - TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

2.10.1 Description. This work shall consist of excavation of trenches for the
construction of pipe for drainage, water and sanitary sewer services or other facilities
shown on the plans as pipe, the construction or installation of all facilities necessary
to accomplish the work, all bailing, drainage, pumping necessary to keep the trench
free of standing or flowing water, sheeting, furnishing and placing bedding material,
and backfilling pipe and trench, all as shown on the plans and the special
specifications or as directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall visit the site and evaluate the geological make-up of the
area for himself and base his bid prices solely on his own determination of geological
conditions. Variations in the actual volume or character of structural excavation
quantities shall not be a basis for a claim for additional money or revision of bid price
by the Contractor. No allowance will be made for the classification of materials
regardless of their physical properties.

When unsuitable pipe foundation material is encountered below the bottom of

bedding elevation as determined by the Engineer, said unsuitable material shall be
removed to the depth directed by the Engineer and backfilled with suitable and
stable backfill material. It shall be replaced with suitable and stable backfill material
and shall be measured and paid for at the contract unit price for Unclassified
Structural Excavation - Other Structures.

2.10.2 Construction.

2.10.2.1 General. Pipe for drainage, water and sewer services, or other facilities
shown on the plans as pipe, shall be installed in trenches excavated into previously
constructed embankment or original ground.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of the beginning of any
trench excavation below the bottom of bedding that may constitute a pay item in the
Bill of Quantities so that the Engineer may observe the profile elevations and
measurements taken along the center line of the trench. Any materials removed or
excavated before these measurements have been taken and approved by the
Engineer will not be paid for.

Where pipe is to be placed in a new embankment, the embankment shall be

constructed as specified in Section 2.05, "Embankment," in these General
Specifications, to a minimum height sixty (60) centimeters above the outside
diameter of the pipe or subgrade surface elevation which is lowest, and for a
distance each side of the pipe location equal to at least ten (10) times the outside
diameter of the pipe.

Where pipe is installed in original ground, excavation shall be by open trench

unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified in the special specifications.

The Contractor may request the Engineer to approve construction by

tunneling or jacking any portion not so specified.

101
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

The trench within which the pipe is to be placed shall be excavated to the
widths shown on the plans. When widths are not shown on the plans the trench
shall be excavated such that the clearance from each side of the pipe will be as
follows:

1. Pipe up to eighteen (1 8) centimeters outside diameter - fifteen (15) centimeters.

2. Pipe and pipe arches from eighteen (1 8) centimeters to not more than one and
one-half (1.5) meters in outside diameter - thirty (30) centimeters.

3. Pipe and pipe arches greater than one and one-half (1.5) meters outside
diameter - sixty (60) centimeters.

Trenches greater than one and one-half (1 %) meters in depth shall be

excavated with sloping sides or shored and braced at the option of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, not less than seven (7) days prior to
beginning trench excavation greater than one and one-half (1 1/2) meters in depth,
detailed plans showing the design of side slopes, shoring or bracing proposed for
use. The Contractor shall not begin trench excavation which is greater than one and
one-half (1 1/2) meters in depth until the Engineer has approved the plans. The
Contractor shall remain responsible for satisfactory results.

Safe and suitable ladders which project at least sixty (60) centimeters above
the top of the trench shall be provided for all trenches greater than one and one-half
(1.5) meters in depth. One (1) ladder shall be installed in the trench for each thirty
(30) meters of open trench, or fraction thereof, and so located in the trench that
workmen need not move more than fifteen (1 5) meters to a ladder.

The bottom of the trench shall be graded according to the lines, slopes and
elevations shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and bedding material
placed and compacted. If the Engineer determines that the material in the bottom of
the trench is satisfactory for pipe bedding, placement of pipe bedding material will
not be required providing the existing material is loosened, regraded and compacted
to form a dense unyielding foundation.

2.10.2.2 Scheduling. The Contractor shall schedule roadway excavation,

embankment construction and installation of pipe for drainage so that they
complement each other. Embankment construction which interferes with, reduces or
prevents the flow of normal or necessary drainage shall not be allowed.
Trench excavation for culvert construction shall not be left in an exposed
condition for more than thirty (30) days unless approved by-the Engineer.

Trench excavation for construction of water and sewer services, subdrainage

systems other than culverts, electrical conduits and other ducts shall not be more
than two hundred ( 200) meters ahead of the pipe laying operations and shall be
backfilled or covered at the end of each day. Where cast-in-place pipe construction
is specified or elected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, the
allowable maximum length of open trench at any one (1) location shall be that which
is necessary to permit uninterrupted progress, but in no event, greater than five
hundred (500) meters.

102
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.10.2.3 Trench Excavation. The Contractor shall establish line and grade as
shown on the plans and profile the original ground or embankment as directed by the
Engineer.

The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of

whatever materials encountered to the depth indicated on the plans or specified or
ordered by the Engineer. Material excavated from trenches shall be piled on one (1)
side of and adjacent to the trench and maintained so that the toe of slope of the piled
material is at least sixty (60) centimeters from the edge of the trench. When material
excavated from a trench is piled in or adjacent to a traveled way, it shall be located
to cause a minimum of inconvenience to vehicle travel. The Contractor shall
minimize the length of time that trenches are open.

The Contractor shall exercise sound engineering and construction practices in

excavating the trench and maintaining it so that no damage will occur to any
foundation, structure, pole line, pipe line, traffic sign or signal structure, electric cable
or conduit, or other facility. No act, representation or instruction from the Engineer or
his representatives shall relieve the Contractor from liability for damages or costs
that result from trench excavation.

Care shall be taken not to excavate below the depth specified or ordered by
the Engineer, and excavation below that depth shall be backfilled with sand bedding
material at the Contractors expense.

When water is encountered during trench excavations, the Contractor shall

remove the water by bailing, pumping or other means necessary to permit
installation of the pipe facility in a trench without ponding or flowing water. The cost
of dewatering shall be considered as subsidiary to the pipe being installed.

2.10.2.4 Unsuitable Foundation Material. If in the opinion of the Engineer, it is

necessary to adjust, correct, relocate, or in any way change the trench line and
grade shown on the plans, such changes shall be made by the Contractor under the
terms of these specifications.

Where trench excavation exposes unsuitable foundation material below the

bottom of bedding excavation, as determined by the Engineer, said unsuitable
material shall be excavated to the depth directed by the Engineer and backfilled with
suitable and stable backfill materials meeting the requirements of Paragraph
2.08.3.3, "Foundation Materials," and compacted in accordance with Subsection
2.08.5, "Backfilling Structures," both in these General Specifications.

All unsuitable material shall be loaded directly into trucks and hauled to
disposal sites and disposed of as specified in Subsection 2.03.4, "Disposal of
Unsuitable and Surplus Materials" in these General Specifications.

103
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2.10.2.5 Precast Concrete Pipe Culverts. Culvert pipe shall be installed in

trenches excavated in a new or existing embankment in accordance with the lines
and grades shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer as specified in
Section 6.08, "Pipe Culverts," in these General Specifications.

Bedding for precast concrete pipe shall be as shown on the plans, specified in
the Special Specifications or specified in Subsection 2.10.3 "Bedding Materials" in
these General Specifications. The bedding material shall be placed in more than
one (1) layer. The first layer shall be at least twenty (20) centimeters thick as
bedding under the pipe in the bottom of the excavation. Subsequent trench backfill
layers, not more than twenty (20) centimeters thick, shall be placed around the pipe
and compacted.

When belled pipe are to be installed, the bedding shall be shaped to receive
the bell. All adjustments to line and grade shall be made by removing or filling with
bedding material and not by wedging or blocking.

Trench backfill material shall be deposited on compacted bedding material in

layers not exceeding twenty (20) centimeters loose thickness. Backfill material may
be placed around and over the pipe while joint mortar is still plastic. Should the joint
mortar become set before backfill material is placed around and over the pipe,
placement of bedding material shall not be commenced within sixteen (16) hours of
jointing the pipe. Placement and compaction of successive layers shall continue to
the top of the embankment or sixty (60) centimeters above the top of the pipe,
whichever is greater.

All layers of bedding material and trench backfill material shall be compacted
to a dry density not less than ninety percent (90%) of the maximum dry density
determined from MRDTM 212.

When soil cement bedding material is placed, the bedding material placed
below the springline of the pipe. The soil cement shall be compacted with internal
vibrators to form a dense mass.

A dike of impervious material at least one and one-half (1 "/2) meters in length
shall be placed and compacted near the intake and outlet ends of the culvert to
prevent piping.

2.10.2.6 Metal Pipe Culverts. Culvert pipe shall be installed in trenches

excavated in new or existing embankment in accordance with the lines and grades
shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer as specified in Section 6.08, "Pipe
Culverts," in these General Specifications.

Pipe bedding material and trench backfill material shall be furnished, placed
and compacted as specified in Paragraph 2.10.2.5, "Precast Concrete Pipe
Culverts," in these General Specifications.

104
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

A dike of impervious material at least one and one-half (1 %) meters in length

shall be placed and compacted near the intake and outlet ends of the culvert to
prevent piping.

2.10.2.7 Cast in Place Concrete Pipe. Nonreinforced cast in place concrete pipe
shall be cast monolithically in a prepared trench at the locations and in accordance
with the lines and grades shown on the plans.

The trench shall be excavated and shaped according to the details shown on
the plans and prepared to provide full, firm and uniform support over the bottom two
hundred ten (210) degrees of the pipe to be constructed.

The trench walls, from a point thirty (30) centimeters above the-tope of the
pipe, may be sloped as required by soil conditions to provide more stability in the
trench and safer working conditions.

Backfilling cast in place concrete pipe shall not begin until the concrete has
developed a compressive strength of at least one hundred fifty (1 50) kilograms per
square centimeter (kg/CM2).

The type of trench backfill material shall conform to the requirements of

Paragraph 2.09.3.3, "Structural Backfill Materials" in these General Specifications.

Placement and compaction of trench backfill material shall conform to the

requirements of Paragraph 2.10.2.5, "Precast Concrete Pipe Culverts," in these
General Specifications.

2.10.3 Bedding Materials.

2.10.3.1 Sand Bedding. Sand shall be free from clay or organic material, suitable
for the purpose intended, and shall be of such size that ninety (90) to one hundred
percent (1 00%) passes a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve and not more than five percent
(5%) passes a 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.

2.10.3.2 Soil Cement Bedding. When shown on the plans or specified in the
special specifications, soil cement bedding to be placed under pipe shall conform to
the following requirements:

1. Aggregate.

Percentage

Sieve Size Passing

37. 5 mm (1 '1/2 inch) 100
25 mm (1 inch) 80-100
19 mm ("A inch) 60-100
9.5 mm (% inch) 50-100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 35-70
0.075 mm (No. 200) 5-20

105
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

2. Cement. Cement shall be Portland Cement, Type I or II.

3. Water. Water shall be free of oils, salts or other impurities which would have
an adverse effect on the quality of the soil cement bedding material.

4. Proportions. Proportioning may be done by weight or volume. The cement

content shall not be less than one hundred sixty (160) kilograms per cubic meter.
The water content shall be sufficient to produce a fluid, workable mix that will flow
and can be pumped without segregation of the aggregate while being placed.
Materials for soil. cement bedding shall be thoroughly machine mixed until cement
and water are dispersed throughout the material. Soil cement bedding shall be
placed within forty-five (45) minutes after mixing.

Backfilling with earth on culverts set in soil cement bedding shall not
commence until eight (8) hours after the soil cement bedding has been placed.

2.10.4 Trench Backfill Materials. Materials excavated from the roadway, borrow
pits, foundations, trenches or produced by processing shall be used for pipe bedding
and trench backfilling when it conforms to the following requirements:

1. Material classified by AASHTO M-1 45 as A-1 -a(O), A-1 -b(O) and A-2-4(0)
and no rock fragment larger than six (6) centimeters.

2. Base material conforming to the requirements in Section 3.03, "Aggregate

Bases," in these General Specifications.

3. Slurry cement conforming to the requirements in Paragraph 2.09.3.2,

"Foundation Material," in these General Specifications.

4. Pervious Backfill conforming to the requirements in Paragraph 2.09.3.3,

"Structural Backfill Material," in these General Specifications.

5. Other materials used in embankments construction or structure backfill as

approved by the Engineer with no rock fragment larger than six (6) centimeters.

2.10.5 Quality Assurance Procedures. The Contractor shall sample trench

bedding and backfill materials and other items entering the work as specified or
required to assure that the items conform to special requirements. Density tests,
where specified, shall be performed at the rate of one (1) per compacted lift. The
results of sampling and testing shall be furnished to the Engineer within twenty four
(24) hours after completion of the testing.

The Engineer reserves the right to request, at any time, that the Contractor
obtain duplicate samples of materials for check testing performed by the Engineer.

The Engineer reserves the right to enter the work at any time and obtain
samples and perform density tests.

106
 MOC General Specifications – Novemb er 1998
Table of Contents

When a discrepancy occurs between the test results furnished by the

Contractor and results from tests completed by the Engineer, the work shall cease
until the discrepancy is clarified.

2.10.6 Method of Measurement. No measurement shall be made for clearing and

grubbing, removal of existing road improvements, protection of existing utilities and
services, trench excavation including dewatering, bedding of the pipe, and
compaction of bedding and backfill.

Removal of unsuitable foundation material as specified in Paragraph 2.10.2.4,

"Unsuitable Foundation Material," in these General Specifications and replacement
with pipe bedding material shall be measured in cubic meters. The horizontal limits
for measuring unsuitable material excavation will be the sides of the trench specified
in Paragraph 2.09.2.1, "General," in these General Specifications. Vertical distances
shall be the depth of additional excavation ordered by the Engineer.

2.10.7 Payment. No separate payment will be made for clearing and grubbing,
removal of existing road improvements and protection of existing utilities and
services, trench excavation and backfill within the lines and grades shown on the
plans, including dewatering and furnishing and placing pipe bedding and compaction
of bedding and trench backfill. The costs for such work shall be considered as
subsidiary to the work of constructing pipe facilities and all costs therefore shall be
included in the contract unit prices listed in the Bill of Quantities for the pipe facility
constructed.

Excavation of Unsuitable Foundation Material - Payment shall be made at the

contract unit price per cubic meter for Structural Excavation - Other Structures, for
the actual quantities measured by the Engineer, which price and payment shall be
full compensation for removing unsuitable material and replacing with suitable and
stable backfill material.

Said prices and payments shall be full compensation for furnishing labor,
equipment, materials, tools and all incidentals necessary for the completion of the
Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General
Specifications.

107
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

November 1998

PART THREE
AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
Table of Contents

PART THREE
AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART THREE: AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND BASE COURSESSECTION 3.01 -

PRODUCTION, HANDLING AND STOCKPILING AGGREGATES 1
3.01.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 1
3.01.2 MATERIALS .............................................................................................. 1
3.01.2.1 Sources ........................................................................................... 1
3.01.2.2 Definitions ........................................................................................ 1
3.01.3 PRODUCTION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. 2
3.01.3.1 Preparation of Site ........................................................................... 2
3.01.3.2 Production of Aggregates ................................................................ 2
3.01.3.3 Rejected Aggregates ....................................................................... 3
3.01.3.4 Surplus Screenings ......................................................................... 3
3.01.3.5 Site Cleanup .................................................................................... 3
3.01.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES .................................................. 3
3.01.4.1 Methods and Procedures. ............................................................... 3
3.01.4.2 Preliminary Testing .......................................................................... 4
3.01.4.3 Production Testing ........................................................................... 4
3.01.4.4 Acceptance Testing .......................................................................... 4
3.01.5 STOCKPILING AGGREGATES ................................................................ 4
3.01.5.1 Sites................................................................................................. 4
3.01.5.2 Preparation of Stockpile Site ........................................................... 4
3.01.5.3 Construction of Stockpiles ............................................................... 4
3.01.5.4 Removing Aggregate From Stockpiles ............................................ 5
3.01.5.5 Site Cleanup .................................................................................... 5
3.01.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................ 5
3.01.7 PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 5

SECTION 3.02 - AGGREGATE SUBBASES................................................................ 6

3.02.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 6
3.02.2 MATERIALS .............................................................................................. 6
3.02.3 PROPORTIONING AGGREGATE SUBBASE MIXTURES ....................... 7
3.02.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal ................................................................. 7
3.02.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula ...................................................... 8
3.02.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions.............................................................. 9
3.02.4 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................. 9
3.02.5 CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................................... 9
3.02.5.1 Contractor Quality Control Procedures. ........................................... 9
3.02.5.2 Surface Preparation ....................................................................... 10
3.02.5.3 Placing and Spreading .................................................................. 10
3.02.5.4 Compacting ................................................................................... 10
3.02.5.5 Finishing ........................................................................................ 12
3.02.5.6 Maintenance and Protection .......................................................... 12
3.02.5.7 Compaction Test Trials .................................................................. 12
3.02.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ................................................ 12
Table of Contents
3.02.6.1 Compaction ................................................................................... 13
3.02.6.2 Thickness ...................................................................................... 14
3.02.6.3 Aggregate Gradation, Sand Equivalent and Plasticity Index ......... 14
3.02.6.4 California Bearing Ratio and Abrasion ........................................... 15
3.02.6.5 Surface Tolerances ....................................................................... 15
3.02.6.6 Acceptance .................................................................................... 15
3.02.7 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT .............................................................. 16
3.02.8 PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 16

SECTION 3.03 - AGGREGATE BASES ..................................................................... 17

3.03.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 17
3.03.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................ 17
3.03.3 PROPORTIONING AGGREGATE BASE MIXES ............................. 19
3.03.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal ............................................................... 19
3.03.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula .................................................... 20
3.03.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions............................................................ 20
3.03.4 EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................... 21
3.03.5 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................... 21
3.03.5.1 Contractor Quality Control Procedures. ......................................... 21
3.03.5.2 Preparation and Maintenance ....................................................... 22
3.03.5.3 Mixing ............................................................................................ 22
3.03.5.4 Transporting .................................................................................. 22
3.03.5.5 Placing and Spreading .................................................................. 22
3.03.5.6 Compacting ................................................................................... 23
3.03.5.7 Finishing ........................................................................................ 24
3.03.5.8 Maintenance and Protection .......................................................... 24
3.03.5.9 Compaction Test Trials .................................................................. 25
3.03.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ................................................ 25
3.03.6.1 Compaction ................................................................................... 26
3.03.6.2 Thickness ...................................................................................... 26
3.03.6.3 Aggregate Gradation, Sand Equivalent and Plasticity Index ......... 27
3.03.6.4 California Bearing Ratio and Abrasion ........................................... 27
3.03.6.5 Surface Tolerances ....................................................................... 28
3.03.6.6 Acceptance .................................................................................... 28
3.03.7 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT .............................................................. 29
3.03.8 PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 29

SECTION 3.04 - CEMENT TREATED BASES ........................................................... 30

3.04.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 30
3.04.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................ 30
3.04.2.1 Portland Cement............................................................................ 30
3.04.2.2 Aggregate ...................................................................................... 30
3.04.2.3 Water ............................................................................................. 31
3.04.2.4 Flyash and Chemical Admixtures. ................................................. 31
3.04.2.5 Bituminous Curing Seal ................................................................. 31
3.04.3 MIX DESIGN............................................................................................ 31
3.04.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ....................................................................... 32
3.04.5 EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................... 32
3.04.6 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 32
Table of Contents
3.04.6.1 Surface Preparation ....................................................................... 32
3.04.6.2 Proportioning and Plant Mixing ...................................................... 33
3.04.6.3 Transporting and Spreading .......................................................... 34
3.04.6.4 Compacting and Finishing ............................................................. 35
3.04.6.5 Operation Time Requirement ........................................................ 35
3.04.6.6 Construction Joints ........................................................................ 36
3.04.7 CURING................................................................................................... 36
3.04.8 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES .......................... 36
3.04.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ................................................ 36
3.04.9.1 Compaction ................................................................................... 37
3.04.9.2 Thickness ...................................................................................... 37
3.04.9.3 Aggregate Gradation, Sand Equivalent and Plasticity Index ......... 38
3.04.9.4 California Bearing Ratio or Compressive Strength ........................ 39
3.04.9.5 Surface Tolerances ....................................................................... 39
3.04.9.6 Acceptance .................................................................................... 39
3.04.10 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................. 40
3.04.11 PAYMENT .............................................................................................. 40

SECTION 3.05 - SHOULDERS AND LAYBYS ........................................................... 41

3.05.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 41
3.05.2 EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................... 41
3.05.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 41
3.05.3.1 General................................................................................... 41
3.05.3.2 Earth Shoulders and Laybys ......................................................... 42
3.05.3.3 Aggregate Shoulders and Laybys ................................................. 42
3.05.3.4 Bituminous Base Shoulders and Laybys ....................................... 42
3.05.3.5 Bituminous Wearing for Shoulders and Laybys ............................. 42
3.05.4 SHOULDERING AND DELINEATION ..................................................... 42
3.05.5 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS........................................................... 42
3.05.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT .............................................................. 43
3.05.7 PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 43
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

PART THREE: AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

SECTION 3.01 - PRODUCTION, HANDLING AND STOCKPILING AGGREGATES

3.01.1 DESCRIPTION. This work consists of producing, handling and stockpiling

crushed and screened aggregates including pit run aggregates of the kind, quality and
grading specified for all types of materials to be used in road and bridge and related
construction.

Requirements set forth herein shall apply whether the source be ledge rock, talus,
gravel, sand, or a combination thereof.

3.01.2 MATERIALS.

3.01.2.1 Sources. Materials sources may be shown on the plans, described in the
special specifications, or established by the Contractor after approval by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, not less than thirty (30) days prior to the
scheduled date for beginning crushing operations, information on the source of
aggregates, the method of production to be employed, types and capacity of equipment
to be used and a schedule showing rates of production for the several types of
aggregate to be produced.

Whether or not the materials sources are shown on the plans, specified in the
special specifications, or established by the Contractor after approval by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall determine for himself the types and numbers of equipment and
extent of work needed to remove overburden and produce the volumes of aggregates
required for the work within the contract time, and produce aggregates having the
fracture, gradation and quality conforming to the specifications.

The Engineer may require procurement of aggregate from any portion of a source
and may reject portions of the source as being unacceptable.

3.01.2.2 Definitions.

1. Coarse aggregate consists of particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.

2. Fine aggregate consists of particles passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.

3. Crushed stone consists of rock and stone fragments or gravel having one (1)
or more mechanically fractured faces. Every fractured face shall have a minimum
dimension from edge to edge across the fractured face which is not less than one-third
(1/3) the minimum dimension of the aggregate particle.

4. Gravel consists of uncrushed aggregate particles passing a seventy-five (75)

millimeter (3-inch) sieve and retained on a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.

1
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
5. Sand consists of aggregate particles passing a 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve and
retained on a 0.075 millimeter (No. 200) sieve and may be naturally occurring,
manufactured or combinations thereof.

6. Material passing a 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve may be referred to as silt or clay
or dust depending on other characteristics.

3.01.3 PRODUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

3.01.3.1 Preparation of Site. The portion of the quarry or pit site to be used shall
be cleared and grubbed as specified in Section 2.01, "Clearing and Grubbing" in these
General Specifications.

When clearing and grubbing is completed, all surface materials which are
unsatisfactory for the kind of aggregate to be produced shall be stripped and removed.
Materials from clearing, grubbing and stripping which are removed as unsatisfactory
for producing specified aggregates shall be disposed of at locations not visible from the
roadway, in a manner that precludes erosion by wind or water and the form and
contours of the finished disposal area blends with adjacent terrain.

The costs involved in preparing the site, clearing, grubbing, stripping and removing
overburden and other operations shall be incidental to the production of aggregate and
shall be included by the Contractor in the contract unit price for the specific aggregate
produced.

3.01.3.2 Production of Aggregates. The Contractor shall, as a minimum, utilize

all stone, rock fragments or boulders occurring in the source, up to and including those
measuring four hundred and fifty (450) millimeters in greatest dimension, in the
manufacture of crushed aggregates. The Contractor, at his option, may use stone and
boulders larger than four hundred and fifty (450) millimeters in greatest dimension.

When the percent fracture and other requirements cannot be obtained by using the
natural material, portions of the material may be rejected to the extent necessary to
produce aggregates conforming to the requirements of the specifications.

Failure to include an aggregate scalping and rejection requirement in the

specifications for any type of aggregate shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for scalping and rejection of portions of the materials if such become
necessary to produce aggregates conforming to the requirements of the specifications.

When scalping over a screen of specified size is required in the special

specifications, the scalping screen shall be of such size and capacity that enough of the
fine material will be removed to produce aggregates conforming to the requirements of
the specifications.

Rejected materials may be used in other portions of the work and locations when it
conforms to the specified requirements for said other portions and locations.

2
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
Surplus screenings accumulated during crushing and screening of specified
aggregates shall be kept separate from materials rejected during scalping operations.

Washing of coarse and fine aggregates shall be performed as specified in the

special specifications or as may be necessary to produce aggregates free from clay,
loam, alkali, vegetable and other deleterious material.

Washing and reclaiming of rejected material and subsequent addition to any finished
aggregate shall not be allowed unless authorized in writing by the Engineer.
When producing screened gravel or sand materials, the Contractor shall remove all
oversize material by screening at the source. Operations at the source shall be such
that the grading of aggregates in each hauling unit is reasonably uniform within
tolerances that are specified for individual materials. The Contractor shall use the most
suitable materials available at the source. He shall move his loading equipment as
many times as may be necessary to fulfill these requirements.

3.01.3.3 Rejected Aggregates. All rejected materials unsatisfactory for use in

other portions of the work and locations, shall be disposed of as specified in Paragraph
3.01.3.1, "Preparation of Site" in these General Specifications.

3.01.3.4 Surplus Screenings. Surplus screenings accumulated during the

production of the specified aggregates at material sources established by the
Contractor shall remain the property of the Contractor.

Surplus screenings accumulated during the production of the specified aggregates

at materials sources shown on the plans or described in the special specifications and
furnished by the Ministry shall be stockpiled at the source and become the property of
the Ministry.

The stockpile area shall be prepared and constructed as specified in Subsection

3.01.5, "Stockpiling Aggregates” in these General Specifications. All costs incurred in
producing, hauling and stockpiling the surplus screenings shall be incidental to the
production of the specified aggregates and shall be included by the Contractor in the
contract unit prices for said aggregates.

3.01.3.5 Site Cleanup. Upon completion of the Contractor's operations at any

source, the quarry or pit shall be cleared of rubbish, equipment, temporary structures
and other items brought to the site by the Contractor. The site shall be left in a neat
and presentable condition. When the special specifications require that aggregate
sources be reclaimed in accordance with an approved reclamation plan, the Contractor
shall comply with such approved reclamation plan.

3.01.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES

3.01.4.1 Methods and Procedures. All aggregate testing shall be performed in

accordance with methods and procedures described in the specifications and Materials
Manual publications issued by the Ministry of Communications, Materials and Research
Department.

3
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
3.01.4.2 Preliminary Testing. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all
results of testing as may be necessary to confirm that the source of materials,
equipment and production methods to be employed by the Contractor will produce
aggregates conforming to the requirements of the specifications. No installation of
equipment or production shall start at any materials source until the Engineer has
approved the source, and the dimensions of the area to be excavated. The equipment
and methods proposed by the Contractor shall also be approved by the Engineer.

The approval of the Engineer shall not be construed as final acceptance of the
aggregate to be produced.

Representative samples of materials may be obtained by the Contractor and, when

requested, duplicate samples shall be furnished to the Engineer for testing and future
reference.

Testing may be accomplished in the Contractor's laboratory or a commercial

laboratory. The testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and performed at
his expense.

3.01.4.3 Production Testing. The Contractor shall arrange all testing necessary
to control specified aggregate fracture, gradation and quality during production as
specified in Paragraphs 3.02.5.1, 3.03.5.1 and 3.04.8 all entitled "Contractor Quality
Control Procedures" in these General Specifications. The results of such testing shall
be promptly delivered to the Engineer. Such test results are intended to be used to
guide the Contractor operations and shall not be used to infer that the aggregates being
produced are acceptable and in conformance to the specifications.

3.01.4.4 Acceptance Testing. The Engineer shall sample or supervise the

sampling testing and evaluation of aggregates furnished to the work as specified in
Subsections 3.02.6, 3.03.6 and 3.04.9 all entitled "Quality Assurance Procedures" in
these General Specifications.

3.01.5 STOCKPILING AGGREGATES

3.01.5.1 Sites. The site for constructing stockpiles shall be approved by the
Engineer and located in a manner that the stockpiled materials will not be contaminated
with other aggregates or altered by dust, dune sand or other natural or processed
material. Stockpiling on private property shall be permitted with the written consent of
the owner or lessee. The Engineer shall be afforded access to the stockpiled materials
at all times.

3.01.5.2 Preparation of Stockpile Site. Before placing aggregates on the

stockpile site, the site shall be cleared of vegetation, rocks and debris and the ground
leveled to a smooth, firm uniform surface.

3.01.5.3 Construction of Stockpiles. The stockpiles shall be constructed on the

prepared site, shall be neat and regular in shape and not more than eight (8) meters in
height.

4
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
Stockpiles in excess of two hundred (200) cubic meters shall be built up in layers not
more than one and one-half (1.5) meters in depth using methods and equipment
approved by the Engineer. Pushing aggregate into a stockpile using dozers will not be
permitted. Each layer shall be completed over the entire area of the pile before
depositing aggregate in the succeeding layer. Any method of placing aggregate in a
stockpile which, in the opinion of the Engineer, results in segregation, breaks, degrades
or otherwise damages the aggregate will not be permitted.

Stockpiles of different kinds or sizes of aggregate shall be separated by space or

suitable walls or partitions to prevent mixing. Aggregate shall not be stockpiled where
vehicles will run over or through the piles and cause foreign material to become mixed
with the stockpiled aggregate.

3.01.5.4 Removing Aggregate From Stockpiles. Aggregate shall be removed

from the stockpiles using equipment and methods approved by the Engineer and in a
manner that precludes segregation of particle sizes or adulteration with underlying or
adjacent soil or foreign material.

When removing aggregate from stockpiles, the removal equipment shall be operated
in such a manner as to face-load from the floor to the top of the stockpile to obtain
maximum uniformity of aggregate.

The Contractor shall remove only such aggregate quantities as are necessary to
complete work under the contract.

3.01.5.5 Site Cleanup. If a surplus remains in the stockpile, the Contractor shall
leave said surplus in neat, regular shaped piles, free of foreign matter and equipment.

3.01.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. No measurement will be made for any work

or aggregate produced under this section.

3.01.7 PAYMENT. Full compensation for performing all of the work specified in this
section shall be considered as subsidiary to other items of work appearing in the Bill of
Quantities unless otherwise provided for in the Special Specifications and listed in the
Bill of Quantities.

5
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 3.02 - AGGREGATE SUBBASES

3.02.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of furnishing, spreading and

compacting aggregate subbases to the lines and elevations shown on the plans as
specified in these General Specifications and the Special Specifications.

Aggregate subbases will be designated as Aggregate Subbase Course or Aggregate

Subbase Course, Grading ___. The grading(s) of aggregate subbase to be furnished
shall be according to the item(s) shown in the Plans or Special Specifications and listed
in the Bill of Quantities. If the grading of aggregate subbase is not specified, aggregate
subbase course shall be furnished meeting one of the gradations listed in Table 3.02-1
as designated by the Engineer. The designation of the appropriate Grading shall be
such that the maximum size of aggregate will not exceed two thirds (2/3) of the
thickness of the subbase course layer to be constructed.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Aggregate Subbase Course
Aggregate Subbase Course, Grading ___

3.02.2 MATERIALS. Aggregate used for aggregate subbase shall be free from
vegetation matter and other deleterious substances and, when compacted under
watering and rolling, form a firm, stable subbase. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed
stone, crushed slag, or crushed gravel. Fine aggregate, material passing the 4.75 mm
(No. 14) sieve, shall consist of natural or crushed sand and fine material particles.

The Contractor shall furnish, produce, stockpile, blend and mix all necessary
materials using such equipment and procedures as will produce specified aggregate
subbase. Aggregate shall conform to one of the following grading and quality
requirements on the road bed after all blending and mixing and spreading and before
compacting:
TABLE 3.02-1
AGGREGATE SUBBASES GRADATION REQUIREMENTS - MTDTM 204

Sieve Sizes Grading I Grading II

62.5 mm (2 inch) 100

50 mm (2 inch) 90-100 100

37.5 mm (1 inch) - 90-100

25 mm (1 inch) - 55-85

19 mm (3/4 inch) - 50-80

9.5 mm ( inch) - 40-70

4.75 mm (No. 4) 35-70 30-60

2.54 mm (No. 10) - 20-50

0.425 mm (No. 40) - 10-30

0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-15 0-15

6
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Sand Equivalent (MRDTM 313) 25 Min.
Plasticity Index (MRDTM 208) 6 Max.
Abrasion Loss (MRDTM 309) 50 Max.
California Bearing Ratio (CBR) 50 Min.
(MRDTM 213)

Aggregate for Grading III aggregate subbase shall conform to the requirements
specified in the Special Specifications.

3.02.3 PROPORTIONING AGGREGATE SUBBASE MIXTURES.

3.02.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal. A proposed Job Mix Formula (JMF) shall be
formulated by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. The JMF
shall be prepared by the Contractor in precise compliance with procedures and
requirements set forth in the Materials and Research Department Manual of Materials
and Tests and all current letters issued by the Ministry of Communications.

The Contractor shall select his sources of aggregate and, after sufficient quantities
have been stockpiled or are available for use , obtain representative samples of the
materials and test to determine if they conform to the requirements of these
specifications. At least thirty (30) days before producing aggregate subbase mixtures,
the Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer detailed information for each mix
which he proposes to furnish. The information shall include, but not be limited to the
following:

1. The source and gradation of the aggregate for each mix to be furnished. If the
aggregate (coarse, fine, supplemental fine) is separated into two (2) or more sizes, the
information provided shall consist of gradations for all individual sizes, the proportions
of each individual size to be used, and the mathematically combined gradation for each
mix to be furnished. Such combined gradation shall meet the applicable grading
requirements shown in Subsection 3.03.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications
and show the percentage passing each of the specified sieve sizes.

2. Pertinent test data and a written certification that the aggregates to be furnished
conform to all quality requirements shown in Subsection 3.03.2, Materials in these
General Specifications.

3. The type of plant to be used for mixing each mix to be furnished.

4. The beginning date for producing aggregate subbase mixtures.

7
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
The Engineer shall be provided access to the materials sampling and testing
operations at all times. The combined aggregate, including mineral additives, shall
conform to the approved JMF grading within the following tolerances:
9.75 mm (3/8") and larger sieves, 11 percentage points
4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, 10 percentage points
2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve, 9 percentage points
0.300 mm (No. 50) sieve, 8 percentage points
0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, 8 percentage points

At the same time the above information is provided, the Contractor shall supply to
the Engineer fifty (50) kilogram samples of each individual aggregate size, when used,
ten (10) kilogram samples of mineral filler and chemical admixture, all representing the
materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish.

3.02.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula. The Engineer shall review the JMF to
determine that it contains all required information. If it does not contain all required
information, it shall be returned within seven (7) days to the Contractor for further action
and resubmission by the Contractor.

If the proposed JMF contains all required information but fails to meet all the
requirements specified, it shall not be accepted by the Engineer and will be returned to
the Contractor within fourteen (14) days. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to
the Engineer a new JMF conforming to the requirements specified and propose a new
date for beginning production.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all the requirements of the specifications, he shall order the Contractor to construct
a minimum two hundred (200) meter long field control strip. The Engineer shall
evaluate the control strip as to its constructability and compactability and conformance
to the laboratory tested JMF. Split samples of the aggregate subbase mix for and
components raw material along with the field laboratory test results are to be sent to the
Materials and Research Departments Central Laboratory for a one (1) point check and
documentation. If the Engineer is not satisfied with the results of the control strip, he
shall state his objections in writing and request a revised JMF and a new control strip.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all requirements of the specifications and the control strip results are acceptable, he
will issue written acceptance to the Contractor to begin producing the mixes proposed.

Production of aggregate subbase mixes shall not begin until the Engineer has given
written acceptance of the Job Mix Formula.

Acceptance of the JMF by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to produce aggregate subbase mixes conforming to all specified
requirements.

8
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
3.02.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions. The Contractor shall not alter his methods
of crushing, screening, blending, or stockpiling from that used to produce materials for
the approved JMF. Changes to the JMF will not be permitted without retesting and
resubmission of a proposed (revised) JMF in accordance with all the steps in Paragraph
3.02.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal" in these General Specifications. Significant
changes may include, but not be limited to, changes in the amount or type of materials
rejected or wasted, changes in the amount of materials crushed, reductions in the
amount of crushed fines, changes in the amount and type of mineral filler.

Should the Contractor change his source of aggregate, he shall furnish a new job
mix design proposal and samples of materials, as described in Paragraph 3.02.3.1, "Job
Mix Design Proposal" in these General Specifications, as determined by the Engineer
to be necessary, at least twenty-one (21) days before their intended use.

At any time after the JMF is approved the Contractor may submit a new JMF for
approval by the Engineer. If the revised JMF is approved it shall become the approved
JMF.

3.02.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment for
production, stockpiling and hauling aggregate, preparing the subgrade and placing,
compacting, finishing and maintaining the aggregate subbase according to the minimum
type and number outlined in the contractor's detailed Program of Work as approved by
the Engineer.

Blending and mixing aggregates and adjusting the moisture content as required for
compaction shall be performed in a central mixing plant or on the grade by means that
insure uniformity.

The blended and mixed aggregates shall be placed and spread to the width and
thickness specified.

3.02.5 CONSTRUCTION.

3.02.5.1 Contractor Quality Control Procedures. Testing to control the quality

of aggregate furnished for subbase shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Copies
of all test results shall be forwarded to the Engineer at the end of each working day.
The Engineer shall have access to the Contractor's testing laboratory at all times and
reserves the right to obtain samples of the materials at any point during construction.
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall obtain aggregate subbase
materials and prepare duplicate samples by quartering. One (1) sample shall be
delivered to the Engineer and the duplicate sample shall be tested by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall perform the following minimum types and number of tests:

1. Gradation, sand equivalent and plasticity index - One (1) test each per two
thousand (2000) cubic meters of aggregates produced but no less than one (1) test per
production day.

9
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
2. Abrasion Loss - One (1) test for the first, second and third five hundred (500)
cubic meters of aggregate produced and one (1) test for each twenty-five hundred
(2500) cubic meters thereafter.

3. CBR Value - One (1) test for each five thousand (5,000) cubic meters placed.

When test data indicate that the aggregate subbase does not conform to specified
requirements, the Contractor shall take effective action to correct his production
methods to assure that subbase aggregate will conform to all specified requirements.
Such action shall include halting production, changing the source of aggregate supply,
altering amount of aggregated scalped and rejected, increasing degree of crushing, and
revising blending and handling methods. Such material if already placed, shall be
removed and modified or replaced to produce material conforming to the specified
requirements.

3.02.5.2 Surface Preparation. The surface to receive aggregate subbase,

immediately prior to spreading aggregate subbase, shall conform to specified
compaction and elevation tolerances and shall be free of loose or extraneous material.

The Contractor shall correct, at his own expense, any deviation from specified
elevation and compaction in the surface to receive aggregate subbase.

When surfaces to receive aggregate subbase are lower than specified, the low areas
may be filled with aggregate subbase. The volume of aggregate subbase so placed
shall not be measured for payment under any item listed in the Bill of Quantities.

3.02.5.3 Placing and Spreading. Aggregate for subbase, immediately prior to

spreading, shall be uniform mixtures free from pockets and streaks of coarse or fine
material and shall be deposited on the subgrade in uniform layers or windrows using
approved equipment.

The layers or windrows of aggregate subbase shall be shaped to such thickness

that, after watering and compacting, the completed subbase layer shall conform to the
required width, grade and thickness within the tolerances specified in Paragraph
3.02.4.5, "Finishing" in these General Specifications.

The material shall be handled so as to avoid segregation. Segregated materials

shall be remixed until uniform. The water can either be added in the borrow pit or on
a mixing platform or on the grade.

Where the subbase thickness is twenty (20) centimeters or less, the aggregate
subbase may be spread and compacted in one (1) layer. Where the required thickness
is more than twenty (20) cm, the aggregate subbase shall be spread in two (2) or more
layers of approximately equal thickness.

3.02.5.4 Compacting. Each layer of subbase material, after being shaped to the
required lines and cross section, shall be compacted to a uniform density with no
individual test being less than ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum dry unit weight
determined from MRDTM 212. Each of lot of subbase material as described in

10
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
Subsection 3.02.6 "Quality Assurance Procedures" in these General Specifications shall
have a percent relative compaction of no less than ninety-nine percent (99%) of the
maximum dry unit weight determined from MRDTM 212. The subbase shall be watered
or dried as may be necessary to obtain a moisture content suitable for compaction.
Material which has dried prior to final compaction or which has dried and decompacted
subsequent to final compaction shall be watered and recompacted using equipment
and procedures approved by the Engineer. Should the Contractor be unable to return
the material to its original or specified condition with respect to compaction, thickness,
and surface tolerances, the Contractor shall remove the material and reconstruct the
course on a reapproved subgrade.

When there are delays in constructing the remaining pavement structure over a
granular course, the compaction of the granular course shall be reverified and deficient
areas corrected or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Such corrections or
replacement shall be at the Contractor's expense.

The Contractor shall plan the work and handle the various operations so that the
least amount of water will be lost by evaporation from uncompleted surfaces. If the
Contractor delays placing or succeeding layers of material to the extent that additional
water must be applied to prevent raveling or excessive drying, the application of such
water shall be at the Contractor's expense and will not be considered as the basis for
a claim for additional compensation.

The material shall be compacted by means of approved compaction equipment,

progressing gradually from the outside towards the center, with each succeeding pass
uniformly overlapping the previous pass. Rolling shall continue until the entire thickness
of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly compacted to the specified density. The final
rolling of the completed course shall be done with a self-propelled roller as approved
by the Engineer. Rolling shall be accompanied by sufficient blading, in a manner
approved by the Engineer, to insure a smooth surface, free from ruts or ridges and
having the proper section and crown. When additional water is required, it shall be
added in the amount and manner approved by the Engineer. Initial layers of material
must be constructed to a uniform grade and cross section and compacted by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to the delivery of materials for a
succeeding layer.

Prior to placing a succeeding layer of granular material, the surface of the

underlayer shall be made sufficiently moist, to insure bond between the layers. The
edges and edge slopes of the base course shall be bladed or otherwise dressed to
conform to the lines and dimensions shown on the plans, and present straight, neat and
workmanlike lines and slopes as free of loose material as practicable.

Any areas inaccessible to normal compaction equipment shall be compacted by

means of portable mechanical tampers until satisfactory compaction is obtained. When
the final layer is to be trimmed to final grade by an automatic grading machine, this
layer shall be constructed approximately one (1) to three (3) centimeters above grade,
so that the grading machine cuts continually. After the final pass of the grading
machine, the subbase shall be wetted and rolled.

11
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
3.02.5.5 Finishing. All subbase material shall be placed, trimmed and finished in
a neat and workmanlike manner in compliance with the lines, grades and typical cross
sections shown on the plans or staked by the Engineer within the tolerances listed in
Paragraph 3.02.6.5, "Surface Tolerances" in these General Specifications.

3.02.5.6 Maintenance and Protection. Following construction of the subbase

course, the compacted course shall be maintained by the Contractor at his expense.
The Contractor shall blade, broom, and otherwise maintain the course, keeping it free
from raveling and other defects that result in lost density until such time as the next
element of the pavement structure is placed. Water shall be applied at such times and
in such quantities as directed by the Engineer, and the Engineer shall have full authority
to require the suspension of all other work on the project to insure the proper
maintenance of previously compacted material.

The Engineer shall determine when the surface of the subbase is in the proper
condition to permit the placement of aggregate subbase course or the bituminous prime
and/or surfacing to be applied. The Contractor must continue to maintain the surface
of the base course, including the application of necessary water, at his expense until
such time as the bituminous prime or the subsequent layer is applied. Any additional
expense incurred by the Contractor because of delay in placing subsequent layers or
applying the bituminous prime when so permitted by the Engineer will not be considered
as the basis for a claim for additional compensation.

3.02.5.7 Compaction Test Trials. If directed by the Engineer, or requested by the

Contractor, prior to the commencement of his subbase compaction operations, the
Contractor shall construct compaction trial lengths, not to exceed one (1) kilometer.
The materials used in the trials shall be that approved for use as aggregate subbase
and the equipment used shall be that according to the Contractor's approved detailed
Program of Work.

The object of these trials is to determine the adequacy of the Contractor's

equipment, the loose depth measurements necessary to result in the specified
compacted layer depths, the field moisture content, and the relationship between the
number of compaction passes and the resulting density of the material.

The Contractor may proceed with aggregate subbase work only after the methods
and procedures established in the compaction trial has been approved by the Engineer.

3.02.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Aggregate subbase shall be

accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications, the lot size shall
be ten thousand (10,000) square meters for each layer constructed. The aggregate
subbase shall be sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08
"Acceptance of Work" in these General Specifications. The Engineer may, during the
beginning of placement of subbase, at times when test results indicate erratic
characteristics and at any other time, reduce the lot size to sections of subbase with
similar quality characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and modification or
replacement of low-quality materials with materials of acceptable quality to maintain the
overall strength of the pavement structure.

12
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and
testing for each lot shall include:

1. Compaction

2. Thickness

3. Aggregate Gradation, Sand Equivalent and Plastic Limit

4. California Beating Ratio and Abrasion

5. Surface Tolerances

3.02.6.1 Compaction. The compacted density for each layer of aggregate subbase
shall be determined by the sand cone method, MRDTM 215, or by nuclear method,
MRDTM 218 using full depth penetration, at the option of the Engineer.

When the sand cone method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at a minimum of five (5) randomly selected
locations in each lot.

When the nuclear method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at a minimum of eight (8) randomly selected
locations in each lot. Three nuclear gauge readings shall be made at each test location
within a radius of two (2) meters. The three (3) readings shall be averaged and the
average considered to be the density for that test location.

Percent relative compaction shall be computed by comparing the average actual in-
place compacted density from the nuclear gauge or sand cone test results with the
maximum density determined by MRDTM 212. MRDTM 212 maximum density shall be
determined from samples of aggregate subbase obtained from the roadbed at a
sampling frequency of one (1) test per three (3) lots. The maximum density used for
determining percent relative compaction shall be the running average for three (3)
consecutive tests.

Any lot of aggregate subbase that has a percent relative compaction below the
minimum percent compaction specified in Paragraph 3.02.5.4, "Compacting," in these
General Specifications resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined
in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance
and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General Specifications may
be accepted on the basis of a reduced payment if requested in writing by the
Contractor. Otherwise the lot shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his
expense. Lots that have percent relative compaction resulting in a reduced pay factor
less than 0.75 shall be removed and replaced by the contractor at his expense.

13
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
3.02.6.2 Thickness. The thickness of each course of aggregate subbase complete
as placed and compacted, shall be measured from test holes obtained at a minimum
of five (5) random locations within the lot. The thickness of each hole shall be
determined after determination that the compacted density is acceptable. The average
of the test hole thicknesses shall be reported as the thickness of the lot.

A lot shall be accepted when the average total thickness is not less than the planned
thickness.

Any lot of aggregate subbase course with an average thickness less than shown in
the plans but resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications may be
accepted on the basis of reduced payment if requested in writing by the Contractor,
otherwise additional material shall be provided as specified in the preceding paragraph.

When the average thickness of a lot of aggregate subbase course is less than the
planned thickness by an amount resulting in a reduced pay factor below 0.75 the
Contractor, at his own expense, shall place and remix additional aggregate subbase
material with the original aggregate subbase material and recompact before new test
holes are dug.

3.02.6.3 Aggregate Gradation, Sand Equivalent and Plasticity Index.

Aggregate subbase gradation, sand equivalent and plasticity index will be sampled,
tested and evaluated based on the average of a minimum of five (5) test results per lot
in accordance with the Job Mix Formula Tolerances listed in Paragraph 3.02.3.1 "Job
Mix Design Proposal," and Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work), in these General
Specifications.

Every sample of aggregate subbase shall be taken on a random time basis from
each uncompacted lot during each one-half ( ) day of work, or portion thereof. The
initial sample shall be randomly selected from within one and one-half (1 ) meters
either side of the centerline of and weigh at least twenty-five (25) kilograms. The initial
sample shall be thoroughly mixed and quartered to obtain a test sample weighing at
least six (6) kilograms. The test sample shall be forwarded to the project laboratory and
the aggregate gradation, and sand equivalent and plastic light determined.

When the aggregate gradation, sand equivalent or plasticity index test results for any
lot produce a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in accordance with above
referenced Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value or Work)" in these General Specifications, the lot
may be accepted on the basis of a reduced pay factor if requested in writing by the
Contractor. Otherwise said lot shall be removed and replaced by Contractor at his
expense.

When the gradation, sand equivalent or plasticity index pay factor determined in
accordance with above referenced Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work
for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value or Work)" in these General

14
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
Specifications, for any lot whose pay factor is less than 0.75 the aggregate subbase
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

3.02.6.4 California Bearing Ratio and Abrasion. Random samples shall be taken
and tested for California Bearing Ratio and Abrasion from the first three (3) lots and
every fifth lot thereafter unless test results indicate failure to conform to the values
specified in Subsection 3.02.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications. In such a
case, increased sampling and testing shall be performed.

3.02.6.5 Surface Tolerances. The surface layer of the aggregate subbase shall
be evaluated for compliance with the following surface tolerances:

The cross section of the finished subbase surface shall be checked by the
Contractor in the presence of the Engineer at maximum intervals of twenty-five (25)
meters and at intermediate points as directed by the Engineer. The deviation of the
elevation of the surface above the design elevation shall be not more than twenty (20)
millimeters. Deviations above the design elevation shall not result in the diminished
thickness of any subsequent pavement course. The deviation of the elevation below
the design elevation shall not be more than twenty (20) millimeters. Isolated deviations
below the design elevation shall be compensated by additional thickness of the
subsequent pavement layer. Additional cost and materials resulting from deviations
from the design elevation shall be borne by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish all
devices necessary to check the surface, such as stringlines, straightedges, etc., and
the labor necessary to handle the task.

3.02.6.6 Acceptance. Aggregate subbase construction including California Bearing

Ratio, abrasion and surface tolerances shall be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4,
"Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

Compaction, thickness, aggregate gradation, sand equivalent and plasticity index

will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value or Work)" in these General
Specifications in two (2) stages as follows: The first stage shall be the selection of the
lowest of the four of pay factors for the quality of the aggregate subbase relating to
aggregate gradation, compaction, sand equivalent and plasticity index. The second
stage involves the selection and application of a quantity pay factor based on the
thickness of the aggregate subbase. The reduced thickness pay factor for the lower
course lots of multiple layer courses will be applied provisionally based on the results
of the depths of the holes dug in the lower layers. Additional holes will be dug in the
total depth of all aggregate subbase layers within the lot represented by lower layer
reduced thickness pay factors. If the total thickness depths show that the increased
upper level layer thickness has resulted in total thickness acceptability, the lower level
layer reduced thickness pay factor will be adjusted accordingly. The second stage
thickness quantity pay factor will be applied to all the individual course lots in addition
to the first stage lowest quality pay factor as determined in accordance with Subsection
1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor
(Value or Work)" in these General Specifications.

15
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
3.02.7 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Aggregate subbase shall be measured by the
cubic meter after placement and compaction to the required density, using horizontal
dimensions shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer and thickness
measurements determined as specified in this specification. No allowance for
overdepth shall be permitted except as approved in writing by the Engineer prior to
spreading the aggregate subbase.

3.02.8 PAYMENT. Aggregate subbase shall be paid for at the contract unit price or
adjusted contract unit price per cubic meter for the aggregate subbase item(s) shown
on the plans and listed in the Bill of Quantities. Such price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, tools and incidentals and
all other items necessary to complete the work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2,
"Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

When a lot of aggregate subbase course is accepted with a deficiency, the adjusted
contract unit price for said lot shall be the product of the contract unit price of aggregate
subbase, and the lowest quality and quantity pay factors specified in Subsection 3.02.6,
"Quality Assurance Procedures," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

30201 Aggregate Subbase Cubic Meter

Course

3020101 Aggregate Subbase Cubic Meter

Course, Grading I

3020102 Aggregate Subbase Cubic Meter

Course, Grading II

3020103 Aggregate Subbase Cubic Meter

Course, Grading III

16
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 3.03 - AGGREGATE BASES

3.03.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of furnishing, spreading and

compacting aggregate bases to the lines, elevations and thicknesses shown on the
plans and as specified in these General Specifications and the Special Specifications.

Aggregate bases will be designated as Aggregate Base Course or Aggregate Base

Course, Grading ___. The grading(s) of aggregate base to be furnished shall be
according to the item(s) shown in the Plans or Special Specifications and listed in the
Bill of Quantities. If the aggregate base course grading is not specified aggregate base
course shall be furnished meeting one of the gradations listed in Table 3.03-1 as
designated by the Engineer. The designation of the appropriate Grading shall be such
that the maximum size of aggregate will not exceed two thirds (2/3) of the thickness of
the aggregate base course layer to be constructed.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Aggregate Base Course
Aggregate Base Course, Grading ___

3.03.2 MATERIALS. Aggregates used for aggregate base shall be hard durable
particles or fragments free from vegetation matter and other deleterious substances
and, when compacted under watering and rolling, form a firm, stable base. Aggregate
shall consist of crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed gravel.

Crushed stone aggregate shall contain not more than eight (8) percent, by weight,
flat, elongated, soft, or disintegrated pieces. Aggregate retained on the 2.36 mm (No.
8) sieve shall consist of stone particles of which at least ninety percent (90%), by
weight, shall have at least two (2) mechanically fractured faces.

The specified gradation shall be obtained by crushing, screening and blending

processes, as necessary. The Contractor shall furnish, produce stockpile, blend and
mix all necessary materials using such equipment and procedures as will produce the
specified aggregate base.

If additional fine material, in excess of that already present in the base course
material, is necessary for correcting the gradation properties, for satisfactory bonding
of the base material, or for adjusting the material characteristics of the fraction passing
the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve, it shall be uniformly blended and mixed with the crushed
aggregates. Such mixing shall take place at the crusher, at an approved stationary
proportioning and mixing plant or on a traveling plant. Reworking of the base course
material in place to obtain the specified requirements shall not be permitted. The
additional fine material, if any, shall be obtained from crushing stones, gravel, or slag,
and shall be of a gradation as required to accomplish the specified gradation of the final
mixture.

Aggregate shall conform to one of the following grading and quality requirements on
the road bed after all blending and mixing and spreading and before compacting:

17
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 3.03-1

AGGREGATE BASES
GRADING REQUIREMENTS
MRDTM 204

PERCENTAGE PASSING
SIEVE SIZES Grading I Grading II Grading III
50 mm (2 inch) 100 - -
37.5 mm (1 inch) - 100 -
25 mm (1 inch) 55-85 70-95 100
19 mm ( inch) 50-80 55-85 70-100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 30-60 30-60 35-65
0.425 mm (No. 40) 10-25 10-25 15-25
0.075 mm (No. 200) 3-10 3-10 3-10
The fraction passing the No. 200 sieve shall not exceed the fraction passing the
0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Sodium Sulphate Soundness (MRDTM 311), & Loss 12 Max.
Abrasion Loss (MRDTM 309) 45 Max.
Sand Equivalent (MRDTM 313) 45 Min.
Liquid Limit (MRDTM 209) 25 Max.
Plasticity Index (MRDTM 208) 6 Max.
California Bearing Ratio (MRDTM 213) Grading I 100 Min.

California Bearing Ratio (MRDTM 213) Grading II 80 Min.

California Bearing Ratio (CBR) (MRDTM 213) Grading III 65 Min.

18
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

3.03.3 PROPORTIONING AGGREGATE BASE MIXES.

3.03.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal. A proposed Job Mix Formula (JMF) shall be
formulated by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. The JMF
shall be prepared by the Contractor in precise compliance with procedures and
requirements set forth in the Materials and Research Department Manual of Materials
and Tests and all current letters issued by the Ministry of Communications.

The Contractor shall select his sources of aggregate and, after sufficient quantities
have been stockpiled or are available for use , obtain representative samples of the
materials and test to determine if they conform to the requirements of these
specifications. At least thirty (30) days before producing aggregate base mixtures, the
Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer detailed information for each mix
which he proposes to furnish. The information shall include, but not be limited to the
following:

1. The source and gradation of the aggregate for each mix to be furnished. If the
aggregate (coarse, fine, supplemental fine) is separated into two (2) or more sizes, the
information provided shall consist of gradations for all individual sizes, the proportions
of each individual size to be used, and the mathematically combined gradation for each
mix to be furnished. Such combined gradation shall meet the applicable grading
requirements shown in Subsection 3.03.2 "Materials" in these General Specifications
and show the percentage passing each of the specified sieve sizes.

2. Pertinent test data and a written certification that the aggregates to be furnished
conform to all quality requirements shown in Subsection 3.03.2,"Materials" in these
General Specifications.

3. The type of plant to be used for mixing each mix to be furnished.

4. The beginning date for producing aggregate base mixtures.

The Engineer shall be provided access to the materials sampling and testing
operations at all times. The combined aggregate, including mineral additives, shall
conform to the approved JMF grading within the following tolerances:
9.75 mm (3/8") and larger sieves, 9 percentage points
4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, 8 percentage points
2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve, 7 percentage points
0.300 mm (No. 50 sieve, 6 percentage points
0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, 4 percentage points

At the same time the above information is provided, the Contractor shall supply to
the Engineer fifty (50) kilogram samples of each individual aggregate size, when used,
ten (10) kilogram samples of mineral filler and chemical admixture, all representing the
materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish.

19
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

3.03.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula. The Engineer shall review the JMF to
determine that it contains all required information. If it does not contain all required
information, it shall be returned within seven (7) days to the Contractor for further action
and resubmission by the Contractor.

If the proposed JMF contains all required information but fails to meet all the
requirements specified, it shall not be accepted by the Engineer and will be returned to
the Contractor within fourteen (14) days. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to
the Engineer a new JMF conforming to the requirements specified and propose a new
date for beginning production.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all the requirements of the specifications, he shall order the Contractor to construct
a minimum two hundred (200) meter long field control strip. The Engineer shall
evaluate the control strip as to its constructability and compactability and conformance
to the laboratory tested JMF. Split samples of the aggregate base mix for and
components raw material along with the field laboratory test results are to be sent to
the Materials and Research Departments Central Laboratory for a one (1) point check
and documentation. If the Engineer is not satisfied with the results of the control strip,
he shall state his objections in writing and request a revised JMF and a new control
strip.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all requirements of the specifications and the control strip results are acceptable, he
will issue written acceptance to the Contractor to begin producing the mixes proposed.

Production of aggregate base mixes shall not begin until the Engineer has given
written acceptance of the Job Mix Formula.

Acceptance of the JMF by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to produce aggregate base mixes conforming to all specified requirements.

3.03.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions. The Contractor shall not alter his methods
of crushing, screening, blending, or stockpiling from that used to produce materials for
the approved JMF. Changes to the JMF will not be permitted without retesting and
resubmission of a proposed (revised) JMF in accordance with all the steps in
Paragraph 3.03.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal" in these General Specifications.
Significant changes may include, but not be limited to, changes in the amount or type
of materials rejected or wasted, changes in the amount of materials crushed, reductions
in the amount of crushed fines, changes in the amount and type of mineral filler.

Should the Contractor change his source of aggregate, he shall furnish a new job
mix design proposal and samples of materials, as described in Paragraph 3.03.3.1, "Job
Mix Design Proposal" in these General Specifications as determined by the Engineer
to be necessary, at least twenty-one (21) days before their intended use.

20
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
At any time after the JMF is approved the Contractor may submit a new JMF for
approval by the Engineer. If the revised JMF is approved it shall become the approved
JMF.

3.03.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment for
producing, stockpiling, moisture conditioning, and hauling aggregate, preparing the
surface on which the aggregate base will be placed, and placing, spreading,
compacting, finishing and maintaining the aggregate base in accordance with the
minimum type and number outlined in the Contractor's Program of Work as approved
by the Engineer. Blending and mixing aggregates and adjusting the moisture content
as required for compaction shall be performed in a central mixing plant.

The blended and mixed aggregates shall be placed and spread to the width and
thickness specified using approved mechanical spreading equipment. Motor graders
shall not be used for spreading.

3.03.5 CONSTRUCTION.

3.03.5.1 Contractor Quality Control Procedures. Testing to control the quality

of aggregate base furnished shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Copies of all
test results shall be forwarded to the Engineer at the end of each working day. The
Engineer shall have access to the Contractor's testing laboratory at all times and
reserves the right to obtain samples of the materials at any point during construction.
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall sample aggregate base
materials and prepare duplicate samples, by quartering. One (1) sample shall be
delivered to the Engineer and the duplicate sample shall be tested by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall perform the following minimum types and number of tests:

1. Gradation, sand equivalent and plasticity index - One (1) test each per one
thousand (1000) cubic meters of aggregates produced but not less than one (1) per
production day.

2. Abrasion Loss - One (1) test for first, second and third five hundred (500) cubic
meters of aggregate produced and one (1) test for each twenty-five hundred (2500)
cubic meters thereafter.

3. Percent Crushed Faces - One (1) test for each five hundred (500) meters of
aggregate produced.

4. CBR Value - One (1) test for each five thousand (5000) cubic meters.

When test data indicate that the aggregate base does not conform to specified
requirements, the Contractor shall take effective action to correct his production
methods to assure that the materials produced will conform to all specified
requirements. Such action shall include halting production, changing the source of
aggregate supply, altering amount of aggregate scalped and rejected, increasing
degree of crushing, and revising blending and handling methods.

21
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
3.03.5.2 Preparation and Maintenance. After the subgrade or subbase surface
has been prepared, the Contractor shall maintain it true to cross section, grade and
density. The surface of the subgrade or subbase, immediately prior to receiving the
aggregate base shall conform to the specified cross section, grade and density and
shall be free of any loose or extraneous material. All subgrade or subbase protection,
maintenance or repair work is considered subsidiary to items in the Bill of Quantities.

3.03.5.3 Mixing. The aggregate and the water shall be thoroughly mixed in a twin
shaft pugmill type mixer, unless another type of mixer is approved. The amount of
water added to the aggregate shall be an amount which will provide the mixture with a
satisfactory moisture content for compaction to the specified in-place density. The rate
of flow of the water to the pugmill shall be controlled by valves or other devices which
can be easily reset when a change in the rate of flow is desirable. The water supply
system shall be equipped with a positive cut-off control which will stop the flow of water
simultaneously with any stoppage in the flow of aggregate into the pugmill.

3.03.5.4 Transporting. The plant-mixed material shall be transported in such

manner as to deliver the mix to the project without loss or segregation. Each truck load
shall be covered with a heavy canvas sheet to reduce the loss of moisture in transit
whenever the time between loading the work and spreading the moisture exceeds thirty
(30) minutes.

3.03.5.5 Placing and Spreading. The mixture shall be placed on the existing
roadway, approved subgrade or approved subbase, as the case may be, in a uniform
layer or layers not exceeding fifteen (15) centimeters in compacted depth. Where the
required thickness is greater than fifteen (15) centimeters, the material shall be placed
in layers of equal thickness. However, if heavy duty vibratory compaction equipment
approved by the Engineer is used, the maximum compacted layer thickness may be
increased to twenty (20) centimeters provided test trial compaction tests indicate
compliance with these General Specifications including the following:

1. Compaction samples are taken from the entire layer including the lower part of
the increased thickness.

2. The coarse aggregates on the top of the Aggregate Base layers are not
damaged or crushed.

The increased thickness approval will be rescinded by the Engineer if more than
fifteen percent (15%) of the subsequent field density tests taken on the thicker layer
initially fail, necessitating retesting after additional compaction.

The mixture course shall be placed on the roadbed to the required width and
uncompacted thickness as follows:

1. Through an approved self-propelled spreading machine.

2. In a sized windrow from which a paving machine or travel plant will pickup and
spread the aggregate base.

22
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
3. To protect the underlayer and to allow proper drainage, the spreading of the
base course material shall begin along the centerline on stretches with a crowned
section or on the high side of stretches with a one-way slope.

The approved spreader shall deliver the mixture in such a condition that the material
will be ready for compaction without further shaping. Unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer, the aggregate shall be spread not more than two thousand (.2000) square
meters ahead of the rollers. Any necessary sprinkling shall be kept within this limit.

The material shall be handled so as to avoid segregation. If the approved spreader

causes segregation in the material, or leaves ridges or other objectionable marks on the
surface which cannot be eliminated easily or prevented by adjustment to the spreading
operation, the use of such approved spreader shall be discontinued, and it shall be
replaced. All segregated material shall be removed and replaced with well-graded
material. No "skin" patching shall be permitted. Only minor surface manipulation and
watering to achieve the required surface tolerances shall be permitted during the
compaction process.

No hauling or placement of material will be permitted when, in the judgement of the

Engineer, the weather or road conditions are such that hauling operations will cause
rutting of the road surface or cause contamination of the subbase or base course
material. Before placing the mixture, the subgrade or previous layer shall be wetted to
insure bond between the layers. The mixture shall be placed and shaped by power
equipment to the lines, elevations, cross sections, depths and density specified in the
following subsections.

3.03.5.6 Compacting. Each layer of aggregate base material, after being shaped
to the required lines and cross section, shall be compacted to a uniform density with no
individual test being less than ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum dry unit weight
determined from MRDTM 212. Each lot of base material as described in Subsection
3.03.6, "Quality Assurance Procedures" in these General Specifications shall have a
percent relative compaction of no less than one hundred percent (100%) of the
maximum dry unit weight determined from MRDTM 212. The aggregate base shall be
watered or dried as may be necessary to obtain a moisture content suitable for
compaction. Material which has dried prior to final compaction or which has dried and
decompacted subsequent to final compaction shall be watered and recompacted using
equipment and procedures approved by the Engineer. Should the Contractor be
unable to return the material to its original or specified condition with respect to
compaction, thickness, and surface tolerances, the Contractor shall remove the material
and reconstruct the course on a reapproved subgrade.

When there are delays in constructing the remaining pavement structure over a
granular course, the compaction of the granular course shall be reverified and deficient
areas corrected or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Such corrections or
replacement shall be at the Contractor's expense.

The Contractor shall plan the work and handle the various operations so that the
least amount of water will be lost by evaporation from uncompleted surfaces. If the
Contractor delays placing or succeeding layers of material to the extent that additional

23
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
water must be applied to prevent raveling or excessive drying, the application of such
water shall be at the Contractor's expense and will not be considered as the basis for
a claim for additional compensation.

The material shall be compacted by means of approved compaction equipment,

progressing gradually from the outside towards the center, with each succeeding pass
uniformly overlapping the previous pass. Rolling shall continue until the entire thickness
of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly compacted to the specified density. The base
course shall not be rolled when the underlayer is soft or yielding or when rolling causes
undulation of the base course. The final rolling of the completed course shall be done
with a self-propelled roller as approved by the Engineer. Rolling shall be accompanied
by sufficient blading, in a manner approved by the Engineer, to insure a smooth
surface, free from ruts or ridges and having the proper section and crown. When
additional water is required, it shall be added in the amount and manner approved by
the Engineer. Initial layers of material must be constructed to a uniform grade and
cross section and compacted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to
the delivery of materials for a succeeding layer.

Prior to placing a succeeding layer of granular material, the surface of the underlayer
shall be made sufficiently moist, to insure bond between the layers. The edges and
edge slopes of the base course shall be bladed or otherwise dressed to conform to the
lines and dimensions shown on the plans, and present straight, neat and workmanlike
lines and slopes as free of loose material as practicable.

Any areas inaccessible to normal compaction equipment shall be compacted by

means of portable mechanical tampers until satisfactory compaction is obtained. When
the final layer is to be trimmed to final grade by an automatic grading machine, this
layer shall be constructed approximately one (1) to three (3) centimeters above grade,
so that the grading machine cuts continually. After the final pass of the grading
machine, the base shall be wetted and rolled. Excess material removed by the grading
machine shall be re-used in shoulders, islands, or other areas for which Aggregate
Base is specified, but not under roadway pavement. Material wasted and not re-used
will be deducted from the final pay quantities.

3.03.5.7 Finishing. All aggregate base material shall be placed, trimmed and
finished in a neat and workmanlike manner in compliance with the lines, grades and
typical cross sections shown on the plans or staked by the Engineer.

Grade control shall be accomplished by means of grade stakes, steel pins or forms,
placed in lanes parallel to the centerline of the road and at intervals sufficiently close
to permit placing of string lines or straightedges for checking purposes.

3.03.5.8 Maintenance and Protection. Following construction of the aggregate

base course, the compacted course shall be maintained by the Contractor at his
expense. The Contractor shall blade, broom, and otherwise maintain the course,
keeping it free from raveling and other defects that result in lost density until such time
as the next element of the pavement structure is placed. Water shall be applied at such
times and in such quantities as directed by the Engineer, and the Engineer shall have

24
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
full authority to require the suspension of all other work on the project to insure the
proper maintenance of previously compacted material.

Any damage to the base course, or any layer thereof, caused from routing of
construction or other equipment over completed stretches shall be repaired by the
Contractor at his own expense and as approved by the Engineer.

The Engineer shall determine when the surface of the base course is in the proper
condition to permit the bituminous prime and/or surfacing to be applied. The Contractor
must continue to maintain the surface of the base course, including the application of
necessary water, at his expense until such time as the bituminous prime and/or
surfacing is applied. Any additional expense incurred by the Contractor because of
delay in applying the bituminous prime and/or surfacing when so permitted by the
Engineer will not be considered as the basis for a claim for additional compensation.

3.03.5.9 Compaction Test Trials. If directed by the Engineer, or requested by the

Contractor, prior to the commencement of his aggregate base compaction operations,
the Contractor shall construct compaction test trial lengths, not to exceed one (1)
kilometer. The materials used in the trials shall be that approved for use as aggregate
base and the equipment used shall be that according to the Contractor's approved
detailed Program of Work.

The object of these trials is to determine the adequacy of the Contractor's

equipment, the loose depth measurements necessary to result in the specified
compacted layer depths, the field moisture content, and the relationship between the
number of compaction passes and the resulting density of the material.

The Contractor may proceed with aggregate base Work only after the methods and
procedures established in the compaction trial has been approved by the Engineer.

3.03.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Aggregate base shall be accepted

by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications, the lot size shall be ten
thousand (10,000) square meters for each layer constructed. The aggregate base shall
be sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of
Work" in these General Specifications. The Engineer may, during the beginning of
placement of aggregate base, at times when test results indicate erratic characteristics
and at any other time, reduce the lot size to sections of aggregate base with similar
quality characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and modification or
replacement of low-quality materials with materials of acceptable quality to maintain the
overall strength of the pavement structure.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and
testing for each lot shall include:

25
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

1. Compaction

2. Thickness

3. Aggregate Gradation, Sand Equivalent and Plasticity Index

4. California Bearing Ratio and Abrasion

5. Surface Tolerances

3.03.6.1 Compaction. The compacted density for each layer of aggregate base
shall be determined by the sand cone method, MRDTM 215, or by nuclear method,
MRDTM 218 using full depth penetration, at the option of the Engineer.

When the sand cone method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at a minimum of five (5) randomly selected
locations in each lot.

When the nuclear method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at a minimum of eight (8) randomly selected
locations in each lot. Three nuclear gauge readings shall be made at each test location
within a radius of two (2) meters. The three (3) readings shall be averaged and the
average considered to be the density for that test location.

Percent relative compaction shall be computed by comparing the average actual in-
place compacted density from the nuclear gauge or sand cone test results with the
maximum density determined by MRDTM 212. For example, MRDTM 212 maximum
density shall be determined from samples of aggregate base obtained from the roadbed
at a sampling frequency of one (1) test per three (3) lots. The maximum density used
for determining percent relative compaction shall be the running average for three (3)
consecutive tests.

Any lot of aggregate base that has a percent relative compaction below the minimum
percent compaction specified in Subsection 3.03.5.6, "Compacting," in these General
Specifications, resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.5 "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General Specifications may be
accepted on the basis of a reduced payment if requested in writing by the Contractor.
Otherwise the lot shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
Lots that have percent relative compaction resulting in a reduced pay factor less than
0.75 shall be removed and replaced by the contractor at his expense.

3.03.6.2 Thickness. The thickness of each course of aggregate base complete as

placed and compacted, shall be measured from test holes obtained at a minimum of
five (5) random locations within the lot. The thickness of each hole shall be determined
after it is determined that the compacted density is acceptable. The average of the test
hole thicknesses shall be reported as the thickness of the lot.

26
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
A lot shall be accepted when the average total thickness is not less than the plan
thickness.

Any lot of aggregate base course with an average thickness less than the plan
thickness but resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.5 "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General Specifications may be
accepted on the basis of reduced payment if requested in writing by the Contractor,
otherwise the lot shall be overlaid as specified in the preceding paragraph.

When the average thickness of a lot of aggregate base course is less than the plan
thickness by an amount resulting in a reduced pay factor below 0.75 the Contractor, at
his own expense, shall place and remix additional aggregate base material with the
original aggregate base material and recompact before new test holes are dug.

3.03.6.3 Aggregate Gradation, Sand Equivalent and Plasticity Index.

Aggregate base gradation, sand equivalent and plasticity index will be sampled, tested
and evaluated based on the average of a minimum of five (5) test results per lot in
accordance with the Job Mix Formula Tolerances listed in Paragraph 3.03.3.1, "Job Mix
Design Proposal" and Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance
and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General Specifications.

Every sample of aggregate base shall be taken on a random time basis from each
uncompacted lot during each one-half ( ) day of work, or portion thereof. The initial
sample shall be randomly selected from within one and one-half (1 ) meters either side
of the centerline of and weigh at least twenty-five (25) kilograms. The initial sample
shall be thoroughly mixed and quartered to obtain a test sample weighing at least six
(6) kilograms. The test sample shall be forwarded to the project laboratory and the
aggregate gradation, sand equivalent and plasticity index determined.

When the aggregate gradation, sand equivalent or plasticity index for any lot results
in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher, determined in accordance with above
referenced Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General Specifications the lot
may be accepted on the basis of a reduced pay factor if requested in writing by the
Contractor, otherwise said lot shall be removed and replaced by Contractor at his
expenses.

When the gradation, sand equivalent or plasticity index pay factor determined in
accordance with above referenced Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work
for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General
Specifications for any lot is less than 0.75 the aggregate base shall be removed and
replaced by the Contractor, at his expense.

3.03.6.4 California Bearing Ratio and Abrasion. Random samples shall be taken
and tested for California Bearing Ratio and Abrasion from a minimum of the first three
(3) lots and every fifth lot thereafter unless test results indicate failure to conform to the
quality requirements specified in Subsection 3.03.2 "Materials" in these General
Specifications. In such a case, increased sampling and testing shall be performed.

27
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

3.03.6.5 Surface Tolerances. The surface layer of the aggregate base shall be
evaluated for compliance with the following surface tolerances:

1. The cross section of the finished aggregate base surface shall be checked by
the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer at maximum intervals of twenty-five (25)
meters and at intermediate points as directed by the Engineer. The deviation of the
elevation of the surface above the design elevation shall be not more than ten (10)
millimeters. Deviations above the design elevation shall not result in the diminished
thickness of any subsequent pavement course. The deviation of the elevation below
the design elevation shall not be more than ten (10) millimeters. Isolated deviations
below the design elevation shall be compensated by additional thickness of the
subsequent pavement layer. Additional cost and materials resulting from deviations
from the design elevation shall be borne by the Contractor.

2. The surface shall also be checked with a four (4) meter straightedge in all areas
of apparent roughness as directed by the Engineer. The finished surface of the base
course shall not deviate from the straightedge between any two (2) contact points more
than ten (10) millimeters when the straightedge is placed parallel to centerline or twelve
(12) millimeters when the straightedge is placed perpendicular to centerline. The

Contractor shall furnish all devices necessary to check the surface, such as stringlines,
straightedges, etc., and the labor necessary to handle the task.

3.03.6.6 Acceptance. Aggregate base construction including California Bearing

Ratio, abrasion and surface tolerances shall be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4
"Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

Compaction, thickness, aggregate gradation, sand equivalent and plasticity index

will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in two (2) stages as
follows: The first stage shall be the selection of the lowest of the four pay factors for
the quality of the aggregate base relating to aggregate gradation, compaction, sand
equivalent and plasticity index. The second stage involves the selection and application
of a quantity pay factor based on the thickness of the aggregate base. The reduced
thickness pay factor for the lower courses of multiple layer courses will be applied
provisionally based on the results of the depths of the holes dug in the lower layers.
Additional holes will be dug in the total depth of all aggregate base layers within the lot
represented by lower layer reduced thickness pay factors. If the total thickness depths
show that the increased upper level layer thickness has resulted in total thickness
acceptability, the lower level layer reduced thickness pay factor will be adjusted
accordingly. The second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be applied to all the
individual course lots in addition to the first stage quality pay factor as determined in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.5 "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General Specifications.

28
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

3.03.7 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Aggregate base shall be measured by the

cubic meter after placement and compaction to the required density, using horizontal
dimensions shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer and thickness
measurements determined as specified in this specification. No allowance for
overdepth shall be permitted except as approved in writing by the Engineer prior to
spreading the aggregate base.

3.03.8 PAYMENT. Aggregate base shall be paid for at the contract unit price or
adjusted contract unit price per cubic meter for the aggregate base item(s) shown on
the plans and listed in the Bill of Quantities. Such price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, tools, incidentals and all
other work necessary to complete the work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope
of Payment," in these General Specifications.

When a lot of aggregate base course is accepted with a deficiency, the adjusted
contract unit price for said lot shall be the product of the contract unit price of aggregate
base course and the lowest calculated quality and quantity pay factors specified in
Subsection 3.03.6, "Quality Assurance Procedures," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

30301 Aggregate Base Course Cubic Meter

3030101 Aggregate Base Course, Cubic Meter

Grading I

3030102 Aggregate Base Course, Cubic Meter

Grading II

3030103 Aggregate Base Course, Cubic Meter

Grading III

29
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 3.04 - CEMENT TREATED BASES

3.04.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of furnishing and placing one (1) or
more courses of a mixture of aggregate, Portland cement and water, mixing the
materials in a central plant and spreading and compacting the mixture in conformity with
the lines, grades and thickness shown on the plans all as specified or approved by the
Engineer.

Cement treated bases will be designated as Cement Treated Base Course or

Cement Treated Base Course, Grading ___. The grading(s) of cement treated base
to be furnished shall be according to the item(s) shown on the Plans or in the Special
Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities. When the cement treated base
grading is not specified it shall be furnished meeting the requirements of Grading I,
Grading II, or Grading III as designated by the engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Cement Treated Base Course
Cement Treated Base Course, Grading ___

3.04.2 MATERIALS.

3.04.2.1 Portland Cement. Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of

ASTMC 595 for Type IP(MS) or ASTMC 150 for Type II-M.

3.04.2.2 Aggregate. Aggregate for Grading I cement treated base shall be of such
quality that when mixed with Portland cement in an amount not to exceed five percent
(5%) by weight of dry aggregate and compacted at optimum moisture content in
accordance with MRDTM 212, the compressive strength of the compacted mixture will
not be less than fifty (50) kilograms per square centimeter after seven (7) days curing
in a sealed metal container per MRDTM 528.

Aggregate for Grading II and Grading III cement treated base shall be of such quality
that when mixed with Portland cement in an amount not to exceed three and one-half
percent (3.5%) by weight of dry aggregate and compacted at optimum moisture content
in accordance with MRDTM 212, the compressive strength of the compacted mixture
will not be less than fifty (50) kilograms per square centimeter after seven (7) days
curing in a sealed metal container per MRDTM 528.

The minimum cement content for both Grading I and Grading II shall be two percent
(2%) by weight of dry aggregate. The minimum cement content for Grading III shall be
specified in the Special Specifications.

Aggregate for cement treated base, immediately prior to mixing, shall be hard,
durable, clean and free from vegetation matter and have a plasticity index no greater
than six (6). The aggregate shall be graded as follows:

1. Grading I cement treated base - Aggregate gradation shall conform to the

requirements for Grading I Aggregate Base as specified in Section 3.03, "Aggregate
Bases, in these General Specifications.

30
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Grading II cement treated base - Aggregate gradation shall conform to the

requirements for Grading II Aggregate Subbase as specified in Section 3.02,
"Aggregate Subbases," in these General Specifications.

3. Grading III cement treated base - Aggregate shall conform to the requirements
specified in the Special Specifications.

3.04.2.3 Water. Water for mixing shall be free of injurious quantities of oil, alkali,
vegetable matter and salt as determined by the Engineer. It shall be reasonably clear
and shall contain not more than twenty-five hundredths percent (0.25%) total solids by
weight. It shall be capable of producing the specified cement treated material strength
as confirmed by laboratory testing. Water shall be tested in accordance with MRDTM
514.

3.04.2.4 Flyash and Chemical Admixtures. Flyash may be considered for

incorporation into the cement treated mixture when confirmed by testing and approved
by the Engineer. Set-retarders shall conform to ASTM C494.

3.04.2.5 Bituminous Curing Seal. Bituminous material for curing seal shall be SS-
1h or CSS-1h conforming to Tables 4.01-3 and 4.01-4 in Section 4.01, "Bituminous
Materials," in these General Specifications.

3.04.3 MIX DESIGN. The Contractor shall select his sources of aggregate and, after
sufficient quantities have been stockpiled or are available for use, obtain representative
samples of the aggregate and test to determine if they conform to the requirements of
these specifications. At least thirty (30) days before producing cement treated base
mixtures, the Contractor shall forward to the Engineer not less than fifty (50) kilograms
of aggregate and five (5) kilograms Portland cement representing materials the
Contractor proposes to furnish. The Contractor shall also inform the Engineer of his
proposed date for beginning producing cement treated base.

The Contractor shall perform all testing required to establish the proportions of each
material to be combined to produce the cement treated base mixture. Cylinders shall
be molded in accordance with ASTM F134 and shall be cured in accordance with
MRDTM 523. Load rate application for compression testing at twenty-eight (28) days
shall be in accordance with MRDTM 528.

After completion of laboratory testing the Contractor shall submit a solid-volume mix
design to the Engineer for review. The information submitted for review shall include:

1. The source of aggregate with all specified test information.

2. The brand, type, and source of cement.

3. The type admixture, if proposed for use.

4. The weights, volumes, and specific gravities of all materials to be combined.

31
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
5. The compressive strength optimum moisture content and CBR test results as
they may apply.

6. Every mix design furnished by the Contractor shall be identified with a code
number.

The Contractor may submit mix designs from previous or concurrent projects where
the same materials were furnished.

The Contractor shall prepare trial batches of cement treated base mixture using
materials, mixing equipment, procedures, and batch sizes which are the same as those
to be used in the work. The number of trial batches will be established by the Engineer,
who may waive the requirements for trial batches at any time.

The Contractor shall sample and test the trial batches when requested by the
Engineer. When test results for samples from trial batches indicate the proposed mix
will not meet the specified compressive strength or CBR requirements, the Contractor
shall submit a new mix design for review.

The Contractor shall make no changes in the mix design without approval of the
Engineer. A new mix design shall be submitted for the Engineer's review any time the
Contractor proposes a change in materials or material proportions.

The Engineer's review of mix design and test information shall not be construed as
relieving the Contractor of the responsibility to provide cement treated base conforming
to the specified properties or material contents.

3.04.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Cement treated base shall not be mixed or placed
when the air temperature is below five (5) degrees Celsius, or during hot weather when
the air temperature is expected to reach thirty-five (35) degrees Celsius or higher, or
during rain, sand or dust storms, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

3.04.5 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment required for producing
aggregates, hauling, mixing, placing, spreading, compacting and curing the cement
treated base in accordance with the minimum type and number outlined in the
Contractor's detailed Program of Work as approved by the Engineer. Said equipment
shall include a central plant of the batch or continuous pugmill type and self-propelled
spreader boxes or finishing machines approved by the Engineer. The mixing plant shall
be capable of uniformly mixing the approved cement content within a tolerance of one-
half percent (0.5%) of the weight of dry aggregates.

3.04.6 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

3.04.6.1 Surface Preparation. The surface to receive cement treated base,

immediately prior to spreading cement treated base, shall conform to specified
materials quality, compaction and elevation tolerances and shall be free of loose or
extraneous material. When surfaces to receive cement treated base are lower than
specified, the low areas may be filled with cement treated base. The volume of cement

32
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
treated base so placed shall not be measured for payment under any item listed in the
Bill of Quantities.

When the surface to receive cement treated base does not conform to the specified
materials quality, compaction and elevation tolerances, the Contractor shall correct all
deficiencies.

3.04.6.2 Proportioning and Plant Mixing.

1. General Requirements - Aggregate and cement for cement treated base shall
be proportioned and mixed in a central mixing plant. The plant shall be a batch-mixing
type using revolving blades, rotary drum mixer or the continuous mixing type. The
aggregate and cement may be proportioned either by weight or volume.

Water shall be proportioned by either weight or volume and there shall be a means
by which the Engineer may readily verify the amount of water per batch, or the rate of
flow for continuous mixers. The time of the addition of water, or the points at which it is
introduced into the mixer shall be as approved by the Engineer.

The cement shall be added in such a manner that it is uniformly distributed

throughout the aggregate during the mixing operation.

The charge in the batch mixer, or the rate of feed to the continuous mixer, shall not
exceed that which will permit complete mixing of all materials.

2. Batch Mixing - The batch mixer shall be equipped with a sufficient number of
paddles of a type and arrangement which will produce a uniformly mixed batch.

The mixer shall be equipped with a timing device accurate to within two (2) seconds
which will indicate, by definite audible or visual signal, the expiration of the mixing
period.

The timing of mixing a batch shall begin after all ingredients are in the mixer and
shall end when the mixer is half emptied. Mixing shall continue until a homogeneous
mixture of uniformly distributed and properly coated aggregate of uniform appearance
is produced. The time of mixing shall not be less than thirty (30) seconds.

3. Continuous Mixing - Aggregates shall be drawn from the storage facility by a

feeder or feeders which will continuously supply the correct amount of aggregate in
proportion to the cement.

A control system shall be provided that will automatically halt plant operation when
the material in any storage facility approaches the strike-off capacity of the feed gate.
The plant will not be allowed to operate unless this automatic control is in good working
condition. Storage facilities containing fine aggregate shall be equipped with a vibrating
unit which will effectively vibrate the side walls of the feeder.

The feeder for the aggregate shall be mechanically or electrically driven.

33
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
The cement feeder and aggregate feeders shall be equipped with a device by which
the rate of feed can be accurately determined while the plant is in full operation.

Each type of mixing plant shall be equipped with sampling facilities approved by the
Engineer. The sampling facilities shall allow for the convenient and safe collection of
representative samples of aggregate, cement and cement treated base mixture.

3.04.6.3 Transporting and Spreading. The cement treated base mixture shall be
transported in a manner that does not cause segregation and, when required by the
Engineer, shall be protected against moisture loss by approved covers. The mixture
shall be deposited on the roadbed at a quantity per linear meter which will provide the
compacted thickness for the width being spread without resorting to spotting, picking
up or otherwise shifting the mix.

Immediately prior to depositing plant-mixed cement treated base, the surface to be

covered shall be dampened and kept damp. Excessive water as evidenced by puddles
or flow across the surface shall be prevented. The mixture in-place shall be free from
pockets of coarse or fine material.

The mixture shall be spread on the roadbed in one (1) operation with a self-propelled
mechanical spreader at a quantity per linear meter which will provide the compacted
thickness without further shaping, spotting or otherwise shifting the mix. Equipment not
propelled by the unloading vehicle will be considered self-propelled. The spreader shall
be provided with a screen that strikes off and distributes the material to the full width
being spread and to the surface tolerances specified. The screed shall be adjustable
to produce the required cross section. Screed action includes any cutting, crowding,
or other practical motion that produces a finished surface texture of uniform
appearance.

In addition, mechanical spreader equipment used to spread and trim cement treated
base shall be equipped with fully automatic screed and grade sensing controls which
shall control the longitudinal grade and transverse slopes of the screed. Screed
controls shall be such that compensation for differences from the slope and grade
established by the Engineer will be completely automatic.

Cement treated base placed on areas inaccessible to mechanical spreading

equipment may be spread in one (1) layer by methods approved by the Engineer. After
spreading, the material shall be thoroughly compacted to the required lines, grades, and
cross section by means of pneumatic tampers, or with other compacting equipment
which consistently obtains the degree of compaction required.

The use of motor graders will not be permitted during spreading and compaction
operations. Motor graders may be used to trim the edges and surface of the cement
treated base after compaction in order to finish the base within the tolerances specified.

Unless traffic conditions are prohibitive, the mixed materials shall be spread in
widths of not less than two (2) lanes, insofar as the width of cement treated base to be
spread permits. Three (3) lane sections may be spread as a two (2) lane width and a
one (1) lane width. Spread widths wider than two (2) lanes will be permitted but are not

34
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
required or mandatory. Materials shall be spread either by one (1) spreader or by
several spreaders operating in a staggered position across the subgrade, unless traffic
conditions require that less than two (2) lanes be spread. When traffic conditions
require that less than two (2) lanes be spread, construction joints shall be constructed
in accordance with Subsection 3.06.6, "Construction Joints" in these General
Specifications.

Longitudinal construction joints shall fall within thirty (30) centimeters of lane widths.

When cement treated base is placed in more than one (1) layer, the surface of the
lower layer of compacted material shall be kept moist until covered with the next layer
or with the curing seal. Curing seal shall be applied to the surface of a lower layer
which has not been covered with the next layer on the same day. Full compensation
for keeping lower layers moist and for furnishing and applying curing seal to the lower
layers as specified will be considered as included in the contract price paid for cement
treated base and no separate payment will be made therefore.

3.04.6.4 Compacting and Finishing. Initial compaction shall begin immediately

after spreading. Successive passes of compaction equipment shall overlap the previous
adjacent pass by at least twenty-five percent (25%) of its width. Following the initial
compaction and before final compaction, the treated material shall be trimmed by
blading with a motor grader or a planing machine to obtain surface in reasonable
conformance to line, grade, and cross section established or shown on the plans.

The trimming equipment shall be equipped with automatic grade controls.

When the initial compaction is complete, if the surface of the cement treated base
does not conform to specified finish tolerances, high spots shall be trimmed to produce
the specified tolerances. All trimmed material shall be removed from the surface of the
cement treated base and disposed of as approved by the Engineer. Filling low areas
by drifting or hauling of trimmed material is prohibited. Following trimming, all trimmed
areas shall receive a minimum of one (1) compaction pass. Additional compaction shall
be performed until the entire layer of cement treated cement base conforms to the
specified compaction requirements. Final compaction shall be accomplished in such
a manner that no loose material remains on the surface and all tear marks are
eliminated. Compaction shall proceed without interruption, except as stated above, to
achieve at least ninety-five percent (95%) maximum density as determined by MRDTM
212.

The surface of the cement treated base shall be kept moist at all times until the
curing seal is applied.

3.04.6.5 Operation Time Requirement. The Contractor shall furnish and operate
sufficient equipment or limit the area of work in progress so that not more than two (2)
hours shall elapse between the time water is added to the aggregate and cement and
the time of completion of the final compaction after trimming, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.

35
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
3.04.6.6 Construction Joints. At the end of each day's work or when cement
treated base operations are delayed or stopped for more than two (2) hours, a
construction joint shall be made in thoroughly compacted material. The joint shall be
normal to the center line of the roadbed and have a vertical face. Additional mixture
shall not be placed until the construction joint has been approved by the Engineer.

When partial-width construction of cement treated base is allowed and when the
material has been finally compacted more than one (1) hour, a longitudinal joint shall
be constructed by cutting back into the previously placed material to a point where it
meets the proper line and grade, and trimmed to a true vertical face which is free of any
loose or shattered material. Trimmed material shall be removed and disposed of at
locations approved by the Engineer. The face of transverse and longitudinal
construction joints shall be moistened prior to placement of the adjacent base material.

3.04.7 CURING. After final compaction, the cement treated base shall be covered with
a bituminous curing seal, uniformly applied to the surface at a rate between one-half
(0.50) and one (1.00) liter per square meter. The curing seal shall be applied on the
same day that final compaction is achieved and as soon as practical.

After the curing seal has been applied, the cement treated base shall be kept free
of general traffic for a period of at least seven (7) days. Subsequent aggregate base,
or pavement course shall be placed within ten days after the curing seal is applied.

Any damage to the curing seal or the cement treated base shall be promptly
repaired by the Contractor, at his expense and as directed by the Engineer

3.04.8 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES. The Contractor shall

sample and test materials and the cement treated base mixture throughout the period
of production, placement and compaction. The results of all tests shall be delivered to
the Engineer within twenty-four (24) hours after completion of testing.

Process control sampling and testing shall be by lot. A lot shall be five hundred
(500) cubic meters. Contractor process control testing shall include:

1. Aggregate gradation.
2. Compressive strength or (CBR for the mixture).

3.04.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Cement treated base shall be

accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications, the lot size shall
be ten thousand (10,000) square meters for each layer constructed. The cement
treated base shall be sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08,
"Acceptance of Work" in these General Specifications. The Engineer may, during the
beginning of placement of cement treated base, at times when test results indicate
erratic characteristics and at any other time, reduce the lot size to sections of cement
treated base with similar quality characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and
modification or replacement of low-quality materials with materials of acceptable quality
to maintain the overall strength of the pavement structure.

36
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and
testing for each lot shall include:

1. Compaction

2. Thickness

3. Aggregate Gradation, Sand Equivalent and Plasticity Index

4. California Beating Ratio or Compressive Strength

5. Surface Tolerances

3.04.9.1 Compaction. The compacted density for each layer of each course shall
be determined by the sand cone method, MRDTM 215, or by nuclear method, MRDTM
218 using full depth penetration, at the option of the Engineer.

When the sand cone method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at a minimum of five (5) randomly selected
locations in each lot.

When the nuclear method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at a minimum of eight (8) randomly selected
locations in each lot. Three nuclear gauge readings shall be made at each test location
within a radius of two (2) meters. The three (3) readings shall be averaged and the
average considered to be the density for that test location.

Percent compaction shall be computed by comparing the average actual in-place

compacted density from the nuclear gauge or sand cone test results with the maximum
density determined by MRDTM 212. MRDTM 212 maximum density shall be
determined from samples of aggregate base obtained from the roadbed at a sampling
frequency of one (1) test per three (3) lots. The maximum density used for determining
percent compaction shall be the running average for three (3) consecutive tests.

Any lot of cement treated base that has a percent relative compaction below the
minimum percent compaction specified in Paragraph 3.03.4.6, "Compacting," in these
General Specifications, resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined
in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5 "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance
and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General Specifications may
be accepted on the basis of a reduced payment if requested in writing by the
Contractor. Otherwise the said lot shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at
his expense. Lots that have percent relative compaction resulting in a reduced pay
factor less than 0.75 shall be removed and replaced by the contractor at his expense.

3.04.9.2 Thickness. The thickness of each course of cement treated base

complete as placed and compacted, shall be measured from test holes obtained at a
minimum of five (5) random locations within the lot. The thickness of each hole shall

37
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
be determined after determination that the compacted density is acceptable. The
average of the test hole thicknesses shall be reported as the thickness of the lot.

A lot shall be accepted when the average total thickness is not less than the plan
thickness.

Any lot of cement treated base course with an average thickness less than the plan
thickness but resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General Specifications may be
accepted on the basis of reduced payment if requested in writing by the Contractor.
Otherwise the said lot thickness shall be increased as specified in the following
paragraph.

When the average thickness of a lot of cement treated base course is less than the
planned thickness by an amount resulting in a reduced pay factor below 0.75 the
Contractor, at his own expense, shall place and remix additional cement treated base
material with the original cement treated base material and recompact before new test
holes are dug.

3.04.9.3 Aggregate Gradation, Sand Equivalent and Plasticity Index. The

cement treated base aggregate gradation, sand equivalent and plasticity index will be
sampled, tested and evaluated based on the average of a minimum of five (5) samples
per lot in accordance with the Job Mix Formula Tolerances listed in Paragraph 3.03.3.1,
"Job Mix Design Proposal" and Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General
Specifications.

Every sample of cement treated base shall be taken on a random time basis from
each uncompacted base immediately behind the spreader during each one-half ( ) day
of work, or portion thereof. The initial sample shall be randomly selected from within
one and one-half (1 ) meters either side of the centerline of and weigh at least twenty-
five (25) kilograms. The initial sample shall be thoroughly mixed and quartered to
obtain a test sample weighing at least six (6) kilograms. The test sample shall be
forwarded to the project laboratory and the aggregate gradation, cement gradation and
cement content determined.

When the aggregate gradation, sand equivalent or plasticity index for any lot results
in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher, determined in accordance with above
referenced Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General Specifications the lot
may be accepted on the basis of a reduced pay factor if requested in writing by the
Contractor, otherwise said lot shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his
expense.

When the gradation, sand equivalent or plasticity index pay factor determined in
accordance with above referenced Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work
for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General

38
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
Specifications for any lot is less than 0.75 the aggregate base shall be removed and
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

3.04.9.4 California Bearing Ratio or Compressive Strength. Random samples

shall be taken and tested for California Bearing Ratio or compressive strength from a
minimum of the first three (3) lots and every fifth lot thereafter unless test results
indicate failure to conform to the values specified in Subsection 3.04.2 "Materials" in
these General Specifications. In such a case, increased sampling and testing shall be
performed.

3.04.9.5 Surface Tolerances. The surface layer of the cement treated base shall
be evaluated for compliance with the following surface tolerances:

1. The cross section of the finished cement treated base surface shall be check ed
by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer at maximum intervals of twenty-five
(25) meters and at intermediate points as directed by the Engineer. The deviation of
the elevation of the surface above the design elevation shall be not more than ten (10)
millimeters. Deviations above the design elevation shall not result in the diminished
thickness of any subsequent pavement course. The deviation of the elevation below
the design elevation shall not be more than ten (10) millimeters. Isolated deviations
below the design elevation shall be compensated by additional thickness of the
subsequent pavement layer. Additional cost and materials resulting from deviations
from the design elevation shall be borne by the Contractor.

2. The surface shall also be checked with a four (4) meter straightedge in all areas
of apparent roughness as directed by the Engineer. The finished surface of the base
course shall not deviate from the straightedge between any two (2) contact points more
than ten (10) millimeters when the straightedge is placed parallel to centerline or twelve
(12) millimeters when the straightedge is placed perpendicular to centerline. The
Contractor shall furnish all devices necessary to check the surface, such as stringlines,
straightedges, etc., and the labor necessary to handle the task.

3.04.9.6 Acceptance. Cement treated base construction including California

Bearing Ratio, compressive strength and surface tolerances shall be accepted under
Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

Compaction, thickness, aggregate gradation, sand equivalent and plasticity index

will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in two (2) stages as
follows: The first stage shall be the selection of the lowest of the four pay factors for the
quality of the cement treated base relating to aggregate gradation, compaction, sand
equivalent and plasticity index. The second stage involves the selection and application
of a quantity pay factor based on the thickness of the cement treated base. The
reduced thickness pay factor for the lower courses of multiple layer courses will initially
be applied provisionally based on the results of the depths of the holes dug in the lower
layers. Additional holes will be dug in the total depth of all cement treated base layers
within the lot represented by lower layer reduced thickness pay factors. If the total
thickness depths show that the increased upper level layer thickness has resulted in
total thickness acceptability, the lower level layer reduced thickness pay factor will be

39
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
adjusted accordingly. The second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be applied
to all the individual course lots in addition to the first stage lowest quality pay factor
determined in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)" in these General
Specifications.

3.04.10 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Cement treated base shall be measured by

the cubic meter determined as follows:

The volume to be paid for shall be calculated on the basis of the dimensions shown
on the plans, adjusted by the amount of any change ordered by the Engineer. No
allowance will be made for cement treated base placed outside said dimensions unless
ordered by the Ministry. The quantity of cement treated base placed below the grade
established by the Engineer will not be paid for.

3.04.11 PAYMENT. The accepted quantities of cement treated base, measured as

provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price, or adjusted contract unit
price, for the cement treated base Grading(s) shown on the plans and listed in the Bill
of Quantities, complete in place, including bituminous curing seal when required. The
price(s) shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools,
supplies and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

When a lot of cement treated base course is accepted with a deficiency, the
adjusted contract unit price for said lot shall be the product of the contract unit price of
cement treated base course and the lowest quality and quantity pay factors specified
in Subsection 3.04.9, "Quality Assurance Procedures," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

30401 Cement Treated Base Cubic Meter

Course

3040101 Cement Treated Base Cubic Meter

Course, Grading I

3040102 Cement Treated Base Cubic Meter

Course, Grading II

3040103 Cement Treated Base Cubic Meter

Course, Grading III

40
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 3.05 - SHOULDERS AND LAYBYS

3.05.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of constructing shoulders and laybys
of the types specified hereinafter, in accordance with these specifications and in
conformity to the lines, elevations, thickness and typical cross sections shown on the
plans or established by the Engineer.

1. Definition of Shoulders. That portion of the completed road construction which

lies above the elevation of the subgrade or base and which extends from the edge of
the through travel lanes to the point of intersection with the embankment slopes on
either side of the road centerline.

2. Definition of Laybys. Where shown on the plans, or where directed by the

Engineer, areas adjacent to the roadway shall be constructed of the new materials and
to the dimensions shown on the plans, and in the manner herein specified. These
areas will be for the parking of motor vehicles off the roadway other than the space
defined as shoulders. Such areas will be called "Laybys."

3. Designation of Shoulders and Laybys. Shoulders and laybys shall be

designated by the type and grading of the materials used for construction. The
grading(s) shall be specified in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of
Quantities.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Earth Shoulders
Earth Laybys
Aggregate Shoulders
Aggregate Shoulders, Grading ___
Aggregate Laybys
Aggregate Laybys, Grading ___

3.05.2 EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall conform to the standards outlined in Subsection

2.05.5 "Subgrade," and Section 3.04 "Aggregate Bases, in these General
Specifications and shall be according to the type and number outlined in the
Contractor's detailed Program of Work as approved by the Engineer.

3.05.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

3.05.3.1 General. For the purpose of simplification throughout the remainder of the
Section, when the term "shoulders" is used it shall mean "shoulders and/or laybys."
Shoulders shall be constructed as soon as practicable after the construction of the
base/surface course, and/or preparation of the surface area. If shoulders are part of
a resurfacing project, vegetable matter shall be removed from the surface of the original
shoulders and, if shown on the plans or required by the Engineer, from the adjacent
foreslopes upon which the shoulders are to be constructed, and the underlying twenty
(20) millimeters layer shall be scarified and recompacted to at least ninety-five percent
(95%) of maximum dry density as determined by MRDTM 212.

41
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
3.05.3.2 Earth Shoulders and Laybys. The material used for Earth Shoulders and
Earth Laybys shall meet the requirements of Subsection 2.05.5, "Subgrade," in the
General Specifications and shall be obtained from sources approved by the Engineer.
The material shall be deposited and spread in uniform layers not to exceed twenty (20)
centimeters (loose measurement) in thickness and compacted to ninety-eight percent
(98%) of maximum dry density as determined by MRDTM 212.

3.05.3.3 Aggregate Shoulders and Laybys. Aggregate Shoulders and Aggregate

Laybys shall be constructed as shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, and
in conformance with the requirements specified in Section 3.04, "Aggregate Bases" in
these General Specifications.

The material used for Aggregate Shoulders shall be of the grading designated on
the plans and shall be in conformance with the requirements for the same grading of
material used for Aggregate Bases as specified in Subsection 3.03.2, "Materials" in
these General Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities.

3.05.3.4 Bituminous Base Shoulders and Laybys. Bituminous base course

shown on the plans for use in the construction of shoulders or laybys shall be
constructed as shown on the plans in conformance with the requirements specified in
Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement" for Bituminous Base Course in these
General Specifications.

3.05.3.5 Bituminous Wearing for Shoulders and Laybys. Bituminous wearing

course shown on the plans for use in the construction of shoulders or laybys shall be
constructed as shown on the plans in conformance with the requirements specified in
Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement" for Bituminous Wearing Course in these
General Specifications.

3.05.4 SHOULDERING AND DELINEATION. On projects that carry traffic through

construction, the Contractor shall begin shouldering on the second day of the laying of
the final roadway surfacing layer, unless weather conditions prevent this operation, in
which case the shouldering shall begin as soon as the weather does permit. If the
Contractor fails to begin the shouldering within a reasonable time after the last layer has
been laid, whether the project has traffic through construction or not, the Engineer may
order the Contractor to cease all other Work until the shoulder Work has begun. The
shouldering shall be a continuous operation from that time on until completion, with the
weather being the only delaying factor. The Contractor shall, on roads under traffic or
as directed by the Engineer, delineate the edge of pavement as soon as the surfacing
is begun and maintain the delineation until the shoulders are completed. The
delineators shall be approved prior to use and shall be placed at the edge of the
surfacing at approximately one hundred (100) meter intervals. The cost of this
delineation will be considered subsidiary to other items in the Bill of Quantities and will
not be paid for directly.

3.05.5 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS. Unless otherwise specified in the Special

Specifications, shoulders and laybys shall be compacted to the Type and degree
specified for the materials referenced in the Paragraph 3.05.3.2 Earth Shoulders and
Paragraph 3.05.3.3 Aggregate Shoulders, in these General Specifications.

42
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents

The designated compaction shall be obtained at the edge of the pavement, base or
surface, but extreme care shall be exercised to prevent damage to the pavement, base,
or surface edges, due to the rolling operations. If deemed necessary by the Engineer,
he may require planking of the edges to prevent such damage.

Only pneumatic-tired equipment will be permitted to operate on or across the

pavement, base course, or other surfacing, during the construction of the shoulders.
If it is necessary to cross or turn on the pavement, base or surface course, with rollers
or other nonpneumatic-tired equipment, the surface at such locations shall be protected
with planking or with a layer of earth of sufficient thickness to prevent damage to the
surface.

When completed, the shoulders shall be smooth, compact and shall conform to the
required cross section.

3.05.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Earth Shoulders, Earth Laybys, Aggregate

Shoulders, and Aggregate Laybys shall be measured by the cubic meter, compacted
in place but will be only measured as items for separate compensation when included
in the Bill of Quantities as separate items. If they are not listed as separate items, the
measured quantities will be paid for under the component materials referenced in
Subsection 3.05.3, "Construction Requirements" in these General Specifications.
Measurements shall be based on the dimensions as shown on the plans or as
otherwise directed by the engineer.

Bituminous base and wearing course materials used in the construction of shoulders
and laybys shall not be measured under Section 3.05 Shoulders and Laybys but shall
be measured under Section 4.05 Bituminous Concrete Pavement in these General
Specifications

No measurement will be made of unauthorized areas or for extra thickness. These

items shall include the furnishing of all materials, the drying and screening of
aggregates, and the mixing, placing, finishing, and compaction of the materials.

Shoulders construction shall not be considered to be complete before the final

surface course has been placed and final rolling, shaping, and, if required, priming of
shoulders is completed.

3.05.7 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work, as measured above,
will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) or adjusted contract unit price(s) per cubic
meter for Earth Shoulders, Earth Laybys, Aggregate Shoulders, and Aggregate Laybys,
according to the pay items specified in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill
of Quantities. Those price(s) shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, for
all labor, equipment, tools, supplies, and all other items necessary for the proper
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2., "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

Bituminous base and wearing course materials used in the construction of shoulders
and laybys shall not be paid for under Section 3.05 Shoulders and Laybys but shall

43
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998
Table of Contents
be paid for under Section 4.05 Bituminous Concrete Pavement in these General
Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

30501 Earth Shoulders Cubic Meter
30502 Earth Laybys Cubic Meter
30503 Aggregate Shoulders Cubic Meter
3050301 Aggregate Shoulders, Grading I Cubic Meter
3050302 Aggregate Shoulders, Grading II Cubic Meter
3050303 Aggregate Shoulders, Grading III Cubic Meter
30504 Aggregate Laybys Cubic Meter
3050401 Aggregate Laybys, Grading I Cubic Meter
3050402 Aggregate Laybys, Grading II Cubic Meter
3050403 Aggregate Laybys, Grading III Cubic Meter

44
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

November 1998

PART FOUR
BITUMINOUS CONSTRUCTION
Table of Contents

PART FOUR: BITUMINOUS CONSTRUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 4.01 - BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ............................................................. 1

4.01.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................... 1
4.01.2 GRADES............................................................................................... 1
4.01.2.1 Paving Grade Bituminous Materials ....................................... 1
4.01.2.2 Liquid Bituminous Materials ................................................... 1
4.01.2.3 Emulsified Bituminous Materials ............................................ 1
4.01.2.4 Latex Modified Emulsified Bituminous Materials .................... 1
4.01.2.5 Polymer Modified Paving Grade Bituminous Materials ..........1
4.01.3 MANUFACTURE ................................................................................. 1
4.01.4 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURES FOR BITUMINOUS MATERIALS .....2
4.01.4.1 Shipping Container................................................................. 2
4.01.4.2 Delivery Ticket........................................................................ 2
4.01.4.3 Certificate of Compliance ....................................................... 2
4.01.4.4 Acceptance Sampling Procedures. ........................................ 2
4.01.5 MEASUREMENT ................................................................................. 3
4.01.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 3

SECTION 4.02 - BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT, TACK COAT AND FOG SEAL .......15
4.02.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................. 15
4.02.1.1 Prime Coat ........................................................................... 15
4.02.1.2 Tack Coat ............................................................................. 15
4.02.1.3 Fog Seal ............................................................................... 15
4.02.2 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 15
4.02.2.1 Prime Coat ........................................................................... 15
4.02.2.2 Tack Coat ............................................................................. 15
4.02.2.3 Fog Seal ............................................................................... 15
4.02.2.4 Blotting Sand ........................................................................ 15
4.02.3 APPLICATION RATES ...................................................................... 15
4.02.4 EQUIPMENT...................................................................................... 16
4.02.5 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. 16
4.02.5.1 Preparation of Surfaces ....................................................... 16
4.02.5.2 Preparation of Bituminous Material ...................................... 16
4.02.5.3 Test Sections and Selection of Application Rates ................ 17
4.02.5.4 Application of Bituminous Material ....................................... 17
4.02.5.5 Application of Blotting Sand ................................................. 17
4.02.5.6 Maintenance of Prime Coat .................................................. 17
4.02.6 TRAFFIC CONTROL .......................................................................... 18
4.02.7 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ................................................................. 18
4.02.8 MEASUREMENT ............................................................................... 18
4.02.9 PAYMENT.......................................................................................... 18
Table of Contents

SECTION 4.03 - BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS ..................................... 20

4.03.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................. 20
4.03.2 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 20
4.03.2.1 Bituminous Material.............................................................. 20
4.03.2.2 Changes in Grade of Bituminous Materials ........................... 20
4.03.2.3 Aggregate............................................................................. 21
4.03.2.4 Mineral Fillers ....................................................................... 21
4.03.2.5 Chemical Admixtures and Asphalt Modifiers ........................ 22
4.03.2.6 Precoating Material .............................................................. 22
4.03.3 PROPORTIONING BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT ............22
4.03.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal ..................................................... 22
4.03.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula ........................................... 23
4.03.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions .................................................. 24
4.03.4 EQUIPMENT...................................................................................... 24
4.03.5 APPLICATION RATES FOR BITUMINOUS MATERIAL ................... 25
4.03.5.1 Bituminous Seal Coat ........................................................... 25
4.03.5.2 Single Bituminous Surface Treatment .................................. 26
4.03.5.3 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment ................................ 26
4.03.6 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ................................................................. 26
4.03.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 27
4.03.8 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................ 27
4.03.8.1 Preparation of Surfaces ....................................................... 27
4.03.8.2 Application Temperatures For Bituminous Material .............28
4.03.8.3 Calibration and Adjustment of the Distributor ....................... 28
4.03.8.4 Production Start-Up Procedures for Surface Treatment ......29
4.03.8.5 Procedures for Precoating ................................................... 29
4.03.8.6 Procedures for Applying Bituminous Materials ..................... 30
4.03.8.7 Procedures for Applying Aggregate Screenings .................. 31
4.03.8.8 Adding Bituminous Material and Aggregate Screenings ......32
4.03.8.9 Correction of Defects ........................................................... 32
4.03.9 MAINTENANCE OF SURFACE ......................................................... 32
4.03.10 PROGRESS OF WORK ................................................................... 32
4.03.11 PROTECTION OF FACILITIES ........................................................ 32
4.03.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ......................................... 32
4.03.12.1 Rate of Application of Bituminous Material ......................... 33
4.03.12.2 Bituminous Material ............................................................ 33
4.03.12.3 Aggregate Gradation .......................................................... 33
4.03.12.4 Acceptance ........................................................................ 33
4.03.13 MEASUREMENT .............................................................................. 34
4.03.14 PAYMENT......................................................................................... 34

SECTION 4.04 - BITUMINOUS EMULSION TREATED BASES .............................. 36

4.04.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................. 36
4.04.2 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 36
4.04.2.1 Bituminous Emulsion Material .............................................. 36
4.04.2.2 Aggregate............................................................................. 36
4.04.2.3 Choke Stone for Open-Graded Emulsion Base ................... 37
4.04.2.4 Portland Cement .................................................................. 37
Table of Contents

4.04.2.5 Water.................................................................................... 38
4.04.3 PROPORTIONING BITUMINOUS EMULSION ................................. 38
4.04.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal ..................................................... 38
4.04.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula ........................................... 39
4.04.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions .................................................. 40
4.04.4 EQUIPMENT...................................................................................... 40
4.04.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ................................................................. 41
4.04.6 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. 41
4.04.6.1 Contractor Process Quality Control ...................................... 41
4.04.6.2 Preparation of Bituminous Emulsion Material ...................... 41
4.04.6.3 Preparation of Aggregate ..................................................... 41
4.04.6.4 Type I, Type II and Type III Bituminous Emulsion ................ 42
4.04.6.5 Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion............................. 42
4.04.6.6 Spreading and Compacting .................................................. 43
4.04.6.7 Finishing ............................................................................... 44
4.04.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 44
4.04.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES .......................................... 44
4.04.8.1 Compaction .......................................................................... 45
4.04.8.2 Thickness ............................................................................. 45
4.04.8.3 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content .......45
4.04.8.4 Surface Smoothness ............................................................ 45
4.04.8.5 Acceptance .......................................................................... 45
4.04.9 MEASUREMENT ............................................................................... 46
4.04.10 PAYMENT......................................................................................... 46

SECTION 4.05 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT ...................................... 48

4.05.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................. 48
4.05.2 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 48
4.05.2.1 Bituminous Material.............................................................. 48
4.05.2.2 Aggregate............................................................................. 49
4.05.2.3 Mineral Fillers ....................................................................... 52
4.05.2.4 Chemical Admixtures and Asphalt Modifiers ........................ 52
4.05.3 PROPORTIONING BITUMINOUS CONCRETE MIXTURES. ...........54
4.05.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal ..................................................... 54
4.05.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula ........................................... 55
4.05.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions .................................................. 56
4.05.4 EQUIPMENT...................................................................................... 56
4.05.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ................................................................. 56
4.05.6 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. 57
4.05.6.1 Contractor Process Quality Control ...................................... 57
4.05.6.2 Preparation of Bituminous Materials .................................... 57
4.05.6.3 Preparation of Aggregate ..................................................... 58
4.05.6.4 Preparation of Bituminous Concrete Mixture ........................ 59
4.05.6.5 Preparation of Surface ......................................................... 62
4.05.6.6 Placement of Bituminous Concrete Pavement ..................... 63
4.05.6.7 Joints .................................................................................... 64
4.05.6.8 Compaction of Bituminous Concrete Pavement ................... 65
4.05.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 65
Table of Contents

4.05.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES .......................................... 66

4.05.8.1 Compaction .......................................................................... 66
4.05.8.2 Thickness of Bituminous Concrete ....................................... 67
4.05.8.3 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content .......67
4.05.8.4 Wearing Course Smoothness .............................................. 68
4.05.8.5 Acceptance .......................................................................... 69
4.05.9 MINOR BITUMINOUS CONCRETE .................................................. 69
4.05.9.1 Construction Requirements ................................................... 69
4.05.9.1.1 Composition of Mixture ........................................... 69
4.05.9.1.2 Surface Preparation ............................................... 70
4.05.9.1.3 Weather Limitations ................................................ 70
4.05.9.1.4 Placing.................................................................... 70
4.05.9.1.5 Compacting ............................................................ 70
4.05.9.2 Pavement Smoothness ......................................................... 70
4.05.9.3 Acceptance ........................................................................... 70
4.05.10 MEASUREMENT ............................................................................. 70
4.05.11 PAYMENT........................................................................................ 71

SECTION 4.06 - HOT-MIX RECYCLED BITUMINOUS CONCRETE ...................... 74

4.06.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................. 74
4.06.2 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 74
4.06.2.1 Bituminous Material.............................................................. 74
4.06.2.2 Hot-Mix Recycling Agent ....................................................... 75
4.06.2.3 Mineral Fillers ....................................................................... 76
4.06.2.4 Chemical Admixtures and Asphalt Modifiers ........................ 77
4.06.2.5 Aggregate............................................................................. 77
4.06.2.6 RAP...................................................................................... 77
4.06.3 PROPORTIONING HOT-MIX RECYCLED BITUMINOUS CONCRETE
MIXTURES.......................................................................................... 77
4.06.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal ..................................................... 77
4.06.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mixture Formula ..................................... 79
4.06.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions .................................................. 79
4.06.4 EQUIPMENT...................................................................................... 80
4.06.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ................................................................. 80
4.06.6 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. 80
4.06.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 81
4.06.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES .......................................... 81
4.06.8.1 Compaction .......................................................................... 81
4.06.8.2 Thickness ............................................................................. 81
4.06.8.3 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content .......81
4.06.8.4 Wearing Course Smoothness .............................................. 82
4.06.8.5 Acceptance .......................................................................... 82
4.06.9 MEASUREMENT ............................................................................... 83
4.06.10 PAYMENT......................................................................................... 83

SECTION 4.07 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE FRICTION COURSE ......................... 87

4.07.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................. 87
4.07.2 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 87
Table of Contents

4.07.2.1 Bituminous Material.............................................................. 87

4.07.2.2 Aggregate............................................................................. 87
4.07.2.3 Mineral Fillers ....................................................................... 88
4.07.2.4 Chemical Admixtures and Asphalt Modifiers ........................ 88
4.07.3 PROPORTIONING BITUMINOUS CONCRETE FRICTION COURSE
MIXTURES.......................................................................................... 89
4.07.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal ..................................................... 89
4.07.3.2 Acceptance Job Mix Formula ............................................... 89
4.07.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions .................................................. 90
4.07.4 EQUIPMENT...................................................................................... 90
4.07.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ................................................................. 90
4.07.6 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. 90
4.07.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 91
4.07.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES .......................................... 91
4.07.8.1 Thickness ............................................................................. 91
4.07.8.2 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content .......92
4.07.8.3 Surface Smoothness ............................................................ 92
4.07.8.4 Acceptance .......................................................................... 92
4.07.9 MEASUREMENT ............................................................................... 92
4.07.10 PAYMENT......................................................................................... 93

SECTION 4.08 - BITUMINOUS-RUBBER STRESS ABSORBING MEMBRANE .....94

4.08.1 DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................ 94
4.08.2 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 94
4.08.2.1 Bituminous Binder ................................................................ 94
4.08.2.2 Rubber ................................................................................. 94
4.08.2.3 Class 1 Bituminous-Rubber Binder ...................................... 94
4.08.2.4 Class 2 Bituminous-Rubber Binder ...................................... 95
4.08.2.5 Aggregate Screenings .......................................................... 97
4.08.3 ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS ....................................................... 97
4.08.4 EQUIPMENT...................................................................................... 97
4.08.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ................................................................. 98
4.08.6 TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 98
4.08.7 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. 99
4.08.7.1 Preparation of Surface to Receive Bituminous-Rubber Stress
Absorbing Membrane
4.08.7.2 Adjustment of the Distributor ................................................ 99
4.08.7.3 Procedures for Applying Bituminous-Rubber Binder ............99
4.08.7.4 Procedures for Applying Aggregate Screenings .................. 99
4.08.8 MAINTENANCE OF SURFACE ....................................................... 100
4.08.9 PROGRESS OF WORK .................................................................. 100
4.08.10 PROTECTION OF FACILITIES ...................................................... 100
4.08.11 MEASUREMENT ............................................................................ 100
4.08.12 PAYMENT....................................................................................... 100

SECTION 4.09 - COLD MIX RECYCLED BITUMINOUS BASE ............................. 102

4.09.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................ 102
4.09.2 MATERIALS..................................................................................... 102
Table of Contents

4.09.2.1 Pulverized Bituminous Concrete ........................................ 102

4.09.2.2 Aggregate Base Underlying Bituminous Surface ...............102
4.09.2.3 New Aggregate .................................................................. 102
4.09.2.4 Liquid and Emulsified Bituminous Materials ....................... 103
4.09.2.5 Cold Mix Recycling Agent ................................................... 103
4.09.3 PROPORTIONING COLD MIX RECYCLED BITUMINOUS ............104
4.09.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal ................................................... 104
4.09.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula ......................................... 106
4.09.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions ................................................ 106
4.09.4 EQUIPMENT.................................................................................... 107
4.09.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ............................................................... 107
4.09.6 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................ 107
4.09.6.1 Mixing RAP or RAP and Aggregate with Water ................. 108
4.09.6.2 Mixing RAP, Aggregate and Bituminous Materials .............108
4.09.6.3 Placing and Compaction .................................................... 109
4.09.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL ........................................................................ 109
4.09.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ......................................... 109
4.09.8.1 Compaction ........................................................................ 110
4.09.8.2 Thickness ........................................................................... 110
4.09.8.3 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content .....110
4.09.8.4 Surface Smoothness .......................................................... 110
4.09.8.5 Acceptance ........................................................................ 110
4.09.9 MEASUREMENT .............................................................................. 111
4.09.10 PAYMENT....................................................................................... 111

SECTION 4.10 - SLURRY SEAL ............................................................................ 113

4.10.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................. 113
4.10.2 MATERIALS...................................................................................... 113
4.10.2.1 Emulsified Bituminous Material .......................................... 113
4.10.2.2 Aggregate........................................................................... 113
4.10.2.3 Water.................................................................................. 113
4.10.2.4 Mineral Fillers ..................................................................... 114
4.10.2.5. Chemical Admixtures and Asphalt Modifiers ..................... 114
4.10.3 PROPORTIONING SLURRY SEAL MIXTURES .............................. 114
4.10.4 EQUIPMENT..................................................................................... 115
4.10.4.1 Slurry Mixing Machine ........................................................ 115
4.10.4.2 Slurry Spreading Device .................................................... 116
4.10.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ................................................................ 116
4.10.6 TRAFFIC CONTROL ........................................................................ 116
4.10.7 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................. 117
4.10.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ......................................... 117
4.10.9 MEASUREMENT .............................................................................. 118
4.10.10 PAYMENT....................................................................................... 118

SECTION 4.11 - COLD MILLING PROCESS FOR REMOVING BITUMINOUS

PAVEMENT ................................................................................. 120
4.11.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................ 120
4.11.2 EQUIPMENT.................................................................................... 120
Table of Contents

4.11.3 TRAFFIC CONTROL ....................................................................... 121

4.11.4 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................ 121
4.11.5 ACCEPTANCE ................................................................................ 122
4.11.6 MEASUREMENT ............................................................................. 122
4.11.7 PAYMENT........................................................................................ 122

SECTION 4.12 - SURFACE RECYCLING OF BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT ...........123

4.12.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................. 123
4.12.2 MATERIALS...................................................................................... 123
4.12.2.1 Recycling Agent ................................................................. 123
4.12.2.2 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course ............................... 123
4.12.3 QUANTITY OF RECYCLING AGENT TO BE APPLIED ................... 123
4.12.4 EQUIPMENT..................................................................................... 124
4.12.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ................................................................ 124
4.12.6 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY ........................................................ 124
4.12.7 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................. 125
4.12.8 COMPACTION OF SURFACE RECYCLED BITUMINOUS
PAVEMENT ...................................................................................... 125
4.12.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ......................................... 125
4.12.9.1 Compaction ........................................................................ 126
4.12.9.2 Thickness ........................................................................... 126
4.12.9.3 Smoothness ....................................................................... 126
4.12.9.4 Acceptance ........................................................................ 126
4.12.10 MEASUREMENT ............................................................................ 127
4.12.11 PAYMENT....................................................................................... 127

SECTION 4.13 - ASPHALT PAVEMENT CRACK AND JOINT SEALING..............128

4.13.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................. 128
4.13.2 MATERIALS...................................................................................... 128
4.13.2.1 Asphalt Cement.................................................................. 128
4.13.2.2 Blotter ................................................................................. 128
4.13.2.3 Emulsified Asphalt.............................................................. 128
4.13.2.4 Fine Aggregate................................................................... 128
4.13.2.5 Joint Sealant ...................................................................... 128
4.13.2.6 Slurry Seal.......................................................................... 128
4.13.2.7 Rubberized Asphalt ............................................................ 128
4.13.3 EQUIPMENT.................................................................................... 128
4.13.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .............................................. 129
4.13.4.1 Saw Cutting and Joint Sealing ............................................ 129
4.13.4.2 Crack Cleaning and Sealing ................................................ 130
4.13.4.3 Resealing Defective Joints or Cracks ................................. 130
4.13.4.4 Acceptance ........................................................................ 130
4.13.5 TRAFFIC CONTROL ........................................................................ 131
4.13.6 MEASUREMENT ............................................................................. 131
4.13.7 PAYMENT........................................................................................ 131

SECTION 4.14 - PAVEMENT WIDENING.............................................................. 132

4.14.1 Description ........................................................................................ 132
Table of Contents

4.14.2 Materials ........................................................................................... 132

4.14.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ............................................... 132
4.14.3.1 Trenching ............................................................................ 132
4.14.3.2 Placing Aggregate Subbase or Base Course ...................... 132
4.14.3.3 Placing Bituminous Mixture ................................................. 132
4.14.3.4 Shoulders ............................................................................ 133
4.14.3.5 Special Provisions for Handling Traffic ................................ 133
4.14.3.6 Quality Assurance ............................................................... 133
4.14.3.7 Method of Measurement ..................................................... 134
4.14.3.8 Payment .............................................................................. 134
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
PART FOUR: BITUMINOUS CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 4.01 - BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

4.01.1 DESCRIPTION. Bituminous materials shall be manufactured from crude

petroleum. They shall be free from any residues obtained by the artificial distillation of
coal, coal tar, or paraffin and shall be homogeneous. They shall include the following
types:

1. Paving grade bituminous material

2. Liquid bituminous material
3. Emulsified bituminous material
4. Latex modified emulsified bituminous materials
5. Polymer modified paving grade bituminous materials

4.01.2 GRADES.

4.01.2.1 Paving Grade Bituminous Materials. Paving grade bituminous materials

shall be classified based on viscosity or penetration of original bitumen. The grades of
bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements set forth in Table 4.01-1. The
grade of bituminous material to be used shall be specified in these General
Specifications or in the Special Specifications.

4.01.2.2 Liquid Bituminous Materials. Liquid bituminous materials shall be

medium curing and rapid curing conforming to the requirements set forth in Tables 4.01-
2 and 4.01-3. The grade of liquid bituminous material to be used shall be specified in
these General Specifications or in the Special Specifications.

4.01.2.3 Emulsified Bituminous Materials. Emulsified bituminous materials shall

be composed of a bituminous material uniformly emulsified with water and an
emulsifying or stabilizing agent and shall conform to the requirements set forth in Tables
4.01-4 and 4.01-5. The grade of the emulsified bituminous material to be used shall be
specified in these General Specifications or in the Special Specifications.

Use of emulsified asphalt, storage considerations and handling requirements shall

be as specified in Circular No. 600, dated 12 Rabi II 1407H, issued by the Ministry.

4.01.2.4 Latex Modified Emulsified Bituminous Materials. Latex modified

emulsified bituminous materials shall conform to the grade specified in the Special
Specifications as set forth in Table 4.01-6.

4.01.2.5 Polymer Modified Paving Grade Bituminous Materials. Polymer

modified paving grade bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements specified
in the Special Specifications.

4.01.3 MANUFACTURE. Bituminous materials shall not be heated during the process
of its manufacture or during construction so as to cause damage to the materials as
evidenced by the formation of carbonized particles.

1
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Rapid curing liquid bituminous materials, designated by the letters RC, shall consist
of a bituminous material blended or fluxed with naphtha.

Medium curing liquid bituminous materials, designated by the letters MC, shall
consist of a bituminous material blended or fluxed with kerosene.

Emulsified bituminous material shall consist of a bituminous material emulsified with

an emulsifying agent and dispersed in water. The emulsified bituminous materials shall
be homogeneous for a period of not less than thirty (30) days after delivery when
thoroughly mixed.

4.01.4 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURES FOR BITUMINOUS MATERIALS. Bituminous

materials will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested
Conformance," in these General Specifications subject to the following:

4.01.4.1 Shipping Container. Before loading, the manufacturer shall examine the
shipping container and remove all remnants of previous cargos that may contaminate
the material to be loaded.

4.01.4.2 Delivery Ticket. The manufacturer shall furnish with each shipment two
(2) copies of the delivery ticket containing the following:

Consignees
Project number
Grade
Net liters
Net weight
Type and amount of antistripping agent
Identification number (truck, car tank, et.)
Destination
Date
Loadingtemperature
Specific gravity at 60 oF (15.6 oC)

4.01.4.3 Certificate of Compliance. The manufacturer shall deliver a signed

Certificate of Compliance to cover the quality and quantity of material and the condition
of container for each shipment. Test results shall be provided either with the shipment
or within one week after shipment.

Bituminous materials may be used prior to sampling and testing when a Certificate
of Compliance is furnished by the manufacturer stating that the bituminous material, at
the time of loading, conformed to all specified requirements and that the shipping
container was clean and contained no contaminating residue. This Certificate of
Compliance shall reference the lot and identify the test numbers representing the lot.

Bituminous materials furnished without a Certificate of Compliance should not be

introduced into the work until the Contractor has had sufficient time to sample and test
the delivered materials.

2
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.01.4.4 Acceptance Sampling Procedures. The Contractor shall obtain
acceptance samples of bituminous material according to AASHTO T40 at the applicable
point of acceptance as follows:

1. Bituminous material used in direct application on the road. Samples shall be

taken from each shipping container at the time of discharge into distributors or other
conveyances on the project.

2. Bituminous material initially discharged into storage tanks on the project.

Samples shall be taken from the line between the storage tank and the distributor or the
mixing plant after each delivery. Samples shall be taken after a sufficient period of
circulation has taken place to ensure samples are representative of the material in the
storage tank.

3. The manufacturer of bituminous materials shall test all materials produced and
the test results retained for reference. The Contractor, under the supervision of the
Engineer, shall sample each shipment of bituminous material delivered to a bituminous
concrete mixing plant, bituminous treatment production project, bituminous emulsion
treated base production project or other project requiring the incorporation of bituminous
materials. The samples shall be numbered consecutively and identified by project, type
and grade of bituminous material, date of delivery and use. All samples shall be tested
for conformance with the General and Special Specifications.

Work in which bituminous materials failed to conform to the specifications shall be

rejected. Rejected bituminous materials shall be immediately removed from the work,
including all portions of the work in which said rejected bituminous materials were
placed, and the Contractor shall replace rejected materials with specification materials
at his sole expense.

4.01.5 MEASUREMENT. Unless specified in the Special Specifications and listed in

the Bill of Quantities bituminous materials shall be considered subsidiary and no
measurements shall be made.

4.01.6 PAYMENT. Unless specified in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill
of Quantities, bituminous materials shall be considered as subsidiary to the work being
performed and full compensation for furnishing bituminous materials shall be included
in the contract unit prices and payment for the work performed in accordance with the
specifications.

When specified in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities,
payment will be made at the contract unit price per each item listed in the Bill of
Quantities.

Such prices and payments shall cover and be full compensation for equipment,
labor, tools and incidentals necessary for furnishing bituminous materials as specified
in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

3
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 4.01-1A
SPECIFICATIONS FOR BITUMINOUS MATERIAL GRADED BY VISCOSITY

VISCOSITY GRADE

AASHTO AC-2.5 AC-5 AC-10 AC-20 AC-30 AC-40

TESTS Test
Method

Viscosity, 60 C(140 F.), poises T-202 250+/-50 500 +/-100 1000 +/-200 2000 +/- 400 3000 +/- 600 4000 +/- 800

Viscosity,135 C(275 F), CS minimum T-201 125 175 250 300 350 400
Penetration, 25 C (77 F),100g., 5 sec. T-49 220 140 80 60 50 40
Minimum
Flash Point, COC, C (F) minimum T-48 163(325) 177(350) 219(425) 232(450) 232(450) 232(450)
Solubility in trichloroethylene, percent T-44 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0
Minimum

Tests on residue from Thin-Film Oven Test:

Loss on heating percent maximum (optional) T-240 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Viscosity, 60 C (140 F), poises-maximum T-202 1000 2000 4000 8000 12000 16000
Ductiility,25 C (77 F)5cm per minute cm- T-51 100 100 75 50 40 25
minimum. (Note 1)

Spot Test (when and as specified

(see Note 2) with):
Standard naphtha solvent Negative for all grades
Naphtha-xylene solvent, percent xylene Negative for all grades
Heptane-xylene solvent, percent xylene Negative for all grades

Note 1: If ductility is less than 100, material will be accepted if ductility at 15.6 C (60 F) is 100 minimum.

Note 2: The use of the spot test is optional. When it is specified, the Engineer shall indicate whether the standard naphtha solvent, the naphtha-xylene
solvent, or the heptane-xylene solvent will be used in determining compliance with the requirement, and also, in the case of the xylene solvents, the percentage of
xylene to be used.

4
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.01-1B
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PENETRATION GRADED ASPHALT CEMENT

PENETRATION GRADE
40-50 60-70 85-100 120-150 200-300
TESTS AASHTO TESTMETHOD Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

Penetration at 25 C (77 F) 100 g, 5 sec. T49 40 50 60 70 85 100 120 150 200 300

Penetration Ratio, percent minimum (Note 1) 25 25 25 25 25 ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

Viscosity at 135 degrees C Kinematic T 201 240 200 170 ---- --- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
(minimum)

Flash point, Cleveland Open Cup oF T 48 450 ---- 450 ---- 450 ---- 425 ---- 350 ----

Ductility at 25 C (77 F) 5 cm per min, cm......... T 51 100 ---- 100 ---- 100 ---- 100 ---- ---- ----

Solubility in trichloroethylene percent T 44 99 ---- 99 ---- 99 ---- 99 ---- 99 ----

Thin film oven test, 1/8 in. (3.2 mm), 163 C

(325 F) 5 hour...
Loss on bearing, percent of original ---- 0.8 ---- 0.8 ---- 1.0 ---- 1.3 ---- 1.5
Penetration, of residue, percent of original 58 ---- 54 ---- 50 ---- 46 ---- 40 ----
Ductility of residue at 25 C (77 F), 5 cm per ---- ---- 50 ---- 75 ---- 100 ---- 100 ----
Min., cm...

Spot Test (when and as specified (see Note 2) T 102

With):
Standard naphtha solvent Negative for all grades
Naphtha-xylene solvent, percent xylene Negative for all grades
Heptane-xylene solvent, percent xylene Negative for all grades

Note 1: Penetration Ratio = Penetration at 4 degrees C, 200 gms, 60 seconds X 100

Penetration at 25 degrees C, 100 gms, 5 seconds

Note 2: The use of the spot test is optional. When it is specified, the Engineer shall indicate whether the standard naphtha solvent, the naphtha-xylene solvent, or the heptane-
xylene solvent will be used in determining compliance with the requirement, and also, in the case of the xylene solvents, the percentage of xylene to be used.

5
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.01-2A
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MEDIUM CURING (MC) LIQUID ASPHALTS
GRADES

AASHTO MC-30 MC-70 MC-250 MC-800 MC-3000

TESTS Test
Method Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

Kinematic Viscosity @ 60o C (140o F) - (see Note 1) centistokes T201 30 60 70 140 250 500 800 1600 3000 6000

Flash Point (Tag, open-cup), degrees C (F) T-79 38 ... 38 ... 66 ... 66 ... 66 ...
(100) (100) (150) (150) (150)

Water Percent T-55 ... 0.2 ... 0.2 ... 0.2 ... 0.2 ... 0.2

Distillation Test:
Distillate percentage by volume of total distillate to 360o C (680o F)

To 225o C (680o F) T-78 ... 25 0 20 0 10 ... ... ... ...

To 260o C (680o F) 40 70 20 60 15 55 0 35 0 15

To 315o C (680o F) 75 93 65 90 60 87 45 80 15 75

Residue from distillation to 360o C(680o F) volume percentage of 50 ... 55 ... 67 ... 75 ... 80 ...
sample by difference

Tests on residue from distillation:

Absolute visosity @ 60o C (140o F) - (See Note 4) poises T-49 300 1200 300 1200 300 1200 300 1200 300 1200

Ductility 5 cm/cm., cm. (See Note 2) T-51 100 ... 100 ... 100 ... 100 ... 100 ...

Solubility in Trichloroethylene, percent T-44 99.0 ... 99.0 ... 99.0 ... 99.0 ... 99.0 ...

Spot test (See Note 3) with:

Standard naptha T-102 Negative for all grades

Naptha - xylene solvent, - percent xylene Negative for all grades
Heptane - xylene solvent, - percent xylene Negative for all grades

NOTE 1. As an alternate, Saybolt Furol viscosities may be specified as follows: NOTE 3. The use of the spot test is optional. When specified, the Engineer shall indicate
Grade MC-70 -- Furol viscosity @ 50o C (122o F) -- 60 to 120 sec. whether the standard naptha solvent, the naptha xylene solvent, or the heptane xylene
Grade MC-30 -- Furol viscosity @ 25o C (77o F) -- 75 to 150 sec. solvent will be used in determining compliance with requirements, and also, in the case of
Grade MC-250 -- Furol viscosity @ 60o C (140o F) -- 125 to 250 sec. the xylene solvents, the percentage of xylene to be used.
Grade MC-800 -- Furol viscosity @ 82.2o C (180o F) -- 100 to 200 sec. NOTE 4. In lieu of viscosity of the residue, the specifying agency, at its option, can
Grade MC-3000 -- Furol viscosity @ 82.2o C (180o F) – 300 to 600 sec. specify penetration 100 g.; 5s @ 25o C (77o F) of 120 to 250 for Grades MC-30, MC-
NOTE 2. If the ductility @ 25o C (77o F) is less than 100, the material will be acceptable 70,MC-250, MC-800, and MC-3000. However, in no case will both be required.
if its ductility @ 15.5o C (60o F) is more than 100.

6
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.01-2B
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MEDIUM-CURING (MC) LIQUID ASPHALTS

GRADES
AASHO TEST
TESTS METHOD MC-0 MC-1 MC-2 MC-3 MC-4 MC-5

Flash Point (Open Tag), degrees C (F) T 79 38+ (100+) 38+ (100+) 66+ (150+) 66+ (150+) 66+ (150+) 66+ (150+)

Furol Viscosity at 25 degrees C, seconds 75-150

Furol Viscosity at 50 degrees C, seconds 75-150

Furol Viscosity at 60 degrees C, seconds T 72 100-200 250-500

Furol Viscosity at 82.5 degrees C, seconds 125-250 300-600

Distillation:

Distillate (percent of total) distillate to 360

degrees C:

To 190 degrees C 0-25 0-20 0-10 0-5 0 0

To 225 degrees C T 78 40-70 25-65 15-55 5-40 0-30 0-20

To 315.6 degrees C 75-93 70-90 60-87 55-85 40-80 20-75

Residue from distillation to 350 degrees C, volume 50+ 60+ 67+ 73+ 78+ 82+
percent by difference

Tests on Residue from Distillation:

Penetration, 25 degrees C, 100 grams, T 49 120-300 120-300 120-300 120-300 120-300 120-300
5 seconds

Ductility, 25 degrees C,(1) centimeters T 51 100+ 100+ 100+ 100+ 100+ 100+

Solubility in Carbon Tetrachloride, percent T 44 99.5+ 99.5+ 99.5+ 99.5+ 99.5+ 99.5+

Temperature for Application by Spraying, in 25-65 50-80 65-105 80-120 90-135 105-150
degrees C

General Requirements The materials shall be free from water.

(1)
If penetration of residue is more than two hundred (200) and its ductility at 25 degrees C is less than one hundred (100) the material will be acceptable if its ductility at 15.6 degrees
C is one hundred plus (100+).

7
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.01-3A
SPECIFICATIONS FOR RAPID CURING (RC) LIQUID ASPHALTS
AASHTO RC-70 RC-250 RC-800 RC-3000
TEST
TESTS METHOD Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

Kinematic Viscosity @ 60o C (140o F) - (see Note 1) centistokes T-201 70 140 250 500 800 1600 3000 6000

Flash Point (Tag, open-cup), degrees C (F) T-79 ... ... 27 ... 27 ... 27 ...
(80) (80) (80)

Water Percent T-55 ... 0.2 ... 0.2 ... 0.2 ... 0.2

Distillation Test:
Distillate percentage by volume of total distillate to 360o C (680o F)

to 190o C (374o F) 10 ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

to 225o C (680o F) 50 ... 35 ... 15 ... ... ...

to 260o C (680o F) T-78 70 ... 60 ... 45 ... 25 ...

to 315o C (680o F) 85 ... 80 ... 75 ... 70 ...

Residue from distillation to 360o C(680o F) volume percentage of 55 ... 65 ... 75 ... 80 ...
sample by difference

Tests on residue from distillation: 600 2400 600 2400 600 2400 600 2400
Absolute viscosity @ 60o C (140o F) poises - (See Note 3 T-202
AASHTO T-49)

Ductility 5 cm/min at 25o C (77o F) T-51 100 ... 100 ... 100 ... 100 ...

Solubility in Trichloroethylene, percent T-44 99.0 ... 99.0 ... 99.0 ... 99.0 ...

Spot test (See Note 2) with:

Standard naphtha Negative for all grades

Naphtha – xylene solvent, - percent xylene T-102 Negative for all grades
Heptane – xylene solvent, - percent xylene Negative for all grades

NOTE 1. As an alternate, Saybolt Furol viscosities may be specified as follows: NOTE 2. The use of the spot test is optional. When specified, the
Grade RC-70 -- Furol viscosity @ 50o C (122o F) -- 60 to 120 sec. Engineer shall indicate whether the standard naphtha solvent, the
Grade RC-250 -- Furol viscosity @ 60o C (140o F) -- 125 to 250 sec. naphtha xylene solvent, or the heptane xylene solvent will be used in
Grade RC-800 -- Furol viscosity @ 82.2o C (180o F) -- 100 to 200 sec. determining compliance with requirements, and also, in the case of the
Grade RC-3000 -- Furol viscosity @ 82.2o C (180o F) -- 300 to 600 sec. xylene solvents, the percentage of xylene to be used.
8
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.01-3B
SPECIFICATIONS FOR RAPID-CURING (RC) LIQUID ASPHALTS

GRADES

AASHO TEST
TESTS METHOD RC-0 RC-1 RC-2 RC-3 RC-4 RC-5

Flash Point (Open Tag), degrees C (F) T 79 ---- ---- 27+ (80+) 27+ (80+) 27+ (80+) 27+ (80+)

Furol Viscosity at 25 degrees C, seconds 75-150

Furol Viscosity at 50 degrees C, seconds 75-150

Furol Viscosity at 60 degrees C, seconds T 72 100-200 250-500

Furol Viscosity at 82.5 degrees C, seconds 125-250 300-600

Distillation:

Distillate (percent of total) distillate to 15+ 10+

360 degrees C:

To 190 degrees C 55+ 50+ 40+ 25+ 8+

To 225 degrees C T 78 75+ 70+ 65+ 55+ 40+ 25+

To 315.6 degrees C 90+ 88+ 87+ 83+ 80+ 70+

Residue from distillation to 350 degrees C, volume 50+ 60+ 67+ 73+ 78+ 82+
percent by difference

Tests on Residue from Distillation:

Penetration, 25 degrees C, 100 grams, 5 T 49 80-120 80-120 80-120 80-120 80-120 80-120
Seconds

Ductility, 25 degrees C,(1) centimeters T 51 100+ 100+ 100+ 100+ 100+ 100+

Solubility in Carbon Tetrachloride, percent T 44 99.5+ 99.5+ 99.5+ 99.5+ 99.5+ 99.5+

Temperature for Application by Spraying, in 25-50 50-80 65-105 80-95 95-120 105-135
degrees C

General Requirements The materials shall be free from water.

9
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.01-4A
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANIONIC EMULSIFIED ASPHALT

TYPE RAPID-SETTING

RS-1 RS-2

GRADE Min. Max. Min. Max.

Tests on emulsions:
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol @ 77 o F (25 o C), s 20 100 ... ...
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol @ 122 o F (50 o C), s ... ... 75 400
Storage stability test, 24-h, % ... 1
Demulsibility, a 35 ml, 0.02 N CaCl2, % 60 ... 60 ...
Coating ability and water resistance:
Coating, dry aggregate ... ...
Coating, after spraying ... ...
Coating, wet aggregate ... ...
Coating, after spraying ... ...
Cement mixing test, % ... ...
Sieve test, % ... 0.1 ... 0.10
0
Residue by distillation, % 55 ... 63 ...
Tests on residue from distillation test:
Penetration, 77 o F (25 o C), 100 g, 5s 100 200 100 200
Ductility, 77 o F (25 o C), 5 cm/min, cm 40 ... 40 ...
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 97.5 ... 97.5 ...
Float test, 140 o F (60 o C), s ... ... ... ...
Typical Applications b surface surface
treatment, treatment,
penetration penetration
macadam, macadam,
sand seal coarse
coat, tack aggregate
coat, mulch seal coat
(single and
multiple)

a
The demulsibility test shall be made within 30 days from date of shipment.
b
These typical applications are for use only as a guide for selecting and using
the emulsion for pavement construction and maintenance.

10
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.01-4B
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANIONIC EMULSIFIED ASPHALT

TYPE MEDIUM - SETTING

MS-1 MS-2 MS-2h HFMS-1 HFMS-2 HFMS-2h HFMS-2s

GRADE
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max

Tests on emulsions:

Viscosity, Saybold Furol @ 77 F (25 C), s 20 100 100 ... 100 ... 20 100 100 ... 100 ... 50 ...

Viscosity, Saybolt Furol @ 122 F (50 C), s ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

Storage stability test, 24-h, % ... 1 ... 1 ... 1 ... 1 ... 1 ... 1 ... 1
a
Demulsibility, 35ml, 0.02 N CaC12, % ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

Coating ability and water resistance:

Coating, dry aggregate good good good good good good Good good good good good good good good
Coating, after spraying fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair
Coating, wet aggregate fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair
Coating, after spraying fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair fair

Cement mixing test, % ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

Sieve test, % ... 0.10 ... 0.10 ... 0.10 ... 0.10 ... 0.10 ... 0.10 ... 0.10

Residue by distillation, % 55 ... 65 ... 65 ... 65 ... 65 ... 65 ... 65 ...

Test on residue from distillation text:

Penetration, 77 F (25 C), 100 g, 5s 100 200 200 100 200 40 90 100 200 100 200 40 90 200

Ductility, 77 F (25 C), 5 cm/min, cm 40 ... 40 ... 40 ... 40 ... 40 ... 40 ... 40 ...

Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 97.5 ... 97.5 ... 97.5 ... 97.5 ... 97.5 ... 97.5 ... 97.5 ...

Float test, 140 F (60 C), s ... ... ... ... ... ... 1200 ... 1200 ... 1200 ... 1200 ...

Typical Applications b cold plant mix, cold plant mix, coarse cold plant mix, cold plant mix, cold plant mix, cold plant mix, hot dense-graded
road mix, sand aggregate seal coat hot mix, coarse road mix, sand coarse aggregate plant mix, coarse cold plant mix
seal coat, crack (single and multiple), aggregate seal seal coat, crack seal coat (single and aggregate seal coat and road mix
treatment, tack crack treatment, road coat (single and treatment, tack multiple), crack (single and multiple), stockpile mix,
coat mix, tack coat, sand multiple crack coat treatment road mix, crack treatment road crack treatment,
seal coat treatment, road tack coat, and seal mix, tack coat patching mix
mix track coat

11
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 4.01-4C
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANIONIC EMULSIFIED ASPHALT

TYPE RAPID-SETTING
SS-1 SS-1h

GRADE Min. Max. Min. Max.

Tests on emulsions:
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol @ 77 o F (25 o C), s 20 20 100
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol @ 120 o F (50 o C), s ... ... ... ...
Storage stability test, 24-h, % ... 100 ... 1
Demulsibility, a 35 ml, 0.02 N CaCl2, % ... ... ... ...
Coating ability and water resistance:
Coating, dry aggregate ... ...
Coating, after spraying ... ...
Coating, wet aggregate ... ...
Coating, after spraying ... ...
Cement mixing test, % ... 2.0 ... 2.0
Sieve test, % ... 0.10 ... 0.10
Residue by distillation, % 57 ... 57 ...
Tests on residue from distillation test:

Penetration, 77 o F (25 o C), 100 g, 5s 100 200 40 90

Ductility, 77 o F (25 o C), 5 cm/min, cm 40 ... 40 ...
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 97.5 ... 97.5 ...
Float test, 140 o F (60 o C), s ... ... ... ...
Typical Applications b cold plant mix, road mix, slurry seal
coat, tack coat, fog seal, dust layer,
mulch

a
The demulsibility test shall be made within 30 days from date of shipment.
b
These typical applications are for use only as a guide for selecting and using the
emulsion for pavement construction and maintenance.

12
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents TABLE 4.01-5
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CATIONIC EMULSIFIED ASPHALT

TYPE RAPID SETTING MEDIUM SETTING SLOW SETTING

CRS-1 CRS-2 CMS-2 CMS-2h CSS-1 CSS-1h

GRADE Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max

Tests on emulsions:

Viscosity, Saybold Furol @ 77 F (25 C), s ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 20 100 20 100

Viscosity, Saybolt Furol @ 122 F (50 C), s 20 100 100 400 50 450 50 450 ... ... ... ...

Storage stability test, 24-h, % a ... 1 ... 1 ... 1 ... 1 ... 1 ... 1

Demulsibility 35ml, 0.8% sodium diocytl suffosucinate,% 40 ... 40. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

Classification test Passes Passes

Coating ability and water resistance:

Coating, dry aggregate good good
Particle charge test positive positive positive positive positiveb positiveb

Sieve test, % ... 0.10 ... 0.10 ... 0.10 ... 0.10 ... 0.10 ... 0.10

Cement mixing test, % Distillation: ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2.0 ... 2.0
Oil distillate, by volume of emulsion, %
Test on residue from distillation text:

Penetration, 77 F (25 C), 100 g, 5s 100 250 100 250 100 250 40 90 100 250 40 90

Ductility, 77 F (25 C), 5 cm/min, cm 40 ... 40 ... 40 ... 40 ... 40 ... 40 ...

Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 97.5 ... 97.5 ... 97.5 ... 97.5 ... 97.5 ... 97.5 ...

Typical Applications c surface treatment, surface treatment, cold plant mix, coarse cold plant mix, hot plant cold plant mix, road mix, slurry seal coat, tack
penetration macadam, penetration macadam, aggregate seal coat mix, coarse aggregate coat, fog seal, dust layer, mulch
a
The 24 hour storage stability test results do not necessarily predict satisfactory 5 day settlement test results. NOTE: The revised specification is identified as
b
If the particle charge test result is inconclusive, material having a maximum pH value of 6.7 will be acceptable. interim Specification M 208-811.
c
These typical applications are for use only as a guide for selecting and using the emulsion for pavement construction and maintenance.

13
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.01-6
LATEX MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MATERIAL

ANIONIC CATIONIC

TESTS TEST METHOD LMRS-2H LMRS-2 LMCRS-2H LMCRS-2

Viscosity @ 50 o C MRDTM 424 75-300 sec. 75-300 sec.

(122 o F)
Sieve MRDTM 424 0.3% max. 0.3% max.
Settlement, 5 Days MRDTM 424 5% max. 5% max.
Demulsibility MRDTM 424 60% max. 40% max.
Storage Stability Test MRDTM 424 1% max. 1% max.
(1 Day)
Particle Charge MRDTM 424 - Positive
Ash Content ASTM D3723 0.2% max. 0.2% max.
Test on Residue
(by Drying):
Percent Residue CAL-331 65% min. 65% min.
Penetration @ 25 o C MRDTM 404 40-90 90-200 40-90 90-200
(77 o F) 1009, 5 sec.
Ductility @ 25 o C MRDTM 405 40 cm/min. 40 cm/min.
(77 o F) 5 cm/min..
Torsional Recovery CAL-332 18% min. 18% min.

NOTES:
1. The latex shall be added to either the asphalt or the emulsion at their locations of manufacture.
2. The latex may be either neoprene or a blend of butadiene and styrene.
3. Unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer, a sample of the latex modified asphaltic emulsion shall be
taken by the inspector from the spray bar of the distributor truck at mid-load. The sample shall be taken
in a half-gallon plastic container.
4. The latex modified asphaltic emulsion may be stored in heated circulating tanks at temperatures
between
60 o C and 80 o C for a period not to exceed 7 days.
5. The temperature of the latex-modified asphaltic emulsion at the time of application shall be between
55 o C and 80 o C.

14
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 4.02 - BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT, TACK COAT AND FOG SEAL

4.02.1 DESCRIPTION. This work consists of applying cut-back or emulsified

bituminous materials on previously constructed soil, aggregate, bituminous or concrete
surfaces within the lines shown on the plans, specified or established by the Engineer.

4.02.1.1 Prime Coat. A prime coat consists of applying a coat of cut-back

bituminous material to the surface of an untreated soil or aggregate or other surfaces
as shown on the plans and specified in the Special Specifications.

4.02.1.2 Tack Coat. A tack coat consists of applying a cut-back or emulsified

bituminous material to a primed surface, to an existing bituminous or Portland cement
concrete pavement to be overlaid, to the surface between layers of bituminous
pavement, to bridge decks, and to vertical edges of pavement, curbs and gutters, wing
walls, bridge abutments and other surfaces in contact with bituminous pavement.

4.02.1.3 Fog Seal. A fog seal consists of applying a light application of slow-setting
emulsified bituminous material diluted with water to an existing bituminous surface.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Bituminous Prime Coat
Bituminous Tack Coat
Bituminous Fog Seal

4.02.2 MATERIALS. Bituminous material shall conform to the requirements in Section

4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications, as follows:

4.02.2.1 Prime Coat. MC-70 or MC-250 conforming to the requirements in Table

4.01-2 unless a different grade is specified in the Special Specifications.

4.02.2.2 Tack Coat. RC-70 conforming to the requirements in Table 4.01-3A, SS-
1h emulsified bituminous material conforming to the requirements in Table 4.01-4C, or
CSS-1h emulsified bituminous material conforming to the requirements in Table 4.01-5
unless a different grade is specified in the Special Specifications.

4.02.2.3 Fog Seal SS-1, SS-1h, CSS-1 or CSS-1h emulsified asphalt conforming
to the requirements in Table 4.01-4C or Table 4.01-5 unless a different grade is
specified in the Special Specifications.

4.02.2.4 Blotting Sand. Natural sand, manufactured sand, or combinations thereof

that are free from organic matter or clay, having a grading consisting of one hundred
percent (100%) passing the 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve and not more than five percent
(5%) passing the 0.150 millimeter (No. 100) sieve.

4.02.3 APPLICATION RATES. Application rates for Prime Coat, Tack Coat, Fog Seal
and Blotting Sand shall be within the following ranges as approved by the Engineer:

15
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
1. Prime coat. The approved application rate shall be determined from test sections
constructed using specified materials within the range 0.50 to 1.75 liters per square
meter.

2. Tack coat. The approved application rate shall be within the range 0.10 to 0.30
liters per square meter for RC-70 and 0.20 to 0.50 liters per square meter, prior to
dilution with additional water, for SS-1h and CSS-1h emulsified bituminous material.

3. Fog Seal. The approved undiluted application rate shall be determined from test
sections constructed using specified materials with the range of 0.30 to 0.70 liters per
square meter depending on the conditions of the existing surface.

4. Blotter sand. As needed to prevent bituminous material adhering to vehicle tires.

4.02.4 EQUIPMENT. The contractor shall furnish and operate sufficient equipment to
complete the work within the Contract time in accordance with his Program of Work as
approved by the Engineer. Said equipment shall include rotary type power brooms,
aggregate spreaders, rollers, bituminous material distributors, and equipment for
heating bituminous material.

Bituminous material shall be applied using a truck-mounted distributor capable of

uniformly spraying bituminous material full lane widths.

Sand Spreader. Blotter sand shall be spread from a truck-mounted hopper

equipped with controls to deliver the sand in a uniform application at specified rates to
the surface treated with a prime coat. Sand may be spread by hand on isolated
bleeding spots.

4.02.5 CONSTRUCTION.

4.02.5.1 Preparation of Surfaces. The surface to receive a prime coat,

immediately prior to application of the prime coat, shall conform to the specified
compaction and elevation tolerance and be free of organic and other deleterious
material. When deemed necessary by the Engineer, the soil and aggregate surface
shall receive a light application of water to reduce the surface tension and improve
penetration of the prime into the surface.
The surface to receive a tack coat or a fog seal, immediately prior to application of
the tack coat or fog seal, shall conform to all requirements of the specifications and be
free of dust, organic matter and other deleterious material. Where tack coat or fog seal
is applied to bridge decks, joints shall be cleaned and filled as specified in the Special
Specifications.

4.02.5.2 Preparation of Bituminous Material. The bituminous material shall be

uniform throughout the distributor tank and be heated to the application temperatures
as follows:

MC-70, RC-70 - 50 to 80 degrees Celsius

MC-250 - 75 to 100 degrees Celsius
SS-1h, CSS-1h - 20 to 70 degrees Celsius
SS-1, SS-1h - 20 to 70 degrees Celsius

16
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Prior to application, SS-1h and CSS-1h may be diluted with additional water in the
proportion 1:1, or other proportions as approved by the Engineer.

4.02.5.3 Test Sections and Selection of Application Rates. The Contractor shall
establish application rates for prime coat and fog seal material based on the results
from test sections. A test section shall be at least three (3) meters wide by one hundred
(100) meters long. Two (2) or more test sections shall be constructed for each grade
of bituminous material specified for use or used and every type of material to be prime
coated.

On the date scheduled or any day prior to beginning prime coating or fog sealing,
the Contractor shall apply two (2) or more rates of bituminous material to consecutive
test sections. When the test sections are completed, the prime coat or fog seal
operation shall be halted for a minimum of four (4) hours to allow the Engineer to
assess the suitability of the rates applied. Test sections receiving insufficient prime coat
or fog seal shall receive an additional application of prime coat when ordered by the
Engineer. Test sections receiving excess prime coat or fog seal shall be blotted with
sand when ordered by the Engineer.

The prime coat or fog seal application rate will be proposed by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer.

4.02.5.4 Application of Bituminous Material. The bituminous material coverage

shall be uniform without streaking or uncoated spots. When streaking occurs, as
determined by the Engineer, the application of bituminous material shall cease until
adjustments are made to the distributor and application procedures which will result in
elimination of streaking. Uncoated spots shall be coated using the hand held nozzle.

Traffic should not be permitted on surfaces which have been primed, tacked or
fogged until approved by the Engineer. Fog seal shall be allowed to penetrate
undisturbed for at least two (2) hours until the emulsified asphalt breaks and is
substantially absorbed into the existing surface. Remaining spots of excess asphalt
shall be lightly covered with blotter sand before opening the surface to traffic.

Asphaltic emulsion shall be reheated, if necessary, but at no time after loading into
a tank car or truck for transporting to the site of the work shall the temperature of the
emulsion be raised above seventy degrees Celsius (70o), unless permitted by the
Engineer. During all reheating operations the asphaltic emulsion shall be agitated to
prevent localized overheating.

4.02.5.5 Application of Blotting Sand. When deemed necessary by the Engineer,

after the bituminous material prime coat or fog seal has been applied for forty-eight (48)
hours, a light application of blotting sand shall be applied to those areas which have not
dried sufficiently to permit traffic to use the primed surface. Excess blotting sand shall
be swept from the primed surface before placement of any bituminous course.

4.02.5.6 Maintenance of Prime Coat. The Contractor shall maintain the prime coat
and coated surface until covered with a subsequent course of material. Additional
prime coat material and blotting sand shall be applied when ordered by the Engineer.

17
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.02.5.7 Emulsified Asphalt Fog Seal. Construction requirements for emulsified

asphalt applications, dilution requirements and rates of application, shall be as specified
in the HMM, Part 5, Section 2.04 - Surface Maintenance Techniques; Paragraphs A -
Introduction; and B - Fog Seal.

4.02.6 TRAFFIC CONTROL. While construction of a bituminous prime coat, tack coat
or fog seal is in progress, the treated surface of the roadway shall not be used by the
Contractor, his agents or others until the Engineer is satisfied that the treated surface
will not be damaged by traffic and has given approval for traffic to use the treated
surface.

The Contractor shall assure the safety and convenience of public traffic and protect
the residents and property owners adjacent to the project during all bituminous prime
coat, tack coat and fog seal operations. He shall erect and maintain signs, barricades
and other traffic control devices and shall take effective action to exclude traffic of any
description from the roadway surface for as long as may be required in the judgement
of the Engineer. When traffic is restricted to a one-way basis, the Contractor shall
provide such flagmen and pilot cars as deemed necessary for the protection of traffic
and the treated surface. Traffic may be detoured around the construction in
conformance with detailed detour plans including layout, signing, marking and other
traffic control devices approved by the Engineer. Detours shall be properly constructed
and maintained throughout the period traffic uses the detour. When it is necessary to
provide for traffic across the prime coat before the bituminous material has been
applied for forty-eighty (48) hours, the crossing shall be blotted with sand to the extent
approved by the Engineer before the crossing is opened to traffic. Necessary crossings
of a tack coated surface shall be retacked just prior to the construction of the
subsequent layer to the satisfaction and approval of the Engineer. When traffic is
permitted on a blotted prime coated surface, the Contractor shall effectively limit vehicle
speeds to thirty (30) kilometers per hour for the first two (2) hours of use.

All traffic control work will be done in accordance with Section 9.02, "Traffic Control
through Work Zones," in these General Specifications.

4.02.7 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Bituminous material for prime coat, tack coat and
fog seal shall not be applied to any surface until the air and surface temperatures are
at least fifteen degrees Celsius (15o C.) and rising or during rain, dust or sand storms.

4.02.8 MEASUREMENT. Bituminous material for prime coat, tack coat and fog seal
shall be measured in liters for the areas sealed within the limits shown on the plans,
specified in the Special Specifications or ordered by the Engineer. Prime coat, tack
coat and fog seal material placed outside authorized limits shall not be measured.

Sand blotter shall not be measured for payment.

4.02.9 PAYMENT. Bituminous tack coat will not be paid for directly as it is to be
considered subsidiary to the pay item for the surface that is being tacked unless
otherwise stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities. The
amount of completed and accepted prime coat and fog seal work as measured shall be

18
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
paid for at the contract unit prices, or adjusted contract unit prices, in the Bill of
Quantities.

Such price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for completing the work as specified in
Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

40201 Bituminous Prime Coat Liter

4020101 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade MC-30, or MC-70, or MC-250 Liter

4020102 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade MC-1, or MC-2, or MC-3 Liter

4020103 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade RC-70, or RC-250 Liter

4020104 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade RC-1, or RC-2, or RC-3 Liter

4020105 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade RS-1, or RS-2 Liter

4020106 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade SS-1 or SS-1H Liter

4020107 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade CRS-1 or CRS-2 Liter

4020108 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade CMS-2 or CMS-2H Liter

4020109 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade CSS-1 or CSS-1H Liter

4020110 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade___ Liter

40202 Bituminous Tack Coat Liter

4020201 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade RC-70 or RC-250 Liter

4020202 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade RC-1 or RC-2 Liter

4020203 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade RS-1 or RS-2 Liter

4020204 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade SS-1 or SS-1H Liter

4020205 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade CRS-1 or CRS-2 Liter

4020206 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade CMS-2 or CMS-2H Liter

4020207 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade CSS-1 or CSS-1H Liter

4020208 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade ___ Liter

40203 Bituminous Fog Seal Liter

4020301 Bituminous Fog Seal, SS-1 or SS-1H Liter

4020302 Bituminous Fog Seal, CSS-1 or CSS-1H Liter

4020303 Bituminous Fog Seal, Grade ___ Liter

19
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 4.03 - BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS

4.03.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of placing single or double applications
of bituminous material and aggregate chips or screenings in accordance with the lines
shown on the plans, these specifications, the Special Specifications and as directed by
the Engineer.

BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENTS IN THE BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Bituminous Seal Coat
Single Bituminous Surface Treatment
Double Bituminous Surface Treatment
Precoating Aggregates

The bituminous surface treatment to be applied will be shown on the plans or

specified in the Special Specifications.

Bituminous Seal Coat - CM-B and CM-C, shall consist of one (1) application of
bituminous material and one (1) application of aggregate screenings to an existing
bituminous pavement.

Single Bituminous Surface Treatment - CM-A and CM-A-1, shall consist of one (1)
or more applications of bituminous material and one (1) application of aggregate
screenings to an aggregate subbase or base course.

Double Bituminous Surface Treatment shall consist of two (2) or more applications
of bituminous material and two (2) applications of aggregate screenings to an
aggregate subbase or base course.

4.03.2 MATERIALS.

4.03.2.1 Bituminous Material. The type and grade of bituminous material to be

applied for construction of bituminous surface treatment will be shown on the plans or
specified in the Special Specifications and include one (1) or more of the following:

1. Cut-back Grades. MC-70, MC-250, RC-800 conforming to the requirements in

Tables 4.01-2 and 4.01-3, in Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in these General
Specifications.

2. Emulsified Grades. SS-1h, CSS-1h, RS-1, CRS-1, RS-2, CRS-2, conforming to

the requirements in Tables 4.01-4 and 4.01-5, or latex-modified rapid set emulsions
(LMRS-2H, LMRS-2, LMCRS- 2H, LMCRS-2) conforming to the requirements in Table
4.01-6, Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications.

3. Asphalt Cement Grades and Modified Asphalt Cement. The material shall
conform to the requirements in Table 4.01-1, in Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials,"
in these General Specifications for the Grade(s) specified in the Special Specifications.

4.03.2.2 Changes in Grade of Bituminous Materials. At any time during the

progress of the work, the Engineer may order the use of other grades of bituminous

20
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
materials in substitution of the grades specified in the Special Specifications if, in his
judgement, the results contemplated by the specifications will be better attained
thereby.

No change in the unit price set forth in the Bill of Quantities will be permitted when
such a substitution is ordered.

4.03.2.3 Aggregate. Aggregate chips or screenings to be applied for bituminous

surface treatment shall be hard durable particles or fragments of crushed stone,
crushed slag, or crushed gravel. The grading will be designated in the Special
Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities and include one (1) or more of the
following gradations:
Grading Designation I II III IV V VI
Sieve Size
25 mm (1 inch) 100
19.0 mm (3/4 inch) 55- 100 100 100
85
12.5 mm (1/2 inch) 0-15 45-65 90-100 90- 100
100
9.5 mm (3/8 inch) - 10-30 30-60 - 85-100 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 0-2 0-10 0-10 10-30 10-30 85-100
2.36 mm (No. 8) 0-3 0-3 - 0-10 10-40
2.00 mm (No. 10) 0-3 0-5 0-10
0.300 mm (No. 50) 0-5

In addition to the grading requirements, the aggregate shall conform to the following:

1. Abrasion Loss, MRDTM 309, Percent - 30 Max.

2. Sodium Sulfate Soundness, MRDTM 311, Percent - 10 Max.
3. Percent Fracture, 1 Face, Min. - 90 Min.
4. Coating and Stripping, MRDTM 413, Percent - 95 Min.

Percent fracture shall be determined for the material retained on the 2.36 millimeter
(No. 8) sieve. The fractured face shall have a minimum dimension from edge to edge
across the fractured face which is not less than one-third (1/3) the minimum dimension
of the aggregate particle.

The aggregate screenings shall be clean, uniform in quality, and free from organic
and other deleterious materials. The portion of aggregate retained on the 2.36 mm
(No. 8) sieve shall not have more than one tenth of one percent (0.1%) adherent
material by washing.

4.03.2.4 Mineral Fillers. Mineral fillers shall be either Portland cement, blended
hydraulic cement or lime conforming to the following requirements:

21
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Materials Requirement

Portland Cement, Type I or II ASTM C-150

Blended Hydraulic Cement, Type IP ASTM C-595
Lime, Type N or S ASTM C-207

When required, the amount of mineral filler used shall be between one and two
percent (1 - 2%) of the weight of the aggregate, with the exact amount to be stated in
the Job Mix Formula.

4.03.2.5 Chemical Admixtures and Asphalt Modifiers. The types and amounts
of chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers used shall be limited to those listed in the
Special Specifications or proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Ministry's
Research and Materials Department to establish compliance with the job mix formula
(JMF) requirements contained in Subsection 4.05.3, "Proportioning Bituminous
Concrete Mixtures," in these General Specifications.

All chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers including anti-stripping additives and

polymers shall be thoroughly mixed and uniformly combined with the bituminous
material.

4.03.2.6 Precoating Material. Materials used for precoating aggregate to promote

adhesion may be either prepared material ready for use or field produced. Prepared
precoating materials include bitumen based materials and oil based materials.

Bitumen based materials for precoating include medium curing cutback bitumen and
special refinery prepared cutback bitument which may include an adhesion agent. Oil
based materials for precoating usually comprise an adhesion agent dissolved in a
petroleum oil such as distillate.

Field prepared precoating materials usually include adhesion agents which may be
designed for dilution in petroleum oil such as distillate, kerosene, etc., or in water. The
proportion of adhesion agent used is generally one percent (1%) by volume in both
cases.

Surface active adhesion agents are generally of the amine type derived from fatty
acids.

4.03.3 PROPORTIONING BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT MIXTURES.

4.03.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal. A proposed Job Mix Formula (JMF) shall be
formulated by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. The JMF
shall be prepared by the Contractor in precise compliance with procedures and
requirements set forth in the MRD Test Method 425.

The Contractor shall select his sources of aggregate and bituminous material and,
after sufficient quantities have been stockpiled or are available for use, obtain
representative samples of the materials and test to determine if they conform to the
requirements of these specifications. At least thirty (30) days before producing the

22
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
bituminous surface treatment, the Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer
detailed information for each mix which he proposes to furnish.

The information shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. The source and gradation of the aggregate for each mix to be furnished. If the
aggregate (coarse, fine, supplemental fine) is separated into two (2) or more sizes, the
information provided shall consist of gradations for all individual sizes, the proportions
of each individual size to be used, and the mathematically combined gradation for each
mix to be furnished. Such combined gradation shall meet the applicable grading
requirements shown in Paragraph 4.03.2.3, "Aggregate," in these General
Specifications and show the percentage passing each of the specified sieve sizes.

2. All pertinent materials test data for triplicate test specimens and a written
certification that the aggregates to be furnished conform to all of the quality
requirements specified in Paragraph 4.03.2.3, "Aggregate," in these General
Specifications.

3. Pertinent test data for triplicate test specimens and a written certification that the
bituminous materials, mineral fillers, chemical admixtures, asphalt modifers, and
precoating materials conform to the quality requirements specified in Subsection 4.03.2,
"Materials," in these General Specifications.

The durability of the bitumen to be used shall be determined in accordance with the
Australian Standard AS 2341.13 "Determination of Durability of Bitumen." The test
results shall be included with the Contractor's Job Mix Formula (J.M.F.) submission.

The test results shall be submitted in tabular form. The information shall include the
source and grade of bituminous material to be used and the recommended bituminous
material content for each mix. If a mineral or chemical admixture has been used, the
type and quantity shall be also stated for each mix.

The Engineer shall be provided access to the materials sampling and testing
operations at all times.

At the same time that the above information is provided, the Contractor shall supply
to the Engineer one hundred (100) kilogram samples of each individual aggregate size,
eight (8) liters of bituminous material and, when used, sufficient quantities of mineral
filler and chemical admixture, all representing the materials which the Contractor
proposes to furnish.

4.03.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula. The Engineer shall review the JMF to
determine that it contains all required information. If it does not contain all required
information, it shall be returned within seven (7) days to the Contractor for further action
and resubmission by the Contractor.

If the proposed, JMF contains all required information but fails to meet all of the
requirements specified, it shall not be accepted by the Engineer and will be returned to
the Contractor within fourteen (14) days. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to

23
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
the Engineer a new JMF conforming to the requirements specified and propose a new
date for beginning production of the bituminous surface treatment.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all the requirements of the specifications, he shall order the Contractor to construct
a two hundred (200) meter long field control strip. The Engineer shall evaluate the
control strip as to its constructability and the mix for conformance to the laboratory
tested JMF. Split samples of the mix and component raw materials along with the field
laboratory test results are to be sent to the Materials and Research Department's
Central Laboratory for testing. If the Engineer is not satisfied with the results of the
control strip, he shall state his objections in writing and request a revised JMF and a
new control strip. The control strip may only be left in place if the results are
satisfactory.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all requirements of the specifications and the control strip results are acceptable, he
will issue written acceptance to the Contractor to begin producing the proposed surface
treatment.

Production of the bituminous surface treatment shall not begin until the Engineer has
given written acceptance of the Job Mix Formula.

Acceptance of the JMF by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to produce the bituminous surface treatment conforming to all specified
requirements.

4.03.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions. The Contractor shall not alter his
methods of crushing, screening, blending, or stockpiling from that used to produce
materials for the approved JMF. Changes to the JMF will not be permitted without
retesting and resubmission of a proposed (revised) JMF in accordance with all the steps
in Paragraph 4.03.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in these General Specifications.

Should the Contractor change his source of supply of aggregate and grade of
bituminous materials, he shall furnish the new information and samples of materials, as
described in Paragraph 4.03.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal" as determined by the
Engineer to be necessary, at least twenty (20) days before their intended use. The
Engineer will deduct all job mix formula calculation costs for Contractor requested
changes to approval or additional job mix formula calculations.

At any time after the JMF is approved the Contractor may submit a new JMF for
approval by the Engineer. If the revised JMF is approved it shall become the approved
JMF.

4.03.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall furnish the proper type and operate
sufficient numbers of equipment to complete the work within the Contract time in
accordance with his Program of Work as approved by the Engineer. Said equipment
shall include rotary type power brooms, aggregate spreaders, rollers, bituminous
material distributors, and equipment for heating bituminous material.

24
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
The bituminous material shall be applied using a truck-mounted distributor capable
of spraying evenly heated asphalt through an adjustable full circulation spray bar up to
four and six-tenths (4.6) meters wide. It shall also have positive controls including
tachometer, thermometer pressure gage, volume measuring device on calibrated tank
to uniformly deposit asphalt over the full width at the required rate. Prior to beginning
any work specified in this section, and at all times during the performance of the work,
the Contractor shall demonstrate, in the presence of the Engineer, that the distributor
spray bar has been maintained and adjusted so that the nozzles provide a true triple
lap without ridges or voids, that all nozzles are functioning as intended and that the
distributor is capable of applying bituminous material within 0.08 liters per square meter
of the specified rate.

Aggregate spreaders shall be self-propelled and capable of spreading aggregate

uniformly to full lane widths.

Rollers shall be light self-propelled pneumatic-tired and two-axle smooth-drum

tandem steel rollers. The light self-propelled pneumatic-tired rollers shall be
constructed so that they may be loaded to provide a gross weight of at least forty (40)
kilograms per centimeter of width of tire tread. The tires on the front and rear axles
shall have wide smooth treads and shall be staggered to provide complete coverage
of the entire area over which the roller travels. The tires shall be inflated to a pressure
that has been approved by the Engineer and the pressure shall be reasonably uniform
in all tires. The Contractor shall provide a suitable gauge for determining air pressure
in the tires.

Two-axle tandem steel rollers shall be self-propelled and shall weigh not less than
seven (7) tons or more than eleven (11) tons. The power mechanism shall be capable
of propelling the roller smoothly and without jerking when starting, stopping, or reversing
directions, free from backlash, loose link motion, faulty steering mechanism and worn
king bolts. The steering mechanism shall have no lost motion, shall operate readily and
permit the roller to be directed on the alignment desired. The faces of all rolls shall be
smooth and free from defects which mar the finished road surface. Rollers shall be
equipped with water tanks and sprinkling devices which shall be used for wetting the
rolls to prevent adherence of the placed material. Other equipment necessary to
perform the work as specified shall be furnished and operated by the Contractor.

4.03.5 APPLICATION RATES FOR BITUMINOUS MATERIAL. The exact application

rates will be directed by the Engineer which, in his judgement, will provide the results
contemplated by the specifications.

4.03.5.1 Bituminous Seal Coat.

(Quantities Per Square Meter)

Bituminous Bituminous
Material Finished Material Aggregate Aggregate
Type and Grade Thickness Liters Grading Screenings-Kg.
CM-B RC-800 9 mm 1.10-1.70 V 10-14
RS-2,CRS-2 9 mm 1.20-1.80 V 10-14
LMRS-2H,LMRS-2,
LMCRS-2H,LMCRS-2 1.20-1.80 V 10-14

25
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
_____________________________________________________________________
CM-CRC-800 6 mm 0.70-1.20 VI 8-11
RS-2, CRS-2 6 mm 0.80-1.30 VI 8-11
LMRS-2H, LMRS-2
LMCRS-2H,LMCRS-12 6 mm 0.80-1.30 VI 8-11
_____________________________________________________________________

4.03.5.2 Single Bituminous Surface Treatment.

(Quantities Per Square Meter)

Bituminous Bituminous
Material Finished Material Aggregate Aggregate
Type and Grade Thickness Liters Grading Screenings-Kg.

CM-A RC-800 12mm 1.50-2.00 III 14-18

RS-2,CRS-2 12mm 1.60-2.20 III 14-18
LMRS-2H, LMRS-2,
LMCRS-2H,LMCRS-2 12mm 1.60-2.20 III 14-18
_____________________________________________________________________
CM-A-1 RC-800 16 mm 1.80-2.30 II 20-28
RS-2, CRS-2 16 mm 2.00-2.50 II 20-28
LMRS-2H, LMRS-2,
LMCRS-2H,LMCRS-2 16 mm 2.00-2.50 II 20-28
____________________________________________________________________

4.03.5.3 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment.

(Quantities Per Square Meter)

Bituminous Bituminous
Material Finished Material Aggregate Aggregate
Type and Grade Thickness Liters Grading Screenings-Kg.

Class A RC-800
1st Application 1.10-1.80 I 20-28
2nd Application 25mm 1.60-2.10 IV 12-16
_____________________________________________________________________
Class B RS-2, CRS-2, LMRS-2H,
LMRS-2, LMCRS-2H,LMCRS-2
1st Application 1.20-1.90 I 20-28
2nd Application 25mm 1.80-2.30 IV 12-16
_____________________________________________________________________

4.03.6 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Subject to the determination of the Engineer,

bituminous material shall not be applied during sand or dust storms, rainfall, or before
any imminent storms that might damage the construction. The Engineer shall have the
discretion as to whether the surface and materials are dry enough. The application of
any bituminous material to the prepared surface shall be restricted to the following
conditions:

26
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
1. The ground temperature shall be at least fifteen degrees Celsius (15 o C.) and the
air temperature at least fifteen degrees Celsius (15o C.) and rising, or,

2. The air temperature shall be at least twenty degrees Celsius (20 o C.) when falling
and the wind shall be less than ten (10) kilometers per hour as estimated by the
Engineer.

No bituminous material shall be applied which cannot be covered with aggregate

screenings one hour before darkness.

The Engineer may require the Contractor to delay application of bituminous material
until the atmospheric and roadway conditions are satisfactory.

4.03.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL. While construction of a bituminous surface treatment is

in progress, the treated surface of the roadway shall not be used by the Contractor, his
agents or others until the Engineer is satisfied that the treated surface will not be
damaged by traffic and has given approval for traffic to use the treated surface.

The Contractor shall assure the safety and convenience of public traffic and protect
the residents and property owners adjacent to the project during all bituminous surface
treatment operations. He shall erect and maintain signs, barricades and other traffic
control devices and shall take effective action to exclude traffic of any description from
the roadway surface for as long as may be required in the judgement of the Engineer.
When traffic is restricted to a one-way basis, the Contractor shall provide such flagmen
and pilot cars as deemed necessary for the protection of traffic and the treated surface.
Traffic may be detoured around the construction in conformance with detailed detour
plans including layout, signing, marking and other traffic control devices approved by
the Engineer. Detours shall be properly constructed and maintained throughout the
period traffic uses the detour. When it is necessary to provide for traffic across the
bituminous surface treatment, the crossing shall be blotted with sand to the extent
approved by the Engineer before the crossing is opened to traffic. All traffic control
work shall be in accordance with Section 9.02, "Traffic Control through Work Zones,"
in these General Specifications.

4.03.8 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

4.03.8.1 Preparation of Surfaces to Receive Bituminous Surface Treatments.

1. Untreated Surfaces. The surface to receive a bituminous surface treatment,

immediately prior to the first application of bituminous material, shall conform to the
specified compaction and surface elevation tolerance and be free of organic and other
deleterious material.

A prime coat shall be applied in accordance with the requirements of Section 4.02,
"Bituminous Prime Coat, Tack Coat and Fog Seal," in these General Specifications,
when application of a prime coat is shown on the plans or specified in the Special
Specifications, otherwise a prime coat will not be applied separately. Where a prime
coat is applied it shall be allowed to cure for a minimum period of forty-eight (48) hours
before proceeding with a second application of bituminous material.

27
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Treated Surfaces. The existing treated surface shall be swept with a rotating
broom until the surface is free from dust, dirt or other deleterious material.

Surface holes and depressions greater than two (2) centimeters in depth shall be
patched using bituminous concrete wearing material. Holes two (2) centimeters in
depth or less shall be patched with multiple applications of bituminous material and
aggregate screenings. The holes and depressions shall be swept clean, a tack coat
applied and patching completed. Patching work shall be completed at least seven (7)
days prior to beginning application of the bituminous surface treatment.

When shown on the plans, specified in the Special Specifications or directed by the
Engineer, reshaping the roadway cross section and reducing the depth of longitudinal
sags shall be accomplished by pre-leveling with bituminous concrete wearing material
in accordance with the requirements in Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement,"
in these General Specifications.

All areas patched and pre-leveled with bituminous concrete wearing course material,
after completion of compaction, shall receive a fog seal, diluted with additional water
as approved by the Engineer, and applied at an undiluted rate between 0.20 and 0.50
liters per square meter.

4.03.8.2 Application Temperatures For Bituminous Material. Bituminous

materials shall be heated to a uniform temperature as directed by the Engineer within
the following limits:

Bituminous Material Distributor Spraying Temperature

Type and Grade Minimum Degrees C Maximum Degrees C

Bituminous Cut-Back Grades

MC, RC-800 95 125

MC, RC-250 75 105
MC, RC-70 50 80

Bituminous Emulsions

SS-1h, CSS-1h 20 65
RS-2, CRS-2 50 85
LMRS-2H, LMRS-2,
LMCRS-2H, LMCRS-2 55 85

Asphalt Cements

All Grades 130 180 or below that

at which fogging
occurs

4.03.8.3 Calibration and Adjustment of the Distributor. At the beginning of each

day's operations, the Contractor shall make checks, tests and calculations as necessary

28
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
to confirm that the application rate is uniform and within five percent (5%) of the
specified rate, at all points across the roadway width and for at least three hundred
(300) meters in length. The information collected shall be reported to the Engineer in
writing. The Contractor shall also calibrate the asphalt distributor spray bar height,
nozzle angle and pump pressure and check contractual and transverse spread rates
weekly according to ASTMD 2995.

4.03.8.4 Production Start-Up Procedures for Surface Treatment. The Contractor

shall provide seven (7) calendar days advance notice before constructing all asphalt
surface treatments containing aggregate. The following start-up procedures shall be
repeated when resuming production after work has been terminated due to non-
conformance.

On the first day of production, the contractor shall construct a one hundred fifty
meter (150) long control strip that is one lane wide. The control strip shall be located
on the project as designated.

The Contractor shall construct the control strip using materials, placement and
compaction procedures intended for the remainder of the surface treatment. Production
shall cease after construction of the control strip until the material and the control strip
are evaluated and accepted.

Acceptable control strips may remain in place and will be accepted as a part of the
completed surface treatment.

The control strip process shall be repeated until an acceptable control strip is
produced.

4.03.8.5 Procedures for Precoating. Prepared precoating materials are supplied

in drums or bulk and need no further preparation in the field. Preparation of precoating
materials in the field usually involves dilution of adhesion agents in either oil or water.

For oil-soluble material the usual procedure is to mix the required quantity of
adhesion agent with the appropriate amount of oil by circulating in a tank.

When the adhesion agent is either in a paste or solid form it will be necessary to
melt the agent before mixing. Under cold conditions it may be necessary to warm the
oil. Complete dispersion of the adhesion agent throughout the oil is essential.

For water soluble material in the mixing procedure will vary with different materials
and it is most important to follow carefully the manufacturer's directions if satisfactory
results are to be achieved.

Adhesion agents may be injurious to health and gloves and eye shields should be
worn at all times by personnel handling these materials.

Adhesion agents may settle out after some time in solution. Containers should be
checked regularly and agitated if necessary.

29
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
If precoating is to be fully effective, all aggregate particles must be completely but
thinly coated. The quantity needed to obtain this result will vary with the nature of the
aggregate, the efficiency of the precoating methods, the absorptive properties of the
aggregates, the amount of moisture and dust present, and the type of precoating
material. Generally four (4) to twelve (12) liters per cubic meter (L/m3) will be
necessary. The precoating material is usually applied as a fine spray on a moving
stream of aggregate.

When aggregate is freshly precoated with oil-based materials the fluid precoating
material tends to cut back the binder in contact with the aggregate and the reduction
in viscosity lessens the ability of the binder to hold the aggregate. This effect, which is
accentuated by over precoating, usually applies for a short time, during which instability
or stripping can occur.

When cutback bitumen is used for precoating it is an advantage to allow it to dry on

the aggregate before being used. To achieve this, precoating should be done at least
one (1) week before use but it may be done up to about two (2) months before the
aggregate is used providing that dust is not blown over the stockpile thus reducing the
effectiveness of the precoating.

A small amount of moisture on the aggregate may not be detrimental to the

precoating process by an excess of moisture before precoating tends to produce a
thinner and less uniform film of oil reducing its effectiveness in promoting adhesion. In
any case, sufficient time should be allowed for any moisture to evaporate and allow the
oil to adhere to the aggregate.

If rain falls immediately after damp aggregate has been preocated and placed in a
stockpile and before the precoating material has adhered properly to the aggregate the
precoating material may be washed from the aggregate unless the stockpile is covered.
It is good practice, where practical, to cover stockpiles of precoated aggregates which
are not intended for immediate use.

Normally the aggregate will be stockpiled and checked for quantity and quality some
time before being used. Immediately after the work commences a check on the
aggregate should be made to see if further precoating or other treatment is necessary.

In some areas aggregate is precoated at the crushing site by running the freshly
crushed and screened aggregate through a pugmill fed with a bitumen-based
precoating material.

4.03.8.6 Procedures for Applying Bituminous Materials. Bituminous material

shall be applied at the specified rates upon the prepared surface using distributors.

Areas missed during the application of bituminous material shall be immediately

covered using the hand held nozzle and the same type and grade of bituminous
material. The area covered with bituminous material shall be no larger than can be
covered with aggregate within five (5) minutes from the time of application on any part
of the roadway.

30
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, construction of the bituminous surface
treatment shall progress towards the source of aggregate screenings being applied.

Where application of bituminous material begins at the end of a previous application

of bituminous material, and when directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall cover
the full width of the end of the previous application with building paper at least eighty
(80) centimeters wide. The application of bituminous material shall begin on the paper
when the distributor is advancing at a speed that provides for uniform distribution of the
bituminous material. The building paper shall be removed before application of
aggregate screenings begins.

4.03.8.7 Procedures for Applying Aggregate Screenings. After the bituminous

material has been evenly spread over the roadway surface, aggregate of the grading
specified shall be evenly applied to the roadway surface by a self-propelled spreader
box.

The aggregate shall be spread in one operation on one-half of the roadway in such
a manner that a twenty (20) centimeters strip of bituminous material is left exposed
along the center line of the roadway. Where necessary, thin or bare spots in the spread
of aggregate shall be corrected by hand spreading or by other methods as may be
approved by the Engineer.

As soon as the aggregate has been spread on the first one-half of the roadway, it
shall be rolled as directed by the Engineer with self-propelled pneumatic-tired or
smooth-drum steel rollers. The aggregate shall be rolled at speeds not in excess of
seven (7) kilometers per hour (KPH) in such a manner that the aggregate surface
receives three (3) complete coverages. All rolling on any area shall be completed within
thirty (30) minutes after the aggregate screenings were applied.

After the application of bituminous material and aggregate to the first half of the
roadway, the remaining half shall be prepared and treated in the same manner as
described for the first half. Where there is an excess of aggregate, it shall be
distributed evenly over the adjacent roadway or picked up by shoveling into trucks.

Where specified, subsequent applications of bituminous material and aggregate

shall proceed as directed by the Engineer. When multiple applications of bituminous
material and aggregates are specified, no one application of aggregate shall precede
a second application of aggregate by more than two thousand (2000) meters.

When the final application of aggregate has been placed over any length of the full-
width of roadway, rolled as specified and inspected by the Engineer, it shall be broomed
to remove excess aggregate. When traffic is permitted to use the completed surface
treatment, it shall be broomed for five days following application of the aggregate, as
directed by the Engineer, to reduce the detrimental effects from free aggregate
particles.

Trucks hauling aggregates shall operate in a manner, and at reduced speeds so that
no damage is done to the surface treatment, as determined by the Engineer.

31
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.03.8.8 Adding Bituminous Material and Aggregate Screenings. If the
application of bituminous material or aggregate screening, or both, placed on any
portion of the roadway is insufficient for the required results, the Engineer may direct
the Contractor to make additional applications of one or all materials in accordance with
these specifications.

4.03.8.9 Correction of Defects. Omissions by the distributor or damage to the

treated surface of any application shall be immediately repaired by hand patching.
Holes which develop in the surface shall be repaired in a similar manner. All costs
incurred in making said repairs shall be at the Contractor's expense.

Defects such as raveling, bleeding of bituminous material, lack of uniformity, or other

imperfections caused by faulty workmanship or materials shall be corrected as directed
by the Engineer and new work shall not be started until such defects and the causes
of the defects have been remedied.

All improper workmanship and defective materials shall be removed from the
roadway by the Contractor and replaced with approved materials and workmanship at
the Contractor's expense. The removed materials shall be disposed of as specified in
Subsection 2.01.3, "Disposal of Removed Material," in these General Specifications.

4.03.9 MAINTENANCE OF SURFACE. The completed surface treatment shall be

maintained and all damage resulting from any cause shall be repaired by the Contractor
at his expense until such time as the project or portions of the Contract have been
accepted in writing by the Engineer.

4.03.10 PROGRESS OF WORK. The Contractor shall furnish and operate sufficient
equipment, produce or purchase and make timely delivery of materials and organize
his work so that his progress will be equivalent to at least five (5) kilometers per day of
completed roadway for all classes of bituminous surface treatment. Work shall be
commenced where the Engineer directs.

4.03.11 PROTECTION OF FACILITIES. All bridge handrails, curbs, road signs or other
facilities shall be protected from splashing of the bituminous material. The Contractor
shall immediately remove bituminous material from said facilities. Protection and
cleaning shall be accomplished at the Contractor's cost.

4.03.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Bituminous Surface Treatments

shall be accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications, the lot
size shall be five thousand (5,000) square meters for each treatment constructed. The
surface treatments shall be sampled, tested, and evaluated in accordance with
Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance," in these General
Specifications. The Engineer may, during the beginning of placement of surface
treatments, at times when test results indicate erratic treatment characteristics and at
any other time, reduce the lot size to sections of surface treatment with similar quality
characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and modification or replacement of
low-quality materials with materials of acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength
of the pavement structure.

32
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and
testing for each lot shall include:

1. Rate of application of bituminous material.

2. Bituminous material.
3. Aggregate gradation.

4.03.12.1 Rate of Application of Bituminous Material. The Contractor shall

furnish test pads for the purpose of determining the uniformity and rate of application
of bituminous material at locations selected by the Engineer. The test pads shall
consist of three (3) pieces of building paper each thirty (30) centimeters by sixty (60)
centimeters attached to plywood strips sixty (60) centimeters by ninety (90) centimeters
by one and one-quarter (1.25) centimeters, or other materials as may be approved by
the Engineer. The building paper shall be weighed accurately before being attached
to the plywood strips.

The sixty (60) centimeter by ninety (90) centimeter plywood strips and building paper
shall be placed at three (3) randomly selected roadway locations for each five thousand
(5,000) square meter lot of surface treatment to be placed. The distributor shall apply
bituminous material to the test pads during routine operations. Placement of
screenings shall proceed as specified.

After collecting the bituminous material, the building paper shall be carefully
removed from the plywood strips and weighed. The rate of application on each thirty
(30) centimeter by sixty (60) centimeter test pad shall be within ninety and one hundred
ten percent (90 and 110%) of the approved rate. If the rate is outside these limits, the
work shall be stopped and the distributor adjusted to provide for the specified rates
within said tolerances.

Any gaps left in the bituminous material application on the treated surface of the
roadway shall be repaired by hand using the same type and grade of bituminous
material.

4.03.12.2 Bituminous Material. Bituminous Materials utilized in bituminous surface

treatment construction shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the provisions
of Subsection 4.01.4, "Acceptance Procedures for Bituminous Materials," in these
General Specifications.

4.03.12.3 Aggregate Gradation. Five aggregate gradation samples shall be taken

from the spreader discharge at random intervals during the construction of each five
thousand (5,000) square meter lot. The sample size shall not be less than twenty-five
(25) kilograms of aggregate chips or screenings. The sample shall be tested
immediately and the results reported to the Engineer.

4.03.12.4 Acceptance. Bituminous materials will be accepted under Subsection

1.08.3, "Certification of Compliance," in accordance with Subsection 4.01.4,
"Acceptance Procedures for Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications.

33
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Bituminous surface treatment construction will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4,
"Measured or Tested Conformance," in these General Specifications.

Bituminous surface treatment rate of application of bituminous material and

aggregate gradation will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested
Conformance," in these General Specifications.

4.03.13 MEASUREMENT. Each type of bituminous seal coat or bituminous surface

treatment specified and completed within the lines shown on the plans or ordered by
the Engineer shall be measured in square meters. Seal coat or surface treatment
placed outside authorized limits shall not be measured.

Prime coat, when applied, shall be considered as subsidiary to constructing single

and double surface treatment and shall not be measured separately.

Precoating aggregates shall be measured by square meter and include the areas
where the aggregates were acceptably precoated with asphalt cement and incorporated
into the bituminous surface treatment when precoating is required by the Special
Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures and asphalt modifiers used by the contractor to
meet the Job Mix Formula (JMF) requirements will be considered subsidiary to the
construction of the bituminous seal coats and surface treatments and will not be
measured separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed
in the Bill of Quantities. When they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in
the Special Specifications they shall be measured in liters, kilograms, or tons in
accordance with Subsection 4.05.10 "Measurement" in these General Specifications.

Bituminous wearing course material furnished and placed for reshaping the roadway
cross section as shown on the plans, specified or directed by the Engineer shall be
measured in cubic meters in accordance with the methods described in Section 4.05,
"Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General Specifications.

4.03.14 PAYMENT. Bituminous seal coat and bituminous surface treatment of each
class completed as specified and measured shall be paid for at the contract unit price,
or adjusted contract unit price, per square meter for each item listed in the Bill of
Quantities.

Precoated aggregate shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each type
bituminous treatment per square meter where precoating is required by the Special
Specifications listed in the Bill of Quantities and measured as detailed in Section
4.03.13, "Measurement," in these General Specifications.

When a lot of bituminous surface treatment is accepted with a deficiency, the

adjusted contract unit price for said lot shall be the product of the contract unit price and
the lowest calculated quality and quantity pay factors specified in Subsection 4.03.11,
"Quality Assurance Procedures," in these General Specifications.

Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures, and asphalt modifiers used by the contractor to
meet the Job Mix Formula requirements shall be considered subsidiary to the

34
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
construction of bituminous seal coats and surface treatments and shall not be paid for
separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill
of Quantities. When they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in the Special
Specifications they shall be paid for as provided in Subsection 4.05.11 "Payment" in
these General Specifications.

No separate payment shall be allowed for adding bituminous material or aggregate

screenings, for correcting defects or for maintaining the surface.

Payment for traffic control shall be in accordance with Section 9.02, "Traffic Control
through Work Zones," in these General Specifications.

No separate payment shall be allowed for rolling.

No separate payment shall be allowed for furnishing and weighing test pads.

Prices and payment made under this section shall cover and be full compensation
for furnishing labor, equipment, materials, tools and incidentals for completing the work
as in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

40301 Bituminous Seal Coat Liter

4030101 Bituminous Seal Coat, CM-B Liter

4030102 Bituminous Seal Coat, CM-C Liter

40302 Single Bituminous Surface Treatment Square Meter

4030201 Single Bituminous Surface Treatment, CM-A Square Meter

4030202 Single Bituminous Surface Treatment, CM-A-1 Square Meter

40303 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment Square Meter

4030301 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment, Class A, Grading I Square Meter

4030302 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment, Class A, Grading IV Square Meter

4030303 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment, Class B, Grading I Square Meter

4030304 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment, Class B, Grading IV Square Meter

40304 Precoating Aggregates Square Meter

35
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 4.04 - BITUMINOUS EMULSION TREATED BASES

4.04.1 DESCRIPTION. This work consists of furnishing and cold-mixing aggregate and
emulsified bituminous material, hauling, spreading, compacting and finishing the
bituminous emulsion treated base to the lines, grades and thickness shown on the
plans, all in accordance with the specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

BITUMINOUS EMULSION TREATED BASE ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Bituminous Emulsion Base Course
Type I Bituminous Emulsion Open-Graded Base Course
Type II Bituminous Emulsion Dense-Graded Base Course
Type III Bituminous Emulsion Sand Base Course

Type I bituminous emulsion treated base mixtures shall be produced at ambient

temperatures only by central-mixing in a continuous mixing pugmill. Types II and III
bituminous emulsion treated base mixtures shall be produced at ambient temperatures
by central-mixing in a continuous mixing pugmill or screenless batch plant or by road-
mixing using a travel plant at the option of the Contractor.

4.04.2 MATERIALS.

4.04.2.1 Bituminous Emulsion Material. Bituminous emulsion material for

bituminous emulsion treated base shall consist of MS-2, MS-2h, CMS-2, CMS-2h, SS-1,
SS-1h, CSS-1 or CSS-1h conforming to the requirements of Tables 4.01-4 and 4.01-5
in Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications.

The type and grade of bituminous emulsion shall be specified in the Special
Specifications.

4.04.2.2 Aggregate. All aggregate shall be hard durable particles or fragments of

crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel or sand free from decomposed materials,
organic materials and other deleterious substances. The aggregate shall not contain
more than one percent (1.0%) by weight of particles having a specific gravity below
1.95. Aggregate for Open-Graded Base retained on the 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve
shall not have more than one-tenth of one percent (0.1%) adherent material by
washing.

Unless otherwise specified in the Special Specifications, the aggregate for Types I,
II and III bituminous emulsion treated base, prior to the addition of bituminous emulsion
material, shall conform to the following gradation and quality requirements:

36
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

AGGREGATE GRADING REQUIREMENTS - MRDTM 419

Type I Type II Type III

Sieve Open-Graded Dense-Graded Sand
Size Base Base Base

37.5 mm (1 1/2 inch) 100 100

25 mm (1 inch) 95-100 90-100
12.5 mm (1/2 inch) 25-60 60-80 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 0-10 25-60 75-100
2.36 mm (No. 8) 0-5 15-45
0.300 mm (No. 50) - 3-18 15-30
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-2 1-7 5-12

Bituminous Emulsion Material

Content - Percent 4.5-7.5 6.0-12.0 6.0-12.0

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

Sand Equivalent MRDTM

313 - Percent, Min. - 40 30
Stripping Loss MRDTM
413 - Percent, Max. 10 10 10
Abrasion Loss MRDTM -
Percent, Max. 40 40 -
Percent Fracture -
Min. 2 Face 75 75 -

Percent fracture shall be determined for the material retained on the 2.36 millimeter
(No. 8) sieve. The fractured faces shall have a minimum dimension from edge to edge
across each fractured face which is not less than one-third (1/3) the maximum
dimension of the aggregate particle.

4.04.2.3 Choke Stone for Open-Graded Emulsion Base. Choke stone shall be
clean sand, fine material remaining from production of the aggregate for open-graded
emulsion base, or other fine material conforming to the following gradation:

Sieve Percentage
Size Passing
9.5 mm (3/8 inch) 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 85-100
0.300 mm (No. 50) 15-45
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-4

4.04.2.4 Portland Cement. Portland cement shall be Type I or II conforming to the

requirements specified in Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete," in these General
Specifications.

37
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.04.2.5 Water. Water shall be free of matter deleterious to the quality of the
bituminous emulsion treated mixture.

4.04.3 PROPORTIONING BITUMINOUS EMULSION TREATED BASE MIXTURES.

4.04.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal. A proposed Job Mix Formula (JMF) shall be
formulated by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. The JMF
shall be prepared by the Contractor in precise compliance with procedures and
requirements set forth in the MRD Manual of Materials and Tests and all current circular
letters issued by the Ministry of Communications.

The Contractor shall also use the Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual," MS-19,
published by the Asphalt Institute, Lexington, Kentucky, USA.

1. Type I Bituminous Emulsion Treated Base. Chapter XII Procedural Outline and
Design Criteria for the Asphalt Institute Design Method for Open-Graded Mixes.

2. Types II and III Bituminous Emulsion Treated Base. Chapter XIV Marshall
Method for Emulsified Asphalt-Aggregate Cold Mixture Design or, Chapter XI Modified
Hveem Mix Design.

The Contractor shall select his sources of aggregate and bituminous emulsion
material and, after sufficient quantities have been stockpiled or are available for use,
obtain representative samples of the materials and test to determine if they conform to
the requirements of these specifications.

The Contractor shall perform all testing required to establish the proportions of each
material to be combined to produce the specified base (JMF).

The Contractor shall submit the Job Formula Mix (JMF) with the following
information:

1. Pertinent data on the source of aggregate and test data on the fracture,
gradation and other quality treatments shown in Paragraph 4.04.2.2, "Aggregate," in
these General Specifications.

2. The type and grade of emulsified bituminous material to be used.

3. All laboratory trial mix test results.

4. The bituminous material content, based on total dry weight mixture. The
quantity of bituminous emulsion material to be added to the mixture, based on total dry
weight of material, shall be computed from the required bituminous material content and
the quantity of water in the bituminous emulsion material at the time it is removed from
the storage tank.

5. The percentage of Portland cement, when required, by total dry weight of

mixture.

6. The percentage of additional mixing water, based on total dry weight of mixture.

38
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7. The percentage of total fluids (bituminous material and water) at compaction,

based on the total dry weight of mixture.

8. The theoretical maximum density based on ASTM D 2041 for fully cured
moisture free mixtures.

9. The type and location of each plant to be used for mixing each mix to be
furnished.

10. The beginning date for producing bituminous emulsion treated base mixtures.

The Engineer shall be provided access to the materials sampling and testing
operations at all times.

At the same time that the above information is provided, the Contractor shall supply
to the Engineer one hundred (100) kilogram samples of each individual aggregate size,
eight (8) liters of bituminous material and, when used, sufficient quantities of mineral
filler and chemical admixture to complete two (2) mix design checks, all representing
the materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish.

4.04.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula. The Engineer shall review the JMF to
determine that it contains all required information. If it does not contain all required
information, it shall be returned within seven (7) days to the Contractor for further action
and resubmission by the Contractor.

If the proposed JMF contains all required information but fails to meet all of the
requirements specified, it shall not be accepted by the Engineer and will be returned to
the Contractor within fourteen (14) days. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to
the Engineer a new JMF conforming to the requirements specified and propose a new
date for beginning production of the bituminous mixtures.

When the Engineer is satisfied that JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms to all
the requirements of the specifications, he shall order the Contractor to construct a two
hundred (200) meter long field control strip of bituminous emulsion treated base. The
Engineer shall evaluate the control strip as to its constructibility and the mix for
conformance to the laboratory tested JMF within the tolerances contained in Paragraph
4.04.6.1, "Contractor Process Quality Control," in these General Specifications. Split
samples of the cold bituminous mix and component raw materials along with the project
laboratory test results are to be sent to the Materials and Research Department Central
Laboratory for a one point check and documentation purposes. If the Engineer is not
satisfied with the control strip results, he shall state his objections in writing and request
a revised JMF and new control strip. The control strip may only be kept in place if the
results are satisfactory.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all requirements of the specifications and the control strip results are acceptable, he
will issue written acceptance to the Contractor to begin producing the mixes proposed.

39
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Production of bituminous concrete mixtures shall not begin until the Engineer has
given written acceptance of the Job Mix Formula.

Acceptance of the JMF by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to produce bituminous concrete mixtures conforming to all specified
requirements.

4.04.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions. The Contractor shall not alter his methods
of crushing, screening, blending, or stockpiling from that used to produce materials for
the approved JMF. Changes to the JMF will not be permitted without retesting and
resubmission of a proposed (revised) JMF in accordance with all the steps in Paragraph
4.04.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in these General Specifications. Significant
changes may include, but not be limited to, changes in the amount of type of materials
rejected or wasted, changes in the amount of materials crushed, reductions in the
amount of crushed fines, changes in the amount and type of mineral filler and mineral
and chemical admixtures to be used.

Should the Contractor change his source of supply of aggregate and grade of
bituminous material, he shall furnish a new information and samples of materials, as
described in Paragraph 4.04.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in these General
Specifications as determined by the Engineer to be necessary, at least twenty-one (21)
days before their intended use.

At any time after the JMF is approved the Contractor may submit a new JMF for
approval by the Engineer. If the revised JMF is approved it shall become the approved
JMF.

4.04.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall supply the proper type and sufficient
numbers of equipment to complete the work within the Contract time and in accordance
with his Program of Work as approved by the Engineer. The equipment shall also
conform to the following specific requirements:

1. Travel mixing plant shall not be used to produce open-graded base mixtures.

2. Water, when added to the mixture, shall be introduced into the mix by pumping
through a volumetric rate meter, registering in liters per minute, which will accurately
measure the flow of water. The flow of water shall be interlocked with the flow of
aggregate, bituminous emulsion material and additives, if required.

3. Portland cement, when added to the mixture, shall be introduced into the mixture
through a positive auger or belt feeder.

4. When batch plants are used for producing bituminous emulsion treated base, all
screens except an oversize scalping screen shall be removed.

5. Cold-feed proportioning controls shall be used.

40
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.04.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Bituminous emulsion treated mixtures shall not be
placed on any wet or frozen surface, during dust or sand storms, or when the air
temperature is less than fifteen degrees Celsius (15o C.).

4.04.6 CONSTRUCTION.

4.04.6.1 Contractor Process Quality Control. Testing to control the quality of

bituminous emulsion treated base mixtures shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Copies of all test results shall be forwarded to the Engineer at the end of each working
day. The Engineer reserves the right to obtain samples of the materials at any point
during the production operations for his own use.

The Contractor shall perform the following minimum testing for each type of
bituminous emulsion treated base produced and each day's production.

1. Two (2) samples of combined aggregate shall be obtained from the bin discharge
gate at random times during the day just prior to the addition of bituminous emulsion
material and the combined aggregate tested for gradation.

2. Two (2) samples of the bituminous emulsion treated materials shall be obtained from
hauling vehicles, and the water and bituminous material contents determined by oven
drying and extraction testing.

Extracted aggregate shall be tested for gradation. The bituminous material content
as extracted from the mixture shall conform to the requirement in the approved JMF
within plus or minus four-tenths ( 0.4) percentage points.

The combined aggregate, including Portland cement and other mineral additives,
shall conform to the approved JMF grading within the following tolerances:

9.75 mm (3/8") and larger sieves, + 8 percentage points

4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, + 7 percentage points
2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve and No. 50 sieves, + 6 percentage points
0.300 mm (No. 50) sieve + 4 percentage points
0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, + 2 percentage points

4.04.6.2 Preparation of Bituminous Emulsion Material. Bituminous emulsion

material shall be stored at temperatures within the following ranges:

SS-1, SS-1h, CSS-1, CSS-1h Minimum = 10 degrees Celsius

Maximum = 60 degrees Celsius
MS-2, MS-2h, CMS-2, CMS-2h Minimum = 50 degrees Celsius
Maximum = 85 degrees Celsius

The bituminous emulsion materials shall be protected from freezing and periodically
rolled or circulated to maintain uniformity. Forced air shall not be used for agitation.

4.04.6.3 Preparation of Aggregate. Aggregate shall be stockpiled and removed

from stockpiles as required in Section 3.01, "Production, Handling and Stockpiling
Aggregates," in these General Specifications.

41
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.04.6.4 Type I, Type II and Type III Bituminous Emulsion Treated Bases.
Type I, Type II and Type III Bituminous Emulsion Treated Bases may be produced at
centrally located mixing plant. Aggregate, bituminous emulsion material, added water,
Portland cement and other additives, when required, may be proportioned by weight or
by volume.

The aggregate shall be fed from storage to the mixing chamber using a belt feeder
equipped with devices by which the rate of aggregate feed can be determined while the
plant is in full operation. Aggregate feed and the bituminous emulsion material
metering pump shall be mechanically or electrically interlocked in a manner that
maintains a constant ratio of aggregate and bituminous emulsion material.

Portland cement, when required, shall be introduced into the aggregate on the belt
feeder.

Mixing water, when required, shall be introduced into the aggregate through a spray
bar mounted at such a point that the water is added as the aggregate enters into the
mixing chamber.

The bituminous emulsion material shall be introduced into the mixing chamber
through a spray bar that can be adjusted to vary mixing times between five (5) and thirty
(30) seconds.

The aggregate, water and Portland cement as required, and bituminous emulsion
material shall be mixed until the aggregate has been coated and a uniform and
homogeneous mixture has been obtained.

Type I open-grade bituminous emulsion treated base shall be discharged directly

into hauling equipment or stored in bins or silos. Type I open-graded bituminous
emulsion treated base shall not be stored on the ground.

Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion treated base may be discharged directly
into hauling equipment or stored. Type II and Type III base shall not be stored for
periods longer than forty-eight (48) hours without prior written approval from the
Engineer.

4.04.6.5 Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion treated base may be mixed
on the roadway using self-propelled travel mixing plant. Travel mixing plant may
be of three types:

1. A plant that moves along an appropriately sized aggregate windrow on the

roadbed, picking up the aggregate in the windrow, adding and mixing bituminous
emulsion material and discharging the completed mixture at the rear.

2. A plant that receives aggregate into its hopper from hauling equipment as it
moves forward along the roadbed, adding and mixing bituminous emulsion material and
discharging the completed mixture at the rear. The aggregate may be delivered into
the hopper directly from hauling equipment or by pickup equipment from aggregate
deposited into a windrow by hauling equipment.

42
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

3. A rotary type mixing plant that moves along the roadbed adding bituminous
emulsion material to aggregate situated in-place on the roadbed and mixing the
materials. The bituminous emulsion material may be added through a spray bar located
inside the rotary mixing chamber, or spread on the aggregate immediately in advance
of mixing.

Rotary mixers may be used to cut into and scarify the in-place aggregate, either old
bituminous concrete pavement or new aggregate, without introduction of bituminous
emulsion material. Bituminous emulsion material shall be delivered to the mixing plant
from hauling equipment traveling adjacent to the mixing plant.

The travel plant shall be capable of producing a uniform, properly coated, bituminous
emulsion material-aggregate mixture conforming to the requirements of the JMF.
Bituminous emulsion material and aggregate proportioning devices shall be keyed to
the rate of forward travel of the mixer, or interlocked to ensure a constant bituminous
emulsion material-aggregate blend.

Multiple passes of the travel plant may be required for higher bituminous emulsion
material contents to achieve required uniformity of mix.

4.04.6.6 Spreading and Compacting. The surface to receive bituminous emulsion

treated base shall conform to the compaction and other requirements for the material
involved.

When the surface to receive the bituminous emulsion treated base does not conform
to compaction and other requirements for the material involved, the Contractor, at his
own expense, shall correct all deviations.

When the surface to receive bituminous emulsion treated base is a soil subgrade,
aggregate subbase or aggregate base, and the total thickness of the bituminous
emulsion treated base and surface course is less than ten (10) centimeters, the surface
shall receive a prime coat in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
4.02, "Bituminous Prime and Tack Coat," in these General Specifications. The prime
coat shall be allowed to cure for at least forty-eight (48) hours before placement of
bituminous emulsion treated base.

Type I open-graded bituminous emulsion treated base shall be spread using a self-
propelled paving machine. The maximum thickness of one lift shall not exceed ten (10)
centimeters. Immediately after spreading, each lift shall be compacted with one
coverage of a steel-drum tandem roller weighing not less than ten thousand (10,000)
kilograms. After the initial coverage, choke stone shall be uniformly spread across the
surface of the open-grade base at a rate between seven (7) and thirteen (13) kilograms
per square meter using a self-propelled spreading device conforming to the
requirements specified in Section 4.02, "Bituminous Prime and Tack Coat," in these
General Specifications immediately after spreading choke stone, the open-graded base
shall receive three additional coverages with a steel-drum tandem roller weighing not
less than ten thousand (10,000) kilograms. After completion of compaction, surplus
choke stone shall be removed by sweeping. Each lift of open-graded base shall be

43
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
allowed to cure for a period not less than seventy-two (72) hours before spreading
successive lifts.

Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion treated base may be spread using a self-
propelled paving machine, aggregate base spreader or other device which results in a
base that is smooth, has a uniform texture, conforms to planned and specified thickness
and is within the lines and grade shown on the plans. The maximum thickness of one
lift shall not exceed ten (10) centimeters unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Lift thicknesses greater than ten (10) centimeters may be approved by the Engineer
when sufficient Portland cement has been added to the mixture to accelerate curing
and the Contractor demonstrates that curing is effective.

Each lift shall be compacted using a steel-drum tandem roller weighing not less than
ten thousand (10,000) kilograms until the relative compaction of each lot of bituminous
emulsion treated base as described in Subsection 4.04.8, "Quality Assurance
Procedures," in these General Specifications is between ninety-one percent (91%) and
ninety-four percent (94%) of the theoretical maximum density determined from ASTM
D 2041.

Each lift of Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion base shall be allowed to cure
for the period specified in the Special Specifications, or for three (3) to five (5) days, or,
when Portland cement has been added to the mixture, for such shorter period as
approved by the Engineer.

4.04.6.7 Finishing. When shown on the plans, or specified in the Special

Specifications, Type I, Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion treated base courses
shall be sealed with a Class C, Medium Fine, surface treatment conforming to the
requirements specified in Section 4.03, "Bituminous Surface Treatment," in these
General Specifications.

4.04.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL. Traffic control shall conform to the requirements

specified for traffic control in Section 9.02, "Traffic Control through Work Zones," in
these General Specifications.

4.04.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The bituminous emulsion treated

base shall be accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications,
the lot size shall be ten thousand (10,000) square meters for each layer constructed.
The bituminous emulsion treated base shall be sampled, tested, and evaluated in
accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work," in these General Specifications.
The Engineer may, during the beginning of placement of bituminous emulsion treated
base, at times when test results indicate erratic characteristics, and at any other time,
reduce the lot size to sections of bituminous emulsion treated base with similar quality
characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and modification or replacement of
low-quality materials with materials of acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength
of the pavement structure.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and
testing for each lot shall include:

44
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

1. Compaction
2. Thickness
3. Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content
4. Surface Smoothness

4.04.8.1 Compaction. The specified range of acceptable compaction is between

91 and 94 percent. The bituminous emulsion treated base course compaction will be
sampled, tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph 4.05.8.1, "Compaction," in
these General Specifications.

Type I base may be accepted without density testing when the specified equipment
and operating procedures are verified and documented as being utilized.

4.04.8.2 Thickness. A lot shall be accepted when the average thickness is not less
than the planned thickness. The bituminous emulsion treated base course thickness
will be sampled, tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph 4.05.8.2, "Thickness,"
in these General Specifications.

The Contractor shall backfill density and thickness test holes with bituminous
emulsion treated base or other material approved by the Engineer.

4.04.8.3 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content. The upper and
lower specification units are the approved job-mix target values plus or minus the
allowable deviations shown in Paragraph 4.04.6.1, "Contractor Process Quantity
Control," in these General Specifications.

The bituminous material content of the bituminous emulsion treated base shall be
determined by extraction from five (5) randomly selected sample per lot taken from the
road after all mixing is complete and prior to compaction. The average bituminous
material content shall not vary from the approved job mix content by more than plus or
minus five-tenths percent ( 0.5%). When the bituminous material content varies by
more than plus or minus five-tenths percent ( 0.5%) the lot shall be removed, remixed
with other materials added as necessary and/or replaced with other materials approved
by the Engineer.

4.04.8.4 Surface Smoothness. When a straightedge four (4) meters in length is

laid on the finished surface of the base parallel with the centerline, the surface shall
have no depressions greater than three (3) millimeters from the lower edge of the
straightedge. When the straightedge is laid transverse to the centerline, the surface
shall have no depressions greater than six (6) millimeters from the lower edge of the
straightedge.

4.04.8.5 Acceptance. Bituminous materials will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.3,

"Certification of Compliance," in accordance with Subsection 4.01.4, "Acceptance
Procedures for Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications.

Bituminous emulsion treated base construction including surface smoothness and

bituminous material content will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or
Tested Conformance," in these General Specifications.

45
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Bituminous emulsion treated base compaction, thickness and aggregate gradation,

will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General
Specifications in two (2) stages as follows:

The first stage shall be the selection of the lowest of the two (2) pay factors for the
quality of the bituminous emulsion treated base relating to aggregate gradation and
density. The second stage involves the selection and application of a quantity pay
factor based on the thickness of the bituminous emulsion treated base. The reduced
thickness pay factor for the lower courses of multiple course pavements will initially be
applied provisionally based on the results of the depths of the cores taken from the
lower courses. Additional cores will be taken of the total depth of all bituminous
courses within the lot represented by lower course reduced thickness pay factors. If the
total thickness cores show that the increased upper level course thickness has resulted
in total thickness acceptability, the lower level courses reduced thickness pay factor will
be adjusted accordingly. The second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be applied
to all the individual course lots in addition to the first stage lowest quality pay factor as
determined in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General
Specifications.

4.04.9 MEASUREMENT. Each Type bituminous emulsion treated base shall be

measured by the cubic meter, as placed and compacted to the planned and specified
thickness and within the lines and grades shown on the plans, as specified or directed
by the Engineer. No measurement will be made for material placed outside authorized
limits.

Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures and asphalt modifiers used by the contractor
to meet the Job Mix Formula (JMF) requirements will be considered subsidiary to the
construction of the bituminous emulsion base course and will not be measured
separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill
of Quantities. When they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in the Special
Specifications they shall be measured in liters, kilograms, or tons in accordance with
Subsection 4.05.10 "Measurement" in these General Specifications.

Surface treatment shall be measured in square meters as specified in Section 4.02,

"Bituminous Prime and Tack Coat," in these General Specifications.

Choke stone will be considered subsidiary to the construction of bituminous

emulsion treated base and will not be measured.

4.04.10 PAYMENT. Payment shall be made at the contract unit price, or adjusted
contract unit price, per cubic meter for each Type bituminous emulsion treated base
measured and calculated as described above for the pay items listed below that are
shown in the Bill of Quantities.

When a lot of bituminous emulsion treated base is accepted with a deficiency, the
adjusted contract unit price for said lot shall be the product of the contract unit price and

46
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
the lowest quality and quantity pay factors specified in Subsection 3.04.8, "Quality
Assurance Procedures," in these General Specifications.

Surface treatment shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter as
measured and listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures, and asphalt modifiers used by the contractor
to meet the Job Mix Formula requirements will be considered subsidiary to the
construction of bituminous emulsion base course and shall not be paid for separately
unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities.
When they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in the Special Specifications
they shall be paid for as provided in Subsection 4.05.11 "Payment" in these General
Specifications.

Choke stone shall be considered subsidiary to the construction of Type I Bituminous

Emulsion Open-Grade Base and separate payment shall not be made.

Such prices and payment shall cover and be compensation for furnishing labor,
materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for completing the work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

40401 Bituminous Emulsion Base Course Cubic Meter

4040101 Bituminous Emulsion Open Graded Base Course, Type I Cubic Meter

4040102 Bituminous Emulsion Dense Graded Base Course, Type Cubic Meter
II

4040103 Bituminous Emulsion Sand Base Course, Type III Cubic Meter

47
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 4.05 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT

4.05.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of furnishing and mixing aggregate and
bituminous material in a central mixing plant, hauling, spreading and compacting the
mixture on a prepared surface, in one or more base, leveling or wearing courses, all as
shown on the plans, specified in these General Specifications and the Special
Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

Bituminous concrete base course shall be undesignated or designated as

Bituminous Grading I, Grading II or Grading III, and consist of either thirty-two (32)
millimeters (1 1/4inch), twenty-two (22) millimeters (7/8 inch) or nineteen (19)
millimeters (3/4 inch) nominal maximum size aggregate.

Bituminous concrete wearing course shall be undesignated or designated as

Grading I, Grading II or Grading III, and consist of either sixteen (16) millimeters
(5/8inch), twelve and one-half (12.5) millimeters (1/2 inch) or nine and one-half (9.5)
millimeters (3/8 inch) nominal maximum size aggregate.

The grading and maximum size aggregate for bituminous concrete base course or
bituminous concrete wearing course will be shown on the plans or specified in the
Special Specifications. When bituminous concrete leveling course is shown on the
plans, specified in the Special Specifications or listed in the Bill of Quantities,
bituminous concrete wearing course of the same class and maximum size aggregate
shall be furnished.

Bituminous concrete mixtures shall be produced in batch, continuous pugmill or

dryer-drum mixing plant. Proportioning may be by hot or cold feed control at the option
of the Contractor.

ITEMS IN THE BILL OF QUANTITIES

Bituminous Concrete Base Course
Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course
Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course
Asphalt Cement
Modified Asphalt Cement
Mineral Filler
Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier
Minor Bituminous Concrete

4.05.2 MATERIALS.

4.05.2.1 Bituminous Material. Bituminous material for bituminous concrete

pavement shall be a penetration or viscosity grade conforming to the requirements in
Table 4.01-1, Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications. The
penetration or viscosity grade to be used shall be specified in the Special
Specifications.

When penetration grade asphalt 60/70 is used, the optimum ratio between
bituminous material and filler shall be so determined that the bituminous material-filler
mixture will reach its softening point within the temperature range of 75-90 degrees C,

48
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
when tested in accordance with MRDTM 406 (Circular No. 2401, paragraphs 3 and 6,
as amended). In particular, the softening point shall be not less than 85 degrees C for
heavy traffic and not less than 75 degrees C for medium or low traffic. The foregoing
requirements shall be relaxed by 10 degrees C, respectively, when penetration grade
asphalt 40/50 is used.

4.05.2.2 Aggregate. All aggregate shall be hard durable particles or fragments free
from decomposed materials, organic materials and other deleterious substances. The
aggregate shall not contain more than one percent (1.0%) by weight particles having
a specific gravity below 1.95.

Coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed gravel retained
on a 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve and containing no more than ten percent (10%) thin
or elongated particles which have a maximum dimension more than five (5) times the
minimum dimension as determined in accordance with ASTM D 4791 Standard Test
Method for Flat or Elongated Pieces.

Fine aggregate shall be material passing the 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve and may
be produced from crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed gravel or manufactured
sand. Natural sand may not be used without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
If approved, the quantity of natural sand in the aggregate shall not exceed fifteen
percent (15%) of the weight passing the 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve and the quantity
of dune sand included shall not be more than fifty percent (50%) of the weight of natural
sand authorized by the Engineer. Particular attention shall be paid to the proper
control of aggregate and especially to that of natural sand. The daily timetable of the
plant operations and the test results of aggregate production shall be diligently kept and
updated on the Work by the Contractor. Should the Contractor fail to comply with the
foregoing requirements, the Engineer will have authority to suspend the Work wholly
or in part, as stipulated in Section 1.03 – "Control of Work" in these General
Specifications

Supplemental fine aggregate shall be mineral filler passing the 0.600 mm (No. 30)
sieve, including dust from the dust collection system. When furnished as supplemental
fine aggregate, mineral filler, at the time of use, shall be dry, free flowing, without lumps
or agglomerations and conform to the requirements of AASHTO M-17.

Gravel, to be crushed for use as bituminous concrete aggregate, shall be screened

in such a manner that all material to be crushed is retained on a 37.5 millimeter (1 1/2
inch screen). Uncrushed material passing the screen shall be stored separately from
the crushed material. Uncrushed aggregates shall not be combined with crushed
aggregates.

Unless otherwise specified in the Special Specifications, the combined aggregate,

prior to the addition of bituminous material, shall conform to the gradation and quality
requirements contained in Table 4.05-1.

The grading limits specified are based on materials of uniform specific gravity and
shall be adjusted by the Engineer to compensate for any variations in specific gravity
of the individual sizes. The gradings may be varied by the Engineer on the basis of

49
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Marshall Tests to obtain optimum stability and life of the completed Bituminous
Concrete Pavement.

Aggregate gradation for heavy traffic must avoid the area defined by the following
equation:

P = ____d_____ 0.45 T
d max

Where P = Percent passing

d= Sieve opening in mm
dmax = The smallest sieve opening which is not allowed to retain any material
(max size aggregate)
T =Vertical distance from the 0.45 power curve in %

The values of T are as follows:

For 19 mm nominal size:

dmm 2.36 2.0 1.18 .6 .425 .30

T (%) +0 +1 +3 +2 +1 +0

For greater than 19 mm nominal size

dmm 4.75 2.36 2.0 1.18 .60 .425 .30

T(%) +0 +2.0 +2.5 3.0 +2.0 +1.0 +0

TABLE 4.05-1

AGGREGATE GRADING REQUIREMENTS - MRDTM 419

BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE

GRADING I GRADING II GRADING III
Sieve 32 mm (1 1/4 In) 22 mm (7/8 Inch) 19 mm (3/4 Inch)
Size Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum

7.5 mm (1 1/2 inch) 100

25 mm (1 inch) 75-90 100 100
19.0 mm (3/4 inch) 65-80 75-90 90-100
12.5 mm (1/2 inch) 55-70 65-80 78-93
9.5 mm (3/8 inch) 45-60 55-65 57-72
4.75 mm (No. 4) 31-46 35-60 43-58
2.00 mm (No. 10) 18-33 20-35 28-43
0.425 mm (No. 40) 5-18 7-20 13-28
0.180 mm (No. 80) 3-13 5-25 -
0.075 mm (No. 200) 2-9 3-7 3-7

50
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

BITUMINOUS WEARING COURSE

GRADING I GRADING II GRADING III
Sieve 16 mm (5/8 Inch) 12.5 mm (1/2 In) 9.5 mm (3/8 Inch)
Size Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum

19.0 mm (3/4 inch) 100 100

12.5 mm (1/2 inch) 75-90 90-100 100
9.5 mm (3/8 inch) 64-79 78-83 90-100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 41-56 46-60 54-68
2.00 mm (No. 10) 23-37 30-42 32-46
0.425 mm (No. 40) 7-20 14-25 14-25
0.180 mm (No. 80) 5-13 8-16 8-16
0.075 mm (No. 200) 3-8 3-7 3-7

TABLE 4.05-2

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

Bituminous Wearing Bituminous

Course Base Course
Class Class Class Class Class Class
A B C A B C

Sodium Sulfate Soundness

Loss, MRDTM 311-66
Percent, Max. 10 10 10 10 10 10
Abrasion Loss,
MRDTM 309 - Percent, Max. 40 40 40 40 40 40
Clay and Friable Particles,
MRDTM 312, Percent Max. 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Sand Equivalent,
MRDTM 313 - Percent, Min. 45 45 45 45 45 45

1) 75 Blow Marshall, MRDTM 410 -

Stability - Kg. min. 1000 750 500 1000 750 500

Flow - mm 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4

Voids in Mineral
Aggregate - Percent, Min. Varies with Nominal Maximum Size per MS-2*

Voids in Mix - Percent 4-6 4-6 3-5 5-7 5-7 5-7

Bituminous Material -
Percent of Total Weight 4.0-6.0 4.0-6.0 4.0-6.0 3.0-6.0 3.0-6.0 3.0-6.0
Retained Strength -
75 75 75 70 70 70
Percent, Min.

* Asphalt Institute Manual MS-2.

51
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS (Continued)

Bituminous Bituminous
Wearing Course Base Course

Class Class Class Class Class Class

A B C A B C

2) Hveem, ASTMD 1560 -

Stabilimeter, Minimum 40 37 35 37 35 33
Voids in Mix - Percent 4-6 4-6 3-5 5-7 5-7 5-7

Filler/Bituminous Material Softening Point

All Mixtures - 65 Minimum
Filler/Bituminous Material Ratio
All Mixtures - Between 0.5 and 1.5

Aggregate particles retained on the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve shall have the following
minimum percentage by weight, and have two (2) faces with mechanical fracture:

Class A Base and Wearing Course - 90 %

Class B Base and Wearing Course - 65 %
Class C Wearing Course - 25 %

Each fractured face shall have a minimum dimension from edge to edge across the
fractured face which is not less than one-third (1/3) the maximum dimension of the
aggregate particle.

4.05.2.3 Mineral Fillers. Mineral fillers shall be either Portland cement, blended
hydraulic cement or lime conforming to the following requirements:

Material Requirement

Portland Cement, Type I or II ASTM C-150

Blended Hydraulic Cement, Type IP ASTM C-595
Lime, Type N or S ASTM C-207

When required, the amount of mineral filler used shall be between one and two
percent (1.0 and 2.0%) of the weight of aggregate, with the exact amount to be stated
in the Job Mix Formula.

52
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.05.2.4 Chemical Admixtures and Asphalt Modifiers. The types and amounts of
chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers used shall be limited to those listed in the
Special Specifications or proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Ministry's
Research and Materials Department to establish compliance with the job mix formula
(JMF) requirements contained in Subsection 4.05.3, "Proportioning Bituminous
Concrete Mixtures," in these General Specifications.

Should a stripping problem be determined to exist the Contractor shall add an

approved antistripping agent to the mixture to meet the quality requirements.

Should the bituminous concrete mixture require improvement of the temperature

susceptibility of the asphalt cement or where increased resistance to permanent
deformation is required the Contractor shall add an approved polymer material to meet
the job mix formula requirements in accordance with the following criteria:

1. The polymer additive shall be a commercially available product, supported by an

approved mixing process, that will ensure accurate proportioning of materials and
quality control of the modified asphalt cement and of the final bituminous mixture.
Candidate products include styrene butadiene rubber (SBR); block copolymers;
polyethylene; ethylene vinyl acetate; polypropylene; polychloroprene latex;
polychloroprene solids; natural polyisoprene; ethylene propylene-diene-monomer
(EDPM); and polyisobutylene.

2. The polymer material shall be fully compatible with the base asphalt cement to
ensure uniform blending and shall be so stored as to prevent segregation with time.

3. When so recommended by the additive manufacturer, polymer shall be added to

the asphalt mixture in the mixing plant to avoid prolonged hot storage and possible
damage of the modified asphalt cement.

4. The increased viscosity of modified binders at high temperatures normally

extends into the temperature range in which asphalt concrete is mixed. Therefore, it
may be necessary to increase the operating temperature of the mixing plant to achieve
adequate coating of aggregates and provide for satisfactory compaction of the mixture.
When so recommended by the additive manufacturer, increased mixing temperature
requirements shall be diligently observed.

5. An approved extraction process must exist to allow verification of the design

quantity of the modified asphalt cement in the mixture. Additives must not interfere with
the extraction process.

6. Readily usable, proven test methods must exist to determine the polymer content
of the modified asphalt cement, even if the asphalt cement must be first extracted from
the aggregate mixture.
7. The aging index of the modified asphalt cement shall not exceed that o f the base
asphalt cement, as specified in ASTM D2872.

8. The polymer additive shall be capable of increasing the softening point of the
base asphalt cement by at least fifteen degrees Celcius (15 C) without the addition of
filler.

53
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

9. The polymer additive shall be capable of increasing the permanent deformation

resistance and fatigue resistance of the modified bituminous mixture, as compared to
that of a similar conventional bituminous mixture, by at least thirty (30) percent; as
documented by field tests performed in Kingdom or abroad, by reputable authorities or
transportation agencies and under environmental conditions closely resembling those
of Saudi Arabia.

All chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers including anti-stripping additives and

polymers shall be thoroughly mixed and uniformly combined with the bituminous
material.

4.05.3 PROPORTIONING BITUMINOUS CONCRETE MIXTURES.

4.05.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal. A proposed Job Mix Formula (JMF) shall be
formulated by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. The JMF
shall be prepared by the Contractor in precise compliance with procedures and
requirements set forth in the MRD Manual of Materials and Tests and all current circular
letters issued by the Ministry of Communications.

The Contractor shall select his sources of aggregate and bituminous material and,
after sufficient quantities have been stockpiled or are available for use, obtain
representative samples of the materials and test to determine if they conform to the
requirements of these specifications. At least thirty (30) days before producing
bituminous concrete mixtures, the Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer
detailed information for each mix which he proposes to furnish. The information shall
include, but not be limited to the following:

1. The source and gradation of the aggregate for each mix to be furnished. If the
aggregate (coarse, fine, supplemental fine) is separated into two (2) or more sizes, the
information provided shall consist of gradations for all individual sizes, the proportions
of each individual size to be used, and the mathematically combined gradation for each
mix to be furnished. Such combined gradation shall meet the applicable grading
requirements shown in Paragraph 4.05.2.2, "Aggregate," in these General
Specifications and show the percentage passing each of the specified sieve sizes.

2. Pertinent test data and a written certification that the aggregates to be furnished
conforms to all of the quality requirements shown in Paragraph 4.05.2.2, "Aggregate,"
in these General Specifications.

3. Pertinent test data on the type and properties of the asphalt cement, modified
asphalt cement, mineral filler, and chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers to be
furnished.

4. Marshall test data (based on seventy-five (75) blow compaction) and Hveem test
data for each mix to be furnished shall include individual test results for triplicate test
specimens prepared for each of at least five (5) different bituminous material contents.
The test results shall be submitted in tabular form and plotted on appropriate charts.
The information shall include the source and grade of bituminous material to be used

54
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
and a recommended bituminous material, mineral and chemical admixture/asphalt
modifier content for each mix to be furnished.

5. The type and location of plant to be used for mixing each mix to be furnished.

6. The proposed beginning date for producing bituminous concrete mixtures.

The Engineer shall be provided access to the materials sampling and testing
operations at all times.

At the same time that the above information is provided, the Contractor shall supply
to the Engineer one hundred (100) kilogram samples of each individual aggregate size,
eight (8) liters of bituminous material and, when used, sufficient quantities of the mineral
filler and the chemical admixture/asphalt modifier to complete two (2) proposed mix
design checks, all representing the materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish.

The final job mix formula shall be made by using hot-bins aggregate. The Contract
may develop preliminary job mixes using stockpiled aggregate, to demonstrate their
suitability for the intended purpose.

4.05.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula. The Engineer shall review the JMF to
determine that it contains all required information. If it does not contain all required
information, it shall be returned within seven (7) days to the Contractor for further action
and resubmission by the Contractor.

If the proposed JMF contains all required information but fails to meet all of the
requirements specified, it shall not be accepted by the Engineer and will be returned to
the Contractor within fourteen (14) days. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to
the Engineer a new JMF conforming to the requirements specified and propose a new
date for beginning production of the bituminous mixtures.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all the requirements of the specifications, he shall order the Contractor to construct
a two hundred (200) meter long field control strip. The Engineer shall evaluate the
control strip as to its constructability and compactability and the mix for conformance
to the laboratory tested JMF within the tolerances listed in Table 4.05-4, "Job Mix
Formula Tolerances," in these General Specifications. Split samples of the hot mix and
components raw materials along with the field laboratory test results are to be sent to
the Materials and Research Departments Central Laboratory for a one point check and
documentation. If the Engineer is not satisfied with the results of the control strip, he
shall state his objections in writing and request a revised JMF and a new control strip.
The control strip may only be left in place if the results are satisfactory.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all requirements of the specifications and the control strip results are acceptable, he
will issue written acceptance to the Contractor to begin producing the mixes proposed.

Production of bituminous concrete mixtures shall not begin until the Engineer has
given written acceptance of the Job Mix Formula.

55
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Acceptance of the JMF by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to produce bituminous concrete mixtures conforming to all specified
requirements.

4.05.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions. The Contractor shall not alter his methods
of crushing, screening, blending, or stockpiling from that used to produce materials for
the approved JMF. Changes to the JMF will not be permitted without retesting and
resubmission of a proposed (revised) JMF in accordance with all the steps in Paragraph
4.05.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in these General Specifications. Significant
changes may include, but not be limited to, changes in the amount or type of materials
rejected or wasted, changes in the amount of materials crushed, reductions in the
amount of crushed fines, changes in the amount and type of mineral filler and mineral
and chemical admixtures to be used.

Should the Contractor change his source of supply of aggregate and grade of
bituminous material, he shall furnish a new information and samples of materials, as
described in Paragraph 4.05.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal" as determined by the
Engineer to be necessary, at least twenty-one (21) days before their intended use.

At any time after the JMF is approved the Contractor may submit a new JMF for
approval by the Engineer. If the revised JMF is approved it shall become the approved
JMF.

4.05.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor's equipment shall be of sufficient capacity and

numbers to complete the paving in a timely manner as outlined in the Contractor's
Program of Work as approved by the Engineer.

Equipment shall also conform to the additional requirements outlined in the

MCM, Part 4 - Bituminous concrete and Surface Treatments, Section 4.3 - Bituminous
Base Courses and Bituminous Wearing Courses, Paragraph B - Construction
Equipment.

4.05.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Bituminous concrete pavement shall not be placed

on any wet or frozen surface, during dust or sand storms, when wind or other weather
conditions prevent the proper handling of the bituminous mixtures or when the average
surface temperatures are less than specified in the following table:

TABLE 4.05-3
SURFACE TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS *
(Degrees Celsius)

Base and
Compacted Thickness - cm Wearing Course Leveling Courses

Less than 3 25 20
3 to 6 20 15
6.1 to 10 Not applicable 10
More than 10 Not applicable 5

56
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
* The surface on which the bituminous mixtures are to be placed.

4.05.6 CONSTRUCTION. Construction requirements for the Work under this section
shall be as specified in the MOC HCM, Part 4, Bituminous Concrete and Surface
Treatment,, Section 4.3 Bituminous Base Courses and Bituminous Wearing Courses,
Paragraph C - Construction Procedures and Paragraph D - Field Inspection.

4.05.6.1 Contractor Process Quality Control. Testing to control the quality of

bituminous concrete mixtures produced shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Copies of all test results shall be forwarded to the Engineer at the end of each working
day. The Engineer reserves the right to obtain samples of the materials at any point
during the production operations for his own use.

The Contractor shall perform the following minimum testing for each class of
bituminous concrete produced and each day's production:

1. Batch-mixing. Two (2) samples of aggregate from each hot bin shall be obtained
at random times during the day and tested for gradation. The results of individual
sample gradations and combined gradations shall be reported.

2. Continuous Pugmill or Dryer-Drum Mixing. Two (2) samples of aggregate shall

be obtained at random times during the day immediately prior to adding bituminous
binder and the aggregate tested for gradation.

3. All Plant Types.

(1) One (1) sample of bituminous concrete shall be obtained from the discharge chute
or hauling vehicle for bituminous material extraction testing. The bituminous material
content shall be reported to one-tenth percent (0.1%) accuracy and the grading
determined for the extracted aggregate.

(2) One (1) complete Marshall test, including stability, flow, compacted unit weight
and percent voids in mix shall be completed on a sample obtained from the discharge
gate or hauling vehicle. The theoretical maximum specific gravity (ASTM D-2041) shall
be reported.

When the bituminous material content and aggregate gradation do not conform to
the approved JMF within the tolerances specified in Paragraph 4.05.6.4, "Preparation
of Bituminous Concrete Mixture," in these General Specifications, plant production shall
cease and the plant recalibrated.

4.05.6.2 Preparation of Bituminous Materials. Bituminous materials to be used

as binder for bituminous concrete shall be at a temperature not less than one hundred
forty-five degrees Celsius (145 o C.), nor more than one hundred eighty degrees Celsius
(180o C.) when introduced into the mixing plant.

Different grades of bituminous materials shall be stored in separate tanks,

transported in separate vehicles, and shall not be mixed without the approval of the
Engineer.

57
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
When asphalt modifiers are used, their use shall comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations as to their preparation, blending and placement.

4.05.6.3 Preparation of Aggregate. Aggregate shall be stored in separate

stockpiles a minimum of ten (10) meters apart or separated by walls so that various
sizes are not mixed together. Any aggregate which has been mixed together shall be
removed and replaced with aggregate of specified grading.

Supplemental fine aggregate and mineral and chemical admixtures shall also be
stored separately. A minimum of ten (10) meters apart or separated by walls.

Dust collected in skimmers, expansion chambers and centrifugal collectors may be

returned to the aggregate without being stored separately, provided the dust is returned
uniformly at a point in advance of the sampling device in batch-mix and continuous
pugmill mixing plants or between the sampling device and the dryer-drum mixer in
dryer-drum mixing plants and the combined aggregate gradation at the time bituminous
material is added conforms to the requirements specified in Paragraph 4.05.2.2,
"Aggregate," in these General Specifications.

Before being fed to the dryer, aggregate shall be separated into sizes and stored in
compliance with the following:

1. When the Contractor elects to use a plant equipped with hot-feed control, aggregate
for bituminous base course and Grading I and II bituminous wearing course, 19.0
millimeters (3/4 inch) and 12.5 millimeters (1/2 inch) maximum sizes, shall be separated
into five (5) sizes and stored separately.

Aggregate for Grading III bituminous wearing course and Grading I and II bituminous
wearing course, 9.5 millimeters (3/8 inch) maximum size, need not be separated into
sizes and stored separately.

2. When the Contractor elects to use a plant equipped with cold-feed control,
aggregate for bituminous base course and Grading I and II bituminous wearing course,
19.0 millimeters (3/4 inch) and 12.5 millimeters (1/2 inch) maximum sizes, shall be
separated into five sizes and stored separately.

Aggregate for Grading III bituminous wearing course and Grading I and II bituminous
wearing course, 9.5 millimeters (3/8 inch) maximum size, shall be separated into two
(2) or more sizes and stored separately.

The various sizes of aggregate shall be fed from storage in their proper proportions,
directly to a dryer or dryer-drum mixer, using mechanical feeders and at a rate to permit
correct and uniform temperature control and mixing with bituminous material. Except
for mixtures produced in a dryer-drum mixer, drying shall continue for a sufficient period
of time and at a sufficiently high temperature that, at the time of spreading, the moisture
content of the mixture shall not exceed one percent (1%). At the time of spreading,
mixtures produced in a dryer-drum mixer shall not contain more than three percent (3%)
moisture.

58
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
The dryer or dryer-drum mixer shall be equipped with a device which indicates the
temperature of the material leaving the dryer or dryer-drum mixer. The temperature
indicating device shall be accurate to the nearest five degrees Celsius (5o C.) and
installed in such a manner that changes of five degrees Celsius (5o C.) will be shown
within one (1) minute.

Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, dryers and dryer-drum mixers shall be
equipped with dust collectors. Dust shall be returned to the aggregate or disposed of
in accordance with Subsection 2.03.4, "Disposal of Surplus and Unsuitable Materials,"
in these General Specifications.

3. When use of natural sand is allowed it must be fed to the dryer in a separate bin.

When dune sand is allowed, it must also be fed separately. The minimum lot size
should not be less than one thousand (1000) metric tons to permit proper use of the
equipment.

4.05.6.4 Preparation of Bituminous Concrete Mixture. Aggregates and

bituminous material for bituminous concrete shall be proportioned in accordance with
the requirements of the approved JMF and mixed using equipment that will produce a
mixture conforming to these General Specifications and the Special Specifications.

When the Contractor elects to use a plant equipped with hot-feed controls,
aggregate after drying shall be separated into sizes as follows:

1. Aggregate for bituminous concrete base course and Grading I and II bituminous
wearing course, 19.0 millimeters (3/4 inch) and 12.5 millimeters (1/2 inch) maximum
sizes, shall be separated into three (3) or more sizes and each size stored in a separate
bin.

2. Aggregate for Grading III bituminous wearing course and Grading I and II
bituminous wearing course, 9.5 millimeters (3/8 inch) maximum size, shall be separated
into two (2) or more sizes and each size stored in a separate bin.

Supplemental fine aggregate and mineral admixtures shall each be stored in a

separate bin. Chemical admixtures shall be added to the bituminous material, at a
uniform rate, in the specified amount, through the bituminous material supply line using
an on-line blender.

Each size aggregate, supplemental fine aggregate and mineral admixture shall be
delivered from storage bins, in their proper proportion, by weight or by volume.

3. The combined aggregate, including supplemental fine aggregate and mineral

admixtures and bituminous material content shall conform to the approved JMF grading
within the following tolerances:

59
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.05-4 JOB MIX FORMULA TOLERANCES

JMF Tolerances
Wearing Courses Base Courses
Parameter a b a b

19.0 mm (3/4") +4 +5 +6 +6

12.5 mm (1/2") +4 5 - -

9.75 mm (3/8") - - +6 +8

4.75 mm (#4) +5 +7 +6 +7

2.00 mm (#10 +4 +5 +5 +6

0.425 mm (#40) +3 +4 +3 +4

0.180 mm (#80) +2 +3 - -

0.075 mm (#200) + 1.5 +2 + 1.5 +2

% AC + 0.40 + 0.40 + 0.40 + 0.40

a
Job Mix Formula and Acceptance Test Result(s) Tolerances
b
As Constructed (Final Handover) Test Result Tolerances

When discharged from the mixing plant, the temperature of the bituminous concrete
shall not exceed one hundred sixty-five degrees Celsius (165o C.).

1. Proportioning for Batch-Mixing. When the Contractor elects to use batc h-mixing
equipment, each material storage bin shall be equipped with a suitable, safe sampling
device which will provide a sample of the material discharged from the storage bin.

Aggregate and bituminous material may be manually or automatically proportioned

by weight or by volume in a manner that produces a mixture conforming to the
requirements specified.

An automatic plant shall not be operated manually unless the automatic circuitry is
disconnected to the extent that it cannot be activated by the operation of a switch,
circuit-breaker or other routine procedure.

60
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

When automatic batch mixing is required by the Special Specifications, or when the
Contractor elects to use an automatic batching system, the proportioning devices shall
be automatic to the extent that the only manual operation involved in proportioning all
materials for one batch shall be a single operation of a switch or starter.

2. Proportioning for Continuous Pugmill and Dryer-Drum Mixing. When continuous

pugmill mixing or dryer-drum mixing is used, bituminous material shall be introduced
into the mixer through a meter capable of varying the rate of delivery of bituminous
material.

The correct proportions of each aggregate size, supplemental fine aggregate and
mineral admixture shall be drawn from storage bins by a continuous mechanical or
electrical feeder which will supply the correct amount of aggregate in proportion to the
bituminous material and be arranged so that each aggregate size can be adjusted
separately. Aggregate feeders and the bituminous material pump shall be interlocked.

When cold feed proportioning is used with continuous pugmill or dryer-drum mixing,
the bituminous material feeder, each of the aggregate feeders, the supplemental fine
aggregate feeder, the mineral admixture feeder and the combined aggregate feeder
shall be equipped with devices by which the rate of aggregate feed can be determined
while the plant is in full operation. The combined aggregate shall be weighed using a
belt scale.

A method of sampling shall be provided that will provide a representative sample for
each size of aggregate or the combination of aggregates immediately prior to
introduction of bituminous material. The plant shall be equipped to permit sampling of
aggregates while the plant is in full operation and be such that the plant production rate
may be determined.

Aggregate, supplemental fine aggregate and mineral admixtures, when used, shall
be mixed uniformly and completely and coating, when tested in accordance with the
requirements of AASHTO T-195, shall not be less than ninety-five percent (95%).

3. Storage of Bituminous Concrete Materials. When bituminous concrete material

is stored, it shall be stored in a manner that prevents segregation of the completed mix.

Bituminous mix with hardened lumps in it shall not be used. Any storage method
that results in a mixture with hardened lumps in it shall not be used.

All bituminous concrete material placed in storage shall be used before darkness on
the day of mixing, except bituminous concrete material stored in approved silos may
remain in storage for a period not to exceed twenty-four (24) hours.

61
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.05.6.5 Preparation of Surface. The following steps shall be followed to properly
prepare the surface for the next layer:

1. When the bituminous mixture is placed on a prepared subgrade, and whether or

not a prime coat is designated on the plans, the subgrade shall be prepared to meet the
requirements provided in Section 4.02.5, "Construction," in these General
Specifications.

2. When the bituminous mixture is to be placed on an aggregate base course, the

surface shall be prepared as specified in Subsection 4.02.5, "Construction," and
protected and maintained as specified in Paragraph 3.03.4.8, "Maintenance and
Protection," in these General Specifications.

3. When the "Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course" is to be placed on a bituminous

base course, all loose materials shall be removed from the surface and the surface shall
be cleaned by means of approved mechanical sweepers or blowers and/or hand
brooms, until it is as free from dirt as is deemed practicable. No traffic shall be
permitted on the surface after it has been prepared to receive the bituminous material.

4. When the "Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course," or "Leveling Course," or "Base

Course" is constructed on an existing bituminous surface, the surface shall be cleaned
of all foreign material and broomed free of dust. In addition, any loose, broken, or
shattered bituminous material along the edges of the existing surface shall be removed,
and the exposed subgrade and a sufficient width of the shoulder adjacent to the edge
of the existing surface to receive the new bituminous mixture shall be shaped, bladed,
and broomed to provide a uniform firm subgrade for the new surface course. When
directed by the Engineer, existing bituminous surfaces shall receive a tack coat as
specified in this Section.

The existing mat, base, or subgrade shall be removed through broken, shattered,
or unstable areas as shown on the plans or designated by the Engineer. The areas
shall be excavated to a depth directed by the Engineer, and refilled with bituminous
mixture herein described. When the Contract does not provide a patching item, the unit
price for the "Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course" mixture, as specified in the Bill of
Quantities, shall be used for such Work. The excavation required will not be paid for
directly but will be considered subsidiary to the pay items of "Bituminous Concrete
Wearing Course" as specified in the Bill of Quantities.

5. Prior to the placing of the bituminous mixture, when designated on the plans or
directed by the Engineer, a prime coat shall be applied to the subgrade or surface in
accordance with the standards specified in Section 4.02, "Bituminous Prime and Tack
Coat," in these General Specifications.

6. Prior to the placing of the mixture, when designated or, the plans or directed by
the Engineer, a tack coat as specified in Section 4.02, "Bituminous Prime and Tack
Coat," in these General Specifications shall be applied to subgrade, base or existing
bituminous surfaces at the rate of application not exceeding one-quarter (1/4) liters per
square meter or as otherwise designated by the Engineer. When the asphaltic surface
is to be constructed on a previously newly primed base, and where deemed advisable

62
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
by the Engineer, the above specified tack coat may be eliminated. No mixture will be
laid on a tack coat prior to the approval of the Engineer.

4.05.6.6 Placement of Bituminous Concrete Pavement. Bituminous materials

shall be placed as a base course, leveling course or surface course. The type and
thickness of the individual courses will be shown on the plans. Base course is defined
as a layer or layers of bituminous materials placed on a paved or unpaved surface in
preparation for placing a wearing course. A leveling course is defined as a layer of
bituminous material used to reshape a roadway cross section and eliminate sags and
irregularities in the longitudinal grade line. Wearing course is defined as a layer to
serve either as a traffic surface or a surface on which a seal coat will be placed.

The maximum and minimum depths of any layer of any course shall be in
accordance with the following:

TARGET OR DESIGN
THICKNESS (CM)
Bituminous Base Course, Grading I 10
Bituminous Base Course, Grading II 7
Bituminous Base Course, Grading III 6
Bituminous Wearing Course, Grading I 5
Bituminous Wearing Course, Grading II 4
Bituminous Wearing Course, Grading III 3

The above thicknesses were developed using the formula: Target or Design
Thickness equals three (3) times the nominal maximum size aggregate.

Bituminous materials may be dumped on the surface to receive the mixture or

discharged directly from hauling unit into a self-propelled paving machine or other
device which will produce the course as specified.

If the bituminous materials are delivered in bottom dump trucks, placed in a windrow
on the surface and subsequently loaded into the paving machine, the loading
equipment shall be self-supporting and not exert any vertical load on the paving
machine. Substantially all of the bituminous materials shall be picked up and loaded
into the paving machine.

When the bituminous materials are dumped from the hauling equipment directly into
the paving machine, care shall be taken to avoid jarring the paving machine or moving
it out of alignment. No vertical load shall be exerted on the paving machine by hauling
equipment. Hauling equipment, while dumping into the paving machine, shall be
attached firmly to the paving machine.

Sufficient quantities of bituminous materials shall be delivered in a continuous

manner, using a self-propelled paving machine conforming to these General

63
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Specifications, in a manner that the finished surface is smooth with uniform texture, no
segregation is evident, planned and specified thickness is complied with and joints are
tight and thoroughly sealed. The paving machine shall be operated at a uniform
forward speed consistent with plant production. Stopping and starting the paving
machine and folding sidewalls of the paver hopper shall be avoided.

The Contractor may propose to the Engineer and the Engineer, under certain
conditions or at certain locations, may approve equipment other than self-propelled
paving machines for placing base and leveling courses when such other equipment will
produce the results specified.

All self-propelled paving machines used to spread bituminous material shall be

equipped with automatically actuated screed controls and sensors mounted on both
sides of the paver. The sensor shall be constructed to operate from a reference line or
a multi-footed ski-type arrangement. The automatic screed control system shall operate
at all times during spreading of bituminous materials except under conditions, or at
certain locations where the Engineer deems the automatic controls impractical. Failure
of the automatic controls to function properly shall be cause for suspension of
placement of bituminous materials.

The Contractor shall establish all reference lines as may be necessary for the
operation of automatic screed controls.

Spreading and compacting bituminous concrete wearing courses will not be

permitted at night except when specified in the Special Specifications or approved by
the Engineer.

4.05.6.7 Joints. Longitudinal joints for each course shall be offset thirty (30)
centimeters from the joint in the immediate underlying course. Transverse joints shall
be offset a minimum of sixty (60) centimeters from the joint of the immediate underlying
course.

Longitudinal joints shall be located within fifteen (15) centimeters of the centerline
of the roadway or within fifteen (15) centimeters of the centerline of a lane. Longitudinal
joints shall be held to the minimum practical number. Longitudinal joints shall be
formed by lapping the screed over the first layer placed, crowding a ridge of bituminous
material at the joint and crimping the ridge of material into the joint by a compaction
roller while the material is hot.

Transverse joints shall be formed by cutting back the first layer placed to the full
depth of the layer, removing and wasting the material, spreading new bituminous
material in sufficient quantity to create a compacted thickness equal to the thickness
of the first layer. The joint shall be cross rolled with one coverage and the joint checked
with a straight edge not less than four (4) meters in length. High points shall be
removed and sags filled with additional bituminous material and the joint rolled a
second time. The joint shall again be checked with a straight edge, humps and sags
adjusted as necessary, and rolled until the joint is complete and compacted as
specified.

64
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Contact surfaces, where bituminous concrete mixtures are placed against concrete
or stone curb and gutter, bridge abutments, retaining walls, drainage facilities, a cold
pavement joint or metal surface, shall be tack coated as specified in Section 4.02,
"Bituminous Prime Coat, Tack Coat, and Fog Seal" in these General Specifications.

4.05.6.8 Compaction of Bituminous Concrete Pavement. Unless lower

temperatures are ordered by the Engineer, all courses of bituminous concrete
pavement shall be spread and the initial coverage or breakdown compaction shall be
performed when the temperature of the mixture is not less than one hundred forty
degrees Celsius (140o C.) and all rolling shall be completed before the temperature of
the mixture drops below ninety degrees Celsius (90o C.).

Longitudinal joints shall be rolled first, then rolling shall begin at the lower edge and
proceed towards the highest portion, except when compacting layers that are thicker
than nine (9) centimeters. Compaction of layers more than nine (9) centimeters in
thickness shall begin in the middle and proceed alternately towards each edge. When
the roller is within sixty (60) centimeters of either edge it shall proceed by lapping the
uncompacted mixture by not more than thirty (30) centimeters per coverage.

A coverage consists of one pass of the roller over any portion of the layer being
placed.

Sufficient compaction equipment shall be provided and compaction shall continue

until each lot of bituminous concrete pavement as described in Subsection 4.05.8,
"Quality Assurance Procedures," in these General Specifications is compacted to an
in-place density within the following range when compared to the theoretical maximum
density determined from ASTM D-2041:

Bituminous Concrete Base Course - 92 to 95

Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course - 92 to 95
Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course - 91 to 94

4.05.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL. The Contractor shall take effective action to prevent all
traffic from using the bituminous concrete pavement until such time as the Engineer has
given approval for traffic to use the pavement.

All traffic control work will be done in conformance with Section 9.02, "Traffic Control
through Work Zones," in these General Specifications.

When the roadway being paved is open to traffic, the following additional
requirements shall apply:

The Contractor shall keep road intersections and ramps open at all times except
when a ramp is being paved or the paving operations cross the road intersection or
ramp. During such time, the road intersection or ramp shall be closed for the minimum
possible time period. In hot weather, the Engineer may require the Contractor to apply
water to the pavement to accelerate finish rolling and opening to traffic.

Before closing a ramp or access to the roadway, warning signs shall be placed and
the detour or alternate route signed.

65
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

During paving operations, temporary lane stripes shall be maintained throughout the
length of project open to traffic. Temporary striping shall consist of ten (10) centimeters
by thirty (30) centimeters strips of pressure sensitive tape applied to the roadway
surface at eight (8) meter intervals. The temporary stripes shall be placed at the end
of each day's paving operation, maintained and replaced until permanent striping is
completed.

When necessary to maintain one-way traffic, the Contractor shall furnish and
operate a pilot car, employ flaggers and position all signs, markings, barricades and
other traffic control devices as needed to protect traffic and construction operations.
All traffic control work will be done in conformance with Section 9.02, "Control of Traffic
through Work Zones."

4.05.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The bituminous base, leveling and

wearing courses shall be accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the lot size shall be ten thousand (10,000) square meters for each layer
constructed. The bituminous base, leveling and wearing courses shall be sampled,
tested, and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work," in these
General Specifications. The Engineer may, during the beginning of placement of
bituminous base leveling and wearing courses, at times when test results indicate
erratic characteristics, and at any other time, reduce the lot size to sections of
bituminous base, leveling and wearing courses with similar quality characteristics. This
should facilitate the isolation and modification or replacement of low quality materials
with materials of acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength of the pavement
structure.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and
testing for each lot shall include:

1. Compaction
2. Thickness
3. Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content
4. Surface Smoothness

4.05.8.1 Compaction. The compacted density for each layer of each course shall
be determined using nuclear gauge measurements in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM D-2041, or from cores taken from the completed layer in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM D-2726. Cores shall be not less than ten
(10) centimeters in diameter obtained as described in ASTM D-979.

When testing is performed using nuclear gauges, a minimum of ten (10) randomly
selected locations shall be tested in each lot. Random selection of locations shall be
done in accordance with ASTM D-3665.

When coring is performed, a minimum of five (5) randomly selected locations shall
be tested in each lot.

66
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
The Contractor shall backfill core holes with compacted bituminous concrete mix of
the same class as placed in the lot.

The average actual in-place density from the ten (10) nuclear gauge tests or five (5)
cores shall be compared with the theoretical maximum density determined by ASTM
D-2041. The result shall be the percent relative compaction for the lot.

If any lot tested has a percent relative compaction outside the range specified in
Paragraph 4.05.6.8, "Compaction of Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General
Specifications, the Contractor shall be advised that he is not attaining the specified
percent relative compaction and that his materials or his procedures, or both, need
adjustment.

Any lot of bituminous concrete pavement that has a percent relative compaction
outside the percent relative compaction range specified in Subsection 4.05.6.8,
"Compaction of Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General Specifications
resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in accordance with
Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination
of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications may be accepted on the
basis of a reduced payment if requested in writing by the Contractor. Otherwise the lot
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Lots that have
percent relative compaction resulting in a reduced pay factor less than 0.75 shall be
removed and replaced by the contractor at his expense.

4.05.8.2 Thickness of Bituminous Concrete. The thickness of each course of

bituminous concrete pavement, complete as placed and compacted, shall be measured
from cores obtained at five (5) random locations within the lot. The thickness of each
core shall be determined, using a set of calipers, in accordance with ASTM D-3549.
The average of the five core thicknesses shall be reported as the thickness of the lot.

A lot shall be accepted when the average total thickness is not less than the planned
thickness.

Any lot of bituminous concrete pavement which has an average thickness less than
planned but resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications may be
accepted on the basis of reduced payment if requested in writing by the Contractor.
Otherwise the lot shall be overlaid as specified in the following paragraph.

When the average thickness of a lot of bituminous concrete pavement is less than
the planned thickness by an amount resulting in a reduced pay factor below 0.75 the
Contractor, at his expense, shall overlay the lot with a mix conforming to the
requirements for bituminous concrete wearing course of the class and maximum
aggregate size shown on the plans or specified in the Special Specifications. The
thickness of the overlay shall be sufficient to produce the total thickness of bituminous
concrete pavement as planned, but not less than four (4) centimeters.

4.05.8.3 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content. The

bituminous concrete aggregate gradation and bituminous content will be sampled,

67
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
tested and evaluated based on the average of a minimum of five (5) samples per lot in
accordance with the Job Mix Formula Tolerances listed in Paragraph 4.05.6.4
"Preparation of Bituminous Concrete Mixture" and Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical
Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work),"
in these General Specifications.

Every sample of bituminous concrete shall be taken on a random time basis from the
uncompacted pavement immediately behind the paving machine during each one-half
(1/2) day of work, or portion thereof. The initial sample shall be randomly selected from
within one and one-half (1/2) meters either side of the centerline of the lane being
paved and weight at least twenty-five (25) kilograms. The initial sample shall be
thoroughly mixed and quartered to obtain a test sample weighing at least six (6)
kilograms. The test sample shall be forwarded to the project laboratory and the
aggregate gradation and bituminous material content determined by extraction.

Any lot of bituminous concrete pavement that has its gradation or bituminous
material content outside the tolerances specified in Subsection 4.05.6.4, "Preparation
of Bituminous Concrete Mixture," in these General Specifications, resulting in a reduced
pay factor of 0.75 or higher may be accepted on the basis of a reduced payment if
requested in writing by the Contractor, otherwise said lot shall be removed and replaced
by the Contractor at his expense. Lots that have their gradation and bituminous
material content resulting in a reduced pay factor less than 0.75 shall be removed and
replaced by the contractor at his expense.

4.05.8.4 Wearing Course Smoothness. The completed bituminous wearing

course shall be compacted as specified, smooth, free from ruts, humps or depressions,
or irregularities. Any ridges, indentations, roller checking, or other objectionable marks
left in the surface, as determined by the Engineer, shall be eliminated by whatever
means are necessary and approved by the Engineer. The use of any equipment that
leaves ridges, indentations or other objectionable marks shall be discontinued.

When a straight edge four (4) meters in length is laid on the finished surface of the
bituminous wearing course parallel with the centerline, in such a manner that both ends
are in contact with the surface, the surface shall have no depressions which vary more
than three (3) millimeters from the lower edge of the straight edge. When the straight
edge is laid transverse to the centerline, with both ends in contact with the surface, the
surface shall have no depressions which vary more than six (6) millimeters from the
lower edge of the straight edge.

The wearing course smoothness will be measured by the Contractor under the
supervision of the Engineer with a May's RideMeter, in accordance with MOC Test and
Measurement Standards . All lots will be divided into a minimum of five (5) sublots with
each sublot being a minimum of eighty (80) meters long. The May's RideMeter results
will be statistically evaluated to determine the acceptability and quality of the surface
smoothness.

Any lot of bituminous concrete pavement that has May's Ride Meter Reading above
one hundred (100) resulting in a reduced pay factor of 0.75 or higher determined in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications may be

68
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
accepted on the basis of a reduced pay factor if requested in writing by the Contractor.
Otherwise the lot shall be removed and replaced or overlaid by Contractor at his
expenses.

4.05.8.5 Acceptance. Bituminous materials will be accepted under Subsection

1.08.3, "Certification of Compliance," in accordance with Subsection 4.01.4,
"Acceptance Procedures on Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications.

Bituminous concrete pavement construction will be accepted under Subsection

1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance," in these General Specifications.
Compaction, thickness, aggregate gradation, bituminous material content and
wearing course smoothness will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical
Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work),"
in these General Specifications in two (2) stages as follows:

The first stage shall be the selection of the lowest of the three (3) pay factors for the
quality of the bituminous concrete pavement relating to aggregate gradation, bituminous
content and density. The smoothness quality pay factor shall be the fourth quality pay
factor considered as part of the first stage for bituminous concrete wearing course. The
second stage involves the selection and application of a quantity pay factor based on
the thickness of the bituminous concrete pavement. The reduced thickness pay factor
for the lower courses of multiple course pavements will initially be applied provisionally
based on the results of the depths of the cores taken from the lower courses.
Additional cores will be taken of the total depth of all bituminous concrete pavement
courses within the lot represented by lower course reduced thickness pay factors. If the
total thickness cores show that the increased upper level course thickness has resulted
in total thickness acceptability, the lower level courses reduced thickness pay factor will
be adjusted accordingly. The second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be applied
to all the individual course lots in addition to the first stage lowest quality pay factor as
determined in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General
Specifications.

4.05.9 MINOR BITUMINOUS CONCRETE. This work consists of constructing minor

hot asphalt concrete for medians, drivepads, sidewalks, paved waterways, curbs, and
other minor surfacing.

4.05.9.1 Construction Requirements.

4.05.9.1.1 Composition of Mixture (Job-Mix Formula). The Contractor shall

provide a bituminous concrete mixture composed of crushed stone or gravel and
asphalt cement mixed in an approved plant. The gradation and quality of the aggregate
and the grade and quality of the asphalt cement shall conform to those normally used
locally in the construction of highways by either Ministry or Municipality agencies.

The Contractor shall submit the strength, quality, and gradation specifications for
the bituminous concrete mixture including copies of laboratory test reports that
demonstrate the properties of the aggregates, asphalt cement, additives, and mixture
meet the Ministry or Municipality agency specifications. He shall also submit the
maximum density of the mixture as determined by AASHTO T 209.

69
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.05.9.1.2 Surface Preparation. The Contractor shall prepare the surface

according to Paragraph 4.05.6.5, "Preparation of Surface," in these General
Specifications.

4.05.9.1.3 Weather Limitations. Minor bituminous concrete shall be placed on a dry,

unfrozen surface when the air temperature in the shade is at least five degrees Celsius
(5o C) and rising.

4.05.9.1.4 Placing. The mixture shall be spread with a mechanical paver. In

areas where mechanical spreading and finishing is impractical, each course shall be
spread and finished by hand raking, screeding, or by other approved methods. The
Contractor shall construct a surface that is uniform in texture and cross-section. Joints
shall be constructed according to Paragraph 4.05.6.7, "Joints," in these General
Specifications.

4.05.9.1.5 Compacting. Mechanically spread paving mixtures shall be

compacted to a minimum of ninety percent (90%) of the maximum density determined
from ASTM D-2041 by nuclear gauge.

Non-mechanically spread paving mixtures shall be compacted by rolling with a

hand-operated roller weighing not less than one hundred forty (140) kilograms or with
a small power roller. Areas that are not accessible to rollers shall be compacted by
other approved methods.

4.05.9.2 Pavement Smoothness. The Contractor shall use a four (4) meter metal
straightedge to measure smoothness at right angles and parallel to the centerline at
designated sites. Defective areas are surface deviations in excess of six (6) millimeters
between any two (2) contacts of the straightedge with the surface. All defective areas
shall be corrected using approved methods.

4.05.9.3 Acceptance. Minor bituminous concrete mixtures will be accepted under

Subsection 1.08.3, "Certifications of Conformance," in these General Specifications.
Minor bituminous concrete construction work will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4,
"Measured or Tested Conformance," in these General Specifications.

4.05.10 MEASUREMENT. The quantity of each lot and course of bituminous concrete
pavement shall be measured by the cubic meter, as placed and compacted to the
required density, within the lines and grades and thickness shown on the plans,
specified or directed by the Engineer. No measurement will be made for overdepth or
areas of pavement placed outside authorized limits.

Prime coat, when placed, shall be measured as specified in Section 4.02,

"Bituminous Prime and Tack Coat," in these General Specifications.

Asphalt cement and modified asphalt cement shall be considered subsidiary to the
construction of each lot of bituminous concrete pavement unless specifically stated in
the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities. When they are listed
separately they shall be measured in liters.

70
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Tack coat shall not be measured.

Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures and asphalt modifiers used by the contractor to
meet the Job Mix Formula (JMF) requirements will be considered subsidiary to the
construction of the bituminous emulsion base course and will not be measured
separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill
of Quantities. When they are listed separately they shall be measured in liters,
kilograms, or tons as specified in the Special Specifications and as listed in the Bill of
Quantities.

4.05.11 PAYMENT. Payment shall be made at the contract unit price, or adjusted
contract unit price, per cubic meter measured as described above for each grading and
class of bituminous concrete base, leveling and wearing courses listed in the Bill of
Quantities.

Prime Coat shall be paid for as specified in Section 4.01, "Bituminous Prime and
Tack Coat," in these General Specifications. Tack coat shall not be measured or paid
separately and shall be considered as subsidiary to the construction of Bituminous
Concrete Pavement.

Asphalt cement, modified asphalt cement, mineral fillers, chemical admixtures,

and asphalt modifiers shall be considered subsidiary to the construction of bituminous
concrete and shall not be paid for separately unless specifically stated in the Special
Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities. When they are listed in the Bill of
Quantities and specified in the Special Specifications they shall be paid for when
measured in accordance in Subsection 4.05.10 Measurement in these General
Specifications.

When the asphalt or modified cement is subsidiary to the bituminous concrete

pavement the payment for each lot of bituminous concrete pavement shall include the
supplying, heating, mixing, placing, and compacting the bituminous material as part of
the bituminous concrete pavement.

When the asphalt or modified asphalt cement is listed separately in the Bill of
Quantities the payment for each liter of asphalt or modified asphalt cement shall only
include the supplying of the bituminous material. The payment for each lot of
bituminous concrete payment shall then still include the heating, mixing, placing, and
compacting of the bituminous material as part of the bituminous concrete pavement.

When a lot of bituminous concrete base, leveling or wearing course is accepted with
a deficiency, the adjusted contract unit price for said lot shall be the product of the
contract unit price of bituminous concrete base, leveling or wearing course and the
lowest quality and quantity pay factors specified in Subsection 4.05.8, "Quality
Assurance Procedures," in these General Specifications.

The above prices and payment shall cover and be full compensation for furnishing
labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for completing all work
involved in construction of bituminous concrete pavement as specified in Subsection
1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

71
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

40501 Bituminous Concrete Base Course Cubic Meter

4050101 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4050102 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4050103 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4050104 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4050105 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4050106 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
40502 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course Cubic Meter
4050201 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4050202 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4050203 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4050204 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4050205 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4050206 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4050207 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4050208 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4050209 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
40503 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Cubic Meter
4050301 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4050302 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4050303 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4050304 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4050305 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4050306 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4050307 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4050308 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4050309 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
40504 Asphalt Cement Liter
4050401 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-2.5 Liter
4050402 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-5 Liter
4050403 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-10 Liter
4050404 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-20 Liter
4050405 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-30 Liter
4050406 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-40-50 Liter
4050407 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC 60-70 Liter
4050408 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC 85-100 Liter
40505 Modified Asphalt Cement Liter
4050501 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-2.5 Liter
4050502 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-5 Liter
4050503 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-10 Liter
4050504 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-20 Liter
4050505 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-30 Liter
4050506 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC40-50 Liter
4050507 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC60-70 Liter
4050508 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC85-100 Liter
40506 Mineral Filler Ton

72
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

4050601 Mineral Filler, Portland Cement Ton

4050602 Mineral Filler, Hydraulic Cement Ton
4050603 Mineral Filler, Lime Type N or S Ton
40507 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier Liter
4050701 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Antistrip Liter
4050702 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Polymer Liter
40508 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier Kilogram
4050801 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Antistrip Kilogram
4050802 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Polymer Kilogram
4050803 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Latex Kilogram
4050804 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Rubber Kilogram
40509 Minor Bituminous Concrete Ton

73
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 4.06 - HOT-MIX RECYCLED BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

4.06.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of furnishing and mixing aggregate,
pulverized bituminous concrete pavement, bituminous material and/or bituminous
recycling agent, and hauling, spreading and compacting the mixture on a prepared
surface, all as shown on the plans, specified in these General Specifications or the
Special Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

Pulverized bituminous concrete pavement shall be referred to in this specification

as RAP (Recycled Asphalt Pavement).

Hot-mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete will be designated as Hot-mix Recycled

Bituminous Concrete or Hot-mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Type I or Type II.

Type I Hot-mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete shall consist of up to twenty percent

(20%) by weight RAP blended with not less than eighty percent (80%) bituminous
concrete base or wearing course materials conforming to the requirements specified
in Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General Specifications.

Type II Hot-mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete shall consist of twenty to seventy

percent (20 to 70%) RAP blended with thirty to eighty percent (30 to 80%) aggregates,
bituminous material and/or hot-mix bituminous recycling agent. The proportion of RAP
to new materials, aggregate grading and quality requirements and the bituminous
material and/or bituminous modifying material to be furnished shall be specified in the
Special Specifications.

The plans or Special Specifications will state the grading and class of base course
or wearing course requirements to which the hot mix recycled bituminous concrete shall
conform. When the plans or Special Specifications do not so state, the hot mix recycled
bituminous concrete shall conform to the requirements for the Grading and Class of
Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course designated by the Engineer from Section 4.05,
"Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General Specifications.

Hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete may be produced in a batch-type, continuous

pugmill or dryer-drum mixing plant. Central plant mix proportioning may be by hot or
cold feed control at the option of the Contractor.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course
Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course
Hot-Mix Recycling Agent

4.06.2 MATERIALS.

4.06.2.1 Bituminous Material. Bituminous material for hot-mix recycled bituminous

concrete shall be the viscosity or penetration grade specified in the Special
Specifications conforming to the requirements specified in Table 4.01-1A or 1B, Section
4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications.

74
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.06.2.2 Hot-Mix Recycling Agent. Hot-mix recycling agent shall conform to the
requirements listed in Tables 4.06-1 or 4.06-2 below or as specified in the Special
Specifications.

TABLE 4.06-1
RECYCLING OIL

Requirement
ASTM/AASHTO Light Medium
Property Test Method Grade Grade

Viscosity @ 60o C (140o F) cSt T202 200-800 1000-4000

Flash Point, C.O.C., C(F) minimum T48 205 (400) 219 (425)
Saturates, Wt, % D 2007 28 Max. 30 Max.
Tests on Residue T240 or
From RTFO (Note 1) T179
or TFO Oven @ 163o C (325o F):
Wt, Change, + % 4.0 Max. 2.0 Max.
Viscosity Ratio (See Note 2) 2.5 Max. 2.5 Max.

Notes:
1. RTFO = Rolling Thin Film-Circulating Oven

2. Viscosity Ratio = RTFO Residue Viscosity @ 60o C (140o F), cSt

Viscosity of the Original Material @ 60o C (140o F), cSt

75
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.06-2
EMULSIFIED RECYCLING AGENT (Note 1)

Property Test Method Requirement

Viscosity @ 25 degrees C., SFS ASTM D 244 15-85

Pumping Stability G.B. Method (Note 2) Pass
Emulsion Coarseness, % Sieve Test
ASTM D 244 (Note 3) 0.1 Max.
Sensitivity to Fines, % Cement Mixing
ASTM D 244 2.0 Max.
Particle Charge ASTM D 244 Positive
Concentration of Oil Phase, % ASTM D 244 (Note 4) 60 Min.

Notes:
1. Oils used for emulsions must meet specifications listed in Table 4.06-1 or as
specified in the Special Specifications.

2. Pumping stability is determined by charging four hundred fifty (450) ml of

emulsion into a one (1) liter beaker and circulating the emulsion through a gear pump
(Roper 29.B22621) having six and three-tenths (6.3) millimeter inlet and outlet. The
emulsion passes if there is no significant oil separation after circulating ten (10)
minutes.

3. Test procedure identical with ASTM D 244 except that distilled water will be used
in place of two percent (2%) sodium oleate solution

4. ASTM D 244 Evaporation Test for percent residue is modified by heating fifty (50)
gram sample to one hundred fifty degrees Celsius (150 o C.) until foaming ceases, then
cooling immediately and calculating results.

Test reports and Certificates of Compliance shall be furnished with each shipment
of emulsified recycling agent.

4.06.2.3 Mineral Fillers. Mineral Fillers shall be either Portland Cement, blended
hydraulic cement or lime conforming to the following requirements:

Materials Requirement

Portland Cement, Type I or II ASTM C-150

Blended Hydraulic Cement, Type IP ASTM C-595
Lime, Type N or S ASTM C-207

76
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
When required, the amount of mineral filler used shall be between one and two percent
(1 - 2%) of the weight of the aggregate, with the exact amount to be stated in the Job
Mix Formula.

4.06.2.4 Chemical Admixtures and Asphalt Modifiers. The types and amounts
of chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers used shall be limited to those listed in the
Special Specifications or proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Ministry's
Research and materials Department to establish compliance with the job mix formula
(JMF) requirements contained in Subsection 4.05.3, "Proportioning Bituminous
Concrete Mixtures," in these General Specifications.

All chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers including anti-stripping additives and

polymers shall be thoroughly mixed and uniformly combined with the bituminous
material.

4.06.2.5 Aggregate. The aggregate specified for use in Types I and II Hot-Mix
Recycled Bituminous concrete shall conform to the requirements for Bituminous
Concrete Pavement specified in Subsection 4.05.2, "Materials," in these General
Specifications.

4.06.2.6 RAP. RAP for hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete shall consist of
bituminous concrete pavement which has been pulverized or crushed and reduced in
size to the following grading:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

37.5 mm (1 1/2 inch) 100

25 mm (1 inch) 90-100

4.06.3 PROPORTIONING HOT-MIX RECYCLED BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

MIXTURES.

4.06.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal. When Type I hot-mix recycled bituminous
concrete is specified in the Special Specifications, or when the Contractor, at his option,
elects to furnish Type I hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete, the Contractor shall
prepare the Job Mix Design Proposal (JMF) in accordance with the requirements
specified in Subsection 4.05.3, "Proportioning Bituminous Concrete Mixtures," in these
General Specifications. When Type II hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete is specified
in the Special Specifications, the Contractor shall prepare the Job Mix Design Proposal
(JMF) in accordance with the requirements specified in this specification and the
Special Specifications.

The JMF for both Types I and II hot mix recycled bituminous concrete shall conform
to all of the requirements of Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these
General Specifications.

77
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
At least thirty (30) days before producing hot mix recycled bituminous concrete, the
Contractor shall obtain representative samples of all materials specified to be furnished
and submit said samples to the Engineer. Not less than fifty (50) kilograms of RAP and
each size aggregate, eight (8) liters of each type and grade bituminous material and
four (4) liters of recycling agent shall be furnished. The recycling agent shall be
identified by trade-name, grade and source of supply.

The Contractor shall perform all testing required to establish the proportions of each
material to be combined to produce the specified type of hot mix recycled bituminous
concrete.

The Contractor shall submit the following information:

1. For the RAP. Extracted bituminous material content as a percent of dry

aggregate and the gradation of the aggregate. Penetration of the bituminous material
recovered from the RAP. One test shall be furnished for every one thousand (1,000)
cubic meters of pavement to be pulverized and recycled.

2. Added aggregate. Fracture, gradation and quality requirements which, when

blended with the RAP will produce all requirements specified for bituminous concrete
in Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General Specifications.

3. Estimate total bituminous material demand based on mix design requirements in

Subsection 4.05.3, "Proportioning Bituminous Concrete Mixes," in these General
Specifications.

4. Determine type, grade and quantity of bituminous material to be added to the

RAP and added aggregate. The criteria shall be:

(1) The total bituminous material demand as determined in Number 3, above, will
be met and,

(2) The combined bituminous material in the final mixture shall have a
penetration not less than forty (40).

5. Results obtained from trial mixes prepared in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General
Specifications.

6. Recommended JMF with the following information:

(1) The percentage of RAP to be used, by total weight of mix.

(2) The gradation of each aggregate to be blended with the RAP and the percent
of each aggregate, by total weight of mix.

(3) The type, grade and percent of bituminous material to be added, by total
weight of mix. The type and amount of mineral filler, chemical admixture and asphalt
modifier to be added by total weight of mix.

78
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
(4) The type and percent of hot-mix recycling agent to be added, by total weight
of mix.

(5) The results of all tests performed by the Engineer.

(6) The theoretical maximum unit weight of the mixture based on ASTM D 2041.

7. The type and location of plants to be used for mixing each mix to be furnished.

8. The proposed beginning date for producing Hot-Mix Recycled bituminous

concrete mixtures.

The Engineer shall be provided access to the materials sampling and testing
operations at all times.

At the same time that the above information is provided, or at a later date, when
requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer twenty-five (25)
kilogram samples of each individual aggregate size, four (4) liters of bituminous material
and, when used, two (2) kilogram samples of mineral filler and chemical admixture, all
representing the materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish.

4.06.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mixture Formula. The Engineer's review and

acceptance of the hot-mix recycle bituminous concrete mixture job mix formula shall be
in accordance with Paragraph 4.05.3.2, "Acceptance of Job Mix Formula," in these
General Specifications including the field control strip provision.

4.06.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions. The Contractor shall not alter his methods
of crushing, screening, blending, or stockpiling from that used to produce materials for
the approved JMF. Changes to the JMF will not be permitted without retesting and
resubmission of a processed (revised) JMF in accordance with all the steps in
Paragraph 4.06.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in these General Specifications.
Significant changes may include, but not be limited to, changes in the amount of type
of materials rejected or wasted, changes in the amount of materials crushed, reductions
in the amount of crushed fines, changes in the amount and type of mineral filler and
mineral and chemical admixtures to be used.

Should the Contractor change his source of supply of aggregate and grade of
bituminous material, he shall furnish a new information and samples of materials, as
described in Paragraph 4.06.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in these General
Specifications as determined by the Engineer to be necessary, at least twenty-one (21)
days before their intended use.

At any time after the JMF is approved the Contractor may submit a new JMF for
approval by the Engineer. If the revised JMF is approved it shall become the approved
JMF.

The Engineer may, at any time, require a change in the JMF which will provide a hot
mix recycled bituminous concrete mixture that conforms to the quality intended by the
specifications.

79
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.06.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall supply the proper type and sufficient
numbers of equipment to complete the work within the Contract time and in accordance
with his Program of Work as approved by the Engineer.

4.06.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. The limitations specified in Subsection 4.05.5,

"Weather Limitations," in these issued in these General Specifications shall apply.

4.06.6 CONSTRUCTION. The requirements specified in Subsection 4.05.6,

"Construction," in these General Specifications, shall apply when Type I and Type II hot
mix recycled bituminous concrete are produced in a central mixing plant. The following
additional requirements shall also apply:

1. Before being fed into the mixing chamber, the RAP shall be stored separately.
The stockpiles of RAP shall be prepared as specified in Subsection 3.01.5, "Stockpiling
Aggregates," in these General Specifications. Stockpile height shall not exceed three
(3) meters. The stockpiled RAP shall be protected from contamination during dust and
sand storms by covering with heavy weight plastic sheeting held in place with vehicle
tires or other objects.

2. The bituminous recycling agent, when used, shall be stored separately and
added to the bituminous material in the storage tank, through an in-line blender or
directly into the mixing chamber, as approved by the Engineer. When bituminous
recycling agent is added to the bituminous material in storage the combined materials
shall be uniformly blended together.

3. When the Contractor elects to use a batch-mixing plant, the RAP shall be fed
from storage into the weigh hopper and the new aggregate sizes added in the
proportion specified in the approved JMF. RAP shall not pass through the dryer. When
the Contractor elects to use a batch-mixing plant, hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete
shall be produced using automatic controls. The combined RAP and new aggregate
shall be discharged into the mixer and mixed for an initial period not less than twenty
(20) seconds before addition of bituminous material and/or bituminous modifying
materials. Upon completion of the initial mixing period, the bituminous materials shall
be introduced into the mixer, and all materials mixed for an additional time of not less
than thirty (30) seconds before the hopper gates are opened.

4. When the Contractor elects to use a dryer-drum mixing plant, the RAP shall be
introduced into the dryer-drum and combined with the hot, new aggregate in such a
manner that the RAP is protected from direct contact with the burner's flame by a
shield, separator, second drum, or other means as may be approved by the Engineer.
The bituminous materials shall be introduced into the dryer-drum after the RAP and
aggregate have been combined.

5. When the Contractor elects to use a continuous mix pugmill, the RAP and new
aggregate shall be introduced into the mixing chamber simultaneously, followed by the
bituminous materials. Mixing shall continue for not less than forty (40) seconds after
introduction of the bituminous materials. RAP shall not pass through the dryer.

6. The grading of the combined RAP and aggregate, after extraction and gradation
of the combined mixture, shall conform to the approved JMF within the tolerances listed

80
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
in Table 4.05-4 for the grading class of aggregate specified as modified in Paragraph
4.06.8.3, "Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material," in these General
Specifications.

7. Spreading and compaction of Type I hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete shall

conform to the requirements for bituminous concrete wearing course specified in
Subsection 4.05.6.8, "Compaction of Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General
Specifications. Spreading and compaction of Type II hot-mix recycled bituminous
concrete shall conform to the requirements for bituminous concrete base course
specified in Subsection 4.05.6.8, "Compaction of Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in
these General Specifications.

4.06.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL. The Contractor shall take effective action to permit traffic
to safely pass through recycling operations work zones as specified in Subsection
4.05.7, "Traffic Control," in these General Specifications.

4.06.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The hot-mix recycled bituminous

base and wearing courses shall be accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the
Special Specifications, the lot size shall be ten thousand (10,000) square meters for
each layer constructed. The hot-mix recycled bituminous base and wearing courses
shall be sampled, tested, and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance
of Work," in these General Specifications. The Engineer may, during the beginning of
placement of hot-mix recycled bituminous base and wearing courses, at times when
test results indicate erratic characteristics, and at any other time, reduce the lot size to
sections of hot-mix recycled bituminous base and wearing courses with similar quality
characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and modification or replacement of
low quality materials with materials of acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength
of the pavement structure.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and
testing for each lot shall include:

1. Compaction
2. Thickness
3. Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content
4. Wearing Course Smoothness

4.06.8.1 Compaction. Hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete pavement compaction

shall be tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph 4.05.8.1 "Compaction" in these
General Specifications.

4.06.8.2 Thickness. Hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete pavement thickness

shall be measured and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph 4.05.8.2 "Thickness" in
these General Specifications.

4.06.8.3 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content. Hot-mix

recycled bituminous concrete pavement aggregate gradation and bituminous material
content shall be sampled, tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph 4.05.8.3,

81
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
"Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content," except that the allowable
deviation from job mix target values shall be modified to reflect the RAP material as
follows:

1. Bituminous Material Content. The upper and lower specification limits are the
approved job-mix formula target value +0.4 x (1 + the ratio of the reclaimed asphalt
pavement material to the total mixture rounded to the nearest 0.10%).

Example: If thirty percent (30%) of the mixture is reclaimed asphalt pavement

material, then the allowable deviation from target value for percent asphalt content is
0.4(1.30) = 0.52%. Use plus 0.5% and minus 0.5% from approved job-mix formula
target value for bituminous material content.

2. Aggregate gradation. The upper and lower specification limits are the approved
job-mix formula target values plus or minus the allowable deviations shown in Table
4.05-4 multiplied by one plus the ratio of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material
to the total mixture. Round to the nearest percent except for the 0.075 mm (No. 200)
sieve that is rounded to the nearest 0.10%.

Example: If thirty percent (30%) of the mixture is reclaimed asphalt pavement

material, then all allowable deviation from target value for percent of aggregate passing
the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve is 2(1.30) = 2.6%. Use plus 2.6% and minus 2.6% from
the approved job-mix formula target value for percent passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200)
sieve.

4.06.8.4 Wearing Course Smoothness. The surface layer of hot-mix recycled

bituminous concrete pavement surface smoothness shall be tested and evaluated as
detailed in Paragraph 4.05.8.4, "Wearing Course Smoothness," in these General
Specifications.

4.06.8.5 Acceptance. Bituminous materials will be accepted under Subsection

1.08.3, "Certification of Compliance," in accordance with Subsection 4.01.4,
"Acceptance Procedures for Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications.

Hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete construction will be accepted under

Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance," in these General
Specifications.

Hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete compaction, thickness, aggregate gradation,

bituminous material content and wearing course smoothness will be accepted under
Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination
of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications in two (2) stages as
follows:

The first stage shall be the selection of the lowest of the three (3) pay factors for the
quality of the hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete relating to aggregate gradation,
bituminous content and density. The smoothness quality pay factor shall be the fourth
quality pay factor considered as part of the first state for hot-mix recycled bituminous
concrete wearing courses. The second stage involves the selection and application of
a quantity pay factor based on the thickness of the hot-mix recycled bituminous

82
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
concrete. The reduced thickness pay factor for the lower courses of multiple course
pavements will initially be applied provisionally based on the results of the depths of the
cores taken from the lower courses. Additional cores will be taken of the total depth of
all hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete courses within the lot represented by lower
course reduced thickness pay factors. If the total thickness cores show that the
increased upper level course thickness has resulted in total thickness acceptability, the
lower level courses reduced thickness pay factor will be adjusted accordingly. The
second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be applied to all the individual course
lots in addition to the first stage lowest quality pay factor as determined in accordance
with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications.

4.06.9 MEASUREMENT. Each course of hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete

pavement shall be measured by the cubic meter, as placed and compacted to the
required density, within the lines and grades and thickness shown on the plans,
specified or directed by the Engineer. No measurement will be made for overdepth or
areas of pavement placed outside authorized limits.

Asphalt cement and modified asphalt cement shall be considered subsidiary to the
construction of the hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete pavement and shall not be
measured separately unless specifically specified in the Special Specifications and
listed in the Bill of Quantities. When they are listed separately in the Bill of Quantities
and specified in the Special Specifications they shall be measured in liters in
accordance with subsection 4.05.10 "Measurement" in these General Specifications.

Hot-mix bituminous recycling agent shall be measured separately in liters unless

specifically stated in the Special Specifications and the item is not listed in the Bill of
Quantities.

Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures and asphalt modifiers used by the contractor to
meet the Job Mix Formula (JMF) requirements will be considered subsidiary to the
construction of the hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete pavement and will not be
measured separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed
in the Bill of Quantities. When they are listed separately in the Bill of Quantities and
specified in the Special Specifications they shall be measured in liters, kilograms, or
tons in accordance with Subsection 4.05.10 "Measurement" in these General
Specifications.

Prime coat, when placed, shall be measured as specified in Section 4.02,

"Bituminous Prime Coat and Tack Coat," in these General Specifications. Tack coat
shall not be measured.

4.06.10 PAYMENT. Payment shall be made at the contract unit price, or adjusted
contract unit price, per cubic meter measured as described above for each lot and type
of hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Asphalt cement and modified asphalt cement shall be considered subsidiary to the
construction of hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete and shall not be paid for
separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill
of Quantities. When they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in the Special

83
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Specifications they shall be paid for as measured in subsection 4.05.11 "Payment" in
these General Specifications.

Hot-mix bituminous recycling agent shall be measured as described above and paid
for separately unless otherwise specifically stated in the Special Specifications and the
item is not listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Prime coat shall be paid for at the contract unit price per liter of bituminous material
as listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Tack coat shall be considered subsidiary to the construction of hot-mix recycled

bituminous concrete and shall not be paid for unless stated in the Special Specifications
and listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures, and asphalt modifiers used by the con tractor to
meet the Job Mix Formula requirements shall be considered subsidiary to the
construction of bituminous emulsion base course and shall not be paid for separately
unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities.
When they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in the Special Specifications
they shall be paid for as provided in Subsection 4.05.11 “Payment” in these General
Specifications.

When a lot of Type I or Type II hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete pavement is

accepted with non-specified compaction, thickness, aggregate gradation, bituminous
material content or surface smoothness, the adjusted contract unit price for said lot
shall be the product of the contract unit price for Type I or Type II Hot-Mix Recycled
Bituminous Concrete listed in the Bill of Quantities and the appropriate quality and
quantity pay factors determined as specified in Subsection 4.06.8, "Quality Assurance
Procedures," in these General Specifications.

The above prices and payment shall cover and be full compensation for furnishing
labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for completing and
performing all work involved in construction of hot-mix recycled bituminous concrete
pavement as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General
Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

40601 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course Cubic Meter
4060101 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type I, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4060102 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type I, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4060103 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type I, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4060104 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type I, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4060105 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type I, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter

84
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4060106 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type I, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4060107 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type I, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4060108 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type I, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4060109 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type I, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
4060110 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type II, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4060111 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type II, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4060112 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type II, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4060113 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type II, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4060114 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type II, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4060115 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type II, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4060116 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type II, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4060117 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type II, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4060118 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course,
Type II, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
40602 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Cubic Meter
4060201 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type I, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4060202 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type I, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4060203 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type I, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4060204 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type I, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4060205 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type I, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4060206 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type I, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4060207 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type I, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4060208 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type I, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4060209 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type I, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
4060210 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type II, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4060211 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type II, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4060212 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,

85
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Type II, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4060213 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type II, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4060214 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type II, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4060215 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type II, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4060216 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type II, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4060217 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type II, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4060218 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course,
Type II, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
40603 Hot Mix Recycling Agent Liter

86
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 4.07 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE FRICTION COURSE

4.07.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of furnishing and mixing aggregate and
bituminous material in a central mixing plant, hauling, spreading and compacting the
mixture on a prepared surface, all as shown on the plans, in accordance with these
specifications and the Special Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

Bituminous concrete friction course mixtures shall be produced in batch, continuous

pugmill or dryer-drum mixing plant.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Bituminous Concrete Friction Course

4.07.2 MATERIALS.

4.07.2.1 Bituminous Material. Bituminous material for bituminous concrete friction

course shall be the Viscosity or penetration grade specified in the Special Specifications
conforming to the requirements in Table 4.01-1A or 1B, Section 4.01, "Bituminous
Materials," in these General Specifications.

4.07.2.2 Aggregate. All aggregate shall be hard durable particles or fragments of

crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed gravel free from decomposed materials,
organic materials and other deleterious substances. The aggregate shall not contain
more than one percent (1.0%) by weight particles having a specific gravity below 1.95.

Unless otherwise specified in the Special Specifications, the combined aggregate,

prior to the addition of bituminous material, shall conform to the following gradation and
quality requirements:

AGGREGATE GRADING REQUIREMENTS - MRDTM 419

BITUMINOUS CONCRETE FRICTION COURSE

Sieve Percent
Size Passing

12.5 mm (1/2 inch) 100

9.75 mm (3/8 inch) 95-100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 30-50
2.36 mm (No. 8) 5-15
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-5

87
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

Sodium Sulfate Soundness

Loss, MRDTM 311 - Percent 10 Max.
Abrasion Loss, MRDTM 309 - Percent 30 Max.
Polish Value, MRDTM 317 - Percent 35 Min.
Flakiness Index, MRDTM 423 - Percent 25 Max.
Retained Strength, MRDTM 415 - Percent 50 Min.

Percent Fracture
2 Face Fracture - Percent 75 Min.
1 Face Fracture - Percent 90 Min.

Percent fracture shall be determined for the material retained on the 2.36 mm (No.
8) sieve. Each fractured face shall have a minimum dimension from edge to edge
across the fractured face which is not less than one-third (1/3) the maximum dimension
of the aggregate particle.

4.07.2.3 Mineral Fillers. Mineral fillers shall be either Portland cement, blended
hydraulic cement or lime conforming to the following requirements:

Materials Requirement

Portland Cement, Type I or II ASTM C-150

Blended Hydraulic Cement, Type IP ASTM C-595
Lime, Type N or S ASTM C-207

When required, the amount of mineral filler used shall be between one and two
percent (1 - 2%) of the weight of the aggregate, with the exact amount to be stated in
the Job Mix Formula.

4.07.2.4 Chemical Admixtures and Asphalt Modifiers. The types and amounts
of chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers used shall be limited to those listed in the
Special Specifications or proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Ministry's
Research and Materials Department to establish compliance with the job mix formula
(JMF) requirements contained in Subsection 4.05.3, "Proportioning Bituminous
Concrete Mixtures," in these General Specifications.

All chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers including anti-stripping additives and

polymers shall be thoroughly mixed and uniformly combined with the bituminous
material.

88
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.07.3 PROPORTIONING BITUMINOUS CONCRETE FRICTION COURSE
MIXTURES.

4.07.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
his proposed Job Mix Formula (JMF) in accordance with the requirements of
Subsection 4.05.3, "Proportioning Bituminous Concrete Mixtures," in these General
Specifications, MRD Manual of Materials and Tests and all current circulars issued by
the Ministry of Communications, modified as follows:

1. Marshall test data are not required.

2. The information furnished shall include a specific bituminous material content and
the temperature at which the mixture will be discharged from the mixing plant.

3. The type, grade and quantity of any mineral, chemical or asphalt modifier
admixture to be added to the mixture shall be stated.

The Engineer shall be provided access to the materials sampling and testing
operations at all times.

At the same time that the above information is provided, the Contractor shall supply
to the Engineer one hundred (100) kilogram samples of each individual aggregate size,
eight (8) liters of bituminous material and, when used, sufficient quantities of mineral
filler and chemical admixture to complete two (2) mix design checks, all representing
the materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish.

4.07.3.2 Acceptance Job Mix Formula. The Engineer's review and acceptance
of the bituminous concrete friction course mixture job mix formula shall be in
accordance with Paragraph 4.05.3.2, "Acceptance of Job Mix Formula," in these
General Specifications including the field control strip provision.

4.07.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions. The Contractor shall not alter his methods
of crushing, screening, blending, or stockpiling from that used to produce materials for
the approved JMF. Changes to the JMF will not be permitted without retesting and
resubmission of a proposed (revised) JMF in accordance with all the steps in Paragraph
4.07.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in these General Specifications. Significant
changes may include, but not be limited to, changes in the amount or type of materials
rejected or wasted, changes in the amount of materials crushed, reductions in the
amount of crushed fines, changes in the amount and type of mineral filler and mineral
and chemical admixtures to be used.

Should the Contractor change his source of supply of aggregate and grade of
bituminous material, he shall furnish a new information and samples of materials, as
described in Paragraph 4.07.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in these General
Specifications as determined by the Engineer to be necessary, at least twenty-one (21)
days before their intended use. At any time after the JMF is approved the Contractor
may submit a new JMF for approval by the Engineer. If the revised JMF is approved
it shall become the approved JMF.

89
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
The Engineer may at any time require a change in the JMF which will provide a
bituminous emulsion treated base that best conforms to the quality intended by the
specifications.

4.07.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall supply the proper type and sufficient
numbers of equipment to complete the work within the Contract time and in accordance
with his Program of Work as approved by the Engineer.

4.07.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Bituminous concrete friction course shall not be

placed on any wet or frozen surface, during dust or sand storms, when wind or other
weather conditions prevent the proper handling of the bituminous mixture or when the
average temperature of the surface on which the mixture is to be placed is less than
twenty-five degrees Celsius (25o C.).

4.07.6 CONSTRUCTION. Construction and quality control testing shall be performed

in accordance with the requirements specified in Subsection 4.05.6, "Construction," in
these General Specifications, modified as follows:

1. Marshall testing will not be required.

2. When the Contractor elects to use a plant equipped with hot-feed control,
aggregate for bituminous concrete friction course, before being fed to the drier, need
not be separated into sizes and stored separately. After being dried, aggregate for
bituminous concrete friction course shall be separated into two (2) or more sizes and
each size stored in a separate bin.

3. When the Contractor elects to use a plant equipped with cold-feed control,
aggregate for bituminous concrete friction course, before being fed to the drier, shall be
separated into two or more sizes and stored separately.

4. When discharged from the mixing plant, the temperature of the bituminous
concrete friction course shall not exceed one hundred thirty-five degrees Celsius (135 o
C.).

5. Bituminous concrete friction course material shall be stored in silos only. All
bituminous concrete friction course material placed in storage during any day shall be
used before darkness. Any material remaining in storage at darkness shall be removed
from storage and disposed of as may be approved by the Engineer.

6. Trucks used in hauling bituminous concrete friction course material shall be

equipped with approved covers for the total area of load. When the air temperature is
less than twelve degrees Celsius (12o C.) and the length of haul exceeds ten (10)
kilometers, the bituminous concrete friction course material shall be covered, except
when the Engineer approves otherwise.

7. Bituminous concrete friction course material shall be dumped directly into the
hopper of a self-propelled paving machine. Dumping directly on the surface shall not
be permitted.

90
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
8. Bituminous concrete friction course material shall be spread at a temperature
not less than ninety-five degrees Celsius (95o C.) and not more than one hundred
twenty (120o C.), measured in the hopper of the paving machine. Bituminous concrete
friction course shall be spread at a rate between forty-five (45) and sixty (60) kilograms
per square meter as necessary to provide a compacted thickness which is not less than
eighteen (18) millimeters.

9. Bituminous concrete friction course shall be rolled only with a steel-tired, two (2)
axle-tandem roller weighing not less than ten thousand (10,000) kilograms. Initial or
breakdown rolling shall consist of three (3) coverages of the layer of bituminous
concrete friction course and begin immediately after spreading of the bituminous
concrete friction course material. Finish rolling shall follow breakdown rolling without
delay and continue until the surface is smooth, without ridges or indentations.

10. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall place a fog seal conforming
to the requirements specified in Section 4.03, "Bituminous Surface Treatments," in
these General Specifications.

4.07.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL. The Contractor shall take effective action to permit traffic
to safely pass through bituminous concrete friction course construction work zones as
specified in Subsection 4.05.7, "Traffic Control," in these General Specifications.

4.07.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Bituminous Concrete Friction Course

shall be accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications, the lot
size shall be five thousand (5,000) square meters. The bituminous concrete friction
course shall be sampled, tested, and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08,
"Acceptance of Work," in these General Specifications. The Engineer may, during the
beginning of placement of bituminous concrete friction course, at times when test
results indicate erratic quality characteristics and at any other time, reduce the lot size
to sections with similar quality characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and
modification or replacement of low-quality materials with materials of acceptable quality
to maintain the overall strength of the pavement structure.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all lots shall be recorded by roadway, lane and
centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and testing for each lot shall
include:
1. Thickness
2. Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content
3. Surface Smoothness

4.07.8.1 Thickness. A lot shall be accepted when the average thickness is not less
than the planned thickness. The bituminous concrete friction course thickness will be
sampled, tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph 4.05.8.2, "Thickness," in these
General Specifications.

The Contractor shall backfill density and thickness test holes with bituminous
concrete friction course or other material approved by the Engineer.

91
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.07.8.2 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content. The upper and
lower specification units are the approved job-mix target values plus or minus the
allowable deviations shown in Table 4.05-1 for Bituminous Wearing Course in these
General Specifications.

Samples of bituminous concrete friction course shall be taken on a random time

basis from the uncompacted pavement immediately behind the paving machine. The
initial sample shall be randomly selected from within one and one-half (1 1/2) meters
either side of the center line of the lane being paved and weigh at least twenty-five (25)
kilograms. The samples shall be thoroughly mixed and quartered to obtain a test
sample weighing at least six (6) kilograms. The test sample shall be forwarded to the
laboratory and the aggregate gradation and bituminous material content determined by
extraction.

The bituminous concrete friction course aggregate gradation and bituminous

material content will be sampled, tested and evaluated as detailed in paragraph
4.05.8.3, "Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material," in these General
Specifications.

4.07.8.3 Surface Smoothness. When a straightedge four (4) meters in length is

laid on the finished surface of the base parallel with the centerline, the surface shall
have no depressions greater than three (3) millimeters from the lower edge of the
straightedge. When the straightedge is laid traverse to the centerline, the surface shall
have no depressions greater than six (6) millimeters from the lower edge of the
straightedge.

4.07.8.4 Acceptance. Bituminous materials will be accepted under Subsection

1.08.3, "Certification of Compliance," in accordance with Subsection 4.01.4,
"Acceptance Procedures for Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications.

Bituminous concrete friction course construction including surface smoothness will

be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance," in these
General Specifications.

Bituminous concrete friction course thickness, aggregate gradation, and bituminous

material content will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of
Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these
General Specifications in two (2) stages as follows:

The first stage shall be the selection of the lowest of the two (2) pay factors for the
quality of the bituminous concrete friction course relating to aggregate gradation and
bituminous content. The second stage involves the selection and application of a
quantity pay factor based on the thickness of the bituminous concrete friction course.
The second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be applied to all the individual
course lots in addition to the first stage lowest quality pay factor determined in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications.

4.07.9 MEASUREMENT. Bituminous concrete friction course shall be measured by

the square meter, as placed and compacted within the lines and grades shown on the

92
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
plans, specified in the specifications and Special Specifications and as directed by the
Engineer. No measurement will be made of areas of bituminous concrete friction
course placed outside authorized limits.

Asphalt cement and modified asphalt cement shall be considered subsidiary to the
construction of the bituminous concrete and shall not be measured separately unless
specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities. When
it is listed separately it shall be measured as provided in Subsection 4.05.10
"Measurement" in these General Specifications.

Tack coat and fog seal will not be measured.

Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures and asphalt modifiers used by the contractor to
meet the Job Mix Formula (JMF) requirements will be considered subsidiary to the
construction of the bituminous concrete friction course and will not be measured
separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill
of Quantities. When they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in the Special
Specifications they shall be measured in liters, kilograms, or tons in accordance with
Subsection 4.05.10 "Measurement" in these General Specifications.

4.07.10 PAYMENT. Payment shall be made at the contract unit price, or adjusted
contract unit price, per square meter measured as described above for each square
meter of Bituminous Concrete Friction course when listed in the Bill of Quantities.

When a lot of bituminous concrete friction course is accepted with a deficiency, the
adjusted contract unit price for said lot shall be the product of the contract unit price and
the lowest quality and quantity pay factors specified in Subsection 4.07.8, "Quality
Assurance Procedures," in these General Specifications.

Tack coat and fog seal shall be considered subsidiary to the construction of
bituminous concrete friction course and shall not be paid for separately.

Asphalt cement, modified asphalt cement, mineral fillers, chemical admixtures, and
asphalt modifiers shall be considered subsidiary to the construction of bituminous
concrete friction course and shall not be paid for separately unless specifically stated
in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities. When they are listed
in the bill of Quantities and specified in the Special Specifications they shall be paid for
as provided in Subsection 4.05.11 "Payment" in these General Specifications.

The above price and payment shall cover and be full compensation for furnishing
labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to completing all work
involved in construction of bituminous concrete friction course as in Subsection 1.07.2,
"Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

40701 Bituminous Concrete Friction Course Square Meter

93
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 4.08 - BITUMINOUS-RUBBER STRESS ABSORBING MEMBRANE

4.08.1 DESCRIPTIONS. This work consists of placing a bituminous-rubber stress

absorbing membrane on the surface of an existing pavement as a wearing course or
in preparation for placing an overlay of bituminous concrete pavement, as shown on the
plans, specified in these specifications, the Special Specifications and as directed by
the Engineer.

The membrane shall be undesignated or designated as Bituminous-Rubber

Membrane, Bituminous-Rubber Membrane, Class 1, or Bituminous-Rubber Membrane,
Class 2.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Bituminous-Rubber Membrane

4.08.2 MATERIALS.

4.08.2.1 Bituminous Binder. Bituminous binder shall be the Viscosity or

Penetration Grade specified in the Special Specifications conforming to the
requirements in Table 4.01-1A or 1B, in Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in these
General Specifications.

4.08.2.2 Rubber. Rubber for use in bituminous-rubber binder shall be of the type
specified, free of loose fabric, wire and other contaminants except that calcium
carbonate talc, in the maximum amount of four percent (4%) by weight of rubber, may
be added to the rubber to prevent sticking together or caking of the rubber particles.
Sieves required for testing rubber particle gradation shall comply with the requirements
of AASHTO M-92.

4.08.2.3 Class 1 Bituminous-Rubber Binder. Class I bituminous-rubber binder

shall consist of bituminous binder and diluent, if used, and ground tire rubber. The
exact proportions shall be determined by the Engineer.

1. Bituminous binder for use in Class 1 bituminous-rubber binder shall be, at the
option of the Contractor, Viscosity Grade AC-5 or AC-10.

2. Rubber for use in Class 1 bituminous-rubber binder shall consist of ground tire
rubber and shall conform to the following:
GRADATION
(ASTM D-1151)

Sieve Size Percent Passing

2.36 mm (No. 8) 100

2.00 mm (No. 10) 95-100
0.600 mm (No. 30) 0-10
0.300 mm (No. 50) 0-2

The specific gravity of the ground rubber shall be between 1.10 and 1.20.

94
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
3. Diluent, if used, shall be a solvent compatible with other materials of the mixture
and conforming to the following requirements:

ASTM Requirement
Test Designation Degrees Celsius

Flashpoint D-92 27 Min.

Initial Boiling Point D-850 177 Min.
Dry Point D-850 232 Max.

Class 1 bituminous-rubber binder shall consist of between seventy-four and eighty

percent (74 - 80%) bituminous binder of the grade selected by the Contractor, including
diluent if used, and between twenty and twenty-six percent (20 - 26%) rubber, by weight
of the total bituminous-rubber binder. The exact percentage will be determined by the
Engineer.

The temperature of the bituminous binder, at the time rubber is added, shall be
between one hundred seventy-five and two hundred twenty degrees Celsius (175-220 o
C.). The bituminous binder and rubber shall be combined and mixed together in the
blending equipment until an homogeneous material is produced. The bituminous-
rubber mixture shall be mixed for a minimum of thirty (30) minutes at not less than one
hundred twenty nor more than two hundred twenty degrees Celsius (120-220o C.).

Diluent, if used, shall be added to the bituminous-rubber mixture to adjust the fluidity
of the mixture for ease of spraying. Diluent shall be added to the bituminous-rubber
mixture, at a rate not to exceed seven and one-half percent (7.5%) by volume of the
bituminous-rubber mixture. The exact rate will be determined by the Engineer. The
temperature of the bituminous-rubber mixture shall be less than the boiling point of the
diluent at the time the diluent is added to the mixture.

Class 1 Bituminous-Rubber Binder shall be applied to the surface to receive the

stress absorbing membrane after reaching the desired consistency and shall not be
held at temperatures exceeding one hundred sixty degrees Celsius (160 o C) for more
than four (4) hours.

4.08.2.4 Class 2 Bituminous-Rubber Binder. Class 2 bituminous rubber binder

shall consist of bituminous binder, extender oil and ground vulcanized rubber. The
exact proportions will be determined by the Engineer.
1. Bituminous binder for use in Class 2 bituminous-rubber binder shall be, at the
option of the Contractor, Viscosity Grade AC-5 or AC-10.

2. Rubber for use in Class 2 bituminous-rubber binder shall consist of vulcanized

ground rubber and shall contain between twenty and thirty percent (20 and 30%), by
weight, of natural rubber, when tested in accordance with ASTM D-297. The rubber
shall conform to the following:

95
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

GRADATION
(ASTM D-1151)

Sieve Size Percent Passing

2.36 mm (No. 8) 100
0.600 mm (No. 30) 25-50
0.300 mm (No. 50) 5-45
0.150 mm (No. 100) 0-10

3. Extender oil shall be a resinous high flash point aromatic hydrocarbon

compound conforming to the following:

ASTM
Test Designation Requirement

Viscosity, SSU at
38 degrees Celsius D-88 2500 Min.
Flash Point,
COC degrees Celsius D-92 200 Min.
Molecular Analysis:
Percent by Weight
Maltenes - D-200 70.1 Max.
Aromatics - D-200 755 Min.

Extender oil shall be added to the bituminous material at a rate between one (1)
and seven percent (7%) by weight, when the bituminous material is at a temperature
between one hundred twenty and two hundred twenty degrees Celsius (120 - 220 o C.).

Class 2 bituminous-rubber binder shall consist of between seventy-eight and eighty-

two percent (78 - 82%) bituminous binder of the grade selected by the Contractor,
including extender oil, and between eighteen and twenty-two percent (18 - 22%) rubber,
by weight of the total bituminous-rubber binder. The exact percentage will be
determined by the Engineer.

The temperature of the bituminous binder and extender oil, at the time rubber is
added, shall be between one hundred seventy-five and two hundred twenty degrees
Celsius (175-220o C.). The bituminous binder, extender oil and rubber shall be
combined and mixed together in the blending equipment until an homogeneous
material is produced. The bituminous-rubber mixture shall be mixed for a minimum of
forty-five (45) minutes at a temperature not less than one hundred ninety (190) or more
than two hundred twenty (220) degrees Celsius.

The viscosity of the Class 2 bituminous-rubber binder at the time of application shall
be between six hundred (600) and two thousand (2000) cps, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D-2994. The exact viscosity shall be as directed by the Engineer. Class
2 bituminous-rubber binder shall be applied to the surface to receive the stress
absorbing membrane after reaching the desired viscosity and shall not be held at a
temperature exceeding two hundred (200) degrees Celsius for more than four (4) hours.

96
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer, not less than fifteen (15) days prior to
beginning work, with a certificate stating that the materials proposed for use in the
particular class of bituminous-rubber binder meet all the requirements specified in this
specification and the Special Specifications.

Bituminous-rubber binder shall not be applied after it has been retained more than
48 hours.

4.08.2.5 Aggregate Screenings. Aggregate screenings shall conform to the

grading and quality requirements for grading VI in Paragraph 4.03.2.3, "Aggregate," in
these General Specifications.

Aggregate screenings for construction of bituminous-rubber stress absorbing

membrane shall be preheated to a temperature between one hundred forty-five and one
hundred seventy-five degrees Celsius (145 - 175oC.) and then precoated with
bituminous binder, Grade AC-5 or AC-10 conforming to the requirements in Table 4.01-
1A, Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications, in the amount
of one-half to one percent (1/2 - 1%) by weight of dry aggregate. Immediately after
precoating, the aggregate screenings shall be deposited in hauling equipment.
Stockpiling of aggregate screenings after precoating will not be permitted.

Canvas or similar covers that completely cover each load of aggregate screenings
shall be used during hauling to minimize temperature drop of the precoated aggregate.
Aggregate screenings shall be spread before the temperature of the precoated
screenings, at the time of depositing on the roadway, drops below one hundred five
degrees Celsius (105o C.).

4.08.3 ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS. The materials will be accepted by the

Engineer for placement on the roadway, after the required certificates have been
furnished by the Contractor, in accordance with Paragraph 1.08.3, "Certification of
Compliance," in these General Specifications. The bituminous-rubber binder has been
blended in the proportions determined by the Engineer, the materials shall be mixed for
the specified time period, the temperature of the bituminous-rubber binder shall be as
specified and the aggregate screenings shall conform to the grading and quality
requirements, have been preheated and precoated as specified and are above the
minimum temperature specified at the time of spreading.

4.08.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall furnish and operate sufficient equipment
in accordance with his Program of Work as approved by the Engineer and shall include:

1. Rotary type brooms, aggregate spreaders, bituminous materials distributors and

equipment for heating bituminous materials and all equipment conforms to the
requirements of Section 4.03, "Bituminous Surface Treatment," in these General
Specifications. The bituminous material distributor shall be equipped with pumps and
spray bar nozzles suitable for applying bituminous-rubber binder.

2. A minimum of three self-propelled pneumatic-tired rollers having a minimum

weight of thirteen hundred (1300) kilograms on each wheel and an inflation pressure

97
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
between six and one-half and seven and one-half (6.5-7.5) kilograms per square
centimeters in each tire.

3. A mechanical blender for proper proportioning and thorough mixing of the

bituminous material and rubber together to produce the specified rubber content
material. The unit shall have both an asphalt totalizing meter reading in liters and a flow
meter reading in liters per minute.

4. The Contractor shall provide a skilled technician to accompany the distributor

at all times and ride in a position so that all spray bar nozzles are in full view at all times
and readily accessible in the event of plugging.

5. Trucks for hauling aggregate screenings shall be tail-gate discharge and shall
be equipped with a device to lock onto the hitch at the rear of the aggregate spreader.
Haul trucks shall be compatible with the aggregate spreader so that the dump bed will
not push down on the aggregate spreader when fully raised or have too short a bed so
that the aggregate screenings are spilled on the roadway surface while dumping into
the aggregate spreader.

4.08.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Subject to the determination of the Engineer,

bituminous-rubber binder shall not be applied during sand or dust storms, rainfall, or
before any imminent storms that might damage the construction. The Engineer shall
have the discretion as to whether the surface on which bituminous-rubber binder is to
be applied is dry enough to proceed.

Bituminous-rubber binder shall only be applied when the atmospheric temperature

is twenty degrees Celsius (20o C.) or above and the temperature of the surface on
which bituminous-rubber binder is to be applied is twenty-five degrees Celsius (25 o C.)
or above.

4.08.6 TRAFFIC CONTROL. While construction of a bituminous-rubber stress

absorbing membrane is in progress, the treated surface of the roadway shall not be
used by the Contractor, his agents or others until the Engineer is satisfied that the
treated surface will not be damaged by traffic and has given approval for traffic to use
the treated surface.

The Contractor shall erect and maintain signs, barricades and other traffic control
devices and shall take effective action to exclude traffic of any description from the
roadway surface for as long as may be required in the judgement of the Engineer.
When traffic is restricted to a one-way basis, the Contractor shall provide such flagmen
and pilot cars as deemed necessary for the protection of traffic and the treated surface.
One-way traffic will not be permitted after dark. Traffic may be detoured around the
construction, provided detours are properly constructed, signed and marked. When it
is necessary to permit traffic to cross the treated surface, the crossing shall be blotted
with sand, as directed by the Engineer, before the crossing is opened to traffic.
Removal of excess aggregate screenings shall be completed before uncontrolled traffic
is permitted on the bituminous-rubber stress absorbing membrane. All traffic control
work will be done in accordance with Section 9.02, "Traffic Control through Work
Zones," in these General Specifications.

98
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.08.7 CONSTRUCTION.

4.08.7.1 Preparation of Surface to Receive Bituminous-Rubber Stress

Absorbing Membrane. Surfaces to receive bituminous-rubber stress absorbing
membrane shall be prepared as specified for treated surfaces in Paragraph 4.03.7.1,
"Preparation of Surfaces to Receive Bituminous Surface Treatment," in these General
Specifications.

4.08.7.2 Adjustment of the Distributor. The distributor for applying bituminous-

rubber binder shall be adjusted and maintained as described in Paragraph 4.03.7.3,
"Adjustment of the Distributor," in these General Specifications.

4.08.7.3 Procedures for Applying Bituminous-Rubber Binder. The bituminous-

rubber binder shall be applied at a rate between two and two-tenths and two and nine-
tenths (2.2-2.9) liters per square meter to one-half (1/2) of the roadway surface at
temperatures specified in this specification using distributors. The exact rate will be
determined by the Engineer.

Areas missed during the application of bituminous-rubber binder shall be

immediately covered using the hand held nozzle and the same class of bituminous-
rubber binder.

The area covered with bituminous-rubber binder shall be no larger than can be
covered with aggregate screenings within five (5) minutes from the time of application
of bituminous-rubber binder.

Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, construction of the bituminous-rubber

stress absorbing membrane shall progress towards the source of aggregate screenings
being applied.

Where application of the bituminous-rubber binder begins at the end of a previous

application of bituminous-rubber binder, and when directed by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall cover the full width of the end of the previous application with building
paper at least eighty (80) centimeters wide and weighing at least one and one-half (1.5)
kilograms per square meter. The application of bituminous-rubber binder shall begin
on the paper when the distributor is advancing at a speed that provides for uniform
distribution of the bituminous-rubber binder. The building paper shall be removed
before application of the aggregate screenings.

Where the bituminous-rubber binder is placed alongside of a previous application

of bituminous-rubber binder, all joint edges shall be swept clean of overlapping
aggregate screenings, prior to the application of bituminous-rubber binder. The
application of bituminous-rubber binder shall be placed against the edge of the previous
application and all reasonable precautions shall be taken to avoid skips and overlaps
at joints. Defects, as determined by the Engineer, shall be corrected by the Contractor.

4.08.7.4 Procedures for Applying Aggregate Screenings. After the bituminous-

rubber binder has been evenly spread over the roadway surface, aggregate screenings
shall be evenly applied to the roadway surface by a self-propelled spreader box at a
rate between twelve (12) and sixteen (16) kilograms per square meter.

99
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The aggregate spreader shall not be more than twenty (20) meters behind the
bituminous-rubber binder distributor unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer. Trucks
hauling aggregate screenings shall be kept clear of the freshly placed aggregate
screenings until ready to dump aggregate in the spreader equipment.

The aggregate shall be spread in one (1) operation. Where necessary, thin or bare
spots in the spread of aggregate shall be immediately corrected by hand spreading or
other methods as may be approved by the Engineer.

As soon as the aggregate has been spread on the roadway, it shall be rolled with
one or more pneumatic-tired rollers. The distance between the rollers and aggregate
spreader shall not exceed seventy-five (75) meters at any time during the application
of bituminous-rubber binder and aggregate spreading operations.

A total of four (4) complete coverages with pneumatic-tired rollers shall be made on
the bituminous-rubber stress absorbing membrane.

4.08.8 MAINTENANCE OF SURFACE. The completed stress absorbing membrane

shall be maintained and all damage resulting from any cause shall be repaired by the
Contractor at his expense until such time as the project or portions of the contract have
been accepted in writing by the Engineer.

4.08.9 PROGRESS OF WORK. The Contractor shall furnish and operate sufficient
equipment, produce or purchase and make timely delivery of materials and organize
his work so that his progress is equivalent to that contained in the approved work
schedule. Work shall be commenced where the Engineer directs. The full width of the
roadway to receive bituminous-rubber stress absorbing membrane shall be completed
each day.

4.08.10 PROTECTION OF FACILITIES. All traffic and roadside facilities shall be

protected from splashing of materials. The Contractor shall immediately clean and
repair any vehicle and roadside facility coated or damaged by materials. Protection,
cleaning and repair shall be at the Contractor's costs.

4.08.11 MEASUREMENT. Bituminous-rubber stress absorbing membrane completed

within the lines shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer shall be measured in
square meters.

When bituminous wearing course material is furnished and placed for reshaping the
roadway cross section or as a wearing surface as shown on the plans, specified or
directed by the Engineer, it shall be measured in cubic meters in accordance with the
methods described in Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General
Specifications.

4.08.12 PAYMENT. Bituminous-rubber stress absorbing membrane completed as

specified and measured shall be paid for at the contract unit price, or adjusted contract
unit price, per square meter listed in the Bill of Quantities.

100
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
When bituminous concrete wearing course material is furnished and placed as
specified and measured, it shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter
listed in the Bill of Quantities for "Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course."

No separate payment shall be allowed for any materials placed outside the limits
shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer.

Payment for traffic control shall be in accordance with Section 9.02, "Traffic Control
through Work Zones," in these General Specifications.

No separate payment shall be allowed for rolling.

Prices and payments made under this section shall cover and be full compensation
for furnishing labor, equipment, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to completing
all work involved in the construction of bituminous-rubber stress absorbing membrane
as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

40801 Bituminous-Rubber Membrane Square Meter
4080101 Bituminous-Rubber Membrane, Class 1 Square Meter
4080102 Bituminous-Rubber Membrane, Class 2 Square Meter

101
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 4.09 - COLD MIX RECYCLED BITUMINOUS BASE

4.09.1 DESCRIPTION. Cold mix recycled bituminous base shall consist of cold milled,
crushed or pulverized bituminous concrete blended with one or more of the following
materials:

1. Aggregate base material underlying the bituminous surface.

2. New crushed aggregate.
3. Liquid or emulsified bituminous materials.
4. Recycling oil, emulsified or non-emulsified.
5. Water

The Contractor shall cold mill, crush or pulverize bituminous concrete, blend and mix
with additional materials, place and compact the mixed materials and finish the recycled
bituminous base, all as shown on the plans and specified in these General
Specifications and the Special Specifications.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Cold Mix Recycled Bituminous Base Course
Cold Mix Recycling Agent

4.09.2 MATERIALS. Materials for cold mix recycled bituminous base shall be as
specified in the Special Specifications and include one or more of the following:

4.09.2.1 Pulverized Bituminous Concrete. Pulverized bituminous concrete,

referred to in this specification as RAP (Recycled Asphalt Pavement), shall conform to
the following gradation after mixing with all additional materials:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

37.5 mm (1 1/2 inches) 100

4.09.2.2 Aggregate Base Underlying Bituminous Surface. Aggregate base

underlying the bituminous surface shall be blended with RAP to the depth shown on the
plans or specified in the Special Specifications.

4.09.2.3 New Aggregate. When specified in the Special Specifications or required

by the Job Mix Formula, new aggregate shall be blended with RAP. The new
aggregate shall conform to the fracture, gradation and quality requirements as
necessary to produce the specified base course when combined with the RAP.

1. When the specified base course consists of RAP or RAP and additional
aggregate blended with water. The combined materials shall conform to the
requirements specified for Aggregate Base, Grading II in Section 3.03, "Aggregate
Bases," in these General Specifications.

102
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
2. When the specified base course consists of RAP or RAP with additional
aggregate blended with recycling oil and/or liquid and emulsified bituminous material,
the combined materials shall conform to the requirements for Type II base specified
in Section 4.04, "Bituminous Emulsion Dense Graded, Type II," in these General
Specifications.

4.09.2.4 Liquid and Emulsified Bituminous Materials. The types and grades of
bituminous materials shall conform to the Grade listed in the Special Specifications and
requirements specified in the following tables in Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials,"
in these General Specifications:

1. Liquid Bituminous Material. Tables 4.01-2 and 4.01-3

2. Emulsified Bituminous Material. Tables 4.01-4 and 4.01-5

4.09.2.5 Cold Mix Recycling Agent. Cold mix recycling agent shall conform to the
requirements listed in Tables 4.09-1 or 4.09-2 or as specified in the Special
Specifications.

TABLE 4.09-1
RECYCLING OIL

Requirement
ASTM/AASHTO Light Medium
Property Test Method Grade Grade

Viscosity @ 60o C (140o F) cSt T202 200-800 1000-4000

Flash Point, C.O.C., C(F) minimum T48 205 (400) 219 (425)
Saturates, Wt, % D 2007 28 Max. 30 Max.
Tests on Residue T240 or
From RTFO (Note 1) T179
or TFO Oven @ 163o C (325o F):
Wt, Change, + % 4.0 Max. 2.0 Max.
Viscosity Ratio (See Note 2) 2.5 Max. 2.5 Max.

Notes:
1. RTFO = Rolling Thin Film-Circulating Oven

2. Viscosity Ratio = RTFO Residue Viscosity @ 60o C (140o F), cSt

Viscosity of the Original Material @ 60o C (140o F), cSt

103
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
TABLE 4.09-2
EMULSIFIED RECYCLING AGENT (Note 1)

Property Test Method Requirement

Viscosity @ 25 degrees C., SFS ASTM D 244 15-85

Pumping Stability G.B Method (Note 2) Pass
Emulsion Coarseness, % Sieve Test
ASTM D 244 (Note 3) 0.1 Max.
Sensitivity to Fines, % Cement Mixing
ASTM D 244 2.0 Max.
Particle Charge ASTM D 244 Positive
Concentration of Oil Phase, % ASTM D 244 (Note 4) 60 Min.

Notes:
1. Oils used for emulsions must meet specifications listed in Table 4.09-I or as
specified in the Special Specifications.

2. Pumping stability is determined by charging four hundred fifty (450) milliliters of

emulsion into a one (1) liter beaker and circulating the emulsion through a gear pump
(Roper 29.B22621) having six and three-tenths (6.3) millimeters inlet and outlet. The
emulsion passes if there is no significant oil separation after circulating ten (10)
minutes.

3. Test procedure identical with ASTM D 244 except that distilled water will be
used in place of two percent (2%) sodium oleate solution.

4. ASTM D 244 Evaporation Test for percent residue is modified by heating fifty
(50) gram sample to one hundred fifty degrees Celsius (150 o C.) until foaming ceases,
then cooling immediately and calculating results.

Test reports and Certificates of Compliance shall be furnished with each shipment
of emulsified recycling agent.

4.09.3 PROPORTIONING COLD MIX RECYCLED BITUMINOUS BASE MIXTURES.

4.09.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal. A proposed Job Mix Formula (JMF) shall be
formulated by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. The JMF
shall be prepared by the Contractor in precise compliance with procedures and
requirements set forth in the MRD Manual of Materials and Tests and all current circular
letters issued by the Ministry of Communications.

The Contractor shall select his sources of aggregate and bituminous material and,
after sufficient quantities have been stockpiled or are available for use, obtain
representative samples of the materials and test to determine if they conform to the
requirements of these specifications.

Cold mix recycled bituminous base specified to conform to Section 3.03, "Aggregate
Bases," in these General Specifications shall be produced as specified in Section 3.03.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposed method of operation and test

104
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
data confirming that the base will conform to all specified fracture, gradation and quality
requirements.

Cold mix recycled bituminous base specified to conform to Section 4.04, "Bituminous
Emulsion Treated Base," in these General Specifications shall be prepared as follows:

The Contractor shall perform all testing required to establish the proportions of each
material to be combined to produce the specified base.

The Contractor shall submit the following information:

1. For the RAP. Extracted bituminous material content as a percent of dry

aggregate and the gradation of the aggregate. Penetration of the bituminous material
recovered from the RAP. One test shall be furnished for every one thousand (1,000)
cubic meters of pavement to be pulverized and recycled.

2. Added aggregate. Fracture, gradation and quality requirements which, when

blended with the RAP will produce all requirements specified for Type II Bituminous
Emulsion Treated Base in Section 4.04, "Bituminous Emulsion Treated Base," in these
General Specifications.

3. Estimate total bituminous material demand based on mix design requirements

for bituminous base in Section 4.05 "Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General
Specifications.

4. Determine type, grade and quantity of liquid or emulsified bituminous material

to be added to the RAP and added aggregate. The criteria shall be:

(1) The total bituminous material demand as determined in Number 3, above,

will be met and,

(2) The combined bituminous material in the RAP will have a penetration not
less than forty (40).

5. Results obtained from trial mixes prepared in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General
Specifications.

6. Recommended JMF with the following information:

(1) The percentage of RAP to be used, by total weight of mix.

(2) The gradation of each aggregate to be blended and the percent of each
aggregate, by total weight of mix.

(3) The type grade and percent of bituminous material to be added, by total
weight of mix.

(4) The type and percent of cold-mix recycling agent to be added, by total weight
of mix.

105
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
(5) The results of all tests performed by the Engineer.

(6) The theoretical maximum unit weight of the mixture based on ASTM D
2041.

At the same time the above information is provided, the Contractor shall obtain
representative samples of all materials specified to be furnished and submit said
samples to the Engineer. Not less than one hundred (100) kilograms of RAP and each
size aggregate, eight (8) liters of each type and grade bituminous material and four (4)
liters of emulsified recycling agent shall be furnished. The emulsified recycling agent
shall be identified by trade-name, grade and source of supply.

4.09.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula. The Engineer's review and acceptance
of the Cold Mix Recycled Bituminous base mixture job mix formula shall be in
accordance with Paragraph 4.05.3.2, "Acceptance of Job Mix Formula," in these
General Specifications including the field control strip provision.

4.09.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions. The Contractor shall not alter his methods
of crushing, screening, blending, or stockpiling from that used to produce materials for
the approved JMF. Changes to the JMF will not be permitted without retesting and
resubmission of a proposed (revised) JMF in accordance with all the steps in Paragraph
4.09.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in these General Specifications. Significant
changes may include, but not be limited to, changes in the amount or type of materials
rejected or wasted, changes in the amount of materials crushed, reductions in the
amount of crushed fines, changes in the amount and type of mineral filler and mineral
and chemical admixtures to be used.

Should the Contractor change his source of aggregate and grade of bituminous
material, he shall furnish a new information and samples of materials, as described in
Paragraph 4.09.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in these General Specifications as
determined by the Engineer to be necessary, at least twenty-one (21) days before their
intended use.

At any time after the JMF is approved the Contractor may submit a new JMF for
approval by the Engineer. If the revised JMF is approved it shall become the approved
JMF.

The Engineer may, at any time, require a change in the JMF which will provide a
cold mix recycled bituminous base mixture that conforms to the quality intended by the
specifications.

4.09.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment as may be necessary
to produce cold mix recycled bituminous base in accordance with the plans,
specifications and his Program of Work as approved by the Engineer. Such equipment
shall be suitable for performing the following functions:

1. Pavement reduction (reducing to required gradation). Such equipment may

include, at the Contractor's option, cold milling machines, rotary type pulverizers,
rippers, jaw crushers, hammermills or such other devices that may be approved by the
Engineer.

106
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Blending and mixing. Such equipment may include, at the Contractor's option,
attachments to the cold milling equipment which introduce and uniformly mix bituminous
material with RAP, cold mixing pugmills, rotary type stabilizers, cross shaft travel plants
or other equipment that may be approved by the Engineer.

3. Spreading and compaction. Standard equipment used for placing and

compacting bituminous concrete pavement, Midland-Type mix paver or similar
equipment utilizing a floating strike-off screed as approved by the Engineer.

Any equipment furnished by the Contractor, whether or not approved by the

Engineer, which at any time fails to produce cold mix recycled bituminous base as
planned and specified shall be removed from the work.

4.09.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Cold mix recycled bituminous base shall not be
mixed or placed during rainfall, dust or sand storms, when the ambient temperature is
less than five degrees Celsius (5o C.) or when weather conditions prevent specified
mixing and compaction requirements.

4.09.6 CONSTRUCTION. Construction shall conform to those requirements specified

in the HMM, Part 5, Section 2.03 - Pavement Surface Problems, Paragraph I - Milling
and Recycling, and as prescribed herein.

The exact locations of the areas to be recycled along with the respective thicknesses
thereof shall be determined and delineated by the Engineer immediately prior to the
start of the Work. The process shall involve pulverization of the existing pavement layer
and the addition and mixing in place of any required new aggregate and new asphalt.
The resultant mixture shall be spread, compacted and, when directed or shown on the
plans, sealed with a surface treatment or an overlay. When such a treatment or an
overlay is planned, it shall be carried out and paid for separately as specified in other
sections of the specifications.

Milling, if any, shall be carried out as specified in Section 4.11 - Cold Milling Process
for Removing Bituminous Pavement. Breaking up of the old bituminous surface by
scarifying or ripping shall not be permitted. When directed by the Engineer, milling shall
be so regulated as to eliminate the need for additional size reduction of the reclaimed
materials. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer,
undesirable contamination of the reclaimed materials with underlying untreated base
course or subgrade materials, clay, silt, or other deleterious matter shall not be
accepted. Should such undesirable contamination occur, as determined by the
Engineer, the materials shall be discarded as directed and shall be replaced with new
approved materials, all at the Contractor's expense.

Within five (5) days after execution of the contract, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer the proposed method of pulverizing the existing bituminous surfacing, adding
new aggregate, bituminous materials and/or recycling agent and mixing, placing,
compacting and finishing the cold mix recycled bituminous base.

107
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.09.6.1 Mixing RAP or RAP and Aggregate with Water. This work shall be
performed as specified in Section 3.03, "Aggregate Bases," in these General
Specifications.

4.09.6.2 Mixing RAP, Aggregate and Bituminous Materials. The bituminous

material and/or recycling agent shall be uniformly mixed with the RAP and aggregate
by one of the following methods:

1. The bituminous material and/or recycling agent may be applied through the
machine used to cold mill the bituminous surface as a part of the liquid used to cool the
cutter teeth, provided it is applied uniformly across the width of cut and results in a
complete and uniform blending of all materials.

2. The bituminous material and/or recycling agent may be applied through a

mixing machine capable of mixing a windrow of RAP and other materials. The road
mixing machine shall be of the pugmill or auger type. The machine shall be designed
to pick up the materials to be mixed from the windrow and shall be equipped with a
bottom shell or pan so that during at least fifty percent (50%) of the mixing cycle all
materials are picked up and mixed while separated from the underlying road surface.
Road mixing equipment shall not be operated at greater speeds than recommended
by the manufacturer for the depth of treatment and quantity of materials passing
through the machine while mixing.

3. The bituminous material and/or recycling agent may be added through a paving
machine that is capable of mixing and placing the recycled bituminous base in its final
position for compacting (Midland type mix-paver).

4. The cold mix recycled bituminous base may be produced using a continuous
operation consisting of an interconnected cold milling device, portable crusher mounted
on a trailer, cold mixing pugmill mounted on a trailer, paving machine, materials transfer
belts for moving the materials from milling equipment through to the paving machine
and compaction equipment. When new aggregates are required they shall be spread
uniformly at the approved quantity on the road surface in advance of the cold milling
machine.

Regardless of which method is used, mixing equipment shall have a positive

displacement pump that can accurately meter the planned amount of bituminous
material and/or recycling agent into the RAP and aggregate. A positive displacement
pump shall be employed for each bituminous material and recycling agent introduced
into the mixture.

The pump feed shall have electronic recording capabilities so that the amount of
bituminous material and/or recycling agent incorporated into the mixture during any
period of time may be read directly.

When directed by the Engineer, water shall be added to the RAP to facilitate uniform
mixing with bituminous materials. Water may be added prior to or concurrently with
adding the bituminous materials, as approved by the Engineer.

108
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.09.6.3 Placing and Compaction. The recycled mixture shall be compacted using
a steel-drum tandem roller weighing not less than ten thousand (10,000) kilograms until
the compacted density, at any point in the layer of recycled mixture, is between ninety-
one percent and ninety-four percent (91-94%) of the theoretical maximum density
determined from ASTM D -2041.

After the recycled mixture has been spread and compacted, it shall be allowed to
cure for at least three (3) calendar days to reduce the moisture content prior to placing
a wearing surface. Additional curing time may be required by the Engineer in the event
that the recycled mixture becomes wet during rainfall. Any damage to the recycled
mixture shall be repaired by and at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.

Traffic may be allowed on the base when approved by the Engineer.

During the curing period, the Contractor may, when approved by the Engineer, place
a fog seal as specified in Section 4.03, "Bituminous Surface Treatments," in these
General Specifications to reduce surface abrasion caused by traffic. The fog seal shall
be considered subsidiary to the work and shall not be measured separately. When a
wearing course is shown on the plans or specified it shall be placed no sooner than
three (3) days nor later than six (6) days after completion of compaction of the cold mix
recycled bituminous base.

4.09.7 TRAFFIC CONTROL. The Contractor shall take effective action to permit traffic
to safely pass through recycling operations as specified in Subsection 4.05.7, "Traffic
Control," in these General Specifications.

4.09.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The cold mix recycled bituminous

base shall be accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications,
the lot size shall be ten thousand (10,000) square meters for each layer constructed.
The cold mix recycled bituminous base shall be sampled, tested, and evaluated in
accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work," in these General Specifications.
The Engineer may, during the beginning of placement of cold mix recycled bituminous
base, at times when test results indicate erratic characteristics and at any other time,
reduce the lot size to sections of cold mix recycled bituminous base with similar quality
characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and modification or replacement of
low-quality materials with materials of acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength
of the pavement structure.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling testing
for each lot shall include:

1. Compaction
2. Thickness
3. Bituminous Material Content and Aggregate Gradation
4. Surface Smoothness

109
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.09.8.1 Compaction. The specified range of acceptable compaction is between
91 and 94 percent. The average in-place densities from the ten (10) nuclear gauge
readings or three (3) core or sand-cone holes shall be compared with the maximum
theoretical density determined by ASTM D 2041. The result shall be the percent
relative compaction of the lot. The cold mix recycled bituminous base course
compaction will be sampled, tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph 4.06.8.1,
"Compaction" in these General Specifications.

4.09.8.2 Thickness. A lot shall be accepted when the average thickness is not less
than the planned thickness. The cold mix recycled bituminous base course thickness
will be sampled, tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph, 4.06.8.2 "Thickness,"
in these General Specifications.

The thickness of the cold mix recycled bituminous base course after completion of
compaction shall be determined from test holes, cored when possible or cut, at five (5)
randomly selected locations in each lot. The average of the five (5) thicknesses shall
be reported as the thickness of the lot.

The Contractor shall back fill density and thickness test holes with cold mix recycled
bituminous base or other material approved by the Engineer.

4.09.8.3 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content. The aggregate

gradation of the cold recycled bituminous base will be sampled, tested and evaluated
as detailed in Paragraph 4.06.8.3, "Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material
Content," in these General Specifications.

Samples of cold recycled bituminous material shall be taken on a random time basis
from the roadway immediately after all mixing is completed each one-half (1/2) day of
work, or portion thereof. The initial sample shall be obtained one and one-half (1 1/2)
meters from the center line of the lane being paved and weight at least twenty-five (25)
kilograms. The initial sample shall be thoroughly mixed and quartered to obtain a test
sample weighing at least six (6) kilograms. The test sample shall be forwarded to the
project laboratory and the bituminous material content determined by extraction.

The bituminous content shall not vary from the approved job mix content by more
than plus or minus the allowable deviation determined as outlined in paragraph
4.06.8.3, "Bituminous Content and Aggregate Gradation," in these General
Specifications. When the bituminous material content varies by more than the
allowable deviation the lot shall be removed, remixed with other materials added as
necessary and/or replaced with other materials approved by the Engineer.

4.09.8.4 Surface Smoothness. The final surface after completion of compaction

shall have no depressions under a four (4) meter straightedge greater than three (3)
millimeters when laid parallel with the centerline and six (6) millimeters when laid
transverse to the centerline.

4.09.8.5 Acceptance. Bituminous materials will be accepted under Subsection

1.08.3, "Certification of Compliance," in accordance with Subsection 4.01.4,
"Acceptance Procedures for Bituminous Materials," in these General Specifications.

110
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
Cold-mix recycled base bituminous base construction including surface smoothness
and bituminous content will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested
Conformance," in these General Specifications.

Compaction cold-mix recycled base and thickness and aggregate gradation will be
accepted under Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications in two
(2) stages as follows:

The first stage shall be the selection of the lowest of two (2) pay factors for the
quality of the cold recycled bituminous base relating to aggregate gradation and
density. The second stage involves the selection and application of a quantity pay
factor based on the thickness of the cold recycled bituminous base. The reduced
thickness pay factor for the lower courses of multiple course pavements will initially be
applied provisionally based on the results of the depths of the cores taken from the
lower courses. Additional cores will be taken of the total depth of all bituminous
courses within the lot represented by lower course reduced thickness pay factors. If the
total thickness cores show that the increased upper level course thickness has resulted
in total thickness acceptability, the lower level courses reduced thickness pay factor will
be adjusted accordingly. The second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be applied
to all the individual lots in addition to the first stage lowest quality pay factor determined
in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance
and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications.

4.09.9 MEASUREMENT. Cold mix recycled bituminous base course, cold mix recycled
bituminous base course Class B or Type II as listed in the Bill of Quantities shall be
measured by the cubic meter, as placed and compacted to the planned and specified
thickness and within the lines and grades shown on the plans, as specified or directed
by the Engineer. No measurement shall be made for material placed outside
authorized limits.

The cold mix recycling agent will be measured in liters as applied to the bituminous
surface within the widths specified or added to the mixing or paving machine.

4.09.10 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work, measured as

provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter, or adjusted
contract unit price, as listed in the Bill of Quantities.

When a lot of cold mix recycled bituminous base course is accepted with a
deficiency, the adjusted contract unit price for said lot shall be the product of the
contract unit price and the lowest quality and quantity pay factors specified in
Subsection 4.09.8, "Quality Assurance Procedures," in these General Specifications.

The quality and quantity pay factors shall be applied to the contract unit price for
each course of cold mix recycled bituminous base listed on the Bill of Quantities. The
reduced contract unit price shall apply to the quantity of work in the lot accepted at
reduced payment.

Payment will be made at the contract unit price, or adjusted contract unit price, per
liter of cold mix recycling agent as described above and listed in the Bill of Quantities.

111
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Such price and payment shall cover and be full compensation for furnishing labor,
materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for completing all the work
involved in construction of cold mix recycled bituminous base as specified in Subsection
1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

40901 Cold Mix Recycled Bituminous Base Course Cubic Meter
4090101 Cold Mix Recycled Bituminous Base Course,
Class B Cubic Meter
4090202 Cold Mix Recycled Bituminous Base Course,
Type II Cubic Meter
40903 Cold Mix Recycling Agent Liter

112
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 4.10 - SLURRY SEAL

4.10.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of mixing emulsified bituminous

material, aggregate, water and specified additives and spreading the mixture on a
surfacing or pavement within the lines shown on the plans, as specified in these
specifications and the Special Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Slurry Seal

4.10.2 MATERIALS. The materials for slurry seal immediately prior to mixing shall
conform to the following requirements:

4.10.2.1 Emulsified Bituminous Material. Emulsified bituminous material shall

conform to the requirements for SS-1h or CSS-1h grades in Section 4.01, Bituminous
Materials, Tables 4.01-4 and 4.01-5 in these General Specifications.

4.10.2.2 Aggregate. Aggregate shall consist of natural or manufactured crushed

stone, rock dust, crushed slag, crushed gravel sand and mineral filler. The total
aggregate shall contain not less than eighty-five percent (85%) aggregate produced by
crushing rock particles larger than 19.5 millimeters (3/4 inch) minimum dimension when
the rock particles enter the crusher. Smooth textured sands of less than one and one-
quarter percent (1.25%) water absorption shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the
total aggregate blend. Dune sand shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the percent
of the smooth textured sand. The percentage by weight of the aggregate shall conform
to one of the following gradings when tested in accordance with MRDTM 204:

Type I Type II Type III

Percent Percent Percent
Sieve Sizes Passing Passing Passing

9.5 mm (3/8 Inch) 100 100

4.75 mm (No. 4) 100 90-100 70-100
2.36 mm (No. 8) 90-100 65-90 45-70
1.18 mm (No. 16) 65-90 45-70 28-50
0.600 mm (No. 30) 40-65 30-50 19-34
0.300 mm (No. 50) 25-42 18-30 12-25
0.150 mm (No. 100) 5-30 10-21 7-18
0.075 mm (No. 200) 10-20 5-15 5-15

The aggregate shall also conform to the following requirements prior to the addition of
any chemically active mineral fillers:

Abrasion Loss (MRDTM 309), Percent - 35 Max.

Sodium Sulfate Soundness
Loss, (MRDTM 311), Percent - 15 Max.
Sand Equivalent (MRDTM 313 - 45 Max.

4.10.2.3 Water. Water shall be of such quality that the bituminous material will not
separate from the emulsion before the slurry seal is in place in the work.

113
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.10.2.4 Mineral Fillers. Additives may be used to accelerate or retard the break-
setting of the slurry seal, or improve the resulting finished surface texture and
appearance. The type and quantity of additive shall be determined from the mix design
approved by the Engineer.

Chemically active mineral fillers such as Portland cement, hydraulic cement,

hydrated lime and ammonium sulfate conforming to the following requirements may be
added to improve workability, regulate break-setting time and alter aggregate gradation.

Materials Requirement

Portland Cement, Type I or II ASTM C-150

Blended Hydraulic Cement, Type IP ASTM C-595
Lime, Type N or S ASTM C-207

When required by the Job Mix Design, the amount of mineral filler used shall be
between one and two percent (1 - 2%) of the weight of the aggregate, with the exact
amount to be stated in the Job Mix Design.

Chemically inactive mineral fillers such as limestone dust, fly ash and rock dust may
be added to alter aggregate gradation.

4.10.2.5. Chemical Admixtures and Asphalt Modifiers. The types and amounts
of chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers used shall be limited to those listed in the
Special Specifications or proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Ministry's
Research and Materials Department to establish compliance with the job mix design
requirements contained in Subsection 4.10.3, "Proportioning Slurry Seal Mixtures," in
these General Specifications.

All chemical admixtures/asphalt modifiers including anti-stripping additives and

polymers shall be thoroughly mixed and uniformly combined with the bituminous
material.

4.10.3 PROPORTIONING SLURRY SEAL MIXTURES. MRDTM 427 shall be used

for the design and testing of slurry seal mixtures. Not less than fourteen (14) days
before the work is scheduled to commence, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
a detailed mix design covering the specific materials and proportions of each to be
used. The design shall be prepared by a laboratory under the supervision of a qualified
technician. Samples of each of the materials to be used, sufficient to produce fifty (50)
kilograms of slurry seal mixture, shall also be furnished to the Engineer. The Engineer
will make additional tests at his option. When the Engineer is satisfied with the
materials to be used, the mixture proportions and the test results, he shall notify the
Contractor in writing of his approval of the mix design.

The laboratory report submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer shall show the
results of tests on the individual materials and compare the results with those specified
in these General Specifications and the Special Specifications. The report shall provide
the following test information for the slurry mixture.

114
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Test Method Requirement

Slurry Seal Consistency ISSA T 106 20-30 mm

Excess Asphalt ISSA T 109 500-700 grams per square meter
Wet Stripping Test ISSA T 114 Pass
Compatibility ISSA T 115 Pass (Note 1)
Quick Set Emulsion ISSA T 102 Pass (Note 2)
Wet Track Abrasion Loss ASTM D 3910 800 grams per square meter,
Max.

Notes: 1. At the maximum air temperature occurring during placement.

2. For materials used when slurry seal is placed.
3. ISSA = International Slurry Seal Association.

Cure time and set time shall be determined and shall conform to the requirements
described in MRDTM 427.

The laboratory shall report the quantitative effects of moisture content on the unit
weight of the combined aggregates. The mix proportions shall include:

1. Percent by dry weight of aggregate.

2. Maximum and minimum quantity of mineral filler (if used) as a percent of the dry
weight of aggregate.

3. Maximum and minimum quantity of water as a percent of the dry weight of

aggregate.

4. Quantity of emulsified bituminous material as a percent of the dry weight of

aggregate.

5. The type and quantity of mineral fillers and/or chemical admixtures/asphalt

modifiers to be used.

The mixture shall be capable of uncontrolled traffic no more than three (3) hours
after placement. The mixture shall not exhibit bleeding, raveling, separation or other
distress.

4.10.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment, tools and
machines to be used in the design, testing and production of slurry seals in accordance
with his Program of Work as approved by the Engineer. All equipment shall be properly
maintained and in good working condition.

4.10.4.1 Slurry Mixing Machine. The slurry mixing machine shall be a self-
propelled continuous flow mixing unit. The mixing unit shall be capable of proportioning
emulsified bituminous material, water, aggregate and additives by volume. The
emulsified bituminous material shall be introduced into the mixing unit by a positive
displacement pump. Water shall be introduced into the mixing unit through an
indicating meter by a centrifugal-type pump. Aggregate shall be introduced into the

115
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
mixer through a feeder which is directly connected to the drive for the emulsified
bituminous material pump. The drive shaft of the aggregate feeder shall be equipped
with a revolution counter reading to one-tenth (1/10) revolution. Additives shall be
introduced into the mixer through continuous feeding mechanisms which will accurately
feed each individual additive.

Each feeder unit shall be calibrated at different gate settings for each slurry mixing
unit used in the work. A means for weighing the aggregate, water and emulsified
bituminous material shall be provided by the Contractor so that the accuracy of the
pumps and feeder units may be checked at daily intervals during the production of
slurry seal.

The slurry mixing machine shall be capable of proportioning and mixing individual
materials within the following tolerances:

1. The Engineer approved emulsified bituminous material content plus or minus

one percentage point ( 1).

2. The percent of aggregate passing each specified sieve shall not vary more than
plus or minus four percent ( 4%) from the approved job mix formula.

3. The percent of aggregate passing each sieve shall not go from the high limit to
the low limit for any two (2) successive sieves.

4. The slurry consistency (ISSA T 106) shall not vary more than five (5) millimeters
from the approved mix design after field adjustments approved by the Engineer.

4.10.4.2 Slurry Spreading Device. The spreader device shall be a box equipped
to prevent loss of slurry mixture along all sides and have a flexible rubber belt strike-off
capable of being adjusted to various crown shapes. The spreader box shall be capable
of placing a uniform surface over the width of one lane. It shall have a means for
adjusting to deviations in the pavement surface being sealed. Replacement flexible
strike-offs shall be available at all times during the placement of slurry seal.

The spreading device shall be capable of spreading the specified rate of slurry
materials within a tolerance of plus or minus fifteen percent (+/- 15%) of the dry
aggregate weight.

The spreading device shall be kept clean and build-up of slurry materials shall not
be allowed.

4.10.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Slurry seal shall not be mixed or placed when the
temperature of the surface on which the slurry seal is to be placed is less than fifteen
degrees Celsius (15o C.) and falling. Slurry seal shall not be placed during dust or sand
storms, when there is a chance for rain within two (2) hours or when freezing may occur
within twelve (12) hours.

4.10.6 TRAFFIC CONTROL. No traffic shall be allowed on the slurry seal for at least
three (3) hours after placement. The Contractor shall take effective action to permit

116
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
traffic to safely pass through slurry seal operations in accordance with Section 9.02,
"Traffic Control through Work Zones," in these General Specifications.

4.10.7 CONSTRUCTION. Construction requirements shall also be as specified in the

HMM, Part 5, Section 2.04 - Surface Maintenance Techniques; Paragraphs A -
Introduction; and D-Slurry Seal, and as prescribed herein.

The surface to be slurry sealed shall be thoroughly cleaned by brooming, blowing

with high pressure air or with a suitable vacuum.

When specified in the Special Specifications, a tack coat consisting of SS-1h or

CSS-1h emulsified bituminous material mixed in the proportion of one (1) part
emulsified bituminous material to three (3) parts water shall be spread at a rate between
two-tenths and four-tenths (0.2-0.4) liters per square meter. The exact rate shall be
determined by the Engineer.

The surface to receive the slurry seal shall be pre-wetted by fogging with water at
a rate determined by the Engineer. Said rate shall be adjusted during the day as
temperature changes. Flowing water in front of the spreading device shall not be
allowed.

Slurry seal material shall be placed within the following rates based on dry
aggregate weight. The exact rate shall be as specified.

Type I - 3.3 to 5.4 kilograms per square meter

Type II - 5.4 to 8.2 kilograms per square meter
Type III - 8.2, or more, kilograms per square meter

The slurry seal mixture shall be smooth and homogeneous after spreading on the
surface to be sealed and show no evidence of separation of aggregate and emulsified
bituminous material after break-setting.

Hand tools shall be used to remove spillage. Ridges and bumps in the slurry seal
surface shall not be permitted. Joints shall be worked with an appropriate hand
operated fabric drag and no excessive build-up of slurry mixture, uncovered areas or
unsightly appearance shall be permitted on longitudinal and transverse joints.

Areas inaccessible to the slurry mixing and spreading machine may be slurry sealed
using hand operated fabric drags.

4.10.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Slurry seal shall be accepted or

rejected by lots. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications, a lot shall
consist of five thousand (5,000) square meters, or portion thereof placed each day. The
Engineer shall perform or supervise on the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing.

Quality assurance testing for each lot shall include:

1. Residual bituminous material content

2. Weight per square meter

117
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The residual bituminous material content shall be determined by solvent extraction

testing of a minimum of five (5) samples per lot randomly obtained from the mixing
machine discharge. The thickness shall be determined by the weight of material used
for each lot as determined from the recorders and measuring devices attached to the
slurry seal mixing machine.

When the as-constructed bituminous material content varies from the approved mix
design content, slurry seal may be accepted on the basis of reduced payment in
accordance with the following pay factors:

PAY FACTORS

Variation From Approved

Residual Bituminous
Material Content Slurry Seal

+ 1.00 percentage points 100 %

+ 1.01 - 1.50 percentage points 98 %
+ 1.51 - 2.00 percentage points 92 %
+ 2.01 - 2.50 percentage points 80 %
+ 2.51 percentage points, or more 0%

The pay factor shall be applied to the contract unit price listed in the Bill of
Quantities. The reduced price shall apply to the quantity of work in the lot accepted at
reduced price.

When the weight of slurry seal per square meter for any lot is less than the approved
spread rate by more than fifteen (15%) the deficiency shall be corrected by spreading
additional slurry seal mixture for the full width and length of the lot.

4.10.9 MEASUREMENT. Slurry seal shall be measured in square meters for the area
upon which the slurry seal was actually placed within the lines shown on the plans,
specified or ordered by the Engineer. Tack coat and water used to pre-wet the surface
to be sealed shall not be measured separately.

Emulsified bituminous material, mineral fillers, chemical admixtures and asphalt

modifiers used by the contractor to meet the Job Mix Design requirements will be
considered subsidiary to the construction of the slurry seal and will not be measured
separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill
of Quantities. When they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in the Special
Specifications they shall be measured in liters, kilograms, or tons in accordance with
Subsection 4.05.10 "Measurement" in these General Specifications.

4.10.10 PAYMENT. Slurry seal of each type completed as specified and measured
shall be paid for at the contract unit price, or adjusted contract unit price, per square
meter listed in the Bill of Quantities.

When a lot of slurry seal is accepted with a deficiency, the adjusted contract unit
price for said lot shall be the product of the contract unit price and the lowest quality and

118
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
quantity pay factors specified in Subsection 4.10.8, "Quality Assurance Procedures,"
in these General Specifications.

Emulsified bituminous material, mineral fillers, chemical admixtures, and asphalt

modifiers used by the contractor to meet the Job Mix Design requirements shall be
considered subsidiary to the construction of slurry seals and shall not be paid for
separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill
of Quantities. When they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in the Special
Specifications they shall be paid for as provided in Subsection 4.05.11 "Payment" in
these General Specifications.

Prices and payment made under this section shall cover and be full compensation
for furnishing labor, equipment, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
all the work involved as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these
General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

41001 Slurry Seal Square Meter
4100101 Slurry Seal, Type I Square Meter
4100102 Slurry Seal, Type II Square Meter
4100103 Slurry Seal, Type III Square Meter

119
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 4.11 - COLD MILLING PROCESS FOR REMOVING BITUMINOUS
PAVEMENT

4.11.1 DESCRIPTION. The cold milling process consists of planing and removing an
existing bituminous surface to the lines and depths shown on the plans, as specified in
these specifications, the Special Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

The purposes for cold milling shall include, but not be limited to:

1. To revise by leveling and reshaping the longitudinal grade and transverse cross-
section of an existing bituminous pavement.

2. To remove portions or all of a bituminous pavement in preparation for hot or

cold mix recycling or placement of an overlay.

3. To prepare areas of an existing bituminous pavement for placement of an inlay

patch of bituminous concrete.

4. To remove bituminous pavement alongside cracks in preparation for crack

repairs using an inlay patch.

5. To texture the bituminous surface for improvement of skid resistance.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Cold Milling Bituminous Concrete

4.11.2 EQUIPMENT. The cold milling equipment shall be self-propelled, equipped with
a rotating cutting cylinder and replaceable cutting teeth and be of such size and
capacity as may be required to perform the milling work in accordance with his Program
of Work as approved by the Engineer. The equipment shall have a water tank, pump
and spray bar for applying cooling water to the teeth during cutting and for control of
dust. The cold milling machine shall be equipped with a electronically controlled,
hydraulically operated leveling device which will produce the grade and cross-slope
specified.

The minimum acceptable size and capacity for the purposes listed in Subsection 4.11.1,
"Description," in these General Specifications shall be:

1. For purposes Number 1. and Number 2., the minimum cutting width shall be
one and nine-tenths (1.9) meters. The equipment shall be capable of milling to various
selected depths up to fifteen (15) centimeters in one pass.

2. For purposes Number 3. and Number 4., the equipment shall be capable of cutting
specified widths between fifteen and ninety (15-90) centimeters by removing cutting
teeth. The equipment shall be capable of milling to various selected depths up to eight
(8) centimeters in one pass.

120
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
3. For purpose Number 5., the rotary cutting cylinder shall contain sufficient teeth,
properly spaced as necessary to produce a uniform surface texture. The equipment
shall be capable of cutting to a minimum depth of one (1) centimeter.

When, in the opinion of the Engineer, crawler-mounted milling machines damage the
surface of the pavement to remain in place, he may either direct that the work be
carried out in more passes with reduced thickness per pass or that a pneumatic-tired
machine be used instead. Whatever the Engineer's instructions in this respect, they
shall not be grounds for additional payment to the Contractor.

4.11.3 TRAFFIC CONTROL. The Contractor shall take effective action to permit traffic
to safely pass through cold milling operations in accordance with Section 9.02, "Traffic
Control through Work Zones," in these General Specifications.

4.11.4 CONSTRUCTION. Construction requirements shall also conform to those

specified in the HMM, Part 5, Section 2.03 - Pavement Surface problems, Paragraph
I - Milling and Recycling, and as herein detailed.

The exact locations of the areas to be milled along with the respective depths
thereof shall be determined and delineated by the Engineer immediately prior to start
of the Work. The number of passes shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved
by the Engineer. Trial sections shall be as directed by the Engineer.

Milling shall be carried out along the longitudinal direction of the road/shoulders,
using an accurate direction reference. The operation shall produce a uniform surface
free from holes, protrusions, humps, or unduly deep grooves, all as determined by the
Engineer.

When directed, the process shall be so organized as to minimize downtime of the

milling machine in position, by providing the required number of dump trucks. Worn out
or broken teeth shall be replaced promptly to maintain the uniformity of the surface, so
an adequate supply of good quality cutting teeth shall be on site prior to starting the
work. In addition, a dedicated team of technicians shall be present at all times to
undertake replacement as needed.

All cutting teeth shall be inspected and, if not in proper working order, teeth shall be
replaced. When grade control is specified, a reference wire shall be established or,
when approved by the Engineer, a reference ski shall be attached to the milling
machine. Cold milling shall be carried out longitudinally to the width of the machine and
the depth specified.

Prior to commencing cold milling operations, the surface to be milled shall be cleaned
of dust, dirt and other deleterious materials.

During cold milling, water shall be added in a fog to the cutting teeth to reduce dust.

When specified that the milled material is to be picked up, an elevating belt or other
pickup device approved by the Engineer shall be furnished. Milled materials shall be
delivered to the location specified or as directed by the Engineer.

121
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
The milled surface shall be uniform with no depressions under a four (4) meter long
straightedge laid parallel with and transverse to the centerline which are greater than:

1. When the purpose is to level and reshape the longitudinal grade and transverse
cross slope six (6) mm Max.

2. When the purpose is to remove portions or all of the bituminous pavement in

preparation for hot or cold recycling or placement of an overlay -

(1) When the replacement layer is less than eight (8) centimeters thick - nine
(9) mm Max.

(2) When the replacement layer is greater than eight (8) centimeters thick -
twelve (12) mm Max.

3. When the purpose is to prepare areas for inlay patching and crack repair nine
(9) mm Max.

4. When the purpose is to texture the surface - six (6) mm Max.

4.11.5 ACCEPTANCE. Cold Milling will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4,

"Measured or Tested Conformance," in these General Specifications.

4.11.6 MEASUREMENT. Measurement shall be in square meters or cubic meters as

listed in the Bill of Quantities:

1. For purposes 3, 4 and 5 listed in Subsection 4.11.1, "Description," in these

General Specifications. Square meters measured within the lines shown on the plans,
specified in the Special Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.

2. For purposes 1 and 2 listed in Subsection 4.11.1, "Description," in these

General Specifications. Cubic Meters using principles of precise survey cross sections.

4.11.7 PAYMENT. Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for the square
meters and/or cubic meters measured as prescribed above for the item number and pay
unit listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Such payment shall cover and be full compensation for furnishing equipment,
replacement teeth, labor, tools and incidentals necessary to complete all of the work
involved in cold milling as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these
General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

41101 Cold Milling Bituminous Concrete Square Meter
41102 Cold Milling Bituminous Concrete Cubic Meter

122
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 4.12 - SURFACE RECYCLING OF BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT

4.12.1 DESCRIPTION. Surface recycling of bituminous pavement consists of heating

the existing bituminous surface in situ, scarifying and remixing the bituminous surface
to the specified depth, treating the remixed material with an emulsified recycling agent
and compacting all in accordance with the plans, these General Specifications, the
Special Specifications and as directed by the Engineer. When the surface recycled
bituminous pavement is to receive a wearing course, the Special Specifications will
specify the grading, class and thickness of wearing course.

Surface recycling shall be a continuous operation, free from stops and starts,
throughout the process of heating, scarifying and remixing the bituminous surface,
spreading and compaction. The wearing surface, when specified may be placed
concurrently with or after completion of the surface recycling operation.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Surface Recycling of Bituminous Pavement

Hot-Mix Recycling Agent

4.12.2 MATERIALS. The materials for surface recycling shall consist of the following:

4.12.2.1 Recycling Agent. The recycling agent shall conform to the requirements
listed in Tables 4.06-1 or 4.06-2, Paragraph 4.06.2.2, "Hot-Mix Recycling Agent," as
specified in these General Specifications.

4.12.2.2 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course. The bituminous concrete

wearing surface shall conform to the requirements in Section 4.05, "Bituminous
Concrete Pavement," in these General Specifications. The grading and class of
bituminous concrete wearing course shall be specified in the Special Specifications.

4.12.3 QUANTITY OF RECYCLING AGENT TO BE APPLIED. The quantity of hot-

mix recycling agent to be applied will be determined from laboratory testing of samples
of bituminous material obtained from the actual bituminous surface to be recycled
(referred to as RAP). One (1) RAP sample, representing the top five (5) centimeters
of the surface to be recycle and weighing at least twenty (20) kilograms shall be
obtained from each ten thousand (10,000) square meters of surface to be recycled.
The bituminous material shall be recovered from each RAP sample using MRDTM 418.
The recycling agent selected for recycling shall be added to the recovered bituminous
material to produce a modified bituminous material that will have characteristics and
properties similar to paving grade bituminous material in Section 4.01, "Bituminous
Materials," in these General Specifications. The penetration of the modified bituminous
material shall be in the range forty to seventy (40-70) or as specified in the Special
Specifications.

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining specified samples, performing all
required tests and reporting the results to the Engineer with a recommendation for
quantity of recycling agent to be applied as a percent of the weight of bituminous
material to be remixed.

123
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
The Contractor shall furnish duplicate samples of RAP and not less than four (4)
liters of recycling agent to the Engineer for comparative testing and evaluation. The
Engineer shall direct the quantity of recycling agent to be added.

4.12.4 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment as required to perform
the work as outlined in his Program of Work and to maintain a minimum rate of
production of one thousand (1000) square meters per hour.

1. The equipment used to heat and scarify the bituminous surface shall be
equipped to burn liquid petroleum gas (LPG), natural gas or other fuel as may be
approved by the Engineer. Diesel fuel shall not be allowed. The combustion chamber
shall be insulated, rear wheel positioned and equipped with burners rated at fifteen
million (15,000,000) BTU's per hour, minimum. The machine shall be equipped with two
(2) rows of spring-equalized scarifier-leveling rakes which will automatically ride over
obstructions in the surface such as man-hole covers.

Additional heater units, without scarifier rakes, shall be operated in advance of

the scarifier so that the full train is capable of heating the bituminous surface to a
temperature of one hundred fifty degrees Celsius (150 o C.), plus or minus ten degrees
Celsius (+10o C.) to a depth between twenty and thirty (20-30) millimeters.

Heater-scarifying equipment shall be capable of being adjusted to heat widths

between two and four-tenths and three and eight-tenths (2.4-3.8) meters.

2. A mixer-repaver machine equipped with an oscillating or vibratory screed and

capable of distributing and leveling the scarified material for the full width of scarified.

3. The mixer-repaver may be equipped with a means for uniformly applying the
recycling agent across the full width scarified during the remixing operation. A
distributor truck may also be used for applying the bituminous recycling agent after
completion of remixing, spreading and leveling the scarified material. Whichever means
for applying recycling agent is selected, it shall be capable of spraying the correct
quantity of recycling agent within a tolerance of plus or minus three-tenths (+ 0.3)
percentage points.

4. A means for placing the bituminous concrete wearing surface when specified.
This may be an integral part of the mixer-repaver equipment or a separate paving
machine.

5. Compaction equipment - As necessary to achieve the compaction specified.

In addition, a twenty (20) Ton pneumatic roller shall be furnished for compacting the
recycled material.

4.12.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Surface recycling shall not be performed when the
air temperature is less than twenty degrees Celsius (20o C.), when raining or during
dust or sand storms.

4.12.6 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY. The Contractor shall protect adjacent

structures, passing vehicles, trees, shrubbery and other improvements from excessive

124
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
heat and damage. No flames outside the combustion chamber shall be permitted.
Equipment that causes, or appears to cause damage shall be removed from the project.

The Contractor shall repair or replace any damaged facilities or landscaping at his sole
cost.

4.12.7 CONSTRUCTION. The surface to be recycled shall be cleaned by sweeping

or blowing with high pressure air.

The surface to be recycled shall be heated to the width shown on the plans or
specified plus ten (10) centimeters on either side. Sufficient heater units shall be
operated in tandem to heat the bituminous surface to the temperature and depth
specified. The full depth of material heated to the width specified shall be scarified,
remixed, distributed, leveled and compacted with a pneumatic roller.

The surface of the recycled bituminous pavement shall be smooth, free from ruts,
humps or depressions. The surface shall have no depressions greater than six (6)
millimeters under a straightedge three (3) meters in length when laid in any direction.

Concurrent with, but in any event, no later than four (4) hours after scarification,
recycling agent shall be applied to the surface width specified at the rate specified in
liters per square meter (L/M2) within a tolerance of plus or minus five (+5) percentage
points.

The bituminous concrete wearing surface shall be placed to the thickness and width
specified and compacted as specified in Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete
Pavement," in these General Specifications.

The wearing course may be placed concurrently with the mixer-repaver operation
or later.

4.12.8 COMPACTION OF SURFACE RECYCLED BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT. The

recycled bituminous pavement, immediately after completion of heating, scarifying,
distributing and leveling, shall be compacted by pneumatic rollers to between ninety
percent (90%) and ninety-three percent (93%) of the maximum laboratory density
determined by MRDTM 412.

The bituminous concrete wearing surface shall be compacted as specified in Section

4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General Specifications.

4.12.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The surface recycled bituminous

pavement shall be accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the lot size shall be ten thousand (10,000) square meters for each layer
constructed. The surface recycled bituminous pavement shall be sampled, tested, and
evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work," in these General
Specifications. The Engineer may, during the beginning of surface recycling, at times
when test results indicate erratic characteristics, and at any other time, reduce the lot
size to sections of surface recycled bituminous pavement with similar quality
characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and modification or replacement of

125
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
low-quality materials with materials of acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength
of the pavement structure.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and
testing for each lot shall include:

1. Compaction
2. Thickness
3. Surface Smoothness

4.12.9.1 Compaction. The upper and lower specifications limits are 90 and 93
percent. The bituminous emulsion treated base course compaction will be sampled,
tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph 4.05.8.1, "Compaction," in these General
Specifications.

4.12.9.2 Thickness. A lot shall be accepted when the average thickness is not less
than the planned thickness. The Engineer will accept the lot on a thickness basis when
the average thickness for five (5) cores at each location is equal to the planned and
specified thickness for the sum of the two (2) layers. The surface bituminous recycled
pavement thickness will be sampled, tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph
4.05.8.2, "Thickness," in these General Specifications.

The Contractor shall backfill density and thickness test holes with bituminous
emulsion treated base or other material approved by the Engineer.

4.12.9.3 Smoothness. The Engineer will accept the lot on a smoothness basis
when the surface of the wearing surface does not have any depressions greater than
six (6) millimeters under a three (3) meter straight edge and in any direction on the
surface.

4.12.9.4 Acceptance. Surface recycled pavement construction including surface

smoothness will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested
Conformance," in these General Specifications.

Surface compaction recycled bituminous pavement and thickness will be accepted

under Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and
Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications in two
(2) stages as follows:

The first stage shall be the selection of the pay factor for the quality of the surface
recycled bituminous pavement relating to density. The second stage involves the
selection and application of a quantity pay factor based on the thickness of the surface
recycled bituminous pavement. The second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be
applied to all the individual lots in addition to the first stage pay factor.

The pay factors shall be applied to the contract unit price for each course of surface
recycled bituminous pavement listed in the Bill of Quantities. The reduced contract unit
prices shall apply to the quantity of work in the lot accepted at reduced payment.

126
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.12.10 MEASUREMENT. The recycled bituminous shall be measured in cubic meters

based on the widths and depths shown on the plans or as specified or average widths
and depths measured in-place, whichever is the least.

The hot-mix recycling agent shall be measured in liters as applied within the recycled
widths specified.

4.12.11 PAYMENT. Payment shall be made at the contract unit price, or adjusted
contract unit price, per cubic meter measured as described above for each lot of
surface recycled bituminous pavement listed in the Bill of Quantities.

When a lot of surface recycled bituminous pavement is accepted with a deficiency,

the adjusted contract unit price for said lot shall be the product of the contract unit price
and the lowest calculated quality and quantity pay factors specified in Subsection
4.12.9, "Quality Assurance Procedures," in these General Specifications.

Payment will be made at the contract unit price or adjusted contract unit price per
liter of recycling agent measured as described above and in accordance with
Subsection 4.06 "Payment" in these General Specifications.

Such price and payment shall cover and be full compensation for furnishing labor,
equipment, fuel and recycling agent, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General
Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

41201 Surface Recycling of Bituminous Pavement Cubic Meter
40610 Hot-Mix Recycling Agent Liter

127
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 4.13 - ASPHALT PAVEMENT CRACK AND JOINT SEALING

4.13.1 DESCRIPTION. This work consists of saw cutting, when required, and cleaning
and filling cracks and joints in asphalt pavement.

CRACK AND JOINT SEALING ITEMS IN THE BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Saw Cutting and Joint Sealing

Crack Cleaning and Sealing

4.13.2 MATERIALS. Materials shall conform to the following Subsections:

4.13.2.1 Asphalt Cement. Asphalt cement shall be a Viscosity Grade conforming

to the requirements listed in Table 4.01-1, Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in these
General Specifications.

4.13.2.2 Blotter. Aggregate for blotter material shall consist of sound durable
particles of gravel or crushed stone having a gradation so all particles will pass a sieve
with nine and one-half (9.5) millimeter (3/8 inch) square openings. The Contractor shall
furnish material that is free from organic matter and clay balls and meets the following:

(1) Liquid limit, MRDTM 209 25 maximum

(2) Plasticity index, MRDTM 208 6 maximum

4.13.2.3 Emulsified Asphalt. Emulsified asphalt shall be CRS-2 or CMS-2 or

LMCRS-2H conforming to the requirements listed in Tables 4.01-5 and 4.01-6 in these
General Specifications.

4.13.2.4 Fine Aggregate. Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements listed
in Subparagraph 5.01.2.2.1, "Fine Aggregates," in these General Specifications.

4.13.2.5 Joint Sealant. Joint sealant shall be hot poured conforming to the
requirements of AASHTO M 301.

4.13.2.6 Slurry Seal. Slurry seal shall conform to the materials requirements
contained in Subsection 4.10.2, "Materials," for Type I Slurry Seal in these General
Specifications.

4.13.2.7 Rubberized Asphalt. Rubberized asphalt shall conform to the

requirements of ASTM D1190 and AASHTO M 173.

4.13.3 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall supply the proper type and numbers of
sufficient equipment to complete the work within the Contract time and in accordance
with his Program of Work as approved by the Engineer. The equipment shall also
conform to the following specific requirements:

128
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
1. Power saw and blades. Saw and blades of such size and configuration that
saw cuts can be made with one pass shall be furnished. Spacers are not allowed.

2. Router. The Contractor shall furnish power rotary impact router or vertical
spindle router capable of cleaning cracks or joints to the required depth and width.

3. Hot-compressed air lance. The Contractor shall furnish a lance capable of

providing clean, oil-free compressed air at a volume of two and eighty-three hundreds
(2.83) cubic meters per minute at a blast velocity of six hundred and ten (610) meters
per second.

4. Application wand. A crack sealant applicator wand attached to a heated hose

that is attached to a heated sealant chamber shall be furnished. The temperature
controls shall maintain the temperature of the sealant within manufacturer's tolerances.

5. Heating kettle. The Contractor shall furnish an indirect-heating-type double

boiler with the space between the inner and outer shells fixed with oil or other heat
transfer medium capable of constant agitation. He shall provide an accurate and
calibrated thermometer having a range from ninety-three degrees Celsius to three
hundred sixteen degrees Celsius (93o C. to 316 o C.) graduated in one (1 o ) degree
increments. The thermometer shall be located such that the temperature of the joint
sealant may be safely checked.

6. Squeegee. The Contractor shall furnish a hand-held squeegee for ensuring that
the crack is filled to the existing surface.

4.13.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

4.13.4.1 Saw Cutting and Joint Sealing. The Contractor shall saw cut, clean and
seal joints in a continuous operation. Either dry or wet cutting is allowed. The
Contractor shall clean dry-sawed joints with a stream of air sufficient to remove all dirt,
dust, or deleterious matter adhering to the joint walls or remaining in the joint cavity.
He shall blow or brush dry material off the pavement surface.

The wet-sawed joints shall be cleaned with a water blast, fifty pounds per square
inch (50 psi) (345 kPa) minimum, immediately after sawing to remove any sawing slurry,
dirt, or deleterious matter adhering to the joint walls or remaining in the joint cavity. All
sawing slurry shall be immediately flushed from the pavement surface. Wet-sawed
joints shall be air-blowed to dry joint surfaces.

The Contractor shall not allow traffic to knead together or damage the sawed joints.
If cleaning operations cause interference with traffic the Contractor shall provide
protective screening.

The sealant shall be placed when the pavement surface temperature is four degrees
Celsius (4o C.) or higher. The Contractor shall discontinue operations when weather
conditions detrimentally affect the quality of forming joints and applying sealants.

The Contractor shall submit a copy of and adhere to the manufacturer's

recommendations for heating and applying the joint sealant. He shall not hold the

129
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
material at the pouring temperature for more than six (6) hours and he shall not reheat
the material.

The Contractor shall place a bond breaker tape designed for use with hot poured
sealant in the bottom of the saw cut joint. He shall seal the joints with an applicator
wand when the sealant material is at the pouring temperature. He shall heat or insulate
the applicator wand to maintain the pouring temperature of the sealant during placing
operation. He shall return the applicator wand to the machine and recirculate the joint
sealant material immediately after sealing each joint.

The Contractor shall fill each joint such that, after cooling, the level of the sealant is
no more than three (3) millimeters below the pavement surface. He will wait for the
sealant to be tack free before opening the joint to traffic. Blotter will not be spread on
the sealed joints to allow early opening to traffic.

4.13.4.2 Crack Cleaning and Sealing. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean the
existing surface of all loose material, dirt, or other deleterious substances by brooming,
flushing with water, or other approved methods. He shall route and clean all cracks with
an average opening of six (6) millimeters or more to make a sealant reservoir to the
depth of the routed crack or at least nineteen (19) millimeters depth. He shall dry
cracks before sealing.

When using the hot-compressed air lance, it shall be kept moving so as not to burn
the surrounding pavement and the joint. The Contractor shall place and finish sealant
within five (5) minutes after heating with the hot-compressed air lance.

For cracks with a thirteen (13) millimeter width or less, the Contractor shall seal with
hot-poured elastic sealant as described in 4.13.4.1, "Saw Cutting and Joint Sealing,"
in these General Specifications.

For cracks with a width greater than thirteen (13) millimeters, the Contractor shall
seal with an approved slurry seal mixture, fine aggregate-asphalt cement mixture, or
fine aggregate-emulsified asphalt mixture, or rubberized asphalt mixture. A squeegee
or other suitable equipment shall be used to force the mixture into the cracks.

The Contractor shall immediately screed the joint sealant or asphalt mixture to the
elevation of the existing surface. He shall use a squeegee to ensure that a seventy-five
(75) millimeter wide band is centered on the finished sealed crack. The sealed crack
shall be covered with a light application of blotter.

4.13.4.3 Resealing Defective Joints or Cracks. The Contractor shall reseal areas
exhibiting adhesion failure, damage, missed areas, foreign objects in the sealant, or
other problems which will accelerate failure.

4.13.4.4 Acceptance. Joint Sealant will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.3,

“Certification of Compliance”, in these General Specifications.

Crack and joint sealing will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, “Measured or
Treated Conformance,” in these General Specifications.

130
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.13.5 TRAFFIC CONTROL. While the saw cutting, cleaning and filling joints in
asphalt pavement is in progress, the surface of the roadway shall not be used by the
Contractor, his agents or others until the Engineer is satisfied that the sealed surface
will not be damaged by traffic and has given approval for traffic to use the treated
surface.

The Contractor shall erect and maintain signs, barricades and other traffic control
devices and shall take effective action to exclude traffic of any description from the
roadway surface for as long as may be required in the judgement of the Engineer.
When traffic is restricted to a one-way basis, the Contractor shall provide such flagmen
and pilot cars as deemed necessary for the protection of traffic and the treated surface.
One-way traffic will not be permitted after dark. Traffic may be detoured around the
construction, provided detours are properly constructed, signed and marked. When it
is necessary to permit traffic to cross the freshly sealed surface, the crossing shall be
blotted with sand, as directed by the Engineer, before the crossing is opened to traffic.
Removal of excess sand shall be completed before uncontrolled traffic is permitted on
the sealed surface. All traffic control work will be done in accordance with Section 9.02,
"Traffic Control through Work Zones," in these General Specifications.

4.13.6 MEASUREMENT. Saw cutting and joint sealing will be measured by the linear
meter of completed and accepted work. Crack cleaning and sealing will be measured
by the linear meter of completed and accepted work. No separate measurement shall
be made of joint sealant or other materials.

4.13.7 PAYMENT. Payment shall be made at the contract unit price, or adjusted
contract unit price, listed in the Bill of Quantities for the linear meters measured as
prescribed above.

Such payment shall cover and be full compensation for furnishing equipment,
materials, labor, tools and incidentals necessary to complete all of the work involved in
asphalt pavement crack and joint sealing as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of
Payment," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

41301 Saw cutting and joint sealing Linear Meter

41302 Crack cleaning and sealing Linear Meter

131
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
SECTION 4.14 - PAVEMENT WIDENING

4.14.1 Description. This Work shall consist of the widening of the existing
bituminous concrete pavement or aggregate base course and the shouldering and
finishing of the completed Work in accordance with the specifications and in conformity
with the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross sections shown on the plans or
established by the Engineer.

Pavement widening work shall be analyzed into the applicable removal pay items
and the applicable new construction pay items, corresponding to the prescribed Work
as shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer; and shall be executed as specified
herein and in accordance with the provisions of the pertinent specification sections that
refer to the pay items which are to constitute the complete Work.

4.14.2 Materials. Materials shall conform to the requirements prescribed in the

corresponding specification sections for the several pay items which are to constitute
the complete Work.

4.14.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

4.14.3.1 Trenching. The Contractor shall excavate along the edge of the
existing pavement for the full depth and width as shown on the plans. The bottom of
the trench shall be compacted with rollers and tampers to the type of compaction called
for on the plans. If the plans do not call for a specific type of compaction, the
embankment or subgrade shall be compacted to the provisions specified in Subsection
2.05.4 - Lift Thickness and Compaction Requirements; and the existing subgrade shall
be treated as specified Paragraph 2.06.3.9 - Preparation of Existing Subgrade both, in
these General Specifications.

Adequate provisions shall be made for drainage of the trench to prevent

damage to the subgrade.

Before placing any widening material, the trench shall be cleaned of all loose
materials. The edge of the existing pavement shall be thoroughly cleaned. The trench
must be approved by the Engineer, prior to placement of any widening material.

4.14.3.2 Placing Aggregate Subbase or Base Course. This Work shall be

carried out as specified in Section 3.02 - Aggregate Subbases and Section 3.03 -
Aggregate Bases in these General Specifications as applicable and as shown on the
plans.
4.14.3.3 Placing Bituminous Mixture. Prior to placing any material, the edge
of the existing bituminous pavement and the entire base course shall be sprayed with
a tack or prime coat, as applicable. These sections shall then be paved with the
bituminous mixture designated on the plans.

The bituminous mixture shall be prepared as specified in Section 4.05 -

Bituminous Concrete Pavement in these General Specifications. The material shall be
placed in the prepared trench in two (2) or more layers as shown on the plans or as
directed by the Engineer. This material shall be placed by approved machine methods.

132
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
After being spread, each layer shall be thoroughly compacted with trench rollers
approved by the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements specified in Paragraph
4.05.6.8 - Compaction of Bituminous Concrete Pavement in these General
Specifications.

4.14.3.4 Shoulders. After the surface courses have been completed, the
shoulders shall be constructed to the cross section shown on the plans. Unless
otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the embankment or
subgrade material used for constructing the shoulders shall be obtained from the
widening trench, the ditches and the backslopes. The removal of earth from ditches
and backslopes shall be done in a manner that will provide adequate and satisfactory
drainage without pockets that will impound water; with reasonably uniform ditch widths
and depths; and with reasonably uniform backslopes. It may be necessary to haul
material from locations within the Right of Way where a surplus exists to locations
where a deficit exists, in order to construct the shoulders to the section indicated on the
plans. Any surplus material from the widening trench shall be disposed of at approved
locations.

During the operations of constructing shoulders, care shall be exercised to

prevent injury to previously constructed surfaces.

The Contractor shall water during the shaping and rolling operations as directed
by the Engineer. After the material has been shaped and bladed, the shoulders shall
be compacted to the density shown on the plans or, if not shown, to that specified in
Subsection 3.05.5 - Compaction Requirements or in Paragraph 4.05.6.8 - Compaction
of Bituminous Concrete Pavements in these General Specifications as applicable.

4.14.3.5 Special Provisions for Handling Traffic. Widening operations shall

be permitted on only one (1) side of the pavement at a time, and excavation of trenches
shall be permitted only sufficiently in advance of other operations to insure a continuity
of the operations of excavating, placing of widening materials and rolling.

Reflectorized barricades and lighting shall be placed along open trenches and
traffic shall be protected and handled as specified in Section 9.02 - Traffic Control
through Work Zones, in these General Specifications.

The Contractor shall make adequate provisions to enable traffic to cross open
trenches at intersecting roads, streets and private entrances.

Partial shouldering shall be performed immediately after completion of widening

of portions of the Work in order to eliminate the hazard of the open trench as soon as
possible.

4.14.3.6 Quality Assurance. Tests for quality, conformity, density, and

thickness shall be performed as outlined in the pertinent specification sections that refer
to the pay items which are to constitute the complete Work; except that the numbers
and locations of tests may be modified to those deemed necessary by the Engineer to
determine conformity with the specifications.

133
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents
4.14.3.7 Method of Measurement. The quantities of the various pay items
which constitute the completed and accepted Work shall be measured for payment
according to the plans and specifications for the several pay items appearing in the Bill
of Quantities, and in terms of the prescribed units provided for the several pay items.
Only accepted Work shall be included and the dimensions shall be those shown on the
plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer.

4.14.3.8 Payment. The quantities, measured as provided above, will be paid

for at the unit prices bid for the several pay items as specified in the Bill of quantities.
Such prices shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, and placing all materials,
for all labor, equipment, tools, and all other items necessary for the proper completion
of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 - Scope of Payment, in these General
Specifications. Such payment shall constitute full payment for the completed Work, and
no allowance will be made for any item not specifically provided for or for any other
incidental expense.

134
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

November 1998

PART FIVE
CONCRETE, STEEL AND STRUCTURES
Table of Contents

PART FIVE: CONCRETE, STEEL AND STRUCTURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5.01 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE .................................................... 1

5.01.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 1
5.01.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................. 2
5.01.2.1 Portland Cement ........................................................................ 2
5.01.2.2 Aggregate................................................................................... 3
5.01.2.2.1 Fine Aggregate ............................................................. 3
5.01.2.2.2 Coarse Aggregate ........................................................ 4
5.01.2.2.3 Combined Aggregate ................................................... 5
5.01.2.3 Water.......................................................................................... 7
5.01.2.4 Admixtures ................................................................................. 7
5.01.2.5 Reinforcement ............................................................................ 9
5.01.2.6 Grout .......................................................................................... 9
5.01.3 MIX DESIGN. ........................................................................................... 9
5.01.3.1 Design Limits.............................................................................. 9
5.01.3.1.1 Consistency of Concrete ............................................ 10
5.01.3.1.2 Water .......................................................................... 10
5.01.3.1.3 High-range Water-reducing Admixture ....................... 11
5.01.3.1.4 Mortar ......................................................................... 12
5.01.3.2 Changes in Proportion ............................................................. 12
5.01.3.3 Testing of Trial Mixes ............................................................... 13
5.01.4 EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................... 14
5.01.5 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING DURING CONSTRUCTION ............. 14
5.01.5.1 Handling of Materials ............................................................... 14
5.01.5.2 Mixing Concrete ....................................................................... 15
5.01.5.3 Hauling ..................................................................................... 16
5.01.6 WEATHER CONDITIONS & CURING REQUIREMENTS ..................... 16
5.01.6.1 Cold Weather and General Curing Requirements .................... 16
5.01.6.2 Hot Weather Limitations and General Curing Requirements ... 18
5.01.6.2.1 All Concrete ................................................................ 18
5.01.6.2.2 Method One - Supplying Additional Moisture ............. 19
5.01.6.2.3 Method Two - Preventing Moisture Loss .................... 19
5.01.7 NO-FINES AND CYCLOPEAN CONCRETE ......................................... 20
5.01.7.1 Description ............................................................................... 20
5.01.7.2 Materials................................................................................... 20
5.01.7.2.1 Portland Cement ........................................................ 20
5.01.7.2.2 Coarse Aggregate ...................................................... 20
5.01.7.2.3 Water. ......................................................................... 20
5.01.7.2.4 Admixtures. .............................................................. 20
5.01.7.3 Proportioning. ........................................................................... 20
5.01.7.4 Mixing ....................................................................................... 21
5.01.7.5 Curing....................................................................................... 21
5.01.7.6 Acceptance .............................................................................. 21
5.01.8 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES......................... 21
5.01.8.1 Quality Control of the Mixing Process ...................................... 21
5.01.8.2 Delivery, Process Control Sampling ......................................... 22
Table of Contents 5.01.8.3 Water........................................................................................ 23
5.01.8.4 Portland Cement ...................................................................... 23
5.01.8.5 Admixtures ............................................................................... 23
5.01.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES .............................................. 23
5.01.9.1 Temperature and Slump .......................................................... 23
5.01.9.2 Water-Cement (W/C) Ratio ...................................................... 24
5.01.9.3 Compressive Strength .............................................................. 24
5.01.9.4 Defective Concrete................................................................... 25
5.01.9.5 Acceptance .............................................................................. 26
5.01.10 MEASUREMENT ................................................................................. 26
5.01.11 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 26

SECTION 5.02 - REINFORCING STEEL ..................................................................... 27

5.02.1 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 27
5.02.2 MATERIALS........................................................................................... 27
5.02.3 EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................... 27
5.02.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 27
5.02.4.1 Bending Diagrams.................................................................... 27
5.02.4.2 Protection and Storage ............................................................ 28
5.02.4.3 Cutting and Bending ................................................................. 28
5.02.4.4 Placing, Supporting and Fastening. ......................................... 29
5.02.4.5 Splicing..................................................................................... 30
5.02.4.6 Welded Wire Mesh Reinforcement for Structures .................... 30
5.02.4.7 Drilled Shaft Reinforcing .......................................................... 30
5.02.4.8 Welding of Reinforcement ........................................................ 30
5.02.4.9 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel .............................................. 31
5.02.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES .............................................. 31
5.02.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT............................................................. 31
5.02.7 PAYMENT.............................................................................................. 33

SECTION 5.03 - CONCRETE STRUCTURES ............................................................. 34

5.03.1 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 34
5.03.2 MATERIALS........................................................................................... 34
5.03.3 EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................... 34
5.03.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 35
5.03.4.1 Bridge Structure Concrete ........................................................ 35
5.03.4.2 Bridge Structure Falsework ...................................................... 35
5.03.4.2.1 General....................................................................... 35
5.03.4.2.2 Falsework Design ....................................................... 36
5.03.4.3 Bridge Structure Forms ............................................................ 40
5.03.4.4 Removal of Bridge Structure Forms and Falsework ................. 44
5.03.4.5 Handling and Placing Bridge Structure Concrete ..................... 47
5.03.4.6 Seal Courses and Underwater Concreting ............................... 50
5.03.4.7 Bridge Structure Construction Joints ........................................ 50
5.03.4.8 Bridge Structure Cold Joints .................................................... 51
5.03.4.9 Bridge Structure Finishing. ....................................................... 51
5.03.4.9.1 Bridge Deck Placing, Consolidating and Finishing ..... 51
5.03.4.9.2 Other Bridge Structure Finishing ................................ 54
5.03.4.10 Bridge Structure Curing and Protection................................... 55
5.03.4.10.1 Membrane Curing ..................................................... 55
Table of Contents 5.03.4.10.2 Water Curing ............................................................ 56
5.03.4.10.3 Steam Curing ........................................................... 56
5.03.4.10.4 Additional Hot Weather Limitations and Curing
Requirements for Bridge Decks and Slabs............... 58
5.03.4.11 Tunnel Concrete...................................................................... 60
5.03.4.12 Tunnel Concrete Formwork ..................................................... 60
5.03.4.13 Tunnel Arch Forms.................................................................. 60
5.03.4.14 Tunnel Concrete Placement .................................................... 61
5.03.4.15 Tunnel Construction Joints ...................................................... 61
5.04.4.16 Tunnel Concrete on Rock Surfaces ........................................ 61
5.03.4.17 Tunnel Concrete Curing and form Removal ............................ 62
5.03.4.18 Repair of Tunnel Surface Defects ........................................... 62
5.03.4.19 Finishing of Formed Surfaces ................................................. 62
5.03.4.20 Tunnel Concreting Tolerances ................................................ 62
5.03.4.21 Tunnel Excavation................................................................... 62
5.03.4.22 Tolerances for Bridge Structure Concrete Work ..................... 62
5.03.4.23 Precast Concrete ................................................................... 63
5.03.5 BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS ............................................................. 66
5.03.5.1 Description. .............................................................................. 66
5.03.5.2 Materials................................................................................... 66
5.03.5.2.1 Submittals................................................................... 67
5.03.5.2.2 Storage and Handling ................................................. 67
5.03.5.3 Construction Requirements ...................................................... 67
5.03.5.3.1 Joints .......................................................................... 67
5.03.5.3.2 Bedding and Nosing ................................................... 68
5.03.5.4 Water Stops ............................................................................. 68
5.03.5.4.1 Materials ..................................................................... 68
5.03.5.4.2 Construction ............................................................... 70
5.03.6 BEARING DEVICES .............................................................................. 70
5.03.6.1 Description ............................................................................... 70
5.03.6.2 Materials................................................................................... 71
5.03.6.2.1 Bearing Devices ......................................................... 71
5.03.6.2.2 Elastomeric Bearings.................................................. 73
5.03.6.3 Construction Requirements. ................................................... 75
5.03.7 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES......................... 76
5.03.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES .............................................. 77
5.03.9 CONCRETE FOR MINOR STRUCTURES ............................................ 77
5.03.9.1 Description ............................................................................... 77
5.03.9.2 Materials................................................................................... 77
5.03.9.3 Concrete Composition .............................................................. 77
5.03.9.4 Construction Requirements ...................................................... 78
5.03.9.4.1 General....................................................................... 78
5.03.9.4.2 Placing Concrete ........................................................ 78
5.03.9.5 Curing Concrete ....................................................................... 78
5.03.9.6 Acceptance .............................................................................. 78
5.03.10 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT............................................................ 79
5.03.11 PAYMENT............................................................................................. 80

SECTION 5.04 - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES ................................. 83

5.04.1 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 83
Table of Contents 5.04.2 PRESTRESSING SYSTEM APPROVAL ............................................... 83
5.04.3 MATERIALS........................................................................................... 84
5.04.3.1 Concrete................................................................................... 84
5.04.3.2 Concrete Reinforcement .......................................................... 84
5.04.3.3 Prestressing Reinforcement ..................................................... 84
5.04.3.4 Duct Enclosures ....................................................................... 85
5.04.3.5 Anchorages .............................................................................. 86
5.04.3.6 Grout ........................................................................................ 86
5.04.4 EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................... 87
5.04.5 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES......................... 88
5.04.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING ................................................................. 89
5.04.7 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 89
5.04.7.1 Formwork ................................................................................. 89
5.04.7.2 Shoring ..................................................................................... 89
5.04.7.3 Concrete and Reinforcement ................................................... 90
5.04.7.4 Prestressing Steel .................................................................... 90
5.04.7.5 Anchoring Devices and Load Distribution ................................ 91
5.04.7.6 Ducts ........................................................................................ 91
5.04.7.7 Pretensioning Procedures ........................................................ 92
5.04.7.8 Post-Tensioning Equipment and Procedures ........................... 92
5.04.7.9 Bonding and Grouting .............................................................. 94
5.04.7.10 Workmanship ......................................................................... 96
5.04.8 SEGMENTAL BRIDGE DECK CONSTRUCTION ................................. 99
5.04.8.1 Epoxy Adhesives in Segmental Bridge Deck Construction ...... 99
5.04.8.1.1 Epoxy Adhesive Suppliers .......................................... 99
5.04.8.1.2 Flexure and Compression Test Specimens ................ 99
5.04.8.1.3 Flexure Strength Test ............................................... 100
5.04.8.1.4 Compression Strength Test ...................................... 100
5.04.8.1.5 Shear Test ................................................................ 100
5.04.8.1.6 Surface Preparation ................................................. 100
5.04.8.1.7 Application of Epoxy ................................................. 100
5.04.8.1.8 Preliminary Prestress ............................................... 100
5.04.8.1.9 Records of Jointing ................................................... 100
5.04.9 COMPOSITE SLAB CONSTRUCTION. .............................................. 101
5.04.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ........................................... 101
5.04.11 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.......................................................... 101
5.04.12 PAYMENT........................................................................................... 102

SECTION 5.05 - STEEL STRUCTURES AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK ... 104
5.05.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 104
5.05.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 104
5.05.3 PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................... 107
5.05.3.1 Drawings ................................................................................. 107
5.05.3.1.1 General..................................................................... 107
5.05.3.1.2 Shop Drawings ......................................................... 107
5.05.3.1.3 Erection Drawings .................................................... 108
5.05.3.1.4 Camber Diagram ...................................................... 108
5.05.3.1.5 Transportation Drawings .......................................... 108
5.05.3.2 Inspection ............................................................................... 109
5.05.4 FABRICATION ..................................................................................... 109
Table of Contents 5.05.4.1 Quality of Workmanship ......................................................... 109
5.05.4.2 Identification of Steels ............................................................ 109
5.05.4.3 Plates and Plate Cut Edges ................................................... 110
5.05.4.3.1 Direction of Rolling ................................................... 110
5.05.4.3.2 Edge Planing ............................................................ 111
5.05.4.3.3 Flange Plates ........................................................... 111
5.05.4.3.4 Web Plates ............................................................... 111
5.05.4.3.5 Truss Members......................................................... 111
5.05.4.3.6 Stiffeners and Connection Plates ............................. 111
5.05.4.3.7 Lateral Gusset Plates ............................................... 111
5.05.4.3.8 Splice Plates and Gusset Plates .............................. 111
5.05.4.4 Bent Plates ............................................................................. 111
5.05.4.4.1 Cold Bending ............................................................ 112
5.05.4.4.2 Hot Bending .............................................................. 112
5.05.4.4.3 Fit of Stiffeners ......................................................... 112
5.05.4.4.4 Abutting Joints .......................................................... 112
5.05.4.4.5 Facing of Bearing Surfaces ...................................... 113
5.05.4.4.6 Straightening Material............................................... 113
5.05.4.5 Annealing and Stress Relieving ............................................. 114
5.05.4.6 Bolt Holes ............................................................................... 114
5.05.4.7 Pins and Rollers ..................................................................... 116
5.05.4.7.1 Boring Pin Holes ....................................................... 116
5.05.4.7.2 Threads for Bolts and Pins ....................................... 117
5.05.4.8 Eyebars .................................................................................. 117
5.05.4.9 Assembly-Bolting ................................................................... 117
5.05.5 CONNECTIONS .................................................................................. 117
5.05.5.1 Welded Connections .............................................................. 117
5.05.5.2 Preassembly of Field Connections ......................................... 117
5.05.5.3 Connections Using Unfinished, Turned or Ribbed Bolts ........ 118
5.05.5.4 Connections Using High-Strength Bolts ................................. 119
5.05.5.4.1 Bolted Parts .............................................................. 119
5.05.5.4.2 Surface Conditions ................................................... 119
5.05.5.4.3 Installation ................................................................ 119
5.05.6 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 125
5.05.6.1 Falsework ............................................................................... 125
5.05.6.2 Continuous Members ............................................................. 125
5.05.6.3 Erection .................................................................................. 126
5.05.6.3.1 Handling and Storing Material .................................. 126
5.05.6.3.2 Bearings and Anchorages ........................................ 126
5.05.6.3.3 Erection Procedures ................................................. 126
5.05.6.3.4 Field Assembly ......................................................... 127
5.05.6.3.5 Pin Connections ....................................................... 127
5.05.6.3.6 Misfits ....................................................................... 127
5.05.6.4 Bolted Connections ................................................................ 127
5.05.6.5 Field Fabrication and Welding ................................................. 128
5.05.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................ 129
5.05.7.1 General .................................................................................. 129
5.05.7.2 Inspection of Welds ................................................................ 129
5.05.8 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................... 130
5.05.8.1 Structural Steel....................................................................... 131
Table of Contents 5.05.8.2 Bridge Railing ......................................................................... 131
5.05.9 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 131
5.05.9.1 Structural Steel....................................................................... 131
5.05.9.2 Bridge Railing .............................................................. 131

SECTION 5.06 - PILING............................................................................................. 133

5.06.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 133
5.06.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 133
5.06.2.1 Precast Concrete Piling .......................................................... 133
5.06.2.2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Piling ................................................ 134
5.06.2.3 Steel Piling ............................................................................. 135
5.06.2.4 Splice Materials ...................................................................... 135
5.06.2.5 Bentonite ................................................................................ 135
5.06.2.6 Bentonite Slurry...................................................................... 135
5.06.3 EQUIPMENT........................................................................................ 135
5.06.3.1 General .................................................................................. 135
5.06.3.2 Hammers for Precast Concrete Piles ..................................... 135
5.06.3.3 Hammers for Metal Shell for Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles .... 135
5.06.3.4 Hammers for Steel Piles......................................................... 136
5.06.3.5 Leads ..................................................................................... 136
5.06.3.6 Followers ................................................................................ 136
5.06.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 136
5.06.4.1 Jetting and Drilling.................................................................. 136
5.06.4.2 Driving and Casting ................................................................ 136
5.06.4.2.1 General Requirements ............................................. 136
5.06.4.2.2 Driving Precast Concrete Piles ................................. 137
5.06.4.2.3 Driving Metal Shell for Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles 137
5.06.4.2.4 Driving Steel Piles .................................................... 138
5.06.4.3 Determination of Bearing Values ........................................... 139
5.06.4.3.1 Load Tests................................................................ 139
5.06.4.3.2 Formulas .................................................................. 141
5.06.4.3.3 Diesel Hammers ....................................................... 141
5.06.4.4 Test Piles and Order Lists ...................................................... 141
5.06.4.4.1 Test Piles.................................................................. 141
5.06.4.4.2 Order Lists for Piling ................................................. 142
5.06.4.5 Falsework and Defective Piles ............................................... 142
5.06.4.6 Splicing Piles .......................................................................... 142
5.06.4.6.1 General Requirements ............................................. 142
5.06.4.6.2 Welded Splices ......................................................... 143
5.06.4.6.3 Steel Piles ................................................................ 143
5.06.4.6.4 Precast Concrete Piles ............................................. 143
5.06.4.7 Painting .................................................................................. 143
5.06.4.8 Records and Reports ............................................................. 143
5.06.5 QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ................. 143
5.06.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................... 144
5.06.6.1 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In-Place .................................. 144
5.06.6.2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles in Steel Shells, In-Place .......... 144
5.06.6.3 Precast Piles, Furnished. ....................................................... 144
5.06.6.4 Precast Piles, In-Place ........................................................... 144
5.06.6.5 (Type) Pile Load Tests ........................................................... 144
Table of Contents 5.06.6.6 Pile Splices, (Type). ............................................................... 145
5.06.7 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 145

SECTION 5.07 - LEAN CONCRETE BASE COURSE ............................................... 148

5.07.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 148
5.07.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 148
5.07.2.1 Portland Cement .................................................................... 148
5.07.2.2 Aggregate............................................................................... 148
5.07.2.3 Water...................................................................................... 148
5.07.2.4 Admixtures ............................................................................. 148
5.07.2.5 Curing Compounds ................................................................ 148
5.07.3 EQUIPMENT........................................................................................ 148
5.07.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 148
5.07.4.1 Preparation of Subgrade, Subbase, or Base ......................... 148
5.07.4.2 Forming .................................................................................. 148
5.07.4.3 Proportioning and Mixing Lean Concrete Base Course ......... 149
5.07.4.3.1 Cement, Water, and Aggregate ................................ 149
5.07.4.3.2 Admixtures ............................................................... 155
5.07.4.3.3 Mixing ....................................................................... 150
5.07.4.3.4 Consistency .............................................................. 150
5.07.4.4 Joints ...................................................................................... 150
5.07.4.5 Placing and Finishing ............................................................. 150
5.07.5 CURING............................................................................................... 150
5.07.6 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ................................................................... 151
5.07.7 LEAN CONCRETE BASE COURSE STRENGTH TESTS .................. 151
5.07.7.1 Production Lot ........................................................................ 151
5.07.7.2 Compressive Strength ............................................................ 151
5.07.8 OPENING TO TRAFFIC ...................................................................... 151
5.07.9 LEAN CONCRETE BASE COURSE THICKNESS .............................. 151
5.07.10 MEASUREMENT ................................................................................ 152
5.07.11 PAYMENT........................................................................................... 153
5.07.11.1 Adjustment in Concrete Unit Price ....................................... 153

SECTION 5.08 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT ........................... 155

5.08.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 155
5.08.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 155
5.08.2.1 Portland Cement Concrete ..................................................... 155
5.08.2.2 Portland Cement .................................................................... 155
5.08.2.3 Aggregates ............................................................................. 155
5.08.2.4 Water...................................................................................... 155
5.08.2.5 Admixtures ............................................................................. 155
5.08.2.6 Expansion Joint Filler ............................................................. 155
5.08.2.7 Steel Reinforcement ............................................................... 156
5.08.2.8 Plastic Sheet Bond Breaker ................................................... 156
5.08.2.9 Curing Compound .................................................................. 156
5.08.3 EQUIPMENT........................................................................................ 156
5.08.4 CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 156
5.08.4.1 General .................................................................................. 156
5.08.4.2 Pavement Base ...................................................................... 157
5.08.4.3 Forming .................................................................................. 157
Table of Contents 5.08.4.4 Placing and Finishing ............................................................. 158
5.08.4.4.1 General..................................................................... 158
5.08.4.4.2 Slip-Form Method ..................................................... 159
5.08.4.4.3 Fixed Form Method .................................................. 160
5.08.4.4.4 Fixed Form Manual Methods .................................... 161
5.08.4.4.5 Joint Finishing and Edging ....................................... 161
5.08.4.4.6 Surface Texturing ..................................................... 161
5.08.4.4.7 Curing ....................................................................... 162
5.08.4.5 Joints ...................................................................................... 163
5.08.4.5.1 General..................................................................... 163
5.08.4.5.2 Longitudinal Joints .................................................... 163
5.08.4.5.3 Transverse Expansions Joints .................................. 163
5.08.4.5.4 Joint Construction ..................................................... 164
5.08.4.6 Opening Pavement to Traffic ................................................. 165
5.08.5 PAVEMENT EVALUATION AND REMEDIAL MEASURES................. 165
5.08.5.1 Pavement Surface Texture .................................................... 165
5.08.5.2 Pavement Smoothness .......................................................... 166
5.08.5.3 Pavement Cracks ................................................................... 168
5.08.5.3.1 General..................................................................... 168
5.08.5.3.2 Crack Repair............................................................. 168
5.08.5.3.3 Pavement Removal and Replacement ..................... 169
5.08.5.4 Pavement Thickness. ............................................................. 169
5.08.5.5 Compressive Strength ............................................................ 171
5.08.6 MEASUREMENT ................................................................................. 171
5.08.7 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 171
5.08.7.1 Adjustment in Contract Unit Price for Deficiency in Concrete
Pavement Thickness ............................................................. 172
5.08.7.2 Adjustment in Contract Unit Price for Deficiency in Concrete
Pavement ............................................................................. 172

SECTION 5.09 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT REPAIRS .......... 174

5.09.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 174
5.09.2 SPALL REPAIRS ................................................................................. 174
5.09.2.1 Description ............................................................................. 174
5.09.2.2 Material Requirements ........................................................... 174
5.09.2.2.1 General..................................................................... 174
5.09.2.2.2 Rapid Setting Patching Material ............................... 174
5.09.2.2.3 Epoxy Resin Patching Material ................................. 174
5.09.2.3 Construction Requirements. ................................................... 175
5.09.2.3.1 General..................................................................... 175
5.09.2.3.2 Accelerated Strength Portland Concrete Pavement Patch
................................................................................................... 176
5.09.2.3.3 Rapid Set Patch ....................................................... 176
5.09.2.3.4 Epoxy Resin Patches ............................................... 176
5.09.3 FULL DEPTH SLAB REPAIRS ............................................................ 176
5.09.3.1 Description ............................................................................. 176
5.09.3.2 Material Requirements ........................................................... 176
5.09.3.3 Construction Requirements .................................................... 178
5.09.4 PAVEMENT GRINDING ...................................................................... 178
5.09.4.1 Description ............................................................................. 178
Table of Contents 5.09.4.2 Equipment and Procedures. ................................................. 178
5.09.4.3 Construction Requirements .................................................... 178
5.09.5 PAVEMENT GROOVING .................................................................... 179
5.09.5.1 Description ............................................................................. 179
5.09.5.2 Equipment and Procedures. ................................................... 179
5.09.5.3 Construction Requirements .................................................... 180
5.09.5.4 Tolerances. ............................................................................ 180
5.09.6 JOINT AND CRACK REPAIR .............................................................. 181
5.09.6.1 Description ............................................................................. 181
5.09.6.2 Material Requirements ........................................................... 181
5.09.6.3 Construction Requirements .................................................... 181
5.09.6.3.1 General..................................................................... 181
5.09.6.3.2 Joint and Crack Preparation ..................................... 181
5.09.6.3.3 Dowel Placement...................................................... 182
5.09.6.3.4 Cleaning Prior to Sealing .......................................... 182
5.09.6.3.5 Separating or Blocking Medium ................................ 183
5.09.6.3.6 Installation of Sealer ................................................. 183
5.09.7 EDGE SEALING .................................................................................. 183
5.09.7.1 Description ............................................................................. 183
5.09.7.2 Materials................................................................................. 183
5.09.7.2.1 General..................................................................... 183
5.09.7.2.2 Ground Rubber ......................................................... 183
5.09.7.2.3 Asphalt Cement ........................................................ 185
5.09.8 MEASUREMENT ................................................................................. 186
5.09.8.1 Spall Repair............................................................................ 186
5.09.8.2 Full Depth Slab Repairs ......................................................... 186
5.09.8.3 Pavement Grinding ................................................................ 186
5.09.8.4 Pavement Grooving ............................................................... 186
5.09.8.5 Joint and Crack Repairs ......................................................... 186
5.09.8.6 Edge Sealing .......................................................................... 186
5.09.9 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 186
5.09.9.1 Spall Repairs .......................................................................... 186
5.09.9.2 Depth Slap Repair .................................................................. 186
5.09.9.3 Pavement Grinding ................................................................ 187
5.09.9.4 Pavement Grooving ............................................................... 187
5.09.9.5 Crack Repairs ........................................................................ 187
5.09.9.6 Edge Sealing .......................................................................... 187

SECTION 5.10 - BRIDGE PARAPETS....................................................................... 188

5.10.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 188
5.10.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 188
5.10.2.1 Concrete................................................................................. 188
5.10.2.2 Steel ....................................................................................... 188
5.10.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 188
5.10.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................... 188
5.10.5 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 188
SECTION 5.11 - DRAINAGE ON STRUCTURES ...................................................... 189
5.11.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 189
5.11.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 189
5.11.2.1 Gully and Channel Grates and Frames .................................. 189
Table of Contents 5.11.2.2 Iron and Steel Pipes ............................................................... 189
5.11.2.3 PVC and uPVC Pipes ............................................................ 189
5.11.2.4 Permeable Backing ................................................................ 190
5.11.2.5 Granular Backfill ..................................................................... 190
5.11.2.6 Aluminum Pipes ..................................................................... 190
5.11.2.7 Fiberglass Pipes.................................................................... 190
5.11.2.8 Miscellaneous Materials ......................................................... 190
5.11.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 190
5.11.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................... 191
5.11.4.1 Gully Grates and Frames ....................................................... 191
5.11.4.2 Bridge Deck Drainage Pipes .................................................. 191
5.11.4.3 Permeable Backing. ............................................................... 191
5.11.4.4 Granular Backfill ..................................................................... 191
5.11.4.5 Subsidiary Work ..................................................................... 191
5.11.5 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 191

SECTION 5.12 - WATERPROOFING FOR STRUCTURES....................................... 192

5.12.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 192
5.12.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 192
5.12.2.1 Primer..................................................................................... 192
5.12.2.2 Bonding Agent........................................................................ 192
5.12.2.3 Proprietary Waterproofing Systems ....................................... 192
5.12.2.4 Submittals .............................................................................. 192
5.12.2.5 Membrane Waterproofing Materials ....................................... 193
5.12.2.6 Miscellaneous Materials ......................................................... 193
5.12.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 193
5.12.3.1 Preparation of Surfaces ......................................................... 193
5.12.3.2 Laying Waterproofing Materials.............................................. 194
5.12.3.3 Concrete Surfaces ................................................................. 195
5.12.3.4 Protective Layers to Waterproofing ........................................ 195
5.12.3.5 Painting with Tar or Bitumen .................................................. 195
5.12.3.6 Acceptance of Waterproofing Membranes ............................. 196
5.12.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................... 196
5.12.5 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 196

SECTION 5.13 - PAINTING OF STRUCTURES ........................................................ 197

5.13.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 197
5.13.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 197
5.13.2.1 General .................................................................................. 197
5.13.2.1.1 Condition .................................................................. 197
5.13.2.1.2 Pigments .................................................................. 197
5.13.2.1.3 Thinners ................................................................... 197
5.13.2.1.4 Tinting....................................................................... 198
5.13.2.1.5 Covering Qualities .................................................... 198
5.13.2.1.6 Containers ................................................................ 198
5.13.2.1.7 Delivery .................................................................... 198
5.13.2.1.8 Storage and Handling ............................................... 198
5.13.2.2 Pigments and Pastes ............................................................. 198
5.13.2.3 Paint Oils, Thinners and Dryers ............................................. 200
5.13.2.4 Paint No. 1 - Red Lead Paint ................................................. 200
Table of Contents 5.13.2.4.1 Description ............................................................... 200
5.13.2.4.2 Composition ............................................................. 200
5.13.2.4.3 Weight Per Liter ........................................................ 201
5.13.2.4.4 Coarse Particles ....................................................... 201
5.13.2.4.5 Consistency .............................................................. 201
5.13.2.4.6 Condition in Container .............................................. 201
5.13.2.4.7 Skinning.................................................................... 201
5.13.2.4.8 Dilution Stability ........................................................ 201
5.13.2.4.9 Brushing Properties .................................................. 201
5.13.2.4.10 Spraying Properties ................................................ 201
5.13.2.4.11 Drying Time ............................................................ 201
5.13.2.4.12 Tinting..................................................................... 202
5.13.2.5 Paint No. 2 - Basic Lead Silico-Chromate Primer .................. 202
5.13.2.5.1 Description ............................................................... 202
5.13.2.5.2 Composition ............................................................. 202
5.13.2.5.3 Weight Per Liter ........................................................ 202
5.13.2.5.4 Coarse Particles ....................................................... 202
5.13.2.5.5 Consistency .............................................................. 202
5.13.2.5.6 Flash Point ............................................................... 202
5.13.2.5.7 Condition in Container .............................................. 202
5.13.2.5.8 Skinning.................................................................... 203
5.13.2.5.9 Dilution Stability ........................................................ 203
5.13.2.5.10 Appearance ............................................................ 203
5.13.2.5.11 Brushing Properties ................................................ 203
5.13.2.5.12 Spraying Properties ................................................ 203
5.13.2.5.13 Drying Time ............................................................ 203
5.13.2.6 Paint No. 3 - Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide Primer ............................. 203
5.13.2.6.1 Description ............................................................... 203
5.13.2.6.2 Zinc Oxide Vehicle.................................................... 203
5.13.2.6.3 Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide Mixed Primer .......................... 204
5.13.2.7 Paint No. 4 - Aluminum Paint ................................................. 205
5.13.2.7.1 Description ............................................................... 205
5.13.2.7.2 Proportions ............................................................... 205
5.13.2.7.3 Mixing ....................................................................... 205
5.13.2.8 Paint No. 5 - Tinted Aluminum Paint ...................................... 205
5.13.2.8.1 Description ............................................................... 205
5.13.2.8.2 Proportions ............................................................... 205
5.13.2.9 Paint No. 6 - Basic Lead Silico-Chromate .............................. 206
5.13.2.9.1 Description ............................................................... 206
5.13.2.9.2 Composition ............................................................. 206
5.13.2.9.3 Weight Per Liter ........................................................ 206
5.13.2.9.4 Coarse Particles ....................................................... 206
5.13.2.9.5 Consistency .............................................................. 206
5.13.2.9.6 Condition in Container .............................................. 206
5.13.2.9.7 Skinning.................................................................... 206
5.13.2.9.8 Dilution Stability ........................................................ 207
5.13.2.9.9 Brushing Properties .................................................. 207
5.13.2.9.10 Spraying Properties ................................................ 207
5.13.2.9.11 Drying Time ............................................................ 207
5.13.2.10 Paint No. 7 - Basic Lead Silico-Chromate ............................. 207
Table of Contents 5.13.2.10.1 Description ............................................................. 207
5.13.2.10.2 Composition ........................................................... 207
5.13.2.10.3 Weight Per Liter ...................................................... 207
5.13.2.10.4 Coarse Particles ..................................................... 208
5.13.2.10.5 Consistency ............................................................ 208
5.13.2.10.6 Color ....................................................................... 208
5.13.2.10.7 Condition in Container ............................................ 208
5.13.2.10.8 Skinning.................................................................. 208
5.13.2.10.9 Dilution Stability ...................................................... 208
5.13.2.10.10 Brushing Properties .............................................. 208
5.13.2.10.11 Spraying Properties .............................................. 208
5.13.2.10.12 Drying Time .......................................................... 208
5.13.2.11 Paint No. 8 -Zinc Dust Paint .................................................. 208
5.13.2.11.1 Description ............................................................. 208
5.13.2.11.2 Requirements ......................................................... 208
5.13.2.12 Paint No. 9 - Gloss Enamel ................................................... 209
5.13.2.12.1 Description ............................................................. 209
5.13.2.12.2 Requirements ......................................................... 209
5.13.2.13 Sampling and Testing .......................................................... 209
5.13.2.14 Paint No 10 - Portland Cement Paint ................................... 210
5.13.2.14.1 Description ............................................................. 210
5.13.2.14.2 Composition ........................................................... 210
5.13.2.14.3 Colors ..................................................................... 210
5.13.2.15 Paint No. 11 - Polymer Latex Paint ...................................... 210
5.13.2.15.1 Description ............................................................. 210
5.13.2.15.2 Composition ........................................................... 210
5.13.2.15.3 Colors ..................................................................... 211
5.13.2.16 Paint No. 12 - Polymer Paint ................................................ 211
5.13.2.16.1 Description ............................................................. 211
5.13.2.16.2 Composition ........................................................... 211
5.13.2.16.3 Colors ..................................................................... 211
5.13.2.17 Protective Coating Materials ................................................ 212
5.13.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 212
5.13.3.1 General .................................................................................. 212
5.13.3.2 Application.............................................................................. 215
5.13.3.3 Structural Steel Requirements ............................................... 217
5.13.3.4 Shop Coat (Prime) ................................................................. 218
5.13.3.4.1 Shop Cleaning .......................................................... 218
5.13.3.4.2 Shop Painting ........................................................... 218
5.13.3.5 Field Coat ............................................................................... 219
5.13.3.5.1 Field Cleaning .......................................................... 219
5.13.3.5.2 Field Painting ............................................................ 219
5.13.3.6 Bridge Railing and Guardrail .................................................. 219
5.13.3.6.1 Bridge Railing ........................................................... 219
5.13.3.6.2 Guardrail................................................................... 220
5.13.3.7 Painting Existing Structures ................................................... 220
5.13.3.8 Painting Steel Piling and Steel Pile Shells ............................. 221
5.13.3.9 Painting Steel Pile Enclosures and Tubular Steel Piers ......... 221
5.13.3.10 Protective Coating System Application ................................ 221
5.13.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................... 221
Table of Contents 5.13.5 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 223
SECTION 5.14 - CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK OVERLAYS ...................................... 223
5.14.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 223
5.14.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 223
5.14.2.1 General .................................................................................. 223
5.14.2.2 Fine Aggregate....................................................................... 223
5.14.2.3 Coarse Aggregate .................................................................. 223
5.14.2.4 Epoxy Bonding Agent ............................................................. 224
5.14.2.5 Latex and Polymer Admixture ................................................ 224
5.14.2.6 Epoxy Cement for Sand Slurry ............................................... 224
5.14.2.7 Sand for Epoxy Sand Slurry ................................................... 225
5.14.2.8 Other Materials....................................................................... 225
5.14.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 225
5.14.3.1 General .................................................................................. 225
5.14.3.2 Weather Limitations ............................................................... 225
5.14.3.3 Epoxy Bonding Agent ............................................................. 226
5.14.3.4 Mixing and Placing ................................................................. 226
5.14.3.5 Epoxy-Sand Slurry ................................................................. 227
5.14.3.6 Unacceptable Work ................................................................ 228
5.14.4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LATEX CONCRETE OVERLAYS .. 229
5.14.4.1 Prewetting and Epoxy Bonding Agent .................................... 229
5.14.4.2 Proportioning .......................................................................... 229
5.14.4.3 Placing, Consolidating, and Finishing the Overlay ................. 230
5.14.4.4 Curing..................................................................................... 231
5.14.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
OVERLAYS........................................................................................... 231
5.14.5.1 Epoxy Bonding Agent ............................................................. 231
5.14.5.2 Proportioning .......................................................................... 231
5.14.5.3 Placing and Finishing Equipment ........................................... 232
5.14.5.4 Placing, Consolidating, and Finishing the Overlay ................. 233
5.14.5.5 Curing..................................................................................... 233
5.14.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................... 234
5.14.6.1 Epoxy Bonding Agent ............................................................. 234
5.14.6.2 Concrete Overlay, Latex or Polymer ...................................... 234
5.14.6.3 Concrete Overlay, Portland Cement ...................................... 234
5.14.6.4 Epoxy-Sand Slurry ................................................................. 234
5.14.7 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 234
5.14.7.1 Epoxy Bonding Agent ............................................................. 234
5.14.7.2 Concrete Overlay ................................................................... 234
5.14.7.3 Epoxy-Sand Slurry ................................................................. 235

SECTION 5.15 - STRUCTURE RESTORATION AND REHABILITATION ................. 236

5.15.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 236
5.15.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 237
5.15.2.1 General .................................................................................. 237
5.15.2.2 Fine Aggregate....................................................................... 237
5.15.2.3 Coarse Aggregate .................................................................. 237
5.15.2.4 Replacement Structural Concrete .......................................... 237
5.15.2.5 Replacement Concrete for Partial or Full Depth Patching ...... 237
5.15.2.6 Miscellaneous Structural Steel ............................................... 238
Table of Contents 5.15.2.7 Other Materials....................................................................... 238
5.15.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 228
5.15.3.1 General Requirements ........................................................... 238
5.15.3.1.1 Scheduling................................................................ 238
5.15.3.1.2 Weather Limitations .................................................. 238
5.15.3.1.3 Removal of Epoxy, Bituminous, and Foreign Surface
Overlay ................................................................... 239
5.15.3.1.4 Removal of Structural Concrete Deck Surface,
Restoration of Reinforcement and Surface Preparation239
5.15.3.1.5 Breaking and Removal of Structural Concrete ......... 240
5.15.3.1.6 Field Welding Prohibited........................................... 241
5.15.3.1.7 Drilling and Grouting of Anchors ............................... 241
5.15.3.1.8 Anti-Corrosion Primer for Steel ................................. 241
5.15.3.1.9 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel ............................... 241
5.15.3.1.10 Special Expansion Joints........................................ 241
5.15.3.1.11 Expansion Dam Treatment ..................................... 241
5.15.3.1.12 Epoxy Bonding Agent ............................................. 241
5.15.3.1.13 Deck Drainage Pipes .............................................. 241
5.15.3.1.14 Replacement Structural Concrete Placement ........ 241
5.15.3.1.15 Partial Depth Patching ............................................ 242
5.15.3.1.16 Full Depth Patching ................................................ 242
5.15.3.1.17 Mixing and Placing of Concrete Overlay ................ 243
5.15.3.1.18 Bridge End Transitions ........................................... 243
5.15.3.1.19 Cleaning and Sealing Joints ................................... 243
5.15.3.1.20 Waterproof Membrane............................................ 244
5.15.3.1.21 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Overlay ...... 244
5.15.3.1.22 Material Hauling...................................................... 244
5.15.3.1.23 Maintain and Control Traffic ................................... 244
5.15.3.1.24 Damage to Structures............................................. 244
5.15.3.1.25 Unacceptable Work ................................................ 244
5.15.3.2 Concrete Removal Methods ................................................... 245
5.15.3.2.1 General..................................................................... 245
5.15.3.2.2 Work Plan ................................................................. 245
5.15.3.2.3 Construction Procedures .......................................... 246
5.15.3.2.4 Equipment ................................................................ 246
5.15.4 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 248
5.15.4.1 Drilling and Grouting of Anchors ............................................ 248
5.15.4.1.1 Description ............................................................... 248
5.15.4.1.2 Material..................................................................... 248
5.15.4.1.3 Execution.................................................................. 248
5.15.4.2 Anti-Corrosion Primer ............................................................. 249
5.15.4.2.1 Description ............................................................... 249
5.15.4.2.2 Material..................................................................... 249
5.15.4.2.3 Application ................................................................ 249
5.15.4.3 Sand Blasting ......................................................................... 249
5.15.4.3.1 Description ............................................................... 249
5.15.4.3.2 Material..................................................................... 249
5.15.4.3.3 Application ................................................................ 249
5.15.4.4 Blast Cleaning ........................................................................ 250
5.15.4.4.1 Description ............................................................... 250
Table of Contents 5.15.4.4.2 Material..................................................................... 250
5.15.4.4.3 Application ................................................................ 250
5.15.4.5 Special Expansion Joints ....................................................... 250
5.15.4.5.1 Description ................................................................ 250
5.15.4.5.2 Material..................................................................... 250
5.15.4.5.3 Application ................................................................ 251
5.15.4.6 Epoxy Bonding Agent ............................................................. 251
5.15.4.6.1 Description ............................................................... 251
5.15.4.6.2 Material..................................................................... 251
5.15.4.6.3 Application ................................................................ 251
5.15.5 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................... 251
5.15.5.1 Bridge Rehabilitation Engineer ............................................... 251
5.15.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................... 252
5.15.6.1 Removal of Epoxy, Bituminous and Foreign Overlay ............. 252
5.15.6.2 Removal of Structural Concrete Deck Surface ....................... 252
5.15.6.3 Breaking and Removal of Structural Concrete ....................... 252
5.15.6.4 Drilling and Grouting of Anchors ............................................ 252
5.15.6.5 Joint Sealing........................................................................... 252
5.15.6.6 Miscellaneous Structural Steel ............................................... 252
5.15.6.7 Special Expansion Joint ......................................................... 252
5.15.6.8 Anti-Corrosion Primer ............................................................. 252
5.15.6.9 Replacement Concrete for Partial or Full Depth Patching and
Replacement Structural Concrete ....................................... 253
5.15.6.10 Sand Blasting and Blast Cleaning ........................................ 253
5.15.6.11 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel .......................................... 253
5.15.6.12 Epoxy Bonding Agent ........................................................... 253
5.15.6.13 Concrete Overlay, Latex, Portland Cement or Polymer ....... 253
5.15.6.14 Epoxy-Sand Slurry ............................................................... 253
5.15.6.15 Waterproof Membrane ......................................................... 253
5.15.6.16 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Overlay .................... 253
5.15.7 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 253
5.15.7.1 Removal of Epoxy, Bituminous and Surface Overlay ............. 253
5.15.7.2 Removal of Structural Concrete Deck Surface ....................... 254
5.15.7.3 Breaking and Removal of Structural Concrete ....................... 254
5.15.7.4 Drilling and Grouting of Anchors ............................................ 254
5.15.7.5 Joint Sealing........................................................................... 254
5.15.7.6 Miscellaneous Structural Steel ............................................... 254
5.15.7.7 Special Expansion Joint ......................................................... 254
5.15.7.8 Anti-Corrosion Primer ............................................................. 254
5.15.7.9 Replacement Concrete for Partial or Full Depth Patching and
Replacement Structural Concrete ......................................... 254
5.15.7.10 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel .......................................... 254
5.15.7.11 Epoxy Bonding Agent ........................................................... 255
5.15.7.12 Concrete Overlay, Latex, Portland Cement or Polymer ....... 255
5.15.7.13 Epoxy-Sand Slurry ............................................................... 255
5.15.7.14 Waterproof Membrane ......................................................... 255
5.15.7.15 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Overlay .................... 255

SECTION 5.16 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK REPAIRS...... 256

5.16.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 256
Table of Contents 5.16.2 SPALL REPAIRS ................................................................................. 256
5.16.2.1 Description ............................................................................. 256
5.16.2.2 Material Requirements ........................................................... 256
5.16.2.3 Construction Requirements .................................................... 256
5.16.3 SLAB REPAIRS ................................................................................... 258
5.16.3.1 Description ............................................................................. 258
5.16.3.2 Material Requirements ........................................................... 259
5.16.3.3 Construction Requirements .................................................... 259
5.16.4 BRIDGE DECK GRINDING ................................................................. 260
5.16.4.1 Description ............................................................................. 260
5.16.4.2 Equipment and Procedures .................................................... 260
5.16.4.3 Construction Requirements .................................................... 260
5.16.5 BRIDGE DECK JOINT AND CRACK REPAIR. ................................... 261
5.16.5.1 Description ............................................................................. 261
5.16.5.2 Material Requirements ........................................................... 261
5.16.5.3 Construction Requirements .................................................... 262
5.16.5.3.1 General..................................................................... 262
5.16.5.3.2 Joint and Crack Preparation ..................................... 262
5.16.5.3.3 Cleaning Prior to Sealing ......................................... 262
5.16.5.3.4 Separating or Blocking Medium (Backer Rod).......... 262
5.16.5.3.5 Installation of Sealer ................................................. 263
5.16.6 MEASUREMENT ................................................................................. 263
5.16.6.1 Spall Repair Concrete ............................................................ 263
5.16.6.2 Slab Repair Concrete ............................................................. 263
5.16.6.3 Bridge Deck Grinding ............................................................. 263
5.16.6.4 Concrete Bridge Deck Joint and Crack Repair ....................... 263
5.16.7 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 264
5.16.7.1 Spall Repair Concrete ............................................................. 264
5.16.7.2 Depth Slab Repair ................................................................... 264
5.16.7.3 Bridge Deck Grinding .............................................................. 264
5.16.7.4 Concrete Bridge Deck Joint and Crack Repair ........................ 264

SECTION 5.17 - EXTENSION AND WIDENING OF STRUCTURES......................... 265

5.17.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 265
5.17.2 MATERIALS......................................................................................... 265
5.17.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 265
5.17.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ...................................................................... 266
5.17.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT........................................................... 266
5.17.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 266
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents PART FIVE: CONCRETE, STEEL AND STRUCTURES

SECTION 5.01 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

5.01.1 DESCRIPTION. Portland Cement concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland

cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water, proportioned and mixed,
transported, placed, consolidated and finished as specified in these General Specifications
and the Special Specifications. Admixtures, when used, in Portland cement concrete shall
be as specified in these General Specifications and the Special Specifications.

Concrete for each portion of the work shall be of the Class, minimum cement
content in kilograms per cubic meter, twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength or minor
concrete, all as shown on the plans, specified in these General Specifications or the
Special Specifications. When directed, concrete work shall conform to the provisions of
the "GUIDE FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION IN THE GULF REGION", Special
Publication No 31, published by the Construction Industry Research and Information
Association (CIRIA).

TABLE 5.01-1 CONCRETE CLASS DESIGNATIONS

Minimum Minimum Alternate

Cement Compressive Designated Coarse
Specified Content Strength at 28 Coarse Aggregate
Class (Kg. Per Cu. M) Days Aggregate Size Size
A 335 210 Kg./sq. cm. A-50 mm(2 in.) B
B 310 170 Kg./sq. cm B-62.5(2½ in.) A
C 375 250 Kg./sq. cm. C-25 mm(1 in.) D
D 375 250 Kg./sq. cm. D-19 mm(¾ in.)
E 375 280 Kg./sq. cm. D-19 mm(¾ in.)
K 390 315 Kg./sq. cm. D-19 mm(¾ in.)
S 410 350 Kg./sq. cm. D-19 mm(¾ in.)

Concrete for minor structures, when designated on the plans as minor concrete, shall
conform to the requirements of Subsection 5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor Structures" in these
General Specifications.

No-Fines and Cyclopean Concrete when designated on the Plans or permitted by the
General or Special Specifications shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 5.01.7,
"No-Fines and Cyclopean Concrete" in these General Specifications.

The cement content in kilograms per cubic meter for concrete in structures or portions
of structures, unless otherwise specified in these General Specifications or the Special
Specifications, shall conform to the following:

1.Bridges and roof section of exposed top of R.C. box culverts - 375 Minimum, 450
Maximum.

1
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

2.Other portions of R.C box culverts - 335 Minimum, 450 Maximum.

3.Prestressed Members 375 Minimum.

4.Sealing Concrete 310 Minimum.

5.Minor Structures 310 Minimum.

The exact cement content for concrete in structures shall be within the range stated and
determined from mix design testing and the compressive strength shown on the plans or
specified in the special specifications.

The Contractor shall perform all required mix design testing.

5.01.2 MATERIALS.

5.01.2.1 Portland Cement. Cement shall be either Types I, II M, III or V conforming

to the requirements specified in ASTM C150 or Type IP(MS) conforming to AASHTO
M240. Only one type and brand of cement shall be used in any individual structural
member. Mixing of types or brands shall not be permitted.

Cement shall originate from manufacturers approved by the Engineer and shall be
accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance and/or a laboratory test certificate furnished
by the manufacturer. Portland cement shall be tested as stated in MRDTM 504 and shall
have a compressive strength of standard cement mortar samples in accordance with
ASTM C-150 or AASHTO M-240. The Engineer reserves the right to order a retest of the
cement at any time.

Approval of cement quality shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility to
fabricate concrete of the specified strength. The Contractor shall bear all costs in
connection with the Certificates of Compliance and laboratory tests. When factory tests
or field tests, completed subsequent to the original approval tests, show that the cement
does not comply with the specifications, the entire lot from which the sample was taken
will be rejected and the Contractor shall immediately remove the rejected material from the
site and replace it with cement which meets the required specifications.

Storage capacity shall be sufficient to meet the concrete production requirements for
thirty (30) working days unless in the opinion of the Engineer, the supply from the
manufacturer is so limited that more storage capacity is necessary. Cement shall be
stored in moistureproof storage sheds. Sacked cement shall be piled to permit access for
tally, inspection and identification. Neither stale, caked, nor reclaimed or resacked cement
shall be used. The Contractor shall not store cement in areas subject to flooding.

Cement remaining in bulk storage at the mill, prior to shipment, for more than six (6)
months or cement stored in bags in local storage by the Contractor or a vendor for more
than three (3) months after shipment from the mill, may be retested before use and will be
rejected if it fails to meet any of the requirements of these specifications.

2
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.01.2.2 Aggregate. Aggregate shall be free from clay coating, clay balls and other
extraneous materials. Aggregate shall be of such character that it is possible to produce
workable concrete meeting all specified requirements. It shall not contain materials which
may adversely attack the reinforcement or materials in such a form or quantity to reduce
the strength and durability of the concrete. If aggregate is found to be deleterious or
potentially deleterious, as the terms are used in ASTM C 289, the Contractor may offer to
furnish a mineral admixture in an attempt to utilize the aggregate source, and the
performance of the selected mineral admixture shall be tested following the ASTM C441
prior to the final approval of the Engineer.

5.01.2.2.1 Fine Aggregate. Fine concrete aggregate shall conform to AASHTO M

6 and shall consist of natural, manufactured, or combinations of sand. Fine aggregate
shall be thoroughly and uniformly washed unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

Fine concrete aggregate shall meet the following requirements. Deleterious

substances such as, but not limit to, pyrites, coal, or micas shall not exceed two percent
(2%) by weight.

Fineness Modulus, AASHTO M 6 2.3 to 3.1

Sodium Sulfate Soundness,

MRDTM 311, 5 cycles, Percent Loss 10 Maximum

Clay lumps and Friable Particles 1 Maximum

MRDTM 312, Percent

Test for Organic Impurities, MRDTM 315 Lighter than standard

Sand Equivalent, MRDTM 313 75 Minimum

Potential Cement-Aggregate Reactivity, Innocuous

ASTM C 289, as supplemented by ASTM C 227

Fine aggregate shall meet the following requirements when tested by MRDTM 204:

TABLE 5.01-2 CONCRETE FINE AGGREGATE GRADATIONS

Percent Passing
Sieve Size by Weight

9.5 mm (3/8 inch) 100

4.75 mm (No. 4) 95-100
1.18 mm (No. 16) 45-80
0.300 mm (No. 50) 10-30
0.150 mm (No. 100) 2-10
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-4

3
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents If the fineness modulus varies by more than two-tenths (0.2) from the value assumed
in the concrete mix design, the use of such fine aggregate shall be discontinued until
suitable adjustments can be made in the mix proportions to compensate for the difference
in gradation.

In addition to the above and when directed by the Engineer, fine aggregate shall be
tested in accordance with MRDTM 303 for determination of Total Moisture Content and
MRDTM 306 for Surface Moisture.

5.01.2.2.2 Coarse Aggregate. Coarse concrete aggregate shall conform to AASHTO

M 80 and shall consist of gravel, crushed gravel or crushed stone. Coarse aggregate shall
not contain materials such as iron pyrites, coal, mica, laminated materials, or other
materials which may adversely affect the strength and durability of the concrete.

Coarse concrete aggregate shall meet the following requirements:

Sodium Sulfate soundness,

MRDTM 311, 5 cycles, Percent Loss 12 Maximum

Clay Lumps and Friable Particles 1 Maximum

AASHTO T 12, Percent

Soft Fragments and Shale, AASHTO M 80, Percent 5 Maximum

Flakiness Index MRDTM 423, Percent 15

Potential Cement Aggregate Reactivity,

ASTM C 289, as supplemented by ASTM 227 Innocuous

Coarse concrete aggregate shall meet the following gradation requirements when tested
in accordance with MRDTM 204 and shall be uniformly graded within the following limits:

4
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

TABLE 5.01-3 CONCRETE COARSE AGGREGATE GRADATIONS

Percent Passing

Size A Size B Size C Size D

Sieve Size Aggregate Aggregate Aggregate Aggregate
50 mm 62.5 mm 25 mm 19 mm

62.5 mm (21/2 inch) --- 100 --- ---

50 mm (2 inch) 100 95-100 --- ---
37.5 mm (11/2 inch) 95-100 --- --- ---
25 mm (1 inch) --- 35-70 100 ---
19 mm (3/4 inch) 35-70 --- 95-100 100
12.5 mm (½ inch) --- 10-30 --- 90-100
9.5 mm (3/8 inch) 10-30 --- 20-55 40-70
4.75 mm (No. 4) 0- 5 0-5 0-10 0-15
2.36 mm (No. 8) --- --- 0-5 0-5
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1

In addition to the above an when directed by the Engineer, coarse aggregate shall be
tested in accordance with MRDTM 303 for determination of Total Moisture Content,
MRDTM 304 for Specific Gravity and Absorption and MRDTM 308 for Unit Mass and Voids
in Aggregates.

5.01.2.2.3 Combined Aggregate. Approved coarse aggregate and fine concrete

aggregate in each batch of concrete shall be combined in proportions as approved by the
Engineer.

The combined concrete aggregate gradation used in the Work shall be as specified,
except that when approved by the Engineer, a Size C coarse aggregate shall be used for
curbs, handrails, parapets, posts and other similar sections or members with reinforcement
spacing too close to permit proper placement and consolidation of the concrete. Changes
from one gradation to another shall not be made during the progress of the work unless
approved by the Engineer; and shall meet the following requirements for the combined
aggregates:

Material passing the 200 sieve by weight 3% Maximum

Water-soluble Chlorides, MRDTM 319 0.04% Maximum

Water-soluble Sulfates, MRDTM 318:

Pre-stressed concrete 0.5% Maximum

Reinforced concrete 1.0% Maximum
Non-reinforced concrete 2.0%
The water soluble chlorides and sulfates limits specified for the fine and coarse
aggregate individually, are subject to the following overriding requirement:

5
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of ContentsThe total water-soluble chloride content (AASHTO T260) in any mix from all sources,
including any chloride present in other materials and the mixing water, shall not exceed
the following limits as a percentage of the weight of cement in the mix.

Reinforced concrete in humid environment and exposed to chloride 0.10%

Reinforced concrete in humid environment but not exposed to chloride 0.15%
Prestressed concrete 0.06%

In case of any likeliness of alkali reactivity the following further tests shall be
conducted, as soon as practicable after the Contract is awarded to the Contractor.

(1) Potential Reactivity Tests.

- Gel Pat Test (National Building Studies, Research Paper No. 14).
- ASTM Test C 289 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica
Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method).
- ASTM Test C 227 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica
Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar Bar Method).

(2) Shrinkage.

The properties of the aggregates shall be such that the Drying Shrinkage
of concrete prepared and tested in accordance with the United Kingdom Building
Research Station Digest No. 35 (Second Series) shall not exceed forty five thousandths
percent (0.045%).

The initial Drying Shrinkage of all the proposed concrete mixes prepared
and tested in accordance with BS 1881 shall not exceed six hundredths percent (0.06%).

(3) Reactivity.

Aggregates for use in concrete or mortar that will be subject to wetting,

extended exposure to humid atmosphere, or contact with moist ground, shall not contain
any materials that are deleteriously reactive with the alkalis in the cement, or any which
may be additionally present in the aggregates and mixing water or water incontact with the
concrete or mortar, in amounts sufficient to cause excessive localized or general
expansion of concrete or mortar.

Under no circumstances shall the Contractor use Dacite Andesite,

hyolites, Opal Cherts, or Tuffs.

Coarse and fine aggregates shall be tested for reactivity potential in

accordance with the methods listed above and shall satisfy the various criteria given for
innocuous aggregates in the foregoing standards.
It shall be noted that the above involve a testing period of eight (8) to twenty one (21)
weeks.
(4) Petrographic examination and description, including approximate
composition, ASTM C295.

6
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

The above additional tests may be waived only with the written approval of the Materials
and Research Department of the Ministry, where evidence can be produced that
satisfactory test results are already available for materials originating from the same
sources with those to be used.

5.01.2.3 Water. All sources of water for use with cement shall be approved by the
Engineer. If at any time during construction the water from an approved source becomes
unsatisfactory, the Contractor will be required to provide satisfactory water from some
other source.

Water shall be free from injurious quantities of oil, alkali, vegetable matter and salt. The
water shall be reasonably clear and shall contain not more than twenty-five hundredths
percent (0.25%) total solids and organic matter when tested in accordance with MRDTM
514.

If the specific conductance is less than fifteen hundred (1500) microhms per centimeter,
the total solids content requirement may be waived. Water for washing aggregates,
mixing, and curing shall contain no chlorides as Cl, nor sulfates as exceeding the values
for the type of work as follows:
Type of Work Chlorides Sulfates
(Parts per million)

Nonreinforced concrete 2000 1500

Conventionally reinforced 500 1000

Prestressed concrete 500 10000

Mortar prepared with water submitted by the Contractor for test shall show no marked
change in time of set, no indication of unsoundness and a reduction of not more than ten
(10) percent in mortar strength when compared with mortar made with water of known
satisfactory quality.

5.01.2.4 Admixtures. Admixtures to be used in concrete shall conform to the

requirements specified in these specifications, the special specifications and as approved
by the Engineer. The Contractor may offer to furnish admixtures at his own expense when
admixtures are not specified. The Engineer shall consider the offer and approve or
disapprove the use.

Chemical and air entraining admixtures containing chlorides as determined by ASTM

Designation C 1152 shall not be used in reinforced or prestressed concrete.

Calcium chloride shall not be used in concrete containing any embedded metals,
including reinforcing steel, unless otherwise specified.

If more than one admixture is to be used, such admixtures shall be compatible in

combination as used in the concrete.

7
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Admixtures shall conform to the following test requirements:

Chemical Admixtures AASHTO M194
Air Entraining Admixtures AASHTO M154
Calcium Chloride AASHTO M144
Mineral Admixtures ASTM Designation C618

Loss on ignition shall not exceed four percent (4%).

All admixtures to be used in the work shall be accompanied by a Certificate of

Compliance signed by a responsible representative of the manufacturer.

The contractor will be permitted to use admixtures conforming to the requirements in

AASHTO M194 for Type A - Water reducing, Type B - Set-retarding, or Type D - Water
reducing and retarding Type F - water-reducing, high range and Type G - Water-reducing,
high range and retarding to facilitate the work, subject to the following:

When concrete is designated by compressive strength, no reduction in the minimum

required cement will be allowed.

When the required use of air entraining admixture is specified or ordered by the
Engineer, the air entraining agent shall be used in amounts required to produce a concrete
having the specified air content as determined by MRDTM 519 or MRDTM 521.

Optional use of air entraining admixture will be permitted in the amounts which will result
in concrete with an air content not exceeding four percent (4%). The contractor shall
include the air entraining admixture and air content as specified in these General
Specifications.

When the use of mineral admixtures is specified or their use is approved by the
Engineer, the minimum amount of admixture and amount and type of Portland cement will
be specified or ordered. If the minimum amounts are not specified, the concrete shall be
proportioned to conform to the following criteria based on a series of trial mixes:

1. Concrete shall contain the specified cement content using Type IP(MS) conforming
to Subsection 5.01.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications.

2. The concrete shall contain the specified cement content consisting of not less than
eighty-five percent (85%) Type II M in addition to not less than fifteen percent (15%) by
weight of approved mineral admixture conforming to the requirements of ASTM C618,
except Type C mineral admixture will not be permitted in conjunction with alkali-silica
reactive aggregate, as determined in Paragraph 5.01.2.2 "Aggregate" in these General
Specifications.

3. High range admixtures shall comply with the special procedures contained in
Subparagraph 5.01.3.1.2, "High Range Water-Reducing Admixtures" in these General
Specifications.

8
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.01.2.5 Reinforcement. Reinforcing Bars and Welded Steel Wire Fabric. Reinforcing
Table of Contents

bars and welded steel wire fabric shall conform to the requirements of Section 5.02,
"Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

5.01.2.6 Grout. Materials for cement grout in precast concrete Work, where indicated
on the plans or approved by the Engineer, shall consist of Portland cement Type V, ASTM
C150, and fine aggregate with special gradation requirement to ASTM C144.

Shrinkage-resistance grout, where indicated on the plans or approved by the Engineer,

shall be of the premixed and packaged ferrous aggregate type.

Where non-metallic shrinkage-resistant grout is indicated on the plans or approved for

use by the Engineer, it shall be a premixed, non-corrosive, non-staining product,
containing selected silica sands; Portland cement; shrinkage compensating agents;
plasticizing; and water-reducing agents, complying with the US Corps of Engineers CRD-
C558, type A.

5.01.3 MIX DESIGN. The Contractor shall perform all necessary mix design testing and
furnish the results in a written report not less than thirty-five (35) days prior to beginning
concrete production. All mix design testing shall be performed in accordance with MRDTM
515 and M.O.C. Circular 855/409 dated 28/11/1409H except that sufficient cylinders will
be cast to permit compressive strength determination at one (1), three (3), seven (7) and
twenty eight (28) days when any admixtures is used. The report furnished by the
Contractor shall contain all test results for materials proposed for use and trial mixes and
specific recommendations for the following:

1. The weight ratio of coarse and fine aggregates per cubic meter.

2. The cement content in kilograms per cubic meter of concrete.

3. The maximum allowable water content in liters per kilogram of cement, or equivalent
units including surface moisture, but excluding water absorbed by the aggregates.

4. Slump or slumps designated at the point of delivery.

5. Description of all changes from mix proportions previously approved.

6. Initial and final setting time for concrete AASHTO T197.

7. Drying shrinkage for the recommended concrete mix according to BS 1881.

8. The dosage of the proposed admixture in either liter or kilogram per cubic meter.

5.01.3.1 Design Limits. The specified cement content shall be determined from a
yield test completed in accordance with MRDTM 518.

9
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.01.3.1.1 Consistency of Concrete. The consistency of concrete shall be

determined as specified in MRDTM 516 and MRDTM 517 at the time of delivery.

TABLE 5.01-4 CONCRETE SLUMP REQUIREMENTS (CONSISTENCY)

Type of Work Slump (mm)1,2

Concrete Pavement 25 - 50

Non-Reinforced Concrete Facilities 25 - 100

Reinforced Concrete Structures:

Sections over 30 cm thick 25 - 75
Sections 30 cm thick or less 25 - 100
Concrete placed under water 50 - 150

Cast-in-place concrete piles:

40 cm diameter or less 75 - 150
43 cm to 60 cm diameter 50 - 125
over 60 cm diameter 25 - 100
1
Determined in accordance with MRDTM 516 and 517.
2
Maximum slump is two hundred (200) mm if the approved mix design contains a high
range water reducer.

5.01.3.1.2 Water. The quantity of water in concrete mixes shall be regulated so that
the consistency of the concrete, as determined by MRDTM 517, is within the nominal
slump range listed in the above Table 5.01-4 Concrete Slump Requirements
(Consistency). When the slump of the concrete exceeds these limits, the water content
for subsequent batches shall be adjusted to reduce the slump to the specified range.
Batches of concrete with a slump exceeding the maximum slump shall not be used in the
work and shall be disposed of at locations approved by the Engineer.

The amount of free water used in a structural concrete shall not exceed the free-water
to cement ratio of forty-five hundredths (0.45) by weight. The term free water is defined
as the total water in the mixture minus the water absorbed by the aggregates in reaching
a surface dry condition.

Concrete members whose thickness exceeds seventy-five (75) centimeters will be

considered as massive concrete members; recommendations and provisions of ACI 301
Chapter 14 - Massive Concrete, shall be applicable. Water-cement ratio in massive
concrete shall be reduced to thirty-five hundredths up to forty hundredths (0.35-0.40), by
weight.

Concrete in contact with aggregate road materials and/or soil containing water-soluble
salts of chlorides or sulfates exceeding two-tenths percent (0.2%) or in waters containing
an excess of one thousand (1000) parts per million (ppm) of either chlorides or sulfates,

10
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

as determined by MRDTM 318 or MRDTM 319, shall use Type V cement conforming to
Table of Contents

Paragraph 5.01.2.1, "Portland Cement," in these General Specifications and the free-water
weight to cement weight ratio shall not exceed forty hundredths (0.40). Concrete in
contact with soils containing water-soluble salts of chlorides or sulfates exceeding five-
tenths percent (0.5%) or in waters containing an excess of three thousand (3000) parts per
million (ppm) shall be constructed in accordance with special treatments detailed in the
Special Specifications.

5.01.3.1.3 High-range Water-reducing Admixture (Super Water Reducer). When

the mix design includes a high-range water reducing admixture meeting the requirements
of AASHTO M 194 - Type F or Type G, the following procedures shall be followed:

1. The total (initial plus all subsequent) dosage of high-range water reducer shall not
exceed the manufacturer's recommended percent of the weight of cement on a solids
basis. Solids are determined by AASHTO M 194, Section 18.2, Residue by Oven Drying.
Any change in source or type of material in the job-mix may require a new determination
of total dosage.

2. The mix shall be designed to maintain the slump specified in Table 5.01-4 Concrete
Slump Requirements (Consistency) during discharge and placement.

3. The Contractor shall verify mix proportions and admixture dosages with trial mixes
prior to the start of production. Trial mixes shall be produced at the approximate mix
temperature, air temperature and time lapse conditions expected during production. Trial
mix twenty-eight (28) day cylinder strengths shall be available prior to the start of
production.

4. The following properties shall be determined by field batch trial mix procedures
each time a new material, batching, or mixing procedure is introduced:

(1) Water Cement (W/C) ratio and dosage of high-range water reducing admixture
necessary to achieve desired slump at expected temperatures at the project site.

(2) Time-of-Set of Concrete (AASHTO T 197).

(3) Compressive Strength of Concrete (MRDTM 528) at 1, 3, 7 and 28 days.

(4) Expected slump loss during placement of concrete under project conditions.

5. If continuous on-site batching is used, equipment shall be totally calibrated in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions using the design mix in the presence of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments in admixture dosages during production
to maintain the slump specified in Table 5.01-4 Concrete Slump Requirements
(Consistency) during discharge and placement.

11
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

6. If delivery truck mixing is used, the following batch test procedures shall be
instituted:

Test Procedures

(1) Trial Batch Size - Minimum two (2) cubic meters.

(2) The number of cylinders shall be adjusted to permit testing of three (3)
cylinders at one time.

(3) Measurements and cylinders to be taken on-site for each trial batch.

1) Initial, upon arrival on-site, and before dosing: slump, temperature, and
cylinders twelve (12) for testing at one (1), three (3), seven (7) and twenty-eight (28) days;
nine (9) under controlled conditions, and three (3) under field conditions. The three
cylinders subjected to field conditions shall be tested after seven (7) days or as directed
by the Engineer.

(4) Immediately after dosing and mixing: slump, temperature, and cylinders twelve
(12) for testing at one (1), three (3), seven (7) and twenty-eight (28) days; nine (9) under
controlled conditions, and three (3) under field conditions. The three (3) cylinders
subjected to field conditions shall be tested after seven (7) days or as directed by the
Engineer.

(5) Fifteen (15 min.), thirty (30 min.), forty-five (45 min.), sixty (60 min.), seventy-
five (75 min.), and ninety (90 min). after dosing and mixing; slump, temperature with
cylinders twelve (12) at thirty (30), sixty (60), and ninety (90 min.) sampling points for
testing at one (1), three (3), seven (7) and twenty-eight (28) days; nine (9) under controlled
conditions, and (3) under field conditions. The three (3) cylinders subjected to field
conditions shall be tested after seven (7) days or as directed by the Engineer.

5.01.3.1.4 Mortar. Mortar for laying stone for patching for ties, rock pockets and
small voids, for grouted stone riprap, grouted stone wash checks or grouted stone ditch
lining shall be composed of one (1) part of Portland cement and three (3) parts of fine
aggregate by volume with water added to make a workable mix of such consistency as
to perform properly the functions required for the Work being done. Amount of water
added shall be approved by the Engineer.

1. Aggregates for masonry mortar shall conform to AASHTO M 45.

2. Portland Cement shall conform to Paragraph 5.01.2.1, "Portland Cement" in these

General Specifications.

5.01.3.2 Changes in Proportion. As the Work progresses, the Engineer reserves the
right to require the Contractor to change the proportions from time to time if conditions
warrant such changes to produce satisfactory results. Any such changes may be made
within the limits of the specifications at no additional compensation to the contractor.

12
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.01.3.3 Testing of Trial Mixes. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with access
at all times to laboratory facilities and personnel during the preparation of trial mixes. The
trial mixes prepared by the Contractor shall produce dense concrete mixtures containing
the minimum cement content and having the specified consistency and minimum
compressive strength for each Class of concrete listed in the Bill of Quantities. The
compressive strength reported shall be the average cylinder strength of either three (3) or
two (2) individual cylinder test results in accordance with the procedures contained in ACI
214-77.

Concrete mixes shall also be tested in accordance with MRDTM 519 for Air Content.
When designing the concrete mixes, the Contractor shall take into account the following
guidelines:

The maximum aggregate size in all classes of concrete included in the Specifications,
except blinding concrete, shall be not larger than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension
between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs nor two-thirds of the minimum clear
spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars.

After the Contractor completes the necessary mix design testing and obtains approval
of the job-mix proportions for each class of concrete by the Engineer, he shall sample all
materials used in the design of the concrete mixtures along with a copy of the approved
job-mix reports and submit them to the Materials Department of the Ministry for review.
All material samples shall be certified by the Engineer as being representative of those
used in the testing procedure and shall be in sufficient quantities for the conduct of all
specified physical and chemical tests as well as for preparation of the required test
specimens for strength evaluation purposes.

When the materials proposed for use by the Contractor are of such a nature or are so
graded that proportions based on minimum cement content cannot be used without
exceeding the maximum allowable water content, the proportions shall be adjusted to
produce concrete with the required consistency and workability without exceeding such
allowable water content. No increase in payment shall be allowed when such changes
cause an increase in cement content.

Six (6) test cylinders shall be prepared for each trial mix and each class of concrete to
be furnished. The Contractor shall provide facilities for the proper curing of the test
cylinders. The Contractor, after giving notice to the Engineer and providing an opportunity
for the Engineer to be present, shall break three (3) cylinders after seven (7) days curing
and the remaining three (3) cylinders after twenty-eight (28) days curing.

After receipt of the Contractor's mix design report, the Engineer shall review the
information. When the trial mix information, for any class of concrete, fails to meet the
specifications, the Engineer will direct the Contractor to prepare additional trial mixes.
When the Engineer has determined that the Contractor's recommended concrete materials
and mix proportions conform to the specifications he shall allow production of concrete to
begin. No class of concrete shall by produced or placed until the Engineer has reviewed
trial mix information and allowed production to begin.

13
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

The approval of mix proportions by the Engineer, to the Contractor in establishing those
proportions, shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for producing concrete
which conforms to the specifications.

All costs connected with furnishing laboratory facilities and personnel, testing all
materials, preparing every required trial mix, reporting the information to the Engineer and
all other tasks associated with preparing design mixes for all specified classes of concrete
shall be borne by the Contractor.

5.01.4 EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall conform to the requirements specified in the

following Part Five Sections pertaining to the various items of work specified in the Bill of
Quantities. Equipment for mixing, transporting and handling concrete shall be as specified
in Section 5.03, “Conc rete Structures,” in these General Specifications and as approved
by the Engineer.

5.01.5 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING DURING CONSTRUCTION. The concrete may

be produced using a batching plant or central mixing plant with truck agitators or using in-
truck mixers conforming to AASHTO M157. It may also be produced using continuous
volumetric mixing equipment conforming to AASHTO M241. Mixers shall be of a type and
capacity approved by the Engineer. Materials which are combined to produce concrete
shall be measured by weight, except water which may be measured by weight or volume.
Weights or volumes shall be in accordance with the accepted design mix.

Cement weight shall be accurate to five-tenths (0.5) percent. Coarse and fine aggregate
weight shall each be accurate to five-tenths (0.5) percent. Water, whether weighed or
measured volumetrically, shall be accurate to one and five-tenths (1.5) percent.

During batching in windy conditions, it is to the discretion of the Engineer to discontinue

the batching process or instruct the Contractor to add additional cement at no cost.

5.01.5.1 Handling of Materials. All materials required to produce the specified class
of concrete shall be assembled at the batching site in sufficient quantities to complete any
continuous pour necessary for structures. The batching site shall be of adequate size to
allow for storage of all required materials.

Coarse and fine aggregate shall be stored separately in stockpiles prepared in

accordance with Subsection 3.01.5, "Stockpiling Aggregates," in these General
Specifications. The Contractor shall prevent segregation of aggregate. Aggregate which
has become segregated shall not be used until they have been thoroughly remixed and
the resultant pile is of uniform gradation at any point from which a representative sample
is taken. The moisture content of the fine aggregate shall be uniform throughout the
stockpile and not exceed eight percent (8%) at the time of mixing. The Contractor shall
remix aggregate piles when ordered by the Engineer.

The use of equipment or methods of handling aggregates which results in the

degradation of the aggregates is strictly prohibited. Bulldozers with metal tracks shall not
be used on coarse aggregate stockpiles. All equipment used for handling aggregates

14
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

shall be approved by the Engineer.

Table of Contents

Aggregates shall not be stock piled against the supports of proportioning hoppers and
weighing devices.

When aggregates are transported from a central proportioning plant to the mixer in batch
boxes or dump trucks, such equipment shall be of sufficient capacity to carry the full
volume of materials for each batch of concrete. Transport vehicles having partitions
between separate batches shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be constructed to
prevent batched material spilling from one compartment to another while in transit or while
being dumped.

Batches, where cement has been in contact with aggregate for more than one (1) hour
and remain unmixed, may be rejected by the Engineer. Unmixed batches, which are
rejected, shall be disposed of at locations approved by the Engineer.

Aggregates shall enter the mixer in a manner approved by the Engineer and in such a
manner to insure that no matter foreign to the concrete or matter capable of changing the
desired proportions is included.

Cement, water and admixtures when used shall be stored in a manner that allows
effective introduction into the batch.

5.01.5.2 Mixing Concrete. Concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for

immediate use. Concrete without retarder shall not be used when it is not in place within
sixty (60) minutes after the water has been added or it has developed initial set.
Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means will not be permitted. Concrete
that is not within the specified slump limits at the time of placement shall not be used and
shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer.

When mixed at the work site or in a central mix plant, the mixing time shall not be less
than fifty (50) seconds nor more than ninety (90) seconds. Four (4) seconds shall be
added to the specified mixing time when timing starts the instant the skip reaches its
maximum raised position. Mixing time ends when the discharge chute opens. Transfer
time in multiple drum mixers is included in mixing time. The contents of an individual mixer
drum shall be removed before a succeeding batch is introduced into the mixer drum.

The mixer shall be operated at a drum speed as shown on the manufacturer's

nameplate on the approved mixer. Any concrete which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is
mixed more or less than the specified time shall be discarded by the Contractor at his
expense and disposed of at locations approved by the Engineer. The volume of concrete
mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixer's nominal capacity in cubic meters, as shown
on the manufacturer's standard rating plate on the mixer, except that an overload up to ten
percent (10%) above the mixer's nominal capacity may be permitted when approved by
the Engineer. Approval of the Engineer shall not be given unless test data for consistency
and strength are satisfactory and provided no spillage of concrete from the mixer takes
place.

15
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

The batch shall be so charged into the drum that a portion of the mixing water shall enter
Table of Contents

in advance of the cement and aggregate. The flow of water shall be uniform and all water
shall be in the drum by the end of the first fifteen (15) seconds of the mixing period. The
throat of the drum shall be kept free of such accumulations as may restrict the free flow
of materials onto the drum.

5.01.5.3 Hauling. Concrete from central mixing plants shall be transported in truck
mixers, truck agitators or nonagitating trucks having special bodies, or other approved
containers.

The Contractor, when supplying concrete from a central plant, shall furnish a plant with
a rate of production and operate sufficient hauling equipment to provide continuous and
uniform delivery at the rate required to complete the pour during the work shift. The rate
of delivery of concrete shall be such as to provide uniform and continuous handling,
placing, consolidating and finishing of the concrete. The method of delivery and handling
of the concrete shall be such as will facilitate placing with a minimum of rehandling and
without damage to the structure or the concrete. Methods of delivery and handling for
each site shall be approved by the Engineer. The Engineer may delay or suspend the
mixing and placing of concrete at any site when the contractor does not provide sufficient
mixing and delivery capacity.

Concrete delivered in truck agitators (transit mix trucks) shall conform to all of the
requirements specified for ready-mixed concrete in AASHTO M157. Transit mix trucks
with any section of the blades worn twenty-five (25) millimeters or more below the original
manufactured height or with accumulated hard concrete or mortar in the mixing drum shall
not be used.

5.01.6 WEATHER CONDITIONS & CURING REQUIREMENTS. Concrete shall not be

mixed or placed during rain, dust or sand storms.

5.01.6.1 Cold Weather and General Curing Requirements. All newly-placed concrete
shall be cured for at least seven (7) days. When there is a forecast of air temperatures
below two degrees Celsius (2 oC.), during the curing period, the Contractor shall submit for
approval by the Engineer, a cold weather concreting and curing plan detailing the methods
and equipment which will be used to assure that concrete temperature does not fall below
ten degrees Celsius (10oC.) during the entire curing period which will be seven (7), eight
(8), nine (9), or ten (10) days after placement. When fly ash cement is used, this period
shall be extended as follows:

Percentage of Cement Required Period of Controlled

Replaced, by Weight Temperature

10% 8 Days
11-15% 9 Days
16-20% 10 Days

16
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

The above requirement for an extended period of controlled temperature may be waived
Table of Contents

if a compressive strength of sixty-five percent (65%) of the specified twenty-eight (28) day
design strength is achieved in six (6) days based on site-cured cylinders.

The cold weather concreting and curing plan shall detail the Contractor's proposed
method of maintaining or providing heat and moisture to the concrete during the placement
and curing period. No part of the structure surface shall be heated in excess of thirty-three
degrees Celsius (33oC.) or changes by more than ten degrees Celsius (10 oC.) in eight (8)
hours while heating or insulating equipment is in use or immediately thereafter.

The contractor shall provide continuous recording thermometers at the approximate

frequency of one thermometer for each thirty (30) cubic meters curing during the initial
seven (7) day period.

Thermometers shall be placed adjacent to the concrete at locations selected by the

Engineer. Recorded temperatures shall be furnished the Engineer. The Contractor shall
maintain heating units in continuous operation. When placement of concrete occurs at an
air temperature of less than fifteen degrees Celsius (15 o C.), the concrete shall be placed
at a temperature of not less than fifteen degrees Celsius (15o C.), for sections less than
sixty (60) centimeters thick and not less than ten degrees Celsius (10o C.), for sections
greater than sixty (60) centimeters thick. The heating of the concrete components shall
be done in a manner which is not detrimental to the mix. The cement shall not be heated
or permitted to come into contact with aggregates which are in excess of thirty-five
degrees Celsius (35o C.).

Concrete at the time of placement shall be of uniform temperature and free of frost
lumps. Aggregates shall not be heated by means of direct flame, or sheet metal over fire.
Fine aggregate shall not be heated by direct steam. The addition of salts to prevent
freezing shall not be permitted.

All forms, reinforcing steel, girders, and construction joints shall be free of snow, ice and
ponded water, before concrete placement begins. The temperature of all surfaces to be
in contact with new concrete shall be at least fifteen degrees Celsius (15 o C.) and shall be
maintained at a temperature of fifteen degrees Celsius (15 o C.) or above during placement
of the concrete.

The temperature of the concrete shall be not less than fifteen degrees Celsius ( 15o C.)
at the time of placing in the forms. In case of extremely low temperature, the Engineer
may, at his discretion, raise the minimum limiting temperature for work, aggregates and
mixed concrete. Salt, chemicals or other materials shall not be used to prevent freezing.

17
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.01.6.2 Hot Weather Limitations and General Curing Requirements.

Table of Contents

5.01.6.2.1 All Concrete. The temperature of the concrete mixture as deposited shall
never exceed thirty-three degrees Celsius (33oC.) and before pumping it shall never
exceed twenty-seven degrees Celsius (27 oC.). The Contractor is responsible for furnishing
all equipment and other resources necessary for compliance with this specification.
Actions may include but are not limited to:

1. Shading or enclosing and cooling aggregates and other components.

2. Shading or otherwise cooling the batching, hauling, pumping, and other equipment
during production and placement.

3. Cooling aggregates by sprinkling.

4. The cooling of mix water by refrigeration or buried tanks or the use of chipped ice
for part of the mix water. Ice shall be completely melted at the conclusion of the mixing.

Water used for sprinkling aggregates or for mix water ice shall conform to the
requirements of MRDTM 514. When the temperature of the concrete mixture is expected
to exceed twenty-five degrees Celsius (25 oC.) a retarding chemical admixture meeting the
requirements of AASHTO M 194 Type B or a water-reducing and retarding chemical
admixture meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 194, Type D shall be included in the
approved mix design. A water-reducing high range and retarding chemical admixture
meeting the requirements of AASHTO M194, Type G, may be used subject to the special
procedures detailed in Subparagraph 5.01.3.1.3, "High-Range Water-Reducing
Admixtures” in these General Specifications.

The forms, reinforcing steel, steel beam flanges and other surfaces that will come in
contact with the mix shall be cooled to below thirty-three degrees Celsius (33o C.) until the
concrete is placed by means of covering with wet burlap or cotton mats, for spraying with
water, covering with protective housing, or by other approved methods. Water used for
spraying shall also conform to the requirements of MRDTM 514.

Curing shall be done so that moisture is always present, and shall be an integral part
of the concreting operations. The Contractor shall provide the concrete with the curing
protection specified in this Subsection 5.01.6, “Weather Conditions and Curing
Requirements,” in these General Specifications as required for the weather conditions
encountered. Improperly cured concrete will be considered defective, and the Engineer
will stop all of the Contractor's placing operations until proper procedures are put into
effect.

If a formed surface is to be rubbed, the concrete shall be kept moist before and during
the rubbing, and the curing shall be initiated immediately following the first rub while the
concrete surface is still moist.

18
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.01.6.2.2 Method One - Supplying Additional Moisture. This method shall provide
Table of Contents

additional moisture by ponding, sprinkling or fogging. Coverings such as burlap shall be

used to retain water so supplied. The use of sawdust will be allowed and coverings that
cause unsightly discoloration of concrete shall not be used. Any method that results in the
concrete being alternately wet and dry will be considered an improper curing procedure.
Coverings shall be placed as soon as possible after finishing operations have been
completed and there is no danger of surface damage. Coverings shall be kept
continuously moist.

5.01.6.2.3 Method Two - Preventing Moisture Loss. This method shall consist of
preventing moisture loss from the concrete. It may be accomplished with the use of
approved waterproof paper, plastic sheets, or liquid membrane curing compound except
where other requirements prohibit the use of these compounds.

1. Waterproof Paper. The paper shall be the widest practicable width and adjacent
sheets shall be tightly sealed with pressure sensitive tape, mastic, glue, or other approved
methods to form a complete water-proof cover of the entire concrete surface. The paper
shall be secured so that wind will not displace it. Should any portion of the sheets be
broken or damaged before expiration of the curing period, the broken or damaged portions
shall be immediately repaired. Sections that have lost their waterproof qualities shall not
be used.

2. Plastic Sheets. The sheets shall be used in the same manner as required above
for waterproof paper.

3. Curing Compounds. Type 2 liquid membrane curing compound as specified in

AASHTO M 148 may be used as the initial and final curing agent on structural concrete
subject to the following limitations.

If the membrane film is broken or damaged at any time during the curing period, the area
or areas shall be re-coated to the original requirements. Curing compounds shall be
applied to unformed areas as soon as the water sheen has practically disappeared from
the concrete, or as soon as the forms have been removed from the surfaces not be
rubbed. Areas receiving a rubbed finish shall be cured with Type 1 curing compound only,
as specified in AASHTO M 148. If there is any delay in applying curing compound, the
surface shall receive moist curing until the compound can be applied.

Curing compound shall be applied with equipment that will produce a fine spray, and all
compounds shall be thoroughly agitated just prior to and during use. The surface shall be
sprayed again immediately at right angles to the first application. The rate of each
application shall be between one (1) and one and one-half (1.5) liters for each five (5)
square meters of surface. The exact rate is to be determined by the Engineer based upon
the Contractor's field trials which insure uniform coverage with no thin areas, runs, sags,
skips or holidays. Care shall be taken to prevent application to joints where concrete bond
to reinforcement steel is required, and to joints where joint sealer is to be placed.

The use of liquid membrane curing compound on surfaces of construction joints and
areas to receive a spray finish is prohibited.

19
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.01.7 NO-FINES AND CYCLOPEAN CONCRETE.

5.01.7.1 Description. No-Fines and Cyclopean Concrete may be used as structural

backfill around weep holes or drains and structures to prevent back pressure or uplift.
They shall consist of Portland Cement, water, coarse aggregate and admixtures

5.01.7.2 Materials.

5.01.7.2.1 Portland Cement. Portland Cement shall be Type V cement as specified

in Subsection 5.01.2.1, "Portland Cement" in these General Specifications.

5.01.7.2.2 Coarse Aggregate.

1. The coarse aggregate for No-Fines Concrete shall be as specified in Paragraph

5.01.2.2, "Coarse Aggregate" in these General Specifications. However, the grading shall
be single-size grading, either 9.5 to 12.5 millimeters (3/8 - 1/2 inch), or 12.5 to 19
millimeter (½ -3/4 inch); five percent (5%) oversize and ten percent (10%) undersize are
allowed, but no material shall be smaller than 4.76 millimeters (No. 4 Sieve). Sharp-
edged, crushed aggregate shall be avoided if possible.

2. The coarse aggregate for Cyclopean Concrete shall consist of non-reactive broken
stone spalls or boulders ranging in size from one hundred (100) millimeters to three
hundred (300) millimeters. They shall be free from sharp or angular edges.

5.01.7.2.3 Water. Water used in mixing and curing of No-Fines and Cyclopean
Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 5.01.2.3, "Water" in these General
Specifications.

5.01.7.2.4 Admixtures. Admixtures for No-Fines and Cyclopean Concrete shall

conform to the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.2.4 "Admixtures" in these General
Specifications.

5.01.7.3 Proportioning.

The Contractor shall determine the mix proportions and shall furnish no-fines concrete
with a free water cement ratio in the range of thirty-eight hundredths (0.38) to forty-five
hundredths (0.45). The cement content shall be in the range of seventy to one hundred
thirty (130) kilograms per cubic meter. The cement aggregate ratio by volume shall be in
the range of 1:10 to 1:20. No-fines concrete shall attain a minimum compressive strength
of seventy (70) kilograms per square centimeter after seven (7) days per MRDTM 528.
The porosity shall be such that water will pass through a slab thirty (30) centimeters thick
at a rate of not less than four hundred (400) liters per minute per square meter of slab with
a constant one hundred (100) millimeters depth of water on the slab.

The Contractor shall determine the mix proportions and furnish Cyclopean Concrete with
a maximum water-cement ratio, minimum cement content and minimum compressible
strength as shown in Table 5.03-2 Composition of Minor Structure Concrete. The coarse

20
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

aggregate shall not form more than thirty percent (30%) of the total volume of concrete
Table of Contents

and shall be evenly graded.

5.01.7.4 Mixing. Mixing shall be performed according with the requirements of

Subsection 5.01.5, "Proportioning and Mixing during Construction," in these General
Specifications. The Cyclopean Concrete coarse aggregate shall be soaked in water prior
to incorporation into the mix and evenly distributed in the concrete matrix with a minimum
cover of seventy (70) millimeters.

5.01.7.5 Curing. Curing shall be done according to method one (1) of Paragraph
5.01.6.2, "Hot Weather Limitations and General Curing Requirements," in these General
Specifications. Sand or any other loose material shall be prohibited.

5.01.7.6 Acceptance. Acceptance shall be based on the same criteria as contained

in Subsection 5.03.9, for "Concrete for Minor Structures," in these General Specifications.

5.01.8 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES. The Contractor shall

sample and test all materials and the Portland cement concrete mixture throughout the
period of production and placement. The results of all tests shall be delivered to the
Engineer within twenty-four (24) hours after completion of testing; unless otherwise
specified in this specification.

Process control shall be by lot. Lot size for the individual materials and tests shall be
as listed in the M.O.C. Highway Materials Manual, Volume 1 or as specified in these
General Specifications, the Special Specifications, or by the Engineer, but never less than
one lot per day. Process control testing requirements are listed in Subsection 5.01.8,
“Contractor Quality Control Procedures,” in these General Specifications.

5.01.8.1 Quality Control of the Mixing Process. The contractor shall have a
competent and experienced concrete technician in charge of the mixing operations and
overall quality control. Duties of the mixing technician shall include but not be limited to
the following:

1. Assurance of the proper storage and handling procedures of all components of the
mix.

2. Assurance of proper maintenance and cleanliness of plant, trucks and other

equipment.

3. Gradation tests of fine and coarse aggregates at frequencies necessary to assure

compliance with specifications.

4. Moisture tests on aggregates and adjustments to mix proportions accordingly before

each production day or more often as necessary to maintain the specified water/cement
ratio.

5. Batch weight computations for each production day or plant calibration checks as
necessary, based on the approved mix design.

21
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

6. Accurate batching of all concrete in accordance with the specifications.

7. Accurate completion of each batch ticket including the following information to the
extend it is available prior to delivery:

(1) Name of Concrete Supplier

(2) Serial Number of Ticket
(3) Date and Truck Number
(4) Name of Contractor
(5) Designation of Structure or Location of Placement
(6) Identification of the Mix-Design and Concrete Class
(7) Quantities of all Components and Total Volume of Concrete
(8) Moisture Corrections for Aggregate Moisture
(9) Total Water in Mix at Plant and Added Prior to Discharge
(10) Times of Batching and Discharge

Copies of worksheets for items (3), (4), and (5) above shall be furnished to the Engineer
as they are completed. The Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary for the
above tests and controls.

5.01.8.2 Delivery, Process Control Sampling. The Contractor shall have at least one
competent and experienced concrete technician in charge of concrete delivery and
discharge operations. The duties of the technician shall include but not be limited to the
following:

1. Assurance that any final adjustments to the mix prior to discharge are in accordance
with the specification.

2. Completion of the batch ticket including the computation of the apparent

water/cement ratio. One copy of each batch ticket shall be delivered to the Engineer
immediately after its completion.

3. Perform temperature, slump and other screening tests to verify compliance with the
specification before each placement operation and periodically during placement
operations. All equipment required for these tests shall be furnished by the Contractor.
Every batch shall be sampled and tested [one hundred percent (100%) sampling and
testing] for slump at the start of a concrete production lot. Random sampling and testing
for slump at the rate of one for every five successive batches may be substituted for one
hundred percent (100%) sampling and testing if the test results for three successive
batches are within the specifications limitations for temperature and slump. However, one
hundred percent (100%) sampling and testing will be reinstated for that particular property
if a test result for any random sample is outside the specifications limitations. Slump will
be determined by MRDTM 517. Slump acceptance but not rejection may be visually
determined by the Engineer. Any batch that deviates from the specified requirements will
be rejected and shall be removed from the job. Sampling for temperature and slump shall
be in accordance with MRDTM 516 except samples may be taken after at least five-
hundredths (0.05) cubic meters of concrete have been discharged but not more than

22
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

fifteen hundredths (0.15).

Table of Contents

For purposes of controlling the maximum water/cement ratio, the water/cement ratio for
fly ash modified concrete shall be the ratio of the weight of water to the combined weights
of Portland Cement and sixty percent (60%) of the weight of the fly ash.

5.01.8.3 Water. Test per MRDTM 514

5.01.8.4 Portland Cement. Test per MRDTM 504

5.01.8.5 Admixtures. Test as required in these General Specifications.

The Engineer may reject concrete before placement or after placement, consolidation and
curing, and require its removal when test results indicate that it fails to conform to
specification requirements.

5.01.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Portland cement concrete shall be

accepted by lot unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications. The lot shall consist
of the quantity of the concrete items listed in the Bill of Quantities in each structure. At
least one lot will be expected to occur for each class of concrete. More than one lot will
usually be established due to the different items in the Bill of Quantities for each structure
and the number of structures. The Portland cement concrete shall be sampled, tested and
evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance" in these General Specifications.
The Engineer may, during the beginning of placement of Portland cement concrete, at
times when test results indicate erratic characteristics and at any other time, reduce the
lot size to sections of embankment with similar quality characteristics. This should
facilitate the isolation and modification or replacement of low-quality materials with
materials of acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength of the structure or
pavement.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by structure,
structure segment and in the case of pavement by centerline station (kilometer) and offset.
Quality assurance testing for each lot shall include:

1. Temperature
2. Slump
3. Water-Cement Ratio
4. Compressive Strength
5. Acceptance

5.01.9.1 Temperature and Slump. The temperature and slump of batched concrete
shall be screened for compliance as detailed in Paragraph 5.01.8.2 "Delivery and Process
Control Sampling" in these General Specifications. The Specification limits are shown in
Table 5.01-4.

23
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.01.9.2 Water-Cement (W/C) Ratio. The water-cement(W/C) ratio of each load of

concrete shall be checked for compliance with the W/C requirements for that class of
concrete. This shall be accomplished by completion of the batch ticket detailed in
Paragraph 5.01.8.2 "Delivery and Process Control Sampling" in these General
Specifications. The W/C ratio specification limit is forty five hundredths (0.45) unless a
lower limit is specified in subsequent sections of these General Specifications or in the
Special Specifications.

5.01.9.3 Compressive Strength. The Contractor's site concrete technician shall obtain
Quality Assurance (Acceptance) samples of fresh concrete from loads selected by the
Engineer. Sampling shall be done on a random basis in accordance with MRDTM 516.
The frequency for acceptance sampling shall be a minimum of one (1) sample for each
days pour or for each fifty (50) cubic meters for each class of concrete placed in each
structure, whichever is greater, unless otherwise specified in the Special Specifications

The Contractor's concrete technician shall cast all cylinders required to perform all
compressive strength tests, shall perform the initial curing, and shall provide for shipment
or transporting of the cylinders to the project laboratory. The Contractor shall also provide
the required cylinders molds. Acceptance sampling and testing shall be in accordance
with the applicable requirements as follows:

28 Day Compressive Strengths MRDTM 528 and 523

The lower specification limit is the minimum required compressive strength at twenty-
eight (28) days (f'c) specified in the contract documents plus eighty (80) kilograms per
square centimeter.

Compressive strength samples shall consist of six (6) cylinders each, three (3) for the
acceptance sample and three (3) for verification, projected strengths or other purposes
designated by the Engineer. The compressive strength test result will be the average of
the three (3) designated cylinders. The strength of any cylinder from the group of these
shall not deviate by more than two (2) standard deviations from the test group mean. If
such a remarkable strength is determined the outlying strength value shall be discarded
and the test group mean shall be recalculated using the remaining two (2) test cylinder
strengths.

For purposes of acceptance tests for cylinder compressive strength, the standard
twenty-eight (28) day curing period will be extended for fly ash modified concrete by one
(1) day (rounded to the nearest whole day) for each one and five-tenths percent (1.5%)
of cement replaced with fly ash at the selected rate. (Example: If the maximum twenty
percent (20%) of cement is replaced, the curing period for cylinders will be forty-one (41)
days). The pay factor resulting from this evaluation will be applied to the contract unit
prices for each lot of each class of concrete.

The acceptance test results for cylinder compressive strength will be evaluated relative
to compliance with the lower specification limit for each class of concrete in accordance
with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of the Work for Acceptance and

24
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General Specifications.

Table of Contents

A lot will be accepted when the average compressive strength is not less than the lower
specification limit.

A lot of Portland cement concrete may be accepted when the average cylinder
compressive strength for the lot results in a reduced pay factor of 0.90 or higher
determined in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General
Specifications.

5.01.9.4 Defective Concrete. When the average cylinder compressive strength is less
than the lower specification limit by an amount resulting in a reduced pay factor below 0.90
the concrete shall be considered defective. The contractor shall replace the defective
concrete or submit a detailed proposal to core the concrete to more accurately determine
the strength of the defective concrete. The Contractor's coring proposal shall contain a
minimum of five (5) core locations in the portion of the structure represented by the lowest
cylinder results. Non-destructive testing may be proposed for consideration in lieu of
coring where the structure is so heavily reinforced that useful cores cannot be obtained.
The core test results will also be statistically analyzed in accordance with Subsection
1.08.5, “Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor
(Value of Work),” in these General Specifications.

Any lot of concrete may be accepted with an average core compressive strength less
than the lower specification limit by an amount resulting in a reduced pay factor 0.80 or
higher determined in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work
for Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in these General
Specifications with no individual core compressive strength less than seventy-five percent
(75%) of the lower specification limit.

When the average core compressive strength of a lot of concrete is below the lower
specification limit by an amount resulting in a reduced pay factor below 0.80 or with one
or more individual core compressive strengths less than seventy-five percent (75%) of the
lower specification limit shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

In addition to these procedures, the Engineer may reject any concrete that is obviously
defective, or test and reject any concrete which does not meet the requirements for these
specifications. Any concrete represented by cylinders or cores having a compressive
strength of less than eighty-five percent (85%) of the lowest specification limit or is
otherwise defective and is so located as to cause an intolerably detrimental effect on the
structure will be ordered removed and replaced with acceptable concrete. The Engineer
may order the defective area be cored or non-destructively tested to define the defective
area more accurately. The Contractor shall perform the ordered coring or testing at no
cost to the Ministry. Replacement concrete shall be produced and will be accepted in
accordance with these Specifications.

25
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.01.9.5 Acceptance. Portland cement concrete materials will be accepted in

Table of Contents

accordance Subsection 1.08.3 "Certification of Compliance," and Subsection 1.08.4,

"Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

Portland cement concrete construction including slump, temperature and water cement
(W/C) ratio will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4,"Measured or Tested
Conformance" in these General Specifications.

Portland cement concrete compressive strength will be accepted in accordance with

Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for Acceptance and Determination of
Pay Factor (Value of Work)," and Paragraph 5.01.9.4 "Defective Concrete" in these
General Specifications.

5.01.10 MEASUREMENT. Portland cement concrete will not be measured under this
section. Measurement of Portland cement concrete, when made, shall be under the
individual items of work in which the Portland cement concrete was placed.

5.01.11 PAYMENT. Payment for Portland cement concrete will not be made under this
section. Payment for Portland cement concrete shall be included in all items listed in the
Bill of Quantities in which Portland cement concrete was placed.

26
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents SECTION 5.02 - REINFORCING STEEL

5.02.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of furnishing and placing reinforcing steel
in accordance with the specifications and in conformity with the plans.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Reinforcing Steel, Grade 60
Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel, Grade 60

5.02.2 MATERIALS. Reinforcing steel shall be manufactured to conform to the

requirements of Saudi Arabian Standards Organization Standard No. 2/1399 H, "Steel
Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete," for the type and grade specified on the plans as
follows:

- High Tensile Steel reinforcing bars shall conform to AASHTO M31 (ASTM A 615)
Grade 60 or BS 4449.

- Epoxy Coated Reinforcing bars shall conform to AASHTO M 284(1)

- Welded Steel Wire Fabric shall conform to AASHTO M55 or BS 4483.

- Cold Drawn Steel Wire shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M32 or BS 4482
in the case of hard drawn steel wire.

Note (1): Inspect the reinforcing bars after the near white blast cleaning has been
performed. Reject all bars that exhibit steel slivers or scabs. Selective sorting and
rejection at the fabricator's shop may avoid unnecessary delays and subsequent rejection
of bars determined unacceptable during the precoating inspection at the coating
applicator's shop.

The Engineer reserves the right to observe the preparation, coating and testing of the
reinforcing bars. The Engineer or his authorized representative shall have free access to
the plant and any work done when access has been requested and denied shall be
automatically rejected.

5.02.3 EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall be according to the type and number outlined in
the Contractor's detailed Program of Work as approved by the Engineer.

5.02.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.02.4.1 Bending Diagrams. Before fabricating bars, all bending diagrams shall be
furnished by the Contractor for the approval of the Engineer, and no materials shall be
fabricated until such bending diagrams have been approved. Vertical reinforcement in
columns, walls, piers, and shafts shall not be fabricated until footing elevations are
established in the field. Approval of bending diagrams will in no way relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility for ascertaining accuracy of such diagrams. Revision of materials
furnished in accordance with such diagrams to meet compliance with design drawings
shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

27
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.02.4.2 Protection and Storage. Reinforcing steel shall be protected at all times from
damage. Reinforcing steel shall be stored above the ground on platforms, skids or other
supports. It shall be stored in such a manner and adequately marked to facilitate
inspection and checking. Before and after placement, reinforcing steel shall be free from
detrimental dirt, mill scale, rust, paint, grease, oil or other foreign substances, fins, or tears.
The Contractor will not be required to remove slight rusting which discolors the metal but
he shall remove all loose mill scale and scalely rust. Brushing to clean blue metal will not
be required.

5.02.4.3 Cutting and Bending. All cutting and bending of reinforcement bars shall be
done by competent workmen and with equipment approved by the Engineer. Unless
shown otherwise on the plans or unless written approval is obtained from the Engineer,
all reinforcement bars shall be cut and bent in a fabrication shop accessible to the
Engineer according to the following procedures:

1.Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions, with

fabrication tolerance complying with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the Work:
(1) Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances.
(2) Bends or kinks not indicated on the drawings or the final shop drawings.
(3) Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause.
(4) Epoxy coating not meeting the requirements of this section.

2.Cold worked bars and hot rolled high yield bars shall not be straightened or bent again
once having been bent. Where it is necessary to bend mild steel reinforcement projecting
from the concrete, the internal radius of bend shall not be less than twice the diameter of
the bar.

3.Reinforcement bars shall be bent to the dimensions given in the Bar Bending
Schedule. All reinforcement shall be cold bent at the temperature range of five degrees
Celsius (5o C. ) and one hundred degrees Celsius (100o C.). The minimum bending radii
for high tensile steel and mild steel bars shall be not less than three (3) times and two (2)
times, respectively, of the nominal bar diameter.

Bends shall conform to the following requirements:

D = 6d for six (6) millimeter through twenty-two (22) millimeter bar sizes.

D = 8d for twenty-four (24) millimeter through twenty-eight (28) millimeter bar sizes.

D = 10d for thirty (30) millimeter and over bar sizes.

Where (D) is the minimum pin diameter around which a bar may be bent and (d) is the
bar diameter.

The overall height or Drop Bending Tolerance for deck truss bars shall be limited to plus
0 mm or minus six (6) millimeters.

28
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.02.4.4 Placing, Supporting and Fastening. Comply with the CRSI recommended
practice for placing reinforcing bars, for details and methods of reinforcement placement
and supports, and as herein specified.

All reinforcing steel shall be accurately placed and, during the placing of concrete, firmly
held by approved supports in the position shown on the plans. Reinforcing bars shall be
securely fastened together. Reinforcement placed in any member shall be inspected and
approved before any concrete is placed. Laying or driving bars into the concrete after
placement will not be permitted.

Bar supports shall be precast mortar blocks, plastic, or metal supports. Mortar blocks
shall be constructed and cured in accordance with the requirements in Section 5.01,
"Portland Cement Concrete" in these General Specifications as related to "Mortar" and
"Curing." The minimum compressive strength of mortar used for blocks shall equal the
minimum compressive strength of concrete for the structure in which they are used.
Mortar block supports shall be attached to the supported bar by means of 16-gauge wire
cast in the center of each block. Other supports shall be positively attached to the
reinforcing steel. Over waterproofing membranes, the use of precast mortar blocks shall
be encouraged, to prevent penetration of the membrane.

Cover supports in contact with exposed concrete surfaces shall be buff-colored plastic
spacers or plastic protected. Bar supports shall not be used directly or indirectly to support
runways for concrete buggies or other similar construction loads.

If supports indent the forms appreciably or deform due to the weight of the reinforcing
steel, spacing shall be decreased or heavier duty supports shall be substituted.
Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in the position shown on the drawings.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, all bar intersections shall be securely tied
together with the ends of the tying wire turned into the main body of the concrete.
Minimum one and two-tenths (1.2) millimeter diameter stainless steel wire shall be used
for in-situ members having exposed soffits. Minimum one and six-tenths (1.6) millimeter
diameter softer annealed iron wire may be used elsewhere.

In bridge decks, reinforcing bars shall be tied together at all intersections except where
spacing is less than three hundred (300) millimeters in both directions, in which case
alternate intersections may be tied securely to prevent displacement during concrete
placement.

The supports for reinforcing steel shall not be spaced more than one and two-tenths
(1.2) meters apart transversely or longitudinally. The placement of deck reinforcing steel
shall not deviate more than ten (10) millimeters in the vertical direction or fifty (50)
millimeters in the horizontal direction from the position shown on the plans.

Prior to the placement of bridge deck concrete, the Contractor, using the approved
screed or finishing machine shall check and verify, in the presence of the Engineer, the
minimum cover over reinforcing steel and total thickness of the deck. The verification
process shall cover the entire surface of the deck with maximum intervals between

29
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

checkpoints of three (3) meters in both the lateral and longitudinal direction.
Table of Contents

All reinforcement shall have a concrete coverage of fifty (50) millimeters or more except
as shown otherwise on the plans or specified herein.

5.02.4.5 Splicing. Splicing, except where shown on the plans, will not be permitted
without the approval of the Engineer. Lap lengths shall be as shown on the plans.
Proprietary mechanical splicing devices shall be used only with the prior approval of the
Engineer in writing.

No measurement or payment shall be made for additional reinforcement steel used for
splices not shown on the plans. Splices shall be avoided at points of maximum stress.
They shall, where possible, be staggered, and shall be designed to develop the strength
of the bar without exceeding the allowable unit bond stress. Unless otherwise shown on
the plans, all bars shall be lapped a minimum of fifty (50) diameters. Unless otherwise
shown on the plans, splices in adjacent lines of reinforcing bars shall be staggered.

5.02.4.6 Welded Wire Mesh Reinforcement for Structures. Welded wire mesh
reinforcement shall be of the sizes and spacing of bars and sheets as shown on the plans.
Welded wire fabric furnished under this specification shall conform to the requirements
of AASHTO M55. If mesh is shipped in rolls, the Contractor shall straighten them into flat
sheets before placing. He shall splice sheets of mesh by overlapping not less than one
mesh wide plus fifty (50) millimeters and shall securely fasten them at the ends and edges.

5.02.4.7 Drilled Shaft Reinforcing. The reinforcing steel unit for the shaft consisting
of longitudinal bars and spiral hooping or lateral ties shall be completely assembled and
placed into position as a unit for shafts of seven hundred fifty (750) millimeters in diameter
and less. The longitudinal bars shall be tied to the spiral reinforcement at intervals, not to
exceed four hundred fifty (450) millimeters on centers, and such tying shall be staggered
on the various bars in order to provide a rigid unit. Bars shall be tied to lateral tie bars at
all intersections. The lower end of each vertical bar shall be supported upon a suitable
precast concrete spacer block. Side spacer blocks of concrete shall be used at suitable
intervals along the unit to insure adequate spacing for the entire length of the shaft.

5.02.4.8 Welding of Reinforcement. Reinforcement in structures shall not be welded

except where indicated on the drawings or by written approval of the Engineer. All welding
of reinforcing steel where approved by the Engineer, shall conform to AWS D12.1,
"Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforced Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections
in Reinforced Concrete Construction." However, do not weld reinforcing steel if the
chemical composition of the steel exceeds the percentages in Table 5.02.-1, Reinforcing
Steel Components.

30
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

TABLE 5.02-1
REINFORCING STEEL COMPONENTS

Chemical Composition Percent

Carbon (C) 0.30

Manganese (MA) 1.50
Carbon Equivalent (C.E.) 0.55

Use welders that are currently certified. When required in the contract, test each weld
using magnetic particle, radiography or other nondestructive inspection techniques.

Mechanical couplers may be used in lieu of welding if approved. Use couplers with a
yield strength that is at least one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of the required yield
strength of the reinforcing steel.

5.02.4.9 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel. Support coated bars on padded contact
areas. Pad all bundled bands. Lift with a strong back, multiple supports or a platform
bridge. Prevent bar to bar abrasion. Do not drop or drag bundles.

Before placement, inspect coated bars for damage to the coating. Patch all defects in
the coating that are discernible to the unaided eye with a prequalified patching/repair
material according to AASHTO M 284. Clean areas to be patched by removing all surface
contaminants and damaged coating. Roughen the area to be patched before applying the
patching material. Where rust is present, remove the rust by blast cleaning or power tool
cleaning immediately before applying the patching material.

Promptly treat the bar according to the resin manufacturer's recommendations and
before detrimental oxidation occurs. Overlap the patching material onto the original
coating for fifty (50) millimeters or as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide a
minimum 8 mil (200 mm) dry film thickness on the patched areas.

Take necessary steps to minimize damage to the epoxy coating of installed bars. Clean
and patch any damage to the coating noted after installation as described above.

Field repairs will not be allowed on bars that have severely damaged coatings. Replace
bars with severely damaged coatings. A severely damaged coating is defined as a coating
with a total damaged area in any three hundred (300) millimeter length of bar that exceeds
five percent (5%) of the surface area of that portion of the bar. Coat mechanical splices
after splice installation according to AASHTO M 284 for patching damaged epoxy
coatings.

5.02.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Reinforcing steel and epoxy coating

material shall be evaluated and accepted under Subsection 1.08.5, "Certification of
Compliance," in these General Specifications as outlined in the following procedures:
Three (3) copies of a mill test report shall be furnished to the Engineer for each lot of billet-
steel reinforcement bars proposed for use on the project. The mill test report shall be

31
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

sworn to for the manufacturer of the steel by a person having legal authority to bind the
Table of Contents

manufacturer and shall show the following information:

1.The process or processes used in the manufacture of the steel from which the bars
were rolled.

2.Identification of each heat of open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace and/or
each lot of acid bessemer steel from which the bars are rolled.

3.Chemical and physical properties of the heat from which the bars were rolled.

The bars in each lot shall be legibly tagged by the manufacturer and/or fabricator before
the lot is offered for inspection. The tag shall show the manufacturer's test number and
lot number or other designation that will identify the material with the certificate issued for
that lot of steel.

The fabricator shall furnish three (3) copies of a certification which shows the heat
number or numbers from which each size of bar in the shipment was fabricated.

The sampling and testing of reinforcement bars may be made at the source of supply
when the quantity to be shipped or other conditions warrant such inspection. Bars not
inspected before shipment will be inspected after arrival on the Work. Sample bars shall
be a minimum of one (1) meter in length. Bars sampled at the Work site shall be replaced
by the Contractor without additional compensation. The Engineer reserves the right to
resample and inspect all reinforcement steel upon its arrival at the Work site.

5.02.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Measurement of "Reinforcing Steel" will be based

on the theoretical number of tons complete in place as shown on the plans or placed as
ordered in writing by the Engineer. No allowance will be made for the slips, wire or other
fastening devices for holding the steel in place, and no measurement of splices not shown
on the plans will be made. No deductions from the theoretical weights will be made for
minor shortening at bends.
Calculated weights shall be based upon the following table:

TABLE 5.02-2 WEIGHTS OF REINFORCING BARS

DIAMETERWEIGHT DIAMETER WEIGHT DIAMETER WEIGHT

(mm) (kg/m) (mm) (kg/m) (mm) (kg/m)

6 0.222 20 2.470 34 7.130

8 0.395 22 2.980 36 7.990
10 0.617 24 3.550 38 8.900
12 0.888 26 4.170 40 9.870
14 1.210 28 4.830 50 15.40
16 1.580 30 5.550
18 2.000 32 6.310
__________________________________________________________________

32
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

No allowance will be made for the weight of weld metal used in the fabrication of bar
Table of Contents

trusses. No measurement will be made for welded (mesh) steel reinforcement or cold
drawn steel wire as they are considered subsidiary to the construction of the item in which
they are placed.

5.02.7 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted material, measured as

provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per ton of Reinforcing Steel and
Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel, as specified in the Bill of Quantities, which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, fabricating, transporting, delivering,
erecting, and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools, and all other items
necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope
of Payment," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT
50201 Reinforcing Steel, Grade 60 Ton
50202 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel, Grade 60 Ton

33
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 5.03 - CONCRETE STRUCTURES

5.03.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of designing, installing and removing
formwork and falsework, furnishing, placing, consolidating and curing of Portland cement
concrete for bridge, tunnel and minor structures and incidental construction in accordance
with the specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions as shown
on the plans or established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure
Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure
Structural Concrete for Box Culverts
Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls
Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals
Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining
Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining
Concrete for Minor Structures
Bearing Devices
Expansion Joints
Water Stops
Mineral Admixture

5.03.2 MATERIALS. The materials, handling of cement and aggregates, the

classification, composition, consistency, proportioning, batching, mixing and transportation
of bridge structure concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 5.01, "Portland
Cement Concrete," in these General Specifications.

Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel,"

in these General Specifications. Materials for expansion and contraction joints in concrete
structures shall conform to the requirements specified in the plans, standard drawings, or
Special Specifications as appropriate.

Materials for the bridge deck drainage system shall be as specified in Subsection 5.11.2,
"Materials," in these General Specifications.

5.03.3 EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall conform to and be as detailed in the Contractor's

Program of Work, as approved by the Engineer. All bridge decks shall be consolidated
and finished using mechanical bridge deck finishing machines. Hand consolidation and
finishing will not be permitted. Curing compound shall be applied off work bridges in
accordance with Paragraph 5.03.4.5, "Handling and Placing Bridge Structure Concrete,"
in these General Specifications.

34
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.03.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.03.4.1 Bridge Structure Concrete. The handling of cement and aggregates,

composition, consistency, proportioning, batching, mixing and delivery shall conform to the
requirements of Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete," in these General
Specifications for the class of concrete specified in the plans or Special Specifications.

5.03.4.2 Bridge Structure Falsework.

5.03.4.2.1 General. Detailed plans for falsework and centering shall be prepared by
the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. No Work shall be started until
the plans are approved in writing. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval
at least one month before commencing work, details of his proposed system of falsework,
including detailed drawings and calculations. Falsework shall be capable of temperature
changes without causing damage to the concrete.

Notwithstanding any approval of falsework design by the Engineer, the Contractor will
not be relieved of his responsibility for the adequacy and correctness of the design,
manufacture and assembly of the falsework. Falsework and centering shall be designed
and constructed to support the total anticipated dead and live loads, including wind loads,
during all stages of construction, with a deflection not to exceed two thousandths (0.002)
of the falsework span. The Contractor shall submit calculations to support this
requirement for all spans over three (3) meters and other spans if requested by the
Engineer. On concrete bridge deck replacement works the Contractor shall submit
calculations showing that shoring is not required including actual falsework calculations
when the deck removal thickness is fifty (50) millimeters or greater.

Any embankment or backfill, whether permanent or temporary, required to support

falsework shall meet the quality and compaction requirements of Subsection 2.09.4,
"Backfilling of Structures" in these General Specifications. In situ material shall not be
used to support falsework unless it is approved by the Engineer with respect to its load
bearing capacity. In situ material approved for use to support falsework shall be
compacted to Type 95 Compaction as determined by Subsection 2.05.4, "Lift Thickness
and Compaction," requirements in these General Specifications.

Falsework and centering supports shall be designed and constructed to provide the
necessary rigidity to support all loads placed upon it without appreciable settlement or
deformation. Falsework columns shall be supported on concrete, wood, or metal bases
to distribute the loads to the underlying material. The size of the bases shall be based on
the supporting capacity of that material. If necessary, supporting material shall be
removed, replaced, or recompacted to enable it to support the falsework. Falsework shall
not be supported on any part of the structure, except the footings, without the written
permission of the Engineer. The number and spacing of falsework columns, the adequacy
of sills, caps and stringers, and the amount of bracing in the falsework framing shall be
subject to approval of the Engineer.

35
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

All timber shall be of sound wood, in good condition, and free from defects that might
Table of Contents

impair its strength. If the vertical members are of insufficient length to cap at the desired
elevation for the horizontal members, they shall preferably be capped and frames
constructed to the proper elevation. Ends of the vertical members shall be cut square for
full bearing to preclude the use of wedges. If vertical splices are necessary, the abutting
members shall be of the same approximate size, the ends shall be cut square for full
bearing, and the splices shall be scabbed in a manner approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall compute the estimated amount of settlement and deflection of the
falsework due to placement of the concrete. Provisions shall be made in the falsework for
this settlement and/or deflection so that the completed structure will conform to dimensions
and grades shown on the plans. The Engineer will check and approve the Contractor's
computations. Wedges or screw jacks shall be used in all falsework construction and shall
be so placed that they can be adjusted to give proper form alignment. The Contractor
shall provide means for adjusting forms at any time prior to concrete placement. If screw
jacks are used, they shall be adequately braced and secured in such a manner that will
prevent tipping of the jacks in any direction.

The Contractor shall provide means for accurately measuring settlement in falsework
during placement of concrete, and shall provide a competent person to monitor the
settlement and initiate corrective action when necessary.

The Engineer may refuse permission to proceed with other phases of the Work if he
deems the falsework unsafe or inadequate to properly support the loads to which it will be
subjected.

5.03.4.2.2 Falsework Design.

1. The falsework design drawings shall show the stresses and deflections in all load
supporting members, and anticipated total settlement of falsework footings and joint take-
up. Anticipated settlements shall not exceed twenty-five (25) millimeters. The maximum
deflection used in the design of the falsework shall be 1/500 of the falsework span,
irrespective of the fact that the deflection may be compensated for by camber strips.

2. The design of falsework shall be based on the use of loads and conditions which
are no less severe than those described in this section. The stresses listed are based
upon the use of undamaged, high quality materials and such stresses shall be reduced
by the Contractor if lesser quality materials are to be used. The Contractor is responsible
for the proper evaluation of his falsework materials and design of the falsework to safely
carry the actual loads imposed.

3. The vertical design load for falsework shall consist of the sum of dead and live
vertical loads and an assumed horizontal load.

(1) Dead loads shall include the weight of concrete, reinforcing steel, forms, and
falsework. The weight of concrete, reinforcing steel and forms shall be assumed to be not
less than two thousand six hundred (2,600) kilograms per cubic meter for normal concrete
and not less than twenty one hundred (2,100) kilograms per cubic meter for lightweight

36
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

concrete.
Table of Contents

(2) Horizontal pressure shall be based on an assumed unit weight between

fourteen hundred (1,400) and twenty-four hundred (2,400) kilograms per cubic meter
depending on the rate of placement and the effect of retarding admixture, as approved by
the Engineer.

(3) Timber dead load is eight hundred (800) kilograms per cubic meter. The dead
load of timber forms may be assumed at fifty (50) kilograms per square meter for members
smaller than one hundred fifty (150) millimeters by one hundred fifty (150) millimeters.
Dead load for steel and steel forms shall be seven thousand eight hundred fifty (7,850)
kilograms per cubic meter. The weight of any other forming materials shall be specified
on the drawings.

(4) Live loads shall consist of the actual weight of any equipment to be supported
by falsework applied as concentrated loads at the points of contact and a uniform load of
not less than two hundred forty-five (245) kilograms per square meter applied over the
area supported plus eleven hundred (1100) new tons per meter at the outside edge of
deck falsework overhangs..

(5) The total vertical design load for falsework is the sum of the vertical dead and
live loads. A total vertical design load of not less than forty eight hundred (4800) shall be
used.

4. The assumed horizontal load to be resisted by the falsework bracing system shall
be the sum of the actual horizontal loads due to equipment, construction sequence or
other causes and an allowance for wind; however, the assumed horizontal load to be
resisted in any direction shall not be less than two percent (2%) of the total load for
falsework up to ten (10) meters high. The falsework shall be designed so that it will have
sufficient rigidity to resist the horizontal load prior to the placement of concrete.

5. The entire bridge superstructure cross-section, except railing, shall be considered

to be placed at one time except as provided herein. Girder stems and connected bottom
slabs, if placed more than five (5) days prior to the top slab, may be considered to be self-
supporting between falsework posts at the time the top slab is placed, provided that the
distance between falsework posts does not exceed four (4) times the depth of the portion
of the girder placed in the first pour.

6. Falsework footings shall be designed to carry the load imposed upon them without
exceeding the estimated soil bearing values and anticipated settlements.

7. Foundations for individual towers when the maximum leg load exceeds one
hundred thirty-three (133) kilonewtons shall be designed and constructed to provide
uniform settlement under all legs of each tower under all loading conditions.

8. If the concrete is to be post-tensioned in the field, the falsework shall be designed

to support any increased or readjusted loads caused by the prestressing forces, as shown
on the plans.

37
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

9. The falsework design drawings shall include the following minimum information:

(1) Type and grade of structural materials.

(2) Allowable material stresses in bending, compression, and shear.
(3) Modulus of elasticity, "E".
(4) Stress factors if used for short term duration loading (timber only).
(5) Summary of critical tower leg loads and locations on falsework drawings.
(6) Weight of deck finishing machine and wheel or support spacing.
(7) References for load data used for standardized falsework components.
(8) Specification references for design criteria.
(9) The bearing value of the soil as determined by the Contractor when footing
type foundations are to be used.

10. Falsework design shall be based on the current edition of one of the following
applicable specifications. However, it shall be based on AASHTO Specifications if
highway traffic is to be supported.

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials,

Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Manual of Steel Construction.
ACI American Concrete Institute, Formwork for Concrete SP4 Building Code
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
NFPA National Forest Products Association, National Design Specifications for
Wood Construction.
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction Manual.

11. The maximum loadings and deflections used on jacks, columns, brackets, joists,
and other manufactured devices shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendations.

12. Connection details shall be so designed that structural shoring members are
secure for all loading conditions.

13. For identified grades of steel, do not exceed the design stresses (other than
stresses due to flexural compression) specified in the Manual of Steel Construction as
published by AISC.

38
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

14. When the grade of steel for structural shapes cannot be positively identified, do
not exceed the design stresses, other than stresses due to flexural compression,
specified in the AISC Manual for A36 steel or the following:

Tension, axial and flexural 150 Megapascals (MPa)

Compression, axial (L/r max. = 120) 110,000 - 2.62(L/r)2 kilopascals (kPa)
Where:
L = the unsupported length of the column (mm)
r = the corresponding least radius of gyration of the section (mm)

Shear on the gross section of the web of rolled shapes 100 MPa

Web crippling for rolled shapes 180 MPa

For all grades of steel, do not exceed the following flexural compression design stress.

Compression, flexural 1 = 82750 MPa

Ld/bt

NOTE 1: Not to exceed one hundred fifty-two (152) MPa for unidentified steel
or steel conforming to ASTM A36. Not to exceed (0.6)Fy for other
identified steel.

Where:
L = The unsupported length.
d = The least dimension of a square or rectangular column or the
width of a square of equivalent cross-sectional area for round
columns or the depth for beams.
b = the width of the compression flange.
t = the thickness of the compression flange.
r = the radius of gyration of the member.
Fy = the specified minimum yield stress for the grade of steel used.

15. When timber is used as falsewark the allowable maximum design stresses and
loads listed below are based on the use of undamaged, high-quality material. If lesser
quality material is used the allowable stresses and loads shall be reduced accordingly.

The following maximum stresses and loads shall not be exceeded in falsework design
using timber:

Compression perpendicular to the grain = 3100 kilopascals

Compression parallel to the grain (1) 3309 megapascals

(L/d)2

Note: (1) Not to exceed 11 megapascals.

39
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents Where:

L = Unsupported length
d = Least dimension of a square of equivalent cross-sectional area for round
columns

Flexural stress = 12.4 megapascals

Note: Reduced to 10 megapascals for members with a nominal depth of two

hundred (200) millimeters or less.

Horizontal shear = 1300 kilopascals

Axial tension = 8.3 megapascals

Modulus of elasticity (E) for timber - 11.7 gigapascals

Maximum axial loading on timber piles - 400 kilonewtons

Design timber connections according to the stresses and loads allowed in the
National Design Specification for Wood Construction, as published by the National
forest Products Association except:

(1) Reductions in allowable loads required therein for high moisture condition
of the lumber and service conditions do not apply.

(2) Seventy five percent (75%) of the tabulated design value as the design
value of bolts in two member connections (single shear) shall be used.

16. Falsework spans supporting T-beam girder bridges shall be limited to four and
three-tenths (4.3) meters plus eight and one-half (8.5) times the overall depth of T-beam
girder.

5.03.4.3 Bridge Structure Forms. Forms shall be mortartight and sufficiently rigid to
prevent distortion from pressure of the concrete and other loads incidental to the
construction operations, including vibration. Forms shall be constructed and maintained
to prevent the opening of joints due to shrinkage of lumber. They shall be designed to
permit easy removal without injury to the concrete. Form lining such as smooth, exterior
grade plywood or other approved material shall be used for all exposed formed surfaces.
The Contractor shall submit samples, specifications, and other pertinent information to the
Engineer and secure his written approval prior to use of the form lining.

Form lining material shall not bulge, warp or blister, nor shall it stain the concrete. Form
lining shall be used in the largest practicable panels to minimize joints. Small panels of
the lining material shall not be permitted. The joints in the lining shall be tight and
smoothly cut. Adjacent panels of form lining shall be so placed that the grain of wood will
be in the same general direction. Thin metal form lining will not be permitted unless they
are in new condition and firmly backed.

Undressed lumber of uniform thickness may be used for backing or form lining. Wooden

40
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

plywood, of adequate thickness, which is properly supported to meet the above

Table of Contents

requirements, may be used alone in lieu of the lined forms specified herein.

Forms shall be maintained after erection to eliminate warping and shrinkage. They shall
be checked for dimensions and condition immediately prior to the placement of concrete.
The Engineer may at any time require the revision or reconstruction of forms and may
refuse permission to place concrete within the forms until they are satisfactorily
constructed. If, at any period of the Work during or after placing the concrete, the forms
shown signs of sagging or bulging, the concrete shall be removed to the extent directed
by the Engineer, the forms brought to the proper position, and new concrete placed. No
allowance will be made to the Contractor for such extra Work.

Metal forms may be used and are subject to the same requirements and approvals
specified for wood forms. The specifications for wood forms with respect to design,
mortartightness, filleted corners, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, reuse
and oiling, also apply to metal forms. The metal used for forms shall be of such thickness
that the forms will remain true to shape. All bolt and rivet heads shall be countersunk.
Clamps, pins, or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly
together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not
present a smooth surface or do not line up properly shall not be used. Care shall be
exercised to keep metal forms free from rust, grease, or other foreign matter. Under such
circumstances the continuance of use of the metal forms will depend upon satisfactory
performance and their discontinuance may be required at any time by the Engineer. Steel
panels or panels with metal frames and wood or combination facing which leave
permanent impressions or ridges will not be approved.

The inside of all forms shall be oiled with a light, clear, paraffin base oil that will not
discolor or otherwise injure the surface of the concrete. The oiling shall be done where
possible after the completion of the forms and prior to placement of reinforcement.

Unless otherwise directed, the exterior side of all forms exposed to the sun shall be
painted with an approved, good quality, high gloss white oil base enamel prior to placing
concrete. When complete coverage is not obtained with one (1) coat, the Engineer will
order additional coats as he deems necessary to obtain complete coverage. Forms shall
be repainted when ordered by the Engineer.

Form joints shall be closed by moistening the forms with water prior to concrete
placement. Forms that are to be reused shall be thoroughly cleaned and reoiled and, if
necessary, shall be reconditioned by revision or reconstruction. Unsatisfactory lumber will
be condemned by the Engineer, and shall be removed from the site.

The width and thickness of the lumber, the size and spacing of studs and wales shall be
determined with due regard to the nature of the Work and shall be sufficient to insure
rigidity of the forms and to prevent distortion due to the pressure of the concrete.

Forms bolts, rods, or ties shall be made of steel. Ties may be the type which permits the
major part of the tie to remain permanently in the structure. They shall be held in place
by devices attached to the wales capable of developing the strength of the ties. The

41
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Engineer may permit the use of wire ties on irregular sections and incidental construction
Table of Contents

if the concrete pressures are nominal and the form alignment is maintained by other
means. Form ties will not be permitted through forms for handrail. Pipe spreaders shall
not be used unless they can be removed as the concrete is placed, as determined by the
Engineer. Wood or metal spreaders shall be removed as the concrete is placed. Where
the bottom of the forms is inaccessible, the lower form boards shall be left loose or other
provisions made so that the extraneous material may be removed from the forms
immediately before placing the concrete.

Unless provided otherwise on the plans or directed by the Engineer, all exposed edges
shall be beveled by using dressed, mill-cut, triangular molding, having twenty (20)
millimeter sides. All curved surfaces shall be formed with approved plywood or steel.

Placement of reinforcing steel shall not begin on any part of a structure until the location,
alignment, and construction of forms and falsework are approved by the Engineer for that
part of the structure. The Contractor shall conduct all surveyed and dimensional checks
required by the Engineer to verify the adequacy of the forms and falsework. The forms
shall be clean and free of all debris before concrete is placed.

Prior to the placement of bridge deck concrete, the Contractor, using the approved
screed or finishing machine, shall check and verify, in the presence of the Engineer, the
elevations, minimum cover over the reinforcing steel, and total thickness of the deck. The
verification process shall cover the entire surface of the deck with maximum intervals
between checkpoints of three (3) meters in both the lateral and longitudinal direction.
Placement of bridge deck concrete shall not begin until the screed, location of screed rails,
reinforcing steel, and deck forms are approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all details of formwork, liners, joints, and
other materials together with fabrication drawings, details of the working practices and the
procedures he proposed to use for obtaining approvals before any fabrication work begins.
No formwork shall be brought to the site without the prior approval of the Engineer.
Adequate time shall be allowed by the Contractor in his program for these approvals.

Formwork for bridge structures shall comply with the following requirements in respect
of classes of finish. In the following descriptions, F relates to formed surfaces and U
relates to unformed surfaces.

Class F1

Formwork shall be lined with a material approved by the Engineer to provide a smooth
finish of uniform appearance. This material shall leave no stain on the concrete and shall
be so joined and fixed to its backing that it imparts no blemishes. It shall be of the same
type and obtained from only one source for any one structure. The Contractor shall make
good any imperfections in the finish as directed by the Engineer.

Class F2

Similar to F1, except with special additional features as shown on the drawings or as

42
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

specified by the Engineer. These features shall be achieved by the use of approved form
Table of Contents

liners which shall have no horizontal or vertical joints except at locations shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Where F2 finishes are specified, through ties,
whether sleeved or permanently embedded in the concrete, bolts, brackets or any other
cast-in fixings will not be permitted except with the written consent of the Engineer.

Class F3

Irregularities in the finish shall be no greater than those resulting from the use of rough
thick square edged boards arranged in a uniform pattern. The finish is intended to be left
as struck. Imperfections such as fins and surface discoloration shall, however, be made
good as and when required by the Engineer.

Class F4

No special requirements.

Permanently exposed concrete surfaces to Classes F1, F2 and F3 finish shall be

protected from rust marks and stains of all kinds. Internal ties and embedded metal parts
will not be permitted.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all details of formwork, liners, joints, and
materials including fabrication drawings and stating procedures involved in the use of
formwork for approval before commencement of any work on fabrication. No formwork
shall be brought to site without the prior approval of the Engineer. Adequate time shall be
allowed by the Contractor in his program for these approvals after consultation with the
Engineer.

Class U1

The Concrete shall be uniformly leveled and screeded to produce a plain or ridged
surface as described in the Contract. No further work shall be applied to the surface
unless it is used as the first stage for Class U2 or Class U3 finish.

Class U2

After the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the concrete Class U1 surface shall be
floated by hand or machine sufficiently only to produce a uniform surface free from screed
marks.

Class U3

When the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardened sufficiently to
prevent laitance from being worked to the surface, a Class U1 surface shall be steel-
troweled under constant pressure to produce a dense, smooth uniform surface free from
trowel marks.

43
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Surfaces which are to receive deck waterproofing shall be finished to an accuracy such
Table of Contents

that when tested with a three meter long straightedge, the maximum depression shall not
exceed five (5) mm.

The inside surfaces of all forms shall, except for pavement formwork, or unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer, be coated with a release agent approved by the
Engineer. Release agents shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and shall not come into contact with the reinforcement or prestressing tendons
and anchorages. Different release agents shall not be used in formwork to concrete which
will be visible in the finished work.

Immediately before placing concrete, all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned out.

It is of major importance that the finishes required on F1 and F2 surfaces be uniformly

and consistently maintained with no variation in the color or consistency of the concrete
within the same structure. In order to achieve this, the Contractor shall make trial panels
of the formed finishes specified. These panels shall be not less than one and one-half
(1.5) meters high by one (1.00) meter wide and two hundred fifty (250) millimeters thick
and shall be cast in the manner and with materials proposed for the actual Work. These
panels are for the approval of the liners and are preliminary to the test samples carried out
on site.

The Contractor shall provide at his own expense as many panels as required by the
Engineer until a satisfactory trial panel has been accepted by the Engineer. In addition,
the Engineer will require samples of pier, part of a deck, section of retaining wall and/or
underpass wall and typical precast edge unit to be cast on site in the same manner as
proposed for the prototypes. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer and obtain
approval on all details before commencement of any trials thereof. These samples when
approved, will form the standard against which the corresponding finishes on the actual
Work will be judged. In all cases of approvals, the decision of the Engineer alone will be
final.

If the required finish has not been attained in the Work, as determined by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall promptly carry out as his expense all remedies required by the
Engineer to obtain the specified finish. These may include grit blasting followed by the
application of polyester or epoxy paint. Where such remedial action is ordered by the
Engineer, the entire exposed surface shall be so treated, irrespective of whether the
defective areas are localized or extensive.

5.03.4.4 Removal of Bridge Structure Forms and Falsework. All formwork shall be
removed without damage to the concrete. Forms used to support the deck of box girders
and forms in hollow abutments or pieces may remain in place when no permanent access
is available into the cells. Where it is intended to re-use formwork, it shall be thoroughly
cleaned and made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to re-use.

To facilitate finishing, forms on handrails, ornamental Work, and other vertical surfaces
that require a rubbed finish, shall be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened
sufficiently that it will not be injured, as determined by the Engineer. Formwork shall be

44
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

constructed so that the side forms of members can be removed without disturbing the soffit
Table of Contents

forms. If props are to be left in place when the soffit forms are removed, these props shall
not be disturbed during the striking.

In determining the time for the removal of forms, consideration shall be given to the
location and character of the structure, weather, and other conditions influencing the
setting of the concrete.

If field operations are not controlled by beam or cylinder tests, the following periods,
exclusive of days when the temperature is below ten degrees Celsius (10 o C.), for removal
of forms and supports shall be used as a minimum:

Arch Center 21 days

Centering Under Beams 14 days
Supports Under Flat Slab 14 days
Floor Slabs 14 days
Vertical Walls Over Three (3) Meters 3 days
Columns Over Three (3) Meters 3 days
Top Slab Box Culverts 14 days

If high early strength cement is used, the time limits may be decreased as determined
by the Engineer. Special notes on the plans relative to the removal of forms and falsework
under arches, continuous spans, and other special structures shall have precedence over
the above time limits for removal of forms and falsework.

When field operations are controlled by cylinder tests or any other approved control
tests, the removal of forms, supports, and housing, and the discontinuance of heating and
curing may begin when the concrete is found to have the minimum percentage of the
specified twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength contained in Table 5.03-1, provided
further that in no case shall supports be removed in less than seven (7) days after placing
the concrete except for vertical walls and columns over three (3) meters as shown above
(3 days).

45
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

TABLE 5.03-1

MINIMUM REQUIRED PERCENTAGE OF SPECIFIED 28-DAY

STRENGTH (f'c)
Percentage of Specified 28-
Structural Element Day Strength
Columns and wall faces (not yet supporting loads) 50
Mass piers and mass abutments (not yet supporting 50
loads) except pier caps
Sidewalk on bridges Sidewalk forms shall, in all 70
cases, be released before the main girder and slab
forms are released
Box girders 80
T-beam girders, slabs, cross-beams, caps, pier 80
caps not continuously supported, struts, and top
slabs on concrete box culverts
Trestle slabs, when supported on wood stringers 70
Slabs, when supported on steel stringers or 70
prestressed concrete girders
Pier caps continuously supported 60
Arches 90
Rail bases, traffic railings and median barriers* 40

*To facilitate finishing of these items of work, the forms shall be removed in not less than
twelve (12) hours nor more than forty eight (48) hours, depending upon weather
conditions.

Methods of form removal likely to cause overstressing of the concrete shall not be used.
Forms and their supports shall not be removed without approval. Supports shall be
removed in such a manner as to permit the concrete to uniformly and gradually take the
stresses due to its own weight. In order to determine the condition of column concrete,
forms shall be removed from columns before releasing supports from beneath beams and
girders.

Arch centering shall be struck and the arch made self-supporting before the railing or
coping is placed. This precaution is essential in order to avoid jamming of the expansion
joints and variations in alignment. For filled spandrel arches, such portions of the spandrel
walls shall be left for construction subsequent to the striking of centers, as may be
necessary to avoid jamming of the expansion joints.

Centers shall be gradually and uniformly lowered in such a manner as to avoid injurious
stresses in any part of the structure. In arch structures of two or more spans, the
sequence of striking centers shall be specified or approved.

Any remedial treatment to surfaces shall be agreed with the Engineer following

46
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

inspection after removing the formwork and shall be carried out without delay. Any
Table of Contents

concrete surface which has been treated before being inspected by the Engineer, shall be
liable to rejection.

Defects that will need repair, when removal of entire defective portions is not directed
by the Engineer, shall also include crazing, cracks, spalls, popouts, air bubbles,
honeycomb, and holes left by rods and bolts; other surface deficiencies that penetrate to
the reinforcement; fins and other objectionable projections on the surface, as determined
by the Engineer; and stains and discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

Immediately after the removal of the forms and inspection by the Engineer, all fins
caused by form joints and other projections shall be removed. All rock pockets and voids
shall be cleaned by chipping to clean sound concrete. The voids shall then be
premoistened and filled with a Portland cement mortar meeting the requirements of
Subparagraph 5.01.3.1.4, "Mortar" in these General Specifications. Form ties shall be
removed on all exposed surfaces. The ties shall be removed to a depth of at least fifteen
(15) millimeters below the concrete surface. Wire ties shall be cut back at least ten (10)
millimeters below the concrete surface. The cavities shall likewise be filled with cement
mortar less than one (1) hour old meeting the requirements of the above referenced
Subparagraph 5.01.3.1.4, "Mortar" in these General Specifications, and the surface left
sound, smooth, even and uniform in color. All patches and repaired concrete shall be
cured in accordance with Subsection 5.01.6, "Weather Conditions and Curing
Requirements," in these General Specifications. Sufficient white Portland cement shall be
mixed with the cement in the mortar, so that when dry, the color will match the surrounding
concrete. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, at his own expense,
substitute an approved epoxy grout for the Portland cement mortar or provide an epoxy
bonding agent to be used in conjunction with the Portland Cement mortar. If, in the
judgment of the Engineer, rock pockets are of such extent or character as to materially
affect the strength of the structure or to endanger the life of the steel reinforcement, he
may declare the concrete defective and require the removal and replacement of that
portion of the structure affected. The resulting surfaces shall be finished in accordance
with Paragraph 5.03.4.9, "Finishing" in these General Specifications. Portions of the
structure which cannot be finished or properly repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer
shall be removed.

5.03.4.5 Handling and Placing Bridge Structure Concrete. The method and
sequence of placing concrete shall be approved by the Engineer. No concreting
operations will be approved unless the Contractor has scheduled sufficient personnel,
material, and equipment, including standby equipment if required, to insure proper
placement at the minimum rate specified as well as proper finishing, curing, and other
necessary functions. All concreting operations shall conform to the requirements of
Subsection 5.01.6, "Weather Conditions and Curing Requirements," in these General
Specifications.

No concrete placement shall be scheduled when pile driving or other construction

vibrations may subsequently damage the concrete during its initial strength gaining period.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer, end spans of bridges
shall not be constructed until all riprap or other slope protection Work specified below the

47
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

span is complete and approved.

Table of Contents

Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the

displacement of the reinforcement. Concrete shall be deposited as near its final location
as practical and consolidated by vibration. Concrete shall not be moved laterally by
repeated shoveling or vibration of large piles.

The concrete shall be deposited in the forms in horizontal layers and the Work shall be
carried on rapidly and continuously between predetermined planes agreed upon by the
Contractor and the Engineer.

Where steep slopes are required for placing concrete with chutes, the chutes shall be
equipped with baffle boards or be in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement.
Chutes and the use of chutes must be approved by the Engineer.

All pumps, chutes, troughs, and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of
hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each run. The water used for
flushing shall be discharged clear of the concrete already in place. Standby pumps shall
be available for bridge deck placement and other large placement operations as directed
by the Engineer. The use of aluminum chutes, tremies, troughs and pipes will not be
permitted.

Concrete shall not be dropped in the forms a distance of more than one and one-half
(1.5) meters, unless confined by approved closed chutes or pipes, and care shall be taken
to fill each part of the form by depositing the concrete as near final position as possible.
The entire placement operation shall be conducted such that there is no displacement of
forms and reinforcing steel. After initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred
and no strain shall be placed on the ends of projecting reinforcement.

Unless otherwise directed, the concrete shall be consolidated using suitable mechanical
vibrators operating within the concrete. When required, vibrating shall be supplemented
by hand spading with suitable tools to assure adequate consolidation.

Vibrators shall be of an approved type and design. They shall be capable of transmitting
vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than four thousand five hundred (4,500)
impulses per minute and visibly effecting a properly designed mixture with twenty-five (25)
millimeter slump for a distance of at least one-half (0.5) meter from the vibrator. Sufficient
vibrators shall be on hand to insure continuous placement of the concrete without delay.

Vibrators shall be so manipulated as to work the concrete thoroughly around the

reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners and angles of the forms. Vibrators
shall not be used as a means to cause concrete to flow laterally into position in lieu of
proper placing. The vibration at any point shall be of sufficient duration to accomplish
consolidation but shall not be prolonged to the point where segregation occurs.
Pumping of surface water will not be permitted from the inside of the foundation forms
while concrete is being placed. If necessary to prevent flooding, a seal shall be
constructed in accordance with Paragraph 5.03.4.6, "Seal Courses and Underwater
Concreting" in these General Specifications.

48
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

No concrete Work shall be stopped or temporarily discontinued within one-half (0.5)

meter of the top of any finished surface, unless such Work is finished with a coping having
a thickness less than one-half (0.5) meter, in which case the joint shall be made at the
under edge of the coping.

In order to allow for shrinkage or settlement, at least two (2) hours shall elapse after
placing concrete in walls or columns or stems of deep T-beams (over one hundred (100)
cm total depth) before depositing concrete in girders, beams or slabs supported thereon,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. If the columns are structural steel encased in
concrete, the lapse of time to allow for shrinkage or settlement need not be observed.

Concrete in columns shall be placed in one continuous operation and allowed to set at
least two (2) hours before the caps are placed.

No concrete shall be placed in the superstructure until the column forms have been
stripped sufficiently to determine the character of the concrete in the columns, and the load
of the superstructure shall not be allowed to come upon abutments, piers, and column
bents until they have been in place at least seven (7) days, unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer.

Concrete in simple slab spans shall be placed in one (1) continuous operation for each
span, unless otherwise indicated on the plans or approved by the Engineer.

Concrete in simple T-beam slabs or voided slabs one hundred (100) centimeters or less
in total depth at midspan shall be placed in one (1) continuous operation. If required by
the Special Specifications, concrete in simple T-beam slabs or voided slabs greater than
one hundred (100) centimeters in total depth at midspan shall be placed in two (2)
continuous operations. The first operation shall include concrete placed in the bottom of
the fillet or haunch immediately below the slabs in T-beams slabs and to the midpoint of
the voids in voided slabs. The second operation, completing the slab, shall be performed
not less than five (5) days after the first. Before beginning the second operation, the
construction joint shall be cleaned of all mortar and debris by sandblasting or wire
brushing. The joint shall be kept saturated until concrete is placed. It shall be washed
thoroughly immediately prior to placement and the forms drawn tightly against the vertical
concrete surfaces. Free water in key depressions shall be blown out or otherwise
removed before concreting. Keys, if required, shall be as detailed in the plans. All
falsework shall be checked for excessive settlement prior to the final concreting operation
for the slab.

The concrete in arch rings shall be placed in such a manner as to load the centering
uniformly.

Arch rings, preferably, shall be cast in transverse sections of such size that each section
can be cast in a continuous operation. The arrangement of the sections and the sequence
of placing shall be as approved by the Engineer, and shall be such as to avoid the creation
of initial stress in the reinforcement. The sections shall be bonded together by suitable
keys or dowels. When permitted by the Engineer, arch rings may be cast in a single

49
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

continuous operation.
Table of Contents

Before concrete floors are placed on steel spans, the centering under the spans shall
be released and the spans swung free on their supports unless otherwise indicated on the
plans. The operation of placing the concrete in any floor slab shall be continuous until
complete, except where joints are provided on the plans or authorized by the Engineer.
When a special sequence or method of concrete placing operations is indicated on the
plans, or designated by the Engineer, this sequence or method shall be followed.

The method used for transporting concrete batches, materials or equipment over
previously placed floor slabs or floor units or over units of structures of continuous design
types shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Trucks, heavy equipment, and heavy
concentrations of materials will be prohibited on floor slabs until the concrete has attained
its design strength.

5.03.4.6 Seal Courses and Underwater Concreting. Except when a seal course is
required by the plans, no concrete shall be placed underwater without written approval of
the Engineer. Concrete for underwater placement shall be Class K modified by
decreasing the minimum cement content to three hundred ten (310) kilograms per cubic
meter and increasing the slump to approximately fifteen (15) centimeters. An anti-wash
admixture may also be used. Underwater concrete shall be deposited by means of a
tremie or a concrete pump. The concrete shall be carefully placed in a compact mass and
shall not be disturbed after being deposited. Still water shall be maintained at the point
of deposit. A tremie shall consist of a watertight tube having a diameter of not less than
twenty-five (25) centimeters with a hopper at the top. When a batch is dumped into the
hopper, the flow of concrete shall be induced by slightly raising the discharge end, always
keeping it in the deposited concrete.

Concrete pump discharge tubes and tremie tubes used to deposit concrete under water
shall be equipped with a device that will prevent water from entering the tube while
charging the tube with concrete. Such tubes shall be supported so as to permit free
movement of the discharge end over the entire top surface of the Work and to permit rapid
lowering, when necessary, to retard or stop the flow of concrete. The tubes shall be filled
by a method that will prevent washing of the concrete. The discharge end shall be
completely submerged in concrete at all times and the tube shall contain sufficient
concrete to prevent any water entry. The flow shall be continuous until the Work is
completed and the resulting concrete seal shall be monolithic and homogenous.

Before dewatering, the concrete in a seal shall be allowed to cure for not less than five
(5) days after placing.

After sufficient time has elapsed to insure adequate strength in a concrete seal, the
cofferdam shall be dewatered and the top of the concrete cleaned of all scum, laitance,
and sediment. Before fresh concrete is deposited, local high spots shall be removed as
necessary to provide proper clearance for reinforcing steel.

5.03.4.7 Bridge Structure Construction Joints. Whenever the work of placing

concrete is delayed until after the concrete has taken its initial set, the point of stopping

50
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

shall be deemed a construction joint. So far as possible the location of construction joints
Table of Contents

shall be as shown on the plans, but if not shown on the plans, they shall be planned in
advance and the placing of concrete carried continuously from joint to joint. The joints
shall be perpendicular to the principal lines of stress and in general be located at points
of minimum shear.

Where dowel, reinforcing bars, or other adequate ties are not required by the plans, keys
shall be made by embedding water-soaked beveled timbers in soft concrete. The key
shall be sized as shown on the details, or as directed by the Engineer, which shall be
removed when the concrete has set. In resuming concrete placement, the surface of the
concrete previously placed shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, scum, laitance or other soft
material with stiff wire brushes, and if deemed necessary by the Engineer, shall be
sandblasted. The surface shall then be thoroughly washed with clean water and free
water blown from shear keys and other depressions immediately prior to concreting.
When directed by the Engineer, the shear key surface, after being cleaned as specified,
shall be painted with a thick coat of neat cement mortar. Neat cement mortar shall consist
of equal parts by weight of Portland cement and fine aggregate and not more than twenty-
four (24) liters of water per sack of cement. The mortar shall be applied with a brush to
a thickness of five (5) millimeters. Fresh concrete shall then be deposited, before the
cement mortar has attained its initial set. In lieu of neat cement mortar, bonding grout may
be a commercial bonding agent. The bonding agent shall be applied to cleaned concrete
surfaces in accordance with the printed instructions of the bonding material manufacturer.

The exposed end of the end spans of all bridges which form a part of the road surface
shall be finished with an edger having a six (6) millimeter radius and a header board
installed to protect the edge of the wearing surface until the end span is backfilled and the
pavement layers are placed.

5.03.4.8 Bridge Structure Cold Joints. When the continuous placement of concrete
in any structural member is interrupted or delayed, for any reason, for a period long
enough for the previously partially placed concrete to take its initial set, the Engineer may
declare such joint a cold joint and the Contractor shall immediately remove the previously
partially placed concrete from the forms. No extra payment will be made for the initial
placement or the removal of concrete which is wasted because of a cold joint. The
Engineer may suspend all or any part of subsequent concrete Work until he deems the
Contractor has corrected the cause for the cold joint occurrence. In resuming concrete
placement cold joints shall be treated in the same manner prescribed in Paragraph
5.03.4.7 "Bridge Structure Construction Joints,” in these General Specifications.

5.03.4.9 Bridge Structure Finishing.

5.03.4.9.1 Bridge Deck Placing, Consolidating and Finishing.

1. Placing. Concrete shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of

Paragraph 5.03.4.5, “ Handling and Placing Bridge Structure Concrete,” i n these General
Specifications except for the following:

Concrete shall be placed in such manner as to require as little rehandling as possible

51
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

and at sufficient depth to provide some excess for screeding and finishing operations. The
Table of Contents

concrete shall be directed through suitable drop chutes to as near its final location as
practicable.

2. Consolidating. Consolidation shall conform to Paragraph 5.03.4.5, “H andling and

Placing Bridge Structure Concrete,” i n these General Specifications and to the following:

The Contractor shall provide suitable mechanical vibrators to melt down the batch at
the point of discharge and to densify the concrete within the forms. The bond of fresh
concrete to concrete previously placed shall be achieved by vibrating the new concrete
together with the old. Immersion vibrators shall operate at a speed of not less than ten
thousand (10,000) vibrations per minute in air. Internal vibration shall be used along the
edges of forms and in areas of congested reinforcing.

Plate vibrators, vibrating screeds, or rollers may be used for consolidating and
finishing slabs with a nominal thickness of one hundred fifty (150) millimeters or less. A
combination of internal vibration and surface consolidation shall be used when the nominal
slab thickness is greater than one hundred fifty (150) millimeters.

3. Finishing. Following consolidation, the concrete shall be struck off and finished by
an approved rail mounted, power driven, mechanical deck finisher utilizing longitudinal
floating, mechanical rolling, surface vibration, or a combination of any of these methods.
Rail supports shall be adjustable with the intervals between supports being such that the
rail deflection shall be no more than four (4) millimeters. The entire rail system shall be
in place, checked, and approved by the Engineer prior to the beginning of placement.
Surface vibrators shall be of the low-frequency, high-amplitude type, operating at a speed
of three thousand (3,000) to four thousand five hundred (4,500) vibrations per minute. If
the vibrator speed is adjustable, maximum speed shall be used on the first pass and
minimum speed shall be used on the second pass and subsequent passes. Bridge decks
of less than three hundred (300) square meters may be struck off with a portable screed
supported by rails or headers in an approved manner to provide the grade and crown as
shown on the plans.

The Contractor shall state at the preplacement conference the make and type of deck
finishing machine intended to be used. Deck finishing machines shall be supported
beyond the edge of the bridge deck so that the greatest possible deck width will be
finished by machine.

A paver's steel scraping straightedge or lute (one hundred (100) millimeter maximum
width) will be the only hand tool permitted on deck surfaces, except for a minimum use of
metal hand floats and edgers along the forms and in areas where machine finishing cannot
be effectively used. Only minimum hand finishing will be permitted and when the Engineer
deems the slab surface is being overworked, all hand finishing will be stopped. If the
surface of the deck slab becomes dry immediately following finishing operations, due to
an excessive evaporation rate, it shall be covered with wet burlap or fogged with water
covering the entire deck surface using pneumatic atomizing nozzles. The fog spray shall
be just enough to retard surface evaporation and shall not change the water-cement ratio.
During periods of excessive drying, a cover of wet burlap or plastic sheeting will be

52
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

maintained on the slab at all times until final cure cover is placed. Monomolecular film
Table of Contents

coatings applied to the surface of the slab to retain moisture may be used provided they
effectively retard surface evaporation and are adequately maintained throughout the
finishing operation.

Bridge decks that will not be covered with waterproofing membrane shall receive a
final finish as specified in the Contract.

4. Straightedge Testing and Surface Correction. After the floating has been
completed but while the concrete is still plastic, the Contractor will test the surface of the
concrete for trueness. For this purpose the Contractor shall furnish and use an accurate
three (3) meter straightedge or other approved device. Any depressions or variations of
four (4) millimeters shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck off,
consolidated and refinished. High areas shall be cut down and refinished. Special
attention shall be given to assure that the surface across joints meets the requirements
for smoothness.

(1) Bridge deck With Asphalt Surface. When the concrete is sufficiently hard, the
pavement surface shall be retested with the three (3) meter straightedge or other approved
device. Areas showing high spots of more than six (6) millimeters but not exceeding
twelve (12) millimeters in three (3) meters shall be marked. The marked area shall be
immediately ground with an approved grinding tool so that the surface deviation will not
be in excess of six (6) millimeters in three (3) meters. Where the deviation from the
established cross section exceeds twelve (12) millimeters in three (3) meters, the area or
section shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor, unless permitted
to remain with modifications approved by the Engineer.

Any area or section so removed shall not be less than three (3) meters in length
nor less than the full width of the lane involved.

When it is necessary to remove and replace a section of deck slab, any remaining
portion of the slab adjacent to the formed joints that is less than three (3) meters in length,
shall also be removed and replaced.

(2) Bridge Deck With Concrete Riding Surface. Surface smoothness

requirements for a bridge deck built with a concrete riding surface shall conform to
Paragraph I above except that the surface deviation shall be four (4) millimeters in three
(3) meters. The final surface shall be finished by means of a broom after the water sheen
has practically disappeared. The broom shall be drawn transversely across the surface
from the moveable bridge described in Paragraph (5) below with adjacent strokes slightly
overlapping. The brooming operation shall be executed so that the corrugations produced
in the deck surface shall be uniform in appearance and approximately two (2) millimeters
in depth. Brooms shall be of the quality, size and construction and so operated as to
produce a surface finish acceptable to the Engineer.

5. Movable Work Bridge for the Inspectors and Finishers. A movable bridge or
platform shall be provided by the Contractor and moved as directed to allow the inspectors
and finishers to work over the freshly plastic concrete. The movable bridge shall be kept

53
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

as close to the finishing screed as practical. The deck of the movable bridge shall be a
Table of Contents

minimum of six hundred (600) millimeters wide and no more than six hundred (600)
millimeters above the surface of the concrete and shall be capable of supporting two (2)
inspectors/finishers. The Contractor shall provide additional movable bridges as
appropriate for use by the Contractor's workers. In applying membrane, curing compound
and other curing treatments, the movable work bridges shall be in place and demonstrated
by the Contractor before each bridge deck placement is allowed to begin.

Immediately after the curing period, the Contractor shall repair all minor bridge deck
shrinkage cracks identified by the Engineer. Repairs shall be made as directed by the
Engineer using an approved water resistant, high modulus, low viscosity epoxy. Epoxy
shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 881, Type 1, Grade 1, Class C. Grade 2 epoxy
may be used for vertical surfaces and the underside of horizontal surfaces except where
injection is required. Alternate two-part epoxies may be approved by the Engineer after
testing at an MOC approved laboratory at the expense of the Contractor. Such tests shall
indicate that when tested in accordance with MRDTM 571, the epoxy shall have a slant
shear strength of three hundred (300) kilograms per square centimeter when cured for one
(1) day at twenty-five degrees Celsius (25o C.) dry, and shall also have a slant shear
strength of three hundred (300) kilograms per square centimeter when cured an additional
seven (7) days at twenty-five degrees Celsius (25o C.) wet.

Cracks in excess of two-tenths (0.2) millimeter in width identified by the Engineer on

vertical surfaces and the undersides of horizontal surfaces shall be filled by the pressure
injection of Grade 1 epoxy using equipment and procedures recommended by the
manufacturer of the epoxy and approved by the Engineer. All injection equipment shall
receive calibration and pressure checks in the presence of the Engineer prior to approval.
Cracks shall be vacuumed or blown clean prior to sealing and the surfaces sealed except
at the points of injection.

5.03.4.9.2 Other Bridge Structure Finishing. All top surfaces, such as the top of
retaining walls, curbs, abutments, rails, etc. shall be treated by tamping and floating with
a wooden float in such a manner as to flush the mortar to the surface and provide a
uniform surface, free from pits or porous places. The surface thus obtained shall be
troweled to produce a smooth surface and brushed lightly with a damp brush to remove
the glazed surface.

After curing and any required epoxy patching, bridge decks shall be retested for
irregularities by means of four (4) meter straightedge laid parallel to centerline and a crown
template used transversely. Any variations of four (4) millimeters or more shall be
corrected by grinding until variations are acceptable as determined by the Engineer.

All concrete surfaces shall be true and even, free from stone pockets, excessive
depressions or projections beyond the surface. The concrete in bridge seats and walls
shall be brought flush with the finished top surface and struck-off with a straightedge and
floated. The concrete surfaces which are not in an acceptable condition or which are
designated on the plans to be surface finished, shall be rubbed to a smooth and uniform
texture with a carborundum brick and clean water as soon as the forms are removed and
the concrete is ready to hone. The loose material formed on the surface, due to the

54
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

rubbing with a carborundum brick, shall be removed as soon as it dries by means of

Table of Contents

rubbing the surface with burlap or by other approved methods. The finished surface shall
be free from all loose material. A cement wash shall not be used.

Unless otherwise provided on the plans, all true and even surfaces, obtained by use
of a form lining, which are of a uniform color, free from stone pockets, honeycomb,
excessive depressions or projections beyond the surface shall be considered as
acceptable surfaces and a rubbed finish will not be required, except as follows:

On bridges, the curbs and sidewalks, parapets, outer face of exterior beams and floor
slabs, the underside of slab overhands and abutment curbs and wingwalls above roadway
shoulder elevation and on box culverts all surfaces of the parapets, wingwall outer face,
top face and top forty (40) centimeters of backface, and end faces of barrels shall be given
a rubbed surface finish in all cases.

The above provisions for surface finish shall not preclude requiring the use of a dry
carborundum brick for straightening molding lines, removing fins, etc., or requiring a
rubbed surface finish on all portions of the structure which do not present an acceptable
surface even though a form lining is used.

5.03.4.10 Bridge Structure Curing and Protection. All structural concrete shall be
cured for a period of time required to obtain the full specified strength, but not less than
seven (7) consecutive days beginning immediately after placement. Unless otherwise
specified in the Special Specifications, curing shall be as follows:

5.03.4.10.1 Membrane Curing. Except for construction joints and surfaces sealed
by metal forms, liquid membrane shall be used as follows:

- On bridge decks and other horizontal top surfaces, liquid curing membrane shall be
applied immediately after final finishing from adequate work bridges.

- On wood formed vertical surfaces, forms shall be stripped as soon as practical and
liquid curing membrane applied immediately except that those areas being rubbed or
finished during the curing period shall be kept wet until finishing is complete when liquid
curing membrane shall be uniformly applied.

- On metal formed surfaces, with or without wood lining, liquid curing m embrane shall
be applied if the Contractor elects to strip the forms within the curing period.

White pigmented liquid curing membrane shall be used for all non-exposed surfaces
and bridge decks. Clear liquid curing membrane shall be used for other exposed surfaces.
For bridge decks which are to receive a bituminous overlay, residual curing membrane
shall be removed prior to the overlay. Removal methods and results shall be approved
by the Engineer.

The curing membrane used shall be in accordance with the requirements specified for
curing membrane material, AASHTO M 148. The curing membrane shall be applied in two
(2) applications, one immediately following the other. The rate of each application of

55
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

curing compound will be as prescribed by the Engineer with a minimum spreading rate per
Table of Contents

application of between one (1) and one and one-half (1.5) liters of liquid per five (5) square
meters of concrete surface. The exact rate is to be determined by the Engineer based
upon the Contractor's field trials which insure uniform coverage with no thin areas, runs,
sags, skips or holidays. If the concrete is dry or becomes dry, it shall be thoroughly wet
with water and the curing compound applied just as the surface film of water disappears.
During curing operations, any unsprayed surfaces shall be kept wet with water. Any
curing membrane material on construction joints and/or reinforcing steel shall be
completely removed before the following concrete pour.

Hand operated spraying equipment shall be capable of supplying constant and

uniform pressure to provide uniform and adequate distribution of the curing membrane at
the rates required. The curing compound shall be thoroughly mixed at all times during
usage.

No traffic of any kind will be permitted on the curing membrane until the curing period
is completed, unless the Engineer permits the placement of concrete in adjacent sections,
in which case the damaged areas shall be immediately repaired as directed.

5.03.4.10.2 Water Curing. All surfaces, unless sealed by metal forms or submerged,
shall be water cured including those surfaces which have previously had liquid curing
membrane applied. For construction joints or other surfaces where no liquid membrane
is specified, water curing shall begin within one (1) hour of finishing. Where liquid
membrane is placed, water curing shall begin within four (4) hours of placement. The
water used for curing shall conform to the requirements in paragraph 5.01.2.3 "Water” in
these General Specifications.

Surfaces to be water cured shall be covered with cotton mats, double thickness
burlap, plastic, polyethylene, other equivalent absorbent and moisture sealing materials.
The absorbent material shall be placed around and behind all reinforcing steel to
completely cover the concrete surface. The material shall be completely saturated with
water and kept continuously saturated throughout the curing period. After initial saturation,
all surfaces shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting meeting requirements of ASTM
C 171 or other approved impervious material. The sheeting shall be weighted or secured
and overlapped one-half (0.5) meters to prevent moisture loss; however, the surfaces of
the concrete shall be readily available for inspection of the Engineer. The sheeting shall
be in good repair. Sheeting that contains holes or is otherwise damaged shall be repaired
or replaced. The Contractor shall be responsible for thoroughly inspecting and monitoring
the concrete surfaces throughout the curing period. Additional water shall be added to any
areas which are not still saturated. Inspections by the Contractor shall be conducted at
least twice per day for the duration of the curing period and more often if ordered by the
Engineer. The Engineer shall be advised of the inspection schedule and may accompany
the workman to verify the acceptability of curing.

5.03.4.10.3 Steam Curing. In lieu of the minimum seven (7) day water cure, the
Contractor may elect to steam cure precast elements subject to the following provisions:

1. After placement of the concrete, members shall be held for a minimum four (4)

56
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

hour presteaming period. If the ambient air temperature is below ten degrees Celsius (10 o
Table of Contents

C.), steam shall be applied during the presteaming period to hold the air surrounding the
member at a temperature between ten degrees and thirty-two degrees Celsius (10-32 o C.).

2. To prevent moisture loss on exposed surfaces during the presteaming period,

members shall be covered as soon as possible after casting or the exposed surfaces shall
be kept wet by fog spray or wet blankets.

3. Enclosures for steam curing shall allow free circulation of steam about the member
and shall be constructed to contain the live steam with a minimum moisture loss. The use
of tarpaulins or similar flexible covers will be permitted, provided they are kept in good
repair and secured in such a manner to prevent the loss of steam and moisture.

4. Steam at the jets shall be low pressure and in a saturated condition. Steam jets
shall not impinge directly on the concrete, test cylinders, or forms. During initial application
of the steam, the temperature rise within the enclosure shall not exceed twenty degrees
Celsius (20o C.) per hour. The curing temperature throughout the enclosure shall not
exceed sixty-five degrees Celsius (65o C.) and shall be maintained at a constant level for
a sufficient time necessary to develop the required transfer strength. A minimum fifteen
(15) centimeter space shall be maintained around the entire element to enable the
circulation of steam. The maximum differential temperature of any two (2) points within
the enclosure shall be ten degrees Celsius (10 o C.). At the conclusion of the steam curing,
the enclosure shall be vented such that the drop in ambient temperature within does not
exceed twenty degrees Celsius (20o C.) per hour. Control cylinders shall be covered to
prevent moisture loss and shall be placed in a location where temperatures are
representative of the average temperature of the enclosure.

5. Accessible temperature recording devices that will provide an accurate continuous

permanent record of the curing temperature shall be provided. A minimum of one (1)
temperature recording device per sixty (60) meters of continuous bed length will be
required for checking temperature.

6. Members in pretension beds shall be detensioned immediately after the

termination of steam curing while the concrete and forms are still warm or the temperature
under the enclosure shall be maintained over fifteen degrees Celsius (15o C.) until the
stress is transferred to the concrete.

7. Steam curing will be considered complete when all of the following criteria have
been met:

(1) A minimum of twenty-four (24) hours of curing has elapsed exclusive of heat-
up and cool-down periods.

(2) The concrete has reached the minimum stress transfer or handling strength
based on cylinders cured with the element.

(3) The concrete has reached a minimum of seventy (70) percent of t he specific
ultimate strength based on cylinders cured with the element.

57
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

All newly placed concrete for precast concrete piles, both conventionally reinforced
and prestressed, shall be cured by steam as provided above except that piles with a
designation of "Corrosion Resistant" shall be kept continuously wet for their entire length
for a period of not less than seven (7) days, including the holding and steam curing
periods.

5.03.4.10.4 Additional Hot Weather Limitations and Curing Requirements for

Bridge Decks and Slabs.

Unless otherwise directed, bridge deck concrete shall not be placed during periods
when the ambient temperature is expected to exceed thirty-five degrees Celsius (35o C.)
during placement and finishing operations. Bridge deck concrete shall not exceed twenty-
six degrees Celsius (26o C.) at the time of placement.

Concrete shall not be placed in bridge decks or other exposed slab type construction
when any combination of air temperature, relative humidity, concrete temperature, and
wind velocity throughout the area of placement is expected to result in an evaporation rate
in excess of one (1.0) kilograms per square meter per hour as determined from Figure
5.03-1.

When natural conditions are expected to approach an evaporation rate of one (1.0)
kilograms per square meter per hour, the Contractor shall take actions approved by the
Engineer to effectively maintain the expected evaporation throughout the area of
placement to less than one (1.0) kilograms per square meter per hour. Such actions shall
include one or more of the following:

1. The construction of windbreaks and/or enclosures to effectively reduce the wind

velocity throughout the area of placement. The construction of windbreaks and/or
enclosures shall not proceed without approval of the Engineer with respect to their
structural design relative to safety and lack of adverse loads with vibration in the existing
falsework.

2. The installation of stationary fog sprayers upwind of the operation to effectively

increase the relative humidity throughout the area of placement. Water used fog sprays
shall conform to MRDTM 504.

58
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Figure 5.03-1

Fig. 5.03-1 - Effect of concrete and air temperatures, relative humidity, and wind velocity
on the rate of evaporation of surface moisture from concrete. This chart provides a
graphic method of estimating the loss of surface moisture for various weather conditions.
To use the chart, follow the four steps outlined above. When the evaporation rate
exceeds 1.0 kg/m2/hr, measures shall be taken to prevent excessive moisture loss from
the surface of unhardened concrete to the extent that the evaporation rate is reduced to
below 1.0 kg/m2/hr. When excessive moisture loss is not prevented, plastic shrinkage
cracking is likely to occur.

59
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Effectively reducing the temperature of the concrete in accordance with Paragraph

Table of Contents

5.01.6.2, “H ot Weather Limitations and General Curing Requirements,” in these General

Specifications. The top surface of bridge decks, approach slabs, rigid pavement and
sidewalks shall be cured by a combination of membrane curing compound, followed by
water curing. The membrane curing compound shall be applied to the completed bridge
deck concrete surface within thirty (30) minutes after completion of the surface finishing
operations and before any drying shrinkage cracks begin to appear. Curing compound
shall not be applied on free-standing water. The curing compound shall be applied
progressively to individual portions of the concrete surface from movable work bridges.
Application shall be such that an even continuous membrane is produced on the concrete
deck on slab surface.

The liquid membrane shall be of such formulation that it will harden thirty (30) minutes
after application. Personnel and equipment shall be kept off the freshly-applied material
to prevent damage to the seal. Should the film become damaged from any cause, the
damaged portions shall be repaired immediately with additional membrane. The water
curing shall be applied immediately after the initial set of placed concrete. The surface
shall be covered with burlap, cotton mats or other suitable moisture-retaining materials.
This moisture-retaining material shall then be saturated with water and the entire area
covered with waterproof paper or plastic sheeting.

5.03.4.11 Tunnel Concrete. The producing and combining of cement, water,

aggregates and admixtures into acceptable composition, consistency, batching, mixing
and delivery of tunnel concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 5.01,
"Portland Cement Concrete," in these General Specifications for the Class of concrete
specified in the Plans or Special Specifications.

5.03.4.12 Tunnel Concrete Formwork. The Contractor shall design the tunnel
concrete formwork in accordance with Paragraph 5.03.4.3, "Bridge Structure Forms," in
these General Specifications. The formwork shall be adequately braced and have
adequate strength and stability to ensure finished concrete within specified tolerances.
The formwork shall be sufficiently designed to compensate for anticipated deflection and
creep due to weight and pressure of the fresh concrete and construction loads. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the adequacy of forms and form supports.

5.03.4.13 Tunnel Arch Forms. Steel or reinforced fiberglass plastic forms shall be used
except where special conditions make use of such materials impractical. These arch
forms shall be designed in accordance with Paragraph 5.03.4.3, "Bridge Structure Forms,"
in these General Specifications. The Contractor shall construct the tunnel forms so that
they can be secured tight against the tunnel arch footing concrete at the joints for the full
length of the form. The forms shall produce a relatively rough scored concrete surface for
future tunnel wall finish coverage unless otherwise shown on the drawings. The scoring
will be done with continuous longitudinally placed wire not exceeding seventy-five (75)
millimeter spacings (transversely) or alternatively, sand blasting. Other means of scoring
may be at the Contractor's option but subject to the Engineer's approval.

The Contractor shall provide forms for the tunnel arch sections with rows of openings
along each side vertically spaced a maximum of every two (2) meters. He shall locate the

60
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

first or bottom row with the centerline of the openings approximately two (2) meters above
Table of Contents

the longitudinal construction joint at the invert footing. The openings in the rows shall be
staggered. The Contractor shall make openings which permit access for concrete
placement, inspection and vibration of concrete being placed behind the forms. The rows
of openings shall be provided with a safe and convenient platform for access to the
openings. The openings shall be located on two and one-half (2½) meter centers and be
fifty (50) centimeters by sixty (60) centimeters minimum, with the long dimension parallel
to the centerline of the tunnel.

5.03.4.14 Tunnel Concrete Placement. Tunnel concrete shall be placed by pumping

in accordance with Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" and discharged into the work
through a pipe inserted into the formed space. The end of the discharge line shall be
marked to indicate the depth of burial at any time. Special care shall be taken to force
concrete into all irregularities in work surfaces and to completely fill tunnel walls and
crown. Placing equipment shall be operated only by experienced operators. The
Contractor shall vibrate pumped concrete in accordance with Section 5.03, "Concrete
Structures," in these General Specifications. Concrete shall not be pumped through
aluminum alloy pipe.

5.03.4.15 Tunnel Construction Joints. Construction joints between the tunnel arch
roadway barrier curb and tunnel arch footing shall be made only where located on the
plans, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.

A construction/contraction joint shall be placed perpendicular to the roadway at ten (10)

meter intervals in the main tunnel.

All construction joints shall be cleaned of surface laitance, curing compound and other
foreign materials before fresh concrete is placed against the surface of the joint. All
reinforcing steel shall run through construction joints unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.

Surfaces on which concrete is to be placed, except for waterproofing membrane, shall

be thoroughly moistened with water immediately before placing concrete.

When the plans show new concrete to be joined to existing concrete by means of bar
reinforcing dowels used in holes drilled in the existing concrete, the diameter of the holes
shall be the minimum needed to place non-shrink epoxy grout or epoxy grout and the
dowel. Immediately prior to placing the dowels, the holes shall be cleaned of dust and
other foreign material and sufficient epoxy grout placed in the holes so that there are no
voids in the drilled holes after the dowels are inserted.

5.04.4.16 Tunnel Concrete on Rock Surfaces. Rock surfaces against or upon which
concrete is to be placed shall be clean, free of oil, and other objectionable coatings, water,
mud, debris, dummy rock and loose semi-detached or unsound fragments, and shall be
sufficiently rough to assure satisfactory bond with the concrete. Discontinuities shall be
cleaned to hard rock on the sides, and to a depth that is approved by the Engineer. All
overbreak beyond the excavation limit shown on the plans shall be backfilled with
shotcrete or concrete at the Contractor's expense.

61
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.03.4.17 Tunnel Concrete Curing and form Removal. Concrete curing and form
removal shall be in accordance with Paragraph 5.03.4.4, "Removal of Bridge Structure
Forms and Falsework," and Paragraph 5.03.4.10, "Bridge Structure Curing and
Protection," in these General Specifications. Concrete arch forms may be removed by the
Contractor at his risk when the concrete is sufficiently set so as not to slump but in no case
before the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least sixty (60) kilograms
per square centimeter as determined from job cast and cured cylinders.

5.03.4.18 Repair of Tunnel Surface Defects. All obvious surface defects or surface
defects designated by the Engineer, shall be repaired, in accordance with Section 5.03,
"Concrete Structures," in these General Specifications at no cost to the Ministry.

5.03.4.19 Finishing of Formed Surfaces. Portions of the arch sidewalls shall have a
scored finish as described in Paragraph 5.03.4.12, "Tunnel Arch Form," in these General
Specifications. All remaining formed surfaces shall have a finish as specified under Class
1, Surface Finish, as described in Paragraph 5.03.4.3 "Bridge Structure Forms," in these
General Specifications.

5.03.4.20 Tunnel Concreting Tolerances. Tolerances for tunnel arch footings with
respect to plan location shall be ± fifteen (15) millimeters. Tunnel arch concrete and
roadway barrier shall be placed to the nominal dimensions and thickness shown on the
Plans with ± fifteen (15) millimeter tolerance.

When approved by the Engineer, concrete may be ground to meet the above
requirements. Concrete may not be added to meet the above requirements.

The overall appearance of the concrete work shall be one of straight lines and smooth
curves with no visible angles or breaks in lines or curvature.

Complete tests on piping and other items which are required to be tested before starting
concrete placement.

Before depositing concrete, check the location and support of piping, electrical conduits,
and other items which are to be wholly or partially embedded.

5.03.4.21 Tunnel Excavation. All tunnel excavation shall be complete within one
hundred (100) meters from any locations to be concreted. Concrete less than seven (7)
days old shall not be subject to any peak particle velocities in excess of one and one-half
(1.5) millimeters per second at all frequencies. All other tunnel concrete shall not be
subject to peak particle velocities in excess of fifty (50) millimeters per second. No blasting
will be permitted within ten (10) meters of any concrete less than five days old.

5.03.4.22 Tolerances for Bridge Structure Concrete Work. The dimensions of

finished Work, unless otherwise shown on plans or directed by the Engineer, shall be
within the tolerances given below and the Contractor will be held responsible for the cost
of all corrective measures required, where Work is not within these tolerances. The
location(s) of cast-in holding-down bolts and other work to locate steel work shall also

62
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

comply with these tolerances and shall also meet any specified tolerances for steelworks,
Table of Contents

consistent with proper connection of steelworks site joints without distress.

1. Acceptable tolerances :
(1) Dimensions three (3) meters and over : Plus or minus six (6) millimeters
(2) Dimensions below three (3) meters : Plus or minus three (3) millimeters
(3) Dimensions of cross-section members and slab thicknesses : Plus or
minus three (3) millimeters
(4) Tops of beams and slabs or bases : Plus or minus six (6) millimeter in
level; Plus or minus three (3) millimeters in line
(5) Vertical lines out of plumb or inclined elements out of true line : five (5)
millimeters if less than fifteen (15) meters in height/length; plus five (5)
millimeters for every additional fifteen (15) meters in height/length; total
plus or minus ten (10) millimeters at any location.

2. In addition to the foregoing tolerances under Subparagraphs 1(1), (2) and (3),
precast concrete Work shall be subject to the following installation tolerances:
(1) Variation from theoretical position in plan : Plus or minus six (6) millimeters
maximum at any location
(2) Variations from level or elevation : six (6) millimeters in any six (6) meter
run; plus six (6) millimeters for every additional six (6) meter run; total plus
or minus twelve (12) millimeters at any location
(3) Variations from plumb for vertical lines or from true line for inclined
elements: six (6) millimeters in any six (6) meter run or storey height,
whichever is less; plus six (6) millimeters for every additional six (6) meter
run; total plus or minus twelve (12) millimeters at any location.

5.03.4.23 Precast Concrete. In addition, precast concrete Work shall conform to the
following requirements, except when otherwise specifically indicated on the plans or
approved by the Engineer:

1. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing complete information

for the fabrication and installation of precast concrete units. The drawings shall indicate
member dimensions and cross-section, location, size and type of reinforcement and
special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection. The
drawings shall detail the erection procedure for precast units, sequence of erection and
required handling equipment. Each precast unit shall be identified to correspond to the
sequence and procedure of installation. Welded connections shall be indicated with AWS
standard symbols. All inserts, anchorage devices that are to be embedded, openings,
connections, joints, and accessories shall be indicated on the drawings.

2. Precast concrete units shall be delivered to the site in such quantities and at
such times as will assure the continuity of the installation. Units shall be stored so as to
ensure against cracking, distortion, staining, or other physical damage, and so that
markings are visible. Units shall be lifted and supported at the designated lift points only.

3. All parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the
precast concrete work is to be erected shall be examined and verified. Installation shall

63
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Table of Contents

4. Design modifications may be made only as necessary to meet field conditions

and to ensure proper fitting of the Work, and only as approved by the Engineer. If design
modifications are anticipated, the Contractor shall provide complete design calculations
and drawings prepared by a qualified professional, for approval by the Engineer.

5. Concrete shall be placed in a continuous operation to prevent the formation of

seams or planes of weakness in precast units. Placed concrete shall be thoroughly
consolidated in each precast unit by internal and external vibration without dislocation of
or damage to reinforcement and built-in items.

6. Precast units shall be provided with permanent markings to identify pick-up

points and orientation in the structure, complying with the markings indicated on the
approved shop drawings. The date of casting shall be imprinted on each precast unit
where it will not show in the finished structure.

7. Curing by low-pressure steam, by steam vapor, by radiant heat and moisture,

or other similar process may be employed to accelerate concrete hardening and to reduce
the curing time, only as approved by and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

8. Field welding shall be performed in compliance with AWS D1.1 and D12.1,
including qualification of welders. Units shall be protected from damage by field welding
or cutting operations, by means of non-combustible shields as required. Damaged metal
surfaces shall be repaired by cleaning and applying a coat of liquid galvanizing repair
compound to galvanized surfaces; and compatible primer to painted surfaces, according
to the manufacturer's instructions, as approved by the Engineer.

9. Powder-actuated fasteners for surface attachment of accessory items in any

precast, prestressed unit shall not be used, unless approved in writing by the precast
manufacturer, if any, and only as approved by and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

10. Grouting connections and joints after precast concrete units have been placed
and secured, shall be performed as follows:
(1) Cement grout consisting by volume of one (1) part Portland cement, two
and one-half (2 1/2) parts sand, and only enough water to properly mix and
for hydration.
(2) Shrinkage-resistant grout consisting of premixed compound and only
enough water to provide a flowable mixture without segregation or
bleeding.

Forms or other acceptable method shall be provided to retain the grout in place, until
sufficiently hard to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids
are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, plumb, and level with adjacent concrete
surfaces. Keep grout damp for not less than twenty-four (24) hours after it has taken its
initial set. Promptly remove any grout material from exposed surfaces before it hardens.

64
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

11. Testing Precast Concrete Units for Strength:

When there is evidence that the strength of a constructed precast concrete unit
does not meet the specification requirements, the Contractor shall take cores drilled from
hardened concrete for compressive strength determination, complying with ASTM C42 and
as follows:
(1) Take at least three (3) representative cores from precast units of suspect
strength, from locations directed by the Engineer.

(2) Test cores in a saturated-surface-dry condition per ACI 318 if the concrete
will be wet during the use of the completed structure.

(3) Test cores in an air-dry condition per ACI 318 if the concrete will be dry at
all times during use of the completed structure.

(4) Strength of concrete for each series of cores may be considered

satisfactory if their average compressive strength is at least ninety percent
(90%) of and if no single core test is less than eighty percent (80%) of the
twenty-eight-day design compressive strength.

(5) Test results will be made in writing on the same day that tests are made,
with copies to the Engineer, and precast manufacturer, if any. Include in
test reports the project identification name and number; date; name of
precast concrete manufacturer; name of individual responsible for
concrete testing; identification letter, number, and type of member or
members represented by core tests; nominal maximum size aggregate,
design compressive strength, compression breaking strength and type of
break (corrected for length-diameter ratio); direction of applied load to
core with respect to horizontal plane of the concrete as placed; and the
moisture condition of the core at the time of testing.

Where core test results are satisfactory and precast units are acceptable for use
in the Work, core holes shall be filled solid with low-slump concrete or patching mortar, and
finished to match adjacent concrete surfaces.

All testing, making good and replacement of precast units as described

hereinabove, shall be carried out by the Contractor at his expense, under the direction and
supervision of the Engineer. Precast concrete units which do not conform to the specified
requirements, including strength, tolerances, and finishes, shall be replaced with precast
concrete units that meet the requirements of this section. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from
corrections to the precast concrete work.

12. When directed by the Engineer or indicated on the plans, precast concrete
Work to be placed in contact with soil shall be waterproofed or dampproofed. Precast
concrete surfaces below water table shall be waterproofed and the water-proofing shall
be extended to five hundred (500) mm above the water table. Waterproofing and shall be

65
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

in accordance with Section 5.12, "Waterproofing for Structures," in these General

Table of Contents

Specifications and will be paid for separately as specified therein.

5.03.5 BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS.

5.03.5.1 Description. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing special bridge
expansion joints as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings,
expansion joints shall be fully waterproof type and to the Engineer's approval.

The Contractor shall submit the type of expansion joint he intends to use and obtain the
Engineer's approval of the joint type. The Contractor is then required to furnish detailed
drawings of all the joints and method assembly and installation procedure for the approval
of the assembly and installation procedure. All joints shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations using only materials and tools recommended by the
manufacturer. The bedding and nosings of expansion joints shall be considered integral
parts of the joint and the joint manufacturer shall be responsible for the supply of all
constituent materials required for bedding and nosing of joints.

5.03.5.2 Materials. Joint sealing compounds shall conform to the requirements of

AASHTO M282 and shall be as specified in Paragraph 6.22.2.2, "Joint Sealing
Compounds," while joint fillers shall conform to the requirements of Paragraph 6.22.2.4,
"Preformed Expansion Joint Filler" in these General Specifications.

Alternatively, if approved by the Engineer, hot-applied sealants shall comply with the
requirements of BS 2499 and cold-poured sealants shall comply with the requirements of
BS 5212.

Materials for manufactured joints shall satisfy the requirements of the applicable
standards specified in Technical Memorandum 3/72 - Expansion Joints for use in Highway
Bridge Decks, issued by the Bridge Engineering Design Standards Division, Department
of Environment, UK

Finished expansion joints shall provide movement to the required degree as shown on
the plans, and shall have good riding qualities. They shall not cause a skidding hazard nor
generate excessive noise or vibration during the passage of traffic. Parts of all bridge joints
shall be easily replaceable and shall facilitate inspection and maintenance. Finished
expansion joints shall either be sealed, as shown on plans, or have provision for carrying
away water, silt, grit and sand.

Epoxy mortar and epoxy concrete composition for joint bedding and nosing shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.

When directed, all materials shall be tested prior to commencement of the bridge work
as deemed necessary by the Engineer and as specified herein. Test samples shall be
supplied by the Contractor at his own expense. Samples shall be tested in accordance
with the requirements stipulated in the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway
Bridges, Division 2, Section 423. Testing shall be conducted by a qualified laboratory,
which will issue a certificate indicating the test results. All costs in connection with

66
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

manufacturer's certificates of guarantee, laboratory analyses and certificates, and all

Table of Contents

subsequent testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

5.03.5.2.1 Submittals. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval
copies of manufacturer's specifications, certifications and laboratory test reports and
instructions for maintenance for all manufactured materials. Installation procedure of
finished expansion joints and items of equipment recommended to be used by the
manufacturer, shall be also included.

5.03.5.2.2 Storage and Handling. Manufactured joints shall be delivered in

weatherproof and protective packaging and shall be so handled and stored so that they
remain free from physical damage.

Epoxy resin mortar and two-part sealants shall be delivered in ready-to-use packs with
the components in the manufacturer's original sealed containers, labeled clearly with the
manufacturer's name, product identification and batch number. The size of the packs shall
be such that batches of material for mixing shall be in whole-number multiples of packs.
The re-use of a portion of a used pack will not be permitted. The materials shall be stored
in dry, weatherproof conditions away from the effects of hot sun and in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.

5.03.5.3 Construction Requirements.

5.03.5.3.1 Joints. The size of the opening shall be compatible with the mean bridge
temperature at the time of installation. This temperature shall be determined in
accordance with arrangements agreed with the Engineer. A poured sealant shall be
placed only when the mean bridge temperature is thirty plus or minus five degrees Celsius
(30 ± 5 C), unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The pouring temperature of a
hot-applied sealant shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended safe heating
temperature.

Materials mixed and applied by hand shall be supplied in separate containers in the
correct proportions and shall be mixed using a power stirrer or mixer.

The position of all bolts cast into concrete and holes drilled in plates shall be
accurately determined from templates. Also, the threads should be kept clean and clear
of dust.

During the placing and hardening of concrete or mortar under expansion joints
components, relative movement shall be prevented between them and the supports to
which they are being fixed.

When one-half of the joint is being set, the other half shall be completely free from
longitudinal restraint. In particular, where strong backs or templates are used to locate the
two sides of the joint, they shall not be fixed simultaneously to both sides.

Ramps shall be provided and maintained to protect all expansion joints from vehicular
loading. Vehicles shall pass over the joint only through ramps until the Engineer approves

67
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

removal of the same.

Table of Contents

5.03.5.3.2 Bedding and Nosing. For bedding and nosing of joints, epoxy mortar and
epoxy concrete shall be used under the direction of a competent supervisor. The work
shall be carried out preferably in warm dry weather. The air temperature around the joint
shall not be less than ten degrees Celsius (10o C.) which shall be achieved artificially if
necessary. Concrete surfaces to which the nosings are applied shall be dry, sound and
free from laitance. Before application of the prime coat, loose materials and dust should
be removed by a tested air compressor to ensure that no oil is leaking from the
compressor.

Unless otherwise specified, surfacing shall be carried across the joint and then cut back
to accommodate the nosing. Masking material shall be provided to prevent surfacing
materials adhering to the deck where nosings are to be formed and shall be adequately
located to prevent displacement by the paving machine. The cutting shall be done with
a diamond saw.

A priming coat of unfilled epoxy resin composition shall be well worked in by brush to all
surfaces with which the nosings will be permanently in contact, at a uniform rate of not less
than three hundred (300) grams per square meter. The mortar shall then be applied while
the priming coat is still tacky. Epoxy mortar shall be compacted in courses of thickness
not exceeding fifty (50) millimeters.

The mixed constituents shall be placed in position within the item recommended by the
manufacturer, well worked against the primed surfaces and trowelled flush with the
adjacent road surface to form a dense mortar to the required profiles.

Traffic shall not be permitted until the joint bedding and nosing have gained full strength
or approved by the Engineer.

The elevation of the top of expansion joint shall be five (5) millimeters below the
elevation of the pavement (or as specified by the manufacturer).

5.03.5.4 Water Stops. This work consists of furnishing and installing water stops in
expansion and construction joints.

Water stops are designated as copper, plastic, or rubber.

5.03.5.4.1 Materials. Materials shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Copper Water Stops or Flashings. Sheet copper for water stops or flashings shall
conform to AASHTO M 138, copper USN No. C11000. The resistivity test is not required.

2. Rubber Water Stops. Water stops may be molded or extruded rubber with a
uniform cross-section and free from porosity or other defects. If approved, an equivalent
standard shape may be furnished.

Rubber water stops may be fabricated from a compound of natural rubber, synthetic

68
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

rubber, or a blend of the two, together with other compatible material. Do not use any
Table of Contents

reclaimed material. Furnish a certification from the producer showing the composition of
the material. The material shall conform to the following:

(1) Hardness (shore), 3021(1) 60 -70

(2) Compression set, 3311(1) 30% max.
(3) Tensile Strength, 4411(1) 17.2 MPa
(4) Elongation at breaking, ASTM D 412 450% min.
(5) Tensile stress, 300% elongation, 4131(1) 6.2 MPa min.
(6) Water absorption by weight, 6631(1) 5% max.
(7) Tensile strength after aging, 7111(1) 80% of original

Note(1): Federal Test Method Standard No. 601.

3. Plastic Water Stops. Plastic water stops shall be fabricated to a uniform cross-
section that is free from porosity or other defects. If approved, an equivalent standard
shape may be furnished.

Water stops shall be fabricated from a homogeneous, elastomeric, plastic compound

of basic polyvinyl chloride and other material. Reclaimed material may not be used.

A product certification shall be supplied by the producer showing test values for the
following properties. If directed, the Contractor shall furnish samples in lengths adequate
for performing the specified tests.

(1) Tensile strength, ASTM D 638 9.65 MPa

(2) Elongation at breaking, ASTM D 638 250% min.
(3) Hardness (shore), ASTM D 2240 60 to 75
(4) Specific gravity, 5011(1) Note (2)
(5) Resistance to alkali(3), ASTM D 543 Max% Wt. change - 0.10 to +0.25
Max. change in hardness 5 shore.
Min. decrease in tensile strength 15%
(6) Water Absorption (48 hours), ASTM D 570 0.50% max.
(7) Cold bending, Note (4) No cracking
(8) Volatile loss, ASTM D 1203 Note (5)

Note:
(1)
Federal Test Method Standard No. 406.
(2)
Manufacturer's value ± 0.02.
(3)
Use a 10% solution of NaOH for a seven (7) day test period.
(4)
Subject a twenty five (25) by one hundred fifty (150) mm strip that is three (3) mm
thick to a temperature of minus twenty nine degrees Celsius (-29o C.) for a period
of two (2) hours. After the two (2) hours, immediately bend the sample 180o (3.1
rad) around a 3 mm diameter rod. Apply sufficient force to maintain contact with
the rod during bending. Examine the sample for evidence of cracking. Test and
report results for at least three (3) individual samples from each lot.
(5)
Not more than manufacturer's value.

69
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.03.5.4.2 Construction.

1. Copper Water Stops. Copper sheet shall be used of the thickness, weight, width,
and shape required. Joints shall be soldered for a continuous watertight unit.

2. Rubber Water Stops. Before installation the following shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval:

(1) Performance test data

(2) One (1) meter sample of each type of water stop required
(3) If splices are used, at least one (1) preliminary field splice.

Water stops shall be formed with a cross-section that is uniform in width and web
thickness. Straight strips shall not be spliced.

All junctions shall be full-molded in the special connection pieces. Well cured, dense,
homogeneous special connection pieces, that are nonporous and are free from other
defects shall be supplied.

Splices shall be fabricated that are dense and homogenous throughout the cross-
section. Splices shall be fabricated watertight by vulcanizing or by mechanical means.
Splices shall have a tensile strength of at least fifty percent (50%) of the reported tensile
strength of the unspliced rubber water stop.

3. Plastic Water Stops. Before installation the Contractor shall submit for approval
at least one (1) preliminary field splice sample. Splices shall be heated according to the
manufacturer's instructions to make them watertight. Splices shall be fabricated to have
a tensile strength of at least eighty percent (80%) of the reported tensile strength of the
unspliced plastic water stop.

4. Placing Water Stops. Water stops shall be carefully placed and supported. Water
stops shall not be displaced or damaged by construction operations or other activities. All
surfaces of water shall be kept free from oil, grease, dried mortar, or any other deleterious
material until embedded in concrete. The embedded portions of the water stop shall be
completely enclosed in dense concrete.

5. Acceptance. Water stop materials will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.3,

"Measured or Tested Conformance," in these General Specifications.

5.03.6 BEARING DEVICES.

5.03.6.1 Description. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing replaceable
bridge bearings as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

All special bearing devices shall be of the pot type, either fixed, sliding or guided.
Movement and restraint characteristics will be shown on the drawings and specified in the
Special Specifications and Bill of Quantities.

70
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

The base of pot bearings shall be formed from a single monolithic material such as solid
steel plate or cast steel.

Elastomeric bearing devices can be either plain or laminated elastomeric bearing pads.

Pads nineteen (19) millimeters or less in thickness may be either laminated or plain.
Pads over nineteen (19) millimeters in thickness shall be laminated.
Laminated pads shall be individually molded and consist of alternate laminations of
elastomer and metal laminates. Laminations of elastomer shall be twelve (12) millimeters,
plus or minus three (3) millimeters in thickness. The top and bottom layers of metal shall
be uniformly covered with a minimum of three (3) millimeters of elastomer, except as
laminate restraining devices and around holes that will be entirely closed on the finished
structure. Variations in the location of the metal reinforcement from its theoretical location
shall not exceed three (3) millimeters.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer well in advance details of bearings he
intends to use for approval. Then the Contractor is required to submit one sample and
detail drawings on all types of bearings and installation procedures for approval by the
Engineer. Bearings shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and as agreed with the Engineer, by competent personnel who are well trained in the
installation procedures of the bridge bearings.

5.03.6.2 Materials.

5.03.6.2.1 Bearing Devices.

1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer details of all the bearings he proposes
to use in the Works along with their specifications. Also, one sample of such bearings
shall be submitted, which will form the basis for a tentative approval of the bearings prior
to the carrying out of the detailed examination and field tests.

2. Weldable structural steel for bearings shall comply with BS 4360 and steel castings
with BS 3100. Stainless steel sheets used in bearings shall comply with BS 1449: Part 2:
1975. Iron castings with spheroidal or nodular graphite shall comply with BS 2789: 1973.
Grade 500/7.

(Where BS is referred to, equivalent specifications shall be accepted).

3. All bearings shall be provided with all fittings, fixtures, bolts and/or shear keys
required either for installation of to ensure satisfactory in-service operation.

Vulcanized natural rubber and chloroprene rubber for bearings shall conform to the
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges or to BS 1154 and BS 2752. Shore
hardness of the rubber, tensile strength, minimum elongation at break and shear modulus
shall be in the range specified on the plans.

Bearings shall be delivered in protective packaging and shall be so handled and

71
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

stored that they remain free from any physical damage or dust accumulation.
Table of Contents

Epoxy mortar shall be delivered in ready-to-use packs in the manufacturer's original

sealed containers, labeled clearly with the manufacturer's name, product identification and
batch number. The size of the packs shall be such that batches of materials for mixing
shall be in whole number multiples of packs. The re-use of the portion of a used pack will
not be permitted. The packs shall be stored in dry, weather-proof conditions away from the
effects of hot sun.

The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's recommendations for periodic inspection

and maintenance of the bridge bearings for the phase of actual operation.

4. Testing. Before approval is given, at least one of each type of bearing shall be
tested for material quality, load capacity and friction characteristics. Then, the Engineer
shall demand bearings selected by him at random which will similarly be tested.

Elastomeric bearings consisting of one or more elastomer slabs, bonded to metal

plates, shall be subjected to tests for compliance with requirements stipulated herein or
to the following specifications, codes and standards, as shown on the plans or as directed
by the Engineer:
1. BS 5400 Part 9 - Code of Practice for Bearings
2. Technical memorandum No. 802 - Provisional Rules for the use of Rubber
Bearings in Highway Bridges.
3. BS 1154 - Specification for Natural Rubber Compounds (High quality).
4. BS 903 - Methods of Testing Vulcanized Rubber.
5. BS 2752 - Specification for Chloroprene Rubber Compounds.
6. BS 4395 - High strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and washers
for structural engineering.

5. Load Bearing Tests shall be as follows:

(1) Vertical Load - Load-deformation test to a maximum of one and one-half (1.5)
times rated load, with the load applied in equal increments and decrements in equal
increments and equal decrements to obtain a load cycle. Two such load cycles shall be
performed. At maximum load in the first cycle, the load shall be held for six (6) hours. At
maximum load in the second cycle, the load shall be held for fifteen (15) minutes.

(2) Guide Test - This test shall be carried out at constant vertical loads of ten (10)
and one hundred percent of rated load. The horizontal load shall be applied in ten equal
increments to a maximum of designed horizontal load. Two load cycles for each test shall
be performed. Where required by the Engineer, electrical strain gauges shall be installed
on the base plate at thirty (30) degrees spacing on one-quarter of the base plate to
measure the stress occurring at the rim/base junctions.

All steel elements of the bearing load tested shall be tested for mechanical strength
and chemical compositions and where rolled steel sheets are used, the mechanical
strength test shall be carried out in the directions both of rolling and perpendicular to
rolling.

72
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Elastomeric components of pot bearings shall comply with the requirements given
in sub-clause 2 of this clause for the requirements of elastomeric bearings.

PTFE sheets used in metal bearings shall comply with BS 3784: 1973, Grade B and
shall be tested for hardness, tensile strength and elongations and specific gravity in
accordance with the ASTM D 2240, ASTM D638 and ASTM D792, respectively.
Additionally, the arrangements and shapes of grease pockets, if used, shall be surveyed
and tested.

All tests shall be carried out at independent laboratories approved by the Engineer.
Adequate notice shall be given to the Engineer or his representative before carrying out
load tests.

5.03.6.2.2 Elastomeric Bearings.

1. Vulcanized natural elastomer shall comply with the requirements of ASTM

standards D2240, D412, D573, D395, D1149, D429B and D746 or equivalent BS or DIN
Specifications.

Flash tolerances, finish and appearance shall meet the requirements of the latest
editions of the "Rubber Handbook” pu blished by the Rubber Manufacturers Association,
Inc., RMA F3 and TO63 for molded bearings and RMA F2 for extruded bearings. For both
plain and laminated bearings, the permissible variation from the dimensions and
configuration required shall be as follows:

(1) Average total thickness -0, +3mm

(2) Overall horizontal dimensions -0, +6mm
(3) Thickness of individual layers of elastomer +/- 2mm
(4) Variation from a plane parallel to the theoretical
surface (top, sides, laminates) 2 mm
(5) Edge corner of embedded laminates 0-, +2mm
(6) Size and positions of holes +/- 2mm

2. Steel for plate reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M185
(ASTM A36) or A245 Grade C or D or equivalent BS and DIN specifications and shall be
free from sharp edges. The thickness of outer plates not less than three (3) millimeters
and of inner plates not less than one and five-tenths (1.5) millimeters.

3. Resistance to Weathering. This is predominantly determined by the resistance to

ozone which is present in the atmosphere in variable amounts. The elastomer shall have
good resistance to ozone attack and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D1149.

4. Number and Nature of Tests.

(1) Bond Test. Test pieces for this purpose shall be prepared from one of the
selected bearings, which may previously have been used for tests specified in sub-
paragraph (3) above.

73
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

(2) Test for Physical Properties and Weathering Test. Test pieces shall be taken
from the inside and outside regions of the bearing and they shall be prepared as for the
bond test. Alternately, they may be prepared from a test sheet formed from the elastomer
used in the manufacture of the bearing and being in a similar state of cure. A test piece
cut from a bearing should produce not less than seventy-five percent (75%) of specified
performance results required from a prepared test sheet.

(3) Stiffness Test. At least one full scale stiffness test for each bearing type and
additional tests as required of the same type shall be carried out in respect of stiffness in
compression and where applicable in shear. The rate of loading shall be agreed with the
Engineer.
(1) Stiffness in Compression. The bearing shall be loaded to one and one-
half (1.5) times the design load and this load shall be maintained for a
period of two (2) minutes. The loading shall then be reduced to ten
percent (10%) of the design load and maintained at this value for ten (10)
minutes, when gauge readings shall be taken. The bearing shall then be
reloaded to one and one-half (1.5) times the design load and maintained
at this value for ten (10) minutes. Gauge readings shall be taken again
and used in conjunction with the earlier readings to evaluate the stiffness.
The compressive stiffness shall be within twenty percent (20%) of the
value quoted by the manufacturer. In addition, for any one structure, the
compressive stiffness for bearings of the same type shall not deviate from
the value quoted by more than fifteen percent (15%).

(2) Stiffness in Shear. The bearing shall be loaded to produce one and one-
half (1.5) times the design movement and this load shall be maintained for
a period of two minutes. The loading shall then be reduced to produce ten
(10) percent of the design movement and maintained at this value for ten
(10) minutes, when gauge readings shall be taken. The bearing shall then
be reloaded to produce one and one half (1.5) times the design movement
and maintained at this value for ten (10) minutes. Gauge readings shall
be taken again and used in conjunction with the earlier readings to
evaluate the stiffness. The shear stiffness shall be within twenty percent
(20%) of the value quoted by the manufacturer.

No surface flaws shall become apparent during both stiffness tests and laminated
bearings shall show no irregularities in deflected shape.

(4) Bond of Elastomer to Metal. Tests shall be performed in accordance with

Method B of BS 903, Part A 21. The average of the peak values of load during separation
shall be not less than seven (7) N per millimeter - width of the test piece.

(5) Physical properties. The physical properties of the elastomer with respect
to hardness, tensile strength, elongation at break, and compression set shall comply with
the requirements of BS 1154 or BS 2752, both as received and after aging. The
respective tests shall be as described in the following:

74
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

(1) Determination of Hardness; BS 903, Part A 26.

(2) Determination of Tensile Strength and Elongation at Break, BS 903, Part A 2.
(3) Determination of Compression Set, BS 903, Part A 6.
(4) Accelerated Aging Tests, BS 903, Part A 19.

Where a prototype bearing has been tested satisfactorily and the Engineer is satisfied
that the materials and workmanship in the bearings to be supplied for incorporation in the
Work comply with this Section, no further acceptance testing of whole bearings will be
required.

Subject to the approval of the Engineer, any or all of the tests may be waived where
evidence can be produced that satisfactory test results are already available for materials
and bearings identical with those to be used.

5.03.6.3 Construction Requirements. The fixing of all bearings shall comply with the
manufacturer's recommendations and be approved by the Engineer.

The maximum allowable value of the coefficient of friction between sliding surfaces of
metal bearings shall be three-hundredths (0.03).

The manufacturer shall inscribe on the top of each bearing the longitudinal axis and
transverse axis of the bearing.

All bearings shall be indelibly marked with the appropriate type number clearly marked
top and bottom. Bearings shall be clearly identified by "pier number/bearing number,"
"abutment number/bearing number."

For each type of bearing, the Contractor shall furnish detailed calculations and drawings
to demonstrate the adequacy of the bearings and that they can be properly installed,
maintained and replaced if necessary. Manufacturer of bearings should not commence
until the Engineer has approved the design calculations and shop drawings.

Bearings shall not be dismantled. Any transit bolts, straps or other temporary fixing shall
not be removed until the bearing is fixed in its final position and the structure immediately
above the bearing is in place. Care shall be taken to ensure that all transit bolts, straps
or other temporary fixings are finally removed.

Bearings which incorporate low friction material, such as PTFE, shall not be opened up
to expose the surface of the low friction material. Should this happen accidentally, bearing
surfaces are to be cleaned and regreased and assembled as required by the manufacturer
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

All bearings shall be set horizontal in both directions and all bearings shall be positioned
so that the inscribed longitudinal axis is parallel to the structure axis at the point of support,
unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

All metal bearings must have positive fixing such that the bearing is subsequently

75
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

removable without excessive jacking. Horizontal forces shall be transferred from the
Table of Contents

superstructure to bearings and from the bearings to supports by means of shear keys or
fixing bolts.

However, where precast segmental deck construction is used, it may not be possible to
use positive fittings for the top bearing plates. In such circumstances, the top bearing
plates shall be fixed to the deck by epoxy injection. The epoxy used, the method of
injection and strength of the fixing shall be to the approval of the Engineer and will be
subjected to laboratory and field tests.

The longitudinal movements listed for metal bearings may require presetting the top
plates with respect to the bottom plates and also variable orientation of the bearings with
respect to the pier axes. Such preset and orientation angles shall be marked on each
bearing by the manufacturer before shipment. Full installation drawings of all bearings
shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval.

Any devices such as steel packs used to hold bearings level whilst being fixed, must be
removed finally, so that the bearing seats only on its dry pack mortar bedding.

Metal bearings shall be set in position on steel wedges to within plus or minus five mm
of the specified level. The location of these wedges beneath the bearings shall be agreed
with the bearing manufacturer prior to installation.

The gap between the underside of bearing and substructure shall be fixed with steel-
rammed dry pack mortar or epoxy mortar as specified by the Engineer which have a
minimum of twenty-eight (28) day cylinder strength of three hundred ten (310) kilograms
per square centimeter (kg/sq. cm) and the resulting voids filled with dry pack mortar or with
an approved epoxy mortar. Construction of the bridge super-structure may then proceed.
The supporting falsework and formwork of the bridge superstructure shall not be removed
nor permit the transfer of load to the bearings prior to removal of the temporary supporting
wedges.

Bearings shall be maintained in their correct position during placing of the bridge deck.
Mating surfaces of bearings shall be kept clean from contamination and after the deck has
been completed, each bearing and the area around it shall be left clean and tidy, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. No bearing shall be accepted on Site or be allowed to be
installed until approval of the Engineer is obtained in respect of shop drawings material
and load tests, installation drawings and installation trials.

In elastomeric bearings, welding for connecting metal to metal surfaces will not be
permitted as there is a risk of burning the elastomer or of affecting adversely the bonding
in the bearing.

5.03.7 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES. Contractor quality control

procedures shall be in accordance with Subsection 5.01.8, "Contractor Quality Control
Procedures," in these General Specifications.

76
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.03.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Quality assurance screening, sampling

Table of Contents

and testing of Portland cement concrete used in concrete structures and tunnels shall be
in accordance with Subsection 5.01.9, "Quality Assurance Procedures," in these General
Specifications. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications the lot size will be
the number of cubic meters of superstructure and substructure concrete in each bridge
structure and in each section of tunnel for each class of concrete specified in the Bill of
Quantities.

5.03.9 CONCRETE FOR MINOR STRUCTURES.

5.03.9.1 Description. This work consists of constructing minor concrete structures

such as pipe culvert headwalls, wingwalls and aprons, spillways, slope paving, sidewalks,
curbs and other minor concrete structures in accordance with these specifications and in
reasonable close conformity with the lines, grades, details and locations shown on the
plans or established by the Engineer.

5.03.9.2 Materials. All minor concrete structure materials shall conform to the
requirements contained in Subsection 5.01.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications.

5.03.9.3 Concrete Composition. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table

5.03-2. Before batching concrete, the Contractor shall submit the proposed concrete
proportions for approval. As a minimum, the following shall be submitted:

1.Type and source(s) of all material proposed for use.

2.Material certification for all material proposed for use including cement.
3.Saturated surface dry weight of the fine and coarse aggregate per cubic yard of
concrete.
4.Gradation of fine and coarse aggregate.
5.Weight of mixing water per cubic meter of concrete.
6.Weight of cement per cubic meter of concrete.
7.Maximum slump of plastic concrete in millimeters.

TABLE 5.03-2

COMPOSITION OF MINOR STRUCTURE CONCRETE

Property Specification
Minimum cement content, (kg/m3) 310
Maximum W/C ratio 0.49
Maximum slump (mm) (100)
Size of coarse aggregate Paragraph 5.01.2.2
Minimum 28-day compressive strength 170
(kilograms per square centimeter)

Class B structural concrete complying with Subsection 5.01, "Portland Cement

Concrete," in these General Specifications will be acceptable as an approved mixture with
appropriate certification.

77
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.03.9.4 Construction Requirements.

5.03.9.4.1 General. The Contractor shall perform the preparatory work in accordance
with Section 2.09, "Structure Excavation and Backfill," in these General Specifications.
He shall design and construct forms that are free of bulge and warp and allow for removal
without injuring the concrete. Reinforcing steel shall be placed according to the "Manual
of Standard Practice" of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. When concrete contains
a retarding admixture, fly ash, or other pozzolan replacement for cement, forms shall be
designed for a lateral pressure equal to that exerted by a fluid weighing twenty-four
hundred kilograms per cubic meter (2400 kg/m3).

Wood, metal, or other suitable material shall be used. Forms shall be kept clean and
coated with a form release agent or form oil before placing concrete.

Class B structural concrete complying with Subsection 5.01, "Portland Cement

Concrete," in these General Specifications will be acceptable as an approved mixture with
appropriate certification.

5.03.9.4.2 Placing Concrete. The forms and foundation shall be moistened

immediately before placing concrete. The concrete shall be discharged within the time
limit shown in Paragraph 5.01.5.2, "Mixing Concrete," in these General Specifications.

Concrete shall be handled and placed to avoid segregation in accordance with

Paragraph 5.03.4.5, “ Handling and Placing Bridge Structural Concreted,” in these General
Specifications. Aluminum pipe for transporting or placing concrete shall not be used. The
intervals between delivery of batches for a single pour on a structure shall not exceed
thirty (30) minutes.

Placement shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 5.01.6, "Weather

Conditions and Curing Requirements," in these General Specifications when there is a
forecast of air temperatures below an atmospheric temperature of two degrees Celsius (2 o
C.) or above twenty-five degrees Celsius (25o C.).

Water shall not be supplied to plastic concrete finishes during finishing operations.

5.03.9.5 Curing Concrete. Minor concrete shall be cured a minimum of seven (7)
days. If high early strength cement is used, cure concrete a minimum of three (3) days.
Cure shall be according to Subsection 5.01.6, "Weather Conditions and Curing
Requirements" in these General Specifications.

5.03.9.6 Acceptance. Concrete for minor structures will be subject to acceptance or

rejection by visual inspection and review of the load certification at the placement site.
Retempering of concrete will not be permitted. The Engineer will take or supervise the
taking of slump tests, test cylinders or cores for strength determination checks.

78
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.03.10 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure,

Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class ___ , Structural Concrete for Bridge
Substructure, Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class ___, Structural Concrete
for Box Culverts, Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class ___, Structural Concrete for
Retaining Walls, Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class___, Structural Concrete
for Tunnel Portals, Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class___, Structural Concrete
for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Strucural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class___,
Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Structural Concrete for Cross
Passage Tunnel Lining, Class ___, and Concrete for Minor Structures shall be measured
by the cubic meter for the Classes provided in the Bill of Quantities based on the
dimensions shown on the plans or otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer,
completed and verified by the Engineer.

No measurement will be made for additional tunnel concrete in overbreak areas. No

measurement will be made for chemical, air entraining or calcium chloride admixtures.
Mineral admixtures will only be measured for payment on a ton basis when specified in the
Plans or Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Unsolicited test panels made by the Contractor for his own purposes to determine the
suitability of the form, form-liner, mold oil or any other parameter that affects the concrete
finish, texture and color shall not be measured for payment.

Satisfactory and accepted test panels ordered by the Engineer shall be measured for
payment as indicated in the Bill of Quantities for the appropriate element and class of
concrete.

Accepted test samples carried out on site and exhibited throughout the duration of the
Works shall be measured for payment as indicated in the Bill of Quantities for the
appropriate element and class of concrete.

Bearing devices shall be measured as provided in the Bill of Quantities for each type,
capacity and member of bearings authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer.
Bearing tests, installation trials, epoxy mortar bedding nuts and bolts and where applicable
epoxy injection shall not be measured separately but shall be deemed to be subsidiary to
the bearing devices. Where temporary restraint of bearing is necessary due to the
sequence of deck construction, it will not be measured separately for payment.

Bridge expansion joints shall be measured per linear meter for the width(s) specified in
the Bill of Quantities for each type and number of expansion joints authorized, completed
and accepted by the Engineer. The measurement shall be made from parapet to parapet
whether or not the joint types over carriageway, verges and walkways for a particular joint
size are similar. No separate measurement shall be made for special curb-units, cover
plates over walkways, epoxy mortar bedding and epoxy concrete nosing, but shall be
deemed subsidiary to bridge expansion joints.

Water stops shall be measured by the linear meter for the type(s) specified in the Bill of
Quantities.

79
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.03.11 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted structural concrete and minor
concrete, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) per
cubic meter for the several classes of concrete as specified in the Bill of Quantities, which
price(s) shall be full compensation for furnishing, quarrying, preparing, transporting,
delivering, mixing and placing all materials, (except reinforcing steel, structural steel, cast
iron, expansion plates, and waterproofing), including forms and falsework, for all labor,
equipment, tools and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2 - "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

The amount of completed and accepted bearings, as measured, will be paid for at the
corresponding contract unit price(s) per unit for each type of bearing device appearing in
the Bill of Quantities, which price(s) will be considered full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and all other items necessary for
the proper completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 - "Scope of Payment"
in these General Specifications.

The amount of completed and accepted expansion joints and waterstops, as measured
above, will be paid for at the corresponding contract unit prices per linear meter for each
type of expansion joint or waterstop specified in the Bill of Quantities, which prices shall
be considered full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, labor, equipment,
tools, supplies and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2 - "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

Mineral admixtures will only be paid for at the contract unit price per ton only when
specified in the Plans or Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities and as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2 - "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

50301 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure Cubic Meter
5030101 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class A Cubic Meter
5030102 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class B Cubic Meter
5030103 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class C Cubic Meter
5030104 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class D Cubic Meter
5030105 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class E Cubic Meter
5030106 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class K Cubic Meter
5030107 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class S Cubic Meter
5030108 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50302 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure Cubic Meter
5030201 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class A Cubic Meter
5030202 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class B Cubic Meter
5030203 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class C Cubic Meter
5030204 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class D Cubic Meter
5030205 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class E Cubic Meter
5030206 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class K Cubic Meter
5030207 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class S Cubic Meter
5030208 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50303 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts Cubic Meter
5030301 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class A Cubic Meter

80
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5030302
Table of Contents Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class B Cubic Meter
5030303 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class C Cubic Meter
5030304 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class D Cubic Meter
5030305 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class E Cubic Meter
5030306 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class K Cubic Meter
5030307 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class S Cubic Meter
5030308 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50304 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls Cubic Meter
5030401 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class A Cubic Meter
5030402 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class B Cubic Meter
5030403 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class C Cubic Meter
5030404 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class D Cubic Meter
5030405 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class E Cubic Meter
5030406 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class K Cubic Meter
5030407 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class S Cubic Meter
5030408 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50305 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals Cubic Meter
5030501 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class A Cubic Meter
5030502 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class B Cubic Meter
5030503 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class C Cubic Meter
5030504 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class D Cubic Meter
5030505 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class E Cubic Meter
5030506 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class K Cubic Meter
5030507 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class S Cubic Meter
5030508 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50306 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Lining Cubic Meter
5030601 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class A Cubic Meter
5030602 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class B Cubic Meter
5030603 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class C Cubic Meter
5030604 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class D Cubic Meter
5030605 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class E Cubic Meter
5030606 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class K Cubic Meter
5030607 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class S Cubic Meter
5030608 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class ____ Cubic Meter
5030611 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class A Cubic Meter
5030612 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class B Cubic Meter
5030613 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class C Cubic Meter
5030614 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class D Cubic Meter
5030615 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class E Cubic Meter
5030616 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class K Cubic Meter
5030617 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class S Cubic Meter
5030618 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50307 Concrete for Minor Structures Cubic Meter
50308 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed Unit
5030801 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 250 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030802 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 300 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030803 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 400 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030804 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 500 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030805 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 600 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030806 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 700 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030807 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 800 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030808 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 900 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030809 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 1000 Ton Maximum Load Unit
50309 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding Unit
5030901 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 250 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030902 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 300 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030903 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 400 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030904 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 500 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030905 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 600 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030906 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 700 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030907 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 800 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030908 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 900 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030909 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 1000 Ton Maximum Load Unit

81
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

50310
Table of Contents Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided Unit
5031001 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 250 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031002 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 300 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031003 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 400 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031004 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 500 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031005 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 600 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031006 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 700 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031007 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 800 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031008 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 900 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031009 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 1000 Ton Maximum Load Unit
50311 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric Unit
5031101 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 60 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031102 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 90 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031103 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 100 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031104 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 120 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031105 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 140 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031106 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 150 Ton Maximum Load Unit
50312 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric Cubic Decimeter
50313 Bearing Devices, Metal Unit
50314 Expansion Joints Linear Meter
5031401 Expansion Joints, Less than 50 mm Linear Meter
5031402 Expansion Joints, 50 mm to 100 mm Linear Meter
5031403 Expansion Joints, 100 mm to 200 mm Linear Meter
5031404 Expansion Joints, greater than 200 mm Linear Meter
50315 Water Stop Linear Meter
5031501 Water Stop, Rubber Linear Meter
5031502 Water Stop, Copper Linear Meter
5031503 Water Stop, Plastic Linear Meter
50316 Mineral Admixture Ton

82
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents SECTION 5.04 - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

5.04.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of furnishing and placing precast,
pretensioned, Portland cement concrete members or post-tensioning cast-in-place
concrete structures in accordance with details shown on the plans and as specified in
these General Specifications and the Special Specifications.

This Work shall include the furnishing and installation of all items necessary for the
particular prestressing system to be used, including but not limited to prestressing and
reinforcing steel, ducts, anchorage assemblies and grout used for pressure grouting ducts.
The Work also includes curing, storing, transporting and erection of precast pretensioned
members complete and in-place. For cast-in-place post-tensioned concrete the term
"member" as used in this Section shall be considered to mean the concrete which is to be
post-tensioned.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Prestressing Steel
Precast, Prestressed Concrete Structural Members
Cast-in-Place Prestressed Concrete Structural Members

5.04.2 PRESTRESSING SYSTEM APPROVAL. The Contractor shall submit to the

Engineer for review and approval working drawings of the prestressing system proposed
for use. For initial review, six (6) sets of such drawings shall be submitted. The Engineer
shall return one (1) approved set or one (1) set with corrections and modifications. After
modification, six (6) sets showing any required corrections shall be submitted for final
approval. Working drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of the start of the
affected work to allow time for review by the Engineer and correction by the Contractor of
the drawings without delaying the approved programmed commencement of the Work.
Such time shall be proportional to the complexity of the work but, in no case, shall such
time be less than two months.

The working drawings of the prestressing system shall show complete details and
substantiating calculations of the method and materials the Contractor proposes to use in
the prestressing operations, including any additions or rearrangement of reinforcing steel
and any revision in concrete dimensions from that shown on the plans. Such details shall
outline the method and sequence of stressing and shall include complete specifications
and details of the prestressing steel and anchoring devices, working stresses, anchoring
stresses, stress-strain curves of the prestressing steel, anticipated gauge pressures, cable
profiles, elongation of prestressing cables, type of ducts and all other data pertaining to
the prestressing operation, including the proposed arrangement of the prestressing steel
in the members.

The designs shall be prepared and signed by a qualified contractor's Structural Engineer
who has been approved in advance by the Engineer.

Approval of working drawings and other submittals does not absolve the Contractor of
the responsibility for any of his Contractual obligations. No additional payment will be
made to the Contractor for any changes required as a result of reviews or approvals.

83
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

The Contractor shall submit for approval experience records and qualification details of
all the Contractor's key structural design, fabrication, installation, and quality control
personnel who will be working on the prestressing and concrete operation. Once
approved, the Contractor shall not change or substitute any of the personnel without the
prior approval of the Engineer.

All criteria covered by this Section on submittals and approval shall also apply to any
subcontractor intended to be employed respective to prestressed concrete work.

5.04.3 MATERIALS.

5.04.3.1 Concrete. Concrete shall be controlled, mixed and handled as specified in

Section 5.01, "Portland Concrete Cement" in these General Specifications, unless
otherwise specified herein or on the drawings. Class shall be as indicated. Concrete for
prestressed work shall be designated Class S, having a 28-day cylinder test compressive
strength of not less than three hundred fifty (350) kilograms per square centimeter.

5.04.3.2 Concrete Reinforcement. Concrete reinforcement shall be in accordance

with Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications unless otherwise
specified herein or on the drawings.

5.04.3.3 Prestressing Reinforcement. Prestressing reinforcement shall be high-

tensile strength steel wire, high-tensile strength seven wire strand or high-tensile strength
alloy bars as called for on the plans or in these specifications.

1.High-tensile strength wire shall conform to AASHTO M 204.

2.High-tensile strength seven-wire strand shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO

M 203.

3.High-tensile strength alloy bars shall be stress relieved and then cold stretched to a
minimum of nine hundred (900) MPa. After cold stretching, the physical properties shall
be as follows:

Minimum ultimate tensile strength 1000 MPa

Minimum yield strength, measured by the 0.7

percent extension under load method shall not
be less than 900 MPa

Minimum modulus of elasticity 172369 MPa

Minimum elongation in 20 mm bar

diameter after rupture 4 percent, min.
Diameter tolerance +0.76 mm, - 0.25 mm

Subject to the Engineer's approval, prestressing steel manufactured to standards

84
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

equivalent to those indicated herein may be used, provided that all requirements be
Table of Contents

satisfied.

In addition to the requirements of ASTM A 722 for deformed bars, the reduction of area
shall be determined from a bar which the deformations have been removed. Such a bar
shall be machined no more than necessary to remove the deformations over a length of
three hundred (300) millimeters and reduction will be based on the area of the machined
portions.

All bars in any individual member shall be of the same grade, unless otherwise permitted
by the Engineer.

When bars are to be extended by the use of couplers, the assembled units shall have
a tensile strength of not less than the manufacturer's minimum guaranteed ultimate tensile
strength of the bars. Failure of any one sample to meet this requirement will be cause for
the rejection of the heat of the bars and lot of couplers. The location of the couplers in the
member shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Wire shall be straightened if necessary to produce equal stress in all wires or wire
groups or parallel lay cables that are to be stressed simultaneously or when necessary to
ensure proper positioning in the ducts.

Where wires are to be button-headed, the buttons shall be cold formed symmetrically
about the axis of the wires. The buttons shall develop the minimum guaranteed ultimate
tensile strength of the wire. No cold forming process shall be used that causes
indentations in the wire. Button heads shall not contain wide open splits, more than two
(2) splits per head, or splits not parallel with the axis of the wire.

Tendons shall not be welded within the length to be tensioned and, unless other
methods of cutting are approved by the Engineer, tendons shall be sawn or cropped using
an abrasive disc cutter.

5.04.3.4 Duct Enclosures. Duct enclosures shall be rigid ferrous metal galvanized and
mortar tight. Ducts shall be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams.
Galvanizing of the welded seam will not be required. Ducts shall have sufficient strength
to maintain their correct alignment during placing of concrete. Joints between sections of
duct shall be positive metallic connections which do not result in angle changes at the
joints. Waterproof tape shall be used at the connections. Ducts shall be bent without
crimping or flattening. Transition couplings, connecting said ducts to anchoring devices
need not be galvanized.

When approved by the Engineer, ducts shall be of the flexible, corrugated type,
delivered to the site on large diameter wooden drums. Ducts shall be protected from
rusting, damage, oil, or any other deleterious matter.

All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or other suitable
connections for the injection of grout after prestressing. Joints in adjacent ducts shall be
staggered by at least thirty (30) centimeters.

85
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Provide ducts with an inside diameter at least ten (10) millimeters larger than the
nominal diameter of a single wire, bar, or strand tendon. For multiple wire, bar or strand
tendons, provide a duct cross-sectional area at least two (2) times the net area of the
prestressing steel.

Ducts for prestressing steel when bars are used shall have a minimum inside diameter
ten (10) millimeters larger than the diameter of the bars to be used.

5.04.3.5 Anchorages. All anchorages shall be approved cast anchorages complying

with the requirements of BS 5557 or approved equivalent specifications and capable of
securing the permanent type anchoring device. All anchorages and couplers for post-
tensioning shall be capable of holding the prestressing steel at a load producing a stress
of not less than ninety-five (95) percent of the specified ultimate tensile strength of the
prestressing steel. The coupling of tendons shall not reduce the elongation at rupture
below the requirements of the tendon itself. Couplers and coupler components shall be
enclosed in housings long enough to permit necessary movements. Couplers for tendons
shall be used only at locations specifically indicated or approved by the Engineer.

Couplers shall not be used as points of sharp tendon curvature.

Anchorage devices shall have a minimum clear concrete or grout coverage of fifty (50)
millimeters in every direction. Alternate corrosion protection methods for anchorages shall
be shown on the shop drawings submitted by the Contractor.

The prestressing force shall be effectively distributed to the concrete by means of an

approved anchoring device. Any allowance for draw-in of the tendon during anchoring
shall be in accordance with the Engineer's instructions, and the actual slip occurring shall
be recorded for each individual anchorage.

When headed wires are used, the outside edge of any hold for any prestressing wire,
through a stressing washer or through an unthreaded bearing ring or plate, shall not be
less than six (6) millimeters from the root of the thread of the washer or from the edge of
the ring or plate.

If loop tendon anchorages are used, they shall be enclosed in ducts for their entire
length.

5.04.3.6 Grout. The Grout shall conform to the following requirements:

- Portland Cement Conforming to ASTM C 150, Type 1 and Water conforming to

MRDTM 514.
- Maximum water cement ratio: 0.45
- Initial Set of 3.5 MPa with a 161 mm2 probe according to AASHTO T 197.
- Minimum compressive strength per AASHTO T 106.
o Three days: 23 MPa
o Seven days: 30 MPa
o Twenty-eight days: 35 MPa

86
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

The grout shall be mixed for a minimum of two minutes and until a uniform consistency
is obtained. The pumpability of the grout shall be determined in accordance with the US
Corp of Engineers Method ASTM C 939. The efflux time of the grout sample immediately
after mixing shall not be less than eleven (11) seconds. The flow cone test does not apply
to grout which incorporates a thixotropic additive.

Admixtures, if used, should impart the properties of low water content, good flowability,
minimum bleed and expansion if desired. Its formulation should contain no chemicals in
quantities that may have harmful effect on the prestressing steel or cement. Admixtures
containing chlorides (as C1 in excess of 0.5% by weight of admixture), fluorides, sulfites
and nitrates shall not be used.

Aluminum powder of the proper fineness and quantity or other approved gas evolving
material which is well dispersed through the other admixture may be used to obtain five
(5) to ten (10) percent unrestrained expansion of the grout.

All admixtures should be used in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer.

5.04.4 EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall conform to the requirements specified in the

Contractor's Program of Work as approved by the Engineer.

Equipment for effectively distributing the load from anchoring devices to the concrete
shall be such that the final unit compressive stress on the concrete directly underneath the
plate or assembly does not exceed twenty (20) MPa.

Jacks used to stress tendons shall be equipped with either a pressure gauge or a load
cell for determining the jacking stress.

1. The pressure gauge shall have an accurately reading dial at least one hundred fifty
(150) millimeters in diameter and each jack and its gauge shall be calibrated as a unit with
the cylinder extension in the approximate position that it will be at final jacking force, and
shall be accompanied by a certified calibration chart.

2. The load cell shall be calibrated and shall be provided with an indicator by means
of which the prestressing force in the tendon may be determined. The range of the load
cell shall be such that the lower ten percent (10%) of the manufacturer's rated capacity will
not be used in determining the jacking stress.

Grouting equipment shall be capable at a pressure of at least seven (7) kilograms per
square centimeter (0.669 MPa). Grouting equipment shall be furnished with a pressure
gauge having a full-scale reading of not more than twenty (20) kilograms per square
centimeter (2.07 MPa). Reciprocating pumps or equipment that produces a pulsating flow
shall not be used. Grouting equipment shall be thoroughly washed with clean water at
least once every three (3) hours during the grouting operations and at the end of use each
day. Unless waived by the Engineer, a complete grouting plant for immediate use in case
of emergency or breakdown of the equipment in operation shall be available on stand-by.

87
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

When vents are required, standby flushing equipment capable of developing a pumping
Table of Contents

pressure of eighteen (18) kilograms per square centimeter and/or sufficient capacity to
flush out any partially grouted ducts shall be provided.

Grout injection pipes shall be fitted with positive mechanical shutoff valves. Vents and
ejection pipes shall be fitted with valves capable of withstanding the pumping pressure.

5.04.5 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES. Contractor Quality Control

Procedures shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 5.01.8, "Contractor Quality
Control Procedures" in these General Specifications. Contractor Process Control
Sampling and Testing of prestressing bars and wires shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM A 416 and A 421 and as follows:

1. Samples from each size and each heat of prestressing bars, from each
manufactured reel of prestressing steel strand, from each coil of prestressing wire and
from each lot of anchorage assemblies and bar couplers to be used shall be furnished and
tested by a testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. With each sample of
prestressing steel wires, bars or strands furnished for testing, there shall be submitted a
certification stating the manufacturer's minimum guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of
the sample furnished.

2. All materials for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The
Contractor shall have no claim for additional compensation in the event his work is delayed
awaiting approval of the materials furnished for testing.

3. All bars of each size from each mill heat, all wire from each coil, and all strand from
each manufactured reel to be shipped to the site shall be assigned an individual lot
number and shall be tagged in such a manner that each such lot can be accurately
identified at the job site. Each lot of anchorage assemblies and bar couplers to be
installed at the site shall be likewise identified. All unidentified prestressing steel,
anchorage assemblies or bar couplers received by the site will be rejected.

4. The following sample materials and tendons, selected by the Engineer from the
prestressing steel at the plant site, shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Engineer for
check testing well in advance of anticipated use:

(1) For wire or bars, one two (2) meters long sample and for strand, one one and
five tenths (1.5) meters long sample of each size shall be furnished for each heat or reel.

(2) If the prestressing tendon is a bar, one two (2) meters long length shall be
furnished and in addition, if couplers are to be used with the bar, two one (1) meter lengths
of bar equipped with one coupler and fabricated to fit the coupler shall be furnished.

5. For prefabricated tendons, the Contractor shall give the Engineer at least ten (10)
days notice before commencing the installation of end fittings or the heading of the wires.
The Engineer will inspect end fitting installations and wire headings while such fabrication
is in progress at the plant and will approve the required testing of the materials before they
are shipped to the site.

88
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

6. No prefabricated tendon shall be shipped to the site without first having been released
by the Engineer, and each tendon shall be tagged before shipment for identification
purposes at the site. All unidentified tendons received at the site will be rejected.

7. The release of any material by the Engineer shall not preclude subsequent rejection
if the material is damaged in transit or later damaged or found to be defective.

5.04.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING. All prestressing steel shall be protected against
physical damage and rust or other results of corrosion at all times from manufacture to
grouting or encasing in concrete. Prestressing steel that has sustained physical damage
at any time shall be rejected. The development of visible rust or other results of corrosion
shall be cause for rejection, when ordered by the Engineer.

Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or shipping forms for the protection
of the steel against physical damage and corrosion during shipping and storage. A
corrosion inhibitor which prevents rust or other results of corrosion shall be placed in a
corrosion inhibitor carrier type packing material, or when permitted by the Engineer, may
be applied directly to the steel. The corrosion inhibitor shall have no deleterious effect on
the steel or concrete or bond strength of steel to concrete. Packaging or forms damaged
from any cause shall be immediately replaced or restored to original condition.

The shipping package or form shall be clearly marked with a statement that package
contains high-strength prestressing steel, and the type of corrosion inhibitor used,
including the date packed.

Prestressing steel for post-tensioning which is installed in members prior to placing and
curing of the concrete, shall be continuously protected against rust or other corrosion, until
grouted, by means of a corrosion inhibitor placed in the ducts or applied to the steel in the
duct. The corrosion inhibitor shall conform to the requirements specified herein.

Precast prestressed members shall be transported in an upright position, and points of

support and directions of the reactions with respect to the girders should be approximately
the same during transportation and storage as when the member is in its final position.
In the event that the Contractor deems it expedient to transport or store members in other
than this position, it shall be done at his own risk.

Care shall be taken during storage, hoisting, and handling of the precast units to prevent
cracking or damage. Units damaged by improper storing or handling shall be replaced by
the Contractor at his expense.

5.04.7 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.04.7.1 Formwork. Formwork and casting beds shall be designed to withstand all
pressure due to compaction of concrete and also all stressing induced during prestressing
operations. The forms shall be constructed such that shortening of member during
prestressing shall be permitted and resistance to relative movement of member shall be
minimized. Side and bottom surface forms shall be constructed without joints or with joints

89
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

smooth and flush with the surface. The requirements in these General Specifications shall
Table of Contents

also apply.

All exposed edges shall be chamfered and chamfer strips secured in place to prevent
movement during subsequent operations.

All forms shall be thoroughly coated with form release agent prior to each casting. The
reinforcing steel shall not be contaminated by form release agent.

5.04.7.2 Shoring. Adequate shores, shoreheads, rakers, trusses and other suitable
form supports shall be provided as necessary to prevent deflection of forms and non-
prestressed members.

Shoring or form supports shall not be removed until sufficient prestressing has been
applied enabling the member to carry all dead loads including forms, and all anticipated
construction loads.

5.04.7.3 Concrete and Reinforcement. All work involving concrete and reinforcement
shall be carried out in accordance with Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" and Section
5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications or as shown on the drawings.

Concrete shall not be placed in the forms until the placing of reinforcement, conduits,
anchorages, and prestressing steel has been inspected and approved by the Engineer.

5.04.7.4 Prestressing Steel. Prestressing steel for pretensioning which is installed in

members prior to placing and curing of the concrete, may be continuously protected
against rust or other corrosion, until grouted, by means of a corrosion inhibitor placed in
the ducts or applied to the steel in the duct. The corrosion inhibitor shall conform to the
requirements specified herein.

Any time acceptable prestressing steel for pretensioning is placed in the stressing bed
and is exposed to the elements for more than thirty-six (36) hours prior to encasement in
concrete, adequate measures shall be taken by the Contractor, as approved by the
Engineer, to protect said steel from contamination or corrosion.

When steam curing is used, prestressing steel for post-tensioning shall not be installed
until the steam curing is completed.

When acceptable prestressing steel for post-tensioning is installed in the ducts after
completion of concrete curing, and if stressing and grouting are completed within ten (10)
days after the installation of the prestressing steel, rust which may form during said ten
(10) days will not be cause for rejection of the steel. Prestressing steel installed, tensioned
and grouted in this manner, all within ten (10) days, will not require the use of a corrosion
inhibitor in the duct following installation of the prestressing steel. Prestressing steel
installed as above but not grouted within ten (10) days shall be subject to all the
requirements in this Specification pertaining to corrosion protection and rejection because
of rust.

90
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Whenever electric welding is performed on or near members containing prestressing

Table of Contents

steel, the welding ground shall be attached directly to the steel being welded.

5.04.7.5 Anchoring Devices and Load Distribution. The load from the anchoring
device shall be distributed to the concrete by means of apparatus that will effectively
distribute the load to the concrete. Such approved devices shall conform to the following
requirements:

1. The final unit compressive stress on the concrete directly underneath the anchoring
plate or assembly shall not exceed two hundred (200) kilograms per square centimeter but
shall also not exceed ninety (90) percent of the ultimate strength of the concrete at time
of post-tensioning.

2. Bending stresses in the anchoring plates or assemblies induced by the pull of the
prestressing steel shall not exceed the yield point of the material or cause visible distortion
in the anchorage plate when one hundred percent (100%) of the ultimate load is applied
as determined by the Engineer. Should the Contractor elect to furnish an anchoring
device of a type which is sufficiently large and which is used in conjunction with a steel
grillage embedded in concrete that effectively distributes the compressive stresses to the
concrete, the steel distribution plates or assemblies may be omitted.

Where the end of a post-tensioned assembly will not be covered by concrete, the
anchoring device shall be recessed so that the ends of the prestressing steel and all parts
of the anchoring devices will be at least fifty (50) millimeters inside of the end surface of
the members, unless a greater embedment is shown on the plans. Following post-
tensioning, the recesses shall be filled with concrete conforming to the requirements for
the structure and finished flush.

5.04.7.6 Ducts. Ducts enclosures for prestressing steel shall be accurately placed at
the locations shown on the plans or approved by the Engineer and securely fastened in
place to prevent movement.

After installation in the forms, the ends of ducts shall at all times be covered as
necessary to prevent the entry of water or debris. If prestressing steel is to be installed
after the concrete has been placed, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction
of the Engineer that the ducts are free of water and debris immediately prior to installation
of the steel.

All ducts over one hundred twenty-two (122) meters long shall have vents placed within
one and eight-tenths (1.8) meters of the high points in the duct profile so that spacing of
vents does not exceed one hundred twenty-two (122) meters. Vents shall be thirteen (13)
millimeters minimum diameter standard pipe or suitable plastic pipe. Connections to ducts
shall be made with metallic or plastic structural fasteners. Plastic components, if selected,
shall not react with the concrete or enhance corrosion of the prestressing steel, and shall
be free of water soluble chlorides. The vents shall be mortar tight, taped as necessary,
and shall provide means for injection of grout through the vents and for sealing the vents.
Ends of vents shall be removed twenty (20) millimeters below the roadway surface after
grouting has been completed.

91
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.04.7.7 Pretensioning Procedures. All prestressing steel shall be pretensioned by

means of hydraulic jacks so that the force in the prestressing steel shall be not less than
the value shown on the plans.

Unless otherwise specified or shown on the plans, the average working stress in the
prestressing steel shall not exceed eighty percent (80%) of the specified minimum yield
point stress of the prestressing steel. The maximum temporary tensile stress (jacking
stress) in prestressing steel shall not exceed ninety percent (90%) of the specified
minimum yield point stress of the prestressing steel. The prestressing steel shall be
anchored at stresses (initial stress) that will result in the ultimate retention of working
forces of not less than those shown on the plans, but in no case shall the initial stress
exceed seventy percent (70%) strength of the prestressing steel.

Working force and working stress will be considered as the force and stress remaining
in the prestressing steel after all losses, including creep and shrinkage of concrete, elastic
compression of concrete, creep of steel, losses in post-tensioned prestressing steel due
to sequence of stressing, friction and take up of anchorages, and all other losses peculiar
to the method or system of prestressing have taken place or have been provided for.

Prior to construction, the Contractor shall submit calculations to check concrete stresses
based upon the approved system of prestressing and anchorage for approval.

The formula and friction coefficient used in calculating friction losses in tendons shall be
in accordance with AASHTO specification, subject to approval.

5.04.7.8 Post-Tensioning Equipment and Procedures. The post-tensioning process

as applied to post-tensioned members shall be so conducted that tension being applied
and the elongation of the prestressing steel may be measured at all times.

Prior to placing of forms for closing slabs of box girder cells, the Contractor shall
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that either the prestressing steel is free
and unbonded in the duct, or, if prestressing steel has not yet been placed, that all ducts
are unobstructed.

Prior to post-tensioning any member, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction
of the Engineer that the prestressing steel is free and unbonded in the duct.

Post-tensioning forces shall not be applied to cast-in-place concrete until at least ten
(10) days after the last concrete has been placed in the member to be post-tensioned and
until the concrete complies with one of the following requirements:

1 . When the concrete is designated by compressive strength, the concrete

compressive strength shall have reached the strength shown on the plans at the time of
post-tensioning.

2. At least twenty-eight (28) days shall have elapsed since the last concrete to be post-
tensioned has been placed.

92
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, the tendons in continuous post-tensioned

members shall be tensioned by jacking at each end of the tendon.

For patented prestressing systems, the manufacturer's procedure and instruction shall
be strictly complied with.

Tensioning shall be done with approved jacking equipment. Hydraulic jacks shall be
equipped with accurate pressure gauges at least one hundred fifty (150) millimeters in
diameter. The combination of jack and gauge shall have been calibrated within the last
twelve (12) months. A certified calibration chart, graph, or table showing this calibration
of the jack and gauge combination shall be furnished to the Engineer. The range of
calibrations must encompass the range of required forces indicated on the shop plans.
The jacking equipment shall be capable of simultaneously stressing all wire, strands, or
bars for each individual tendon, unless otherwise approved.

Tendons shall be stressed in accordance with the approved sequence as indicated on

the approved shop drawings. If the Contractor chooses to deviate from the approved
sequence, the Contractor shall resubmit the shop drawings for approval. The sequence
shall not cause stresses in excess of the maximum allowable stresses shown on the plans.

Tendons shall be preloaded to twenty percent (20%) of their total jacking force.
Accessible dead end anchors shall be inspected by the Engineer for adequacy before
completing the post-tensioning of the tendon.

The following procedure shall apply to groups of similar tendons. (The same duct type,
the same prestressing steel size, similar path, and similar length.)

After the first three (3) tendons are pulled to the jack force stipulated on the approved
shop drawings, stressing shall stop until an evaluation of jacking forces and elongations
can be completed by the Engineer as described herein. The actual measurable
elongations from these first three (3) tendons are to be compared to the calculated
measurable elongations. If the three (3) actual measurable elongations are not within
eight percent (8%) of the calculated measurable elongations, the tensioning shall be
stopped and the tendons and elongations shall be evaluated by the Engineer. If each of
the actual measured elongations is within eight percent (8%) of its calculated measurable
elongation, the following procedures shall apply:

(1) Determine the following factor:

5/8 + 1/8 Tendon 1 AE + 1/8 Tendon 2 AE + 1/8 Tendon 3 AE

Tendon 1 CE Tendon 2 CE Tendon 3 CE

Where "AE" is the actual measured elongation observed in the field and "CE" is the
calculated measurable elongation for each tendon. This factor multiplied by the calculated
measurable elongations for the tendons remaining to be tensioned will be the new base
elongations for the remainder of the member tensioning.

93
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

(2) Acceptance of any remaining tendon will be made if that tendon elongation is within
Table of Contents

five percent (5%) of the new base elongation at the required jacking force.

(3) If a tendon's measurable elongation is five percent (5%) more than that of the new
base elongation, then the tendon will be evaluated and will be subject to rejection.

(4) If a tendon's measurable elongation is less than the new base elongation by more
than five percent (5%), the tendon may be overjacked to eighty percent (80%) of its
ultimate strength, and it may be jacked from either end. If this yields an elongation within
five percent (5%) of the new base elongation, the tendon will be accepted; otherwise it will
be evaluated and will be subject to rejection.

A broken or damaged strand is cause for rejection of the tendon. If rejected, the strands
in the tendon will be evaluated by the Engineer for reuse.

Where dead end anchorages and tendons are accessible, the anchorage system and
length of projecting prestressing steel shall permit jacking with the same jacking equipment
that was used on the live end.

Tendon projections at the live end and accessible dead ends shall not be cut off until all
post-tensioning is completed and accepted.

The use of water soluble oil is an accepted method for loosening bound tendons.

The Contractor shall keep full and detailed record of all tensioning operations, including
the measured elongations, pressure gauge or load cell readings and the amount of pull-in
at each anchorage. Copies of these records shall be submitted to the Engineer within
twenty-four (24) hours of each tensioning operation.

5.04.7.9 Bonding and Grouting. Post-tensioned prestressing steel shall be bonded

to the concrete by completely filling the entire void space between the duct and the tendon
with grout carried out not sooner than two (2) hours and not later than forty-eight (48)
hours after completion of the stressing operations and in accordance with Section
10.4.2.2.1 in the AASHTO Bridge Standard Specifications Division II - Construction
(Protection of Steel After Installation).

Grout shall consist of Portland cement and water, and may contain an admixture if
approved by the Engineer.

Water shall be first added to the mixer followed by cement and admixture. The grout
shall be mixed in mechanical mixing equipment of a type that will produce uniform and
thoroughly mixed grout. Retempering of grout will not be permitted. Grout shall be
continuously agitated until it is pumped.

The quality of the grout shall be approved by the Engineer. The efflux time of a grout
sample immediately after mixing shall not be less than eleven (11) seconds.

Grouting equipment shall be furnished with a pressure gage having a full-scale reading

94
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

of not more than twenty (20) kilograms per square centimeter.

Table of Contents

Standby flushing equipment capable of developing a water pumping pressure of fifteen

(15) kilograms per square centimeter and of sufficient capacity to flush out any partially
grouted ducts shall be provided.

All ducts shall be clean and free of water and deleterious materials that would impair
bonding of the grout or interfere with grouting procedures.

All grout shall pass through a two (2) millimeter (No. 10) sieve prior to being introduced
into the grout pump.

Grout injection pipes shall be fitted with positive mechanical shutoff valves. Vents and
ejection pipes shall be fitted with valves capable of withstanding the pumping pressures.

Leakage of grout through the anchorage assembly shall be prevented by positive

mechanical means.

Grout shall be pumped through the duct and continuously wasted at the outlet until no
visible slugs or other evidence of water or air are ejected and the efflux time of ejected
grout is not less than eleven (11) seconds. The outlet valve shall then be closed and the
pumping pressure held for a minimum of ten (10) seconds. The valve at the inlet shall
then be closed while maintaining this pressure. Valves shall not be removed or opened
until the grout has set.

When hot weather conditions would contribute to quick stiffening of the grout, the grout
shall be cooled by approved methods as necessary to prevent blockages during pumping
operations.

When temperatures below two degrees Celsius (2 o C.) will prevail during and following
the placement of grout, the Contractor shall provide adequate means to protect the grout
in the ducts from damage by freezing or other causes.

The surfaces of concrete against which concrete encasement over anchorage

assemblies is to be placed shall be abrasive blast cleaned and clean aggregate exposed
after grouting of the ducts has been completed.

Vents shall be sealed consecutively in the direction of flow and the injection tube shall
be sealed under pressure until the grout has set. The filled ducts shall be protected to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, to ensure that they are not subjected to shock or vibration for
one day and that the temperature of the grout in them does not fall below three (3)
degrees Celsius (3 C) for at least three (3) days after its injection. Two days after
grouting, the level of grout in the injection and vent tubes shall be inspected and made
good, if necessary.

The Contractor shall keep full and detailed records of grouting, including the date each
duct was grouted, the proportion of the grout and any admixtures used, the pressure,
details of any interruptions and topping up required. Copies of these records shall be

95
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

submitted to the Engineer within three (3) days of grouting.

Table of Contents

Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide facilities and attendance
for the radiographic testing of ducts.

5.04.7.10 Workmanship. Pretensioned & Post-tensioned Members. The following

Table 5.04.1 contains dimension tolerances that will be used by the Engineer as a guide
for acceptance of pretensioned and post-tensioned members. The Contractor shall make
every effort to furnish acceptable members of uniform high quality that are within these
dimensional tolerances. Any member not within these tolerances is subject to rejection
depending on the effect of the deficiency on the structural adequacy and visual quality of
the member in the completed structure as determined by the Engineer.

TABLE 5.04-1
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBER TOLERANCES

Description Tolerance
I Box Beams & Slab Units
Length +/- 19 mm
Width (overall) +/- 6 mm
Depth (overall) +/- 6 mm
Depth (top flange) +/- 13 mm
Depth (bottom flange) +/- 13 mm
Width (web) +/- 10 mm
Sweep (1)
Up to 40 ft. (12 m) member length +/- 6 mm
40 to 60 ft. (12 to 18 m) member length +/- 10 mm
Greater than 60 ft. (18 m) member length +/- 13 mm
Variation from end squareness or skew +/- 10 mm
Horizontal +/- 13 mm, max.
Vertical +/- 13 mm
Camber variation from design camber +/- 3.1 mm/3 m
+/- 13 mm, max.
Differential camber between adjacent members of the 0.75 inch max.
same design (6.2 mm/3 m, 19 mm
max.)
Position of Strands:
Individual +/- 6 mm
Bundled +/- 6 mm
Position from design location of deflection points for +/- 510 mm
deflected strands

96
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Description Tolerance
Position of plates other than bearing plates +/- 25 mm
Tipping and flushness of plates +/- 6 mm
Position of inserts for structural connections +/- 13 mm
Position of handling devices:
Parallel to length +/- 150 mm
Transverse to length +/- 25 mm

(1)
Variation from straight line parallel to centerline of member.

TABLE 5.04-1
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBER TOLERANCES

Description Tolerance
I Beams-
Length +/- 8 mm/m, +/- 25 mm max.
Width (overall) +/- 10 mm, 6 mm
Depth (overall) +13 mm, 6 mm
Depth (flanges) - 6 mm
Width (web) +10 mm, - 6 mm
Sweep(1) 3.1 mm/3 m
Variation from end squareness of skew +/- 16 mm/m, +/ 25 mm max.
Camber variation from design camber +/- 3.1 mm/3m
+/- 13 mm, max. 24 m length
+/- 25 mm, max. over 24 m length
Position of strands:
Individual +/- 6 mm - bundled
Bundled +/- 13 mm
Position from design location of +/- 510 mm
deflection points for deflected strands
Position of plates other than bearing +/- 25 mm
plates
Position of bearing plates +/- 16 mm
Tipping and flushness of plates +/- 6 mm
Tipping and flushness of bearing plates +/- 3 mm
Position of inserts for structural +/- 13 mm

97
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Description Tolerance
connections
Position of handling devices:
Parallel to length +/- 150 mm
Transverse to length +/- 25 mm
Position of stirrups:
Longitudinal spacing +/- 50 mm
Projection above top +/- 19 mm
Local smoothness (2) +/- 6 mm in 3 m any surface

(1) Variation from straight line parallel to centerline of member.

(2) Does not apply to top surface left rough to receive a topping or to visually concealed
surfaces.

TABLE 5.04-1
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE MEMBER TOLERANCES

Description Tolerance
I Box Beams and Slab Units -
Position of stirrups:
Longitudinal spacing +/- 25 mm
Projection above top +/- 6 mm, -19 mm
Tipping of beam seat bearing area +/- 3 mm
Position of dowel tubes +/- 16 mm
Position of tie rod tubes:
Parallel to length +/- 13 mm
Vertical +/- 10 mm
Position of slab void:
End of void to center of tie hole +/- 13 mm
Adjacent to end block +/- 25 mm
Local smoothness (1) +/- 6 mm in 3 m any surface
Post-Tension Members-

Position of post tensioning ducts +/- 6 mm

Position of tendon anchorage bearing +/- 6 mm
plates
(1)
Does not apply to top surface left rough to receive a topping or to visually concealed
surfaces.

98
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.04.8 SEGMENTAL BRIDGE DECK CONSTRUCTION. Where bridge decks are pre-
cast in segments and assembled in position for gluing and stressing, the Contractor shall
satisfy the Engineer that his proposed construction method will achieve the required
standard of workmanship and finish in the time available. Wherever match-casting of
segments is required this shall be obtained by the use of long-line method. The length of
the forms to achieve a satisfactory long-line system of match casting shall be approved
by the Engineer. The Contractor is required to submit details of all his forms, falsework,
and pre-casting factory, and his method of lifting, transporting, assembling, supporting,
threading cables, gluing, and stressing the pre-cast units before commencement of any
work for the approval of the Engineer.

5.04.8.1 Epoxy Adhesives in Segmental Bridge Deck Construction.

5.04.8.1.1 Epoxy Adhesive Suppliers. The epoxy resin adhesive shall be supplied
by an approved manufacturer. It shall be made up and packaged by approved formulators
and comply with the requirements of AASHTO M235 for Type VI epoxy resin adhesive or
meet the compression shear and flexure tests as outlined in this Paragraph.

The material shall be supplied in accurately measured packs with the pack containing
the hardener clearly distinguished by both size and labeling. The pack containing the resin
shall be large enough to permit the addition of the hardener. Resin and hardener shall be
pigmented with dissimilar colors to indicate when even mixing has been completely
attained and to produce an even gray color to match the concrete.

Each batch of resin mixed shall be tested for setting by compression and shear tests
as described below or in AASHTO M235. No permanent prestress shall be applied to a
joint until the epoxy has achieved the required strength. Should these tests show that the
resin is not setting the joint should be broken and the resin removed. Set resin shall be
removed by grit blasting.

Further tests may be requested by the Engineer at various times to ensure that the
material as mixed is complying with the Specification.

All the instructions of the manufacturer and/or the formulator shall be submitted to the
Engineer for agreement. Such agreed instructions shall be adhered to in all respects.

The supplier shall carry out a program of testing to verify the acceptability and
compatibility of epoxy Bonding Agents for segmental construction after consultation with
the Engineer on the range of temperatures and work cycles that are to be considered in
the tests. The Engineer may require the tests to be witnessed either in person or by an
approved independent authority.

5.04.8.1.2 Flexure and Compression Test Specimens. Six (6) test specimens shall
be cast for each joint which shall measure forty by forty by one hundred sixty (40 X 40 X
160) millimeters. The Contractor shall carry out flexure and compression tests at six (6)
hours as described below. The cost of these samples and tests will be deemed to be
included in the rates.

99
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.04.8.1.3 Flexure Strength Test. The specimens described above are to be

supported at a distance of one hundred (100) millimeters and a single load applied to the
center until failure occurs (Test in accordance with DIN 1164). The load is increased at
the rate of one (1) km/5 sec.

5.04.8.1.4 Compression Strength Test. Prisms of forty by forty by eighty (40 X 40

X 80) millimeters which have passed the flexure strength test are used to determine the
compressive strength. The surface area of the punches shall be forty by forty (40 X 40)
millimeters. The loading speed shall be ten (10) km/5 sec.

5.04.8.1.5 Shear Test. Test with lapped metal strips of agreed dimensions. The
Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing in advance the name of the Engineer who
will be supervising the mixing and application of the epoxy resin. Containers which are
opened or mixes made without the presence of the Engineer will be rejected.

Mixing shall be carried out in a mechanical mixer and shall continue until a uniform
color is achieved. A continuous check shall be kept on the temperature of the mix.

Any constituent which has exceeded its shelf life will be rejected.

5.04.8.1.6 Surface Preparation. The interfaces of the units shall be lightly grit
blasted before erection to remove laitance. Before applying epoxy the interfaces must be
clean and free from laitance or any bond breaking material. Any oil or grease which may
be harmful shall be removed. The surface shall have no free moisture.

5.04.8.1.7 Application of Epoxy. Application shall begin immediately as or after a

batch has been mixed. Application shall be to both interfaces to a nominal thickness of
two (2) millimeters with a spatula or by hand. No epoxy may be applied after the specified
pot life. Epoxy is not to be applied within twenty-five (25) millimeters of any duct.

5.04.8.1.8 Preliminary Prestress. Immediately after the interfaces are covered (or
coated) with epoxy, the unit shall be brought into position and the preliminary prestress
applied. This preliminary prestress is to be just sufficient to start squeezing epoxy resin
out of the joint. The amount of prestress required will depend on the formulation of resin
chosen by the Contractor. If this operation is not completed within the contract time of the
first batch of epoxy to be applied, the units shall be moved apart. All the epoxy on both
interfaces shall be removed with spatulas and an approved solvent. No epoxy may be
applied to the joint until twenty-four (24) hours after a solvent has been used. The contact
time shall be reckoned from the end of the pot life unless the manufacturer's instructions
direct otherwise. All excess epoxy shall be cleaned off from the outer faces of the webs
and the soffit in such a way as not to smear the concrete face.

5.04.8.1.9 Records of Jointing. The Contractor shall keep a record of each joint with
the following details:

- Joint Number
- Date and Time of jointing

100
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents - Batch number of resin and hardener

- Weather conditions (temperature and humidity) continuously recorded
- Results of tests

5.04.9 COMPOSITE SLAB CONSTRUCTION. Where in-situ concrete deck is cast to act
compositely with pre-cast beams, the beams shall be installed to correct line and level,
starting from the outer most beam and working inward progressively. When the beams
are laid side-by-side just before erection, the difference in soffit level between beams shall
nowhere exceed six (6) millimeters. Where permanent soffit shutter are used, they shall
be to the approval of the Engineer and they shall be fixed securely so that there is no
movement or grout loss during deck concreting.

The in-situ concrete deck over any one span shall be poured in one continuous
operation and shall be placed in such a sequence that the advancing edge of the freshly
deposited concrete over the full width of deck or between longitudinal construction joints
is approximately parallel to the deck supports. Lateral displacement of beams shall be
prevented during the placing of in-situ concrete.

5.04.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Quality assurance procedures used

on prestressed concrete structures shall be in accordance with Subsection 5.01.9, "Quality
Assurance Procedures" in these General Specifications. Unless otherwise stated in the
Special Specifications the lot size will be each unit of precast, pretensioned concrete
members. The concrete in cast-in-place prestressed concrete structures shall be sampled
and tested in accordance with Subsection 5.01.3, "Concrete Structures," in these General
Specifications.

Quality assurance sampling and testing of the prestressing wires, bars and tendons shall
be in accordance with Subsection 1.08.2, "Visual Inspection” and Subsection 1.08.3,
"Certification of Compliance" of these General Specifications. Quality assurance sampling
and testing of prestressed concrete structure construction shall be in accordance with
Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

5.04.11 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Unsolicited test panels made by the Contractor

for his own purposes to determine the suitability of the form, form-liner, mold oil or any
other parameter that affects the concrete finish, texture and color shall not be measured
for payment.

Satisfactory and accepted test panels ordered by the Engineer shall be measured for
payment as indicated in the Bill of Quantities for the appropriate structural element and
class of concrete.

Accepted test samples carried out on site and exhibited throughout the duration of the
Works shall be measured for payment as indicated in the Bill of Quantities for the
appropriate structural element and class of concrete.

Blinding concrete shall not be measured separately, but shall be considered subsidiary
to the items listed in the Bill of Quantities.

101
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Prestressing steel shall be measured by the theoretical number of metric tons complete
Table of Contents

in place as shown on the plans or placed as ordered in writing by the Engineer. No

measurement shall be made of unauthorized work as specified in Subsection 1.07.6 -
"Unauthorized Work" in these General Specifications. No measurement shall be made of
excess tendon lengths required for threading or stressing, of grout or grouting, and of
concreting of anchorage pockets. Cable ducts, sheaths, supports, anchorages, couplers,
joints, and all testing required in connection with this Work including tensioning or
retensioning, shall not be measured separately. All of the items listed as above shall be
considered subsidiary to prestressing steel.

Precast or cast-in-place prestressed concrete for bridge superstructure shall be

measured by the cubic meter of the several pay items, complete in place and accepted.
Measurements shall be based on the dimensions as shown on the plans or as otherwise
directed and authorized by the Engineer. No deductions will be made for the volume
occupied by ducts, sheaths, drainage system components, or any other embedded item.
No measurement will be made of unauthorized areas or for extra thickness as specified
in Subsection 1.07.6 - "Unauthorized Work" in these General Specifications. This item
shall include the furnishing of all materials, formwork, and the placing, finishing, and curing
of the concrete as specified or directed. Reinforcing steel and/or structural steel used in
this item of Work shall be measured and will be paid for as specified in other Sections of
the Specifications and as specified in the Bill of Quantities.

5.04.12 PAYMENT. All completed and accepted Work will be paid for at the contract unit
price(s) for the items in the Bill of Quantities, measured in accordance with Subsection
5.04.11, “Method of Measurement”, in these General Specifications.

The amount of completed and accepted Work for prestressing steel, measured as
above, will be paid for at the unit price bid per metric ton for prestressing steel appearing
in the Bill of Quantities, which price will be considered full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials, for all labor, equipment, tools, supplies and all other items necessary
for the proper completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 - "Scope of
Payment" in these General Specifications.

The amount of completed and accepted Work for precast or cast-in-place prestressed
concrete for bridge superstructures, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the
corresponding contract unit price(s) per cubic meter for the several pay items as specified
in the Bill of Quantities, which price(s) shall be full compensation for furnishing, quarrying,
preparing, transporting, delivering, mixing and placing all materials, including forms and
falsework, for all labor, equipment, tools and all other items necessary for the proper
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 - "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

102
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

50401 Prestressing Steel Ton

50402 Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Members Cubic Meter

5040201 Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Members, I-Beam, Standard Type Cubic Meter

5040202 Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Member, Slab, Standard Type Cubic Meter
Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Member, Box Beam, Standard
5040203 Cubic Meter
Type
5040204 Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Member, ____, Standard Type Cubic Meter

50403 Cast-in-Place Prestressed Concrete Structural Members Cubic Meter

103
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 5.05 - STEEL STRUCTURES AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK

5.05.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall include all structural steel and castings used in
structures, and all metals, ferrous and nonferrous, except reinforcing bars which are
specified in Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications. Fabrication
and construction shall be in accordance with the specifications and in conformity with the
lines, grades, dimensions and design shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Structural Steel, Furnished, Fabricated and Erected
Aluminum Bridge Railing
Steel Bridge Railing

5.05.2 MATERIALS. Except as otherwise called for herein or shown on the plans, the
grades and qualities shall conform to the applicable standards of AASHTO and ASTM
outlined as follows:

1. Structural Carbon Steel shall conform to AASHTO M 270, Grade 36 F for primary
bridge members, structural carbon steel shall conform to AASHTO M 270, Grade 36T. For
fracture critical bridge members, structural carbon steel shall conform to AASHTO M270,
Grade 36F.

2. Bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM A307.

3. Structural Steel for Welding and Structural Rivet Steel shall conform to AASHTO
M183.

4. High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel (HSLA) shall conform to AASHTO M 270,

Grade 50 or Grade 50W. For primary bridge members, HSLA steel shall conform to
AASHTO M270, Grade 50T or Grade 50 WT. Fracture critical welded members shall
conform to AASHTO M270, Grade 50F or 50WF.

5. High-Strength Quenched and Tempered (QT) Steel. All QT steel shall conform to
AASHTO M270, Grade 70W, Grade 100 or Grade 100W. For primary bridge members,
QT steel shall conform to AASHTO M270, Grade 70T, Grade 100T, or Grade 100WT.
Fracture critical bridge members shall conform to AASHTO M 270, Grade 70WF, Grade
100F or Grade 100WF.

6. Wrought-Iron Plates shall conform to ASTM A 42. Rolled Wrought Iron Shapes and
Bars shall conform to ASTM A207.

7. Carbon-Steel Castings shall conform to AASHTO M 102. Unless otherwise specified,

Class C1 forgings shall be furnished.

8. Carbon-Steel Castings shall conform to AASHTO M 192. Unless otherwise specified,

Class 70 shall be furnished, all as designated on the plans.

104
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

9. Gray-Iron Castings shall conform to AASHTO M 105. Unless otherwise specified,

Class No. 30B shall be furnished.

10. Malleable Iron Castings shall conform to ASTM A47 or AASHTO M 105. Unless
otherwise specified, Grade No. 35018 shall be furnished.

11. Rolled Copper-Alloy Bearing and Expansion Plates shall conform to AASHTO M
108. Unless otherwise specified, Alloy No. 1 shall be furnished.

12. High-Tensile-Strength Bolts, including nuts and washers for structural connections,
shall conform to AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges and to AASHTO
M 164 or AASHTO M 253 as specified.

Bolts shall conform to the requirements for heavy hex structural bolts or heavy hex nuts
of the ANSI Standard B18.2.1. The length of the bolts shall be such that the point of the
bolt will be flush or outside the face of the nut when completely installed.

Threads of bolts and nuts up through twenty five and four tenths (25.4) mm diameter
shall be UNC Series and for over twenty five and four tenths (25.4) mm diameter shall be
8 UN Series as specified in ANSI B1.1, and shall have Class 2A tolerance for bolts and
Class 2B tolerance for nuts. Galvanized nuts shall be tapped or chased after galvanizing.

Circular, beveled and clipped hardened washers shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM F436. Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, washers may be
clipped on one side. The clipped edge shall be not closer than 7/8 of the corresponding
bolt diameter from the center of the washer.

ASTM A325 (AASHTO M164) provides for three types of high-strength bolts. Any of
these types may be used when the structural steel is to be painted. Unless otherwise
shown on the plans or specified hereinafter, Type 1 bolts shall be used. Type 2 bolts shall
not be used when hot-dip galvanized bolts are required. Type 3 bolts, nuts and washers
shall be used when weathering steel (ASTM A242 or ASTM A588) is used. Bolts or nuts
of only one type shall be used for any one structure.

Heavy hex structural bolts manufactured to ASTM A325 are identified on the top of the
head by the legend "A325" and the manufacturer's symbol. In addition, Type 1 bolts, at
the manufacturer's option, may be marked with three radial lines one hundred twenty (120)
degrees apart. Type 2 bolts shall be marked with three radial lines sixty (60) degrees
apart. Type 3 bolts shall have the legend "A325" underlined and the manufacturer may
add other distinguishing marks indicating that the bolt is of a weathering type.

Bolts manufactured to ASTM A490 (AASHTO M253) are marked with the legend "A 490"
and the manufacturer's symbol.

Heavy hex nuts for A325 bolts are identified on at least one face by the manufacturer's
mark and the number "2" or "2H", or by three equally spaced circumferential lines, or by
the legend "D" or "DH". Heavy hex nuts for A325 Type 3 bolts shall be marked on one

105
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

face with three circumferential marks and the numeral "3", and with other distinguishing
Table of Contents

marks the manufacturer may elect to use.

Heavy hex nuts for use on A490 bolts shall be marked with the legend "2H" and the
manufacturer's mark or by the legend "DH".

Nuts may be washer-faced or double-chamfered as shown on the plans or as directed.

Washers for A325 Type 3 bolts shall be marked on one face near the outer edge with
the numeral "3", or other distinguishing marks indicating that the washer is of a weathering
type.

The markings on bearing surfaces of nuts and washers shall be depressed.

13. Steel Pipe for Metal Handrail shall conform to ASTM A 53, Grade A seamless.

14. Pins and Rollers. Fabricate pins and rollers more than two hundred twenty-nine
(229) millimeters in diameter from annealed carbon-steel forgings conforming to AASHTO
M 102, Class C or cold-finished carbon-steel shafting conforming to AASHTO M 169,
Grade 1016 to 1030 inclusive, with a minimum Rockwell Scale B hardness of eighty-five
(85). The hardness requirement may be waived if the steel develops a tensile strength of
490 kilograms per square centimeter (483 MPa) and a yield point of 252 kilograms per
square centimeter (248 MPa).

Pin threads shall conform to ANSO B1.1 Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A. Thread pin
ends with a diameter of thirty-five (35) millimeters or more with six (6) threads to each
twenty-five (25) millimeters.

15. Welded Stud Connectors. Shear connector studs shall conform to AASHTO M 169
for standard quality, cold finished, carbon steel bars. Provide the connectors according
to all subsections of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Division
II, Section 11.3.3, Welded Stud Shear Connectors.

16. Galvanized steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A 53, Type F, standard weight class
and plain ends for the designation specified in the contract.

17. Steel Grid Floors. Steel grid floors shall conform to AASHTO M 270, Grade 36 or
Grade 50W. AASHTO M 270, Grade 36 steel shall have a minimum copper content of
two-tenths percent (0.2%) unless galvanized. Galvanize steel grid floors unless painting
is specified.

18. Anchor Bolts. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, plain and threaded bars used
for anchorage purposes shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36. When high-
strength anchor bolts are designated on the plans, they shall conform to ASTM A 193-B-7.
Nuts for high-strength anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A194-2H. Threads for anchor
bolts and nuts with diameters through to twenty five and four tenths (25.4) mm inclusive,
shall be UNC Series, Class 2 fit. Threads for anchor bolts and nuts over twenty five and
four tenths (25.4) mm diameter shall be 8 UN Series, Class 2 fit.

106
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

19. Structural Steel Tubes shall conform to the physical and chemical requirements of
ASTM A500, and shall be of the Grades specified on the plans.

20. Filler Metal for welds, including electrode, flux or combination electrode and
shielding medium, shall conform to the requirements of AWS A5.1, A5.5, A5.18, A5.20,
and A5.28, as applicable to the types and grades of the connected parts and the welding
process, and shall be tested and certified as specified in the AWS Standard Specifications
for Welded Highway and Railway Bridges.

The loading, transporting and unloading of structural material shall be so conducted that
the metal will be kept clean. Material to be stored shall be placed above ground upon
platforms, skids, or other supports, and shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and other
foreign material and properly drained and protected from corrosion. Girders and beams
shall be placed upright and shored. Long members, such as columns and chords, shall
be supported on skids placed near enough together to prevent damage from deflection.

5.05.3 PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS.

5.05.3.1 Drawings (Shop Drawings, Erection Drawings and Transportation Drawings).

5.05.3.1.1 General. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval working
drawings in the form of shop drawings, erection drawings and transportation drawings for
structural steel. For initial review, six (6) sets of such drawings shall be submitted. After
review, between six (6) and twelve (12) sets, as requested by the Engineer, shall be
submitted for final approval and for use during construction.

The working drawings shall show any changes proposed in the Work, details for
connections not dimensioned on the plans, the direction of rolling of plates where specific
orientation is required, the sequence of shop and field assembly and erection, welding
sequences and procedures, the location of all butt welded splices on a layout drawing of
the entire structure, the location of any temporary supports that are to be used, and the
vertical alignment of the girder at each stage of the erection. Substantiating camber
calculations and diagrams shall be submitted with the working drawings.

Working drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of the start of the affected
Work to allow time for review by the Engineer and correction by the Contractor of the
drawings without delaying the Work. Such time shall be proportional to the complexity of
the Work, but in no case shall such time be less than six (6) weeks.

Any material ordered by the Contractor and the fabrication of any material, prior to final
approval of the drawings by the Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's risk.

5.05.3.1.2 Shop Drawings. The Contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings
which show full detailed dimensions and sizes of component parts of the structure and
details of all miscellaneous parts (such as pins, nuts, bolts, drains, weld symbols, etc.) on
shop drawings for steel structures.

107
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of ContentsWhere specific orientation of plates is required, show the direction of rolling of plates.
Cut flanges and webs of plate girders from plates so the long dimension of the girder
parallels the rolling direction.

The Contractor shall identify on the shop drawings the type and grade of each piece
that is to be made of steel and other than AASHTO M 270 Grade 36 steel.

The Contractor shall also show on the shop drawings assembly marks that are cross-
referenced to the original pieces of mill steel and their certified mill test reports.

The location of all shop welded splices shown on the shop drawings are subject to
approval. Locate all shop welded splices to avoid points of maximum tensile or fatigue
stress. Locate splices in webs at least three hundred (300) millimeters from shop splices,
butt joints in flanges, or stiffeners. Additional nondestructive tests may be required on
shop welded splices.

5.05.3.1.3 Erection Drawings. The Contractor shall submit drawings fully illustrating
the proposed method of erection. Show details of all falsework bents, bracings, guys,
dead-men, lifting devices, and attachments to the bridge members. Show the sequence
of erection, location of cranes and barges, crane capacities, location of lifting points, and
weights of bridge members. Show complete details for all anticipated phases and
conditions of erection. Calculations may be required to demonstrate that allowable
stresses are not exceeded and that member capacities and final geometry will be correct.

5.05.3.1.4 Camber Diagram. The Contractor shall furnish a camber diagram that
shows the camber at each panel point of trusses or arch ribs and at the location of field
splices and fractions of span length (1/4 points minimum) of continuous beams and girders
or rigid frames. On the camber diagram, show calculated cambers to be used in
preassembly of the structure.

5.05.3.1.5 Transportation Drawings. If required, the Contractor shall furnish

transportation drawings for approval.

The transportation drawings shall show all support points, tie-downs, temporary
stiffening trusses or beams, and any other details needed to support and brace the
member. Provide calculation sheets showing the dead load plus impact stresses induced
by the loading and transportation procedure. Use impact stresses of at least two hundred
percent (200%) of the dead load stress. Use a total load, including impact, of not less than
three hundred percent (300%) of the dead load.

The Contractor shall ship and store all members, both straight and curved, with their
webs vertical.

The approval of the drawings will cover the requirements for strength and detail only
in general, and such approval will not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for the
correctness of the drawings or for errors in fabrication or field connections.

No changes shall be made on approved drawings without the written consent of the

108
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Engineer.
Table of Contents

5.05.3.2 Inspection. Structural steel shall be inspected at the fabrication site by an

experienced, independent inspection firm engaged by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish the qualifications of the inspection firm to the
Engineer for approval along with a copy of the Contractor's agreement (contract) with that
firm. At the conclusion of fabrication, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a report
summarizing in detail all inspection activities of the approved firm during fabrication and
a certified summary of payments made to the firm for the services performed.

The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a copy of all mill orders, certified mill test
reports, and a Certificate of Compliance for all structural steel to be used in the Work.
Copies of mill orders shall be furnished at the time orders are placed with the
manufacturer. The Certificate of Compliance shall be submitted in accordance with the
provisions in Subsection 1.08.3, "Certification of Compliance" in these General
Specifications.

The inspection firm shall have free access at all times to any portion of the fabrication
site where said material is stored or where Work on said material is being performed.

Inspection at the shop is intended as a means of facilitating the Work and avoiding
errors, and it is expressly understood that it will not relieve the Contractor from any
responsibility in regard to defective material or workmanship and the necessity of replacing
defective material or doing the Work again.

The Engineer shall have the authority to reject materials or workmanship which do not
comply with the requirements of the plans or the specifications.

The acceptance of any material or finished member by the Engineer shall not bar
subsequent rejection if found defective. Rejected materials shall be replaced promptly and
rejected workmanship shall be made good, all at no expense to the Ministry.

5.05.4 FABRICATION.

5.05.4.1 Quality of Workmanship. Workmanship and finish shall be equal to the best
general practice in modern structural steel fabrication shops.

5.05.4.2 Identification of Steels. Use a system of assembly-marking individual pieces

and cutting instructions to the shop (generally by cross referencing of the assembly-marks
shown on the shop drawings with the corresponding item covered on the mill purchase
order) that maintains the identity of the original piece.

Material may be furnished from stock which can be identified by heat number and mill
test report.

During fabrication, up to the point of assembling members, show clearly and legibly the
specification of each piece of steel (other than Grade 36 steel) by writing the material
specification on the piece or using the identification color code shown in Table 5.05-1.

109
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

TABLE 5.05-1
IDENTIFICATION COLOR CODES

Grade Color
50 Green and Yellow
50W Blue and Yellow
70W Blue and Orange
100 Red
100W Red and Orange

For other steels (except Grade 36 steel) not shown in Table 5.05-2 or included in
AASHTO M160, provide information on the color code used.

Mark for grade by steel die stamping, or by a substantial firmly attached tag, pieces of
steel (other than Grade 36 steel) that before assembling into members will be subject to
fabricating operations (such as blast cleaning, galvanizing, heating for forming or painting)
which obliterate paint color code marking. Where the steel stamping method is used,
place the impressions on the thicker tension-joint member in transition joints.

The maximum allowed depth of the impression is three-tenths (0.3) millimeters. Use a
tool that will make character sizes with corresponding face radii as shown in Table 5.05-2.
Avoid impressions near edges of tensile-stressed plate members.

TABLE 5.05-2
SIZE OF STEEL DIE STAMP MARKINGS

Character Size (mm) Minimum Face Radii (mm)

3 mm 0.1 mm
5 mm 0.2 mm
6 mm 0.3 mm

Use low-stress type steel die stamps. Do not use die stamps on fracture-critical
members. If requested, furnish an affidavit certifying that throughout the fabrication
operation the identification of steel has been maintained.

Heat curving of steel girders is not allowed.

5.05.4.3 Plates and Plate Cut Edges.

5.05.4.3.1 Direction of Rolling. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, cut and
fabricate steel plates for main members and splice plates for flanges and main tension
members, not secondary members, so that the primary direction of rolling is parallel to the

110
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

direction of the principal tensile and/or compressive stresses.

Table of Contents

5.05.4.3.2 Edge Planing. Remove sheared edges on plates thicker than sixteen (16)
millimeters to a depth of six (6) millimeters beyond the original sheared edge, or beyond
any re-entrant cut produced by shearing. Fillet re-entrant cuts before cutting.

1. Oxygen Cutting. Oxygen cut structural steel according to ANSI/AASHTO/AWS

Bridge Welding Code D1.5.

2. Visual Inspection and Repair of Plate Cut Edges. Visually inspect and repair plate
cut edges. The cut edges shall conform to ANSO/AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code
D1.5.

5.05.4.3.3 Flange Plates. Furnish flange plates with either oxygen cut edges that
have the corners chamfered at least two (2) millimeters by grinding or furnish Universal Mill
plates unless oxygen cut edges are required.

5.05.4.3.4 Web Plates. Oxygen cut to the prescribed camber web plates of built-up
beams and girders, box girders and box arches. Cut sufficient extra camber into the webs
to provide for all camber losses due to welding, cutting, etc.

5.05.4.3.5 Truss Members. Prepare, by oxygen cutting, all longitudinal edges for all
plates in welded sections of truss web and chord members. Chamfer, by grinding the
edges of the corners of plates not joined by welding, at least two (2) millimeters.

5.05.4.3.6 Stiffeners and Connection Plates. Stiffeners and connection plates

welded transverse to girder webs and flanges may be furnished with sheared edges
provided the plate thickness does not exceed nineteen (19) millimeters. Universal mill
plate may be used provided its thickness does not exceed twenty-five (25) millimeters.
Furnish other stiffeners and connection plates with oxygen cut edges.

5.05.4.3.7 Lateral Gusset Plates. Oxygen cut, parallel to lines of stress, gusset
plates and other connections welded parallel to lines of stress in tension members where
the plate thickness exceeds ten (10) millimeters. Bolted lateral gusset plates may be
furnished with sheared edges provided the thickness is equal or less than nineteen (19)
millimeters.

5.05.4.3.8 Splice Plates and Gusset Plates. Furnish girder and stringer splice
plates and truss gusset plates with oxygen cut edges.

5.05.4.4 Bent Plates. The Contractor shall furnish unwelded, load-carrying, rolled-steel
plates to be bent as follows:

Take material from the stock plates such that the bent line will be at right angles to the
direction of rolling, except that cold-bent ribs for orthotropic-deck bridges may be bent with
bend lines in the direction of rolling.

Before bending, round the corners of the plates to a radius of two (2) millimeters

111
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

throughout the portion of the plate where the bending occurs.

Table of Contents

5.05.4.4.1 Cold Bending. Cold bend so that no cracking of the plate occurs. Use
the minimum bend radii shown in Table 5.05-3 measured to the concave face of the metal.

TABLE 5.05-3
MINIMUM BENDING RADII

Plate Thickness - (t) (mm) Bending Radius

< 13 2 (t)
13 to 25 2.5 (t)
25 to 38 3 (t)
38 to 64 3.5 (t)
64 to 102 4 (t)

Allow for springback of Grades 100 and 100W steels equal to about three times that
for Grade 36 steel.

5.05.4.4.2 Hot Bending. If a radius shorter than the minimum specified for cold
bending is essential, hot bend the plates at a temperature not greater than six hundred
forty nine degrees Celsius (649 C), except for Grades 100 and 100W. When Grades 100
and 100W steel plates are heated to temperatures greater than six hundred seven
degrees celsius (607 C), requench and temper according to the producing mill's standard
practice.

5.05.4.4.3 Fit of Stiffeners. Fabricate (mill, grind, or weld as shown on the plans or
as specified) end bearing stiffeners for girders and stiffeners intended as supports for
concentrated loads to provide full bearing on the flanges to which they transmit load or
from which they receive load. Fabricate intermediate stiffeners not intended to support
concentrated loads to provide a tight fit against the compression flange.

5.05.4.4.4 Abutting Joints. Mill or saw-cut abutting joints in compressive members

of trusses and columns to give a square joint and uniform bearing. The maximum allowed
opening at other joints, not required to be faced, is ten (10) millimeters.

112
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.05.4.4.5 Facing of Bearing Surfaces. Finish bearing and base plates and other
bearing surfaces that will come into contact with each other or with concrete to the ANSI
surface roughness defined in ANSI B46.1, "Surface Roughness, Waviness and Lay, Part
1," as shown in Table 5.05-4.

TABLE 5.05-4
ANSI SURFACE ROUGHNESS VALUES

Bearing Surface Surface Roughness

Value (mm)
Steel slabs 50
Heavy plates in contact in 25
shoes to be welded
Milled ends of compression 13
members, milled or ground
ends of stiffeners and fillers
Bridge rollers and rockers 6
Pins and pin holes 3
Sliding bearings 3

Machine sliding bearings that have a surface roughness greater than ANSI of two (2)
(mm) so the lay of the cut is parallel to the direction of movement.

Fabricate parts in bearing to provide a uniform even contact with the adjacent bearing
surface when assembled. Limit the maximum gap between bearing surfaces (1 mm).
Base and sole plates that are plane and true and have a surface roughness not exceeding
the above tabulated values need not to be machined, except machine sliding surfaces of
base plates.

Do not machine surfaces of fabricated members until all fabrication on that particular
assembly or subassembly is complete. Machine metal components that are to be heat
treated after heat treatment.

5.05.4.4.6 Straightening Material. If approved, straighten plates, angles, other

shapes and built-up members by methods that will not produce fracture or other damage
to the metal. Straighten distorted members by mechanical means, or, if approved, by
carefully planned procedures and supervised application of a limited amount of localized
heat. Use rigidly controlled procedures and do not exceed the temperatures specified in
Table 5.05-5 when heat straightening Grades 70W, 100 and 100W steel members.

113
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

TABLE 5.05-5
HEAT STRAIGHTENING TEMPERATURES

Material to be Straightened Maximum

Temperature
Grade 70W > 150 mm from weld 580 degrees C
Grade 70W < 150 mm from weld 480 degrees C
Grade 100 or 100W > 150 mm from weld 610 degrees C
Grade 100 or 100W < 150 mm from weld 510 degrees C

Keep parts to be heat straightened substantially free of external forces and stress,
except stresses resulting from mechanical means used in conjunction with the application
of heat.

Evidence of fracture following straightening of a bend or buckle will be cause for

rejection of the damaged piece.

5.05.4.5 Annealing and Stress Relieving. Machine, finish bore, and straighten
annealed or normalized structural members subsequent to heat treatment. Normalize and
anneal (full annealing) according to ASTM E 44. Maintain uniform temperatures
throughout the furnace during the heating and cooling so that the temperature at no two
points on the member will differ by more than fifty-six degrees Celsius (56o C.) at any one
time.

Do not anneal or normalize members of Grades 100/100W or Grade 70W steels. Stress
relieve these grades only with approval.

Record each furnace charge, identify the pieces in the charge and show the
temperatures and schedule actually used. Provide proper instruments, including recording
pyrometers, for determining at any time the temperature of members in the furnace. Make
records of the treatment operation available for approval. The maximum allowed holding
temperature for stress relieving Grades 100/100W and Grade 70W steels is six hundred
ten degrees Celsius (610o C.) five hundred eighty degrees Celsius (580 oC.), respectively.
Stress relieve members (such as bridge shoes, pedestals, or other parts that are built
up by welding sections of plate together) according to Subsection 4.4 of
ANSI/AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code D1.5.

5.05.4.6 Bolt Holes. Punch or drill all bolt holes. Material forming the parts of a
member that is composed of not more than five (5) thicknesses of metal may be punched
two (2) millimeters larger than the nominal diameter of the bolts where the thickness of the
material is not greater than nineteen (19) millimeters for structural steel, for high-strength
steel sixteen (16) millimeters, or thirteen (13) millimeters for quenched and tempered alloy
steel, unless subpunching and reaming is required under eight (8), the preparation of field
connections.

114
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Where there are more than five (5) thicknesses or where any of the main material is
thicker than nineteen (19) millimeters for structural steel, sixteen (16) millimeters for high-
strength steel, or thirteen (13) millimeters for quenched and tempered alloy steel, either
subdrill and ream or drill all holes full size.

If required, either subpunch or subdrill (subdrill if thickness limitation governs) five (5)
millimeters smaller and, after assembling, ream two (2) millimeters larger or drill full size
to two (2) millimeters larger than nominal diameter of the bolts. Bolt holes shall be
fabricated in accordance with the following procedures:

1. Punched Holes. Use a die diameter that is not more than two (2) millimeters larger
than the punch diameter. Ream holes that require enlarging to admit bolts. Clean cut the
holes without torn or ragged edges.

2. Reamed or Drilled Holes. Ream or drill holes so they are cylindrical and
perpendicular to the member. Where practical, direct reamers by mechanical means.
Remove burrs on the outside surfaces. Ream and drill with twist drills, twist reamers, or
roto-broach cutters. Assemble and securely hold together connecting parts that are being
reamed or drilled and match-mark before disassembling.

3. Accuracy of Holes. Holes not more than one (1) millimeter larger in diameter than
the true decimal equivalent of the nominal diameter of the drill or reamer are acceptable.
The slightly conical hole resulting from punching operations is acceptable. The width of
slotted holes produced by flame cutting or a combination of drilling or punching and flame
cutting shall be no more than one (1) millimeter greater than the nominal width. Grind
flame cut surfaces smooth.

4. Accuracy of Hole Group Before Reaming. Accurately punch full size, subpunched,
or subdrilled holes so that after assembling (before any reaming is done) a cylindrical pin
three (3) millimeters smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the punched hole may
be entered perpendicular to the face of the member, without drilling, in at least seventy-five
percent (75%) of the contiguous holes in the same plane. Punched pieces not meeting
this requirement will be rejected. Holes, through which a pin five (5) millimeters smaller
in diameter than the nominal size of the punched hole cannot be inserted, will be rejected.

5. Accuracy of Hole Group After Reaming. After reaming, the maximum allowed offset
of eighty-five percent (85%) of any contiguous group of holes through adjacent thickness
of metal is one (1) millimeter.

Use steel templates having hardened steel bushings in holes accurately dimensioned
from the centerlines of the connection as inscribed on the template. Use connection
centerlines when locating templates from the milled or scribed ends of members.

6. Numerically-Controlled Drilled Field Connections. In lieu of drilling undersized holes

and reaming while assembled, or drilling holes full-size while assembled, drilling or
punching bolt holes full-size in unassembled pieces and/or connections, including
templates for use with matching undersized and reamed holes by means of suitable

115
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

numerically-controlled (N/C) drilling or punching equipment is allowed.

Table of Contents

7. Holes for Ribbed Bolts, Turned Bolts or Other Approved Bearing-Type Bolts. Provide
finished holes with a driving fit.

8. Preparation of Field Connections. Subpunch or subdrill and ream while assembled,

or drill full size to a steel template, holes in all field connections, and field splices of main
members of trusses, arches, continuous beam spans, bents, towers (each face), plate
girders, and rigid frames.

Holes for field splices of rolled beam stringers continuous over floor beams or cross
frames may be drilled full-size unassembled to a steel template. Holes for floor beams or
cross frames may be drilled full size unassembled to a steel template. Subpunch and
ream while assembled, or drill full size to a steel template, all holes for floor beam and
stringer field end connections.

When reaming or drilling full size field connection holes through a steel template,
carefully locate and position the template and firmly bolt in place before drilling. Use exact
duplicates of templates used for reaming matching members, or the opposite faces of a
single member. Accurately locate templates used for connections on like parts or
members so that the parts of members are duplicates and require no match-marking.

For any connection, in lieu of subpunching and reaming or subdrilling and reaming,
holes drilled full-size through all thicknesses or material assembled in proper position may
be used.

5.05.4.7 Pins and Rollers. Accurately fabricate pins and rollers that are straight,
smooth and free from flaws. Forge and anneal pins and rollers more than two hundred
thirty (230) millimeters in diameter. Pins and rollers two hundred thirty (230) millimeters
or less in diameter may be either forged and annealed or cold-finished carbon-steel
shafting.

In pins larger than two hundred thirty (230) millimeters in diameter, bore a hole not less
than fifty (50) millimeters in diameter full length along the pin axis after the forging has
been allowed to cool to a temperature below the critical range (under suitable conditions
to prevent damage by too rapid cooling and before being annealed).

5.05.4.7.1 Boring Pin Holes. Bore pin holes true to the specified diameter smooth
and straight, at right angles with the axis of the member and parallel to each other.
Produce the final surface using a finishing cut.

Produce a pin hole diameter that does not exceed that of the pin by more than one-half
(0.50) millimeter for pins one hundred twenty-seven (127) millimeters or less in diameter,
or by more than one (1) millimeter for larger pins.

The maximum allowed variation of the outside-to-outside distance of end holes in

tension members and the inside-to-inside distance of end holes in compression members
is one (1) millimeter from that specified. Bore pin holes in built-up members after the

116
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

member has been assembled.

Table of Contents

5.05.4.7.2 Threads for Bolts and Pins. Provide threads on all bolts and pins for
structural steel construction that conform to the Unified Standard Series UNC ANSI B1.1,
Class 2A external threads and Class 2B for internal threads, except when pin ends have
a diameter of thirty-five (35) millimeters or more, provide six threads to the twenty-five (25)
millimeters.

5.05.4.8 Eyebars. Pin holes may be flame cut at least fifty (50) millimeters smaller in
diameter than the finished pin diameter. Securely fasten together (in the order to be
placed on the pin hole) eyebars that are to be placed side by side in the structure and bore
at both ends while clamped. Pack and match-mark eyebars for shipment and erection.
Stamp with steel stencils, so as to be visible when the bars are nested in place on the
structure, all identifying marks on the edge of one head of each member after fabrication
is completed. Use low-stress type steel die stamps.

Provide eyebars, straight and free from twists, with pin holes accurately located on the
centerline of the bar. Do not allow the inclination of any bar to the plane of the truss to
exceed two and six-tenths (2.6) millimeters per meter.

Simultaneously cut the edges of eyebars that lie between the transverse centerline of
their pin holes with two mechanically operated torches abreast of each other, guided by
a substantial template to prevent distortion of the plates.

5.05.4.9 Assembly-Bolting. Clean surfaces of metal in contact before assembling.

Assemble parts of a member. Securely pin and firmly draw together before drilling,
reaming, or bolting is commenced. Take assembled parts apart, if necessary, for the
removal of burrs and shavings produced by the operation. Assemble members to be free
from twists, bends and other deformation.

Drift during assembling only enough to bring the parts into position without enlarging
holes or distorting the metal.

5.05.5 CONNECTIONS.

5.05.5.1 Welded Connections. Fabricate surfaces and edges to be welded smooth,

uniform, clean and free of defects that would adversely affect the quality of the weld.
Prepare edge according to ANSI/AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Code D1.5.

5.05.5.2 Preassembly of Field Connections. Preassemble field connections of main

members of trusses, arches, continuous beams, plate girders, bents, towers, and rigid
frames before erection to verify the geometry of the completed structure or unit and to
verify or prepare field splices. Present the method and details of preassembly for
approval.

Use methods and details of preassembly that are consistent with the procedure shown
on the approved erection camber diagram. Assemble all girders and beams in their
cambered (no load) condition.

117
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

When members are assembled with their webs vertical, support them at intervals of six
(6) meters or two-tenths (0.2) of the span length, whichever is less. When the webs are
horizontal, the above intervals of support may be increased provided there is no noticeable
deflection between points of support.

Assemble trusses in full dead load position unless the design of the structure provides
for the secondary stresses created by assembling the truss in the fully cambered (no load)
position. Support trusses during assembly at each panel point. Preassemble at least
three (3) contiguous panels that are accurately adjusted for line and camber. For
successive assemblies include at least one section or panel of the previous assembly
(repositioned if necessary and adequately pinned to assure accurate alignment) plus two
(2) or more sections or panels added at the advancing end. For structures longer than
forty-six (46) meters, make each assembly not less than forty-six (46) meters long
regardless of the length of individual continuous panels or sections. Assembly may start
from any location in the structure and proceed in one or both directions as long as
preceding requirements are satisfied and the following assembly procedures are followed:

1. Bolted Connections. Where applicable, assemble major components with milled

ends of compression members in full bearing and then ream subsized holes to the
specified size while the connections are assembled.

2. Check Assembly/Numerically-Controlled Drilling. When using numerically-controlled

drilling or punching, make a check assembly for each major structural type of each project.
Fabricate the check assembly of at least three (3) contiguous shop sections or, for a truss,
all members in at least three (3) contiguous chord lengths (such as the length between
field splices). Base check assemblies on the proposed order of erection, joints in
bearings, special complex points, and similar considerations. Shop assemblies other than
the check assemblies are not required.

If the check assembly fails in some specific manner to demonstrate that the required
accuracy is being obtained, further check assemblies may be required.

Receive approval of each assembly (including camber, alignment, accuracy of holes,

and fit of milled joints) before reaming is commenced or before any N/C drilled check
assembly is dismantled.

3. Field Welded Connections. Field welded connections are prohibited unless

specifically shown on the drawings. Verify the fit of members (including the proper space
between abutting flanges) with the segment preassembled.

4. Match Marking. Match mark connecting parts preassembled in the shop to assure
proper fit in the field. Provide a diagram showing such match marks.

5.05.5.3 Connections Using Unfinished, Turned or Ribbed Bolts. Use unfinished,

turned or ribbed bolts, where specified, conforming to ASTM A 307 for Grade A Bolts. Use
bolts with single self-locking nuts or double nuts. Use beveled washers where bearing
faces have a slope of more than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis.

118
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Furnish turned bolts with a body surface ANSI roughness not exceeding three (3) mm.
Furnish hex headed bolts and nuts of the nominal size specified. Carefully ream holes
for turned bolts and furnish bolts to provide a light driving fit. Keep bolt threads entirely
outside of the holes. Provide a washer under the nut.

Use approved form of ribbed body with continuous longitudinal ribs. Provide a body
diameter measured on a circle through the points of the ribs two (2) mm greater than the
nominal diameter specified for the bolts.

Furnish ribbed bolts with round heads conforming to ANSI B18.5. Furnish hexagonal
nuts that are either recessed or have a washer of suitable thickness. Ribbed bolts shall
have a driving fit when installed in holes. Provide sufficiently hard ribs such that the ribs
do not compress or deform and allow the bolts to turn in the holes during tightening. If the
bolt twists before drawing tight, ream the hole and provide an oversized replacement bolt.

5.05.5.4 Connections Using High-Strength Bolts. This subsection covers the

assembly of structural joints using AASHTO M 164 or AASHTO M 253 high-strength bolts
or equivalent fasteners, tightened to a high tension.

5.05.5.4.1 Bolted Parts. Use steel material within the grip of the bolt with no
compressible material such as gaskets or insulation. Fabricate bolted steel parts to fit
solidly together after the bolts are tightened. Limit the maximum slope of the surfaces of
parts in contact with the bolt head or nut to 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt
axis.

5.05.5.4.2 Surface Conditions. At the time of assembly clean all joint surfaces
(including surfaces adjacent to the bolt head and nut) of dirt or foreign material and scale,
except tight mill scale. Remove burrs that would prevent solid seating of the connected
parts in the snug-tight condition.

Paint or other coatings are not permitted on the faying surfaces of slip-critical
connections. All connections are considered to be slip-critical. Exclude paint (including
any inadvertent overspray) from areas closer than one bolt diameter, but not less than
twenty-five (25) millimeters from the edge of any hole and all areas within the bolt pattern.

5.05.5.4.3 Installation. Install fasteners of the same lot number together. Protect
fasteners from dirt and moisture. Take from protected storage only as many fasteners as
are anticipated to be installed and tightened during a work shift. Return to protected
storage fasteners not used at the end of the shift. Do not clean lubricant from fasteners
that is required to be present in the as-delivered condition. Clean and re-lubricate, before
installation fasteners for slip-critical connections which accumulate rust or dirt.

Provide a tension measuring device (a Skidmore-Wilhelm calibrator or other

acceptable bolt tension indicating device) at all job sites where high-strength fasteners are
being installed and tightened. Use the tension measuring device to perform the rotational-
capacity test and to confirm:

119
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents - the requirements of Table 5.05-7 of the complete fastener assembly
- the calibration of the wrenches, if applicable, and
- the understanding and proper use of the tightening method.

For short grip bolts, direct tension indicators (DTI) with solid plates may be used to
perform this test. First check the DTI with a longer grip bolt in the Skidmore-Wilhelm
calibrator. The frequency of confirmation testing, number of tests to be performed, and
test procedures shall conform to (3) through (6) as applicable. Confirm the accuracy of
the tension measuring device by an approved testing agency at least annually.

Install fasteners together with washers of size and quality specified, located as
required below, in properly aligned holes and tightened by any of the methods described
in (3) to (6) inclusive to at least the minimum tension specified in Table 5.05-7 after all the
fasteners are tight.

If approved, tightening may be performed by turning the bolt while the nut is prevented
from rotating when it is impractical to turn the nut. If impact wrenches are used, provide
adequate capacity and sufficient air to tighten each bolt in approximately ten (10) seconds.

Do not re-use AASHTO M 253 fasteners and galvanized AASHTO M 164 fasteners.
If approved, other AASHTO M 164 bolts may be re-used once. Touching up or re-
tightening previously tightened bolts that may have been loosened by the tightening of
adjacent bolts will not be considered as re-use, provided the snugging up continues from
the initial position and does not require greater rotation, including the tolerance than that
required by Table 5.05-6.

1. Rotational-Capacity Tests. Subject high-strength fasteners, black and galvanized,

to job-site rotational capacity tests performed according to AASHTO M 164, Subsection
8.5, and the following:

(1) After tightening to a snug-tight condition, as defined in (3), tighten the fastener
two (2) times the required number of turns indicated in Table 5.05-6, in a Skidmore-
Wilhelm Calibrator or equivalent tension measuring device, without stripping or failure.

(2) During this test, the maximum recorded tension must be equal to or greater
than the turn test tension which is one and fifteen hundreths (1.15) times the required
fastener tension indicated in Table 5.05-7.

(3) The measured torque at a tension "P", after exceeding the turn test tension
required above in (2), shall not exceed the value obtained by the following equation:

Torque = 0.25 PD
where:
Torque = Measured torque in ft.lbs. (N.m)
P = Measured bolt tension in pounds (N)
D = Nominal bolt diameter in feet (m)
For rotational capacity tests, use washers even though their use may not be required in

120
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

the actual installation.

Table of Contents

2. Washers. Where the outer face of the bolted parts has a slope greater than 1:20
with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis, use a hardened beveled washer to
compensate for the lack of parallelism.

Use hardened square or rectangular beveled washers for American Standard Beams
and Channels conforming to AASHTO M 293.

Where necessary, washers may be clipped on one side not closer than seven-eighths
(7/8) of the bolt diameter from the center of the washer.

Hardened washers will not be required for connections using AASHTO M 164 and
AASHTO M 253 bolts except under the following conditions:

(1) Use hardened washers under the element turned in tightening when the
tightening is done by the calibrated wrench method.

(2) Use hardened washers under both the head and the nut when AASHTO M 253
bolts are installed in material having a specified yield point less than 276 MPa regardless
of the tightening method.

(3) Use a hardened washer conforming to ASTM F 436 where AASHTO M 164
bolts of any diameter or AASHTO M 253 bolts equal to or less than twenty-five (25)
millimeters in diameter are to be installed in oversize or short-slotted holes in an outer ply.

(4) Use hardened washers conforming to ASTM F 436, except with eight (8)
millimeters minimum thickness, under both the head and the nut in lieu of standard
thickness hardened washers where AASHTO M 253 bolts over twenty-five (25) millimeters
in diameter are to be installed in an oversize or short-slotted hole in an outer ply. Multiple
hardened washers with combined thickness equal to or greater than eight (8) millimeters
do not satisfy this requirement.

(5) Where AASHTO M 164 bolts of any diameter or AASHTO M 253 bolts equal
to or less than twenty-five (25) millimeters in diameter are installed in a long-slotted hole
in an outer ply, provide a plate washer or continuous bar of at least 8 mm thickness with
standard holes with sufficient size to cover the slot after installation and is structural grade
material that need not be hardened.

When AASHTO M 253 bolts over twenty-five (25) millimeters in diameter are used
in long-slotted holes in external plies, use a single hardened washer conforming to ASTM
F 436 with eight (8) millimeters minimum thickness in lieu of washers or bars of structural
grade material. Multiple hardened washers with combined thickness equal to or greater
than eight (8) millimeters do not satisfy this requirement.

3. Turn of Nut Tightening. At the start of work, test nut tightening using a device
capable of indicating bolt tension a sample of not less than three (3) bolt-and-nut
assemblies of each diameter, length and grade to be used in the work. Demonstrate with

121
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

the test that the method for estimating the snug-tight condition and controlling the turns
Table of Contents

from snug tight to be used develops a tension not less than five percent (5%) greater than
the tension required by Table 5.05-7. Perform periodic re-testing when required.

Install bolts in all holes of the connection and initially tighten to a snug-tight condition.
Snug tight is defined as the tightness that exists when the plies of the joint are in firm
contact. This may be attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a
worker using an ordinary-spud wrench.

Systematically snug-tighten bolt groups from the most rigid part of the connection to
the free edges. Then re-tighten the bolts of the connection in a similar systematic manner
as necessary until all bolts are snug tight and the connection is fully compacted. Following
the snug-tightening operation, tighten all bolts in the connection by the applicable amount
of rotation specified in Table 5.05-6.

During all tightening operations, do not allow rotation of the fastener part not turned
by the wrench. Tighten systematically from the most rigid part of the joint to its free edges.

4. Calibrated Wrench Tightening. Calibrated wrench tightening may be used only

when installation procedures are calibrated on a daily basis and when a hardened washer
is used under the element turned in tightening. Standard torques taken from tables or
from formulas that assume to relate torque to tension are not acceptable.

If calibrated wrenches are used for installation, set them to provide a tension not less
than five percent (5%) in excess of the minimum tension specified in Table 5.05-7.
Calibrate the installation procedure at least once each working day for each bolt diameter,
length, and grade using fastener assemblies that are being installed in the work.

Perform the calibration with a device capable of indicating actual bolt tension by
tightening three (3) typical bolts of each diameter, length, and grade from the bolts and
washers being installed using a job-supplied washer under the element turned in
tightening. Re-calibrate wrenches when significant difference is noted in the surface
condition of the bolts, threads, nuts or washers. Verify during use that the wrench
adjustment selected by the calibration does not produce a nut or bolt head rotation from
snug tight greater than permitted in Table 5.05-6. Turn nuts in the tightening direction
when measuring the torque of manual torque wrenches.

If calibrated wrenches are used to install bolts in a connection, install bolts with
hardened washers under the turned element. When tightening bolts in all holes of the
connection, tighten to a snug-tight condition. Following this initial tightening operation,
tighten all bolts in the connection using a calibrated wrench. Tighten systematically from
the most rigid part of the joint to its free edges. "Touch up" previously tightened bolts that
may have been relaxed during the subsequent tightening of adjacent bolts until all bolts
are properly tightened.

5. Installation of Alternate Design Bolts. When fasteners that incorporate a design

feature intended to indirectly indicate the bolt tension or to automatically provide the
tension required by Table 5.05-7 are to be installed, test a representative sample of not

122
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

less than three (3) bolts of each diameter, length and grade at the job site with a device
Table of Contents

capable of indicating bolt tension.

Include in the test assembly flat-hardened washers, if required in the actual

connection, arranged as in the actual connections to be tensioned. The calibration test
must demonstrate that each bolt develops a tension not less than five percent (5%) greater
than the tension required by Table 5.05-7. Follow manufacturer's installation procedure.
Perform periodic re-testing when required.

When alternate design fasteners that are intended to control or indicate bolt tension
of the fasteners are used, install bolts in all holes of the connection and initially tighten
sufficiently to bring all plies of the joint into firm contact, but without yielding or fracturing
the control or indicator element of the fasteners. Continue to tighten systematically from
the most rigid part of the connection to the free edges in a manner that will minimize
relaxation of previously tightened fasteners.

Proper tensioning of the bolts may require more than a single cycle of systematic
partial tightening before final twist-off of the control or indicator element of individual
fasteners.

6. Direct Tension Indicator Tightening. When tightening of bolts using direct

tension indicator devices is used, assemble a representative sample of not less than three
(3) devices for each diameter and grade of fastener to be used in the work in a calibration
device capable of indicating bolt tension. Include in the test assembly flat-hardened
washers, if required in the actual connection, arranged as those in the actual connections
to be tensioned. The calibration test must demonstrate that the device indicates a tension
not less than five percent (5%) greater than that required by Table 5.05-7.

Follow the manufacturer's installation procedures for installation of bolts in the

calibration device and in all connections. Give special attention to proper installation of
flat-hardened washers when direct tension indicator devices are used with bolts installed
in oversize or slotted holes and where the load indicating devices are used under the
turned element.

When bolts are installed using direct tension indicators conforming to ASTM F 959,
install bolts in all holes of the connection and bring to a snug-tight condition. Snug tight
is indicated by partial compression of the direct tension indicator protrusions. Then tighten
all fasteners systematically from the most rigid part of the connection to the free edges in
a manner that will minimize relaxation of previously tightened fasteners. Proper tensioning
of the bolts may require more than a single cycle of systematic partial tighten before final
tightening to deform the protrusion to the specified gap.

7. Lock-Pin and Collar Fasteners. Install lock-pin and collar fasteners using approved
methods and procedures.

8. Inspection. Inspect, in the presence of the Engineer, the tightened bolts using an
inspection torque wrench.

123
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of ContentsIndividually place three (3) bolts of the same grade, size, and condition as those under
inspection in a device calibrated to measure bolt tension. Perform this calibration
operation at least once each inspection day.

Use a washer under the part turned in tighten each bolt if washers are used on the
structure. If washers are not used on the structure, use the same specification material
which abuts the part turned in the tension measuring device as used on the structure. In
the calibrated device, tighten each bolt by any convenient means to the specified tension.
Apply the inspecting wrench to the tightened bolt to determine the torque required to turn
the nut or head five (5) degrees (0.09 rad) approximately twenty-five (25) millimeters at a
three hundred (300) millimeter radius, in the tightening direction. Use the average of the
torque required for all three (3) bolts as the job-inspection torque.

Select at random in each connection ten percent (10%) (at least two) of the tightened
bolts on the structure represented by the test bolts and apply the job-inspection torque to
each selected bolt with the inspecting wrench turned in the tightening direction. If this
torque turns no bolt head or nut, the bolts in the connection will be considered to be
properly tightened. If the torque turns one or more bolts heads or nuts, apply the job-
inspection torque to all bolts in the connection. Tighten and reinspect any bolt whose
head or nut turns at this stage. As an option retighten all bolts in the connection and re-
submit for inspection.
TABLE 5.05-6 (1)
(NUT ROTATION FROM THE SNUG-TIGHT CONDITION)(2)

Geometry of Outer Faces of Bolted Parts

Bolt length Both faces One face normal to Both faces sloped not
measured from normal to bolt axis and other more than 1:20 from
underside of head bolt axis face sloped not normal to bolt axis (Bevel
to end of bolt more than 1:20. washers not used)
(Bevel washer not
used)

Up to and 1/3 turn 1/2 turn 2/3 turn

including 4
diameters
Over 4 diameters 1/2 turn 2/3 turn 5/6 turn
but not exceeding
8 diameters
Over 8 diameters 2/3 turn 5/6 turn 1 turn
but not exceeding
12 diameters (3)

(1)
Applicable only to connections where all material within the grip of the bolt is steel.
(2)
Nut rotation is relative to bolt, regardless of the element (nut or bolt) being turned.
The tolerance is +/- 30 degrees (0.5 rad) for bolts installed by ½ turn or less. The

124
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

tolerance is +/- 45 degrees (0.8 rad) for bolts installed by 2/3 turn or more.
Table of Contents
(3)
Determine the required rotation by actual tests in a suitable tension device simulating
the actual condition.
TABLE 5.05-7
MINIMUM FASTENER TENSION (1)

AASHTO M 164, AASHTO M 253, ASTM

Bolt Size (mm) ASTM A 325 (kN) A 490 (kN)
13 53.4 66.7
16 84.5 106.8
19 124.6 155.7
22 173.5 218.0
25 226.9 284.7
29 249.1 355.9
32 315.8 453.7
38 458.2 658.3

(1)
Equal to 70% of the specified minimum tensile strength of bolts (as specified in
ASTM Specifications for tests of full size ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 490 bolts with UNC
threads loaded in axial tension) rounded to the nearest 0.1 kN.

5.05.6 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.05.6.1 Falsework. Falsework used for the erection of structural steel shall conform
to the general requirements for falsework contained in Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures"
in these General Specifications.

Falsework and forms supporting the concrete work on steel structures shall be
constructed so that any loads applied to girder webs shall be applied within one hundred
fifty (150) millimeters of a flange or stiffener and shall be distributed in a manner that will
not produce local distortion of the web. Temporary struts and ties shall be provided as
necessary to resist lateral loads applied to the girder flanges and to prevent appreciable
vertical movement between the edge of deck form and the adjacent steel girder. Loads
imposed on existing, new or partially completed structures shall not exceed the load
carrying capability of the structure, or portion of the structure, as determined by the Load
Factor Design methods of AASHTO using Load Group III.

5.05.6.2 Continuous Members. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, structural steel
girders have been designed for continuity in supporting girder dead load. The Contractor
may at his option, erect the girders in such a manner that the girder continuity for dead
load is or is not as assumed in design. Furnishing and erecting the girders shall be subject
to the requirements in this Section.

125
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

If erection procedures are to be used which will provide the designed girder continuity
Table of Contents

for dead load, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer for review a statement of
intended steel erection procedures with calculations in sufficient detail to substantiate that
the girder geometry will be correct.

If erection procedures are to be used which will provide the designed girder continuity
for dead load, members with field joints shall be preassembled in a no-load condition in
a horizontal or an upright position.

If erection procedures are to be used which will result in steel girders not attaining the
continuity for dead load assumed in design, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer
for review a statement of steel erection procedures with calculations, in sufficient detail to
substantiate that girder capacity and geometry will be correct.

If erection procedures are to be used which will result in steel girders not attaining the
continuity for dead load assumed in design, the structure shall, after erection, have a load
carrying capacity at least equal to the designed structure shown on the plans. The
Contractor may increase the cross-sectional area or change the grades of steel to provide
the specified load carrying capacity, subject to approval by the Engineer. Any additional
steel or higher strength steels required to accommodate the method of erection selected
shall be considered to be for the convenience of the Contractor and no additional payment
will be made therefor.

5.05.6.3 Erection.

5.05.6.3.1 Handling and Storing Material. Place material stored at the job site on
skids above ground. Keep material clean and properly drained. Place and shore girders
and beams upright. Support long members, such as columns and chords, on skids placed
near enough together to prevent damage due to deflection.

5.05.6.3.2 Bearings and Anchorages. Furnish and install bridge bearings according
to Subsections 5.03.6, “ Bearing Devices,” 5.03.7, “ Contractor Quality Control Procedures,”
5.03.8, “Quality Assurance Procedures,” in these General Specifications. If the steel
superstructure is to be placed on a substructure that was built under a separate contract,
verify that the masonry has been correctly constructed before ordering material.

5.05.6.3.3 Erection Procedures.

1. Conformance to Drawings. Erect according to approved erection drawings.

Modifications to or deviations from the approved erection procedure will require revised
drawings and verification of stresses and geometry.

2. Erection Stresses. Allow for erection stresses induced in the structure as a result
of the use of a method of erection or equipment that differs from that previously approved,
and that will remain in the finished structure as locked-in stresses. Provide additional
material, as needed, to keep both temporary and final stresses within the allowable limits
used in the design.

126
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents Provide temporary bracing or stiffening devices to accommodate handling stresses
in individual members or segments of the structure during erection.

3. Maintaining Alignment and Camber. During erection, support segments of the

structure in a manner that will produce the proper alignment and camber in the completed
structure. Install cross frames and diagonal bracing as necessary during erection to
provide stability and assure correct geometry. As necessary, provide temporary bracing
at any stage of erection.

5.05.6.3.4 Field Assembly. Accurately assemble as shown on the erection drawings

and required by match-marks. Carefully handle the material. Do not hammer, damage
or distort the members. Clean bearing surfaces and permanent contact surfaces before
assembly.

Assemble splices and field connections with at least two (2) cylindrical erection pins
per part (4 minimum per splice or connection). A plate girder splice requires for example,
at least four (4) cylindrical erection pins for the top flange splice, four (4) pins for the web
splice, and four (4) pins for the bottom flange splice. These provide two (2) pins for each
part. Place the pins in the corner holes of the splice plates.

Install more cylindrical erection pins, if necessary, to accurately align the parts. Fill the
remaining holes in the connection with bolts and tighten systematically from the most rigid
part of the connection to the free edges. Remove cylindrical erection pins and replace with
tightened bolts.

Release temporary erection supports at a splice or connection only after all bolts are
installed and tightened. Show special assembly and support situations on the erection
drawings.

Fitting-up bolts may be the same high-strength bolts used in the same installation. If
other fitting-up bolts are required, use the same nominal diameter as the high-strength
bolts. Use cylindrical erection pins eight-tenths (0.8) millimeters larger than the bolts.

5.05.6.3.5 Pin Connections. Use pilot and driving nuts in driving pins. Drive the pins
so that the members will fully bear on the pins. Screw pin nuts tight and burr the threads
at the face of the nut with a pointed tool.

5.05.6.3.6 Misfits. Correction of minor misfits involving minor amounts of reaming,

cutting, and chipping may be done, if approved. Any error in the shop fabrication or
deformation resulting from handling and transporting will be cause for rejection.

5.05.6.4 Bolted Connections. Bolted connections unless otherwise shown on the

plans or specified in the special specifications shall be made with high-strength steel bolts.

All connections made with high-strength bolts shall be friction-type joints, unless
otherwise designated on the plans.

Except when the structural steel is not required to be painted, contact surfaces of all

127
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

high-strength bolted connections shall be cleaned in accordance with Section 5.13,

Table of Contents

"Painting of Structures," in these General Specifications and coated with zinc-rich primer,
organic vehicle type, before assembly. The total thickness on each surface shall be
between two one hundredths (.02) and eight one hundredths (.08) millimeter.

All bolts shall conform to ASTM Designation A 325 and shall be installed with a
hardened washer under the nut or bolt head, whichever is the element turned in tightening.

Bolts may be tightened by any method to the required tension. The torque value or the
direct tension indicator gap needed to develop the required bolt tension will be determined
by the Engineer. Bolt tension shall be checked at locations selected by the Engineer.
Checking of bolt tension shall be done by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer
and in such a manner that the Engineer can read the torque wrench gage or direct tension
indicator during checking.

Nuts shall be located, wherever practicable, on the side of the member which will not be
visible from the traveled way. Nuts for bolts that will be partially embedded in the concrete
shall be located on the side of the member that will be encased in concrete.

Bolts with diameters exceeding by up to six (6) millimeters the diameter of the bolt
shown on the plans may be used, provided that required clearances and edge distances
are not reduced below that required for the larger bolt.

Other fasteners approved by the Engineer as equivalent to these specifications may be

used. Such fasteners, if used, shall have a positive tensioning procedure capable of
calibration for accurately determining the bolt tension. For such fasteners using other than
threaded connectors, the torque measurement requirements will not apply.

5.05.6.5 Field Fabrication and Welding. All painting, welding and other aspects of
fabrication which are performed totally or partially at the project site shall conform to the
requirements of Subsection 5.05.4, "Fabrication" in these General Specifications.

Before assigning any welder on site to Work covered by this Section of the
specifications, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the names of the welders to
be employed on the Work together with certification that each of these welders has passed
qualification tests using procedures covered in the American Welding Society Standard
B3.0, Part II, or such qualification test acceptable to the Engineer. If required by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall submit identifying stenciled test coupons made by any
operator whose workmanship is subject to question. The Contractor shall require any
welder to retake the test when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Work of the welder
creates a reasonable doubt as to the proficiency of the welder. Tests, when required, shall
be conducted at no additional expense to the Ministry. Recertification of the welder shall
be made to the Engineer only after the welder has taken and passed the required retest.
Welders shall have passed the qualification tests within the preceding twelve (12) month
period. The Engineer may require coupons to be cut from any location in any joint for
testing. All sections of weld found defective shall be chipped or cut out to base metal and
properly rewelded before proceeding with the Work. Should any two (2) coupons cut from
the Work of any welder show strengths, under test, less than that of the base metal, it will

128
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

be considered evidence of negligence or incompetence and such welder shall be

Table of Contents

permanently removed from the Work. When coupons are removed from any part of the
structure, the members cut shall be repaired in a neat and workmanlike manner, with joints
of proper type to develop the full strength of the members and joints cut, with peening as
necessary or directed to relieve residual stress, all at no additional cost to the Ministry.

5.05.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES.

5.05.7.1 General. Quality assurance sampling, testing and the acceptance of materials
shall be based on Certificates of Guarantee shall be in accordance with the requirements
of Section 1.04, "Control of Materials" and 1.08, "Acceptance" in these General
Specifications.

5.05.7.2 Inspection of Welds. Radiographic inspection of welds will be required, as

specified in the current edition of the Standard Specifications for Welded Highway and
Railway Bridges of the American Welding Society. Additional welds to be inspected
radiographically will be specified on the plans.

When specified on the plans, other methods of nondestructive inspection of welds will
be required.

The Contractor shall secure the services of an approved organization qualified in the
inspection of welds and will bear the cost of this inspection service. Inspection of all welds
shall be done only by persons skilled in such inspection and who are acceptable to the
Engineer. The Engineer shall review and interpret radiographs and other non-destructive
or destructive testing and has the sole authority to accept or reject the inspection of Works.

All film and/or other records of weld inspection shall become the property of the Ministry.

In the inspection of welds, the presence of any of the following defects in the excess of
the specified limits will result in rejection of the weld as being defective.

1. Cracks. Cracks, regardless of length or location, will not be allowed.

2. Overlaps. Overlaps, lack of penetration or incomplete fusion will not be allowed.

3. Inclusions, Including Slag, Porosity and Other Deleterious Materials. Inclusions less
than one and one-half (1.5) millimeters in the greatest dimension will be allowed if well-
dispersed, such that the sum of the greatest dimensions of the inclusion in any twenty-five
(25) millimeters of welded joint does not exceed ten (10) millimeters and there is no
inclusion within twenty-five (25) millimeters of the edge of the joint or a point of restraint.

Inclusions one and one-half (1.5) millimeters or larger in greatest dimension will be
allowed provided that such defects do not exceed the following limits:

1. Six (6) millimeters, for T up to twenty (20) millimeters, one-third (1/3) T, for T from
twenty (20) millimeters to sixty (60) millimeters, twenty (20) millimeters, for T over
sixty (60) millimeters, where T is the thickness of the thinner plate being welded.

129
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

2. Any group of inclusions in line that have an aggregate length greater than T in a
length of twelve (12) T will not be allowed.

Defects shall be removed by mechanical means or by oxygen gouging, after which the
joints shall be welded again. Repeated, unsuccessful repairs shall be cause for removal
and replacement of the damaged portions of the adjacent steel.

5.05.8 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The computed weight of Work measured by

weight shall be obtained by the use of the following rules and assumptions:

- The weight of steel shall be assumed at seven thousand eight hundred fifty (7,850)
kilograms per cubic meter.

- The weight of bronze shall be assumed at eight thousand seven hundred twenty
(8,720) kilograms per cubic meter.

- The weight of cast iron shall be assumed at seven thousand two hundred (7,200)
kilograms per cubic meter.

The weights of steel, bronze and cast iron shall be computed on the basis of final
dimensions at the unit weights as shown on the drawings and as verified and listed in
standard steel handbooks. The net finished dimensions of the parts, as shown on the
approved shop drawings, shall be used, deducting for copes, cuts, clips, and all holes
including bolt and rivet holes.

The weight of bolts, including washers, heads and nuts shall be attained by scaled
weight measurement methods. The weight of rivets shall be attained either by scaled
weight measurement methods or by accurate volumetric computations and unit weight.

The weight of weld metal shall be computed on the basis of the theoretical volume from
dimensions of the shop drawing welds at the unit weight of seven thousand eight hundred
fifty (7,850) kilograms per cubic meter. For ease in computations, weld metal deposited
in fillets, joint chamfers, and bevels will be measured but no measurement will be made
for weld metal deposited outside the heat lines of the approved shop drawings. No
deductions will be made for material removed by beveling or other cutting and
subsequently replaced with weld metal.
No allowance will be made for erection bolts, temporary laterals, excess field rivets or
other similar items.

At the option of the Engineer, cast steel, cast iron, wrought iron, small structural steel
items composed of any single metal or combination of metals, excluding bearing devices,
may be measured by the kilogram, complete in place, as determined by weighing on an
accurate set of scales.

130
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.05.8.1 Structural Steel. This Work shall be measured by the ton as specified in the
Bill of Quantities, complete in place as determined from the Engineer's computed weights.

For the purpose of payment, all metal parts, other than metal handrail and metal
reinforcement for concrete, such as anchor bolts and nuts, pins and nuts, expansion dams,
weld metal, bolts embedded in concrete, shear connectors, plates and shapes for pier
protection, and similar metal items shall, unless otherwise specified, be measured for
payment as Structural Steel.

The quantity of Structural Steel to be paid for shall include the weight of any full-size
members which are tested to destruction as ordered by the Engineer and which meet the
requirements of the specifications. Full-size members which fail to meet the requirements,
and all members rejected as a result of tests, will not be paid for. All costs incurred in
conducting tests shall be borne by the Contractor, except as otherwise specified.

If the Contractor elects (with the Engineer's permission) to use equivalent sections of
greater weight than those shown on the approved plans, he shall bear all additional costs
thereof.

5.05.8.2 Bridge Railing. Bridge railing, of the specified material and type, shall be
measured by the linear meter, including open joints, complete in place and accepted.

5.05.9 PAYMENT.

5.05.9.1 Structural Steel. The amount of completed and accepted materials,

measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) per ton (as
specified in the Bill of Quantities for Structural Steel, which price shall be full compensation
for furnishing, fabricating, welding, delivering, erecting, radiographic inspection, painting
and placing all materials, for all labor, equipment, tools and all other items necessary for
the proper completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment,"
in these General Specifications.

5.05.9.2 Bridge Railing. The amount of completed and accepted Work, measured as
provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter as specified in
the Bill of Quantities, which price shall be full compensation for furnishing all anchor bolts,
washers, etc., fabricating, delivering, erecting and painting, for all labor, equipment, tools,
supplies and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified
in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

131
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

50501 Structural Steel Finished, Fabricated and Erected Ton
50502 Aluminum Bridge Railing Linear Meter
5050201 Aluminum Bridge Railing, One Rail Linear Meter
5050202 Aluminum Bridge Railing, Two Rail Linear Meter
5050203 Aluminum Bridge Railing, Three Rail Linear Meter
5050204 Aluminum Bridge Railing, W-Beam Linear Meter
5050205 Aluminum Bridge Railing, Thrie Beam Linear Meter
5050206 Aluminum Bridge Railing, (Type) Linear Meter
50503 Steel Bridge Railing Linear Meter
5050301 Steel Bridge Railing, One Rail Linear Meter
5050302 Steel Bridge Railing, Two Rail Linear Meter
5050303 Steel Bridge Railing, Three Rail Linear Meter
5050304 Steel Bridge Railing, W-Beam Linear Meter
5050305 Steel Bridge Railing, Thrie Beam Linear Meter
5050306 Steel Bridge Railing, (Type) Linear Meter

132
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 5.06 - PILING

5.06.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of furnishing, driving or placing and, if
required, load testing piling of the type and dimensions shown on the Plans and listed in
the Bill of Quantities, all in accordance with these General Specifications, the Special
Specifications, and approved by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In-Place
Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In Steel Shells, In-Place
Precast Concrete Piles, Furnished
Precast Concrete Piles, In-Place
Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, Furnished
Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, In-Place
Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, Furnished
Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, In-Place
Steel H-Piles, Furnished
Steel H-Piles, In Place
Pile Load Test
Pile Splices

5.06.2 MATERIALS.

5.06.2.1 Precast Concrete Piling. Precast concrete piling shall conform to the details
and dimensions shown on the plans. Concrete shall be Class C for normal precast piling
and Class K for prestressed precast piling. Concrete shall conform to the requirements
of Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete" in these General Specifications.

Reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the plans and shall conform to the
requirements specified in Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel," or Section 5.04, " Prestressed
Concrete Structures" in these General Specifications.

Precast concrete piles shall be cast in a horizontal position. The forms shall be of an
approved type conforming to the requirements for forms specified under Section 5.03,
"Concrete Structures" in these General Specifications. The casting platform shall be
constructed on a firm foundation, free from settlement. The piles shall be cast in a
continuous operation, filling the forms with a slight excess of concrete.

Consolidation shall be accomplished by external or interval vibrators approved by the

Engineer and the excess concrete shall be struck off to the level of the forms. The piles
may be cast the full length of the reinforcing bars, provided that the excess concrete is cut
off after form removal.

The side forms may be removed in twenty-four (24) to forty-eight (48) hours, but the
piles shall not be moved until the compressive strength, shown by test cylinders cured with
the piles, is equal to the specified minimum twenty-eight (28) day strength and in no case
shall they be moved in less than four (4) days.

133
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

When removed from the forms, the pile shall present a true, smooth, even surface free
from honeycombs, stone pockets, or other such defects and shall be so straight that a line
stretched from butt to tip on any face will not be more than twenty-five (25) millimeters from
the face of the pile at any point.

Precast concrete piles shall be cured either in wet sand, with wet burlap, or in steam for
the period of time required to attain the specified twenty-eight (28) day strength but not
less than four (4) days. When raising or transporting precast concrete piles, the
Contractor shall submit his proposal for the location of the lifting points (or supporting
points during transport) together with his arrangements to maintain the allowable stresses,
for approval. Piles shall be so handled at all times as to avoid breaking or chipping the
edges. Piles determined by the Engineer to be materially damaged in handling or driving
shall be replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Ministry.

5.06.2.2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Piling. Concrete to be used shall be Class C and

shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete"
in these General Specifications.

Reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the standard plans and shall conform to the
requirements specified in Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General
Specifications. When welding of the reinforcement steel is permitted on the drawings, it
shall conform to AWS D121 "Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcement Steel,
Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction."

When using shells or castings for cast-in-place piles, the shells or casings shall be of an
approved material having sufficient strength and rigidity to permit their driving and to
prevent distortion caused by soil pressure or the driving of adjacent piles. The shells shall
be sufficiently water-tight to exclude water before and during the placing of concrete.

The Contractor should be aware of "CII - Review of problems associated with the
Construction of Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles" and submit his proposal accordingly.

The shells may be straight, tapered, step-tapered, or a combination of each with

cylindrical sections.

Stepped or tapered sections shall have a minimum outside tip diameter of twenty (20)
centimeters and a minimum outside butt diameter as shown on the plans. Straight shells
shall have a minimum outside diameter as shown on the plans. For pile shells with a
fluted section, the diameter shall be measured from crest to crest of the flutes. All joints
in the shell shall be electrically welded. The lower end of each section shall be provided
with a steel driving point having a wall thickness of not less than ten (10) millimeters.

The above specifications shall also apply to mandrel driven shells, except that the
driving point shall have sufficient thickness and strength to permit driving without distortion
and remain watertight and shall be approved by the Engineer.

134
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.06.2.3 Steel Piling. Steel piling shall consist of structural steel shapes of the section,
size, and weight specified on the plans. The steel shall conform to requirements of
AASHTO M 183.

5.06.2.4 Splice Materials. Splice materials shall conform to the requirements shown
on the plans or in the Special Specifications. Alternate, equivalent material may be
approved by the Engineer based on manufacturer's Certificates of Compliance or results
of additional tests ordered by the Engineer.

5.06.2.5 Bentonite. Where bentonite is to be used in the boring process the material
shall comply with specification DFCP4 of the Oil Companies Association and the supplier
shall submit a test certificate, representative of the material delivered, to show its apparent
viscosity and gel strength ranges.

5.06.2.6 Bentonite Slurry. Where the Contractor intends to use bentonite slurry or
water during boring of the piles, a detailed method statement shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. Bentonite shall be thoroughly mixed and allowed to pre-hydrate for
twenty-four (24) hours before use. The properties of the slurry shall be such as to ensure
adequate support of the sides of the bore and immediately prior to concreting, slurry shall
be sampled from the level of the pile toe. The density of the slurry from such a test shall
not exceed one and twenty-five hundredths grams per cubic centimeter (1.25 gr/cm 3 )and
the viscosity shall not exceed seventy-five (75) Marsh seconds.

5.06.3 EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall conform to the requirements specified herein and
shall be as detailed in the Contractor's Program of Work, as approved by the Engineer.
Equipment shall also conform to the requirements outlined in the HCM, Section 5-6-Piling,
Paragraph A.3.

5.06.3.1 General. Piles shall be driven with a steam, compressed air, or diesel
hammer. Diesel hammers which have fully enclosed ram shall be equipped with a gauge
and accompanying charts which evaluate the equivalent manufacturer's rated energy
being produced under any driving condition.

All hammers shall be maintained in an approved mechanical condition so that maximum

efficiency will be obtained at all times. Hammers deemed inefficient by the Engineer shall
be removed from the Work.

5.06.3.2 Hammers for Precast Concrete Piles. Precast concrete piles shall be driven
with an approved steam or air, or diesel hammer. The hammer shall develop an energy
per blow of not less than three-tenths (0.3) kilogram-meters for each kilogram of weight
driven. In no case shall the total energy developed by the hammer be less than fourteen
hundred (1,400) kilogram-meters per blow.

5.06.3.3 Hammers for Metal Shell for Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles. Shells for cast-
in-place concrete piles shall be driven with an approved steam or air, or diesel hammer.
For shells driven with the aid of a mandrel, the combined weight of the shell and the
mandrel shall be considered as the weight of the pile and the hammer shall meet the

135
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

requirements specified under Paragraph 5.06.3.2 "Hammers for Precast Concrete Piles"
Table of Contents

above. Hammers used to drive shells without a mandrel shall develop an energy per blow
of not less than one thousand (1,000) kilogram-meters.

5.06.3.4 Hammers for Steel Piles. Steel piles shall be driven with an approved steam
or air, or diesel hammer which shall develop an energy per blows of not less than one
thousand (1,000) kilogram-meters.

5.06.3.5 Leads. Pile driver leads shall be constructed in such an approved manner as
to afford freedom of movement to the hammer and they shall be held in position by guys
or stiff braces to insure support to the pile during driving. The leads shall be blocked in
position on the pile and shall be of sufficient length and rigidity so that the pile will be held
in accurate alignment while being driven.

5.06.3.6 Followers. The driving of piles with followers shall be avoided if practicable
and shall be done only with written permission of the Engineer. When followers are used,
one pile of each group of ten (10) shall be a long pile driven without a follower, and shall
be used, in effect, as a test pile to determine the average bearing power of the group.

5.06.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.06.4.1 Jetting and Drilling. When required to obtain the specified penetration, the
Contractor shall furnish and operate approved jetting equipment, or shall furnish approved
drilling equipment and drill holes not larger than the diameter of the pile, and drive the pile
therein. Piles jetted or set in drilled holes shall be driven to the specified bearing capacity
after completion of jetting or drilling.

5.06.4.2 Driving and Casting.

5.06.4.2.1 General Requirements. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
approval, full details of his proposed method, equipment and program for installing the
concrete piles indicated on the plans or for installing an alternative type of piling proposed
by the Contractor. Improved construction methods (e.g. grouted piles) may be considered.
No claim for extra payment will be accepted if another piling system is approved.

The Contractor shall confirm existing soil information by carrying out at least one deep
sounding (penetration) test at each pier or abutment location at a depth at least two (2)
meters below the specified pile depth. Test results and evaluation shall be promptly
submitted to the Engineer. In case of unexpected soil conditions, the Contractor shall so
inform the Engineer and submit his proposals for resolution. Pile design must be based
on actual soil conditions at each location.

Any circumstance indicating that the ground conditions differ from those expected by
the Contractor so as to affect materially the bearing capacity of a pile shall be reported by
the Contractor to the Engineer immediately, together with remedial proposals.

Unless otherwise specified, or approved by the Engineer, piles for any substructure
element shall not be driven until after the excavation for that element is complete. Any

136
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

material forced up between the piles shall be removed to correct elevation without cost to
Table of Contents

the Ministry before concrete for the foundation is placed.

The piles shall be driven to the depth shown on the plans or as may be required to
develop the specified bearing capacity and stability against scour and shall be of sufficient
length therefor.

Piles shall be driven or cast in position with a maximum tolerance of 1:75 to the
vertical or battered lines indicated on the plans. The maximum variation on the butt of the
pile after driving from the position shown on the plans shall be one hundred (100)
millimeters. Piles shall be driven or cast to the levels shown on the plans or as directed,
within a maximum tolerance of plus or minus twelve (12) millimeters from the theoretical
cut-off levels.

If any pile is driven or cast in a position beyond the limits of the specified tolerances,
the design of the pile cap shall be revised and additional piles shall be installed, if
necessary, all at the Contractor's expense.

All piles pushed up by the driving of adjacent piles or by any other cause shall be
driven down again. Any pile damaged by reason of internal defects, or improper driving,
or by having been driven out of its proper location shall be removed or, at the option of the
Engineer, a second pile may be driven adjacent thereto, if this can be done without
detriment to the structure. Care shall be taken when a hard stratum or rock boulders are
encountered so that the pile will not be damaged. Piles which are to be capped shall be
accurately cut off so that true bearing is obtained on all piles without the use of shims.
Piles cut off otherwise shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

The driving of individual piles, once driving has commenced, shall be a continuous
operation. No Force shall be applied to rectify the verticality or position of the already
driven Piles.

5.06.4.2.2 Driving Precast Concrete Piles. The tops of all precast concrete piles
shall be protected from injury by the impact of the hammer in a manner approved by the
Engineer. This protection shall be so designed, maintained and used as to cause the
minimum absorption of energy consistent with adequate protection of the top of the pile.

The pile shall be driven with equipment as herein specified. The protection shall be
designed and care shall be exercised to prevent injury to or displacement of any
reinforcement which might be projecting above the top of the pile.

5.06.4.2.3 Driving Metal Shell for Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles. An approved

driving head, as furnished by the manufacturer, or equal, which shall be of proper size and
design for the particular size and type of hammer to be used, shall be provided to
distribute properly the hammer blows and to prevent damage to the shell while driving.

The Contractor shall have available at all times a suitable light of a type approved by
the Engineer, for thoroughly illuminating the interior of the pile shells for their entire length
after being driven. Any shell that shows bends, kinks, or other deformations, incurred

137
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

during the process of driving, that would impair the strength or efficiency of the completed
Table of Contents

pile, shall be replaced at the direction of the Engineer and at the expense of the
Contractor. After all the shells have been driven to proper alignment, spacing and
elevation, and cut off at the required elevation, they shall be given a final inspection before
they are filled with concrete. Any water or other foreign substance found in them shall be
removed. Upon approval of the shells by the Engineer, the shells shall be filled with
concrete as specified and in the presence of the Engineer.

No concrete shall be placed until all driving within a six (6) meter radius has been
completed, except that driving within the above limit may be permitted by the Engineer if
the concrete in the last pile cast has set not less than seven (7) days.

Following final cleaning up, the reinforcement shall be placed as indicated on the
plans and shall be maintained in its correct position during the concreting of the pile.
Where the reinforcement is made up into cages, these shall be sufficiently rigid to enable
them to be handled without damage or distortion. Sufficient length of reinforcement shall
be left projecting from the head of the pile after filling, to provide full bond length above the
soffit of the pile cap.

The time interval between the final cleaning up and the placing of concrete shall not
exceed two hours. In the event that there is any appreciable delay, the depth to the pile
bottom shall be checked against the measured drilled depth before placing concrete, to
ensure that no soil has fallen into the bore.

Tremie pipes shall be used in concreting. Once concreting has commenced, the
concrete shall be placed without such interruption as would allow the previously placed
batch to have hardened. The concrete shall be compacted to form a dense homogeneous
mass such that a continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross-section is formed.

Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains
sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted. When a casing is being
extracted, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within it to ensure that
pressure from external water or soil is exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in
cross-section nor contaminated.

Concreting shall continue beyond the required cut-off level so that the pile will consist
of fully-compacted concrete to at least the cut-off level.

When preparing the head of a pile for incorporation into a pile cap, the head shall be
cut off square at the required cut-off level and all loose particles shall be removed by wire
brushing followed by washing with water. Projecting reinforcement shall be cleaned and
straightened.

5.06.4.2.4 Driving Steel Piles. The heads of steel piles shall be cut squarely and a
cast or structural steel driving head or cap shall be used to hold the axis of the pile in line
with the axis of the hammer and to prevent excessive upsetting of the pile head under
extremely hard driving conditions.

138
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents When shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and
attach brackets, lugs, core stoppers, or other devices to increase the bearing value of the
pile. Plate caps shall be provided when shown on the plans.

Steel piles shall be cut off at the designated elevation.

5.06.4.3 Determination of Bearing Values.

5.06.4.3.1 Load Tests. When shown on the plans or specified in the Special
Specifications or when ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform load tests
on any pile or piles designated by the Engineer. The load test and load settlement
relationship for individual piles shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM D 1143. The test load shall be placed so that a uniform pressure over the pile is
assured and so that settlement readings may be taken directly on the piles. Before any
portion of the test load is applied, the piles shall be allowed to rest for not less than twenty-
four (24) hours. The safe allowable load per pile shall be taken as fifty (50) percent of that
load which after remaining in place for forty-eight (48) hours, produces a permanent
settlement not greater than six (6) millimeters measured at the top of the pile.

The above safe bearing value shall be closely correlated with the appropriate pile driving
formulas to determine the adequacy of the driving methods. The safe allowable load as
determined by the above load test shall be used in conjunction with other tests to correlate
bearing values.

The load shall be measured by a load measuring device and by a calibrated pressure
gauge in a hydraulic loading system. Readings of both, the measuring device and the
pressure gauge, shall be recorded.

The load measuring device may consist of a proving ring, load cell or other approved
system. The device shall be calibrated before and after each series of tests. The
pressure gauge and any hydraulic jack shall be calibrated together. Certificates of
calibration shall be supplied to the Engineer.

The measurement of pile or beam movement shall be made by dial gauges that are
rigidly mounted on an independent reference frame that bear on surfaces normal to the
pile axis and fixed to the pile beam or head. Alternatively the gauges may be fixed to the
pile or beam and bear on the surface of the frame. The frame shall be supported in such
a manner that it does not move during the test.

A check shall be made of the movement of the pile head and frame relative to an
external datum during the progress of the test.

Throughout the test, all equipment for measuring load and movement shall be protected
from the weather. Construction equipment and persons who are not involved in the test
shall be kept at sufficient distance from the test to avoid disturbance to the measurement
apparatus.

Loading tests on working piles shall be carried out at one location minimum per bridge.

139
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

In the event of a working pile failing the loading test, its load-carrying capacity shall be
determined as specified below. The working load of the pile group as designated shall be
de-rated accordingly, and additional piles shall be introduced such that the larger pile
group meets the design load requirements. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
submit a revised design to the Engineer for his approval, and the additional work carried
out shall be at the Contractor's expense.

The procedure for loading shall be as follows:

1. The test load shall be measured within an accuracy of two (2) percent.
Settlements shall be measured within an accuracy of one-tenth (0.1) millimeters.

2. Unless otherwise directed the test load shall be applied in the following manner:

(1) to the working load (as described on the appropriate plans) by four equal
increments;

(2) removal of all the

(3) to one-and-one-half (1.5) times the working load by two equal increments
up to the working load and thereafter by four equal increments;

(4) removal of all the load.

3. The load after each increment shall be kept constant until the rate of settlement
does not exceed twenty-five hundredths (0.25) millimeters per hour.

4. The amount of settlement shall be recorded before the next increase of load.

5. The maximum test load shall be maintained for forty-eight (48) hours and the total
settlement recorded.

6. The load shall be reduced in stages equal to those in which it is applied.

7. The load after each reduction shall be kept constant until the rate of recovery
does not exceed twenty-five hundredths (0.25) millimeters per hour.

8. The amount of recovery shall be recorded before the next decrease of load.

9. The Contractor shall, within twenty-four (24) hours of the completion of the test,
submit to the Engineer for each pile tested graphs showing:

(1) Load and settlement plotted above and below a common base line of
time;
(2) Settlement and recovery plotted vertically against a base line of load.

140
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

10. The settlement of the pile under the test load shall be not greater than fifteen
(15) millimeters, and the recovery of the pile after the subsequent removal of the test load
shall be not less than five (5) millimeters.

5.06.4.3.2 Formulas. If loading tests are not required, the formulas shown in the
following table shall be used to determine the bearing values for piles.

Steam All Types P = WH

(Single Acting) 0.06S + 0.015

Steam All Types P = E

(Double Acting) 0.06S + 0.015

Diesel All Types P= E

0.06S + 0.015 X/W

P= safe bearing capacity in kilograms

W= weight, in kilograms, of striking parts of hammer
H= height of fall in meters
E= energy of ram in kilogram-meters per blow
S= the average penetration in centimeters per blow for the last twenty (20) blows
X= weight, in kilograms of the pile plus the weight of any cap used on the pile during
driving

The above formulas are applicable only when:

The piles are driven in a vertical position.
The hammer is operating at full efficiency.
The head of the pile is not broomed or crushed.
The penetration is reasonably quick and uniform.
There is no appreciable bounce after the blow.
A follower is not used.

In case water jets are used in connection with the driving, the bearing power shall be
determined by the above formulas from the results of driving after the jets have been
withdrawn, or a load test may be applied.

5.06.4.3.3 Diesel Hammers. The energy rating of a diesel hammer to be used in

formulas for computing bearing values or to be used to determine if hammer is of
adequate size, will be eighty (80) percent of the manufacturer's rating for the model being
used.

5.06.4.4 Test Piles and Order Lists.

5.06.4.4.1 Test Piles. Test piles, of the number and lengths and at the locations
shown on the plans, or as otherwise ordered in writing by the Engineer, shall be driven by
the Contractor to furnish information to the Engineer in determining the length of piles to
be used.

141
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Test piles shall be installed outside the limits in plan of the permanent pile cap, in close
proximity to it, but not less than ten meters center-to-center from the designed location of
any permanent pile.

The loading tests shall be as specified in Paragraph 5.06.4.3, "Determination of Bearing

Values" in these General Specifications. If a test pile fails the loading test, a further test
pile, of increased length, shall be installed and load-tested.

The tops of test piles shall be demolished to a depth of one (1) meter below ground level
on termination of their use, and the resulting holes shall be backfilled with approved
materials.

5.06.4.4.2 Order Lists for Piling. The Contractor shall furnish piles in accordance
with the list shown on the plans and verified in writing by the Engineer or modified in
writing by the Engineer. The Engineer may require that test piles be ordered and driven
before verifying the list of remaining piles.

The lengths given in the verified list shall be based on the lengths which are assumed
to remain in the completed structure. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, increase
the lengths given to provide for fresh heading and additional length as may be necessary
to suit the Contractor's method of operation. The Contractor shall be responsible for
satisfying himself that he has sufficient data to be able to determine the lengths of piles
required and the method of installation to be used. The Contractor shall be responsible
for carrying out any further site investigation which he deems necessary. Each pile shall
be of sufficient length to develop at least twice the working load capacities indicated on
the plans, the necessary lengths being determined from the site investigation data.

If the plans provide for the driving of test piles and the Contractor elects to order the
piling for the structure prior to driving of the test piles, it shall be his responsibility to furnish
piling of adequate lengths as determined from data obtained at the time of driving the test
piles. The splicing of piles or cut-offs in excess of the ordered and accepted length, as
determined by the Engineer from the test pile data, shall be at the expense of the
Contractor. In case the Contractor orders all piling for the structure before the test piles
are driven and is charged with the responsibility of furnishing the proper length as shown
above, the test piles shall not be underrun.

5.06.4.5 Falsework and Defective Piles. No measurement or payment will be made

for the furnishing or driving of falsework piles, nor will payment be made for piles driven
out of place, for defective piles, or for piles which are damaged in handling or driving.
Defective, damaged, or falsework piles or piles driven out of place shall be pulled and
removed, or cut off below exposed surfaces, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.

5.06.4.6 Splicing Piles.

5.06.4.6.1 General Requirements. Full length piles shall be used where practicable
but may be spliced with the written permission of the Engineer. Splices shall be made in

142
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

accordance with the details shown on the plans and as otherwise described by the
Table of Contents

Engineer. Splices for steel and metal shells shall be welded by the manual shielded metal
arc welding process.

5.06.4.6.2 Welded Splices. Welded splices shall be made by an experienced welder

acceptable to the Engineer; however, any failure in the splice shall be corrected or
replaced at the Contractor's expense.

5.06.4.6.3 Steel Piles. Steel piles to be spliced for further driving or steel piles to be
extended without further driving shall be spliced in accordance with the plan details and
as otherwise approved by the Engineer. The indiscriminate splicing of steel piles will not
be allowed.

Ten percent (10%) of the welded splices shall be tested by X-Ray using three hundred
(300) millimeter length for each Welded Joint and the results shall show no visual evidence
of cracks, lack of fusion, undercutting, excessive piping or porosity in compliance with
AASHTO/ASW D 1.5 Bridge Welding Code.

5.06.4.6.4 Precast Concrete Piles. If an increase in length becomes necessary after

driving a precast concrete pile, the concrete at the top of the driven pile shall be removed,
leaving the reinforcing steel exposed for a length of forty (40) bar diameters. The final cut
of the concrete shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pile. Main reinforcement similar
to that used in the pile shall be fastened securely to the projecting steel with spirals and
ties placed adjacent to the splice as shown on the plans. Just prior to the placing of
concrete, the top of the pile shall be wetted thoroughly and covered with a thin coating of
neat cement or other suitable bonding material. Care shall be taken to prevent concrete
leakage at the splice to give a finished joint.

5.06.4.7 Painting. Unless otherwise specified, when steel piles, or metal shells or
casings for cast-in-place piles extend above the ground or water surface, all surfaces
thereof that will be exposed in the completed Work shall be protected by three (3) coats
of paint as specified for new structural steel in Section 5.13, "Painting of Structures," in
these General Specifications except that all three (3) coats shall be applied in the field.
This protection shall extend from an elevation one (1) meter below the low water surface
or ground surface to the top of the exposed steel.

5.06.4.8 Records and Reports. A record of all piles installed shall be kept by the
Contractor and a copy of the record of work carried out each day shall be submitted to the
Engineer within the following day for his approval and retention. The record shall contain
the information listed in the HCM, Section 5-6-Piling, Paragraph E - Records and Reports,
as well as any other information required by the Engineer; such as details of strata
penetrated, time interval between completion of final cleaning and commencement of
concreting, etc.

5.06.5 QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Contractor sampling,

testing and the Engineer's acceptance of material based on Certificates of Guarantee shall
be in accordance with the requirements of Section 1.04, "Control of Materials" and Section
1.08, "Acceptance" in these General Specifications.

143
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

In addition to the codes and standards specified herein, the contractor shall comply with
the following:

1. CP 2004, 1972 - Code of Practice for Foundations.

2. I.C.E. 1978 - Piling Model Procedures and Specification.
3. HCM, Section 5-6-Piling, paragraphs B and C.

5.06.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

5.06.6.1 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In-Place. Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles (Size),

In-Place, will be measured by the linear meter for each size of piling, or by the cubic meter,
as shown in the Bill of Quantities, based upon the total lengths shown on the plans or as
approved by the Engineer. The total length measured will include test piles.

5.06.6.2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles in Steel Shells, In-Place. Cast-in-Place

Concrete Piles (Size) in Steel Shells In-Place will be measured by the linear meter for each
size of piling or by the cubic meter, as shown in the Bill of Quantities, based upon the total
lengths shown on the plans or approved by the Engineer. The total length measured will
include test piles.

5.06.6.3 Precast Piles, Furnished. Precast Piles, Furnished will be measured by the
linear meter for each type and size of piling or by the cubic meter, as shown in the Bill of
Quantities, based on the total lengths shown on the Order List verified in writing by the
Engineer. The total length measured will include test piles.

Piling damaged by the Contractor through handling, driving, or for other reason shall be
replaced by him at no additional expense to the Ministry.

Should the quantity of piling furnished exceed the quantity placed, the excess piling will
become the property of the Ministry and shall be delivered without additional cost to the
Ministry to the nearest Road District Compound as ordered by the Engineer. Alternatively,
the Engineer may convey excess piling to the Contractor at a mutually agreed price or
convey short lengths to the Contractor for disposal at no cost to either the Ministry or the
Contractor.

5.06.6.4 Precast Piles, In-Place. Precast Piles, In-Place, will be measured by linear
meter for each type and size of piling, or by the cubic meter, driven and cut off as ordered,
as accepted in the structure by the Engineer and as listed in the Bill of Quantities. No
separate measurement will be made for concrete and reinforcing steel in concrete piles.

Preboring, jetting, or other methods used for facilitating pile driving procedures will not
be measured directly, but will be considered as subsidiary to this Work.

5.06.6.5 (Type) Pile Load Tests. These Pile Load Tests will be measured by the unit
of each for the number of load tests completed and accepted, except that load tests made
at the option of the Contractor and load tests made to calibrate diesel or other designated
types of hammers, when test piles are not included in the Bill of Quantities, will not be

144
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

included in the quantity measured for payment.

Table of Contents

5.06.6.6 Pile Splices, (Type). Splices, (Type) will be measured by the unit for those
splices ordered by the Engineer on piles which exceed the lengths shown on the Order
List verified by the Engineer. Splices made for the convenience of the Contractor will not
be paid for. Splices made to fabricate piles from cut-offs will not be paid for unless
ordered by the Engineer.

No measurement shall be made for payment of pile cut-offs.

5.06.7 PAYMENT. The amount and type of piling authorized, completed, accepted, and
measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) shown in the Bill
of Quantities. Pile Load Tests and Splices will be paid by the unit of each at the contract
unit price shown in the Bill of Quantities for each load test or splice ordered and completed
in accordance with the specifications and accepted by the Engineer.

The amount of completed and accepted material, measured as provided above, will be
paid for at the contract unit price(s), which price and payment shall be full compensation
for furnishing, fabricating, transporting, delivering, erecting, and placing all materials,
including all labor, equipment, tools, and all other items necessary for the proper
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

No separate payment will be made for cutting off of pile heads at the specified cut-off
levels as this work is considered subsidiary to the other pile item(s) appearing in the Bill
of Quantities.

Finally, payment shall be considered to cover for all soil testing, dewatering when
required, and cutting off of pile heads.

145
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

50601 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In-Place Linear Meter
5060101 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.6 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060102 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.8 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060103 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.0 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060104 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.2 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060105 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.4 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060106 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.6 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060107 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.8 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060108 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 2.0 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060109 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, ___ m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060112 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.3 m x 1.1 m, In-Place Linear Meter
5060113 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.6 m x 2.2 m, In-Place Linear Meter
5060114 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, ___ m x ___ m, In-Place Linear Meter
50602 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In-Place Cubic Meter
50603 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060301 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.6 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060302 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.8 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060303 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.0 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060304 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.2 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060305 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.4 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060306 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.6 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060307 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.8 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060308 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 2.0 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060309 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, ___ m dia, In Steel Shells, In-place Linear Meter
50604 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In Steel Shells, In-Place Cubic Meter
50605 Precast Concrete Piles, Furnished Linear Meter
5060501 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.2 m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060502 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.3 m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060503 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.4 m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060504 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.5 m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060505 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.6 m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060506 Precast Concrete Piles, ___ m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
50606 Precast Concrete Piles, Furnished Cubic Meter
50607 Precast Concrete Piles, In-Place Linear Meter
5060701 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.2 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060702 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.3 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060703 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.4 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060704 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.5 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060705 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.6 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060706 Precast Concrete Piles, ___ m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
50608 Precast Concrete Piles, In-Place Cubic Meter
50609 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, Furnished Linear Meter

146
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5060901
Table of Contents Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.2 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060902 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.3 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060903 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.4 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060904 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.5 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060905 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.6 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060906 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, ___ m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
50610 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, Furnished Cubic Meter
50611 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, In-Place Linear Meter
5061101 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.2 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061102 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.3 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061103 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.4 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061104 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.5 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061105 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.6 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061106 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, ___ m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
50612 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, In-Place Cubic Meter
50613 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, Furnished Linear Meter
5061301 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.2 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5061302 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.3 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5061303 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.4 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5061304 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.5 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5061305 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.6 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5061306 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, ___ m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
50614 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, Furnished Cubic Meter
50615 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, In-Place Linear Meter
5061501 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.2 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061502 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.3 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061503 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.4 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061504 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.5 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061505 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.6 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061506 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, ___ m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
50616 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, In-Place Cubic Meter
50617 Steel H-Piles, Furnished Ton
50618 Steel H-Piles, In Place Linear Meter
50619 Pile Load Test Unit
5061901 Working Pile Load Test Unit
5061902 Ultimate Pile Load Test Unit
5061903 Tension Pile Load Test Unit
5061904 Pile Integrity Testing Unit
50620 Pile Splices Unit
5062001 Pile Splices, Precast Concrete Unit
5062002 Pile Splices, Steel H-Piles Unit

147
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents SECTION 5.07 - LEAN CONCRETE BASE COURSE

5.07.1 DESCRIPTION. The work under this section consists of furnishing all materials
and constructing a lean concrete base course in accordance with the details shown on the
project plans and the requirements of these specifications.

ITEM IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Lean Concrete Base Course

5.07.2 MATERIALS.

5.07.2.1 Portland Cement. Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of

Paragraph 5.01.2.1, “Portland Cement,” in these General Specifications.

5.07.2.2 Aggregate. At the option of the contractor, the aggregate for lean concrete
base course shall be either Grading II aggregate base material conforming to the
requirements of Section 3.03, “Aggregate Bases,” in these General Specifications, or a
combination of fine and coarse aggregate for Portland cement concrete conforming to
Paragraph 5.01.2.2, “Aggregate,” in these General Specifications.

5.07.2.3 Water. Water used in the construction of lean concrete base course shall
conform to the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.2.3, “Water,” in these General
Specifications.

5.07.2.4 Admixtures. Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Paragraph

5.01.2.4, “Admixtures,” in these General Specifications.

5.07.2.5 Curing Compounds. Liquid membrane curing compounds shall conform to

the requirements of AASHTO M-148, Type 2.

5.07.3 EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall be according to the type and number outlined in
the Contractor's detailed Program of Work as approved by the Engineer.

5.07.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.07.4.1 Preparation of Subgrade, Subbase, or Base. Lean concrete base course

shall be placed on a prepared subgrade, subbase, or base which shall have been
constructed conforming to the surface finish and grade tolerance requirements specified
for the material involved.

The subgrade, subbase, or base shall be free of loose or extraneous material, kept
uniformly moist, but free of ponded water, immediately before placing lean concrete base
course and maintained in an acceptable condition throughout the placement operation.
Any soft or yielding area of the subgrade shall be corrected before placing lean concrete
base course.

5.07.4.2 Forming. Lean concrete base course shall be constructed with slip-form

148
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

paving equipment. Forming shall conform to the requirements of Paragraph 5.08.4.3

Table of Contents

"Forming" in these General Specifications.

5.07.4.3 Proportioning and Mixing Lean Concrete Base Course - Mix Design. The
contractor shall determine the mix proportions and shall furnish lean concrete base course
which shall exceed one hundred eighty (180) kilograms of Portland Cement per cubic
meter, except the amount of cement in the mix may be reduced when fly ash is added as
determined by Paragraph 5.01.2.4, "Mineral Admixtures," in these General Specifications.
The lean concrete base course shall attain a minimum compressive strength of fifty (50)
kilograms per square centimeter after seven (7) days per MRDTM 528.

The contractor shall submit a complete solid-volume mix design to the Engineer for
review before incorporating the proposed mix into the work.

Mix designs submitted for review shall include:

1. The weights, volumes, and specific gravities of all ingredients

2. The brand, type, and source of cement

3. The type of admixtures

4. The source of aggregate

5. The code number to identify the mix design

The contractor may submit mix designs from previous or concurrent projects. The
contractor shall make no changes in the concrete mix designs or code numbers without
review by the Engineer. A new mix design shall be submitted for the Engineer's review any
time the contractor proposes a change in materials or material proportions.

The contractor shall prepare trial batches of lean concrete base course for each mix
design. The number of trial batches required will be established by the Engineer and the
Engineer may waive the requirements for trial batches at any time. The contractor shall
prepare trial batches using materials, mixing equipment, procedures, and batch sizes
which are the same as those to be used in the work.

The Engineer will take test samples from the trial batches. When test results indicate the
proposed mix will not meet the specified compressive strength requirements, the
contractor shall submit a new mix design for review.

In no case will the Engineer's review or test of a mix design relieve the contractor of the
responsibility to provide lean concrete base course with the specified properties or material
contents.

5.07.4.3.1 Cement, Water, and Aggregate - Cement, water, and aggregate shall be
proportioned in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 5.01.2, "Materials" in
these General Specifications.

149
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.07.4.3.2 Admixtures - Admixtures shall be proportioned in accordance with the

requirements of Paragraph 5.01.2.4 "Admixtures" in these General Specifications.

Air-entraining admixtures will be required for lean concrete base course placed at
elevations above two thousand (2000) meters. The amount of entrained air in the lean
concrete mixture shall not be less than six (6) + 1.5% by volume. At elevations below two
thousand (2000) meters, air-entraining admixtures may be used at the option of the
contractor; however, the amount of entrained air in the lean concrete mixture shall not
exceed four (4) percent by volume.

5.07.4.3.3 Mixing - Mixing shall be performed according with the requirements of

Subsection 5.01.5, "Proportioning and Mixing During Construction" in these General
Specifications.

5.07.4.3.4 Consistency - The contractor shall furnish lean concrete base course
having a slump of seven (7) centimeters or less, or as provided for in Subsection 5.01.3,
"Mix Design" in these General Specifications. Lean concrete base course that fails to
conform to this consistency requirement will be rejected. Tests for consistency will be
performed according to the requirements of MRDTM 517.

5.07.4.4 Joints. There shall be no longitudinal or weakened plane joints in lean

concrete base course. Transverse construction joints shall be constructed normal to the
centerline of the pavement at the end of each day's production and during other work
interruptions as directed by the Engineer. When Portland cement concrete pavement is
to be placed over lean concrete base course, longitudinal construction joints in the lean
concrete base course shall be at least six hundred (600) millimeters from any subsequent
longitudinal joint in the Portland cement concrete pavement.

5.07.4.5 Placing and Finishing. Lean concrete base course shall be placed and
finished according to the applicable requirements of Paragraph 5.08.4.4 "Placing and
Finishing" in these General Specifications, except the Surface Texturing portion is not
applicable.

Lean concrete base course may be placed either for the full width in a single pass, or
in two or more passes, provided each pass is a minimum of four (4) meters wide whenever
possible. Longitudinal construction joints between passes shall conform to the
requirements of Paragraph 5.08.4.5 "Joints" in these General Specifications.

5.07.5 CURING. Curing of lean concrete base course shall begin immediately after
surface finishing operations. Liquid membrane-forming compound shall be applied
uniformly to the surface and sides of the lean concrete base course at the rate of not less
than one (1) liter per five (5) square meters. Alternately continuous water sprinkling or
flogging can be applied.

The curing compound container shall be equipped with a calibrated sight-glass for
verification of quantities used.

150
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.07.6 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Lean concrete base course shall be constructed in

Table of Contents

accordance with the weather limitations of Subsection 5.01.6, "Weather Conditions and
Curing Requirements" in these General Specifications.

5.07.7 LEAN CONCRETE BASE COURSE STRENGTH TESTS.

5.07.7.1 Production Lot. The compressive strength and thickness of lean concrete
base course will be evaluated for each lot of production. A lot shall consist of three
hundred fifty (350) lineal meters, or fraction thereof, of lean concrete base course placed
with one pass of the production equipment, measured parallel to the roadway centerline.

5.07.7.2 Compressive Strength. The minimum average compressive strength of lean

concrete base course shall be fifty (50) kilograms per square centimeter for each lot at
seven days. Each lot shall be represented by four random samples. Each strength test
will consist of the average of three cylinders prepared with material taken from a single
load of lean concrete base course. If any cylinder shows obvious evidence as stated in
ACI 214 of improper sampling, molding, or testing, it will be discarded and the strength test
will consist of the strength of the remaining cylinders. All test cylinders will be prepared
according to the requirements of MRDTM 528. The mean value of the four compressive
strength tests will be reported to the nearest twenty-five hundredths (0.25) kilograms per
square centimeter. The unit price paid for the lean concrete base course in that lot will be
adjusted as provided in the provisions of Paragraph 5.07.11.1 "Adjustment in Concrete
Unit Price" in these General Specifications.

5.07.8 OPENING TO TRAFFIC. No traffic or equipment will be permitted on lean

concrete base course until the material has attained the specified seven day compressive
strength as determined by the cores cut for the thickness determination. However, when
the lean concrete base course is to be placed adjacent to previously constructed lean
concrete base course, the paver and work bridges required for the completing new width
will be permitted on the lean concrete base course seventy-two (72) hours after
placement.

The contractor shall schedule his operations and route his equipment such that the base
is subjected to minimal traffic. When it is necessary for construction traffic to travel on lean
concrete base course which has attained the specified compressive strength, the traffic
shall comply with all legal load restrictions applicable to traffic on kingdom highways. No
overloaded vehicles will be permitted to travel on the lean concrete base course under any
circumstances.

Damage to the curing compound or to the lean concrete base course which occurs as
a result of the contractor's construction activities shall be promptly repaired by the
contractor at his expense, when so directed by the Engineer.

5.07.9 LEAN CONCRETE BASE COURSE THICKNESS. Lean concrete base course
shall be constructed to the specified thickness. Tolerances allowed for base and subgrade
construction and other provisions of the specifications that may affect thickness shall not
be construed to modify the lean concrete base course thickness requirements.

151
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

To determine thickness acceptability, the contractor shall drill one hundred (100)
Table of Contents

millimeters minimum diameter cores at the locations specified by the Engineer.

The Engineer will determine average core lengths in accordance with the provisions of
MRDTM 525, except that the measurements will be made to the nearest tenth (0.10) of
a millimeter and the average of the measurements will be reported to the nearest tenth
(0.10) of millimeter.

When calculating average core lengths, cores which exceed the specified thickness by
more than three (3) millimeters will be considered to have the specified thickness plus
three (3) millimeters.

The Engineer may make field thickness measurements instead of measurements in

accordance with MRDTM 525 when an initial core taken from any unit exceeds the
specified thickness; however, when the initial core is less than the specified thickness, or
when there is any question as to the unit thickness, thickness will be determined according
with MRDTM 525.

To determine the acceptability of each lot of lean concrete base course, the following
procedures will be followed:

An initial core shall be drilled in each lot and, if the thickness by the core is not deficient
by more than three (3) millimeters, the thickness of the lean concrete base course in that
lot will be considered acceptable.

If the thickness by the initial core is deficient by more than three (3) millimeters, but less
than nineteen (19) millimeters, two (2)additional cores shall be drilled within that lot and
the thickness by the three (3) cores will be averaged. The average of the three (3) cores
will be used to determine acceptability, and the unit price will be adjusted as specified in
Paragraph 5.07.11.1, “ Adjustment in Concrete Unit Price,” in these General Specifications.

If any core is deficient by more than nineteen (19) millimeters, additional cores shall be
drilled at intervals not to exceed three meters in each direction from the deficient core,
parallel to the roadway centerline, until one core is obtained in each direction that is not
deficient by more than nineteen (19) millimeters. The lean concrete base course between
these two cores will be evaluated separately from the balance of the lean concrete base
course in that lot, and unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, shall be removed and
replaced with lean concrete base course of the specified thickness.

At locations where cores have been drilled, the resulting holes shall be filled with lean
concrete base course or other similar material as approved by the Engineer.

5.07.10 MEASUREMENT. Lean concrete base course will be measured by the square
meter. The area to be paid for will be calculated on the basis of the dimensions shown on
the plans, and adjusted by the amount of any change ordered by the Engineer.

152
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.07.11 PAYMENT. The contract unit price paid for lean concrete base course shall
include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials including at least one hundred
eighty (180) kilograms cement per cubic meter of lean concrete base course, tools,
equipment and incidentals, and doing all of the work involved in constructing lean concrete
base course as shown on the plans, as specified in these specifications, subject to the
following adjustment:

5.07.11.1 Adjustment in Concrete Unit Price. The accepted quantities of lean

concrete base course, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit
price, complete in place, except that an adjustment in the contract unit price will be made
in accordance with Table 5.07-1, when the average lengths of the cores indicates
deficiencies in thickness by more than three (3) millimeters but less than nineteen (19)
millimeters, or Table 5.07-2 when the quality of the concrete represented by the mean
value of the four (4) compressive strength tests is less than the specified seven day
compressive strength.

When the lean concrete base course is deficient both thickness by more than three (3)
millimeters, and in compressive strength, the percentage of the contract unit price shall
be the product of the applicable percentages from Tables 5.07-1 and 5.07-2.

TABLE 5.07-1
ADJUSTMENT IN CONTRACT UNIT PRICE FOR
DEFICIENCY IN THICKNESS OF LEAN CONCRETE BASE COURSE
____________________________________________________________________
Core Length Less Specified
Thickness in Millimeters Allowed Contract Unit Price

0.0 to 3.0 100

3.0 to 6.0 93
6.0 to 9.0 85
9.0 to 12.0 75
12.0 to 15.0 63
15.0 to 19.0 50
less than 19.0 25*
____________________________________________________________________

153
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

TABLE 5.07-2
ADJUSTMENT IN CONTRACT UNIT PRICE FOR
DEFICIENCY IN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF LEAN CONCRETE BASE COURSE
____________________________________________________________________

Percent of Specified Strength Percent of Contract

( to the nearest whole percent) Unit Price Allowed

>100 100
97 to 99 92
94 to 96 85
90 to 93 77
85 to 89 68
80 to 84 60
75 to 79 50
<75 Remove and Replace, or leave
in place at no payment.
____________________________________________________________________

* Material represented by cores deficient by more than nineteen (19) millimeters

thickness and/or represented by lots attaining seven day compressive strengths with the
mean value of the four (4) compressive strengths of less than seventy-five (75) percent
of requirement, will be evaluated as to acceptance. The Engineer will determine if the lean
concrete base course may remain in place. If allowed to remain in place, no payment will
be made for such base. Lean concrete base course not permitted to remain in place shall
be removed and replaced at the contractor's expense.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

50701 Lean Concrete Base Course Square Meter

154
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents SECTION 5.08 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

5.08.1 DESCRIPTION. The work under this section consists of furnishing all materials
and constructing a pavement surface using Portland cement concrete, furnishing and
placing dowels and tie bars, furnishing and placing miscellaneous reinforcing steel and
joint materials, constructing joints, and coring operations, in accordance with the details
shown on the plans and the requirements of these specifications.

ITEM IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement

5.08.2 MATERIALS.

5.08.2.1 Portland Cement Concrete. Portland cement concrete for pavement shall
consist of Portland cement, water, fine and coarse aggregates, and admixtures. The
concrete shall be Class B as specified in Section 5.01.1, "Description" in these General
Specifications.

5.08.2.2 Portland Cement. Portland cement shall be as specified in Paragraph

5.01.2.1, "Portland Cement" in these General Specifications.

5.08.2.3 Aggregates. Aggregates shall be of the Size B as listed in Paragraph

5.01.2.2, "Aggregate" in these General Specifications.

5.08.2.4 Water. Water shall be as specified in Paragraph 5.01.2.3, "Water" in these

General Specifications.

5.08.2.5 Admixtures. Admixtures shall be the type approved for use as specified in
Paragraph 5.01.2.4, "Admixtures" in these General Specifications, and as follows:

Air-Entraining admixtures shall be used for all concrete pavements above two thousand
(2000) meters or cast in a high salt-laden environment, as specified in the special
specifications. In either case, concrete shall be entrained to six percent (6%) +/ - 1.5% as
determined by Test MRDTM 519 or 521.

Water-Reducers, may be used at the option of the contractor, as approved by the

Engineer and the cost shall be borne by the contractor.

Mineral Admixtures, Type F, may be added to the concrete at the contractor's option to
increase workability, or shall be required if alkali-silica reactive aggregates are used
without Type 1P-MS cements.

5.08.2.6 Expansion Joint Filler. Materials for expansion joints shall conform to
Paragraphs 6.22.2.2, "Joint Sealing Compounds" and 6.22.2.4, "Preformed Expansion
Joint Filler," in these General Specifications.

155
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.08.2.7 Steel Reinforcement. Materials for tie bars and dowel bars shall conform to
the requirements of Subsection 5.02.2, " Materials" in these General Specifications, for the
dowel bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M-254 with Type B coating
except that the base metal shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A615. When epoxy
coated reinforcing steel is designated it shall conform to the requirements of Paragraph
5.02.4.9 "Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

5.08.2.8 Plastic Sheet Bond Breaker. Bond Breaker shall be either polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) plastic film conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 1593, Type II, or
polyethylene plastic film conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 2103, Type II. The
thickness shall be a nominal fifteen hundredths to two tenths (0.15 to 0.20) millimeters.

5.08.2.9 Curing Compound. Liquid membrane curing compound shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO2 M-148, Type 2.

5.08.3 EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall be as detailed in the Contractor's Program of

Work, as approved by the Engineer.

5.08.4 CONSTRUCTION.

5.08.4.1 General. At least forty-five (45) days prior to paving, the contractor shall
furnish for the Engineer's review for the following specification compliance:

A detailed sequence and schedule of concrete placement operations including, but not
limited to; the proposed width of pavement to be placed, equipment, production rates,
working hours, transporting, placement methods, curing, sawing, and sealing methods.

A detailed staking plan for grade control, including offset requirement.

A traffic control plan for pavement construction operations which includes provision for
placement and maintenance of barriers required to protect the pavement from traffic for
a minimum of seven days after concrete placement.

Mainline concrete pavement shall be constructed with slip-form paving equipment;

however, areas inaccessible to slip-form pavers may be constructed with fixed side forms.
Ramps and irregular pavement areas shall be constructed with either slip-form or fixed
side forms.

Unless otherwise shown on the plans, mainline roadway pavement, including concrete
shoulders or laybys, shall be placed in a single monolithic pass. Paving widths which are
less than the full mainline width shall be constructed with longitudinal joints that are
located on the lane line or at the edge of the main roadway, as provided for in Paragraph
5.08.4.5, "Joints" in these General Specifications.

The contractor may submit an alternate paving plan in writing at least forty-five (45) days
prior to paving for review by the Engineer. The Engineer's approval shall be obtained
before proceeding with the alternate plan.

156
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.08.4.2 Pavement Base. The surface of lean concrete base, cement treated base,
or cement treated subgrade upon which the concrete pavement is to be placed shall first
conform to the finish and elevation requirements specified for the material involved. The
surface shall be free of all loose and extraneous material.

The plastic sheet bond breaker, specified in Paragraph 5.08.2.8, "Plastic Sheet Bond
Breaker" in these General Specifications shall be placed on the base or subgrade before
placing required load-transfer dowel assembles, expansion joint headers, or pavement
concrete. The seams of the sheeting shall be overlapped a minimum of one hundred fifty
(150) millimeters and the material shall be anchored to prevent displacement from all
causes by methods approved by the Engineer. Areas that are damaged due to dowel
assembly installation or other operations shall be repaired as approved by the Engineer.

Portland Cement concrete pavement shall not be constructed on lean concrete base,
cement treated base, or cement treated subgrade prior to at least seven days after the
placement of the lean concrete base, cement treated base or, cement treated subbase,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

5.08.4.3 Forming. Concrete pavement forms shall be placed in accordance with the
following procedures:

1. The Contractor shall provide survey control for elevation control and alignment as
approved by the Engineer.

2. Slip-Form Method. The contractor shall set taut guide lines to control both line and
grade to conform to the requirements of Section 5.05, “ Steel Structures and Miscellaneous
Metal Work,” in these General Specifications.

Slip-form paving equipment shall be equipped with automatic sensing and control
devices and shall operate such that the machine automatically follows the guide line.

Slip-form pavers shall be equipped with traveling side forms designed to laterally support
the concrete for a length of time sufficient to produce pavement of the required cross-
section.

No abrupt changes in longitudinal alignment will be permitted. Horizontal deviation from

the alignment shown on the plans shall not exceed three (3) centimeters.

3. Fixed-Form Method. Forms shall be set to the required line and grade and shall be
as approved by the Engineer well in advance of placing concrete.

Forms shall be made of steel and have an approved section with a base width of at least
one hundred (100) millimeters and a depth equal to or greater than the thickness of the
pavement. The forms shall be staked with steel stakes of appropriate lengths. Each form
section shall have a stake pocket at each end and intervals of not more than six hundred
fifty (650) millimeters. The stake pockets shall have a device for locking the form to the

157
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

steel stakes. Each form section shall be straight and true, free from bend or warps at all
Table of Contents

times. The top of each form section shall not vary from a true plane by more than four (4)
millimeters in one and three-tenths (1.3) meters.

Wood or other rigid forms may be used in irregular areas as approved by the Engineer.

Before forms are placed, the underlying material shall be finished to the required grade
and shall be firm and smooth. The forms shall be uniformly supported upon the subgrade
or base and shall be adjusted to the required grade and alignment. Forms shall be
supported so that they will not deviate more than four (4) millimeters from the proper
elevation during paving operations.

Forms shall remain in place until the day after placing concrete and shall be removed
without damaging the pavement. Pry bars will not be used between the forms and the
pavement concrete under any circumstance.

5.08.4.4 Placing and Finishing.

5.08.4.4.1 General. When the daytime temperatures are expected to exceed thirty-
five degrees Celsius (35 o C.) , the concrete shall be placed, compacted, and finished only
when the temperature is below that limit and expected to decline.

Immediately prior to placing concrete, the contractor shall verify that the elevation of
the grade wires controlling slip-form pavers and the elevation of the fixed-forms are such
that the thickness and the finished grade of the pavement will meet the requirements of
the project plans and these specifications.

Concrete shall be placed using methods that result in a minimum of handling and
segregation.

Concrete placement shall be continuous between expansion or construction joints.

The concrete shall be struck off, consolidated and floated by mechanical methods. When
widths are less than one and three-tenths (1.3) meters, and where it is impractical to use
mechanical methods, manual methods may be used to finish the surface of the concrete.

If surface drying or cracking should occur before the application of curing material, the
entire surface of the concrete shall be kept moist by applying water with an atomizing
nozzle so that a mist, and not a damaging spray, is formed. The water from the nozzle
shall not be applied directly upon the concrete in a quantity sufficient to cause a flow or
wash of the surface.

The contractor shall protect the base or subgrade from equipment cleaning operations
at the end of each day's production. All concrete deposited on the base or subgrade
during cleaning operations shall be removed from the base or subgrade immediately after
cleaning is completed. Any damage to the base or subgrade shall be immediately
repaired as approved by the Engineer, before resuming paving operations. Wash water
will not be permitted to pond on the roadway.

158
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Concrete which is spilled, splattered or scattered on existing pavement shall be

Table of Contents

removed before the end of each day's paving operations.

Pavement results and production rates are closely related to well managed operations;
therefore, no work shall lag and all operations shall be completed within the optimum or
specified time. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, satisfactory results cannot be obtained,
the work shall be suspended until the contractor can assure the Engineer of satisfactory
results.

5.08.4.4.2 Slip-Form Method. The equipment shall spread, consolidate, screen, and
float-finish the concrete so that a minimum of hand finishing will be necessary and a well
consolidated and homogeneous pavement is produced. Additional labor and equipment
shall be supplied when paving beyond the limits of the side forms is required.

The machine shall vibrate the concrete for the full width and depth of the concrete.
Such vibration shall be accomplished with vibrating tubes or arms working in the concrete
and spaced not more than one (1) millimeter on centers. Vibrators shall operate at a
minimum of five thousand (5,000) impulses per minute. Concrete placement shall cease
immediately if a vibrator fails to function and cannot be immediately repaired, replaced, or
supplemented with additional vibrators.

The machine shall be operated with as nearly a continuous forward movement as

possible and all mixing, delivering, and concrete spreading operations shall be coordinated
to provide uniform progress. If for any reason it is necessary to stop the forward
movement of the paver, the vibratory and tamping elements shall also be stopped
simultaneously.

Pavement edge slump, exclusive of edge rounding, in excess of six (6) millimeters
shall be corrected at the time of operation, if possible. If correction is not possible while
concrete is plastic, excessive edge slump shall be removed by saw cutting a minimum of
one hundred thirty (130) millimeters from the pavement edge and replacing the removed
section. At the contractor's option, the entire slab may be removed and replaced rather
than saw cutting. Repairs required by excessive edge slump shall be done at the
Contractor's expense.

When concrete is placed adjacent to previously constructed pavement, work bridges

for placing and finishing the pavement and tracks on one side of the paver may be allowed
on the new pavement provided that:

1. The previously placed pavement has been placed for a minimum of seventy-two
(72) hours;

2. Pressure exerted on the pavement by the paver shall not exceed two (2) kilograms
per square centimeter;

3. Tracks on the paver shall be equipped with protective pads, or the surface of the
existing pavement shall be protected so that the surface is not damaged;

159
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents 4. No part of the track shall be operated within three hundred thirty (330) millimeters
of the edge of the pavement.

Any pavement which is damaged by the contractor's equipment or operations shall be

repaired as approved by the Engineer and at the Contractor's expense.

With the exception of saws used for the construction of weakened plane joints, no
other contractor's equipment will be allowed on the pavement until all the requirements
specified herein have been met.

5.08.4.4.3 Fixed Form Method - Three types of self-propelled mechanical equipment

will be required; the spreader, the finisher, and the float. A single machine incorporating
two or more of these operations may be used if it has been demonstrated that such
machine will accomplish satisfactory results. All wheels of all machines that ride on the
finished concrete surfaces shall be equipped with rubber tires.

The concrete shall be spread uniformly between the forms immediately after it is
placed by means of the spreading machine. The spreader shall be followed by the
finishing machine equipped with not less than two oscillating or reciprocating screeds. The
spreading machine, or the finishing machine, shall be equipped with vibrating equipment
that will consolidate the concrete to the full paving width. Vibrators shall be attached to
the rear of the spreading or finishing machine. Vibrators shall not rest on new pavements
or the side forms or contact any tie bars, and power to the vibrators shall be such that
when the motion of the machine is stopped, vibration will cease. Vibrators shall operate
at a minimum of five thousand (5000) impulses per minute.

The concrete shall be spread full width before being struck off by the finishing
machine. The concrete shall be struck off and consolidated so that the surface will conform
to the finished grade and cross-section shown on the project plans and at the same time
leave sufficient material for the floating operation. The spreading or finishing machine shall
move over the pavement as many times and at such intervals as may be required to
insured thorough consolidation.

After the pavement has been struck off and consolidated, it shall be floated with an
approved longitudinal float.

The contractor may use a longitudinal float composed of one or more cutting and
smoothing floats, suspended from and guided by a rigid frame the frame shall be carried
on at least four wheels riding on and constantly in contact with the forms.

The contractor may use a longitudinal float which is worked with a sawing motion while
being held in a floating position parallel to the roadway centerline and while passing
gradually from one side of the pavement to the other. Forward movements along the
centerline of the roadway shall be in successive advances of not more than one half the
length of the float.

Instead of using either type of longitudinal float, a single machine which will
satisfactory consolidate, finish, and float may be used. This machine may be towed by a

160
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

spreading machine. This combination finishing-floating machine shall be equipped with

Table of Contents

screeds and vibrators as previously described. Floating shall be accomplished with a non-
oscillating float held in a suspended position from the frame.

If any spreading, finishing, and floating equipment used proves inadequate to obtain
the results prescribed, such equipment shall be remedied or satisfactory equipment
substituted or added.

5.08.4.4.4 Fixed Form Manual Methods. Manual methods may be permitted by the
Engineer in areas inaccessible to mechanical equipment.

When manual methods are permitted, concrete shall be deposited, spread, and struck
off to such an elevation that, when properly consolidated, the surface shall conform to the
required lines and grades. The strike-off board shall be moved forward with a combined
longitudinal and transverse motion so that neither end is raised from the side forms. While
striking off, a slight excess of concrete shall be maintained in front of the cutting edge at
all times.

The concrete shall be consolidated by internal vibrator. Vibrators shall operate at a

minimum of five thousand (5000) pulses per minute. The use of vibrators for shifting the
concrete mass will not be permitted.

After consolidation, the concrete shall be tamped to the proper surface elevation and
cross-section with an approved tamping or screening device or with a mechanical vibrating
unit spanning the full width between forms. A small surplus of concrete shall be
maintained in front of the tamper or vibrating unit. Tamping or vibrating shall continue until
the required cross-section is obtained and the mortar is flushed slightly to the surface.

Other approved methods may be used to finish the concrete.

On grades in excess of five percent, a second strike-off board may be required to

follow behind the tamper or vibrating unit and used in the same manner as the tamper to
remove waves caused by concrete flow.

5.08.4.4.5 Joint Finishing and Edging. The pavement edges and joints shall be
edged according to the details shown on the plans.

5.08.4.4.6 Surface Texturing. Surface texturing of the plastic concrete shall begin
immediately after placement and finishing of the concrete. All excessive surface water
shall be removed before texturing operations begin. Texturing shall be performed by
applying a longitudinal burlap drag followed by a transverse texturing using steel tines.

Burlap and steel tines shall be supported by rolling mechanical bridges. They shall not
be supported manually except in areas inaccessible to the bridges.

Rolling mechanical bridges supporting steel tines shall be equipped and operate with
automatic sensing and control devices which follow the same control line as the slip-form
paver. This machine shall be used for texturing the pavement only. Burlap shall not be

161
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

supported on the same rolling mechanical bridge used to support the steel tines.
Table of Contents

Burlap shall be four ply, three hundred forty (340) grams per square meter (10oz)
material and shall traverse the full width of the pavement to within one hundred thirty (130)
millimeters of the pavement edge.

The timing of the texturing operations is critical. Grooves that close following texturing
will not be permitted, and texturing shall be completed before excessive tearing of the
tinning grooves occur.

Hand tinning brooms shall be provided and available at the job site at all times. Tine
texturing shall be preformed so that the grooves produced will be uniform, normal to the
roadway centerline, and shall extend over the entire roadway width to within eighty (80)
millimeters of the pavement edge. Swerving groove patterns will not be permitted.

Texture grooves shall be one and five-tenths (1.5) to three (3) millimeters) wide and
two and five-tenths (2.5) to five (5) millimeters deep. The center-to-center spacing of the
grooves shall be from twelve (12) to twenty-five (25) millimeters.

If necessary, hardened concrete shall be textured by any method that will produce the
required grooves, providing the pavement surface is not damaged.

5.08.4.4.7 Curing. Curing compound shall be applied to the completed concrete

surface within fifteen (15) minutes after surface texturing operations and before any drying
shrinkage or craze cracks begin to appear. In the event of surface drying or cracking,
water applied with an atomizing nozzle shall begin immediately and continue until curing
compound is applied. Curing compound shall not be applied on free standing water.

Liquid curing compound shall be applied in one or more uniform applications totaling
between (1) and one and one-half (1.5) liters per square meters. The exact rate is to be
determined by the Engineer based upon the Contractor's field trials which insure uniform
coverage with no thin areas, runs, sags, skips or holidays. The curing compound
container shall be equipped with a calibrated sight glass for verification of quantities used.

When the ambient temperature is above thirty degrees Celsius (30 o C.), the contractor
shall fog the surface of the concrete with an atomized mist of water. The surface of the
pavement shall be kept moist until initial joint sawing is completed; fogging done after the
application of the curing compound has been applied shall not begin until the curing
compound has hardened sufficiently to prevent damaging it.

When misting is required, the entire surface of the concrete shall be kept damp by
applying water with an atomizing spray nozzle in such a manner to avoid scouring or
washing of the concrete.

Concrete curing shall be continued for not less than seven days and any damaged
curing material shall be immediately repaired.

162
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.08.4.5 Joints.
Table of Contents

5.08.4.5.1 General. Joints in concrete pavement will be designated as transverse

expansion joints, longitudinal or transverse construction joints, or longitudinal or transverse
weakened plane joints.

The faces of all joints shall be constructed perpendicular to the surface of the concrete
pavement.

Joints shall be constructed of the type, to the dimensions, and at the location shown
on the plans and as specified herein. Concrete placed in lanes adjacent to previously
placed concrete shall have transverse weakened plane joints located to align with the
weakened plane joints in the adjacent pavement.

5.08.4.5.2 Longitudinal Joints. Longitudinal joints in the main roadway shall be

weakened plane joints or construction joints. Weakened plane joints shall be constructed
by sawing.

Longitudinal weakened plane joints shall be constructed between traffic lanes and also
between traffic lanes and shoulders if concrete shoulders wider than one and sixty-five
hundredths (1.65) meters are specified.

Longitudinal joints in ramps and tapers shall be either weakened plane joints or
construction joints. The location of longitudinal joints in ramps and tapers shall be as
approved by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise shown on the plans, tie bars shall be placed in all longitudinal
construction joints and all longitudinal weakened plane joints either by acceptable
mechanical methods while the concrete is still plastic or after the concrete has hardened.
When pavement is being placed adjacent to existing concrete pavement, tie bars shall be
inserted into the existing concrete by drilling twenty (22) millimeter diameter holes into the
hardened concrete. Tie bars shall be placed according with the details shown on the
plans and shall be anchored into the existing concrete with nonshrink grout or epoxy. The
Engineer's approval of the anchoring material shall be obtained before the start of work.

Tie bars shall be deformed No. 5 reinforcing steel bars conforming to AASHTO M 31,
spaced seven hundred fifty (750) millimeters apart. Tie bars placed in pavement which
is constructed without load transfer dowel assemblies shall be six hundred (600)
millimeters long. Tie bars placed in pavement which is constructed with load transfer
assemblies shall be five hundred (500) millimeters long. Tie bars shall be placed within
twenty-five (25) millimeters of mid-depth of the slab. Tie bars placed in adjacent slabs of
different thickness shall be placed at mid-depth of the thinner slab.

5.08.4.5.3 Transverse Expansions Joints. Transverse expansion joints shall be

located at the junction of roadway pavement slabs and bridge approach slabs. The joints
shall be formed in accordance with the details shown on the plans. Transverse expansion
joints at locations other than bridge approaches shall be constructed as shown on the
plans.

163
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Transverse construction joints with tie bars shall be formed as shown on the plans and
as specified herein. They shall be placed at the end of each day's production, or when
placement of concrete is discontinued for more than one hour. Excess concrete shall not
be placed beyond a construction joint at the end of a day's production. Tie bars shall be
twenty five millimeter (25) diameter deformed (No. 8) reinforcing steel bars, six hundred
(600) millimeters in length, spaced five hundred (500) millimeters apart. All tie bars shall
be placed at mid-depth in the slab.

Transverse construction joints shall be formed perpendicular to the centerline of the

roadway.

Transverse weakened plane joints shall be sawed as shown on the plans. Sawed
joints shall extend over for the full main roadway width with a right forward skew extending
the entire width at a rate of six hundred fifty (650) millimeters longitudinally per four (4)
meters of width transversely. The sequence of spacing between adjacent transverse
weakened plane joints shall be five (5) millimeters, four (4) millimeters, and repeat unless
otherwise shown on the plans.

Transverse weakened plane joints in ramps and cross-roads shall be constructed

perpendicular to the centerline of the ramp or cross-road.

Transverse weakened plane joints shall be constructed at least two (2) meters from
transverse construction joints as measured along any longitudinal joint between lanes. The
last sawed joint before a construction joint shall be omitted if it cannot meet the spacing
requirements. A new joint sequence shall be started after a construction joint. The first
weakened plane joint shall be constructed with the closest portion of the joint located two
(2) meters from the transverse construction joint.

5.08.4.5.4 Joint Construction.

1. Sawed joints. Longitudinal or transverse weakened plane joints shall be sawed to

the dimensions shown on the plans. Excess water from the sawing operations will not be
permitted to stand on any subgrade to be paved. The contractor shall provide and
maintain acceptable methods to control the water used in the sawing so the subgrade is
not damaged.

Sawed joints shall be constructed before uncontrolled cracking of the pavement

occurs; however, joints shall not be sawed until the concrete has hardened enough to
prevent excessive tearing or raveling during sawing operations. The exact time when
sawing will be done shall be determined by the contractor.

The contractor shall keep a properly maintained spare concrete saw on the project site
at all times during which sawed joints are being constructed and shall be readily available
as a substitute for the primary concrete saw.

Any procedure used to saw joints which results in premature uncontrolled cracking
shall be revised immediately. The contractor shall repair damaged areas or random cracks

164
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

as specified and directed by the Engineer. Any spalled or chipped concrete along the
Table of Contents

joints shall be repaired as approved by the Engineer.

If the joints are sawed in stages, the initial saw cut shall be of the minimum specified
width and shall be sawed to the full depth shown on the plans.

Suitable guide lines or other devices shall be used to assure that the joints are
constructed at the locations shown on the plans. When dowel assemblies are used, care
shall be taken to assure joints are centered over the dowels.

Just prior to sealing, each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material,
including curing compound and the joint faces shall be clean and surface dry when the
seal is applied.

Immediately prior to applying joint sealant, an inert compressible material, approved

by the Engineer, shall be inserted along the joint as shown on the plans. The
compressible material shall be compatible with the joint sealant to be applied.

Sealant shall be applied according to the manufacture's recommendations. Any

sealant spilled on the concrete pavement shall be removed.

Joints shall be sealed within ten (10) working days after the concrete has been placed
and before opening the pavement to any traffic.

2. Construction Joints. Longitudinal and transverse construction joints shall be

formed according to the details shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

When the concrete is not finished, textured, and protected with curing material within
one hour after placement, the Engineer may order the contractor to construct a transverse
construction joint by sawing at the location established by the Engineer. All concrete
placed beyond the construction joint shall be removed and disposed of by the contractor,
at his expense, prior to continuing paving operations.

3. Transverse Expansion Joints. Transverse expansion joints shall be formed

according to the details shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

5.08.4.6 Opening Pavement to Traffic. Pavement shall not be opened to traffic less
than twenty-eight (28) days after placement, and until all joints are sealed and the concrete
has attained a compressive strength of at least one hundred seventy (170) kilograms per
square centimeter unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

5.08.5 PAVEMENT EVALUATION AND REMEDIAL MEASURES.

5.08.5.1 Pavement Surface Texture. The depth of surface texture grooves shall be
measured according to the following requirements:

1. The depth of surface texture grooves shall be measured from the original concrete
surface using a tire depth gauge with 1 mm gradations or a similar device approved by the

165
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Engineer. Any projections above the original surface shall be remove by wire brushing or
Table of Contents

with a steel straightedge prior to taking measurement on hardened concrete. If

measurements are being made on fresh concrete, the depth gauge shall be pressed down
until substantially at the level of the original concrete surface.

2. With the depth gauge guides in contact with the original concrete surface, the
plunger is depressed until contact is made with the bottom of the groove in the concrete.
The gauge is then removed and the measurement recorded.

5.08.5.2 Pavement Smoothness. Pavement smoothness shall be evaluated by testing

with a profilograph according to ASTM E-1274 (88).

Profilograph equipment will be furnished by the Ministry or the Contractor, as stated in

the Special Specifications. All profilograph measurements shall be made by a team
composed of one Engineer operator and one contractor. The work shall be shared equally.
At the completion of each profilograph run, both operators shall sign the profilograph,
certifying that they are in agreement that the equipment was found to be operating
correctly and that the profilograph is a correct representation of the surface profile.

A pavement Profile Index shall be obtained as soon as possible after concrete

placement.

Two profilograph readings shall be taken in each traffic lane, including ramps tapers,
and climbing lanes, but excluding laybys, shoulders, and side street returns. The
profilograph readings shall be taken in the vehicle wheel paths, one meter from each edge
of the traffic lane.

The tested profile shall begin seventeen (17) meters ahead of concrete placed during
the day's production and shall end seventeen (17) meters behind the end of the placed
concrete. The tested profile will include bridge approaches and seventeen (17) meters of
any pavement which abuts the new pavement.

If during the day's production, less than one thousand (1000) lane meters of pavement
is placed, that pavement shall be tested with the subsequent day's production.

The contractor shall broom or clean the pavement by other approved methods
immediately before to profilograph testing.

Surface profiles will be evaluated by the Engineer according to ASTM E-1274 (88). The
Profile Index for a traffic lane will be the average of the two Profile Indexes obtained for
that lane.

Pavement shall conform to the following Profile Index requirements:

1. Mainline pavement on tangent alignment and horizontal curves with a centerline

radius of six hundred sixty (660) meters or more shall have a Profile Index of one hundred
ten (110) millimeters per kilometer or less for any one hundred seventy-six (176) meter
section.

166
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

2. Ramps and mainline paving on horizontal curves with a centerline radius three
hundred thirty (330) meters or more but less than six hundred sixty (660) meters and
within the superelevation on such curves shall have a profile index of one hundred forty
(140) millimeters or less per kilometer of section.

3. Other pavement surfaces shall have a Profile Index of one hundred sixty (160)
millimeters per kilometer or less in any one hundred seventy-six meters.

The contractor shall remove localized high pavement areas with a vertical deviation
greater than eight (8) millimeters in eight (8) meters or less. High pavement areas shall
be removed with grinding devices or multiple-saw machines as approved by the Engineer.
Grinding machines shall be of the rotary type with a wheel base of at least three (3)
meters and with vertically adjustable grinding wheels. Bush hammers or other impact
devices shall not be used.

After removal of localized high areas, the affected one hundred seventy-six (176) meter
pavement section shall be re-profiled; however, if the original Profile Index for the
pavement was within the specified range, only that portion of the pavement which was
originally contained in localized high areas shall be re-profiled.

Evaluations of localized pavement depressions will be made based on the presumed

correction of adjacent high areas. When the pavement contains depressions greater than
eight (8) millimeters in eight (8) meters or less, the contractor shall grind adjacent
pavement as directed by the Engineer and the pavement shall be re-profiled as specified
above.

If, after repair of highs and lows, the pavement does not conform to the specified
requirements, additional pavement grinding and profile measurements shall be performed
as directed by the Engineer.

In addition to the Surface Profile Index requirements, the pavement surface will be
tested with a three (3) meter straightedge. The surface shall not vary in any one direction
by more than three (3) millimeters, except at longitudinal and transverse construction
joints. The surface shall not vary by more than six (6) millimeters across any longitudinal
or transverse construction joint. Grinding will be required to insure that these requirements
are satisfied.

The pavement shall be ground in such a manner that it does not form a smooth or
polished pavement texture.

All pavement profile repairs shall be made before pavement thickness evaluations.
Remedial work required to correct pavement smoothness deficiencies shall be performed
at the Contractor's expense.

The contractor shall provide for the maintenance and protection of traffic during
pavement profile repairs and subsequent pavement profile measurements as directed by
the Engineer, at the Contractor's expense.

167
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.08.5.3 Pavement Cracks.

5.08.5.3.1 General. Cracks wider than twenty-five hundredths (0.25) millimeters

penetrating the full depth of the pavement shall be repaired or the cracked pavement shall
be removed and replaced, as specified herein, before opening the pavement to public
traffic.

Within twenty-eight (28) days after concrete placement and before acceptance of the
work, the Engineer will perform a pavement crack survey. The pavement shall be cleaned
prior to the crack survey.

Cracks visible without magnification and which require repair (wider than twenty-five
hundredths (0.25) millimeters) and pavement slabs which require replacement will be
marked by the Engineer and shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor as specified,
at the Contractor's expense.

Cracks observed later than twenty-eight (28) days after concrete placement and prior
to final acceptance of the work shall be repaired by the contractor as specified and fifty
(50) percent of the cost of such repairs will be allowed.

The contractor shall provide the Engineer with detailed information concerning the
methods and materials to be used for crack repair for the Engineer's approval of the
proposed methods and materials before beginning the required repairs.

The contractor, at his option and expense, may core cracked pavement as approved by
the Engineer to determine the extent of cracking.

5.08.5.3.2 Crack Repair. Repair of random cracks shall be performed when any of the
following types of full depth pavement cracks occur:

1. Transverse cracks which at any point are more than three (3) meters from transverse
joints;

2. Longitudinal cracks which at any point are within three hundred (300) millimeters of
longitudinal joints;

3. Longitudinal cracks which occur more than five hundred forty (540) millimeters from
the longitudinal joint.

Cracks in pavement constructed without load transfer devices and longitudinal cracks
in pavement constructed with load transfer devices shall be repaired by sawing or routing
the cracks to a width of at least thirteen (13) millimeters and a depth of twenty-five (25)
millimeters and sealing with a gray colored joint sealant material as approved by the
Engineer. Just prior to sealing, each crack shall be thoroughly cleaned and all foreign
material and the crack faces shall be clean and surface dry when the sealant is applied.

When any portion of a repaired crack is within one hundred fifty (150) millimeters of a

168
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

non-working sawed joint, that sawed joint shall be filled with epoxy as approved by the
Table of Contents

Engineer.

Transverse cracks in pavement constructed with load transfer devices shall be repaired
by deepening any immediately adjoining uncracked saw cuts to thirteen (13) millimeters
above the dowels and pressure injecting an approved gray colored epoxies into the
random crack. Pressure injection of epoxy shall be done only between five (5) and thirty-
five degrees Celsius (35o C.).

Crack repair shall begin seven days after completion of the crack survey and shall be
completed within thirty (30) days after the start of repairs.

Payment for pavement slab which require crack repairs as specified herein, will be
adjusted as specified under Paragraph 5.08.7.2, "Adjustment in Contract Unit Price For
Deficiency in Concrete Pavement Specified Strength" in these General Specifications.

5.08.5.3.3 Pavement Removal and Replacement - Cracks not detailed in

Subparagraph 5.08.5.3.1, “ General,” in these General Specifications shall be repaired by
removal and replacement of the Portland cement concrete pavement. Cracked pavement
shall be removed to the limits established by the Engineer. Cracked pavement will
generally require removal of the full lane width of the slab over the length of at least two
(2) meters. Excessively cracked pavement areas will require full width pavement removal
as directed by the Engineer. Pavement to be removed shall be cut full depth prior to
removal.

Base material which is damaged as a result of pavement removal shall be repaired or

replaced by the contractor as approved by the Engineer.

Removed pavement and base material shall be disposed of by the contractor as

approved of by the Engineer.

After removal of cracked pavement, tie bars and dowel bars shall be replaced by drilling
and grouting at approximately mid depth in the existing concrete pavement. Tie bars shall
be placed in transverse construction joints and shall be six hundred (600) millimeters long,
No. 5 deformed bars, placed on six hundred (600) millimeters centers. Dowel bars shall
be placed in construction joints which coincide with existing transverse weakened plane
joints. The dowel bars shall be five hundred (500) millimeters long, smooth three hundred
twenty (320) millimeter diameter bars placed at distances of 15, 65, 105, 225, 295, 340
millimeters from the adjacent longitudinal joint which is nearest to the outside shoulder
lane.

Replacement concrete shall be placed, finished, and cured in accordance with the
requirements of the original pavement.

5.08.5.4 Pavement Thickness. Concrete pavement shall be constructed to the

specified thickness. Tolerances allowed for base and subgrade construction and other
provisions of these specifications which may affect thickness shall not be construed to
modify such thickness requirements. To determine thickness acceptability, the contractor

169
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

shall drill one hundred (100) millimeters minimum diameter cores at the locations specified
Table of Contents

by the Engineer.

The Engineer will determine average core thickness according to MRDTM 525, except
that measurements will read to the nearest tenth of a millimeter and the average will be
reported to the nearest tenth of a millimeter.

When calculating average core thickness, cores which exceed the specified thickness
by more than three (3) millimeters will be considered to have the specified thickness of
plus three (3) millimeters. The Engineer may make field length measurements instead of
measurements according to MRDTM 525 when the original core in any secondary unit,
as defined below, meets or exceeds the specified thickness. However, measurements will
be made according to provisions of MRDTM 525 when any question arises concerning the
thickness, and on all cores used to determine the average pavement thickness for
payment.

Payment will be evaluated on the basis of primary and secondary units. A primary unit
of pavement will be the area of mainline pavement placed during one day's paving
operations. Additionally, each ramp, including tapers, each intersection, each cross-over,
etc. will be considered as a primary unit.

A secondary unit of pavement will consist of three hundred fifty (350) meters or fraction
thereof, of each mainline traffic lane and each shoulder in the primary unit. Additionally,
each thirteen hundred (1300) square meters of pavement in ramps, tapers, intersections,
crossroads, etc., will be considered as a secondary unit, regardless of when the concrete
was placed.

One core shall be drilled in each secondary unit. If the length of the core is not deficient
by more than three (3) millimeters, that secondary unit will be paid for at one hundred
percent (100%) of the contract unit price. If the length of that core is deficient by more than
three (3) millimeters, but less than fifteen (15) millimeters, two (2) additional cores shall be
drilled within the secondary unit and the length of the three cores will be averaged. If the
average length of the three cores is not deficient by more than three (3) millimeters, the
secondary unit will be paid for at one hundred percent (100%) of the contract unit price.
If the average length of the three cores is deficient by more than three (3) millimeters,
payment for the secondary unit will be made in accordance with the provisions of Table
5.08-I, Subsection 5.08.7, "Adjustment in Contract Unit Price for Deficiency in Concrete
Pavement Thickness" in these General Specifications.

If the core in a secondary unit is deficient by more than fifteen (15) millimeters, that core
will not be used to determine the average thickness of the secondary unit, and additional
cores shall be drilled at intervals not exceeding three and three-tenths meters in each
direction from the deficient core, measured parallel to the centerline, until one core is
obtained in each direction which is not deficient by more than fifteen (15) millimeters. The
pavement between these two cores will be evaluated separately from the balance of the
pavement in that secondary unit. The limits for the evaluation will be between the
longitudinal weakened plane or construction joint on each side of the core and between
the next transverse weakened plane, construction, or expansion joint beyond the last two

170
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

cores. Unless the Engineer allows the pavement to remain, it shall be removed and
Table of Contents

replaced with pavement of the specified thickness and no payment will be made for
removal of the deficient pavement. If deficient pavement is allowed to remain, no payment
will be made for the deficient pavement and one additional core will be drilled in the
remaining portion of the secondary unit and that portion will be separately evaluated for
payment as previously specified.

If deficient pavement is removed either by the order of the Engineer or at the option of
the contractor, it shall be removed and replaced within the evaluation limits. After the
pavement has been replaced, one core shall be drilled at random in the secondary unit
outside of the limits of the replaced pavement and one core shall be drilled in the new
pavement. Pavement represented by the drilled core outside of the limits of the replaced
pavement will be evaluated for payment as previously specified. If the core drilled in the
replaced pavement is less than the specified thickness, no payment will be made for the
replaced pavement.

At all locations where cores have been taken, the resulting holes shall be filled with
concrete as approved by the Engineer and at the contractor's expense.

5.08.5.5 Compressive Strength. The minimum average compressive strength of

Portland cement concrete pavement shall be one hundred seventy (170) kilograms per
square centimeter for each lot at twenty-eight (28) days. Each lot shall be represented by
four (4) random samples. The lots shall be the same as listed in Paragraph 5.08.5.4,
"Pavement Thickness" in these General Specifications. Each strength test will consist of
the average of three cylinders prepared with material taken from a single load of the
paving Portland cement concrete. If any cylinder shows evidence of improper sampling,
molding, or testing as stated in ACI 214, it will be discarded and the strength test will
consist of the strength of the remaining cylinders. All test cylinders will be prepared
according to the requirements of MRDTM 528. The mean value of the four compressive
strength tests will be reported to the nearest one (1) kilogram per square centimeter. The
unit price paid for the Portland cement concrete pavement in that lot will be adjusted as
provided in the provisions of Paragraph 5.08.7.2, "Adjustment in Contract Unit Price For
Deficiency in Concrete Pavement Specified Strength" in these General Specifications.

5.08.6 MEASUREMENT. Portland cement concrete pavement will be measured by the

square meter, calculated from the dimensions shown on the plans and adjusted by the
amount of any change ordered by the Engineer. No deduction will be made for areas less
than one (1) square meter. No allowance will be made for concrete pavement placed
outside the planned dimensions unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer.

5.08.7 PAYMENT. The accepted quantities of Portland cement pavement, measured as

provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price which shall include full payment
for furnishing all labor materials, tools, equipment, including surface profile equipment if
required by the Special Specifications, and incidentals, including drilling and filling core
holes, and for doing all the work involved in constructing the pavement, complete in place
as shown on the plans, and as specified. When load transfer dowel assemblies are
specified, separate payment for this work will be as specified in the Special Specifications.

171
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.08.7.1 Adjustment in Contract Unit Price for Deficiency in Concrete Pavement

Table of Contents

Thickness. Cracked pavement slabs which require repair according to Paragraph

5.08.5.3 "Pavement Cracks" will be paid for at eighty (80) percent of the contract unit price
for the pavement repaired, as measured between the original longitudinal and transverse
pavement joints abutting the repaired pavement. However, no adjustment to the contract
unit price will be made for pavement slabs which contain only cracks which are observed
later than twenty-eight (28) days after concrete placement.

When the average length of cores indicates pavement thickness is deficient by more
than three (3) millimeters but not more than fifteen (15) millimeters, payment will be made
as specified in Table 5.08-1.

TABLE 5.08-1
Core Thickness, Less Than Percent of Contract
Specified Thickness Mm. Unit Price Allowed

0.0 to 3.0 100

3.0 to 6.0 93
6.0 to 9.0 85
9.0 to 12.0 75
12.0 to 15.0 63

5.08.7.2 Adjustment in Contract Unit Price for Deficiency in Concrete Pavement

specified strength. Pavement represented by compressive strength tests which do not
meet the minimum strength specified, will be paid for in accordance with Table 5.08-2. All
pavement represented by compressive strength test which do not provide at least seventy-
five (75) percent of the specified strength shall be removed and replaced unless allowed
to remain in place by the Engineer. If allowed to remain in place, no payment will be made
for such pavement.

TABLE 5.08-2

Percent of Specified Strength Percent of Contract

(to nearest whole percent) Unit Price Allowed

>100 100
97 to 99 92
94 to 96 85
90 to 94 77
85 to 89 68
80 to 84 60
75 to 79 50
< 75 Remove and Replace, or
(leave in place at no payment).

When pavement is determined to be deficient in thickness by more than three (3)

millimeters and deficient in strength, the percentage of unit price allowed shall be the
product of the applicable percentages from Tables 5.08-1 and 5.08-2. However, when

172
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

such product results in a payment of less than fifty (50) percent, of the contract unit price,
Table of Contents

the Engineer may require the deficient pavement to be removed and replaced. If allowed
to remain in place, no payment will be made for such pavement.

When pavement contains cracks which are observed within twenty-eight (28) days after
the concrete placement, and when the pavement is deficient in thickness by more than
three (3) millimeter but less than fifteen and zero-tenths (15.0) millimeters and/or deficient
in strength, the percent of the contract unit price allowed will be eighty (80) percent of the
unit price allowed in Table 5.08-1 or 5.08-2 or eighty (80) percent of the product of the
appropriate percents from Table 5.08-1 and 5.08-2.

The amount of authorized, completed, and accepted Work measured as provided above,
will be paid for at the unit price (s) bid in the Bill of Quantities. Such price(s) shall include
furnishing, transporting and placing all materials except those materials specified to be
paid for under other items of Work, and shall include all labor, equipment, tools and other
items of Work necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified in accordance
with Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" of these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

50801 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Square Meter

173
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 5.09 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT REPAIRS

5.09.1 DESCRIPTION. The work done under this section shall consist of furnishing all
labor, materials, and equipment necessary to repair Portland cement concrete pavement
according with the requirements of these specifications, and as shown on the plans, or
established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Spall Repair
Slab Repair
Pavement Grinding
Pavement Grooving
Joint and Crack Repair
Edge Sealing

5.09.2 SPALL REPAIRS.

5.09.2.1 Description. The work shall consist of furnishing all materials and removing
loose patches and materials incompatible with the new repairs, such as temporary
bituminous patching materials from potholes, damaged joints and spalled areas,
thoroughly cleaning the repair area, and placing new patching material according with the
details shown on the plans, and as specified herein, and in reasonably close conformity
with the existing pavement cross-section.

5.09.2.2 Material Requirements.

5.09.2.2.1 General. Patching materials shall be suitable for the anticipated work
conditions before allowing traffic loads, or as shown on the plans, the special
specifications and these specifications.

Accelerated Strength Portland Cement Concrete Patching Material. The patching

material for Accelerated Strength Portland Cement Concrete shall consist of either Type
III or Type II Portland cement and calcium chloride or other accelerators meeting the
AASHTO M-144 requirements and shall attain a minimum compressive strength of
fourteen (14) kilograms per square centimeter in six (6) hours. Materials for the concrete
mix shall conform to the requirements of Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete," in
these General Specifications for Class A concrete. The coarse aggregate shall be as
designated for size No. 67 in accordance to AASHTO M-43.

5.09.2.2.2 Rapid Setting Patching Material. Rapid setting material shall be a

product approved by the Engineer. A list of approved patching materials is maintained
by the Ministry .

5.09.2.2.3 Epoxy Resin Patching Material. Epoxy resin patching material shall be
a low-modulus, moisture insensitive epoxy blended with suitable fillers, as prepared in

174
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Engineer.

Table of Contents

5.09.2.3 Construction Requirements.

5.09.2.3.1 General. Spalled areas to be repaired will be designated by the Engineer

and shall be repaired prior to any required pavement grinding. The extent of the repair
area will be marked out by the Engineer and will be no less than seventy (70) millimeters
outside of the area of delamination. The Engineer will be the final authority if questions
arise in regard to the need for patching or the extent of a required patch.

Spalled areas less than one hundred and fifty (150) by thirty (30) millimeters, adjacent
to joints, need not be repaired under this specification.

Patching material shall not be placed under conditions which will adversely affect the
quality of work. The Engineer shall be the sole judge in determining suitability of working
conditions.

Concrete within the patch area shall be removed to the minimum depth specified for
the patching material being used, with tools that will remove concrete without excessively
damaging sound concrete. If the depth of the spall exceeds half the thickness of the
concrete pavement slab, the affected pavement shall be removed and replaced, as
directed by the Engineer and in accordance with Subsection 5.09.3, "Full Depth Slab
Repairs" in these General Specifications.

Asphalt concrete shoulders adjacent shall be cut longitudinally to the depth of the
patch and to a width of not more than three hundred (300) millimeters. The cut shall
extend three hundred (300) millimeters beyond both transverse limits of the patch to
facilitate placement of formwork. Shoulders shall be patched with material similar to the
existing shoulder material.

Patch perimeters shall be cut substantially vertical, with sharp tools to minimize
fracturing beyond the cut, for at least thirty (30) millimeters in depth.

Prior to patching, the area to receive patching material shall be abrasively blasted to
remove foreign materials. Prior to placing patching materials, residue and dusts shall be
blown free with a oil-less air source, or other satisfactory means.

The area to receive the patching material shall be clean and dry to promote proper
bond. Patching material shall be done in a workmanship like manner and lapping over to
surrounding pavement will not be permitted.

Patching material shall be placed, consolidated, and finished to produce a dense

patch. If the area to be patched abuts a joint or working crack, a bond-breaker of
styrofoam, polyethylene foam or other suitable material not less than four (4) millimeters
or the joint or crack width, whichever is greater, shall be placed prior to patching.

The finishing and texture of the patched surface shall conform to the elevation and
texture of the existing pavement.

175
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Any repair material that develops any appreciable thickening while being placed shall
be discarded and no additional payment will be allowed.

5.09.2.3.2 Accelerated Strength Portland Concrete Pavement Patch. Following

the excavation and abrasive blast cleaning of the repair void as previously specified, the
entire area to be filled with patching material shall be coated with an approved "new-to-old"
epoxy according to the recommendations of the manufacture. The patching material shall
be placed promptly to before hardening of the bond coat occurs. Should the bond coat
harden prior to patching, a new application of bond coat shall be applied before patch
filling operations resume.

5.09.2.3.3 Rapid Set Patch. Rapid set patching materials shall be blended and
mixed installed as recommended by the manufacture.

Upon completing removal and surface preparation, as previously stated, the surface
shall be either lightly damped or dry prior to filling with rapid setting material, as
recommended by the manufacture.

The material shall be consolidated to the proper grade and float finished. Texturing
to match the existing pavement will not be required.

5.09.2.3.4 Epoxy Resin Patches. Epoxy resin shall be proportioned and blended
according to the manufacture's directions and the suitable filler shall then be combined
to produce a mortar or grout, uniform in consistency according to the recommendations
of the resin manufacture.

Upon completing removal and surface preparation, as previously stated, the surface
shall be dry prior to filling with the epoxy mixture.

The material shall be consolidated to the proper grade and float finished. Texturing
to match the existing pavement will not be required.

5.09.3 FULL DEPTH SLAB REPAIRS.

5.09.3.1 Description. The work shall consist of furnishing all materials and removing
existing concrete pavement, constructing full depth repairs of Portland cement concrete
at locations shown on the plans, as specified herein, and in reasonably close conformity
with the existing pavement.

5.09.3.2 Material Requirements. Repair material shall conform to Subsection 5.01.1,

“Description" in these General Specifications, except concrete shall be the same Class
used in the original construction or Class B, using size 57 coarse aggregate as designated
in AASHTO M-43.

Tie bars, Dowel bars, expansion joint fillers, joint seal, and liquid membrane-forming
curing compound, shall conform to the requirements as stated in Section 5.08, "Portland
Cement Concrete Pavement" in these General Specifications.

176
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.09.3.3 Construction Requirements. Areas to be repaired will be designated by the

Engineer and shall be repaired before any specified pavement grinding. The Engineer
shall be the final authority in determining the extent of repairs.

Repairs shall be carried out under conditions that will not adversely affect the quality of
work. If these conditions arise, the Engineer shall have the final determination as to
whether or not to proceed with the planned work.

Removal of those portions of pavement to be removed shall be performed in such a

manner to avoid damaging the adjacent pavement or areas adjacent to the repair work.
In no case shall the work be done in such a manner as to damage the existing base
material. Any damaged base, or spalling of the existing pavement to remain, shall be
remedied by replacing the damaged base with concrete repair material, and spalls greater
than thirty (30) millimeters deep and thirty (30) millimeters wide shall be repaired by full
depth saw cut removal of the damaged portion, or as directed by the Engineer at the
Contractor's expense.

Pavement slabs containing multiple full depth cracks separating the slab in three or more
pieces, and other slabs as designated by the Engineer, shall be entirely removed and
replaced. Pavement slabs containing a single diagonal crack intersecting the longitudinal
and transverse joints by less than one-third (1/3) of the length and width of the slab shall
be repaired by removal and replacement of that corner piece.

Other areas to be repaired shall have the configuration and minimum dimensions shown
on the plans. These areas shall be saw cut to the full depth of the slab.

When the repair boundary is at an existing contraction joint, the new joint shall be
constructed using the plain round thirty-two (32) millimeter diameter, five hundred (500)
millimeter long dowel bars. The dowel bars shall be placed as shown on the plans, and
shall be placed at mid-depth of the existing slab. Holes drilled for the dowel bars shall be
not less than thirty-five (35) millimeters in diameter, and extend two hundred fifty (250)
millimeters into the existing slab. The dowel shall be grouted in place by an approved non-
shrink grout or approved epoxy. Prior to placing repair concrete, the protruding two
hundred fifty (250) millimeters dowel shall be uniformly coated with a thin film of heavy
waterproof grease.

When the repair boundary is adjacent to an existing longitudinal joint, six hundred (600)
millimeters long sixteen (16) millimeter diameter (No. 5) deformed steel tie bars shall be
placed in three hundred (300) millimeter deep holes drilled into the existing slab at seven
hundred fifty (750) millimeter intervals, as shown on the plans, and grouted into place with
approved non-shrink grout or approved epoxy.

When the repair boundary does not abut a joint, six hundred (600) millimeter long twenty
five (25) millimeter diameter (No. 8) deformed steel bars shall be placed at five hundred
(500) millimeter spacings in the transverse perimeter, and six hundred (600) millimeter
long sixteen (16) millimeter diameter (No. 5) deformed steel bars shall be placed in the
longitudinal perimeter of the repair. Holes drilled into the existing slab shall be three

177
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

hundred (300) millimeters deep at mid-depth and shall be grouted in place by approved
Table of Contents

non-shrink grout or approved epoxy, thoroughly consolidated, finished to the plane of the
existing slab, and textured to match the existing slab texture. However, no texturing will
be required if pavement grinding or grooving will be the final finished surface.

New sealant reservoir may be either cast or saw cut into the repaired-to-existing
concrete interface as shown on the plans and as specified under Subsection 5.06.4,"
Pavement Grinding," in these General Specifications.

5.09.4 PAVEMENT GRINDING.

5.09.4.1 Description. The work shall consist of furnishing all materials and grooving
the surface of existing Portland cement concrete pavement at the locations shown on the
project plans and according to the requirements of these General Specifications.

5.09.4.2 Equipment and Procedures. Grinding shall be done with diamond blades,
mounted on a self-propelled machine that has been designed for grinding and texturing
pavements. The equipment shall be designed such that it will not cause strain or damage
to the underlying surface of the pavement. Grinding equipment that causes excessive
ravels, aggregate fractures, spalls, or disturbances of the transverse or longitudinal joints
shall not be used.

All grinding machines used in the cross-section of a lane shall have the same wheel or
grinding head configuration. Overlapping of grinding passes will not be allowed.

The noise level created by any one machine shall not exceed eighty-six (86) dbA at a
distance of fifteen (15) meters normal to the direction of traffic.

No equipment will be allowed within three meters of the lane open to public traffic.
Maintenance and protection of traffic shall conform to the requirements of Section 9.02
“Traffic Control Through Work Zones” in these General Specifications.

5.09.4.3 Construction Requirements. Before grinding, repaired areas shall be

completed as specified. Grinding shall be done prior to any specified sawing and sealing
of existing transverse and longitudinal joints.

Pavement grinding shall be performed longitudinally. The contractor shall grind a test
section of pavement, where designated by the Engineer, to determine that the equipment
proposed for use will provide the desired texture.

Grinding shall produce a uniform surface appearance over the entire designated area.
Grinding shall continue for the full lane width until the pavement surface on both sides of
all transverse joints and of all cracks is in the same plane. Longitudinal ridges in adjacent
passes of the grinding equipment shall not exceed three (3) millimeters in depth.

In any one lane, a maximum distance of three hundred (300) meters of unfinished area
between the lead grinder and the last grinder in that lane will be allowed at the end of the
work shift.

178
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Ground surfaces shall not be smooth or polished and shall have a coefficient of friction
of not less than forty-hundredths (0.40) as measured by ASTM E-1274 (88).

The surface shall have a finish texture of grooves between two (2) to three (3)
millimeters wide, and spaced from one and one-half (1.5) millimeters to three (3)
millimeters and not less than one (1) millimeter to three (3) millimeters.

Residue and excess water resulting from grinding shall be removed from the roadway
by vacuuming or other methods approved by the Engineer. The residue shall be removed
before restoring traffic to the lane. Residue and water from the grinding operations shall
not be allowed to flow across lanes occupied by traffic, onto roadway shoulders, or to flow
into gutters and drainage facilities. Dried residue shall be removed before allowing traffic
to occupy the work area.

After grinding has been completed, the pavement surface will be tested according to
ASTM E-1274 (88). Two Profilograph readings will be taken in the wheel paths one meter
from each edge of the traffic lane.

The Profile Index shall not exceed nineteen (19) centimeters per sixteen hundred (1600)
meter section. In addition all areas representing localized high points having deviations
in excess of eight (8) millimeters in eight (8) meters, shall be reground until such deviations
as indicated by re-runs of the Profilograph do not exceed eight (8) millimeters in eight (8)
meters.

Additional grinding shall be performed, if necessary, to reduce the overall Profile Index,
as measured by the Profilograph, to nineteen (19) centimeters per kilometer section, or
remaining portion thereof, along any line parallel to the edge of the pavement. In any area
requiring regrinding, the regrinding shall be done over the full lane width.

The contractor shall broom the surface of the concrete where Profilograph readings are
to be taken. Profilograph measurements are the responsibility of the contractor on all but
the final acceptance measurement. The contractor shall bear the full cost of profilograph
measurements and associated traffic control.

5.09.5 PAVEMENT GROOVING.

5.09.5.1 Description. The work consists of furnishing all materials and grooving the
surface of the existing pavement at the locations shown on the plans and according to the
requirements of these specifications.

5.09.5.2 Equipment and Procedures. Grooving shall be done with diamond blades
mounted on a multi-blade arbor on a self-propelled machine which has been built for
grooving pavements. The groover shall have a depth control device which will detect
variations in the pavement surface and adjusts the cutting head height to maintain the
specified groove depth. The grooving machine shall have alignment control devices.
Flailing type grooving will not be permitted.

179
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.09.5.3 Construction Requirements. The pavement surface shall be grooved

Table of Contents

longitudinally. The methods used and tolerances employed shall provide a surface which
will provide good wet or dry driving characteristics.

Longitudinally grooved areas shall begin and end at lines normal to the width of the
pavement centerline and shall be centered within the lane line.

No equipment shall be allowed within one (1) meter of a traffic lane open to the public.
Maintenance and traffic control shall be according to Section 9.02 "Traffic Control Through
Work Zones" in these General Specifications.

Removal of all slurry or residue resulting from the grooving operations shall be
continuous. Residue from grooving operations shall not be permitted to flow across
shoulders or lanes occupied by public traffic or to flow into gutters or other drainage
facilities. Dried residue resulting from grooving operations shall be removed from
pavement surfaces with a pick-up or power broom before such residue is blown by the
action of the traffic or wind.

The noise level created by any one machine shall not exceed eighty-six (86) dbA at a
distance of fifteen (15) meters normal to the direction of traffic.

At the beginning of each work shift, all grooving machines shall be equipped with a full
compliment of grooving blades that are capable of cutting grooves of the specified width,
depth, and spacing.

If during the course of the work a single blade becomes incapable of cutting a groove,
work will be permitted to continue for the remainder of the work shift and the contractor will
not be required to otherwise cut the groove omitted because of the failed blade. Should
two or more grooving blades on any individual grooving machine become incapable of
cutting grooves, the contractor shall cease operations.

The grooved area of any selected six hundred (600) millimeters by thirty (30) millimeters
longitudinal area of pavement specified to be grooved shall not be less than ninety (90)
percent of that area. Ungrooved pavement within the selected area shall be that which
occurs as a result of pavement irregularities.

5.09.5.4 Tolerances. Longitudinal grooving shall begin one hundred fifty (150)
millimeters from the outside edge of pavement or reflective marker and run in a continuous
pattern across the lane surface to within one hundred fifty (150) millimeters of the
longitudinal joint. The groove pattern shall be three (3) millimeters width by five (5)
millimeters in depth with a center-center spacing of nineteen (19) millimeters. The groove
spacing tolerance shall be plus or minus three (3) millimeters. The width of the groove
shall have a tolerance of plus or minus one and one-half (1.5) millimeters.

On curves or superelevations, the width of the groove may exceed the above
dimensions as approved by the engineer.

If the pavement profile is very uneven, the Engineer may permit a variation in maximum

180
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

groove depth in areas adjacent to rutted pavement or faulted joints.

Table of Contents

Grooving shall be terminated a minimum of three hundred (300) millimeters from any
device in place in the pavement, such as manholes, inlet castings, valve boxes, etc.

5.09.6 JOINT AND CRACK REPAIR.

5.09.6.1 Description. The work shall consist of furnishing all materials and renovating
longitudinal and transverse contraction control joints and routing and sealing random
cracks in existing pavement, as specified herein, detailed on the plans and as directed by
the Engineer.

5.09.6.2 Material Requirements. Joint sealant shall conform to the requirements of

Paragraph 6.22.2.2 "Joint Sealing Compounds" in these General Specifications. Grout for
filling wide joints shall be a low modulus, moisture insensitive epoxy resin grout of a
viscosity suitable for flowing into the irregular cracked portion of the joint. The ratio of
epoxy resin to sand shall be 1:7 and 1:10 or as specified by the epoxy manufacture. Epoxy
binder material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-881-78(83).

Sand used in epoxy grout shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 5.01.2,
"Materials" in these General Specifications except the gradation shall be as follows:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

2.38 mm (No 8) 100%
1.19 mm (No. 16) 95-100
0.297 mm (No. 50) 10-40
0.074 mm (No. 200) 0-4

A rapid set Portland cement concrete pavement patching material may be substituted
for epoxy grout as approved by the Engineer.

5.09.6.3 Construction Requirements.

5.09.6.3.1 General. Joint and crack repairs shall be accomplished by first removing
old joint sealant and joint insets, then refacing and cleaning the joints and cracks followed
by installation of a backer rod (if required) and installation of new joint sealant.

5.09.6.3.2 Joint and Crack Preparation. Cracks shall be sawed or routed to the
dimensions shown on the plans.

Inserts shall be removed from insert-formed joints by sawing to provide a clean vertical
face. The width and depth of the saw cuts shall be sufficient to insure complete removal
of the insert and to provide a finished joint of the proper dimensions specified for the
sealant material to be used. If the insert is not vertical additional parallel saw cuts shall be
provided as required to insure full removal of the inserts.

Joints that are not insert formed shall be sawed to the widths and depths specified
herein. Joints previously sawed and sealed will be inspected to assure the proper

181
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

dimensions and shall be re-sawed to the proper widths and depths, when required.
Table of Contents

Joints shall be sawed as follows:

Initial Joint Width..."W" Sawed Joint Width Sawed Joint Depth "D"
Pavement Surface
to bottom of backer rod

"W" <13 mm 13 mm 43 mm
13 mm<W <19 mm 19 mm 54 mm
19 mm<W <38 mm No Sawing 2W+19 mm
Required

Immediately after saw cutting a joint or routing a crack, old sealant shall be removed
and internal surfaces of the joint or crack shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting.
Sand for sandblasting shall be sharp and clean. The amount of compressed air and the
nozzle pressure shall be such that the joints and cracks will be thoroughly cleaned and the
edges will have etched surfaces.

5.09.6.3.3 Dowel Placement. Dowel bars shall be placed in transverse joints when
the initial joint width is greater than thirty-eight (38) millimeters. Slots for dowel bar
placement shall be made with two saw cuts perpendicular to the joint and thirty-eight (38)
millimeters apart. Saw cuts shall be one half the depth of the slab plus thirteen (13)
millimeters. Concrete shall be removed between the saw cuts and smooth epoxy coated
dowels which are thirty-two (32) millimeters in diameter and five hundred (500) millimeters
long shall be inserted into the formed slot. Dowels shall be supported above the bottom
of the slot so that epoxy grout can flow around the circumference of the dowel. Dowels
shall be placed so that the dowel is embedded equal distances into the two slabs. Dowel
bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M254 with type B coatings except that
the core material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A615. Dowel bars shall be
placed as shown on the plans, and shall be thoroughly and uniformly coated with a
waterproof grease prior to placement into the slot then covered with an approved epoxy
grout. A thirteen (13) millimeter thickness of preformed joint filler shall be placed next to
one edge of the joint such that a twenty-five (25) millimeter deep reservoir, +/- three (3)
millimeters, can be formed at the top, as shown on the plans. The wide joint shall be filled
with epoxy grout.

On longitudinal joints where the joint opening exceeds thirty-eight (38) millimeters, the
saw cuts for placement of tie bars perpendicular to the joint, shall be twenty-two (22)
millimeters apart so that a sixteen (16) millimeters diameter (No.5) deformed tie bar two
hundred forty (240) millimeter long can be inserted into the slot. This two hundred forty
(240) millimeter inch tie bar shall be placed at mid slab depth and equal distance into each
slab, then covered with an approved epoxy grout. The bars shall be at three hundred sixty
(360) millimeter spacing. The wide joint shall also be filled with epoxy grout.

5.09.6.3.4 Cleaning Prior to Sealing. Prior to sealing, all foreign or loosened

particles shall be removed from the joints to the full depth of the original sawed joints. The
removal of all foreign or loosened particles shall be accomplished with compressed air or

182
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

other means approved by the Engineer. Air compressors shall be capable of furnishing a
Table of Contents

sufficient supply of compressed air to clean the joints properly.

5.09.6.3.5 Separating or Blocking Medium (Backer Rod). Immediately following

the cleaning of joints and prior to the application of sealant, a backer rod composed of an
inert, compressible material shall be inserted along the lower portion of the joint groove
at a depth as shown on the plans.

The backer rod shall be compatible with the sealant in accordance with the manufac-
ture's recommendation. The product shall be clean, free of scale, foreign matter, oil or
moisture and shall be non-absorbing. The Engineer shall be assured that the material
proposed for use has been used successfully in similar installations.

Backer rod sizes shall be as follows:

Joint Width Backer Rod Diameter

Millimeters (mm) Millimeters (mm)
13 mm 16 mm
19 mm 25 mm
25 mm 32 mm
32 mm 38 mm
38 mm 50 mm

5.09.6.3.6 Installation of Sealer. Sealant compound shall not be placed unless the
joint is dry, clean, and free of dust. The face of the joint shall be surface dry and the
ambient temperature shall both be at least ten degrees Celsius (10o C.) at the time of
application of the sealant. Installation of the sealant shall be such that the in-place sealant
shall be well bonded to the concrete and free of voids or trapped air. The joints shall be
sealed in a neat and workmanlike manner, so that upon completion of the work, the
surface of the joint sealant material will be six (6) millimeters, +/- 3 millimeters below the
adjacent pavement surface. The contractor shall refill all low joints before final acceptance.
Any excess material on the surface of the pavement shall be removed and the pavement
surface shall be left in a clean condition. Vehicular or heavy equipment traffic shall not
be permitted on the pavement in the area of the joints during the curing period.

5.09.7 EDGE SEALING.

5.09.7.1 Description. The work shall consist of furnishing all materials and sawing or
routing, and sealing the joints between the Portland cement concrete pavement and the
asphaltic concrete distress lane. This work shall be done after the completion of any
specified rehabilitation of the distress lane or outside shoulder. The work shall be
accomplished in accordance with the details shown on the plans and as specified herein.

5.09.7.2 Materials.

5.09.7.2.1 General. The sealant to be used shall be any one of the following:

A mixture of asphalt and one hundred percent (100%) vulcanized, granulated rubber;

183
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

A mixture of asphalt, extender oil, and reclaimed high natural and ground vulcanized
rubber;

Premix block material consisting of asphalt and one hundred percent (100%) percent
vulcanized rubber;

Premixed block material consisting of asphalt and extender oil, reclaimed high natural
and ground vulcanized rubber.

5.09.7.2.2 Ground Rubber. All material shall meet the requirements of these
specifications and the contractor shall furnish certification showing that the material meets
the requirements. The certificate shall be signed by the party legally able to bind the
supplier and his signature shall be notarized.

Rubber shall be free of fabric, wire or other contaminating materials. No more than
four (4) percent by weight calcium carbonate may be included to prevent the particles from
sticking together.

The gradation of the material will be determined by apparatus consisting of the

following:

1. Sieves conforming to AASHTO Designation M92 with a diameter of thirty-two (32)

millimeters. The sieves shall be nested in such a manner that overloading on any given
sieve will not happen.

2. Balance. The capacity of the balance shall be five hundred (500) grams or more,
with a sensitivity to the nearest one (1) gram.

3. The size of the sample is a critical factor. Sample size shall be in the range of one
hundred (100) to one hundred fifty (150) grams. Samples shall be obtained either by use
of a sample thief or by splitting an entire bag using rifle splitter.

4. The sample shall be separated into a series of sizes using such sieves as are
necessary. The sieving operation shall be conducted by means of a lateral and vertical
motion of the sieve, accompanied by jarring action so as to keep the sample moving
continuously over the surface of the sieve. The motion of the sieves shall be accompanied
by a mechanical shaker. In no case shall fragments in the sample be turned or
manipulated through the sieve by hand. Sieving shall continue for a five (5) minute period.

5. The mass of each size shall be determine on a scale or balance conform ing to the
requirements as specified above in paragraph (2). The material shall be weighed to the
nearest one (1) gram.

6. The results of the sieve analysis shall be reported as total percentages passing
each sieve. Percentages shall be calculated on the basis of the total mass of the sample
including material finer than the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.

184
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents The gradation and the specific gravity shall meet the requirements in Table 5.09-1.

TABLE 5.09-1

Sieve Asphalt Asphalt Rubber Premixed Asphalt Premixed Asphalt

Size Rubber Reclaimed Rubber 100% RubberReclaimed
Vulcanized Hi Natural Vulcanized Hi Natural

No. 8 100% 100% 100% 100%

No. 10 95-100 --- 95-100 ---
No. 30 0-10 25-50 --- 25-50
No. 50 --- 10-45 --- 10-45
No. 100 --- 0-10 --- 0-10
Sp. Gr. 1.15+/-0.2 1.25+/-0.2 1.15+/-0.2 1.25+/-0.2

Ground rubber (reclaimed high natural) shall be dry, free flowing blend of reclaimed
high natural rubber and rubber scrap which has a natural rubber content of at least
twenty-five percent (25%). The natural rubber content will be determined in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM D297.

5.09.7.2.3 Asphalt Cement. Asphalt-Rubber (vulcanized):

Type A - The asphalt cement shall conform to the require ments for Asphalt Cement
AC-10 in Table 4.0I-1 in Subsection 4.01, "Bituminous Materials" in these General
Specifications.

Type B - The asphalt cement shall conform to the requirements for Asphalt cement
AC-20 in Table 4.01-1 in Subsection 4.01, "Bituminous Materials" in these General
Specifications.

Extender Oil - Extender oil shall be resinous, aromatic hydrocarbon meeting the
requirements in Table 5.09-2 when tested as indicated:

TABLE 5.09-2

Test ASTM Requirement

Test
Viscosity, SSU at38 degrees D 88 2,500 Min.
Flash Point, COC Open Cup D 92 392 Min.
Molecular Analysis, Asphaltene, % by wt. D 2007 0.1 Max., 55 Min.
Aromatic, % by wt.

185
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.09.8 MEASUREMENT.

5.09.8.1 Spall Repair. Spall repair shall be measured by the square meter for all
patches successfully constructed. Each patch will be measured to the nearest three (3)
centimeters. The total cumulative calculated area based on the measurements will be
rounded off to the nearest tenth of a square meter.

5.09.8.2 Full Depth Slab Repairs. Full depth slab repairs shall be measured by the
square meter for all repairs successfully constructed. Each repair area will be measured
to the nearest three (3) centimeters. The total cumulative calculated area based on the
measurements will be rounded off to the nearest tenth of a square meter.

Full depth slab repairs shall be measured by the square meter for all repairs successfully
constructed. Each repair area will be measured to the nearest three (3) centimeters. The
total cumulative calculated area based on the measurements will be rounded off to the
nearest.

5.09.8.3 Pavement Grinding. Pavement grinding will be measured by the square

meter of pavement ground and accepted. The quantity will be determined by multiplying
the width by the length of the ground area.

5.09.8.4 Pavement Grooving. Pavement grooving will be measured by the square

meter of grooved pavement and accepted. The quantity of grooved pavement will be the
product of length and width of grooved area. No deduction will be made for grooving
omitted items at joints, manholes, inlets or other similar installations in the pavement
surface.

5.09.8.5 Joint and Crack Repairs. Joint and crack repairs will be measured by the
linear meter.

5.09.8.6 Edge Sealing. Edge sealing will be measured by the linear meter.

5.09.9 PAYMENT.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

5.09.9.1 Spall Repairs. The accepted quantities of spall repairs, measured as provided
for above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per square meter, which shall include
full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment, incidentals, and for doing
all the work of preparing, filling, finishing, and texturing of spalls, if required, complete and
in place, including the removal and disposal of waste concrete, and the reconstruction of
shoulder work which was removed or damaged during the spall repair work.

5.09.9.2 Depth Slap Repair. The accepted quantities of full depth slab repair,
measured as provided for above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per square
meter, which shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment,
and incidentals, and for doing all the work of preparing, filling, finishing, and texturing, if

186
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

required, complete and in place, including the removal and disposal of waste concrete,
Table of Contents

and the reconstruction of shoulder work which was removed or damaged during the repair
work.

5.09.9.3 Pavement Grinding. The accepted quantities of pavement grinding, measured

as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price, which shall be full
compensation for the work complete as specified, including providing profilograph
equipment, if required by the Special Specifications.

5.09.9.4 Pavement Grooving. The accepted quantities of pavement grooving,

measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per square meter,
which price shall be full compensation for the work, complete as specified herein.

5.09.9.5 Crack Repairs. The accepted quantities of joint and crack repairs measured
as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter, which price
shall be full compensation for the work, complete in place.

5.09.9.6 Edge Sealing. The accepted quantities of edge sealing measured as provided
above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter, which price shall be full
compensation for the work, complete in place.

The amount of authorized, completed, and accepted Work, measured as provided

above, will be paid for at the contract unit prices(s) in the Bill of Quantities. Such price(s)
shall include furnishing, transporting and placing all materials except those materials
specified to be paid for under other items of Work, and shall include all labor, equipment,
tools and other items of Work necessary for the proper completion of the Work as
specified in accordance with Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General
Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

50901 Spall Repair Square Meter

50902 Slab Repair Square Meter

50903 Pavement Grinding Square Meter

50904 Pavement Grooving Square Meter

50905 Joint and Crack Repair Linear Meter

50906 Edge Sealing Linear Meter

187
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 5.10 - BRIDGE PARAPETS

5.10.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of furnishing and installing bridge
parapets as and where shown on the drawings or as established by the Engineer.

The finishes of exposed areas of concrete parapets shall be uniform without blow holes
and blemishes.

5.10.2 MATERIALS.

5.10.2.1 Concrete. Concrete for bridge parapets shall be Class A and meet the
requirements of Subsection 5.01.1, "Description" in these General Specifications.

5.10.2.2 Steel. Reinforcing steel for bridge parapets shall meet the requirements of
Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

5.10.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. Concrete parapets shall be constructed in

accordance with Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" in these General Specifications.

5.10.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Bridge parapets shall be measured by the linear

meter installed, completed and accepted. No separate measurement shall be made for
expansion joints, specially fabricated units for nosing areas, special requirements at
junction with transition walls, reinforcement, stitching concrete, and grit blasting if needed,
but shall be considered subsidiary to bridge parapets.

5.10.5 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Works will be paid for at the
contract unit price(s) for Bridge Parapets as specified in the Bill of Quantities, which prices
shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and
other items necessary for the completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2,
"Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT
51001 Bridge Parapets Linear Meter

188
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents SECTION 5.11 - DRAINAGE ON STRUCTURES

5.11.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of furnishing and installing gully and
channel grates and frames on bridge deck, subways and underpasses for collecting
surface water from structures and draining pipes and downpipes which are connected to
the gully and channel grates by hoppers. The gully and channel grates and frames may
be of cast iron or cast steel with or without integral cast hoppers. In the absence of
integral cast hoppers, fabricated uPVC or GRP hoppers will be necessary.

The Contractor shall submit, as early as possible, details of all drainage material and
components he proposes to use for the approval of the Engineer. No material or
component shall be incorporated in the Works without written approval of the Engineer.

The Work shall also consist of installing permeable backing and weep pipes to earth
retaining structures, weep and backfilling with selected free draining granular material to
the line and extent indicated on the plans.

ITEMS IN THE BILL OF QUANTITIES

Heavy Duty Gully Grates and Frames
Permeable Backing
Granular Backfill
Bridge Deck Drainage System

5.11.2 MATERIALS.

5.11.2.1 Gully and Channel Grates and Frames. Gully and channel grates and
frames shall conform to the requirements of Saudi Arabian Standards or BS 497
Amendments PD 6398 (1968) and AMD 554 (1979) and they shall be Grade A (BS 497).
Alternatively, drainage gullies shall be of heavy duty design of the type(s) indicated on the
plans, made of structural steel or gray cast iron to conform with AASHTO M105, Class No.
25 S, or equivalent.

Integral cast hoppers shall be of the same grade and quality as the gully or channel
grate and frame. Fabricated uPVC or GRP shall be to the approval of the Engineer who
may require material and load testing before giving approval.

5.11.2.2 Iron and Steel Pipes. Cast iron pipes shall conform to the requirements of
Saudi Arabian Standards Organization or BS 78 Parts 1 and 2 and spun iron pipes to BS
1211. Steel pipes shall conform to the requirements of BS 3534 or SASO (Saudi Arabian
Standards Organization).

5.11.2.3 PVC and uPVC Pipes. Pipes of synthetic material for general drainage use
shall be approved pipes of polythene, polypropylene, or polyvinylchloride. Unplasticized
polyvinylchloride pipes shall conform to the requirements of Class 2 and 3 ASTM D3333
or BS 3506; alternatively, PVC pipes and sleeves shall comply with SAS14, DIN 8062 and
150.R/161 and fittings shall comply with ISO/DIN 4422, 10 bars class.

189
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.11.2.4 Permeable Backing. Permeable backing to structures shall be precast porous

Table of Contents

concrete blocks laid in stretcher bond with dry joints in a minimum of two hundred twenty-
five (225) millimeters thick walling or approved geotextile composite with a high density
polyethylene core, eight (8) millimeters thick completely wrapped in a spun bound
polypropylene geotextile on the approved list, such as HITER or MIRADRAIN.

5.11.2.5 Granular Backfill. Granular backfill to structures shall be natural sands,

gravel, crushed rock or crushed concrete. The materials shall be well-graded and lie
within the following gradation limits:

Sieve Size Percentage Passing

75 mm (3") 100
37.5 mm (1 1/2") 85 - 100
9.5 mm (3/8") 45 - 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 25 - 85
0.425 mm (No. 40) 8 - 45
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0 - 10

5.11.2.6 Aluminum Pipes. Aluminum pipes, sleeves and fittings shall conform to
ASTM B211, alloy 6061-T6.

5.11.2.7 Fiberglass Pipes. Fiberglass pipes, sleeves and fittings shall conform to
ASTM D2996, class C liner.

5.11.2.8 Miscellaneous Materials. Miscellaneous metal items, including supports,

accessories, fittings, fixtures, embedded items, hangers, and strips, shall conform to
AASHTO M183, ASTM A207, A42 and AASHTO M164, as applicable. All ferrous items
shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication, in conformance with AASHTO M111 and
ASTM A153.

Concrete surface primer shall be cut-back asphalt conforming to ASTM D41 and
waterproofing asphalt shall conform to ASTM D 449, type A.

Non-shrink grout shall be as approved by the Engineer.

Joint sealants shall be as specified in Paragraph 6.22.2.2, "Joint Sealing Compounds"

in these General Specifications.

Paint shall be as specified in Section 5.13, " Painting of Structures" in these General
Specifications.

5.11.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. Drainage pipes and gullies shall be laid to

the lines and levels and bedded, laid, jointed and protected, all as shown on the drawings
or as established by the Engineer. (Top elevation of the gullies shall be five (5) to ten (10)
millimeters below the surface of the asphalt).

When drainage pipes are cast into concrete structures, the Contractor shall take
adequate precautions to prevent any displacement of the pipes during the concreting

190
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

operation.
Table of Contents

Drainage pipes shall be tested for water tightness and the test procedure shall be
agreed with the Engineer. Where drainage pipes are located within the cellular parts of
a bridge deck where access after completion of the deck is limited, then the installation
and testing of the pipes shall be completed and accepted by the Engineer before the deck
construction is allowed to proceed to the stage where free access will be available.

5.11.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

5.11.4.1 Gully Grates and Frames. Gully grates and frames shall be measured by the
number of units installed, completed and accepted. Hoppers connecting the gully frames
to drainage pipes shall not be measured separately but shall be considered subsidiary to
gully grates and frames.

5.11.4.2 Bridge Deck Drainage Pipes. Bridge deck drainage pipes which are part of
the bridge deck drainage system shall be measured by the linear meter of the total length
of pipes installed, completed and accepted. No separate measurement will be made for
pipes cast into concrete or for pipes connecting fully the channel frames to drainage pipes
or for pipe supports and joints or for discharge hoppers from drainage pipes to downstand
pipes, but shall be considered subsidiary to drainage pipes.

5.11.4.3 Permeable Backing. Permeable backing shall be measured by the square

meter successfully placed and accepted.

5.11.4.4 Granular Backfill. Granular Backfill shall be measured by the volume in cubic
meters placed and compacted to the approval of the Engineer.

5.11.4.5 Subsidiary Work. No measurement will be made for weep pipes or for testing
of gully grates and frames or for pipe supports or for testing of drainage pipes as these are
subsidiary work to the items listed in Subsection 5.11.5 “Payment” in these General
Specifications.

5.11.5 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work measured as provided
above, will be paid for at the contract unit price for each item as specified in the Bill of
Quantities, which price shall be full compensation for furnishing, fabricating and placing
all materials, for all labor, equipment, tools and all other items necessary for the proper
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.
PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:
ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

51101 Heavy Duty Gully Grates and Frames Unit

51102 Permeable Backing Square Meter

51103 Granular Backfill Cubic Meter

51104 Bridge Deck Drainage System Linear Meter

191
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents SECTION 5.12 - WATERPROOFING FOR STRUCTURES

5.12.1 DESCRIPTION. The Work shall consist of furnishing and placing and an approved
waterproofing membrane over bridge deck and box-culverts, undersides of foundation to
bridges, box culverts and walls and faces of foundation to bridges as directed by the
Engineer.

The Work shall include the proper cleaning and preparation of the substrate; the
application, protection, drying, and curing of the waterproofing membrane; the protection
of pedestrian, vehicular or other traffic upon or underneath or near the Work; the protection
of all portions of structures (superstructure and substructure) and other portions of the
Work against disfigurement by spatters, splashes and smirches, or waterproofing
materials; and the supplying of all tools, scaffolding, labor, workmanship, and materials
necessary for the entire Work.

ITEM IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Waterproof Membrane

5.12.2 MATERIALS.

5.12.2.1 Primer. Primer for sealing concrete surfaces prior to waterproofing shall be
fully compatible with the bonding agent and waterproofing.

5.12.2.2 Bonding Agent. Unless otherwise specified, the bonding agent shall be hot
applied oxidized bitumen having a softening point (Ring and Ball) within the range of eighty
to one hundred degrees Celsius (80 to 100 o C.) and penetration within the range of twenty
to thirty degrees Celsius (20 to 30o C.).

5.12.2.3 Proprietary Waterproofing Systems. Proprietary waterproofing systems

shall be bituminous membranes reinforced with two layers of suitable reinforcement to
provide impervious membranes easy to lay and able to withstand the laying and
compaction of bridge wearing courses. They shall be of a type accepted by the Engineer
who will give approval only after satisfactory site trials.

5.12.2.4 Submittals. The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval
specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations by the
manufacturer(s) of the waterproofing membrane materials. Submittals shall include
published data or certified test data for each material, showing compliance with the
requirements specified herein.

The Contractor shall furnish a five year guarantee for repair or replacement of any
waterproofing barrier installed under this Contract, which leaks water or otherwise fails to
perform as required within the guarantee period, due to failure of materials or
workmanship. The guarantee shall include an agreement to remove and replace other
Work which has been superimposed on or otherwise placed against the waterproofing
barrier, to the extent required to repair or replace the waterproofing barrier Work.

All materials furnished under this specification shall be accompanied by the

192
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

manufacturer's Certificate of Guarantee. The certificate shall give the quantity of

Table of Contents

waterproofing material in the shipment and shall identify same by order number, project
location and destination. Materials not accompanied by a Certificate of Guarantee shall
be sampled in the field and samples submitted to an approved independent laboratory for
testing, all at the Contractor’s expense.

The Engineer will approve materials on the basis of the Certificates of Guarantee and/or
laboratory tests, but reserves the right to resample and have retested any materials used
during the progress of the work. Should any material not conform to the specifications, it
shall be rejected, previous approval notwithstanding.

Materials shall be tested by the methods specified herein or in the ASTM or AASHTO
as applicable.

5.12.2.5 Membrane Waterproofing Materials.

1. Asphalt primer : ASTM D41, cut-back asphalt.

2. Waterproofing asphalt : ASTM D449, Type A for vertical wall surfaces below
grade, Type B for horizontal surfaces which are concealed, Type C for exposed
surfaces.
3. Asphalt-saturated felt : ASTM D226, No. 15 (630 gr/sq.m., organic fiber).
4. Asphalt-saturated fabric : ASTM D173 (215 gr/sq.m., cotton fabric, asphalt
saturated).
5. Glass fiber fabric : ASTM D1668 (68 gr/sq.m., impregnated with bitumen).
6. Plastic cement : Proper type for application indicated and compatibility with
other materials.
7. Coated base sheet : ASTM D2626, Type I (1.5 kg/sq.m., asphalt coated).
8. Coal-tar pitch : ASTM D450.
9. Creosote primer for coal tar pitch : ASTM D43
10. Coal-tar saturated felt : ASTM D227.

5.12 .2.6 Miscellaneous Materials.

1. Primers, fillers, sealers, joint tapes, adhesives, flashings, cant strips, and
accessories shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the primary protective
barrier materials, for the intended application.

2. Paper slip sheet : two and seven tenths (2.7) kg. rosin-sized paper.

3. Protection Course : On waterproofed surfaces exposed to backfill, a twelve (12)

millimeter thick, asphalt impregnated and coated, rigid fiber-type insulation board shall be
provided.

5.12.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.12.3.1 Preparation of Surfaces. The concrete deck on which the waterproofing

membrane is to be laid shall have a surface finish as shown on the drawings. The surface
shall be finished to such an accuracy that when tested with a three meter straight edge,

193
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

the maximum depression shall not exceed ten (10) millimeters, and abrupt irregularities
Table of Contents

shall not exceed three (3) millimeters.

Immediately before waterproofing is laid, the surface to be waterproofed shall be clean,

dry and free from membrane curing compounds and projecting tying wire.

Waterproofing work shall proceed only after substrate construction and preparation, and
all penetrating work have been satisfactorily completed; and only when weather conditions
comply with the manufacturer's recommendations and will permit the materials to be
applied in accordance with such recommendations.

Preparation of concrete surfaces shall conform to the requirements of Subparagraphs

5.13.3.1.6 through 5.13.3.1.17, in these General Specifications, and as specified herein.

The repair of defects in concrete shall be carried out in accordance with the
waterproofing membrane manufacturer's specific recommendations, specially insofar as
patching is concerned. Conventional Portland cement patching materials may not be
compatible with certain waterproofing systems, and proprietary materials may need to be
used for this purpose.

Acid to be used for etching, when approved, shall be a 10/90 to 15/85 dilution ratio of
commercial grade phosphoric acid in water solution, applied at a rate of one (1.0) liter per
square meter of surface to be prepared. In all other respects, the requirements of
Subparagraph 5.13.3.1.9 in these General Specifications shall apply.

Upon completion of surface preparation, the surface to be waterproofed shall be primed,

cant strips shall be installed, joints shall be sealed and bond breakers shall be applied
thereto as shown or as directed. Separate flashings, as recommended by the
manufacturer, shall be installed, wherever indicated to precede the waterproofing system.

5.12.3.2 Laying Waterproofing Materials. Waterproofing materials shall be laid and

installed according to the recommendations of the manufacturer and to the approval of the
Engineer. Waterproofing shall not be laid when the ambient temperature is below four
degrees Celsius (4o C.).

Only plant and equipment fitted with rubber tires may travel with the permission of the
Engineer, on water-proofed surfaces which have been adequately protected with an
approved protective layer.

The following requirements shall be complied with:

1. Hot bitumen shall not be applied under conditions which result in foaming of the
material. The manufacturer's limitations on heating shall be complied with. High
temperatures shall not be maintained for periods longer than needed for installation, and
in no case for more than three (3) hours. Bitumen shall not be heated to a temperature
higher than fourteen degrees Celsius (14 C) below flash point.

2. Multiple-ply courses of hot bitumen and felts or fabrics shall be installed in

194
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

individual courses, unless manufacturer recommends shingle-fashion courses. Courses

Table of Contents

shall be laid in the direction or directions recommended.

3. Membranes to vertical substrates shall be nailed as shown and as
recommended. Nails shall be covered with courses of fabric set in hot bitumen or plastic
cement.

4. Membranes shall be reinforced at corners and around projections in substrate,

with double course of glass fiber, set in hot bitumen or plastic cement.

5. Membranes shall be extended as flashing at edges, openings and projections,

so as to complete the waterproof enclosures as required for leak-proof performance.

6. Membrane composition : Alternate plies of felt and glass fiber fabric, set in
continuous moppings of bitumen, with top ply of felt, as shown on the plans :
(1) Two-ply Membrane : one (1) fabric, one (1) felt, forty (40) kg bitumen [three
(3) moppings].
(2) Three-ply Membrane : one (1) fabric, two (2) felt, fifty-four (54) kg bitumen
[four (4) moppings].

7. Membranes shall be protected from melting due to temporary exposure to high

ambient air temperatures, solar heat or other heat sources.

5.12.3.3 Concrete Surfaces. Concrete Surfaces sealed with one coat of primer where
specified. Primed surfaces shall not be covered until all solvent constituent has
evaporated. When spirit-based primer is used, a minimum of twenty (20) hours at
temperatures between ten and sixteen degrees Celsius (10 to 16 o C.) shall elapse before
waterproofing is laid. When bituminous emulsion is used, all water shall be allowed to
evaporate.

The sheeting shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
shall be laid so that no air is trapped between it and the concrete surface or between
successive layers of sheeting. Unless otherwise specified, joints between sheets shall
be lapped with end laps of at least one hundred fifty (150) millimeters and side laps of at
least one hundred (100) millimeters. The joints shall be arranged so that at no point are
there more than three thicknesses of sheeting, and, as far as possible, so that water will
drain away from the exposed edge.

5.12.3.4 Protective Layers to Waterproofing. The protective layer shall be laid and
compacted without damage to the waterproofing.

5.12.3.5 Painting with Tar or Bitumen. Prior to the application of tar or bitumen paint,
surfaces to which it is to be applied shall be clean and dry. The first coat shall be allowed
to dry before the second coat is applied.

Tar or bitumen painting shall consist of two coats of hot-applied tar complying with BS
76 of viscosity grade within the range thirty to thirty-eight degrees Celsius (30 to 38o C.)
equi-viscous temperature (evt) with a coverage of one (1.0) square meters per liter or two
(2) coats of cutback bitumen complying with BS 3690 of viscosity grade within the range

195
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

of twenty-five (25) to fifty (50) seconds (standard tar viscometer) at forty degrees Celsius
Table of Contents

(40o C.) with a coverage of one and eight-tenths (1.8) square meters per liter or any
material approved by the Engineer.

5.12.3.6 Acceptance of Waterproofing Membranes.

1. The waterproofing membranes shall be water-tight and not deteriorate in

excess of limitations published by the manufacturer.

2. In-place Testing : Before completed membranes on horizontal surfaces are

covered by protection course or other Work, the surface waterproofed shall be tested for
leaks with fifty (50) millimeters depth of water maintained for twenty-four (24) hours.
Substrates shall be examined for leaks. Leakage, if any, shall be corrected, and the test
shall be repeated until no leakage is observed.

5.12.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Waterproofing membrane shall be measured by

the square meter laid, completed and accepted for different types of waterproofing
membranes. No separate measurement shall be made for site trials to determine the
suitability of waterproofing membranes, but shall be considered subsidiary to the type of
waterproofing membrane for which site tests have been carried out. The tuck-in of
waterproofing membranes will not be measured for payment.

Tar or bituminous painting to surfaces permanently in contact with backfilled material

shall be measured by the square meter of surface area so painted, irrespective of whether
or not more than one coat of paint is used.

No measurement will be made for protective layers to waterproofing membranes or to

surfaces painted with bituminous coatings, but shall be considered subsidiary to the
waterproofing membrane or to the bituminous paint.

No separate measurement shall be made of tapes, bond breakers, flashings, cant strips,
and other accessories as they are considered subsidiary to the pay items of this section.
No measurement shall be made of unauthorized areas as specified in Subsection 1.07.6
- "Unauthorized Work" in these General Specifications. In addition, waterproofing barriers
that are applied to unauthorized areas shall be completely removed, when so directed, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer and at the Contractor's expense.

5.12.5 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work measured as provided
above will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) for "Waterproof Membrane, Two (2)
layer or Three (3) Layer," as specified in the Bill of Quantities, which prices shall be full
compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and all other
items necessary for the completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope
of Payment" in these General Specifications.

196
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

51201 Waterproof Membrane Square Meter

5120101 Waterproof Membrane, 2 Layer Square Meter

5120202 Waterproof Membrane, 3 Layer Square Meter

197
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents SECTION 5.13 - PAINTING OF STRUCTURES

5.13.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work consists of painting structures in accordance with the
following general specifications covering the painting of concrete, steel and other
materials.

This work shall also consist of providing a protective coating to existing concrete
structures or to structures built in the course of the work. Protective coatings shall be used
when the primary function is to improve the durability of concrete by protecting it from
degradation by chemicals and subsequent loss of structural integrity. Typical uses of
protective coatings include protection of concrete in contact with chemical solutions having
a pH value as low as four (4), reduction of chloride and sulphate intrusion, reduction of
water absorption and as barriers against salt water.

ITEM IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Painting of Existing Concrete Structure No _____

Painting of Existing Steel Structure No _____
Protective Coating for Concrete Structure

5.13.2 MATERIALS.

5.13.2.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, paints furnished shall be composed of

paint materials meeting the applicable requirements of this Section. The term "paint" as
used herein, includes enamels, paints and primers. Specifications hereinafter referred to
by organizations' letters and numbers are hereby made a part of the specifications to the
same extent as if fully set out herein. Finish paint for factory-primed items shall be of a
type compatible with the primer. Primers for unprimed items shall be as recommended by
the manufacturer for use with the finish paint.

The paint manufacturer(s) shall supply evidence that the proposed products have
performed satisfactorily for a minimum of five (5) years in conditions similar to those of
Saudi Arabia as to ultraviolet light exposure and intensive climatic conditions.

5.13.2.1.1 Condition. Paints furnished under these specifications shall be factory-

mixed or in paste form. The mixing of dry pigment and a vehicle by the Contractor will not
be permitted, except as specifically required by the specifications. Mixed paints shall be
easily mixed with a paddle to a smooth and homogenous condition. Mixed paints or
pastes which have hardened, thickened or otherwise deteriorated during storage or
shipment will not be accepted.

5.13.2.1.2 Pigments. Pigment shall be considered that portion of the paint that is not
soluble in the vehicle. All pigments shall be finely ground to a smooth uniform
consistency.

5.13.2.1.3 Thinners. Thinners which are specified as thinners for a particular type
of paint must mix readily with that type of paint.

198
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents 5.13.2.1.4 Tinting. When paint is tinted, the tinting material shall be thoroughly mixed
into the paint to form an even, uniform shade.

5.13.2.1.5 Covering Qualities. All mixed paint furnished under these specifications
shall have satisfactory protective and covering qualities. Mixed paint shall not run, streak,
break or sag when brushed on a clean one hundred fifty (150) millimeters by two hundred
fifty (250) millimeter glass panel placed in a vertical position. The paint shall dry to a
smooth, uniform finish, free from roughness, grit, unevenness and other surface
imperfections.

5.13.2.1.6 Containers. Paint containers shall be sufficiently strong and durable to

withstand shipment and normal handling procedures without damage. Paint containers
shall be equipped with lids which positively prevent the entrance of air into the container.

5.13.2.1.7 Delivery. All paint shall be delivered to the site in original manufacturer's
metal containers with labels which give type, color, quantity, gross and tare, and paint
ingredient proportions of every item of the contents.

5.13.2.1.8 Storage and Handling. Water-based polymer latex paint shall be stored
at temperatures above zero (0) degrees C, to avoid freezing of the water in the paint which
will destroy the film-forming qualities of the latex. Storage temperature of solvent-based
and oil-based paints is not critical. However, the temperature of such paints just prior to
use shall be between sixteen and thirty two degrees Celsius (16-32 C), to insure a dense
paint film of the required thickness.

5.13.2.2 Pigments and Pastes. When specified in mixed paints, the following
pigments and pastes shall comply with the requirements of the ASTM designations
indicated below:

ASTM
Zinc Oxide D 79
White Lead, Basic Carbonate D 81
White Lead, Basic Sulfate D 82
Red Lead, ninety-seven (97) D 83
percent Grade
Iron Oxide, Class II Type A D 84
Lampblack D 209
Chrome Oxide Green D 263
Titanium Dioxide, Type I D 476
Carbon Black D 561
Magnesium Silicate Pigment D 605
Aluminum Pigments, Type II Class B D 962
(except coarse particles may be two
(2) percent maximum)
Copper Phtalocyanine Blue D 963
Basic Lead Silico-Chromate D 1648
Copper Phthalocyanine Green D 3021

199
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents Siliceous Red Iron Oxide shall meet the following requirements:

Total Iron Oxide, Calculated as Fe2O3 Eighty-five percent (85%) min.

Coarse Particles, on Number 325 mesh One percent (1%) maximum

sieve

Calcium Oxide Five-tenths percent (0.5%) max.

Moisture and other volatile material Two percent (2%) max.

Water Soluble Matter One and five-tenths percent (1.5%) max.

Oil Absorption Sixteen (16%) percent min.

Siliceous Matter Balance

Organic Colors None Permitted

5.13.2.3 Paint Oils, Thinners and Dryers. When specified in mixed paints or vehicles
the following paint liquids shall comply with the designations indicated below:

ASTM
Turpentine, Steam Distilled D 13
Pine Oil, Type 1 FSS LLL-P-400
Raw Linseed Oil D 234
Mineral Spirits D 235
Mineral Spirits, Grade 1 and Grade 2 FSS TT-T-291
Boiled Linseed Oil, Type 1 D 260
Dryers, Liquid Paint, Class B D 600
Alkyd Resin Solutions, Type 1, II and III FSS TT-R-266

5.13.2.4 Paint No. 1 - Red Lead Paint.

5.13.2.4.1 Description. Rapid-dry red lead paint shall consist only of lead pigment,
iron oxide pigment, magnesium silicate pigment, raw linseed oil, linseed oil modified alkyd
resin, thinners and dryers. The paint shall contain not more than four-tenths (0.4) percent
aluminum stearate to produce loose suspension of the pigment during storage.

5.13.2.4.2 Composition. Rapid-dry red lead paint shall conform to the following
composition by weight:

1. Paint.

Pigment Sixty-six (66) percent min.

Vehicle Thirty-four (34) percent max.
Non-volatile Material in vehicle Fifty-six (56) percent min.

200
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents Phthalic Anhydride Based

on Vehicle Solids Fifteen (15) percent min.
Water Five-tenths (0.5) percent max.

2. Pigment. The extracted pigment shall conform to the following by weight:

True Red Lead Sixty-two and Five-tenths (62.5) percent min.

Ferric Oxide Twelve and Five-tenths (12.5) percent min.
Siliceous Matter and Remainder
Other Oxides of Lead

5.13.2.4.3 Weight Per Liter. Red lead paint furnished under this specification shall
weigh not less than two (2) kilograms per liter.

5.13.2.4.4 Coarse Particles. Coarse particles and skins retained on a forty-five

thousandths (0.045) millimeter (No. 325) sieve shall not exceed one percent (1%) by
weight based on pigment.

5.13.2.4.5 Consistency. Consistency shall be not less than seventy-three (73) nor
more than eighty-six (86) Krebs Units (K.U.).

5.13.2.4.6 Condition in Container. The paint shall be thoroughly ground and mixed;
it shall not be settled, caked or thickened to such a degree that it cannot be redispersed
easily with a paddle to a uniform and homogenous state.

5.13.2.4.7 Skinning. Skinning shall be entirely absent from a sample that has been
stored forty-eight (48) hours in a dark place in a three-quarters-filled tightly-closed
container.

5.13.2.4.8 Dilution Stability. The paint shall remain stable and uniform after
reduction with mineral spirits in the proportions of eight (8) parts by volume of paint to one
(1) part by volume of mineral spirits.

5.13.2.4.9 Brushing Properties. The paint, after thorough mixing, shall have
satisfactory brushing and leveling properties and show no running or sagging tendencies
when brushed on a vertical steel surface.

5.13.2.4.10 Spraying Properties. The paint, when thinned as specified in

subparagraph (8), shall spray satisfactorily, show no tendency to orange-peel, sag, creep,
or run, and shall show satisfactory spraying properties in all other respects. The mineral
spirits used as a reducer shall conform to FSS TT-T-281 Grade 1, and shall be tested and
approved prior to use.

5.13.2.4.11 Drying Time. The paint shall set to touch in not more than four (4) hours
and dry-through in not more than sixteen (16) hours when applied as in FSS Test Method,
Standard Number 141, Method 4061.

201
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.13.2.4.12 Tinting. When used for the shop (prime) and second coat, sufficient black
Table of Contents

synthetic or magnetite iron oxides shall be added to the second coat paint as a tinting
agent for identification of the coated surfaces.

5.13.2.5 Paint No. 2 - Basic Lead Silico-Chromate Primer.

5.13.2.5.1 Description. This specification covers one (1) type and grade of paint
suitable for use as a structural metal, shop or spot primer. This primer shall consist only
of basic lead silico-chromate, and red iron oxide eighty-five (85) percent, linseed-soya oil
modified alkyd resin, raw linseed oil, thinners and dryers. The primer shall contain not
more than seven-tenths (0.7) percent pigment suspended agent. The alkyd resin shall
conform to FSS TT-R-266, Type III.

5.13.2.5.2 Composition. Basic lead silico-chromate primer shall conform to the

following by weight:

1. Paint:

Pigment Fifty-seven (57) percent min.

Non-volatile material in vehicle Fifty-two (52) percent min.
Phthalic Anhydride based on
Vehicle Solids Fifteen (15) percent min.
Water Five-tenths (0.5) percent max.

2. Pigment. The extracted pigment shall conform to the following by weight:

Basic Lead Silico-Chromate Ninety-three and two-tenths (93.2) percent

minimum
Ferric Oxide Four and eight-tenths (4.8) to five and
eight-tenths (5.8) percent

5.13.2.5.3 Weight Per Liter. Basic lead silico-chromate primer shall weigh not less
than one and six-tenths (1.6) kilograms per liter.

5.13.2.5.4 Coarse Particles. Coarse particles and skins retained on a forty-five

thousandths (0.045) millimeter (No. 325) sieve shall not exceed one (1) percent by weight
based on pigment.

5.13.2.5.5 Consistency. Consistency shall be not less than seventy (70) nor more
than eighty-three (83) Krebs Units (K.U.).

5.13.2.5.6 Flash Point. The flash point shall be not less than thirty degrees Celsius
(30 C) when tested in accordance with Federal Test Method, Standard Number 141,
Method 4293 using Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester.

5.13.2.5.7 Condition in Container. The paint shall be thoroughly ground and mixed;
it shall not be settled, caked or thickened to such a degree that it cannot be dispersed
easily with a paddle to a uniform and homogenous state.

202
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents5.13.2.5.8 Skinning. Skinning shall be entirely absent from a sample that has been
stored forty-eight (48) hours in a dark place in a three-quarters-filled tightly-closed
container.

5.13.2.5.9 Dilution Stability. The paint shall remain stable and uniform after
reduction with mineral spirits in the proportions of eight (8) parts by volume of paint to one
(1) part by volume of mineral spirits.

5.13.2.5.10 Appearance. After a flow-out panel of the paint on a one hundred (100)
millimeters by three hundred (300) millimeter clean glass plate has dried in a nearly
vertical position at room temperature, it shall show no streaking or separation.

5.13.2.5.11 Brushing Properties. The paint, after thorough mixing, shall have
satisfactory brushing and leveling properties and show no running or sagging tendencies
when brushed on a vertical steel surface at a spreading rate of twelve and three-tenths
(12.3) square meters per liter.

5.13.2.5.12 Spraying Properties. The paint, when thinned as specified in

subparagraph 5.12.2.5.9 above shall spray satisfactorily, show no tendency to orange-
peel, sag, creep, or run, and shall show satisfactory spraying properties in all other
respects. The mineral spirits used as a reducer shall conform to FSS TT-T-291, Grade 1
and shall be tested and approved prior to use.

5.13.2.5.13 Drying Time. The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform surface, free from
roughness, grit, unevenness, and other surface imperfections. The paint shall set to touch
in not more than four (4) hours and shall dry-through in not more than sixteen (16) hours
when applied as in FSS Test Method, Standard Number 141, Method 4061.

5.13.2.6 Paint No. 3 - Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide Primer.

5.13.2.6.1 Description. Type II zinc dust-zinc oxide-phthalic alkyd resin primer,

conforming to FSS TT-P-641d Type II, shall be a ready-to-mix paint for use on galvanized
metal surfaces, with the zinc oxide mill-ground into the entire vehicle in one (1) container
and the dry zinc dust in a separate container. The zinc dust shall show an analysis of not
less than ninety-four percent (94%) metallic zinc by weight. The zinc oxide vehicle shall
consist of zinc oxide and a vehicle containing a long oil, linseed-modified alkyd resin of the
air drying type, petroleum or terpene thinners, dryers and anti-skimming agents.

5.13.2.6.2 Zinc Oxide Vehicle.

1. Composition. Zinc oxide vehicle shall conform to the following by weight:

Zinc Oxide in the Extracted

and Ignited Pigment Ninety-eight (98) percent min.
Non-volatile Material in the Vehicle Forty-three (43) percent min.
Phthalic Anhydride based on
Vehicle Solids Twenty-three (23) percent min.
Rosin or Rosin Derivatives None

203
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

2. Condition in Container. The zinc oxide vehicle shall be thoroughly ground and
mixed. It shall not be settled, caked, or thickened to such a degree that it cannot be
redispersed easily with a paddle to a uniform and homogenous state. It shall be readily
incorporated with the zinc dust to form a smooth uniform paint of good brushing
consistency.

5.13.2.6.3 Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide Mixed Primer.

1. Composition. Zinc dust-zinc oxide mixed primer shall conform to the following by
weight when mixed in the proportions as submitted in the original containers:

(1) Primer.

Pigment Sixty-two (62) to sixty-five (65) percent

Thirty-five (35) to thirty-eight (38)
Vehicle percent
Water Three-tenths (0.3) percent max.

(2) Pigment. The extracted pigment shall conform to the following by weight:

Metallic Zinc Seventy-four (74) percent min.

Zinc Oxide Eighteen (18) percent min.
Metallic Zinc plus Zinc Oxide Ninety-seven (97) percent min.
Sulfide Sulfur None

2. Weight Per Liter. Zinc dust-zinc oxide mixed primer shall weigh not less than one
and eight-tenths (1.8) kilograms per liter.

3. Coarse Particles. Coarse particles and skins retained on a forty-five thousandths

(0.045) millimeter (No. 325) sieve shall not exceed four (4) percent by weight based on
pigment.

4. Consistency. Consistency shall be not less than sixty-seven (67) nor more than
eight-six (86) Krebs Unit (K.U.).

5. Dilution Stability. The mixed primer shall remain stable and uniform after reduction
with mineral spirits in the proportions of eight (8) parts by volume of paint to one (1) part
by volume of mineral spirits. After standing twenty-four (24) hours there shall be no
curdling or precipitation on the vehicle.

6. Flexibility. After air-drying eighteen (18) hours, baking for twenty-four (24) hours
at one hundred five degrees Celsius (105 oC) and cooling to twenty-three degrees Celsius
(23oC), a film of the mixed primer applied to flat tin panel with a five-hundredths (0.05)
millimeter Bird Film Applicator shall show no cracking after bending double over a three
(3) millimeter mandrel. This test shall be conducted according to FSS Test Method
Number 141, Method 2012.

204
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents 7. Adhesion. After air-drying for eighteen (18) hours, baking for three (3) hours at one
hundred twenty-one degrees Celsius (121oC), a film of the mixed primer brushed on a
clean new galvanized iron panel, seventy-five (75) millimeters by one hundred fifty (150)
millimeters, shall cut loose in the form of a ribbon without flaking or otherwise loosening
from the panel when tested with a knife blade.

8. Brushing Properties. The mixed primer, after thorough mixing, shall have
satisfactory brushing and leveling properties and show no running or sagging tendencies
when brushed on a vertical surface three hundred (300) millimeters by six hundred (600)
millimeters of smooth, clean, untreated galvanized iron.

9. Spraying Properties. The mixed primer when thinned with not more than one (1)
part by volume of mineral spirits to eight (8) parts by volume of paint shall spray
satisfactorily, show no tendency to orange-peel, sag, creep, or run, and shall show
satisfactory spraying properties in all other respects.

10. Drying Time. The mixed primer shall set to touch in not less than thirty (30)
minutes nor more than four (4) hours and dry-hard in not more than eighteen (18) hours
when applied as in FSS Test Method, Standard Number 141, Method 4061.

5.13.2.7 Paint No. 4 - Aluminum Paint.

5.13.2.7.1 Description. Aluminum paint shall be composed of aluminum paste and

aluminum vehicle and shall conform to the requirements specified in AASHTO M 69, Type
1. The paste and vehicle shall be delivered to the project unmixed and in separate
containers.

5.13.2.7.2 Proportions. The mixed paint shall be prepared for use on the project by
combining the aluminum paste and aluminum vehicle in the proportions of twenty-four
hundredths (0.24) kilogram paste per liter of vehicle.

5.13.2.7.3 Mixing. The paste and vehicle shall be thoroughly mixed before use. The
quantity of paint mixed shall not be greater than will be used within twenty-four (24) hours
after mixing.

5.13.2.8 Paint No. 5 - Tinted Aluminum Paint.

5.13.2.8.1 Description. Tinted aluminum paint shall consist of a mixture containing

aluminum paint that conforms to the requirements of Paint No. 4 and Prussian Blue Paste
or Chrome Green paste, conforming to the requirements specified in ASTM D 212 or D
261.

5.13.2.8.2 Proportions. Tinted aluminum paint shall be prepared by mixing one (1)
liter of aluminum paint meeting this specification with between thirty (30) and forty-five (45)
grams of either Prussian Blue paste or Chrome Green paste in oil or varnish.

205
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.13.2.9 Paint No. 6 - Basic Lead Silico-Chromate Maroon Field Coat.

5.13.2.9.1 Description. This specification covers paint intended for use as a field
coat over a properly primed surface. Hiding power shall be sufficient to obtain a complete
hiding when applied at normal spreading rates and shall have a good contrast with the
primer coat. This paint shall consist only of basic lead silico-chromate, siliceous red iron
oxide, raw linseed oil, linseed-soya oil modified alkyd resin, thinners, dryers, and from five-
tenths (0.5) to seven-tenths (0.7) percent suspending agent, based on the pigment, to
insure soft settlement of the pigment during storage. The alkyd resin shall conform to FSS
TT-R-266, Type III and the thinner to FSS TT-T-291, Grade 2.

5.13.2.9.2 Composition. Maroon field coat paint shall conform to the following
composition by weight:

1. Paint.

Pigment Fifty-nine and five-tenths (59.5) percent minimum

Vehicle Forty and five-tenths (40.5) percent maximum
Non-volatile Material in
Vehicle Fifty-two (52) percent minimum
Phthalic Anhydride Fourteen and nine-tenths (14.9) percent minimum
Water Five-tenths (0.5) percent max.

2. Pigment. The extracted pigment shall conform to the following by weight:

Basic Lead Silico-Chromate

Sixty-six and five-tenths (66.5) percent
minimum
Siliceous Red Iron Oxide Thirty-three (33) percent max.
.
5.13.2.9.3 Weight Per Liter. Maroon field coat paint shall weigh not less than one
and sixty-seven hundredths (1.67) kilograms per liter.

5.13.2.9.4 Coarse Particles. Coarse particles and skins retained on a forty-five

thousandths (0.0450) millimeter (No. 325) sieve shall not exceed one (1) percent by weight
based on pigment.

5.13.2.9.5 Consistency. Consistency shall be not less than seventy (70) nor more
than eighty-two (82) Krebs Units (K.U.).

5.13.2.9.6 Condition in Container. The paint shall be thoroughly ground and mixed;
it shall not be settled, caked, or thickened to such a degree that it cannot be redispersed
easily with a paddle to a uniform and homogenous state.

5.13.2.9.7 Skinning. Skinning shall be entirely absent from a sample that has been
stored forty-eight (48) hours in a dark place in a three-quarters-filled tightly-closed
container.

206
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.13.2.9.8 Dilution Stability. The paint shall remain stable and uniform after
reduction with mineral spirits in the proportions of eight (8) parts by volume of paint to one
(1) part by volume of mineral spirits.

5.13.2.9.9 Brushing Properties. The paint, after through mixing, shall have
satisfactory brushing and leveling properties, and show no running or sagging tendencies
when brushed on a vertical steel surface.

5.13.2.9.10 Spraying Properties. The paint, when thinned as specified in

Subparagraph (9), shall spray satisfactorily, show no tendency to orange-peel, sag, creep
or run, and shall show satisfactory spraying properties in all other respects. The mineral
spirits used as a reducer shall conform to FSS TT-T-291 Grade 1, and shall be tested and
approved prior to use.

5.13.2.9.11 Drying Time. The paint shall set to touch in no more than four (4) hours
and dry-through in not more than twenty-four (24) hours.

5.13.2.10 Paint No. 7 - Basic Lead Silico-Chromate Dark Green Finish Coat.

5.13.2.10.1 Description. This paint is intended for use as a finish coat over a
properly primed and field-coated surface. Dark green finish coat paint shall consist only
of basic lead silico-chromate, chromium oxide green, phthalocyanine green and/or
phtalocyanine blue, lampblack, soya oil modified alkyd resin, raw linseed oil, thinners,
dryers and from six-tenths (0.6) to seven-tenths (0.7) percent suspended agent, based on
the pigment, to insure soft settlement of the pigment during storage. The alkyd resin
solution shall conform to FSS TT-R-266, Type I, and the thinner shall conform to FSS TT-
T-291, Grade 2.

5.13.2.10.2 Composition. Dark green finish coat paint shall conform to the following
by weight:

1. Paint:

Pigment Forty-one (41) percent min.

Vehicle Fifty-nine (59) percent max.
Non-volatile Material in Vehicle Fifty-three (53) percent min.
Phthalic Anhydride Based on
Vehicle Solids Twenty & five-tenths (20.5) percent max.
Water Five-tenths (0.5) percent max.

2. Pigment. The extracted pigment shall conform to the following by weight:

Basic Lead Silico-Chromate Eighty-six (86) percent min.

Chromium Oxide Green Nine (9) percent min.

5.13.2.10.3 Weight Per Liter. Dark green finish coat paint shall weigh not less than
one and thirty-three hundredths (1.33) kilograms per liter.

207
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.13.2.10.4 Coarse Particles. Coarse particles and skins retained on a forty-five

thousandths (0.045) millimeter (No. 325) sieve shall not exceed one (1) percent by weight
based on pigment.

5.13.2.10.5 Consistency. Consistency shall be not less than seventy-two (72) nor
more than eighty (80) Krebs Units (K.U.).

5.13.2.10.6 Color. Dark green finish coat paint color shall be as approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, color chips of the
paint proposed for the Work.

5.13.2.10.7 Condition in Container. The paint shall be thoroughly ground and

mixed; it shall not be settled, caked, or thickened to such a degree that it cannot be
redispersed easily with a paddle to a uniform and homogenous state.

5.13.2.10.8 Skinning. Skinning shall be entirely absent from a sample that has been
stored forty-eight (48) hours in a dark place in a three-quarters-filled tightly-closed
container.

5.13.2.10.9 Dilution Stability. The paint shall remain stable and uniform after
reduction with mineral spirits in the proportions of eight (8) parts by volume of paint to one
(1) part by volume of mineral spirits.

5.13.2.10.10 Brushing Properties. The paint, after through mixing, shall have
satisfactory brushing and leveling properties, and show no running or sagging tendencies
when brushed on a vertical steel surface.

5.13.2.10.11 Spraying Properties. The paint, when thinned as specified in

Subparagraph 5.13.2.10.9, shall spray satisfactorily, show no tendency to orange-peel,
sag, creep or run, and shall show satisfactory spraying properties in all other respects.
The mineral spirits used as a reducer shall conform to FSS TT-T-291 Grade 1, and shall
be tested and approved prior to use.

5.13.2.10.12 Drying Time. The paint shall set to touch in not less than twenty (20)
minutes or more than four (4) hours and dry-through in not more than twenty-four (24)
hours.

5.13.2.11 Paint No. 8 - Zinc Dust Paint.

5.13.2.11.1 Description. This specification covers a ready-mixed, high zinc dust

content paint suitable for repairing damaged spelter coating on galvanized steel.

5.13.2.11.2 Requirements. This paint shall comply with all the requirements of U.S.
Military Specification MIL-P-21035 (Ships), Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing
Repair, dated August 23, 1957, with the following additions and exceptions:

1. The paint shall be supplied ready-mixed. Material supplied in two (2)

208
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

compartment cans to be mixed on the job will not be accepted.

Table of Contents

2. Pigment content expressed as a weight percent of total nonvolatile content may

be a minimum of ninety-two (92) instead of the ninety-four (94) minimum required by the
Military Specification.

3. Percent metallic zinc by analysis in the pigment may be minimum of ninety-four

(94) instead of the ninety-seven and five-tenths (97.5) minimum required by the Military
Specification.

5.13.2.12 Paint No. 9 - Gloss Enamel.

5.13.2.12.1 Description. This specification covers a high-grade synthetic-type high

gloss enamel for use on exterior and interior metal. It is highly weather-resistant and is
characterized by easy brushing, good color and gloss retention, good drying and flexibility,
with freedom from after-tack.

5.13.2.12.2 Requirements. This paint shall conform in all respects to Federal

Specification TT-E-489, Class A, Air Drying. This enamel may be thinned with Thinner;
Federal Specification TT-T-291E, Type II, Grade A (Mineral Spirits).

5.13.2.13 Sampling and Testing. All materials furnished under this specification shall
be accompanied by the manufacturer's Certificate of Guarantee. The certificate shall give
the quantity of paint in the shipment and shall identify the paint by order number, project
location and destination. Materials not accompanied by a Certificate of Guarantee shall
be sampled in the field and samples submitted to an approved independent laboratory for
testing.

The Engineer will approve materials on the basis of the Certificates of Guarantee and/or
laboratory tests, but reserves the right to resample and have retested any materials used
during the progress of the Work. Should the paint not conform to the specifications, it shall
be rejected, previous approval notwithstanding.

Materials and paints shall be analyzed or tested by the methods specified in the ASTM,
AASHTO, or FSS Test Method Standard No. 141, for the material to be analyzed or
tested.

No paint or paint materials shall be used which have not been approved by the
Engineer. Paint or paint materials for which samples and/or Certificates of Guarantee of
the same paint or paint materials have previously been submitted to the Engineer and
approved thereby, may be used if the additional shipments are accompanied by the
manufacturer's guarantee that the product is equal in all respects to the previously
approved materials.

The required color, and, if applicable, texture of the coating shall be as specified on the
plans or as directed by the Engineer and the coating shall be selected by the Engineer on
the basis of trial panels prepared by the Contractor.

209
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

The Contractor shall supply manufacturer's samples, specifications and chemical

Table of Contents

compositions of paint(s) meeting the requirements of these specifications and which

correspond to the color and texture specified. A minimum of five (5) samples per pay item
shall be provided, of which not more than three (3) shall be from any one manufacturer.
The Engineer shall select a maximum of three (3) coatings per pay item for which trial
panels shall be constructed by the Contractor as specified herein.

5.13.2.14 Paint No 10 - Portland Cement Paint.

5.13.2.14.1 Description. This paint shall conform to the US Federal Specification TT-
P-0035(1) - Paint, Cementitious, Powder, White and Colors and is intended for use on
properly prepared concrete surfaces; this paint shall not be applied over old paint or other
types of surfaces. Portland cement paint is suitable for use on interior and exterior
concrete surfaces, below and above grade, under normal service and climatic conditions.
Where more stringent requirements are anticipated, preference shall be given to solvent-
based polymer paints, described below under paint No. 12.

5.13.2.14.2 Composition. Portland cement paint shall be a water-based pigmented

cement wash coating, having properties similar to the concrete surface itself. Portland
cement paint shall be supplied as dry powder to be mixed with water prior to using. After
addition of water, thorough mixing shall follow to obtain a creamy consistency to facilitate
a uniform application, and paint shall thereafter be used within the time limits specified by
the manufacturer.

5.13.2.14.3 Colors. Portland cement paint colors are normally restricted to flat white,
field green and earth colors and shall be as shown on the plans or as directed by the
Engineer.

5.13.2.15 Paint No. 11 - Polymer Latex Paint.

5.13.2.15.1 Description. This paint shall conform to the US Federal Specifications

TT-P-0033 - Paint, Latex Base, Exterior, or TT-P-96D - Paint Latex Base, for Exterior
Surfaces and is intended for use on properly prepared concrete surfaces, not less than 3
weeks old, with normal, high or varying moisture content, on masonry surfaces, and on
other types of old paints. Application over other types of paint is subject to the
manufacturer's written instructions/limitations and to the approval of the Engineer. Polymer
latex paint is suitable for use on interior and exterior concrete and masonry surfaces,
below and above grade, under normal service and climatic conditions. Where more
stringent requirements are anticipated, preference shall be given to solvent-based polymer
paints, described below under Paint No.12.

5.13.2.15.2 Composition. Polymer latex paint shall be a water-based dispersion of

pigments and polymeric film-forming materials. Film formers may be butadiene-styrene,
chlorinated rubber, vinyl acetate or butyrate, or acrylic resins. Exterior grade shall be used
in all cases, with a flat or semigloss mildew-resistant finish, as shown on the plans or as
directed.

210
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.13.2.15.3 Colors. Polymer latex paint colors are available in a wide range and shall
be as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

5.13.2.16 Paint No. 12 - Polymer Paint.

5.13.2.16.1 Description. This paint shall conform to the requirements of the US

Federal Specifications TT-P-1411A-Paint, Copolymer Resin, Cementitious; TT-P-95C-
Paint, Rubber for Swimming Pools and Other Concrete and Masonry Surfaces; TT-P-97D-
Paint, Styrene-Butadiene Solvent Type, White; TT-P-1181A(1)-Paint, Styrene-Acrylate
Solvent Types, Tints and Deep Tones; TT-C-545 D(1) - Coating : Polyester-Epoxy (Two
Component), High-Build, Gloss and Semigloss, White and Tints; TT-C-1659A - Coatings
: Epoxy Emulsion, Two-Component Gloss and Semigloss; TT-C-535B(1) - Coating, Epoxy,
Two Component; TT-C-542D - Coating, Polyurethane, Oil Free, Moisture Curing; or MIL-C-
22750C - Coating, Epoxy-Polyamide. Polymer paint is intended for use on properly
prepared interior or exterior concrete and masonry surfaces, with low or relatively stable
moisture content, below and above grade, under normal or adverse service conditions and
normal, humid or wet climatic conditions; and on certain types of old paints, subject to the
manufacturer's written instructions/limitations, to the approval of the Engineer, and as
herein specified.

5.13.2.16.2 Composition. Single-component polymer paints shall be pigmented

solvent-based solutions of resins, such as chlorinated rubber, styrene butadiene and vinyl
chloride-vinyl acetate copolymers. Such "rubber-based" paints shall be of a formulation
so as to possess a considerable degree of flexibility and extensibility when applied to the
specified thickness, in order to maintain a continuous coating over minor cracks which may
exist or develop in the concrete substrate.

The paint formulation shall have a potential to resist soiling and be cleanable with
commercial detergents. Thermoplastic formulations and formulations soluble in organic
solvents shall not be approved for use on surfaces that need to be cleaned with steam
cleaning or strong detergents and aggressive solvents.

Two-component polymer paints : One of the components shall be a pigmented

solution of a compounded polymer, with or without solvent, such as epoxy, urethane or
polyester; the other component shall contain a reactive chemical, the hardener. After
mixing the two components to the manufacturer's instructions, application to the substrate
and curing, the painted surface shall be a hard, strong, chemical- and moisture-resistant
film with excellent adhesion to the protected, properly prepared surface. The finished
surface shall be easy to clean, resistant to fungus and strong detergents, and inert to heat
and steam in order to be used as antigraffiti paint, when required. Two-component epoxy
formulations shall not be used on surfaces that are exposed to sunlight. In such cases,
two-component exterior grade urethane formulations (aliphatic grades) shall be approved
for use.

5.13.2.16.3 Colors. Polymer paint colors are available in a wide range and shall be
as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

211
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Sealers and primers for paints Nos. 10 through 12 shall be provided by the manufacturer
Table of Contents

of the finish paint, compatible with the substrate to be sealed or primed, and with the finish
paint, and suitable for the intended use.

5.13.2.17 Protective Coating Materials. Materials shall conform to ASTM C722 and
be as listed below, depending on the actual application and the severity of the chemical
environment, as shown on the plans, verified by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer. Primers and solvents shall be as recommended by the product manufacturer
for the intended purpose. Colors shall be as shown on the plans or as directed by the
Engineer.
1. Polyvinyl butyral shall be applicable when sealing concrete surfaces for
increased weathering resistance. Alternately, acrylic resins, including styrene-acrylic
copolymer, resulting from the vinyl polymerization of acrylic monomers which are modified
by the addition of plasticizers and prepolymers may be used for this purpose.
2. Polyurethane resins shall be applicable when high resistance to chemical
attack, impact and abrasion are required. Urethanes may be single- or two-component
systems, based on the reaction of a polyol component and an isocyanate curing agent.
Care shall be exercised to match job service conditions with the proper type of urethane
barrier; these barriers shall be applied to dry surfaces only.
3. Epoxy resins shall be applicable when very tough, durable coatings are
required with high caustic, acid and solvent resistance. Epoxy resins shall be two-
component systems, based on a reaction product of bisphenol A and epichlorohydrin with
a curing agent. Special formulations shall be used when the coating must adhere to damp
surfaces.

5.13.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.13.3.1 General. The painting of metal, concrete, masonry, and metal and concrete
structures shall include, unless otherwise provided, the proper cleaning and preparation
of the substrate surfaces; the application, protection, drying, and curing of the paint
coatings; the protection of pedestrian, vehicular or other traffic upon or underneath or near
the Work; the protection of all portions of structures (superstructure and substructure) and
other portions of the Work against disfigurement by spatters, splashes and smirches, or
paint or of paint materials; and the supplying of all tools, scaffolding, labor, workmanship,
and materials necessary for the entire Work.

1. When directed by the Engineer and prior to starting painting operations on

concrete surfaces, the Contractor shall construct trial panels for the coatings selected by
the Engineer. The trial panels shall be constructed of the class of concrete used in the
Work. Where the same coating is to be applied to different classes of concrete, the class
of concrete to be used for the trial panels shall be selected by the Engineer.
For all trial panels, the concrete shall be mixed, cured, finished, and the surfaces
shall be prepared and painted in the same manner as that intended for the permanent
Work.

2. The trial panels shall be one and one-half (1.5) meters high by one (1.0) meter
wide and two hundred (200) millimeters thick. The panel finally accepted by the Engineer
as the standard for the permanent works shall be stored by the Contractor in direct

212
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

sunlight with one half of the panel masked, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, to
Table of Contents

prevent light reaching the coating. The masking shall be easy to remove and replace so
that at any time the aging of the coating may be assessed.

3. The concrete surface preparation and coating application procedure details for
the approved trial panel shall be recorded and will provide the basis for the relevant
permanent works.

4. Trial panels shall be broken up and disposed of by the Contractor when so

instructed by the Engineer.

5. When so directed by the Engineer, trial panels, as specified herein shall be

prepared for each and every color and texture of coating specified in the plans.

6. Preparation of concrete and masonry surfaces shall comply with the

requirements of this specification. Due to the continuous development of new products,
absolute adherence to the paint manufacturer's recommendations and written instructions
is critical for the proper performance of the Work. The Engineer may, at any time, require
the presence of the manufacturer's technical representative on site, for as long as the
Engineer deems necessary, to insure proper execution of the Work.

7. The concrete and masonry surfaces shall not be contaminated by chemicals,

such as form release agents or curing compounds, that can prevent good adhesion
between the paint material and the substrate. The surfaces shall be newly exposed, free
of loose, weak and unsound materials. Laitance, efflorescence, inadequately cured
concrete, and condensed surface moisture are conditions objectionable to paint
application. The dryness or dampness of the surface shall be compatible with the paint
type to be used as per the manufacturer's instructions.

8. Repair of surface defects on concrete surfaces shall be performed as specified

in Paragraph 5.03.4.4, "Removal of Bridge Structure Forms and Falsework," in these
General Specifications.

9. Preparation of repaired concrete surfaces may include chemical cleaning and

mechanical cleaning. Acid etching shall be employed only at the recommendation of the
paint manufacturer and upon approval by the Engineer, and shall be performed by crews
experienced in its use.

10. Chemical cleaning shall be employed prior to mechanical cleaning or acid

etching when removal of surface contaminants such as oil, grease and dirt is required.
Solutions of caustic soda or trisodium phosphate may be used, as well as proprietary
detergents specially formulated for use on concrete. Solvents shall not be used for this
purpose. The approved detergent shall be applied with vigorous scrubbing, followed by
flushing with water to remove all traces of both the detergent and the contaminant.

11. Mechanical cleaning may include scarification and grinding when small areas
are involved. For larger areas, wet sandblasting and, preferably, high-pressure water
jetting shall be employed, according to methods and procedures specified in Paragraph

213
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

5.03.4.7, "Bridge Structure Construction Joints" in these General Specifications.

Table of Contents

Conventional dry sandblasting shall not be permitted.

12. Acid to be used for etching, when approved, shall be a 10/90 maximum dilution
ratio of commercial grade phosphoric acid in water solution, applied at a rate of one (1.0)
liter per square meter of surface to be prepared. Hydrochloric acid solutions shall not be
permitted for this purpose. For small areas, plastic sprinkling cans may be used for
dispensing the acid solution. Larger areas shall be sprayed with low pressure automatic
spray equipment. Upon subsidy of the foaming action of the acid (3 to 5 minutes) the
entire treated surface shall be thoroughly flushed with water, while scrubbed with stiff
bristle or wire brushes to remove the salts formed on the surface and to dislodge loose
particles. The adequacy of the flushing operation shall be checked at several points within
the cleaned area by placing litmus or pH paper on the wet surface to determine whether
the acid has been completely neutralized. Further flushing may be necessary to ensure
an absolutely neutralized surface.

13. When forced drying of wet surfaces is necessary, as approved by the

Engineer, heat may be applied or dry, oil-free air may be blown over the surface.

14. Concrete and masonry surfaces to be painted shall be tested for surface
quality prior to application of paint. Tests shall include cleanliness, dryness and strength
qualities of the substrate as specified below.

15. Cleanliness of Surface.

(1) Dusty condition : wipe the surface with a dark cloth; if a white powder is
on the cloth, the surface is unsatisfactory.
(2) Oily condition : Sprinkle water on the dried suspect surface; if the water
spreads out immediately instead of standing as droplets, the surface is not contaminated
by oils.
(3) Acid condition : Use pH paper to determine the acidity at the concrete
surface; a pH value below four (4) is unacceptable.

16. Dryness of Surface. Unless otherwise specified by the paint manufacturer,

this test is applicable only to solvent-based paints. Water-based paints may be required
to be applied on damp surfaces to promote adhesion; however, free-standing water on the
surface to be painted shall not be acceptable.
Moisture content is considered excessive on a tested surface, if moisture
collects at the bond plane between the concrete and the paint material before the paint
has cured. Tape a one and two tenths by one and two tenths (1.20 x 1.20) meters clear,
polyethylene sheet to the tested surface and determine the time required for moisture to
collect on the underside of the sheet. Compare the time required for moisture to collect,
(1), with the time required for the paint to cure, (2), as supplied by the paint manufacturer.
If (1) is greater than (2), the surface is adequately dry.

17. Strength of Surface, when laitance is present. Unless otherwise specified by

the paint manufacturer, this test is applicable to water-based paints and to two-component,
solvent-based paints.
Scrape the concrete surface with a putty knife; if a loose powdery material is

214
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

readily observed, excessive laitance is present that could adversely affect the adhesion
Table of Contents

of the paint. Consult the paint manufacturer as to the intensity of mechanical cleaning
required.

5.13.3.2 Application. The paint shall be applied in accordance with the following
procedures:

1. Painting shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. Paint may be applied
with hand brushes or by spraying, except that aluminum paint preferably shall be applied
by spraying. All spraying equipment is subject to the Engineer's approval. By either
method, the coating of paint applied shall be smooth and spread uniformly so that no
excess paint will collect at any point. If Work done by spraying is not satisfactory to the
Engineer, hand brushing will be required.

2. Paint shall be applied only when the air temperature is at or above five degrees
Celsius (5oC.). It shall not be applied upon damp surfaces or upon metal containing frost,
nor shall it be applied when the air is misty or otherwise unsatisfactory for the Work, in the
judgment of the Engineer.

3. Material painted under cover in damp or cold weather shall remain under cover until
dry or until weather conditions permit its exposure in the open. Painting in open yards or
upon erected structures shall not be done when the metal has absorbed sufficient heat to
cause the paint to blister and produce a porous paint film.

4. When brushes are used, the paint shall be so manipulated under the brush as to
produce a uniform even coating in close contact with the metal, or with previously applied
paint. In general, the primary movement shall describe a series of small circles to
thoroughly fill all irregularities in the surface, after which the coating shall be smoothed and
thinned by a series of parallel strokes. To secure a maximum thickness of paint film upon
rivet heads, the edges of plates, angles, or other rolled shapes, these areas shall be
"striped" in advance of the general painting, and shortly afterwards shall be given a second
or "wash" coat when the general coat is applied. The paint shall be well-worked into all
joints and open spaces.

5. Power spraying equipment shall apply the paint in a fine, even spray, without the
addition of thinner. Paint, when applied with spray equipment shall be immediately
followed by brushing, when necessary, to secure uniform coverage and to eliminate
wrinkling, blistering and air holes.

6. On all surfaces which are inaccessible for paint brushes, the paint shall be applied
with sheepskin daubers specially constructed for the purpose.

7. All metal coated with paint which is not acceptable shall be thoroughly cleaned and
repainted, by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, without additional
compensation.

8. If it is necessary in cool weather to thin the paint in order that it shall spread more
freely, this shall be done only by heating in hot water or on steam radiators, and liquid shall

215
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

not be added nor removed.

Table of Contents

9. Portland cement paint shall be applied to damp surfaces without any free surface
water. After application, the paint shall be cured by keeping it moist for forty-eight (48) to
seventy-two (72) hours. For two-coat applications, the second coat shall be applied within
twenty-four (24) hours from completion of the first coat. Dry film thickness shall be not less
than three hundred eighty (380) microns per coat. One coat shall be applied, unless
otherwise shown on the plans.

10. Polymer latex paint shall be applied to damp concrete surfaces, so water will not be
absorbed from the paint before it has a chance to properly cure, unless otherwise specified
by the manufacturer. When latex paint does not properly adhere to chalky surfaces, the
prior application of a low viscosity penetrant primer will be required, per the manufacturer's
instructions. Any embedded or adjacent steel work shall be coated with a rust inhibitive
primer as specified in this Section, before application of any water-based paint. Dry film
thickness shall be not less sixty-five (65) microns per coat. Two coats, shall be applied,
excluding sealer or primer, unless otherwise shown on the plans.

11. Polymer paint shall be applied to dry surfaces, unless otherwise specifically
permitted by the paint manufacturer in writing. Two-component paints require the mixture
of the two components supplied as a kit, in the correct proportions as per the
manufacturer's instructions. To insure a complete chemical reaction between the hardener
and the polymer, power stirrers shall be used for thorough mixing. The paint shall be used
after expiration of the required induction period and within the expected pot-life period of
the mixed system, as specified by the manufacturer. Should thinning or viscosity reduction
be necessary, only thinners recommended by the manufacturer shall be used. Thinners
shall be added only after the two components are blended.
Dry film thickness shall be not less than forty (40) microns per coat. A minimum of two
coats shall be applied, excluding primer, unless otherwise shown on the plans or
recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended purpose.

12. Unless otherwise permitted or required by the manufacturer's printed instructions,

the following shall apply :
(1) Water-based paints shall be applied when the temperatures of the surfaces to
be painted and of the surrounding air are between ten and thirty-two degrees Celsius (10-
32 C).
(2) Solvent-based paints shall be applied when the temperatures of the surfaces
to be painted and of the surrounding air are between seven and thirty-five degrees Celsius
(7-35 C).
(3) Paint shall not be applied in fog, mist, rain or when the relative humidity
exceeds eighty-five percent (85%). Painting operations shall not start when rain is
anticipated to strike the painted surface within twenty-four (24) hours of application.

13. The finished coating shall be uniform in color and texture, free from runs, drops,
ridges, waves, laps, etc., and shall match the color and texture of the approved sample
panel to the Engineer's satisfaction.

14. Should the coating, in the Engineer's opinion, be non-uniform in color and/or texture

216
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

or should there be runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, etc., in the coating, the Contractor
Table of Contents

shall propose remedial works for the Engineer's approval. Should the Contractor's
proposals be unacceptable, or should the remedial works result in an unsatisfactory finish,
the Engineer shall require the Contractor to :
(1) Recoat the complete area affected; or
(2) Remove, to the extent possible, the coating from the affected area and re-
apply the coating.

The Engineer shall notify the Contractor which option he requires and, in the case of a
re-coating being unsatisfactory, the Engineer shall require the Contractor to remove, to the
extent possible, the re-coating and the original coating and re-apply a new coating.
All re-coating works and removal and re-application of coatings shall be at the Contractor's
expense.

15. If the color of the coating as applied to the permanent works departs from that of the
approved trial panel color (as marked) to a degree which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
is unacceptable, the Contractor shall stop application and shall demonstrate to the
Engineer's satisfaction that the coating formulation and/or application method can be
suitably adjusted to produce a color matching that of the trial panel. If considered
necessary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall produce additional trial panel(s) at his own
expense to demonstrate that a color match can be obtained.

16. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a satisfactory color match cannot be obtained, the
Engineer, at his option, may require the Contractor to remove, to the extent possible, the
unacceptable coating applied to the permanent works and/or to apply an alternative
coating. Such an alternative coating will be selected by the Engineer on the basis of the
previously prepared trial panels, except that where in the opinion of the Engineer such trial
panels are unacceptable, the Contractor shall supply additional manufacturer's samples
and trial panels as the Engineer may require until a coating satisfactory to the Engineer
is obtained.

5.13.3.3 Structural Steel Requirements. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, or

in the Special Specifications, all new structural steel shall be given three (3) coats of paint.
The numbers of the paints to be used for the shop and field coats shall be as specified
on the plans. The first coat shall be applied immediately after shop fabrication is complete.
The second and third coats shall be applied after all erection is complete, except that
immediately following the field riveting or bolting of members, the heads of field rivets,
bolts, and all abrasions of the shop coat due to handling at the shop, shipment, erection,
etc., and all field erection marks shall be thoroughly covered with one (1) coat of primer
as specified for shop coat and permitted to become thoroughly dry before the first field
coat is applied.

After the steel is completely erected in place, and the touching up is thoroughly dry, it
shall be given a second and third coat of paint of the number or numbers specified.

All metal coated with impure or unauthorized paint shall be thoroughly cleaned and
repainted to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at the expense of the Contractor.

217
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Prime coats of paint shall be at least four hundredths (0.04) millimeter thick when dry
Table of Contents

and each intermediate and finish coat of paint shall be at least three hundredths (0.03)
millimeter thick when dry. No portion of the paint films shall be less than these specified
thicknesses. The film thickness shall be not so great that either the appearance or service
life of the paint will be detrimentally affected.

5.13.3.4 Shop Coat (Prime).

5.13.3.4.1 Shop Cleaning. All surfaces of metal to be painted shall be thoroughly

cleaned of rust, loose mill scale, dirt, oil or grease, and all other foreign substances. The
removal of rust, scale and dirt shall generally be done by the use of metal brushes,
scrapers, chisels, hammers, sandblasting, or other effective means. Oil and grease may
be removed by the use of gasoline or benzene. Bristle or wood fiber brushes shall be
used for removing loose dirt. Unless cleaning is to be done by sandblasting, all weld
areas, before cleaning is done, shall be neutralized with a proper chemical, after which
they shall be thoroughly rinsed with water. All cleaning shall conform to the requirements
of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

5.13.3.4.2 Shop Painting. Shop painting shall be done in accordance with the
following procedures:

1. When all fabrication Work is complete and has been accepted, all surfaces not
painted before assembling shall be given an approved shop coat of paint. Steel members
shall not be loaded for shipment until thoroughly dry. No painting shall be done after
loading.

2. Structural steel which is to be welded shall not be painted before welding is

complete. If it is to be welded only in the fabricating shop and subsequently erected by
bolting, it shall receive one (1) coat of paint after shop welding is finished. Steel which is
to be field welded shall be given one (1) coat of boiled linseed oil or other approved
protected coating after shop welding and shop fabrication are completed.

3. Surfaces of metal to be in contact when assembled shall not be painted. Surfaces

of field connections gusset plates of trusses and areas of girders or plates where floor
beam or stringer connections are to come in contact shall not be painted.

4. With the exception of pins and pinholes in bearings, unless otherwise shown in the
plans, all surfaces except those described in Subparagraph (3), whether machine finished
or otherwise, shall be given the regular coat of shop paint, and those parts inaccessible
after erection shall be given two (2) coats of field paint. Pins and pinholes shall be coated,
as soon as practicable after being accepted, with a hot mixture of white lead and tallow
before removal from the shop.

5. The composition used for coating machine finished surfaces shall be mixed in the
following proportions:

One and eight-tenths (1.8) kilograms of pure tallow

Nine-tenths (0.9) kilograms of pure white lead

218
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents Ninety-five hundredths (0.95) liters of pure linseed oil

6. Erection marks for field identification of members shall be painted upon previously
painted surfaces.

5.13.3.5 Field Coat.

5.13.3.5.1 Field Cleaning. When the erection Work is complete, including all riveting,
bolting, welding, straightening of bent metal, etc., all adhering rust, scale, dirt, grease, or
other foreign matter shall be removed as specified under Subparagraph 5.13.3.4.(1),
"Shop Cleaning" in these General Specifications.

5.13.3.5.2 Field Painting.

1. As soon as the field cleaning is done to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the heads
of field rivets and bolts, welded surfaces, and any surface from which the shop coat of
paint has worn off, or has otherwise become defective, and all shipping and erection
marks shall be thoroughly covered with one (1) coat of the same type of paint used in the
shop, and permitted to become thoroughly dry before the first field coat is applied.

2. When the paint for "touching up" has become thoroughly dry, the first and second
field coats may be applied. In no case shall a succeeding coat be applied until the
previous coat has dried through the full thickness of the paint film.

3. All small cracks and cavities which have not become sealed in a watertight manner
by the first coat shall be filled with a pasty mixture of red lead and linseed oil before the
second coat is applied.

4. If, in the judgment of the Engineer, produces an objectionable quantity of dust, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, allay the dust for the necessary distance on each
side of the bridge and take any other precautions necessary to prevent dust and dirt from
coming in contact with freshly painted surfaces or with surfaced before the paint is applied.

5. The Contractor shall protect pedestrians, vehicular, and any other upon or
underneath the bridge, and also all portions of the bridge superstructure and substructure
against damage or disfigurement by spatters, splashes and smirches of paint or paint
materials.

5.13.3.6 Bridge Railing and Guardrail.

5.13.3.6.1 Bridge Railing. Metal bridge railing shall be painted as specified herein
and the number of the paint and the number of coats of shop paint and field paint shall be
as specified in the Special Specifications.

Aluminum hand rails shall not be painted except that the portion of posts to be inserted
in concrete shall first be painted with one (1) coat of Paint Number 3 to a point two (2)
centimeters above the concrete line. Aluminum hand rail after erection shall be wiped with
a rag saturated with lacquer thinner to remove stains.

219
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.13.3.6.2 Guardrail. Guardrail posts shall be painted as specified herein and the
number of the paint and the number of coats of shop paint and field paint shall be as
specified on the plans. Under no circumstances shall a paint other than Paint Number 3
be used for the shop or prime coat on galvanized posts.

5.13.3.7 Painting Existing Structures. The painting of existing structures shall be

done in accordance with the following procedures:

1. Unless otherwise provided, this painting shall include the removal of the rust, scale,
dead paint, dirt, grease or other foreign matter from the metal parts or portions of existing
bridge structures and the application of paint thereto. All work shall be in full compliance
with the provisions of Subsection 1.05.21, "Air Pollution” in these General Specifications.

2. All metal surfaces not in close contact with other metal surfaces or truss members,
concrete, stone masonry, or other structure materials shall be considered as exposed to
deterioration by rusting and shall be thoroughly cleaned and given the number of coats of
designated paint or paints indicated in the plans.

3. Unless otherwise provided, the metal after being cleaned to the satisfaction of the
Engineer shall be given at least two (2) coats of paint.

4. The requirements and methods of procedure for maintenance cleaning and painting
shall be the same as specified for shop and field painting herein.

5. When repainting with the same type of paint as that on an existing surface, the
surface shall be thoroughly washed with commercial detergents, or, where approved, with
solvents, to remove any dirt, chalk and grime accumulation, along with dead paint.

6. When repainting with a different type of paint from that on an existing surface, the
paint manufacturer shall be consulted as to their compatibility, to avoid poor intercoat
adhesion problems. Any paint may be applied over Portland cement paint, but Portland
cement paint cannot be applied over any other type of paint. In general, latex paints will
normally adhere satisfactorily to other types of paints, provided that any gloss on the old
paint be first removed by sanding. The adhesion between a fully-cured polyurethane paint
and newly-applied polyurethane is generally questionable, and a coat of an epoxy-
polyamide paint may be required in between. Certain solvent-based paints are
incompatible with fully-cured oil-based coatings, and wrinkling or lifting may be
encountered; when this occurs, the old coat must be removed first.

Loose paint, curled edges and blistered paint shall be removed before repainting. Light
wet sandblasting, water-jet blasting, machine sanding, or paint strippers may be utilized.
Filling of any cracks and holes in the concrete shall be done in the same manner as for
new concrete. If the old paint has become partially removed, but that remaining is in good
condition, the bare areas shall be painted first, followed by two coats over all. If the old
paint is failing by blistering, peeling or disrupting from efflorescence, it shall be investigated
whether the source of supply of moisture is still present and the Engineer will evaluate the
viability of its elimination, and direct corrective measures thereof; or else, the type of paint

220
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

may be changed.
Table of Contents

5.13.3.8 Painting Steel Piling and Steel Pile Shells.

Unless otherwise provided in the plans or Special Specifications, steel bearing piles,
steel sheet piles, and steel pile shells need not be painted if they are to be encased in
concrete or other solid waterproof materials from six hundred (600) millimeters below the
water line or ground line to the tops of the piles.

When steel bearing piles, and steel pile shells are not to be encased, or when provided
in the plans, they shall be painted in accordance with the requirements stated
hereinbefore, except that three (3) coats of shop paint shall be applied from the tops of the
piles to an elevation three (3) meters below the water line or finished ground line before
driving, and then two (2) field coats of paint as specified for structural steel shall be applied
to each steel bearing pile, or steel pile shell which extends above the low water line or
finished ground line after driving.

5.13.3.9 Painting Steel Pile Enclosures and Tubular Steel Piers. The exterior
surfaces of steel pile enclosures and tubular steel piers shall be painted in accordance
with the requirements of Paragraph 5.13.3.7, Painting Existing Structures, in these
General Specifications.

5.13.3.10 Protective Coating System Application. Protective coatings shall be

applied in accordance with the product manufacturer's printed instructions, especially, as
to number of coats and total dry film thickness which shall not exceed one (1) millimeter.

In particular, polyvinyl butyral and acrylic resins shall be dissolved in an approved

solvent and applied in thin films not exceeding eighty (80) microns per coat. Polyurethane
and epoxy resins shall be applied in two or more coats, to attain the total dry film thickness
recommended by the manufacturer.

5.13.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The painting of new structures, miscellaneous

metals, and piling will not be measured directly, but will be considered subsidiary to other
items in the Bill of Quantities.

The painting of existing structures shall be measured on a square meter basis for the
items listed in the Bill of Quantities.

The protective coating of new or existing structures shall be measured on a square

meter basis for the items listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Unsolicited trial panels made by the Contractor for his own purposes to determine
suitability of surface preparation methods and of the finished coating color and/or texture
shall not be measured for payment.

Satisfactory and accepted trial panels ordered by the Engineer and exhibited throughout
the duration of the Work, shall be measured for payment as indicated in the Bill of
Quantities for the appropriate element and class of concrete, only if not already measured

221
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

for payment under the stipulations of Subsection 5.03.10 -"Method of Measurement" in

Table of Contents

these General Specifications. Paint on such panels shall be measured for payment, as
authorized by the Engineer, by the square meter of completed and accepted painted area.

5.13.5 PAYMENT. Contracts which include painting or repainting in whole or in part of

existing structure(s) provide for payment of the amount of completed and accepted Work
as measured, at the unit price(s) bid per square meter as specified in the Bill of
Quantities.
The amount of completed and accepted protective coating, measured as provided
above, will be paid for at the unit price(s) bid per square meter for the several types of
coatings applicable, as shown in the Bill of Quantities.

Unit price(s) shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, tackle,
scaffolding and any other equipment, and for performing all surface preparation and
cleaning and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified
in Subsection 1.07.2 - "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

51301 Painting of Existing Concrete Structure No ___ Square Meter

51302 Painting of Existing Steel Structure No ___ Square Meter

51303 Protective Coating for Concrete Structure Square Meter

5130301 Protective Coating for Concrete Structure, Resistance to Square Meter

Weathering

5130302 Protective Coating for Concrete Structure, Resistance to Square Meter

Chemicals, Impact and Abrasion

5130303 Protective coating for concrete Structure, Resistance to Square Meter

Strong Caustics, Acids and Solvents

222
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents SECTION 5.14 - CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK OVERLAYS

5.14.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of the construction of a latex concrete
overlay or a Portland cement concrete overlay on a concrete bridge deck and shall include
the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to blast clean the deck;
apply an epoxy bonding agent; to place, consolidate, finish and cure the overlay; to apply
the epoxy--sand slurry; and to perform all other associated work required by the contract.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Epoxy Bonding Agent
Concrete Overlay, Latex
Concrete Overlay, Polymer
Concrete Overlay, Portland Cement
Epoxy-Sand Slurry

5.14.2 MATERIALS.

5.14.2.1 General. All materials shall be approved before use. The Contractor is
advised that certain combinations of materials in concrete overlay mixtures may cause
chemical reactions resulting in significant cracking of the overlay, even though the
materials are individually acceptable. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing
materials that are compatible with each other, and shall repair or remove and replace any
overlay damaged because incompatible materials were used, at no cost to the Ministry.

The moisture contents of the aggregates used in overlay mixtures, especially the fine
aggregate, shall be controlled by the Contractor so that, at the time of mixing, the moisture
content of each aggregate is relatively uniform; the material will feed uniformly when
continuous type mixers are used; and the moisture contents of the aggregates are not so
great that the water-cement ratio or slump requirement for the concrete mixture is violated.
Any concrete overlay mixture produced which is not properly proportioned or is not in
conformity with the specified slump and/or water-cement ratio will be rejected by the
Engineer, and shall be removed and replaced with concrete mixture meeting the
requirements of this Section at no cost to the Ministry. When the water-cement ratio or
slump requirements are violated due to excessive moisture content of the aggregates, this
condition shall be corrected by the Contractor at his expense before mixing operations are
continued.

5.14.2.2 Fine Aggregate. Fine aggregate for the concrete overlay mixture shall be
natural sand conforming to the requirements of Subparagraph 5.01.2.2.1, "Fine
Aggregate" in these General Specifications. The Engineer will verify the moisture content
of the natural sand in order to calculate its free water content and resulting water-cement
ratio of the concrete mixture.

5.14.2.3 Coarse Aggregate. Coarse aggregate for the concrete overlay mixture shall
be maximum size nineteen (19) millimeters (¾ inch) conforming to the requirements of
Subparagraph 5.01.2.2.2, "Coarse Aggregate," in these General Specifications. The
Engineer will verify the moisture content of the coarse aggregate in order to calculate its
free water content and resulting water-cement ratio of the concrete mixture.

223
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.14.2.4 Epoxy Bonding Agent. Epoxy bonding agent for bonding new, or wet
concrete, to old concrete shall be two-component epoxy resin binder and shall be a
product approved by the Ministry Materials and Research Department. It shall be of the
type specifically intended for bonding wet concrete to existing concrete. Each container
of epoxy shall conform to ASTM C881. The manufacturer's instructions regarding the use
of the epoxy bonding agent are to be strictly followed.

5.14.2.5 Latex and Polymer Admixture. The Contractor shall select the latex or
polymer admixture from the listing of acceptable products and their manufacturers on file
at the Ministry's Material and Research Department.

Manufacturers desiring prequalification of new products shall have their product tested
and evaluated by a qualified independent laboratory, or the Ministry's Materials and
Research Department in accordance with the Prequalification Test Program in the U.S.
Department of Transportation Research Report No. FHWA-RD-78-35. When analysis is
performed by an independent laboratory, certified test results from the independent
laboratory and a five (5) gallon sample of latex or polymer admixture shall be submitted
to the Ministry's Materials and Research Department. Approval of the latex or polymer
admixture will be based upon the submitted information and evaluation of the sample.

The latex or polymer admixture shall not contain any chlorides.

Each shipment of latex or polymer admixture shall be accompanied by a report of tests

performed in accordance with the Certification Program in Report No. FHWA-RD-78-35.
In addition to actual test results, the report shall include date of manufacture, batch or lot
number(s), quantity represented, manufacturer's name, place of manufacture, a statement
that all test results are satisfactory, the date on which the one (1) year certification period
will expire, and signature of manufacturer's representative.

Each lot of latex or polymer will be check sampled and tested, and will be removed from
the approved product listing at any time there is an indication of nonconformity or
questionable quality.

The latex or polymer admixture shall be packaged and stored in containers and storage
facilities which will protect the material from freezing and from temperatures above thirty
o
degrees Celsius (30 C) or as the manufacturer recommends. Additionally, the material
shall not be stored in direct sunlight and shall be shaded when stored outside of buildings
during moderate temperatures. No latex or polymer admixture which has been exposed
to freezing temperatures shall be used. The products presently on the approved list are:

Modifier A - Dow Chemical Company

Thermoflex 8002 - Reichold Chemicals, Inc.
Deco-Rez 4776 - General Polymers Corp.
Arco Dylex 1186 - Arco Polymers

5.14.2.6 Epoxy Cement for Sand Slurry. Epoxy cement for sand slurry shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C881-Type III or AASHTO M 200, Class II.

224
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.14.2.7 Sand for Epoxy Sand Slurry. Sand for epoxy mixtures shall be silica sand
containing no less than ninety percent (90%) acid insolubles and shall be rounded to
subangular in shape, clean, dry and non-friable. The gradation shall be as follows:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

2.36 mm (No. 8) 100
0.300 mm (No. 50) 0-40
0.150 mm (No. 100) 0-5

5.14.2.8 Other Materials. Other materials shall meet requirements specified in the
following Paragraphs in these General Specifications:

Cement 5.01.2.1
Water 5.01.2.3
Admixtures 5.01.2.4

5.14.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.14.3.1 General. These general requirements shall apply to both latex concrete
overlays and Portland cement concrete overlays. General and special requirements for
polymer concrete overlays shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the approved
polymer admixture.

The sequence of operations shall be: blast cleaning of the existing deck; application of
the epoxy bonding agent coat; mixing, placing and consolidating the concrete overlay
mixture; finishing; texturing; curing; sealing joints and cracks; and application of the epoxy-
sand slurry. The deck which is to be overlaid shall be at least fourteen (14) calendar days
old before overlay operations are started. When longitudinal construction joints are
necessary, each section of overlay shall be completely cured before the adjacent overlay
is placed.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least one working day in advance of the date
and time he intends to begin placing concrete for the overlay. When placing of concrete
is not begun within two (2) hours after the scheduled time, then all engineering costs from
the scheduled time until the time placing actually begins or is canceled will be deducted
from monies due or to become due the Contractor. No engineering costs will be deducted
when placing is delayed for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor, such as
inclement weather or equipment failure after placing begins. No time extension will be
granted for delay to placing concrete resulting from the Engineer receiving less than the
twelve (12) hour notice specified above.

5.14.3.2 Weather Limitations. During warm weather concrete shall only be placed in
accordance with the requirements in Subparagraph 5.03.4.10.4, "Additional Hot Weather
Limitations and Curing Requirements for Bridge Decks and Slabs" in these General
Specifications. During cool weather, concrete shall not be placed when the air
o
temperatures away from artificial heat is less than eight degrees Celsius (8 C.) and
falling. In all instances, all concrete shall be placed and kept at a temperature above eight

225
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents o
degrees Celsius (8 C.) for at least ninety-six (96) hours after it is placed. Provisions shall
be made for the uniform distribution of heat, and no area of the concrete surface shall be
o
heated to a temperature above thirty degrees Celsius (30 C.) This will require approved
housing, heating, or insulation methods during cold weather. In no case shall the concrete
be placed when raining or drizzling. If during the process of placing concrete it should
begin to rain or drizzle, placement shall be stopped and the material already in place shall
be finished and protected.

5.14.3.3 Epoxy Bonding Agent. Before the epoxy bonding agent is applied, the entire
area of the deck surface shall be blast cleaned to a bright, clean appearance which is free
from curing compound, laitance, dust, dirt, oil, grease, bituminous material, paint, and all
other foreign matter. The blast cleaning of an area of the deck shall be performed within
the twenty-four (24) hour period preceding placement of the epoxy bonding agent and
overlay on the area. However, if the project is done under traffic, all blast cleaning must
be done within twelve (12) hours prior to the placement of the epoxy bonding agent. Blast
cleaning shall be performed as specified in Paragraph 5.15.4.4 "Blast Cleaning" and
Subsection 1.5.14, "Protection and Preservation of Property and Landscape" in these
General Specifications.

Blast cleaned areas shall be protected, as necessary, against contamination prior to

placement of the epoxy bonding agent and overlay. Contaminated areas and areas
exposed more than twenty-four (24) hours [twelve (12) hours when under traffic] shall be
blast cleaned again as directed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

The epoxy bonding agent shall be applied to the blast cleaned sound existing concrete
surfaces, which are free of laitance, oil, grease, dust, sand, form releasing agent and other
substances that are detrimental to a good bond. The epoxy bonding agent shall be
applied just prior to casting/pouring of new concrete. If pouring of new concrete is delayed
after the application of epoxy bonding agent to the old concrete surfaces, remedial
measures as deemed necessary by the Engineer and the manufacturer's recommendation
shall be carried out by the contractor at his own expense before any new concrete is cast.

5.14.3.4 Mixing and Placing. Concrete for concrete overlays shall be mixed at the
work site by either batch or continuous mixers approved by the Engineer. Drum type
transit truck mixers or rotating drum batch-type mixers shall not be used in any
circumstance for Portland cement concrete overlays. All batch mixers shall be equipped
with rotating blades or paddles. The maximum time between completion of mixing and
placement shall be twenty (20) minutes.

Batch-type mixers shall be equipped with or accompanied by suitable devices for

accurately measuring the weight of the cement, fine aggregate, and coarse aggregate for
each batch and for accurately determining either the volume or the weight of the water, the
water-reducing and air-entraining admixtures, and latex admixture, as applicable, for each
batch. Approved methods for adding the air-entraining admixture and the water-reducing
admixture shall be provided. The admixtures shall be kept separated, and shall be
separately added to the mixture. Batch-type mixers which entrap unacceptable volumes
of air in the mixture shall not be used.

226
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Continuous type mixers shall be equipped so that the proportions of latex admixtures
(when required), cement, fine aggregate, and coarse aggregate can be fixed by calibration
of the mixer, and thereafter shall not be changed without approval by the Engineer. The
latex admixture supply portion of the mixer shall be equipped with a cumulative-type meter
which can be read to the nearest one-half (½)liter or one-half (½)kilogram. The water
supply portion of the mixer shall be equipped with a flow meter or other suitable device for
calibrating the water supply, and a cumulative-type water meter which can be read to the
nearest one-half (½)liter or one-half (½)kilogram. The latex and water meters shall be
readily accessible, accurate to within ± one percent (±1%), and easy to read. Approved
methods for adding the air-entraining admixture and water-reducing admixture, when
required, shall be provided. Admixtures shall be added so as to be kept separated as far
as is practicable.

The continuous-type mixer shall be calibrated at least once during each fifty (50) cubic
meters production if yield checks indicate recalibration is necessary, and at any other
times the Engineer deems necessary to ensure proper proportioning of ingredients.
Continuous-type mixers which entrap unacceptable volumes of air in the mixture shall not
be used.

The mixer, whether batch or continuous-type, shall be kept clean and free of partially
dried or hardened materials at all times. It shall consistently produce a uniform, thoroughly
blended mixture within the specified air content and slump limits. Malfunctioning mixers
shall be immediately repaired or replaced with acceptable units. Operation and
maintenance of continuous-type mixers shall be in accordance with the mixer
manufacturer's recommendations.

Formation of longitudinal joints and transverse construction joints shall be held to the
minimum number necessary, and both types of joints shall be thoroughly blast cleaned
and coated with grout-bond coat material before fresh concrete is placed against the
hardened sides of the joints. When longitudinal joints are necessary, they shall be formed
by use of a longitudinal header secured to the deck, six (6) millimeters less in thickness
than the overlay. Longitudinal joints shall be located along lane lines unless otherwise
permitted. After removal of the header, the overlay shall be sawed longitudinally seventy-
five (75) millimeters or more inside the formed edge and the overlay outside the saw cut
removed before the adjacent overlay is placed. The volume of the overlay removed will
be deducted from the volume measured for payment. Alternate methods of constructing
longitudinal joints may be used on latex concrete overlays if approved by the Engineer.

The mixture shall be produced at a uniform rate so that finishing is performed

immediately after mixing.

5.14.3.5 Epoxy-Sand Slurry. After the overlay has been completed and cured, a thin
coat (approximately two (2) millimeters) of an epoxy-sand slurry shall be applied to the
thirty (30) centimeters of the overlay adjacent to the curbs, concrete barrier walls, or other
vertical walls. The epoxy-sand slurry mixture shall extend up the faces of curbs and walls
for seventy-five (75) millimeters above the overlay. The areas to receive the epoxy-sand
slurry shall be thoroughly blast cleaned to a clean, bright appearance and shall be

227
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

thoroughly clean and dry before the slurry is applied. The deck must be dry when slurring
Table of Contents

is started and not have been subject to rain within thirty-six (36) hours preceding
application of the slurry. Before applying the slurry, all joints in the area receiving the
application shall be protected by placing strips of masking tape along the joints in a
manner to exclude the slurry from the joints. Masking will also be required to ensure a
straight line for applying the epoxy-sand slurry.

The epoxy-sand slurry mixture shall be proportioned by volume as follows:

1 part of Component A
1 part of Component B, and
2 parts of dry, silica sand.

The Engineer may make minor adjustments in the quantity of sand, in order to produce
a more workable mixture. The ingredient materials shall be thoroughly mixed from three
(3) to five (5) minutes. The slurry shall then be spread and squeegeed as smoothly and
uniformly as possible so as to completely fill the blast cleaned pitted areas, cracks, and
rough surfaces. The finished elevation of the slurry shall be no more than two (2)
millimeters above the elevation of the deck. Silica sand shall be sprinkled very lightly over
the slurry so as to prevent slipperiness.

At the Contractor's option, thoroughly mixed neat epoxy may be spread on the specified
areas and sprinkled with dry silica sand if the process used and results produced are
acceptable to the Engineer.

5.14.3.6 Unacceptable Work. Overlay thickness will be determined by coring done

under the supervision of the Engineer. Any core made in the overlay shall be filled by the
Contractor using concrete overlay material at no additional cost to the Ministry. Areas
found to be deficient in thickness no more than twelve (12) millimeters will be paid for as
specified hereinafter. Areas found deficient by more than twelve (12) millimeters shall be
removed and replaced with concrete overlay of the specified thickness at no cost to the
Ministry.

Any areas of the overlay which display extensive cracking or other characteristics
indicating the waterproofing effectiveness or expected life of the overlay may be reduced,
or the overlay may not be intimately bonded to the underlying deck, will be cored by the
Contractor when deemed necessary by the Engineer.

Any area shown by the cores to either have cracks exceeding a depth of six (6)
millimeters or to not be intimately bonded to the underlying deck shall be removed and
replaced with acceptable concrete at the Contractor's expense. Removal and placement
may be required without coring when significant cracking or lack of bond so apparent as
to make coring unnecessary in the judgment of the Engineer. All cracks which are not
significant enough to require removal of the overlays shall be sealed with grout to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

228
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.14.4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LATEX CONCRETE OVERLAYS. In addition

to the General Requirements, the following shall apply to Latex Concrete Overlays.

5.14.4.1 Prewetting and Epoxy Bonding Agent. The blast cleaned areas to receive
the overlay shall be thoroughly and continuously wetted with water at least one (1) hour
before placement of the overlay is started. The areas shall be kept wet and cooled with
water until the overlay is placed. Any accumulations of water shall be dispersed and/or
removed prior to applying the epoxy bonding agent. Immediately ahead of placing the
overlay mixture, a thin coating of the epoxy bonding agent shall be thoroughly brushed
and scrubbed onto the wetted surface. Accumulations of coarser particles of the mixture
which cannot be scrubbed into intimate contact with the surface will not be permitted.

The epoxy bonding agent shall be applied only for a short distance in advance of the
placement of the overlay and shall not be allowed to show any signs of drying prior to
being covered with the overlay.

5.14.4.2 Proportioning. The latex concrete shall be accurately proportioned through

trial mixes to satisfy the below required properties. It shall contain no less than one
hundred twenty-one (121) liters of latex admixture per cubic meter.

Material Quantities per Cubic Meter

Type I or Type II Portland Cement 300 kilograms minimum

Latex Admixture 121 liters minimum

Fine Aggregate 474 to 540 kilograms*

Coarse Aggregate 364 to 430 kilograms*

Water (including free moisture on the fine 48.5 kilograms maximum

and coarse aggregates)

*The actual quantities to be used within this limit shall be determined by the Contractor
and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

229
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

The properties of the latex concrete shall be as follows when determined by the
Materials and Research Department's Highway Materials Manual test methods.

Properties Values

Slump 75 to 200 mm
(slump test shall be performed four (4) to
five (5) minutes after discharge from the
mixer when continuous type mixers are
used.)

Air Content No more than 7%

Water-cement ratio No more than 0.40

(considering all the non-solids in the
Latex Admixture as part of the total
water)

Compressive strength at seven (7) 210 kilograms per square centimeter

calendar days

Chloride Ion permeability ASTM C-1202 maximum 1000 coulombs

In the event compressive strength is tested at twenty-eight (28) days or later during
unusual circumstances, the compressive strength shall be at least two hundred eighty
(280) kilograms per square centimeter.

5.14.4.3 Placing, Consolidating, and Finishing the Overlay. Latex concrete for the
overlay shall be placed on the blast cleaned and prewetted deck immediately after the
grout-bond coat has been applied. The minimum thickness of the latex concrete overlay
is twenty-five (25) millimeters. The surface of the overlay shall conform to the existing
deck section while maintaining the minimum thickness. The deck section will be
determined in the field, and cross slope and/or crown will be determined by the Engineer.
The finishing machine shall be passed over the existing deck prior to placing the overlay
so that measurements can be made to ensure that the proper cross slope and thickness
will be achieved.

The top surface of the overlay shall be uniform, smooth, and even-textured after finishing
by an approved finishing machine. The finishing machine shall be equipped with a vibrator
positioned in advance of or attached to the screeding device, and the latex concrete shall
be thoroughly consolidated by vibration during the finishing operations.

A transverse construction joint shall be constructed whenever placing is interrupted for

any reason for twenty (20) minutes or longer.

The top surface of the consolidated and finished concrete overlay shall be smooth,
uniform, and tight, and variations in the surface, when checked with a three (3) meter
straightedge, shall not exceed three (3) millimeters.

230
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.14.4.4 Curing. Immediately following the texturing operation, the overlay shall be
covered with a thoroughly wetted layer of burlap immediately followed by a layer of
polyethylene film one-tenth (0.10) millimeters [four (4) mils] or more in thickness. Sections
or strips of burlap shall be placed transversely, so the overlay can be covered immediately
after finishing or texturing. The burlap and polyethylene film shall be left in place for at
least twenty-four (24) hours, and the burlap shall be rewetted if any signs of drying appear.
New burlap shall be soaked in water for at least twelve (12) hours before the first use.

After the twenty-four (24) hour period has ended, the burlap and polyethylene shall be
removed and the overlay shall be allowed to air-cure. The air-cure shall continue an
additional forty-eight (48) hours (additional twenty-four (24) hours for Type III cement) in
o
which the ambient air temperature is ten degrees Celsius (10 C.) or more.

After curing of the overlay has been completed, the tops of all longitudinal and
transverse construction joints shall be given a thorough coating of grout of the same
proportions as the grout-bond coat material with the coarse aggregate omitted. The
coating shall be at least fifty (50) millimeters wide, and shall be neatly and uniformly
applied. This coating is intended to seal any minute cracks which may have developed
at these locations. Use of epoxy-sand slurry to seal construction joints in lieu of grout will
not be permitted. The overlay may be opened to traffic as soon as all curing is completed.

5.14.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

OVERLAYS. In addition to the General Requirements, the following shall apply to
Portland Cement Concrete Overlays.

5.14.5.1 Epoxy Bonding Agent. After the concrete surface has been blast cleaned
and accepted, and immediately prior to placing the concrete overlay mixture on the deck,
a thin coat of epoxy bonding agent shall be vigorously scrubbed into the dry, clean surface
areas. The surface areas shall not be wetted prior to applying the epoxy bonding agent.
When the bridge deck is exposed to rain prior to application of the epoxy bonding agent
application shall be delayed until the bridge deck has dried sufficiently to proceed as
determined by the Engineer; a minimum drying time of four (4) hours will be required. The
epoxy bonding agent shall be as specified. The consistency of the epoxy bonding agent
shall be such that it can be applied with a stiff brush or broom in a thin, even coating which
will not run or puddle in low spots. Care shall be exercised to ensure that all areas of the
blast cleaned deck receive a thorough even coat of epoxy bonding agent and that no
excess grout is permitted to collect in any areas. Epoxy bonding agent shall be applied
only for a short distance in advance of the placement of the overlay and shall not be
allowed to show any signs of drying prior to being covered with the overlay. Any areas
which show any signs of drying shall be thoroughly recoated with fresh grout.

5.14.5.2 Proportioning. Concrete for the overlay shall be accurately proportioned

according to currently established M.O.C. methods and its properties shall be verified by
laboratory and field trials. It shall contain a minimum of four hundred (400) kilograms of
cement and have a maximum water-cement ratio of forty hundredths (0.40) including free
moisture in the aggregates. The contractor shall determine the amount of water to be
added to the mixture to maintain proper slump, except that the above specified water-

231
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

cement ratio shall not be exceeded. The required minimum compressive strength, at
Table of Contents

seven (7) calendar days, is two hundred fifty (250) kilograms per square centimeter.

Water-reducing admixture shall be added to the concrete in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer.

The slump of the concrete shall be consistently maintained at eighteen (18) millimeters.
The slump test shall be performed four (4) to five (5) minutes after discharge from the
mixer. A tolerance of plus or minus six (±6) millimeters will be permitted for occasional
samples. Concrete with a slump of more than twenty-five (25) millimeters shall not be
used in any circumstance and shall be wasted at the Contractor's expense. Concrete with
a slump less than twelve (12) millimeters shall not be used unless the finishing machine
can finish and consolidate the concrete in accordance with requirements specified herein.
Slump requirements shall be met at both the site of mixing and at the time of placing.

5.14.5.3 Placing and Finishing Equipment. Equipment shall include sufficient hand
tools for placement of still, plastic concrete and for working it down to approximately the
correct elevation for striking off with a screed.

Supporting rails upon which the finishing machine travels shall be placed outside the
area to be surfaced, when possible, and shall extend beyond each end of the bridge a
sufficient distance to accommodate the finishing machine. Anchorage for the supporting
rails shall be substantial enough to provide for rigid horizontal and vertical stability of the
rails. Methods proposed for anchoring the supporting rails to the deck shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval prior to beginning the work.

The finishing machine shall be equipped with a strikeoff to provide a uniform thickness
of concrete in front of the screeds and with two (2) oscillating screeds set accurately to the
crown specified. The screeds of the finishing machine shall be of metal.

The front oscillating screed shall be designed to thoroughly consolidate the concrete by
vibration to the specified density. A sufficient number of identical vibrators shall be
effectively installed on the screed so that at least one (1) vibrator is provided for each one
and one-half (1½) meter of screed length. The bottom face of this screed shall be at least
one hundred twenty-five (125) millimeters wide with a turned up or rounded leading edge
to minimize tearing of the surface of the plastic concrete. Each screed shall be provided
with positive control of the vertical position, the angle of tilt, and the slope of the crown.
The final screed shall oscillate and finish without vibration.

Design of the finishing machine together with appurtenant equipment shall be such that
positive machine screeding of the plastic concrete will be obtained within twenty-five (25)
millimeters of the face of the existing curbs; the vibrating screed shall be of sufficient
length to extend at least one hundred fifty (150) millimeters beyond an intended
longitudinal joint, and to extend at least one hundred fifty (150) millimeters beyond the
longitudinal edge of a previously placed section of overlay.

The finishing machine shall be capable of forward and reverse motion under positive
control. Provision shall be made for raising the screeds to clear the screeded surface

232
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

when traveling in reverse.

Table of Contents

5.14.5.4 Placing, Consolidating, and Finishing the Overlay. The minimum thickness
of the overlay is fifty (50) millimeters. The surface of the overlay shall conform to the
existing deck section while maintaining the minimum thickness. The existing deck section
will be determined in the field and cross slope and/or crown will be verified by the
Engineer. The finishing machine shall be passed over the existing deck prior to placing
the concrete overlay in order that measurements can be made to ensure that proper cross
slope and thickness will be achieved.

Promptly after the grout-bond coat has been applied, the concrete shall be deposited on
the deck, and struck off and consolidated with the finishing machine. Consolidation using
hand-held vibrators may be required when placing the mixture around steel reinforcement
or structural steel members.

A transverse construction joint shall be constructed whenever placing is interrupted for

twenty (20) minutes or longer, for any reason.

Concrete shall first be struck off at six (6) millimeters or more above the specified final
thickness, and then consolidated by vigorous mechanical vibration. The in-place density
of the consolidate mixtures will be determined by nuclear gages immediately following the
screeding operation; the in-place density thus determined will be adjusted using the
following formula:

Adjusted Density = in-place density x 0.98

1.00 - actual air content*

*Express actual air content as a decimal.

The adjusted density shall equal or exceed the target density; target density will be one
hundred percent (100%) of the maximum theoretical density. Areas of concrete of
deficient density shall be immediately corrected by additional passes of the finishing
machine. When any concrete cannot be consolidated to the specified density, it shall be
removed and replaced with acceptable concrete, at the Contractor's expense. Hand
finishing of the consolidated concrete with a float may be required in order to produce a
tight uniform surface.

The top surface of the consolidated and finished concrete overlay shall be smooth,
uniform, and tight, and variations in the surface when checked with a three (3) meter
straightedge shall not exceed three (3) millimeters.

5.14.5.5 Curing. Curing of the overlay shall be initiated immediately after texturing.
Curing shall be by a double layer of wetted burlap. Sections or strips of burlap shall be
placed transversely so that the overlay can be covered immediately after texturing. The
burlap shall be continuously and thoroughly wetted by automatic fogging or sprinkling
equipment for at least ninety-six (96) hours after the curing is started. New burlap shall
be soaked in water for at least twelve (12) hours before the first use. Improper curing will
be a basis for rejection of the concrete and nonpayment for the total cost of the rejected

233
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

concrete. Curing compound will not be permitted on the overlay.

Table of Contents

After curing of the overlay has been completed, the tops of all longitudinal and
transverse construction joints shall be given a thorough coating of grout of the same
consistency as the grout-bond coat material. The coating shall be neatly and uniformly
applied. This coating is intended to seal any minute cracks which may have developed
at these locations. Use of epoxy-sand slurry to seal construction joints in lieu of grout will
not be permitted. The overlay may be opened to traffic as soon as all curing is completed.

5.14.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

5.14.6.1 Epoxy Bonding Agent. The area of the deck acceptably blast cleaned and
coated with epoxy bonding agent prior to placing the concrete overlay, including the three
hundred (300) millimeter width adjacent to the curbs will be measured in square meters.
The blast cleaning and epoxy coating of any longitudinal and transverse construction
joints will not be measured for payment.

5.14.6.2 Concrete Overlay, Latex or Polymer. The volume of the latex or polymer
concrete in the completed and accepted overlay will be measured in cubic meters. In
computing the volume for payment, the dimensions used shall be those shown on the
plans or as ordered by the Engineer; the volume of material wasted or not incorporated
into the finished work will not be included in the measured quantity. Grout used for the
bond coat and crack sealing is considered incidental to the latex or polymer concrete
overlay and will not be measured for separate payment.

5.14.6.3 Concrete Overlay, Portland Cement. The volume of Portland cement

concrete in the completed and accepted overlay will be measured in cubic meters. In
computing the volume for payment, the dimensions used shall be those shown on the
plans as ordered by the Engineer; the volume of material wasted or not incorporated into
the finished work will not be included in the measured quantity. Grout used for crack
sealing is considered incidental to the concrete overlay and will not be measured for
separate payment.

5.14.6.4 Epoxy-Sand Slurry. The accepted epoxy-sand slurry will be measured in

square meters. The entire area covered, including the three hundred (300) millimeter width
of the overlay and the seventy-five (75) millimeters extending up the faces of curbs and
walls will be measured for payment.

5.14.7 PAYMENT.

5.14.7.1 Epoxy Bonding Agent. Payment for the measured areas at the contract unit
price per square meter for epoxy bonding agent will be considered full payment for all
expenses associated with the epoxy bonding agent application including the blast
cleaning.

5.14.7.2 Concrete Overlay. The accepted quantity will be paid for at the contract unit
price per cubic meter for Concrete Overlay, Latex; Concrete Overlay, Polymer; or Concrete
Overlay, Portland Cement; as applicable, provided however, that for any area of overlay

234
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

found deficient by no more than twelve (12) millimeters, payment will be made at an
Table of Contents

adjusted contract price as specified in the following table:

Average Deficiency in Proportional Part of

Thickness (mm) Contract Price Allowed (percent)
0 100.0
1.5 95.0
3 90.0
4.5 80.0
6 70.0
7.5 57.5
9 45.0
10.5 25.0
12 0.0

At the Contractor's option, areas with an average deficiency in thickness of no more than
twelve (12) millimeters may be removed and replaced with concrete overlay of the
specified thickness at no cost to the Ministry. Payment at the contract unit price will be
made for areas on which deficient overlay was removed and replaced with overlay meeting
all requirements specified herein.

No additional payment will be made for concrete overlay in excess of the specified
thickness.

5.14.7.3 Epoxy-Sand Slurry. Payment at the contract unit price per square meter shall
be full compensation for all expenses associated with the epoxy-sand slurry construction
necessary to complete the work.

Payment for the above listed items at the contract unit prices shall be full compensation
for purchasing all materials, labor equipment, tools, supplies and all other expenses
incurred which are necessary for completion of the bridge overlay work as specified in
Subsection 1.07.2, Scope of Payment, in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

51401 Epoxy Bonding Agent Square Meter

51402 Concrete Overlay, Latex Cubic Meter

51403 Concrete Overlay, Polymer Cubic Meter

51404 Concrete Overlay, Portland Cement Cubic Meter

51405 Epoxy-Sand Slurry Square Meter

235
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

SECTION 5.15 - STRUCTURE RESTORATION AND REHABILITATION

5.15.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of restoration or rehabilitation or a

combination of restoration and rehabilitation, including any or all of the following:
Maintaining and controlling traffic;
Supporting the bridge;
Furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment;
Removal of all bituminous surfacing including patching materials;
Removal of all bridge deck structural concrete to an average depth of up to 10
millimeters below the existing concrete surface;
Removal of all bridge deck structural concrete to an average depth of at least 25
millimeters below the bottom of the existing top mat of reinforcing steel;
Removal of existing concrete as necessary to construct bridge end transitions;
Removal of all spalled and deteriorated concrete in curbs, sidewalks, and plinths;
Removal of all spalled and deteriorated concrete in abutment caps, pier caps and
superstructures;
Removal of all other deteriorated concrete;
Sand blasting and blast cleaning;
Removal of corroded steel;
Application of an anti-corrosion primer to the steel designated to remain in place;
Drilling and grouting of dowels;
Installation of epoxy coated reinforcing steel;
Raising expansion devices;
Removal of existing expansion joint and the installation of new expansion joints;
Furnishing and installation of miscellaneous structural steel;
Application of epoxy bonding agent to substrate;
Partial or Full-depth patching;
Placing, finishing, and curing of deck replacement concrete or other replacement
structural concrete;
Placing, finishing, and curing of a Portland cement, latex, polymer, or bituminous
concrete overlay;
Application of an epoxy-sand slurry;
Any other work specified as part of the contract;

All of the Work described herein shall be carried out in accordance with these General
Specifications, the Special Specifications, as shown on the plans, and as directed by the
Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Removal of Epoxy, Bituminous, and Foreign Surface Overlay
Removal of Structural Concrete Deck Surface
Breaking and Removal of Structural Concrete
Drilling and Grouting Anchors
Joint Sealing
Miscellaneous Structural Steel
Special Expansion Joint
Anti-Corrosion Primer

236
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents Replacement Concrete for Partial Depth Patching

Replacement Concrete for Full Depth Patching
Replacement Deck Concrete or Other Replacement Structural Concrete

5.15.2 MATERIALS.

5.15.2.1 General. All materials shall be approved before use. The Contractor is
advised that certain combinations of materials in concrete mixtures may cause chemical
reactions resulting in significant cracking of the overlay, even though the materials are
individually acceptable. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing materials that
are compatible with each other, and shall repair or remove and replace any overlay
damaged because incompatible materials were used, at no cost to the Ministry.

The moisture contents of the aggregates used in replacement structural concrete or

concrete overlay mixtures, especially the fine aggregate, shall be controlled by the
Contractor so that, at the time of mixing, the moisture content of each aggregate is
relatively uniform; the material will feed uniformly when continuous type mixers are used;
and the moisture contents of the aggregates are not so great that the water-cement ratio
or slump requirement for the concrete mixture is violated. Any replacement structural
concrete or concrete overlay mixture produced which is not properly proportioned or is not
in conformity with the specified slump and/or water-cement ratio will be rejected by the
Engineer, and shall be removed and replaced with concrete mixture meeting the
requirements of this Section at no cost to the Ministry. When the water-cement ratio or
slump requirements are violated due to excessive moisture content of the aggregates, this
condition shall be corrected by the Contractor at his expense before mixing operations are
continued.

5.15.2.2 Fine Aggregate. Fine aggregate for the replacement structural concrete or
concrete overlay mixtures shall be natural sand conforming to the requirements of
Subparagraph 5.01.2.2.1, "Fine Aggregate," in these General Specifications. The
Engineer will verify the moisture content of the natural sand in order to calculate its free
water content and resulting water-cement ratio of the concrete mixture.

5.15.2.3 Coarse Aggregate. Coarse aggregate for the replacement structural

concrete or concrete overlay mixtures shall be maximum size nineteen (19) millimeters (¾
inch) conforming to the requirements of Subparagraph 5.01.2.2.2, "Coarse Aggregate,"
in these General Specifications. The Engineer will verify the moisture content of the
coarse aggregate in order to calculate its free water content and resulting water-cement
ratio of the mixture.

5.15.2.4 Replacement Structural Concrete. Deck replacement concrete or other

structural concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 5.01, "Portland Cement
2
Concrete," in these General Specifications for structural concrete Class E of 280 kg/cm
or the Class of the existing concrete; whichever requires the higher strength.

5.15.2.5 Replacement Concrete for Partial or Full Depth Patching. Concrete for
partial or full depth patching shall meet the requirements for structural concrete in
Paragraph 5.15.2.4, "Replacement Structural Concrete" in these General Specifications.

237
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.15.2.6 Miscellaneous Structural Steel. Miscellaneous structural steel for

expansion dams and joint build-up shall be new, commercial grade steel suitable for
welding. Acceptance will be based on visual inspection by the Engineer on the project.

5.15.2.7 Other Materials. Other materials shall meet requirements specified in the
following Sections and Paragraphs in these General Specifications:

Cement 5.01.2.1
Water 5.01.2.3
Admixtures 5.01.2.4
Drilling and Grouting of Anchors 5.15.4.1.2
Epoxy Coated Steel 5.02
Anti-Corrosive Primer 5.15.4.2.2
Special Expansion Joint 5.15.4.5.2
Aggregates for Concrete Overlay 5.14.2.2 and 5.14.2.3
Epoxy Bonding Agent 5.14.2.4
Latex 5.14.2.5
Epoxy Cement for Epoxy Sand Slurry 5.14.2.6
Sand for Epoxy Sand Slurry 5.14.2.7
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler 6.23.2.4
Joint Sealing Compound 6.22.2.2
Waterproof Membrane 5.12
Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Overlay 4.05

5.15.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.15.3.1 General Requirements. These general requirements shall apply to all

restoration or rehabilitation work to be carried out on the structures in scope.

5.15.3.1.1 Scheduling. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least one (1)
working day in advance of the date and time he intends to begin placing concrete overlay
or replacement structural concrete. When placing of concrete is not begun within two (2)
hours after the scheduled time, then all engineering costs from the scheduled time until
the time placing actually begins or is canceled will be deducted from monies due or to
become due the Contractor. No engineering costs will be deducted when placing is
delayed for reasons beyond control of the Contractor, such as inclement weather or
equipment failure after placing begins. No time extension will be granted for delay in
placing concrete resulting from the Engineer receiving less than the one (1) working day
notice specified above.

5.15.3.1.2 Weather Limitations. During warm weather, replacement structural

concrete or replacement concrete for partial or full depth repairs shall only be placed in
accordance with the requirements in subparagraph 5.03.4.10.4, " Additional Hot Weather
Limitations and Curing Requirements for Bridge Decks and Slabs," in these General
Specifications. During cool weather, concrete shall not be placed when the air
temperatures away from artificial heat is less than eight degrees Celsius (8 C.) and falling.
In all instances, all concrete shall be placed and kept at a temperature above eight

238
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

degrees Celsius (8 C.) for at least ninety-six (96) hours after it is placed. Provisions shall
Table of Contents

be made for the uniform distribution of heat, and no area of the concrete surface shall be
heated to a temperature above thirty degrees Celsius (30 C.) This will require approved
housing, heating, or insulation methods during cold weather. In no case shall the concrete
be placed when raining or drizzling. If during the process of placing concrete it should
begin to rain or drizzle, placement shall be stopped and the material already in place shall
be finished and protected.

Weather limitations for concrete overlays shall be as specified in Paragraph 5.14.3.2,

"Weather Limitations," in these General Specifications.

5.15.3.1.3 Removal of Epoxy, Bituminous, and Foreign Surface Overlay . Epoxy,

bituminous, and foreign surfaces and patches shall be removed in a manner approved by
the Engineer. Hammers exceeding fifty (50) kilograms in weight or any other equipment
that may cause damage to the underlying concrete shall not be used. Generally, epoxy,
bituminous, and foreign surfaces (overlays) placed over the existing slab or surface profile
will be listed as a separate bid item entitled "Removal of Epoxy, Bituminous, and Foreign
Overlays" and will be paid for as a separate item. If, however, no bid item is set up for
removal of these overlays in the contract, removal shall become incidental to the overlay.

Bituminous surfaces and patches may be removed in a manner approved by the

Engineer and in accordance with Section 4.11, "Cold Milling Process for Removing
Bituminous Pavement," in these General Specifications.

5.15.3.1.4 Removal of Structural Concrete Deck Surface, Restoration of

Reinforcement and Surface Preparation. The area of the deck shown on the plans and
delineated by the Engineer shall have the concrete removed to an average depth of up to
ten (10) millimeters below the existing concrete surface. This operation shall be
accomplished by use of Milling Machines or Hydrodemolition Methods described in
Paragraph 5.15.3.2, "Concrete Removal Methods," in these General Specifications. The
method used shall produce a surface matching the existing slab cross section and each
pass of the machine shall match the previous pass in elevation. If satisfactory results are
not achieved, the Engineer may direct that the work be performed with other equipment.

All other concrete deemed unsound by the Engineer shall be removed. Removal of
concrete within areas where the depth of removal exceeds ten (10) millimeters shall be
carried out as specified in Paragraph 5.15.3.1.5, "Breaking and Removal of Structural
Concrete," and may be accomplished by use of Mechanical Impact Methods (Pneumatic
Breakers). Should removal of unsound concrete extend through two-thirds (2/3) of the
concrete slab or more, the remaining sound concrete shall be removed and replaced as
outlined herein for full depth patching.

All exposed steel reinforcement and structural steel shall be sand blasted to remove
scale, rust, grease, oil, etc. Prior to placing concrete, deteriorated or damaged
reinforcement shall be replaced or supplemented as directed by the Engineer. All dust
and chips of bituminous materials, concrete, or other debris shall be removed and the
entire area shall be cleaned with compressed air supplied by an air compressor having
suitable separators and traps. The compressed air shall be free of detrimental qualities

239
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

of water, oil, grease, or any other injurious substances. Leakage of oil, grease, gasoline,
Table of Contents

or other substances from the compressor(s) or other equipment on the deck shall be
prohibited. Protective sheeting (plastic, tarpaulins, etc.) shall be suspended under any
equipment which leaks.

All spalled or deteriorated concrete in curbs, sidewalks, and plinths shall be removed
(minimum of twenty-five (25) millimeters in depth). These areas shall be blast cleaned,
coated with a bonding agent, restored to the original section with overlay material, then
sealed with epoxy-sand slurry.

5.15.3.1.5 Breaking and Removal of Structural Concrete. The area of the deck
including curbs, as shown on the plans and delineated by the Engineer, shall have the
concrete removed to an average depth of at least twenty-five (25) millimeters below the
existing top mat of reinforcing steel, as shown on the plans. This operation shall be
accomplished by use of Mechanical Impact Methods (Pneumatic Breakers), Milling
Machines, or Hydrodemolition Methods described in Paragraph 5.15.3.2, "Concrete
Removal Methods," in these General Specifications. The method used shall produce a
surface matching the existing slab cross section and each pass of the machine shall match
the previous pass in elevation. If satisfactory results are not achieved, the Engineer may
direct that the work be performed with other equipment. Endwalls will not require machine
preparation unless otherwise noted. No deductions in area will be made for exist ing deck
drains, castings, expansion dams, patches of foreign material, etc.

All other concrete deemed unsound by the Engineer shall be removed. Removal of
concrete may be accomplished by the use of hammers not exceeding fourteen (14)
kilograms in weight or other such small equipment. Precaution shall be exercised by the
Contractor not to damage any steel reinforcement. Concrete shall be removed to a depth
of twenty-five (25) millimeters below any reinforcing bar which is more than half (1/2)
exposed or any other which appears not to be bonded to the existing concrete.
Precautions shall be exercised to protect any underlying sound concrete and steel
reinforcement. The periphery of routed area shall be as nearly vertical as possible. Any
exposed steel reinforcement that is not tied shall be tied.

Inferior concrete in the deteriorated and spalled areas near joints shall be removed, and
all joint filler removed. The joints shall be reformed to exact width and true alignment by
installation of a template made of styrofoam, timber covered with polyethylene sheeting,
or other suitable materials.

All exposed steel reinforcement and structural steel shall be sand blasted as per require-
ments of Paragraph 5.15.4.3, "Sand Blasting," in these General Specifications to remove
scale, rust, grease, oil, etc. Prior to placing concrete, deteriorated or damaged
reinforcement shall be replaced. Corroded steel reinforcements shall be replaced by using
epoxy coated reinforcements as shown on the plans or supplemented as directed by the
Engineer. All dust and chips of bituminous materials, concrete, or other debris shall be
removed and the entire area shall be blast cleaned as described in Paragraph 5.15.4.4,
"Blast Cleaning," in these General Specifications.

All spalled or deteriorated concrete in abutment caps, pier caps and superstruc ture shall

240
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

be removed a minimum of twenty-five (25) millimeters behind the reinforcements or as

Table of Contents

directed by the engineer. These areas shall be blast cleaned as described in Paragraph
5.15.4.4, "Blast Cleaning," in these General Specifications, all existing exposed steel
shall be sand blasted as described in Paragraph 5.15.4.3, "Sand Blasting," in these
General Specifications and coated with anti-corrosion primer as described in Paragraph
5.15.4.2, "Anti-corrosion Primer," in these General Specifications. The substrate shall be
coated with an epoxy bonding agent as described in Paragraph 5.15.4.6, "Epoxy Bonding
Agent," in these General Specifications and restored to the original section with structural
concrete.

5.15.3.1.6 Field Welding Prohibited. No welding of any nature shall be performed

on load carrying members of bridge, except as approved on the plans, without written
consent of the Engineer, and then only in the manner and at locations designated.

5.15.3.1.7 Drilling and Grouting of Anchors. The Contractor shall drill and grout
anchors as specified in the plans in accordance with Paragraph 5.15.4.1, "Drilling and
Grouting of Anchors," in these General Specifications.

5.15.3.1.8 Anti-Corrosion Primer for Steel. The Contractor shall apply anti-
corrosion primer to the exposed existing steel reinforcement prior to placing of the
concrete in accordance with Paragraph 5.15.4.2, "Anti-Corrosion Primer," in these General
Specifications.

5.15.3.1.9 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel. The Contractor shall remove the steel
reinforcements that are deteriorated at any point to greater than twenty (20) per cent of
their original cross section, as judged by the Engineer, and replace them with epoxy
coated reinforcing steel as shown on the plans and in accordance with Section 5.02,
"Reinforcing Steel," in these General Specifications.

5.15.3.1.10 Special Expansion Joints. The Contractor shall remove the existing
expansion joints and replace them with polymer modified bituminous joints as shown in
the plans in accordance with Paragraph 5.15.4.5, "Special Expansion Joints," in these
General Specifications.

5.15.3.1.11 Expansion Dam Treatment. Unless otherwise specified, existing

expansion dams shall be treated as shown on the plans. Painting of structural steel will
not be required unless specified in the plans.

5.15.3.1.12 Epoxy Bonding Agent. The Contractor shall apply epoxy bonding agent
to the substrate before placing of new concrete in accordance with Paragraph 5.15.4.6,
"Epoxy Bonding Agent," in these General Specifications.

5.15.3.1.13 Deck Drainage Pipes. The Contractor shall install deck drainage pipes
as shown in the drawings in accordance with Section 5.11, "Drainage on Structures," in
these General Specifications.

5.15.3.1.14 Replacement Structural Concrete Placement. The proportioning,

production, placing, consolidating, finishing and curing of deck replacement concrete or

241
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

other replacement structural concrete shall be in accordance with Section 5.03, "Concrete
Table of Contents

Structures" in these General Specifications.

The top surface of the consolidated and finished concrete shall be smooth, uniform
and tight, and variations in the surface when checked with a three (3) meter straightedge
shall not exceed four (4) millimeters.

5.15.3.1.15 Partial Depth Patching. Partial depth patching shall be constructed in

accordance with Paragraph 5.15.3.1.16, "Full Depth Patching," in these General
Specifications except that the concrete shall only be brought up to the elevation of the
surrounding concrete thereby permitting the replacement structural concrete layer or the
concrete overlay to be placed as one uniformly thick surface layer.

5.15.3.1.16 Full Depth Patching. The area of removal of concrete to full depth shall
be as shown on the plans and delineated on site by the Engineer. Full depth holes shall
be filled with the class of concrete specified in Paragraph 5.15.2.5, "Replacement
Concrete for Partial or Full Depth Patching," in these General Specifications. Immediately
prior to placement of concrete, the contact surfaces shall be treated with epoxy bonding
agent as specified in Paragraph 5.15.4.6, "Epoxy Bonding Agent," in these General
Specifications. The new concrete shall be carefully placed and tamped or vibrated into
place. Full depth patched areas shall be rough-finished to an elevation corresponding to
the scarified grade and shall be cured for a period of no less than seven (7) calendar days,
or until the overlay is placed, by means of a double layer of wetted burlap or similar
material. If the concrete surrounding a full depth concrete patch requires partial depth
removal, then the full depth concrete patch shall be finished to an elevation corresponding
to the bottom of the partial depth routed areas instead of the elevation of the original deck.

After the concrete has hardened sufficiently to maintain the proper shape, all joint
templates shall be removed in a manner to avoid chipping or breaking down the edges of
the repaired joint. All forming material shall be removed prior to completion of the project
unless otherwise specified.

Existing concrete parapet and other deck sections may require temporary support while
removing and replacing full depth concrete; the cost of this work will be incidental to the
concrete overlay. The proposed method of supporting these sections shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval prior to beginning work.

The surfaces of all patched areas shall be blast cleaned to remove all laitance prior to
the overlayment and all sand shall be removed. All full depth patching in each lane shall
be completed prior to beginning overlaying operations on that lane, unless otherwise
permitted.

Latex concrete overlays, Portland cement concrete overlays and polymer concrete
overlays may not be placed until full depth patches are at least seven (7) days old;
however, Portland cement concrete overlay may be placed when the full depth patches
are three (3) days old, provided the Contractor elects to use Type III (high early strength)
cement in the concrete patches, and the concrete has developed a compressive strength
of two hundred eighty (280) kilograms per square centimeter. The Contractor's equipment

242
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

will not be permitted on the full depth patches until the patches are at least seven (7) days
Table of Contents

old, or have developed a compressive strength of two hundred eighty (280) kilograms per
square centimeter.

5.15.3.1.17 Mixing and Placing of Concrete Overlay. Mixing and placing of

concrete overlays shall be in accordance with Section 5.14, "Concrete Bridge Deck
Overlays," in these General Specifications. Concrete overlays shall only be placed on
decks which have been prepared for an overlay in accordance with Paragraph 5.15.3.1.4,
"Removal of Structural Concrete Deck Surface, Restoration of Reinforcement and Surface
Preparation," in these General Specifications.

In the vicinity of drainage scuppers or gullies, the overlay shall be finished as shown
on the plans unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

Consolidation using hand-held vibrators may be required when placing the mixture
around steel reinforcement or structural steel members.

The overlay may be opened to traffic as soon as curing is completed, all full depth
patches are at least seven (7) days old or have attained a compressive strength of two
hundred eighty (280) kilograms per square centimeter, and all construction joints have
been sealed.

5.15.3.1.18 Bridge End Transitions. End sections of the bridge shall be overlaid
and finished in a manner dependent on the type of adjacent approach pavement. For a
rigid type approach, the finishing machine rails shall be set so as to provide a fifteen (15)
meter transition on the ends of the bridge to match the finished grade of the overlay with
the existing grade of the adjacent pavement. Existing concrete shall be removed as
necessary to maintain the minimum specified thickness of the overlay. For a non-rigid
approach or a rigid approach with bituminous overlay, no transition will be required. These
requirements shall apply unless otherwise noted.

5.15.3.1.19 Cleaning and Sealing Joints. Each joint shall be reworked as shown
in the plans and prescribed as follows:

1. All joint and sealer and filler materials, incompressibles and other foreign materials
shall be removed down to the waterstop or one hundred fifty (150) millimeters below the
top of the deck when no waterstop exists. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the
water stop and any damage shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

2. All vertical faces of the joint shall be blast cleaned to a depth of thirty (30)
millimeters so as to be free of all bituminous materials, tar, grease, and other materials
which would prevent the best possible bond between the concrete and the joint sealing
compounds.

3. A preformed joint filler, of the proper dimensions, shall be inserted into the joint.
The filler shall be of such depth that when resting on the waterstop, it will be thirty (30)
millimeters below the top surface of the deck.

243
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents 4. Before the joint sealing compound is applied, the joint shall be inspected for
cleanness. When the cleanness of the joint is approved by the Engineer, the joint shall
be sealed with joint sealing compound. The joint shall be filled to within six (6) millimeters
of the top surface of the deck. All joints shall be sealed from the outside face of one plinth
to the outside face of the other plinth, including the deck, curbs, sidewalks, and plinths.

5.15.3.1.20 Waterproof Membrane. When shown on the plans, the Contractor shall
apply waterproof membrane to the bridge deck prior of placement of bituminous concrete
wearing course overlay in accordance with Section 5.12, "Waterproofing for Structures,"
in these General Specifications.

5.15.3.1.21 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Overlay. When shown on the

plans, the Contractor shall place and finish a bituminous concrete wearing course overlay
in accordance with Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement," in these General
Specifications.

5.15.3.1.22 Material Hauling. The hauling of all material for latex concrete or
Portland cement concrete overlays by trucks with continuous mixers or any other types of
trucks shall be performed with vehicles which do not exceed the regulation for either the
legal axle weights or axle spacing contained in the Ministry's Truck Weight Regulations.

Prior to doing any overlay work on a structure, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer a certified statement listing the empty weight of each hauling vehicle, axle
weights when empty, axle weights when fully loaded, gross weight of each vehicle when
loaded with a specific number of cubic meters, and the spacing of axles. This information
will be used by the Engineer for the purpose of limiting the quantity of materials permitted
to be hauled by the Contractor and this limitation shall be based on the capacity and
condition of the bridge after unsound concrete has been removed and prior to placement
of the overlay. Under no circumstances will loads which exceed legal gross or axle load
limits be permitted .

5.15.3.1.23 Maintain and Control Traffic. All necessary traffic controls, signs,
devices, and flagmen shall be properly placed before any work is started. All work shall
be performed in accordance with the applicable standard drawings, Section 9.02, "Traffic
Control Through Work Zones," in these General Specifications and any special
requirements in the plans or Special Specifications.

5.15.3.1.24 Damage to Structures. The Contractor is responsible for any and all
damage to the structure during construction until all work is completed, even to the
replacement of entire spans at his expense, should they be allowed to fail as a result of
this construction.

5.15.3.1.25 Unacceptable Work. Any areas of the overlay which display extensive
cracking or other characteristics indicating the waterproofing effectiveness or expected life
of the overlay may be reduced, or the overlay may not be intimately bonded to the
underlying deck, will be cored by the Contractor when deemed necessary by the Engineer.
Any area shown by the cores to either have cracks exceeding a depth of six (6)
millimeters or to not be intimately bonded to the underlying deck shall be removed and

244
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

replaced with acceptable concrete at the Contractor's expense. Removal and replacement
Table of Contents

may be required without coring when significant cracking or lack of bond are so apparent
as to make coring unnecessary in the judgment of the Engineer. All cracks which are not
significant enough to require removal of the overlay shall be sealed with grout to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

5.15.3.2 Concrete Removal Methods.

5.15.3.2.1 General. The concrete removal shall be accomplished by one of the

following methods:

1. Mechanical Impact Methods (Pneumatic Breakers).

2. Milling Machines.
3. Hydrodemolition Methods.

The Contractor shall arrange an advance approval of the Engineer for the method(s)
which he intends to use for the accomplishment of the work.

The following definitions of the quality of existing concrete are used:

Sound concrete is defined as concrete that is free from spalls, cracks and/or
delaminations.

Deteriorated concrete is defined as concrete that has spalls, cracks and/or

delaminations.

Contaminated concrete is defined as concrete that has a chloride ion content greater
than 1.18 kg/cubic meter, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T260. Contaminated
concrete may be either sound or deteriorated.

5.15.3.2.2 Work Plan. Prior to commencement of the work, the Contractor shall
submit for approval to the Engineer his work plan. This work plan shall include complete
details of the following items:

1. The method or methods proposed for concrete removal including the protection
and safety of nearby traffic.

2. When there is a risk to the structural integrity of the structure, which is under
treatment, the Contractor shall suggest, provide and install the adequate supporting
system to ensure the safety of the structure during the retrofitting operation.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all environmental

regulation regarding the discharge of removed materials, dust and the runoff water
resulted from the hydrodemolition process into the environment. The Contractor shall
provide specific details of the method of treatment of these materials and obtain any
necessary permits required for its discharge into the environment.

4. The Contractor shall suggest and provide a means for controlling runoff water to

245
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

control its flowing into adjacent lanes which are open to traffic. The control measures must
Table of Contents

be approved by the Engineer.

5. The Contractor shall clean up all debris immediately after demolition. If for any
reason or another the debris rebond to the deck, the Contractor shall clean the deck to the
Engineer's satisfaction at no additional cost to the Ministry and with no additional
allowance for contract time extension.

5.15.3.2.3 Construction Procedures. The Contractor shall arrange an advanced

approval of the Engineer on the methods and work plans which he intends to follow for the
accomplishment of the work.

The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to prevent cutting or otherwise damaging
the reinforcing steel bars. Any bars damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired or
replaced at no additional cost to the Ministry and with no additional allowance for contract
time extension.

Following the concrete removal, the Engineer will inspect any exposed steel
reinforcement. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the bars are deteriorated at any point to
greater than twenty (20) per cent of their original cross section, the Contractor will be
directed by the Engineer to remove and replace these bars or section of bars. New epoxy-
coated bars of the same size shall be spliced by providing the laps shown on the plans.

5.15.3.2.4 Equipment.

1. General. The Contractor shall provide the necessary scaffolding and safety net
as well as a lighting system when needed.

The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying the water and all other materials
as well as the labor necessary to do the specified work.

The Contractor shall maintain on site an adequate supply of wear items, repair parts
and service personnel to guarantee that the removal operation will not be interrupted for
more than twenty-four (24) hours when an equipment breakdown occurs.

The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all removed materials at an off-
site location, and he shall get the necessary prior approvals from the concerned bodies.

2. Concrete Removed by Mechanical Impact. Only breakers powered by pneumatic

pressure shall be used. The weight of the breaker shall be limited to a maximum of
fourteen (14) kg above reinforcements and seven (7) kg below reinforcements. For
vertical or overhead surface or light duty applications the weight shall not be more than ten
(10) kg. However, the upper weight limits shall be governed by the quality requirements
of the job and the weight which can be handled by the operator with ease and safety.

The pneumatic breaker shall be capable of removing concrete from around and
below the steel reinforcement.

246
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents The breaker shall be operated by qualified labor capable of controlling the impact
angle between forty-five (45) and sixty (60) degrees.

3. Concrete Removed by Milling. The milling machine shall consist of a cutting

mandrel with carbide-tungsten tipped cutting teeth arranged in a spiral which runs inward
from the sides. The mandrel drive system shall rotate the mandrel in a direction opposite
to direction of travel of the machine so as to fracture the concrete in tension.

The milling machines of weight not more than ten (10) tons may run on tires. Large
size machines of a maximum weight of twenty (20) tons shall be equipped with tracks.

The machine shall be equipped with a hydraulically controlled conveyor system for
the removal of debris.

The milling machine shall be capable of removing the contaminated or damaged

concrete cover in one pass or several passes. The depth of cutting shall be controlled by
an automatic or manual depth control system.

The milling machine shall be operated by qualified experienced personnel approved

by the Engineer prior to the beginning of the milling process.

4. Concrete Removed by Hydrodemolition. The hydrodemolition equipment shall

consist of a water supply system, a high pressure water pumping system and a
demolishing unit. The demolishing unit shall be fully automated to provide precise control
of the water-jet and guarantee consistent operation.

The hydrodemolition equipment shall be capable of removing concrete from around

and below the steel reinforcement. The hydrodemolition equipment shall clean all
exposed reinforcing steel from rust, concrete fragments, laitance, loose scale and other
coatings which may destroy or inhibit the bond with the new concrete.

The hydrodemolition shall be operated by qualified personnel certified by the

equipment manufacturer. Operator certification shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to beginning the hydrodemolition operation.

The hydrodemolition equipment shall be calibrated and tested in trial sections prior
to commencement of the actual operation to demonstrate that the equipment, personnel
and method of operation are capable of producing results satisfactory to the Engineer.
The trial area shall consist of two (2) patches, each approximately three (3) meters long.
The first trial patch shall consist of sound concrete as determined by the Engineer. The
second trial patch shall consist of deteriorated concrete as determined by the Engineer.

The hydrodemolition equipment shall first be calibrated on the sound trial patch to
remove concrete to a depth specified by the Engineer ± half (1/2) of the maximum
aggregate size in the existing concrete.

The hydrodemolition equipment shall then be used to remove concrete from the
deteriorated trial patch using the operating parameters established from the sound trial

247
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

patch. If all the deteriorated concrete is removed as determined by the Engineer then the
Table of Contents

hydrodemolition system shall be considered calibrated. These operating parameters shall

be used as the basis for the production removal.

The Contractor shall record the calibrated hydrodemolition equipment's operating

parameters and provide the Engineer with a copy. The Contractor shall not change the
hydrodemolition system's operating parameters unless directed or approved by the
Engineer.

5.15.4 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS.

5.15.4.1 Drilling and Grouting of Anchors.

5.15.4.1.1 Description. Drilling and grouting of anchors into the sound existing
concrete shall be carried out where the stirrups are damaged and/or corroded and where
additional bond or shear resistance is required between the old existing concrete and new
concrete.

5.15.4.1.2 Material. The following two types of anchors may be used:

1. Adhesive anchors. The binder is in a glass capsule, which will be broken when
the anchor is driven into the hole.

2. Grouted anchor. The binder is a polymer modified cement mortar placed in the
holes. These types of anchors are only to be used on top sides of horizontal surfaces.

5.15.4.1.3 Execution. The diameters of the drilled holes shall be four (4) millimeters
greater than the diameter of the anchors or shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

The holes shall be drilled perpendicular to the sound concrete surface and the holes
shall be cleaned carefully from dust before inserting the anchors.

The adhesive anchors shall be installed in accordance with the supplier's specifications
and as approved by the Engineer.

The length of the anchors shall be as shown on the drawing or as directed by the
Engineer.

When using grouted anchors, the holes shall be saturated before inserting and grouting
the anchors.

The holes for the grouted anchor shall be completely filled from the bottom using a tube
before the anchors are inserted. The anchors shall be totally surrounded by mortar for the
full depth of the hole.

After hardening, the Contractor shall carry out tests of tensile strength on approximately
five percent of the anchors, for a minimum of five pieces in every stage. The anchors

248
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

should achieve the required tensile strength and should not fail in bond by slipping through
Table of Contents

the cement mortar or by failure of the cement mortar itself. If the results of the tests are
not satisfactory, further tests and/or replacements may be carried out in accordance with
the Engineer's instructions.

Anchors shall have the proper concrete cover as specified in the contract drawings.

5.15.4.2 Anti-Corrosion Primer.

5.15.4.2.1 Description. This work shall consist of application of approved anti-

corrosion primer over all the exposed steel as shown on the drawings and/or as directed
by the Engineer.

5.15.4.2.2 Material. Anti-corrosion primer shall possess the following properties:

1. Actively resist/prevent corrosion in steel over which it is applied.

2. It should not be harmful in any way to the concrete or the steel.

3. It should not be detrimental to the bond between the steel and the concrete.

5.15.4.2.3 Application. Before applying the anti-corrosion primer, all the exposed
steel shall be sand blasted as per Paragraph 5.15.4.3, "Sand Blasting," in these General
Specifications. The approved anti-corrosion primer shall be applied over all the exposed
steel as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The manufacturer’s
instructions for surface preparation and application shall be strictly followed.

5.15.4.3 Sand Blasting.

5.15.4.3.1 Description. This work shall consist of cleaning by sand blasting the steel,
including the underside and/or back of the steel, of all loose scale, rust/corrosion, mortar
or other materials.

5.15.4.3.2 Material. Sharp natural sand shall be used. The sand shall consist of
non-disintegrating grains, free of clay particles and other detrimental materials for steel
and concrete.

The compressed air used for sand blasting must be free of oil, and substances that
contaminate the surfaces and other detrimental materials.

5.15.4.3.3 Application. Sand blasting shall be performed within twenty-four (24) hour
period preceding placement of the concrete on the area. However, if the project is done
under traffic, all sand blasting must be done within twelve (12) hours prior to placement
of concrete.

The sand blasted steel shall be protected, as necessary against contamination prior to
placement of concrete. Contaminated areas and areas exposed more than twenty-four
(24) hours (twelve (12) hours when under traffic) shall be sand blasted again as directed

249
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

Table of Contents

5.15.4.4 Blast Cleaning.

5.15.4.4.1 Description. This work shall consists of cleaning the designated areas
with clean water from a high pressure water jet or compressed air supplied by an air
compressor having suitable separations and traps.

5.15.4.4.2 Material. The water used for blast cleaning shall conform to the
requirements in Paragraph 5.01.2.3, "Water," in these General Specifications. The
compressed air used for blast cleaning must be free of water, oil, grease and other
injurious substances.

5.15.4.4.3 Application. All dust chips and particles from previous concrete breaking
removal, sand blasting and other rehabilitation work shall be removed prior to the start of
blast cleaning. Leakage of oil, grease, gasoline, diesel fuel, or other substances from the
compress or other equipment or to the deck shall be prohibited.
Protective sheeting (plastic, polyethylene, tarpaulin, etc.) shall be suspended under any
equipment which leaks.

The blast cleaning shall produce areas cleaned to a bright clean appearance free from
all foreign material.

5.15.4.5 Special Expansion Joints.

5.15.4.5.1 Description. This work shall consist of removal and installing/replacement

of expansion joints. The Contractor shall remove the existing expansion joints and or
pavement mortar in such a manner so as not crack/damage the concrete below and
around the joint. If the concrete is damaged, the Contractor shall carry out immediately
at his own cost, the appropriate remedial measures deemed necessary by the Engineer.

5.15.4.5.2 Material. The type of expansion joint to be used shall be a polymer

modified bituminous joint. The Contractor shall provide all the information with regard to
the material, properties, installation procedures, guarantees etc. and detailed drawings of
the joint, for the approval by the Engineer.

The joints must possess the following properties under normal and extreme weather
conditions:

- Waterproof under all conditions, also at boundaries ends and connections etc.
- Sufficient mechanical stability and strength to withstand loads from the traffic in the
form of compressive and shear forces, also in curves and during braking and accelera-
tion.
- Resistance against cracking or separation in layers under the influence of the traffic
and movement of supports.
- Wearing strength.
- Expansion and contraction capacity as required 0-50 millimeters.
- Provide good riding surface.

250
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents - Should be flexible even in very cold conditions and not become too soft in very warm
conditions.

5.15.4.5.3 Application. The joint shall be installed under the Rehabilitation

Engineer's supervision. The manufacturer's detailed description of all steps of the work
procedure and requirements for the finished work shall be strictly followed. The size of the
opening shall be compatible with the mean bridge temperature at the time of installation.

5.15.4.6 Epoxy Bonding Agent.

5.15.4.6.1 Description. This work shall consist of applying a coat of epoxy bonding
agent of uniform thickness and consistency on properly prepared areas of old concrete,
designated to receive replacement structural or overlay concrete.

5.15.4.6.2 Material. Epoxy bonding agent shall be as specified in Paragraph

5.14.2.4, "Epoxy Bonding Agent," in these General Specifications.

5.15.4.6.3 Application. Application of the epoxy bonding agent shall be as specified

in Paragraph 5.14.3.3, "Epoxy Bonding Agent," in these General Specifications. Except
that, for the scope of this section, the entire area of the surface to receive concrete
overlay, concrete for partial or full depth repairs or replacement concrete, shall be blast
cleaned to a bright, clean appearance which is free from curing compound, laitance, dust,
dirt, oil, grease, bituminous material, paint, and all foreign matter.

5.15.5 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS.

5.15.5.1 Bridge Rehabilitation Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a full time on-
site Bridge Rehabilitation Engineer with the following experience and qualifications, while
bridge rehabilitation work is under way.

1. Education. Graduate civil or structural engineer or equivalent.

2. Experience. Several years of acceptable construction experience in rehabilitating

bridges and similar structures.

3. Proficient in the English and Arabic languages and able to clearly communicate
observations, determinations and proposed ground support category recommendations.

4. The Contractor shall not commence field work until written approval of the bridge
rehabilitation engineer has been received.

Duties shall be as follows:

1. Propose appropriate concrete removal areas based upon observed deck condition,
crack mapping and appropriate test data.

2. Hold daily discussion with the Engineer on-site regarding bridge conditions and the
performance of rehabilitation work and keep written records thereof.

251
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

3. Submit weekly summary reports on rehabilitation work progress and conditions

encountered.

4. Participate in all pertinent coordination meetings with the Engineer, and submit
minutes of the meetings within one week after each meeting.

5.15.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

Quantities to be paid for will be measured in units of completed and accepted work, as
hereinafter specified. In computing quantities, all dimensions used shall be those
measured by the Engineer.

5.15.6.1 Removal of Epoxy, Bituminous and Foreign Overlay. The area of removal
of epoxy, bituminous, and foreign overlays, including patches, complete and accepted, will
be measured in square meters. This item will not be measured separately when a bid item
for removal of the epoxy, bituminous, and foreign overlays is not included in the contract,
but will be considered incidental to the overlay.

5.15.6.2 Removal of Structural Concrete Deck Surface . The total area prepared
by removal of concrete to an average depth of up to ten (10) millimeters below the existing
surface, as specified, complete and accepted, will be measured in square meters.

5.15.6.3 Breaking and Removal of Structural Concrete. The total quantity of

concrete removed to an average depth of at least twenty-five (25) millimeters below the
existing top mat of reinforcing steel, as specified, complete and accepted, will be
measured in cubic meters in accordance with Subparagraph 5.15.3.1.5, "Breaking and
Removal of Structural Concrete," in these General Specifications.

5.15.6.4 Drilling and Grouting of Anchors. Measurement of drilling and grouting

of anchors will be the number acceptably placed and grouted in accordance with
Paragraph 5.15.4.1, "Drilling and Grouting of Anchors," in these General Specifications.

5.15.6.5 Joint Sealing. Joint sealing will be measured in linear meters.

5.15.6.6 Miscellaneous Structural Steel. Structural steel will be measured in

accordance with Paragraph 5.5.8.1, "Structural Steel," in these General Specifications.

5.15.6.7 Special Expansion Joint. Measurement will the number of linear meters
of a special expansion joint properly installed and accepted in accordance with Paragraph
5.15.4.5, "Special Expansion Joints," in these General Specifications.

5.15.6.8 Anti-Corrosion Primer. Measurement will be the liters of material used to

satisfactorily coat the surface area of the exposed steel reinforcement over which the
primer is satisfactorily applied and accepted in accordance with Paragraph 5.15.4.2, "Anti-
Corrosion Primer," in these General Specifications. The preparatory sand blasting shall
not be measured as it is considered to be subsidiary to the anti-corrosion primer
application.

252
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.15.6.9 Replacement Concrete for Partial or Full Depth Patching and

Replacement Structural Concrete . The quantity measured for payment will be the
number of cubic meters actually placed, accepted and measured in accordance with
Section 5.03.10, "Method of Measurement," in these General Specifications. This will
include material used to patch spalled or deteriorated sections of curbs, sidewalks or
plinths. The volume of material wasted or not incorporated in the work will not be included
in the measured quantity. Crack sealing is considered incidental and will not be measured
for payment.

5.15.6.10 Sand Blasting and Blast Cleaning. The surface area of the reinforcing
steel acceptably sand blasted in accordance with Paragraph 5.15.4.3, "Sand Blasting," in
these General Specifications shall not be measured separately as it is considered
subsidiary to the anti-corrosion primer.

The surface area of concrete substrate acceptably blast cleaned in accordance with
Paragraph 5.15.4.4, "Blast Cleaning," in these General Specifications shall not be
measured as it is considered subsidiary to the epoxy bonding agent.

5.15.6.11 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel. Measurement will be in accordance

with Subsection 5.02.6, "Method of Measurement," in these General Specifications.

5.15.6.12 Epoxy Bonding Agent. The area of acceptable application of epoxy

bonding agent including blast cleaning will be measured in square meters in accordance
with Paragraph 5.15.4.6, "Epoxy Bonding Agent," in these General Specifications. The
preparatory sand blasting shall not be measured as it is considered to be subsidiary to the
bonding agent application.

5.15.6.13 Concrete Overlay, Latex, Portland Cement or Polymer. Measurement

will be in accordance with Paragraphs 5.14.6.2, "Concrete Overlay, Latex or Polymer,"
5.14.6.3, "Concrete Overlay, Portland Cement," in these General Specifications, as
applicable.

5.15.6.14 Epoxy-Sand Slurry. Measurement will be in accordance with Paragraph

5.14.6.4, "Epoxy-Sand Slurry," in these General Specifications.

5.15.6.15 Waterproof Membrane. Measurement will be in accordance with

Subsection 5.12.4, "Method of Measurement," in these General Specifications.

5.15.6.16 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Overlay. Measurement will be

in accordance with Subsection 4.05.10, "Method of Measurement," in these General
Specifications.

5.15.7 PAYMENT.

5.15.7.1 Removal of Epoxy, Bituminous and Surface Overlay. Payment at the

contract unit price per square meter shall be full compensation for the satisfactory removal
and disposal of existing epoxy, bituminous, and foreign overlay measured as specified in

253
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Paragraph 5.15.6.1, "Removal of Epoxy, Bituminious and Foreign Overlay," in these

Table of Contents

General Specifications.

5.15.7.2 Removal of Structural Concrete Deck Surface. Payment at the contract

unit price per square meter will be made for the area prepared by removal of existing
concrete to an average depth of up to ten (10) millimeters below the existing surface,
complete and accepted, measured in accordance with Paragraph 5.15.6.2, "Removal of
Structural Concrete Deck Surface," in these General Specifications.

5.15.7.3 Breaking and Removal of Structural Concrete. Payment at the contract

unit price per cubic meter shall be full compensation for the breaking and removal of
existing concrete to an average depth of at least twenty-five (25) millimeters below the
existing top mat of reinforcing steel, measured as specified in Paragraph 5.15.6.3,
"Breaking and Remval of Concrete," in these General Specifications.

5.15.7.4 Drilling and Grouting of Anchors. Payment will be made at the contract
unit price for the number of units of completed and accepted work measured in
accordance with Paragraph 5.15.6.4, "Drilling and Grouting of Anchors," in these General
Specifications.

5.15.7.5 Joint Sealing. Payment will be made at the contract unit price per linear
meter for all completed and accepted work measured in accordance with Paragraph
5.15.6.5, "Joint Sealing," in these General Specifications.

5.15.7.6 Miscellaneous Structural Steel. Payment will be made in accordance with

the requirements of Paragraph 5.5.9.1, "Structural Steel," in these General Specifications.

5.15.7.7 Special Expansion Joint. Payment will be made at the contract unit price
per linear meter for all work authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer
measured in accordance with Paragraph 5.15.6.7, "Special Expansion Joint," in these
General Specifications.

5.15.7.8 Anti-Corrosion Primer. Anti-corrosion primer will be paid for at the contract
unit price per liter for all authorized, completed and accepted work by the Engineer and
measured in accordance with Paragraph 5.15.6.8, "Anti-Corrosion Primer," in these
General Specifications.

5.15.7.9 Replacement Concrete for Partial or Full Depth Patching and

Replacement Structural Concrete. Payment will be made at the contract unit prices per
cubic meter for all completed and accepted work measured in accordance with Paragraph
5.15.6.9, "Replacement Concrete for Partial or Full Depth Patching and Replacement
Structural Concrete," in these General Specifications.

5.15.7.10 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel. Payment will be made at the contract
unit price per ton in accordance with Subsection 5.02.7, "Payment," in these General
Specifications.

254
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.15.7.11 Epoxy Bonding Agent. Epoxy bonding agent will be paid for at the
contract unit price for all work completed and accepted by the Engineer and measured in
accordance with Paragraph 5.15.6.12, "Epoxy Bonding Agent," in these General
Specifications.

5.15.7.12 Concrete Overlay, Latex, Portland Cement or Polymer . Payment will

be made in accordance with Paragraph 5.14.7.2, "Concrete Overlay," in these General
Specifications.
5.15.7.13 Epoxy-Sand Slurry. Payment will be made in accordance with Paragraph
5.14.7.3, "Epoxy-Sand Slurry," in these General Specifications.

5.15.7.14 Waterproof Membrane. Payment will be made in accordance with

Subsection 5.12.5, "Payment," in these General Specifications.

5.15.7.15 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Overlay. Payment will be made

at the contract unit price in accordance with Subsection 4.05.11, "Payment," in these
General Specifications.

Payment for the above listed items at the contract unit prices shall be full
compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and all other
expenses incurred which are necessary for completion of the work as specified in
Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

51501 Removal of Epoxy, Bituminous and Foreign Surface Overlay Square Meter
51502 Removal of Structural Concrete Deck Surface Square Meter
51503 Breaking and Removal of Structural Concrete Cubic Meter
51505 Drilling and Grouting Anchors Unit
5150501 Drilling and Grouting Anchors, 50 cm Unit
5150502 Drilling and Grouting Anchors, 75 cm Unit
5150503 Drilling and Grouting Anchors, 100 cm Unit
5150504 Drilling and Grouting Anchors, ___ cm Unit
51506 Joint Sealing Linear Meter
51507 Miscellaneous Structural Steel Kilogram
51508 Special Expansion Joint Linear Meter
5150801 Special Expansion Joint, width less than 50 mm Linear Meter
5150802 Special Expansion Joint, width 51 - 100 mm Linear Meter
5150803 Special Expansion Joint, width 101 - 200 mm Linear Meter
5150804 Special Expansion Joint, width 201 - 300 mm Linear Meter
5150805 Special Expansion Joint, width ___ - ___ mm Linear Meter
51509 Anti-Corrosion Primer Liter
51510 Replacement Concrete for Partial Depth Patching Cubic Meter
51511 Replacement Concrete for Full Depth Patching Cubic Meter
51512 Replacement Deck Concrete or Other Replacement Structural Cubic Meter
Concrete

255
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents SECTION 5.16 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK REPAIRS

5.16.1 DESCRIPTION. The work done under this section shall consist of furnishing all
labor, materials, and equipment necessary to repair Portland cement concrete bridge
decks according with the requirements of these General Specifications, as shown on the
plans, and in the Special Specifications or established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Spall Repair Concrete

Slab Repair Concrete
Bridge Deck Grinding
Concrete Bridge Deck Joint and Crack Repair

5.16.2 SPALL REPAIRS.

5.16.2.1 Description. The work shall consist of furnishing all materials and removing
loose patches and materials incompatible with the new repairs, such as temporary
bituminous patching materials from potholes, damaged joints and spalled areas,
thoroughly cleaning the repair area replacing corroded reinforcing steel, and placing new
patching material according with the details shown on the plans, and as specified herein,
and in reasonably close conformity with the existing bridge deck cross-section.

5.16.2.2 Material Requirements.

1. General. Patching materials shall be suitable for the anticipated work conditions
before allowing traffic loads, or as shown on the plans, the Special Specifications and
these General Specifications.

Accelerated Strength Portland Cement Concrete Patching Material. The patching

material for Accelerated Strength Portland Cement Concrete shall consist of either Type
III or Type II Portland cement or other accelerators meeting the AASHTO M-144
requirements and shall attain a minimum compressive strength of fourteen (14) kilograms
per square centimeter in six (6) hours. Materials for the concrete mix shall conform to the
requirements of Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete," in these General
Specifications for Class K concrete. The coarse aggregate shall be as designated for size
D coarse aggregate (19 mm).

Rapid Setting Patching Material - Rapid setting material shall be a product approved by
the Engineer. A list of approved patching materials is maintained by the Ministry.

Epoxy Resin Patching Material - Epoxy resin patching material shall be a low-modulus,
moisture insensitive epoxy blended with suitable fillers, as prepared in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Engineer.

5.16.2.3 Construction Requirements.

1. General. Spalled areas to be repaired will be designated by the Engineer. The

extent of the repair area will be marked out by the Engineer and will be no less than

256
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

seventy (70) millimeters outside of the area of delamination. The Engineer will be the final
Table of Contents

authority if questions arise in regard to the need for patching or the extent of a required
patch.

Spalled areas less than one hundred and fifty (150) by thirty (30) millimeters, adjacent
to joints, need not be repaired under this specification.

Patching material shall not be placed under conditions which will adversely affect the
quality of work. The Engineer shall be the sole judge in determining suitability of working
conditions.

Saw cut approximately nineteen (19) millimeters deep along all boundaries of the repair
areas. Point saw cuts, extending beyond the limits of repair areas, flush with the surface
with Portland cement or epoxy mortar.

Where the bond between existing concrete and reinforcing steel has been destroyed,
remove the concrete adjacent to the steel to a depth that will permit new concrete to bond
to the entire periphery of the exposed steel. Provide a minimum of nineteen (19)
millimeters clearance behind the steel.

Remove and replace all reinforcing steel that is corroded more than twenty (20) percent.
Apply a anti-corrosive primer to the existing steel after sand blasting and prior to
concreting.

After removal of deteriorated or unsound concrete, sandblast exposed structural steel,

reinforcing steel, and any concrete surfaces which will be in contact with repair material
until free of rust and foreign material. Clean the sound concrete surface by flushing with
clean water from a high pressure water jet or compressed air.

For all vertical and overhead concrete repairs, and those horizontal repairs to areas less
than one hundred twenty-five (125) millimeters in depth, use a high strength concrete
patching compound placed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

For all other repairs, apply a bonding coat of a two-component epoxy resin binder to the
surfaces of the sound existing concrete immediately before placing new concrete against
it. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for the epoxy resin binder. Repair areas
using Class K concrete.

Patch perimeters shall be cut substantially vertical, with sharp tools to minimize
fracturing beyond the cut, for at least thirty (30) millimeters in depth.

Remove and dispose of concrete according to Section 2.02, "Removal of Structures and
Obstructions" in these General Specifications.

The area to receive the patching material shall be clean and dry to promote proper bond.
Patching material shall be done in a workmanlike manner and lapping over to surrounding
bridge deck will not be permitted. If there is an interval of more than twenty-four (24) hours
between cleaning of the sound concrete surface and placement of new concrete, or there

257
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

are previously prepared concrete surfaces that have been contaminated by any substance
Table of Contents

detrimental to good bonding, clean or remove the concrete.

Patching material shall be placed, consolidated, and finished to produce a dense patch.
If the area to be patched abuts a joint or working crack, a bond-breaker of styrofoam,
polyethylene foam or other suitable material not less than four (4) millimeters or the joint
or crack width, whichever is greater, shall be placed prior to patching.

The finishing and texture of the patched surface shall conform to the elevation and
texture of the existing bridge deck.

Any repair material that develops any appreciable thickening while being placed shall
be discarded and no additional payment will be allowed.

Accelerated Strength Portland Concrete Bridge Deck Patch - Following the excavation
and abrasive blast cleaning of the repair void as previously specified, the entire area to
be filled with patching material shall be coated with an approved "new-to-old" epoxy
according to the recommendations of the manufacture. The patching material shall be
placed promptly to before hardening of the bond coat occurs. Should the bond coat harden
prior to patching, a new application of bond coat shall be applied before patch filling
operations resume.

Rapid Set Patch - Rapid set patching materials shall be blended and mixed installed as
recommended by the manufacture.

Upon completing removal and surface preparation, as previously stated, the surface
shall be either lightly damped or dry prior to filling with rapid setting material, as
recommended by the manufacture.

The material shall be consolidated to the proper grade and float finished. Texturing to
match the existing bridge deck will not be required.

Epoxy Resin Patches - Epoxy resin shall be proportioned and blended according to the
manufacture's directions and the suitable filler shall then be combined to produce a mortar
or grout, uniform in consistency according to the recommenda tions of the resin manufac-
ture.

Upon completing removal and surface preparation, as previously stated, the surface
shall be dry prior to filling with the epoxy mixture.

The material shall be consolidated to the proper grade and float finished. Texturing to
match the existing bridge deck will not be required.

5.16.3 SLAB REPAIRS.

5.16.3.1 Description. The work shall consist of furnishing all materials and removing
existing concrete bridge deck, constructing partial and full depth repairs of Portland
cement concrete bridge decks and reinforcing steel at locations shown on the plans, as

258
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

specified herein, and in reasonably close conformity with the existing bridge deck.
Table of Contents

5.16.3.2 Material Requirements. Repair material shall conform to Subsection 5.01.1,

"Description" in these General Specifications, except concrete shall be Class K, using size
D coarse aggregate (19 mm).

Reinforcing steel, expansion joint fillers, joint seal, and liquid membrane-forming curing
compound, shall conform to the requirements as stated in Section 5.02, "Reinforcing
Steel" and 5.03, "Concrete Structures" in these General Specifications.

5.16.3.3 Construction Requirements. Areas to be repaired will be designated by the

Engineer. Areas to be repaired shall have the configuration and minimum dimensions
shown on the plans. However the Engineer shall be the final authority in determining the
extent of repairs.

Repairs shall be carried out under conditions that will not adversely affect the quality of
work. If these conditions arise, the Engineer shall have the final determination as to
whether or not to proceed with the planned work.

Breaking and removal of partial and full depth bridge deck concrete shall be performed
in accordance with Subparagraph 5.15.3.1.5, "Breaking and Removal of Structural
Concrete," in these General Specifications. This work shall be done in such a manner as
to avoid damaging the adjacent deck and other bridge elements adjacent to the repair
area in compliance with the requirements in Paragraphs 1.05.2.1 "Air Pollution" and
5.15.3.2 "Concrete Removal Methods" in these General Specifications.

When the repair boundary is adjacent to an existing longitudinal joint, six hundred (600)
millimeters long, sixteen (16) millimeters diameter (No. 5) deformed steel tie bars shall be
placed in three hundred (300) millimeters deep holes drilled into the existing deck at seven
hundred fifty (750) millimeters intervals, as shown on the plans, and grouted into place
with approved non-shrink grout or approved epoxy.

The Contractor shall saw cut approximately nineteen (19) millimeters deep along all
boundaries of the repair areas and point saw cuts, extending beyond the limits of repair
areas, flush with the surface with Portland cement or epoxy mortar.

All exposed steel reinforcement and structural steel shall be sand blasted as per require-
ments of Paragraph 5.15.4.3, "Sand Blasting," in these General Specifications to remove
scale, rust, grease, oil, etc. Prior to placing concrete, deteriorated or damaged
reinforcement shall be replaced. Corroded steel reinforcements shall be replaced by using
reinforcements as shown on the plans or supplement ed as directed by the Engineer. All
dust and chips of concrete, or other debris shall be removed and the entire area shall be
blast cleaned as described in Paragraph 5.15.4.4, "Blast Cleaning," in these General
Specifications. An anti-corrosive primer shall be applied to the existing steel prior to
concreting.

Full depth slab repairs shall be constructed in accordance with Subparagraph

5.15.3.1.16, "Full Depth Patching" in these General Specifications.

259
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

Partial depth slab repairs shall be constructed in accordance with Subparagraph

5.15.3.1.16, "Full Depth Patching" except that the concrete shall only extend from the
bottom of the removal area to the elevation of the surrounding concrete.

5.16.4 BRIDGE DECK GRINDING.

5.16.4.1 Description. The work consists of furnishing all materials and grooving the
surface of existing Portland cement concrete bridge deck at the locations shown on the
project plans and according to the requirements in these General Specifications.

5.16.4.2 Equipment and Procedures. Grinding shall be done with diamond blades,
mounted on a self-propelled machine that has been designed for grinding and texturing
bridge decks. The equipment shall be designed such that it will not cause strain or damage
to the underlying surface of the bridge deck. Grinding equipment that causes excessive
ravels, aggregate fractures, spalls, or disturbances of the transverse or longitudinal joints
shall not be used.

All grinding machines used in the cross-section of a lane shall have the same wheel or
grinding head configuration. Overlapping of grinding passes will not be allowed.

The noise level created by any one machine shall not exceed eighty-six (86) dbA at a
distance of fifteen (15) meters normal to the direction of traffic.

No equipment will be allowed within three (3) meters of the lane open to public traffic.
Maintenance and protection of traffic shall conform to the requirements of Section 9.02,
"Traffic Control Through Work Zones," in these General Specifications.

5.16.4.3 Construction Requirements. Before grinding, repaired areas shall be

completed as specified. Grinding shall be done prior to any specified sawing and sealing
of existing transverse and longitudinal joints.

Bridge deck grinding shall be performed longitudinally - The Contractor shall grind a test
section of bridge deck, where designated by the Engineer, to determine that the
equipment proposed for use will provide the desired texture.

Grinding shall produce a uniform surface appearance over the entire designated area.
Grinding shall continue for the full lane width until the bridge deck surface on both sides
of all transverse joints and of all cracks is in the same plane. Longitudinal ridges in
adjacent passes of the grinding equipment shall not exceed three (3) millimeters in depth.

In any one lane, a maximum distance of three hundred (300) meters of unfinished area
between the lead grinder and the last grinder in that lane will be allowed at the end of the
work shift.

Ground surfaces shall not be smooth or polished and shall have a coefficient of friction
of not less than forty-hundredths (0.40) as measured by ASTM E-1274 (88).

260
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

The surface shall have a finish texture of grooves between two (2) to three (3)
Table of Contents

millimeters wide, and spaced from one and one-half (1.5) millimeters to three (3)
millimeters and not less than one (1) millimeter to three (3) millimeters.

Residue and excess water resulting from grinding shall be removed from the roadway
by vacuuming or other methods approved by the Engineer. The residue shall be removed
before restoring traffic to the lane. Residue and water from the grinding operations shall
not be allowed to flow across lanes occupied by traffic, onto roadway shoulders, or to flow
into gutters and drainage facilities. Dried residue shall be removed before allowing traffic
to occupy the work area.

After grinding has been completed, the bridge deck surface will be tested for
smoothness using a three (3) meter straightedge to insure that the surface elevation does
not exceed plus or minus (±6) six millimeters.

Additional grinding shall be performed, if necessary, to reduce the surface deviation as

measured with the three (3) meter straightedge to within plus or minus (±6) six millimeters,
or remain portion thereof, along any line parallel to the edge of the bridge deck. In any
area requiring regrinding, the regrinding shall be done over the full lane width.

The Contractor shall broom the surface of the concrete where straightedge
measurements are to be taken. The Contractor shall bear the full cost of straightedge
measurements and associated traffic control.

5.16.5 BRIDGE DECK JOINT AND CRACK REPAIR.

5.16.5.1 Description. The work shall consist of furnishing all materials and renovating
longitudinal and transverse contraction control joints and routing and sealing random
cracks in existing bridge deck, as specified herein, detailed on the plans and as directed
by the Engineer.

5.16.5.2 Material Requirements. Joint sealant shall conform to the requirements of

Paragraph 6.23.2.2, "Joint Sealing Compounds," in these General Specifications. Grout
for filling wide joints shall be a low modulus, moisture insensitive epoxy resin grout of a
viscosity suitable for flowing into the irregular cracked portion of the joint. The ratio of
epoxy resin to sand shall be 1:7 and 1:10 or as specified by the epoxy manufacture. Epoxy
binder material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-881-78(83).

Sand used in epoxy grout shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 5.01.2,
"Materials" in these General Specifications except the gradation shall be as follows:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
2.36 mm (No 8) 100%
1.18 mm (No. 16) 95-100
0.300 mm (No. 50) 10-40
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-4

A rapid set Portland cement concrete pavement patching material may be substituted
for epoxy grout as approved by the Engineer.

261
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.16.5.3 Construction Requirements.

5.16.5.3.1 General. Joint and crack repairs shall be accomplished by first removing
old joint sealant and joint insets, then refacing and cleaning the joints and cracks followed
by installation of a backer rod (if required) and installation of new joint sealant.

5.16.5.3.2 Joint and Crack Preparation. Cracks shall be sawed or routed to the
dimensions shown on the plans.

Inserts shall be removed from insert-formed joints by sawing to provide a clean vertical
face. The width and depth of the saw cuts shall be sufficient to insure complete removal
of the insert and to provide a finished joint of the proper dimensions specified for the
sealant material to be used. If the insert is not vertical additional parallel saw cuts shall be
provided as required to insure full removal of the inserts.

Joints that are not insert formed shall be sawed to the widths and depths specified
herein. Joints previously sawed and sealed will be inspected to assure the proper
dimensions and shall be re-sawed to the proper widths and depths, when required.

Joints shall be sawed as follows:

Initial Joint Width..."W" Sawed Joint Width Sawed Joint Depth "D"
Pavement Surface to
bottom of backer rod
"W" <13 mm 13 mm 43 mm
13 mm<W <19 mm 19 mm 54 mm
19 mm<W <38 mm No Sawing Required 2W+19 mm

Immediately after saw cutting a joint or routing a crack, old sealant shall be removed and
internal surfaces of the joint or crack shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting. Sand
for sandblasting shall be sharp and clean. The amount of compressed air and the nozzle
pressure shall be such that the joints and cracks will be thoroughly cleaned and the edges
will have etched surfaces.

5.16.5.3.3 Cleaning Prior to Sealing. Prior to sealing, all foreign or loosened

particles shall be removed from the joints to the full depth of the original sawed joints. The
removal of all foreign or loosened particles shall be accomplished with com pressed air or
other means approved by the Engineer. Air compressors shall be capable of furnishing a
sufficient supply of compressed air to clean the joints properly.

5.16.5.3.4 Separating or Blocking Medium (Backer Rod). Immediately following

the cleaning of joints and prior to the application of sealant, a backer rod composed of an
inert, compressible material shall be inserted along the lower portion of the joint groove
at a depth as shown on the plans.

The backer rod shall be compatible with the sealant in accordance with the manufac-
ture's recommendation. The product shall be clean, free of scale, foreign matter, oil or

262
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

moisture and shall be non-absorbing. The Engineer shall be assured that the material
Table of Contents

proposed for use has been used successfully in similar installations.

Backer rod sizes shall be as follows:

Joint Width Backer Rod Diameter

Millimeters (mm) Millimeters (mm)
13 mm 16 mm
19 mm 25 mm
25 mm 32 mm
32 mm 38 mm
38 mm 50 mm

5.16.5.3.5 Installation of Sealer. Sealant compound shall not be placed unless the
joint is dry, clean, and free of dust. The face of the joint shall be surface dry and the
ambient temperature shall both be at least ten degrees Celsius (10 C.) at the time of
application of the sealant. Installation of the sealant shall be such that the in-place sealant
shall be well bonded to the concrete and free of voids or trapped air. The joints shall be
sealed in a neat and workmanlike manner, so that upon completion of the work , the
surface of the joint sealant material will be six (6) millimeters, ± 3 millimeters below the
adjacent bridge deck surface. The Contractor shall refill all low joints before final
acceptance. Any excess material on the surface of the bridge deck shall be removed and
the bridge deck surface shall be left in a clean condition. Vehicular or heavy equipment
traffic shall not be permitted on the bridge deck in the area of the joints during the curing
period.

5.16.6 MEASUREMENT.

5.16.6.1 Spall Repair Concrete. Spall repair concrete shall be measured by the
square meter for all patches successfully constructed. Each patch will be measured to the
nearest three centimeters. The total cumulative calculated area based on the
measurements will be rounded off to the nearest tenth of a square meter.

5.16.6.2 Slab Repair Concrete. Full depth and partial depth slab repair concrete shall
be measured by the square meter for all repairs successfully constructed. The dimensions
of each repair area will be measured to the nearest centimeter. The total cumulative
calculated area based on the measurements will be rounded off to the nearest tenth of a
square meter.

5.16.6.3 Bridge Deck Grinding. Bridge deck grinding will be measured by the square
meter of pavement ground and accepted. The quantity will be determined by multiplying
the width by the length of the ground area.

5.16.6.4 Concrete Bridge Deck Joint and Crack Repair. Concrete bridge deck joint
and crack repair will be measured by the linear meter.

263
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents

5.16.7 PAYMENT.

5.16.7.1 Spall Repair Concrete. The accepted quantities of spall repair concrete,
measured as provided for above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per square
meter, which shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment,
incidentals, and for doing all the work of preparing, filling, finishing, and texturing of spalls,
complete and in place, including the removal and disposal of waste concrete, and the
reconstruction of the spalled areas.

5.16.7.2 Depth Slab Repair. The accepted quantities of full and partial depth slab
repair concrete, measured as provided for above, will be paid for at the contract unit price
per square meter, which shall include full compensation for doing all preparing, filling,
finishing, and texturing, complete and in place, including the breaking, removal and
disposal of waste concrete, and the reconstruction of the full or partial depth slab.

5.16.7.3 Bridge Deck Grinding. The accepted quantities of bridge deck grinding,
measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price, which shall be full
compensation for the work complete as specified.

5.16.7.4 Concrete Bridge Deck Joint and Crack Repair. The accepted quantities of
concrete bridge deck joint and crack repair measured as provided above, will be paid for
at the contract unit price per linear meter, which price shall be full compensation for the
work, complete in place.

The amount of authorized, completed, and accepted Work, measured as provided

above, will be paid for at the unit price(s) bid in the Bill of Quantities. Such price(s) shall
include furnishing, transporting and placing all materials except those materials specified
to be paid for under other items of Work, and shall include all labor, equipment, tools and
other items of Work necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified in
accordance with Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

51601 Spall Repair Concrete Square Meter
51602 Slab Repair Concrete Square Meter
51603 Bridge Deck Grinding Square Meter
51604 Concrete Bridge Deck Joint and Crack Repair Linear Meter

264
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

Table of Contents SECTION 5.17 - EXTENSION AND WIDENING OF STRUCTURES

5.17.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of extending and/or widening of existing
structures as indicated on the plans, in conformity to the lines, grades, dimensions and
designs shown, in accordance with the specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

This Work shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of Sections 2.02,
"Removal of Structures and Obstructions"; 2.09, "Structural Excavation and Backfill"; 5.01,
"Portland Cement Concrete"; 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel"; 5.03, "Concrete Structures"; 5.05,
"Steel Structures and Miscellaneous Metal Work," in these General Specifications; and all
other pertinent specification sections that refer to the pay items which are to constitute the
complete extended and/or widened structure.

For purposes of this section, the term "extended" shall mean "extended and/or widened",
and the term "extension" shall mean "extension and/or widening".

5.17.2 MATERIALS. Materials shall be those prescribed for the several items which are
to constitute the complete extended structure.

5.17.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. The construction methods shall be those

prescribed for the several items which are to constitute the complete extended structure
and as specified herein.

The Contractor shall verify all pertinent dimensions of the existing structure prior to
ordering materials required for the extensions.

Portions of the old structure shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown on the
plans and all waste materials shall be disposed of as directed. Unless otherwise shown
on the plans, salvageable materials shall be removed in such a manner that they will not
be damaged and shall be stored neatly at approved locations. Salvageable materials so
removed shall remain the property of the Ministry. Any portion of the existing structure,
outside the limits designated for removal, damaged during the operations of the
Contractor, shall be restored to its original condition and at the Contractor's expense.
Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structures unless
approved by the Engineer in writing.

When directed by the Engineer, culverts shall be extended as detailed in Standard

Drawings Nos. E/C/01 and BC/I/01, issued by the Ministry. When the headwalls,
wingwalls and apron are specified on the plans to be reused in the extended culvert, the
portion to be reused shall be severed from the old structure to the lines and details shown
on the plans. The headwall unit shall be moved to the new location by methods approved
by the Engineer, and the extension concrete and reinforcement placed according to the
plan details. Any portion of the headwall unit damaged by the moving operation shall be
restored to its original condition at the expense of the Contractor.

Unless otherwise noted on the plans, a demolition ball, other swinging weight or impact
tool, will be permitted on those portions of the structure not immediately adjacent to the
break line of the concrete. The concrete shall be severed at the break line by pneumatic

265
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

tools. Slabs shall first be sawed along the break line to a depth of twenty (20) millimeters
Table of Contents

prior to beginning the removal of concrete.

Except when otherwise provided on the plans, new reinforcing bars shall be spliced to
exposed bars in the old structure by lap splices as specified in Paragraph 5.02.4.5,
"Splicing," in these General Specifications. When welded splices are permitted on the
plans, they shall conform to the requirements of Paragraph 5.02.4.8, "Welding of
Reinforcement," in these General Specifications. For lap splices (not welded), new
reinforcing steel need not be tied to existing steel, where spacing and/or elevation does
not match that of the existing steel, provided the proper lap length is attained. All splices,
lap or welded, shall be staggered as indicated or directed.

Dowels or starter bars, if indicated in the plans, shall be installed by grouting reinforcing
bars to the lengths shown into the old structure, in accordance with the requirements of
Paragraph 5.15.4.1, "Drilling and Grouting of Anchors," in these General Specifications.

Concrete surfaces which will be in contact with new construction shall be roughened,
cleaned and prepared as specified in Paragraph 5.03.4.7, "Bridge Structure Construction
Joints," in these General Specifications.

The widened portion of bridges and direct-traffic culverts shall not be opened to
construction traffic or to the traveling public until authorized by the Engineer. In this
respect, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Section 9.02, "Traffic Control
through Work Zones," in these General Specifications.

5.17.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE. Quality assurance shall be performed as outlined in the

pertinent specification sections that refer to the pay items which are to constitute the
complete Work; except that the numbers and locations of tests may be modified to those
deemed necessary by the Engineer to determine conformity with the specifications.

5.17.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The quantities of the various items which

constitute the completed and accepted extended structure shall be measured for payment
according to the plans and specifications for the several pay items appearing in the Bill of
Quantities, and in terms of the prescribed units provided for the several pay items. Only
accepted Work shall be included and the dimensions and pay items shall be those shown
on the plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer.

In addition, all incidental work shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, shall be
measured and will be paid for separately as specified elsewhere in these General
Specifications and as specified in the Bill of Quantities.

Headwall units of culverts severed from the old structure and reused at a new location
shall be measured for payment under pay item Removal of Box Culvert and Pipe Culvert
End Section. No separate measurement will be made of relocation work.

5.17.6 PAYMENT. The quantities, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the
unit prices bid for the several pay items as specified in the Bill of Quantities. Such prices
shall be full compensation for furnishing, handling, and placing all materials, for all labor,

266
 MOC General Specifications – November 1998

equipment, tools, and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the work as
Table of Contents

specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," in these General Specifications.

Such payment shall constitute full payment for the completed extended structure, and no
allowance will be made for cofferdam construction, form lumber, falsework, or other
incidental expense.

267
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

November 1998

PART SIX
INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION
Table of Contents

PART SIX: INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 6.01 - CRASHWORTHY SAFETY BARRIERS ............................................... 1

6.01.1 DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................... 1
6.01.2 MATERIALS.............................................................................................. 1
6.01.2.1 Metal Beam Guardrail ................................................................. 1
6.01.2.2 Tensioned Four Rope Wire Rope Guardrail ................................ 1
6.01.2.3 Other Wire Rope ......................................................................... 2
6.01.2.4 Posts and Miscellaneous Barrier Rail Hardware ......................... 2
6.01.2.5 Galvanizing ................................................................................. 3
6.01.2.6 Glare Screens ............................................................................. 4
6.01.2.7 Concrete...................................................................................... 4
6.01.2.8 Reinforcing Steel ......................................................................... 5
6.01.2.9 Guardrail Delineators .................................................................. 5
6.01.2.10 Other Materials........................................................................... 5
6.01.2.11 Reinstallation of Guardrail, Guardrail Terminals, New Jersey
Concrete Barrier and Steel Safety Railing ........................... 5
6.01.2.12 Impact Attenuators .................................................................... 5
6.01.3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .................... 7
6.01.3.1 Metal W-Beam and Thrie-Beam Guardrail .................................. 7
6.01.3.2 Tensioned Four Rope Wire Rope Cable Guardrail ..................... 8
6.01.3.3 Guardrail Anchor Terminals ........................................................ 8
6.01.3.4 New Jersey Concrete Barriers and Terminal Sections ................ 8
6.01.3.5 Impact Attenuators ...................................................................... 9
6.01.3.6 Glare Screens ........................................................................... 10
6.01.3.7 Reinstallation of Guardrail ......................................................... 10
6.01.3.8 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Guardrail Terminals and Impact
Attenuators ................................................................................ 10
6.01.3.9 Steel Safety Railing ................................................................... 10
6.01.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 10
6.01.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 11
6.01.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 12

SECTION 6.02 - CURBS AND GUTTERS .................................................................... 17

6.02.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 17
6.02.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 17
6.02.2.1 Concrete.................................................................................... 17
6.02.2.2 Reinforcing Steel ....................................................................... 17
6.02.2.3 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler .............................................. 17
6.02.2.4 Bituminous Mix .......................................................................... 17
6.02.2.5 Mortar ........................................................................................ 17
6.02.2.6 Bedding ..................................................................................... 17
6.02.2.7 Epoxy Adhesive ........................................................................ 17
6.02.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 18
6.02.3.1 Precast Channelization and Bridge Curb .................................. 18
Table of Contents

6.02.3.2 Cast-in-Place Portland Cement Concrete Curbs, Combined

Curbs and Gutters .................................................................... 18
6.02.3.3 Precast Portland Cement Concrete Curbs and Combined Curbs
and Gutters............................................................................... 20
6.02.3.4 Bituminous Curb........................................................................ 22
6.02.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. .............................................. 22
6.02.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 22
6.02.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 22

SECTION 6.03 - CATCH BASINS, MANHOLES, INLETS AND DRAINAGE

GRATES: ............................................................................................................ 24
6.03.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 24
6.03.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 24
6.03.2.1 Concrete.................................................................................... 24
6.03.2.2 Reinforcing Steel ....................................................................... 24
6.03.2.3 Structural Steel.......................................................................... 24
6.03.2.4 Cast Iron.................................................................................... 24
6.03.2.5 Steel Castings ........................................................................... 24
6.03.2.6 Wrought Iron ............................................................................. 25
6.03.2.7 Bedding Course ........................................................................ 25
6.03.2.8 Precast Concrete Manholes ...................................................... 25
6.03.2.9 Manhole Frames and Covers .................................................... 25
6.03.2.10 Safety Steps and Hand Bars .................................................... 25
6.03.2.11 Catchbasins ............................................................................. 26
6.03.2.12 Catchbasin Frames and Grates ............................................... 26
6.03.2.13 Masonry ................................................................................... 26
6.03.2.14 Pipe Runners ........................................................................... 26
6.03.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 26
6.03.3.1 Alternate Designs ...................................................................... 26
6.03.3.2 Excavation and Backfill ............................................................. 26
6.03.3.3 Concrete Construction .............................................................. 27
6.03.3.4 Masonry .................................................................................... 27
6.03.3.5 Placing Castings ....................................................................... 27
6.03.3.6 Welded Grates and Frames ...................................................... 27
6.03.3.7 Cleaning .................................................................................... 27
6.03.3.8 Manholes................................................................................... 27
6.03.3.9 Adjustment of Elevation of Manhole Cover and Inlet Drainage
Grate ............................................................................................. 28
6.03.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. .............................................. 29
6.03.4.1 General ..................................................................................... 29
6.03.4.2 Concrete Products .................................................................... 29
6.03.4.3 Steel and Iron Castings ............................................................. 29
6.03.4.4 Other Materials.......................................................................... 29
6.03.4.5 Construction .............................................................................. 29
6.03.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 29
6.03.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 29
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.04 - PIPE UNDERDRAIN AND IRRIGATION PIPE .................................. 31

6.04.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 31
6.04.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 31
6.04.2.1 Plastic Pipe Underdrains ........................................................... 31
6.04.2.2 Bituminous Coated Steel Pipe Underdrains .............................. 31
6.04.2.3 Plastic Irrigation Pipe ................................................................ 31
6.04.2.4 Steel Irrigation Pipe ................................................................... 31
6.04.2.5 Perforations ............................................................................... 31
6.04.2.6 Granular Backfill Filter Material ................................................. 32
6.04.2.7 Geotextile Fabric ....................................................................... 32
6.04.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 32
6.04.3.1 Pipe Underdrain ........................................................................ 32
6.04.3.2 Irrigation Pipe ............................................................................ 33
6.04.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 33
6.04.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 33
6.04.5.1 Pipe Underdrain ........................................................................ 33
6.04.5.2 Irrigation Pipe ............................................................................ 34
6.04.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 34

SECTION 6.05 - STORM SEWERS .............................................................................. 36

6.05.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 36
6.05.2 TYPES OF PIPE FOR STORM SEWERS .............................................. 36
6.05.3 REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX STORM SEWER............................... 36
6.05.4 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 36
6.05.4.1 Asbestos-Cement Pipes ............................................................ 36
6.05.4.2 PVC Pipe................................................................................... 36
6.05.4.3 Granular Material for Pipe Bedding and Backfilling. .................. 36
6.05.4.4 Bitumen Emulsion ..................................................................... 37
6.05.5 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. .................................................... 37
6.05.5.1 Handling of Pipes ...................................................................... 37
6.05.5.2 Pipe Storm Sewer Requirements .............................................. 37
6.05.5.2.1 Excavation ................................................................... 37
6.05.5.2.2 Laying .......................................................................... 38
6.05.5.2.3 Backfilling .................................................................... 39
6.05.5.2.4 Cleaning and Inspecting of Storm Sewer Pipes .......... 39
6.05.5.2.5 Testing of Pipelines Generally ..................................... 40
6.05.5.2.6 Testing on Non-Pressure Pipelines ............................. 40
6.05.5.3 Reinforced Concrete Box Storm Sewer .................................... 40
6.05.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 41
6.05.7 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 41
6.05.7.1 Storm Sewer Pipes ................................................................... 41
6.05.7.2 Reinforced Concrete Box Storm Sewer .................................... 41
6.05.7.3 Unauthorized Work ................................................................... 41
6.05.8 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 41

SECTION 6.06 - RIPRAP AND SLOPE PROTECTION ................................................ 44

6.06.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 44
Table of Contents

6.06.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 44
6.06.2.1 Stone for Riprap ........................................................................ 44
6.06.2.2 Grout ......................................................................................... 44
6.06.2.3 Concrete.................................................................................... 44
6.06.2.4 Sacks ........................................................................................ 44
6.06.2.5 Gabions ..................................................................................... 44
6.06.2.6 Reinforcing Steel ....................................................................... 46
6.06.2.7 Wire Mesh Slope Protection ...................................................... 46
6.06.2.8 Wire Enclosed Riprap ............................................................... 46
6.06.2.9 Geotextile Fabric ....................................................................... 46
6.06.2.10 Joint Filler ................................................................................. 46
6.06.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 46
6.06.3.1 Loose Riprap ............................................................................. 47
6.06.3.2 Grouted Riprap.......................................................................... 47
6.06.3.3 Sacked Concrete Revetment .................................................... 47
6.06.3.4 Gabions ..................................................................................... 47
6.06.3.5 Reinforced Concrete Slope Protection ...................................... 48
6.06.3.5.1 Surface Preparation .................................................... 48
6.06.3.5.2 Reinforcing Steel and Joints ........................................ 48
6.06.3.5.3 Concrete Placement .................................................... 48
6.06.3.5.4 Curing .......................................................................... 48
6.06.3.6 Wire Mesh Slope Protection ...................................................... 48
6.06.3.7 Paving Tile Slope Protection ..................................................... 49
6.06.3.8 Wire Enclosed Riprap ............................................................... 49
6.06.3.9 Geotextile Fabric ....................................................................... 49
6.06.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 49
6.06.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 49
6.06.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 50

SECTION 6.07 - DITCH LININGS, WASH CHECKS, AND SLOPE DRAINS ................ 52
6.07.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 52
6.07.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 52
6.07.2.1 Concrete.................................................................................... 52
6.07.2.2 Reinforcing Steel and Steel Mesh ............................................. 52
6.07.2.3 Bituminous Mixture.................................................................... 52
6.07.2.4 Riprap........................................................................................ 52
6.07.2.5 Galvanized Sheet Metal ............................................................ 52
6.07.2.6 Anchor Stakes ........................................................................... 52
6.07.2.7 Stone ......................................................................................... 52
6.07.2.8 Grout ......................................................................................... 53
6.07.2.9 Bedding Course ........................................................................ 53
6.07.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 53
6.07.3.1 Excavation................................................................................. 53
6.07.3.2 Concrete Ditch Linings, Concrete Wash Checks and Concrete
Cut Slope Drains ...................................................................... 53
6.07.3.2.1 Bedding Course ........................................................... 53
6.07.3.2.2 Forms .......................................................................... 53
Table of Contents

6.07.3.2.3 Concrete Placement .................................................... 53

6.07.3.2.4 Curing .......................................................................... 53
6.07.3.3 Grouted Riprap Stone Ditch Linings and Wash Checks ............ 53
6.07.3.4 Bituminous Waterways and Slope Drains ................................. 54
6.07.3.4.1 Bedding Course ........................................................... 54
6.07.3.4.2 Forms .......................................................................... 54
6.07.3.4.3 Placing Mixture ............................................................ 54
6.07.3.5 Metal Slope Drains .................................................................... 54
6.07.3.6 Backfilling and Finishing Work .................................................. 54
6.07.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 54
6.07.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 54
6.07.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 55

SECTION 6.08 - PIPE CULVERTS ............................................................................... 56

6.08.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 56
6.08.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 56
6.08.2.1 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast) ............................. 56
6.08.2.1.1 Description .................................................................. 56
6.08.2.1.2 Requirements .............................................................. 56
6.08.2.1.3 Basis of Acceptance .................................................... 56
6.08.2.1.4 Testing of Precast Reinforced Concrete Pipe ............. 57
6.08.2.1.5 End Sections ............................................................... 57
6.08.2.1.6 On-Site Fabrication...................................................... 57
6.08.2.2 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast) ............................. 58
6.08.2.2.1 Description .................................................................. 58
6.08.2.2.2 Requirements .............................................................. 58
6.08.2.2.3 Basis of Acceptance .................................................... 58
6.08.2.2.4 On-Site Fabrication...................................................... 59
6.08.2.3 Reinforced Concrete Pipe (Cast-in-Place) and Reinforced
Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place) .......................................... 60
6.08.2.3.1 Description .................................................................. 60
6.08.2.3.2 Requirements .............................................................. 60
6.08.2.3.3 Basis of Acceptance .................................................... 60
6.08.3 EQUIPMENT........................................................................................... 60
6.08.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 60
6.08.4.1 Excavation and Forming Bed for Pipe ....................................... 60
6.08.4.2 Laying Pipe ............................................................................... 61
6.08.4.2.1 General........................................................................ 61
6.08.4.2.2 Precast Concrete Pipe and Pipe Arches ..................... 61
6.08.4.2.3 Rubber Gasket Type Pipe ........................................... 61
6.08.4.2.4 Sealing Pipe ................................................................ 61
6.08.4.2.5 Cast-in-Place Concrete Pipe and Pipe Arches ............ 61
6.08.4.2.6 Bedding ....................................................................... 62
6.08.4.2.7 Backfilling .................................................................... 62
6.08.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 62
6.08.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 63
6.08.7 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 63
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.09 - WATER WELL EXTENSIONS ............................................................ 65

6.09.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 65
6.09.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 65
6.09.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 65
6.09.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 65
6.09.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 65
6.09.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 66

SECTION 6.10 - DIKES................................................................................................. 67

6.10.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 67
6.10.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 67
6.10.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 67
6.10.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 68
6.10.5 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 68

SECTION 6.11 - FENCES, GATES AND GUARDS ...................................................... 69

6.11.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 69
6.11.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 69
6.11.2.1 Chain Link Fence ...................................................................... 69
6.11.2.2 Barbed Wire .............................................................................. 69
6.11.2.3 Combination Fence Fabric ........................................................ 69
6.11.2.4 Tension Wire ............................................................................. 69
6.11.2.5 Posts and Braces ...................................................................... 69
6.11.2.6 Miscellaneous Hardware ........................................................... 70
6.11.2.7 Tie Wire ..................................................................................... 70
6.11.2.8 Structural Steel.......................................................................... 70
6.11.2.9 Concrete.................................................................................... 70
6.11.2.10 Reinforcing Steel ...................................................................... 70
6.11.2.11 Wire Rope ................................................................................ 70
6.11.2.12 Barbed Wire Supporting Arms.................................................. 70
6.11.2.13 Stretcher Bars .......................................................................... 71
6.11.2.14 Stretcher Bar Bands ................................................................. 71
6.11.2.15 Gates........................................................................................ 71
6.11.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 71
6.11.3.1 Fencing ..................................................................................... 71
6.11.3.2 Animal Guards .......................................................................... 72
6.11.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 72
6.11.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 72
6.11.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 73

SECTION 6.12 - SIDEWALKS, DRIVE PADS AND MEDIAN PAVING ......................... 75

6.12.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 75
6.12.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 75
6.12.2.1 Concrete.................................................................................... 75
6.12.2.2 Reinforcing Steel ....................................................................... 75
6.12.2.3 Mortar ........................................................................................ 75
Table of Contents

6.12.2.4 Expansion Joint Filler ................................................................ 75

6.12.2.5 Bituminous Mixture.................................................................... 75
6.12.2.6 Bedding Course ........................................................................ 75
6.12.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 75
6.12.3.1 Cast-in-Place Sidewalks, Drive Pads, Median Paving .............. 75
6.12.3.1.1 Excavation ................................................................... 75
6.12.3.1.2 Bedding Course ........................................................... 76
6.12.3.1.3 Forms .......................................................................... 76
6.12.3.1.4 Placing Concrete ......................................................... 76
6.12.3.1.5 Finishing ...................................................................... 76
6.12.3.1.6 Joints ........................................................................... 76
6.12.3.1.7 Curing .......................................................................... 76
6.12.3.2 Precast (Tiled) Sidewalk, Drive Pad and Median Paving .......... 76
6.12.3.2.1 General........................................................................ 76
6.12.3.2.2 Manufacture of Tiles .................................................... 77
6.12.3.2.3 Concrete Tiles ............................................................. 77
6.12.3.2.4 Tile Sidewalk Construction .......................................... 77
6.12.3.2.5 Testing of Tiles ............................................................ 78
6.12.4 SIDEWALK, DRIVE PAD AND MEDIAN PAVING TOLERANCES ......... 80
6.12.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. .............................................. 80
6.12.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 80
6.12.7 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 81

SECTION 6.13 - MONUMENTS ................................................................................... 82

6.13.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 82
6.13.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 82
6.13.2.1 Concrete.................................................................................... 82
6.13.2.2 Reinforcing Steel ....................................................................... 82
6.13.2.3 Metalwork .................................................................................. 82
6.13.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 82
6.13.3.1 General ..................................................................................... 82
6.13.3.2 Laying........................................................................................ 82
6.13.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. .............................................. 83
6.13.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 83
6.13.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 83

SECTION 6.14 - SHOTCRETE (PNEUMATICALLY APPLIED MORTAR).................... 84

6.14.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 84
6.14.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 84
6.14.2.1 General ..................................................................................... 84
6.14.2.2 Applicable Publications ............................................................. 85
6.14.2.3 Mix Design Requirements ......................................................... 86
6.14.2.3.1 General........................................................................ 86
6.14.2.3.2 Acceptance of Design Mix ........................................... 87
6.14.2.3.3 Shotcrete Strengths ...................................................... 87
6.14.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING ........................................................... 88
6.14.3.1 Submittals ................................................................................. 88
Table of Contents

6.14.3.2 Personnel .................................................................................. 89

6.14.3.3 Preconstruction Tests ............................................................... 89
6.14.3.4 Safety ........................................................................................ 90
6.14.4 EQUIPMENT........................................................................................... 90
6.14.4.1 Proportioning and Mixing Equipment ........................................ 90
6.14.4.2 Water and Air Supply Systems.................................................. 91
6.14.4.3 Delivery Equipment ................................................................... 91
6.14.4.4 Placing Equipment .................................................................... 91
6.14.5 CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................... 91
6.14.5.1 Preparation of Surface for Shotcreting ...................................... 91
6.14.5.2 Shotcrete Application ................................................................ 92
6.14.5.3 Shotcrete Curing ....................................................................... 92
6.14.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 93
6.14.6.1 Quality Assurance Sampling and Testing ................................. 93
6.14.6.2 Defective Shotcrete ................................................................... 94
6.14.7 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 94
6.14.8 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 94

SECTION 6.15 - MODULAR RETAINING WALLS ........................................................ 96

6.15.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 96
6.15.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 96
6.15.2.1 Concrete.................................................................................... 96
6.15.2.2 Reinforcing Steel ....................................................................... 96
6.15.2.3 Steel Components..................................................................... 96
6.15.2.4 Geotextile Fabric ....................................................................... 96
6.15.2.5 Underdrain ................................................................................ 96
6.15.2.6 Drainage Layer.......................................................................... 96
6.15.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... 96
6.15.3.1 Preliminary ................................................................................ 96
6.15.3.2 Foundation ................................................................................ 96
6.15.3.3 Concrete Modules ..................................................................... 97
6.15.3.4 Backfill ....................................................................................... 97
6.15.3.5 Drainage.................................................................................... 97
6.15.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................... 97
6.15.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.............................................................. 97
6.15.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................... 98

SECTION 6.16 - GEOTEXTILES................................................................................... 99

6.16.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 99
6.16.2 MATERIALS............................................................................................ 99
6.16.2.1 General ..................................................................................... 99
6.16.2.2 Definitions ................................................................................. 99
6.16.2.3 Materials Acceptance .............................................................. 100
6.16.2.3.1 Source Approval ........................................................ 100
6.16.2.3.2 Control Testing .......................................................... 100
6.16.2.4 Physical Requirements ........................................................... 100
6.16.2.5 Fastener Pins .......................................................................... 100
Table of Contents

6.16.2.6 Other Materials........................................................................ 101

6.16.2.7 Acceptance Procedures for Non-Specification Fabric ............. 103
6.16.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 104
6.16.3.1 General .................................................................................... 104
6.16.3.2 Field Seams. ........................................................................... 105
6.16.3.2.1 General...................................................................... 105
6.16.3.2.2 Stitch Requirements .................................................. 105
6.16.3.2.3 Minimum Seam Allowance ........................................ 105
6.16.3.2.4 Seam Type ................................................................ 105
6.16.3.3 Overlaps .................................................................................. 105
6.16.3.4 Slope Protection and Channel Lining ...................................... 105
6.16.3.5 Underdrains............................................................................. 106
6.16.3.6 Subgrade or Embankment Foundation Stabilization ............... 106
6.16.3.7 Drainage Blankets ................................................................... 107
6.16.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................. 107
6.16.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT............................................................ 107
6.16.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................. 108

SECTION 6.17 - SOIL NAILED WALL......................................................................... 109

6.17.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................... 109
6.17.2 MATERIALS.......................................................................................... 109
6.17.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 110
6.17.3.1 Submittals ............................................................................... 110
6.17.3.2 Qualifications........................................................................... 110
6.17.3.3 Sequence ................................................................................ 111
6.17.3.4 Excavation............................................................................... 111
6.17.3.5 Initial Shotcrete ....................................................................... 111
6.17.3.6 Nail Holes ................................................................................ 112
6.17.3.7 Final Shotcreting ..................................................................... 113
6.17.3.8 Tolerances .............................................................................. 113
6.17.4 NAIL INSTALLATION AND TESTING .................................................. 113
6.17.4.1 Test Nail Installation. ............................................................. 113
6.17.4.2 Nail Testing ............................................................................. 114
6.17.4.2.1 Equipment ................................................................. 114
6.17.4.2.2 Pullout Testing ........................................................... 115
6.17.4.2.3 Acceptance Criteria ................................................... 115
6.17.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................. 115
6.17.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT............................................................ 115
6.17.7 PAYMENT............................................................................................. 115

SECTION 6.18 - REINFORCED EARTH STRUCTURES ........................................... 118

6.18.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................... 118
6.18.2 MATERIALS.......................................................................................... 118
6.18.2.1 General ................................................................................... 118
6.18.2.2 Concrete Facing ...................................................................... 118
6.18.2.2.1 Casting ...................................................................... 118
6.18.2.2.2 Curing ........................................................................ 118
Table of Contents

6.18.2.2.3 Removal of Forms ..................................................... 118

6.18.2.2.4 Concrete Finish ......................................................... 119
6.18.2.2.5 Tolerances................................................................. 119
6.18.2.2.6 Acceptance................................................................ 119
6.18.2.2.7 Handling, Storage and Transporting .......................... 119
6.18.2.3 Leveling Concrete ................................................................... 120
6.18.2.4 Reinforcing Strips and Tie Strips ............................................. 120
6.18.2.4.1 Physical and Mechanical Properties .......................... 120
6.18.2.4.2 Weight of Coating ...................................................... 120
6.18.2.5 Fasteners ................................................................................ 120
6.18.2.6 Joint Filler ................................................................................ 121
6.18.2.7 Coil Embeds/Loop Imbeds ...................................................... 121
6.18.2.8 Coil Embed Grease ................................................................. 121
6.18.2.9 Coil Bolt ................................................................................... 121
6.18.2.10 Connector Pins....................................................................... 121
6.18.2.11 Backfill Materials .................................................................... 121
6.18.2.11.1 Mechanical Requirements ....................................... 121
6.18.2.11.2 Physico-Chemical Requirements ............................ 122
6.18.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 122
6.18.3.1 Excavations ............................................................................. 122
6.18.3.2 Foundation Preparation ........................................................... 122
6.18.3.3 Erection ................................................................................... 122
6.18.3.4 Backfill Placement ................................................................... 123
6.18.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. ............................................ 123
6.18.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT............................................................ 123
6.18.5.1 Concrete Facing ...................................................................... 123
6.18.5.2 Reinforcing Strips .................................................................... 124
6.18.5.3 Backfill ..................................................................................... 124
6.18.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................. 124

SECTION 6.19 - ROCK BOLTS, CABLE BOLTS AND ROCK ANCHORS ................. 126
6.19.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................... 126
6.19.2 MATERIALS.......................................................................................... 127
6.19.3 SUBMITTALS ....................................................................................... 127
6.19.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 128
6.19.4.1 General. .................................................................................. 128
6.19.4.2 Installation Procedures ............................................................ 130
6.19.4.2.1 Bolts ........................................................................... 130
6.19.4.2.2 Anchors ..................................................................... 131
6.19.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................. 131
6.19.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT............................................................ 131
6.19.7 PAYMENT............................................................................................. 131

SECTION 6.20 - EXPLORATORY DRILLING ............................................................. 135

6.20.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................... 135
6.20.2 MATERIALS.......................................................................................... 135
6.20.2.1 Drive Pipe................................................................................ 135
Table of Contents

6.20.2.2 Casing ..................................................................................... 135

6.20.2.3 Samplers ................................................................................. 135
6.20.2.4 Thin Wall Sample Tubes ......................................................... 135
6.20.2.5 Diamond Core Drill Bits ........................................................... 135
6.20.2.6 Sample Storage Bags ............................................................. 135
6.20.2.7 Sample Jars ............................................................................ 136
6.20.2.8 Jar Cartons.............................................................................. 136
6.20.2.9 Boulder and Rock Core Boxes ................................................ 136
6.20.3 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS ................................................................. 136
6.20.3.1 Drilling Procedures .................................................................. 136
6.20.3.1.1 Soil Samples ............................................................. 136
6.20.3.1.2 Rock Samples ........................................................... 137
6.20.3.2 Sampling ................................................................................. 137
6.20.3.2.1 Split-Spoon Barrel ..................................................... 137
6.20.3.2.2 Thin-Walled Tube ...................................................... 137
6.20.3.3 Testing ..................................................................................... 138
6.20.3.4 Backfilling Boreholes ................................................................ 139
6.20.4 BORING LOG DATA ....................................... 139
6.20.5 GROUND WATER LEVELS ................................................................. 140
6.20.6 MARKING AND PACKAGING SAMPLES ............................................ 140
6.20.6.1 Driven Soil Samples ................................................................ 140
6.20.6.2 Undisturbed Soil Samples ....................................................... 140
6.20.6.3 Rock Samples ......................................................................... 141
6.20.7 DELIVERY OF SAMPLES .................................................................... 141
6.20.7.1 Soil Samples ........................................................................... 141
6.20.7.2 Rock Samples ......................................................................... 141
6.20.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................. 142
6.20.9 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT............................................................ 142
6.20.9.1 Split-Spoon Sampling of Soils ................................................. 142
6.20.9.2 Thin-Walled Sampling of Soils ................................................ 142
6.20.9.3 Rock Core Drilling ................................................................... 142
6.20.10 PAYMENT............................................................................................ 142
6.20.10.1 Split-Spoon Sampling ............................................................ 142
6.20.10.2 Thin-Walled Tube Sampling .................................................. 142
6.20.10.3 Rock Core Drilling ................................................................. 142

SECTION 6.21 - DRAINAGE LAYER .......................................................................... 144

6.21.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................... 144
6.21.2 MATERIALS.......................................................................................... 144
6.21.2.1 Geocomposite Drains .............................................................. 144
6.21.2.2 Geocomposite Sheet Drains ................................................... 144
6.21.2.3 Geocomposite Pavement Edge Drains ................................... 145
6.21.2.4 Sheathing Material .................................................................. 145
6.21.2.5 Geogrid .................................................................................... 146
6.21.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 148
6.21.3.1 Sheathing Materials ................................................................ 148
6.21.3.2 Geocomposite Sheet Drain ..................................................... 148
Table of Contents

6.21.3.3 Geogrid ................................................................................... 148

6.21.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ............................................. 150
6.21.5 MEASUREMENT .................................................................................. 150
6.21.6 PAYMENT............................................................................................. 150

SECTION 6.22 - JOINT SEALANT AND JOINT FILLER ............................................. 152

6.22.1 Description ............................................................................................. 152
6.22.2 Materials ................................................................................................ 152
6.22.2.1 General .................................................................................... 152
6.22.2.2 Joint Sealing Compounds ........................................................ 153
6.22.2.2.1 Hot Type Joint Sealing Compounds ............................. 153
6.22.2.2.2 Cold Type Joint Sealing Compounds ........................... 155
6.22.2.2.3 Two-component Elastomeric Sealants ......................... 155
6.22.2.2.4 One-Component Elastomeric Sealants ........................ 155
6.22.2.2.5 Preformed Elastomeric Sealants .................................. 156
6.22.2.2.6 Non-elastomeric Sealants ............................................ 156
6.22.2.2.7 Non-skinning Mastic Sealants ...................................... 156
6.22.2.3 Miscellaneous Materials .......................................................... 156
6.22.2.3.1 Joint Cleaner ................................................................ 156
6.22.2.3.2 Joint Primer/Sealer ....................................................... 156
6.22.2.3.3 Bond Breaker Tape ...................................................... 157
6.22.2.3.4 Sealant Backer Rod ..................................................... 157
6.22.2.4 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler ............................................ 157
6.22.2.4.1 Description ................................................................... 157
6.22.2.4.2 Requirements ............................................................... 157
6.22.2.4.3 Concrete Control/Expansion Joint Fillers ..................... 157
6.22.2.4.4 Cellular Foam Expansion Joint Fillers .......................... 157
6.22.2.4.5 Gaskets ........................................................................ 158
6.22.2.5 Miscellaneous Materials .......................................................... 158
6.22.3 Certificate of Guarantee ........................................................................ 159
6.22.4 Construction Requirements .................................................................. 159
6.22.4.1 General ................................................................................... 159
6.22.4.2 Joint Sealing Compounds ....................................................... 159
6.22.4.2.1 Weather Limitations ..................................................... 159
6.22.4.2.2 Joint Surface Preparation ............................................. 159
6.22.4.2.3 Installation ................................................................... 159
6.22.4.2.4 Cure and Protection .................................................... 161
6.22.4.3 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler ............................................. 161
6.22.5 Quality Assurance ................................................................................. 161
6.22.6 Method of Measurement ....................................................................... 162
6.22.7 Payment................................................................................................ 172
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PART SIX: INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 6.01 - CRASHWORTHY SAFETY BARRIERS

6.01.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of the construction of crashworthy metal
beam and rope cable guardrail, New Jersey concrete and other similarly shaped safety
barriers, barrier terminals, portable and permanent impact attenuators, glare screens,
and steel safety railing. This work also includes the reinstallation/retrofitting of metal
beam and rope cable guardrail, New Jersey Concrete Barriers and guardrail terminals,
impact attenuators and steel safety railings in accordance with these General
Specifications and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the plans or
established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

W-Beam Guardrail
Thrie Beam Guardrail
Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail
W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End
W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End
Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End
Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End
Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal
Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Approach End
Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End
Reinstallation of Guardrail
Reinstallation/Retrofit of Guardrail Terminal
New Jersey Concrete Barrier
Reinstallaltion of New Jersey Concrete Barrier
Impact Attenuator
Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator
Glare Screen
Steel Safety Railing
Reinstallation of Steel Safety Railing

6.01.2 MATERIALS.

6.01.2.1 Metal Beam Guardrail. Rail elements and backup plates for W-Beam or
Thrie-Beam rail shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 180, Class A, Type 2
galvanized. Rail elements to be erected on a radius of forty-five (45) meters or less shall
be shaped in the shop. The radius of curvature shall be stenciled on the back of each
section of rail. Rail elements shall be designed to be spliced at intervals not to exceed
either four (4) or eight (8) meters and such splices shall be made at posts, unless
otherwise shown on the plans.

6.01.2.2 Tensioned Four Rope Wire Rope Guardrail. The ropes shall be of
nineteen (19) millimeter diameter 3x7 (6/1) coreless construction having a minimum

1
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

breaking load of seventeen and seven-tenths (17.7) tons. The rope shall exhibit a
minimum modulus of elasticity of eight thousand three hundred (8300) kilograms per
square millimeter based on an area of two hundred eighty-three (283) square
millimeters, after prestressing by an approved method to ensure the ropes behave
elastically and retain their tension in service.

All wire used for the manufacture of the ropes shall be general purpose wire to BS
2763 grade 1370, A, or to AASHTO M30, Type II, finally zinc coated by the hot dip
method.

All threaded terminals and rigging screws shall be hot dip galvanized to BS 729 or
AASHTO M232.

The posts, which are designed to collapse on impact, shall be one thousand and
eighty (1080) millimeters long, six (6) millimeters thick steel to BS 4360 grade 50A, one
hundred (100) millimeters by thirty-two (32) millimeters "Z" (median applications) or "S"
section (shoulder applications) as determined by the contract but always with the
rounded edge of the post facing the traffic, and shall be slotted at one end through the
center of the web one hundred thirteen (113) millimeters deep by twenty-two (22)
millimeters wide prior to galvanizing, in which the ropes are located. A black
polyethylene cap to which is affixed a retroreflective Class 1 prismatic reflector (color to
be specified in the contract) complying with Table 1 of BS 873:Part 6, shall be placed on
the top of the post. A polyethylene excluder shall be placed at the bottom of the post to
prevent the ingress of sand, etc., into the foundation.

The anchor frames shall be fabricated from mild steel and galvanized to BS 729
before being embedded in a block of concrete one and twenty-two hundredths (1.22)
meters long by one (1) meter wide by one (1) meter deep.

A check rope, one and eight-tenths (1.8) meters in length, eight (8) millimeters
diameter, with a minimum breaking load of three and nine-tenths (3.9) tons when tested
as an assembly, fitted with a galvanized thimble at one end and a fork terminal at the
other, shall be provided at each anchor. The thimble shall be passed over the end of
the tail rope and the fork terminal connected to the anchor.

6.01.2.3 Other Wire Rope. Wire rope for metal beam guardrail anchor terminals
shall conform to AASHTO M 30, Type II, Class A. Equivalent galvanized wire rope with
a minimum breaking strength of nineteen thousand four hundred (19,400) kilograms will
be acceptable.

6.01.2.4 Posts and Miscellaneous Barrier Rail Hardware. Unless otherwise

indicated on the plans, all steel posts, plates, angles, channels, brackets, and anchor
assembly units shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 36. Cold rolled post
sections shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 446, Grade B.

The swage fittings for anchor terminals shall be machined from hot-rolled carbon
steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 576, Grade 1035, and shall be
annealed suitable for cold swaging. A lock pin hole shall be drilled through the swage

2
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

fitting head to accommodate a seven (7) millimeter, plated, spring steel pin to retain the
stud in the proper position. The stud shall be steel conforming to the requirements of
ASTM A 449. Prior to galvanizing, a ten (10) millimeter slot for the locking pin shall be
milled into the stud end. The swage fitting, stud, and nut shall develop the full breaking
strength of the wire cable.

Anchor rod eyes shall be hot forged or formed with full penetration welds. After
fabrication, anchor rods with eyes that have been formed with any part of the eye below
eight hundred seventy degrees Celsius (870_ C) during the forming operation or with
eyes that have been closed by welding shall be thermally stress relieved prior to
galvanizing. The completed anchor rod, after galvanizing, shall develop a strength of
twenty-three thousand (23,000) kilograms.

All bolts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 307, except those designated
on the plans as high strength shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 325 or A
449. All nuts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 563, Grade A or better,
except those designated on the plans as high strength shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM A 563, Grade C or better.

Clevises shall be drop forged galvanized steel and shall develop the full specified
breaking strength of the wire cable.

The concrete insert assembly for Type 4 anchor terminals shall be fabricated as
shown on the plans. Ferrules shall be steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A
108, Grade 12 L 14. Inserts shall be tapped to the dimensional requirements specified
in ASTM A 563 for nuts receiving galvanized bolts. Insert assembly wires shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM A 510, Grade 1030, and have a minimum tensile strength
of seven thousand (7,000) kilograms per square centimeter. Welded attachment of wire
to ferrule shall develop the full tensile strength of the wire.

Turnbuckles shall be steel of commercial quality and shall have a minimum breaking
strength of one thousand five hundred (1,500) kilograms. Turnbuckles shall be
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153. Compensating and non-compensating
cable ends shall be cast steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 27 or
malleable iron conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 47. Compensating devices
shall have spring constants of eight thousand (8,000) kilograms per meter, plus or minus
five hundred (500) kilograms per meter, and permit a travel of one hundred fifty (150)
millimeters, plus or minus twenty-five (25) millimeters. All elements shall be galvanized.
The cable connecting hardware shall develop the full strength of the wire rope. At all
locations where the cable is connected to a cable end with a wedge type connection,
one (1) wire of the wire rope shall be crimped over the base of the wedge to hold the
cable firmly in place.

6.01.2.5 Galvanizing. All of the exposed materials for guardrail, guardrail anchor
terminals, impact attenuators, glare screen, and delineators, which are made of steel or
iron, shall be galvanized after fabrication unless otherwise specified. Galvanization shall
be in accordance with the specific referenced specification. When no galvanization

3
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

requirements is included in the specification, galvanization shall be in accordance with

ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 as appropriate.

All components shall be fabricated and galvanized for installation without further
drilling, bending, cutting or welding. When field modifications are approved by the
Engineer, or when minor damage to the galvanized coating occurs, the exposed surface
shall be repaired by thoroughly cleaning and applying two (2) applications of Paint No.
3 as specified in Paragraph 5.13.2.6, "Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide Primer" in these General
Specifications.

6.01.2.6 Glare Screens. Glare screens shall be chain-link mesh conforming to

ASTM A 491 or ASTM A 392 or plastic slats as detailed on the plans and in the Bill of
Quantities. Chain-link mesh size and wire diameter shall be as specified in the plans.

Posts shall be galvanized steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53 of the diameter shown
on the plans. Posts shall be furnished with galvanized watertight caps.

Tension wire shall conform to ASTM A 641, Class 1, Hard Temper, with a minimum
diameter of four and five tenths (4.5) millimeter.

Tension cable shall conform to ASTM A 474 or A 475, six (6) millimeter minimum
diameter, high strength grade. All hardware shall be typical of that shown on the plans
and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153.

When required by the plans or Special Specifications, the fence fabric, posts, and all
exposed galvanized hardware shall be coated with a minimum twenty-five hundredths
(0.25) millimeter coating of bonded polyvinyl chloride (PVC). The polyvinyl chloride shall
be applied by the thermal extrusion process and shall withstand a minimum exposure
of one thousand five hundred (1,500) hours at sixty-two degrees Celsius (62 _ C) without
any deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1499.

Slats, when required, shall be either wood or plastic and of the dimensions shown on
the plans. Wood slats shall be treated with a preservative.

Plastic slats shall be made of polyethylene or polymeric materials. They shall be

color pigmented, and designed to retard ultraviolet penetration. The material shall
remain flexible without distortion and without becoming brittle through a temperature
range of zero degrees Celsius (0 _ C) to sixty degrees Celsius (60_ C). The system will
use a nonmetallic base designed so the flexible slat can be retained in place by two (2)
friction locking pins or a U-shaped retainer at the bottom and top of the glare screen.

Samples for the color for plastic slats shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

6.01.2.7 Concrete. Concrete for post supports, burried footings, and anchors shall
conform to the requirements of Minor Concrete as described in Subsection 5.03.9
"Concrete For Minor Structures," in these General Specifications. Concrete for the New
Jersey concrete barriers and terminal sections shall conform to Class C in Subsection
5.01.1, "Description" in these General Specifications. All other concrete, unless

4
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

otherwise specified, shall conform to Class B in Subsection 5.01.1 "Description" or

"Minor Concrete" as described in Subsection 5.03.9 "Concrete for Minor Structures,” in
these General Specifications.

6.01.2.8 Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel shall be of the size and grade shown
on the plans and shall conform to the provisions of Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in
these General Specifications.

6.01.2.9 Guardrail Delineators. Metal W-Beam and Thrie-Beam guardrail

delineators, when required, shall conform to the requirements of the plans, Special
Specifications, M.U.T.C.D., and Paragraph 6.5.2.10 "Delineators" in these General
Specifications. Hardware shall conform to the requirements shown on the plans. An
acceptable alternative delineator will be a replaceable barrier marker post with a locking
mechanism compatible with the base. The replaceable barrier marker post will be a
minimum of three hundred fifty (350) millimeters long and seventy (70) millimeters wide.
The replaceable barrier marker post should be available in a variety of colors and
compatible with reflective sheeting. When shown on the Plans or stated in the Special
Specifications reflective sheeting shall be placed on the approach ends of metal beam
guardrail terminals and be Type IV high intensity retroreflective sheeting with Class III
backing meeting the requirements of Paragraph 9.05.2.9 "Retroreflective Sheeting" in
these General Specifications.

New Jersey concrete barrier delineators shall conform to the requirements of the
plans, Special Specifications, M.U.T.C.D. Subsection 5.03 F and Paragraph 9.05.2.10
"Delineators” in these General Specifications. Epoxy Resin Adhesives for bonding
delineators to hardened Portland cement concrete shall conform to AASHTO M 237.

6.01.2.10 Other Materials. Other materials shall be as shown in the plans, stated
in the Special Specifications or in the U.S. American Road Builders Transportation
Association (ARBTA) Bulletin No. 268 "A Guide to Standardized Highway Barrier Rail
Hardware.” Special materials for impact attenuators shall be as specified by the
manufacturer.

6.01.2.11 Reinstallation of Guardrail, Guardrail Terminals, New Jersey Concrete

Barrier and Steel Safety Railing.

1. Metal beams, cables, posts, anchor terminal sections, concrete barriers or safety
railings shall be salvaged materials, as provided by the Ministry or as salvaged by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

2. Bolts, nuts, washers, fittings, adhesives, and accessories shall be new materials
conforming to the requirements for the construction of new guardrail, concrete barrier
and steel safety railing as detailed in Section 5.05 - Steel Structures and Miscellaneous
Metal Work and Section 6.01 Crashworthy Safety Barriers in these General
Specifications.

6.01.2.12 Impact Attenuators. - Rail elements for thrie beam rail (used in G.R.E.A.T.
Impact Attenuators) shall conform to AASHTO M 180, Class B, Type galvanized. Rail

5
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

element joints shall be fabricated to lap not less than thirty (30) centimeters and be
bolted. The rail metal, in addition to conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 180,
shall withstand a cold bend, without cracking, of two hundred (200) grads around a
mandrel of a diameter equal to two and one half (2½) times the thickness of thesheet
metal plate.

Wire rope restraining cable for G.R.E.A.T. impact attenuators shall be a minimum of
twenty-two (22) millimeter nominal diameter galvanized wire rope conforming to ASTM
A 603, Class A.

Pull out and secondary cable for G.R.E.A.T. impact attenuators shall be minimum
nine and five tenths (9.5) millimeter nominal diameter galvanized wire rope conforming
to ASTM A 603, Class A.

Restraining chains for G.R.E.A.T. impact attenuators shall be twelve (12) millimeter
nominal size and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 413, Grade 28.

Materials for the impact attenuation systems shall conform to the requirements of the
HDM, Volume 4, Standard Drawings TB1 Series, A, B and C, and TB3 Series, A through
I.

QuadGuard metal work shall be fabricated from either M1020 Merchant Quality or
ASTM A-36 steel. After fabrication, metal work shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A-123. All welding shall be done by or under the direction of a certified welder.

The QuadGuard System shall be assembled with galvanized fasteners. All bolts,
nuts and washers shall be Commercial Quality “American National Standard” unless
otherwise specified.

The QuadGuard diaphragms shall be made from 10 gauge steel Quad-beam

sections. The diaphragms shall be available in widths of 610, 760 and 910 mm [2', 2'-6"
and 3']. Two support legs shall be welded to the Quad-beam. Ski-shaped plates shall
be welded to the bottom of the support legs. The diaphragms shall be designed to lock
onto and be guided by a ground-mounted, center monorail support structure.

The QuadGuard fender panels shall be fabricated from 10 gauge steel Quad-beam
sections. Each fender panel shall be drilled and slotted in accordance with the
manufacturer’ s specifications so that when assembled in the field, the front end shall be
bolted to a diaphragm by means of the three (3) 15.9 mm (5/8") bolts.

Impact attenuation devices with cartridges filled with liquids, such as antifreeze
agents, that may become a skid hazard when impacted, shall not be used; replaceable
cartridges with foam-filled cardboard, lightweight concrete and similar materials will be
acceptable. All units shall be identified by identification labels fastened at a protected
but conspicuous location.

6
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.01.3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

6.01.3.1 Metal W-Beam and Thrie-Beam Guardrail. Guardrail shall be installed at

the locations shown on the plans or as ordered by the Engineer. Posts shall be installed
by driving plumb to the required grades or set in concrete as required by the plans.
When the pavement is within one (1) meter of the guardrail, the posts shall be set before
placing the pavement.
If ground conditions are such that pilot holes are necessary to prevent damage to
posts during driving, all space around steel posts after driving shall be filled with dry
sand or fine gravel.

When posts are set in concrete, the concrete shall be placed against the excavated
earth unless otherwise permitted. All curved guardrail with a radius of forty-five (45)
meters or less shall be bent in the shop.

Continuous lengths of rail or cable shall be installed and alignment checked and
adjusted before final tightening of bolts, etc. Unless otherwise specified, bolted
connections shall be torqued to six (6) to seven (7) kilogram-meters. Bolts that extend
at least six (6) millimeters but not more than twenty-five (25) millimeters beyond the nuts
shall be used.

Rail elements shall be erected in a smooth continuous line with the laps in the
direction of traffic flow.

Posts may be erected by driving with approved mechanical devices. The method of
driving shall not substantially alter the cross-sectional dimensions of the posts or
materially damage the coating. Battered tops shall not be accepted. Posts which, in the
opinion of the Engineer, are bent or otherwise damaged during or after erection, shall
be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

Damaged galvanized surfaces may be repaired, only if so approved by the Engineer.

Such surfaces shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing and then by applying two
(2) coats of an approved zinc-dust zinc-oxide primer.

The guardrail ropes shall be joined together by rigging screws, which are also used
for tensioning. The maximum length of any one (1) individual rope shall be one hundred
fifty-four (154) meters. Immediately prior to each anchorage there shall be a tail rope
six (6) meters in length and connected to the anchorage in the ground. All ropes shall
be fitted on each end with a threaded terminal of right hand or left hand thread as
appropriate to ensure a right hand and left hand thread is in the rigging screw to effect
the tension. A minimum insertion of twenty-five (25) millimeters into the rigging screw
is required. The tail rope shall have a right hand thread on the end which is connected
to the anchor.

The installation of the cable guardrail shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and working drawings.

7
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The foundation for the post shall be as detailed on the manufacturer's working
drawings unless advised otherwise in the Contract due to local ground conditions. It
shall be of sufficient size to ensure that it is not displaced when the post is knocked
down, and withstand an overturning moment of six thousand (6000) Nm.
When all the components are in place, the ropes shall be uniformly tensioned to 25
kN by turning the rigging screws. Backfill above the tops of concrete anchor footings
shall not be placed before the cables are tensioned.

6.01.3.3 Guardrail Anchor Terminals. Guardrail anchor terminals shall be installed

at the locations shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer in accordance with the
Standard Drawings in the M.O.C. Highway Design Manual Volume 4 or as modified by
the Contract Drawings or Special Specifications.

Posts, anchors, and footings shall be driven or installed in concrete as required.

Concrete shall be placed against the excavated earth unless otherwise permitted.

Bolted connections shall be torqued to six (6) to seven (7) kilogram-meters unless
otherwise specified.

6.01.3.4 New Jersey Concrete Barriers and Terminal Sections. Construction of

concrete barriers shall also conform to the Ministry’s Sta ndard Drawings, TB-2 Series.
Concrete barriers shall present a smooth, uniform appearance in their final position,
conforming to the horizontal and vertical lines shown on the plans or ordered by the
Engineer, and shall be free of lumps, sags, or other irregularities. The top and exposed
faces of the barrier shall not vary more than more than six (6) millimeters between any
two (2) contact points when tested with a four (4) meter straightedge laid on the
surfaces. Transverse expansion joints of one (1) centimeter thick premoulded filler shall
be provided in all New Jersey Barriers at spacings not exceeding fifteen (15) meters
center to center.

Concrete barriers may be precast, cast-in-place with fixed forms, or extruded with slip
forms at the Contractor's option. Concrete barriers constructed by casting-in-place with
fixed forms shall conform to the provisions in Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" in
these General Specifications.

Concrete barriers constructed by means of an extrusion machine or other similar type

equipment shall be of thoroughly consolidated concrete, and the exposed surfaces shall
conform to the requirements of Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" and this Subsection
6.01.3 “Construction and Installation Requirements” in these General Specifications.
The Contractor shall furnish evidence of successful operation of the extrusion machine
or other equipment by constructing a trial section of barrier or by other evidence suitable
to the Engineer. Concrete shall be fed to the extrusion machine at a uniform rate. The
machine shall be operated under sufficient uniform restraint to forward motion to produce
a thoroughly consolidated mass of concrete free from surface pits larger than two (2)
centimeters in diameter and requiring no further finishing. The concrete shall be of such
consistency that, after extrusion, it will maintain the shape of the barrier without support.
The grade for the top of the concrete barrier shall be indicated by an offset guide line
set by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The forming portion of the

8
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

extrusion machine shall be readily adjustable vertically during the forward motion of the
machine to conform to the predetermined grade line. A grade line gauge or pointer shall
be attached to the machine in such a manner that a continual comparison can be made
between the barrier being placed and the established grade line as indicated by the
offset guide line. Other means of controlling barrier grade may be permitted by the
Engineer. Expansion joints of the width shown on the plans shall be constructed by
sawing through the barrier section to its full width. If sawing is performed before the
concrete has hardened, the adjacent portions of the barrier shall be firmly supported with
close fitting shields. When sawing is performed after the application of curing
compound, the exposed faces of the barrier in the vicinity of the joint shall be treated
with curing compound after sawing the joint.

If stationary forms for concrete barriers are used, they shall be removed as soon as
possible after the concrete has set enough to maintain the shape of the barrier without
support in order to facilitate finishing. The surface shall be free from pits larger than two
(2) centimeters in diameter. The surface shall be given a final soft brush finish with
strokes parallel to the line of the barriers. Finishing with a brush application of grout will
not be permitted. Surfaces shall be finished as necessary to produce smooth, even
surfaces of uniform texture and appearance, free from bulges, depressions, and other
imperfections. The use of power sanders, carborundum stones, or disks may be
required to remove bulges or other imperfections.

Exposed surfaces of concrete barriers shall be cured by the "water method" in

accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 5.03.4.10 "Curing and Protection" in these
General Specifications. The Engineer may permit the concrete barriers to be cured by
means of the "curing compound method" in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph
5.03.4.10 "Curing and Protection" in these General Specifications.

6.01.3.5 Impact Attenuators. G.R.E.A.T. system and other impact attenuators shall
be installed in accordance with the requirements shown in the M.O.C. Highway Design
Manual - Volume 4 Standard Drawings TB 1 series A, B, and C and TB 3 series A
through I, or as modified by the Contract Drawings or Special Specifications and with the
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. A copy of these recommendations
and instructions shall be furnished to the Engineer upon delivery of the materials.

The QuadGuard System shall consist of crushable cartridges surrounded by a

framework of steel Quad-beam guardrail which can telescope rearward during head-on
impacts. The QuadGuard System shall have a center monorail which will resist lateral
movement during side angle impacts. The nose shall consist of a formed plastic nose
wrap.

A bay describes a section of the QuadGuard System consisting of a cartridge, a

diaphragm and two fender panels. Each bay shall be fitted with an energy absorbing
cartridge. The outside of the cartridge shall be fabricated from a weather resistant
plastic. The front portion of the system shall be fitted with Type I cartridges. The rear
portion of the system shall be fitted with Type II cartridges. All cartridges shall include
a cartridge replacement indicator.

9
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The back end of each Quad-beam fender panel shall overlap and be connected to
the diaphragm of the next bay by means of a bolt and enlarged “mushroom” washer.
The bolt fits through the long horizontal slot in the forward fender panel. This permits
the movement, front to back, of one set of fender panels relative to the panels in the
underlying-rearward bay. The back portion of each fender panel shall be tapered to help
maximize performance during wrong-way, redirective impacts.

The monorail support structure shall be made of steel and be anchored to a specified
concrete pad. The monorail shall prevent lateral movement, vertical movement and
overturning movement of the diaphragms during design impacts.

The nose section shall contain a nose cover and a crushable cartridge and is not
counted as a bay. The nose cover shall be made from a plastic material formulated to
resist weathering. The nose shall attach to the front diaphragm. Standard colors shall
be gray or yellow.

6.01.3.6 Glare Screens. Glare screen fabric shall be placed on the face of the posts
designated by the Engineer. On curves, the fabric shall be placed on the face of the
post which is on the outside of the curve.

The fabric shall be stretched taut and securely fastened to the posts as shown on the
standard plans. The fabric shall be cut and each span attached independently at all pull
and brace posts. Rolls of wire fabric shall be joined by weaving a single strand into the
end of the rolls to form a continuous mesh between pull posts.

6.01.3.7 Reinstallation of Guardrail. Remove and store the existing guardrail,

posts and appurtenances. Remove and dispose of posts that are set in concrete.
Replace and reinstall guardrail, posts and hardware damaged during removal, storage
or resetting.

6.01.3.8 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Guardrail Terminals and Impact Attenuators.

Remove and store the existing attenuator guardrail, hardware posts and appurtenances.
Remove and dispose of posts that are set in concrete. Replace and reinstall the
attenuator and including the hardware damaged or lost during removal, storage or
resetting.

6.01.3.9 Steel Safety Railing. Construction requirements shall conform to the

Ministry’ s standard drawings and to Section 5.05 - "Steel Structures and Miscellaneous
Metal Work" in these General Specifications.

6.01.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The guardrails and crashworthy

safety barriers will be inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with
Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the crashworthy safety barriers shall be sampled, tested
and evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods referenced in
Subsection 6.01.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications. The installation of the

10
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

crashworthy safety barriers will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4,

"Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

The manufacturer of the guardrail systems shall be approved to a Quality Assurance

scheme complying with ISO 9002 (eg., EN29002, BS 5750 Part 2) as a supplier of
components for use in vehicle safety barriers.

Only components complying with the manufacturer's specification may be used.

Copies of Certificates of Guarantee and test reports shall be provided for the
components of each guardrail system manufactured off site.

6.01.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Guardrail, Reinstallation of Guardrail, New

Jersey Concrete Barrier, Glare Screen, Steel Safety Railing and Reinstallation of Steel
Safety Railing shall be measured by the linear meter along the front face excluding
terminal sections for all Work of each type authorized, completed and accepted by the
Engineer based on the dimensions as shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer.

The pay limits for guardrail and anchor terminal sections shall be as specified in the
Ministry’s Standard Drawings, Series TB-4 and TB-5.

No measurement will be made for barrier base, dowel bars or of concrete filling or
backing behind curbs. Excavation for the New Jersey Barriers and removing and
resetting guardrail shall not be measured separately but will be considered as subsidiary
work except when such excavation is part of and is measured in conjunction with the
roadway excavation. In such instances, the barrier excavation shall be measured and
included in the quantity of unclassified excavation as provided in Section 2.03,
"Excavation" in these General Specifications.

There shall be separate measurement for guardrail transition sections including

hardware necessary to meet the requirements of the installation when the transition
section is shown on the Plans or Standard Drawings and listed in the Bill of Quantities.
Otherwise such work shall be considered subsidiary to the standard guardrail section.

Guardrail and New Jersey Barrier delineators shall not be measured for separate
payment. Their installation will be considered subsidiary to the construction of the
guardrail or New Jersey barriers.

Terminals, Terminal Sections, and Impact Attenuators shall be measured by the unit
of each for all Work of each type authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer
based on the number of units shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer.

Reinstallation and retrofitting of guardrail terminals and impact attenuators shall be

measured by the unit for all work of each type authorized completed and accepted by
the Engineer based on the number of units shown on the Plans or ordered by the
Engineer base on the number of units shown on the Plans or ordered by the Engineer.

11
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

There shall be no separate measurement of the backfill, concrete, reinforcing steel

or any other component materials required for this Work as they are considered
subsidiary to the items listed in this Subsection for measurement.

6.01.6 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted Work, as measured above, will be
paid for at the contract unit prices in the Bill of Quantities, which prices shall include all
required materials, equipment, tools, labor, and all other items necessary for the proper
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2., "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

60101 W-Beam Guardrail Linear Meter

6010101 W-Beam Guardrail, Standard Section Linear Meter

6010102 W-Beam Guardrail, Transition Section Linear Meter

6010201 Thrie Beam Guardrail, Standard Section Linear Meter

6010202 Thrie Beam Guardrail, Transition Section Linear Meter

60103 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Linear Meter

6010301 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail, Standard Section Linear Meter

6010302 Tensioned Four wire Rope Cable Guardrail, Transition Section Linear Meter

60104 (Type), Guardrail Linear Meter

6010401 (Type), Guardrail, Standard Section Linear Meter

6010402 (Type), Guardrail, Transition Section Linear Meter

60105 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End Unit

6010501 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, BCT (Type 1) Unit

6010502 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, SRT (Type 1A) Unit

6010503 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Cut Slope Buried Unit
End (Type 2)

6010504 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, ET-2000/BEST Unit

6010505 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Median Anchor, (Type 4) Unit

6010506 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Anchor to Structural Unit

Element or concrete Barrier, (Type 5)

6010507 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End (Type) Unit

60106 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End Unit

6010601 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End Anchor (Type 3) Unit

6010603 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Cut Slope Buried End Unit

12
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

(Type 2)

6010604 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal Trailing End (Type) Unit

60107 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End Unit

6010701 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Connector (Thrie Unit
to W-Beam)

6010702 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End SENTRE Unit

6010703 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Cut Slope Buried Unit
End (Type 2A)

6010704 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Anchor to Unit

Structural Element or Concrete Barrier

6010705 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, (Type) Unit

60108 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End Unit

6010801 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Anchor Turndown Unit
90° to Concrete Footing

6010802 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Cut Slope Buried Unit
End (Type 2A)

6010803 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, (Type) Unit

60109 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal Unit

6010901 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Approach Unit
End, Anchor Block

6010902 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Approach Unit
End, Cut Slope Buried End

6010903 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Approach Unit
End, (Type)

6010904 Tensioned Four Wire Rope cable Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Unit
Anchor Block

6010905 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Unit
Cut Slope Buried End

6010906 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Trailing Unit
End, (Type)

60110 Reinstallation of Guardrail Linear Meter

6011001 Reinstallation of Guardrail, W-Beam, Standard Section Linear Meter

6011002 Reinstallation of Guardrail, W-Beam, Transition Section Linear Meter

6011003 Reinstallation of Guardrail, Thrie Beam, Standard Section Linear Meter

6011004 Reinstallation of Guardrail, Thrie Beam, Transition Section Linear Meter

6011005 Reinstallation of Guardrail, Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable, Linear Meter
Standard Section

13
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6011006 Reinstallation of Guardrail Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable, Linear Meter
Transition Section

6011007 Reinstallation of Guardrail, (Type), Standard Section Linear Meter

6011008 Reinstallation of Guardrail, (Type), Transition Section Linear Meter

60111 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Guardrail Terminal Unit

60112 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Guardrail Terminal, Approach End Unit

6011201 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach Unit

End, BCT (Type 1)

6011202 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach Unit

End, SRT (Type 1A)

6011203 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach Unit

End, Cut Slope Buried End (Type 2)

6011204 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach Unit

End, ET-2000/BEST

6011205 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach Unit

End, Anchor to Structural Element or Concrete Barrier, (Type 5)

6011206 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach Unit

End, (Type)

6011210 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Unit

Approach End, Connector (Thrie to W-Beam)

6011211 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Unit

Approach End, SENTRE

6011212 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Unit

Approach End, Cut Slope Buried End (Type 2A)

6011213 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Unit

Approach End, Anchor to Structural Element or Concrete Barrier

6011214 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Unit

Approach End, (Type)

6011220 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Unit

Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Anchor Block

6011221 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Unit

guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Cut Slope Buried End

6011222 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Unit

Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, (Type)

60113 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End Unit

6011301 Reinstallation/lRetrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing Unit

End, Anchor Turndown 90° to Concrete Footing

6011302 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing Unit

End, Anchor (Type 3)

Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing

14
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6011303 End, Cut Slope Buried End, (Type 2) Unit

6011304 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing Unit

End, (Type)

6011310 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing Unit

End, Anchor Turndown 90° to Concrete Footing

6011311 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing Unit

End, Cut Slope Buried End (Type 2A)

6011312 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing Unit

end, (Type)

6011320 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Unit

Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Anchor Block

6011321 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Unit

Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Cut Slope Buried End

6011322 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Unit

Guardrail Terminal Trailing End, (Type)

60114 New Jersey Concrete Barrier Linear Meter

6011401 New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Single Face Linear Meter

6011402 New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Double Face Linear Meter

60115 New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section Unit

6011501 New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section, Approach End Unit

6011502 New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section, Trailing End Unit

60116 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier Linear Meter

6011601 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Single Face Linear Meter

6011602 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Double Face Linear Meter

60117 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section Unit

6011701 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section, Unit

Approach End

6011702 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section, Unit

Trailing End

60118 Impact Attenuator Unit

6011801 Impact Attenuator, GREAT Unit

6011802 Impact Attenuator, Sand-filled Plastic Containers Unit

6011803 Impact Attenuator, HY-DRI Unit

6011804 Impact Attenuator, HI-DRO Unit

6011805 Impact Attenuator, QuadGuard Unit

6011806 Impact Attenuator, (Type) Unit

15
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

60119 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator Unit

6011901 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, GREAT Unit

6011902 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, Sand Filled Plastic Unit

Containers

6011903 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, HY-DRI Unit

6011904 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, HY-DRO Unit

6011905 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, QuadGuard Unit

6011906 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, (Type) Unit

60120 Glare Screen Linear Meter

6012001 Glare Screen, Fabric, Type 1A Linear Meter

602002 Glare Screen, Fabric, Type 1B Linear Meter

6012003 Glare Screen, Fabric, Type 1C Linear Meter

6012004 Glare Screen, Slats, Type 2 Linear Meter

6012005 Glare Screen, (Type) Linear Meter

60121 Steel Safety Railing Linear Meter

60122 Reinstallation of Steel Safety Railing Linear Meter

16
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.02 - CURBS AND GUTTERS

6.02.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of the construction of Portland cement
concrete curbs, curbs and gutters, gutters, and bituminous concrete curbs and gutters
in accordance with the specifications and in conformity to the locations, lines, grades,
and typical sections shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Precast Channelization Curb
Precast Bridge Curb
Concrete Curb
Bituminous Curb
Combined Curb and Gutter
Gutters

6.02.2 MATERIALS.

6.02.2.1 Concrete. Portland cement concrete shall conform to the requirements of

Subsection 5.01.1, "Description" for Class A concrete, except that footing concrete may
conform to Minor Concrete as described in Subsection 5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor
Structures" in these General Specifications.

6.02.2.2 Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of

Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

6.02.2.3 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler. Preformed expansion joint filler shall
meet the requirements of AASHTO M-33.

6.02.2.4 Bituminous Mix. Bituminous mix for bituminous curbs and gutters shall
meet the materials, mix design and mix preparation requirements of Section 4.05,
"Bituminous Concrete Pavement" in these General Specifications for Bituminous
Concrete Wearing Course, Grading III, except that the asphalt content shall be
increased approximately one-half (½) percent or as directed by the Engineer.

6.02.2.5 Mortar. Mortar shall conform to the requirements of Subparagraph

5.01.3.1.2, "Mortar" in these General Specifications.

6.02.2.6 Bedding. Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of

Subsection 3.02.2, "Materials for Aggregate Subbase," Grading I or II in these General
Specifications.

6.02.2.7 Epoxy Adhesive. Epoxy adhesive shall conform to the requirements of

AASTO M 235 for the type of application required.

17
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.02.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

6.02.3.1 Precast Channelization and Bridge Curb.

1. Casting Curb Sections. Curb sections shall be hydraulically pressed into

approved molds under conditions of controlled temperature and humidity. Section shall
be water or steam cured until the concrete attains one hundred (100) percent of
specified strength. Curbs shall have a clean finish with smooth surfaces. Segregation,
honeycombing or broken corners will not be allowed and remedial measures will not be
accepted.

2. Installation. The adhesive shall be placed uniformly on the cleaned pavement

surface or on the bottom of the curb sections in a quantity sufficient to result in complete
coverage of the area of contact of the curb and the pavement, with no voids present and
with a slight excess after the curb has been pressed in place. The curb shall be placed
in position and pressure applied until firm contact is made with the pavement. Excess
adhesive around the edge of the marker, excess adhesive on the pavement, and
adhesive on the exposed surfaces of the marker shall be immediately removed. The
curb shall be protected against impact until the adhesive has hardened.

Mixing of adhesive shall be performed in limited quantities such that the curb sections
shall be aligned and pressed into place within five (5) minutes after mixing the adhesive
components. Any mixed batch of adhesion which becomes so viscous that the adhesive
is not readily extruded from under the curb on application of slight pressure shall not be
used.

Curbs shall be placed to the lines shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall mark the location where each section is to be placed and the
marks shall be approved by the Engineer prior to beginning mixing operations. No curb
sections shall be placed over longitudinal or transverse joints of the pavement surface.

Final acceptance of the curbs will be given by the Engineer only after proper
incorporation in the Work.

6.02.3.2 Cast-in-Place Portland Cement Concrete Curbs, Combined Curbs and

Gutters.

1. Subgrade. The subgrade for concrete curb, gutter, combined curb and gutter,
and cast-in-place concrete base shall be excavated to the grades and sections shown
on the plans. If the section is not indicated, the width to be excavated shall be thirty (30)
centimeters each side of the outside edges of the curb or gutter. The subgrade shall be
of uniform density as approved by the Engineer. When required by the plans or ordered
by the Engineer, the foundation shall be subexcavated a minimum of one hundred fifty
(150) millimeters and the material replaced with bedding material. The bedding material
shall be compacted to meet the requirements of Type 90 compaction as specified in
Paragraph 2.05.4.3, "Earth Embankment Lift Thickness and Compaction Requirements"
in these General Specifications. All foundation shall be rolled or compacted to provide

18
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

a smooth surface and shall be approved by the Engineer and moistened before placing
concrete.

2. Forms.

(1) Stationary Side Form Construction. Forms for edge curb or header curb
constructed monolithically with concrete pavement or base course shall be of steel.
Forms for all other types of curb and gutter shall preferably be of steel but, with the
permission of the Engineer, may be of wood for curb or gutter of nonstandard section
or when small quantities are involved. All forms shall be sufficiently strong and rigid and
securely staked and braced to obtain a finished product correct to the dimensions, line
and grade required. Forms shall be cleaned and oiled before each use.

(2) Slip-Form Construction. The curb and/or gutter may be constructed by the
use of approved slip-form or extrusion equipment provided the completed curb and/or
gutter is true to shape, grade and line, and the concrete is dense and of the required
surface texture.

The extrusion machine shall be equipped with grade line gages or pointers in a
manner which will provide a continuous comparison between the curb, curb and gutter,
or gutter being placed and the planned grade, indicated by an offset guide line. The
finished curb shall comply with the following tolerances:

Top of curbs ± 3 mm in 3 meters; vertical face on longitudinal axis, ± 6 mm in 3

meters.

3. Placing Concrete. Edge curb and header curb shall be constructed monolithically
with concrete pavement. Immediately after finishing, the pavement area where the curb
is to be constructed shall be cleaned of all laitance and roughened. The concrete shall
be placed, consolidated, and shaped with a steel template conforming to the section
shown on the plans. Concrete for other types of curbs and gutters shall be placed upon
the previously prepared and moistened subgrade. The concrete shall be consolidated
with an approved internal type vibrator. The surface shall be shaped by use of a steel
template to produce the section shown on the plans. The edges shall be rounded with
edgers to form the radii indicated on the plans.

4. Contraction and Construction Joints for Curbs and/or Gutters. Joints shall be
constructed at the intervals and places shown on the plans. All joints shall be of the type
and materials and conform to the dimensions shown on the plans.

When constructed monolithically with or abutting concrete pavement, the joints in

curbs and/or gutters shall coincide with joints in the pavement.

When constructed separately from concrete pavement, or adjacent to flexible base

or surface courses, weaker plane construction joints in curbs and/or gutters may be
constructed by sawing through the curb and to a depth of not less than thirty (30)
millimeters below the surface of the gutter, or they may be formed by inserting an
approved removable metal template in the fresh concrete, or by other methods approved

19
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

by the Engineer. Sealing of the joints will not be required unless the curb and/or gutter
is constructed monolithically with or abutting concrete pavement.

Unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, contraction

joints shall be provided at 3 meters on center, and shall be either tooled (in fresh
concrete) or sawed (in hardened concrete). Further, expansion joints shall be located
at 9 meters on center. Preformed joint fillers shall be provided for expansion joints and
locations abutting catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, sidewalks and other fixed
objects.

Construction joints shall be preplanned to coincide with expansion joints.

5. Finish. The exposed surfaces shall be finished full width with a trowel and edger.
The top face of curbs shall receive a light brush finish. Within twenty-four (24) hours
after the concrete is placed, the forms of the roadway face of curbs shall be removed
and the concrete given a light rubbed finish.

6. Curing. Curbs and/or gutters shall be moist cured until stripped and finished, and
then cured in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 5.03.4.10, "Curing and
Protection" in these General Specifications.

7. Removal of Forms. Forms may be removed as soon as practical, as long as no

damage results to the curb or gutter. Required finishing shall be performed immediately
followed by application of curing compound.

8. Backfilling. The area adjacent to curbs and/or gutters shall be backfilled with
approved material to the top edges of the curbs or gutters or to the elevation shown on
the plans. The backfill shall be placed and compacted in accordance with Type 95
compaction as defined in Paragraph 2.05.4.3 "Earth Embankment Lift Thickness and
Compaction Requirements" in these General Specifications.

6.02.3.3 Precast Portland Cement Concrete Curbs and Combined Curbs and
Gutters.

1. Subgrade. The subgrade for the concrete base shall be as specified above in
Subparagraph 6.02.3.2.1, "Subgrade" in these General Specifications.

2. Forms. Forms shall be approved and constructed of steel fiberglass or other

durable material. All forms shall be sufficiently strong and rigid and securely supported
to obtain a finished product correct to the shape and dimensions required. Forms shall
be cleaned before each use.

For radii of twelve (12) meters or less, forms shall be curved and curbs, curbs and
gutter or gutter of appropriate radii shall be used. The use of straight units shall not be
permitted.

Precast concrete curb may be constructed by the use of approved extrusion or other
specially designed equipment, provided the finished curb is true to the dimensions

20
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

shown on the plans and the concrete is properly consolidated and finished to the
required surface texture.

3. Placing Concrete. All concrete shall be placed, consolidated, and shaped to the
section shown on the plans. The concrete shall be consolidated with an approved
vibrator. Edges of precast curb shall be rounded as shown on the plans.

The method used in placing concrete shall be such as to produce a uniformly dense
concrete element.

Unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the concrete base
shall be not less than one hundred fifty (150) mm thick and of a width that will allow for
a one hundred fifty (150) mm wide backing, to be poured upon completion of placing the
units.

The sand-cement mortar bedding shall be not less than twenty (20) mm thick. After
curbs, curbs and gutter or gutter have been laid, a continuous concrete backing not less
than one hundred fifty (150) mm wide shall be poured against the units. For curbs
abutting earth or aggregate surfaces the backing shall be to a height of fifty (50) mm
below the top of the curb. For curbs abutting surfaces to be filled or paved, the backing
shall be to a height which permits laying of tiles or similar surface. The top of the
backing shall be battered downward from the back of the curb to a height of fifty (50)
mm.

No pavement layer shall be laid against curbs until such time as the backing has
cured and backfilled.

Unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed, joints between precast units shall
be five (5) mm wide and grouted as specified. Joints shall be tooled to produce a
smooth circular section not more than three (3) mm deep.

The vertical alignment of the finished curb shall not depart from true level by more
than six (6) mm and at any point, maximum deviation of the tip of the curb under a
straightedge shall be not greater than three (3) mm in three (3) meters. The horizontal
alignment shall not depart from that shown on the plans by more than twelve (12) mm,
nor deviate from a straight edge by more than three (3) mm in three (3) meters.

4. Finish. Unformed, exposed surfaces shall be finished in accordance with

Paragraph 5.03.4.9, "Finishing" in these General Specifications.

Formed, exposed surfaces need not receive additional finishing except when air
bubbles or other surface flaws require correction as determined by the Engineer.

5. Curing. Precast curb sections shall be cured in accordance with the provisions
of Paragraph 5.03.4.10, "Curing and Protection" in these General Specifications using
membrane, water, or steam curing.

21
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6. Removal of forms. Forms may be removed from elements cast at the site as
soon as practical as long as damage results.

6.02.3.4 Bituminous Curb. Immediately prior to placing bituminous curb, a tack

coat of asphalt at the rate ordered by the Engineer shall be applied to the surface upon
which bituminous curb is to be placed. The curb shall be placed, shaped, and
compacted true to line and grade with extrusion or other equipment capable of shaping
and thoroughly compacting the materials to the required cross section and uniform
surface texture.

Construction of bituminous curbs, may be performed with automatic curbing

machines which place, compact and finish straight or curved curbs, for streets, traffic
islands and other roadside areas. In this case, no forms shall be used. Instead,
interchangeable mold patterns shall be used to form the required shapes. For
construction methods of asphalt curbs the latest Asphalt Institute Specification Series
No. 3 shall apply. Typical details for installation of asphalt concrete curbs are provided
in the Ministry’ s Standard Drawing CGS-5, which shall govern, unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer.

6.02.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The curbs and gutters will be

inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance
of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the curbs and gutters shall be sampled, tested and
evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods referenced in
Subsection 6.02.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications. The construction of the
curbs and gutters will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or
Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications. For bituminous curbs the stability
and density requirements will be waived.

6.02.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Precast Curb, Precast Channelization Curb,

Precast Bridge Curb, Concrete Curb, Bituminous Curb, Combined Curb and Gutter, and
Gutters, shall be measured by the linear meter of each type of Work authorized,
completed, and accepted by the Engineer based on the dimensions shown on the plans
or ordered by the Engineer. Symmetrical curbs and gutters shall be measured along the
centerline. Asymmetrical sections shall be measured along the inside face (toward
roadway centerline). Excavation for the various types of curbs and gutters shall not be
measured separately for payment but will be considered as subsidiary Work, except
when such excavation is a part of, and is measured in conjunction with, the roadway
excavation. In such instances, the excavation shall be measured and included in the
quantity of Roadway Excavation - computed as a pay item as provided in Section 2.03,
"Excavation" in these General Specifications.

No separate measurement shall be made for concrete base for precast curb, nor will
measurement be made for bedding material, except that excavation and backfill ordered
and acceptably performed in excess of one hundred fifty (150) millimeters below the
section shall be measured in accordance with Subsection 2.09.8, "Method of
Measurement" in these General Specifications.

22
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.02.6 PAYMENT. The amount of authorized, completed and accepted Work as

measured above will be paid at the contract unit prices in the Bill of Quantities, which
price shall be full compensation for furnishing all required materials, equipment, tools,
labor, including reinforcement and joints, and all other items necessary for the proper
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

60201 Precast Curb Linear Meter

6020101 Precast Channelization Curb, Type ___ Linear Meter

6020102 Precast Bridge Curb, Type ___ Linear Meter

60202 Concrete Curb Linear Meter

6020201 Concrete Curb, Type ___ Linear Meter

60203 Bituminous Curb Linear Meter

6020301 Bituminous Curb, Type ___ Linear Meter

60204 Combined Curb and Gutter Linear Meter

6020401 Combined Curb and Gutter, Type ___ Linear Meter

60205 Gutter Linear Meter

6020501 Gutter, Type ___ Linear Meter

23
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.03 - CATCH BASINS, MANHOLES, INLETS AND DRAINAGE GRATES

6.03.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of the finishing and installing of precast
or cast-in-place catch basins, manholes, inlets and outlets, including metal frames,
grates, and covers, in accordance with the plan details and these specifications, at the
locations and to the lines and grades shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.

This Work shall also consist of changing the elevation of manhole, catch basin or inlet
covers or grates, including rebuilding of the existing manhole, catch basin, or inlet top,
preparation of the seat and placement anew of the existing manhole cover or grate, in
conformity with the lines and grades shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Catch Basins
Manholes
Inlets
Drainage Grate
Adjustment of Elevation of Manhole Cover and Drainage Inlet Grate

6.03.2 MATERIALS.

6.03.2.1 Concrete. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Class C as

specified in Subsection 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete" in these General
Specifications.

6.03.2.2 Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements as

specified in Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

6.03.2.3 Structural Steel. Structural steel shall conform to the requirements as

specified in Section 5.05, "Steel Structures and Miscellaneous Metal Work" in these
General Specifications.

6.03.2.4 Cast Iron. Gray-iron castings shall conform to AASHTO M 105, Class 25S.
Castings shall be manufactured to conform to the sizes and dimensions shown on the
plans.

1. Test Specimens. Two (2) test specimens shall be cast for each casting that will
be subjected to traffic loads. The specimens may be cast attached to or separate from
the casting. Specimens shall be of such size that a bar nineteen (19) millimeters in
diameter and twenty (20) centimeters in length can be machined from each specimen.

6.03.2.5 Steel Castings.

1. General. Mild to medium-strength steel castings shall conform to AASHTO M

103. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified, castings shall be Grade 65-35
fully annealed in accordance with ASTM E 44. Steel castings shall conform to the
dimensions, sizes and sections shown on the plans.

24
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Test Specimens. Two (2) test specimens shall be cast for each casting. Test
specimens shall be of such size that a bar nineteen (19) millimeters in diameter and
twenty (20) centimeters in length can be machined for each specimen.

6.03.2.6 Wrought Iron.

1. General. Wrought iron bars, plates, and shapes shall conform to the sizes and
dimensions shown on the plans or specified.

2. Requirements.

(1) Rolled Wrought Iron Shapes and Bars. Rolled wrought-iron shapes and bars
shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 207.

(2) Wrought-Iron Plates. Wrought-iron plates shall conform to ASTM A 42.

6.03.2.7 Bedding Course. Bedding Course material shall conform to the

requirements of Subsection 3.02.2, "Materials," Grading I or Grading II in these General
Specifications.

6.03.2.8 Precast Concrete Manholes. The Contractor may use any type of precast
concrete manhole segments provided that they have been approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor should submit with his Tender, full details and drawings of any
alternative type which he proposes to use.

Precast concrete manhole chamber, taper and shaft sections and chamber and shaft
cover slabs shall be BSS 556: Part 2, 1972.

6.03.2.9 Manhole Frames and Covers. All manhole frames and covers shall be of
local Saudi Production and shall be of grey cast iron, of heavy duty design (forty tons
test load) and on tensile strength conform to ASTM A48-76 Class 30A or better. Frames
shall have a square base seventy-five (75) centimeters per side, a height of fifteen (15)
centimeters, and have a clear circular opening of sixty (60) centimeters diameter.
Covers shall be circular, and shall be equipped with a locking device, have prising slots,
lifting holes and non-skid pattern top. The total weight of frame and cover shall be two
hundred (200) kilograms minimum.

The word "STORM" in five (5) centimeter letters shall be cast on the cover in English
and Arabic. Bearing surfaces between cast iron frames and covers shall be machined
and fitted together to prevent rocking. All castings shall be coated with coal or tar pitch
varnish to which sufficient oil has been added to make a smooth finish. When manholes
are used as drop inlets, the manhole frame and cover will be replaced by a catchbasin
frame and grate as per Paragraph 6.03.2.2, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General
Specifications.

6.03.2.10 Safety Steps and Hand Bars. Safety steps and hand bars shall be
manufactured of twenty (20) millimeters diameter mild steel deformed reinforcing bars
and hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153.

25
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.03.2.11 Catchbasins. Catchbasins shall be precast and constructed of Class C

concrete, cast in steel watertight forms, thoroughly cured, all as detailed on the drawings
and specified. Such units shall be cast in a casting yard prepared and fitted for this
purpose at least three (3) weeks before they are used. Catchbasin shall be set on a
fifteen (15) centimeters base of Class B concrete.

6.03.2.12 Catchbasin Frames and Grates. All catchbasin frames and grates shall
be of heavy duty design (25 tons test load). The type shall be as indicated on the
drawings.

Those for use on asphalted streets shall be of a grey cast iron and shall conform to
DIN 1213. Frames and grates shall be square. The total grate opening shall be 1250
cm2 minimum made up of rectangular opening three (3) centimeters wide at the top and
slightly tapered (opening downward). The frames shall be fifteen (15) centimeters high
and shall have a clear basin. The total weight of frame and grate shall be one hundred
fifty (150) kilograms minimum.

6.03.2.13 Masonry. Bricks shall be from local manufacturer and should conform with
local standards or BS 3921 1965.

6.032.14 Pipe Runners. Pipe Runners used for R.C.B.C. inlet and outlet drainage
grates shall be ASTMA-53 steel. Steel plates, bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTMA
36 and ASTM 307 respectively.

The dimensions of the pipe runner standard and alternate design plates, size and
length of bolts and nuts are to be checked and submitted to the Engineer for approval.
They shall be compatible with the type and size of pipe runner adopted from the
standard plan tabulation.

6.03.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.03.3.1 Alternate Designs. Unless otherwise designated, concrete manholes,

catch basins, and inlets may be precast or cast-in-place at the option of the Contractor.
Alternate designs may also be proposed for inlet frames and grates. Alternate designs
shall conform to the plans. If alternate designs are not included in the plans, the
Contractor may submit proposals to the Engineer for approval. Such designs shall be
minimally equivalent to the specified design with respect to strength, hydraulic capacity,
and other functional parameters. Alternate designs shall also be similar to the specified
design in above ground appearance after installation. The approval of alternate designs
for concrete manholes, catch basins, or inlets shall not result in increased costs to the
Ministry for the construction of these or any related items.

6.03.3.2 Excavation and Backfill. Excavation and backfill shall conform to the
requirements of Section 2.09, "Structural Excavation and Backfill" in these General
Specifications.

26
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

When required by the plans or ordered by the Engineer, the structure shall be
installed on a bedding course of the thickness shown on the plans or ordered by the
Engineer. The bedding course shall be compacted to Type ninety (90) compaction.

6.03.3.3 Concrete Construction. Precast and cast-in-place concrete construction

shall conform to the requirements of Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" in these
General Specifications.

6.03.3.4 Masonry. When so indicated on the plans, brick or concrete block masonry
may be used for the walls of catch basins, manholes, or inlets. Masonry manholes may
be constructed circular, with an inside diameter which is equal to the greater of the inside
dimensions indicated on the plans.

When masonry is used for square or rectangular structures, the inside dimensions
of the structure shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans, unless ordered otherwise
by the Engineer. The mortar for masonry shall be as specified in Subparagraph
5.01.3.1.2, "Mortar" in these General Specifications. The brick or concrete block shall
be laid with full mortared joints and with sufficient header courses to tie the masonry
together properly as approved by the Engineer.

6.03.3.5 Placing Castings. Castings shall be set in full mortar beds or otherwise
secured as shown on the plans and approved by the Engineer. Mortar for setting
castings shall be as specified in Subparagraph 5.01.3.1.2, "Mortar" in these General
Specifications. Casting shall be set accurately to correct elevations so that no
subsequent adjustment will be necessary.

6.03.3.6 Welded Grates and Frames. Welded steel grates and frames shall be
constructed in accordance with the plans. All materials, including miscellaneous
hardware, shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123 or ASTM
A 153 as appropriate.

Frames or anchor bolts shall be set and firmly secured in place to grade before
placement of concrete.

6.03.3.7 Cleaning. All catch basins, manholes, inlets and outlets shall be thoroughly
cleaned of any accumulation of silt, debris or foreign matter of any kind and shall be free
from such accumulations at the time of Provisional and Final Handover.

6.03.3.8 Manholes. Manholes, of precast concrete shall be constructed in

accordance with the drawings. Channels in the bottom of the manholes shall be smooth
and semi-circular in shape conforming to the inside of the adjacent pipe sections.

The channel shall be constructed of half pipe sections for straight through manholes.
Changes in direction of flow shall be made with a smooth curve of as large a radius as
the size of the manhole will permit.

Changes in size and grade of the channels shall be gradual and even. Manholes
shall be constructed so that the top of the frame and cover is at road grade unless

27
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

otherwise directed by the Engineer. The final position of the cover at the finished grade
shall be attained by the installation of at least two courses of brick.

The types of manholes to be constructed are as follows:

- Manholes Type "A" shall be used where the vertical depth from the ground level
to pipe soffit does not exceed two and eighty hundredths (2.80) meters.

- Manholes Type "B" shall be used where the vertical depth from the ground level
to pipe soffit exceeds two and eighty hundredths (2.80) meters.

Precast concrete sections or rings used for all manhole construction shall have
lengths of thirty (30), ninety (90) and/or one hundred twenty (120) cm conforming to BS
556: Part 2: 1972. The sections shall be of reinforced Class A concrete, cast in steel
watertight forms, thoroughly cured, all as detailed in the drawings.

Such units shall be cast in a casting yard prepared and fitted for this purpose at least
three (3) weeks before they are used.

The steps may be placed during or after casting, but no field installations shall be
permitted. If the steps are installed after casting, correctly located holes shall be made
during casting, and steps shall be placed later, properly blocked and mortared in to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Any section not fitted with the necessary number of steps
will be rejected.

Steps shall not be used as lifting eyes and any such devices for lifting and handling
shall be provided on the exterior surface only. Any units found cracked, defective or with
edges broken or damaged shall be rejected.

Precast concrete units except where otherwise specified, shall be bedded and jointed
with cement mortar of one part cement to three parts fine aggregate, true to line and
level shown on the drawings, each unit being firmly pressed into position and the joints
flush pointed as the Work proceeds.

6.03.3.9 Adjustment of Elevation of Manhole Cover and Inlet Drainage Grate.

Where a manhole cover or inlet grate is to be raised or lowered to conform to a new
elevation as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
carry out the following:

1. Remove the cover or grate along with its frame and store it on site.

2. Remove the top portion of the manhole or inlet to prepare for rebuilding; or to
expose the embedded rebars, clean the rebars by sandblasting or wire-brushing, and
weld new reinforcement to raise the structure elevation; or bend/cut the existing
reinforcement to lower the structure elevation.

3. Dispose of removed materials as directed.

28
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4. Rebuild the manhole/inlet top with new masonry units or concrete, as directed,
place anew the frame and cover/grate, coat as directed, cure the structure, and clean
the Work.

6.03.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES.

6.03.4.1 General. The catch basins, manholes and inlets will be inspected,
sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work"
in these General Specifications as detailed in the following paragraphs.

6.03.4.2 Concrete Products. Concrete products which are precast not in the vicinity
of the project shall be tested by the manufacturer at the time of casting and such test
results shall be presented to the Engineer along with Certificates of Compliance. The
Engineer shall be advised of the manufacturer's proposed casting schedule at least thirty
(30) days in advance of commencement. If so ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall arrange for an approved independent laboratory to perform verification testing at
the casting site.

6.03.4.3 Steel and Iron Castings. Along with Certificates of Compliance, the
Contractor shall submit all required test specimens to the Engineer for inspection. After
inspection, the Engineer may order some or all of the test specimens to be machined
and tested by an approved independent laboratory.

6.03.4.4 Other Materials. All other materials produced offsite shall be accompanied
by Certificates of Compliance and test results as appropriate.

6.03.4.5 Construction. The installation of the catch basins, manholes, inlets and
drainage grates will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or
Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.03.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Catch Basins, Manholes, Inlets, and Drainage

Grates shall be measured by the unit of each based on the number of each type
constructed, completed and accepted including furnishing and installation of all frames,
grates, covers and steps.

Manhole cover or drainage grate shall be measured by the kilogram, to the nearest
gram, of completed and accepted Work, regardless of size or type.

Manhole cover or drainage grate changing of elevation shall be measured by the

number of units successfully restored as specified, regardless of size or type.

Excavation, bedding, backfill, replacing pavement where required, reinforcing steel,

and disposal of surplus material will not be measured separately, but shall be considered
subsidiary to the Item(s) of Work as shown in the Bill of Quantities.

6.03.6 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work as measured above
will be paid at the contract unit price(s) specified in the Bill of Quantities which price(s)
shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, for all labor, equipment, tools,

29
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

supplies and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified
in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

60301 Catch Basin Unit

6030101 Catch Basin, Type A Unit

6030102 Catch Basin, Type ___ Unit

60302 Manhole Unit

6030201 Manhole, Type A Unit

6030202 Manhole, Type B Unit

6030203 Manhole, Type ___ Unit

60303 Inlet Unit

6030301 Inlet, Type 1 Unit

6030302 Inlet, Type 2 Unit

6030303 Inlet, Type 3 Unit

6030304 Inlet, Type ___ Unit

60304 Drainage Grate Kilogram

6030401 Drainage Grate, R.C.B.C. Inlet and Outlet Pipe Runners Kilogram

6030402 Drainage Grate, Type 1 Kilogram

6030403 Drainage Grate, Type 2 Kilogram

6030404 Drainage Grate, Type 3 Kilogram

6030405 Drainage Grate, Type ___ Kilogram

60305 Adjustment of Elevation of Manhole Cover and Inlet Drainage Unit

Grate

30
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.04 - PIPE UNDERDRAIN AND IRRIGATION PIPE

6.04.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of furnishing pipe underdrain and
irrigation pipe of the type and sizes provided on the plans or in the proposal in
accordance with the requirements of these specifications, and installing such pipe at the
locations shown on the plans or designated and in conformity with the established lines
and grades. The Work shall include the furnishing and construction of such joints and
connections to other pipes, catch basins, endwalls, etc., as may be required to complete
the Work, as shown on the plans or directed, together with granular backfill filter material
and construction fabric, if required.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Pipe Underdrain
Irrigation Pipe

6.04.2 MATERIALS.

6.04.2.1 Plastic Pipe Underdrains. Plastic pipe underdrain shall be plastic

conforming to ASTM 3033 or ASTM 3034 for polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or ASTM D 2751
for acrylanitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS). The class of pipe may be modified to
accommodate local Saudi manufactured products that meet appropriate Saudi Arabian
Standards Organization (SASO) requirements.

6.04.2.2 Bituminous Coated Steel Pipe Underdrains. Bituminous Coated Steel

pipe underdrain shall be bituminous coated, galvanized, corrugated steel conforming to
AASHTO M-36, Type III, and AASHTO M-190, Type A. Coupling bands shall be fully
coated.

6.04.2.3 Plastic Irrigation Pipe. Plastic irrigation pipe shall conform to ASTM D
1785, Schedule 40 (polyvinyl chloride), or ASTM D 1527, Schedule 40 (acrylonitrile-
butadiene-styrene).

6.04.2.4 Steel Irrigation Pipe. Steel irrigation pipe shall be standard, circular,
galvanized welded or threaded steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53.

6.04.2.5 Perforations. All pipe underdrain shall be perforated except sections

specifically designated as non-perforated by the Engineer. Perforated pipe may be
sealed for nonperforated sections provided the perforations are sealed in a manner
approved by the Engineer and provided the pipe is installed with the perforations on the
top. Perforations may be circular holes or slots at the option of the Contractor.
However, different filter requirements shall apply to each.

Plastic pipe underdrain circular perforations shall be between five (5) millimeters and
ten (10) millimeters in diameter arranged symmetrically in a minimum of four (4) rows
parallel to the axis of the pipe. All rows shall be in the lower half of the pipe but no row
shall be closer than forty (40) grads to the invert. Perforations in each row shall be a
maximum of ten (10) centimeters center to center.

31
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Plastic pipe underdrain slotted perforations shall be between one and five tenths (1.5)
millimeters and three (3) millimeters in width, and twenty-five (25) to forty (40) millimeters
in length measured on the inside of the pipe. Perforations shall be in two (2) rows,
parallel to the axis of the pipe on each side of the invert. Each row shall be
approximately fifty (50) grads from the invert. Perforations shall be spaced between
twenty (20) and thirty (30) times the average slot width along each row.

Bituminous Coated Steel pipe underdrain circular or slotted perforations shall conform
to AASHTO M 36. Perforations shall be cut before bituminous coating but shall conform
to the minimum size.

6.04.2.6 Granular Backfill Filter Material. Granular backfill filter material for pipe
underdrain with circular perforations or slots greater than three (3) millimeters average
width shall meet the requirements of and conform to one of the gradations in
Subparagraph 5.01.2.2.2, "Coarse Aggregate" in these General Specifications.

Granular backfill filter material for pipe underdrain with slots up to three (3) millimeters
in width shall meet the requirements of and conform to the gradation in Subparagraph
5.01.2.2.1, "Fine Aggregate" for concrete fine aggregate or one of the gradations in
Subparagraph 5.01.2.2.2, "Coarse Aggregate" in these General Specifications.

6.04.2.7 Geotextile Fabric. If the granular backfill filter material is installed in

trenches excavated in or backfilled with A-3, A-4, A-5, A-6, or A-7 soil, the filter material
shall be encapsulated in Type II Geotextile fabric conforming to Table 6.018-2
"Type II Fabric Geotextiles for Underdrain" in these General Specifications.

6.04.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.04.3.1 Pipe Underdrain.

1. Perforated Sections. Trenches for perforated underdrain sections shall be

excavated to a width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus three hundred (300)
millimeters, and to a minimum depth of approximately one hundred fifty (150) millimeters
below the grade established for the flow line of the pipe, unless otherwise directed.

When geotextile fabric is required, it shall be of sufficient width to accommodate the

periphery of the granular coarse aggregate backfill filter material section plus a minimum
thirty (30) centimeter lap. The fabric shall be placed in the trench before any filter
material with the center of the fabric in the bottom of the trench. After installation of the
bedding, pipe, and remainder of the filter material, the fabric shall be lapped at the top
and the installation backfilled as required.

A minimum one hundred fifty (150) millimeters bedding layer of granular backfill filter
material shall be placed and compacted in the bottom of the trench for its full width and
length. Pipe of the size specified shall be embedded firmly in the bedding material with
perforations down and the pipe sections joined securely with the appropriate coupling
bands or joint filler. The high end of pipe installations shall be closed with suitable plugs
to prevent entry of soil materials.

32
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

After the pipe installation has been inspected and approved, granular backfill material
shall be placed to a minimum height of three hundred (300) millimeters above the top
of pipe. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled in accordance with Section 2.10,
"Trench Excavation and Backfill" in these General Specifications.

2. Nonperforated Sections. Trenches for nonperforated sections for connections and

outlets shall be excavated to the same width and depth required for perforated sections
or as ordered by the Engineer. Pipe shall be laid in the trench with all ends firmly joined
by applicable methods. After inspection of the pipe installation by the Engineer, the
trench shall be backfilled in accordance with Section 2.10, "Trench Excavation and
Backfill" in these General Specifications. Granular backfill filter material will not be
required for nonperforated sections unless specified on the plans or ordered by the
Engineer.

6.04.3.2 Irrigation Pipe.

1. General. In areas where the new roadway intercepts and blocks existing irrigation
flow, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide and maintain, as approved by
the Engineer, adequate temporary irrigation flow to all the isolated areas originally under
irrigation, until such time as the irrigation pipe is installed in the approved location.

2. Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. Excavating, trenching and backfilling shall

be as specified for pipe culverts in Section 2.10, "Trench Excavation and Backfill" in
these General Specifications.

3. Laying Pipe. In general, irrigation pipe will be placed as specified for pipe culverts
in Section 6.08, "Pipe Culverts" in these General Specifications. Steel pipes shall be laid
with ends abutting, and joints coupled by welding or by means of threads, and true to
line and grade. All pipes shall be fitted and matched so that, when laid, they will form
a smooth, uniform invert with watertight joints. Backfilling shall not proceed until the
installation is tested in the presence of and approved by the Engineer.

6.04.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The pipe underdrain and irrigation

pipe will be inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08,
"Acceptance of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the pipe underdrain and irrigation pipe shall be
sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods
referenced in Subsection 6.04.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications. The
installation of the pipe underdrain and irrigation pipe will be accepted in accordance with
Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.04.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

6.04.5.1 Pipe Underdrain. The accepted length of perforated and nonperforated

sections of pipe underdrain will be measured by the linear meter for each type and size
of Pipe Underdrain authorized, completed and accepted. No separate measurement will

33
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

be made for granular backfill filter material or for geotextile fabric which shall be
considered subsidiary to the Pipe Underdrain item.

No separate measurement will be made for trench excavation and backfill required
up to two (2) meters in depth. This Work will be considered subsidiary to Pipe
Underdrain. For trenches ordered in excess of two (2) meters in depth, measurement
will be made for quantities in excess of two (2) meters depth in accordance with
Paragraph 2.09.2.3, "Structural Excavation for Culverts and Miscellaneous Structures"
in these General Specifications.

6.04.5.2 Irrigation Pipe. Irrigation Pipe shall be measured by the linear meter of
each type and size for all Work authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer.
Measurements shall be continuous along the longitudinal axis of each installation. No
separate measurement will be made for fittings and hardware required explicitly or
implicitly by the plans or Special Specifications. The furnishing and installation of these
items shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor. Excavation, bedding, and
backfilling will not be measured and shall also be subsidiary obligation of the Contractor.

6.04.6 PAYMENT. The amount of authorized, completed and accepted Work as

measured above will be paid at the contract unit price per linear meter for each type and
size of Pipe Underdrain and Irrigation Pipe as they appear in the Bill of Quantities, which
price shall include all required materials, equipment, tools, labor, and all other items
necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2,
"Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

60401 Plastic Pipe Underdrain, 100 mm diameter Linear Meter

60402 Plastic Pipe Underdrain, 150 mm diameter Linear Meter

60403 Plastic Piper Underdrain, 200 mm diameter Linear Meter

60404 Plastic Pipe Underdrain, 250 mm. diameter Linear Meter

60405 Plastic Piper Underdrain, 300 mm diameter Linear Meter

60406 Plastic Piper Underdrain, ___ mm diameter Linear Meter

60413 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, 100 mm diameter Linear Meter

60414 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, 150 mm diameter Linear Meter

60415 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, 200 mm diameter Linear Meter

60416 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, 250 mm diameter Linear Meter

60417 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, 300 mm diameter Linear Meter

60418 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, ___ mm diameter Linear Meter

60423 (Type) Underdrain, 100 mm diameter Linear Meter

34
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

60424 (Type) Underdrain, 150 mm diameter Linear Meter

60425 (Type) Underdrain, 200 mm diameter Linear Meter

60426 (Type) Underdrain, 250 mm diameter Linear Meter

60427 (Type) Underdrain, 300 mm diameter Linear Meter

60428 (Type) Underdrain, ___ mm diameter Linear Meter

60431 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 300 mm diameter Linear Meter

60432 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, ___ mm diameter Linear Meter

60441 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 300 mm diameter Linear Meter

60442 Steel Irrigation Pipe, ___ mm diameter Linear Meter

35
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.05 - STORM SEWERS

6.05.1 DESCRIPTION. This Works shall consist of the construction of "Storm Sewers"
for the removal of water from collection points in accordance with these specifications
and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the plans or established by the
Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer
PVC Storm Sewer Pipe
Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer

6.05.2 TYPES OF PIPE FOR STORM SEWERS. Reinforced concrete, asbestos

cement or PVC may be furnished for Storm Sewers, unless otherwise shown on the
plans or in the Bill of Quantities.

6.05.3 REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX STORM SEWER. Reinforced concrete box

storm sewer shall be constructed in place to conform to the location and dimensions
shown on the plans and in accordance with the requirements of Sections 5.01 "Portland
Cement Concrete," 5.03 "Concrete Structures," and 5.02 "Reinforcing Steel" in these
General Specifications.

6.05.4 MATERIALS. Materials shall conform to the requirements of Sections 5.01

"Portland Cement Concrete," 5.02 "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

6.05.4.1 Asbestos-Cement Pipes. All asbestos-cement pipes and fittings for storm
water systems shall be made from sulphate resistant cement and shall be to BS 3656:
1973.

The pipes and asbestos cement fittings shall be given a double coat internally and
externally or a bituminous solution at the place of manufacture.

Unless otherwise specified or ordered, the pipes shall be provided with approved
flexible joints.

A crushing test shall be carried out on one percent (1%) of the total number of pipes,
asbestos cement fittings and collars.

6.05.4.2 PVC Pipe. Pipes of synthetic materials for general drainage use shall be
approved pipes of polythene, polypropylene, or polyvinylchloride. Unplasticised
polyvinylchloride pipes shall conform to the requirements of Class 2 or 3 ASTM D3033
or BS 3506.

6.05.4.3 Granular Material for Pipe Bedding and Backfilling. Granular material
for pipe bedding and backfilling shall be as specified in Section 2.10, "Trench Excavation
and Backfill" in these General Specifications.

36
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Flexible Joints in Concrete Beds, and Surrounds to Pipes shall be formed with
suitable compressible fibrous board, or similar approved material, of a thickness of
twenty (20) millimeters, unless otherwise specified or ordered.

6.05.4.4 Bitumen Emulsion. Bitumen emulsion shall be as provided for in Section

4.01, "Bituminous Materials" in these General Specifications and shall contain not less
than fifty-three percent (53%) of prime bitumen.

6.05.5 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.05.5.1 Handling of Pipes. At every point of loading and unloading, pipes must be
handled by approved lifting tackle. Unloading by rolling down planks or any other form
of inclined ramp will not be allowed without the written approval of the Engineer.

6.05.5.2 Pipe Storm Sewer Requirements.

6.05.5.2.1 Excavation. The trench shall be excavated beginning at the outlet

end and proceeding toward the upper end, true to line and grade shown on the plans or
as established by the Engineer. The width of the trench shall be sufficient to lay and
backfill the pipe satisfactorily but in no case shall be less than the external diameter of
the pipe plus fifteen (15) centimeters on each side. When ordered by the Engineer, the
trench shall be shored or sheeted to insure safe and satisfactory construction and
backfilling. If tunneling under a railroad or existing street or highway is required, it shall
be done using methods which will insure that the railroad, street, or highway is
undisturbed during and after the construction and such methods shall be approved by
the Engineer before Work is begun. If it is necessary to remove an existing street or
highway surface in constructing the sewer, the surface shall be reconstructed with fully
equivalent material as approved by the Engineer and at the expense of the Contractor
unless provision for the removal and reconstruction is otherwise provided on the plans,
or in the Bill of Quantities.

The foundation in the trench shall be so formed as to prevent subsequent

settlement and must be approved by the engineer. If the foundation is in rock, an
equalizing bed of well-compacted sand or other approved material at least fifteen (15)
centimeters in thickness shall be placed upon the rock. If the foundation is in good firm
earth, in the opinion of the engineer, the earth shall be pared or molded to give full
support to each pipe for a depth at least equal to one-fourth (¼)the external diameter
of round pipe, or ten percent (10%) of the overall height of arch pipe, notches being cut
to receive the bell (when bell and spigot pipe is used). If the excavation has been made
deeper than necessary, proper bearing shall be secured by means of a layer of sand or
other suitable material, approved by the Engineer.

When indicated on the plans, or if ordered in writing by the Engineer, in order to

provide a suitable foundation for the pipe, a concrete cradle or encasement shall be
placed under or around the pipe. The dimensions and class of the concrete shall be as
indicated on the plans or ordered by the Engineer.

37
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Pipe trenches shall only be bottomed up immediately in advance of pipe laying

but no pipes shall be laid until a distance of at least ten (10) meters along the trench has
been prepared to receive the pipes, unless specially permitted otherwise by the
Engineer. The trenches and joint holes shall be kept free from water until the pipes are
laid, jointed and where specified surrounded with concrete.

Water from the trenches shall not be allowed to enter the pipes after jointing, and
backfilling shall not commence until the pipe joints have been inspected by the Engineer.

Where the pipes are to be laid in rock cutting, the excavation shall be taken down
to one hundred fifty (150) millimeters of granular bedding materials or with one hundred
fifty (150) millimeters of Class A concrete as directed by the Engineer.

6.05.5.2.2 Laying. The laying of pipes in finished trenches shall be started at

the outlet end so that the spigot ends (when bell and spigot pipe is used) point to the
direction of flow. All pipes shall be laid with ends abutting and true to line and grade.
They shall be laid in the beds so that the lower portion of each pipe is supported for its
entire length to a depth at least equal to one-fourth (¼) the external diameter of round
pipe, or ten percent (10%) of the overall height of arch pipe. They shall be fitted and
matched so that when laid in the trench, they will form a sewer with a smooth, uniform
invert. Bell ends (when bell and spigot pipe is used) shall be carefully cleaned before
pipes are lowered into the trenches. Pipes shall be lowered in an approved manner so
as to avoid unnecessary handling in the trench.

For pipe lines laid inside trenches, the permissible tolerance in line and level shall
be determined by the Engineer, but unless otherwise specified or determined, shall be
six (6) millimeter in level and twenty-five millimeters in line between manholes or other
access points.

Asbestos-cement and reinforced concrete pipes shall have watertight and flexible
joints sealed with approved rubber ring or flexible gasket, which shall be stored until
needed in a cool place far from direct sunlight. Joints shall have a gap between the end
of the spigot and the base of the bell of not less than six (6) millimeters and not greater
than twenty (20) millimeters, this being achieved by approved positive means such as
removable metal feelers or hardwood wedges.

Synthetic or rubber joint rings, shall be stored until needed in a cool place free
from direct sunlight and protected from frost.

Joints of all other types of pipe shall be cemented with a cement mortar
composed of one (1) part Portland cement and three (3) parts of fine aggregate mixed
with sufficient water to form a plastic mortar. As each section of pipe is laid, the bell or
hub of the preceding pipe shall be wetter and cleaned and the bottom portion filled with
mortar. After the pipe is placed, the remaining portion of the joint shall be filled. The
inside of the joint shall be finished smooth and wiped clean. The mortar on the outside
shall, after its initial set, be protected from the sun with moist earth or other covering
approved by the engineer.

38
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Plastic joint compound may be used in lieu of the Portland cement mortar. If
plastic joint compound is used, it shall be prepared and applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.

Where pipes are to be laid on solid ground, holes shall be cut in the bottom of the
trench of such size and depth as to allow the joints to be properly made and for the
barrel of the pipe to bear evenly on solid ground for its full length.

Granular material for pipe bedding shall be placed over the full width of the
trench bottom in successive uniform layers not exceeding one hundred fifty (150)
millimeters. Each layer shall be lightly compacted to give the following minimum bed
thickness:

- Pipes not exceeding three hundred (300) millimeters ID - one hundred fifty
(150) millimeter bed thickness [minimum one hundred (100) under sockets].

- Pipes exceeding three hundred (300) millimeters but not exceeding five
hundred (500) ID - two hundred (200) millimeters minimum bed thickness.

- Pipes exceeding five hundred (500) millimeters but not exceeding seven
hundred fifty (750) millimeters ID - two hundred fifty (250) millimeters minimum bed
thickness.

- Socket holes shall be formed into the compacted material and the bedding
graded so that pipe barrels bear evenly on the bed for their full length.

- Any leveling pegs shall be removed as pipe laying proceeds.

6.05.5.2.3 Backfilling. Granular material of the same type as that used for pipe
bedding shall be carefully placed and thoroughly compacted above the bedding material
in successive uniform layers and on both sides of the pipes simultaneously and over the
top of the pipe as specified in Section 2.10, "Trench Excavation and Backfill" in these
General Specifications.

Properly fitted temporary wooden stoppers shall be provided and constantly used
to close the ends of all uncompleted pipe lines. The stoppers are only to be removed
when pipes are being laid and jointed.

6.05.5.2.4 Cleaning and Inspecting of Storm Sewer Pipes. After backfilling

pipe trenches and completing manholes, hatch boxes, etc., and before the trench
surfaces are permanently reinstated, the interior of the pipelines shall be cleaned of silt
and debris for inspection by the Engineer.

Pipelines of six hundred seventy-five (675) millimeters or more diameter will

where practicable be inspected from the inside and where necessary the Contractor
shall provide a suitable trolley for this purpose.

39
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Where pipelines are less than six hundred seventy-five (675) millimeters
diameter and where larger pipelines for special reasons cannot be inspected from the
inside, a loose plug in the form of a cylinder of diameter twenty-five (25) millimeter
smaller and of length not less than the internal diameter of the pipe shall be passed
through each pipeline.

If required by the Engineer, a similar inspection will be repeated immediately

before a certificate of completion is issued which includes that part of the Works.

On completion of work, or earlier if agreed by the Engineer, all drains and pipes
shall be flushed from end to end with water and left clean and free from obstructions.

6.05.5.2.5 Testing of Pipelines Generally. Testing of pipelines shall in all

cases be applied in the presence of the Engineer's Representatives. The Contractor
shall provide complete plant and all struts, thrust blocks, etc., as may be necessary for
effectively testing the pipelines to the specified pressures.

Should a test fail the Contractor shall at his own cost replace defective pipes or
make good leaking joints, or otherwise re-execute defective work and cleaning,
inspection and testing shall then be repeated. Payment will be made only for
satisfactory tests.

6.05.5.2.6 Testing on Non-Pressure Pipelines. As soon as a length of pipe

has been laid and before backfilling, it shall be subjected to the following Preliminary
Test: air shall be pumped into the pipeline by suitable means until a pressure of one
hundred (100) millimeter head of water is indicated on a water manometer and the test
will not be considered satisfactory if the air pressure falls to less than seventy-five
millimeters during a period of five (5) minutes.

Pipes shall be given a Final Test after they have been backfilled, cleaned and
inspected. For the Final Test the pipeline shall be filled with water in a manner approved
by the Engineer to a level one and one-quarter (1.25) millimeters above the highest point
of that part of the pipeline under test. After standing for thirty (30) minutes the water
shall be topped up if necessary and the test will not be considered satisfactory if the loss
of water in the next sixty minutes exceeds seven and one-half (7.5) liters per thirty (30)
meters of length per meter of diameter of the pipeline under test.

6.05.5.3 Reinforced Concrete Box Storm Sewer. Reinforced concrete box storm
sewer shall be constructed of the class of concrete designated on the plans and Work
shall conform to the requirements of Sections 5.01 "Portland Cement Concrete,” 5.03
"Concrete Structures,” and 5.02 "Reinforcing Steel," in these General Specifications.

Excavation and backfilling of reinforced concrete box storm sewer shall conform to
the requirements of Section 2.09, "Structural Excavation and Backfill” i n these General
Specifications.

40
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.05.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The storm sewers will be inspected,

sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work"
in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the storm sewers shall be sampled, tested and
evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods referenced in
Subsection 6.05.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications. The installation of the
storm sewers will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or
Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.05.7 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

6.05.7.1 Storm Sewer Pipes. Storm Sewer Pipes shall be measured by the linear
meter of the various sizes and types of storm sewer pipe regardless of the depth to
which they are to be laid. Measurements shall be along the centerline of the pipe
complete in place from end of pipe to the inside face of walls of catchbasins, manholes,
inlets, sumps, or from the inside face to inside face of walls of such structures, as the
case may be.

No measurement shall be made for the excavation and preparation of trenches, the
provision and installation of concrete bedding, cradles or surrounds and granular pipe
bedding and for the backfilling and recompaction of trenches, all such work will be
considered subsidiary to the appropriate storm sewer pipe item in the Bill of Quantities.

No measurement shall be made for breaking into existing pipes and manholes and
making good afterwards as approved by the Engineer, but shall be considered
subsidiary to the laying of the pipe.

6.05.7.2 Reinforced Concrete Box Storm Sewer. The quantities of the various
items that constitute the completed and accepted structure shall be measured for
payment. Only accepted Work shall be included and the dimensions shall be those
shown on the plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer.

Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be measured as provided in Section 5.01,

"Concrete Structures” and Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General
Specifications.

Structural excavation shall be measured for payment as specified in Section 2.09,

"Structural Excavation and Backfil" in these General Specifications.

6.05.7.3 Unauthorized Work. No measure shall be made of unauthorized Work as

specified in Part One, “General” in these General Specifications.

6.05.8 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work, measured as

provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) per linear meter in the Bill of
Quantities for storm sewer pipe of the various sizes and types, which prices shall be full
compensation for all excavation, trimming and preparation of trenches, including any
shoring or sheeting and other work required to deal with problems related to the high

41
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

water table, for the provision and installation of concrete or granular bedding, cradles or
surround and for the laying, jointing and testing of the storm sewer pipes, including
connections to existing pipes, manholes, chambers and headwalls, for the backfilling,
recompaction, disposal of surplus materials, reinstatement of trenches and for all labor,
equipment, tools and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment” in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

60501 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 300 mm dia Linear Meter

60502 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 400 mm dia Linear Meter

60503 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 500 mm dia Linear Meter

60504 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 600 mm dia Linear Meter

60505 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 750 mm dia Linear Meter

60506 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 900 mm dia Linear Meter

60507 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 1000 mm dia Linear Meter

60508 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 1200 mm dia Linear Meter

60509 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, ___ mm dia Linear Meter

60513 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 300 mm dia Linear Meter

60514 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 400 mm dia Linear Meter

60515 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 500 mm dia Linear Meter

60516 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 600 mm dia Linear Meter

60517 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 750 mm dia Linear Meter

60518 PVC Storm Seer Pipe, 900 mm dia Linear Meter

60519 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 1000 mm dia Linear Meter

60520 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 1200 mm dia Linear Meter

60521 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, ___ mm dia Linear Meter

60525 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 300 mm dia Linear Meter

60526 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 400 mm dia Linear Meter

60527 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 500 mm dia Linear Meter

60528 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 600 mm dia Linear Meter

60529 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 750 mm dia Linear Meter

60530 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 900 mm dia Linear Meter

60531 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 1000 mm dia Linear Meter

42
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

60532 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 1200 mm dia Linear Meter

60533 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, ___ mm dia Linear Meter

60536 (Type), Storm Sewer, 300 mm dia Linear Meter

60537 (Type), Storm Sewer, 400 mm dia Linear Meter

60538 (Type), Storm Sewer, 500 mm dia Linear Meter

60539 (Type), Storm Sewer, 600 mm dia Linear Meter

60540 (Type), Storm Sewer, 750 mm dia Linear Meter

60541 (Type), Storm Sewer, 900 mm dia Linear Meter

60542 (Type), Storm Sewer, 1000 mm dia Linear Meter

60543 (Type), Storm Sewer, 1200 mm dia Linear Meter

60544 (Type), Storm Sewer, ___ mm dia Linear Meter

43
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.06 - RIPRAP AND SLOPE PROTECTION

6.06.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of the placement of riprap, concrete,
gabions, wire mesh, or other forms of protection on slopes at the locations shown on the
plans, or as ordered by the Engineer, in accordance with the specifications and in
conformity with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross sections shown on the
plans or established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Loose Stone Riprap
Grouted Stone, Riprap
Sacked Concrete Revetment
Gabions
Reinforced Concrete Slope Protection
Wire Mesh Slope Protection
Paving Tile Slope Protection
Wire Enclosed Riprap Slope Protection

6.06.2 MATERIALS.

6.06.2.1 Stone for Riprap. Stone for grouted and loose riprap shall be hard, sound
and durable, furnished in broad flat shapes to the maximum extent practicable. Samples
of the stone to be used shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before any
stone is placed.

The minimum apparent specific gravity shall be two and five tenths (2.5) and the
maximum absorption shall be six (6) percent when tested in accordance with MRDTM
304. The stone shall not have an abrasion loss greater than forty-five (45) percent when
tested in accordance with MRDTM 309.

The weight of stone for the various classes of riprap shall be as follows:

TABLE 6.06-1

Percent of the Total

Size of Stone (Kilograms) Weight Smaller than Size
Shown
Class A Class B Class C Class D
50 200 1,000 5,000 95-100
20 100 500 2,000 50-100
5 20 100 500 0-50
1 5 20 100 0-10

44
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Stone for "Loose Stone Riprap" shall be quarried, fractured, or otherwise

predominantly angular. Stone for other riprap and gabions may be rounded (boulders)
or angular.

6.06.2.2 Grout. Grout for "Grouted Stone Riprap" shall conform to Subparagraph
5.01.3.1.2, "Mortar" in these General Specifications.

6.06.2.3 Concrete. Concrete for "Sacked Concrete Revetment" shall conform to

Subsection 5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor Structures" in these General Specifications
except that aggregates may be produced in and batched from a single stockpile and the
minimum cement content shall be five and one-half (5½) sacks per cubic meter.

Concrete for "Reinforced Concrete Slope Protection" shall conform to Class A in

Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete" in these General Specifications.

6.06.2.4 Sacks. Sacks for "Sacked Concrete Revetment" shall be of minimum two
hundred (200) grams per square meter burlap. They shall be approximately six hundred
(600) millimeters by nine hundred (900) millimeters measured when empty. Relatively
clean reclaimed sacks may be used if approved by the Engineer.

6.06.2.5 Gabions. Gabion baskets shall be constructed of galvanized steel wire

mesh conforming to ASTM A 390, Class 3, and the requirement shown on the plans.
The wire mesh shall be twisted to form hexagonal openings of uniform size. The
maximum nominal opening size shall be one hundred (100) millimeters. The mesh shall
be constructed so as to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming
the mesh when a single wire strand in a section is cut.

Baskets shall be supplied in one or more of the sizes shown on the plans so as to be
assembled forming the minimum dimensions, stability, and structural integrity of the type
of installation specified.

Baskets shall be fabricated in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid (except for
gabion blankets), and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the specified sizes. Gabion baskets shall be of single unit
construction-base, lid, ends, and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one
edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner
that strength and flexibility at the point of connection is at least equal to that of the mesh.

All perimeter edges of the mesh forming the basket shall be securely clip bound or
selvedged so that the joints formed by tying the selvedges have at least the same
strength as the body of the mesh.

Perimeter (edge), tie, and connection wires shall conform to ASTM A 641, Class 3,
Medium Temper, and the minimum diameters shown on the plans.

Alternate equivalent designs of gabion baskets may be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.

45
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Riprap fill material for gabions shall be Class A as shown in Table 6.06-1.

6.06.2.6 Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel for "Reinforced Concrete Slope

Protection" shall conform to Subsection 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General
Specifications.

6.06.2.7 Wire Mesh Slope Protection. Wire mesh for "Wire Mesh Slope Protection"
shall be chain-link fence fabric conforming to ASTM A 491 or ASTM A 392. Minimum
wire size shall be four and eight tenths (4.8) millimeter diameter (6 AWG).

Galvanized wire rope shall conform to ASTM A 603 and shall be the size shown on
the plans.

Rock bolts, fasteners, and hardware shall be galvanized and conform to the
requirements shown on the plans.

6.06.2.8 Wire Enclosed Riprap Slope Protection. Wire fabric shall meet the
requirements of ASTM A 116, Class 2, minimum four (4) millimeters diameters (No. 8
AWG). Tie wires shall conform to ASTM A 641, Class 3, soft or medium temper,
minimum four (4) millimeters diameter.

Piles, deadmen, and other hardware shall conform to the requirements shown on the
plans.

Riprap for "Wire Enclosed Riprap" shall be Class A as shown in Table 6.06-1.

6.06.2.9 Geotextile Fabric. Geotextile Fabric shall be a woven or nonwoven

geotextile meeting the following requirements of Section 6.16, " Geotextile Construction"
in these General Specifications for Type 1 Fabric-Geotextile for Slope Protection and
Channel Lining.

6.06.2.10 Joint Filler. Preformed joint filler shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 33. Hot-poured joint filler shall conform to AASHTO M 282.

6.06.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. The bed upon which the riprap or slope
protection is to be placed shall be excavated to the required grades and lines as shown
on the plans or as directed and approved by the Engineer. A footing trench shall be
excavated along the toe of the slope as shown on the plans or as directed by the
Engineer. All footing trenches and excavations shall be approved by the Engineer prior
to placement of stones or concrete. Subgrade or base should be firm or compacted as
approved by the Engineer. Stones shall be placed so as to provide a minimum number
of voids; larger stones shall be placed in the footing trench and on the outside surface
of the slope.

6.06.3.1 Loose Riprap. The loose riprap shall be placed by dumping and spreading
in layers by a mechanical device or other methods approved by the Engineer, all to
secure a stable mass. After the completion and approval of the riprap placement, the

46
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

surface voids of the riprap in the footing trench and on the lower portions of the slope
shall be filled with excavated material and dressed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

6.06.3.2 Grouted Riprap. Riprap shall be arranged in such a way that the largest
rocks are at the bottom of the slope. The surfaces of the rock shall be cleaned of
adhering dirt and clay.

The space between stones of grouted riprap shall be filled with concrete mortar.
After riprap placement, the grout shall be vibrated, spaded, and rodded into place until
the voids are completely filled to a minimum depth of five hundred (500) millimeters from
the face of the riprap. Excess material and spillage shall be cleaned from the front face
of the riprap before hardening. The exposed mortar shall, immediately after completion
of a section of riprap, be cured using clear curing compound in accordance with
Subparagraph 5.03.4.10.1, "Membrane Curing" in these General Specifications.

6.06.3.3 Sacked Concrete Revetment. After the slopes have been prepared as
shown on the plans, and have been approved by the Engineer, the sacked concrete
riprap shall be placed thereon. The sacks shall be filled with concrete loosely placed so
as to leave room for tying and sewing. Approximately thirty-five thousandths (0.035)
cubic meter of concrete shall be placed in each sack. The sacks shall be closed by
sewing tied with strong twine. Immediately after closing, the sacks shall be placed and
trampled lightly to cause them to conform to the earth surface and the adjacent sacks
already in place. The sacks shall be laid in accordance with the details shown in the
plans. All dirt and debris shall be removed from the top of the sacks before the next
course is laid. Sacks shall be placed so that the tied ends will not be adjacent to one
another. No more than six (6) courses of sacks shall be placed in any tier until initial set
in the first course of any such tier has taken place.

In placing sacks that are filled with concrete, care in shaping the sacks shall be
exercised, to the end that the minimum dimensions shown on the plans will be obtained,
and also that the finished sacked concrete revetment will have a minimum of voids.

6.06.3.4 Gabions. Each gabion unit shall be assembled by binding together all
vertical edges with wire ties on approximately one hundred fifty (150) millimeter spacing
or by a continuous piece of connecting wire stitched around the vertical edges with a coil
about every one hundred (100) millimeters. Empty gabion units shall be set to line and
grade as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Wire ties or connecting
wire shall be used to join the units together in the same manner as described above for
assembling. Internal tie wires shall be uniformly spaced and securely fastened in each
cell of the structure.

Assembly details of gabions shall be as specified in the HDM, Volume 4, Standard

Drawings SP-4 through SP-7.

Where the length of the gabion exceeds its horizontal width the gabion shall be
equally divided by diaphragms, of the same mesh and gauge as the body of the gabions,
into cells whose length does not exceed the horizontal width. The gabion shall be

47
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base section
in such a manner that no additional tying at this juncture will be necessary.

The last lift of stone in each cell shall be level with the top of the gabion in order to
properly close the lid and provide and even surface for the next course.

All gabion units shall be tied together each to its neighbor along all contacting edges
in order to form a continuous connecting structure. Empty gabions stacked on filled
gabions shall be laced to the filled gabion at the front, side and back.

A standard fence stretcher, chain fall, or iron rod may be used to stretch the wire
baskets and hold alignment.

The gabions shall be filled with stone carefully placed by hand or machine to assure
alignment and avoid bulges with a minimum of voids. Alternate placing of rock and
connection wires shall be performed until the gabion is filled. After a gabion has been
filled, the lid shall be bent over until it meets the sides and edges. The lid shall then be
secured to the sides, ends, and diaphragms with the wire ties or connecting wire in the
manner described above for assembling.

6.06.3.5 Reinforced Concrete Slope Protection.

6.06.3.5.1 Surface Preparation. Slopes to be protected shall be compacted

and finished to grade prior to the installation of reinforcing steel, bulkheads, and joint
material. The Contractor shall furnish screed rails or other grade indicating devices to
control the minimum depth of concrete and uniformity of the top surface.

6.06.3.5.2 Reinforcing Steel and Joints. Reinforcing steel shall be supported

firmly so as not to be subject to displacement during construction. Joints shall be laid
out or referenced accurately. Construction joints shall be placed at designated
contraction joints, except they shall be expansion type whenever constructed more than
five (5) meters from a free edge or another expansion joint.

6.06.3.5.3 Concrete Placement. Concrete shall be placed and finished in

accordance with the requirements of Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" in these
General Specifications. The Contractor may select a uniform floated or broomed finish
approved by the Engineer. Joint blockouts for poured joint filler may be formed in place
or inserted in the fresh concrete.

6.06.3.5.4 Curing. Concrete shall be cured in accordance with the

requirements of Paragraph 5.03.4.10, "Curing and Protection" in these General
Specifications using membrane or water curing.

6.06.3.6 Wire Mesh Slope Protection. Wire Mesh Slope Protection shall be
installed in accordance with the typical details shown on the plans, and at locations
shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer.

48
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

In particular, wire mesh slope protection shall be placed as shown in the HDM,
Volume 4, Standard Drawing SP-1, depending on the slope, its nature, and to the sizes
of loose boulders, if any.

Wire mesh shall be folded onto itself for thirty (30) centimeters minimum, and firmly
anchored on the tope of the slope. Anchors may be expansion bolts or reinforcing bars,
driven or bonded to the slope with non-shrink grout or encased in concrete. Type, size,
length and spacing of anchors and anchor rods shall be as shown on the plans.

Before laying the wire mesh, all loose rock and boulders shall be removed and
disposed of as approved. The cable grid shall be laid, the wire mesh sheets shall be
rolled down the slope, secured to the cables, and laced together using galvanized steel
wire two gauges heavier than that used in the main body of the mesh. Where
overlapping occurs, the sheets shall be overlapped without cuts.

Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, wire mesh shall be anchored
to the slope, using one anchor every fifteen (15) square meters of mesh. The toe of the
slope protection shall be anchored or left loose, as shown or as directed.

6.06.3.7 Paving Tile Slope Protection. Paving Tile Slope Protection shall be
installed in accordance with the Plan details and as detailed in Paragraph 6.12.3.2
"Precast Tiled Sidewalks” in these General Specifications.

6.06.3.8 Wire Enclosed Riprap Slope Protection. Wire Enclosed Riprap Slope
Protection shall be constructed in accordance with the typical details shown on the
plans, and at locations shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer.

6.06.3.9 Geotextile Fabric. Geotextile Fabric shall be furnished and installed, when
required, by the typical details shown on the plans and as detailed in Section 6.16,
"Geotextiles" in these General Specifications for Type I Fabric-Geotextile for Slope
Protection and Channel Lining.

6.06.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The riprap and slope protection will
be inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08,
"Acceptance of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the riprap and slope protection shall be sampled,
tested and evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods referenced
in Subsection 6.06.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications. The installation of the
riprap and slope protection will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4,
"Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.06.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Loose Stone Riprap, Grouted Stone Riprap,

Sacked Concrete Revetment, Gabions, and Wire Enclosed Riprap Slope Protection
shall be measured by the cubic meter based on the dimensions shown on the plans or
ordered in writing by the Engineer, for all quantities authorized, constructed and
accepted by the Engineer.

49
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Reinforced Concrete Slope Protection, Wire Mesh Slope Protection and Paving Tile
Slope Protection, Geotextile Fabric (if included in the Bill of Quantities) will be measured
by the square meter based on the dimensions shown on the plans or ordered in writing
by the Engineer, for all quantities authorized, constructed, and accepted by the
Engineer. When Geotextile Fabric is required by the plans or specifications, but not
included in the Bill of Quantities, it shall be considered subsidiary. When it is included
in the Bill of Quantities it shall be as specified, measured, and paid for under Section
6.16, "Geotextiles" in these General Specifications. No separate measurement will be
made for the anchorage system for Wire Mesh Slope Protection which shall be
considered subsidiary to that Item of Work.

Excavation below original ground elevations for riprap and other forms of slope
protection shall be measured in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.2.3 "Roadway
Excavation - Channel and Ditch" in these General Specifications.

6.06.6 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work as measured above
will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) specified in the Bill of Quantities which
price(s) shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, for all labor, equipment,
tools, supplies, and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

60601 Loose Stone Riprap Cubic Meter

6060101 Loose Stone Riprap, Class A Cubic Meter

6060102 Loose Stone Riprap, Class B Cubic Meter

6060103 Loose Stone Riprap, Class C Cubic Meter

6060104 Loose Stone Riprap, Class D Cubic Meter

6060105 Loose Stone Riprap, Class ___ Cubic Meter

60602 Grouted Stone Riprap Cubic Meter

6060201 Grouted Stone Riprap, Class A Cubic Meter

6060202 Grouted Stone Riprap, Class B Cubic Meter

6060203 Grouted Stone Riprap, Class C Cubic Meter

6060204 Grouted Stone Riprap, Class D Cubic Meter

6060205 Grouted Stone Riprap, Class ___ Cubic Meter

60603 Sacked Concrete Revetment Cubic Meter

60604 Gabions Cubic Meter

60605 R.C. Slope Protection Square Meter

50
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

60606 Wire Mesh Slope Protection Square Meter

60607 Paving Tile Slope Protection Square Meter

60608 Wire Enclosed Riprap Slope Protection Cubic Meter

51
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.07 - DITCH LININGS, WASH CHECKS, AND SLOPE DRAINS

6.07.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of the construction of ditch linings, wash
checks, and slope drains, including drainage chutes and waterways, in accordance with
the specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on
the plans or established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Ditch Lining
Wash Check
Embankment Slope Drain
Cut Slope Drain

6.07.2 MATERIALS. Materials shall conform to the requirements specified in the

following sections:

6.07.2.1 Concrete. Concrete for drainage chutes, ditch lining, and wash checks
shall conform to Minor Concrete in Subsection 5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor Structures"
in these General Specifications.

6.07.2.2 Reinforcing Steel and Steel Mesh. Reinforcing steel and steel mesh shall
be as specified in Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

6.07.2.3 Bituminous Mixture. The bituminous mixture for bituminous waterways

for embankment slopes shall conform to the requirements for Bituminous Wearing
Courses as specified in Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement" in these General
Specifications an equivalent mixture, as may be approved by the Engineer. Additional
asphalt cement may be required by the Engineer to reduce oxidation and the specified
stability requirements will therefore be waived.

6.07.2.4 Riprap. The riprap for use with concrete drainage chute for cut slopes,
overside drains, and bituminous waterways for embankment shall be the class shown
on the plans and as specified in Section 6.06, "Riprap and Slope Protection" in these
General Specifications.

6.07.2.5 Galvanized Sheet Metal. The galvanized sheet metal for the overside
drain flume shall be fabricated from two (2) millimeter thick corrugated sheet metal and
the tapered inlet assembly shall be fabricated from two (2) millimeter thick smooth sheet
metal.

6.07.2.6 Anchor Stakes. The anchor stakes used to attach the overside drain to the
slope shall be thirty-eight (38) millimeter galvanized steel pipe.

6.07.2.7 Stone. Stone for grouted stone ditch lining or grouted stone wash checks
shall be hard, durable, and from a source approved by the Engineer. The stone shall
be quarried or fractured in generally rectangular shapes suitable for laying in the
required configurations.

52
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.07.2.8 Grout. Grout for grouted ditch linings or wash checks shall conform to
Subparagraph 5.01.3.1.2, "Mortar" in these General Specifications.

6.07.2.9 Bedding Course. Bedding course material shall conform to the

requirements of Subsection 3.02.2, "Materials" for Aggregate Subbase, Grading I or II
in these General Specifications.

6.07.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.07.3.1 Excavation. The subgrade for the ditch linings, wash checks, and slope
drains shall be excavated to a smooth surface parallel to the proposed finished surface
and to a depth sufficient for the full thickness of the lining, wash checks, or slope drains.
Soft, unstable subgrade material shall be removed and replaced with suitable materials
approved by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be compacted to Type 95 compaction.

6.07.3.2 Concrete Ditch Linings, Concrete Wash Checks and Concrete Cut
Slope Drains.

6.07.3.2.1 Bedding Course. The bedding course, if required by the plans, shall
be placed to the minimum specified dimensions in layers not exceeding one hundred
fifty (150) millimeters compacted depth and compacted to Type 90 compaction.

6.07.3.2.2 Forms. Forms for concrete ditch linings, concrete wash checks, and
cut slope drains shall be full typical section depth constructed of metal, wood, or other
suitable material. All forms shall be free from warp, and of sufficient strength to resist
the pressure of the concrete without displacement. They shall be securely staked, and
supported firmly to the required line and grade.

6.07.3.2.3 Concrete Placement. Concrete shall be placed in accordance with

Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" in these General Specifications. Placement of
concrete for ditch linings and slope drains shall begin at the lower end of the portion of
the ditch to be lined or slope to be drained and progress toward the upper end. If shown
on the plans, the concrete shall be reinforced with the type of reinforcement and in the
manner indicated.

The surface shall be finished with a wooden float. Facilities for workmen shall
be provided to avoid them walking in the fresh concrete.

6.07.3.2.4 Curing. Immediately after the finishing operations are completed, the
concrete shall be protected and cured in conformance with Paragraph 5.03.4.10, "Curing
and Protection" in these General Specifications using membrane or water curing.

6.07.3.3 Grouted Riprap Stone Ditch Linings and Wash Checks. Grouted riprap
ditch linings and wash checks shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements
of Section 6.06, "Riprap and Slope Protection" in these General Specifications.

53
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.07.3.4 Bituminous Waterways and Slope Drains.

6.07.3.4.1 Bedding Course. The bedding course, if required by the plans, shall
be placed to the minimum specified dimensions in layers not exceeding one hundred fifty
(150) millimeters compacted depth and compacted to Type 95 compaction.

6.07.3.4.2 Forms. If shown on the plans, forms of a type satisfactory to the

Engineer shall be staked securely into position at the correct line and elevation. Other
approved equipment and methods may be used.

6.07.3.4.3 Placing Mixture. The mixture shall be placed on the prepared bed
only when the bed is sufficiently dry and weather conditions are suitable. The mixture
shall be placed in one or more courses of uniform thickness as shown on the plans.
Each course shall be smoothed by raking or screeding, and shall be thoroughly
compacted by rolling with a hand-operated roller weighing not less than one hundred fifty
(150) kilograms, or with a small power roller of a type satisfactory to the Engineer. Areas
that cannot be reached with rollers may be compacted with hand tampers. After
compaction, the surfacing shall be of nominal thickness and cross section shown on the
plans, shall be smooth and even, and of a dense and uniform texture.

6.07.3.5 Metal Slope Drains. The corrugated metal inlet assemblies and flumes
and other appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with these specifications and
in conformity with the standard drawings, design, grades, and at the locations shown on
the plans or as established by the Engineer.

6.07.3.6 Backfilling and Finishing Work. For all ditch linings, wash checks, and
slope drains, immediately after placement or curing, the installation shall be backfilled
with suitable material and compacted to Type 95 compaction. The adjacent slopes and
shoulders shall also be shaped and compacted to the required cross section and to
provide a neat appearance to the drainage installation.

6.07.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The ditch linings, wash checks, and
slope linings will be inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with
Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the ditch linings, wash checks, and slope linings shall
be sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test
methods referenced in Subsection 6.07.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications.
The construction of the ditch lining, wash checks and slope drains will be accepted in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance" in these
General Specifications.

6.07.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Ditch Linings shall be measured by the square

meter for all Work authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer based on the
top surface area of each item as shown on the plans or authorized by the Engineer.

Wash Checks, Embankment Slope Drains, and Cut Slope Drains shall be measured
by the linear meter for all Work authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer.

54
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Wash Checks shall be measured perpendicular to the wash along the top surface of the
upstream face as shown on the plans. Embankment Drains and Cut Slope Drains shall
be measured longitudinally based on the lengths ordered by the Engineer and limits
shown on the plans.

There shall be no separate measurement of excavation, backfill bedding course,

minor concrete, bituminous concrete, reinforcing steel, steel mesh, stone, riprap, grout
and other quantities associated with these items. This Work shall be considered
subsidiary to these items.

Loose riprap or grouted riprap required at the outlet ends of ditches and slope drains
shall be measured separately in accordance with Subsection 6.06.4, "Method of
Measurement" in these General Specifications.

6.07.6 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work as measured above
will be paid at the contract unit price(s) specified in the Bill of Quantities which price(s)
shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, for all labor, equipment, tools,
supplies, and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

60701 Ditch Lining Square Meter

6070101 Concrete Ditch Lining Square Meter

6070102 Grouted Stone Ditch Lining Square Meter

6070103 Paving Tile Ditch Lining Square Meter

6070104 (Type) Ditch Lining Square Meter

60702 Wash Check Linear Meter

6070201 Concrete Wash Check Linear Meter

6070202 Grouted Stone Riprap Wash Check Linear Meter

6070203 (Type) Wash Check Linear Meter

60703 Slope Drain Linear Meter

6070301 Concrete Embankment Slope Drain Linear Meter

6070302 Bituminous Embankment Slope Drain Linear Meter

6070303 Metal Embankment Slope Drain Linear Meter

6070304 Concrete Cut slope Drain Linear Meter

6070305 Bituminous Cut Slope Drain Linear Meter

6070306 Metal Cut Slope Drain Linear Meter

55
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.08 - PIPE CULVERTS

6.08.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing circular pipe
culverts and elliptical pipe arch culverts. All units shall conform to the dimensions,
fabrications, material, and strength requirements for the type, class, size, and shape in
accordance with the plans and these specifications. Units shall be bedded and
backfilled in accordance with applicable provisions included herein and shall be
constructed to the lines and grades shown or established. When specified, concrete
headwalls or anchors of the class concrete and dimensions shown shall be constructed
on pipe culverts.

Where alternate types of pipe are shown in the contract, any of the alternates may
be furnished provided that each continuous line of pipe is constructed of the same
throughout. At locations where no alternates are shown, the specified type shall be
installed.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast)
Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place)
Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast)
Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place)

6.08.2 MATERIALS.

6.08.2.1 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast).

6.08.2.1.1 Description. This specification covers reinforced concrete round

pipe to be used for culvert construction.

6.08.2.1.2 Requirements. Reinforced concrete round pipe shall meet all

applicable requirements of the "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,
Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe," AASHTO M 170. Unless otherwise shown on the plans
or in the Special Specifications, Class V pipe shall be furnished.

6.08.2.1.3 Basis of Acceptance. Acceptability of pipe in sizes less than one

and eighty-three thousandths (1.083) meters in diameter shall be based on one (1) or
more of the following items as may be deemed necessary by the Engineer.

1. The results of three-edge-bearing tests for the load to produce a twenty-five

hundredths (0.25) millimeter crack and the ultimate load performed on not less than
three percent (3%) of all pipes furnished (AASHO T33).

2. The loading to destruction of selected pieces of pipe to determine ultimate

strength, area and placement of steel and absorption characteristics of the concrete
(AASHO T33).

56
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

3. Absorption tests on selected samples from the wall of the pipe (AASHO T33).

4. By inspection of the finished pipe to determine its conformance with the

design prescribed in this specification and its freedom from defects.

5. Crushing tests on concrete cores drilled from the wall of the pipe (AASHO T
33).

6. Absorption tests on concrete cores drilled from the walls of selected pipe
(AASHO T 33).

7. By inspection of the finished pipe, including the amount and placement of

reinforcement, to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in these
specifications and its freedom from defects.

By mutual agreement between the producer and the Engineer, pipe one and
eighty-three thousandths (1.083) meters in diameter and larger may be tested by three-
edge-bearing to complete destruction to determine area and placement of steel.

6.08.2.1.4 Testing of Precast Reinforced Concrete Pipe. If the Contractor

elects to purchase reinforced concrete culvert pipe from a source off the project, all
provisions of the specification shall apply. Pipe not available for testing and inspection
during manufacture will be tested on the job site in accordance with the specifications.

For test purposes, the Contractor shall at his expense, when directed by the
Engineer, provide three (3) edge bearing test equipment (CT 230) or CT 230M). The
test equipment shall remain on-site until such time as the Engineer releases it. The
Contractor shall assist the Engineer in conducting the three-edge-bearing tests as
directed by the Engineer.

6.08.2.1.5 End Sections. Concrete for precast concrete end sections shall
conform to the requirements of Class K in Paragraph 5.01.2.1 "Portland Cement
Concrete" in these General Specifications. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the
requirements of Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.
Materials for other end sections shall conform to the requirements shown on the plans
in these General Specifications and in the Special Specifications.

6.08.2.1.6 On-Site Fabrication. If the precast pipe is not supplied by an

approved manufacturer of reinforced concrete pipe and the Contractor elects to precast
such pipe on site, the Contractor shall, in addition to the requirements specified herein,
comply with all of the requirements of Sections 5.01 "Portland Cement Concrete," 5.03
"Concrete Structures" and 5.02 "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications as
deemed applicable by the Engineer. Pipe cast on the site shall be as detailed on the
plans.

The curing methods for on-site precast reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to
the requirements of Paragraph 5.03.4.10 "Curing and Protection" in these General
Specifications.

57
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The acceptability of pipes manufactured on-site shall be determined from results

obtained from laboratory cured compressive strength cylinders tested in accordance with
AASHTO T22, and conforming to the general requirements for reinforced concrete
culvert pipe as state herein.

Pipes represented by test cylinders that fail to meet the strength requirements for
Class K concrete, but in no case below eighty percent (80%) of the specified design
strength, shall be properly marked, and installed provided that the full length of the
culvert in which they are used shall be carefully bedded in a concrete cradle of at least
one hundred forty (140) kilograms per square centimeter, twenty-eight (28) day strength,
having a minimum thickness under the pipe of one-fourth (¼) of the nominal internal
diameter of the culvert pipe and extending up the sides of the pipe to a height equal to
one-fourth (¼) the outside diameter of the culvert pipe. The concrete cradle shall extend
the full width of the culvert trench unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, but in no
case shall it extend, as its narrowest point, less than fifteen (15) centimeters from the
outside of the pipe on each side. Concrete cradle bedding installed for the purpose of
counter affecting under-strength pipe shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Pipes
represented by test cylinders that fail to meet eighty percent (80%) of the specified
design strength shall be destroyed and disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the
Engineer.

There shall be no less than four (4) test cylinders made for each seventy-five (75)
cubic meters of concrete placed or for each day's production, whichever is less.

6.08.2.2 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast).

6.08.2.2.1 Description. These specifications cover precast reinforced concrete

arch pipe to be used for culverts.

6.08.2.2.2 Requirements. Pipe furnished under these specifications shall meet

all applicable requirements of the "Specifications for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert,
Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe" (AASHTO M 206). Unless otherwise shown on the plans
or specified in the Contract Documents, Class A-IV shall be furnished for culverts up to
one and thirty hundredths (1.30) meter times eighty hundredths (.80) meter and Class
A-III for larger pipes.

6.08.2.2.3 Basis of Acceptance. Acceptability of pipe in sizes from forty-six

hundredths (0.46) meter times twenty-eight hundredths (.28) meter through one and
thirty hundredths (1.30) meter by eighty hundredths (.80) meter shall be based on one
(1) or more of the following items, as may be deemed necessary by the Engineer.

1. The results of the three-edge bearing tests for the load to produce at twenty-
five hundredth (0.25) millimeter crack and the ultimate load performed on not less than
three percent (3%) of the pipe furnished (AASHO T 33).

58
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. The loading to destruction of selected pieces of pipe to determine ultimate

strength, area and placement of steel and absorption characteristics of the concrete
(AASHO T 33).

3. Absorption tests on selected samples from the wall of the pipe (AASHO T
33).

4. By inspection of the finished pipe to determine its conformance with the

design prescribed in this specification and its freedom from defects.

Acceptability of pipe one and forty-nine hundredths (1.49) meter by ninety-one

hundredths (.91) meter and larger shall be based on the following items as may be
deemed necessary by the Engineer.

5. Crushing tests on concrete cores drilled from the wall of the pipe (AASHO T
33).

6. Absorption tests on concrete cores drilled from the walls of selected pipe
(AASHO T 33).

7. By inspection of the finished pipe, including the amount and placement of

reinforcement, to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in this
specification and its freedom from defects.

By mutual agreement between the producer and the Engineer these sizes of pipe
may be tested by three-edge bearing to complete destruction to determine area and
placement of steel.

6.08.2.2.4 On-Site Fabrication. If the precast pipe is not supplied by an

approved manufacturer of reinforced concrete arch pipe and the Contractor elects to
precast such pipe on site, the Contractor shall, in addition to the requirements specified
herein, comply with all the requirements of Sections 5.01 "Concrete," Section 5.03
"Concrete Structures" and Section 5.02 "Reinforcing Steel" in these General
Specifications. Pipe cast on the site shall be as detailed on the plans.

The curing methods for on-site precast reinforced concrete arch culvert pipe shall
conform to the requirements of Paragraph 5.03.4.10 "Curing and Protection" in these
General Specifications.

The acceptability of pipes manufactured on-site shall be determined from results

obtained from laboratory cured compressive strength cylinders tested in accordance with
AASHTO T 22, and conforming to the general requirements for reinforced concrete
culvert pipe as stated herein.

Pipes represented by test cylinders that fail to meet the strength requirements for
Class K concrete, but in no case below eighty percent (80%) of the specified design
strength, shall be properly marked, and installed provided that the full length of the
culvert in which they are used shall be carefully bedded in a concrete cradle of at lease

59
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

one hundred forty (140) kilograms per square centimeter, twenty-eight (28) day strength,
having a minimum thickness under the pipe of one-fourth (¼) of the nominal internal
span of the culvert pipe and extending up the sides of the pipe to fifteen (15) centimeters
above the third (_) radius center. The concrete cradle shall extend the full width of the
culvert trench unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer but in no case shall it extend
as its narrowest point, less than fifteen (15) centimeters from the outside of the pipe on
each side. Concrete cradle bedding installed for the purpose of counter effecting under-
strength pipe shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Pipes represented by test
cylinders that fail to meet eighty percent (80%) of the specified design strength shall be
destroyed and disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer.

There shall be no less than four (4) test cylinders made for each seventy-five (75)
cubic meters of concrete placed or for each day's production, whichever is less.

6.08.2.3 Reinforced Concrete Pipe (Cast-in-Place) and Reinforced Concrete

Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place).

6.08.2.3.1 Description. These specifications cover cast-in reinforced concrete

round pipe and cast-in-place reinforced concrete arch pipe to be used for culvert
construction.

6.08.2.3.2 Requirements. Cast-in-place reinforced concrete pipes shall be

constructed as shown in the standard plans or as otherwise proposed by the Contractor
and approved by the Engineer. Any deviation from the approved manner of
construction, in the opinion of the Engineer, will be a basis for rejection, and the
subsequent removal and reconstruction of the culvert. Cast-in-place pipe culverts shall
conform to the requirements of Section 5.01 "Portland Cement Concrete," Section 5.03
"Concrete Structures," Section 5.02 "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

6.08.2.3.3 Basis of Acceptance. Acceptability of cast-in place pipe culverts

shall be determined from the conformance of the concrete to the requirement specified
for Class K concrete, based on results obtained from laboratory-cured compressive
strength cylinders tested in accordance with AASHO T22, conforming to the other
requirements specified for reinforced concrete culvert pipe as stated herein. There shall
be no less than four (4) test cylinders made for each seventy-five (75) cubic meters of
concrete placed for each day's pour, whichever it less.

6.08.3 EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall be according to the type and number outlined
in the Contractor's detailed Program of Work as approved by the Engineer.

6.08.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.08.4.1 Excavation and Forming Bed for Pipe. The excavation for pipe culverts
shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section 2.10, "Trench
Excavation and Backfill" in these General Specifications.

60
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.08.4.2 Laying Pipe.

6.08.4.2.1 General. No pipe culverts shall be placed until the excavations and
foundations have been approved by the Engineer. Variations in the laying lengths of two
(2) or more pipes forming a multiple culvert shall not exceed (2) centimeters. The laying
length of any pipe shall not underrun the theoretical design length by more than two (2)
centimeters.

6.08.4.2.2 Precast Concrete Pipe and Pipe Arches. The pipe shall be
carefully laid true to lines and grades given, with hub, bell, or groove ends upstream, and
with the spigot or tongue end entered the full length into the adjacent section of pipe.
If the pipe is to be laid below the ground line, a trench shall be excavated to the required
depth and of a width sufficient to permit thorough tamping of the backfill under the
haunches and around the pipe. Any pipe which is not in true alignment or which shows
any undue settlement after laying, but before the fill is placed, shall be taken up and
relaid at the Contractor's expense. When shown on the plans, or as directed by the
Engineer, sufficient camber shall be built into the pipe structure to allow for settlement
from fill loads. All joints, shall be sealed with an approved cement mortar. Jointing
mortar shall be one (1) part Portland cement to two (2) parts of sand, by volume. The
quantity of water in the mixture shall be sufficient to produce a still workable mortar, but
shall in no case exceed twenty-seven (27) liters per fifty (50) kilogram sack of cement.
The sand shall conform to AASHO M 45 and cement shall conform to AASHO M 85.
When approved by the Engineer, air entrained Portland cement conforming to AASHO
M 134 or and admixture conforming to AASHO M 154 may be used. Rubber gasketed
joints when approved by the Engineer, may be used at no additional cost to the Ministry.
Where permissible lift holes have been used, the holes shall be carefully filled with an
approved expansive mortar to provide a watertight section. The mortar shall be finished
flush on the inside of the pipe and shall be properly cured on the outside. Lifting devices
shall have sufficient bearing on the inside of the pipe to avoid damage resulting from a
concentration of stresses around the lift holes.

6.08.4.2.3 Rubber Gasket Type Pipe. If rubber gasket type pipe is used, the
joints shall be Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to
insure that the gasket has not been displaced.

6.08.4.2.4 Sealing Pipe. In sealing pipe with mortar, the mortar contact areas of all
pipe ends shall be clean and damp when mortar is applied. After applying mortar to the
entire interior surface of the bell or groove, the spigot or tongue end shall be forced into
position. Any remaining void in the bell or groove shall be filled with a bed of mortar
built-up around the groove-type joint. The interior joints of the pipe shall be finished
flush with the surface of the pipe. Outside surface of mortar joints shall be cured with
burlap, kept thoroughly moist for a minimum of three (3) days after the completion of the
joint.
Multiple culverts, unless otherwise noted on the plans, shall be laid with one-half
(½) span of the pipe, or a minimum of three hundred (300) millimeters, whichever is
greater, between the pipes.

6.08.4.2.5 Cast-in-Place Concrete Pipe and Pipe Arches. The pipes shall be
constructed in accordance with the details shown on the plans or in an alternate manner,

61
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The pipe shall be carefully
formed true to the lines and grades given.

When the Contractor elects to construct the pipe in a trench with no external
vertical forms, four (4) centimeters of additional reinforcing steel clearance shall be
provided. No additional payment will be made for the increased quantity of concrete
required as it shall be considered subsidiary to the bid items for "Cast-in-Place
Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Pipe Arches."

Longitudinal construction joints will only be permitted as shown on the plans.

Transverse construction joints will be permitted provided prior written approval is
obtained from the Engineer. Continuance of such approval shall be contingent on the
construction of the joints in a satisfactory and acceptable manner.

All forms for Cast-in-Place Reinforced Concrete Pipes shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to their use. The inside pipe forms shall be of metal suitably stiffened and
supported to be unyielding during the placement of the concrete. The face of the forms
shall be such to provide a smooth and even interior pipe surface.

Interior arch forms may be removed after forty-eight (48) hours when approved
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall use every precaution when removing forms to
protect the culvert from damage. Damage caused by the removal for forms shall be
immediately repaired by the Contractor at his own expense.

Multiple culverts shall be laid (or constructed) as shown on the plans.

Curing of Cast-in-Place Reinforced Pipe and Arch Culvert shall conform to the
requirement of Paragraph 5.03.4.10 "Curing and Protection" in these General
Specifications.

6.08.4.2.6 Bedding. The bedding of pipe culverts shall conform to the

requirements of Section 2.10, "Trench Excavation and Backfill” in these General
Specifications.

Concrete used for bedding, concrete cradles and concrete used to compensate
for overdepth or overwidth trench excavation will not be paid for separately, but will be
considered subsidiary to the items of pipe culverts appearing in the Bill of Quantities.

6.08.4.2.7 Backfilling. The backfilling of pipe culverts shall conform to the

requirements in Section 2.10, "Trench Excavation and Backfill" in these General
Specifications.

6.08.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The pipe culverts will be inspected,

sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work"
in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the pipe culverts shall be sampled, tested and
evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods referenced in

62
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Subsection 6.08.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications. The installation of the

pipe culverts will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or
Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.08.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. This work shall be measured by the linear

meter, to the nearest centimeter, of the various types, classes and sizes of pipe culverts
appearing in the Bill of Quantities.

For accepted pipe culverts without headwalls, the measurement shall be taken from
end to end along the geometrical center of the pipe. For accepted pipe culverts with
headwalls, the measurements, unless otherwise shown on the plans, shall be taken from
the inside (roadside) face of parapet (hub-guard) to the inside face of parapet along the
geometrical center of the pipe.

No measurement or payment shall be made for pipes ordered removed because of

faulty construction.

The quantities of Work and material constituting headwalls which are part of a pipe
culvert installation will be measured and paid for as provided in the several Sections
involved.

6.08.7 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted pipe culverts, measured
as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) per linear meter, as
specified in the Bill of Quantities for the various types, classes and sizes of pipes, which
price (s) shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, for all labor,
structural excavation, removal of old pipes, shoring, draining water, jointing, bedding and
all bedding materials, backfill, including concrete backfill, increased cement content,
equipment, tools, and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work
as specified in Section 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

60801 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 300 mm Linear Meter

60802 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 400 mm Linear Meter

60803 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 500 mm Linear Meter

60804 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 600 mm Linear Meter

60805 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 750 mm Linear Meter

60806 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 1000 mm Linear Meter

60807 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 1200 mm Linear Meter

60808 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 1400 mm Linear Meter

60809 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), ___ mm Linear Meter

63
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

60812 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), Linear Meter

60813 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 400 mm Linear Meter

600814 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 500 mm Linear Meter

60815 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 600 mm Linear Meter

60816 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 750 mm Linear Meter

60817 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 1000 mm Linear Meter

60818 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 1200 mm Linear Meter

60819 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 1400 mm Linear Meter

60820 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), ___ mm Linear Meter

60823 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 49 x 77 cm Linear Meter

60824 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 61 x 96 cm Linear Meter

60825 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 73 x 115 cm Linear Meter

60826 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 85.5 x 134.5 cm Linear Meter

60827 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 97.5 x 153.5 cm Linear Meter

60828 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 109.5 x 173 cm Linear Meter

60829 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 122 x 192 cm Linear Meter

60830 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 134 x 211 cm Linear Meter

60831 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), ___x___ cm Linear Meter

60835 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 49 x 77 cm Linear Meter

60836 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 61 x 96 cm Linear Meter

60837 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 73 x 115 cm Linear Meter

60838 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 85.5 x 134.5 Linear Meter
cm

60839 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 97.5 x 153.5 Linear Meter
cm

60840 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 109.5 x 173 Linear Meter
cm

60841 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 122 x 192 cm Linear Meter

60842 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 134 x 211 cm Linear Meter

60843 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), ___ x ___ cm Linear Meter

64
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.09 - WATER WELL EXTENSIONS

6.09.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of extending or construction of mortar

uncoursed rubble masonry water wells above original ground level for protection against
inundation from flood water in accordance with the specifications and in conformity with
the dimensions and locations as shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.

ITEM IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Water Well Extensions

6.09.2 MATERIALS. Stone for water well extensions shall be sound, durable stone,
and, if possible, obtained locally during construction. Stone shall be similar in size to
that used in the existing well or as approved by the Engineer. Mortar shall meet the
requirements of Subparagraph 5.01.3.1.4, "Mortar" in these General Specifications.

6.09.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. All live or active wells within the limits of
new construction or at locations shown in the plans or directed by the Engineer to
continue in service and which require extending shall be carefully protected during the
placement of the embankment and all construction operations.

All stones shall be laid in mortar with all spaces between stones completely filled and
with the stones carefully settled in the mortar beds before the mortar has set.

The masonry shall be constructed in an approved workmanlike manner and the top
of the wall shall fit the embankment slope and/or be constructed to the elevation shown
on the plans or designated by the Engineer.

The mortar shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun and shall be cured for
three (3) days after placing with approved wet burlap or wet cotton mats.

The backfill, when required, around the wall shall be carefully placed and the finished
construction shall present a neat approved appearance.

6.09.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The water well extensions will be

inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance
of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the water well extensions shall be sampled, tested
and evaluated in accordance with the specifications referenced in Subsection 6.09.2,
"Materials" in these General Specifications. The construction of the water well
extensions will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested
Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.09.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Stone masonry for water well extensions shall
be measured by the cubic meter of masonry authorized, completed and accepted by the
Engineer based on the minimum dimensions shown on the plans or ordered and
subsequently verified by the Engineer.

65
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.09.6 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work, measured as

provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter specified in the
Bill of Quantities for Water Well Extensions, which price shall be full compensation for
furnishing and placing all materials, for all excavation, for all labor, tools, equipment, and
all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified in
Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEMPAY UNIT

60901 Water Well ExtensionsCubic Meter Cubic Meter

66
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.10 - DIKES

6.10.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of reconstructing portions of existing

farm dikes which were partially or totally removed in order to permit new construction,
and constructing new diversion and spur dikes. Diversion dikes shall consist of placing
material to the lines and grades required to intercept and divert the flow of surface water
to an appropriate discharge or dispersion point. Spur dikes shall consist of placing
material to the lines and grades required to channel flood waters away from bridge
abutments.

This Work shall be in accordance with the specifications and in conformity with the
lines and grades shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Reconstructing Existing Farm Dike
Spur Dike
Diversion Dike

6.10.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. Only approved materials from the

roadway excavation, drainage excavation, structural excavation, or borrow may be used
to reconstruct existing farm dikes, or construct new diversion or spur dikes.

Reconstruction of existing farm dikes shall be the rebuilding of existing

improvements, at or near the same location, to either new lines, grades, and cross
sections, or to their original lines, grades and cross sections, as indicated on the project
plans. Farm dikes shall be compacted in a manner approved by the Engineer and to a
density fully equivalent to the original dike or as otherwise ordered by the Engineer.

Reconstruction of existing farm dikes, and construction of diversion and spur dikes
shall be performed in accordance with the plans and Section 2.05, "Embankment" in
these General Specifications. All material shall be compacted to Type 95 compaction
unless otherwise specified.

Unless otherwise specified, the outer one and half (1.5) meter (horizontal) of dike
faces subject to flooding and not otherwise protected by construction fabric and riprap
shall be constructed of AASHTO M-145 Classification A-1 or A-2 materials.

Construction fabric and riprap shall be installed on spur dikes as required by the
plans.

6.10.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The dikes will be inspected, sampled,

tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work" in these
General Specifications as follows:

The construction of the dikes shall be sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance
with the specifications referenced in Subsection 6.10.2, "Construction Requirements"
and in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance" in these
General Specifications.

67
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.10.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Reconstructing Existing Farm Dikes shall be

measured by the linear method of authorized, completed and accepted Work by the
dimensions ordered and subsequently verified by the Engineer.

Spur Dikes and Diversion Dikes shall be measured by the cubic meter of material
authorized, placed, compacted, finished, and accepted by the Engineer based on the
ordered and verified final dimensions of the dike(s).

Quantities of embankment measured as farm dikes, spur dikes, or diversion dikes will
not be measured separately as embankment.

Riprap and Construction Fabric, if required, shall be measured as provided in Section

6.06, "Riprap and Slope Protection" in these General Specifications. Such quantities of
riprap will not be included in the quantities of Spur Dikes or other dikes.

6.10.5 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work, measured as

provided, will be paid for at the contract unit price specified in the Bill of Quantities bid
per linear meter for Reconstructing Existing Farm Dikes, and per cubic meter for Spur
Dikes and Diversion Dikes, which price shall be full compensation for furnishing all
material, water, equipment, tools, labor, and all other items necessary for the proper
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

61001 Reconstructing Existing Farm Dikes Linear Meter
61002 Spur Dike Cubic Meter
61003 Diversion Dike Cubic Meter

68
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.11 - FENCES, GATES AND GUARDS

6.11.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of furnishing and installing fences,
gates, and guards in accordance with the plans and specifications, at the locations and
to the lines and grades shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Chain Link Fence
Industrial Fence
Wire Barbed Wire Fence
Wire Combination Fence
High Tension Wire Fence
Gate
Animal Guard

6.11.2 MATERIALS.

6.11.2.1 Chain Link Fence. Chain link fabric shall conform to ASTM A 491
(aluminum coated) or ASTM A 392 (galvanized). Mesh size shall be fifty (50) millimeters
nominal, and wire size shall be three and seventy-six hundredths (3.76) millimeters
diameter (No. 9 AWG) before galvanizing. If required by the plans or Special
Specifications, fabric shall be plastic coated in accordance with Paragraph 6.01.2.5,
"Glare Screens" in these General Specifications.

Materials shall conform to the requirements of this specification and shall be of the
sizes, dimensions and types indicated in the HDM, Volume 4, Standard Drawings Nos.
FAG-4 and FAG-5, according to the type(s) of chain-link fence(s) shown on the plans or
directed.

6.11.2.2 Barbed Wire. Barbed wire shall conform to ASTM A 585 (aluminum
coated), Class 1; or ASTM A 121 (galvanized), Class 1.0 Wire shall be composed of
minimum two and five tenths (2.5) millimeters diameter (No. 12½AWG) wire and four
(4) pointed barbs spaced not more than one hundred fifty (150) millimeters on center.

6.11.2.3 Combination Fence Fabric. Fabric for combination fences shall conform
to ASTM A 584 (aluminum coated), Class 1; or ASTM A 116 (galvanized), Class 1.0
Minimum wire size shall be three and four tenths (3.4) millimeter diameter (No. 10 AWG).
Mesh size and style shall be as shown on the plans.

6.11.2.4 Tension Wire. Tension wire shall conform to ASTM A 641, Class 1, Hard
Temper. Tension wire for High Tension Wire Fence shall be a minimum of two and
seven tenths (2.7) millimeters diameter. Tension wire for Chain Link Fence and
Industrial Fence shall be a minimum of four and five tenths (4.5) millimeters diameter.
Tension wire for other fences shall be of the minimum diameter shown on the plans.

6.11.2.5 Posts and Braces. Circular steel posts and braces shall be galvanized,
conforming to ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, or ASTM A 120, Schedule 40, and shall be of
the dimensions shown on the plans. At the option of the Contractor, alternate

69
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

galvanized steel shapes having the minimum equivalent bending strength in both
directions may be substituted for circular posts and braces.

Rectangular hollow sections shall conform to ASTM A 501, BS 4360 Grade 43C or
DIN 17100 St. 44.

End corner posts, straining posts and line posts, along with braces and stretcher bars
thereof, shall conform to the requirements of this specification and shall be of the sizes
and dimensions indicated in the Standard Drawings referred to in Paragraph 2.1 above.
Line posts shall be spaced at three (3.0) meters on centers maximum, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer. Gate posts shall conform to the requirements of this
specification and shall be of the sizes and dimensions specified in the HDM, Volume 4,
Standard Drawing FAG-6.

Post tops shall be pressed steel, wrought iron, malleable iron, or plastic caps to
manufacturer’s standard as approved by the Engineer, designated as a weathertight
closure cap for each post.

Posts and braces for High Tension Wire Fence shall conform to ASTM A 618, Grade
1.0 Material shall be of the shapes and dimensions shown on the plans and shall be
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123.

6.11.2.6 Miscellaneous Hardware. All miscellaneous hardware shall conform to the

requirements shown on the plans, and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A
153.

6.11.2.7 Tie Wire. Tie Wire shall conform to ASTM A 112, and shall be minimum
three and five tenths (3.5) millimeters diameter unless otherwise shown.

6.11.2.8 Structural Steel. Structural steel for Animal Guards shall conform to ASTM
A 36, and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM D 123.

6.11.2.9 Concrete. Concrete for setting posts shall conform to the requirements of
Subsection 5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor Structures" in these General Specifications.
Concrete for Animal Guards shall conform to Class A in Section 5.01.0

6.11.2.10 Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel shall conform to Section 5.02,

"Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

6.11.2.11 Wire Rope. Wire rope for High Tension Wire Fence installed in the median
shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 30, Type 11, Class A. Equivalent
galvanized wire rope with a minimum breaking strength of nineteen thousand four
hundred (19,400) kilograms will be acceptable.

6.11.2.12 Barbed Wire Supporting Arms. These items, where indicated, shall be
manufacturer’ s standard as approved by the Engineer, consisting of metal and finish to
match the framework, with provision for anchorage to posts and attaching three (3) rows
of barbed wire to each arm. Supporting arms may be either attached to posts or integral

70
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

with post top weather cap and must be capable of withstanding a maximum of one
hundred fifteen (115) kg downward pull at the outermost end. Unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer, provide single forty five (45) degree arm for three (3) strands barbed
wire, one for each post, spaced as indicated on the plans.

6.11.2.13 Stretcher Bars. Stretcher bars shall be of one piece lengths to full height
of fabric, with a minimum cross-section of twenty by five (20 x 5) mm. Provide one
stretcher bar for each gate and end post, and two (2) for each corner and straining post.

6.11.2.14 Stretcher Bar Bands. Bands shall be steel, wrought iron, or malleable
iron, spaced not over three hundred (300) mm on centers to secure stretcher bars to
end, corner, straining and gate posts. Bands may also be used with special fittings for
securing braces to end, corner, straining and gate posts.

6.11.2.15 Gates. Materials for gates shall conform to the requirements of this
specification and shall be of the sizes, dimensions and types indicated in the HDM,
Volume 4, Standard Drawing No FAG-6.

Gate perimeter frames shall be fabricated of tubular members. Additional horizontal

and vertical members shall be provided to ensure proper gate operation and for
attachment of fabric, hardware and accessories. Space so that frame members are not
more than two and forty five hundreths (2.45) meters apart.

Gate frames shall be assembled by welding or with special malleable or pressed steel
fittings and rivets for rigid connections. Same fabric as for the fence shall be used,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Fabric shall be installed with stretcher bars
at vertical edges. Bars may also be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretchers
to gate frame at not more than three hundred eighty (380) mm on centers. Attach
hardware with rivets or by other means which will provide security against removal or
breakage.

Diagonal cross-bracing consisting of ten (10) mm diameter adjustable length truss

rods shall be installed on gates, where necessary to ensure frame rigidity without sag
or twist, as approved by the Engineer.

6.11.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.11.3.1 Fencing. The Contractor shall stake all sections of fence as shown on the
plans or ordered by the Engineer prior to beginning Work. Top elevations of all posts
shall be computed to follow a smooth grade with curves at transitions. Cutting the tops
from posts after installation shall not be permitted.

The required line of the fence shall be cleared of all obstacles and debris which would
interfere with the line of the fence. Minor grading may be required to achieve a smooth
line.

Posts shall be set plumb to the required line and grade in concrete footings. No wire
or fabric shall be strung taut until line posts have been set for at least one (1) day and

71
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

corner posts for at least three (3) days. In sandy areas or other areas of poor soil
support, the Contractor shall enlarge the footings as required by the Engineer to
maintain adequate fence tension.

Wire or fabric shall be strung uniformly at the required tension and attached to corner
posts and brace posts before permanently attaching to line posts. Any significant sags
or detensioning which occurs after installation shall be corrected by the Contractor.

When fencing crosses ravines or other discontinuities in the terrain causing gaps
under the fence, the Contractor, if so ordered by the Engineer, shall modify the
installation to the extent practical by adding strands or additional fabric so as to provide
the required access control without interfering with drainage.

Galvanized gates or fencing materials which are constructed or repaired by welding,

cutting, or other Work which damages the coating shall be repaired by grinding smooth
all damaged surfaces and painting with two (2) coats of paint No. 8 as specified in
Section 5.13, "Painting of Structures" in these General Specifications.

6.11.3.2 Animal Guards. Concrete supports for animal guards shall be constructed
in accordance with the requirements of Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" in these
General Specifications. Supports shall be set to support the guard at the design grade
of the finished roadway surface. Anchor bolts shall be set precisely prior to and
supported firmly during concreting.

Steel and hardware for animal guards shall be galvanized before assembly. Units
shall be set on the supports after the concrete curing period.

6.11.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The fences, gates and guards will be
inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08 "Acceptance
of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the fences, gates and guards shall be sampled,
tested and evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods referenced
in Subsection 6.11.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications. The construction of
the fences, gates and guards will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4,
"Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.11.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Chain Link Fence, Industrial Fence, Barbed

Wire Fence, Combination Fence, and High Tension Wire Fence shall be measured by
the linear meter for all Work authorized, completed, and accepted by the Engineer based
on the horizontal length of each type and height fence ordered by the Engineer.
Dimensions ordered shall be from center to center of end or corner posts. Gates and
other gaps shall be excluded.

Gates shall be measured by the square meter for all gates of each type authorized,
completed, and accepted by the Engineer, based on the nominal height of the gate
ordered times the required distance between the adjacent fence end/gate support posts.

72
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Animal Guards shall be measured by the unit of each for all Work authorized, completed
and accepted by the Engineer for each width guard required.

There shall be no separate measurement for excavation, backfill, concrete footings,

or for any other material and Work required explicitly or implicitly by the Plans and
specifications for the proper completion of the Work. Such material and Work shall be
considered subsidiary to these items.

6.11.6 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work as measured above
will be paid at the contract unit price(s) specified in the Bill of Quantities, which price(s)
shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, for all labor, equipment, tools,
supplies, and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

61101 Chain Link Fence Linear Meter

6110101 Chain Link Fence, 1.0 m Height Linear Meter

6110102 Chain Link Fence, 1.2 m Height Linear Meter

6110103 Chain Link Fence, 1.4 m Height Linear Meter

6110104 Chain Link Fence, 1.6 m Height Linear Meter

6110105 Chain Link Fence, 1.8 m Height Linear Meter

6110106 Chain Link Fence, 2.0 m Height Linear Meter

6110107 Chain Link Fence, 2.2 m Height Linear Meter

6110108 Chain Link Fence, 2.4 m Height Linear Meter

6110109 Chain Link Fence, 2.6 m Height Linear Meter

61102 Industrial Fence Linear Meter

6110201 Industrial Fence, 1.0 m Height Linear Meter

6110202 Industrial Fence, 1.2 m Height Linear Meter

6110203 Industrial Fence, 1.4 m Height Linear Meter

6110204 Industrial Fence, 1.6 m Height Linear Meter

6110205 Industrial Fence, 1.8 m Height Linear Meter

6110206 Industrial Fence, 2.0 m Height Linear Meter

6110207 Industrial Fence, 2.2 m Height Linear Meter

6110208 Industrial Fence, 2.4 m Height Linear Meter

6110209 Industrial Fence, 2.6 m Height Linear Meter

73
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

61103 Barbed Wire Fence Linear Meter

6110301 Barbed Wire Fence, 2 Strand Linear Meter

6110302 Barbed Wire Fence, 3 Strand Linear Meter

6110303 Barbed Wire Fence, 4 Strand Linear Meter

6110304 Barbed Wire Fence, 5 Strand Linear Meter

6110305 Barbed Wire Fence, 6 Strand Linear Meter

6110306 Barbed Wire Fence, 7 Strand Linear Meter

61104 Combination Wire Fence Linear Meter

6110401 Combination Wire Fence, 2 Wire Linear Meter

6110402 Combination Wire Fence, 3 Wire Linear Meter

6110403 Combination Wire Fence, 4 Wire Linear Meter

6110404 Combination Wire Fence, 5 Wire Linear Meter

6110405 Combination Wire Fence, 6 Wire Linear Meter

61105 High Tension Wire Fence Linear Meter

6110501 High Tension Wire Fence, Type 1 Linear Meter

6110502 High Tension Wire Fence, Type 2 Linear Meter

6110503 High Tension Wire Fence, Type 3 Linear Meter

6110504 High Tension Wire Fence, Type 4 Linear Meter

61106 Gate Unit

6110601 Chain Link Fence Gate Unit

6110602 Industrial Fence Gate Unit

6110603 Combination Fence Gate Unit

6110604 Metal Gate Unit

6110605 (Type) Gate Unit

61107 Animal Guard, 3 m Width Unit

61108 Animal Guard, 4 m Width Unit

61109 Animal Guard, 5 m Width Unit

61110 Animal Guard, 6 m Width Unit

61111 Animal Guard, 7 m Width Unit

61112 Animal Guard, 8 m Width Unit

61113 Animal Guard, 9 m Width Unit

61114 Animal Guard, 10 m Width Unit

74
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.12 - SIDEWALKS, DRIVE PADS AND MEDIAN PAVING

6.12.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of the paving of sidewalks, drive pads,
and medians in accordance with these General Specifications and in conformity to the
locations, lines, grades, and typical sections shown on the plans or established by the
Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Cast-in-Place Sidewalk, Drive Pad or Median Paving
Precast (Tiled) Sidewalk, Drive Pad or Median Paving
Bituminous Sidewalk, Drive Pad or Median Paving

6.12.2 MATERIALS.

6.12.2.1 Concrete. Portland cement concrete shall conform to the requirements of

Class A in Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete" in these General Specifications
except that the concrete subcourse for precast sidewalks and median paving shall
conform to Subsection 5.03.9 "Concrete for Minor Structures" in these General
Specifications.

6.12.2.2 Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel and wire mesh shall conform to the
requirements of Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

6.12.2.3 Mortar. Mortar shall conform to the requirements of Subparagraph

5.01.3.1.4, "Mortar" in these General Specifications.

6.12.2.4 Expansion Joint Filler. Performed expansion joint filler shall conform to
the requirements of AASHTO M 33.

6.12.2.5 Bituminous Mixture. Bituminous mixture shall conform to the

requirements of Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete Pavement” for Bituminous Wearing
Course in these General Specifications.

6.12.2.6 Bedding Course. Bedding course material shall conform to the

requirements of Paragraph 3.02.2.2 "Materials" for Granular Subbase Course, Grading
I or II in these General Specifications.

6.12.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.12.3.1 Cast-in-Place Sidewalks, Drive Pads, Median Paving.

6.12.3.1.1 Excavation. Excavation shall be made to the required depth and to

a width that will permit the installation and bracing of the forms. The foundation shall be
shaped and compacted to an even surface conforming to the section shown on the
plans. All soft and yielding material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable
material.

75
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.12.3.1.2 Bedding Course. Bedding course material, if required, shall be

placed in layers not exceeding one hundred fifty (150) millimeters in depth and each
layer compacted to Type 95 compaction. The total bedding course thickness shall be
as shown on the plans.

6.12.3.1.3 Forms. Forms shall be of metal, wood, or other suitable material and
shall extend for the full depth of the concrete. All forms shall be straight, free from warp,
and of sufficient strength to resist the pressure of the concrete without displacement.
Bracing and staking of forms shall be such that the forms remain in both horizontal and
vertical alignment until their removal. All forms shall be cleaned and oiled before
concrete is placed against them.

6.12.3.1.4 Placing Concrete. The foundation shall be thoroughly moistened

immediately prior to the placing of the concrete. The proportioning and mixing of the
concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements for the class of concrete specified.
The concrete shall be deposited in one course in such a manner as to prevent
segregation and consolidation by vibrators.

6.12.3.1.5 Finishing. The surface shall be finished with a wooden float and light
brooming. No plastering of the surface will be permitted. All outside edges of the slab
and all joints shall be edges with a five (5) millimeter radius edging tool.

6.12.3.1.6 Joints. Expansion joints shall be of the dimensions specified, and

shall be filled with the type of premolded expansion joint filler noted. The sidewalk shall
be dived into sections by weakened plane joints formed by a jointing tool or other
acceptable means as directed. These joints shall extend into the concrete for about one
fourth (¼) to one fifth (1/5) of the depth and shall be approximately three (3) millimeters
wide. Joints shall match as nearly as possible adjacent joints in curb or pavements.
Weakened plane joints may be sawed in lieu of forming with a jointing tool.

Construction joints shall be formed around all appurtenances such as manholes,

utility poles, etc., extending into and through the sidewalk, drive pad, or median.
Premolded expansion joint filler one (1) centimeter thick shall be installed in these joints.
Expansion joint filler of the thickness indicated shall be installed between concrete
construction and any fixed structure such as a building or bridge. This expansion joint
material shall extend for the full depth of the concrete construction.

6.12.3.1.7 Curing. Concrete shall be cured by membrane or water in

accordance with Paragraph 5.03.4.10, "Curing and Protection" in these General
Specifications.

6.12.3.2 Precast (Tiled) Sidewalk, Drive Pad and Median Paving.

6.12.3.2.1 General. Tiled sidewalks shall be constructed in accordance with the

dimensions and levels shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. All areas
inside channelizing islands shall also be provided with a sidewalk pavement, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

76
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Tiles sidewalks shall be formed of precast concrete tiles four hundred by four
hundred (400 X 400) millimeters, with a seven (7) millimeter edge bevel. The tiles shall
have sufficient roughness on the back surface to permit proper adhesion of the mortar.

6.12.3.2.2 Manufacture of Tiles. Precast tiles shall be manufactured by an

automatic plant of the central batch high pressure type, erected in a special yard
reserved specifically for this purpose. The plant shall be equipped with a double feeding
system, one for the upper layer, and another for the lower layer of the tile. Manual
intervention shall be a minimum.

Operation of the plant shall be such that it shall first discharge enough mortar
materials into the form for the upper layer, and after preliminary vibration and uniform
leveling, the coarse mixture for the lower layer shall then be discharged into the tile form.
The high pressure automatic device shall be used only after a second vibration and
leveling of the material has taken place. Tiles shall not be disturbed during setting of the
concrete.

Curing of the tiles shall take place in a closed curing room where the Contractor
shall provide an automatic steam curing system to be operated as and when approved
by the Engineer. The capacity of the curing room shall permit acceptance and complete
curing of the daily plant production of tiles.

The period of curing shall be at least one full day at a temperature of fifty-five to
seventy-five degrees Celsius (55 to 75 o C). This period may be subject to changes and
adjustments after direct tests have been made on the production or as directed by the
Engineer.

Tiles shall not be imperfectly finished, and shall be free from segregation,
honeycombing, broken or damaged corners and imperfect plan faces. Correction of
defects by polishing, retouching or any other means will not be permitted. Approval of
the tiles given by the Engineer at any stage of the Work, shall not prejudice the
Engineer's right to later discard any imperfect tiles. Final approval shall be given only
after the tiles have been completely positioned in-situ. Rejected tiles shall be removed
from the site and replaced.

6.12.3.2.3 Concrete Tiles. Concrete tiles shall consist of an upper layer formed
of one (1) cm of 1:1 cement:sand mortar, and lower layer formed of three (3) centimeters
of Class D concrete.

6.12.3.2.4 Tile Sidewalk Construction. The foundation for tiles shall consist
of seven (7) centimeters thickness of compacted sand gravels.

Tiles shall be laid only after the gravel base has been compacted sufficiently and
after approval has been given by the Engineer. Tiles shall be immersed in water
immediately before laying. Tiles shall be bedded on a five (5) centimeter thickness of
1:3 cement:sand mortar.

77
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Joints between tiles and between tiles and curbs shall be as per the Ministry's
Standard Drawings wide and shall be completely filled with 1:2 cement/sand mortar or
a grout for the full thickness of the tile by use of proper tools, during and after positioning
of the tiles. All transverse and longitudinal joints shall be in proper line and in the correct
pattern, to ensure a neat and workmanlike appearance.

As soon as the mortar or grout has partially set, the Contractor shall rake all
mortar material from the groove formed by the two adjacent bevels, and from the first
three mm. depth of the joint, using appropriate tools.

When the mortar has sufficiently set, the Contractor shall sprinkle the sidewalk
with water and shall cover it with plastic or nylon sheets to avoid evaporation of water
during the curing period. The sheets shall be left in place until completion of setting of
the mortar and concrete, or as ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor shall then
remove all foreign matter, wood, concrete or mortar lumps, etc., leaving the sidewalk in
a neat, clean and tidy condition.

In cases where tiles are required to be cut, due to the presence of obstacles,
poles, hydrants, etc., or in the construction of driveways or side roads, etc., the
Contractor shall cut the tiles and/or substitute in-situ concrete of at least the same quality
as the tiles. The Engineer shall decide, after trials, on the method to be adopted. This
operation shall be kept to a minimum. The Contractor shall complete as much as
practicable of the sidewalk using precast tiles.

The method of construction of the sequence of operations, for areas of sidewalks

constructed using in-situ concrete shall be the same as those for sidewalks constructed
using precast tiles. The Contractor shall ensure that the final appearance of the
sidewalk surfaces, regardless of the method of construction adopted, shall be the same
for both types of construction.

Where the sidewalk crosses the entrance to a shop or a house the level of which
is higher than the sidewalk, the Contractor shall construct steps, formed by a curb and
a complete or partial tile. The steps shall be backfilled with concrete of the same quality
as specified for tile foundations.

A step shall be constructed wherever the difference in elevation between the

entrance and the sidewalk is more than three hundred (300) millimeters. The Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer, prior to commencing any sidewalk construction, a list of
locations where steps will be required, together with design details for construction of
such steps.

Driveway pavements shall be constructed to the same standards as specified for

sidewalks.

6.12.3.2.5 Testing of Tiles. The following tests shall be carried out on sidewalk
tiles to ascertain their suitability for the Work:

1. Impact Strength

78
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Flexural Strength
3. Abrasion Resistance

The first two (2) tests shall be carried out on four (4) samples taking as a final
result the average of the most homogenous results of the four (4). The abrasion
resistance test shall be carried out on two (2) samples, the results of which shall be
averaged.

1. Impact Strength

This test establishes the minimum height of fall of a steel ball weighing one kg.
which, when striking the tile in the middle, breaks it. The product of the height of the fall
by the weight of the ball is taken as the Impact Strength. Limiting value: 0.5 Kgs. -
Meters minimum.

2. Flexural Strength

This test is carried out by placing a tile on two knife supports, with edges rounded
with a radius of one (1) centimeter, arranged parallel to the side of the tile and ten (10)
centimeters apart. The load is gradually transmitted to the tile top surface, along the
centerline, by a third knife arranged parallel to the other two (2).

The unit maximum bending stress equals fifteen (15) Phb2 where 'P' is the total
breaking load in kilograms, 'b' is the width of the tile in centimeters, 'h' is the thickness
of the tile in centimeters.

The limit acceptance value for Flexural Strength shall be thirty (30) kilograms per
square centimeter minimum.

3. Abrasion Resistance

This test is carried out with a machine composed of a horizontal cast-iron disc,
rotating about its vertical central axis at uniform speed; a horizontal diametrical cross-
piece by means of which two samples are pressed on the disc, at such a distance from
the center of the disc, that the relative speed with respect to the disc, is one meter per
second; a second horizontal diametrical cross-piece orthogonal to the first, which is
carried at either end appropriate devices to let the moistened abrasive flow onto the
track; two pairs of conveniently arranged brushes to guide the abrasive that tends to
escape under the samples.

The samples, pressed against the disc, rotate by means of a special mechanical
device, around their own vertical central axis, at the rate of one turn of the specimen for
fifty (50) turns of the disc. Carborundum grit sufficiently coated with liquid mineral oil
with an Engler viscosity between five (5) and seven (7) at fifty degrees Celsius (50o C.)
shall be used as an abrasive. The grit shall pass Sieve No. 60 and be retained on Sieve
No. 100. Consumption of carborundum and oil should be approximately twenty (20) and
twelve (12) grams, respectively, per minute.

79
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The square sample, with a surface area of fifty (50) square centimeters shall be
pressed against the disc by a total weight of fifteen (15) kilograms unit pressure of three-
tenths (0.3) kilograms per square centimeter. The test is normally carried out with a
distance run of the grinding wheel of five hundred (500) meters. For materials with a
surface wearing layer different from the rest of the tile, the distance run must be such
that the disc does not penetrate into the lower layer.

The thickness of the layer abraded in millimeters with a pressure of three-tenths

(0.3) kilogram per square centimeter for a distance run of one thousand (1000) meters
is taken as the Abrasion Factor. This factor is determined by assuming that the
consumption is proportional to the distance run. The limit acceptance value for the
Abrasion Factor shall be twelve (12) millimeters maximum.

6.12.4 SIDEWALK, DRIVE PAD AND MEDIAN PAVING TOLERANCES. The

tolerances for sidewalk, drive pad and median paving construction shall be as follows:

Elevation of sidewalk and tiles: plus or minus six (6) millimeters from the designed
grade elevation.

The Engineer shall check paving surfaces by use of a four (4) meter long straight
edge. The deviation of the surface from the straight edge shall not exceed three (3)
millimeters when the straight edge is applied transversely and longitudinally to the
finished paving.

6.12.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Sampling, testing and acceptance

shall conform to the requirements of Section 1.04, "Control of Materials" and 1.08,
"Acceptance of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the sidewalks, drive pads and medians shall be
sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods
referenced in Subsection 6.12.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications. The
construction of the sidewalks, drive pads and medians will be accepted in accordance
with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General
Specifications.

The finished surface shall be such that, when tested with a three (3) meter
straightedge, no portion of the finished surface shall vary more than ten (10) millimeters
from its lower edge.

6.12.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Cast-in-Place, Precast (Tiled) and

Bituminous Sidewalk, Drive Pad, or Median Paving shall be measured by the square
meter for all Work of each type, authorized, completed, and accepted by the Engineer
based on the horizontal dimensions on the plans or ordered by the Engineer.
Depressed curb driveway entrances, unless otherwise specified, shall be measured
inclusive with the adjacent sidewalk.

Excavation for sidewalk, drive pad, and median paving shall not be measured
separately for payment but will be considered as subsidiary Work, except when such

80
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

excavation is a part of, and is measured in conjunction with, the roadway excavation.
In such instances, the excavation shall be measured and included in the quantity of
roadway excavation computed as a pay item as provided in Section 2.03, "Excavation"
in these General Specifications.

Bedding course, if required, shall not be measured separately but shall be considered
subsidiary to these Items of Work. Portland cement concrete, minor concrete,
bituminous concrete, reinforcing steel and other miscellaneous materials shall not be
measured separately but shall also be considered subsidiary to the items.

6.12.7 PAYMENT. The amount of authorized, completed and accepted Work,

measured as described above, will be paid at the contract unit price(s) shown in the Bill
of Quantities, which price(s) shall include all required materials, equipment, tools, labor,
and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified in
Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

61201 Cast-in-Place Sidewalk, Drive Pad or Median Paving Square Meter

61202 Precast (Tiled) Sidewalk, Drive Pad or Median Paving Square Meter

61203 Bituminous Sidewalk, Drive Pad or Median Paving Square Meter

81
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.13 - MONUMENTS

6.13.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of the construction or furnishing and
placing of right-of-way, survey and reference monuments in accordance with the
standard plans and these specifications in conformity with the lines, grades, and
locations shown on the plans in the MOC's "Standards for Road Safety Features" or
established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Right-of-Way Monument
Survey Monument
Reference Monument

6.13.2 MATERIALS.

6.13.2.1 Concrete. Concrete used to fabricate monuments shall conform to the

requirements of Section 5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor Structures" in these General
Specifications.

6.13.2.2 Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of

Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

6.13.2.3 Metalwork. Monuments and marker hardware, steel plates, and pipe shall
conform to the requirements shown on the plans. Anchor rail for monuments in sand
dune areas shall be 5-20 or equivalent and shall conform to the requirements shown on
the plans. Brass shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 176.

6.13.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.13.3.1 General. Units shall be constructed in accordance with Standard Ministry

Drawings. They shall be hydraulically pressed and cured to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. They shall have a clean finish with smooth surfaces. Segregation,
honeycombing or broken corners will not be allowed and remedial measures will not be
accepted. Final approval of the monuments will be given by the Engineer only after
proper incorporation in the Work.

6.13.3.2 Laying. Units shall be laid in the locations and to the levels shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Subgrade shall be compacted to provide a
smooth surface of uniform density and shall be approved by the Engineer before placing
the units. Excavation and backfilling with concrete or otherwise shall be considered
subsidiary to the installation of right-or-way monuments and no additional payment will
be made therefore. All monuments shall be set vertically to the depth shown on the
plans and maintained in the vertical position while the holes are backfilled with approved
material and thoroughly compacted.

One face of the monument shall be impressed with the kilometric distance. The method
of inscribing the information on the unit shall be approved by the Engineer.

82
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.13.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The monuments will be inspected,

sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work"
in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the monuments shall be sampled, tested and
evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods referenced in
Subsection 6.13.2, "Materials" in this Section in these General Specifications. The
installation of the monuments will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4,
"Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.13.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Monuments shall be measured by the unit for

each monument furnished, installed and accepted.

6.13.6 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work, as measured, will
be paid for at the contract unit price(s) per unit as specified in the Bill of Quantities for
each type of monument which price(s) shall be full compensation for furnishing all
materials, for all labor, equipment, tools, supplies, and all other items necessary to
complete the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

61301 Monument Unit

6130101 Right-of-Way Monument Unit

6130102 Survey Monument Unit

6130103 Reference Monument Unit

83
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.14 - SHOTCRETE (PNEUMATICALLY APPLIED MORTAR)

6.14.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of applying one or more layers of
pneumatically applied shotcrete to rock soil or concrete surfaces in ditches, channels,
and tunnels, and cladding slopes in accordance with details and dimensions shown on
the plans and as specified in the specifications.

The several classes of shotcrete shall be produced by a wet mix process which
consists of mixing aggregates, admixtures, Portland cement and water and then feeding
this mixture into suitable delivery equipment which will feed the mixture into a
pressurized nozzle. Accelerating admixtures, if used, shall be added uniformly at the
nozzle and the resulting mixture pneumatically sprayed onto a surface.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Shotcrete
Reinforced Shotcrete
Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete

6.14.2 MATERIALS.

6.14.2.1 General. Except as modified in this Subsection, Portland cement, fine

aggregate, coarse aggregate, and mixing water shall conform to the quality requirements
of Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete" in these General Specifications. The
mixture of coarse and fine aggregate for applications two hundred fifty (250) millimeters
or thicker shall conform to the following gradation requirements:

Standard Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight

12.5 mm (½ inch) 100
9.5 mm (3/8 inch) 90-100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 65-82
2.36 mm (No. 8) 45-68
1.018 mm (No. 16) 30-53
0.600 mm (No. 30) 20-38
0.300 mm (No. 50) 7-22
0.150 mm (No. 100) 2-10
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-3

When the application is less than two hundred fifty (250) millimeters thick, the
gradation given in Subparagraph 5.01.2.2.1, "Fine Aggregate" in these General
Specifications shall apply.

All Portland Cement used in shotcrete shall have a maximum sulfate expansion of
0.040 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 452.

84
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Aggregates: Normal weight aggregate for shotcrete shall comply with the requirements
of AASHTO M6 and M80. The minimum specific gravity for aggregates shall be 2.55.
Light weight aggregate is not permitted.

Accelerating Admixtures: Accelerating admixtures shall only be used after

acceptable compatibility testing as in Paragraph 6.14.2.3 "Mix Design Requirements" in
these General Specifications. Admixtures shall conform to the following additional
requirements:

1. Contain no water-soluble chlorides or materials corrosive to steel not be subject

to other detrimental effects such as cracking, spalling or debonding.

2. Admixtures shall have a three-year minimum history of satisfactory performance

in similar applications.

Silica Fume: The use of silica fume is subject to the approval of the Engineer. The
silica fume shall have a minimum of Silicon Dioxide (Si0 2 ) content of ninety (90) percent
and have previous acceptable performance on similar projects with shotcrete.

Reinforcement: Welded wire reinforcement shall be as shown on the plans and

meet the requirements of Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General
Specifications.

Fibers: Fibers shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A 820-90 and shall be
cold drawn steel with a minimum tensile strength of one thousand (1000) N per square
millimeter and with lengths at least eighteen (18) millimeters and an equivalent diameter
between thirty-eight hundredths (.38) millimeters and sixty-four hundredths (.64)
millimeter. The fibers shall have bent, deformed or enlarged ends or be continuously
deformed throughout.

6.14.2.2 Applicable Publications. The publications listed below form a part of this
Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

ACI 506.2-77 Specification for Materials, Proportioning and Application of

Shotcrete
ACI 506.3R-82 Guide to Certification of Shotcrete Nozzlemen
ACI 506R-85 Guide to Shotcrete

2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

AASHTO M157 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

AASHTO M241 Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric
Batching and Continuous Mixing
AASHTO T24 Standard Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams of Concrete

85
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

AASHTO T106 Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of

Hydraulic Cement Mortar
AASHTO T154 Standard Method of Test for Time of Setting of Hydraulic
Cement by Gilmore Needles

3. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)

ASTM A 820-90 Evaluation of Cold Drawn Steel Wire Fibers

ASTM C 452 Standard Test Method for Determination of the Sulphate
Resistance of Cements
ASTM C 1018-92 Standard Test Method for Flexural Toughness and First
Crack Strength of Fiber-reinforced Concrete

6.14.2.3 Mix Design Requirements.

6.14.2.3.1 General. All shotcrete shall be designed in accordance with the most
current requirements of ACI 506.2 - Specification for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete taking into account all special requirements contained in this
Subsection in these General Specifications. A separate mix design shall be submitted
for each type of shotcrete. Each mix shall have a minimum cement content of four
hundred (400) kilograms per cubic meter.

Maximum Water Cement Ratio. The maximum water-cement ratio is forty-five

hundredths (0.45) for all wet mix applications.

Fiber-reinforced shotcrete mixes shall contain a minimum of fifty-five (55)

kilograms per cubic meter of steel fibers and a minimum of five percent (5%) micro silica.
The proposed shotcrete mixes shall be developed by the Contractor using accelerator
compatibility tests and subsequent preconstruction tests as indicated herein at least
thirty (30) days prior to the actual application of any shotcrete to any surface. The
Engineer will witness the production of all test samples and supervise the testing on
cored cylinder samples and sawed beam specimens.

Compatibility tests shall be performed to determine cements and additives to be

used in field test mixes. Determine initial and final set for additive concentrations of
varying percentages of cement content by weight expected to be used in the work. The
actual proportion shall be determine by laboratory testing such that:

1. Setting times determined by AASHTO T154 using no greater than forty-five

hundredths (0.45) water-cement ratio by weight.

(1) Time of initial setting at not more than three (3) minutes.

(2) Time of final setting at not more than twelve (12) minutes.

2. Compressive strength by AASHTO T106 (using fifty (50) millimeter cube

specimens), using no greater than forty-five hundredths (0.45) water-cement ratio by

86
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

weight, shall be not less than five hundred sixty (560) kilograms per square centimeter
at eight (8) hours.

To ascertain the compatibility of the ingredients and their optimum proportions,

a shotcrete mix having the same strength and characteristics required for actual
application shall be developed.

6.14.2.3.2 Acceptance of Design Mix. The Engineer will inform the Contractor,
in writing, of his approval of mixes which meet the requirements. No shotcrete mix shall
be used in preconstruction tests that has not been accepted by the Engineer.

The exact proportions of ingredients determined on the basis of preconstruction

tests shall be used in the actual application of shotcrete and shall not be varied without
the written approval of the Engineer.

6.14.2.3.3 Shotcrete Strengths. The minimum progressive core shotcrete

compressive strengths and toughness requirements are as follows:

1. All shotcrete (preconstruction and construction) shall have the following

minimum progressive core compressive strengths:

Age Compressive Strength-psi

8 hours - unsoaked 60 kg./sq. cm. minimum
72 hours - unsoaked 200 kg./sq. cm. minimum
28 days - soaked 350 kg./sq. cm. minimum

2. All of the above minimum strengths are for test specimens with a seventy-
five (75) millimeter diameter and having a length to diameter ratio (L/D) of at least two
(2) with compressive strengths determined by AASHTO T24. For L/D ratios between
one (1) and two (2), the compressive strength shall be reduced as indicated in AASHTO
T24.

3. All preconstruction fiber-reinforced shotcrete shall have the following

minimum requirements:

1.0 First crack flexural strength at seven (7) days = fifty (50) kilograms per
square centimeter
2.0 Toughness Index at seven (7) days:
I10 = 5.0 and I30 = 14

The flexural strength and toughness index shall be determined according to

ASTMC 1018-92. All test beams shall be extracted from panels according to AASHTO
T24. All beams shall have dimensions of 350x100x100 millimeters for all
preconstruction and construction testing.

87
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.14.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING.

6.14.3.1 Submittals. The following, in accordance with Subsection 1.03.2, "Plans

and Working Drawings" requirements in these General Specifications, shall be submitted
by the Contractor prior to proceeding with preconstruction testing:

1. Specification for and description of proposed equipment for mixing and

application of shotcrete, including the specified remote shotcreting boom. Include
manufacturer's literature, operating and maintenance procedures.

2. Proposed mix design and preliminary test results following requirements in ACI
506.2 for each proposed shotcrete type. Include detailed gradations of all aggregates.
This submission shall be accompanied by certified test results of samples tested in
accordance with ASTM C 452 to verify adequate sulphate expansion resistance. The
results of compatibility testing done in accordance with ACI 506.2 shall also accompany
this submission to verify that any proposed admixtures to accelerate set are compatible
with the cement to be used.

3. Proposed method of application and batching of shotcrete.

4. Certification of specified materials to the referenced standards.

5. Samples of all shotcrete ingredients and product supplier data. The Engineer
shall have the opportunity to visit the proposed aggregate supplier(s) and obtain
independent samples.

6. Brands, types and suppliers of admixtures.

7. Evidence of nozzlemen's qualifications.

8. Evidence of shotcrete supervisors' qualifications.

9. Name(s) and experience record of the firm(s) doing the work. References shall
be provided.

10. Proposed preconstruction testing program plan showing, as a minimum,

proposed test panel (shop drawing), location and method of anchoring test panels, date
and time for test panel shotcreting, method of shooting test panel (e.g. vertical,
horizontal, using remote boom) and number of test panels to be completed for each
method.

11. Batch tickets. Submit a delivery ticket if ready mix delivery of materials is used.
The information to be provided and the requirements shall be in accordance with
Paragraph 5.01.8.1, "Quality Control of the Mixing Process" in these General
Specifications.

12. Cold and hot weather protection and curing plans.

88
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.14.3.2 Personnel. The Contractor and/or Shotcrete Subcontractor shall have had
previous shotcreting experience. The Engineer will quality nozzlemen for this project.
Furthermore, the Contractor shall provide evidence that all proposed nozzlemen on this
project have a minimum one year shotcrete application experience. Supervisors shall
demonstrate and provide evidence of previous experience of training in shotcrete
application of at least three (3) years experience on comparable projects. Evidence, for
both nozzlemen and supervisors shall be provided prior to any preconstruction tests.
The Engineer will then qualify the nozzlemen, using the ACI Certification (ACI-5063R-82
Guide to Certification of Shotcrete Nozzlemen). The qualification will be granted upon:
a successful written exam based on questions in, but not limited to, Appendices B and
E; workmanship demonstration and successful test panel completion as described
herein. The qualification will be based on the scoring system in the publication and
when the results of the twenty-eight (28) day strength tests are known. No shotcrete
shall be placed by any personnel without the specific prequalification.

6.14.3.3 Preconstruction Tests. After completion of the laboratory tests and their
acceptance, preconstruction tests shall be made on each approved design mix to
demonstrate capability of equipment, workmanship, and materials under field
construction at least thirty (30) days prior to actual application of shotcrete in permanent
Work. The mixes selected for preconstruction tests shall be confined to those approved
by the Engineer following the laboratory testing.

Test panels shall be shotcreted by each proposed nozzleman using the equipment,
materials, mix proportions and procedures proposed for the applications. All test panels
shall be shotcreted at the project site. Mixes that are to be applied using a remote boom
shall have test panels made using the remote boom. Each nozzleman shall shotcrete
one test panel for each mix design considered and for each shooting position which will
be encountered with each mixture. As a minimum, a horizontal (overhead) and vertical
shooting position shall be done.

A minimum of two (2) test panels shall be constructed for each mixture and bid item
eight hundred (800) millimeters square by two hundred (200) millimeters deep
constructed with a rigid bottom and sides. Each test panel must be fastened to a rigid
object to prevent vibration during shotcreting. A minimum one hundred fifty (150)
millimeter thickness of shotcrete shall be applied to permit proper core and beam
dimensions and trimming. Test panels shall then be cured to approximate field
conditions.

The Contractor shall core nine (9) seventy-five (75) millimeter diameter cores and cut
three (3) beams from each test panel, in the presence of the Engineer, utilizing AASHTO
T24 procedures. The Contractor shall seal the cylinders individually in plastic bags,
identify them and transport them to the Engineer's testing facility at the project site. The
Engineer will supervise the testing of the cylinders for compressive strength in
accordance with MRD Test 525 and the testing of the beams for first crack flexural
strength and toughness indices in accordance with ASTM C1018-92.

Core samples, for each panel, will be taken at different times, corresponding to the
specified strength ages. A series of cores will be taken at six and one-half (6½)hours,

89
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

to allow time to test for eight (8) hour strength. The remaining series shall be cored at
two (2) days for seventy-two (72) hour compressive strength and twenty-eight (28) day
compressive strength. Three (3) beams shall be cut from the on site test panel at six (6)
days of age. In addition to the compression testing, the cores and beams shall be
carefully examined visually for soundness or evidence of nonuniformity in the
consistency of the shotcrete. The Contractor shall saw one of the test panels into
several pieces to allow visual inspection of the shotcrete density, void structure and
coverage of any reinforcement.

All phases of the preconstruction testing will be done in the Engineer's presence.
The average compressive strength of all cores from each test panel shall test to at least
one hundred percent (100%) of the strength specified for each specified age with no
individual core having a compressive strength of less than eighty eight percent (88%)
of the specified strength. For the fiber-reinforced shotcrete, the first crack flexural
strength and average toughness indices, for both I10 and I30 shall test to at least one
hundred percent (100%) of the specified requirements. Cylindrical samples having a L/D
of less than two (2), shall have the strength reduced in accordance with AASHTO T24.

6.14.3.4 Safety. Alkali hydroxides and other chemicals contained in shotcrete

admixtures are toxic and can cause skin and respiratory irritation; adequate safety
measures shall be undertaken. The Contractor shall maintain safety in all areas where
shotcrete is to be handled or applied, including dust protection to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. To ensure protection against detrimental effects from such caustic material,
nozzlemen, operators, helpers, and any other nearby personnel, during application of
shotcrete, shall wear gloves, adequate protective clothing, goggles or face shields, and
approved respirators equipped with filters which prevent passage of caustic mists. The
Contractor shall furnish and maintain at his own expense two additional sets of approved
head and face protection equipment and toxic-free breathing apparatus for the exclusive
use of the Engineer throughout the project.

After preliminary testing has shown that mix design process and workmanship are
capable of providing a satisfactory product, the Engineer will authorize Work on the
structure.

6.14.4 EQUIPMENT.

6.14.4.1 Proportioning and Mixing Equipment. The following shall apply:

Aggregate and cement shall be proportioned on a weight basis conforming to the
applicable provisions of AASHTO M157. Volumetric batching may be used, subject to
the Engineer's approval, providing that a weight batching is done every four hours of
shotcreting in accordance with AASHTO M241, Sections 6.4 (Yield Check) and 6.5
(Proportioning Check), except that the former may be checked by simple metered
weight. Ready mixed shotcrete shall be delivered in transit mixers that comply with
AASHTO M157.

The application of the mixture shall be done within sixty (60) minutes after adding
cement to the mixer. This time allotment may be reduced by the Engineer if cement

90
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

prehydration in the mixer results in significant rebound, insufficient bonding and/or

reduced compressive strength.

Mixing and placing equipment shall be capable of continuous operation and shall
deliver a uniform and uninterrupted material flow, without segregation or loss of any
ingredients.

Any accelerating admixture shall be added immediately prior to final mixing, of in

liquid form, shall be accurately proportioned into the water supply by metering at the
application nozzle. Dry additive whether powder or finely ground from a solid at the
mixer shall be accurately proportioned by mechanical means and shall be thoroughly
mixed with the other ingredients.

6.14.4.2 Water and Air Supply Systems. The following shall apply:

1. Water Supply. The water supply, for the dry mix process, shall have three and
one-half (3.5) kilograms per square centimeter or greater pressure in excess of the air
pressure at the nozzle water ring.

2. Air Supply. The air supply shall be capable of supplying sufficient uniform
constant pressure to convey shotcrete materials as recommended by the manufacture.
An air supply system shall not be contaminated by oil or contain excessive moisture.

6.14.4.3 Delivery Equipment. The equipment shall be provided with a device which
can be directly correlated to production (i.e. cubic meter) either by direct volume or a
machine constant.

The delivery machine shall be capable of introducing materials to the delivery hose
at a uniform rate, with ejection from the nozzle at velocities that will afford adherence of
material to the treated surface with a minimum rebound and maximum adherence and
density.

6.14.4.4 Placing Equipment. Placing equipment for wet-mix process shall be capable
of handling and applying shotcrete containing the specified maximum size aggregate
and accelerating admixture. If accelerating admixture is to be added at the nozzle, the
placing equipment shall provide for accurate proportioning and adequate mixing of
accelerator with the other shotcrete ingredients.

6.14.5 CONSTRUCTION.

6.14.5.1 Preparation of Surface for Shotcreting. Surfaces, which are to receive

shotcrete whether new or previously shotcreted, shall be cleaned of all loose material.
Loose rock, mud and other foreign matter shall be removed by a combination water and
high velocity air jet. Surfaces shall be moist at the time of application. Surfaces are
unacceptable if they are excessively dry, dusty or have frost.

Non-corrosive measuring pins or gage wires shall be installed on not greater than
one (1) meter centers in all directions or depth check holes shall be drilled on a random

91
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

basis in each four (4) square meters of shotcrete to verify that the requirement minimum
thickness is being provided. When it is determined that the minimum thickness is not
being provided, the Contractor shall drill additional core holes where and as directed by
the Engineer, to determine the limits of the deficient shotcrete and to make additional
placements of shotcrete in these areas to bring thickness up to the specified minimum.
No additional payment will be made for these requirements.

When a layer of shotcrete is to be covered by a succeeding layer at a later time, it

shall first be allowed to develop its initial set. All laitance, loose material, and rebound
shall then be removed by brooming or scraping. Laitance which has been allowed to
develop final set and which cannot be cleaned by brooming or scraping shall be
removed by sandblasting.

6.14.5.2 Shotcrete Application. The Contractor shall coordinate shotcrete

application with excavation and ground support installation.

Shotcrete shall be applied using the same equipment, techniques, and nozzlemen
as used to place the accepted preconstruction test panels. The nozzle shall be held at
a predetermined distance and position so that the stream of shotcrete shall flow as
nearly as possible at right angles to the surface to be covered. When filling around any
steel ground reinforcement, the nozzle shall be held at a slight angle so that the metal
is completely encased. The shotcrete shall be applied from the lower part of the area
upwards so that rebound does not accumulate on the portion of the surface that still has
to be covered.

Shotcrete shall emerge from the nozzle in a steady uninterrupted flow. When, for any
reason, the flow becomes intermittent, the nozzle shall be diverted from the Work until
steady flow resumes. The velocity of materials ejected from the nozzle shall be such
that with the clockwise rotation of the nozzle, the required compaction of the material
with minimal rebound and segregation, and maximum placement density are achieved.
Care shall be taken to ensure a product of uniform consistency and quality. Equipment
shall be provided to allow application of shotcrete to surfaces at an appropriate range
of one (1) to one and one-half (1.5) meters from the nozzle.

Acceptable shotcrete shall consist of a dense and uniform concrete without rebound
inclusions, segregation, or discernible weakness of bond between layers. All laitance,
loose material and rebound shall be removed and the surface layer sounded with a
hammer for voids, rebound or aggregate pockets, and unbounded areas. Defective
areas shall be removed and replaced as specified herein at the Contractor's expense.

Construction joints shall be tapered over a minimum distance of four hundred eighty
(480) millimeters to a thin edge, and the surface of such joints shall be thoroughly wetted
before any adjacent section is placed.

6.14.5.3 Shotcrete Curing. New shotcrete shall be cured for seven days by
keeping its surface moist. Moisture may be applied by sprinkling, intermittent light
hosing or other methods approved by the Engineer. The surface is not permitted to be
dry at any time during the curing period.

92
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.14.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The shotcrete will be inspected,

sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08 "Acceptance of Work"
in these General Specifications.

6.14.6.1 Quality Assurance Sampling and Testing. An acceptance sample

consists of three cores. Test cores shall be obtained from work and may be taken on
partially applied shotcrete or completed shotcrete, at the Engineer's discretion. The
Engineer will determine the locations and dates. The frequency of sampling shall be:

MINIMUM MANDATORY TESTING

Material Test Location Frequency Notes

Shotcrete, AASHTO T24 On-Site 1 set of 3 Individually sealed in

Reinforced cores per plastic bags, tagged for
Shotcrete and Fiber- 50 cubic identification and
Reinforced Shotcrete meters delivered to project lab.
(all categories) placed. Minimum forty (40) hours
to break date as per T-24
specification.

An acceptance sample shall be obtained by the Contractor for each fifty (50) cubic
meters of shotcrete placed. Each sample shall consist of three cores from the
completed Work, cored at twenty-six (26) days of age. At the Engineer's option, the
Engineer may require cores from the panels in lieu of cores from the Work.

Testing and core sampling shall be done utilizing AASHTO T24 procedures. The
core samples shall be seventy-five (75) millimeters diameter. The Contractor shall
perform the core sampling and test the samples under the supervision of the Engineer.
Core lengths shall be the full thickness of the shotcrete or as otherwise directed by the
Engineer and shall expose the bond between shotcrete and rock.

The voids caused by the coring operation shall be plugged by the use of material
equal to the shotcrete in-place and workmanship to ensure continuity of the lining as to
strength.

If the average strength of three cores from one area is less than eighty-five percent
(85%) of the specified twenty-eight (28) day strength, corrective work shall be performed,
including application of additional thickness of shotcrete or removal and replacement of
the defective shotcrete as directed by the Engineer. Such corrective work shall be
performed at no cost to the Ministry.

If any cores taken fail to show adequate bond with the rock, or bond between layers,
or show obvious defects, or the strength or toughness requirements do not meet the
minimums, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to do additional sampling/testing.
This additional sampling/testing will be done at no cost to the Ministry.

93
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

If the shotcrete system selected by the Contractor fails to provide satisfactory in-place
shotcrete in accordance with these Specifications, as determined by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall modify his procedures, mix design, equipment or system accordingly,
subject to approval of the Engineer.

6.14.6.2 Defective Shotcrete. Shotcrete that does not meet strength requirements
or which lacks uniformity, exhibits segregation, honeycombing, or lamination, shows
significant cracking, lacks reasonable watertightness, contains any dry patches, slugs,
voids, or sand pockets, or is hollow shall be regarded as defective shotcrete.

The Engineer reserves the right to order removal of defective shotcrete and its
replacement with acceptable corrective shotcrete as specified herein.

Any surface defects shall be repaired as soon as possible after any initial shotcrete
placement. The Engineer will inspect all shotcrete visually and by hammer sounding.
All shotcrete which sounds "hollow" or which exhibits defects noted above shall be
removed and replaced with fresh shotcrete, at the Contractor's expense. Alternatively,
the Engineer may allow application of an additional layer of full-thickness shotcrete.

Any corrective measure ordered by the Engineer to correct defective shotcrete shall
be without cost to the Ministry.

6.14.7 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Shotcrete, Reinforced Shotcrete, and Fiber

reinforced Concrete will be measured by the square meter when the depth is specified
in the Pay Item description. Measurement of areas for payment will include only those
areas where the full thickness called for on the plans is in place. Shotcrete, Reinforced
Shotcrete, and Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete shall be measured by the cubic meter when
the depth is not specified in the Pay Item description.

Adjustments to Shotcrete contract unit prices will be based on compressive strength

for unreinforced, reinforced and fiber reinforced shotcrete.

6.14.8 PAYMENT. The accepted quantities determined as provided above will be

paid for at the contract unit price per unit of measurement on the pay items listed below
and the price and payment will be full compensation for the Work specified in Subsection
1.07.2, “Scope of Payment” in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

61401 Shotcrete, 25 mm Depth Square Meter

61402 Shotcrete, 50 mm Depth Square Meter

61403 Shotcrete, 75 mm Depth Square Meter

61404 Shotcrete, 100 mm Depth Square Meter

61405 Shotcrete, 125 mm Depth Square Meter

94
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

61406 Shotcrete, 150 mm Depth Square Meter

61407 Shotcrete, 175 mm Depth Square Meter

61408 Shotcrete, 200 mm Depth Square Meter

61409 Shotcrete, ___ mm Depth Square Meter

61412 Shotcrete Cubic Meter

61413 Reinforced Shotcrete, 50 mm Depth Square Meter

61415 Reinforced Shotcrete, 75 mm Depth Square Meter

61416 Reinforced Shotcrete, 125 mm Depth Square Meter

61417 Reinforced Shotcrete, 150 mm Depth Square Meter

61418 Reinforced Shotcrete, 175 mm Depth Square Meter

61419 Reinforced Shotcrete, 200 mm Depth Square Meter

61420 Reinforced Shotcrete, ___ mm Depth Square Meter

61423 Reinforce Shotcrete Cubic Meter

61424 Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete, 50 mm Depth Square Meter

61425 Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete, 75 mm Depth Square Meter

61426 Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete, 100 mm Depth Square Meter

61427 Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete, 125 mm Depth Square Meter

61428 Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete, 150 mm Depth Square Meter

61429 Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete, 175 mm Depth Square Meter

61430 Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete, 200 mm Depth Square Meter

61431 Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete, ___ mm Depth Square Meter

61434 Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete Cubic Meter

95
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.15 - MODULAR RETAINING WALLS

6.15.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of furnishing and installing cribwalls,
binwalls, concrete panel walls, or other precast or prefabricated modular retaining wall
systems as specified by the plans and Special Specifications.

ITEM IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

(Type) Modular Retaining Wall

6.15.2 MATERIALS.

6.15.2.1 Concrete. Concrete for precast concrete modules shall conform to Class
C in Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete" in these General Specifications.
Concrete for footings shall conform to Section 5.03.9, "Concrete For Minor Structures"
in these General Specifications.

6.15.2.2 Reinforcing Steel. "Reinforcement Steel" shall conform to Section 5.02

"Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

6.15.2.3 Steel Components. Steel components and hardware shall conform to the
requirements shown on the plans. All components shall be galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A 123 or A 153 as appropriate.

6.15.2.4 Geotextile Fabric. Geotextile fabric shall conform to the requirements for
Type III Fabric - Geotextiles for Drainage Blankets in Section 6.16, "Geotextiles" in these
General Specifications.

6.15.2.5 Underdrain. Underdrain shall conform to the requirements of Section 6.04,

"Pipe Underdrain and Irrigation Pipe" in these General Specifications.

6.15.2.6 Drainage Layer. Drainage shall conform to the requirements of Section

6.21, "Drainage Layer" in these General Specifications and as detailed in the Special
Specifications.

6.15.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.15.3.1 Preliminary. Prior to the fabrication of modules, the Contractor shall

develop and submit to the Engineer for approval, detailed drawings of each wall section
based on the typical drawings in the plans and onsite surveys conducted by the
Contractor which confirm the dimensions of the design.

6.15.3.2 Foundation. The foundation for each section of wall shall be excavated,
leveled, and compacted to Type 95 compaction. If required by the Engineer, the
foundation shall be subexcavated and replaced with compacted Class A-1-a or A-1-b
material or, if required, with concrete meeting the requirements contained in Subsection
5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor Structures" in these General Specifications.

96
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.15.3.3 Concrete Modules. Concrete modules shall be precast in accordance with

the requirements of Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" in these General Specifications.
Modules shall not be placed in the structure until they have attained one hundred
percent (100%) of their specified strength.

Modules, including all required hardware and miscellaneous components, shall be

set in the structure in accordance with the plans and approved detailed drawings.
Deflections due to backfilling shall be anticipated in setting the modules. After
backfilling, the face of the wall shall not deviate from the theoretical design plane by
more than one-half (½) of one (1) percent of the height of the wall at that point.
Temporary wedges or clamps shall be used to hold modules in place during construction
and backfill. Open joints shall be masked on the inside of the wall using three hundred
(300) millimeter wide strips of geotextile fabric fastened to the wall with an approved
adhesive.

6.15.3.4 Backfill. As construction progresses, the modular wall shall be backfilled

in maximum fifteen (15) centimeter compacted lifts using Class A-1-a or A-1-b soil.
Backfill material shall also contain not more than fifty percent (50%) rock fragments and
boulders passing the fifteen (15) centimeter sieve and retained on the seven and five
tenths (7.5) millimeter sieve. Backfill shall be compacted to Type 95 compaction.

6.15.3.5 Drainage. Adequate provisions shall be made for the thorough draining of
the backfill to weep holes or to a separate underdrain system through a sheathing
material or geocomposite sheet drain drainage layer as detailed in the Plans and Special
Specifications for the specific type(s) modular retaining wall system listed in the Bill of
Quantities.

6.15.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The modular retaining walls will be

inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance
of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the walls shall be sampled, tested and evaluated in
accordance with the General Specification Sections referenced in Subsection 6.15.2
"Materials" in this Section in these General Specifications. The construction of the walls
will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested
Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.15.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. (Type) Modular Retaining Wall shall be

measured by the square meter based on the nominal dimensions of the front face of
each section of wall as shown on the approved detailed drawings, completed and
accepted by the Engineer.

Foundation excavation and backfill below the original ground elevation shall be
measured in accordance with Subsection 2.09.8 "Method of Measurement" for
"Structural Excavation-Other Structures" in these General Specifications. Backfill above
the original ground elevation shall be included in the approved cross sections for Section
2.05, "Embankment" in these General Specifications.

97
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Geotextile fabric and concrete for footings shall be considered subsidiary to the
retaining wall.

Underdrain and drainage layers detailed in the Plans and Special Specifications will
not be measured separately but will be considered subsidiary to the wall system(s) listed
in the Bill of Quantities.

6.15.6 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted Work, measured as described above,
will be paid at the contract unit price(s) shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price(s)
shall include all required materials, equipment, tools, labor and all other items necessary
for the proper completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of
Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

61501 Crib Wall Modular Retaining Wall Square Meter
61502 Binwall Modular Retaining Wall Square Meter
61503 Concrete Panel Modular
Retaining Wall Square Meter

98
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.16 - GEOTEXTILES

6.16.1 DESCRIPTION. This Section covers requirements for erosion control (slope
protection and channel lining), subsurface drainage (underdrains and drainage blankets)
and subgrade restraint (subgrade or embankment foundation stabilization) construction
using geotextile fabrics, when required elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

ITEMS IN THE BILL OF QUANTITIES

Geotextile Fabric, Type

6.16.2 MATERIALS.

6.16.2.1 General. Geotextiles shall be woven or nonwoven fabrics as specified and

shall consist of long chain polymeric filaments or yarns such as polypropylene,
polyethylene, polyester, polyamide, or polyvinylidene-chloride formed into a stable
network such that the filaments or yarns retain their relative position to each other and
be free of defects and tears. These fabrics shall be resistant to deterioration due to
ultraviolet exposure, ambient temperatures, acid and alkaline conditions, oils, micro-
organisms and insects.

During shipment and storage, the rolls of fabric shall be protected from exposure to
the sun, or any light containing ultraviolet rays, heat, dirt and other detrimental
conditions. The fabric shall be placed in a dry place off the ground in straight piles
according to ASTM D 4873. Except for fabrics designed for slope stabilization and soil
erosion control work, the geotextiles shall not be exposed to ultraviolet radiation for more
than two (2) days.

The fabric, except wrapping placed directly against perforated pipe, shall be formed
in widths of at least 2 meters. Sheets of fabric may be sewn together to form fabric
widths as required. The sheets of fabric shall be sewn together at the point of
manufacture or other approved locations. The geotextile manufacturer is responsible
for establishing and maintaining a quality control program so as to assure compliance
with the requirements of this specification.

6.16.2.2 Definitions. The following definitions apply to geotextiles:

1. Machine Direction. The long (or warp) direction of the geotextile. The cross-
machine (or fill) direction is perpendicular to the machine direction.

2. Mean Roll Values. The mean roll value of any specific geotextile property is the
average of the test results from any roll within a lot.

3. Nonwoven Geotextile. A textile produced by bonding or interlocking of fibers, or

both, accomplished by mechanical, heat or chemical means.

4. Seam Allowance. The minimum distance from the edge of a geotextile to the
stitch line nearest to that edge.

99
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

5. Seam Type. A designation relating to the essential characteristics of geotextile

positioning and rows of stitching in a specified sewn seam, as shown on the plans.

6. Selvedge. The finished edge of a geotextile parallel to the machine direction.

7. Stitch Type. A designation relating to the essential characteristics of the

interlacing of sewing thread(s) in a specified seam, as shown on the plans.

8. Woven Geotextile. A textile comprising of two or more sets of filaments or yarns

interlaced in such a way that they result in a uniform pattern.

6.16.2.3 Materials Acceptance.

6.16.2.3.1 Source Approval. Prior to installation of the proposed fabric, the

Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a copy of a mill certificate or affidavit signed by
a legally authorized official from the company manufacturing the fabric.

The mill certificate or affidavit shall attest that the fabric meets the chemical,
physical, and manufacturing requirements stated in this specification. The sample shall
be labeled with the lot and batch number, date of sampling, project number, property
specifications, manufacturer, and product name.

6.16.2.3.2 Control Testing. As soon as the fabric arrives at the project site,
samples will be randomly selected by the Contractor under the supervision of the
Engineer and submitted to an independent testing Materials Testing Laboratory for
testing and to confirm that the correct fabric was received and that it meets the property
values specified.

One sample from the inner wraps of each five (5) rolls or fraction thereof, up to
a maximum of five (5) samples, shall be chosen at random from each shipment. Size
of sample shall be one (1) meter by the full roll width of the fabric. The Contractor shall
also furnish, with each shipment of fabric, a Certificate of Guarantee from the
manufacturer of the fabric. The Certificate shall attest that the fabric meets the chemical,
physical and manufacturing requirements stated in this General Specification and
include actual test results for each physical requirement.

6.16.2.4 Physical Requirements. The fabric furnished may be either woven or non-
woven, at the Contractor's option. The fabric shall meet the requirements of Table 6.16-
1, Table 6.16-2, Table 6.16-3 or Table 6.16-4 as specified for each use.

6.16.2.5 Fastener Pins. Fastener pins for use when fabric is installed in underdrain
systems shall be formed of No. 9 or heavier steel wire and shall be at least three
hundred (300) millimeters long with a one hundred (100) millimeters right angle bend on
one end.
Fastener pins for use when the fabric is used under slope protection or channel
lining, for subgrade or embankment foundation stabilization, or is used to wrap
aggregate drainage blankets, shall be steel, six (6) millimeters in diameter, pointed at

100
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

one end, fabricated with a head to retain a steel washer having an outside diameter of
at least forty (40) millimeters, and at least forty (40) millimeters long.

Fastener pins will be accepted based on visual inspection by the Engineer on the
project.

6.16.2.6 Other Materials. Aggregates, perforated pipe, and other materials that
may be specified in the contract shall meet the requirements of the Standard
Specifications or as provided elsewhere in the Contract.

TABLE 6.16-1 - TYPE I FABRIC

GEOTEXTILES FOR SLOPE PROTECTION AND CHANNEL LINING

PROPERTY MINIMUM VALUE1 TEST METHOD

Grab Strength (kg.) 90 ASTM D 4632
Elongation (%) 15 ASTM D 4632
2
Sewn Seam Strength (kg.) 80 ASTM D 4632
Puncture Strength (kg.) 36 ASTM D 4833
2
Burst Strength (kg/cm ) 22 ASTM D 3786
Trapezoid Tear (kg.) 22 ASTM D 4533
Apparent Opening Size Hole size equal to or ASTM D 4751
(U.S. Std. Sieve) smaller than a U.S.#40
Sieve (0.425 mm)
Permeability (cm/sec.) 0.015 AASHTO M 288
Ultraviolet Degradation 70% strength retained
at 150 hours for all classes ASTM D 4355

(1) Minimum. Use value in weaker principal direction. All numerical values represent
minimum average roll value (i.e. test results from any sampled roll in a lot shall meet
or exceed the minimum values in the Table)
.
(2) Values apply to both field and manufactured seams.

101
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 6.16-2 - TYPE I FABRIC

GEOTEXTILES FOR SLOPE PROTECTION AND CHANNEL LINING

PROPERTY MINIMUM VALUE1 TEST METHOD

Grab Strength (kg.) 36 ASTM D 4632
Elongation (%) N/A ASTM D 4632
Sewn Seam Strength2(kg.) 30 ASTM D 4632
Puncture Strength (kg.) 10 ASTM D 4833
2
Burst Strength (kg/cm ) 9 ASTM D 3786
Trapezoid Tear (kg.) 10 ASTM D 4533
Apparent Opening Size Hole size equal to or ASTM D 4751
(U.S. Std. Sieve) smaller than a U.S.#40
Sieve (0.425 mm)
Permeability (cm/sec.) 0.025 AASHTO M 288
Ultraviolet Degradation 70% strength retained
at 150 hours for all classes ASTM D 4355

1. Minimum. Use value in weaker principal direction. All numerical values represent
minimum average roll value (i.e. test results from any sampled roll in a lot shall meet
or exceed the minimum values in the Table)

2. Values apply to both field and manufactured seams.

3. The AASHTO 288-97 Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications TABLE 2.

Subsurface Drainage Geotextile Requirements are in addition to the above Table
6.16-2 Type II Fabric Requirements

TABLE 6.16-3 – TYPE III FABRIC

GEOTEXTILES FOR SUBGRADE OR EMBANKMENT STABILIZATION

Table 6.16-3 is composed of the following referenced three (3) Tables in ASSHTO M
288-97.

TABLE 1 - Geotextile Strength Property Requirements

TABLE 2 - Separation Geotextile Property Requirements
TABLE 3 – Stabilization Geotextile Property Requirements

(1) Minimum. Use value in weaker principal direction. All numerical values represent
minimum average roll value (i.e. test results from any sampled roll in a lot shall meet or
exceed the minimum values in the Table).
(2) Values apply to both field and manufactured seams.

102
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 6.16-4 - TYPE IV FABRIC

GEOTEXTILES FOR DRAINAGE BLANKETS

PROPERTY MINIMUM VALUE1 TEST METHOD

Grab Strength (kg.) 80 ASTM D 4632
Elongation (%) N/A ASTM D 4632
Sewn Seam Strength2(kg.) 70 ASTM D 4632
Puncture Strength (kg.) 36 ASTM D 4833
Burst Strength (kg/cm2) 204 ASTM D 3786
Trapezoid Tear (kg.) 22 ASTM D 4533
Apparent Opening Size Hole Size Equal to or ASTM D 4751
(U.S. Std. Sieve) Smaller than a U.S.#50
Sieve (0.300 mm)
Permeability (cm/sec.) 0.020 AASHTO M 288
Ultraviolet Degradation 70% Strength Retained
at 150 hours for All Classes ASTM D 4355

(1) Minimum. Use value in weaker principal direction. All numerical values represent
minimum average roll value (i.e. test results from any sampled roll in a lot shall meet or
exceed the minimum values in the Table).
2) Values apply to both field and manufactured seams.

6.16.2.7 Acceptance Procedures for Non-Specification Fabric. It is intended that

all geotextile fabric used in Ministry work shall meet the requirements of the applicable
specifications. However, when geotextile fabric which fails requirements has been
inadvertently incorporated into the work prior to completion of testing, the material may
be accepted with a reduction in pay provided the failure(s) will not cause poor
performance. When the failure is excessive, then the geotextile fabric shall be removed
and replaced unless the Engineer determines that the geotextile fabric can remain in
place. The largest payment reduction will be applied when the material fails to meet
more than one specification requirement. The payment reduction will be calculated on
the invoice cost of the material delivered at the project site. Geotextile fabric that fails
and has not been incorporated into the Work will be rejected and shall not be used on
the project.
AOS PAYMENT REDUCTION
% #35-#40 or 0-5 6-10 11-15 16-20 21 or More
% #45-#50
Glass Beads
Passing Fabric
as Applicable
Reduction
Rate 0% 20% 30% 40% *

103
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

GRAB STRENGTH PAYMENT REDUCTION

% of 100% or more 90-99% 75-89% 74% or Less
Requirement
Reduction 0% 25% 40% *
Rate

ELONGATION PAYMENT REDUCTION

TYPE I FABRIC ONLY
% of 100% or more 90-99% 75-89% 74% or Less
Requirement
Reduction 0% 25% 40% *
Rate

SEWN SEAM STRENGTH PAYMENT REDUCTION

% of 100% or more 90-99% 75-89% 74% or Less
Requirement
Reduction 0% 25% 40% *
Rate

*Fabric shall be removed and replaced unless the Engineer determines the fabric can
remain in place at a 100% reduction rate.

6.16.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.16.3.1 General. The fabric shall be placed in the manner and at the locations
shown on the plans. At the time of installation, fabric will be rejected if it has defects,
rips, holes, flaws, deterioration, or damage incurred during manufacture, transportation
or storage. The surface to receive the fabric shall be prepared to a relatively smooth
condition free of obstruction, debris or sharp objects that may puncture the fabric.
Construction equipment will not be permitted to operate directly on the fabric.

The fabric shall be protected at all times during construction from contamination by
surface runoff and any fabric so contaminated shall be removed and replaced with
uncontaminated fabric.

Any fabric damaged during installation or during placement of filter materials, slope
protection or other materials shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Ministry.
Extensively damaged fabric shall be removed and replaced as directed. When the
majority of the fabric is undamaged, individual isolated cuts, tears or punctures may be
repaired by placing a patch of geotextile fabric over the damaged area. The patch shall
extend at least one meter beyond the damage in all directions or the entire perimeter of
the patch shall be fastened by sewing as specified in Paragraph 6.16.3.2 "Field Splices"
in these General Specifications at the Contractor's option.

Fabric shall be covered with a layer of the specified material within fourteen (14)
calendar days after placement of the fabric; fabric not covered within this time shall be
removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense if damage or deterioration is evident

104
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

as determined by the Engineer. Fabric not covered within thirty (30) calendar days after
placement shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Ministry.

6.16.3.2 Field Seams.

6.16.3.2.1 General. Field splices at edges or ends of the fabric made by sewing
with a portable sewing machine which produces a lock stitch. The strength across the
seam shall be least sixty percent (60%) of the fabric strength in that direction. The
Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval before field seaming and stitching. Sew
field seams with polymeric thread consisting of polypropylene, polyester, or kevlar, and
as resistant to deterioration as the geotextile being sewn. Use a color of thread that
contrasts with the geotextile being sewn so the stitches are exposed for inspection when
the geotextile is placed.

6.16.3.2.2 Stitch Requirements. Use two (2) rows of lock-type stitching, Type
401, to make the seams, as shown. The two (2) rows of stitching shall be twelve (12)
millimeters apart with a tolerance of ± six (6) millimeters and not cross except for
restitching.

6.16.3.2.3 Minimum Seam Allowance. The minimum seam allowance, that is,
the minimum distance from the edge of geotextile to the nearest stitchline is:

Seam Type Minimum Seam

(See Plans) Allowance, Millimeters

Flat or Prayer Seam Type SSa-1 38

"J" Seam, Type SSn-1 25
Butterfly-folded Seam, Type SSd-1 25

6.16.3.2.4 Seam Type. Obtain the geotextile manufacturer's recommendation

for the type of seam and stitch to be used. If the Contractor does not obtain and provide
the foregoing technical information, use a "J" seam with at least three (3) stitches per
twenty-five (25) millimeters. The flat, or prayer, seam may be used for repair of
damaged in-place geotextile.

6.16.3.3 Overlaps. Where appropriate, overlapping instead of sewn seams, will be

allowed. Minimum overlap requirements for geotextiles are:

Geotextile Application Minimum Overlap

Requirements, Millimeters
Drainage Blankets 300
Embankment Stabilization 600
Underdrains 600
Slope Protection and Channel Lining 600
Roadbed Subgrade Stabilization 600

6.16.3.4 Slope Protection and Channel Lining. Type I fabric shall be placed with
the long dimension parallel to the channel or toe of slope and shall be laid smooth and

105
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

free of tension, stress, folds, wrinkles or creases. Transverse laps shall be placed so
the upstream strip laps over the downstream strip. Horizontal laps shall be placed so the
lower strip laps over the upper strip. Laps may be eliminated provided the joint is sewn
as specified in Paragraph 6.16.3.2, "Field Seams" in these General Specifications.

Fastener pins shall be installed through both strips of overlapped fabric at no less
than two (2) meter intervals along a line through the midpoint of the overlap, and at any
other locations as necessary to prevent any slippage of the fabric.

The fabric shall be protected from damage due to the placement of the slope
protection or channel lining by limiting the height of drop of the material to no greater
than three tenths (0.3) meter or no greater than one (1) meter when a cushioning layer
of sand is placed on top of the fabric before dumping the material, at the Contractor's
option. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the placement technique will prevent
damage to the fabric. Placement of material shall begin at the toe and proceed up the
slope.

6.16.3.5 Underdrains. Type II fabric shall be placed and shaped to the sides and
bottom of the trench with suitable equipment, without stretching. Care shall be taken so
that the required amount of fabric will be available for top lap. The filter aggregate shall
be placed so as not to damage, displace, or dislodge the fabric, and shall be placed as
specified in Section 6.04, "Pipe Underdrain and Irrigation Pipe," in these General
Specifications. The fabric shall then be folded over the backfilled trench and secured
with steel pins at intervals of two (2) meters to produce a double thickness of fabric over
the full width of the top of the trench.

The fabric shall be ordered in lengths to minimize the number of splices necessary.
When splices between rolls are necessary, the fabric shall be placed so that the
upstream roll overlaps the downstream roll a minimum of six hundred (600) millimeters
and shall be secured with fastener pins as directed. The lap and fastener pins may be
eliminated provided the joint is sewn as specified in Paragraph 6.16.2.4, "Field Splices"
in these General Specifications.

6.16.3.6 Subgrade or Embankment Foundation Stabilization. Type III fabric shall

be placed with the long dimensions parallel to the long dimensions of the area to be
covered and shall be laid smooth and free of tension, stress, folds, wrinkles or creases.
The embankment foundation area to be stabilized shall be cleared of sharp objects
which might damage the fabric during installation. Surface vegetation (grasses, weeds,
etc.) shall be left in place. All laps, both longitudinal and transverse, shall be at least
one-half (0.5) meters and shall be secured with fastener pins at two (2) meter intervals
along a long through the midpoint of the overlap. This overlap is normally sufficient for
a good joint, however, it may become necessary to sew the overlapped sections. When
sewn joints are directed or approved, sewing shall be specified in Paragraph 6.16.3.2,
"Field Seams" in these General Specifications.

During back dumping and spreading, the wheels of trucks, dozer blades and other
equipment shall travel on previously placed fill and shall not make direct contact with the
fabric. The material shall be spread in the direction of the fabric overlap. Large fabric

106
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

wrinkles which may develop during spreading operations shall be folded and flattened
in the direction of the spreading. Occasionally, large folds may reduce the fabric overlap
width. Special care shall be given to maintain proper overlap and fabric continuity. For
the first lift, the thickness shall be the minimum that will support construction equipment
with two hundred (200) to four hundred (400) millimeter ruts. A minimum of between
two-tenths (0.2) meters and three-tenths (0.3) meters of fill shall be maintained between
the structures and geotextile.

6.16.3.7 Drainage Blankets. Type IV fabric shall be placed with the long
dimensions parallel to the long dimensions of the area to be covered and shall be laid
smooth and free of tension, stress, folds, wrinkles or creases. All laps, both longitudinal
and transverse, shall be at least one-half (0.5) meters except laps may be eliminated
provided the joint is sewn as specified in Paragraph 6.16.3.2, "Field Seams" in these
General Specifications.

The drainage blanket material shall be placed to present a reasonably even surface
free from mounds or depressions. After the material is placed, the fabric shall be folded
over the ends and sides of the material and additional fabric placed over the material so
that the material is completely encased within the fabric. All laps that are not sewn shall
be secured by fastener pins at one (1) meter intervals along a line through the midpoint
the lap. Additional pins, regardless of the location, shall be installed as necessary to
prevent any slippage of the fabric. The fabric shall be placed so that laps do not occur
at the edges or ends of the drainage blanket. Embankment shall be placed in a manner
to avoid damage or displacement of the completed drainage blanket.

Light equipment shall be used for spreading fill material over previously placed
material.

6.16.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Geotextile fabric shall be sampled,

tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work" of these
General Specifications as follows: Fabric materials acceptance shall be in accordance
with Paragraph 6.16.2.3 "Materials Acceptance" and 6.16.2.7 "Acceptance Procedures
for Non-Specification Fabric" in these General Specifications. Construction of the
Geotextile fabric shall be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or
Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.16.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. When fabric is used for underdrains, either to

wrap perforated pipe or to wrap aggregate, measurement and payment will as specified
in Section 6.04 "Pipe Underdrain and Irrigation Pipe" in these General Specifications as
applicable. No separate measurement of payment will be made for fabric when the
plans or proposal indicate the fabric is incidental to the Work, when the specifications
for another item requires incidental installation of geotextile fabric, or when no separate
bid item for fabric is listed in the proposal.

When a separate bid item for fabric is listed in the proposal, fabric of each type will
be measured in square meters except where the Contract indicates the fabric is
incidental to other Work or items.

107
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

When the fabric is used to completely enclose an aggregate drainage blanket, the
area measured for payment will be the sum of (1) the area of the lower surface of the
aggregate layer, (2) the area of the upper surface of the aggregate layer, and (3) the
area of the sides and ends of the aggregate layer; dimensions used to calculate these
areas will be the dimensions shown on the plans or as directed. When used for other
purposes, the entire surface area covered as specified or directed will be measured. No
allowance will be made for material in laps or seams. Fastener pins will not be
measured for separate payment, but will be considered incidental to the fabric.

6.16.6 PAYMENT. The accepted quantity of fabric and geocomposite of each type will
be paid for at the contract unit price per square meter, which payment shall be full
compensation for all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals necessary to
acceptably furnish and place the fabric and complete the Work as specified in
Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

61601 Geotextile Fabric, Type I Square Meter

61602 Geotextile Fabric, Type II Square Meter

61603 Geotextile Fabric, Type III Square Meter

61604 Geotextile Fabric, Type IV Square Meter

61605 Geotextile Fabric, Type V Square Meter

61606 Geotextile Fabric, Type _ Square Meter

108
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.17 - SOIL NAILED WALL

6.17.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work consists of constructing soil nailed walls by internally
reinforcing the soil mass with cement grouted steel bars, and providing vertical drainage
and a reinforced shotcrete facing in close conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions,
and design parameters shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The wall shall
be constructed from the top down as the soil and rock in front of the wall are removed
and the nails are installed, grouted and the facing applied at each level. The soil nailed
wall system shall provide permanent or temporary stabilization for the exposed slopes.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Soil Nail Wall No.
Additional Length of Nails

6.17.2 MATERIALS. Materials shall conform to the following referenced Sections in

these General Specifications and other referenced test methods:

Epoxy Coated Soil Nail Bars: (threaded as necessary)

Steel: AASHTO M31-Grade 60 thread as necessary. Only
nails greater than 10 meters in length may be
spliced using a mechanical splicer.
Epoxy Coating: AASHTO M284. Bend Test requirements shall be
waived.

The minimum coating thickness for epoxy shall be fourteen (14) mils and the
maximum thickness shall be eighteen (18) mils.

Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Section 5.02-"Reinforcing Steel"

Shotcrete: Section 6.14- "Shotcrete"
Grout: Paragraph 5.04.3.6 - "Grout"
Mortar: Subparagraph 5.01.3.1.4
Plates: AASHTO M183
Nuts: AASHTO M291, Grade B, Hexagonal

Plates and nuts shall be epoxy coated with the same minimum and maximum
thickness as the soil nail bars. At least two bar, plate, and nut assemblies shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM F432. The results of these tests shall be submitted to
the Engineer at least ten (10) days prior to the installation of any soil nail bars.

Centralizers: Minimum diameter twelve (12) millimeters less than the nominal
diameter of the drill hole.

Centralizers shall be plastic and so constructed so to insure a minimum grout cover

of at least twenty-five (25) millimeters around the soil nail bar.

Horizontal Drains. Provide as required and shown on the Plans, slotted and
unslotted PVC pipe conforming to AASHTO M-278. The Contractor shall make

109
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

provisions to assure that the hole does not collapse prior to the insertion of the slotted
drain. Only the front three hundred (300) millimeters of drain pipe shall be unslotted.

Vertical Wall Drains. Provide as required and shown on the Plans, prefabricated, fully
wrapped preformed geocomposite drains. The core, not less than six (6) millimeters
thick or more than twelve (12) millimeters thick, shall be either a preformed grid of
embossed plastic or a system of plastic pillars and interconnections forming a semirigid
mat. The core material when covered with filter fabric shall be capable of maintaining
a drain void for the entire height of permeable liner. Preformed drains shall be no wider
than three hundred (300) millimeters unless special methods are used to insure
adherence of the shotcrete to the fabric and to preclude the fabric from sagging under
the weight of the shotcrete. They shall be suitably outletted or connected to a
longitudinal drain at the bottom of the structure. When splicing of drains is required, full
flow through the splice shall be maintained and splices shall be suitably protected from
damage and contamination during subsequent shotcreting. The shotcrete shall be full
thickness over the drain.

6.17.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.17.3.1 Submittals. Material certifications, instrumentation installation and

connection details, personnel qualifications, and detailed excavation and construction
procedures and sequencing plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and
approval at least two weeks prior to the commencement of work under this item. This
submittal shall include all details for the installation and load testing of test nails
described in this Section of these General Specifications.

All necessary torque wrenches, hydraulic jacks, and related equipment for the
installation and testing of soil nails shall be provided and maintained in good working
order by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide certified calibrations for each of
these devices dated not more than thirty days prior to their first use on this project. The
Contractor may be required to verify the calibration of any torquing or jacking equipment
should any question arise concerning the accuracy of these devices.

Within thirty (30) days after the completion of each soil nailed wall, the Contractor
shall provide as-built drawings, grouting records, and soil nail test results for all work on
that wall. The drawings shall be compatible with, at a similar scale to, and similarly
detailed as the contract drawings for this work. The grouting records and soil nail test
results shall be compiled and summarized in a neat, logical and readable manner.

6.17.3.2 Qualifications. The Contractor shall submit proof of two projects on which
he has constructed retaining walls using soil nails or ground anchors within the past five
(5) years. The Contractor's staff on this project shall include a supervising engineer with
at least three (3) years experience in the construction of soil nailed or ground anchored
walls.

Drill operators and foremen shall have a minimum of two years experience in the
installation of soil nails or ground anchors. Shotcrete nozzle operators shall have at
least one year experience in the application of shotcrete or work under the immediate

110
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

supervision of a foreman or instructor with at least two years of such experience.

Shotcrete nozzle operators shall be qualified in accordance with ACI Test Panel
Certification Procedures detailed in Paragraph 6.14.3.2 "Personnel" in these General
Specifications. The Contractor shall submit resumes documenting that project personnel
have the required experience and work shall not begin until the Engineer has approved
the proposed personnel in writing. Changes to approved personnel shall not be made
until approved in writing by the Engineer.

6.17.3.3 Sequence. The sequence of construction shall be as outlined in

Paragraphs 6.17.3.4, “Excavation” through 6.17.3.7, "Final Shotcreting” below unless
otherwise proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, in these General
Specifications. Consideration will be given to make the sequence more site specific
including installing the nails before the face is shotcreted provided the cut face remains
stable.

6.17.3.4 Excavation. Excavation shall proceed in stages with each stage exposing
the minimum amount of soil or rock face which will allow the practical and expeditious
application of the initial layer of shotcrete and the installation of soil nails while assuring
stability of the excavated face and minimizing ground movements. The excavation
should be within the limits and construction stages indicated in the Plans.

6.17.3.5 Initial Shotcrete. After each stage is excavated the cut surface shall be
cleaned of all loose material, mud, rebound, and other foreign matter than could prevent
or lessen the bond of the shotcrete to the soil or rock face. No exposed face will be
allowed to stand for more than twenty-four (24) hours without applying the initial
shotcrete layer. All surfaces shall be dampened and all permanent drainage and
instrumentation for the exposed area shall be installed prior to the application of the
initial shotcrete layer.

The Contractor shall install permanent drainage as specified in the submitted Plans.
Connect drainage system at the bottom of the wall in such a manner as to carry the
water away from the toe. Use weep holes, horizontal drains, or other methods to control
seepage. Where used, weep holes shall be six-tenths (0.6) meter long, fifty (50)
millimeter diameter, slotted drain pipe (Schedule 40 PVC) placed in pre-drilled holes
sloped five percent (5%) to drain. During placement of shotcrete the weep holes shall
be protected against contamination to insure proper functioning.

Apply shotcrete with the same equipment and the same technique as those used in
the approved test panels. Nozzle operators performing the test panels to be the same
operators used to place shotcrete in the work. Thickness measuring pins shall be
installed on one and five-tenths (1.5) meter centers in each direction. The pins shall be
non-corrosive. Other methods to establish if the required minimum thickness of
shotcrete is being applied may be approved if Contractor can satisfactorily demonstrate
the reliability of these other methods.

When any layer of shotcrete is to be covered by a succeeding layer, it shall first be

allowed to develop its initial set. Then, all laitance, loose material, and rebound must be

111
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

removed by brooming or scraping. Remove laitance which has been allowed to take
final set by sandblasting and thoroughly clean surface.

Firmly position the wire fabric to prevent movement and vibration while the shotcrete
is being applied. Lap mesh one and one-half (1½) squares in both directions. Tie wires
shall be bent flat in the plane of the mesh and not form large knots. A minimum cover
of forty (40) millimeters of shotcrete shall be required.

Control thickness, method of support, air pressure and water content of shotcrete to
preclude sagging or sloughing off.

The shotcrete shall be applied from the bottom up to prevent accumulation of

rebound on the surface still be covered. Shotcrete shall emerge from the nozzle in a
steady uninterrupted flow.

6.17.3.6 Nail Holes. Holes shall be drilled for soil nails at the location shown in the
plans, or directed by the Engineer, to the minimum diameter and length shown. The
Contractor shall provide soil nail length necessary to develop adequate load capacity to
satisfy testing acceptance criteria for the design load required, but not less than the
lengths shown on the plans. Core drilling, rotary drilling, percussion drilling, auger
drilling, or driven casting may be used to advance the hole. Water or other liquids shall
not be used as a cutting or flushing medium but air may be used. It will be the
Contractor's responsibility to choose the drilling method that will maintain open drill holes
and does not promote mining and loosening of the soil at the perimeter of the drill hole
or fracture soil with weak stratification planes by using high flushing volumes and
pressures. Each hole shall be located within one hundred fifty (150) millimeters of the
location shown on the plans (measured at the collar) and the angle of entry shall be
within three degrees (3o) of that shown on the plans. Subsidence or physical damage
to the exposed soil face, or to areas intended to be undisturbed, by the Contractor's
drilling operations, shall be cause for immediate cessation of these operations and repair
of all damage at the Contractor's expense.

Grout shall be injected at the lowest point of each drill hole and the hole shall be filled
with grout progressively from the bottom to the top. Grouting equipment shall be
capable of thorough and continuous mixing and producing a grout with the required
water-cement ratio that is free of lumps. Grout may be pumped through grout tubes,
casing, hollowstem augers, or drill rods. The Contractor shall keep accurate and up-to-
date records of the quantities of grout used for each soil nail.

Nails shall be placed in each drilled hole within fifteen (15) minutes of the grout
injection. Mortar packing and secondary grouting shall be accomplished as soon as
practicable after nail installation. Nominal nail stressing as shown on the plans shall not
be accomplished until the grout and mortar pack have reached a compressive strength
of at least 250 kg/cm2. Nails shall not be stressed to more than twenty percent (20%)
of design load.

112
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The Contractor shall place centralizers at three (3) meter intervals in the total length
with the last centralizer three hundred (300) millimeters from the end of each nail and
insure that no less than forty (40) millimeters of grout cover is achieved along the nail.

Secondary grouting shall be provided to the small ungrouted zone at the face, place
a bearing plate over the bar and dry pack with cement or a cement mortar to provide
even bearing against the shotcrete face.

6.17.3.7 Final Shotcreting. Welded wire fabric for reinforcement of the surface
layer shall be installed and held firmly in proper position while the final layer of shotcrete
is applied. All requirements of Paragraph 6.17.3.5 "Initial Shotcrete" shall also apply to
this shotcreting operation. Care shall be exercised to avoid allowing significant
overspray or rebound to hit final and finished shotcrete or rock surfaces. Any finishing,
brooming, or cleaning necessary to produce or maintain the required surface texture
shall follow the shotcrete application as closely as possible.

Further Excavation. Further excavation shall not be accomplished until after the final
layer of shotcrete has been applied to the proceeding lift. Each lift shall be completed
using the sequence outlined in Paragraphs 6.17.3.4 “ Excavation” through 6.17.3.7 “ Final
Shortcreting” in these General Specifications.

6.17.3.8 Tolerances. Shotcrete tolerances shown on the plans are minimum

thicknesses. Greater thicknesses may be required locally to fill indentations left in the
face by the excavation process. Areas overexcavated behind the theoretical excavation
limit shall be backfilled with shotcrete at no additional cost to the Ministry. Careful
excavation techniques will be necessary and some shotcrete backfill should be
anticipated. The final wall surface shall fall within one hundred fifty (150) millimeters of
the theoretical surface except within the bottom one and one-half (1.5) meters of the wall
where the tolerance shall be three hundred (300) millimeters, toward the roadway and
zero away from the roadway. All adjustments to meet these tolerances shall be made
in the initial shotcrete application so that the fully reinforced final shotcrete layer shall
have a relatively uniform thickness.

The Contractor shall provide field survey data comparing the theoretical and actual
excavation limits with sufficient measurement points to assure compliance with these
tolerances. These data shall be supplied to the Engineer for each excavation lift prior
to the setting of thickness measurement pins or the application of the initial layer
shotcrete on each lift.

6.17.4 NAIL INSTALLATION AND TESTING.

6.17.4.1 Test Nail Installation. The Contractor shall install, at the locations shown on
the plans or as directed by the Engineer, approximately one (1) test nail per horizontal
row of nails. These nails shall be installed using similar procedures as production nails
and as soon as practicable in the excavation sequence. The length of each test nail will
be chosen to insure pullout failure prior to yield of the steel tendon but will not be less
than one (1) meter. The total number of test nails will not exceed three percent (3%) of
the total number of production nails on this project.

113
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Each test nail shall be grouted in place as part of a regular production grouting
process, including primary grout, and if necessary and secondary grouting. Details for
isolating the test nail from the shotcrete and determining the grouted length shall be
provided by the Contractor. As soon as the grout has reached a cube strength of two
hundred fifty (250) kilograms per square centimeter, the Contractor shall subject each
test nail to a pullout test. This pullout test shall consist of incrementally tensioning the
nail with a calibrated hydraulic jacking system. Each increment shall be equivalent to
approximately twenty-five percent (25%) of the design load of the nail tendon and each
nail test shall be conducted to ninety percent (90%) of the yield strength of the tendon.

Nail tendon deflection shall be measured with a dial gage capable of measuring
movement of two hundredths (0.02) millimeters and recorded to the nearest 0.02 mm
with respect to an independent fixed reference point at each increment of load. The
jacking system shall be capable of maintaining a constant load for at least eight (8)
minutes at each increment. Deflection readings shall be taken and recorded at times of
½, 1, 2, 4 and 8 minutes after each load increment has been applied. Each load
increment shall be applied as rapidly as possible.

All nail testing shall be done in cooperation with and in the presence of the Engineer.
Shorter load hold times at the low load increments may be individually approved during
testing should no movement be occurring.

The reaction load for nail testing may be spread over the surface of the wall but no
pressure shall be applied within one (1) meter of the nail being tested. Pressure from
the reaction system against the wall shall not crack or otherwise damage partially or fully
completed sections of the wall.

Test nails shall be cut off behind the finished surface of the wall when testing is
complete.

Nail testing is included to verify the soil-tendon strength assumed in design. Should
nail tests prove that the friction limit actually being obtained in field production is
significantly different than the friction limit assumed in design, the Engineer will make
design modifications to increase the nail length or decrease the nail spacing to insure
a stable completed structure.

Should these design modifications become necessary, additional nails or nail length
beyond those shown on the plans will be paid for under Item 6.17.3, "Additional Length
of Nails" in these General Specifications.

6.17.4.2 Nail Testing.

6.17.4.2.1 Equipment. A dial gauge capable of measuring to twenty-five

thousandths (0.025) millimeter shall be used to measure movement. A hydraulic jack
and gauge calibrated as a unit shall be used to apply the test load. The pressure gauge
shall be graduated in one hundred (100) pounds per square inch increments or less and
used to measure the applied load. The test loads shall be applied incrementally.

114
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.17.4.2.2 Pullout Testing. Install one (1) nail per horizontal row but no more
than three percent (3%) of the total number of nails as non-service nails and load test
to pullout failure. Pullout failure is defined as movement in excess of one (1) millimeter
between the one (1) minute and ten (10) minute reading of two (2) millimeters per log
cycle of time over a maximum load hold period of sixty (60) minutes. The test nails shall
be installed and tested at each level at a rate consistent with construction operations.
The test length of nail shall be chosen to cause pullout failure prior to steel yield, but it
shall not be less than two and five-tenths (2.5) meters. A minimum ungrouted or
unbonded zone of nine-tenths (0.9) meters in length to the face shall be provided. The
method of installation and size of drill hole shall be the same as for production nails.

Each test nail shall be grouted in place as part of a regular production grouting
process. After grouting, the nail shall not be loaded for a minimum of three (3) days.
Reaction frames should not bear on the shotcrete face within a nine-tenths (0.9) meter
radius of the center of the drilled hole.

The pullout test shall be made by incrementally loading the nail. The nail
movement shall be measured and recorded to the nearest twenty-five thousandths
(0.025) of a millimeter with respect to an independent fixed reference point at each
increment of load. The test shall be monitored with a pressure gauge. The load hold
period shall start as soon as each test load is applied. Movement shall be recorded at
1 minute, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 10 minutes. If the load hold is extended, the nail movement
shall be recorded at 15, 25, 30, 45 and sixty (60) minutes. Each increment of load shall
be no greater than twenty-five percent of the design load of the nail tested. The loading
shall be terminated at failure or earlier at the option of the Contractor if the design
ultimate unit bond stress is demonstrated.

6.17.4.2.3 Acceptance Criteria. The nail is deemed acceptable if the unit bond
stress at a failure load is equal or greater than the design unit bond stress.
Unacceptable test results shall result in modifications to design and/or construction
procedures. Any modifications of design or construction procedures shall be at no
change in the contract prices and the verification testing procedures shall be repeated
as required by the Engineer. Graphs shall be plotted during the test of deflection against
load.

6.17.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Soil Nailed Wall shall be sampled,

tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work" in these
General Specifications as follows:

Construction of the walls and nails shall be in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4
"Measured or Tested Conformance" and Paragraph 6.17.4.2 "Nail Testing" in these
General Specifications. The Soil Nail walls materials shall be accepted in accordance
with Subsection 1.08.3, "Certificate of Compliance" and the specifications and test
methods referenced in Subsection 6.17.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications.

115
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.17.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Each soil nailed wall complete in place and
accepted will be measured by the square meter of surface area to the pay limit shown
on the plans or designated by the Engineer which will include the following:

1. All Walls
(1) shotcrete with coloring
(2) epoxy coated nails, nuts & plates, grout, mortar pack and grout pads
(3) wall drain and weep holes
(4) welded wire fabric holding devices

2. Wall with 1.05 Meters H X 1.02 Meters V Nail Spacing

(1) shotcrete thickness
1st application - 80 millimeters
2nd application - 100 millimeters
(2) welded wire fabric
1st application - 70 millimeters X 70 millimeters - W12 x W12 (2' squares at
nails only)
2nd application - 100 millimeters X 100 millimeters - W7 x W7

3. Wall with 1.08 Meters H X 1.02 Meters V Nail Spacing

(1) shotcrete thickness
1st application - 60 millimeters
2nd application - 70 millimeters
(2) welded wire fabric
1st application - 70 millimeters X 70 millimeters - W10 x W10 (2' squares at
nails only)
2nd application - 100 millimeters X 100 millimeters - W5.5 x W5.5

Additional length of nails will be paid by the linear meter of nail complete in place and
accepted. This item will only be paid if modifications in nail length and/or nail spacing
are necessitated by low pullout test results and are approved by the Engineer. If such
modifications are made, payment under Pay Item 61701 will comprise full and final
payment for any and all Work required to implement these modifications. No additional
nails or longer nails will be added at a higher elevation that the test nail upon which
design modifications are based.

6.17.7 PAYMENT. The accepted quantities, determined as provided above, will be paid
for at the contract price per unit of measurement. For the soil nailed walls and additional
lengths of nails is in the Bill of Quantities. The prices(s) shall be full compensation for
furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and all other items necessary
for the proper completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of
Payment" in these General Specifications, which price shall be full compensation for all
labor, equipment, and materials required by this Section. All work required by this
Section and not specifically listed in the bid schedule shall be considered a subsidiary
obligation of the Contractor under this Section.

116
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

61701 Soil Nailed Wall No. ___ Square Meter

61702 Soil Nailed Wall, No. 2 Square Meter

61703 Soil Nailed Wall, No. 3 Square Meter

61704 Soil Nailed Wall, No. ___ Square Meter

61706 Additional Lengths of Nails Linear Meter

117
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.18 - REINFORCED EARTH STRUCTURES

6.18.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of the construction of Reinforced Earth
structures in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines,
grades, design and dimensions shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Concrete Facing
Reinforcing Strips

6.18.2 MATERIALS.

6.18.2.1 General. Since "Reinforced Earth" or its equivalent is normally a patented

process, the Contractor shall make his own arrangements to secure the supplies and
services needed for this Work from the patentee or his licensees through suitable legal
agreement. A copy of such agreement shall be furnished to the Engineer. Materials not
conforming to this section of the specification or from sources not listed in the contract
documents should not be used without written consent from the Engineer.

6.18.2.2 Concrete Facing. All concrete materials shall conform to the requirements
in Subsection 5.01.2, "Materials." Concrete shall conform to Class A as specified in
Subsection 5.01.1, "Description." Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements
of Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel," for the type and grade specified on the plans or in
the Special Specifications all in these General Specifications.

6.18.2.2.1 Casting. All reinforcing steel and inserts, including connection

hardware, PVC tubes, tie strips, lifting and handling devices, etc., shall be set in place
to the dimensions and tolerances shown on the plans prior to casting. The panels shall
be cast on a flat level area with the exposed face cast against a correctly dimensioned
and approved form. Each unit shall be identified by lightly marking in the fresh concrete
on the rear face, the date of casting, the panel type, and any other information required
by the Engineer. Any galvanized devices shall not contact or be attached to the face
panel reinforcement steel.

6.18.2.2.2 Curing. The units shall be cured in accordance with the

requirements of Paragraph 5.03.4.10, "Bridge Structure Curing and Protection" in these
General Specifications. Curing shall continue as necessary beyond seven (7) days until
the concrete develops the specified compressive strength as required herein.

6.18.2.2.3 Removal of Forms. The forms shall remain in place until test
cylinders cured with the facing panels yield seventy (70) kilograms per square centimeter
compressive strength, otherwise twenty-eight (28) days. Transportation of panels shall
only be allowed at a minimum of two hundred forty (240) kilograms per square
centimeter.

118
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.18.2.2.4 Concrete Finish. The front face of each unit shall have the finish as
specified in the plans or Special Specifications.

The Contractor shall demonstrate his ability to produce the specified finish by
constructing or supplying a minimum of three (3) test panels. The materials, including
formwork, used in the construction of the test panels shall be the same as those
proposed for use in the Work. The test panel finish must be approved by the Engineer
prior to production of units for the Work. The approved test panels shall remain available
on the site throughout the duration of the Work and shall not be incorporated into the
Work unless or until released by the Engineer.

The rear face of each unit shall be left with a dense, rough texture with no open
pockets of aggregate or honeycombed areas.

6.18.2.2.5 Tolerances. All units shall be manufactured within the following

tolerances:

1. All dimensions shall be within five (5) millimeters of the corresponding plan
dimensions.

2. The smoothness of the front face of each unit shall be within eight (8)
millimeters when tested with a one and one-half (1.5) meter straightedge in any
direction.

3. The difference in length between any two diagonal measurements on a

single unit shall be no more than ten (10) millimeters.

4. The thickness of the unit shall be within fifteen (15) millimeters of the plan
thickness.

6.18.2.2.6 Acceptance. Acceptance of each of the precast units shall be

determined on the basis of compression tests and visual inspection. Sampling and
testing for compressive strength shall conform to the requirements of Section 5.01,
"Concrete," Section 1.04, "Control of Materials", and Section 1.08 "Acceptance of Work"
in these General Specifications. An additional four (4) compressive specimens shall be
cast with each acceptance sample set of specimens and shall be field cured in the same
manner as the concrete facing units. Compressive tests on these additional specimens
shall be used to determine the length of curing time required and acceptability for
placement. Units will be considered acceptable for placement in the structure provided
the compressive strength of field cured cylinders exceeds two hundred forty (240)
kilograms per square centimeter. Units will be rejected by the Engineer due to defects
that indicate imperfect molding, honeycombing, cracking, severe chipping, or open
texture concrete. The Engineer may reject any unit which does not compare favorably
with the approved front face panel.

6.18.2.2.7 Handling, Storage and Transporting. All units shall be handled,

stored and transported in such a manner as to eliminate the danger of chipping,
cracking, fracture, and excessive bending stresses. Units in transport or in storage shall

119
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

be supported on firm blockings located adjacent to the tie strips. Connecting pins and
tie strips shall be protected from bending and damage at all times.

6.18.2.3 Leveling Concrete. Concrete for placement in the leveling pad shall
conform to the requirements of Subsection 5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor Structures" in
these General Specifications. Curing shall be maintained for a minimum of twelve (12)
hours or as ordered by the Engineer.

6.18.2.4 Reinforcing Strips and Tie Strips. Shapes and dimensions of these
elements shall conform to the dimensions and tolerances shown on the plans and shall
be shown on shop drawings produced by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
Tie strips shall be shop fabricated of rolled steel conforming to the minimum
requirements of ASTM A 570, Grade 33 except as modified in Subparagraph 6.18.2.4.1
“ Physical and Mechanical Properties” in these General Specifications. Reinforcing strips
shall be hot rolled form bars to the required shape and dimensions. Their physical and
mechanical properties shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183, except as
modified in Subgraph 6.18.2.4.1 “ Physical and Mechanical Properties” in these General
Specifications. Reinforcing strips and tie strips shall be hot dip galvanized to conform
to the minimum requirements of AASHTO M 111, except as modified in Subparagraph
6.18.2.4.2 “ Weight of Coating” in these General Specifications. Holes for bolts shall be
punched in the locations shown on the plans. All required cutting, bending, and hole
punching shall be performed prior to galvanizing.

6.18.2.4.1 Physical and Mechanical Properties. Reinforcing strips and tie

strips shall conform to the following:

Minimum Yield Point 2,400 kg/cm2 (235 MPa)

Tensile Strength 3,700 to 4,500 kg/cm2
(363 to 441 MPa)
Phosphorus 0.06 percent maximum
Sulfur 0.05 percent maximum

6.18.2.4.2 Weight of Coating. The weight of zinc coating shall conform to the
following:

Minimum Weight 500 g/m2

6.18.2.5 Fasteners. Bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads and shall conform
to the requirements of AASHTO M 164, Type 2, except as modified hereunder. Bolts
shall be twelve (12) millimeters in diameter, thirty (30) millimeters in length with twenty
(20) millimeters of thread length. Fasteners shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance
with the requirements of AASHTO M 232, Class C.

Minimum Yield Point 6,400 kg/cm2 (627 MPa)

Minimum Tensile Strength 8,000 kg/cm2 (784 MPa)
Minimum Elongation 12 percent

120
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.18.2.6 Joint Filler. Filler for vertical joints between units shall be flexible, open cell
polyurethane foam. Filler for horizontal joints between units and where pads are used
shall be resin-bonded cork strips conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 1752, Type
II, or preformed EPDM rubber pads conforming to ASTM D-2000 for 4AA, 812 rubber
or neoprene elastomeric pads having a Durometer Hardness of 55+5, and shall be
approved by the Engineer. All joint covers between panels on the back side of wall shall
be Type III Fabric conforming to the applicable requirements of Table 6.16-3 " Geotextile
Subgrade and Embankment Stabilization."

6.18.2.7 Coil Embeds/Loop Imbeds. Coil Embeds/Loop Imbeds shall be fabricated

of cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM-510, UNS G-10350 or ASTM A-82. Loop
imbeds shall be welded in accordance with ASTM A-185. Both shall be galvanized in
accordance with ASTm B-633 or equal.

6.18.2.8 Coil Embed Grease. The cavity of each coil embed shall be completely
filled with no-oxid type grease or equal.

6.18.2.9 Coil Bolt. The coil bolts shall have two (2) inches of thread. They shall be
cast of 80-55-06 ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536. Galvanization shall conform
to ASTM B-633 or equal.

6.18.2.10 Connector Pins. Connector pins and mat bars shall be fabricated from A-
36 steel and welded to the soil reinforcement mats as shown on the Plans.
Galvanization shall conform to ASTM A-123 (AASHTO M-111).

6.18.2.11 Backfill Materials. All backfill material used in the structural volume shall
be reasonably free from organic or otherwise deleterious materials, and shall conform
to the following mechanical and physico-chemical requirements.

6.18.2.11.1 Mechanical Requirements. Backfill material shall conform to the

following gradation:

SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING

250 mm (10 inch) 100
100 mm (4 inch) 100-75
0.425 mm (No. 40) 0-60
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-15
Plasticity Index Less than 6

The angle of internal friction should not be less than thirty-four degrees (34o ) as
determined by the standard direct shear test (AASHTO T-236) on the portion finer that
the #10 sieve, utilizing a sample of the material compacted to ninety-five percent (95%)
of AASHTO T-99.

The Contractor may request that the acceptance limits be increased for material
not meeting the above percent passing the 0.075 millimeter sieve requirement.
However, he must include with his request an analysis showing (1) that the material
passing the 0.075 millimeter sieve contains less than ten (10) percent smaller than

121
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

fifteen thousandths (.015) millimeters, or (2) that the material contains less than twenty
(20) percent smaller than fifteen thousandths (.015) millimeter and the minimum angle
of internal friction as determined by ASTM D 2850 of twenty-eight (28) grads.

6.18.2.11.2 Physico-Chemical Requirements. Materials shall have a minimum

resistivity when measured in accordance with ASTM G 57 of three thousand (3,000)
Ohm centimeters. Materials having a resistivity less than the above but greater than one
thousand (1,000) Ohm centimeters may be acceptable provided that the following
requirements are met:

1. The pH value of the material measured in water extracted from a water-soil

mixture is between five (5) and ten (10) when tested in accordance with ASTM G 51.0

2. The water extracted from the water-soil mixture contains a chlorides content
of less than one hundred (100) parts per million and a sulphates content of less than two
hundred (200) parts per million when tested in accordance with MRDTM 514.

6.18.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.18.3.1 Excavations. Excavations shall be in accordance with the requirements

of Section 2.03, "Excavation" in these General Specifications and the Special
Specifications. Limits and construction stages shall be as shown on the plans or
approved by the Engineer.

6.18.3.2 Foundation Preparation. The foundation for Reinforced Earth structures

shall be graded level for a width equal to the length of reinforcing strips plus three-tenths
(.3) of a meter. Prior to wall construction, the foundation shall be fully compacted with
a smooth wheel vibratory roller and shall meet the requirements of Type 95 compaction
except where constructed on rock as specified in Section 2.05, "Embankment" in these
General Specifications. Any foundation soils found to be unsuitable shall be removed
and replaced in accordance with the procedures in Paragraph 2.03.2.2 “Roadway
Excavation - Unsuitable Material” in these General Specifications.

Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, a concrete leveling pad shall
be placed beneath the concrete facing panels.

6.18.3.3 Erection. Precast concrete facing panels shall be placed so that their final
position is vertical or battered as shown on the Plans. Panels shall be placed in
successive horizontal lift in the sequence shown on the plans as backfill placement
proceeds. As fill material is placed behind a panel, the panels shall be maintained in
position by means of temporary wooden wedges or braces according to the suppliers
recommendations placed in the joint at the junction of the two (2) adjacent panels on the
external side of the wall. Wedges or braces shall be kept in place for the three (3) top
rows of panels during construction. As construction proceeds and a fourth row is
erected, the lowest row of wedges or braces can be removed and so on.

External bracing may also be needed for the initial lift. The panels shall be handled
by means of lifting devices connected to the upper edge of the panel.

122
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Vertical tolerance and horizontal alignment tolerance shall not exceed twenty-five
(25) millimeters when measured with a three (3) meter straightedge. The maximum
offset in any panel joint shall be nineteen (19) millimeters.

6.18.3.4 Backfill Placement. Backfill placement shall follow closely the erection of
each lift of panels. At each reinforcing strip level, backfill shall be roughly leveled before
placing and bolting the strips. Reinforcing strips shall be placed normal to the face of
the wall or as shown on the plans. The maximum layer thickness shall not exceed forty
(40) centimeters. The Contractor shall decrease this thickness if necessary to obtain the
specified density.

At the end of each day's operations, the Contractor shall shape the last level of
backfill to permit runoff of rain water away from the wall face. Backfill shall be
compacted to Type 95 compaction as defined by Paragraph 2.05.4.3 "Earth
Embankment Lift Thickness and Requirements” in these General Specifications. Backfill
in subgrade zones shall be compacted to Type 98 compaction. Backfill compaction shall
be accomplished without disturbance or distortion of reinforcing strips and panels.
Compaction of the one (1) meter wide strip adjacent to the backside of the wall facing
shall be achieved by the use of a manually operated vibrating compactor.

The moisture content of the backfill material prior to and during compaction shall be
uniformly distributed throughout each layer. Backfill optimum moisture content. Backfill
material with a placement moisture content in excess of the optimum moisture content
shall be removed and reworked until the moisture content is uniformly acceptable
throughout the entire lift.

The maximum lift thickness after compaction shall not exceed three hundred (300)
millimeters. The Contractor shall decrease this lift thickness, if necessary, to obtain the
specified density.

6.18.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The reinforced earth structures will

be inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08
"Acceptance of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the reinforced earth structures shall be sampled,
tested and evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods referenced
in Subsection 6.18.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications. The installation of the
reinforced earth structures will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4,
"Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.18.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

6.18.5.1 Concrete Facing. Concrete Facing shall be measured by the square meter
for all Work authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer based on the front face
surface area of each unit for the thickness shown on the plans and listed in the Bill of
Quantities. There will be no separate measurement of concrete for concrete leveling

123
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

pads. This Work and any excavation required to place the pads shall be considered
subsidiary to this item.

6.18.5.2 Reinforcing Strips. Reinforcing Strips shall be measured by the linear

meter of strip fixed in place and accepted by the Engineer. Lengths shall be based on
those shown on the plans for each type of strip or as authorized by the Engineer.

6.18.5.3 Backfill. There will no separate measurement for excavation, backfill, or

compaction required to complete the structural earthwork volume. This Work shall be
considered subsidiary to these items.

6.18.6 PAYMENT. The amount of completed and accepted Work as measured above
will be paid at the contract unit prices specified in the Bill of Quantities, which prices shall
be full compensation for furnishing all materials, for all labor, equipment, tools, supplies,
and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as specified in
Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

61801 Concrete Facing, 0.1 m thick Square Meter

61802 Concrete Facing, 0.15 m thick Square Meter

61803 Concrete Facing, 0.2 m thick Square Meter

61804 Concrete Facing, 0.25 m thick Square Meter

61805 Concrete Facing, 0.3 m thick Square Meter

61806 Concrete Facing, 0.35 m thick Square Meter

61807 Concrete Facing, 0.40 m thick Square Meter

61808 Concrete Facing, ___ m thick Square Meter

61811 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 1 mm Depth Linear Meter

61812 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 2 mm Depth Linear Meter

61813 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 3 mm Depth Linear Meter

61814 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 4 mm Depth Linear Meter

61815 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 5 mm Depth Linear Meter

61816 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 6 mm Depth Linear Meter

61817 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 7 mm Depth Linear Meter

61818 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 8 mm Depth Linear Meter

61819 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 9 mm Depth Linear Meter

61820 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 1 mm Depth Linear Meter

124
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

61821 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 2 mm Depth Linear Meter

61822 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 3 mm Depth Linear Meter

61823 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 4 mm Depth Linear Meter

61824 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 5 mm Depth Linear Meter

61825 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 6 mm Depth Linear Meter

61826 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 7 mm Depth Linear Meter

61827 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 8 mm Depth Linear Meter

61828 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 9 mm Depth Linear Meter

61829 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 1 mm Depth Linear Meter

61830 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 2 mm Depth Linear Meter

61831 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 3 mm Depth Linear Meter

61832 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 4 mm Depth Linear Meter

61833 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 5 mm Depth Linear Meter

61834 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 6 mm Depth Linear Meter

61835 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 7 mm Depth Linear Meter

61836 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 8 mm Depth Linear Meter

61837 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 9 mm Depth Linear Meter

61838 Reinforcing Strips, ___ mm Width, ___mm Depth Linear Meter

125
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.19 - ROCK BOLTS, CABLE BOLTS AND ROCK ANCHORS

6.19.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of cleaning and scaling slopes, drilling
and redrilling slope reinforcement holes, placing rock bolts, cable bolts, and rock
anchors, grouting, tensioning and testing the bolts and anchors. The location and
inclination of each bolt and anchor will be determined by the engineer in the field. On
new construction the installation and tensioning of rock bolts and rock anchors shall be
done concurrently with rock excavation to allow this installation to proceed from benches
or blasted rock.

The essential terms are defined as follows:

Rock bolt is a bolt made of steel rebar inserted into a hole drilled or bored in rock
and grouted. Rockbolts can be tensioned or non-tensioned. Normally the maximum
length of a rock bolt is six (6) meters. In special cases rock bolts may be twelve (12)
meters long. (Long bolts are difficult to handle). Bolts are usually installed manually.
In large projects special drilling jumbos with bolt installation capability may be used.
The tensioning force of a bolt is usually fifty (50) to one hundred (100) kN.

Cable bolt is a bolt made of steel cable inserted into a hole drilled or bored in rock
and grouted. The cable bolts can be tensioned or non-tensioned. Tensioning force of
a cable bolt is usually less than two hundred (200) kN. The length of a cable bolt can
be up to forty (40) meters. At longer lengths the installation becomes difficult and drilling
accuracy decreases considerably beyond that length.

Rock Anchor is a rock bolt or cable bolt which is tensioned with high force (minimum
two hundred (200) kN and even more than one thousand (1000) kN). Anchors may be
equipped with special anchoring, tensioning, and corrosion protection fixtures.

Corrosion Protection. The most common corrosion protection of bolts and anchors
is grout. Grout can be cement/water mixture, sand/cement/water mixture or resin. To
improve corrosion protection of a bolt or anchor various kinds of fixtures can be used.
The most useful are centralizing fixtures which keep the rock bolt or cable bolt in the
center of the installation hole and do not allow it to touch the wall of the installation hole.

The bolt or anchor can be installed inside a corrugated plastic tube. The space
between the tube and the rock bolt or anchor and tube shall be filled with grout.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Slope Cleaning and Scaling
Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation
Holes
Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement
Installation Holes
Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole
Tensioning of Rock Bolts or Cable Bolts
including Tensioning Elements and Face Plates
Tensioning of Rock Anchors including Tensioning

126
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Elements and Face Plates

Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable
Bolt or Rock Anchor, Installed on Slope Height(s)
Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor
Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor

6.19.2 MATERIALS. Rock bolts, cable bolts, rock anchors and accessories shall
conform to the following requirements and shall be of the type manufactured by
companies regularly engaged in the production of rock bolts, cable bolts, rock anchors
and accessories:

Resin Grouted and Cement Grouted AASHTO M31 - Grade 60. Nominal
Rock Bolts and StrandCable Bolts diameter of 20-35 millimeters. ASTM A-
615-Grade 70 hollow-core groutable
rebar. Nominal diameter of 20 to 51
millimeters.

Cement Grouted Rock Anchors AASHTO M 31 - Grade 60 groutable steel

rebar. Nominal diameter of 20 to 51
millimeters.

Nuts and Head Assemblies AASHTO M 291, Grade B, hexagonal.

Spin-lock head assembly.

Bearing and Keyhole Plates AASHTO M 183, 200 millimeters by 200

millimeters by 10 to 15 millimeters thick.

Washers AASHTO M 293 Carbon Steel

Resin Grout Prepackaged high strength polyester

resin cartridges with separated catalyst
such as Celtite or Fasloc or an approved
equal.

The water/cement ratio of the grout shall

Cement Grout not exceed nineteen (19) liters per sack.
Chemical additives shall not be used
unless approved in writing by the
Engineer.

6.19.3 SUBMITTALS. At least two (2) bolt-plate-washer-nut assemblies shall be

laboratory tested by the Contractor in accordance with ASTM F 432 for each different
bolt and anchor proposed for use. At least two (2) weeks prior to any bolt or anchor
installation, the Contractor shall furnish the results of these laboratory tests, copies of
manufacturer's literature, and the Contractor's proposed method of installing and
tensioning rock bolts, cable bolts, and rock anchors for review and approval by the
Engineer.

127
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

All necessary torque wrenches, hydraulic jacks, and related equipment for installation
and testing of bolts and anchors shall be provided and maintained in good working order
by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide certified calibrations for each of these
devices dated not more than thirty (30) days prior to their first use on this project. The
Contractor may be required to verify the calibration of any torquing or jacking equipment
should any question arise concerning the accuracy of the equipment.

A minimum of four (4) resin grouted bolts and two (2) anchors of each length shall be
installed with short anchor zones consisting of fast set resin and no slower setting resin.
These bolts will be tested in increments, to ninety percent (90%) of the yield strength
of the bolt, to verify the anchorage capacity. The Contractor shall supply all necessary
tensioning and measuring devices and labor support to assist the Engineer in conducting
these tests.

At least two (2) mechanically anchored bolts and anchors shall also be tested to
verify the capacity of the Contractor's proposed mechanical anchorage and tested in
increments to ninety percent (90%) of the yield strength of the bolt.

All acceptable anchorage tests shall hold at least eighty percent (80%) of the yield
strength of the bolt without significant anchorage slip. Should the initial tests be
unacceptable, anchorage modifications shall be submitted for review and approval by
the Engineer, and further testing shall proceed until acceptable anchorage tests have
been conducted with all proposed anchors. Bolts and anchors used for anchorage
testing shall not be incorporated as mechanical stabilization for any final slope, and will
not be measured for payment. All testing is a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor.

At least two (2) weeks before conducting these tests, the Contractor shall submit his
proposed testing location and procedure to the Engineer for review and approval.
Before conducting the tests, the Contractor shall submit certified calibration curves for
all tensioning devices dated not more than thirty (30) days prior to their use on this
project.

6.19.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

6.19.4.1 General. Bolt and anchor lengths specified are minimum embedded
lengths. The Contractor shall allow extra length for appropriate end hardware. The
length of anchors indicted shall be verified by pull-out tests and may require modification
to achieve adequate bond.

The spacing and pattern of bolts and anchors shown on the plans are diagrammatic
and approximate, and are not to be taken as definitive. The location, length, and
inclination of each rock bolt and anchor in the side slopes shall be determined and
located in the field by the Engineer.

Holes shall be drilled by rotary or percussion drilling methods. The type of drilling
method selected shall not fracture or otherwise damage the rock which is being bolted.
The drilled hole or cased hole shall be the diameter recommended by the bolt or epoxy

128
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

resin grout manufacturer. Holes shall be drilled into the rock to the lengths and
inclinations directed by the Engineer. Inclination of the bolt or anchor shall be such as
to permit bolting generally normal to the rock surface, except when otherwise shown on
the plans or directed by the Engineer. All alignment of the drilled holes shall be straight
and allow easy entry of bolts and anchors without undue force.

Resin grouted bolts and anchors shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended viscosities and setting times (fast and slow setting) for the
expected temperature ranges.

The resin cartridges shall be stored in a well-ventilated, dry area and protected from
excessive heat or cold during storage. The manufacturer's recommended shelf life shall
not be exceeded. Resin cartridges that show signs of hardness or other indications of
deterioration shall not be used.

All installation procedures of the resin grouted bolts and anchors shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the following requirements:

1. Sufficient fast setting resin shall be placed in the bottom of the hole for an
adequate anchorage.

2. Sufficient cartridges of slower setting resin to completely fill the remainder of the
hole when the bolt is inserted shall then be placed, the bolt inserted, and the resin
mixed.

3. After the fast setting resin has set but before the setting time of the slower setting
resin, the bolt shall be tensioned to fifty percent (50%) of the yield strength of the bolt
and locked off at that stress.

Mechanically anchored cement grouted bolts and anchors shall be installed as shown
on the plans and tensioned to fifty percent (50%) of the yield strength of the bolt.

Any installed bolt or anchor (either resin grouted or mechanically anchored) which
cannot be tensioned to the specified loading without movement of the anchorage zone
shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Location, length and inclination of
replacement bolts will be determined by the Engineer.

Cement grout for encapsulation of bolts and anchors shall be pumped in from the
lowest part of the hole. Holes which do not hold grout in the initial filling shall be
regrouted from the lowest part of the ungrouted portion until the annular space is
completely filled with grout.

All vertical and near vertical bolts and anchors shall be installed, grouted, and the
grout allowed to reach a compressive strength of at least one hundred seventy-five (175)
kilograms per square centimeter prior to blasting any adjacent lift below the topmost
elevation of the bolts and anchors.

129
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.19.4.2 Installation Procedures.

6.19.4.2.1 Bolts.

1. Cleaning and scaling of the slope. The slope is cleaned and scaled.
Scaffolding is erected where installation from the surrounding ground level is not
possible.

2. Marking of bolt locations. The location and direction of individual bolts are
marked on the slope surface.

3. Drilling of installation hole. Installation hole is bored or drilled. If the hole

caves in it shall be filled with cement grout and redrilled after the grout has hardened.
If the rock has open fractures it shall be injected through the installation hole by
pumping cement grout into the hole through a packer installed at the mouth of the hole.
The grouting pressure shall be specified in the design documents.

4. Bolt installation.

4.1 Installation of non-tensioned bolts. Non-tensioned bolt is installed by

filling the hole with sand, water, and cement grout and then pushing rebar into the hole.
If the hole is inclined upwards the hole needs to be plugged with a rubber plug to
prevent the grout from flowing out of the hole.

Spacers can be used to centralize the rebar in the hole and prevent it from
touching the wall of the hole.

4.2 Installation of tensioned bolts.

Tensioned bolts are installed in two (2) or three (3) phases depending on the
type of anchoring. Bolts with mechanical anchoring are installed by making the anchor
operational, expansion shell anchors are anchored by turning the rebar which make the
anchoring mechanism expand and anchor itself against the walls of the hole. Wedge
type anchor is hit against the bottom of the hole which makes the wedge expand and
anchor itself.

Resin or cement grout anchored bolts are installed by installing first the grout
anchor at the lower end of the hole. The grout is left to cure and harden.

After the anchoring is installed the bolt is tensioned by turning the tightening
nut against the washer with a specified moment. After tightening the hole is filled with
cement grout to reduce the risk of corrosion. Some mechanically anchored bolt types
have a hole through which the grout is pumped into the hole. Others need to have a
grouting hose pushed to the bottom of the hole. If the bolt needs to be tension tested
the testing has to be done before grouting.

130
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.19.4.2.2 Anchors. The installation of rock anchors is similar to the installation

of tensioned rock bolts. The anchoring and tensioning elements may be more elaborate
for anchors than for bolts. Therefore, the anchoring procedures shall always be fully
specified in the Special Specifications.

Fully bonded anchors are preferred for rock slope stabilization (Anchors with a
free length are originally designed for soil anchoring where full bonding of the entire
length of the anchor is not possible). Even if anchors with free lengths are used the
installation hole has to be filled with cement grout to reduce the risk of corrosion as
otherwise the empty hole may be filled with water.

6.19.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The bolt and anchor installation

including preparatory slope cleaning and boring will be inspected, sampled, tested and
evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work" in these General
Specifications.

Slope cleaning and scaling and drilling of slope reinforcement installation holes will
be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.2 "Visual Inspection" in these General
Specifications. Installation and tensioning of bolts and anchors will be accepted in
accordance with Subsection 1.08.04, "Measured or Tested Conformance" in these
General Specifications as documented by the various anchorage and pull tests on the
installations. The bolts and anchors will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.3,
"Certification of Compliance" in these General Specifications based upon the Certificates
of Guarantee and test reports on the materials including ASTM F432.

6.19.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Slope cleaning shall be measured by the

square meter including the area of the slope cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Initial boring, cementation and reboring of slope reinforcement installation holes shall
be measured by the linear meter based upon the actual length of holes bored and/or
cemented and rebored except for the anchorage capacity test holes as they are
subsidiary. Tensioning of bolts and anchors shall be measured by the unit for each bolt
and anchor acceptably tensioned except that the anchorage capacity tests shall not be
measured as they are subsidiary to the work under the tensioning items.

Bolts, anchors, and corrugated plastic tube shall be measured by the linear meter,
complete in place and accepted. The linear meter measurement shall be taken from the
collar of the hole to the furthest extent of the steel tendon. No measurement above the
collar of the drill holes will be made.

6.19.7 PAYMENT. The accepted quantities, determined as provided above, will be paid
for at the contract price per unit of measurement, respectively, for each of the pay items
listed in the Bill of Quantities. Said prices and payments shall be full compensations for
furnishing labor, equipment, materials, tools and all incidentals necessary for the
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

131
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

NO

61901 Slope Cleaning and Scaling Square Meter

6190101 Slope Cleaning and Scaling, Slope Height less than 5 meters Square Meter

6190102 Slope Cleaning and Scaling, Slope Height 5 to 15 meters Square Meter

6190103 Slope Cleaning and Scaling, Slope Height 15 to 25 meters Square Meter

6190104 Slope Cleaning and Scaling, Slope Height more than 25 meters Square Meter

61902 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes Linear Meter

6190201 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes less than 5 m high

6190202 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes 5-15 m high

6190203 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes 15-25 m high

6190204 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes more than 25 m high

6190205 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes less than 5 m high

6190206 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes less that 5 -15 m high

6190207 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes 15 -25 m high

6190208 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes more than 25 m high

6190209 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes less than 5 m high

6190210 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes 5-15 m high

6190211 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes less that 15-25 m high

6190212 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes more than 25 m high

6190213 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes less than 5 m high

6190214 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes 5-15 m high

Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia

132
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6190215 on Slopes 15-25 m high Linear Meter

6190216 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia Linear Meter
on Slopes more than 25 m high

61903 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes

6190301 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 50 mm dia on Slopes less than 5 m high

6190302 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 50 mm dia on Slopes 5-15 m high

6190303 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 50 mm dia on Slopes 15-25 m high

6190304 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 50 mm dia on Slopes more than 25 m high

6190305 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 75 mm dia on Slopes less than 5 m high

6190306 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 75 mm dia on Slopes 5-15 m high

6190307 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 75 mm dia on slopes 15-25 m high

6190308 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 75 mm dia on Slopes more than 25 m high

6190309 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 100 mm dia on Slopes less than 5 m high

6190310 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 100 mm dia on Slopes 5-15 m high

6190311 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 100 mm dia on slopes 15-25 m high

6190312 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 100 mm dia on Slopes more than 25 m high

6190313 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 125 mm dia on Slopes less than 5 m high

6190314 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 125 mm dia on Slopes 5-15 m high

6190315 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 125 mm dia on Slopes 15-25 m high

6190316 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Linear Meter

Holes, 125 mm dia on slopes more than 25 m high

61904 Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole Kilogram

6190401 Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole on Slopes less than 5 m high Kilogram

6190402 Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole on Slopes 5-15 m high Kilogram

133
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6190403 Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole on Slopes 15-25 m high Kilogram

6190404 Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole on Slopes more than 25 m Kilogram
high

61905 Tensioning of Rock Bolts or Cable Bolts including Tensioning Unit

Elements and Face Plates

61906 Tensioning of Rock Anchors including Tensioning Elements and Unit

Face Plates

61907 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor Linear Meter

6190701 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Linear Meter
Capacity 50 kN

6190702 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Linear Meter
Capacity 100 kN

6190703 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Linear Meter
Capacity 200 kN

6190704 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Linear Meter
Capacity 400 kN

6190705 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Linear Meter
Capacity ___ kN

61908 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor Linear Meter

6190801 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 50 kN Linear Meter

6190802 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 100 kN Linear Meter

6190803 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 200 kN Linear Meter

6190804 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 400 kN Linear Meter

6190805 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity ___ kN Linear Meter

61909 Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor Linear Meter

6190901 Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor, 50 mm dia Linear Meter

6190902 Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor, 75 mm dia Linear Meter

6190903 Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor, 100 mm dia Linear Meter

6190904 Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor, ___ mm dia Linear Meter

134
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.20 - EXPLORATORY DRILLING

6.20.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of exploratory drilling for soil and rock
samples and recording boring log data as specified. The various sampling methods are
designated as follows:

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Split Spoon (SPT) Sampling of Soils
Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils
Rock Core Drilling NX Cores, 53 mm Min. Dia. Double Barrel
Rock Core Drilling NX Cores, 53 mm Min. Dia. Triple Barrel

6.20.2 MATERIALS. Materials for this work shall meet the requirements of the following
Paragraphs:

6.20.2.1 Drive Pipe. Drive pipe shall be extra-strength steel pipe one hundred (100)
millimeter nominal diameter as specified, with threaded ends in random one and one-half
(1.5) meter lengths and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A120, Schedule 40.

6.20.2.2 Casing. The casing shall be diamond drill flush-joint or flush coupled type,
fabricated from high quality seamless steel tubing conforming to the requirements of the
Diamond Core Drill Manufacturer's Association (DCDMA) Standards. The design shall
permit any size casing to telescope into the next larger size.

6.20.2.3 Samplers. Samplers shall be of the split barrel, ball check design and have
a minimum length of five-tenths (0.5) meter and outside diameter of fifty (50) millimeters.
Samplers with flap valve or spring type retainers shall be permitted only with special
permission of the Engineer.

6.20.2.4 Thin Wall Sample Tubes. Tubes for undisturbed soil samples shall be
fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel tubing meeting the requirements of ASTM A276
as specified for a nominal eighty-three (83) millimeter O.D. seamless or welded tubing
with nominal sixteen hundred twenty-five ten thousandths (0.1625) millimeter wall
thickness.

6.20.2.5 Diamond Core Drill Bits. Diamond drill bits shall be one type: NX bits.
NX bits shall produce an eighty-three (83) millimeter diameter core and shall have a
0.134 millimeter wall thickness. The bits shall meet the requirements specified by the
National Bureau of Standards and Diamond Core Drill Manufacturer's Association
Standards.

6.20.2.6 Sample Storage Bags. Sample storage bags shall be moisture-proof,

transparent, plastic bags with minimum dimensions two hundred (200) millimeters
length, two hundred fifty (250) millimeters width and five hundredths (0.05) millimeter
thickness.

135
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.20.2.7 Sample Jars. Sample jars shall be glass, wide-mouthed jars of one-quart
capacity with air-tight screw covers fitted with rubber compo-lined caps.

6.20.2.8 Jar Cartons. Jar cartons shall consist of corrugated Kraft paper cardboard
fabricated into a box with overall nominal dimensions three hundred (300) millimeters
wide, three hundred ninety-three (393) millimeters long and one hundred seventy-five
(175) millimeters deep. The box shall be partitioned and have sufficient strength to
safely support twelve (12) sample jars in a three by four (3 x 4) array.

6.20.2.9 Boulder and Rock Core Boxes. Boxes shall be fabricated of white pine,
grade No. 1 common lumber or better, twenty-five millimeter minimum thickness stock.
Overall box dimensions for NX core boxes shall be one hundred twenty (120)
centimeters long, two hundred eighty-three (283) millimeters wide and ninety-four (94)
millimeters deep. Core rows shall be separated by wooden or tempered hardboard,
three (3) millimeter thick strips recessed to nine (9) millimeter depth at the bottom and
ends of box. Box covers shall be hinged with two (2) fifty (50) millimeter steel butt
hinges and arranged to be securely fastened with two (2) thirty-seven (37) millimeter
hooks and eyes.

6.20.3 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS. The Contractor shall carry out all field work
associated with subsurface investigations as shown in the plans or as directed by the
Engineer. Such investigations may include boring, sampling, logging, and field testing,
and shall be performed as specified herein and in accordance with the methods outlined
in the HDM, Section 2.06-Geotechnical Engineering, Appendix I - Ground Investigations.

6.20.3.1 Drilling Procedures. Auger borings and diamond core drilling shall be
performed as specified in MRDTM 223 and 226, respectively.

Special precautions shall be taken when protection of existing structures is required.

Precautions shall be at the Contractor’ s responsibility and expense and as directed by
the Engineer.

6.20.3.1.1 Soil Samples. Drill holes for split-spoon (SPT) samplers shall be
progressed and cased by means of flush-joint casing, flush-coupled casing, one hundred
(100) millimeter diameter, extra-strength drive pipe or where permitted, by a drilling mud
process or by using a hollow flight auger. If the drilling mud process is approved and
used, the minimum hole diameter shall be one hundred (100) millimeters.

Drill holes for thin-walled tube samplers shall be progressed and cased using
minimum one hundred (100) millimeter diameter drive pipe or casing.

Prior to sampling, the drill hole shall be cleaned to the sampling elevation by
using equipment that will not disturb the material to be sampled. Bottom discharge
chopping or fishtail bits will not be allowed. Jetting through an open sampler and
subsequently sampling when the desired depth is reached will not be permitted.
Samples shall be removed from material which is not disturbed or contaminated from
drilling operations. When sampling with a thin-walled tube, the last seventy-five (75)

136
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

millimeters of soil directly above the sampling elevation shall be removed with a clean-
out jet auger.

6.20.3.1.2 Rock Samples. Continuous rock core samples shall be taken in

boulders exceeding one hundred fifty (150) millimeters in penetration thickness and in
ledge rock at locations and depths designated by the Engineer. Rock samples shall be
drilled with a Double or Triple Tube, Swivel Type Core Barrel using a diamond bit that
will drill a rock core not less than fifty-three (53) millimeters in diameter for one hundred
(100) millimeters casing.

6.20.3.2 Sampling. Soil samples may be disturbed or undisturbed as directed.

Split-barrel sampling shall conform to MRDTM 224 and piston or open tube thin-walled
sampling shall conform to MRDTM 225.

6.20.3.2.1 Split-Spoon Barrel. Samples shall be taken at every obvious

change in stratum and in no case at intervals greater than one and five-tenths (1.5)
meters. The split-spoon barrel sampler shall be placed on the bottom of the cleaned-out
hole and then driven with blows from a one thousand six hundred sixty (1660) kilogram
± hammer falling freely forty-five (45) centimeters. The sampler shall be driven a
minimum of forty-five (45) centimeters but not farther than the length of the split barrel,
a variable to be determined for the individual split barrel being used.

The number of blows required to drive the sampler each increment of one
hundred fifty (150) millimeters shall be recorded. If refusal of penetration is encountered
before the desired sample length is attained, the sampler shall be removed from the hole
and core drilling started. Refusal shall be assumed when fifty (50) hammer blows
advance the sampler less than twenty-five (25) millimeters.

A recovery of less than three hundred (300) millimeters of sample in a sampler

drive a minimum of four hundred fifty (450) millimeters is not acceptable, and another
sample is to be taken after advancing the hole into undisturbed soil. Should this second
sample also be similarly short, a sampler equipped with a basket shoe or other
springtype retainer shall be used for the third attempt. Flap or trap valves will be allowed
only with special permission of the Engineer. When sampling fine granular materials
below the water table, the casing or drive pipe shall be kept full of water to prevent
"blow-back" unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

6.20.3.2.2 Thin-Walled Tube. Undisturbed soil samples shall be taken with a

thin-walled tube sampler in the strata designed by the Engineer. Samples shall be
recovered with a stationary piston type sampling tube, a self-contained, hydraulically
operated piston sampler, or a casing-actuated piston sampler, modified to accept the
thin-walled tubes specified in Subsection 6.20.2, "Materials" in these General
Specifications. Samples with piston rods extending to the ground surface must be
provided with locks which positively lock the piston against upward travel during lowering
of the tube until the sampling depth is reached. In addition, the sampler shall be
provided with positive locks to secure the piston rods to the drill rod prior to removal of
the sampler tube after penetration. All samplers must be approved by the Engineer
before use.

137
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

With the sample tube resting on the bottom of the hole, the tube shall be pushed
into the soil with a continuous motion and without impact or rotation for a maximum
distance of four hundred fifty (450) millimeters. Care must be taken to allow air and
water to flow freely through the vent thus preventing compression of the soil sample.
Time and pressure for penetration, whenever measured, must be recorded. After
pressing to the required depth and setting for five (5) minutes to allow the soil to swell
and adhere to the sides of the tube, the sampler with its contained soil sample shall be
carefully rotated to shear off the sample, then removed from the hole. The piston rod
shall be backed off to admit air past the flattened threads and thus relieve the vacuum
which would distort the sampling during removal of the piston. For other approved types
of equipment, the necessary vacuum breaking measures shall be taken.

The length of sample in the tube and also the distance pressed, shall be
measured and recorded.

The bottom of the sample shall be carefully squared at least twenty-five (25)
millimeters back from the end of the tube and a wax seal, approximately twenty-five (25)
millimeters thick, shall be poured in the bottom end of the tube. The soil at the top of the
tube shall be carefully squared up and a wax seal, approximately twelve (12) millimeters
thick, shall be poured. Any space remaining between the top or bottom of the sample
tube and the wax seal shall be filled with damp sawdust after the was has hardened.
Wax shall be a mixture of equal parts of microcrystalline wax and white paraffin. The
ends of the tubes shall be sealed with snugly fitting metal or plastic caps which shall be
secured in place with friction tape. No was shall be placed on the outside of the tube.

Rock cores shall be obtained by use of rotary drilling methods in accordance with
MRDTM 226. The procedure to be followed shall be that which brings about the highest
percent recovery and shall be determined in the field. Under no circumstances shall
coring be continued when it is obvious that the core barrel is blocked. In zones that are
highly fractured or where the barrel continually becomes blocked, either short runs shall
be used or a wire line core barrel shall be utilized. Core barrels may be single-tube
(restricted to hard rock), double-tube (conventional or M-design, for fractured or broken
formations), or wire line (formations prone to caving or blocking, increased recovery), as
directed in the field as the work progresses.

Rock core recoveries of less than eighty-five percent (85%) will generally not be
considered satisfactory. Except for deliberately serving the continuous core, care shall
be taken to avoid blocking the bit or core barrel.

When the core is broken off, the core barrel shall be raised to the ground surface
and the core withdrawn.

6.20.3.3 Testing. Testing shall be performed by the Contractor under the supervision
of the Engineer, as indicated in the HDM, Section 2.06 - Geotechnical Engineering,
Appendix I - Ground Investigations, Paragraphs B.5 - Field Tests and C.1 - Laboratory
Tests. Tests shall be carried out in accordance to the Highway Materials Manual Part
2 - Soils, and the requirements of the project as determined by the Engineer.

138
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.20.3.4 Backfilling Boreholes. Open boreholes that are no longer required

shall be backfilled. Backfilling materials shall be locally available soil tamped in place,
except at locations where it is essential to prevent the movement of water from one
stratum to another and to preclude piping of material to the surface through the
borehole. Included in this category are all borings downstream of proposed
embankments and at proposed locations of structures. In such cases, the boreholes
shall be backfilled with grout, placed from the bottom of the hole upward by means of a
pipe so that all of the drilling fluid be displaced. Grout shall consist of Portland cement
and water, Portland cement and hydrated lime in proportions about 5:8 by weight, or a
mixture of Portland cement with about ten (10) percent bentonite by volume.

6.20.4 BORING LOG DATA. Data obtained in borings shall be recorded in the field and
shall include the following:

Date of Boring
Job Identification
Boring Location by Stations and Offset or Coordinates
Structure Number or Name when Pertinent
Elevation of Ground Surface at Boring Locations
Sample Depths
Limits of Strata
Ground Water Data
Soil Description
Penetration Records (blows)
Other Pertinent Remarks

The data thus obtained shall be presented on boring logs furnished by the Engineer.
Two (2) copes of the preliminary log for each boring shall be submitted to the Engineer
on the working day following completion of the boring.

A complete record of all significant information pertaining to the drilling and sampling
operations within each borehole shall be maintained, concurrent with the advancement
of the hole. Each soil boring or rock coring shall be logged in the field by the Contractor
as specified in the HDM, Section 2.06, Figures 2.06.2, 2.06.3, unless more stringent
requirements are established by the Engineer, and submitted to the Engineer in three
copies upon completion of a hole.

A similar record may be prepared independently by the supervisor assigned to

oversee the operations in the borehole, when so directed. Duplicate records may be
needed to insure that all observations are recorded and to provide a check in the event
of the discovery of some discrepancy after the work has been completed.

Final logs shall be prepared by the Contractor as a condensation of the field logs,
refined on the basis of laboratory test results, in an approved format. The final logs shall
present a clear, concise, accurate picture of subsurface conditions and shall be readily
usable for preparation of geologic sections. Geologic sections shall be submitted by the

139
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Contractor to the Engineer in three copies, along with the final logs for approval and
evaluation.

Final typed logs shall be submitted to the Engineer within one (1) week after an
"approved" preliminary log is returned to the Contractor by the Engineer.

6.20.5 GROUND WATER LEVELS. The level at which ground water is first
encountered in the borings shall be noted. When water is introduced into the hole, water
level readings shall be taken at the end of each day after the hole is prepared to the next
sampling depth. The casing or drive pipe shall be filled with water and covered at the
end of the working day and the drop, if any, recorded when the work is resumed.
Ground water levels shall be measured before and after the casing or drive pipe is
pulled. Each water level reading shall be recorded showing the date and time the
reading is made, the depth of the drive pipe or casing, and the depth to water. Any loss
or gain of water in the boring, except that caused by deliberately introducing water
and/or inserting or removing tools shall be recorded. This record shall show the date
and time the loss or gain is noted, the depth of the casing and the depth of the water.
If flowing, the height of artesian rise above the ground surface shall be recorded.

All water level readings and related data shall be recorded on the boring logs under
"Remarks." If necessary, additional forms shall be used for recording ground water data.

Artesian heads shall be effectively and permanently sealed. This seal shall be
satisfactory to the Engineer.

6.20.6 MARKING AND PACKAGING SAMPLES.

6.20.6.1 Driven Soil Samples. Samples shall be placed in tied plastic storage bags
placed in wide-mouth quart-size jars in such a manner so as to maintain a representation
of the sample's natural structure. The jar top shall be self-sealing (compo-lined) to retain
the natural moisture and the jar shall be labeled to show the project, sample number, the
hole number, and the depth of original of the sample. Jars shall be placed in Kraft
corrugated cartons with spacers for twelve (12) jars. Samples must be protected from
temperature extremes of freezing and sun.

6.20.6.2 Undisturbed Soil Samples. Undisturbed soil samples shall be clearly,

accurately and indelibly marked to show the date, hole number, location, the depth and
elevation from which the sample was taken, kind of material and depth of stratum the
sample represents, and all other information which may be helpful in determining the
character of the subsurface conditions. Undisturbed samples shall be handled, stored
and transported using extreme care to absolutely prevent the samples from being
subjected to freezing, drying, jarring and any other disturbance that would make the
samples unsuitable for detailed laboratory testing. The tubes properly packaged to
prevent any disturbance to the samples, shall be stored and transported in the correct
upright position at all times.

140
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.20.6.3 Rock Samples. Samples shall be labeled in accordance with "Instructions

for Labeling Rock Cores." This information is available upon request to the Ministry of
Communications Materials and Research Department.

The rock cores shall be placed for shipment in boxes meeting the requirements of
Paragraph 6.20.2.9 "Boulder and Rock Core Boxes" in these General Specifications.

Rock cores shall be preserved and stored as specified in MRDTM 226. Core boxes
pertaining to each hole shall be numbered in sequence with box one number (1)
containing the core of the highest elevation. Wooden blocks shall also be used to
indicate core loss. These blocks shall be marked with the elevations of top and bottom
of loss, as well as amount of loss, on twelve-millimeter wide tape with embossed
lettering. If the loss can be pinpointed, the block shall be inserted at the depth of the
loss; otherwise, it shall be placed at the end of the run in which the loss occurred.

When directed by the Engineer, some rock cores may require sealing. In such
instances, the method shall be to wrap waxed paper or foil around the core and seal the
entire core by dipping in microcrystalline wax.

Samples and boxes shall be clearly labeled so as to leave no doubt as to their exact
source. Labeling information shall be as specified in MRDTM 224, 225 and 226 and as
directed. In addition, sampling tubes or liners shall be marked to indicate the top and
the level of the top and bottom of the sample contained. All markings shall be weather
- and wear - proof.

6.20.7 DELIVERY OF SAMPLES. When directed, samples shall be transported for

testing to the laboratory, or to such other location within one-hundred (100) kilometers
from the source as the Engineer may direct, in a motor vehicle to be provided by the
Contractor and under the custody of a supervision staff member. Loading, handling and
unloading of the samples shall be carried out by the Contractor’ s staff under the direction
of the Engineer or his authorized representative.

6.20.7.1 Soil Samples. The Contractor shall deliver, with all charges prepaid, the
properly labeled, packaged and protected undisturbed samples and split barrel samples
immediately following the completion of each boring from which Thin-Walled Samples
were extracted. The samples shall be delivered to a location designated by the
Engineer.

The container in which the undisturbed soil samples are delivered shall be marked
with the wording, "UNDISTURBED SOIL SAMPLES" "HANDLE WITH SPECIAL CARE"
in large lettering.

The tubes containing acceptable undisturbed samples shall become the property of
the Ministry.

6.20.7.2 Rock Samples. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer's or Ministry

Office which is delegated the responsibility and authority to execute the prescribed work.

141
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.20.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The exploratory drilling will be

inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance
of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

The materials incorporated into the exploratory drilling shall be sampled, tested and
evaluated in accordance with the specifications and test methods referenced in
Subsection 6.20.2, "Materials" in this Section in these General Specifications. The
exploratory drilling will be accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured
or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.20.9 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

6.20.9.1 Split-Spoon Sampling of Soils. The quantities to be measured shall be

the actual number of linear meters of acceptable holes measured from the ground
surface at each hole. For holes progressed in water, the mean level of the water surface
during the time the boring is made shall be considered as the starting datum. All
measurements will be made by or in the presence of the Engineer.

6.20.9.2 Thin-Walled Sampling of Soils. The quantities to be measured shall be

the number of individual acceptable samples taken.

6.20.9.3 Rock Core Drilling. The quantities to be measured shall be the actual
number of linear meter drilled in the presence of the Engineer as listed in the Bill of
Quantities and as substantiated by core length obtained, properly labeled, described and
boxed.

6.20.10 PAYMENT.

6.20.10.1 Split-Spoon Sampling. The contract unit price bid per linear meter shall
be based on twenty (20) meter incremental depths as follows:

0-20 Linear Meter

20-40 Linear Meter
over 40 Linear Meter

The contract unit price shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials and
equipment necessary to complete the work.

6.20.10.2 Thin-Walled Tube Sampling. The contract unit price for each sample
shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to
complete the work, including the cost of the stainless steel tube which shall become the
property of the Ministry. Payment for progressing the borings shall be paid for under
their respective items.

6.20.10.3 Rock Core Drilling. The contract unit price per linear meter shall include
the cost of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work
including core boxes which shall become the property of the Ministry.

142
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

62001 Splt Spoon Sampling of Soils Linear Meter

6200101 Split Spoon Sampling, 0-20 m Depth Range Linear Meter

6200102 Split Spoon Sampling, 20-40 m Depth Range Linear Meter

6200103 Split Spoon Sampling, over 40 m Depth Range Linear Meter

62002 Thin-walled Tube Sampling of Soils Unit

62003 Rock Core Drilling NX Cores, 53 mm Min. Dia., Linear Meter

Double Barrel

62004 Rock Core Drilling NX Cores, 53 mm Min. Dia., Triple Linear Meter
Barrel

143
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.21 - DRAINAGE LAYER

6.21.1 DESCRIPTION. This work consists of furnishing and placing sheathing material
or geocomposite against the backfilled faces of retaining walls, wing walls, and
abutments. This Work shall also consist of furnishing and placing geogrid mats on a
prepared earth, aggregate or other surface, in accordance with the specifications and
in conformity with the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the plans or
established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Sheathing Material
Geocomposite Sheet Drain
Geocomposite Pavement Bridge Drain
Geogrid

6.21.2 MATERIALS. Materials shall conform to the following Subsections:

6.21.2.1 Geocomposite Drains. Geocomposite drains consist of a polymeric

drainage core with a geotextile conforming to TYPE IV fabric in Table 6.11-4 attached
to or encapsulating the core. The geocomposite drain shall include all necessary fittings
and material to splice one sheet, panel, or roll to the next and to connect the
geocomposite drain to the collector and outlet piping.

The drainage core shall be fabricated in sheet, panel, or roll form of adequate
strength to resist installation stresses and long term loading conditions. The core
material shall consist of long chain synthetic polymers composed of at least eighty-five
percent (85%), by weight, polypropylene, polyester, polyamide, polyvinyl chloride, or
polystyrene. The core shall be built up in thickness by means of columns, cones, nubs,
cusps, meshes, stiff filaments or other configurations.

Geocomposite drains shall have a minimum compressive strength of two hundred

seventy-five (275) kPa when tested according to ASTM D 1621, procedure A. All
splices, fittings, and connections shall have sufficient strength to withstand construction
handling and permanent loading and shall not impede flow or damage the core.

The geocomposite drains shall be identified, shipped, and stored according to

Section 7 of AASHTO M 288. Elevate and protect sheets, panels, or rolls with a
waterproof and ultraviolet resistant cover if stored outdoors.

When using a geocomposite drain for a permanent installation, limit the

geocomposite exposure to ultraviolet radiation shall be limited to less than ten (10)
calendar days.

6.21.2.2 Geocomposite Sheet Drains. The horizontal and vertical flow of water
within the sheet drain shall interconnect at all times for the full thickness of the core. The
drainage core with the geotextile in place shall provide a minimum flow rate of one (1)

144
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

L/s/m of width when tested according to ASTM D 4716 under the following test
conditions:

1. A three hundred (300) millimeter long specimen

2. An applied load of sixty-nine (69) kPa
3. A gradient of 1.0
4. A 100 hour seating period
5. A closed cell foam rubber between platens and geocomposite

If core construction separates the flow channel into two (2) or more sections, only
the flow rate on the in-flow face is considered in determining the core's acceptability.

The geotextile fabric shall be firmly attached to the core so folding, wrinkling, or
other movement cannot occur either during handling or after placement. Bonding shall
be achieved using nonwater soluble adhesive, heat sealing, or other method
recommended by the manufacturer. Adhesive shall not be used on areas of the
geotextile fabric where flow is intended to occur.

If heat sealing is used, it shall not weaken the geotextile below the required
strength values. The geotextile shall be extended below the bottom of the core a length
sufficient to completely encapsulate a one hundred twenty-five (125) millimeter diameter
collector pipe.

6.21.2.3 Geocomposite Pavement Edge Drains. The geotextile shall tightly

encapsulate the geocomposite edge drain. The edge drain shall permit in-flow from both
sides. The drain core with the geotextile in place shall provide a minimum flow rate of
three (3) L/s/m of width when tested according to ASTM D 4716 under the following test
conditions:

1. A three hundred (300) millimeter long specimen

2. An applied load of sixty-nine (69) kPa
3. A gradient of 0.1
4. A 100 hour seating period
5. A closed cell foam rubber between platens and geocomposite

If the geocomposite polymer core separates the flow channel into two (2) or more
parts, only the tested flow rate of the channel facing the pavement shall be considered.

All pipe and pipe fittings used for an outlet to the edge drain shall be non-
perforated plastic pipe conforming to Section 6.04 "Pipe Underdrain and Irrigation Pipe"
in these General Specifications.

The solvent cement for the outlet pipe and fittings shall be according to ASTM D
2564. The material composition of the outlet fittings shall be compatible for direct
solvent welding to PVC.

6.21.2.4 Sheathing Material. Sheathing material shall meet the requirements for
either concrete fine aggregate conforming to Subparagraph 5.01.2.2.1 "Fine Aggregate"

145
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

in these General Specifications or coarse aggregate consisting of sound, durable

particles of gravel, slag, or crushed stone conforming to Table 6.21-1.

TABLE 6.21-1
SHEATHING MATERIAL GRADATION
Percent by Weight Passing Standard Sieves
Sieve Designation (AASHTO T 11 and T 27)
75 mm (3 in.) 100
19.00 mm (¾ in.) 50-90
4.75 mm (No. 4) 20-50
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0.0-2.0

6.21.2.5 Geogrid. Geogrids shall be single-layered or multi-layered, made from high

density polyethylene or polypropylene in a continuous extrusion process. Geogrids used
in conjunction with bituminous concrete construction shall have a melting point over one
hundred seventy degrees Celsius (170° C) and a service temperature range extending
at least between zero and eighty degrees Celsius (0-80° C).

Geogrid shall have adequate tensile strength and extensibility, compatible with its
intended use and the soil and site conditions. The material shall be physically and
chemically durable, and resistant to mildew, insects, naturally occurring acids and
alkalis, and to certain building materials, when present, such as lime, cement or asphalt.
When specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer, geogrid shall be treated for
resistance to ultraviolet radiation. Geogrid may be of the following types.

1. Type A; monooriented grid/mat, exhibiting considerable tensile strength

along one direction, the primary direction, suitable for unidirectional reinforcement of soil
or other materials.
2. Type B; bioriented grid/mat, exhibiting considerable tensile strength along
both directions, primary and secondary, suitable for bidirectional reinforcement of soil
or other materials.
3. Type C; bioriented grid/mat, exhibiting considerable tensile strength along
both directions, primary and secondary, suitable for bidirectional reinforcement of soil
or other materials.
4. Type D; tridimensional grid/mat of cellular construction, exhibiting moderate
tensile strength along both directions, suitable for containing soil, or other material, within
its cells.

When shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, multi-layered geogrid mats
shall be factory-sewn or factory-extruded, to manufacturer’s standard. Site assembly
of single-layered geogrids into multi-layered composite systems shall not be permitted.

Performance requirements shall be as shown on the plans, and shall address all or
part of the physical and chemical characteristics itemized in the foregoing paragraphs,

146
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

based on intended use. Depending on the plan requirements and the primary function
of the geogrid, the Contractor shall submit test results of the proposed material, as
outlined in Table 6.21-2 herein.

Table 6.21-2
Minimum Quality Assurance Test Requirements

Primary Function

Test Test Unit Reinforceme Filtratio Drainag Erosion

Method nt n e Control

Polymer ASTM - x x x x
material D1248,
D4101

Mass per ASTM gr/m2 x x x x

unit area D1910

Thickness ASTM mm x x x x
D1777

Strip tensile ASTM kN/m x

strength D4595
(main/secon
dary
direction)

Elongation ISO 5081 % x

at max.
Load
(main/secon
dary
direction)

U.V. ASTM % x
Properties D4218
(carbon
black
content)

Transmissivi EMPA m2/se x x

ty under Testing c
pressure 2 Institute,
kN/m2* Switzerland

*Transmissivity tests shall be accompanied by graphs, illustrating

transmissivity curves for applied pressures ranging from zero to one thousand (0 to
1000) kPa and hydraulic gradients ranging from five tenths to two (0.5 to 2.0).

147
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Depending on application, the Engineer reserves the right to require that all tests
listed in this table or additional tests not listed therein, be carried out, prior to approval
of any material.

Tests shall be carried out on a sample of five specimens cut out randomly from each
lot of five thousand (5,000) square meters of the proposed geogrid, or fraction thereof.
Test results shall be the average of five specimens, with no individual value varying
more than twenty percent (20%) from the average.

All materials furnished under this specification shall be accompanied by the

manufacturer’s certificate of guarantee. The certificate shall guarantee compliance to
the specification requirements, give the quantity of the geogrid in the shipment, and
identify the geogrid by order number, project location and destination. Materials not
accompanied by a certificate of guarantee, shall be sampled in the field and samples
submitted to an approved independent laboratory for testing.

The Engineer may approve materials on the basis of the certificate of guarantee
and/or laboratory tests, but reserves the right to resample and have retested any
materials used during the progress of the work. Should the geogrid not conform to the
specifications, it shall be rejected, previous approval notwithstanding.

6.21.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. Sheathing material or geocomposite shall

not be placed against a mortar course less than four (4) days old.

6.21.3.1 Sheathing Materials. The inlet end of each weep hole and drain shall be
covered with a geotextile extending a minimum of three hundred (300) millimeters
beyond the weep hole or drain. Sheathing material shall be placed against the surface
to be backfilled. Backfill shall be according to Subsection 2.09.4, "Backfill Structures"
in these General Specifications using methods which prevent the backfill from mixing
with the sheathing material.

6.21.3.2 Geocomposite Sheet Drain. When a geocomposite is used in conjunction

with a waterproof membrane, install drainage panels compatible with the waterproofing
using methods recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Assembly and
placement of the geocomposite drain against the surface to be backfilled according to
the manufacturer's recommendations.

Geocomposite drains are to be spliced so the flow across the edges is continuous.
The geotextile shall overlap a minimum of seventy-five (75) millimeters in the direction
of water flow. For vertical splices, the geotextile shall be overlapped in the direction
backfill proceeds.

The geocomposite drain shall be connected to the perforated pipe underdrain or

weep holes so the flow is continuous from the drainage core into the perforated collector
pipe or weep holes. The geotextile shall extend from the bottom of the geocomposite
drain to over the collection pipe.

148
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Backfill and compaction shall be according to Subsections 2.09.4 “Backfilling

Structures” and 2.09.5 “ Compaction of Structural Backfill” in these General Specifiations.
The backfill shall not be allowed to enter the geocomposite drain system at any point.

Any portion of the geocomposite drain damaged during installation or backfilling shall
be repaired or replaced according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Galvanized No. 17 gage hardware cloth screen having approximately thirteen by

thirteen (13 x 13) mesh openings shall be placed and securely attached over the outlet
ends or all exposed pipes or weep holes to prevent rodent entry.

6.21.3.3 Geogrid. The surface whereupon the geogrid will be laid shall be smooth,
level and compacted as specified on the plans or specifications for each particular
application. The surface shall be free of obstructions, depressions or debris that may
adversely affect the installation of the geogrid.

The geogrid shall be placed smoothly and stretched over the prepared surface,
parallel or perpendicular to the centerline of the facility, as shown on the plans or
directed for each particular application. Individual mats shall be secured in place using
8-mm diameter, U-shaped pegs made from reinforcing steel bars. When directed,
adjacent mats shall overlap with each other. Overlapping shall follow a shingle-like
pattern, with the uphill or upstream mat overlapping the downhill or downstream mat,
respectively. Lap widths shall be not less than 15 cm and mats shall be tied to each
other with plastic ties, as per the manufacturer’s standard.

Geogrid mats shall be unrolled as close as possible to their final locations and
shall not be dragged around nor subjected to unnecessary abuse prior to placement.
Backfill shall be back-dumped on the geogrid and spread in a loose thickness between
15 and 25 cm, without driving trucks or other construction equipment directly on the
geogrid. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the geogrid is damaged or displaced to the
extent that it cannot function as intended, he will order the Contractor to remove any
backfill, regrade the area, and replace the geogrid, all at the Contractor’s expense.
Backfill shall be compacted to the density required by the purpose of the backfill, as
specified elsewhere in the specifications.

Geogrids shall be placed in conjunction with the placement of the backfill or

overburden material, in order to minimize the time of exposure of the unprotected
geogrid to the sunshine. Such lag time shall not exceed two weeks.

In slope-protection applications, the geogrid shall be anchored at the top of the

slope by means of folding the geogrid into a small trench and backfilling with the
excavated material, and compacted. Slope-protection materials, such as riprap, shall
be placed from the bottom upward.

When underwater installation is necessary, laps shall be pre-sewn and the

geogrid shall be weighted by tying reinforcement bars to it, either transversely or
longitudinally, to secure against floatation, and then lowered in position.

149
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

When geogrids are used in conjunction with bituminous concrete construction,

the mats shall be laid on the prepared surface immediately after the tack coat has been
sprayed. The geogrid shall be unrolled under tension and rolled with a manual roller
onto the bituminous surface for full adhesion. In curves, the geogrid shall be cut across
its full width as frequently as directed and overlapped 15 to 20 cm in the direction of
subsequent laying of the bituminous layer. While the bituminous concrete layer is being
placed, braking and unnecessary maneuvering on the fabric shall be avoided. On
gradients, the bituminous concrete layer shall be placed uphill, so as to avoid direct
braking of trucks pushed by the paving machine on the geogrid.

6.21.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. Drainage layer work will be inspected,

sampled, tested, evaluated and accepted in accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance
of Work" in these General Specifications as follows:

Geocomposites will be accepted under Subsection, 1.08.3 "Certification of

Compliance" in these General Specifications. When samples are required, the
Contractor shall provide a one (1) meter square sample from products supplied as
sheets or panels or a one (1) meter length full roll width sample from products supplied
in rolls. The sample shall be labeled with the lot and batch number, date of sampling,
project number, item number, manufacturer, and product name.

The installation of the geocomposites and sheathing material shall be inspected,

sampled, and evaluated in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or Tested
Conformance" in these General Specifications.

6.21.5 MEASUREMENT. Sheathing material will be measured by the cubic meter to

the neat lines shown on the Plans.

Geocomposite sheet drain will be measured by the square meter of front face in final
position, excluding overlaps.

Geocomposite pavement edge drain will be measured by the linear meter acceptably
installed excluding splices.

Geogrid shall be measured by the square meter of completed and accepted Work of
the various types and strength grades placed as specified. Measurement shall be based
on the theoretical dimensions shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. No
allowance shall be made for anchoring, overlaps or seams or for other materials, such
as reinforcing bars for weighting. No measurement shall be made of unauthorized Work
as specified in Subsection 1.07.6, "Unauthorized Work," in these General Specifications.
This Work shall include furnishing all materials and placing the geogrid as specified.

6.21.6 PAYMENT. The accepted quantities, measured as provided above, will be paid
at the contract unit price per unit of measurement for the pay items listed below that are
shown in the Bill of Quantities. Said prices and payments will be full compensation for
furnishing labor, equipment, materials, tools and all incidentals necessary for the
completion of the work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

150
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

62101 Sheathing material Cubic Meter

62102 Geocomposite sheet drain Square Meter

62103 Geocomposite pavement edge drain Linear Meter

62104 Geogrid Square Meter

6210401 Geogrid Type A, Tensile Strength ___kN/m Square Meter

6210405 Geogrid Type B, Tensile Strength ___ kN/m Square Meter

6120410 Geogrid Type C, Tensile Strength ___ kN/m Square Meter

6120415 Geogrid Type D, Tensile Strength ___ kN/m Square Meter

6120420 Geogrid Type ___, Tensile Strength ___ kN/m Square Meter

151
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 6.22 - JOINT SEALANT AND JOINT FILLER

6.22.1 Description. This Work covers joint sealing and caulking materials and
expansion joint fillers and gaskets for use where shown on the plans and specified in
other sections of these General Specifications and at locations directed by the Engineer.

6.22.2 Materials.

6.22.2.1 General. Manufacturer’s specifications, recommendations, and

installation instructions for each type of sealant, caulking compound, joint filler, gasket,
and associated miscellaneous materials required, shall be submitted by the Contractor
for approval by the Engineer. Each submittal shall be accompanied with a letter by the
manufacturer stating which of the materials proposed comply with the requirements and
is intended for each specific application shown or directed.

Elastomeric sealant materials shall be obtained only from manufacturers who will,
if required, send a qualified technical representative to the site, for the purpose of
advising the Contractor of proper procedures and precautions for the use of the
materials.

Sealant materials specified by the manufacturer as having an application

temperature range of eight to fifty degrees Celsius (8 to 50° C) shall be given
preference.

When so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit three hundred
(300) mm long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant,
caulking compound, joint filler, or gasket exposed to view. The sample shall be installed
between two strips of material similar to or representative of typical surfaces where the
sealant or filler will be used, held apart to represent typical joint widths. Samples will be
reviewed by the Engineer for color and texture only. Compliance with all other
requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

When so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare a mock-up

installation of each major type and use of sealant. Sealant shall be installed between
materials matching those used on the project, complying with conditions similar in every
respect to the anticipated project conditions. Mock-ups shall be prepared well in
advance of scheduled installation, so that nominal cure time is allowed and final
adjustments can be made, if necessary, before proceeding with the actual Work.

Sealant hardnesses shown on the plans, specified or directed, are intended to

indicate the general range necessary for overall performance. The manufacturer’s
technical representative shall be consulted to determine the actual hardness
recommended for the conditions of installation and use. Except as otherwise indicated
or recommended, compounds within the following ranges of hardness (Shore A, fully
cured, at 24 degrees C) shall be provided:
1. Five (5) to twenty (20) for high percentage of movement and
minimum exposure to weather, with no exposure to abuse.

152
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Fifteen (15) to thirty-five (35) for moderate percentage of movement

and moderate exposure to weather and abrasion.

3. Thirty (30) to sixty (60) for low percentage of movement and

maximum exposure to weather and abrasion, including foot traffic on horizontal joints.

For joints subject to movement, either thermal or dynamic elastomeric sealants,

where approved, having the lowest modulus of elasticity consistent with exposure to
abrasion or abuse shall be provided. For horizontal joints subject to traffic, sealants with
high modulus of elasticity, as required to withstand indentation by impressed stones,
etc., shall be provided. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be complied with,
wherever no other requirements are indicated.

Before purchase of each specified sealant, filler or gasket, the Contractor shall
investigate its compatibility with the joint surfaces and other materials in the system.
Only materials as herein specified which are known to be fully compatible with the actual
installation conditions, as shown by manufacturer’ s published data or certification, shall
be provided.

Size and shape of preformed sealant or filler units shall be as shown in the plans
or, if not shown, as recommended by the manufacturer, either in his published data or
upon consultation with his technical representative for the joint size and site location
conditions.

Pressure sensitive adhesives, compatible with each material in the joint system,
may be applied to one face of joint fillers and gaskets to facilitate installation and
permanent anchorage. Adhesives shall not be allowed to contaminate sealant bond
surfaces, if any, in the joint system.

6.22.2.2 Joint Sealing Compounds.

6.22.2.2.1 Hot Type Joint Sealing Compounds.

1. Compositions. This type shall be a mixture of virgin synthetic rubber or

reclaimed rubber, or a combination of the two with asphalt plasticizer and tactified.
Ground cured rubber scrap shall not be used.

2. Physical Requirements. The joint sealing compound, after heating and

applications, shall form a resilient and adhesive compound capable of effectively sealing
joints in concrete against the infiltration of moisture and foreign material through
repeated cycles of expansion and contraction. It shall be for completely filling the joints
and without damage to the material. It shall not flow from the joints or be picked up and
tracked by vehicle tires at summer temperatures.

This material shall comply with the following:

(1) Pour Point. The pour point shall be at least eleven degrees
Celsius (11° C) lower than the safe heating temperature. The safe heating temperature

153
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

is defined as the highest temperature to which the material can be heated and still meet
all requirements of this specification. No sample of the material will be tested until the
manufacturer furnishes his recommended safe-heating and pouring temperatures.

(2) Prolonged Heating. After six (6) hours of continuous heating,

with constant mixing the laboratory melter at the manufacturer’s recommended pouring
temperature, the joint sealer shall meet all requirements of this specification. (For initial
qualifying tests and subsequently as directed by the Engineer.)

(3) Penetration. The penetration at twenty-five degrees Celsius (25°

C), one hundred fifty (150) grams, five (5) seconds, shall be not less than fifty (50) nor
more than ninety (90) millimeters.

(4) Flow. The flow at sixty degrees Celsius (60° C) and at a

seventy-five (75) degree angle shall not exceed one (1) centimeter in five (5) hours.

(5) Ductility. The ductility at twenty-five degrees Celsius (25° C)

shall be not less than thirty-five (35) centimeters.

(6) Bond. The material when tested at minus seventeen and eighth-
tenths (-17.8) degrees C to one hundred (100) percent extension (1.27 centimeters
extended to 2.54 centimeters) shall, after five (5) cycles, show no surface checking,
cracking, separation or other opening in the material or between the material and the
block. At least two (2) test specimens in a set of three (3) specimens representing a
given sample shall meet this requirement.

(7) Resilience. Recovery shall be not less than twenty-five (25) percent.

(8) Compression Recovery. Compression recovery of bond specimens

shall be not less than one (1) centimeter within fifteen (15) minutes.

(9) Impact. No failure in cohesion or adhesion shall occur.

(3) Methods of Sampling and Testing.

(1) Sampling. Samples for testing shall consist of not less than a
four and five tenths (4.5) kilogram sample from each batch of the joint sealer. A batch
shall be considered as all finished material that was manufactured simultaneously or
continuously as a unit between the time of compounding and the time packaging or
placing in shipping containers. Each package or container shall be marked properly to
indicate clearly the batch of which it forms a part. The material shall be sampled in
accordance with the requirements of the “Standard Methods of Sampling Bituminous
Materials” (ASTM Designation: D 140) for solid materials in cakes.

(2) Testing. Testing shall be in accordance with AASHTO T 187

except that the tolerances on dimensions of test specimens, Article 6.3 shall be plus or
minus thirteen hundredths (0.13) centimeters and the temperature tolerances, Article 6.4
shall be plus or minus two and two tenths (2.2) degrees C.

154
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.22.2.2.2 Cold Type Joint Sealing Compounds.

1. Composition. This type shall be homogeneous material of such

consistency that it can be applied by means of a high pressure pump through suitable
nozzles to completely fill the joints. The compound may be blended with a suitable
solvent or solvents by the manufacturer to provide better workability during installation
in the joints. The volatility of these solvents must be such that they will evaporate within
a short time after installation leaving a material that is adhesive and resilient.

2. Physical Requirements.

(1) Flow. The flow during a five (5) hour period at sixty degrees
Celsius (60° C) shall not exceed five-tenths (0.5) centimeters.

(2) Penetration. After evaporation of the solvent, the

penetration at twenty-five (25) degrees C, one hundred fifty (150) seconds, shall not
exceed two hundred twenty (220) millimeters.

(3) Bond. When the compound is tested at minus seventeen and

eight tenths (-17.8) degrees C, the development at any time during the test procedure
of a crack, separation or other opening which is at any point over sixty-four (64)
millimeters deep in the material or between the material and concrete block, shall
constitute failure or the test specimen. The failure of more than one (1) test specimen
in a group of three (3) specimens representing a given sample of joint-sealing compound
shall be cause for rejection of the sample on the basis of this requirement.

3. Methods of Sampling and Testing. Cold-type joint compound shall

be tested in accordance with ASTM D 1851, except that the material for test specimens,
Article 7 © will be stirred manually rather than mechanically.

6.22.2.2.3 Two-Component Elastomeric Sealants.

1. Two-component Polysulfide Sealant: Polysulfide-based, two-part

elastomeric sealant, non-sag or self-leveling as recommended by the manufacturer for
the application shown in the plans or directed.

2. Two-component Polyurethane Modified Sealant: Proprietary two-

component primerless sealant.

3. Two-component Polyurethane Sealant: Polyurethane-based, two-part

elastomeric sealant, self-leveling or non-sag as recommended by the manufacturer for
the application shown in the plans or directed.

6.22.2.2.4 One-Component Elastomeric Sealants.

1. One Part Silicone Rubber Sealant: Silicone rubber based, one-

component elastomeric sealant compounds.

155
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. One Part Polyurethane Sealant: Polyurethane based, one-

component elastomeric sealant compound.

6.22.2.2.5 Preformed Elastomeric Sealants. Butyl Rubber Sealant Tape: A

partially-vulcanized, self-adhesive, non-staining, elastomeric butyl rubber type,
recommended by the manufacturer for waterproof construction when compressed up to
35% in dynamically-moving joints; not less than ninety eight percent (98%) solids; no
deterioration after 3000 hours test in Atlas Weatherometer.

6.22.2.2.6 Non-elastomeric Sealants.

1. One-component Acrylic Sealant: Acrylic terpolymer, solvent-based,
one part, thermoplastic sealant compounds; solids not less than ninety five percent
(95%) acrylic; recommended by manufacturer for general use as an exposed
construction sealant.

2. Acrylic-latex Sealant: Latex-rubber-modified, acrylic-emulsion

polymer sealant compound; permanently flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding;
recommended by manufacturer for protected exterior exposure.

3. Butyl Rubber Sealant: Polymerized butyl rubber and inert fillers

(pigments), solvent-based with minimum seventy five percent (75%) solids, non-sag
consistency, tack-free time of twenty four (24) hours or less, paintable, non-staining.

4. Preformed Butyl Rubber Sealant: Preformed ribbon or tape (coiled

with release paper) of polymerized butyl rubber and inert fillers (pigments), solvent-
based with minimum ninety five percent (95%) solids, non-sag thread or fabric to prevent
stretch (as required to facilitate proper application).

6.22.2.2.7 Non-skinning Mastic Sealants.

1. Polybutene Mastic Sealant: Either liquid or preformed ribbon (coiled with

release paper) of polybutene-based mastic, non-drying, non-skinning, non-hardening,
of low viscosity, as recommended by the manufacturer for joints subject to shear
movement but not subject to normal joint movement.

2. Polyisobutylene Mastic Sealant: Either liquid or preformed ribbon (coiled

with release paper) of polyisobutylene-based mastic, non-drying, non-skinning, non-
hardening, non-migrating, heavy-bodied as recommended by manufacturer for large
joints subject to shear movement but not subject to normal joint movement.

6.22.2.3 Miscellaneous Materials.

6.22.2.3.1 Joint Cleaner. Type of joint cleaning compound recommended by

the sealant or caulking compound manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be cleaned.

6.22.2.3.2 Joint Primer/Sealer. Type of joint primer/sealer recommended by

the sealant manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.

156
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.22.2.3.3 Bond Breaker Tape. Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as

recommended by the sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces
where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of
sealant; Self-adhesive tape wherever applicable.

6.22.2.3.4 Sealant Backer Rod. Compressible rod stock polyethylene foam,

polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other
flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material as recommended for compatibility
with sealant by the sealant manufacturer.

6.22.2.4 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler.

6.22.2.4.1 Description. This type of fillers and gaskets shall be as herein

specified and shall have relatively little extrusion and a moderate to high amount of
recovery after release from compression.

6.22.2.4.2 Requirements. Nonextruding and resilient type of expansion joint

filler shall conform to all the requirements of the Standard Specifications for “ Preformed
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding
and Resilient Bituminous Types),” AASHTO Designation M 213 and as herein specified.

6.22.2.4.5 Concrete Control/Expansion Joint Fillers.

1. Self-expanding Cork Joint Filler: Resilient and non-extruding type

premolded cork units, complying with ASTM D1752 Type III, and AASHTO M153, Type
III.
2. Cork Joint Filler: Resilient and non-extruding type premolded cork
units, complying with ASTM D1752, Type II, and AASHTO M153, Type II.

3. Sponge Rubber Joint Filler: Resilient, non-extruding, open-cell type

premolded rubber, gray to match concrete, complying with ASTM D1752, Type I and
AASHTO M153, Type I.

4. Bituminous and Fiber Joint Filler: Resilient and non-extruding type

premolded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units, complying with ASTM D1751 and
AASHTO M213.

6.22.2.4.4 Cellular Foam Expansion Joint Fillers.

1. Closed-cell Neoprene Joint Filler Expanded neoprene complying

with ASTM D1056, Class SC (oil-resistant and medium swell), of thirteen (13) kPa to
thirty four (34) kPa compression deflection (Grade SCE 41); except provide ninety (90)
kPa to one hundred seventeen (117) kPa compression deflection (Grade SCE 44),
wherever filler is applied under sealant exposed to traffic.

2. Closed-cell PVC Joint Filler: Flexible expanded polyvinyl chloride

complying with ASTM D1667, Grade VE 41 B1 (24 kPa compression deflection); except

157
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

provide higher compression deflection grades as may be necessary to withstand

installation forces and provide proper support for sealants, if any.

3. Expanded Polyethylene Joint Filler: Flexible, compressible, closed-

cell polyethylene of not less than sixty eight (68) kPa compression deflection twenty five
percent (25%); except provide higher compression deflection strength as may be
necessary to withstand installation forces and provide proper support for sealants;
surface water absorption of not more than four hundred ninety (490) gr/sq.m.

4. Open-cell Polyurethane Joint Filler: Flexible, highly compressible,

open-cell polyurethane foam of not less that twenty (20) kg/cu m density and not less
than thirteen (13) kPa compression deflection twenty five percent (25%) with not more
than ten percent (10%) compression set for twenty five (25) hours at fifty percent (50%)
compression; comply with ASTM D1564.

6.22.2.4.5 Gaskets.

1. Hollow Neoprene Pavement Gasket: Hollow or compartmentalized

neoprene extrusion, designed to withstand compression to forty percent (40%) of normal
width without extrusion from joint, and with full recovery; with heavy, durable top
member, suitable for long-term exposure to severe traffic abrasion and contamination;
hardness of approximately 66 Shore A; comply with ASTM D2628.

2. Molded Neoprene Gasket: Extruded neoprene gaskets complying

with ASTM D2000, designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black, of 40 to 60 Shore A
durometer hardness; of the profile shown in the plans or, if not shown, as required by the
joint shape, size and movement characteristics to maintain a watertight and airtight seal.

3. Exposed Closed-cell Neoprene Gasket: Extruded or molded

expanded neoprene complying with ASTM C509, Grade 4, black; formed with durable
self-skin to the profile shown in the plans or, if not shown, as required to maintain a
watertight and airtight seal.

4. Concealed Closed-cell Neoprene Gasket: Extruded or molded

expanded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D1056, Class SC, of the
compression deflection required to perform properly; self-skinned and of the profile
shown in the plans or, if not shown, as required to maintain a watertight and airtight seal.

5. Closed-cell PVC Gasket: Closed-cell, flexible, non-exuding, polyvinyl

chloride foam gaskets complying with ASTM D1667, Grade VE 41 BL; except provide
a higher compression deflection grade if necessary to maintain a watertight seal; provide
pressure-sensitive adhesive on one face.

6.22.2.5 Miscellaneous Materials. Oakum Joint Filler: Untreated hemp or jute

fiber rope, free of oil, tar and other compounds which might stain surfaces, contaminate
joint walls, or not be compatible with sealants.

158
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6.22.3 Certificate of Guarantee. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Guarantee for each type of joint material delivered to the
site. The certificate shall note compliance to the appropriate specifications and shall
state the results of the tests performed on the material, as required by the specifications.
The Contractor shall, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, have the joint material
tested for conformance to the applicable specifications at an approved testing laboratory.
All costs connected with Certificate of Guarantee and any subsequent quality testing
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

The Contractor shall submit a special guarantee indicating that for a period of two (2)
years from final acceptance he shall repair or replace sealants which fail to perform as
watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion; cohesion, abrasion, weather, extrusion,
migration, or stain resistance; general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other
manner not clearly specified by the submitted manufacturer’ s data, as an inherent quality
of the material for the exposure indicated. The guarantee shall include an agreement
to remove and replace other work which has been superimposed on or otherwise placed
against the sealants and caulking work, to the extent required to repair or replace the
sealants and caulking work.

6.22.4 Construction Requirements. Joints shall be placed and sealed as specified

in other sections of the specifications pertaining to items of Work to be jointed and
sealed and as herein specified, when more stringent.

6.22.4.1 General. Joint surfaces of units to receive fillers, gaskets or sealants,

and the conditions under which the work is to be performed shall be examined, and
surfaces shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer and as herein
specified for the intended use.

Work shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

6.22.4.2 Joint Sealing Compounds.

6.22.4.2.1 Weather Limitations. Installation of sealants shall not proceed

under adverse weather conditions, or when forecasted weather conditions are
unfavorable for proper cure and development of high early bond strength. Wherever
joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, elastomeric sealants shall be
installed only when temperatures are in the lower third of the manufacturer’s
recommended installation temperature range, so that the sealant will not be subjected
to excessive elongation and bond stress.

6.22.4.2.2 Joint Surface Preparation. Joint surfaces shall be cleaned

immediately before installation of the sealant or caulking compound. Dirt, insecure
coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond of sealant or
caulking compound shall be removed.

Sealants shall not be installed over joint surfaces which have been
painted, lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water repellent or other treatment or
coating, unless a test for durability (adhesion) has successfully demonstrated that the

159
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

sealant bond is not impaired by the coating or treatment. If the test has not been
performed, or shows bond interference, the coating or treatment shall be removed from
the joint surfaces before installing the sealant.

Concrete and masonry joint surfaces shall be etched to remove excess

alkalinity, unless the manufacturer’s printed instructions indicate that alkalinity does not
interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etching shall be performed with 5%
solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with dilute ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with
water and allow to dry before sealant installation.

6.22.4.2.3 Installation. The sealant manufacturer’s printed instructions shall

be complied with except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and
except where the manufacturer’s technical representative indicates otherwise.

The joint surfaces shall be primed or sealed wherever shown or

recommended by the manufacturer. Primer/sealer shall not be allowed to spill or migrate
onto adjoining surfaces.

Sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric sealants shall be installed,

except where shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by the manufacturer
for the intended application.

Bond breaker tape shall be installed wherever shown and wherever

required by manufacturer’s recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will
perform properly.

Only proven installation techniques shall be employed which will ensure

that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air
pockets; with complete “ wetting” of the j joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides.
Except as otherwise indicated or directed, sealant rabbet shall be filled to a slightly
concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between
a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, the joint shall be filled to form a slight cove,
so that the joint will not trap moisture and dirt.

Sealants shall be installed to depths as shown or, if not shown, as

recommended by the sealant manufacturer; but within the following general limitations
measured at the center (thin) section of the bead.

1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with

elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures,
joints shall be filled to a depth equal to seventy five percent (75%) of joint width, but not
more than sixteen (16) mm deep or less than ten (10) mm deep.

2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants,

but not subject to traffic, joints shall be filled to a depth equal to fifty percent (50%) of
joint width, but not more than twelve (12) mm deep or less that six (6) mm deep.

160
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking

compounds, joints shall be filled to a depth in the range of seventy five to one hundred
twenty five percent (75% - 125%) of joint width.

Sealants or caulking compounds shall not be allowed to overflow or spill

onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces. Masking tape
or other precautionary devices shall be used to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces,
by either the primer/sealer or the sealant/caulking compound.

Excess and spillage of compounds shall be removed promptly as the

work progresses. Adjoining surfaces shall be cleaned with a solvent recommended by
the manufacturer, to eliminate evidence of spillage; without damage to the adjoining
surfaces or finishes.

Polysulfide sealant installation shall comply with standards

recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

6.22.4.2.4 Cure and Protection. Sealants and caulking compounds shall be

cured in compliance with the manufacturer’ s instructions and recommendations to obtain
high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. All
procedures required for the curing and protection of sealants and caulking compounds
during the construction period shall be provided, so that they will be free of deterioration
or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at the time of acceptance.

6.22.4.3 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler. The manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations shall be complied with for the installation of each type of joint filler or
gasket required, unless more stringent requirements are shown in the plans or directed.

Units shall be set at proper depth or position in the joint to coordinate with other
work, including the installation of bond breakers, backer rods and sealants. Voids or
gaps between the ends of joint filler units shall not be accepted.

Exposed edges or faces of gaskets and exposed joint fillers shall be slightly
recessed behind adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise directed, so that compressed units
will not protrude from the joint.

Ends of gaskets shall be bonded together with adhesive or by other means as

recommended by the manufacturer to ensure continuous watertight and airtight
performance. Ends at corners shall be mitercut and bonded, unless molded corner units
are provided.

6.22.5 Quality Assurance. Acceptance of joint materials shall be in accordance with

Subsection 1.08.4 - "Measured or Tested Conformance," in these General
Specifications. At the Engineer’s discretion, acceptance of any or all of the materials
specified herein, may be carried out as specified in Subsection 1.08.3 - "Certification of
Compliance," in these General Specifications.

161
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Acceptance of the completed work shall be carried out as specified in Subsection

1.08.2 "Visual Inspection," in the General Specifications, and as detailed below.

After nominal cure of exterior joint sealants which are exposed to the weather,
a test for water leaks shall be performed. Horizontal joint exposures shall be tested by
flooding with water to a depth of fifty (50) mm for twenty four (24) hours. Vertical joint
exposures shall be tested by flooding the joint with water directed from a twenty (20) mm
garden hose held perpendicular to the wall face, six hundred (600) mm from the joint,
connected to a water system with two hundred (200) kPa minimum normal water
pressure. The stream of water shall be moved along the joint at an approximate rate of
six (6) meters per minute.

Approximately five percent (5%) of total joint system shall be tested, in locations
which are typical of every joint condition, and which can be inspected easily for leakage
on the opposite face. The test shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer who
will determine the actual percentage of joints to be tested and the actual period of
exposure to water, based upon the extent of observed leakage, or lack thereof.

Sealant installation shall be repaired at leaks or, if the leakage is excessive, the
sealant installation shall be replaced as directed.

Where the nature of observed leakage indicates the possibility of inadequate joint
bond strength, the Engineer may direct that additional testing be performed at a time
when joints have been fully cured, followed by natural exposure through both extreme
temperatures and returned to the lowest range of temperature in which it is feasible to
conduct testing. Repair or replace work shall be carried out as directed.

6.22.6 Method of Measurement. No part of this section is a Bill-of-Quantity item.

Measurement may be made for project records only, when so directed by the Engineer.

6.22.7 Payment. The materials provided for in this section shall not be paid for directly,
but will be considered subsidiary to other items or Work appearing in the Bill of
Quantities

162
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

November 1998

PART SEVEN
ROADWAY LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Table of Contents

PART SEVEN: ROADWAY LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 7.01 - GENERAL........................................................................................ 1

7.01.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................... 1
7.01.2 SCOPE OF WORK. ............................................................................. 1
7.01.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 1
7.01.3.1 General................................................................................... 1
7.01.3.2 Regulations and Standards .................................................... 1
7.01.3.3 Basic Design Consideration ................................................... 2
7.01.3.4 Approval of Equipment ........................................................... 3
7.01.3.5 Contractor's Drawings ............................................................ 4
7.01.3.6 Maintenance Literature ........................................................... 4
7.01.3.7 Manufacturers ........................................................................ 4
7.01.4 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR THE LIGHTING INSTALLATION. ................5
7.01.4.1 General................................................................................... 5
7.01.4.2 Lighting Design Criteria .......................................................... 5
7.01.4.3 Light Distribution Pattern ........................................................ 6
7.01.5 ENERGY SAVING. .............................................................................. 7
7.01.6 SAFETY CLEARANCE ........................................................................ 7

SECTION 7.02 - 33 KV SYSTEM ............................................................................... 8

7.02.1 33 KV DISTRIBUTION NETWORK. ..................................................... 8
7.02.1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 8
7.02.2 MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 8
7.02.2.1 Poles ...................................................................................... 8
7.02.2.2 Pole Extensions .................................................................... 10
7.02.2.3 Crossarms ............................................................................ 10
7.02.2.4 Braces .................................................................................. 11
7.02.2.5 Bracket, Plate and Strap ...................................................... 11
7.02.2.6 Saddles ................................................................................ 11
7.02.2.7 Porcelain Insulators .............................................................. 12
7.02.2.8 ACSR Conductor .................................................................. 12
7.02.2.9 Tie Wire ................................................................................ 13
7.02.2.10 Ground Wire (Earth Wire) ................................................... 14
7.02.2.11 Guy Wire ............................................................................ 14
7.02.2.12 Dropout Power Fuse........................................................... 14
7.02.2.13 Pole Line Hardware ............................................................ 15
7.02.2.13.1 Shoulder Eye Bolts ............................................... 15
7.02.2.13.2 Eye Nut ................................................................. 15
7.02.2.13.3 Bolts ...................................................................... 15
7.02.2.13.4 Expansion Anchors ............................................... 16
7.02.2.13.5 Square Washers ................................................... 16
7.01.2.13.6 Suspension Clamps .............................................. 16
7.02.2.13.7 Strain Clamp Straight Type ...................................16
Table of Contents
7.02.2.13.8 Strain Clamps, Quadrant Type .............................17
7.02.2.13.9 Messenger Suspension Clamp .............................17
7.02.2.13.10 Wedge Grip......................................................... 17
7.02.2.13.11 Straight Clevis Extension with Eye .....................17
7.02.2.13.12 Y-Clevis Extension .............................................. 18
7.02.2.13.13 Y-Clevis Eye ....................................................... 17
7.02.2.13.14 Anchor Shackle................................................... 17
7.02.2.14 Guy Accessories................................................................. 19
7.02.2.15 Energy Meter ...................................................................... 21
7.02.2.15.1 System Condition.................................................. 21
7.02.2.15.2 Terminals .............................................................. 21
7.02.2.15.3 Register ................................................................ 22
7.02.2.15.4 Arrangement ......................................................... 22
7.02.2.15.5 Current and Voltage Transformers .......................22
7.02.2.16 GRP Cabinet ...................................................................... 23
7.02.2.17 Surge Arrestor .................................................................... 24
7.02.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. .............................................. 25
7.02.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 25
7.02.5 PAYMENT .......................................................................................... 25

SECTION 7.03 - 33/0.4 KV PACKAGED SUB-STATIONS ....................................... 27

7.03.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 27
7.03.2 MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 27
7.03.2.1 Transformer Compartment .................................................... 27
7.03.2.2 Low Voltage Switchboard ..................................................... 29
7.03.2.3 Accessories .......................................................................... 30
7.03.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................. 30
7.03.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 30
7.03.5 PAYMENT .......................................................................................... 30

SECTION 7.04 - 13.8 KV INTAKE SWITCHING STATIONS .................................... 32

7.04.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 32
7.04.2 MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 32
7.04.2.1 The Enclosure ...................................................................... 32
7.04.2.2 Equipment ............................................................................ 32
7.04.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................. 35
7.04.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 35
7.04.5 PAYMENT .......................................................................................... 35

SECTION 7.05 - 13,800/400 VOLT PACKAGED SUBSTATIONS ...........................37

7.05.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 37
7.05.2 MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 37
7.05.2.1 Medium Voltage (MV) Switchgear ......................................... 37
7.05.2.2 Transformer Compartment .................................................... 39
7.05.2.3 Low Voltage Switchboard ...................................................... 40
7.05.2.4 Accessories .......................................................................... 41
7.05.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................. 41
7.05.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 41
Table of Contents
7.05.5 PAYMENT .......................................................................................... 41

SECTION 7.06 - 13.8 KV MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES ......................................... 42

7.06.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 42
7.06.2 MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 42
7.06.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................. 42
7.06.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 43
7.06.5 PAYMENT .......................................................................................... 43

SECTION 7.07 - LOW VOLTAGE CABLES.............................................................. 45

7.07.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 45
7.07.2 MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 45
7.07.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................. 46
7.07.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 47
7.07.5 PAYMENT .......................................................................................... 47

SECTION 7.08 - LOW VOLTAGE FEEDER PILLAR ................................................ 48

7.08.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 48
7.08.2 MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 48
7.08.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................. 49
7.08.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 50
7.08.5 PAYMENT .......................................................................................... 50

SECTION 7.09 - HIGH MASTS ................................................................................ 51

7.09.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 51
7.09.2 MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 51
7.09.2.1 Mast...................................................................................... 51
7.09.2.2 Luminarie Support Ring ........................................................ 52
7.09.2.3 Raising and Lowering Equipment ......................................... 53
7.09.2.4 Finish .................................................................................... 55
7.09.2.5 High Mast Distribution Equipment ........................................ 55
7.09.2.6 Aircraft Obstruction Light ...................................................... 56
7.09.2.7 Lightning Protection .............................................................. 56
7.09.2.8 High Mast Approval .............................................................. 56
7.09.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................. 57
7.09.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 57
7.09.5 PAYMENT ........................................................................................... 58

SECTION 7.10 - LIGHTING COLUMNS .................................................................... 60

7.10.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................... 60
7.10.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................ 60
7.10.2.1 Columns ................................................................................ 60
7.10.2.2 Finishing ................................................................................ 61
7.10.2.3 Distribution Equipment .......................................................... 61
7.10.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.................................................. 62
7.10.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT .......................................................... 62
7.10.5 PAYMENT ........................................................................................... 62
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.11 - STREET LIGHTING LUMINARIES ................................................. 64

7.11.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................. 64
7.11.2 MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 64
7.11.2.1 Luminarie............................................................................. 64
7.11.2.2 Lamps.................................................................................. 65
7.11.2.3 Control Gear ........................................................................ 65
7.11.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................ 65
7.11.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................ 66
7.11.5 PAYMENT ......................................................................................... 66

SECTION 7.12 - AMENITY LIGHTING LUMINARIES ............................................. 67

7.12.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................. 67
7.12.2 MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 67
7.12.2.1 Luminaries ........................................................................... 67
7.12.2.2 Lamps.................................................................................. 68
7.12.2.3 Control Gear ........................................................................ 68
7.12.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................ 68
7.12.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................ 69
7.12.5 PAYMENT ......................................................................................... 69

SECTION 7.13 - SIGN ILLUMINATION ................................................................... 70

7.13.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................. 70
7.13.2 MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 70
7.13.2.1 Floodlight ............................................................................. 70
7.13.2.2 Lamps.................................................................................. 70
7.13.2.3 Control Gear ........................................................................ 70
7.13.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................ 71
7.13.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................ 71
7.13.5 PAYMENT ......................................................................................... 71

SECTION 7.14 - UNDERBRIDGE FITTING ............................................................ 73

7.14.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................. 73
7.14.2 MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 73
7.14.2.1 Fitting................................................................................... 73
7.14.2.2 Lamps.................................................................................. 73
7.14.2.3 Control Gear ........................................................................ 73
7.14.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................ 73
7.14.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................ 74
7.14.5 PAYMENT ......................................................................................... 74

SECTION 7.15 - UNDERPASS LIGHTING LUMINARIES ....................................... 75

7.15.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................. 75
7.15.2 MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 75
7.15.2.1 Luminaries ........................................................................... 75
7.15.2.2 Lamps.................................................................................. 76
7.15.2.3 Control Gear ........................................................................ 76
7.15.2.4 Lighting Control System ...................................................... 76
Table of Contents
7.15.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................ 77
7.15.3.1 General................................................................................ 77
7.15.3.2 Luminaries ........................................................................... 77
7.15.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................ 77
7.15.5 PAYMENT ......................................................................................... 77

SECTION 7.16 - EARTHING ................................................................................... 79

7.16.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................. 79
7.16.2 MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 79
7.16.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................ 79
7.16.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................ 80
7.16.5 PAYMENT ......................................................................................... 80

SECTION 7.17 - TESTING AND ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS ......................... 82

7.17.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................. 82
7.17.2 LABELLING....................................................................................... 82
7.17.3 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ................................................... 83
7.17.3.1 General................................................................................. 83
7.17.3.2 Site Testing .......................................................................... 83
7.17.3.2.1 Substation Tests .................................................... 83
7.17.3.2.2 Cables.................................................................... 83
7.17.3.2.3 Visual Inspection.................................................... 84
7.17.3.2.4 Measurement of Insulation Resistance .................. 84
7.17.3.2.5 Operational Tests .................................................. 84
7.17.3.2.6 Performance Tests ................................................. 84
7.17.4 HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT ........................................................... 85

SECTION 7.18 - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT DATA .................... 86

7.18.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................... 86
7.18.2 DETAILED EQUIPMENT DATA. ....................................................... 86
7.18.2.1 33 KV Overhead Lines Network .......................................... 86
7.18.2.2 High Masts/Lighting Columns .............................................. 86
7.18.2.3 Intake Switching Station/Packaged Substation/Feeder Pillar87
7.18.2.4. Cables (MV and LV)...................................................... 87
7.18.2.5 Luminaries. .......................................................................... 87
7.18.2.5.1 Luminaries Details. ................................................. 87
7.18.2.5.2 Lamp Control Gear ................................................ 87
7.18.2.5.3 Lamps .................................................................... 88
7.18.2.6 For all Other Equipment ...................................................... 88

SECTION 7.19 - CIVIL WORKS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION .................... 89

7.19.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................. 89
7.19.2 MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 89
7.19.2.1 Polyvinylchloride (uPVC) Duct .............................................. 89
7.19.2.2 Concrete ............................................................................... 89
7.19.2.3 Reinforcing Steel .................................................................. 89
7.19.2.4 Drawpit Covers ..................................................................... 89
7.19.2.5 Backfill Material .................................................................... 89
Table of Contents
7.19.2.6 Breakaway Support Coupling, Transformer Base and Multi-
direction Slip Base Assemblies ............................................ 90
7.19.2.6.1 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly ................ 90
7.19.2.6.2 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transformer Base
Assembly ............................................................... 90
7.19.2.6.3 Breakaway Multi-direction Slip Base Assembly ..... 91
7.19.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................ 91
7.19.3.1 Underground Duct System .................................................. 91
7.19.3.2 Drawpits, Bases and Foundations ....................................... 92
7.19.3.3 Trenching for Duct Laying ................................................... 93
7.19.3.4 Breakaway Support Coupling, Transformer Base and Multi-
directional Slip Base Assemblies ............................................. 93
7.19.3.4.1 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly Installation93
7.19.3.4.2 Breakaway Multi-direction Slip Base Assembly
Installation .............................................................. 94
7.19.3.4.3 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transformer Base
Assembly Installation ............................................ 95
7.19.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES ......................................... 96
7.19.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................ 96
7.19.6 PAYMENT ......................................................................................... 96

SECTION 7.20 - TRAFFIC SIGNALS .................................................................... 100

7.20.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................ 100
7.20.2 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................. 100
7.20.3 SUBMITTALS.................................................................................. 102
7.20.4 MATERIALS .................................................................................... 103
7.20.4.1 General.............................................................................. 103
7.20.4.2 Concrete and Footings ...................................................... 104
7.20.4.3 Steel Products .................................................................... 104
7.20.4.4 Aluminum Products ........................................................... 104
7.20.4.5 Cable and Duct .................................................................. 105
7.20.5 CONTROLLERS ............................................................................. 105
7.20.5.1 General.............................................................................. 105
7.20.5.2 Controller Enclosure .......................................................... 108
7.20.5.3 Controller Electrical Equipment ......................................... 109
7.20.5.4 Pre-timed Controllers......................................................... 110
7.20.5.5 Traffic-Actuated Controllers ............................................... 111
7.20.6 MONITORS ..................................................................................... 113
7.20.7 TERMINAL FACILITIES AND CABINET EQUIPMENT ................... 114
7.20.7.1 Terminal Facilities.............................................................. 114
7.20.7.2 Cabinet and Cabinet Equipment........................................ 115
7.20.8 DETECTORS .................................................................................. 116
7.20.8.1 Vehicle Detectors .............................................................. 116
7.20.8.2 Pedestrian Detectors ......................................................... 118
7.20.9 VEHICLE TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS ............................................. 119
7.20.9.1. Optical Unit Lenses .......................................................... 119
7.20.9.1.1 General ................................................................ 119
7.20.9.1.2 Arrow Lenses ...................................................... 120
Table of Contents
7.20.9.2 Optical Unit Reflectors ....................................................... 120
7.20.9.3 Distribution of Light from Vehicle Traffic Signal Optical Units121
7.20.9.4 Traffic Signal Lamps .......................................................... 122
7.20.9.5 Lamp Holders .................................................................... 123
7.20.10 VEHICLE TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEAD ASSEMBLIES ...................... 123
7.20.10.1 General............................................................................ 123
7.20.10.2 Signal Sections ................................................................ 124
7.20.10.3 Visors .............................................................................. 125
7.20.10.4 Mounting and Miscellaneous Assemblies ........................ 126
7.20.11 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS. ................................................... 127
7.20.11.1 Physical Characteristics .................................................. 127
7.20.11.2 Optical Characteristics..................................................... 127
7.20.12 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEAD SUPPORTS ......................................... 127
7.20.12.1 General............................................................................. 127
7.20.12.2 Pedestals and Bases (for roadside signals) ..................... 128
7.20.13 CABLE .......................................................................................... 129
7.20.13.1 Signal Cable ..................................................................... 129
7.20.13.2 Detector Lead-In Cable .................................................... 131
7.20.13.3 Interconnecting Cable ...................................................... 132
7.20.14 DUCT ............................................................................................ 132
7.20.15 INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTS TO BE SUPPLIED PRIOR TO
ISSUE OF HANDING-OVER CERTIFICATE. .................................. 133
7.20.16 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PRIOR TO HANDING-OVER. 134
7.20.17 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT .................................................... 134
7.20.18 PAYMENT ..................................................................................... 134
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PART SEVEN: ROADWAY LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS

SECTION 7.01 - GENERAL

7.01.1 DESCRIPTION. These specifications are considered as General Specifications.

The Lighting and Power Installations to be supplied and installed under contract shall
be as required by the Project Drawings and Contract Bill of Quantities.

7.01.2 SCOPE OF WORK. Work related to the electrical installation provided for in this
Specification shall include the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and putting
into satisfactory operation any or all of the following systems as required by the Project
Drawings and Contract Bill of Quantities:

1. 33 kV System
2. 13.8 kV System
3. LV Cables
4. LV Pillar
5. Lighting Installation
6. Earthing
7. Installation Testing
8. Equipment Data
9. Electrical Civil Works
10. Traffic Signals.

The work shall include the provision of shop drawings and the calculations required
by the specification, as well as the provision of all literature and samples in connection
with the approval of proposed equipment.

The equipment supplied shall include all necessary items for a complete installation
which will give satisfactory operation not withstanding errors and omissions. The
equipment listed in the documents is, therefore, indicative and not limitative.

7.01.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS.

7.01.3.1 General. All work carried out on the installation shall be in accordance with
the requirements of these Specifications, so that their true meaning and intent are
fulfilled. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, but no
changes shall be made without the written approval of the Engineer.

These specifications, and the design drawings are complementary documents,

intended for the selection of equipment having the general and specific characteristics
as detailed in the documents.

7.01.3.2 Regulations and Standards. All electrical work shall comply with all
applicable Government Rules and Regulations and carried out in accordance with the
recommendations of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) together with
reference to the following:

1
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

1. Relevant Standards and Specifications issued by the appropriate Authorities in

the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, including the “Design Principles for Roadway Lighting”
issued by the Ministry of Communications.

2. IEE Wiring Regulations (UK) as published by the Institute of Electrical

Engineers, London.

3. National Electric Code (USA) as published by National Fire Protection

Association.

4. BSS published by the British Standards Institution.

5. DIN (German) Standards and VDE Regulations as published by the German

Electrotechnical Commission.

6. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (USA)

7. I.E.C. Recommendations.

All equipment and materials supplied for this project shall be manufactured in
compliance with the latest relevant standards of the IEC and NEMA, BSS or DIN and
hereinafter referred to as "Standards.”

Acceptance tests shall conform with the above mentioned "Regulations" and
"Standards.”

7.01.3.3 Basic Design Consideration. MV power will be supplied to the package

sub-stations either by underground cable networks or by overhead lines, 3-phases, 60
HZ, as shown on the Project Drawings.

LV power will be distributed from the substation transformers at 400/230V nominal,

3-phases, 4-wires, 60 HZ.

Single phase equipment shall be connected between phases and neutral in a way to
balance the three (3) phases.

The component parts of each electrical system or piece of equipment shall be the
latest standard product of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified, and
provided such components, manufactured by different manufacturers, are of standard
design and dimensions, and interchangeability is possible and shall normally have been
in satisfactory service for at least two (2) years.
All work shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner so as to be readily
accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from the Drawings
may be made to accomplish this but no changes shall be made without the approval of
the Engineer.

2
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Unless otherwise specifically mentioned, all equipment shall be designed and rated
for a continuous and trouble-free service at fifty degrees Celsius (50o C.) ambient
temperature and one hundred percent (100%) relative humidity with temperature
reaching seventy degrees Celsius (70o C.) in direct sunlight with a high content of
ULTRA-VIOLET rays. The equipment shall be able to withstand full load operation
exposed to sun, dust storms, corrosive agents and the like.

7.01.3.4 Approval of Equipment. The Contractor shall not order any equipment
before receiving approval in writing. Approval procedures shall be as follows:

1. Contractor submits his proposal to the Engineer in triplicate. This submission

shall be comprehensive and clearly state any manufacturer's deviations from the
specification. Manufacturers' literature with the submission shall be originals and not
photocopies.

2. The submission shall be reviewed by the Engineer. Approval procedure shall

be as follows:

(1) If the submission is from local manufacturers and complies with

specification requirements, the Engineer will issue his written approval to the
Contractor. A copy of the submission with the Engineer's approval letter is to be
submitted to the M.O.C. for information.

(2) If the submission is from local manufacturers but there are minor deviations
from the specification requirements which shall not affect the performance of the
equipment, the Engineer will clarify the deviation and submit it to the M.O.C. for
approval. The Engineer shall transmit the approval to the Contractor in writing only
after receipt of the M.O.C. approval.

All submissions shall give clear detailed characteristics of the equipment

proposed, together with calculations where necessary, including catalogue identification
references. Documents shall be in the Arabic and English languages.

The Engineer reserves the right to direct the Contractor to provide equipment of a
make and type which is essential to achieve the designed criteria.

The Contractor shall at his own expense, present a sample to the Engineer of each
type of luminarie to be used, complete with its auxiliary equipment which shall exactly
conform to the specified items. The luminaries should only be submitted after approval
of their technical characteristics.

The approval of the proposed luminaries shall be given after the Contractor submits
his detailed calculation of the illumination levels as required by this Subsection.

The Engineer reserves the right to verify the performance and quality of the samples
by instructing that tests of his choice be carried out at the Contractor's expense, before
granting approval of the sample.

3
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Approval of samples by the Engineer does not in any way relieve the Contractor of
his contractual obligations in respect of the suitability of the equipment or its final
performance once installed, and the coordination of the elements into a fully operational
installation.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim in any way whatsoever because of a
sample rejection considered by the Engineer as not complying with the Specification
and the Contractor shall be wholly responsible for any delay resulting from the rejection
of a sample.

7.01.3.5 Contractor's Drawings. The Tender Drawings detailed in the "List of

Drawings" are design drawings, describing all the installation deemed to achieve the
required performance.

The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer detailed construction
drawings before starting work. These drawings shall comply with and complement the
tender drawings in showing physical layout of all equipment, exact location of columns,
construction and installation details, wiring diagrams, etc. No work shall be started on
site until approval of the Drawings has been given in writing by the Engineer.

Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with one (1)
transparency and six (6) prints of each of the layout and detail drawings and wiring
diagrams showing "As-installed" together with any other information and documentation
and operation of the equipment.

All Contractor's documents and drawings presented shall be in the Arabic and English
languages.

7.01.3.6 Maintenance Literature. Prior to the final acceptance of the installation the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of manuals for all equipment
supplied under the Contract. The manuals shall be A4 size bound in loose leaf binders
or booklets suitably enclosed and including the following:

1. Single line diagram of the complete work

2. Control, protection and circuit diagrams for all equipment
3. Setting-up, commissioning and operating instructions
4. Trouble shooting procedures
5. Maintenance instructions including schedules for preventative maintenance
6. Complete recommended spares list including manufacturers' name and
catalogue number
7. Name, address and phone number of manufacturers' local authorized
representatives and service agent.

7.01.3.7 Manufacturers. The detailed descriptions of equipment appearing in the

following sub-divisions, indicate the minimum quality and standard of equipment to be
accepted. Products of manufacturers having good repute and standard shall be
considered by the Engineer on an equal basis. In this respect the Engineer's decision
shall be final and not subject to any justification whatsoever.

4
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.01.4 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR THE LIGHTING INSTALLATION.

7.01.4.1 General. It is the intention of these Specifications and the attached

Drawings to obtain a lighting installation which provides luminance levels according to
the design criteria detailed below. The installation detailed on the drawing has been
designed tentatively on the basis of actual light distribution curves of existing luminaries
similar to those specified to achieve the required levels.

The Contractor shall be responsible and confirm in writing that his selection of
equipment will ensure on the road and sign surfaces luminance levels and uniformities
equal or better than those defined in the "Lighting Design Criteria."

7.01.4.2 Lighting Design Criteria. The road surface on which the lighting levels
shall be measured is defined as the width of all the traffic lanes of all roadways,
underpasses and ramps of the interchanges.

The luminance and illumination levels of the roadways and ramps as specified below
are the initial average level which shall be calculated and substantiated by
measurements of the Contractor, after one hundred (100) hours of operation. The
Contractor shall specify the anticipated lamp lumen and luminarie dirt depreciation
factors after two (2) years of operation recommended by the manufacturers, to assist
the Engineer in assessing the maintained lighting levels in the installation.

The luminance and illuminance levels and uniformities shall be calculated by the
Contractor for the interchanges, travel lanes and service roads. The Contractor shall
take account of the different elevations of roadways and ramps in his lighting
calculations. The Contractor shall include for the luminaries manufacturer to carry out
the final setting of all lights after site erection to ensure maximum utilization of light
output.

Within six (6) weeks after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit the
technical details of the luminaries and having obtained conditional approval thereof,
submit in duplicate, full details of the calculated results for the levels and uniformity of
luminance and illumination on all road surfaces. These details should be submitted in
the format as described in the relevant IEC Publication and the Ministry of
Communications Highway Design Code and after initial approval by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall erect on site along typical stretches of the road, at least four (4)
consecutive spans of masts equipped with the specified number of the submitted
luminaries, and the Contractor shall prove by measurement that the lighting criteria
have been met. The results shall be fully tabulated. The results will be analyzed and
submitted to the M.O.C. Engineer for approval. No final approval will be given until the
tests have been completed and the test results are accepted by the M.O.C. Engineer.
The execution of the Contract shall then proceed upon the basis of these levels and
uniformities being achieved, throughout the whole extent of the Contract.

Upon completion of the installation the Contractor shall be required to carry out
measurements of the lighting levels on site in accordance with Design Code Section

5
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.16, Paragraph C (f) and to submit the results as proof that the approved calculated
levels and uniformities have been achieved.

The following initial lighting design criteria should be applied:

Travel Lanes

Luminance (L) cd/m2 As shown on Design Manual TABLE for the type of road
under construction

Overall
Uniformity (Uo)
(Uo = L min./L avg.) 0.4

Uniformity of
each lane (Ul)
(Ul = L min./L max. 0.7

Threshold increment
not exceeding 10%

Calculations shall show the installation is satisfactory using Road Surface

characteristics IEC classification. Type R2 with qo = 0.07 and also Type R4 with qo =
0.08.

Reference Horizontal As shown in Design Manual

Illumination (E avg. #) TABLE for the type of road under construction

Illuminance Uniformities

E. min./E. Avg. 1:3

E. min./E. Max. 1:6

7.01.4.3 Light Distribution Pattern. The Contractor shall select fixtures generally
similar to IEC classification.

Luminaries shall be of the cut-off or semi cut-off type of distribution.

The luminaries shall be of purpose built design incorporating the specified size and
type of lamps.

The light distribution characteristics of the luminarie as mounted shall be better than:

Direction of Maximum intensity zero to sixty-seven degrees (0-67o) for cut-off type.
Maximum permissible value of intensity at:

90 degrees from nadir - 25 cd/1000 lumens

80 degrees from nadir - 100 cd/1000 lumens

6
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.01.5 ENERGY SAVING. Partial cut-off of the street lighting after mid-night is
required in roads and interchanges. This shall be achieved by putting off one-half (½)
of the installed luminaries on high masts and columns.

This shall be made by Timer installed in the Packaged S/S and contactors installed
in the high masts and columns. The connection between the timer and contactor shall
be by pilot cables.

Specifications of timer, contactor and pilot cables to be submitted for approval by the
Engineer.

7.01.6 SAFETY CLEARANCE. Prior to start of construction, the Contractor must

check all drawings and to ensure that all obstacles have been taken into account and
to submit to the Engineer a list of obstacles at site including existing O/H power lines,
water and drainage pipes, underground power and telephone lines.

Clearances (vertical and horizontal) required by the authorities to be achieved.

Construction drawings showing all services and the new installations to be signed by
both Contractor representatives and the Engineer before commencement of the
construction of bases of High Mast, Lighting Columns, Traffic Signals Poles, Overhead
Gantry Signs, Sign Boards, Packaged Sub-Stations, uPVC Ducts, Trenches, etc.

7
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.02 - 33 KV SYSTEM

7.02.1 33 KV DISTRIBUTION NETWORK.

7.02.1.1 DESCRIPTION. The distribution shall consist of 33 KV overhead line 3

phases and earth wire shall be installed along the roads to feed the 33/0.4 KV sub-
stations installed in the positions shown on the drawings. The work and structure shall
consist of the following: foundations and steel tubular pole, pole extension, angle steel
crossarm, angle braces, hardware, ACSR conductors, earth wire, surge arrestors, fuse
disconnect, porcelain insulators, guys, earthing, steel accessories, cut out with fuses,
etc. The Contractor shall supply all materials and labor installation testing and putting
into satisfactory operation the 33 KV network, including connecting the new 33 KV lines
to the existing SCECO overhead lines. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain full
specification from SCECO to ensure full compliance with their requirements.

The positions of connection points shall be determined by SCECO. The line

conductor size shall be in accordance with SCECO requirements.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

33 KV Overhead Electrical Line, Copper Conductor
33 KV Overhead Electrical Line, Aluminum Conductor

7.02.2 MATERIALS.

7.02.2.1 Poles. Octagonal Steel poles of different heights and working loads are
classified as follows:

ULTIMATE LOAD HEIGHT CLASS

1490 Kg 12M 12 OC1/1490

1900 Kg 12M 12 OC2/1900
3750 Kg 12M 12 OC3/3750
4960 Kg 12M 12 OC4/4960
4917 Kg 13M 13 OC5/4917

Poles will be limited to a deflection of five percent (5%) of their exposed height by
using the following formula:

The exposed height is the total pole length less one and three-quarters (1.75) meters
for High Voltage poles and less one and one-half (1.5) meters for Low Voltage Poles.

Thus, for a twelve (12) meter HV pole, the deflection is (12 - 1n.75) x 5/100 - 512.5
millimeters.

In order to determine the deflection, poles will be tested at Working Load. Working
Load will be defined as Ultimate Load divided by a safety factor of one and one-half
(1.5) or WL=UL/1.5.

8
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The analysis and design of the poles shall include the effect of deflection at the top.
Local buckling criteria shall be in accordance with provisions of "Design of Steel
Transmission Pole Structures" by ASCE.

Poles are required to be supplied with holes predrilled in order to attach crossarms,
braces and eye bolts, etc., according to the type of structure required, in conformity with
SCECO construction standards. Manufacturer shall supply poles with plugs installed
to seal off all holes. These may be plastic and must be a fine fit within the hole.

Manufacturer shall supply caps or plugs to cover the top of each pole. Such caps
may be made of durable plastic or composition materials and shall be tight fitting, with
an air hole in each cap.

The pole shall be of octagonal cross-section. It shall be of taper design and

aesthetically pleasing. It shall be manufactured from sheet steel or grade as specified
by the relevant standard. It shall preferably be made in one (1) piece. When more than
one (1) piece is needed, the Contractor will give details of the method of joining the
pieces. The octagonal sections will be made by cold forming.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the details of his calculations to evaluate
the working stresses in the steel poles for the specified loading and dimensions.

The calculations shall include sketches of applied loads and indicate the breaking
stress of the pole and pole top deflection.

The welding process used will conform to the CSA Standard W59-1977 for the grade
of steel to be used.

All welds will be performed, ground to a smooth finish, and tested before galvanizing.

Quality control method specified by SCA Standard W59-1966 shall be used to check
the quality of all the welds.

All poles, cross arms, braces, brackets, etc. after manufacture will be hot-dip
galvanized in accordance with the ASTM standard No. A123-73.

No further manufacturing, touching or modifications will be performed on them after

they have been galvanized.

Each item will be checked for adherence, mass of zinc deposited, continuity of
coating, after the process of galvanizing.

All holes shall be drilled before galvanizing.

The holes will have specified dimensions as measured after galvanizing.

The poles shall be provided with a permanently fixed metal tag at five thousand
(5000) millimeters from the built-end with the following information punched on it:

9
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

- Class, working load in kilograms

- The year of manufacture
- The length of pole in meters

All poles will be color coded by placing two (2) sets of specific spectral bands of color,
one (1) set at the build-end of the pole and the second set at a distance of four
thousand five hundred (4500) millimeters from the built-end of the pole. Each band will
be one hundred (100) millimeters wide and shall be separated by one hundred (100)
millimeters. This code will give immediate identification of the Pole's application in the
field.

Color coding shall be carried out as per SCECO requirements.

The manufacturing tolerance on the overall dimensions of the items of material will
be as follows:

± 1.0% - on overall height of the pole

± 0.5% - on overall length of crossarms and braces
± 0.5 mm - on hole diameters
± 0.8 mm - on the centers of the holes

7.02.2.2 Pole Extensions. Pole extensions must be made to fit precisely into their
parent pole. They must be capable of rapid and easy assembly in the field. The
composite pole must be capable of carrying the load normally carried by the parent
pole. They shall be manufactured to the same specifications.

7.02.2.3 Crossarms. Crossarms shall be fabricated from angle sections of ASTM

grade A36 steel with minimum tensile strength 42.186 kilograms per square millimeter.
(60,000 pounds per square inch).

The crossarms shall be supplied with holes predrilled to attach it to poles and for
installation of insulators, etc.

The required size and location of holes in the Crossarm shall be as specified in
SCECO construction standard drawings. Crossarms of different length are classified
as follows:

X-Section Length

L 100 x 100 x 10 mm 2000 mm

L 100 x 100 x 10 mm 3000 mm
L 100 x 100 x 10 mm 1500 mm
L 100 x 100 x 10 mm 2500 mm
L 100 x 100 x 10 mm 3000 mm
L 150 x 100 x 10 mm 3000 mm

10
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.02.2.4 Braces. Braces shall be fabricated from equal angle sections of ASTM
grade A36 steel with minimum tensile strength 42.186 kilograms per square millimeter
(60,000 pounds per square inch).

Braces shall be supplied with holes pre-drilled to attach it to pole end crossarm. They
are classified as follows and shall have the dimensions, size and location of holes as
detailed in SCECO construction standard drawings:

X-Section Length

L 40 x 40 x 6mm 800 mm
L 40 x 40 x 6mm 800 mm one end clipped
L 40 x 40 x 6mm 1500 mm
L 40 x 40 x 6mm 1500 mm one end clipped
L 40 x 40 x 6mm 1460 mm
L 40 x 40 x 6mm 1460 mm one end clipped left hand
L 60 x 60 x 5mm 2370 mm
L 40 x 40 x 6mm 1460 mm one end clipped right hand
L 40 x 40 x 8mm 1270 mm

7.02.2.5 Bracket, Plate and Strap. These shall be fabricated from ASTM grade A36
steel with a minimum tensile strength of 42.185 kilograms per square millimeter (60,000
pounds per square inch).

They shall be supplied with pre-drilled holes wherever specified. The material items
are described as follows and in conformity with SCECO construction standard drawings:

Item Description

Flat Steel Bracket

Double Arming Plate
Back Strap
Pole bearing plate five (5) millimeters thick for light pole
Pole bearing plate ten (10) millimeters thick for heavy pole

7.02.2.6 Saddles. Saddles are required to be installed on poles of round section to

provide a flat surface for crossarms of angle iron specified in the crossarm section.

Two (2) types of saddles are required: bold-on and wrap-on type. The wrap-on type
saddle will, in addition, provide a means of attaching crossarms and brace to pole by
means of locking type steel wraps. The wraps shall be of stainless steel or galvanized
steel. It shall be of dimensions to meet the mechanical strength specified below. It
shall be supplied in lengths of thirty (30) meters. Locking clamps and tool for locking
wraps shall also be supplied.

11
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The saddles shall be galvanized steel and have the following mechanical strengths.

Mechanical Strength

1. Bolt-on type saddle for x-arm 2500 kilograms

2. Bolt-on type saddle for brace 2500 kilograms
3. Wrap-on type saddle for x-arm 7000 kilograms
4. Wrap-on type saddle for brace 500 kilograms

7.02.2.7 Porcelain Insulators. The entire porcelain surface of the insulators that will
be exposed after assembly shall be glazed, so as to ensure zero (0) moisture
absorption and relative freedom from imperfections. The glaze shall be of a type to
minimize radio and TV interference and corona discharge. Retaining pins and locking
devices shall be of phosphor bronze high quality galvanized steel, galvanized in
accordance with ASTM specification for zinc coating (hot-dip) on iron and steel
hardware. Each insulator unit shall bear symbols identifying the manufacturer and
giving the year of manufacture. The marking shall be visible and durable. The cement
sealing between insulator porcelain and base shall be so processed to avoid any
surface cracking. The top groove radius of insulators shall be suitable for aluminum
stranded conductors up to a size of two hundred twenty-five (225) square millimeters.

7.02.2.8 ACSR Conductor. Sizes of ACSR conductor to be used shall be specified

by SCECO and are classified as follows:

1. One hundred twenty-five and one-tenth (125.1) square millimeters or equivalent,

with six (6) strands of aluminum and one (1) strand of steel, rated tensile strength of
three thousand eight hundred twenty (3820) kilograms. It shall be of code name
"PENGUIN.”

2. Two hundred fifty-five and one-tenth (255.1) square millimeters or equivalent,

with eighteen (18) strands of aluminum, and one (1) strand of steel, rated tensile
strength of five thousand five hundred eighty-three kilograms. It shall be of code name
"PELICAN.”

The aluminum conductor shall be hard-drawn aluminum wire and the steel core
wire shall be of zinc coated hard-drawn steel. The weight of zinc coating shall be not
less than as specified in CSA standard C49-65.

The wires used in the construction of the stranded conductor shall, before
stranding, have the mechanical and electrical properties specified in CSA Standard
C49-65.

The aluminum shall be of highest purity commercially obtainable and shall not be
less than ninety-nine and one-half percent (99.5%). It shall be Electrical Conductor
Grade EC having a minimum conductivity of sixty-one percent (61%) IACS. If
requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a certificate of analysis giving
the percentage and nature of any impurities in the metal from which the wire is made.

12
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The wires of the stranded conductor shall be smooth and free from all
imperfections consistent with good commercial practice.

The stranding of the conductor shall be round concentric and lay factor as per CSA
Standard C49-65.

Joints in wires shall only be made as specified CSA Standard C49-65.

7.02.2.9 Tie Wire. Tie wire, line guard and preformed line ties.

1. Tie wire. The Tie wire shall be five (5) millimeters diameter round annealed
dead soft aluminum wire suitable for binding fourteen and three-tenths (14.3) millimeter
bare ACSR and twenty and sixty-seven hundredths (20.67) bare ACSR to line post
insulation EEI/NEMA class 57-35 F neck.

2. Line Guards. The line guards shall be preformed aluminum alloy type suitable
for conductor diameters fourteen and three-tenths (14.3) millimeter bare ACSR and
twenty and sixty-seven hundredths (20.67) millimeter bare ACSR and having suitable
abrasion characteristics, and of suitable lengths for use on signal and double insulator
supports. The line guard for double insulator support shall be suitable for insulator
spacing of two (2) millimeters. The ends shall be so shaped as to give the minimum
acceptable corona characteristics. They shall be center marked for proper alignment
during installation.

3. Line Ties. The preformed line ties for top and side groove shall be suitable for
binding the following two (2) sizes of conductors to EEI/NEMA class 57-3SF neck post
insulators:

(1) One hundred twenty-five and one-tenth (125.1) square millimeter ACSR
with line guard giving an overall diameter of twenty and eighty-three hundredths (20.83)
millimeters.

(2) Two hundred fifty-five and one-tenth (255.1) square millimeter ACSR with
line guard giving an overall diameter of twenty-eight (28) millimeters.

The preformed line ties shall be made of alumoweld wire to tie and fit exactly
insulator-conductor lie guard, eliminating the movement of conductor relative to
insulator and to wind, which can create the unbalanced pull. They must have suitable
lengths for use on single and double insulator support. They shall be color coded for
proper identification.

4. Preformed Dead-End for Messenger. This is required for dead ending the
ACSR messenger of quadruplex cable. It shall be of aluminum alloy, suitable for one
hundred twenty-five and one-tenth (125.1) square millimeter ACSR fourteen and three-
tenths (14.3) millimeter diameter bare conductor. It shall be suitable to fit standard
hardware such as thimbles, eye nuts, clevises. They shall be color coded for proper
identification.

13
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.02.2.10 Ground Wire (Earth Wire). The ground wire shall be forty-two and forty-
one hundredths (42.41) square millimeters stranded Class A, as per ASTM B8-72, soft
drawn bare copper. Technical date pertaining to this class of wire :

- Stranding 7/2.76 mm
- Conductor diameter (mm) 8.43
- Conductor weight (Kg/km) 377
- Resistance B.C. at 20o C. (Ohms/km) 0.415

The ground wire supplied shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standard
B8-72 and all values specified shall be considered minimum guaranteed values.

7.02.2.11 Guy Wire. The guy wire shall be made up of seven (7) strands and the
overall diameter shall be about nine and two tenths (9.2) millimeters. The grade of wire
shall be CSA Grade 160 as specified by CAS G12-1970. The guy wire shall have a
guaranteed minimum breaking of not less than five thousand four hundred sixty (5460)
kilograms. The individual wires before stranding shall meet the physical properties such
as tensile strength, elongation and ductility strength as specified by CSA G12-1970.
The zinc coating on wires before stranding shall be by hot dip galvanizing. The weight
of zinc coating and adherence of coating will meet the requirement of CSA G12-1970.
The method of stranding the wire shall be as specified in CSA G12-1970. No splicing
or joining of strands shall be permitted after manufacture. Welds made prior to wire
drawing are permitted. Joining of individual wires by welding during stranding operation
is permissible and such joints shall be dispersed sufficiently so as to maintain the
minimum breaking strength specified. Such joints, however, will be recoated in a
workmanlike manner with zinc or lead-zinc compound containing a minimum of fifty
percent (50%) zinc.

7.02.2.12 Dropout Power Fuse. The dropout power fuse shall have the following
characteristics:

1. It shall be used for protection of the distribution transformer and the 33/0.4 KV
package substations. The transformers MV voltage level and size shall be as specified
in the project Special Specifications.

2. The Dropout Fuses specifications; nominal voltage, maximum design voltage,

continuous current rating, symmetrical interrupting rating, insulator creepage distance
to ground, shall strictly follow the latest SCECO requirements.

3. It shall be expulsion, drip out type with single element, open, with solid power
fuse suitable for the protection of distribution transformers.

4. It shall be single insulator style, suitable for direct vertical mounting on angle
steel crossarms.

5. Terminals and hardware shall be suitable for clamping.

14
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

(1) One hundred twenty-five and one-tenth (125.1) square millimeter ACSR
stranded conductor.

(2) Two hundred fifty-five and one-tenth (255.1) square millimeter ACSR
stranded conductor.

6. The fuse links for power fuse shall be EEI-NEMA standard. Fuse links shall be
rated to the requirements or as recommended by SCECO.

They shall be suitable for mounting on steel crossarms and shall be supplied
complete with mounting accessories and hardware.

7. Mounting brackets and accessories shall conform to applicable EEI-NEMA

Standards and galvanized in accordance with Standards specificized.

They shall be constructed for outdoor, pole top application.

They shall be mild exhaust, low arc energy construction, suitable for heavy duty
application.

7.02.2.13 Pole Line Hardware. The pole line hardware listed below shall be of
galvanized steel, galvanized in accordance with ASTM Standard A 123-71 for steel
parts and A 153-71 for hardware.

Cotter pins shall be of stainless or bronze.

7.02.2.13.1 Shoulder Eye Bolts. These are required for LV dead end and angle
poles. It shall be of sixteen (16) millimeter (_") diameter and made with a snug fitting
washer welded into place suitable to the pole section. The eye shall be thirty-eight (38)
millimeters by fifty (50) millimeters and the thickness should be twelve and seven-tenths
(12.7) millimeters. Length shall suit the installation equipment. Shoulder eye bolts shall
have a mechanical strength of fifty three thousand four hundred N (12,000 pounds) in
accordance with CSA Standard C83-1970.

7.02.2.13.2 Eye Nut. Eye nut shall be manufactured in accordance with CSA
Standard C83-1970 and have a mechanical strength of fifty-three thousand five
hundred (53,500) N (12,000 pounds). The eye nut shall have a tapped hole for sixteen
(16) millimeter (_ inch) diameter bolt. The oval eye shall be thirty-eight (38) by fifty (50)
millimeters (1½"x 2") thickness twelve and seven-tenths (12.7) millimeters (½ ni ch) to
fit the standard NEMA clevis opening of seventeen and forty-six hundredths (17.46)
millimeters (1.46 inches).

7.02.2.13.3 Bolts. Bolts shall be of carbon steel grade "A" in accordance with
ASTM standard A 307-74. Bolts dimensions and strength shall be to SCECO
requirements. The thread shall be coarse thread series as per ANSI standard having
a class 2A tolerance for bolts and class 2B tolerance for nuts. All bolts shall be supplied
with nuts.

15
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.02.2.13.4 Expansion Anchors. Anchors shall be threaded, expansion type,

suitable for attaching fittings to masonry wall. It shall be suitable for use with stud
(double arming bolt) of diameter sixteen (16) millimeters (_") and length as required, at
least sixty-three and one-half (63.5) millimeters (2½").

7.02.2.13.5 Square Washers. Three (3) types of washers are required:

1. Flat square galvanized washers shall be of six and thirty-five hundredths

(6.35) millimeters (½") and nine and one-half (9.5) millimeters (_") thicknesses and one
hundred two (102) millimeters (four inches (4") area suitable for bolts of diameters
sixteen (16) millimeters (_") and twenty-five and four-tenths (25.4) millimeters (1").

2. Curved square galvanized washers for round poles shall be of four and
seventy-six hundredths (4.76) millimeters (3/16") thickness and sixty-three and one-half
(63.5) millimeters (2½") area suitable for bolt or diameter sixteen (16) millimeters (_").

3. Bevel washer shall be used with transformer platform. It shall be of hot dip
galvanized suitable for bolt of diameter sixteen (16) millimeters (_"). All washers will
conform to CSA standard G164 after galvanizing.

7.01.2.13.6 Suspension Clamps. The clamps are required to permit turning

angles of up to one hundred twenty degrees (120 o) without the need of dead ending the
conductor.

1. Suitable for clamping one hundred twenty-five and one-tenth (125.1) square
millimeter, stranded conductor (code name "PENGUIN") together with the line guard,
which will have an overall diameter of approximately twenty-eight (28) millimeters. It
shall have a minimum mechanical strength of 54779 N.

2. Suitable for clamping twenty-five and one tenth (25.1) square millimeters,
stranded conductor (code name "PELICAN" together with the line guard, which will
have an overall diameter of approximately twenty-eight (28) millimeters. It shall have
a minimum mechanical strength of 54779 N.

It shall be suitable for use with suspension insulators EEI/NEMA class 52-4. It
shall be of cast aluminum and supplied complete with aluminum keeper, Ubolts, cotter
bolt, cotter pin and hardware for clamping the specified conductors. Suspension clamp
shall be in accordance with CSA Standard C83-1970.

7.02.2.13.7 Strain Clamp Straight Type. The straight line strain clamps with
clevis ends are required for dead-ending one hundred twenty-five and one-tenths
(125.1) square millimeters. ACSR messenger having a diameter of fourteen and three-
tenths (14.3) millimeters (.563"). The clamp body shall be manufactured from forged
aluminum alloy which has been heat treated. All connector fittings, will be of forged
steel, hot-dip galvanized. U-bolts, nut and lockwashers will be of galvanized steel.
Cotter pins will be of stainless steel. Clamp shall have a mechanical strength of
37473N.

16
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.02.2.13.8 Strain Clamps, Quadrant Type. These are required for clamping the
overhead conductors in dead ends. It shall be of one (1) piece cast aluminum type, with
clevis opening suitable for eye nut of thickness twelve and seven-tenths (12.7)
millimeters. They shall be:

1. Suitable for clamping ACSR stranded conductor one hundred twenty-five and
one-tenth (125.1) square millimeters and shall have minimum mechanical strength of
37474 N.

2. Suitable for clamping ACSR stranded conductor two hundred fifty-five and
one-tenth (255.1) square millimeters and shall have minimum mechanical strength of
54779 N.

It shall be supplied complete with cotter bolt and cotter pin and shall be suitable
for hot line maintenance.

7.02.2.13.9 Messenger Suspension Clamp. Messenger clamps are required for

messenger attachment to poles in straight runs and small angles up to five degrees (5 o).
It shall be of two (2) pieces, with curved ends, suitable for clamping ACSR messenger
of size one hundred twenty-five and one-tenth (125.1) square millimeters. It shall be
supplied complete with two (2) bolts and a hole in the center of nineteen (19) millimeters
and have a mechanical strength of 82974 N.
7.02.2.13.10 Wedge Grip. Wedge grips are required to dead end quadruplex
services. The shell of wedge shall be of aluminum. The wedge and wire bail shall be
of stainless steel. The wire bail shall be of stainless steel and of detachable type. The
wedge grips shall have the minimum mechanical strength as listed below and suitable
for use with the size of conductors specified.

The following sizes of wedge grips are required:

1. Wedge grip for dead ending quadruplex cable service with full size neutral
messenger of one hundred twenty-five and one-tenth (125.1) square millimeters ACSR,
having a mechanical strength of 11125 N.

2. Wedge grip for dead ending quadruplex cable service with full size neutral
messenger of thirty-three and six-tenths (33.6) square millimeters ASC, having a
mechanical strength of 4450 N.

3. Wedge grip for dead ending quadruplex cable service with full size neutral
messenger of thirteen and three-tenths (13.3) square millimeters ASC, having a
mechanical strength of 4450 N.

7.02.2.13.11 Straight Clevis Extension with Eye. Two (2) lengths of straight
clevis with eye are classified to SCECO requirements to connect the suspension
insulator to the pole structure.

1. Total length of clevis with eye shall be two hundred fifty-four (254) millimeters
(10").

17
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Total length of clevis with eye shall be three hundred fifty-five (14")
millimeters.

The clevis shall be manufactured from steel and be hot dip galvanized. It shall
have a minimum mechanical strength of 54779 N (12,300 lbs) and be manufactured in
accordance with CSA standard C83-1970.

The clevis shall have an opening of seventeen and forty-six (17.46) millimeters
(11/16") and will be complete with a sixteen (16) millimeter (5/8") diameter cotter belt,
nut and cotter pin. Cotter pin shall be of bronze or stainless steel. The clevis eye shall
have an opening of seventeen and forty-eight hundredths (17.48) millimeters (11/15")
and an eye thickness of twelve and seven-tenths (12.7) millimeters (½") suitable for use
with a clevis type insulator EEI/NEMA class 92-4.

7.02.2.13.12 Y-Clevis Extension. Y-Clevis extension is required to connect the

suspension insulators to the pole structure.

The Y-Clevis shall have forty-five degree (45o) clevis opening, with sixteen (16)
millimeters (5/8") diameter cotter bolt complete with nut and cotter pin and an overall
length of two hundred fifty-four (254) millimeters (10"). Cotter pin shall be of bronze or
stainless steel.

The Y-Clevis shall have a minimum mechanical strength 54779 N (12,300

pounds), and be manufactured in accordance with CSA standard C83-1970. The clevis
eye shall have an opening of seventeen and forty-six (17.46) millimeters, and the eye
thickness shall be twelve and seven-tenths (12.7) millimeters, suitable for use with the
clevis type suspension insular EEI/NEMA class of 52.4.

7.02.2.13.13 Y-Clevis Eye. Y-Clevis with eye is required for connecting pole guy
straps to guy wire. The Y-clevis shall have a forty-five degree (45o) opening with a
nineteen and one-tenth (19.1) millimeter (½")cotter bolt complete with nut and cotter
pin. The cotter pin shall be of bronze or stainless steel.

The overall nominal length of Y-clevis eye shall not exceed one hundred fifty-two
(152) millimeters (6"). The eye of the Y-clevis shall have a diameter of twenty and six-
tenths (20.6) millimeters (13/16") and a width of nineteen and one-tenth (19.1)
millimeters (½").

The Y-clevis eye shall be manufactured in accordance with CSA standard C83-
1970 and shall have a mechanical strength of 133,492 N, 13,608 kilograms or thirty
thousand (30,000) pounds.

7.02.2.13.14 Anchor Shackle. It shall be used in part with items (f) or/and (k)
specified above. It shall be a hot dip galvanized steel piece, ninety (90) turning,
complete with cotter bolt and cotter pin. Shackle shall be of twelve (12) millimeter
thickness, and be of eye dimensions of seventy and six-tenths (70.6) millimeters length

18
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

and sixteen and seven-tenths (16.7) per seventeen and three-tenths (17.3) millimeter
radius.

7.02.2.14 Guy Accessories. Guy fittings shall be suitable for nine and fifty-two
(9.52) millimeter (3/8") diameter galvanized steel stranded guy wire with breaking
strength of 53562 N conforming to CSA grade 160, and be manufactured in accordance
with CSA standard C83-1970.

All guy fittings shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM stranded A 123-71
and hardware in accordance with ASTM standard A 153-71 and are classified as below:

1. Guy Dead-End Fittings. These are required for attaching the guy strand to steel
tubular pole. It shall be suitable for guying angles of thirty degrees to forty degrees (30-
40o).

Two (2) types of guy dead and fittings are required:

(1) Bolt-on Type. It shall be an angle guy attachment with thimble eye fitting
provided with a bolt hole for bolting to steel pole using a bolt of diameter sixteen (16)
millimeters (5/8").

The guy eye shall be shaped into a smooth thimble to prevent injury to the guy
strand.

(2) Pole Band. The pole band is required for attaching guys and suspension
insulators to poles without drilling holes in poles.

It shall consist of a four (4) piece pole band, a pair of connecting links with holes
and one (1) end for nineteen (19) millimeters (½") diameter bolt and holes at the other
end of forty-four and four-tenths (44.4) millimeters (1½") diameter suitable for the guy
thimble to be used.

Two (2) sizes of pole bands are required:

- for strapping to pole diameters between one hundred ninety (190)

millimeters (7½") to three hundred four (304) millimeters (12").

- for strapping to pole diameters between two hundred eighty (280)

millimeters (11") to four hundred six (406) millimeters (16").

Each pole band shall be supplied with 4-bolts of nineteen millimeter (½")
diameter, each bolt with 4-nuts. The bolts shall be of steel as per ASTM standard A-
325 and hot dip galvanized.

2. Side Walk Guy Fittings. These are required for use in place of ordinary head
guy in congested areas. It shall consist of pole plate, unthreaded steel pipe and clamp
fitting. The fitting on plate and clamp shall be by means of set screw to avoid the use
of threaded pipe.

19
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

(1) Pole Plate: It shall be provided with pipe fitting for fifty and eight-tenths
(50.8) millimeters (2 inch I.P.S.) diameter pipe. Pole plate shall be strapped to steel
tubular poles by means of two (2) piece pole bands.

Pole plate and bands shall be of one (1) piece construction or means
provided on bands to bolt plate on to the pole bands. Pole bands are required to strap
the pole plate to poles of diameter two hundred sixty-five (265) millimeters and three
hundred ten (310) millimeters. The dimensions of pole diameter are preliminary and
shall be confirmed by the Engineer at the time of order.

(2) Clamp Fitting: It shall be provided with pipe fitting for fifty and eight-tenths
(50.8) millimeters (2 inch I.P.S.) diameter pipe.

It shall also be provided with clamps with grooves to accommodate guy

strand of size specified above.

(3) Steel Pipe: The pipe shall be of galvanized steel, unthreaded, fifty and
eight-tenths (50.8) millimeters (2 inch I.P.S.) diameter and length one and one-half (1½)
meter. The side walk guy fitting shall be supplied complete with all necessary
hardware.

3. Guy Thimble. Half oval guy thimble shall be grooved to fit the guy wire of nine
and fifty-two hundredths (9.52) millimeters (3/8") diameter.

4. Anchor Rod. The rod shall be of hot-dip galvanized steel, with double thimble
eye. It shall be supplied complete with hardware for attaching the rod to steel cross
plate anchor specified below in item (e). These sizes are required:

(1) 25.4 mm (1") dia. and 2.44 m (8 ft.) long

(2) 19 mm (3/4") dia. and 2.44 m (8 ft.) long
(3) 19 mm (3/4") dia. and 1.83 m (6 ft.) long

5. Steel Cross-Plate Anchors. The cross-plate anchor shall be of hot-dip

galvanized steel. The anchor shall comprise of two (2) steel plates, heavy duty, welded
at right angles. It shall be suitable for use with anchor rods of diameters nineteen (19)
millimeters (3/4") and twenty-five and four-tenths (25.4) millimeters (1").

Two (2) sizes are required:

(1) 1612 square centimeters (250 square inch) area

(2) 2580 square centimeters (400 square inch) area

6. Preformed Guy Grip. It shall be suitable for dead-ending CSA grade one
hundred sixty (160) guy wire to the above specified dead ends and guy rods. It shall
be of galvanized steel strands and breaking strength not less than 53562 N.

The guy strand shall not slip through the grip at load equal to or less than 53562N.

20
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7. Guy Guard. Guy guards shall be of tapered half round section, made of steel
sheet or aluminum of high impact resistance and yellow in color. It shall be two
thousand four hundred forty (2440) millimeters in length.

It shall be provided with galvanized bolted clamps for attaching it to guy wire of
diameter nine and fifty-two (9.52) millimeters (3/8") or anchor rods of diameter twenty-
five and four-tenths (25.4) millimeters (1").

8. Link Stick. It shall be used as an insulated extension link on guys at the

locations where the jumper clearance is inadequate. It shall consist of a fiber glass rod
with eye fittings at both ends, suitable for a guy wire of nine and fifty-two (9.52)
millimeters diameter. The eye fittings shall be of malleable iron, hot dip galvanized and
shall be supplied complete with hardware.

It shall be used on a system of the following characteristics:

Nominal system voltage 33 KV

Maximum system voltage 36 KV
Bill 170 KV
Impulse flashover positive 210 KV
Impulse flashover negative 260 KV

It shall have minimum breaking strength of 53562 N.

7.02.2.15 Energy Meter. This standard applies to induction type kilowatt hour
meters for the measurement of electrical energy at a frequency of sixty (60) Hz.

The kilowatt hour meter will comply in all respects with IEC publication No. 521
(latest edition). Maximum demand indicators shall be as per IEC 211 (latest edition).
Reactive energy meters will comply with IEC publication No. 145 (latest edition).
Acceptance and testing by SCECO general will be carried in accordance with IEC 514
(latest edition). SCECO will carry out an additional accuracy test on polyphase meters
with one (1) phase loaded.

7.02.2.15.1 System Condition.

Three (3) phase, earthed neutral system, frequency sixty (60) Hz. for HV.

Three (3) phase, four (4) wire system, frequency sixty (60) Hz. for LV.

7.02.2.15.2 Terminals.

1. The clearance of the terminal block and between the terminals and
surrounding parts shall be not less than three (3.0) millimeters.

2. Terminal cover shall be short and sealable.

21
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

3. The order of the phases at the terminals shall be, looking from the front, from
left to right.

Incoming Red Outgoing Red

Incoming Yellow Outgoing Yellow
Incoming Blue Outgoing Blue
Incoming Neutral Outgoing Neutral

7.02.2.15.3 Register.

1. The register shall be of the cyclometer type. For 5(6)A, transformer operated
meters, it shall have six (6) digits including two (2) decimals. For direct connection
meters, it shall have six (6) digits including one (1) decimal.

2. For 6(6)A, transformer operated meters a removable blank plate, to be

engraved by SCECO Central, shall be fixed adjacent to the register to indicate the
necessary multiplication factor.

3. The figures shall be clearly and indelibly marked or engraved in old Arabic
on the drums. The figures shall not be less than four (4) millimeters high; they shall be
in white on a black background.

The decimal(s) shall be encircled in red on the plate. As an alternative, the

figures can be printed on white on a red background. For the decimals, the European
script is also acceptable.

The fast moving drum shall be subdivided and marked on the edge in one
hundred (100) divisions.

7.02.2.15.4 Arrangement. The nameplate of the meter shall have all information
in Arabic and English and should indicate that the meter is the property of SCECO,
Central Region. All meters will be suitable for surface mounting on a plain surface or
adjustable rails. Fixing will be from the front with one (1) hole at the top center and two
(2) at the bottom. The meters shall have maximum dimensions of:

Width 180 millimeters

Depth 150 millimeters
Length 270 millimeters

A sample should be supplied in any type of meter not previously approved by

SCECO Central. If the type is approved, the sample shall remain the property of
SCECO and the material to be supplied shall correspond in all respects to that sample.

7.02.2.15.5 Current and Voltage Transformers.

1. Current Transformers: To IEC publication No. 185 (latest edition) Burden 10

VA, accuracy class 0.5.

22
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

(1) High Voltage CTs

Ratios 800/5; 600/5; 400/5; 300/5; 150/5; 75/5

When applicable.

(2) Low Voltage CTs

Ratios 3000/5; 1500/760/5; 500/250/5
When applicable.

They shall be encapsulated with base fixings and busbar fixings,

independently removable.

2. Voltage Transformers: To IEC publication No. 186 (latest edition).

Burden 100 VA, accuracy class 0.1.

Ratios 13800/110; 13800/120; 33000/115; 33000/110; 132000/115 Volts.

When applicable.

7.02.2.16 GRP Cabinet.

1. Three (3) neon lamps, green color is requested. An average life of forty
thousand (40,000) hours is expected.

They should be easily visible from the outside, without removing the cabinet
cover, through a window. Any alternative device with the same expected average life
shall be considered.

2. Internal wiring shall be of two and one-half (2.5) square millimeters stranded
copper, black PVC insulated cable, as per SCECO drawings. Cables shall be
numbered at each end. At the meter brackets, the cables shall be equipped with flat
blade type crimp terminals.

3. One (1) sealed cable bushing shall be provided in the base of the cabinet to
accommodate the incoming cable. In addition, cable clamp fitting shall be provided
inside the cabinet to support the cable.

A knock-out in the back of the cabinet shall also be provided to accept a cable
coming through the wall directly into the cabinet.

4. Provision shall be made for bonding any metallic part inside the cabinet to the
armoring of the cable.

5. The meter cabinet shall be of impact proof and high temperature heat resistant
self extinguishing hot molded glass fiber reinforced polyester insulating material with at
least twenty-five percent (25%) of fiber-glass (weight).

23
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6. It shall be vermin, dust and weather-proof and suitable for surface mounting.
The front shall take the form of a cover complete with fittings such that it can be locked
or sealed in position.

7. Two (2) unbreakable and heat resistant windows shall be fitted in the front
cover, one (1) for meter reading, one (1) for seeing the lamps. The meter window shall
be at the top of the cabinet cover.

8. An unbreakable, heat resistant and transparent pocket with a hinged lid, shall
be provided in the front cover to accommodate the Electricity Account.

9. There should be sufficient space to make off the cables and to install the meter
within the cabinet.

10. The finished color of the cabinet is preferably green but a suitable somber
alternative color such as gray would be sufficient.

11. Four (4) fixing brackets shall be provided as per SCECO standard
construction drawings.

12. A sample should be supplied to SCECO for checking and approval. The
sample will correspond in all respects with the cabinets to be supplied.

As an alternative, two (2) samples could be submitted: one (1) for checking the
internal arrangement of the cabinet and one (1) for checking the quality of the material
itself. If specifically requested by SCECO central the KWh meter 5(6)A shall be
supplied.

7.02.2.17 Surge Arrestor. The surge arrestors supplied shall be:

- Suitable for use on 33 KV system, with equipment Bill 170 KV.

- Distribution class and intermediate class.
- Ten (10) kA standard duty cycle operations.
- Complete with clamp type terminals for line conductor and ground leads.
- Intermediate class surge arrestors are to be installed at both source side and
load sides of the recloser and at the cable termination structure.

Each surge arrestor supplied shall be furnished with a galvanized steel mounting
bracket suitable for mounting the arrestor on steel cross arms complete with hardware.
Mounting brackets and accessories shall conform to applicable EEI-NEMA standards.
The surge arrestors shall be of time-proven valve type construction, using high quality
ceramic valve blocks, scaled in one (1) piece ceramic housing.

The surge arrestors shall be supplied with high speed dropout or lockout feature,
permitting isolation of the arrestor in the event of failure and also providing visible
indication of the faulted arrestors.

24
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The line terminals shall be positive clamp type for copper stranded conductor up to
forty-two and four-tenths (42.4) square millimeters.

The ground terminals shall be positive clamp type suitable for copper standard
conductors up to forty-two and four-tenths (42.4) square millimeters.

All terminals shall be supplied complete with hardware, ready for connecting the
specified conductors. A protective cover of suitable material shall be provided with
each arrestor.

Each arrestor shall be provided with a permanent, weatherproof name plate giving
arrestor type, voltage minimum creepage distance style and date of manufacture
mounted for ease of identification. The name plate shall be both in the Arabic and
English languages.

7.02.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. The Contractor shall verify with the

successful manufacture of the steel poles and conductors details of the necessary civil
works which must be completely suitable for the equipment. All sizes and details must
be checked before concrete is poured and revised with the approval of the Engineer
and SCECO. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to supply all materials and to
construct in the correct site location the concrete bases for the poles and to connect
with SCECO authorization the new installed 33 KV lines to the existing overhead lines.

Typical atmospheric conditions are as follows:

Isokeraunic level 10 to 2 days/annum

Maximum average air temperature per 24hours 38o C
Minimum air temperature -2o
Maximum air temperature 45o
Relative humidity 100%
Annual precipitation 30 to 100 mm in the form of
drizzle
Maximum wind velocity 110 km/hour
Air pollution Sand, grain sized, dust and traces
of salt laden spray
Solar radiation constant 120 watts/square centimeter
Elevation above sea level 1000 meters

N.B. The Contractor shall verify with the concerned authorities in the area of the
project to ensure that the above typical atmospheric conditions are applicable otherwise
the actual atmospheric conditions shall be applied.

7.02.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The 33 KV overhead lines shall be measured

by linear meter, put into operation after testing and acceptance as meeting these
General Specifications in all respects and being acceptable to the supply authority.

7.02.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities, measured as provided

above, will be paid at the contract unit price for the pay items listed below that are

25
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for supplying all
materials, installation, testing and putting in operation, for all labor, equipment, tools,
supplies and other items necessary for the proper completion of the work as specified
in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

70201 33 kV Overhead Electrical Line, Copper conductor, 125 Linear Meter

mm2 ACSR Penguin with Earth Cable, 85 mm2

70202 33 kV Overhead Electrical Line, Copper Conductor, 255 Linear Meter

mm2 ACSR Pelican with Cable, 85 mm2

70203 33 kV Overhead Electrical Line, Aluminum Conductor, Linear Meter

125 mm2 ACSR Penguin with Earth Cable, 85 mm2

70204 33 kV Overhead Electrical Line, Aluminum Conductor, Linear Meter

255 mm2 ACSR Pelican with Cable,
85 mm2

70205 33 kV Overhead Electrical Line, Copper Conductor Linear Meter

___mm2 Penguin with Earth Cable, 85 mm2

70206 33 kV Overhead Electrical Line, Copper Conductor, ___ Linear Meter

mm2 ACSR Pelican with Earth Cable 85 mm2

70207 33 kV Overhead Electrical Line, Aluminum Conductor Linear Meter

___mm2 ACSR Penguin with Earth Cable 85 mm2

70208 33 kV Overhead Electrical Line, Aluminum Conductor ___ Linear Meter

mm2 ACSR Pelican with Earth Cable 88 mm2

26
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.03 - 33/0.4 KV PACKAGED SUB-STATIONS

7.03.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of supplying, installing the necessary
bases, testing and putting into satisfactory operation, factory assembled package sub-
stations at the locations indicated upon the drawings and connecting to the medium
voltage electrical supply and to the Low Voltage distribution network.

The MV supply shall be extended from the 33 KV overhead lines installed under this
Contract. The Contractor shall include for all necessary work on existing roads to
facilitate the extension of the MV supply. The Contractor shall also supply all materials
and labor for connecting the station base with the existing duct runs.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

33000/400V KVA Electrical Substation

7.03.2 MATERIALS. The packaged sub-station shall be completely self-contained,

mounted upon integral base and factory assembled in a totally enclosing, aesthetically
acceptable cladding, vandalproof and weatherproof housing ready for placing into
position upon a concrete or similar base pad.

The substation shall comprise: Transformer with LV and MV cable boxes, LV

switchgear and control panel.

The substation shall be suitable in all respects for continuous operation or rated load
in direct sun with surface temperatures reaching seventy degrees Celsius (70o C.).

Finish: The substation final finish and final color shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.

All live parts shall be completely enclosed in lockable compartments, which shall be
adequately segregated for maximum safety, giving all necessary access.
Compartments shall be ready to accept cables from the bottom side. (A safety fence
and concrete crashworthy safety barrier shall be provided around the substation with
a lockable gate).

7.03.2.1 Transformer Compartment. The transformer compartment containing a

transformer which shall have the following characteristics based on an ambient
temperature of fifty degrees Celsius (50o):

Rated KVA As specified.

Voltage Ratio 33,000 volts primary, 400/230 volts

secondary, no load.

Winding connections Primary - delta three (3) wires, Secondary -

star with neutral point brought out insulated
for earthing externally.

27
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Phases/Frequency Three (3) phase/60 HZ MV off-circuit at plus

Tappings five percent (+5%) to minus five percent (-
5%) in two and one-half percent (2½ %)
steps.

Tapping Method Externally operated off-circuit tap change

switch with indicator plate and facilities for
locking in any operating condition.

Phase Notation DYn 11

Impedance Five percent (5%) minimum.

Noise Level Less than forty-eight (48) DB

Allowable temperature Fifty degrees Celsius (50o C.) measured by

increase rise in resistance of windings.

Cooling Oil natural with radiator sealed type ONAN to

give full rated output in fifty degrees Celsius
(50o C.) ambient temperature.

Fittings Lifting lugs, skid base, earthing terminal, dial

type thermometer, rating and connection
plate, pressure relief disc.

Permanent continuous oil temperature reading is required.

A vent shall be provided to prevent rupturing of the transformer. This shall be

capable of withstanding the variations in pressure in normal service.

An oil level indicator shall be fitted with the sight glass fitted to the same side of the
transformer as the tap change control handle.

MV & LV cable boxes shall be located on opposite sides of the transformer with the
cable entry coming vertically from below.

Boxes shall have a removable front and bottom cover.

Dry type terminations shall be used for both MV and LV cables and palms of brushing
shall be flat and vertical in order to facilitate easy termination of cables which shall be
fitted with crimped or compression lugs and covered with heat shrinkable shrouds.

The bottom cover of the MV cable box shall be designed to accommodate standard
compression glands; A M10 stud with nut shall be provided to earth the cable armor.

28
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Where deemed suitable for a compact design, the input and output connections shall
be by means of purpose made copper busbars designed to fit the two (2) package
substation compartments and of adequate rating and fault level.

7.03.2.2 Low Voltage Switchboard. The low voltage switchboard shall be a

separate enclosed metal compartment complete with lockable doors within the housing
and comprising:

A triple pole and neutral earth leakage type, manual operated main circuit breaker of
the molded case pattern rated as detailed on the drawings, 500 volt, of adequate
rupturing capacity not less than the available short circuit current from the substation
transformer, and complete with overload and short circuit release mechanisms thermal
and magnetic trips. It shall be of the current operated type.

A triple pole contactor rated as indicated on the drawings.

Electronic Timer (Quartz) type for energy saving installation: timer shall be capable
to operate without interruption in case of power supply loss for at least two hundred
(200) hours.

An ammeter with selector switch and current transformers. Ammeter to be fitted with
maximum demand indicator.

A voltmeter with selector switch and protection fuse.

A KWh meter, current transformer and accessories with a glass window to be

mounted on the S/S frame (enclosure) to SCECO Specifications (if required).

The layout, rating and number of outgoing triple and single pole circuit breakers, shall
be as detailed on the drawings, 500 volt 10,000 ampere rupturing capacity and
complete with overload and short circuit release mechanism comprising thermal and
magnetic trips.

All breakers shall be molded case circuit breakers type, calibrated at fifty degrees
Celsius (50o C.) for setting the magnetic trip coils.

A single phase socket outlet of 16-250 DIN rating range complete with plug top and
a twelve (12) watt fluorescent lighting fittings of the integral battery/inverter emergency
type with switching facility to allow emergency light to be initiated shall be mounted
adjacent to the LV and MV switchgear panels and shall be prewired in the factory.

The substation shall have the following facility:

Photo Electric Control: The LV panel circuits serving the street lighting and signs
shall be supplied through triple pole contactors which shall be photo-electric controlled.
An override facility shall be provided for maintenance. The photo-electric controls shall
consist of an omni-directional cadmium cell thermal relay of high quality employing solid
state photo-variable conductance elements giving a 2:1 on/off ratio with sensitivity to

29
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

switch on lights when the daylight illumination reduces to seventy (70) lux. This allows
for the high pressure sodium lights striking time, taking account of the rather fast rate
of daylight intensity drop off in the region. The photo-electric cell shall be mounted at
the top of the substation on a three (3) meter high post.

7.03.2.3 Accessories. Each substation shall be fitted with a compartment housing

the accessories to form a complete operating installation including the following:

One (1) pair of rubber gloves.

One (1) set of spare fuses.
One (1) set of safety and operating instructions.
MV line diagram.
LV circuit diagram with designations.

7.03.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. The Contractor shall agree with the

successful manufacturer of the packaged substation on the details of the necessary civil
works which must be completely suitable for the equipment and all sizes and details
must be checked before concrete is poured and revised with the approval of the
Engineer where necessary. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to supply all
materials and to construct in the correct site location the concrete base, and to connect
it to the cable duct system and subsequently to carry out the installation, cabling and
connecting up of the packaged substation, including making off the ends of the MV
supply cables.

The Contractor shall install the packaged substation unit from the concrete base
supplying and using the appropriate lifting gear to ensure that no damage occurs.
When correctly located, the unit shall be anchored in position and tested before and
after connecting up of the incoming and outgoing cables is carried out.

Approved Manufacturers:

Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.

7.03.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The 33000/400 V electrical substation shall

be measured as a complete unit furnished, installed, including safety barriers and
fencing and put into operation after testing and acceptance as meeting these General
Specifications in all respects. No separate measurement will be made for New Jersey
Barriers or safety fence as this work is considered subsidiary to the substation item.

7.03.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities, measured as provided

above, will be paid for at the contract unit price for pay items listed below as specified
in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for supplying all materials,
installation of the substation, testing and putting into operation, for all labor, equipment,
tools, supplies and other items necessary for the proper completion of the work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

30
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

70301 33000/400 V (100) KVA Electrical Substation Unit

70302 33000/400 V (160) KVA Electrical Substation Unit

70303 33000/400 V (200) KVA Electrical Substation Unit

70304 33000/400 V (300) KVA Electrical Substation Unit

70305 33000/400 V (500) KVA Electrical Substation Unit

70306 33000/400 V (600) KVA Electrical Substation Unit

70307 33000/400 V (___) KVA Electrical Substation Unit

31
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.04 - 13.8 KV INTAKE SWITCHING STATIONS

7.04.1 DESCRIPTION. The Electric Power Company (SCECO) and suburbs shall give
a supply at 13.8 KV 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 Hz to the MV Intake Switching Stations which
will be positioned as shown on the Drawings.

This work shall consist of installing foundations and constructing the necessary
building, roofing and putting into satisfactory operation and Medium Voltage switching
station. Supplying, installing and testing the contained switchgear. The Contractor
shall supply all materials and labor for connecting the building to the existing cable duct
systems.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

13.8 KV Intake Switching Station

7.04.2 MATERIALS.

7.04.2.1 The Enclosure. The enclosure will house the switchgear as detailed and
in addition contain adequate space for the Power Company equipment. It shall consist
of a concrete block built building cement rendered internally and externally with
concrete roof and foundation containing cable trench for the power company distribution
cabling. Doors shall be steel lockable and adequate louvers with sand traps where
applicable for natural cooling shall be provided. The complete building to conform to
the requirements of the Power Company and generally as shown on the Drawings.

Enclosed lighting fittings, self-contained emergency lighting fittings (switched battery

inverted type), general purpose socket outlet and plug, together with all associated
wiring from a central distribution unit shall be included and supplied from a voltage
transformer installed on the network circuit breaker cubicle.

7.04.2.2 Equipment. The MV intake and switching units shall comprise panels
containing the following equipment as shown on the Drawings:

MV Switching Station at the location shown on the drawings.

Space only for two (2) incoming circuit breakers provided by power company.

Space only for one (1) metering panel provided by the power company.

Network control - One (1) circuit breaker.

Outgoing circuit breakers - Number as indicated on the drawings.

The MV equipment shall consist of standard panel extensible type units suitable for
mounting within the purpose built station. Equipment shall be suitable in all respects
for an ambient temperature of fifty-five degrees Celsius (55o C.) and forming a
completely integrated self-supporting assembly.

32
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The MV panel shall be equipped with floor mounting framework, skid base, internal
wiring, labels and cable sockets all as required for the complete installation. The
assembly shall be arranged for cubic access from below without dismantling any
structural members.

Circuit Breakers: These shall be manually and motor charged mechanisms suitable
for local and remote control fitted with integral earthing.

Type SF6 or Vacuumor Minimum Oil or Bulk

Oil metalclad.

System Nominal Voltage 13,800 Volts.

Rated Current at 55o C. 630 Amps.

Basic Impulse Level 95 KV.

Power Frequency Withstand Voltage 38 KV.

Frequency 60 Hz.

Short Circuit Rating 500 MVA.

Busbar Shall be electrolytic grade copper rated

1200 Amperes at fifty-five degrees
Celsius (55o C.) The entire busbar shall
be made of individual module sections.
The busbar system shall be suitable to
withstand the mechanical stress for the
rated short circuit currents. The busbars,
connections and their insulated supports
shall be of approved construction and
mechanically strong with molded
insulation completely encasing each
busbar and connections.

Indication Compensations for expansion and

contraction of the busbar and enclosure
arrangement due to temperature
changes shall be provided.

Protection 1. Network Control Neon indicator connected to voltage

(Incoming C.B.) capacitator divider indicating voltage
presence.

In order to achieve discrimination with the

outgoing circuit breakers, tripping of the
breakers shall be by current transformer

33
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

energized trip coils operated from a direct

acting inverse definite minimum time
relay activated from primary current
transformers for overcurrent and earth
fault protection. Protection to be suitable
for a normal load current of
approximately 150/200 Amps. Protection
2. Outgoing C.B.s relay shall be flush mounted on the front
panel and shall meet from all respects
with SCECO relevant standard and
specifications.

Tripping of the breakers shall be by direct

acting primary trip coil or by means of
current transformer operated direct acting
trip coils for overcurrent and earth fault
protection. Protection to be suitable for a
normal load current of approximately
50/100 Amps and discriminate with
Voltage Transformer network circuit breakers. Protection
relays shall be flush mounted on the front
panel and shall meet from all respects
with SCECO relevant specifications.

The Network Control Panel shall be

provided with A 5000 to 10,000 VA
voltage transformer connected at the
primary side of the circuit breaker. This
VT shall be fitted with fuses and supply
the lighting, socket outlets and any
Cable Boxes and auxiliaries needed to serve the switching
Cable Glands station building. Specifications for a
separate transformer may be proposed
by the Contractor for the Engineer's
review and approval.

For incoming cables from SCECO to the

Network Control Panel, cable box and
cable gland shall be in accordance with
the power company requirements.
Accessories.
For outgoing cables, cable boxes and
cable glands shall be suitable for the use
with the type and cross section of the
cables used as specified or indicated on
the drawings.

Each injection and switching station shall

34
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

be supplied with all necessary

accessories to form a complete operating
installation including the following:

- One (1) pair of rubber gloves.

- One (1) 13.8 K volt potential tester.
- One (1) set of spare fuses for each fuse
switch.
- One (1) set of safety and operating
instructions.

The above equipment excluding the rubber mat shall be supplied within a special
purpose made wall mounted cupboard and shall be painted white inside and outside
and be complete with a mortise type lock and three (3) keys.

Each intake switching station shall be equipped with a framed and glazed MV line
diagram indicating the breakers, switches, etc

7.04.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. The Contractor shall verify with the

successful manufacturers of the Medium Voltage intake and switching station that the
civil works as described are suitable for each equipment. All sizes and details must be
checked and revised where necessary. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to
ensure compatibility of civil and electrical work.

The units of equipment shall be lifted into position within the station upon prepared
foundations. The station switchboards shall be complete or in sections as necessitated
for transportation. They shall be fixed into position and all equipment connected up as
required. The units shall then be tested before and after incoming and outgoing cables
are terminated.

7.04.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The intake switching station shall be

measured as the number of units acceptably furnished and put into operation after
testing and accepted as meeting the General Specifications in all respects and being
acceptable to the Supply Authority. This unit measurement shall include complete
construction and equipping of the buildings including cells, service transformer,
connections, fees and the cost of power connection from SCECO.

7.04.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities, measured as provided

above will be paid for at the contract unit prices for the pay items listed below that are
as specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for supplying
all materials, installation, testing and putting into operation, all labor, equipment, tools,
supplies, including any fees or cost whatsoever due to the Local Supply Authority for
supply connection, and any other items necessary for the proper completion of the work
as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

35
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO. PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

70401 13.8 kv Intake Switching Station including cells,
service transformer, reinforced concrete building
and connections, fees and the cost of power
connection from SCECO. Unit

36
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.05 - 13,800/400 VOLT PACKAGED SUBSTATIONS

7.05.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of supplying, installing the necessary
bases, testing and putting into satisfactory operation, factory assembled package
substations at the locations indicated upon the drawings and connecting to the medium
voltage electrical supply and to the Low Voltage distribution network.

The MV supply shall be extended from the MV switching station or MV overhead line
installed under the Contract or from the existing substations installed under previous
Contracts, as specified or shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall include for all
necessary work on the existing roads to facilitate the extension of the MV supply. The
Contractor shall also supply all materials and labor for connecting the substation base
with the existing duct runs.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

13,800/400V KVA Electrical Substation

7.05.2 MATERIALS. Packaged substations shall be completely self-contained,

mounted upon integral base and factory assembled in a totally enclosing, aesthetically
acceptable cladding, vandalproof and weatherproof housing ready for placing into
position upon a concrete or similar base pad.

The substation shall comprise: MV switchgear (ring main unit), transformer, LV

switchgear and control panel. The MV switchgear (RMU) either to be incorporated in
the substation enclosure or to be separately mounted on separate concrete base to
SCECO requirements (if required).
The substation shall be suitable in all respects for continuous operation or rated load
in direct sun with surface temperatures reaching seventy degrees Celsius (70o C.).

Finish: The substation final finish and final color shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.

All live parts shall be completely enclosed in lockable compartments, which shall be
adequately segregated for maximum safety, giving all necessary access.
Compartments shall be ready to accept cables from the bottom side.

7.05.2.1 Medium Voltage (MV) Switchgear. The medium voltage switchgear shall
consist of the following units:

1. Two (2) ring main oil switches

2. One (1) fuse oil switch with fuses mounted in a separate compartment.

The ring main oil switches shall be fitted with cable boxes and glands suitable to
receive the incoming three (3) core copper conductors, XLPE insulated steel or
aluminum armored cable 15 KV rated of cross section as specified. The cables shall
be connected to the fixed mating contacts by flexible connectors which shall be

37
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

provided with a slotted hole to compensate for manufacturing and installation

tolerances.

The ring main switches and the fuse switch shall have operating positions at the
front of the unit and the fuses shall be capable of withdrawal by direct pull from this
position for replacement. The fuse access shall be interlocked to prevent it being
opened unless the fuse switch is "OFF" and earthed. The switching mechanisms shall
be "independent manual" type with a quick "make and break" feature, speed of
operation being independent of the operator.

The fuse switch shall have a trip button or trip automatically by fuse operations.
In the event of any fuse "blowing" all three (3) phases of the fuse shall trip open and
an interlock shall be provided to ensure that the fuse switch cannot be put back into
service until the faulty fuse has been replaced.
The MV switchgear shall have the following characteristics:
1. Main Unit:

Rated voltage 13.8 KV

Impulse withstand 95 KV
Power Frequency Test Voltage 38 KV for 1 minute
Short circuit rating 500 KVA
Busbar current rating 630 Amps
Frequency 60 Hertz

2. Switch Fuse:
Normal Current 150 Amps with fuses rated to
requirements.
Making Capacity
Breaking Capacity 47 KA peak prospective at 13.8 KV (500
MVA)

21 KA symmetrical prospective (500 MVA

at 13.8 KV).

3. Oil Switches:
Normal Current 630 Amps
Making Capacity 47 KA at 13.8 KV (500 MVA)
Short Time Current 21 KA for three (3) seconds.

4. The RMU shall be equipped with sensitive earth fault indicator.

38
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.05.2.2 Transformer Compartment. The transformer compartment containing a

transformer which shall have the following characteristics based on an ambient
temperature of fifty degrees Celsius (50o C.).

Rated KVA As specified.

Voltage Ratio 13,800 volts primary 400/230 volts

secondary, no load.
Winding Connections
Primary - delta three (3) wires, Secondary
- star with neutral point brought out
insulated for earthing externally.

Phases/Frequency Tappings Three (3) phase/60 Hz.

Tapping Method MV off-circuit at plus five percent (+5%)

to minus five percent (-5%) in two and
one-half percent (2½%) steps.

Externally operated off-circuit tap change

switch with indicator plate and facilities for
locking in any operating condition.

Phase Notation DYn 11

Impedance Five percent (5%) (minimum).

Noise Level Less than forty-eight (48) DB

Allowable temperature Forty-five degrees Celsius (45o C.)

measured by increase rise in resistance
of windings.
Cooling
Oil natural with radiator sealed type
ONAN to give full rated output in fifty
degrees Celsius (50o C.) ambient
Fittings temperature.

Lifting lugs, skid base, earthing terminal,

dial type thermometer, rating and
connection plate, pressure relief disc.

Permanent continuous oil temperature reading is not required, however, provision

shall be made for the use of a thermometer, as and when required, by the fitting of a
thermometer pocket. This shall be fitted with a weather-proof removable cap.

39
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

A vent shall be provided to prevent rupturing of the transformer. This shall be

capable of withstanding the variations in pressure in normal service.

An oil level indicator shall be fitted with the sight glass fitted to the same side of the
transformer as the tap change control handle.

7.05.2.3 Low Voltage Switchboard. The low voltage switchboard shall be a

separate enclosed metal compartment complete with lockable doors within the housing
and comprising:

A triple pole and neutral earth leakage type, manual operated main circuit breaker of
the molded case pattern rated as detailed on the drawings, 500 volt, of adequate
rupturing capacity not less than the available short circuit current from the substation
transformer, and complete with overload and short circuit release mechanisms thermal
and magnetic trips. It shall be of the current operated type.
A triple pole contactor rated as indicated on the drawings.

Electronic Timer (Quartz) type for energy saving installation: Timer shall be capable
to operate without interruption in case of power supply loss for at least two hundred
(200) hours.

An ammeter with selector switch and current transformers. Ammeter to be fitted with
maximum demand indicator.
A voltmeter with selector switch and protection fuse.

A KWH meter, current transformer and accessories with a glass window to be

mounted on the S/S frame (enclosure) to SCECO Specifications (if required).

The layout, rating and number of outgoing triple and single pole circuit breakers, shall
be as detailed on the drawings, 500 volt 10,000 ampere rupturing capacity and
complete with overload and short circuit release mechanism comprising thermal and
magnetic trips.

All breakers shall be molded case circuit breakers type, calibrated at fifty degrees
Celsius (50o C.) for setting the magnetic trip coils.

A single phase socket outlet of 16-250 DIN rating range complete with plug top and
a twelve (12) watt fluorescent lighting fittings of the integral battery/inverter emergency
type with switching facility to allow emergency light to be initiated shall be mounted
adjacent to the LV and MV switchgear panels and shall be prewired in the factory.
The substation shall have the following facility:
Photo Electric Control: The LV panel circuits serving the street lighting and signs
shall be supplied through triple pole contactors which shall be photo-electric controlled.
An override facility shall be provided for maintenance. The photo-electric controls shall
consist of an omni-directional cadmium cell thermal relay of high quality employing solid
state photo-variable conductance elements giving a 2:1 on/off ratio with sensitivity to
switch on lights when the daylight illumination reduces to seventy (70) lux. This allows
for the high pressure sodium lights striking time, taking account of the rather fast rate

40
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

of daylight intensity drop off in the region. The photo electric cell shall be poled
mounted at a height of three (3) meters and fitted to the top of the substation.

7.05.2.4 Accessories. Each substation shall be fitted with a compartment housing

the accessories to form a complete operating installation including the following:
One (1) pair of rubber gloves.
One (1) set of spare fuses.
One (1) set of safety and operating instructions.
MV line diagram.
LV circuit diagram with designations.

7.05.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. The Contractor shall agree with the

successful manufacturer of the packaged substation details of the necessary civil works
which must be completely suitable for the equipment and all sizes and details must be
checked before concrete is poured and revised with the approval of the Engineer where
necessary. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to supply all materials and to
construct in the correct site location the concrete base, and to connect it to the cable
duct system and subsequently to carry out the installation, cabling and connecting up
of the packaged substation, including making off the ends of the MV supply cables.

The Contractor shall install the packaged substation unit from the concrete base
supplying and using the appropriate lifting gear to ensure that no damage occurs.
When correctly located, the unit shall be anchored in position and tested before and
after connecting up of the incoming and outgoing cables is carried out.

Approved Manufacturers:

Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.

7.05.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The 13,800/400 volt electrical substation

shall be measured as the number of units acceptably furnished, installed, including
safety barriers and fencing, and put into operation after testing and accepting as
meeting these General Specifications in all respects. No separate measurement will
be made for safety barriers or fencing as this work is considered subsidiary to the
substation item.

7.05.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities, measured as provided

above, will be paid for at the contract unit price for the pay items listed below specified
in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for supplying all materials,
testing and putting into operation, for all labor, equipment tools, supplies and other
items necessary for the proper completion of the work as specified in Subsection
1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications. No separate payment for
safety barriers or fencing will be made as this work is considered subsidiary to the
substation item.

41
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

70501 13,800/400 V (100) KVA Electrical Substation Unit
70502 13,800/400 V (160) KVA Electrical Substation Unit
70503 13,800/400 V (200) KVA Electrical Substation Unit
70504 13,800/400 V (300) KVA Electrical Substation Unit
70505 13,800/400 V (500) KVA Electrical Substation Unit
70506 13,800/400 V (1000) KVA Electrical Substation Unit
70507 13,800/400 V (___) KVA Electrical Substation Unit

SECTION 7.06 - 13.8 KV MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES

7.06.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of supplying and installing of cables
and tray including all necessary jointing, terminating and testing. The cables shall be
pulled into the ducts and draw-pits provided or installed directly buried in ground, as
specified or shown on the drawings.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

13.8 KVA Medium Voltage Cables

7.06.2 MATERIALS. Cables shall be single or three (3) cores of cross section as
specified with stranded copper phase conductors, cross-linked polyethylene insulated
(XLPE), semiconductive layer, copper foil PVC inner sheath, aluminum wire or strip
armored, PVC outer sheath and rated 8.7/15 KV, in compliance with IEC 502:1983.
The cable shall be suitable for a maximum conductor operating temperature of ninety
degrees Celsius (90o C.). The armoring on all cables shall be bonded to the metalwork
and to the earthing system.

The semiconductive layer shall be capable of being removed without the use of tools
to ensure that the XLPE core insulation is unscratched or damaged in any way.

7.06.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. Power shall be distributed to the

transformer substations at 13,800 volts, three (3) phases, three (3) wires, 60 Hertz, by
one (1) of the following procedures:

1. From the MV intake station and fed out from the outgoing circuit breakers then
looped into the packaged substations installed under the project. MV cables shall be
single or multi cores of the type and cross-sections as specified on the drawings.
or

2. From the existing packaged substation installed under previous contracts, then
looped into the substations installed under the project. MV cables shall be single or
multi cores of type and cross-sections as specified on the drawings.

42
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

or

3. From the existing 13.8 KV SCECO cable networks to the packaged substations
installed under the project. Type, cross-sections and method of installation for the MV
cables shall be in accordance with SCECO requirements.

4. Before any cable is installed, duplicate copies of the test certificate giving details
of the results of tests made in accordance with the "Standards" shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval. For XLPE cable these tests shall include the application of
voltage tests minimum twenty-five percent (25%) above the working voltage level and
checking the permitted discharge level in pico-Coulombs (maximum 20 PC's).
5. Cable Jointing and Terminating.
(1) All cable joints and terminations shall be complete with the correct specified
materials, tapes, stress cones, glands and bonds.
(2) All joints whether terminations to or through joints shall be carried out strictly
in accordance with the cable manufacturers recommendations.
(3) Only skilled jointers shall be employed for the jointing of cables. The
qualifications of the jointers shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the work
commencing on site. Joints shall be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless this is
contrary to the chosen cable manufacturers recommendations. A sample site
constructed cable termination and through-joint shall be submitted to the Engineer prior
to any jointing commencing on site. The samples shall be constructed in the presence
of the Engineer and shall be available to the Engineer for any manufacturer's test and
inspection.
(4) Termination of cables shall be either crimped or soldered. Use of either
method shall be verified with the Engineer prior to commencement.
(5) All through-joints shall be complete with manufacturer's recommended metal
sleeves and shall be filled with recommended type compound.
(6) All through-joints shall be located in a cable draw-pit.
6. After completion of the installation, draw-pits should be cleared out and the covers
correctly refitted.
Approved Manufacturers:
Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.
7.06.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Medium voltage cables shall be measured by
the linear meter installed in ducts or clipped on tray or run directly into the ground as
specified in these General Specifications.
Where three (3) single core cables are run laid in trefoil these shall be measured as
installed per linear meter including three (3) single core cables suitably taped and
installed.
7.06.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities, measured as provided
above, shall be paid for at the contract unit prices for the pay items listed below that are
specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for furnishing all
materials, including tray where required, installation, testing and putting into operation,
for all labor, equipment, tools and supplies and all other items necessary for the proper

43
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

completion of the work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these

General Specifications.
PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

70601 13.8 kVA Medium Voltage Cables, single wire armored, Linear Meter
PVC/XLPE Insulated (3x185) mm2
70602 13.8 kVA Medium Voltage Cables, single wire armored, Linear Meter
PVC/XLPE Insulated (3x95) mm2
70603 13.8 kVA Medium Voltage Cables, single wire armored, Linear Meter
PVC/XLPE Insulated (size) mm2

44
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.07 - LOW VOLTAGE CABLES

7.07.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of supplying and installing of cables
and tray including all necessary jointing, terminating and testing. The cables shall be
pulled into the ducts and draw-pits provided.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Low Voltage Cable

7.07.2 MATERIALS. Unarmored Cables. The LV cables shall be single or multicore

cables of cross section as specified with stranded copper conductors, PVC or XLPE
insulated, PVC outer sheath.

Armored Cables. The LV cables shall be multicore cables of cross section as

specified with stranded copper conductors, PVC or XLPE insulated, single wire
armored, extruded PVC outer sheath.

Cables shall be 600/1000 volts grade in compliance with the standards. Color coding
of the different phases and neutral or L-N and E shall be in conformity with the
standards. The cable shall be suitable for a maximum conductor operating temperature
of seventy degrees Celsius (70o C.).

The cable voltage designation and manufacturer shall be embossed on the cable
oversheath.

Cable Accessories.

Cable Glands. Cable glands shall be made of brass, bright dipped and the gland
shall consist of the gland body with polychloroprene inner sheath sealing ring, armor
clamping cone, armor nut and captive polychloroprene outer sheath sealing ring, brass
solid washer and earth tag to which the separate earthing conductor shall be attached.

The gland shall be of such a design that during assembly no torque will be induced
in the cable sheath or armor. Also, overtightening of the seals when clamping armor
wires shall be prevented.

Each gland shall be locked onto equipment with suitable brass backnuts. Also, at
every gland a polychloroprene shroud shall be fitted over the gland for additional
protection.

Cable Tray and Supports. All cable trays used throughout the project shall be
galvanized, flanged with heavy duty folded reinforced edge, and slotted to British
Admiralty pattern.

Cable channel used throughout shall be galvanized.

45
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.07.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

1. From the substations power shall be distributed at a declared voltage of three

hundred eighty (380) volts three (3) phase and neutral, four (4) wire, 60 Hertz.

2. The LV distribution 380/220 Volt shall be installed using PVC insulated,

PVC sheathed cable. A separate green PVC insulated cable shall be run alongside the
supply cable within the ducts and connected to the earth studs of the equipment.

3. The distribution shall be generally routed as shown on the Drawings and

consist of final sub-circuits from each packaged substation or feeder pillar.

4. The LV cables shall be pulled into a duct system in the ground as indicated
and routed through the draw-in pits at each position of equipment via the sleeves from
the pit to the base of the equipment.

5. The low voltage cable for the amenity lighting shall be run in the
underground duct system. From a drawpit located in the base of the abutment wall a
rising duct will be provided to route the cables up to a final drawpit via sleeves passing
through the abutment wall into the box structures of the viaduct. It shall be run in ducts
to the first amenity light position where it will be terminated in a metal clad junction box
with a three (3) pin waterproof socket mounted in the lid for recessed hingeable type
luminarie.

6. No through joints shall be allowed in LV cables where adequate

manufacturers length are available.

7. All through-joints, where allowed, shall be complete with the

manufacturer's recommended metal sleeves and shall be filled with recommended type
compound. Joints shall be located in a cable drawpit.

8. All cable joints and terminations shall be complete with the correct
specified materials, tapes, stress cones, glands and bonds. All joints whether
terminations to or through joints shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the cable
manufacturers recommendations.

9. Only skilled jointers shall be employed for the jointing of cables. The
qualifications of the jointers shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the work
commencing on site. Joints shall be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless this is
contrary to the chosen cable manufacturer's recommendations. A sample site
constructed cable termination and through-joint shall be submitted to the Engineer prior
to any jointing commencing on site. The samples shall be constructed in the presence
of the Engineer and shall be available to the Engineer for any manufacturer's test and
inspection.

10. Termination of cables shall be either crimped or soldered. Use of either methods
shall be verified with the Engineer prior to commencement.

46
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

11. After completion of the installation, drawpits should be cleared out and the covers
correctly refitted.

Before any cable is installed, duplicate copies of the test certificate giving details of
the results of tests made in accordance with the "Standards" shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.

Approved Manufacturers:

Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.

7.07.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Low voltage cables shall be measured by the

linear meter installed in ducts or clipped on cable tray or supports as specified in these
General Specifications.

7.07.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities, measured as provided

above, shall be paid for at the contract unit prices for the pay items listed below that are
as specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for furnishing
all materials, including cable tray where required, installation, testing and putting into
operation, for all labor, equipment, tools and supplies and all other items necessary for
the proper completion of the work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of
Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

70701 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insultated Stranded Copper Linear Meter
Wires, (4x6) mm2

70702 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insultated Stranded Copper Linear Meter
Wires, (4x10) mm2

70703 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insultated Stranded Copper Linear Meter
Wires, (4x16) mm2

70704 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insultated Stranded Copper Linear Meter
Wires, (4x25) mm2

70705 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insultated Stranded Copper Linear Meter
Wires, (4x35) mm2

70706 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insultated Stranded Copper Linear Meter
Wires, (Size) mm2

47
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.08 - LOW VOLTAGE FEEDER PILLAR

7.08.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of supplying, complete with necessary
base, mounting, testing and putting into satisfactory operation of feeder pillars which
shall generally be used to feed underpasses electrical lighting and power installation
and other installations as required.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Low Voltage Feeder Pillar

7.08.2 MATERIALS. The feeder pillar shall be totally enclosed, fully self-contained,
dustproof, weatherproof, and suitable for mounting outdoors exposed to dust, rain and
sunlight.

The cabinets shall be reinforced free standing structure, manufactured from three (3)
millimeters nominal thickness steel with bolted reinforcement corner construction and
shall be of the dwarf type with a bolting down root for mounting on a pre-formed
concrete base suitable for all incoming and outgoing cables from below ground level on
a duct system. Cabinets shall have two (2) hinged lockable opening doors to provide
full front access to the cabinet which shall be sized according to the equipment being
installed. The roof of the cabinet shall be slanted and shall have water drip edges
provided.

The feeder pillar shall be complete with all equipment and fittings incorporating
molded case circuit breakers controlling the main supply in and the outgoing circuits.
The pillar shall have the following main characteristics:

Voltage 1000 volts.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers Triple-pole rated as shown on the project

(MCCB) drawings.

Interrupting Capacity 25,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

Contactors Triple-pole, inductive type, rates as shown

on the project drawings.

Busbars Fully insulated, rates as shown on the

drawings.

Metering Ammeter with selector switch and current

transformers. Ammeter to be fitted with
maximum demand indicator.

Voltmeter with selector switch and protection

fuse.

KWH meter, current transformer and

48
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

accessories with a glass window to be

mounted on the F.P. frame (enclosure) to
SCECO specifications (if required).

Internal Cabling PVC/PVC single core 1000 volt grade with

copper conductors and rated as required
taking into account manufacturers
recommended temperature and"bunching"
derating factors. All internal wiring shall be
suitably "laced" or clipped.

Photo Electric Control The LV panel circuits serving the street

lighting and signs shall be supplied through
triple-pole contactors which shall be photo-
electric controlled. An override facility shall
be provided for maintenance. The photo-
electric controls shall consist of an omni-
directional cadmium cell thermal relay of
high quality employing solid state photo-
variable conductance elements giving a 2:1
on/off ratio with sensitivity to switch on lights
when the daylight illumination reduces to
seventy (70) lux. This allows for the high
pressure sodium lights striking time, of
daylight intensity drop off in the region. The
cell shall be pole mounted at a height of
three (3) meters and fitted to the top of the
feeder pillar.

All equipment, busbars, conductors, etc., within the pillar shall be fully insulated such
that there are no live parts of connections exposed all to the complete satisfaction of
the Engineer.

The feeder pillar shall have a fifty (50) millimeters by six (6) millimeters high
conductivity copper main earth bar for grounding purposes complete with test link (see
"earthing"). Also, permanently fixed to the inside of the door there shall be a distribution
diagram showing all circuit connections, MCCB ratings, cable sizes and references, etc.

The Feeder Pillar shall be secured against unauthorized access by means of wedge
locks protected by brass plugs and operated by a special key to be agreed with the
Engineer.
Finish. The Pillar final finish and final color shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

7.08.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. The Contractor shall agree with the

successful manufacturer of the feeder pillar, details of the necessary civil works which
must be completely suitable for the equipment and all sizes and details must be
checked before concrete is poured and revised with approval of the Engineer where

49
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

necessary. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to supply all materials and to

construct in the correct site location the concrete base, and to connect it to the cable
duct system and subsequently to carry out the installation, cabling and connecting up
of the feeder pillar.

The Contractor shall install the feeder pillar unit upon the concrete base supplying
and using the appropriate lifting gear to ensure that no damage occurs. When correctly
located, the unit shall be anchored in position and tested before and after connecting
up of the incoming and outgoing cables is carried out.

Approved Manufacturers:
Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.

7.08.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The low voltage feeder pillar shall be

measured as a complete unit, furnished, installed, including safety barriers and fencing,
and put into operation after testing and accepting as meeting these General
Specifications in all respects. No separate payment for safety barriers or fencing shall
be made as this work is considered subsidiary to the feeder pillar item.

7.08.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities measured, as provided

above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the pay items listed below that are
specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for supplying all
materials, installation, testing and putting into operation, for all labor, equipment tools,
supplies and other items necessary for the proper completion of the work as specified
in Subsection 1.07.2 "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.
PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:
ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT
70801 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (100) Amp Main C.B., (60) Unit
Amp Main Contactor
70802 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (150) Amp Main C.B., (150) Unit
Amp Main Contactor
70803 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (200) Amp Main C.B., (200) Unit
Amp Main Contactor
70804 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (300) Amp Main C.B., (300) Unit
Amp Main Contactor
70805 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (400) Amp Main C.B., Unit
(3500) Amp Main Contactor
70806 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (___) Amp Main C.B., Unit
(___) Amp Main Contactor

50
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.09 - HIGH MASTS

7.09.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of the supply, installation upon
prepared foundations the connection, commissioning and putting into satisfactory
service the high masts complete with operating mechanisms, luminarie support ring or
bracket, luminaries, control gear, energy saving contactor, wiring and distribution
equipment.

The mast luminarie support ring shall be designed to provide appropriate distribution
of lighting either in one (1) direction or in many directions thus making it possible to
concentrate the required number of luminaries on any zone and fix them rigidly in any
direction desired.

High mast earthing requirements are specified in Section 7.16 "Earthing" in these
General Specifications.

The high masts shall be installed on fixed foundations and/or bases which together
with the necessary ducts, drawpits, excavation and similar civil works shall be provided
by the Contractor in conformity with the requirements outlined in Section 7.19 "Civil
Works for Electrical Installation" and as further detailed in this Section of these General
Specifications.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

High Mast Lighting Including Control Gear and Power Distribution Box

7.09.2 MATERIALS.

7.09.2.1 Mast. The mast shall be of the height specified on the Drawings, hot dipped
galvanized of multi-sided or circular cross-section with a continuous taper made of
formed sheet steel in accordance with BS 4360 and electrically welded. They shall be
delivered to the site in manageable sections and be joined by means of pressure over-
lapping or slip joints which shall have a minimum length of one and one-half (1½) times
the diameter of the joint. Site welding will not be allowed.

The walls of the Masts shall have a minimum thickness of three (3) millimeters and
the steel used shall have a minimum tensile strength of five hundred ten (510) MN per
square meter and a minimum yield strength of three hundred fifty five (355) MN per
square meter.

The Mast and Mast Foundations shall be designed, manufactured and installed in
accordance with Technical Report No. 7 of the Institution of Public Lighting Engineers
(UK). The design shall be based upon Section 2 of Report No. 7 giving guidance on
the selection of the three (3) second gust wind speed, in this case of not less than one
hundred sixty (160) kilometers per hour, blowing in the most unfavorable direction at a
height of ten (10) meters above ground level. Appropriate reinforcement shall be
provided where necessary to increase the strength. Its behavior under wind induced
oscillation shall be such that it shall not fail due to fatigue and its oscillation shall be
damped to zero (0).

51
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The maximum deflection at the top of the mast shall not exceed two and one-half
percent (2½%) of the mast height with the wind speed detailed.

A steel flange of adequate thickness and free from laminations shall be welded to the
base of the mast developing fully the strength of the section. In addition,
supplementary gussets shall be provided between bolt holes where deemed necessary.

An access door shall be provided in the base of the mast of adequate dimensions to
permit clear access to the back plate installed for the mounting of the MCCB and the
junction box, winch, etc. The backboard shall be made of steel or other non-
hygroscopic material. The door shall be completely weatherproof fitted with a hidden
hinge and a heavy duty lock. The door area shall have appropriate reinforcement.

A stainless steel twelve (12) millimeter diameter earthing bolt shall be welded inside
the mast near the access door and shall be complete with cadmium plated steel
washers and nuts.

7.09.2.2 Luminarie Support Ring. The high mast luminarie support ring or carriage
shall be constructed of hot dipped galvanized steel channel fitted with the appropriate
number of luminaries, lamp gear mounting brackets, wiring chamber and mounting
plate. Where necessary it shall be in two (2) halves joined by bolted flanges to permit
removal from the erected mast.

The luminarie shall be mounted on the luminarie ring by means of a specially

designed bracket allowing it to be swivelled in any desired direction. It shall be possible
to lock it firmly in its position, thus preventing any rotation or falling while moving the
luminarie ring.

The head frame shall be covered by a shaped protective aesthetic canopy to give a
coordinated appearance of head frame and luminarie ring as detailed in the Plans or
Standard Drawings. If the details are included in the Plans or Standard Drawings the
Contractor shall submit his proposed details to the Engineer for approval as part of his
Electrical Shop Drawings submitted.

For masts fitted with a mobile luminarie ring, rollers with a centering mechanism shall
be provided to ensure a perfect alignment of the luminarie ring both axially and in
azimuth, while ascending or descending the mast. Rollers shall be made of water-
resistant, non-marking composition material with oil-impregnated bronze brushings. All
shafts and washers shall be stainless steel.

A weatherproof wiring chamber shall be provided and installed on the luminarie ring
and shall be equipped with the proper terminal blocks and neutral bar and shall include
facilities on the luminarie ring to allow testing of luminaries while in the lowered position.
The wiring chamber shall be fitted with an earthing stud accessible from inside and out
for earthing connections.

52
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The cable connecting the MCCB assembly at the base of the mast to the wiring
chamber on the luminarie ring, shall be flexible multicore copper conductor cable with
neoprene or approved equivalent high temperature insulation and sheath in accordance
with BS 6977 or IEC 277-6.

For mobile luminarie rings a multi-pin type plug and socket shall be fitted in the
flexible cable adjacent to the power control and distribution unit housing in the base, for
disconnection of the rising cable.

Color coding of the different phases shall conform to the standards. Each luminarie
shall have its own neutral conductor connected to the neutral bar.

The cables installed within the luminarie ring connecting each luminarie to the wiring
chamber shall be factory pre-wired avoiding the need for field wiring, and shall have
single core copper conductors with neoprene or cross-linked polyethylene or approved
equivalent insulation and sheath. Cables shall have two and one-half (2½) square
millimeter copper conductors with color coding of different phases being in conformity
with BS 6004, BS 6007, IEC 227 and IEC 245 or other equivalent standards.

7.09.2.3 Raising and Lowering Equipment. The head frame shall be hot-dipped
galvanized steel attached to the mast by means of a steel slip-fitter and secured by at
least four (4) stainless steel set screws. It shall be composed of a spun aluminum or
other approved weatherproof cover, housing the required number of steel rope pulleys
and associated accessories for the operation and powering of the luminarie ring.

Pulleys shall be of non-corrosive material grooved to suit the steel rope and cable
diameter, and fitted with stainless steel shafts. The pulleys shall be housed in a chassis
integral with a sleeve which slopes over the top of the mast and is secured axially and
in azimuth. The complete chassis assembly shall be manufactured from steel and hot
dipped galvanized. Arrangements shall be provided to ensure that the electric cables
and steel ropes are separated before passing over their respective pulleys, and close
fitting guides shall ensure that the cables and ropes cannot disengage the pulley during
operations.

The luminarie ring shall be supported by three (3) steel ropes coupled to two (2) steel
ropes and suspended from the double drum winch by means of a manufactured steel
coupling unit. A divider bar shall ensure the separation of the steel ropes during raising
and lowering.

Flexible stainless steel stranded wire ropes in accordance with BS 302 suitable for
the application, with a factor of safety of five (5) times the Safe Working Load of the
winch, shall support the luminarie ring assembly. Stops installed on the steel ropes or
alternatively welded to the mast shall support the luminarie ring assembly in the lower
position to within one and six-tenths (1.6) meters above the base of the mast. The
electric cable shall be prevented from winding around the steel hoisting ropes.

A multicore electrical power cable as specified shall be provided, terminating in the

base compartment with a multi-pin plug and socket coupler fitted with a guard ring for

53
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

the disconnection of the rising cable and at the mast head connected to the wiring
chamber fixed to the luminarie ring.

A steadying system shall keep the luminarie ring in the correct top position avoiding
any rotation around its vertical axis.

The luminarie ring shall be raised and lowered for installation and maintenance
purposes by means of a winching system specially designed to be installed and
removed through the access door at the base of the mast.

The luminarie ring shall be raised and lowered for installation and maintenance
purposes by means of a winching system specially designed to be installed and
removed through the access door at the base of the mast.

The winching system shall have a lifting capacity of at least twice the weight of the
luminarie ring assembly. The maximum winding torque during operation shall be
specified. The winching system shall employ double drums as a safeguard against a
single suspension steel wire rope failing.

Winches shall be capable of normal operation using a portable power tool which shall
be a multispeed reversible type incorporating a torque limiting device which can be
readily adjusted and locked. The power tool shall be equipped with a remote control
switch to allow the operator to stand clear of the moving head frame and using push-
button controls at the end of a five (5) meter long flexible lead. A mounting or support
frame shall be provided for locating and securing the power tool during operations.

Terminations of steel wire ropes on which drums shall not involve distortion or twisting
of the rope structure. One (1) full layer of turns shall remain on the drum when the
luminarie ring is full or lowered or alternatively the drums shall be grooved to ensure a
tidy lay.

Manually operated winches shall be provided with handles and shall incorporate a
torque limiter which can be readily adjusted and locked. Winches shall be completely
self-sustaining. Brakes or clutches which require adjustment or which can be affected
by moisture or lubricant shall not be used.

Winch gears shall be totally enclosed and self-lubricating by means of an oil bath.
Only lubricant recommended by the supplier shall be used. The gear ratio shall take
into account operational safety and speed.

An MCCB providing overload protection shall be incorporated to stop the luminarie

ring when the effort required by the winch exceeds the nominal load.

The winch shall be fitted with suitable equipment to allow it to stop in a safe manner,
without damage to the mast finish, in the event of a supply failure to the power tool.
The winding mechanism should then be capable of being operated by hand.

54
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.09.2.4 Finish. All welds shall be smooth with spatter removed and the interior and
exterior surfaces of the mast and ring shall be cleaned by pickling or blasting and shall
be free of any grease.

All components shall be hot dipped galvanized by total immersion in a bath of molten
zinc after completion of the fabrication. No further leveling up, finishing or modifications
shall be carried out after completion of the galvanizing process. The minimum
thickness of zinc coating shall be four hundred fifty (450) grams per square meter on
the inside and outside surfaces of the mast and ring. The galvanizing shall conform
with BS 729:1971.

Any damage to the galvanizing shall be rectified during erection by wire brushing the
affected area and treating with an approved zinc restorative. Sufficient material shall
be applied to provide a zinc coating at least equal in thickness to the galvanized layer.

The flange plate and bottom of the pole to a height of one-half (0.5) meters shall be
given an internal and external coating on all surfaces of heavy duty bitumen paint prior
to erection.

7.09.2.5 High Mast Distribution Equipment. The high mast base compartment
shall be fitted with a power control and distribution assembly installed in a pre-wired
weatherproof box opposite the access door inside the base of the mast.

The assembly shall consist of a surface mounting sheet steel weatherproof box with
a cover enclosing:

- One (1) three-pole MCCB together with a neutral link for luminarie circuits. The
ratings of the MCCB shall be in accordance with the Regulations and Standards and
suitable to the connected load and cable.

- One (1) single pole MCCB with neutral link for each luminarie circuit of a suitable
current rating.

- One-pole MCCB with neutral link connected to the incoming supply and serving
a 16A-250 V DIN socket outlet complete with a three (3)-pin plug to suit the raising and
lowering mechanism.

- A multi-pin plug and socket coupler with guard ring fitted with cable outlet for
connection to the multi-core electric power cable provided from the MCCB to the
luminarie ring wiring chamber.

The MCCB's shall be derated and calibrated to provide over-current and short circuit
protection when used in an ambient temperature of fifty degrees Celsius (50o C.) and
shall have the required breaking capacity. The incoming side of the triple pole MCCB
with neutral link shall be fitted with a four (4)-way, line-tap type terminal block, with each
terminal capable of accepting 2 x 35 square millimeter copper conductors.

55
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The multi-pin coupler for supply to the portable raising and lowering power tool shall
be connected to the MCCB via a flexible connection to ensure accessibility.

A contactor of the normally closed type, rated at fifty degrees Celsius (50o C.)
adequate for two and one-half (2½) KW and shall comply with the standards. The
contactor shall be used to control the partial cut-off operation of the street lighting after
midnight. The contactor shall be installed inside the H. Mast distribution box or inside
a separate weatherproof box opposite the access door inside the base of the mast.

Note:

Where MCCBs are referred to in this Specification it shall be taken to mean Molded
Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) conforming to IEC 57 or BS 4752 and suitable for
uninterrupted duty, having a rated current short circuit breaking capacity exceeding
three (3) KA.

7.09.2.6 Aircraft Obstruction Light. Where required by Civil Aviation Authorities,

two (2) red luminaries within cast aluminum bodies shall be fitted at the top of each high
mast attached to the movable luminarie ring with a purpose made bracket and arranged
to project through the canopy.

The luminaries shall be provided with a change over relay such that, in the event of
lamp failure, the second lamp is automatically connected. Lamps shall be GLS Rough
Service 100 watt suitable for an E.S. (#27) lampholder.

7.09.2.7 Lightning Protection. High masts shall be equipped with an air terminal
of the correct height to provide the required zone of protection for the mast headframe
and fixtures. The air terminal shall be bonded to the mast to ensure the discharge is
dissipated via the earth connection and system without damage to the steel winch ropes
or the electrical cables.

7.09.2.8 High Mast Approval. For the approval of the Engineer before
manufacturing commences the Contractor shall submit detailed calculations and
supporting data to show the mast meets the design criteria detailed and shall include
the following information:

- The deflection at the top of the Mast at the designed wind speed.

- The natural frequency of the mast.

- The critical wind speed for resonance.

- The damping stresses under resonant conditions.

- The steel stresses under resonant condition.

- The acceleration at the top of the mast under resonant conditions.

56
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

- Welding procedure.

- Procedure to ensuring that the flange plate is not laminated.

- Details of the joints between the mast sections and between the bottom section
and the flange plate.

- Details of the joints between the mast sections and between the bottom section
and the flange plate.

- Details of the base compartment with the method of reinforcement at the door
area and means adopted for making the door weather and tamperproof.

7.09.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. High masts shall be installed on concrete

foundations as shown on the Drawings and described under another section of the
Specification. The erection of high masts and the assembly of the luminarie headframe
and raising and lowering gear shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions using workmen who have had experience in the installation
of high masts. The Contractor shall confirm before commencement of the erection and
assembly work, that the foundations are suitable for use with the high mast installation
proposed.

Each high mast metal work shall be bonded to a separate earth rod as indicated on
the Drawings and also to the separate earthing cable connected to the distribution
system earth bar.

Masts shall be of specified height capable of carrying the specified number of

luminaries as indicated on the Drawings. The luminarie ring shall be oriented to give
the correct illumination at designated locations along the road surfaces.

The high mast system incorporating mobile luminarie rings shall be installed to be
suitable for utilizing a purpose-made portable cage for maintenance purposes. The
cage shall be obtained from the high mast supplier and shall be capable of carrying two
(2) persons plus servicing equipment. A safety device shall be provided for use within
the cage in the event of a hoisting rope failure.

A portable power tool shall be provided as necessary for raising and lowering the
headframe or maintenance cage respectively from a remote position. Manual raising
and lowering equipment where appropriate shall also be provided.

Approved Manufacturers:
Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.

7.09.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. High masts shall be measured as the number

of masts completely capable of fixing the number of luminaries specified including
control gear, distribution board, contactor and earthing, erected and put into operation
in accordance with these General Specifications.

57
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.09.5 PAYMENT. Luminaries will not be measured for payment under this Section
as they are covered in Section 7.11, "Street Lighting Luminaries" in these General
Specifications. The completed and accepted high mast assemblies, as measured
above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the high mast pay items listed
below that are specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for
supplying all materials, installation, testing and putting into operation, for all labor,
equipment, tools, supplies and other items necessary for the proper completion of the
Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General
Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

70901 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaries, including Unit

control gear and power distribution box, 20 m height

70902 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaries, including Unit

control gear and power distribution box, 25 m height
70903 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 30 m height
70904 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 35 m height
70905 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 40 m height
70906 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, ___ m height
70911 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 25 m height
70912 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 25 m height
70913 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 30 m height
70914 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 35 m height
70915 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 40 m height
70916 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, ___ m height
70921 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 20 m height
70922 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 25 m height
70923 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 30 m height
70924 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 35 m height

58
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

70925 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaries, including Unit

control gear and power distribution box, 40 m height
70926 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, ___ m height
70931 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 20 m height
70932 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 25 m height
70933 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 30 m height
70934 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 35 m height
70935 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, 40 m height
70936 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaries, including Unit
control gear and power distribution box, ___ m height

59
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.10 - LIGHTING COLUMNS

7.10.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of supplying, installing upon prepared
bases, and putting into satisfactory operation lighting columns complete with luminaries,
brackets, wiring, distribution equipment, control gear and associated materials as
located on the Drawings.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Lighting Columns (Poles) Complete With Arms, Power Distribution Box, Bolts and
Cables

7.10.2 MATERIALS.

7.10.2.1 Columns. Columns shall be of the height specified and be multi-sided or

circular section, tapered type, made of formed sheet steel electrically welded.

Columns up to twelve (12) meters height shall be supplied as a one (1) piece section.

Columns above twelve (12) meters in height may be supplied in more than one (1)
piece, with the base section being a minimum of twelve (12) meters in length. Multi-
section columns shall be of the slip joint type with sufficient overlap to ensure correct
vertical alignment for the whole column after assembly.

Columns shall have a minimum wall thickness of three (3) millimeters for the lowest
section and shall be made of sheet steel with a minimum rupturing resistance of thirty-
seven (37) kilograms per square millimeter and a minimum yield strength of twenty-four
(24) kilograms per square millimeter.

The column tops shall be designed to receive the single or double arm brackets, as
required, to support the specified number of luminaries. The bracket arrangement shall
be so designed as to ensure that failure due to wind induced oscillations does not
occur, nor shall the wind rotate the bracket from the desired alignment.

The Contractor shall calculate the column cross-section thickness of steel sheet, etc.,
so that the columns once installed and fully equipped shall be able to withstand a gust
wind velocity of one hundred sixty (160) kilometers per hour blowing in the most
unfavorable direction, at a height of ten (10) meters above ground level taking into
account the effect of the maximum resistance provided by a minimum of two (2)
luminaries plus any special bracketing for each type of pole. Appropriate reinforcement
shall be provided where needed to increase the strength.

The fatigue of the steel shall in no case exceed half (½) ofthe elasticity limit, taking
into account the dynamic stresses due to vibrations.

A steel flange plate of adequate thickness shall be solidly welded onto the lower edge
of the pole as shown on the Drawings. The plate shall have the specified number of
holes for the columns for accepting the holding down bolts together with clearance hole
in the center of not less than one hundred fifty (150) millimeters diameter.

60
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Columns shall be provided with one (1) weatherproof access door positioned at the
base. The access shall be suitably sized to insert and service the supply cable
terminations and switchgear. The door shall be flush fitting with a retaining mechanism
and a positive locking arrangement having a removable hexagonal key. Appropriate
reinforcement shall be provided in the column at the door openings. Internally
positioned opposite to each door shall be fitted non- hygroscopic baseboards of suitable
size to accept the appropriate equipment. The baseboards shall be fixed to the inside
of the column by means of purpose-made brackets. A stainless steel earthing stud
shall be welded inside the pole near the access door and shall be complete with
stainless steel washers and nuts.

7.10.2.2 Finishing. All welds shall be smooth with spatter removed, the interior and
exterior surfaces of the columns shall be cleaned by means of pickling or blasting and
shall be free of any grease trace.

All components of the column shall be hot dipped galvanized after completion of the
fabrication. No further touching up, finishing or modifications shall be carried out after
galvanizing. The minimum thickness of zinc coating shall be five hundred (500) grams
per square meter on both the inside and outside faces of the column. The galvanizing
shall be carried out by total immersion in a bath of molten zinc.

The galvanizing standard used shall be at least equal to French Standard NFA 91
121 (June 1958) or UK Standard BS 729/71.

Any damage to the galvanizing shall be rectified during erection by wire brushing the
affected area, treating with an approved rust converter to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

The flange plate and bottom of the pole to a height of half (½)meter shall be given
an external and internal coating of heavy bitumen paint prior to erection.

7.10.2.3 Distribution Equipment. Distribution equipment shall be mounted in a

weatherproof enclosure on the baseboards of the lower compartment of the columns
and shall comprise a back plate chassis complete with:

For either one or two luminaries 1 x 15 amperes single pole molded case
per column circuit breaker and neutral assembly.

The breakers shall be calibrated at fifty degrees Celsius (50 0 C.). The incoming side
of the breakers shall be fitted with a terminal kit capable of accepting 2 x 16 square
millimeter three (3) phase and neutral copper conductors. The breakers shall have a
current interrupting capacity exceeding three (3) KA.

A contactor of the normally closed type, rated at fifty degrees Celsius (50o C.)
adequate for one (1) KW and shall comply with the standards. The contactor shall be
used to control the partial cut-off operation of the street lighting after midnight. The

61
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

contactor shall be installed inside the column distribution box or inside a separate
weatherproof box opposite to the access door inside the base of the column.

Columns with three (3) or more individual luminaries shall have them wired over the
three (3) phase and neutral. Columns carrying one (1) or two (2) single lamp luminaries
shall be connected over one (1) phase and neutral.

7.10.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. Columns shall be installed upon concrete

bases as detailed on the Drawings. The Contractor shall, before commencement of the
construction work, confirm that the foundations are suitable for use with the column
installation he proposes to install. Holding down and plumb adjusting nuts, washers,
locknuts or nyloc nuts shall be stainless steel or cadmium plated.

Erection of lighting columns along the roadways shall be such that the luminaries
shall be located on a line parallel to the theoretical profile of the road. The alignment
of the columns both horizontally and vertically must be secured to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

At each column the separate earthing cable associated with the circuit supplying it
shall be bonded to the metalwork. Where the supply cable is looped at the column
breaker panel, the earthing cable shall not be cut but looped into the terminal. The final
column in each LV distribution circuit shall have its metalwork bonded to a separate
earth rod as detailed.

Approved Manufacturers:

Saudi Manufacturers.

7.10.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Lighting columns shall be measured as the

number of columns as specified above complete with wiring, control gear, distribution
board, contactor and internal cabling for luminaries and earthing as necessary
commencing at the termination of incoming cable supplied, erected and put into
operation in accordance with these General Specifications.

Luminaries will not be measured for payment under this Section as they are covered
in Section 7.11, "Street Lighting Luminaries" in these General Specifications.

7.10.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted lighting column assemblies,

measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the Lighting
Column items listed below that are specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be
full compensation for all materials, installation, testing and putting into operation, for all
labor, equipment, tools, supplies and other items necessary for the proper completion
of the work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment in these General
Specifications.

62
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

71001 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power Unit

distribution box, bolts and cables, 4 m height

71002 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power Unit

distribution box, bolts and cables, 6 m height

71003 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power Unit

distribution box, bolts and cables, 8 m height

71004 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power Unit

distribution box, bolts and cables, 10 m height

71005 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power Unit

distribution box, bolts and cables,12 m height

71006 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power Unit

distribution box, bolts and cables, 14 m height

71007 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power Unit

distribution box, bolts and cables, 16 m height

71008 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power Unit

distribution box, bolts and cables, 18-19.9 m height

63
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.11 - STREET LIGHTING LUMINARIES

7.11.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of supplying, installing and putting into
satisfactory operation the street lighting luminaries to be installed on the High Mast or
Lighting Columns as specified under other sections of this Specification.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Street Light Luminarie Complete With Control Gear and Lamp

7.11.2 MATERIALS.

7.11.2.1 Luminarie. The luminaries shall be totally enclosed, dust and watertight,
shock resistant and specially designed to house the specified lamps, electrical gear and
accessories. The body shall be made of extruded or pressure die-cast or fabricated
aluminum alloy of the corrosion resistant type. The lamp housing shall be dust,
watertight, in compliance with IP 54 of IEC Publication 144.

Mirror reflectors shall be of ninety-nine and one-half percent (99½%)purity, glazed,

and anodized aluminum, or die-cast, super-purity aluminum vapor deposited type,
coated with a transparent layer of silicon as a protection against wiping.

The protector shall be made of heat and shock resistant glass, and mounted into a
suitable frame. The protector frame assembly shall be fixed to the body by means of
captive screws and secured by extra safety clamps to allow the replacement of the
protector and reflector. An ozone resistant ethylene propylene or approved equivalent
rubber shall ensure sealing of the front glass.

The lamp socket shall be made of high grade porcelain mounted in a support bracket
with provision to adjust the lamp both vertically and axially. A lamp support and a
locking system shall grip and prevent the lamp moving in operation.

Ballast and control gear shall be mounted within the luminarie in a separate
compartment isolated from the lamp and with enclosed terminal blocks fitted with quick-
disconnect electrical leads. Where required the control gear shall be contained within
a prewired box having an enclosure of IP at least twenty-three (23) and mounted on the
luminarie ring separately from the luminaries.

The luminarie shall be provided with a line HRC fuse carrier and holder with a suitably
rated fuse to conform with IEC 269 or BS 88 to provide fault protection to the luminarie.
The fuse shall also be rated to withstand the starting current and be preferably located
in the control gear enclosure.

A specially designed louver shall be proved to screen the lamp from direct view and
limit glare where necessary.

Special precautions shall be given to the choice of materials which shall be able to
support without damage or aging or alteration in its structural or physical properties,
severe climatic conditions (tropical climate) in addition to the heat emitted by the lamp.

64
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Utilization of aluminum is imposed, polyester, plastics and other similar organic matters
are not acceptable.

A suitable terminal block shall be provided to allow connection of the supply cables
and shall be clearly marked. Special arrangements shall be taken to facilitate
maintenance, quick replacement and easy disconnection of individual components.

The exposed metallic parts of the luminarie shall be factory finished, stove enameled
with a suitable corrosion resisting paint capable of resisting the heat emitted by the map
during continuous operation, even if necessary under full sunlight conditions. Color to
be agreed upon with the Engineer.

7.11.2.2 Lamps. Each luminarie shall be provided with the specified lamp or lamps
as selected from the following list and having the characteristics detailed.

Type Nominal lamp Minimum Lumen Average Life

Wattage output after Burning Hours
100 hours

SONT 250 27,000 12,000

SONT 400 48,000 12,000
SONT 1000 135,000 12,000

7.11.2.3 Control Gear. Shall be of the plug in type for operation at A.C. 220 volts,
single phase, 60 Hertz. The ballast shall be specially selected for the particular type of
lamps selected. The lamp shall be able to start with at least plus or minus ten percent
(±10%) variation of the nominal voltage and continue in normal operation with dips
attaining twenty percent (20%) for four (4) seconds.

The compression provided shall ensure there is no large increase in the current
during starting.

The control gear losses shall not exceed ten percent (10%) of the normal lamp
wattage. A device shall be provided for the suppression of radio and television
interferences.

The ballast shall be equipped with energy savings components which will guarantee
savings of not less than thirty percent (30%) of the lamp wattage. Electronic ballasts
are also acceptable if submitted and approved with the luminarie.

7.11.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

- The luminarie shall be arranged on the mast head frame and oriented to give the
recommended illumination at the designated locations along the road surface.

- The luminaries shall be mounted at the top of the lighting columns upon purpose
made bracket. The angle of luminarie inclination shall be in accordance with the design

65
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

requirements. The luminaries shall be set at ninety degrees (90o) to the longitudinal
axis of the roadway.

Approved Manufacturers:

Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.

7.11.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The street lighting luminaries shall be

measured by the unit complete with lamps, all fittings and fixing including wiring, control
gear and installed and put into operation in accordance with these General
Specifications.

7.11.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted street lighting luminaries, measured
as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the luminarie pay item
specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for the furnishing
of all materials, installation, testing and putting into operation, and all labor, equipment,
tools, supplies and other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2 "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

71101 Street Lighting Luminarie, IP54, complete with control gear Unit
and lamp, 150 W.H.P.S.

71102 Street Lighting Luminarie, IP54, complete with control gear Unit
and lamp, 250 W.H.P.S.

71103 Street Lighting Luminarie, IP54, complete with control gear Unit
and lamp, 400 W.H.P.S.

71104 Street Lighting Luminarie, IP54, complete with control gear Unit
and lamp, 1000 W.H.P.S.

71105 Street Lighting Luminarie, IP54, complete with control Unit

gear and lamp, ___ W.H.P.S.

66
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.12 - AMENITY LIGHTING LUMINARIES

7.12.1 DESCRIPTION. The work shall consist of the supplying and installing in
prepared cutouts in the structure of the viaduct and ramps, the recessed amenity
lighting complete with all supports, fittings and fixings and connected to the low voltage
distribution system.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Amenity Lighting, Luminaries Complete with Lamp

7.12.2 MATERIALS.

7.12.2.1 Luminaries. The luminaries shall be recessed hingeable or fixed type flush
mounted complete with lamp and control gear. The luminaries shall be of the totally
enclosed type, dust, watertight, shock resistant in compliance with IP 54 of IEC
Publication 144. The luminarie shall be designed to house the specified HPS lamp and
accessories and suitable for fitting into a preformed opening in the underside of the
viaduct to provide a flush finish.

The luminarie shall consist of three (3) principal parts as follows:

1. Luminarie (body and diffuser)

2. Frame for concrete opening
3. Control gear housing

The luminarie shall consist of the luminarie body, lamp-holder and flat sheet glass
diffuser. The body shall be made from galvanized sheet steel epoxy powder coated
silver-grey after construction. The interior of the body shall be white epoxy powder
coated.

The refractor shall be high impact heat and shock resistant glass specially treated to
avoid any build up of electrostatic charges and mounted into a metal frame. The frame
assembly shall be fixed to the body by means of stainless steel captive screws and
secured by additional safety clamps to allow replacement. An approved gasket shall
ensure a thorough weathertight sealing of the front glass assembly.

Access into the body of the luminarie shall be from the back or top. The lamp socket
shall be made of high grade porcelain fixed in a rigid support bracket. A lamp
supporting and locking system shall grip and prevent the lamp from loosening.

Luminarie Frame: The luminarie shall be fixed flush with the underside of the viaduct
into a preformed opening. To achieve this the luminarie shall be complete with a frame
for "trimming" the concrete opening. The frame shall be made from steel angle of
suitable section galvanized after manufacture and finished the same as the luminarie
body. The frame shall allow for taking up constructional tolerances in the concrete
opening.

67
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Each luminarie shall have an integral fuse to protect the luminarie and associated
cabling.

Luminaries shall be complete with a one and one half (1½)square millimeter three
(3) core cable high temperature PVC flexible cable and a five (5) pin waterproof plug
for connection into a socket outlet mounted on an adaptable conduit box, suitably
sealed against the ingress of moisture and into which will be terminated the incoming
supply cable. This arrangement shall afford rapid removal of the luminarie for
maintenance or replacement.

Hinged type luminarie shall hinge onto the frame on one (1) side and shall swing up
into the vertical position. Access for maintenance personnel shall be gained to the
viaduct "boxes" using the luminaries as access points. The frame shall have a vertical
upstand onto which the luminarie body shall automatically clip and rest in the raised
position. The control gear shall be housed in a self-contained sealed box which shall
be fixed to the rear of the frame upstand. Connection from the control gear to the lamp
holder shall be by means of a three (3) core two and one-half (2½)square millimeter
flexible copper cable butyl insulated and sheathed with cable glands at each end.

7.12.2.2 Lamps. Lamps shall have the following characteristics:

Type Nominal lamp Minimum Lumen Average Life

Wattage output after Burning Hours
100 hours

SONT 150 14,500 12,000

SONT 250 27,000 12,000

7.12.2.3 Control Gear. Control gear shall be of the plug-in type for operation at 220
volts, 60 Hertz, power factor compensated to at least nine-tenths (0.9). The ballast
shall be of a type specially adapted for the particular make of lamps selected. The lamp
shall be able to start with at least plus or minus ten percent (± 10%) of the voltage value
and continue in normal operation with dips attaining twenty percent (20%) for four (4)
seconds.

The compensation provided shall ensure that there is no large increase in the
operating current during starting. The control gear losses shall not exceed ten percent
(10%) of the nominal lamp wattage. A device shall be provided for the suppression of
radio and television interference. The ballast shall be equipped with energy savings
components which will guarantee savings of not less than thirty percent (30%) of the
lamp wattage. Electronic ballasts are also acceptable if submitted and approved with
the luminarie.

7.12.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. Recessed fittings shall be fixed square

in the preformed openings and finished flush with the underside of the viaduct.

68
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Cabling for the recessed hingeable type luminaries shall be run inside the viaduct
boxes suitably clipped and shall loop in and out of the adaptable conduit boxes housing
and sockets serving the luminaries.

Each adaptable box shall be equipped with terminals to terminate the two (2) or three
(3), sixteen (16) square millimeter four (4) core cable and earth cable depending upon
the position in the circuit.

The cabling for the recessed fixed type luminaries shall pass from the duct system
through the bridge abutment at high level and shall be embedded looping in and out of
the adaptable conduit boxes' recess left for the luminarie.

Approved Manufacturer:

Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.

7.12.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. The amenity lighting luminaries shall be

measured by the unit complete with lamps, all fittings and fixings including flexible cable
and plug supplied and installed and put into operation in accordance with these General
Specifications.

7.12.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted amenity lighting luminaries,

measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the pay
items specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing all material, installation, testing and putting into service, for all labor,
equipment, tools, supplies and other items necessary for the proper completion of the
work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General
Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT
71201 Amenity Lighting Luminaries, IP 54, complete with lamp, 70 Unit
W.H.P.S.
71202 Amenity Lighting Luminaries, IP 54, complete with lamp, 150 Unit
W.H.P.S.
71203 Amenity Lighting Luminaries, IP 54, complete with lamp, 250 Unit
W.H.P.S.
71204 Amenity Lighting Luminaries, IP 54, complete with lamp, 400 Unit
W.H.P.S.
71205 Amenity Lighting Luminaries, IP 54, complete with lamp, ___ Unit
W.H.P.S.

69
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.13 - SIGN ILLUMINATION

7.13.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of supplying, installing and putting into
satisfactory operation the floodlights for lighting the road signs which are supplied and
installed under a separate section of this Contract.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Overhead Sign Lighting Luminaries, Including Fixtures, Cables, Distribution Box,
Switch, and Control Gear and Installation on Supporting Steelwork.

7.13.2 MATERIALS.

7.13.2.1 Floodlight. The wide angled floodlights for overhead signs shall be of the
totally enclosed type, weather, dust and shock resistant designed to house the specified
lamps.

The body of the floodlight shall be made of extruded or pressure die-cast aluminum
alloy box closed on the front by a protector of very high resistance glass capable of
withstanding thermic and mechanical shocks and set into grooves in the box by special
gasketting. The reflector shall be of high purity (99.9 percent) anodized aluminum
secured in precision aligned internal tracks to provide wide beam distribution. The side
covers of injected light shall allow easy access to the optical block and shall secure
tightness of the whole enclosure to IP 54 in accordance with IEC Publication 144.

A connection box shall be located at the rear of the floodlight body with gland
connection to accept four (4) square millimeter PVC/SAW/PVC two (2) core cable. The
lamp and control gear shall be mounted in two (2) different and isolated compartments,
or alternatively the central gear may be housed remotely. Floodlights shall be provided
with an earthing terminal.

7.13.2.2 Lamps. Metal halide shall have the following characteristics:

Nominal lamp watts 250 watts

Minimum lumen output after
100 hours burning 19,000 lumen
Average life 10,000 hour

7.13.2.3 Control Gear. Control gear shall be of the plug-in type, for operation at 220
volts, 60 Hertz, power factor compensated to at least nine tenths (0.9) lagging. The
ballast shall be of a type specially adapted for the particular make of lamps selected.

The lamp shall be able to start with at least plus or minus ten percent (±10%) line
voltage, and normal operation with dips attaining twenty percent (20%) for four (4)
seconds. Compensation shall be such to ensure that there is no large increase in the
operating current during starting. The control gear losses shall not exceed ten percent
(10%) of the nominal lamp wattage. A device shall be provided for the suppression of
radio and television interference. The ballast shall be equipped with energy savings

70
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

components which will guarantee savings of not less than thirty percent (30%) of the
lamp wattage. Electronic ballasts are also acceptable if submitted and approved with
the luminarie.

The cables for the internal wiring in the control gear compartments, shall have single
core two and one-half (2½) square millimeter copper conductors, with neoprene or
cross-linked polyethylene or approved equivalent insulation and sheath.

The exposed metallic parts of the luminarie shall be painted with a corrosion and heat
resistant paint and equipped with radio interference suppression equipment.

7.13.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. The Contractor shall check that the sign
is adjusted and set correctly relative to the vertical plane and the road axis, and shall
then proceed with the electrical installation and fitting of the floodlights.

Overhead Signs. The floodlights shall be located as shown on the Drawings and
mounted on the front edge of the platform. A specially designed mounting bracket shall
be provided for each floodlight allowing it to be swivelled in any desired direction and
enabling it to be locked firmly in its final position. The feeder cable shall be routed via
the duct in the supporting frame up to platform height where it shall be glanded into a
suitable metal clad waterproof box and will be terminated into a non-automatic T00PO
and N 40 ampere miniature circuit breaker isolator. A two-way three (3) phase five (5)
ampere miniature circuit breaker board within the enclosure shall distribute power to the
individual floodlights using four (4) square millimeter two (2) core PVC/SWA/PVC
cable. The earth of the cables shall be bonded to the earth terminal of each
enclosure.

On no account should the floodlights or associated bracketry and fixings obstruct the
view of the sign face. Additional screening where required shall be added to the top or
bottom edges of the sign in the event of excess glare to oncoming traffic.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the final setting and locking in position of the
floodlights after demonstrating to the Engineer that the specified sign lighting
requirements has been met.

Approved Manufacturers:

Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.

7.13.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Sign illumination shall be measured as the

number of overhead sign lighting luminaries including fixtures, distribution box,
supporting steelwork, switchgear, control gear, interconnecting cabling and earthing as
necessary, supplied, erected and put into operation in accordance with these General
Specifications.

7.13.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted sign illumination floodlight assemblies
as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price(s) for "Overhead Sign
Lighting Luminaries" as specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full

71
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

compensation for furnishing all materials, installation, testing and putting into operation,
for all labor, equipment, tools, supplies and other items necessary for the proper
completion of the work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

71301 Overhead Sign Lighting Luminaries, IP54, 250 Watt H.P.M.V. Unit
(Size), including fixtures, cables, distribution box, switch and
control gear and installation on supporting steelwork

72
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.14 - UNDERBRIDGE FITTING

7.14.1 DESCRIPTION. The work shall consist of the supply, installation on the ceiling
or on the walls of the bridges and putting into satisfactory service the fittings for the
specified high pressure sodium lamps, including control gear and lamp, wiring and
associated materials.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Underbridge Fitting, Complete with Lamp

7.14.2 MATERIALS.

7.14.2.1 Fitting. The fitting shall have a robust body constructed from pressure die-
cast aluminum finished with polyurethane paint. A front refractor shall be applied with
gasket with a mechanical protection to IP 54 in compliance with IEC Publication 144.
The refractor shall be one (1) piece made from thermal and mechanical shock-resistant
borosilicate glass. The fitting shall be completely factory assembled and prewired with
heat-resistant silicone insulated flexible cable. The reflector shall be of the high purity
anodized aluminum giving asymmetrical distribution of the light.

The control gear shall be housed in a separated compartment isolated from the lamp
compartment.

Through wiring shall be provided making use of watertight cable glands.

7.14.2.2 Lamps. Lamps shall have the following characteristics:

Type Nominal lamp Minimum Lumen Average Life
Wattage output after 100 Burning Hours
hours
SONT 150 14,500 12,000
SONT 250 27,000 12,000

7.14.2.3 Control Gear. Control gear shall be suitable for operation at 220 volts, 60
Hertz, power factor compensated to at least nine-tenths (0.9). The ballast shall be of
a type specially adapted for the particular make of lamps selected. The lamp shall be
able to start with at least plus or minus ten percent (±10%) of the voltage value and
continue in normal operation with dips attaining twenty percent (20%) for four (4)
seconds. The ballast shall be equipped with energy savings components which will
guarantee savings of not less than thirty percent (30%) of the lamp wattage. Electronic
ballasts are also acceptable if submitted and approved with the luminarie.

The compensation shall ensure that there is no large increase in the operating current
during starting. The control gear losses shall not exceed ten percent (10%) of the
nominal lamp wattage. A device shall be provided for the suppression of radio and
television interference.

7.14.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. The fitting shall be mounted on the

ceiling or on the walls of the bridges, at the instructions of the Engineer, by means of

73
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

galvanized steel brackets specially designed for the purpose and well fixed to the
concrete of the bridge structure.
Approved Manufacturers:
Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.

7.14.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Underbridge fittings shall be measured as the

number of fittings complete with lamp, control gear, wiring, fixing brackets and other
accessories, mounted and put into operation in accordance with these General
Specifications.

7.14.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted fittings, measured as provided above,
shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the pay items listed below specified in the
Bill of Quantities. Payment shall be full compensation for the furnishing of all material,
installation, testing and putting into service, for all labor, equipment, tools, supplies and
other items necessary for the proper completion of the work as specified in Subsection
1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.
PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

71401 Underbridge Fitting, IP54, complete with lamp, 70 W.H.P.S. Unit

71402 Underbridge Fitting, IP54, complete with lamp, 150 W.H.P.S. Unit

71403 Underbridge Fitting, IP54, complete with lamp, 250 W.H.P.S. Unit

71404 Underbridge Fitting, IP54, complete with lamp, 400 W.H.P.S. Unit

71405 Underbridge Fitting, IP54, complete with lamp, ___ W.H.P.S. Unit

74
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.15 - UNDERPASS LIGHTING LUMINARIES

7.15.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of supplying, installing and putting into
satisfactory operation a luminarie lighting system to light vehicle underpasses.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Underpass Lighting Luminaries

7.15.2 MATERIALS.

7.15.2.1 Luminaries. The luminaries shall be a modular unit modified by the

manufacturer to accommodate the lamp and light distribution arrangement required for
the scheme.

All luminaries shall have the following principal features and details:

1. Aluminum (magnesium - silicon alloy) one (1) piece extruded body having
a wall thickness of not less than two and one-half (2½) millimeters.

2. Polished aluminum reflector.

3. The optical system, electrical control gear and lamp shall be mounted on
a "plug-in" type gear tray which shall have locating pins to ensure alignment when being
fitted into the body. The ground wire connection shall be taken through the plug and
socket connector to ensure that the ground potential is maintained on the gear tray
when it is being removed from the luminarie for maintenance purposes.

4. The luminarie shall have a hinged front glass assembly which shall
comprise of a clear toughened glass plate, not less than five and one-half (5½)
millimeters thick, fixed into an aluminum frame which shall have a full length closing
device. The front glass assembly shall seat on to a neoprene non-rotting type gasket
and once seated shall provide a fully jet-proof and dustproof seal to IP 65.

5. The whole assembly shall be treated against corrosion by anodizing the

aluminum.

6. The luminarie shall be complete with their own mounting accessories and
shall be supported from the underpass structure.

75
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.15.2.2 Lamps. Each luminarie shall be provided with the specified lamp or lamps
as selected from the following list and having the characteristics detailed.

Type Nominal lamp Minimum Lumen Average Life

Wattage output after 100 Burning Hours
hours
(a)

SONT 250 27,000 12,000

SONT 400 48,000 12,000

(b) Fluorescent lamps

TL 58 4,500 7,500
TL 65 4,800 7,500

7.15.2.3 Control Gear:

1. For high pressure sodium lamps

Lamps shall have a ballast incorporated of the plug-in type, for operation at 220
volts, power factor compensated to at least nine-tenths (0.9) lagging. The ballast shall
be of the type specially adopted for the lamps selected. The lamp shall be able to start
with at least plus or minus ten percent (±10%) line voltage and continue in normal
operation with dips attaining twenty percent (20%) for four (4) seconds. Compensation
shall be such as to ensure that there is no great increase in the operating current during
starting and gear losses shall not exceed ten percent (10%) of the normal wattage.

The luminarie circuits shall be provided with a suppressing device for prevention
of radio interference. The ballast shall be equipped with energy savings components
which will guarantee savings of not less than thirty percent (30%) of the lamp wattage.
Electronic ballasts are also acceptable if submitted and approved with the luminarie.

2. For fluorescent lamps

Fluorescent luminaries shall be equipped with rapid start (starterless) control

gear, which shall be tropicalized for use in temperature in excess of fifty degrees
Celsius (50o C.) ambient and shall be suitable for operation as a 220V, 60 Hertz supply.

Fluorescent circuits shall have a power factor of not less than nine-tenths (0.9).

7.15.2.4 Lighting Control System. The nighttime lighting fluorescent fixtures shall
be controlled from the section of the LV switchboard busbar inside the compact
substation which feeds the street lighting masts. These will be switched on when the
photo-electric cell controlling the street lighting contactor actuated.

76
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The daytime lighting HPS fixtures will be fed from a separate busbar of the LV
switchboard of the compact substation and which will be controlled from a second set
of photo-electric cell and contactor. These shall be interlocked with the nighttime
lighting contactor such that when one is "ON" the other will be "OFF".

7.15.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

7.15.3.1 General. Sub-circuit lighting cables from the substation to the lighting
fixtures shall be routed via PVC ducts into the underpass.

7.15.3.2 Luminaries. Luminaries shall be fixed using Unistrut or approved equal

cable channel together with luminarie mounting accessories as provided by the
luminarie manufacturer.

The interconnection between fittings shall be by a conduit coupling approximately

twenty five (25) millimeters length, twenty (20) millimeters diameter through which the
interconnecting wiring will be passed.

Luminaries shall be through wired with a five (5) core or five (5) single core heat
resistant flexible copper cable, rubber insulated and/or sheathed. The earth wire shall
be solidly bounded to the earthing stud inside the luminarie. Cable cross sections shall
be as specified on the drawings.

Luminaries shall be installed throughout the underpass in a neat continuous line.

Luminaries shall be aligned to the satisfaction of the Engineer and any necessary
realignment to the satisfaction of the Engineer and any necessary realignment shall be
made without additional cost.

Luminaries shall be complete with their own mounting accessories as shown on

the electrical and structural drawings. Fixings shall be agreed with the Engineer and
all bolts used shall be stainless steel painted after installation with a two (2) pack epoxy
anti-corrosion paint again to be agreed with the Engineer.

The Contractor shall place emphasis on aligning the luminaries level and true to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

Approved Manufacturers:

Saudi Manufacturers - Saudi Arabia.

7.15.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Underpass lighting luminaries complete with

lamps, control gear, wiring and all fittings, fixings and shall be measured as the number
furnished, installed and put into operation after testing and acceptance as meeting
these General Specifications in all respects.

7.15.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities, measured as provided

above, shall be paid for at the contract unit prices for the pay items listed below that are
specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for supplying all

77
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

materials installation and putting into operation, all labor, equipment, tools, supplies and
other items necessary for the proper completion of the work as specified in Subsection
1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

71501 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, daytime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, 150 W.H.P.S.

71502 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, daytime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, 2 x 150 W.H.P.S.

71503 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, daytime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, 250 W.H.P.S.

71504 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, daytime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, 2 x 250 W.H.P.S.

71505 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, daytime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, 400 W.H.P.S.

71506 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, daytime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, 2 x 400 W.H.P.S.

71507 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, daytime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, ___ W.H.P.S.

71511 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, nighttime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, 40 Fluorescent

71512 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, nighttime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, 58 Fluorescent

71513 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, nighttime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, 65 Fluorescent

71514 Underpass Lighting Luminaries, IP65, nighttime lighting, Unit

complete with lamp, ___ Fluorescent

78
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.16 - EARTHING

7.16.1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of the supply, installation, connection,
testing and any additions or adjustments to make the earthing installation comply with
the standards specified and to the approval of the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Earthing Installation

7.16.2 MATERIALS. Materials shall be in accordance with the requirements and

standards.

7.16.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. All exposed non-current carrying metallic

parts of the installation and the neutral point of the distribution system shall be earthed.
The earthing of the distribution system shall be made at the neutral point of the
transformers.

A separate fifty (50) millimeter by six (6) millimeter high conductivity earth bar shall
be mounted on porcelain connectors in each substation housing. The bar shall be pre-
drilled with a minimum distance of seventy-five (75) millimeters between holes. The
following conductors shall be connected to the bar where relevant:

1. Transformer Neutral - insulated cable

2. Transformer frame earth - bare conductor

3. MV switchgear frame earth - bare conductor

4. LV switchgear frame earth - bare conductor

5. Earth mat connection - insulated cable

6. Earth mat connection - insulated cable

The insulated cable shall be fifty (50) square millimeter single core PVC green
insulated cable fixed at regular intervals with PVC cleats and terminating with suitably
sized lugs.

The bare conductors shall be thirty-five (35) millimeters by six (6) millimeters high
conductivity copper tape fixed at regular intervals with purpose made brass saddles.

Each substation earth mat shall have two (2) separate earth paths, each comprising
of two (2) sixteen (16) millimeter diameter copper covered steel rods of two and one-
half (2½) meter length driven into the ground in the corners of enclosure. The rods shall
be fitted with inspection covers and connected together and to the earth bar with
inspection covers and to the earth bar with insulated cable. The resistance to earth for
each path should not exceed ten (10) ohms giving a network earth of maximum five (5)
ohms excluding any earthing external to the substation.

79
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Each earth bar shall have a label fitted over and shall identify the connections
together with the wording "Main Earth Bar."

The separate earthing cables for the high masts and lighting column circuits shall be
bonded to the earth at the LV supply position, every high mast and last column on each
circuit shall be bonded via the earthing bolt to a sixteen (16) millimeter diameter copper
covered steel rods of sufficient length driven into the ground adjacent to the mast or
column. The bonding shall be a sixteen (16) square millimeter stranded copper, single
core, insulated cable. A similar system shall be installed at the relevant position of the
sign lighting installation. The resistance to earth for the earth path shall not exceed ten
(10) ohms excluding any other earthing. Additional rods shall be installed if necessary
to achieve this reading.

All connections between rods and earthing tape or cables shall be made by the
Cadweld process which produces a fused joint. Bolted connections may be used for
connection to removable items of equipment only.

All lighting fittings distribution boards, isolators, ... etc., together with all extraneous
metalwork shall effectively be bonded to the main earth bar in the substation via
separate earthing leads and sub-main cables; armoring, etc.

Where single wire armored is used for earthing purpose, earth tags shall be fitted to
the cable glands and a separate bonding lead shall be taken from the tag to the earth
terminal of the fused switch, breaker, isolator or switchboard.

EARTHING TESTS. After installation of the individual earthing system in accordance

with the above for the various parts of the Specification and after the whole installation
has been connected up, an earth resistance test shall be carried out on the earth bar
at each substation and the readings obtained officially recorded. Three (3) readings
shall be obtained or each substation relating to the two (2) earth paths connected
individually and in parallel. An Evershed and Vignoles or similar earth tester shall be
used and all results tabulated and handed to the Engineer.

7.16.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Earthing shall be measured as the number of

completed sets of earthing supplied, installed, and put into operation after testing and
acceptance as meeting these General Specifications in all respects.

7.16.5 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities, measured as provided

above, will be paid at the contract unit price(s) for the pay items listed below that are
specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for furnishing all
materials, installation, testing and putting into operation, for all labor, equipment, tools,
supplies and other items necessary for the proper completion of the work as specified
in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

80
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

71601 Earthing Installation, Highmast Unit

71602 Earthing Installation, Sub-Station Unit

71603 Earthing Installation, Switching Station Unit

71604 Earthing Installation, Columns and Amenity Lighting Unit

71605 Earthing Installation, Gantry Sign or Overhead Unit

71606 Earthing Installation, (Type) Unit

81
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.17 - TESTING AND ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

7.17.1 DESCRIPTION. The work included in this section is of a general subsidiary

type associated with that carried out in the relevant sections of these General
Specifications.

7.17.2 LABELING. All items of equipment shall be adequately and clearly labeled in
English and Arabic. Labeling shall be in accordance with the schematic diagram, a
copy of which shall be incorporated in the Operation and Instruction Manual.

1. General. Each item of switchgear, and all other items of plant whether individual
or forming part of a switch or control panel shall be clearly labeled on the exterior of the
casings.

2. Lighting columns and masts shall be fitted with "Traffolite" or similar labels to give
black lettering on a whole background of sufficient size to be visible from a passing
vehicle. These labels shall be attached to the columns by means of stainless steel nuts
and bolts positioned just above the access openings. The columns shall be identified
strictly in accordance with the coding and locations shown on the Plan - Electrical
Installation Drawings.

3. Switchgear. All control switchgear labels shall be engraved on "Traffolite" to give

black lettering on a white background, and shall indicate the voltage, current rating and
phase color, together with the manufacturer's distinguishing mark. A separate label
shall include the service controlled.

4. Overall Scheme. All switchgear, distribution boards and apparatus shall be

included in an overall identification scheme and labeled accordingly.

5. Phase Markers. The interior of each item of electrical equipment shall be clearly
marked to show the phases by means of colored plastic sleeving or discs.

6. Circuit Lists. Circuit lists shall be mounted on the inside of distribution or doors,
so placed that they are easily readable. The list shall comprise a printed sheet sealed
into a semi-rigid clear plastic cover provided by specialist supplier.

7. Cable Core Identification. AC power cable cores shall be identified at their

terminations by colored sheaths of the heat or chemically shrinkable type to indicate the
respective phases and neutral. Where the core insulation is suitably colored during
manufacture the colored sleeve may be omitted.

8. Accessory Identification. All accessories such as local switches, switch-fuses and

isolators used for the control of equipment, lighting fittings, etc., shall carry engraved
identification plates to indicate the circuit number and phase to which the accessory is
connected as shown on the drawings.

82
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Prior to final testing the Contractor shall confirm that all labeling is intact over the
whole site and that all cables have been fitted with circuit markers wherever the cable
emerges from the duct system.
7.17.3 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING.

7.17.3.1 General. Testing and inspection of the installation shall be carried out in
accordance with the regulations and standards listed in the documents after completion
of the work to prove compliance with the Specifications. The tests will be carried out
in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Manufacturer's test certification for appropriate equipment shall be handed to the
Engineer prior to the site testing being carried out.
All results of the tests shall be recorded on site and signed by all witnessing parties.
Subsequently, three (3) copies of all such documents shall be submitted to the
Engineer.

The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, measuring apparatus, labor, etc., to
facilitate the tests. This equipment shall be sealed and have current calibration
certificates issued by an official laboratory, approved by the Engineer.

Prior notice shall be given to the Engineer of proposed tests together with a list of the
equipment to be used. In particular the Contractor shall submit his proposals for
measuring the luminance and illumination levels and for calculating the average levels
as specified elsewhere in this specification.

All tests including where applicable, insulation tests, continuity tests, effectiveness of
earthing, measuring of earth electrode resistance, shall be carried out under the
responsibility of the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs involved in testing and
commissioning and shall re-test at his own expense any item that fails. No repeat test
shall be carried out until the cause has been established and rectification of the failure
has been carried out.

7.17.3.2 Site Testing. The Contractor shall include for the following tests to be
carried out on site:

7.17.3.2.1 Substation Tests. Insulation resistance test with 1000 volts megger.
Phasing out and polarity check. Operation and protection tests.
7.17.3.2.2 Cables.

MV Cables
- Insulation resistance tests taken between conductors and between
conductors and cable metallic sheath taken with a 1000 volt megger.
- High potential Test

83
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

This shall be carried out in accordance with the IEC 502:1983 recommendations
for Electrical Test after installation. Test voltage shall be agreed with and recognized
by the cable manufacturer.

LV Cables
- Insulation resistance tests taken between conductors and between
conductors and separate earthing cable taken with a 500 volt megger

- Continuity Tests

The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer, after completion of all
tests, for authorization of connection of the power supply to the installation.

7.17.3.2.3 Visual Inspection. The Contractor shall include for carrying out the
following tests in addition to those previously called for:

- Condition of the equipment and quality of the workmanship.

- Level, perpendicularity and alignment of the high masts, poles and

luminaries.

- Actual characteristics of the equipment.

7.17.3.2.4 Measurement of Insulation Resistance. Insulation resistance tests

on the various LV circuits. The tests shall be performed after installation, in accordance
with approved standards to determine the adequacy of insulation between phases and
also between phases, neutral and earth (lamps shall be removed during the test where
applicable).

Resistance tests of the earthing of all metallic frames.

7.17.3.2.5 Operational Tests. Normal functioning of all lamps. Operational

tests on all switchgear and power equipment including recording the voltage at the
terminals of each ballast on the final column in each circuit, together with the voltage
existing simultaneously at the feeder pillar outgoing LV terminals.

7.17.3.2.6 Performance Tests. Performance tests shall be performed after one

hundred (100) hours normal functioning. Measurement of the lighting levels and
uniformities on the road surfaces. The results of which shall be submitted to the
Engineer in tabulated form.

The Resident Engineer will reserve the right to take any action he may consider
necessary, in the event of the measure values not conforming with the lighting design
criteria as specified under the relevant section of these Specifications. Any other tests
found necessary by the Engineer to verify conformity of the installation with these
Specifications.

84
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.17.4 HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall provide all slings, lifting
tackles and cranes required for the safe handling, off-loading and installation of all items
supplied and shall be responsible for obtaining and maintaining up-to-date the
necessary test certificates for such equipment. Protection of surfaces and floors during
installation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor together with any making good
required. Programming of deliveries shall be coordinated to ensure accessibility of
equipment at the appropriate stage of construction.

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for protection and maintenance in good
condition of all equipment included in his supply during storage, delivery, installation
and until hand over completion.

85
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.18 - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT DATA

7.18.1 GENERAL. The information and data on the principal items of equipment must
be submitted by the Contractor with his Tender.

The Contractor shall supply all the information and data proving compliance of the
equipment with the Specifications as listed in the Summary of Equipment Manufacturers
and required by the Detailed Equipment Data. The Engineer reserves the right to
request any further information he may need to check compliance of the proposed
equipment with the Specifications.

The Contractor shall supply information from the Manufacturer's Equipment lists with
the characteristics indicated in his Tender unless otherwise specifically agreed to in the
following format:.

SUMMARY OF EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS

Bill of Country
Quantity of Catalogue
Item No. Description Manufacturer Orgin Reference

7.18.2 DETAILED EQUIPMENT DATA.

7.18.2.1 33 KV Overhead Lines Network.

1. Manufacturers of all parts of the system

2. Type with manufacturers catalogue and descriptive leaflet and catalogue
number
3. Details of construction with detailed specifications, grade, strength and
ratings of the materials used
4. Calculations showing details of stresses under maximum wind loading
5. Calculations and sizes of necessary concrete support bases

7.18.2.2 High Masts/Lighting Columns.

1. Manufacturers
2. Type with manufacturers' catalogue and descriptive leaflet
3. Details of construction with detailed specification of materials used for
column and holding down bolts
4. Calculations showing details of stresses under maximum wind loading and
gusting
5. Calculations and sizes of necessary concrete support bases

86
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.18.2.3 Intake Switching Station/Packaged Substation/Feeder Pillar.

1. Manufacturer
2. Specifications with manufacturer's catalogue
3. Construction drawings
4. Characteristics of each component
5. Foundations block detail
6. General Arrangement

7.18.2.4. Cables (MV and LV).

For each type of cable:

1. Manufacturer
2. Specification
3. Standard to which it complies
4. Rated voltage
5. Manufacturer's catalogue, with indications of cable proposed

7.18.2.5 Luminaries.

7.18.2.5.1 Luminaries Details.

1. Manufacturer
2. Type with manufacturer's catalogue and description leaflet
3. Details of construction with detailed specification of materials used
4. Total electrical load of luminarie
5. Lighting characteristics of the luminarie:
- Total luminous output in percent of lamps output
- Isocandela diagrams in all azimuths
- Isolux curves on a horizontal surface
- Coefficient of utilization
6. Weight of complete fitting
7. Luminarie dirt depreciation curves

7.18.2.5.2 Lamp Control Gear.

1. Ballast

(1)Manufacturer
(2)Type with manufacturer's catalogue and descriptive leaflet
(3)Operating design characteristics of lamp (starting and normal)
(4)Losses in normal operation
(5)Minimum starting voltage
(6)Variation of lamp lumen output with voltage
(7)Starting current (with cold and hot lamp)

87
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

(8) Minimum voltage for lamp correction

(9) Power factor before and after correction
(10) Conductor temperature when the ballast is operating inside the
luminarie, placed in an ambient temperature of fifty degrees
Celsius (50o C.)
(11) Wiring diagram and characteristics of each component

2. Condenser for Power Factor Correction

(1) Manufacturer
(2) Type with manufacturer's catalogue
(3) Characteristics: capacity, voltage and temperature rating
(4) Maximum operating temperature when installed inside the
luminarie, operating in an ambient temperature of fifty degrees
Celsius (50oC.)

3. The ballast shall be equipped with energy savings components which will
guarantee savings of not less than thirty percent (30%) of the lamp wattage. Electronic
ballasts are also acceptable if submitted and approved with the luminarie.

7.18.2.5.3 Lamps.

1. Manufacturer
2. Type with manufacturer's catalogue
3. Lamp operating characteristics (starting and normal)
4. Starting time and starting current in cold and hot conditions
5. Minimum voltage for lamp extinction
6. Spectral distribution of the light emitted
7. Lumen output after 100 and 200 hours operation
8. Variation of lumen output with voltage variation
9. Variation of lumen output with ambient temperature variation
10. Variation of lumen output with lamp life
11. Average lamp life, under defined conditions
12. Lamp temperature, while operating in the proposed fixture in an ambient
temperature of fifty degrees Celsius (50o C.). The critical spot location of lamp
temperature shall be identified.

7.18.2.6 For all Other Equipment.

1. Manufacturer
2. Type
3. Catalogue, with indication of equipment proposed
4. Detailed Specification
5. Construction drawings and wiring drawings

88
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.19 - CIVIL WORKS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

7.19.1 DESCRIPTION. The work shall consist of furnishing and installing of the
complete duct system for all cables, construction of reinforced concrete foundations for
packaged substations, distribution feeder pillars, high mast and conventional lighting
columns, construction of drawpits for ducts, and installation of breakaway support
coupling, transformer base and multi-direction slip base assemblies all as shown on the
Plans or as established by the Engineer. This work also includes the installation of
breakaway support coupling assemblies on existing foundations.

ITEMS IN THE BILL OF QUANTITIES

uPVC Ducts
Drawpits
Reinforced Concrete Foundations for High Mast/Lighting Columns
Reinforced Concrete Bases for Substations
Reinforced Concrete Bases for Feeder Pillars
Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for Lighting Columns
Breakaway Multi-direction Slip Base Assembly for Lighting Columns
Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transformer Base Assembly for Lighting Columns

7.19.2 MATERIALS.

7.19.2.1 Polyvinylchloride (uPVC) Duct. Polyvinylchloride (uPVC) duct shall be of

the non-sparking type and suitable for direct burial in the ground. Minimum tensile
strength shall be four hundred (400) MN per square meter. Impact strength shall be
forty (40) MN per square meter.

The nominal outside diameters shall be as noted on the Drawing and comply with
S.A.S. for Class II having wall thickness of two and two-tenths (2.2) millimeters for one
hundred ten (110) millimeters diameter and three and two-tenths (3.2) millimeters for
one hundred sixty (160) millimeters diameter.

7.19.2.2 Concrete. Concrete shall be Class B as specified and shall conform to the
relevant requirements of Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete" in these General
Specifications.

7.19.2.3 Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel shall be mild steel and shall conform
to the relevant requirements of Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General
Specifications.

7.19.2.4 Drawpit Covers. Covers for drawpits shall be cast iron and of the heavy
duty (35 tons test load) type, Grade A, to BSS 497 (1976) and shall conform to the
relevant requirements of these General Specifications.

7.19.2.5 Backfill Material. Sand and sieved backfill material free from stones or
other debris shall be provided for reinstating the trenches after the laying of cables and
ducts. Interlocking concrete cable tiles to give fifty (50) millimeters minimum overlap

89
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

each side of the outer cables and/or ducts. An indicating tape or mesh shall be buried
two hundred (200) millimeters below the finished ground surface and above each duct
run.

7.19.2.6 Breakaway Support Coupling, Transformer Base and Multi-direction

Slip Base Assemblies. Breakaway support coupling, transform base and multi-
direction slip base assemblies shall meet the materials requirements contained in the
latest edition of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for
Highway Signs, Luminaries, and Traffic Signs.

7.19.2.6.1 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly. Breakaway support

coupling assembly (longitudinally grooved) shall comply with the following additional
materials requirements:

Minimum Tensile Strength 10,900 kilograms

Restrained Shear 1.64 kg min. - 2.95 kg max

Nut Torque (237 ± 34 Newton meters)

Coupling Coating: External surface: Phosphate per Mil.

Std TTC-490 Method 3, Type 2, prime
using cathodic epoxy electrocoat and
fusion bond coat with black nylon #11,
7-15 mil thick

Internal Threads:
Dry Film Lubricant per Mil-L-23398

Anchor Bolt: Min. 500 mm length, 27 mm diameter,

(3 mm pitch) threaded and galvanized
per ASTM 153, 64-76 mm maximum
above foundation

Miscellaneous washers are to be heavy duty galvanized per ASTM A153. Heavy Hex
Nut per ASTM A563 Grade DH shall be mechanically galvanized per ASTM B695.

Sheet metal skirt to be two-piece corrosion resistant AASHT T3003 aluminum 1.5 mm
thick, 13.3 cm high sections long enough to be held together by three (3) stainless steel
self tapping slotted sheet metal screws.

Electrical wiring and electrical breakaway quick disconnects are to be provided

as indicated on the Drawings.

7.19.2.6.2 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transformer Base Assembly . Unless

otherwise indicated on the contract drawings, conventional lighting columns shall
incorporate a cast aluminum breakaway transformer base and electrical breakaway
quick-disconnect. The base shall be constructed so that when used with the size and
weight of pole proposed, the assembly shall meet the safety and strength requirements

90
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

of AASHTO Standard Specification for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,

Luminaries and Traffic Signals.

The contractor shall furnish a certification from the base manufacturer to this effect:

Cast aluminum transformer bases shall meet the following requirements:

Base - ASTM B108 allow 5G70A - T6 or alloy 356-T6.
Door - The high density plastic door shall be fabricated using Noryl SE1
CFM3 resin, or approved equal. The vandal resistant door fastener
shall be a stainless steel socket button head cap screw.

Connecting and hold down hardware for cast aluminum transformer bases shall be:
bolts ASTM A-325, nuts ASTM A-563 Grade A, and both galvanized to ASTM A-153
(AASHTO M-232).

The transformer base and pole combination shall be designed to withstand the
wind loads described in the referenced AASHTO Standard Specifications.

Electrical wiring and electrical breakaway quick disconnects are to be provided

as indicated on the Drawings.

7.19.2.6.3 Breakaway Multi-direction Slip Base Assembly . Breakaway multi-

direction slip base assembly shall conform following additional materials requirements,
and to the standard drawing details and notes.

1. All washers shall be AASHTO M164 (ASTM A325).

2. Clamping bolts shall be new AASHTO M164 (ASTM A325) or ASTM

A449 bolts with clean undamaged threads.

3. The galvanized surfaces of the two slip plates and the 22 guage
stainless steel or galvanized keeper plate shall be smooth and without irregularities, to
reduce friction and to prevent slackening of bolt tension due to flattening of the
irregularities.

Electrical wiring and electrical breakaway quick disconnects are to be provided

as indicated on the Drawings.

7.19.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

7.19.3.1 Underground Duct System.

1. UPVC duct shall be supplied in lengths with a fitting socket provided at one
(1) end of each length, and jointed using the manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to form a watertight joint.

2. Routing of duct as shown on the Drawings is schematic but no major

change of alignment will be allowed unless approved by the Engineer. In all cases

91
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

where unremovable obstructions are met, the directions of the Engineer shall govern
the routing of duct past such obstacles. All routing of duct shall be of such nature and
in accordance with good practice to allow the minimum of difficulty in subsequent
installations of cable within the conduit. Only smooth bend elbows (Electrical Elbows)
to be used, bend of ducts by heating is not acceptable.

3. Excavation shall be of sufficient depth to allow the duct to be installed as

shown on the Project Drawings.

4. A pull wire shall be placed in all ducts stretching the complete length
between all drawpits.

5. The duct runs shall be inspected by pulling a steel mandrel, or other

approved device, of a diameter equal to seventy-five percent (75%) of the inside
diameter of the duct and five hundred (500) millimeters long. The mandrel shall pass
through the entire run of the duct from one (1) end to the other without binding. All
ducts which will not allow the mandrel to be pulled through, shall be repaired or
replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

6. After the duct run has been accepted the Contractor shall furnish and install
a three (3) millimeter diameter galvanized steel pull wire in the ducts for the future
pulling of cables. The steel wire shall be cut at a distance of one (1) meter outside the
duct head into the drawpit and be securely fixed so that the wire will not be lost inside
the duct.

7. Ducts run not terminated in drawpits shall be properly capped.

8. Identification markers to be placed at both sides of road to indicate utilities

ducts.

7.19.3.2 Drawpits, Bases and Foundations.

1. All structural excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of

Section 2.05, "Excavation for Structures” in these General Specifications.

2. The excavation shall be well cleaned and a waterproof membrane lining

placed in the bottom and on the sides before the concrete is poured.

3. Walls and roof slabs of drawpits shall be properly formed.

4. Mild steel reinforcement shall be provided and placed as shown on the

Drawings, PVC ducts shall be installed all as detailed.

5. Where duct openings are provided in the drawpit walls are unused, they
shall be fitted with a three hundred (300) millimeter length of capped stub duct.

92
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6. Foundation for packaged substations/feeder pillars shall be in accordance

with the manufacturer's detailed drawings.

7. Foundation for high masts and conventional lighting columns shall be in

accordance with the dimensions, details and technical requirements as shown on the
project relevant drawings.

7.19.3.3 Trenching for Duct Laying.

1. Trenches shall be excavated to the depth shown on the project drawings

in any material including soil, sand or rock, in level or sloping ground in the locations
shown. The trenches shall be wide enough to accommodate the ducts at the spacing
indicated. Excavation to link the trenches with every location into ducts at road
crossings and into enclosures shall be included.

2. A bed of sand two hundred (200) millimeters thick shall be laid in the bottom
of the trench prior to the ducts being laid.

3. After laying of the ducts, a surrounding and covering layer of sand two
hundred (200) millimeters deep shall be placed over the ducts, followed by the
interlocking cable tiles, then the backfill incorporating the marker tape and the whole
then compacted. The marker tape shall be provided as part of the item covering the
duct. These operations shall be carefully coordinated with the duct layer who shall
supervise the duct covering operations to ensure there shall be no damage to the ducts.

7.19.3.4 Breakaway Support Coupling, Transformer Base and Multi-

directional Slip Base Assemblies. The construction of support coupling, transformer
base and multi-slip base assemblies shall be in accordance with the recommended
practices of the manufacturers as supplemented by the following additional installation
instructions:

The type of breakaway assembly used (support coupling, transformer

base, or multi-direction slip base) shall be the Transformer Base unless otherwise
indicated in the Contract Plans and listed in the Bill of Quantities. If the weight of
luminarie and pole exceed 590 kilograms, breakaway support coupling assembly
cannot be used.

Where the lighting column flange plate is in contact with a breakaway

transformer base the contacting surfaces shall be thoroughly coated with an aluminum-
impregnated caulking compound, or a synthetic rubber gasket may be placed between
the two surfaces, as approved by the Engineer.

7.19.3.4.1 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly Installation.

Breakaway support coupling assembly shall be installed on new and existing
foundations in accordance with the recommended practices of the manufacturer as
supplemented by the following installation instructions:

93
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

1. The coupling manufacturer shall have a representative present

during initial installation.

2. At existing foundations the anchor nuts, pole, grout pad and

leveling nuts shall be removed and the conduits cut to a maximum height of fifty (50)
mm above the foundation.

3. Area around the anchor bolts shall be cleaned of debris or dirt.

4. Heavy duty galvanized (HDG) anchor bolts must be installed min.

sixty four (64) mm to max. seventy six (76) mm above the new foundation or cut off to
the same elevation above on existing foundations.

5. Remove excess zinc or other foreign material from HDG anchor

bolts by chasing the threads with a standard HDG twenty seven (27) mm diameter three
(3) mm pitch nut to within twenty five (25) mm of the foundation. Thread couplings onto
the anchor bolts by hand.

When threading coupling onto the anchor bolt, take precautions

so as not to damage the black coating on the surface.

6. Level couplings after positioning. There should be a minimum of

three (3) mm and a maximum of nine (9) mm gap between the bottom surface of the
coupling and the top of the anchor.

7. Remove the nut, small washer and the cardboard sleeve.

8. Set the pole in place on top of couplings and large washers.

9. Install small washers and hand tighten the nuts.

10. Plumb the pole using the couplings as required. Pole should sit firmly
on all four (4) couplings before starting to tighten the nuts.

11. To complete the installation, tighten the nuts to the manufacturer's

specified torque or use torque control nuts. Do not over torque the nut as it may crack
the coupling.
Note: Torque control nuts should not be used in highly corrosive
environment.

7.19.3.4.2 Breakaway Multi-direction Slip Base Assembly Installation .

Construction of the breakaway multi-directional slip base assembly shall be in
accordance with the recommended practices of the manufacturer as supplemented by
the following installation instructions:

1. The slip plane shall be free of obstructions such as protruding

conduit or anchor bolts. The conduit, anchor bolts, and other obstructions shall
terminate at a height at or below the elevation of the top of the bottom slip plate.

94
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Washers in the slip plane shall be placed between the bottom

plate and the keeper plate to reduce friction.

3. The clamping bolts for the slip base assembly shall be tightened
to 200 Newton Meters or to the specified torque, plus or minus two percent (2%), in two
stages using an accurately calibrated torque wrench before erecting the light standard
onto the foundation bolts.

4. Anchor bolts shall extend through the top heavy hex nut two full
threads.

5. Anchor bolts damaged after the foundation concrete is placed

shall not be repaired by bending or welding. The Contractor's repair procedure is to be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to making any repairs. The procedure is
to include removing the damaged portion of the anchor bolt, cutting threads on the
undamaged portion to remain, the installation of an approved threaded sleeve nut and
stud, and repairing the foundation with epoxy concrete repair.

6. Where used, the grout pad shall not extend above the elevation
of the bottom of the slip base.

7. Anchor bolts shall be installed plumb, ± 1 degree.

8. The lighting column flange plate, where in contact with the pole
foundation, shall be coated externally with black bituminous paint.

7.19.3.4.3 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transformer Base Assembly

Installation.

1. Cast aluminum transformer bases shall meet the requirements of

the latest version of AASHTO's and "Standard Specifications for Structural Supports
for Highway Signs, Luminaries and Traffic Signals."

2. Cast aluminum transformer bases shall be marked for easy

identification as to compliance with the above specifications.

3. All connecting and hold down washers shall be supplied and

installed in accordance with the base manufacturer recommendations.

4. The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a certification that the

base meets AASHTO requirements for all types of breakaway bases.

5. All connecting and anchor bolts shall be torqued to a minimum

257 N-M or as specified by the pole and breakaway base manufacturer.

95
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

6. If shimming is necessary to install the light poles straight and

level, on its longitudinal axis, the contractor shall install "U" shaped shims or bound flat
washers. The washers/shims shall be installed around the anchor bolts.

7.19.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES. The uPVC ducts, drawpits,

reinforced concrete bases and foundations, and breakaway assemblies will be
inspected, sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08 "Acceptance
of Work" in these General Specifications.

The materials incorporated into the uPVC ducts, drawpits, reinforced concrete bases
and foundations and breakaway assemblies shall be sampled, tested and evaluated in
accordance with the specifications and test methods referenced in Subsection 7.19.2
"Materials" and Subsection 1.08.3 "Certification of Conformance" in these General
Specifications. The installation of these materials and construction of the ducts,
drawpits, bases, foundations and assemblies will be inspected and accepted in
accordance with Subsection 7.19.3 "Construction Requirements" and Subsection 1.08.4
"Measured or Tested Conformance" in these General Specifications.

7.19.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Bases, foundations and breakaway

assemblies shall be measured by the number of units acceptably constructed. uPVC
duct shall be measured by the linear meter of completed and backfilled trench in which
the specified number of ducts have been installed. Ducts shall be measured along the
axis of the duct from terminus to terminus and shall include all bends. Breakaway
support coupling assemblies installed on existing foundations shall also be measured
by the unit.

Reinforced concrete drawpits and cast iron covers shall be measured by the number
of completed and accepted drawpits of each type and size.

7.19.6 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities, measured as provided

above, will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) for the pay items listed below that are
specified in the Bill of Quantities. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all
materials, for all labor, equipment, tools, supplies and all other items necessary for the
proper completion of the work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment"
in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

71901 uPVC Duct, installed, 50 mm dia Linear

Meter

71902 uPVC Duct, installed, 80 mm dia Linear

Meter

96
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

71903 uPVC Duct, installed, 100 mm dia Linear

Meter

71904 uPVC Duct, installed, 150 mm dia Linear

Meter

71905 uPVC Duct, installed, 200 mm dia Linear

Meter

71906 uPVC Duct, installed, 250 mm dia Linear

Meter

71907 uPVC Duct, installed, 300 mm dia Linear

Meter

71908 uPVC Duct, installed, 350 mm dia Linear

Meter

71909 uPVC Duct, installed, ___ mm dia Linear

Meter

71915 Drawpit with Heavy Duty Steel Cover, 90 x 900 x 1200 mm Unit

71916 Drawpit with Heavy Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 1800 x 1200 mm Unit

71917 Drawpit with heavy Duty Steel Cover, 600 x 600 x 1200 mm Unit

71918 Drawpit with Heavy Duty Steel Cover, (Size) mm Unit

71925 Drawpit with Medium Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 900 x 1200 mm Unit

71926 Drawpit with Medium Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 1800 x 1200 mm Unit

71927 Drawpit with Medium Duty Steel Cover, 600 x 600 x 1000 mm Unit

71928 Drawpit with Medium Duty Steel Cover, (Size) mm Unit

71935 Drawpit with Light Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 900 x 1200 mm Unit

71936 Drawpit with Light Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 1800 x 1200 mm Unit

71937 Drawpit with Light Duty Steel Cover, 600 x 600 x 1000 mm Unit

71938 Drawpit with Light Duty Steel Cover, (Size) mm Unit

71945 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (6) meter lighting column Unit

97
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

71946 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (8) meter lighting column Unit

71947 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (10) meter lighting column Unit

71948 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (12) meter lighting column Unit

71949 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (14) meter lighting column Unit

71950 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (16) meter lighting column Unit

71951 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (20) meter high Unit

mast/lighting column

71952 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (25) meter high Unit

mast/lighting column

71953 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (30) meter high Unit

mast/lighting column

71954 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (35) meter high Unit

mast/lighting column

71955 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (___) meter high Unit

mast/lighting column

71960 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (6) meter lighting Unit
column

71961 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (8) meter lighting Unit
column

71962 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (10) meter lighting Unit
column

71963 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (12) meter lighting Unit
column

71964 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (14) meter lighting Unit
column

71965 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (16) meter lighting Unit
column

71966 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (___) meter lighting Unit
column

71970 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (6) meter Unit
lighting column

98
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

71971 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (8) meter Unit
lighting column

71972 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (10) meter Unit
lighting column

71973 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (12) meter Unit
lighting column

71974 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (14) meter Unit
lighting column

71975 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (16) meter Unit
lighting column

71976 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (___) meter Unit
lighting column

71980 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (6) Unit
meter lighting column

71981 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (8) Unit
meter lighting column

71982 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (10) Unit
meter lighting column

71983 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (12) Unit
meter lighting column

71984 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (14) Unit
meter lighting column

71985 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (16) Unit
meter lighting column

71986 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for Unit

(___) meter high mast/lighting column

71990 Reinforced Concrete Base for substations in accordance with Unit

substation supplier design

71991 Reinforced Concrete Base for Feeder Pillars Unit

99
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 7.20 - TRAFFIC SIGNALS

7.20.1 DESCRIPTION. These Works shall consist of the supply, installation and
putting into satisfactory service of the Traffic Signal system complete with controller,
detectors, traffic signal masts and poles, signal heads complete with lamps and
pedestrian facilities where required, cabling and connection and all necessary services
for the complete installation.

The controller, signal masts and poles shall be installed on fixed foundations or bases
and the supply and construction of these, together with all necessary ducts, drawpits,
trenches, excavations and similar civil works shall be provided by the Contractor in
conformity with the requirements outlined in Section 7.19, "Civil Works for Electrical
Installation" and as further detailed in this Section of these General Specifications.

Placement of the signal poles and controller cabinet shall minimize the possibility of
their being struck by errant vehicles.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Signal Controller, (No. ) Phase
Traffic Signal Head
Pedestrian Traffic Signal Head
Pedestrian Traffic Signal Head, Push Button
Traffic Signal Support
Traffic Loop Detectors

7.20.2 DEFINITIONS. For this Section of the General Specifications the following
definitions shall apply. Where applicable, the meanings of the terms are detailed in BS
892:1967 Glossary of Highway Engineering Terms and BS 6100 Section 2.4.1:1986
Highway Engineering.

1. Full-vehicular actuated traffic signals. Traffic signaling equipment in which the

duration of green signals and the time of the cycle vary in relation to the traffic flow into
and through the controlled area.

2. Fixed time traffic signals. Traffic signaling equipment in which the duration of the
red and green signals are fixed in relations to each other and together form a fixed
cycle.

3. Semi-vehicular actuated traffic signals. Traffic signaling equipment which

provides vehicular actuated control of the minor roads including Vehicular Extension
Periods up to the Maximum Green Period.

4. Pedestrian demand traffic signals. Traffic signaling equipment actuated by push

button and providing right-of-way for pedestrians, who when the request is made, do
not have the right-of-way.

5. Traffic signal sequence. Traffic signal head aspects to provide the following
facilities:

100
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Option 1 (Vehicle/Vehicle)
VEH A G A R R R
VEH B R R RA G G

Option 2 (Vehicle/Pedestrian)
VEH G A R R R RA G
PED R R R G FG R R

If specified the flashing green (FG) pedestrian right-of-way may be complete with
audible signal.

6. Right-of-way. The condition which applies when a green signal is displayed to

traffic at the approach to a primary signal face and which permits traffic to proceed if the
way is clear, but with special care to turning traffic, giving way to pedestrians who are
crossing.

7. Traffic stream. Vehicles in one (1) or more lanes on the same approach to the
controlled area which, when they have the right-of-way, will move in the same direction.

8. Stage. A condition of signal lights during a period of the cycle which gives right-
of-way to one (1) or more particular traffic movements.

A stage may be considered as starting at the point at which all phases that will have
right-of-way during the stage have been set to green, and all phases terminating have
been set to red and ending at the point at which the phase loses the right-of-way.

Stages may be considered as being separated by interstage timing periods during

which phases loses and gain right-of-way to establish a new stage.

9. Interstage period. The period between the end of one (1) stage and the start of
the next stage.

10. Phase. The sequence of conditions applied to one (1) or more streams of
vehicular traffic and, where required combinations of vehicular traffic and pedestrians,
which always receive identical signal light indications throughout the complete cycle.

11. Minimum green run period. The minimum duration of the phase green signal
before it is allowed to be terminated.

12. Vehicular extension period. Additional duration of green signal indication s ecured
by operation of a detector by vehicles having the right-of-way.

13. Maximum green run period. The maximum time for which a phase can continue
to be extended by its associated detection equipment after a demand has been made
by traffic on another phase.

101
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

14. Early cut-off. A condition in which one (1) or more traffic streams are permitted
to move after the stoppage of one (1) more of the traffic streams which during the
preceding stage have been permitted to run with them.

15. Late release. A condition in which one (1) or more traffic streams are permitted
to move before the release of one (1) or more of the traffic streams which during the
subsequent stage are permitted to run with them.

16. Cycle. The sum of all stages from the beginning of the green on a reference
major street until the return of green to the reference approach.

17. Staggered ambers. A condition where on a change of right-of-way the warning

to traffic streams about to start commences during the warning to traffic streams called
upon to stop.

18. All red. A condition where on a change of right-of-way the commencement of a

warning to traffic streams about to start commences after the termination of the warning
to traffic streams called upon to stop.

19. Normal clearance period. A fixed inter-stage period giving staggered ambers.

20. Fixed extra clearance. A fixed inter-stage period longer than the normal
clearance period.

21. Turning traffic. Vehicles turning left or right after passing the stop line or primary
signal face.

22. Demand. A request for right-of-way by traffic during a phase which has no right-
of-way when the request is made.

23. Forced change. A condition which shall cause a change to a selected stage,
unless the controller is in an inter-stage or a minimum green period, in which case the
change to the selected stage shall be deferred until the expiry of the minimum green
period providing the condition is still present at that time.

7.20.3 SUBMITTALS. Material and equipment listings along with shop drawings of
poles, mast arms, controller, cabinet, wiring schematics, harnesses and pin connectors,
etc., shall be furnished the Engineer for approval within sixty (60) days after signing the
Contract. Partial listings and shop drawings will not be accepted for consideration.

Submissions shall be clear, complete, and in quadruplicate. Material and equipment

lists shall, in addition to a summary, include catalog cutouts or published data sheets.
Unacceptable submittal data will be returned for corrective action. A copy of the
approved material and equipment listings along with approved shop drawings will be
returned to the Contractor.

Any changes to the approved material or equipment lists must be requested in

writing. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit for inspection and

102
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

approval samples of both the specified and proposed substitute item at no cost to the
Ministry. Manufacturer's warranties and guarantees, furnished on equipment used in
the Work, shall be delivered to the Engineer; likewise, instruction sheets and parts lists
supplied shall be delivered to the Engineer upon receipt of the equipment. For each
type of equipment used in the Work, spare units reflecting ten percent (10%) of the
equipment used with a minimum of one (1) shall be provided to the Engineer.

Throughout the entire project, all units of any one (1) item, such as poles, signal
heads, detectors, controllers, cabinets, etc., shall be made by the same manufacturer
unless otherwise approved in writing by the Ministry.

Inasmuch as certain items and/or equipment furnished for use under this Section will
be standard production type products, acceptance will be made by the Engineer, based
on selected confirmation tests, the manufacturer's certification of the material and/or
design conforming to the requirements, noted hereinafter or on the plans, and visual
inspection at the job site. The manufacturer shall make available to the Ministry data
and material samples from the production runs for use in evaluation of their product.

7.20.4 MATERIALS.

7.20.4.1 General. Materials employed in the manufacture of the equipment shall be

the best of their respective kinds and the workmanship shall conform to the best
modern practice. Material shall be selected or treated so that no corrosion will occur
during the lifetime of the installation.

The equipment shall be designed to operate on A.C. 220 volts single phase 60 Hz.
The equipment shall function satisfactorily should the voltage vary within the plus
fifteen percent (+15%) or minus twenty percent (-20%) and should the frequency vary
within plus or minus four percent (±4%). If the equipment is sensitive to voltage
fluctuations within the above stated limits an automatic voltage stabilizer shall be
incorporated in the system.

Electronic equipment shall use components of assessed quality in accordance with

the system outlined in BS 9000 General Requirements For A System For Electronic
Components Of Assessed Quality or other approved equal.

All equipment shall be designed and derated for continuous operation at fifty degrees
Celsius (50oC.) ambient temperature and one hundred percent (100%) relative humidity
with temperatures reaching eighty-five degrees Celsius (85oC.) in direct sunlight with
a high ultra violet content. The equipment shall be suitable for uninterrupted full load
operation exposed to sun, dust storms, corrosive elements and similar adverse climatic
conditions.

All wiring shall be neatly and securely fixed in position in an approved manner. The
wiring, except loop detector wire, shall be in high temperature PVC insulated cables,
color coded for ease of identification. All terminals shall be of adequate size.

103
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

All equipment and associated service requirements shall comply with BS 505:1971
Road Traffic Signals, or approved equal and with local requirements covering timing,
sequence, phasing detectors, modes, facilities and other options as may be detailed.

7.20.4.2 Concrete and Footings. Concrete for footings and pedestals shall conform
to Subsection 5.03.9, "Concrete For Minor Structures" in these General Specifications.

Concrete for prestressed poles shall be Class K conforming to Paragraph 5.04.3.1

"Prestressed Concrete" in these General Specifications.

Reinforcing steel shall conform to Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General
Specifications.

Prestressing steel shall conform to Paragraph 5.04.3.3 "Prestressing Reinforcement"

in these General Specifications.

Piling shall conform to Section 5.06 "Piling" in these General Specifications.

7.20.4.3 Steel Products. Steel products shall conform to the following:

Structural Steel Tubing ASTM A 501 or ASTM A 595,

Grade A

Steel Castings ASTM A 27, Grade U-60-30

Galvanizing ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153

Low Carbon Anchor Bolts, Bolts, Nuts, ASTM A 307

and Washers

High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and ASTM A 325

Washers

Stainless Steel Bolts, Screws, and ASTM A 193

Washers

Stainless Steel Nuts ASTM A 194

7.20.4.4 Aluminum Products.

1. Aluminum tubing, support components, bases and miscellaneous support

hardware shall conform to ASTM B 108, B 209, B 211 or B 221, as appropriate.
Aluminum alloys shall have a minimum tensile strength of two thousand five hundred
(2,500) kilograms per square centimeter, and a minimum yield strength of two thousand
(2,000) kilograms per square centimeter.

104
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Miscellaneous non-structural aluminum castings shall conform to ASTM B

108, alloy optional.

7.20.4.5 Cable and Duct.

1. Conductor Cable, High Voltage. The voltage rating of the conductor cable
supplying primary electrical power shall be five (5) KV for primary voltages less than five
(5) KV, and fifteen (15) KV for voltages of five (5) KV and above. The specific type of
conductor cable shall be as recommended and approved by the Kingdom.

2. Conductor Cable and Wire. Conductor cable shall be six hundred (600) volt
cable, single conductor, thermoplastic insulated and sheathed. The conductor cable
shall be plainly marked on the outside with the manufacturer's name and identification
in accordance with industry practice.

3. Duct. Duct shall consist of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe conforming
to ASTM F 512, Type DB-120, or ABS plastic pipe conforming to ASTM D 2750, Type
II. Duct for jacking may be galvanized steel as approved by the Engineer.

7.20.5 CONTROLLERS.

7.20.5.1 General. Controllers shall be completely solid state, digital micro-processor

controllers. Solid state shall mean that electronic devices such as transistors, diodes,
resistors, and capacitors are used to perform the functions of the controller or other
mechanism. They shall be capable of providing the number and sequence of intervals,
phases, overlapping phases, and special operational features required by the plans and
specifications.

The manufacturer shall program each controller to operate as required by the plans
and specifications. All logic circuit inputs shall be internally buffered to withstand
transients and electrical noise resulting from normal use, without damage to the circuits.
All controller timing shall be fully programmable using keyboard units located on the
front panel of each controller. Memory storage shall be non-volatile EPROM under a
main power-off condition for at least thirty (30) days.

It shall be possible to advance the controller through the normal cycle by a hand-
operated (police) switch. This switch shall control all intervals except the yellow change
and red clearance intervals which shall be timed by the controller as programmed.
Controllers shall be designed for operation at a nominal power input of two hundred
twenty (220) volt, single phase, sixty (6) hertz alternating current. The controller and
all associated electrical equipment shall operate satisfactorily at any voltage between
one hundred eighty (180) and two hundred forty-five (245) volts. They shall also
operate satisfactorily within a power mains frequency range of sixty (60) hertz plus or
minus three (±3) hertz.

A diagnostic and interrogation control unit shall be supplied with each controller which
shall provide means of changing the intersection parameters and give visual displays

105
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

of circuit functions to enable a rapid maintenance service, and indicate stage in

operation, termination or running of minimum green time, signal state for each phase
and stored demands.

The time clock shall be of real time quartz type having the same accuracy and
monitoring as that of the mains frequency with which it shall be synchronized. The time
clock module shall be programmed to provide the time plan dependent control and to
be used in dedicated intersection or in the area or group coordinated system as
required, it shall accept, operate and pass on the green signal hurry calls and to provide
any other time based requirement as specified.

The module shall be provided with a battery operated "stand by" unit for use in the
event of a main failure which shall function for a minimum of two hundred (200) days
and arranged so that when supply is returned the signals will reestablish without loss
of function.

Controllers shall be capable of being fitted with modules to provide priority facilities
for emergency or other public vehicles fitted with the necessary equipment. In no case
shall the introduction or cancellation of a priority signal override a normal minimum
green period on any stage sequence specified for safety reasons but the priority signal
may convert a running signal to a minimum green run period.

The controller shall be fitted with adjustable auto transformer signal dimming facilities
to reduce the intensity of the aspect signals to between five to fifty percent (5-50%) of
full intensity during the night hours. All signals shall be reduced by the same amount
which shall be adjustable and capable of being set between the limits specified.

The reduced intensity shall not affect the color of the light signal which shall comply
with the limits set out in BS 1376:1985.

Switching of the reduced signal aspect intensity of each intersection shall be provided
by photo electric control relay supplying the traffic signals through a tapped auto
transformer controlled by a change-over Contractor to IEC 158:1 or a solid state
contactor to IEC 158:2.

The photo-electric controls shall consist of two (2) omni-directional cadmium cell
thermal relays connected in series using solid state photo-variable conductance
elements giving a 2:1 on/off ration with sensitivity to switch on lights when the daylight
illumination reduces to seventy (70) lux. The photo-electric cells shall be mounted at
the top of the nearest traffic signal mast or other purpose designed high mounting and
connected to the controller via the duct system.

The photo-cell control module shall be capable of adjustment to permit switching

levels between thirty (30) and eighty (80) lux. The exact settings between these limits
is to be determined on Site and approved.

Series connection of the two (2) photo cells shall ensure that failure of one cell (in the
closed position) will allow the other to control the circuit.

106
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

An on-off switch shall be installed in the controller arranged so that in the "on"
position the traffic signal dimming system is functional and the "off" position shall ensure
that the contactor and hence the dimming remains de-energized whilst the control
system remains functional.

Two (2) or more power interruptions separated by power restoration of fifteen

hundred (1,500) or more milliseconds shall be considered as separate interruptions.
When power to the controller is interrupted and then restored, the controller shall react
as follows:

1. When the interruption is five hundred (500) milliseconds or less, the controller
shall continue to operate as though the interruption had not occurred.

2. When the interruption is one thousand (1,000) milliseconds or more, the controller
shall revert to its start-up sequence.

3. When the interruption is more than five hundred (500) milliseconds and less than
one thousand (1,000) milliseconds, the controller shall react in accordance with either
Subparagraph 1 or 2 above.

Three (3) or more power interruptions of three hundred (300) milliseconds or less
separated by power restoration of three hundred (300) milliseconds or more shall not
cause the controller to revert to its start-up sequence. Whenever power is restored
after a power interruption, as defined in Subparagraphs 2 and 3 above, the initial signal
indications shall be those which are programmed to be displayed to traffic at the
beginning of the green interval for the major traffic movement on the major street. The
manufacturer shall program each controller to restart at that point in the cycle. The
restart program shall also place a call on each actuated phase of a traffic-actuated
controller.

The programmed timing of any interval by the controller shall not deviate at any time
by more than plus or minus one hundred (± 100) milliseconds from the set value related
to the power frequency. The controller and all associated electrical equipment shall
operate satisfactorily in a temperature range of from minus twenty-five degrees Celsius
(-25oC) to eighty-five degrees Celsius (85o C). They shall also operate satisfactorily at
a relative humidity of not over ninety-five percent (95%) over the temperature range of
five degrees Celsius (5oC) to forty-five degrees Celsius (45oC).

Non-varying controller functions shall be contained in a programmable read-only

memory (PROM) (or EPROM), or similar device. The manufacturer shall program this
memory as required by the plans and specifications prior to delivery of the controller.
This memory shall be unaffected by a power outage. It shall be alterable only by being
reprogrammed by an external device or by replacement of the memory. The controller
functions which shall be contained in this memory include (but are not limited to):

1. Permissible sequences of indications, intervals, and phases;

107
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Minimum allowable timing of Yellow Clearance, Green, Walk and Don't Walk
intervals;
3. Initial indications upon start-up after power interruption;
4. Prohibited simultaneous signal combinations.

Controllers shall not accept nor operate upon any manual input or stored timing
parameters shorter than the following:

1. Yellow Clearance 2.0 seconds

2. Minimum green 5.0 seconds
3. Minimum "Walk" 4.0 seconds
4. Minimum pedestrian clearance 6.0 seconds

Controllers shall not allow any of the following conditions:

1. Green signal indications which cause two (2) or more traffic movements to be in
conflict.
2. The appearance of indications, intervals, or phases which the Manual o n Uniform
Traffic Control Devices states shall not follow other specified indications, intervals, or
phases.
3. The simultaneous appearance of combinations of indications which are prohibited
by the MUTCD.

Controllers shall require, in accordance with the MUTCD, that designated indications,
intervals, and phases shall follow specified indications, intervals, and phases.

7.20.5.2 Controller Enclosure. Each controller shall be housed in a dust tight and
weatherproof enclosure conforming to IP 65 of IEC 529. The housing shall be made
from aluminum alloy, galvanized sheet steel or glass-reinforced polyester as specified.
The surface shall be treated light grey with paint having high ultra-violet reflective and
corrosion inhibiting qualities and so designed as to minimize the effect of solar radiation
on the equipment.

The housing shall be constructed of material not less than two (2) millimeters thick
and internally ribbed where necessary to provide a rigid structure and support
framework for the necessary internally mounted equipment. All external corners and
edges, excepting the lower edges, shall be rounded.

The front and rear of the enclosure shall be fully accessible through one (1) side or
two (2) center opening doors fitted with gaskets and compression type recessed hinges
and center mounted cylinder locks with three locking points.

Where specified the enclosure may be fitted with access doors on one side only and
the internal equipment shall be hinge mounted on a frame for access to front and rear.
The housing shall be adequately braced and supported to carry the weight of the
equipment when moved to the open position.

108
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Provision shall be made for manual control of the traffic signal control system by
means of either a "built-in" flap type access door or a separate "bolt-on" unit as
specified. The "bolt-on" manual control unit shall have an enclosure to a similar
specification to that of the controller Access to the controller and manual controls shall
be protected with locks with keys of different patterns, two (2) keys for each lock.
Corresponding locks and keys for each controller or manual control shall be identical
for enclosures of the same make and pattern.

The controller and manual control enclosure for each intersection shall provide
sufficient space to house all standard equipment including vehicle detector modules,
local interface and master equipment for use in a cabled or cable less system, and shall
be capable of operating as an isolated intersection or as linked system.

7.20.5.3 Controller Electrical Equipment. All circuit wiring shall have a current
carrying capacity in accordance with design requirements.

Traffic signal head wiring and switching equipment shall be suitable for a normal
maximum lamp load of two (2) kilowatts to allow for uprated signal lamps where used
on high speed motor road intersections.

All components and accessories shall be adequately derated and sufficiently sized
so as to ensure reliability in operation and require only routine maintenance for a
minimum of five (5) years operation.

A separate switched 13A BS 1363 power socket outlet shall be provided for
maintenance purposes.

A heavy duty (HD) master switch and fuse shall be provided to isolate all equipment
in the controller from the mains supply. The master switch shall be DP and rated at not
less than twenty (20) amps.

An HD switch and fuse shall be provided to isolate the power from the controller logic.
The controller fuse shall be rated at ten (10) amps.

A separate HD switch rated at not less than ten (10) amps shall be provided to control
traffic signal lamps. The operation of this switch shall not affect the controller logic.

A fault on any signal feeder or a short circuited lamp shall not cause any major
damage to the controller which cannot be easily repaired, i.e. fuse replaced, plug-in
lamp switching module replaced etc.

To enable the controller to be used in a future wide area control system a separate
switch fuse outlet shall be provided to supply electrical power to the associated
equipment. The mains to this switch will not be disconnected by the controller switch.

Where deemed preferable or if otherwise specified the HD switches and fuses may
be substituted with Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB's) conforming to IEC 157 or

109
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

BS 4752. The MCCB's shall be of equivalent rating and provide over current and fault
protection.

All HD switches, fuses, or MCCB's shall be derated for use in the climatic conditions
detailed. All control and protection equipment shall be properly labeled showing the
purpose and function of the equipment controlled.

The controller shall be fitted with a voltage monitor and in the event of a supply loss
of less than fifty (50) milliseconds the controller shall continue to function normally.
Should the supply failure exceed 50 milliseconds the controller shall shut down without
malfunction and the control logic shall be retained without loss.

Where specified the controller shall be fitted with a mains failure standby unit which
shall comprise a fixed thirty-two (32) amp three (3) pin plug suitable for the connection
of a portable thirty-two (32) ampere socket and flexible cable connected to a mobile
generating set.

The fixed plug and portable socket shall be in accordance with BS 4343:1968 or IEC
309 or approved equal standard and located in an IP 65 enclosure within the base of
the enclosure.

7.20.5.4 Pre-timed Controllers. Pre-timed controllers, without any physical change

in or addition to the controller or terminal facilities, shall be capable of operating:

1. As an isolated intersection controller, or

2. As a unit in a non-interconnected coordinated progressive system, or
3. As either a secondary or master controller in an interconnected coordinated
progressive system.

The controller may be either:

1. Modular with plug-in circuit boards, or

2. An integral, single unit, or
3. A combination of the above.

All controllers furnished shall be identical and shall have the following features as a
minimum:

1. Four (4) separate and distinct signal sequences (operating plans)

2. Three (3) cycle lengths
3. Three (3) offsets for each cycle
4. Four (4) splits per cycle
5. Thirty-six (36) intervals per cycle
6. Thirty-six (36) signal circuits
7. The capability to accept a command for automatic transfer to and from flashing
operation. The time of transfer within the signal cycle shall conform to the requirements
of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

110
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Switches of keyboard units shall be provided on the front of the controller to permit
manual programming of the following functions:

1. Any one (1) of the four (4) signal sequences (operating plans)
2. Any one (1) of the three (3) cycle lengths
3. Any one (1) of the four (4) splits
4. Any one (1) of the three (3) offsets
5. Turn ON or OFF the power to the controller only
6. Select the mode of operation:

(1) Automatic (normal)

(2) Stop-timing
(3) Manual advance of intervals

The controller status shall be displayed by dials or electro-luminous devices for the
following functions:

1. Signal interval
2. Signal plan (sequence of phases)
3. Length of cycle, split, and offset
4. Status of back-up battery

Each controller shall be readily interchangeable with other similar controllers. The
wiring harness and pin connector shall be wired in accordance with the U.S. National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) specifications. Controllers shall be
connected to the associated electrical equipment by the wiring harness terminating in
an enclosed plug, with a socket in the controller.

7.20.5.5 Traffic-Actuated Controllers. The controller shall be a fully traffic-actuated

controller which is also capable of functioning as a semi-traffic actuated controller or as
a pretimed controller. It shall also be capable of operation as a unit in a progressive
coordinated signal system.

The controller may be either:

1. Modular with plug-in printed circuit boards, or

2. An integral, single unit, or
3. A combination of the above.

All controllers furnished shall be identical and shall have indicator lights on the front
panel to show as a minimum:

1. The phase which is being timed

2. The interval which is being timed
3. The next phases to which the controller will advance
4. The presence of vehicle and pedestrian detector actuations in the controller.
5. The status of the back-up battery.

111
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The following external inputs to and outputs from the controller shall be provided as
a minimum in addition to power input, grounding (earthing) and signal circuits:

1. Vehicle and pedestrian detectors

2. Stop timing (which may be activated at any point in the cycle)
3. Hold (to prevent transfer of right-of-way at the end of a phase)
4. Inhibit maximum timing
5. Force-off (to cause immediate transfer of right-of-way without regard to timing
status)
6. Manual control
7. Switches to insert:

(1) One (1) artificial demand without extensions on all phases having detectors
(2) Continuous artificial demands on all phases (which would result in pre-timed
operation)

If the controller has a keyboard entry device, the front panel shall contain an
electronic character display panel. When information is put into or requested from the
controller memory and operating circuits, the information shall be shown on the display
panel. The number of characters which can be displayed shall be adequate to show
all data and parameters in decimal format together with a data descriptor.

A diagnostic program shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the controllers. The

program shall show the proper operation of all inputs, outputs, controls, and indicators.
It shall provide visual confirmation on the front panel of the controller. The diagnostic
program may be in the controller memory or may be in a separate plug-in module. An
instruction and maintenance manual, including a diagnostic routine, circuit diagrams,
and parts list, shall be furnished with each controller.

Each four (4) phase traffic-actuated controller called for by the contract shall have the
following characteristics:

1. It shall be capable of providing four (4) phase operation.

2. It shall provide for four (4) programmable overlaps.
3. The above features shall be provided by the controller whether or not preemption,
coordination, or other special programming is utilized.
4. Sequential timing of phases (single ring, dual entry)
5. Separate vehicle and pedestrian timing shall be provided on all four (4) phases.
6. Volume-density timing shall be provided on all timed and vehicle-actuated phases.

This shall include a combination of:

(1) Increasing the length of the initial part of the Green interval on the basis of
the number of vehicle actuations during the Yellow and Red intervals, and
(2) A reduction in the allowable time gap between actuations by vehicles having
the Green indication based on the time after an actuation on a conflicting phase.

112
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Each eight (8), sixteen (16), or thirty-two (32) phase traffic-actuated controller which
is required by the plans and estimate of quantities shall be identical to the other eight
(8), sixteen (16), or thirty-two (32) phase controllers furnished under this contract.
These controllers shall have the following characteristics:

1. They shall be capable of providing from two (2) to eight (8), sixteen (16), or thirty-
two (32) phase operation as required by the plans and Bill of Quantities. It shall be
readily possible to increase the phase capability of the controller to eight (8), sixteen
(16), or thirty-two (32) sequential phases by reprogramming through the keyboard.
2. They shall provide for four (4) programmable overlaps whether or not preemption,
coordination, or other special programming is utilized.
3. Concurrent timing of phases (dual ring) shall be provided.
4. The controller shall be programmable for both single and dual entry. (This means
that an actuation may cause transfer of right-of-way to only one (1) phase (single entry)
or to two (2) or more concurrent, non-conflicting phases.)
5. Volume-density timing shall be provided on all vehicle-actuated phases. This shall
include a combination of:

(1) Increasing the length of the initial part of the Green interval on the basis of
the number of vehicle actuations during the Yellow and Red intervals, and
(2) A reduction in the allowable time gap between actuations by vehicles having
the Green indication based on the time after an actuation on a conflicting phase.

When a phase is terminated by expiration of the maximum green interval timing, a

demand for return of the right-of-way to that phase shall be automatically placed.

When operating in the semi-actuated mode, the signal shall revert to and rest with the
green indication displayed to the major street. When operating in the full traffic-
actuated mode, the signal shall rest with the green indication being shown to the street
on which the last actuation occurred.

7.20.6 MONITORS. Either internal or external to each controller there shall be a

device (monitor) which will detect conflicting signal indications, unsatisfactory controller
or monitor voltage, or the absence of a required red indication. If included in the
controller, the monitor function shall have a separate power supply.

The monitor shall have twelve (12) input channels. Four (4) inputs per channel shall
be provided. For the purpose of conflict determination, a signal on the Green, Yellow,
or Walk inputs of the channel shall be considered to indicate that the channel is in
service. The signal inputs shall be taken at the field terminals in the control cabinet so
that the load switches as well as the controller output are monitored. For the purpose
of detecting the absence of a required Red indication, a signal on any of the Green,
Yellow, Walk, or Red inputs or a channel shall be considered to show that the channel
is in service.

When voltages concurrently exist on any conflicting channels for five hundred (500)
milliseconds or more, the monitor shall trigger. When the monitor triggers due to
conflicting Greens or the absence of a Red indication, it shall place the signal in a

113
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

flashing mode. The desired mode shall be indicated on the plans and shall be user
programmable by jumpers on the terminal facilities. It may either cause the signal
indications to flash Yellow on the main street and Red on the minor street, or to flash
Red on both streets. This flashing mode shall continue until manually reset. Power
interruption and subsequent restoration after the monitor is triggered by conflicting
Greens or the absence of Red shall not reset the conflict monitor. The absence of the
required voltage at any of the Red signal field terminals for one (1) second or more shall
trigger the monitor. When the direct current input voltage from its power supply to either
the monitor or the controller drops below seventy-five percent (75%) of the rated
voltage, the monitor shall trigger. When this occurs, the monitor shall place the signal
in the selected flashing mode as detailed in Paragraph 6, above. Upon resumption of
normal voltage, the monitor shall cause the controller to resume normal operation
without the necessity of manual resetting.

The wiring between the controller and the monitor shall be designed so that the signal
installation will revert to and remain in flashing mode whenever either the controller or
the monitor is disconnected. Indicator lights to display the status of the monitor and the
signal operations which it is monitoring shall be placed in its front panel or on the
controller front panel if it includes the monitor function. These lights shall indicate that
the monitor is operating and the reasons for its being triggered if that occurs.

7.20.7 TERMINAL FACILITIES AND CABINET EQUIPMENT.

7.20.7.1 Terminal Facilities. Terminal facilities consist of all devices and materials
in the control cabinet which are external to the controller and monitor, except time
switches.

Terminal facilities shall be protected by dual thirty (30) ampere common-trip, solid
neutral circuit breakers, or acceptable equivalent means for circuit protection which will
de-energize all signal indications simultaneously. These circuit breakers shall supply
power through separate bus relays and radio interference line filters to two (2) signal
busses (load strips) having essentially equal load. The bus relays shall have mercury
contactors and shall not be jack-mounted. These relays are needed to disconnect
normal power circuits from the signal indication field terminals during flashing operation.

Load switch panels shall have sufficient capacity for twelve (12) three (3) circuit load
switches, the necessary number of flash transfer relays, and two (2) double-circuit
flashers. Load switches shall be solid-state and shall be compatible with the controller.
Their contacts shall have a minimum rating of not less than one hundred fifty percent
(150%) of the load (in amperes) which will be required by the signal indications called
for by the plans. The minimum rating shall be ten (10) amperes for a tungsten lamp or
gas-tubing-transformer load at eighty to one hundred ten percent (80-110%) of rated
voltage. Solid-state current switching devices shall be derated to not more than fifty
percent (50%) of their rated maximum capacity.

Cabinet wiring shall be neat and firm. Signal circuit wiring shall have a current-
carrying capacity of not less than ten (10) amperes. Control circuit wiring shall be
capable of carrying the required current without significant voltage drop or heating.

114
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Control circuit wiring shall have a cross sectional area of four-tenths (0.4) square
millimeters (22 AWG) or more. All cabinet wiring shall have heat-resistant insulation.
To ensure reliability during the life of the installation, all wiring shall be sized to have
good mechanical strength and to carry the required current. The wiring shall be of
sufficient size so that it will not be damaged by a brief shorting of a light circuit.

Terminal strips shall be used to terminate mechanism wiring, and signal light, detector
and interconnection cables. All cabinet wiring shall be attached to the terminal strip with
spade or eyelet lugs. Terminal strips shall have strong, positive screw pressure
connectors well separated for safe and easy connection of wires. Each incoming line
on interconnection cable shall have a fuse. Flexible cable shall be furnished for
connecting the controller and other components to each other and to the terminal strips.

7.20.7.2 Cabinet and Cabinet Equipment. Each controller shall be housed in a

strong weatherproof and dustproof metal cabinet designed to be fastened with interior
anchor bolts to a concrete base. The anchor bolts shall be furnished with the cabinet.
Doors and base shall be adequately sealed to prevent the entry of rain, sand, or dust
(IP 65). The cabinet shall be of pleasing and functional design and appearance. It shall
be large enough to provide ample space for housing the controller and all of the other
electrical and mechanical devices which must be in the cabinet. This will include the
monitor, detector amplifiers, local interface and master control equipment, flashers, load
switches, circuit breakers, and fuses.

The cabinet shall have a door in the front which is nearly the full height of the cabinet.
A similar door shall be provided in the rear of the cabinet if necessary to give access
to equipment and wiring. The front cabinet door shall contain a small door for access
only to a separate compartment with switches and controls of concern to the police.
Cabinet doors shall be secured by a tumbler lock identical for all cabinets of the same
make. The police door shall be secured by a tumbler lock for standard police keys.
Two (2) keys for each controller door and one (1) police key shall be furnished for each
cabinet.

The cabinet shall be designed to limit the temperature of the air inside the cabinet to
not more than seventy degrees Celsius (70 oC) under any ambient outside temperature
without forced ventilation. Shelves or frames shall be provided within the cabinet to
support the controller and all associated equipment. Such supports shall be spaced to
give adequate air circulation. It shall not be necessary to rest one (1) piece of
equipment upon another. Relays, flashers, load switches, circuit breakers, electrical
interference filters, and other auxiliary equipment shall be located in a manner
consistent with the intersection plan. Equipment layout shall allow easy field inspection
and maintenance accessibility without extensive disassembly or special tools. The
inner and outer surfaces of the cabinet shall be properly painted or enameled to resist
corrosion, abrasion, and the effects of solar radiation. White, light grey, or aluminum
are desirable colors to improve visibility inside the cabinet and to reduce the
temperature in it by reflecting rather than absorbing the sun's rays.

The cabinet shall contain the following in addition to the controller, detector modules,
monitor, and interconnection equipment (where required):

115
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

1. An automatic variable resistor type of power surge protector in the power mains
input.
2. Radio interference filters in the power mains input.
3. A separately fused duplex power receptacle.
4. A light socket protected by a screen, with switch, for illuminating the interior of the
cabinet for servicing the equipment at night.
5. Two (2) double-circuit solid state or motor-driven flashers and bases. Flashers
shall have contacts rated for at least ten (10) amperes per circuit.
6. Intersection master switch to remove power from the entire installation.
7. Switch to remove power only from the controller.
8. Switch to remove power from the signal indications without removing it from the
controller and monitor.
9. Emergency flash switch, manual/automatic mode switch, and manual pushbutton
control cord, all accessible only through the door keyed for police use.

The control cabinet shall be placed on and bolted to a concrete base not less than
seventy-five (75) centimeters thick, of which ten (10) centimeters is above ground line.
The concrete base shall extend at least (10) centimeters beyond the control cabinet
on all sides. One (1) three (3) centimeter and at least one (1) ten (10) centimeter fiber
or plastic duct shall be placed in the concrete base. The duct shall extend
approximately five (5) centimeters above the top of the base and shall exit from the side
of the base not less than fifty (50) centimeters below ground level.

The controller cabinet shall be factory wired for the controller, monitor, detector
amplifiers, and all auxiliary equipment called for by the plans and specifications. A
cabinet wiring diagram shall be placed in a heavy plastic envelope attached to the
inside of the door. A maintenance and operations manual shall also be placed in the
envelope. An additional copy of the wiring diagram and manual for each cabinet shall
be furnished to the Ministry.

7.20.8 DETECTORS.

7.20.8.1 Vehicle Detectors.

1. Detector Loop Roadway Unit

Detection of vehicles shall be accomplished by a loop of multiple turns of wire placed

in the roadway not less than fifty (50) millimeters below its surface in accordance with
the plans.

The detector loop shall be formed from stranded copper wire having a minimum cross
sectional area of three (3) square millimeters (12 AWG), with cross-linked polyethylene
insulation. The loop wire shall then be encased for physical protection in neoprene
tubing having an inside diameter slightly greater than the loop wire and a wall thickness
of approximately one and six-tenths (1.6) millimeter. As an alternative, the loop wire
may be placed in a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) duct having a nominal inside diameter of
twenty-five (25) millimeters laid in a slot cut into the pavement.

116
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The detector loop shall not be spliced in the loop and shall be brought out from the
loop to a splice box indicated on the plans. The cable run from the splice box to the
controller cabinet shall be #14 AWG, THHN type. The output from the loop shall be
compatible with the detector amplifier. The location, configuration, and installation of
the loops shall be as shown on the plans and for high speed may be up to one hundred
fifty (150) meters from the intersection.

The width of the slots for loop cables shall be the diameter of the encased cable and
twenty-five (25) millimeters deeper than the encased loop cable diameter multiplied by
the number of turns in the loop. All debris shall be blown from the slots with
compressed air prior to installation of the cable. A stick or non-metallic object with a
broad face (rather than a sharp tool) shall be used to push the loop cable into the slot.
The cable shall be sealed into the slot with one component rubberized sealant, and the
slot shall then be filled to pavement level. The cable shall be held in place in the slot
while it is being filled.

Detector loops shall cover the total width of the carriageway with individual loops for
each traffic lane. Loops shall be installed to provide signals for right filter vehicles and
may be required, if specified, for left turning vehicles.

Detectors and control modules shall be arranged to detect presence and estimated
speed of vehicles within the active loop area, two (2) or three (3) detection loops shall
be installed and spaced apart in appropriate traffic lanes if required, for speed detection
and for signal extension times as required. Parked vehicles within or adjacent to the
detector loop shall not affect the detector operation.

2. Detector Amplifiers. The detector amplifiers shall be housed and powered in the
controller cabinet. They may be modular units with a common power supply or
separate self-contained units. All outputs from detector amplifiers shall be isolated from
equipment ground (earth). Detector amplifiers shall be self-tuning. The detector shall
automatically adjust to normal environmental changes. The detector amplifier shall be
capable of proper operation with a loop having an inductance range of from twenty (20)
to two thousand (2,000) microhenries.

In the event of a power failure, detector amplifiers shall automatically retune upon
power restoration. The circuit design of detector amplifiers shall protect the amplifier
from damage from voltage surges on the amplifier input due to lighting or other high
voltage. Detector amplifiers which are separate modular units shall have a fuse or
circuit breaker in the mains power supply lead which is accessible from the front panel.
Detector amplifiers shall have a lamp or other device to give visual indication of each
actuation of each detector channel by a vehicle.

Detector amplifiers shall provide delay and extension timing as follows, and shall
have suitable controls on the front of the amplifier for these functions:

1. In delay timing, detector output to the controller occurs from one (1) second
to thirty (30) seconds after detector actuation. The amount of delay can be selected

117
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

and shall be adjustable in not more than one (1) second increments. Each new
detection shall restart the timing of delay.

2. In extension timing, detector output to the controller is continued for a

maximum period of about seven (7) seconds after vehicle passage. This allows the
vehicle passage-time to be shortened, which increases the efficiency of the signal. The
extension timing shall be adjustable in increments or not more than one-fourth (¼)
second.
3. Green Gating. The delay and extension timing functions of detectors shall
be modified by the presence or absence of Green signal outputs from the controller as
follows:
- When the Green signal is being shown to a phase, the detector amplifier delay
timing shall not operate on that phase.
- When the Green signal is not being shown to a phase, the detector amplifier
extension timing shall not operate on that phase.

A permanent demand shall be registered by the detector as if a vehicle were present

over the loop when:
1. A loop or loop lead-in becomes an open circuit, or
2. The power supply to the detector amplifier fails.
Each detector amplifier shall be separately fused. They shall have front controls or
switches to select the detector sensitivity, to adjust frequency and inductance and
operational mode such as pulse or presence operation. There shall be a lamp or other
device on the front of the detector to indicate the operation of the output device.
Detector amplifiers shall be capable of proper operation under the same conditions of
temperature and humidity as are specified for signal controllers. Detector amplifiers
which are separate units shall be furnished with suitable cable to connect them to the
cabinet terminal block.

7.20.8.2 Pedestrian Detectors. A pedestrian detector shall be a manually-operable

normally-open switch (push button). These detectors shall be capable of being
operated by any pedestrian.

Pedestrian detectors shall be designed for fastening to a metal or wood pole or post.
Any hardware necessary for the purpose shall be furnished.

The pedestrian push button unit shall be a cast aluminum or galvanized sheet level
fabricated box fitted with a glass or acrylic display mounted adjacent to the pedestrian
access. Provision shall be made to illuminate internally that part of the display marked
with the legend "WAIT" (in Arabic and English) white on a blue background, the lamp
shall be sixty (60) watt E27 cap in accordance with IEC 64 or BS 161.

Push buttons shall be plastic, with plungers and mountings designed to minimize the
effect of jamming. Enclosures shall be dust protected and weatherproof conforming to
IP 54 of IEC 529. The push button circuits shall operate at voltages less than AC sixty
(60) volts.

118
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.20.9 VEHICLE TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS.

7.20.9.1. Optical Unit Lenses.

7.20.9.1.1 General. Vehicle traffic signal lenses shall be made either from glass
or a plastic stabilized to ultra-violet light. They type, quality, and processing of the
material shall be the best for the purpose. Lenses shall remain in satisfactory condition
after prolonged exposure to weather, including blowing sand. Plastic lenses shall not
be deformed by the head from the lamp, nor shall their chromaticity or transmittance
change materially due to heat or aging.

Lenses shall be uniformly colored throughout the body of the material. They shall be
true to required dimensions and form. They shall be free from streaks, wrinkles, chips,
or bubbles which in any way detract from their efficiency or use. Each lens, when used
in a standard traffic signal with approved lamp and proper reflector, shall produce the
appearance, light distribution, brightness, and chromatic characteristics required by this
specification. The chromaticity of each color of vehicular traffic signal lens shall be
between the following boundaries as defined by the Commission Internationale
d'Enclairage (C.I.E.) 1931 (ASTM E 308).

The minimum relative luminous transmittance of traffic signal lenses with illuminate
between two thousand eight hundred fifty degrees K (2,850o K) and three thousand
degrees K (3,000o K) shall be:

1. Red - ten percent (10%)

2. Yellow - forty-four percent (44%)
3. Green - nineteen percent (19%).

The manufacturer shall furnish certification from the supplier satisfactory to the
Ministry, stating that the lenses meet the requirements of these General Specifications.

The following information shall be pressed on the flange of each lens:

1. The word "TOP" at the proper point to indicate the correct orientation of the
lens in the head.

2. The manufacturer's trademark.

3. On plastic lenses, the maximum wattage of the lamp which may be used in an
optical unit with that lens.

4. On a three hundred (300) millimeter lens, a word or symbol to show whether

it is narrow or wide beam, if applicable.

There shall be two (2) nominal lens sizes--two hundred (200) millimeter and three
hundred (300) millimeter. All lenses of each size shall fit readily but closely into position
with its gasket so as to make a water and dust-proof joint.

119
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.20.9.1.2 Arrow Lenses.

1. Arrow lenses shall be round and shall be three hundred (300) millimeter in
nominal dimensions.

2. Arrow lenses may use prismatic diffusion or the equal thereof for diffusion of
the transmitted light.

3. Arrow lenses shall be red, green, or yellow as specified. The chromaticity and
minimum relative luminous transmittance of the translucent part of the lens shall be the
same as for other lenses of the same color.

4. All of the lens, except for the arrow, shall be covered by an opaque dull black
or dark grey enamel. Alternatively, the lens may be a composite of glass, colored
plastic and filter, with the symbol on an internal surface. The material forming the
symbol shall be of sufficient opacity to totally hide the light from the largest lamp used
behind the lens. The covering material shall not separate from the lens due to heat
from the lamp, weathering or washing during signal maintenance.

5. The shape of the arrow shall be in accordance with the MUTCD.

6. The lighted arrow indication shall appear to be uniformly illuminated over that
portion of the signal which is not opaque.

7.20.9.2 Optical Unit Reflectors. Reflectors may be either silvered glass or

specular-finished anodized aluminum. They shall be so shaped that, with the lamp in
the correct position, its light will be directed by the reflector and lens to provide the light
distribution required by these General Specifications.

Reflectors shall be mounted in such a manner that they are held firmly in the proper
optical relation to the lens and socket when the optical unit door is closed. The
mounting shall allow easy access without tools to the reflector and the back of the lens
for cleaning and replacement of the lamp. The reflector shall have provision for a lamp
receptacle. There shall be a gasket between the reflector and the lamp receptacle to
exclude dust.

Glass reflectors shall have the following characteristics:

1. They shall be made from the best quality clear glass.

2. They shall have a uniform coating of metallic silver deposited over the entire back
surface of the glass. No other substance shall be allowed between the silver and the
glass. The silver shall adhere tightly to the glass.

3. A coat of metallic copper at least thirteen one-thousands (0.013) millimeters in

thickness shall be applied over the silver. The copper coating shall extend over the
edge of the reflector one-fourth (¼) of the thickness of the glass.

120
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4. One (1) or more coats of enamel, conforming to Paint No. 9 in Section 9.13,
"Painting of Structures" in these General Specifications shall be placed over the copper
backing to prevent entrance of injurious gasses or moisture.

Aluminum reflectors:

1. The metal of the reflector shall be spun or drawn from aluminum not less than six-
tenths (0.6) millimeters in thickness with a strengthening bead or flange.

2. The specular anodized aluminum reflecting coating shall be not less than twenty-
five ten thousandths (0.0025) millimeters in thickness. The reflecting surface shall be
totally free from flaws, scratches, defacement, or distortion.

The minimum values of luminance for Green Arrows and for pedestrian indications
shall not be less than shown in Table 7.20-3.

Unless otherwise specified, there shall be a means of reducing the light output at
night from lenses having a diameter of three hundred (300) millimeters, except for arrow
lenses. The light output shall decrease proportionally as the ambient light level
decreases. The output shall decrease to not less than thirty percent (30%) nor more
than fifty percent (50%) of the light output at full rated voltage.

Table 7.20-1
Minimum Values of Luminance from Red and Green Lenses (Candelas)
Ordinary Highways

Horizontal 11G 28G on Either

On Geometric on Either Side of Side of
Vertical Axis Geometric Axis Geometric Axis

On geometric axis 400 150 25

1.1G below geometric axis 475 200 30

11G below geometric axis 200 100 25

7.20.9.3 Distribution of Light from Vehicle Traffic Signal Optical Units. When
viewed from normal angles, the lighted signal lens shall appear to be reasonably
uniformly illuminated over its entire surface. The ratio of maximum to minimum
luminance shall not exceed five (5) to one (1). Each optical unit shall be so designed
such that each lens will be illuminated independently. The unit shall be assembled so
that no light can escape from one unit to another. Optical units shall be designed to
minimize the appearance that the lamp is illuminated when the light rays from the sun
enter the lens at low angles.

121
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The distribution of light from red and green signal units shall be not less than that
given in Tables 7.20-1 and 7.20-2 under the following conditions:

1. A standard lamp used at proper voltage.

2. Transmittance as set forth in Subparagraph 7.20.9.1 "Optical Unit Lenses" in these

General Specififications.

3. Visor removed.

The light distribution for yellow signal units shall not be less than two (2) times the
values in Table 7.20-2.

Table 7.20-2
Minimum Values of Luminance from Red and Green Lenses (Candelas)
High-Speed Highways

Horizontal 11G on 28G on Either

On Either Side of Side of
Vertical Geometric Geometric Axis Geometric Axis
Axis

On geometric axis 800 380 50

11G below geometric axis 475 200 40

Table 7.20-3
Minimum Values of Luminance for Green Arrows and for Pedestrian Signals
(Candelas Per Square Meter)

On Horizontal 11G on 33G on Either

Geometric Either Side of Side of
Vertical Axis Geometric Axis Geometric Axis

On geometric axis 3500 2200 700

11G below geometric axis 2500 1350 600

17G below geometric axis 1500 1000 400

7.20.9.4 Traffic Signal Lamps. Traffic signal lamps shall be a standard design for
use in traffic signal optical units. Lamps shall be designed for an average burning time
of not less than six thousand (6,000) hours. The nominal operating voltage, rated

122
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

watts, size, light center length, and base type shall be as required by the design of the
optical unit.

The nominal operating color temperature of the lamps shall be between two thousand
eight hundred fifty degrees K (2850o K) and two thousand eight hundred fifty-four
degrees K (2854o K). Lamps may be either the tungsten or tungsten-halogen type.
Lamps with a nominal minimum light output of six hundred (600) lumens shall be used
with two hundred (200) millimeter lenses for ordinary conditions. Lamps with a nominal
minimum light output of one thousand seven hundred fifty (1,750) lumens shall be used
with larger lenses except polycarbonate arrow, special visibility limiting, and pedestrian
lenses for which the lamp size recommended by the manufacturer shall be used.
Transformers for the halogen lamps shall be furnished and shall be placed in each
signal section.

7.20.9.5 Lamp Holders. Lamp holders shall be suitable for use in the type of optical
unit furnished. The length of the lamp holder shall be such that the light center length
of the lamp to be used in that optical unit is placed at the proper distance from the
reflector as specified by the manufacturer. The metal socket of the lamp holder shall
be compatible with brass or copper. The insulating parts of the lamp holder shall be
strong and resilient and shall not burn nor soften when heated to a temperature of two
hundred fifty degrees Celsius (250o C.). The lamp holder shall be designed to ensure
that the lamp does not become loose and displaced due to vibration.

If tungsten lamps are furnished, the design of either the lamp holder or the reflector
holder shall allow the rotation on the lamp holder so that the lead wires in the lamp may
be properly oriented. It shall be possible to easily rotate the holder without changing
the relative positions of the holder and the optical light center length of the reflector.
After rotation, the holder shall be securely clamped in proper position without the use
of tools.

Each lamp holder shall have two (2) lead wires, one of which shall be color-coded
red, yellow, or green to correspond to the color of the lens which it is to be used. The
other lead shall be white. Other appropriate colors shall be used for pedestrian
indications, and for arrow indications. Each lead wire shall have a cross sectional area
of at least two (2) square millimeters (14 AWG) and shall have at least six hundred
(600) volt, one hundred five degrees Celsius (105 oC.) thermoplastic insulation. Leads
shall be long enough to reach from the lamp holder to the terminal block in the signal
head with the door fully open.

7.20.10 VEHICLE TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEAD ASSEMBLIES.

7.20.10.1 General. Each vehicle traffic signal head shall consist of an assembly of
one (1) or more signal faces. Signal head units shall be joined by bolts or similar
devices capable of developing the full strength of the signal head and making a
waterproof joint. Each signal face shall consist of an assembly of a sufficient number
of signal sections to provide the required indications. Signal heads when assembled,
generally in a group of three aspect units mounted vertically with red at the top, amber
(yellow), and green at the bottom shall be capable of individual adjustment in respect

123
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

to each other and the assembly shall be dust protected and splashproof with an
enclosure conforming to IP 54 of IEC 529. Housings, doors, visors, and backplates for
signal heads shall be made from suitable flame-resistant polycarbonate structural
plastic which is ultra-violet light and heat stabilized. The visors, housings, doors, and
backplates shall be matte black.

Each signal face consisting of three (3) sections, either all with two hundred (200)
millimeter or all with three hundred (300) millimeter lenses, as specified, and with a
standard backplate, shall perform satisfactorily under the following test:

1. The face shall be rigidly supported solely from the top or bottom section.

2. The laboratory equivalent of a sustained wind load of one hundred twenty (120)
kilograms per square meter shall be applied perpendicularly to the face and backplate.

3. The face and backplate shall withstand the above loading without damage or
permanent deformation sufficient to adversely affect their performance.

4. Upon request of the Ministry, the Contractor shall submit the results of the test
performed by a laboratory approved by the Ministry, showing that the signal face and
backplate conform to this requirement.

Signal heads assemblies shall be available in the various configurations allowing filter
left or right aspects and alternative traffic symbols as required for specific intersections.
Masks for inclusion in specific aspects with the specified symbol shall be available if
required by the intersection design. Each configuration shall be a complete unit and
fitted with the appropriate polypropylene backing sheet to complete the assembly.
Signal aspect optical units shall be fitted with a pre-focus tungsten halogen signal lamp
mounted within an aluminum reflector and fitted with a wide-angled self-colored acrylic
lens. Each aspect shall be fitted with a visor and an anti-phantom light insert to prevent
false signals from incident sunlight.

7.20.10.2 Signal Sections. Each signal section shall consist of a housing, door,
visor, and optical assembly. Joints between housing, door, lens, reflectors, and lamp
holder shall be adequately gasketed. Gasketing of outside joints shall be weatherproof,
and gasketing of joints inside the housing shall be dustproof. The devices to secure the
joints shall be simple, positive, and easily operated without special tools.

Each two hundred (200) millimeter signal section shall be square or round and
between two hundred fifty (250) millimeters, and two hundred and eighty (280)
millimeters along each side. Each three hundred (300) millimeter signal section shall
be square or round and between three hundred fifty-five (355) millimeters, and three
hundred eighty-five (385) millimeters along each side.

Each signal section and its associated optical system shall be capable of operating
satisfactorily with the section's axis either vertical or horizontal. The optical system or
the lens or both shall be capable of being turned to place the top of the lens in the
proper position. Each signal section shall have an opening at either end to fit a

124
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

mounting device. Unused openings shall be closed with an appropriate gasketed plug.
Openings between sections shall be of adequate size to easily accommodate
necessary wiring.

The signal lamp shall be low voltage supplied from a "built-in" encapsulated
transformer for each aspect. The lamps shall be fifty (50) watt for use on normal
intersections but where high speed roads (speeds above eighty (80) kilometers per
hour) form part of the whole of the intersection, one hundred (100) watt lamps shall be
used.

Light signals for vehicles shall be directed towards the vehicles at a point
approximately fifty to one hundred (50-100) meters (200-400 meters for high speed
roads) from the signal face at a point one and one-half (1½)meters above and along
the center line of the carriageway, where light signals are used for individual traffic
lanes the signal shall be directed along the center line of that lane.

The light intensity along this axis shall be four hundred (400) Candelas (800 Candelas
for high speed roads) for the Red and Green Aspects and at least twice these values
for the Amber (yellow) signal.

Each aspect shall be uniform in appearance within the core of the viewing angle and
without secondary maxima and the colors of the light transmitted shall comply with the
limits specified in BS 1376 or approved equal standard.

Where specified, traffic light signals shall be duplicated and displayed in miniaturized
format mounted at driver eye level in a position adjacent to primary signal face or
"Traffic Stopped" line.

All bolts, hinge pins, and similar hardware exposed to the weather shall be stainless
steel or other non-corrosive material. The attachment hardware for each signal face
shall be designed so that each face without visor may be rotated four hundred (400)
grads about its axis. The attachment shall allow the face to be securely locked at
approximate six (6) grad intervals. Locking shall be accomplished by engaging integral
serrations on the housings and the attachment hardware. Alternative means of
accomplishing the same result may be accepted by the Ministry.

7.20.10.3 Visors. The length of standard visors shall be a minimum of two hundred
forty (240) millimeters for nominal three hundred (300) millimeter round or rectangular
lenses. The length of visors for nominal two hundred (200) millimeter lenses shall be
a minimum of one hundred seventy-five (175) millimeters.

Each visor shall be attached to the door in such a way that no light from the lens is
visible between the visor and the door. Visors shall be securely fastened to the door
so that they will not be detached by the wind loading specified in Paragraph 7.20.10.1
"General" in these General Specifications. Visors shall be made from the same material
as the signal heads unless prior written approval for another material is given by the
Ministry.

125
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The lens opening in doors shall provide a visible lens diameter in Table 7.20-4.

TABLE 7.20-4

NOMINAL LENS SIZE LENS OPENING

Minimum Maximum

200 mm 195 mm 210 mm

300 mm 290 mm 300 mm

7.20.10.4 Mounting and Miscellaneous Assemblies. Signal head assemblies shall

be mounted on straight or cantilever masts by brackets supporting both top and bottom
of the signal head assembly. One (1) or a combination of the mounting methods may
be used at any given intersection as indicated on the Drawings.

Signal head assemblies shall be attached by means of stainless steel clamps and
mounting brackets which shall incorporate a wiring duct for the signal head wiring. The
attachment shall allow vertical and angular adjustment of the signal head assembly and
shall be suitable for the signal head presentation.

Gasketing shall be made from neoprene, silicone rubber, or an equivalent material.

Gasketing material shall be resistant to heat, permanent deformation, and weather.
The gasketing shall be compatible with the materials of the door, housing, and lens.
The door, housing, or other parts to which the gasket is attached shall be designed to
hold it in the correct position whether the joint is open or closed.

Unless otherwise specified, a backboard shall be provided with each signal face, or
pair of signal faces which are mounted essentially back-to-back on the same support.
Backboards shall extend not less than two hundred (200) millimeters beyond each
edge of the signal face.

Mounting Assemblies. All mounting brackets and fittings which attach signal heads
to their supports shall be water-tight when assembled. Brackets and other mounting
hardware shall be of sufficient strength to safely support the weight of all signal heads
which they carry. This shall include stress resulting from the horizontal wind loading
described in Paragraph 7.20.10.1 "General" in these General Specifications. Brackets,
slip-fitters, and other attachment devices shall provide a wireway free from sharp edges
and protrusions which might damage the wiring insulation. The wireway shall be of
sufficient size to accommodate at least ten (10) wires of the type used to energize the
signal indications. Mast arm slip-fitters shall provide a means of adjusting the signal
face to the proper vertical alignment.

126
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7.20.11 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS.

7.20.11.1 Physical Characteristics. Pedestrian signal lenses shall be of the two

(2) aspect type and shall be rectangular with three hundred (300) millimeter sides.
When not illuminated, the symbols shall not be readily distinguishable by pedestrians
at the far end of the crosswalk. The luminance of the signal head along the directed
axis shall be thirty-five hundred (3500) candelas per square meter.

Backplates are not needed on pedestrian signals unless specifically required by the
contract. The physical characteristics of the housing, doors, lamp holders, visor,
support brackets, gaskets, reflectors, lamps, and wiring shall comply with the
requirements of this specification for the same device or material in vehicle signal head
components.

7.20.11.2 Optical Characteristics. The chromaticity of each color of pedestrian

signal lens shall be between the following coordinates as defined by the Commission
Internationale d'Enclairage (C.I.E.) 1931 (ASTM E 308). The minimum luminous
transmittance of the red color shall be three hundred thousandths (0.300), and of the
green shall be two hundred ninety thousandths (0.290).

The lighted indication shall appear to be uniformly illuminated over that portion of the
surface which is not opaque. When viewed from the usual angles encountered in
service, the lens shall not show any shadows or bright spots which reduce the legibility
of the message.

A complete pedestrian signal face shall consist of two (2) signal sections. The upper
section shall have the red "standing man" symbol. The bottom section shall have the
green "walking man" symbol.

Pedestrian indications shall be sufficiently bright and legible to be effective under all
normal atmospheric conditions. They shall attract the attention of and be
understandable by pedestrians (both day and night) at all distances from three (3)
meters to the full width of the roadway which the pedestrian must cross.

7.20.12 TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEAD SUPPORTS.

7.20.12.1 General. Traffic signal pedestals, poles, and bridges shall be placed on
concrete foundations as shown on the plans. Each such foundation shall have a cable
duct not less than ten (10) centimeters inside diameter extending from eight (8)
centimeters above the top of the foundation to a point on the side of the foundation at
least sixty (60) centimeters below ground level. The conduit shall exit the top of the
foundation between the anchor bolts.

The combined strength of pedestal or pole and base shall be as shown on the plans.
Each pedestal or pole shall have an access opening with a cover plate. The opening
shall be not less than two hundred (200) millimeters by fifty (50) millimeters. If in a
pedestal or pole, it shall be not less than fifty (50) centimeters above ground level. The

127
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

cover plate shall extend not less than ten (10) millimeters beyond the opening on all
sides and shall be attached with stainless steel screws. A grounding lug, complete with
stainless steel hardware, shall be provided inside the pole or base opposite the access
door.

When required by the contract, pile foundations for poles shall be constructed in
accordance with Section 5.06, "Piling" in these General Specifications.

Signal Bridges. Signal bridges, when required, shall be designed and fabricated to
conform to the plans unless an equivalent design is approved by the Engineer.

7.20.12.2 Pedestals and Bases (for roadside signals). Standard pedestals to

support traffic signal heads at the side of the street or on a median traffic island shall
be galvanized steel or aluminum and shall have a minimum outside diameter of eleven
(11) centimeters.
Bases for signal pedestals may be octagonal or round. If specified or required by the
design, they shall each have an access opening at least one hundred fifty (150)
millimeters square with a cover which is securely fastened with two (2) or more bolts.

The pedestal may be screwed into the base, or it may be fastened with epoxy into
a socket in the base. The screw shall be in a readily-accessible location within the
base. The base shall be fastened to the concrete footing with four (4) anchor bolts as
shown on the plans. Ferrous pedestals, bases, and hardware shall be galvanized.

An assembly consisting of a three (3) section, single-face vehicle signal or a two (2)
section pedestrian signal may be supported on the top of a signal pedestal using a
suitable slip-fitter. When more or large signal heads are to be supported on a pedestal,
they shall be attached to the side of the pedestal with suitable brackets and clamps.
The pedestal shall extend beyond the upper signal head support. All bolts, nuts, and
washers used with mounting hardware shall be stainless steel.

The top of a signal pedestal shall be covered by an acceptable polyethylene or metal

cap or plug. Signal pedestals and bases shall be covered with at least three (3) coats
of deep-yellow enamel conforming to Paint No. 9 in Section 5.13, "Painting of
Structures" in these Generalthe roadway). The length and design of each traffic signal
pole, base, and mast arm shall be in accordance with the plans and specifications. The
cantilever section shall be not less than one hundred sixty-eight (168) millimeters
diameter dependent upon the length of the outreach and as indicated on the Drawings.
Masts shall be designed and constructed to provide adequate support and stability for
the signal head and shall be suitable to support more than one (1) assembly. The
masts specified are of tapered construction for aesthetic reasons for both the vertical
and cantilever sections. The masts shall be complete with weather-proof cap and bolt
down baseplate.

Galvanized steel, aluminum, or prestressed concrete poles shall be furnished as

specified. The base shall be welded to the pole. Poles and mast arms shall provide
for a wiring entrance from the pole to the arm, with a protective grommet for the wire at

128
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

the joint. Mast arms shall also provide for wiring entrances directly from the mast arm
to the signal head or heads. There shall be no exposed wiring.

Masts shall be constructed from seamless steel, conical shape with a wall thickness
not less than four and one-half (4½)millimeters and a tensile strength of five hundred
ten (510) MN per square meter. Masts and mast components shall be hot dipped
galvanized finish conforming to BS 729:1971 and the minimum thickness of zinc coating
shall be four hundred fifty (450) grams per square meter on the inside and outside
surface. No machining operation shall be allowed after completion of the galvanizing
process. Masts shall be painted with two (2) coats of epoxy resin paint to an approved
color finish after completion of the galvanizing process. Anchor bolts for signal poles
shall be galvanized steel.

7.20.13 CABLE.

7.20.13.1 Signal Cable. Underground cables for signals shall have six-hundred
(600) volt copper conductor having a cross-sectional area at least two (2) millimeters
(14AWG). The conductors shall be stranded.

Underground cables shall have heat-resistant, long-life, cross-linked polyethylene

insulation around each conductor. The cables shall have a tough, abrasion-resistant
insulating sheath and a jacket of either neoprene or polyethylene over all conductors.
The thickness of the insulation around the conductor at any point shall not be less than
six-tenths (0.6) millimeter. The thickness of the sheath or jacket of the cable at any
point shall not be less than shown in Table 7.20-5.

TABLE 7.20-5

DIAMETER OF CABLE JACKET THICKNESS (MM)

UNDER JACKET (MM)

10 or less 0.1

10 to 18 0.15

18 to 40 0.20

The Contractor shall verify the number of conductors required in all cable runs.
Conductors shall be installed in continuous lengths without splices between terminals.
Splicing is not permitted. Each connection of an electrical conductor to another
conductor shall be made with the highest quality of the type of connector and insulation
required by this specification. During the installation of each cable, a minimum of one
(1) meter of cable shall be left in each handhole for connections.

Waterproof identification markings (colors) in the insulation shall be used for tracing
and identifying wires. The green (tracer) conductor in the cable shall be used for green
signal indications, the yellow (tracer) conductor for yellow indications, and the red

129
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

(tracer) conductor for red signal indications. Each conductor in the cable shall have a
different tracer color or color combination.

Single core cables for use in controllers or signal masts, aspects or pedestrian or
manual controllers shall be 450/750 volt flexible PVC insulated copper in accordance
with BS 6004:1984 or approved equal standard with HT PVC insulation where operating
in high ambient temperature conditions. The conductor size shall be in accordance with
the circuit requirement. Cables shall be bunched, clipped and properly secured to form
a complete wiring loop.

Multi-core cables to signal masts and equipment shall be stranded copper PVC
insulated and sheathed 600/1000 volt to BS 6346:1977 or approved equal standard.
Where multi-core cables are installed directly in the ground, they shall be single wire
armored and sheathed overall.

Wires that extend from the cable in the signal base to the terminal strips in the signal
heads shall be of the same gauge and tracer colors as the conductors in the cable. The
white neutral conductor from each signal head terminal block shall be (30) centimeters
longer than the other conductors.

A separate minimum five (5) square millimeters (10 AWG) single conductor white
(tracer) current-carrying neutral conductor shall be connected to all other current-
carrying neutral conductors in each base, handhole, and manhole. It shall be insulated
from ground (earth) and other conductors. These white wires shall be connected to the
current-carrying neutral terminal strip in the control cabinet. This terminal strip shall be
isolated from the cabinet and from the equipment ground. The terminal strip shall be
connected to the ground rod or rods through the neutral ground lug in the cabinet.

The minimum two (2) square millimeter (14 AWG) white insulated conductor in each
cable shall be stripped bare for its entire length outside of the cable sheath. This is
termed the equipment ground. It shall be attached for a short base, minimum two (2)
square millimeters (14 AWG) wire from the grounding connector in each signal base
with an approved electrical connector. The equipment ground shall terminate at the
equipment grounding strip in the controller cabinet. The equipment grounding strip shall
be isolated from the cabinet and the current-carrying neutral wire. The equipment
ground strip shall terminate at the current-carrying neutral grounding lug in the control
cabinet.

All cable grounding shields and any spare or unused conductors shall be effectively
grounded in the control cabinet by connection to the equipment grounding terminal
strip. They shall be grounded only in the control cabinet.

The Contractor shall verify that the maximum current load on any two (2) square
millimeter (14 AWG) conductor to signal indications shall not exceed six and one-fourth
(6¼)amperes. He also verify that the maximum current in a current-carrying neutral
from signal indications does not exceed twelve and one-half (12½) amperes.

130
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The current carrying neutral ground lug in the control cabinet shall be connected to
two (2) copper-clad ground rods driven full length not less than two (2) meters apart.
The ground (earthing) rods shall be at least fifteen (15) millimeters in diameter and two
and one-half (2½)meters in length. The ground lug shall be connected to the ground
rods with a single continuous length of bare stranded copper wire at least thirteen (13)
square millimeters (6 AWG) in area.

7.20.13.2 Detector Lead-In Cable. Detector lead-in cable shall be shielded, and
shall have two (2) minimum two (2) square millimeter (14 AWG) conductors with cross-
linked polyethylene insulation. The cable shall have a drain wire.

The lead from the detector loops shall be spliced to the lead-in cable wire in the
nearest appropriate splice box. All such splices shall be soldered and fully insulated
from one another and from atmospheric conditions. Weather proofing can be
accomplished with an epoxy splice kit, shrink fit plastic splice or by placing the soldered
end of the splice in a paper cup and filling the cup with loop sealant to a level at least
twenty-five (25) millimeters above the bare wire. The lead wire from the splice-box to
the controller cabinet shall not exceed six hundred (600) meters. Each loop or
adjoining loop pair, unless otherwise indicated on the plans, shall have a separate lead-
in cable to the control cabinet. From the splice box to the control cabinet the lead-in
cable shall be installed in the trench or duct with other cables.

Adjoining paired loops may be wired either in series or in parallel when being
connected to the lead-in cable in the splice box. The Contractor shall measure the
combined loop and lead-in inductance at the control cabinet end of each lead-in cable.
The inductance of the loop detector circuit shall be determined by the equation:

L = 17.6 PN2 + 75 l
11 + N

Where L = inductance in microhenries

P = loop perimeter in meters
N = number of turns of wire in the loop
l = hundreds of meters of loop lead wire.

The calculated inductance of the loop and lead wire shall be between 50uh and
500 uh.

When wired in series the system inductance shall be determined as:

Ls = L1 + L2 + -- + LN

Where Ls = System Inductance

L1, L2 & LN = Inductance of Loops 1, 2 through N

When wired in parallel the system inductance shall be determined as:

Where Ls = System Inductance in uh

131
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

L1, L2 thru LN = Inductance in uh of loop 1,2, through N that are

in the center.

When both series and parallel corrections are made in one loop detector system,
each group of loop inductance or equivalent loop inductance shall be combined in
accordance with the equations above. The resulting system inductance measured at
the controller cabinet shall be between fifty (50) and five hundred (500) microhenries.
The ratio of loop inductance to system induction shall be a minimum value of twenty-
five hundredths (0.25).

Following completion of the detector/lead wire connection at the splice-box, the

inductance of the loop/lead wire system shall be measured. The resulting value must
1be between fifty (50) uh and five hundred (500) uh. Should the measured value fall
outside this range, the Contractor shall repair or replace the loop at no additional cost
until the measured inductance is within the specified range.

7.20.13.3 Interconnecting Cable. When called for by the plans, interconnecting

cable having the required number of conductors shall be installed. Shielded
multiconductor cable with conductors shall be not less than two (2) square millimeters
(14 AWG) in area, and have a cross-linked polyethylene insulation shall be used. The
cable sheath shall also be polyethylene.

7.20.14 DUCT. Duct shall be assembled from sections of plastic pipe. It shall have a
nominal diameter of seventy-five (75) millimeters. It shall be suitable for direct burial
in the ground. The joints between sections shall be water-tight. If the duct is designed
so that a tapered end of one duct is fitted into the end of the succeeding duct, the
overlap of the joint shall be at least six (6) centimeters. The installed wire shall not fill
more than one-half (½) the area of the conduit. When this limit is reached, an additional
conduit or a larger conduit shall be used.

Ducts shall not be installed by cutting across the finished road surface. Where this
operation is required ducts shall be installed by approved "thrust boring" techniques.

Ducts shall be made of high-impact, acid and alkali resistant ( uPVC) type, and shall
be of the specified class, diameter, wall thickness, all as detailed in the Standards and
on the Drawings. They shall be of the non-sparking type and suitable for direct burial
in the ground. The minimum tensile strength shall be four hundred (400) MN per
square meter and impact strength shall be four hundred (400) MN square meter and
impact strength shall be forty (40) MN per square meter. Each section of the duct shall
have one end tapered. The joined part shall be equal or longer than eighty (80)
millimeters in length. The junction shall be waterproof and sandproof.

Trenching and backfilling for duct and underground cable shall be to not less than the
depth shown on the plans. No duct or cable shall be placed in a trench prior to
inspection of the trench by the Engineer. The Contractor shall remove, store, and relay
sod, and shall furnish and place topsoil and sod at locations as directed by the
Engineer. Where excavation is made across parkways or driveways, the sod, topsoil,
and crushed stone or gravel shall be replaced as nearly as practicable to its former

132
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

condition. Concrete or bituminous surfaces and stabilized bases shall be restored to

their former condition. The entire area involved shall be left in a neat presentable
condition. Duct trenching shall be performed to a depth not less than fifty (50)
centimeters below the ground line or top of subgrade and shall slope to drain at a rate
not less than one-half percent (½%).

Ducts shall not be placed under the paved travel surface except in extreme cases.
Excavation and backfill shall be performed in accordance with Section 2.10 "Trench
Excavation and Backfill" in these General Specifications. All trenches shall be backfilled
as soon as practicable after the installation of conduit, cable, or cable-conduit. Cinders,
broken concrete, and other hard or objectionable materials which might cause
mechanical damage to duct or cable shall not be used for backfilling to an elevation
thirty (30) centimeters above the top of duct or cable. Backfill material shall be
deposited in layers not exceeding fifteen (15) centimeters deep, and each layer shall
be compacted to Type 95 compaction. If the trench is to be located under a shoulder
which is to be stabilized, the trenching, installation of duct or cable, and backfilling the
trench shall be completed before the shoulder stabilization construction is started.
Unless the poles are in place, a coil of cable of sufficient length to reach the proposed
handhole shall be buried near each pole location. The coil shall be covered with planks,
a box, or other approved means so that it will not be damaged.

A minimum three (3) square millimeter (12 AWG) galvanized steel wire shall be left
inside of any empty duct, or elsewhere as called for by the plans, for future pulling of
cables. At least (1) meter of such wire shall extend beyond the end of the duct at each
end, and shall be fastened securely to a wooden block or other object which cannot be
drawn into the duct. A rigid object nearly the diameter of the duct shall be drawn
through each such empty duct to ensure that it is clear of obstruction, after which both
ends shall be plugged to prevent entry of dirt.

Duct shall extend approximately twenty-five (25) centimeters beyond paved areas at
either end. Bends in duct shall have a minimum radius of thirty (30) centimeters for a
duct having an inside diameter of five (5) centimeters and a proportionately greater
radius for larger conduits.

7.20.15 INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTS TO BE SUPPLIED PRIOR TO ISSUE OF

HANDING-OVER CERTIFICATE. The Contractor shall arrange to supply in triplicate
and in the ENGLISH language the following information and documents and unless
these are handed over, a taking-over certificate will not be issued:

1. Manufacturers catalogues of the actual equipment installed for each and every
item.

2. Instruction manuals for the installation, operation and maintenance of each and
every type of equipment installed.

3. Priced parts lists clearly indicating the part number of each component used in
the equipment, reference to which will enable the Manufacturer to identify readily the

133
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

exact component required. Drawings showing the exploded view of major equipment
should also be provided.

4. As fitted drawings of the completed Traffic Signal installation of the particular

intersection complete with exact routes of all cables, their number of cores and sizes
and the location of all signals. One transparent mother print on stable plastic film from
which reproductions can be made in the future shall also be provided.

5. Any other information relating to the installation and which in the opinion of the
Engineer and the Ministry of Communications is required for the future maintenance of
the system.

7.20.16 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PRIOR TO HANDING-OVER. As soon as

the work at any one intersection is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer
and the Ministry of Communications of its readiness to test and commission the system.

All testing instruments and tools like Oscillograms, meters, recorders, etc., required
and indicated as necessary by the Manufacturer of the testing of the equipment shall
be provided free of charge by the Contractor.

After the system has been tested successfully, the Contractor shall commission the
installation in the presence of the Ministry's representative and demonstrate that the
entire system operates as required by the Specification and as indicated in the
accepted offer.

7.20.17 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Measurement will be made of the number of

units of Signal Controllers, Traffic Signal Heads, Traffic Signal Head Supports,
Pedestrian Traffic Signal Heads, Pedestrian Signal Head Push Buttons, and Traffic
Loop Detectors furnished and accepted in accordance with the plans and specifications,
and as directed or approved by the Engineer.

7.20.18 PAYMENT. The completed and accepted quantities, measured as provided

above, will be paid at the contract unit price(s) for the pay items listed below that are in
the Bill of Quantities. Payment will be full compensation for furnishing all materials, for
all labor equipment, tools, supplies and all of the other items necessary for the proper
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

134
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

72001 Signal Controller, 4 Phase Unit

72002 Signal Controller, 8 Phase Unit

72003 Signal Controller, 16 Phase Unit

72004 Signal Controller, 32 Phase Unit

72005 Signal Controller, (No.) Phase Unit

72010 Traffic Signal Head, Size 3 x 100 mm Unit

72011 Traffic Signal Head, Size 3 x 200 mm Unit

72012 Traffic Signal Head, Size 3 x 300 mm Unit

72013 Traffic Signal Head, Size ___ x ___ mm Unit

72020 Pedestrian Traffic Signal Head, Size 2 x 200 Unit

72021 Pedestrian Traffic Signal Head, Size 1 x 300 Unit

72022 Pedestrian Traffic Signal Head, Size 2 x 200, with Flashing Unit
Arrows

72023 Pedestrian Traffic Signal Head, Size 1 x 200, with Flashing Unit
Arrows

72024 Pedestrian Traffic Signal Push Button Unit

72025 Traffic Signal Support, Cantilever Unit

72026 Traffic Signal Support, Pedestal Unit

72027 Traffic Signal Support Short Bracket Unit

72028 Traffic Loop Detectors Unit

135
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

November 1998

PART EIGHT

LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

Table of Contents

PART EIGHT: LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 8.01 LANDSCAPING ................................................................................. 1

8.01.1 SCOPE AND REQUIREMENTS................................................................. 1
8.01.1.1 Description........................................................................................... 1
8.01.1.2 Submittals ............................................................................................ 1
8.01.1.3 Rubbish ............................................................................................... 2
8.01.1.4 Oil and Petrol Storage ......................................................................... 2
8.01.1.5 Approved Chemicals ........................................................................... 2
8.01.1.6 Season ................................................................................................ 2
8.01.1.7 Work by Machine or by Hand .............................................................. 2
8.01.1.8 Existing Plants ..................................................................................... 2
8.01.1.9 Storage ................................................................................................ 2
8.01.2 SOFT LANDSCAPE: MATERIALS ............................................................ 3
8.01.2.1 Agricultural Soil.................................................................................... 3
8.01.2.1.1 Composition ................................................................................ 3
8.01.2.1.2 Soil Analysis ................................................................................ 4
8.01.2.1.3 Storage........................................................................................ 4
8.01.2.1.4 Peat Humus ................................................................................ 4
8.01.2.1.5 Fertilizers..................................................................................... 5
8.01.2.2 Planting Medium ................................................................................... 5
8.01.2.3 Plants.................................................................................................... 5
8.01.2.3.1 General Conditions ..................................................................... 5
8.01.2.3.2 Substitutes .................................................................................. 5
8.01.2.3.3 Nomenclature .............................................................................. 5
8.01.2.3.4 Range of Sizes ............................................................................ 6
8.01.2.3.5 Planting Stock ............................................................................. 6
8.01.2.4 Stakes................................................................................................... 7
8.01.2.4.1 Stakes For Trees ......................................................................... 7
8.01.2.4.2 Stakes For Palms ........................................................................ 7
8.01.2.5 Irrigation Water .................................................................................... 8
8.01.2.6 Hydroseeding Materials ....................................................................... 8
8.01.2.6.1 Soil Stabilizer ......................................................................... 8
8.01.2.6.2 Super Absorbent Humectant.................................................. 9
8.01.3 SOFT LANDSCAPE: WORKMANSHIP ..................................................... 9
8.01.3.1 Soil Grading and Preparation .............................................................. 9
8.01.3.2 Drainage .............................................................................................. 9
8.01.3.3 Planting Sequence .............................................................................. 9
8.01.3.4 Tree Planting Medium ....................................................................... 10
8.01.3.5 Planting Trees ................................................................................... 10
8.01.3.6 Supporting Trees ............................................................................... 11
8.01.3.7 Planting Palms................................................................................... 11
8.01.3.8 Supporting Palms .............................................................................. 11
8.01.3.9 Shrub, Ground Cover and Creeper Planting Medium ........................ 11
8.01.3.10 Planting Shrubs, Ground Cover and Creepers ................................ 11
Table of Contents

8.01.3.11 Climber Mesh Embankments & Interchanges ................................. 12

8.01.3.12 Pruning ............................................................................................ 12
8.01.3.13 Mulch ............................................................................................... 12
8.01.3.14 Watering .......................................................................................... 12
8.01.3.15 Protection ........................................................................................ 12
8.01.3.16 Preparation and Maintenance of Grass Areas................................. 13
8.01.3.17 Grass Seeding ................................................................................. 13
8.01.3.18 Hydroseeding .................................................................................. 13
8.01.3.18.1 General ................................................................................... 13
8.01.3.18.2 Quality of Work ........................................................................ 13
8.01.3.18.3 Inspection of Conditions .......................................................... 13
8.01.3.18.4 Soil Stabilization and Hydroseeding Materials ........................ 14
8.01.3.18.5 Hydroseeding Equipment ........................................................ 14
8.01.3.18.6 Hydroseeding Installation and Planting Schedule ................... 15
8.01.3.19 Sod .................................................................................................. 16
8.01.4 COMPLETION AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 17
8.01.4.1 After Planting ..................................................................................... 17
8.01.4.2 Cleanliness ........................................................................................ 17
8.01.4.3 Maintenance Period........................................................................... 17
8.01.4.4 Maintenance Program ....................................................................... 17
8.01.4.5 Watering ............................................................................................ 17
8.01.4.6 Weed Control and Debris Removal ................................................... 18
8.01.4.7 Pruning .............................................................................................. 18
8.01.4.8 Fertilizing ........................................................................................... 18
8.01.4.9 Plant Replacement ............................................................................ 18
8.01.4.10 Pest and Disease Control ................................................................ 19
8.01.4.11 Tree Stakes ..................................................................................... 19
8.01.4.12 Burlap Wrapping .............................................................................. 19
8.01.4.13 Grass Area Maintenance ................................................................. 19
8.01.5 GENERAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS ........... 20
8.01.5.1 Defects .............................................................................................. 20
8.01.5.2 Manufacturer's Recommendations .................................................... 20
8.01.5.3 Storage .............................................................................................. 20
8.01.5.4 Planting Time..................................................................................... 20
8.01.5.5 Weather Conditions ........................................................................... 20
8.01.5.6 Planting Outside Specified Conditions .............................................. 21
8.01.5.7 Notice ................................................................................................ 21
8.01.5.8 Meaning of Drawings ......................................................................... 21
8.01.5.9 Planting Designs................................................................................ 21
8.01.5.10 "As Planted" Record ........................................................................ 21
8.01.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................... 21
8.01.7 PAYMENT ................................................................................................ 21

SECTION 8.02 IRRIGATION .................................................................................... 24

8.02.1 SCOPE AND REQUIREMENTS............................................................... 24
8.02.1.1 Scope ................................................................................................ 24
8.02.1.2 Abbreviations ..................................................................................... 24
8.02.1.3 Shop Drawings and Approval of Equipment ...................................... 25
Table of Contents

8.02.1.4 Record Drawings ............................................................................... 25

8.02.1.5 Maintenance and Operation .............................................................. 26
8.02.1.5.1 General ..................................................................................... 26
8.01.1.5.2 Works ........................................................................................ 26
8.02.1.6 Operation and Maintenance Literature .............................................. 27
8.02.2 PIPING AND APPURTENANCES ............................................................ 27
8.02.2.1 Scope ................................................................................................ 27
8.02.2.2 Special Requirements ....................................................................... 27
8.02.2.2.1 Manufacturer's Certificate ......................................................... 27
8.02.2.2.2 Marking ..................................................................................... 28
8.02.2.2.3 Retests ...................................................................................... 28
8.02.2.3 Handling ............................................................................................ 28
8.02.2.4 Pipes, Fittings and Accessories ......................................................... 29
8.02.2.4.1 Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes ....................................................... 29
8.02.2.4.2 Unplasticised PVC Pressure Pipes ........................................... 29
8.02.2.4.3 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes ............................................. 29
8.02.2.4.4 Steel Tubes and Tubulars ......................................................... 30
8.02.2.4.5 Flexible Pipe Couplings ............................................................. 30
8.02.2.4.6 Flanged Adaptors ...................................................................... 30
8.02.2.4.7 Jointing Materials ...................................................................... 30
8.02.2.4.8 Field Testing.............................................................................. 31
8.02.2.4.9 PVC Ducts................................................................................. 32
8.02.2.5 Valves ................................................................................................ 33
8.02.2.5.1 General ..................................................................................... 33
8.02.2.5.2 Gate Valves............................................................................... 34
8.02.2.5.3 Butterfly Valves ......................................................................... 34
8.02.2.5.4 Globe Valves ............................................................................. 34
8.02.2.5.5 Silent Check Valves .................................................................. 34
8.02.2.5.6 Remote Control Valves (RCV) .................................................. 35
8.02.2.5.7 Pressure Reducing Valves ........................................................ 35
8.02.2.5.8 Remote Controlled Pressure Reducing Valves (RCPRV) ......... 36
8.02.2.5.9 Pressure Relief Check Valves (Pump Control Valves) .............. 36
8.02.2.5.10 Air Valves ............................................................................... 37
8.02.2.5.11 Penstocks................................................................................ 37
8.02.2.5.12 Jointing Materials .................................................................... 38
8.02.2.5.13 GRP Valve Boxes ................................................................... 38
8.02.2.5.14 Plastic Valve Boxes ................................................................. 38
8.02.2.5.15 Valve Accessories ................................................................... 38
8.02.2.5.16 Workmanship .......................................................................... 39
8.02.2.5.17 Installation ............................................................................... 40
8.02.2.5.18 Field Protection ....................................................................... 40
8.02.2.6 Irrigators ............................................................................................ 41
8.02.2.6.1 Irrigation Program Controllers ................................................... 41
8.02.2.6.2 Spray Heads (for spray and stream spray) ............................... 41
8.02.2.6.3 Bubblers .................................................................................... 42
8.02.2.6.4 Hose Bibs .................................................................................. 42
8.02.2.6.5 Drip Emitters and Tubing........................................................... 42
8.02.2.6.6 Polyethylene Tubing and Fittings .............................................. 42
Table of Contents

8.02.2.6.7 Emitters ..................................................................................... 43

8.02.2.7 Construction Requirements ................................................................ 43
8.02.2.7.1 Earthworks ................................................................................ 43
8.02.2.7.2 Pipe Laying and Jointing ........................................................... 47
8.02.3 MECHANICAL PLANT.............................................................................. 49
8.02.3.1 Scope ................................................................................................ 49
8.02.3.2 Labels, Tags and Charts ................................................................... 50
8.02.3.3 Workmanship Generally .................................................................... 50
8.02.3.4 Equipment and Materials Generally................................................... 51
8.02.3.5 Spares ............................................................................................... 52
8.02.3.6 Pumping Units ................................................................................... 52
8.02.3.6.1 General ..................................................................................... 52
8.02.3.6.2 Split Case Horizontal Pumping Unit .......................................... 54
8.02.3.6.3 Submersible Pumping Unit ........................................................ 56
8.02.3.6.4 End Suction Centrifugal Pump .................................................. 57
8.02.3.6.5 Motor Control Panel .................................................................. 57
8.02.3.7 Pressure Switches ............................................................................. 59
8.02.3.8 Water Level Controls ......................................................................... 59
8.02.3.9 Electromagnet Flowmeters ................................................................ 60
8.02.3.10 Pressure Gauges............................................................................. 60
8.02.3.11 Strainers .......................................................................................... 60
8.02.3.12 Electrical Indicators and Integrators ................................................ 60
8.02.3.13 Fertilizer Injector Equipment ............................................................ 61
8.02.3.14 Axial In-Line Exhaust Fans .............................................................. 61
8.02.3.15 Roof Cowls ...................................................................................... 61
8.02.3.16 Flexible Connectors ......................................................................... 61
38.02.3.17 Filters ..................................................................................................... 62
8.02.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS............................................................... 62
8.02.4.1 Scope ................................................................................................ 62
8.02.4.2 Technical Requirements .................................................................... 63
8.02.4.2.1 General ..................................................................................... 63
8.02.4.2.2 Regulations and Standards ....................................................... 63
8.02.4.3 Pumping Station Installation .............................................................. 63
8.02.4.4 Irrigation Control ................................................................................ 64
8.02.5 METALWORK, PAINT AND PAINTING AND WATER RETAINING
STRUCTURES ....................................................................................... 65
8.02.5.1 Metalwork .......................................................................................... 65
8.02.5.1.1 General ..................................................................................... 65
8.02.5.1.2 Ladders and Safety Cages ........................................................ 65
8.02.5.1.3 Pipe Supports............................................................................ 65
8.02.5.2 Paint and Painting ............................................................................. 66
8.02.5.3 Excavation ......................................................................................... 66
8.02.5.4 Concrete ............................................................................................ 66
8.02.5.5 Reinforcement ................................................................................... 66
8.02.5.6 Bituminous Primer to Buried Surfaces ............................................... 66
8.02.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................... 66
8.02.7 PAYMENT ................................................................................................ 67
Table of Contents

APPENDIX 1 - COMMON NAMES AND SPECIES OF THE MOST POPULAR

PLANTS WIDELY PLANTED IN THE KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA............... 73

APPENDIX 2 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTENANCE OF IRRIGATION

AND LANDSCAPING........................................................................................... 75
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PART EIGHT: LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

SECTION 8.01 LANDSCAPING

8.01.1 SCOPE AND REQUIREMENTS

8.01.1.1 Description. The works shall consist of furnishing and planting palms,
trees, shrubs, creepers, succulents, grass, sod, ground cover and other plants. It shall
also include excavation for planted areas and provision of agricultural soil, preparing
and finishing planting bed. The work shall also include maintenance and other
incidental planting procedure work, all as necessary to complete the planting operations
in a workmanlike manner, according to the provisions of this Specification and in
conformity with the lines shown on the Drawings or established by the Engineer.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Trees
Palms
Shrubs
Creepers
Ground Cover
Succulents
Climbing Plant
Grass
Hydroseeding Mixes
Gravel Mulch
Precast Concrete Tiling
Sod

8.01.1.2 Submittals. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer information and
certificates for materials to be used for this Contract. Such submittals shall include, but
not be limited to, the following:

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of all standard products, including fertilizers.

2. Certificates confirming the origin, size and age of all plant materials.

3. Health certificates for all imported plant material.

4. A laboratory analysis of agricultural soil mix, having the characteristics indicated

in Paragraph 8.01.2.1 “Agricultural Soil” in these General Specifications with
additives such as pH adjusters, fertilizers and other soil amendments.

5. Landscape construction schedules indicating mobilization, equipment, personnel,

preparatory work and planting schedules.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all items purchased and shall
submit a Supplier Quality inspection plan for review. The inspection plan shall cover
those items intended for shop inspection and the procedures for carrying out the same.

1
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.01.1.3 Rubbish. All rubbish and litter as it accumulates within the landscape
boundary, shall be cleared and carted away daily. The areas shall be kept in a clean
and tidy condition with all driveways, paths, edges, curbs, gutters, and gullies swept
and kept clear of debris at all times. All rubbish and debris shall be carted away to a
dump as directed by the Engineer.

8.01.1.4 Oil and Petrol Storage. All oil and petrol containers are to be kept in
suitable sheds provided by the Contractor, who is to observe all regulations regarding
the storage of inflammable liquid. If any areas of soil are affected by oil or petrol
spillage, the contaminated soil is to be dug up until uncontaminated ground is reached,
and carted away and such areas made good as directed by the Engineer, all at the
Contractor's expense.

8.01.1.5 Approved Chemicals. Only chemicals approved by the Ministry of

Agriculture in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia will be used. All chemicals shall be non-
toxic to human beings, birds and animals and subject to the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be liable for ensuring that all chemicals are stored, handled and
supplied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8.01.1.6 Season. All work shall be carried out during the appropriate season and
in weather conditions suitable for the operation. In particular, planting shall not be
carried out before October or after March without the specific approval of the Engineer.

8.01.1.7 Work by Machine or by Hand. All operations may be executed by

suitable approved machines or by hand. Any work in confined spaces, around existing
trees or in the vicinity of major utility services must be executed by hand and the
Contractor shall include for this in his rates.

8.01.1.8 Existing Plants. No existing trees, shrubs or other plants shall be

removed without instructions from the Engineer. The Contractor shall take all measures
to protect all plants from malicious or accidental damage during the execution of his
work. He shall ensure that no branches are lopped and no tree roots exceeding fifty
(50) millimeters in diameter are severed from growing trees except for pruning and
training operations approved by the Engineer.

No soil, spoil, construction material or rubbish shall be stored, or deposited within

three (3) meters of existing trees, shrubs or hedges. No bonfires shall be lit within the
landscape contract boundaries.

Any damage that may be incurred shall be made good by the Contractor at his own
expense.

8.01.1.9 Storage. All materials to be used in the landscape contract and stored at
the Contractor's yard shall be kept covered and protected. In particular any plants held
for planting shall be kept in a special compound, sheltered from the direct sun and
drying winds and watered regularly.

2
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.01.2 SOFT LANDSCAPE: MATERIALS

8.01.2.1 Agricultural Soil.

8.01.2.1.1 Composition.

Agricultural soil shall be approved imported agricultural soil obtained from local
sources and defined as follows:

PH: 6.0 - 8.0 saturated soil

Electro-Conductivity: Less than 4 mmhos/cm saturation extract

(EC x 103) at twenty-five degrees Celsius (25o C.)

Free Carbonates: Less than 0.5 percent air-dried soil

Chlorides: Less than 200 ppm in saturation extract

Sulphates: Less than 200 ppm in saturation extract

Nitrates Less than 75 ppm in saturation extract.

Phosphorus 10-25 ppm in 1.5 ammonium nitrate

extract: 0.5 hour shake.

Potassium 100-400 ppm in 1.5 ammonium nitrate

extract: 0.5 hour shake.

Magnesium 25-100 ppm in 1.5 ammonium nitrate

extract: 0.5 hour shake.

Exchangeable Sodium: Less than fifteen percent (15%) in neutral

normal ammonium acetate

Boron: Less than 1.5 ppm, hot water soluble

Physical Characteristics: Sandy loam made up as follows:

Sand 2 mm - 0.05 mm: 45-65%
Silt 0.05 - 0.002 mm: 20-40%

Clay less than 0.002 mm: 5-15%

In case naturally occurring agricultural soil to the above physical characteristics

is not available, the Contractor is allowed to mix soil constituents to achieve the above
required characteristics.

3
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.01.2.1.2 Soil Analysis.

The Contractor shall arrange for an approved independent analyst to prepare a

physical and chemical analysis of the proposed imported agricultural soil and irrigation
water together with recommendations and report on fertilizer adjustments to the rates
specified.

Soil samples shall be taken as follows:

Upon identification of every source of soil, representative samples of soils shall be

analyzed as detailed below and results submitted to the Engineer for approval before
any of the soil has been used.

Following this, further representative soil samples shall be taken at the rate of one
(1) in every twenty (20) loads or as may be otherwise directed by the Engineer,
analyzed and the results compared with those from the original sample (so as to ensure
consistency and compatibility of supply).

The tests shall be:

- Total salts (EC of soil solution)

- Soil pH
- Exchangeable sodium, calcium, magnesium, potassium
- Available phosphates
- Organic matter as a percentage
- Available zinc, manganese, iron, boron
- Total sulphates.

8.01.2.1.3 Storage.

Agricultural soil shall be stored in heaps less than one (1) meter height. Soil
heaps shall be protected from undue compaction and no construction material or waste
shall be stored on or mixed in with the soil.

Approval shall be obtained of a sample load of agricultural soil of not less than five
(5) cubic meters (5m3). This sample shall be retained for comparison with subsequent
loads.

8.01.2.1.4 Peat Humus.

Peat Humus shall be natural peat consisting of sedge, sphagnum or reed peat and
of such a physical condition that it will pass through a twelve (12) millimeter screen.
The humus shall be free from sticks, stones, roots or other objectionable matter. It shall
have an acidity range from pH four (4) to seven and one-half (7.5) and the minimum
organic content shall be eighty-five percent (85%) on a dry weight basis. Peat humus
shall be delivered in undamaged commercial bales in an air-dry condition.

4
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.01.2.1.5 Fertilizers.

Inorganic fertilizers shall be applied to the irrigation water by the fertilizer injection
equipment. Fertilizers shall be approved soluble NPK fertilizers in the ratio
twenty:twenty:twenty (20:20:20) applied at a dilution rate of one (1) kilogram of fertilizer
to one thousand (1000) liters of water.

Alternative dilutions of soluble fertilizer or other fertilizer types and composition

may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer.

8.01.2.2 Planting Medium. The planting medium shall consist of agricultural soil
plus soil fertilizers as specified, and shall be placed in accordance with the tree and
shrub planting Special Specifications.

8.01.2.3 Plants.

8.01.2.3.1 General Conditions.

Ground covers and vines, planting stock and trees shall be obtained from a source
with soil and climatic conditions similar to those prevailing on the site. All species shall
be adequately and carefully packed and protected against mechanical damage,
extremes of temperature and drying out. If required by the Engineer a certificate stating
that plants comply with this specification shall be provided.

8.01.2.3.2 Substitutes.

The tender must be based on the plants specified in the Contract Documents. If
specified plants are unobtainable, alternatives may be submitted with the Tender,
stating price and how they differ from the Specification. Such substitutions may not be
acceptable and submission of further alternatives may be required. Before making
substitution, approval must be obtained.

8.01.2.3.3 Nomenclature.

Nomenclature of trees and plants shall conform the scientific names given in:

I. Royal Horticultural Society, Dictionary of Gardening, Oxford University Press

1974, and Supplement, 1969.

2. I.B.N. - International Code of Nomenclature for Cultivated Plants.

3. Post, George E., Flora of Syria, Palestine and Sinai, American University of
Beirut, 1932.

Alternatives names can be checked in these references. All plants must agree
with the botanical descriptions in these references. Post is the authority only for plants
which are not listed in the RHS Dictionary or I.B.N. Code.

5
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Appendix "1" attached shows the names of the most popular trees, shrubs, ground
covers and succulents widely planted in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.

8.01.2.3.4 Range of Sizes.

No plant shall be less than minimum size, as specified herein after and at least
fifty percent (50%) of the plants are to be as large as the upper half of the specified
range. Measurements specified are minimum sizes acceptable after pruning (where
pruning is required). Plants that meet measurements specified but do not possess
normal balance between height and spread will not be acceptable.

8.01.2.3.5 Planting Stock.

All planting stock shall be well-branched and well-formed, sound, vigorous, healthy
and free from disease, sunscald, abrasion and harmful insects or insect eggs and with
a healthy and unbroken root system. Trees shall be symmetrically developed, their
structure and habit of growth typical of the species or variety with straight stems free
from objectionable disfigurements.

Plants delivered to the Work shall be either balled and burlapped or container
stock. Bare rooted stock will not be permitted. Plant roots shall not be allowed to dry
out during transport, storage, or transplanting, and the ball of earth surrounding the
roots shall be kept wet at all times. Any plant that has a damaged root ball or is dry or
in a wilted condition, as determined by the Engineer, when delivered to the Work, shall
be rejected and shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. Each plant
shall be handled and packed in the approved manner for that species or variety, and
all necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the plants will arrive at the Work
in proper condition for successful growth. Root condition of plants furnished by the
Contractor shall be determined by removing the earth from around the roots of not less
than two (2) plants nor more than two percent (2%) of the total number of plants of each
species or variety. If the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the
Engineer may reject the entire supply of plants represented by the sample plants.
Sample plants deemed unsuitable for use in the Work due to the inspection shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

Trees shall be of a minimum height of one and one-half (1.5) meters above
planting level, stem diameter shall be two (2) centimeters minimum and branches shall
be at least twenty-five (25) centimeters. Where trees of the specified species are
unavailable, and subject to the submission of evidence to that effect, the Contractor
may, with the Engineer's approval, substitute alternative species trees of one and one-
half (1.5) meters minimum height.

Palms shall be balled and burlapped unless container grown plants are available.
Offshoots will not be accepted. The height of the palm shall be not less than one (1)
meter from planting level to the base of the growing tip. Palms of one (1) to one and
one-half (1.5) meters height shall have a root-ball diameter of seven hundred fifty (750)
to nine hundred (900) for two (2) to three (3) meters height, the root-ball diameter shall

6
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

be one and one-half (1.5) to two (2) meters. Ninety percent (90%) of the palms shall
be females.

Shrubs shall have a minimum height of five hundred (500) millimeters. Where
shrubs of this size are not available, and subject to the submission of evidence to that
effect, the Contractor may be allowed, with the approval of the Engineer, to use other
substitutes of the same size. The shrubs are to be of good form, and their structure
and habit of growth typical of species or variety.

Ground cover species shall be well rooted, and of not less than one (1) year's full
growth and a minimum length of four hundred (400) millimeters.

Climbing plants shall have a minimum length of seven hundred fifty (750)
millimeters. The growth shall be symmetrical and balanced. They should have been
grown in one (1) kilogram containers and shall be of at least one (1) year's growth.

Grass seed shall comprise of the following mixture of species:

Cydomon dactylon: Fifty percent (50%)

Roa annua: Fifty percent (50%)

Before delivery to site, all plants shall be dipped in anti-desiccant.

8.01.2.4 Stakes

8.01.2.4.1 Stakes For Trees.

All stakes shall be of timber, straight, free of projections and pointed at one end.
The lower ends shall be coated with a non-injurious wood preservative, to a minimum
height of one hundred fifty (150) millimeters above ground level, to be applied at least
two (2) weeks before use. Stakes shall be fifty (50) millimeters thick, the length below
ground to be one thousand three hundred (1300) millimeters and the length above to
be for full height of clear stem or half full height of feathered species.

Alternatively, tree stakes shall be mild steel tubes protected by a PVC coating in
mid-green or similar approved color. The top and bottom of the steel tube shall be
sealed with plastic caps. The external covering shall have horizontal ridges at regular
intervals to facilitate the fixing of tree ties. The steel tube shall have a diameter of thirty-
five (35) millimeters and a length of two thousand five hundred (2500) millimeters. Tree
ties shall be patent plastic ones appropriate to the steel stake.

8.01.2.4.2 Stakes For Palms.

Stakes for palms shall be rough sawn timber, free from knots, rot, cross-grain or
other defects that would impair strength. The size shall be fifty (50) by one hundred
(100) by two hundred (200) millimeters minimum, depending upon palm size.

7
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Alternatively, palm trees shall be stabilized with three (3) No. galvanized steel
seven (7) strand wire ropes of ten (10) gauge, set out at one hundred twenty degrees
(120o) round the stem. The wire shall be looped around the palm stem and protected
by a neoprene tube. The wires shall be connected via a galvanized steel turnbuckle
to an eight (8) millimeter diameter reinforcing road ground anchor. The ground anchor
shall be one thousand (1000) meters long and shall be given in flush to the ground.
The rods shall be at forty-five degrees (45o) to the ground surface.

8.01.2.5 Irrigation Water. Water shall be provided by the Contractor from off-site
sources approved by the Engineer as being suitable for irrigation, free from substances
harmful to plant life. Water sources shall not exceed the following parameters:

pH: 6.7

Total dissolved solids: less than 1000 parts per million (ppm)

The Contractor shall supply certified laboratory water quality test reports from an
independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. These water quality test
reports shall show evidence that the water to be utilized meets with the water quality
criteria established above. Water quality reports shall be submitted:

- Two (2) weeks prior to the beginning of the first watering/irrigation operations

- Once per month throughout the maintenance period.

8.01.2.6 Hydroseeding Materials.

8.01.2.6.1 Soil Stabilizer. Products of the following composition are acceptable:

1. Stabilization material consisting of natural petroleum resin, wetting agents,

water and sequestering agents not subject to breakdown.

The stabilization material shall be a free flowing, stable emulsion to the extent that
the diluted emulsion shall not break down when stored in clean, closed containers
at temperatures zero to eighty degrees Celsius (0 o to 80o C.), for a minimum of three
(3) months.

2. Product conforming to Table 4.01-5, Grade CSS-1 for Cationic Emulsified

Asphalt in Section 4.01 "Bituminous Materials" in these General Specifications.

3. Product conforming to Table 4.01-5, Grade CMS-2 for Cationic Emulsified

Asphalt in Section 4.01 "Bituminous Materials" in these General Specifications.

4. Product shall be non-toxic to plants, animals, humans and soil organisms and
shall not be injurious to clothing. It shall positively immobilize sand to such an extent
that it will not be disturbed by normal wind action from prevailing directions.

8
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The material as purchased shall carry a warranty that if applied in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions it will provide effective stabilization for a period of one
year after application.

Color of the chemical agents shall be as selected by the Engineer. Type of

pigment shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the chemical agent and
mixed according to its instruction.

8.01.2.6.2 Super Absorbent Humectant. Super absorbent humectant shall be

a hydrolyzed starch copolymer absorbent that swells into a clear gel capable of
absorbing hundreds of times its weight in water.

8.01.3 SOFT LANDSCAPE: WORKMANSHIP

8.01.3.1 Soil Grading and Preparation. Subsoil shall be excavated to achieve

tolerances specified for finished level of soil, and when reasonably dry and workable,
graded to smooth flowing contours with all minor hollows and ridges removed. Non-
cohesive, light subsoils shall be loosened with a three (3)-tine ripper, three hundred
(300) millimeters deep at six hundred (600) millimeter centers; stiff clays and other
cohesive subsoils shall be treated with herbicide, and the period of time recommended
by the manufacturer shall be allowed to elapse before grading.

Finished ground levels shall be thirty (30) millimeters below adjoining paving or curbs
after settlement except for any median strip where New Jersey Barriers are specified.
Here, the finished level shall be one hundred (100) millimeters below the top of the
New Jersey Barrier after settlement.

Between Concrete Crashworthy Safety Barriers (New Jersey Barriers) in the central
median the areas shall be brought up to finished levels by spreading agricultural soils
approximately four hundred fifty (450) millimeters deep that are reasonably dry and
workable. The agricultural soil shall be graded to remove all hollows and ridges. In the
outer separators and interchanges the Contractor shall excavate the planted areas to
a depth of four hundred fifty (450) millimeters and backfill the excavated areas with
agricultural soil.

Any rock projections and/or boulders should be removed off site to dump areas.

8.01.3.2 Drainage. The Contractor shall ensure that all planting positions are well
drained.

8.01.3.3 Planting Sequence.

I. Grade soil as specified.

2. Stake out the outline of soft landscaping areas for approval by the Engineer.

3. For shrub, ground cover or creeper, excavate the planting pits to forty-five
hundredths (0.45) meters depth. Excavated material shall be removed from the Site.

9
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4. For trees, palms, shrubs, and ground covers. Dig the planting pit to the sizes
specified. Excavated material shall be removed from the Site.

5. Ensure that the irrigation system is functioning properly.

6. Backfill planting pits with planting medium.

7. Preirrigate and ensure that the excess water can drain away.

8. Position the plant at the approved locations and fill around it with planting medium
as specified.

9. Where specified, tie plant to stakes.

10. Check all plants one (1) week after planting for signs of wind shake and
loosening due to soil subsidence. Firm and make good as necessary. Then similarly
check all plants at a maximum of monthly intervals until the end of the defects liability
period.

11. Remove wrapping from the buds of palm trees.

8.01.3.4 Tree Planting Medium. Planting medium for tree pits shall consist of
approved agricultural soil as specified well mixed with fertilizers at the rate of two-tenths
(0.2) kilograms P205, two-tenths (0.2) kilograms K2O, two-tenths (0.2) kilograms N and
five (5) kilograms of fermented animal manure approved by the Engineer per cubic
meter of agricultural soil.

8.01.3.5 Planting Trees. Tree pits shall be excavated to the dimensions shown on
the Drawings, and the pit bottoms shall be broken up to a further depth of three
hundred (300) millimeters. All trees shall be placed in the center of the pits and at the
original soil depth and watered thoroughly after backfilling. All trees shall be
surrounded by a water-holding depression, one hundred fifty (150) millimeters deep and
six hundred (600) millimeters minimum in diameter.

Before planting, any broken or damaged roots shall be cut back to sound growth; any
cut ends over twenty-five (25) millimeters in diameter shall be treated with tree wound
dressing.

For bare-rooted trees, backfilling shall be placed in one hundred fifty (150) to two
hundred fifty (250) millimeter layers to ensure close contact with roots and to eliminate
air pockets. Firming shall take place as backfilling proceeds, so as not to damage
roots; the soil shall be heeled in firmly around the root collar. For root-balled trees,
backfilling shall be firmed around the root-ball in one hundred fifty (150) millimeter
layers, so as not to disturb the roots.

10
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.01.3.6 Supporting Trees. To support a tree, a single stake shall be positioned

close to the tree on the windward side and driven vertically into the pit bottom until the
stake top is at its specified height.

Soil shall be consolidated around the stake during backfilling. The tree shall be
secured firmly, but not rigidly, to the stake with at least two (2) ties, to prevent the tree
from touching the stake. If necessary, chafing guards to be used to prevent abrasion
between the tree and the stake. The top tie shall be positioned twenty-five (25)
millimeters from the top of the stake and the lower tie approximately halfway down.
Tree ties shall be approved proprietary ties, canvas or rubber hose.

8.01.3.7 Planting Palms. All suckers, flowering and fruiting parts and
approximately thirty percent (30%) of fronds shall be removed from the palms before
digging with sufficient fronds left to enclose and protect the growing bud. The
remaining fronds shall be trimmed to sixty-five percent (65%) of their original length,
lifted to surround the growing bud, burlap wrapped, securely tied in position. Special
attention is required to protect palm roots from being bruised during digging and
burlapping. Palms shall be planted according to specifications for trees above.

8.01.3.8 Supporting Palms. Palms are to be supported as shown on the detail

drawing and in accordance with either method described in Subparagraph 8.01.2.4.2
"Stakes for Palms."

8.01.3.9 Shrub, Ground Cover and Creeper Planting Medium. Planting medium
for shrub, ground cover and creeper shall consist of approved agricultural soil as
specified well mixed with fertilizers at the rate of twenty (20) grams P2O5, twenty (20)
grams K2O, twenty (20) grams N and two (2) kilograms of fermented animal manure
approved by the Engineer per plant.

8.01.3.10 Planting Shrubs, Ground Cover and Creepers. All weeds and rubbish
shall be removed from planting areas. Before planting, all non-perishable containers
shall be removed and all badly damaged roots pruned.

All shrubs shall be planted upright and well balanced with the best side to the front
and at a density as specified on the Drawings. Planting medium shall be carefully
packed around evenly spread roots or rootball in one hundred fifty (150) millimeter
layers and well heeled in. The finished level shall be at the original soil mark on the
shrubs. All shrubs irrigated by spray heads shall be surrounded by a water-holding
depression one hundred fifty (150) millimeters deep by six hundred (600) millimeters
minimum in diameter.

Climbers shall have their leading growths trained around the supporting wire mesh
if specified.

Immediately after planting, (1.) carefully cut back any damaged, dead or diseased
branches, remove weak or malformed growth and treat with tree wound dressing and
(2.) water thoroughly, using a fine hose and (3.) spray with anti-desiccant (not during
rainy weather).

11
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.01.3.11 Climber Mesh Embankments & Interchanges. Wherever required,

supply and fix Polyethylene mesh to interchange embankments and outer median
embankments steeper than 1V:2H. The mesh shall be green and shall be secured with
Steel Pins, to the manufacturer's specifications, driven into the embankment at six
hundred (600) millimeter vertical spacings and one (1.0) meter horizontal spacings.
The top edge shall be secured with pins at five hundred (500) millimeter horizontal
spacings. The base shall be buried in a trench four hundred fifty (450) millimeters by
four hundred fifty (450) millimeters deep. The Contractor shall allow for all necessary
excavation and backfilling.

8.01.3.12 Pruning. Immediately after planting, all plants are to be pruned as

directed by the Engineer and in accordance with accepted horticultural practices.
Pruning shall consist of carefully cutting back any damaged, dead or diseased
branches; the removal of any weak or malformed growth, with the aim of forming each
type of stock to the standard shape for its species. All pruning cuts greater than
nineteen (19) millimeters shall be treated with an approved tree wound dressing.

8.01.3.13 Mulch. Gravel mulch shall be laid sequentially with the plant material and
to a thickness of fifty (50) millimeters. Gravel mulch shall consist of washed gravel that
is free from dirt, organic matter, clays, clay film or other deleterious matter. Grading
shall be eighteen (18) to twenty-five (25) millimeters diameter. Gravel mulch shall be
kept away from all drain inlets, pedestrian and vehicular surfaces.

Rock mulch used to stabilize the large open areas and planting beds shall be
crushed stone or gravel, clean and free from sand, clay, dirt, organic matter or other
deleterious matter. Grading shall be twenty-five (25) to fifty (50) millimeters diameter.

8.01.3.14 Watering. The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient water is applied to
maintain healthy growth of all trees and plants. All plants shall be watered immediately
after planting. If an irrigation system is required, water may be obtained from such
facility. When an irrigation system is not required, the Contractor shall make his own
arrangements for furnishing and applying water and shall be responsible for all costs
involved.

Water shall be applied in a moderate stream until the backfill soil throughout the
depth of each plant is saturated. Where watering is done with a hose, a pressure
reducing device approved by the Engineer shall be used. Under no circumstances shall
the full force of the water from the open end of a hose be allowed to fall within the basin
around any plant.

8.01.3.15 Protection. Newly planted trees and plants shall be protected where
necessary until plants are established. Any damage to planting shall be made good
and the ground reinstated if disturbed, at the Contractor's expense.

12
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.01.3.16 Preparation and Maintenance of Grass Areas. Agricultural soils shall

be placed to a minimum depth of one hundred fifty (150) millimeters to establish an
acceptable seed medium. The seeding area shall be graded to line and grade and all
weeds, sticks and stones more than twenty-five (25) millimeters diameter removed.
Fertilizer shall be incorporated at the following rate: one hundred (100) kilograms P 205,
one hundred (100) kilograms K 20 and fifty (50) kilograms N per hectare. The soil shall
be cultivated to a minimum depth of one hundred (100) millimeters resulting in a lightly
firm but friable seedbed.

The seeding area is to be thoroughly moistened before seeding and mulched with
either straw or hay mulch within twenty-four (24) hours of seeding. The mulched
seeded areas shall be kept moist until at least ten (10) days after seed germination.

8.01.3.17 Grass Seeding. Grass areas shall be recultivated immediately prior to

planting if so required by the Engineer.

Seeding shall be carried out at the appropriate state in the Contract. The Contractor
shall ensure that the seed bed is thoroughly irrigated before seeding. Seed shall be
applied at the rate of one (1) kilogram per one hundred (100) square meters, spread
evenly in two (2) equal sowings in transverse directions and areas lightly harrowed or
raked.

8.01.3.18 Hydroseeding.

8.01.3.18.1 General. The Contractor shall furnish labor, materials, equipment

and transportation to plant and stabilize by hydroseeding all the areas that are
designated on the Contract Drawings and described herein to be hydroseeded.
Included as part of the work in this Section but not necessarily limited by it are the
following:
Soil Stabilization and Hydroseeding
Materials
Hydroseeding Installation
Maintenance Procedures
Irrigation as required.

8.01.3.18.2 Quality of Work.

The hydroseeding work shall be performed by a competent, trained individual or

by use of an approved hydroseeding Subcontractor in accordance with the best
standards and practices relating to the trade and under the continuous supervision of
a competent foreman capable of interpreting the Contract Drawings and Specifications.

8.01.3.18.3 Inspection of Conditions.

The Contractor shall examine related work including irrigation and grading
surfaces before proceeding with work and inform the Ministry in writing on conditions
which will prevent the proper execution of his work. Failure to report unsuitable

13
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

conditions will constitute acceptance of performing all work caused by the unsuitable
conditions.

8.01.3.18.4 Soil Stabilization and Hydroseeding Materials.

All materials shall be approved and first grade quality and shall be in prime
condition when installed and accepted. Any commercial process or packaging material
shall be undisturbed and materials delivered to the site in the original, unopened
condition bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. They shall be applied at the
rates given below:

1. Fertilizer - three hundred thirty-six (336) kilograms per hectare of 16-20-20+

micronutrients, inorganic commercial fertilizer.

2. Fiber Mulch - at the quantity per hectare of cellulose fiber or paper mulching
fiber as indicated on the Special Specifications.

3. Super Absorbent Humectant - at the quantity per hectare indicated on the

Contract Drawings.

4. Soil Stabilant - four hundred seventy (470) liters per hectare of soil stabilant.

5. Seedmix - Seedmix for the contract area as specified in Subsection 8.01.2.3,

"Plants" and Paragraph 8.01.5.1.1 "Grass Seeding" in these General Specifications or
as specified in the Special Specifications.

Each type of seed shall be delivered to the site in separate sacks labeled with
proper Latin names per variety and pure live seed count per kilogram on each sack.
Any deviation from procedures, pure live seed rates, varieties or quantities must be
authorized in writing by the Engineer. Written verification of seed components for each
mix shall be supplied to the Engineer along with copies of certified seed analysis
reports and respective lot numbers. Certified seed analysis shall be by a licensed seed
laboratory.

8.01.3.18.5 Hydroseeding Equipment.

1. The above specified components shall be mixed together in the hydroseeding

machine to allow for a homogenous slurry which is thoroughly mixed with potable water
and can be applied easily without clogging. The machine type must be approved by
the Ministry.

2. The equipment shall have a built-in agitation system and operating capacity
sufficient to agitate, suspend and homogeneously mix a slurry containing not less than
five (5) kilograms of fiber mulch plus fertilizers and chemical additives and solids for
each one hundred (100) liters of potable water.

3. The hydroseeding equipment shall meet the minimum requirements of a slurry

distribution line large enough to prevent stoppage and shall be equipped with a set of

14
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

hydraulic spray nozzles which will provide a continuous nonfluctuating discharge at the
end of the spray nozzle.

8.01.3.18.6 Hydroseeding Installation and Planting Schedule.

1. The hydroseeding shall be applied in the form of a slurry consisting of organic

soil amendments, commercial fertilizers, fiber, mulch, super absorbent humectant,
potable water and seeds. When hydraulically sprayed onto the soil, the hydroseeding
SHALL NOT FORM A BLOTTER LIKE MATERIAL. Instead, the spray operation should
be so directed that the slurry spray will penetrate the soil surface as to drill and mix the
slurry components into the soil, thus ensuring maximum impregnation and coverage of
the sand particles with soil stabilizing material. The impregnation and mixing of the
components will help in retaining moisture while preventing soil erosion.

2. The slurry shall be prepared at the site and its components shall be mixed to
supply the rates of application as outlined in these specifications.

Slurry preparation should begin by adding potable water to the tank when the
engine is at one-half (½)throttle. When the water level has reached the height of the
agitator shaft and good recirculation has been established, the fertilizers shall be added
to the mixture (the tank shall be at least one-third (_) filled with water at this time).

The engine throttle shall be opened to full speed when the tank is one-half (½)
filled with water. All organic amendments and soil stabilants shall then be added by the
time the tank is two-thirds (_) full. At this time the seedmix shall also be added.

Spraying shall commence immediately after the tank is full and the slurry is mixed.

3. Application - The operator shall spray the areas with a uniform coat using the
dark color of the dye in the fiber as a visible guide. The slurry shall be applied in a
downward drilling motion via a fan stream nozzle. It is important to ensure that all the
components enter and mix with the soil to a depth not greater than ten (10) millimeters.
The hydroseed materials have a tendency to build upon themselves. Therefore, it is
important that the Contractor employs only qualified personnel to ensure uniformity of
the hydroseed application.

4. Time Limit - The hydroseeding slurry components are not to be left in the
hydroseed machine for more than two (2) hours for fear of destruction of the seeds.
The Contractor shall add fifty percent (50%) more of the originally specified seedmix to
any slurry which has not been applied within two (2) hours after mixing. The Contractor
shall add seventy-five percent (75%) more of the original seedmix to any slurry which
has not been applied within six hours after mixing. Any mixture which has not been
applied within eight (8) hours shall be rejected and disposed of off-site at the
Contractor's expense.

5. Protection - Special care is to be exercised by the Contractor to prevent any

slurry from being sprayed onto any hardscape areas including concrete walks, fences,

15
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

walls, buildings, etc. Any slurry sprayed onto these areas shall be removed at the
Contractor's expense.

6. Hydroseeding Schedule - The hydroseeding and soil stabilization installation

should be timed to take advantage of the natural precipitation during the winter rainy
season. As an added precaution, the area shall be presoaked by potable water truck
or irrigation to a depth of seventy-five (75) millimeters immediately prior to the
hydroseeding installation.

7. The hydroseeding areas shall be sealed with a soil stabilant immediately

following the completion of the hydroseeding application. The time lapse between the
first application of hydroseed and the sealing with soil stabilant shall not exceed twenty-
four (24) hours.

8. Irrigation at the rates and frequency required for germination and establishment
shall begin not more than twenty-four (24) hours after the completion of the
hydroseeding and soil stabilant application.

8.01.3.19 Sod. This work consists of furnishing and placing living sod of perennial
turf-forming grasses. Sod placement is designated as solid or spot as outlined below.

Sod shall be a living vigorous growth of the type of grass and thickness specified in
the contract. The grass shall have a dense root system contained in suitable sod and
reasonably free from noxious weeds and grasses. When the sod is cut, its top growth
shall not be more than seventy-five (75) millimeters in height. Sod shall be cut and
placed during the local growing season. Sod shall be placed only when weather and
soil moisture conditions are favorable.

Pegs for sod shall be fabricated from sound wood, at least two hundred (200)
millimeters long, square or round, and having a cross-sectional area of approximately
six hundred forty-five (645) millimeters.

The area to be sodded shall be cleared and graded. The grade shall be cultivated,
disked, harrowed or otherwise loosened to a depth of not less than one hundred (100)
millimeters. Stones larger than twenty-five (25) millimeters in any diameter, sticks,
stumps, and other debris that might interfere with the proper placement or subsequent
growth shall be removed. The area to be sodded shall be cultivated like a grass area
per Paragraph 8.01.3.16 "Preparation and Maintenance of Grass Areas" in these
General Specifications.

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer at least three (3) days notice before
cutting sod. The Engineer will inspect and approve the sod in its original position before
cutting. The Contractor shall not deliver sod until the soil is prepared. The prepared
sod bed shall be thoroughly moistened. The sod shall be placed within twenty-four (24)
hours after cutting or within five (5) calendar days after cutting when the sod is stored
in moist stacks, grass-to-grass and roots-to-roots. Protect sod against drying and from
freezing.

16
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

1. Solid Sod. Sod shall be placed perpendicular to drainage flows. Sections of solid
sod shall be placed edge to edge with staggered joints. Openings shall be plugged with
sod or openings filled with acceptable loamy seeded topsoil. Sod shall be rolled or
tamped to eliminate air pockets and provide an even surface. On slopes 1V:2H or
steeper and in channels, sod shall be pegged on six-tenths (0.6) meter centers after
rolling or tamping.

2. Spot Sod. Sod is to be placed in blocks. The blocks shall be rolled or tamped
into the soil until the sod surfaces are slightly below the surrounding ground surface.
The sod shall be watered when placing and kept moist for a minimum of ten (10) days.
Erosion shall be avoided when watering.

The Contractor shall erect warning signs and barriers to protect newly sodded areas.
Wheeled vehicles shall not be allowed on newly sodded areas.

Sodded areas shall be mowed and sodded areas that are damaged or fail to show
a uniform growth of grass shall be repaired or replaced. Sodded areas shall be
maintained until final acceptance of the project.

8.01.4 COMPLETION AND MAINTENANCE. This item shall be read in conjunction

with the General Requirements for Maintenance of Irrigation and Landscaping in the
attached Appendix "2".

8.01.4.1 After Planting. All soils areas shall be forked and/or raked to a fine tilth
with approved cambers and no hollows.

8.01.4.2 Cleanliness. Soil and rubbish shall be removed from hard surfaces and
the works left in a clean and tidy condition.

8.01.4.3 Maintenance Period. The Contractor shall be responsible for the

maintenance of the planted areas, their irrigation and all operations necessary to keep
the plants in a healthy condition for a period of two (2) years following the satisfactory
completion of landscaping.

The maintenance shall include, but not be limited to watering, watering, weeding,
pruning, mowing, fertilizing, removing rubbish, replacing plants, applying approved
chemicals to counter insect attack, disease and weeds and any other horticultural
operations recognized as necessary for the proper growth of plants and for keeping the
contract area neat in appearance.

8.01.4.4 Maintenance Program. Visits shall be made at approximately daily

intervals during the growing season and as necessary to fulfill the requirement of the
Contract. The Contractor shall keep accurate records as to the operations conducted
and keep such records available for inspection by the Engineer.

8.01.4.5 Watering. Irrigation should be conducted regularly. Irrigation duration

should be scheduled to provide sufficient water for plants' growth based on the monthly

17
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

plant water requirement. Once per month throughout the maintenance period, the
Contractor shall supply certified laboratory water quality test reports as mentioned in
Paragraph 8.01.2.5 "Irrigation Water" in these General Specifications.

8.01.4.6 Weed Control and Debris Removal. Weed and debris removal from an
area of two (2) meter diameter around each tree and one (1) meter diameter around
each ground cover or shrub shall be routinely performed by the Contractor. Grass and
weeds shall not be allowed to reach a height of fifty (50) millimeters (two (2) inches) in
any tree basin or around any plant before being completely removed, including root
growth.

8.01.4.7 Pruning. Plants shall be pruned at an appropriate time to remove any

dead, dying or diseased wood and suckers in order to promote healthy growth and
natural shape. Cut ends exceeding twenty-five (25) millimeters in diameter shall be
treated with tree wound dressing.

8.01.4.8 Fertilizing. Throughout the maintenance period the Contractor shall apply
a soluble NPK fertilizer in weak solution through the injector mechanism located at each
pump station. The fertilizer shall also include traces of zinc, iron and manganese.

Every two (2) months the Contractor shall take one (1) soil sample per half a hectare
in each separate planting area serviced by fertilizer injection unit as directed by the
Engineer. The soil samples shall be tested for agricultural nutrients and fertility suitable
for arid plant growth.

The soil sample shall be tested by an approved agricultural soil testing laboratory
from the Ministry of Agriculture to determine the levels of nutrients and obtain
recommendations for the rate of application of nitrogen, phosphorus and exchangeable
potassium together with the need for trace elements.

The dilution rate shall be as per the injector and manufacturer's recommendations
and as directed by the Engineer. Fertilizer material and application rate shall be
performed by the Contractor, and will be monitored and certified by the Engineer at the
time of injection.

8.01.4.9 Plant Replacement. From a field review of completed sections of planting

works thirty (30) days after installation, the Engineer will direct the Contractor to remove
and replace all plants determined by the Engineer as dead, from the Contract Site.
Plants reviewed that, though not dead but which exhibit questionable abilities to survive
will be marked by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer that require
subsequent review after an additional thirty (30) day period.

The Contractor shall make every effort to stabilize the quality of all plants identified
by the Engineer as questionable well in advance of any additional field reviews. Plants
reviewed as not being in a healthy condition one hundred and twenty (120) days from
installation will be noted by the Contractor for removal and replacement. As soon as
seasonal planting conditions are appropriate the Contractor shall replant any areas

18
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

containing unhealthy and dead plants at his own expense. The replanted species shall
be as close as possible in size, shape and species as already growing on site.

8.01.4.10 Pest and Disease Control. Specific checks for pests and disease are
to be carried out every week by the trained technical specialist of the Contractor's staff.

Spraying and dusting with approved insecticides and fungicides to control pests and
to ensure healthy plant growth and survival, shall be performed as directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's review and approval
manufacturer's product information with a sample one (1) liter of all proposed chemical
insecticides and fungicides and a minimum thirty (30) calendar days prior to their
anticipated use. Spraying with pesticides and fungicides shall be performed as required
to control pests and disease and as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
maintain a supply of recognized and approved horticultural chemicals in sufficient
quantities to combat recurring pests and/or disease infestation that might occur during
the length of the contract.

The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's recommendations in handling and

storage of chemicals. Certain chemicals such as potassium nitrate must be separated
from other chemicals. The ventilated storage area of the Contractor's chemicals must
be locked when not in use and toxic hazard notices shall be posted in both Arabic and
English, and suitable protective clothing and washing facilities shall be furnished by the
Contractor, together with first aid equipment immediately adjacent to the storage area.
The Contractor shall conduct training sessions in first aid and site safety, in English
and Arabic, ensuring staff awareness to any precautionary measures that may be
required for handling chemicals.

All equipment should be surface sterilized with methylated spirits after use on the
plants which are known, or suspected to be diseased. All diseased wood, fungi,
pruning, etc. to be disposed of after removal from diseased plants. The Contractor's
methods and location of disposal shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior
to initiating the work.

8.01.4.11 Tree Stakes. The condition of all stakes, ties and guards shall be checked
and any broken or missing items replaced. Ties shall be adjusted to prevent bark from
being rubbed. Any damaged bark shall be cut back and treated with tree wound
dressing.

8.01.4.12 Burlap Wrapping. Wrapping shall be removed from the palm growing
buds when the turgor in the bud has been completely restored.

8.01.4.13 Grass Area Maintenance. The Contractor shall perform all required soil
tests, mowing, trimming, irrigation, aeration, thatching, top dressing, and fertilization at
frequencies required to maintain a healthy vigorous turf with a well kept appearance.
The Contractor will overseed with rye grasses in areas approved by the Engineer to
maintain a vigorous green color during winter months. The Contractor shall
continuously reseed thin or dead areas and top dress lawn areas as required during the
maintenance period.

19
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.01.5 GENERAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS.

8.01.5.1 Defects. Any trees, shrubs or plants which are dead, dying or otherwise
defective at substantial completion of the Works or six (6) weeks after first leafing out,
whichever is later, shall be regarded as defects due to materials or workmanship not
in accordance with the Contract. These must be replaced by approved equivalent
trees, shrubs or plants unless otherwise instructed or unless defects are caused by
malicious damage after substantial completion.

At the end of the maintenance period, all planted areas shall be free from weeds,
trash, debris, and shall appear neat and clean. All plants shall be in good growing
condition and shall be pruned, as directed by the Engineer, to present a well shaped
and natural appearance. After pruning, all remaining wood shall be alive. All cut
surfaces of twenty-five (25) millimeters or more in diameter shall be treated with an
approved tree paint. Replacement plants shall be in place at least fifteen (15) days
prior to the end of the maintenance period and shall exhibit no signs of damage or
failure. The maintenance period shall be extended as required to ensure full
compliance with the specifications.

Failure of the Contractor to adequately perform maintenance during this period shall
be cause for extension of the maintenance period.

8.01.5.2 Manufacturer's Recommendations. Recommendations for the storage,

handling and application of fertilizers, herbicides and other chemicals shall be strictly
followed.

8.01.5.3 Storage. All trees and plants which are not to be planted on the day of
delivery to the site shall be stored as follows, or by any other approved method:

1. Root-balled trees and plants shall be placed close together and root-balls covered
with sand, moist peat or wet straw.

2. Bare-rooted trees and plants shall be heeled in, in prepared trenches, covered
with sweet soil and watered thoroughly.

8.01.5.4 Planting Time. Plants and trees shall only be moved or planted into
permanent positions during the period mid February to mid May and mid September to
mid November every year and only when ground and weather conditions are suitable.
The Engineer's approval must be obtained to vary the planting period if special
conditions so warrant.

8.01.5.5 Weather Conditions. No planting shall be carried out when persistent cold
or drying winds are likely to occur, or if the soil is water logged or excessively dry.

20
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.01.5.6 Planting Outside Specified Conditions. If the Engineer requires or

approves of planting outside the above season or hours or during adverse weather
conditions, the Contractor is not relieved of his obligations regarding plant replacement
during the Defects Liability Period.

The Contractor is to allow for all measures necessary to reduce fatalities in the plant
material by, for example, additional watering and the use of anti-desiccants and
shading, as he considers appropriate.

8.01.5.7 Notice. The Contractor must give forty-eight (48) hours notice to the
Engineer before commencing planting, maintenance or replacement work.

8.01.5.8 Meaning of Drawings. The drawings, specifications and other documents

are intended to convey accurate descriptions of the nature and standard of quality of
the work to be performed by the Contractor. Should the tenderer be in any doubt
regarding the true meaning and intent of any Clause in the Specification, etc., he is
invited to have these fully resolved before submitting his tender.

8.01.5.9 Planting Designs. Three (3) weeks prior to the commencement of

excavation, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, shop drawings
indicating all the planting positions, species sizes. They shall be prepared in
accordance with the planting plans supplied by the Engineer and shall be liable to in-
situ adjustments as required.

8.01.5.10 "As Planted" Record. Before issuing of the Certificate of Substantial

Completion, the Contractor shall furnish the Client with a bound set of layout Drawings
to a scale 1:1000 which record the actual species used in the planted areas, including
all approved substitutes.

8.01.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Trees, palms, shrubs, creepers, ground

cover, succulents and climbing plants are all measured by number. Grass,
hydroseeding mixes, gravel mulch and concrete tiling wherever specified shall be
measured by the square meter. These measurements are taken to include all
necessary works such as preparation of planting areas, excavation of pits, furnishing
of all plants, stakes, ties, agricultural soil and fertilizers and all labor and maintenance.

8.01.7 PAYMENT. The quantities, measure as provided above, shall be paid for at
the contract unit price(s) for the several pay items as specified in the Bill of Quantities,
which prices shall be full compensation for furnishing, preparation of planting areas
including plants, soil, fertilizers, stakes, chemicals and placing all materials, for all labor
and maintenance, equipment and all other items described in the specifications
necessary for the proper completion of the work.

The supply of water required will not be paid for directly but shall be considered
subsidiary work pertaining to the several items contained in the landscape works.

The Contractor shall supply water for his own Contract and for any additional adjacent
Contracts which are served by his pumping station.

21
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

For guarantee of perfect maintenance of works according to the Specifications, an

amount equivalent to twenty-four percent (24%) of total amount of landscape items
shall be reserved to be paid during maintenance period (24 months) at equal monthly
payments of one percent (1%) according to performance of maintenance or works as
required.

Prices and payment made under this section shall cover and be full compensation
for furnishing labor, equipment, materials, tools and incidentals for completing the work
as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

80101 Trees, Acacia arabica Unit

80102 Trees, Albizzia lelbbek Unit

80103 Trees, Casuarina Unit

80104 Trees, Delonix regia Unit

80105 Trees, Eucalyptus camaldulensis Unit

80106 Trees, Prosopis juliflora Unit

80107 Trees, Schinus molle Unit

80108 Trees, Schinus terebinthifolius Unit

80109 Trees, Ficus nitida Unit

80110 Trees, Ficus altissima Unit

80111 Trees, Pithecellobium dulce Unit

80112 Trees, Aiziphus mauritiana Unit

80113 Trees, (Type) Unit

80120 Palms, Phoenix dactylifera Unit

80121 Palms, (Type) Unit

80125 Shrubs, Acacia farnesiana Unit

80126 Shrubs, Bougainvillea spectabilis Unit

80127 Shrubs, Bougainvillea glabra Unit

80128 Shrubs, Caesalpina pulcherrima Unit

80129 Shrubs, Dodonia viscosa Unit

80130 Shrubs, Callistermon viminalis Unit

22
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

80131 Shrubs, Atriplex halimus Unit

80132 Shrubs, Tecoma stans Unit

80133 Shrubs, Tehvitia nereifolia Unit

80134 Shrubs, (Type) Unit

80140 Creepers, (Type) Unit

80145 Ground Cover, Carissa grandiflora Unit

80146 Ground Cover, Clerodendron inerme Unit

80147 Ground Cover, Ipomoea pes-capre Unit

80148 Ground Cover, Ipomoea carica Unit

80149 Ground Cover, (Type) Unit

80155 Succulents, Aloe vera Unit

80156 Succulents, Agava americana Unit

80157 Succulents, Opuntia Unit

80158 Succulents, Yucca alofolia Unit

80159 Succulents, (Type) Unit

80165 Climbing Plant, (Type) Unit

80170 Grass, Bermuda Square Meter

80171 Grass, Cydomon Dactylon/Roa Annua Square Meter

80172 Grass, (Type) Square Meter

80175 Hydroseeding Mixes, Bermuda Square Meter

80176 Hydroseeding Mixes, (Type) Square Meter

80180 Gravel Mulch, Class 18-25 mm dia Square Meter

80181 Gravel Mulch, Class ___ - ___ mm dia Square Meter

80185 Precast Concrete Tiling Square Meter

80186 Sod Square Meter

23
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 8.02 IRRIGATION

8.02.1 SCOPE AND REQUIREMENTS

8.02.1.1 Scope. This work shall consist of supplying, installing, testing and
maintaining an irrigation system complete in all respects, all in accordance with the
specifications and in conformity with the details shown on the Drawings or established
by the Engineer.

All irrigation water used by the Contractor for watering shall be of an approved quality
and the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with complete physical and chemical
analyses of this water and shall obtain necessary approvals prior to its use.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Irrigation Pipework
Plastic Irrigation Pipe
Steel Irrigation Pipe
Valve, Butterfly
Valve, Air Type
Valve, Globe
Valve, Silent Check
Valve, Remote Control
Valve, Pressure Reducing
Valve, Pressure Relief, Check
Valve, Penstock
Valve, Gate
Combination Valves
Electricity Supply
Mechanical Plant for Irrigation Pumping Station
Electrical Installations for Pumping Station
Civil Works for Pumping Station
Suction and Header Pipes for Pumping Station
Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates

8.02.1.2 Abbreviations.

BS British Standards

SAS Saudi Arabian Standards

U/L Underwriters Laboratory

24
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.1.3 Shop Drawings and Approval of Equipment. The Contractor shall

prepare shop drawings showing the detailed and accurate construction of every
element of the Works. The shop drawings shall cover but not be limited to:

1. Reinforced concrete details and bar bending schedules.

2. The accurate setting out plans of all irrigation pipelines presented on 1/500 scale
over one (1) meter contour background as obtained from actual field survey, indicting
the pipe diameter, the location and size of all valves, fittings, and irrigators.

3. Installation details of valves, risers, pumping units and accessories.

4. Irrigation schedule showing the reference number of every valve, time of irrigation
and length of the irrigation period.

5. Wiring layout of all remote control valves including the size and length of wires
used.

Shop drawings for a specific location shall be submitted in triplicate to the Engineer
at least two (2) weeks prior to commencement of construction in that location. No
permanent work shall proceed in a location until the relevant shop drawings have been
approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall submit full details in triplicate of all materials and equipment to
be supplied for the approval of the Engineer. Firm orders for equipment shall not be
placed until equipment has been approved in writing.

8.02.1.4 Record Drawings. The Contractor shall provide record drawings, to a

scale not less than one one-thousandth (1/1000), showing the locations, dimensions
and details of the Works as built. The drawings can be prepared by making
amendments to the Contract Drawings; the Engineer will provide the Contractor with
one (1) set of reproducible transparencies of the Contract Drawings for this purpose.

The record drawings shall be prepared not later than twenty (20) days after
completion of the corresponding part of the Works. Upon completion of the whole of
the Works, the completed record drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval before the substantial Completion Certificate is issued. After approval, the
Contractor shall provide three (3) bound sets of prints and one (1) reproducible
transparency to the Employer.

Record drawings shall give the exact location, with respect to the road section, other
pipelines and other permanent features, of all standard and special pipes, fittings,
valves, irrigators and all other items incorporated in the Works, including diameters,
pressure class or rating, and the actual pressures as measured on the highest and
lowest irrigators commanded by each pressure regulating valve.

25
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.1.5 Maintenance and Operation.

8.02.1.5.1 General. The Contractor shall operate and maintain the irrigation
system throughout the Maintenance Period as defined under Section 8.01,
“Landscaping” in these General Specifications and shall provide staff in full time
attendance throughout the period.

This item to be read in conjunction with the General Requirements for

Maintenance of Irrigation and Landscaping in the attached Appendix "2".

8.01.1.5.2 Works. Maintenance of the works included in this Section shall cover
all work necessary to adequately operate and keep all irrigation equipment, valves,
pipelines and appurtenances in a proper operating condition, all to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.

The maintenance program shall in general include but not be limited to the
following:

1. Supply of irrigation water of suitable quality and in adequate quantities to meet

the irrigation requirements. The Contractor shall arrange to obtain water from an
adequate source, subject to the approval of the Employer and the Engineer, and shall
pay all expenses incident thereto. Ground water may be exploited for this purpose and
the Employer will provide assistance for obtaining approval by the relevant authorities.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, a full analysis of the
water from each source prior to its use for irrigation, and at one (1) month intervals
thereafter.

2. Irrigation at a frequency and depth as required for every season.

3. Maintenance and repair of all irrigation equipment, pipes, valves, pumping

stations, and all appurtenances.

4. Provision of a detailed maintenance program to be submitted to the Engineer

for approval at least two (2) months before any irrigation system is operated. This
program shall include the Operation and Maintenance organization chart, the regular
Maintenance works, the irrigation scheduling the means of providing water to the site
and all other activities incident thereto.

5. Keeping a record of all maintenance, repair and operation activities throughout

the maintenance period. This record shall show the date, location and type of work
performed, all repairs and replacements, the amount of water applied at every irrigation
and the duration of the application, results of the water analyses and all works, activities
and equipment relevant to the operation and maintenance works. This record shall be
complete to the approval of the Employer and the Engineer and shall revert to the
Employer so that it can be used by the authority in charge following the expiry of the
Maintenance Period.

26
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.1.6 Operation and Maintenance Literature. Prior to the final acceptance of

the installation, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of manuals for
all equipment supplied under the Contract. The manuals for all equipment supplied
under the Contract. The manuals shall be A4 size bound in loose leaf binders or
booklets suitably enclosed and shall include the following in Arabic and English
languages:

1. Single line diagrams of the complete electrical installations.

2. Control, projection and circuit diagrams for all equipment.

3. Setting up, commissioning and operating instructions.

4. Trouble shooting procedures.

5. Maintenance instruction including schedules for preventative maintenance,

recommended lubricants and equivalents.

6. The manufacturers catalogues and spare parts numbers of all permanent works
together with a recommended spares list.

7. A description of the regular maintenance activities and the proper operating

methods of the system in both the Arabic and English languages.

8. Name of Manufacturers' local or nearest authorized representative(s) and service

agent(s).

8.02.2 PIPING AND APPURTENANCES

8.02.2.1 Scope. PIPING AND APPURTENANCES cover all pipes, fittings valves,
irrigation equipment and accessories relevant to the irrigation network and also the
Pumping Stations and Water Tanks.

8.02.2.2 Special Requirements. Notwithstanding the specific standards relevant

to every pipe material, the following general requirements shall apply to all pipe
materials:

8.02.2.2.1 Manufacturer's Certificate.

Every shipment shall be accompanied by an original statement from the

manufacturer certifying that the products have been subject to the tests specified in the
relevant standards, have been found to meet the requirements thereof and are
manufactured in complete accordance with the specified standards.

Records of all tests carried out at the factory shall be kept and made available to
the Engineer.

27
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.2.2.2 Marking.

Products shall have the following marks legibly cast, stamped or indelibly painted
on, as appropriate:

1. Trade name, or manufacturer's name, monogram or identification mark.

2. Relevant standard(s).

3. Nominal diameter and pressure class designation.

4. Length of pipe is shorter than standard length.

5. Angle of bends in degrees.

6. Date of manufacture.

7. Shift of manufacture or lot reference.

8. Material used.

8.02.2.2.3 Retests.

For the purpose of this Specification, the term "batch" shall be deemed to include
products of the same material, size and pressure class only.

The Engineer reserves the right to require additional tests or retests on selected
products and the Contractor shall defray all costs. These tests when required shall be
carried out an independent testing organization approved by the Engineer through the
offices of the Contractor, in accordance with the latest applicable standards. The
samples to be tested shall be selected by the Engineer with at least one (1) from every
batch, and shall be subjected to any or all of the tests specified in the applicable
standards.

If a sample shall fail to pass a given test, two (2) additional samples of the same
batch shall be subjected to the same test. The failure of one (1) of these additional
samples to pass this test shall be cause for rejection of that size, pressure class and
type of manufacture during the same shift as the test samples.

8.02.2.3 Handling. All products shall be delivered to and distributed at the site by
the Contractor. The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's recommendations for
handling, repairing, laying, jointing, anchoring, testing and other works with due respect
to the following:

1. Loading and unloading shall be carried out by lifting with hoists, using ropes or
slings in order to avoid shock or damage. Fittings shall be loaded and unloaded
individually. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipes handled

28
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipes or other materials already on
the ground. No dragging on the ground will be allowed.

2. Pipes shall be stacked by placing the first layer on level timber. Pipes shall not
rest on sockets or joint faces. Pipes of the same diameter shall be stacked together
with suitable labels, on which shall be entered the stack reference number, date of
dispatch, date of delivery at the Site and the number of pipes. Height of stack shall be
to the manufacturer's instructions. Rubber rings, plastic materials and any other
materials as recommended by the manufacturers, shall be stored in shaded locations
in their original packing.

3. Each pipe shall be unloaded on Site opposite or near the place where it will be
installed.

8.02.2.4 Pipes, Fittings and Accessories. The pressure class of the pipes, fittings
and accessories shall be as indicated in the Specifications that follow unless otherwise
specifically indicated on the Drawings:

8.02.2.4.1 Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes.

Flexibility jointed pipes shall be to BS 4772 Class K9, with NP10 joints, flanged
pipes to BS 4772 Class K12, fittings to BS 4772 K12 except for fittings with branches
which shall be Class K14, and flanges to BS 4504. All flanges shall be rated at NP25.

Factory protection shall consist of:

Internally: cement mortar lining to BS 4772 Appendix C with sulphate resisting

Portland cement to BS 4027.

Externally: coating with bitumen to BS 3416, thickness one (1) mil.

8.02.2.4.2 Unplasticised PVC Pressure Pipes.

Pipes shall be to SAS 14 Class 5 and SAS 15 unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings and in the Bill of Quantities. All sizes shown on the Drawing and the Bill of
Quantities are for nominal internal diameter.

Fittings shall be injection molded to SAS 14.

Joints shall be injection molded to SAS 14.

8.02.2.4.3 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes.

Pipes shall be to SAS 5 and SAS 6 Class 18 manufactured with sulphate

resistance cement conforming to BS 4027.

Ductile iron fittings to BS 4772, protected internally with cement mortar and
externally with bitumen shall be used with asbestos cement pipes. End combinations

29
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

shall be as shown on the Drawings. Spigot or plain ended fittings shall have their ends
shaped to suit specified asbestos cement joints.

Joints between pipes and between pipes and fittings shall be of the sleeve type
utilizing gasket retaining grooved asbestos cement couplings. Rubber sealing rings
shall be to BS 2494.

8.02.2.4.4 Steel Tubes and Tubulars.

Tubes shall be to BS 1387 Medium Class with screwed joints to BS 21. Factory
protection shall consist of dipping in molten zinc containing not less than ninety-eight
and one-half percent (98.5%) by weight of zinc at a temperature suitable to produce a
complete and uniform adherent coating.

8.02.2.4.5 Flexible Pipe Couplings.

Flexible couplings are to be of the correct type and class recommended by the
manufacturer for the specific pipe material and pressure. They must be fixed exactly
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Factory protection shall
consist of external and internal coating with bitumen to BS 3416, thickness one (1) mil.

Flexible pipe couplings shall be of the straight type to connect two (2) plain ended
pipes of the same outside diameter or of the stepped type for large diametrical
differences. Coupling is to be with center register. Material shall be malleable iron to
BS 300 Grade 20/10 or rolled steel to BS 970-060 A12. Bolts to BS 90-EN3A. Rubber
rings to BS 2494.

Allowable angular deflection shall not be less than six degrees (6 o) for sizes up to
six hundred (600) millimeters diameter.

8.02.2.4.6 Flanged Adaptors.

Material shall be cast iron body to BS 1452 grade 14 or mild steel plate to BS
4360 - 4SA and malleable cast iron flanges to BS 310 grade 20/10 or rolled steel to BS
970-060 A12. Bolts to BS 970-EN3A. Rubber rings to BS 2494.

Length of adaptor shall be two hundred (200) millimeters for diameters up to one
hundred fifty (150) millimeters, two hundred fifty (250) millimeters for diameters between
two hundred (200) and three hundred (300) millimeters and as approved for diameters
larger than three hundred (300) millimeters. Factory protection shall consist of external
and internal coating with bitumen to BS 3416, thickness one (1) mil.

8.02.2.4.7 Jointing Materials.

1. Gaskets shall be elastomeric full face three (3) millimeter thick joint rings to BS
2494 with dimensions to BS 3063.

30
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Rings shall be elastomeric to BS 2494. Dimensions shall be to manufacturer's

recommendations to suit type of joint.

3. Bolts and nuts shall be ISO metric black hexagon to BS 4190 minimum tensile
strength four hundred thirty-three (433) MN per square meter, maximum elongation
seventeen percent (17%). After fixing, bolt projection shall be maximum six (6)
millimeters, minimum three (3) millimeters.

4. Washers shall be black steel conforming to BS 4320.

8.02.2.4.8 Field Testing.

1. General.

The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment, pressure gauges, instruments

and water needed for hydrostatic field testing. Tests shall be carried out in the
presence of the Engineer's representative.

Fittings and joints shall be permanently anchored before testing and left exposed
for checking. All pipework is to be cleaned and swabbed, prior to field testing, to
remove any material that may have collected during installation. Pipelines shall be
partially backfilled before testing.

Each section shall be limited to five hundred (500) millimeters or the length
between valve positions, whichever is shorter. No testing shall be carried out against
a closed valve.

Ends of test sections shall be securely plugged and strutted.

Ends of risers shall be plugged and all air purged.

No testing shall be carried out against or through the pressure reducing valves.
The setting of the pressure reducing valves shall not be changed for testing purposes.
Pressures shall be applied by manually operated or motor driven test pumps approved
by the Engineer.

Exposed joints shall be examined for visible leaks and appropriately repaired
where necessary. Should a test fail, leaks shall be located and defective pipes or joints
made good or replaced and the pipeline retested.

Test records shall be kept in an approved form, and the original copy shall be
handed over to the Engineer immediately after completion of each test.

2. Hydrostatic Test.

The pipeline shall be filled slowly with water from the lowest point. After filling with
water, absorbent pipes shall be allowed to stand for at least twenty-four (24) hours
before testing to allow complete absorption.

31
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Entrapped air shall be bled before pressurizing. Pressurizing is to continue until

the specified test pressure is reached in the lowest part of the section under test.
Further quantities of entrapped air shall be bled while pressure is being raised.

Unless otherwise specifically indicated, the test pressure shall be thirteen

kilograms per square centimeter (13 kg/cm2) for all pipelines upstream of pressure
regulating valves and seven kilograms per square centimeter (7 kg/cm 2) for all pipelines
downstream of pressure regulating valves.

The test pressure shall be maintained for one (1) hour by pumping. Pumping shall
then be stopped for two (2) hours, at the end of which time, the line shall be
repressurized to the original test pressure and the volume of water pumped into the line
recorded.

The pipeline will be deemed to have failed the test if:

- Visible leaks are detected, regardless of leakage being within the allowable
specified limit.

- Volume of water pumped to restore original test pressure after the period when
pumping was stopped exceeds the allowable leakage of:

- Eight-tenths (0.8) liters per day per kilometer of pipe per millimeter of pipe
diameter for each three (3) kilograms per square centimeter (3 kg/cm2) of
applied pressure for other pipe material.

- One-tenth (0.1) liters per kilometer of pipe per millimeter of pipe diameter for
each three (3) kilograms per square centimeter of applied pressure for other
pipe material.

8.02.2.4.9 PVC Ducts.

Ducks are to high impact resistant, acid resistant, high resistance to heat self
extinguishing, low coefficient of expansion PVC compound. The size of ducts shall be
as indicated in the Drawings.

Each section of duct is to have one (1) end tapered with jointed part being equal
or longer than eight (8) millimeters and joined using adhesive recommended by
manufacturer. Joint is to be waterproof and sandproof.

Ducts running under streets or paved areas are to be encased in concrete with
minimum thickness as shown on the Drawings.

Ducts are to be cleaned by rubber or leather mandrel slightly larger than duct
inside diameter.

32
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

A pull wire is to be placed in all ducts stretching the complete length and fixed to
wooden block.

8.02.2.5 Valves.

8.02.2.5.1 General.

Unless otherwise indicated, valves shall comply with the following:

1. Valves shall be rated at sixteen kilograms per square centimeter (16 kg/cm2)
(NP 16).

2. Size fifty (50) millimeter (2 inch) and smaller shall have screwed ends to BS 21.

3. Size sixty-five (65) millimeter (2½ inch) and larger shall have flanged end
connections to BS 4504 - NP 16.

4. The construction of the valve shall allow for complete servicing without
removing the valve body from the line.

5. Factory protection of cast iron valves shall consist of an initial coat of protective
paint applied immediately after shot blasting and a second coat on assembly.

6. For cast iron valves that will be installed exposed indoors the protective coating
shall consist of two (2) coats of zinc primer. Two (2) coats of oil paint shall be applied
one (1) before and one (1) after assembly. For cast iron valves that will be directly
buried or installed inside valve chambers, the protective coating shall consist of two (2)
coats of cold applied coat tar based primer. Two (2) coats hot applied coat tar based
coating shall be applied after assembly.

7. After testing, each valve shall be drained, cleaned and closed. Valves shall be
prepared for dispatch in such a way as to prevent the possibility of damage to inside
or outside parts during transit. All machined parts shall be protected against rusting by
painting or by other approved means.

8. For all underground valves the Contractor shall provide a valve support, the
necessary ductile iron flanged/spigot pipes for connecting to pipes and all necessary
fittings, tapers, flanged adaptors, bolts, nuts, gaskets, etc., for a complete valve
installation as shown on the Drawings.

9. The valve box shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings.

10. Valve markers shall bear suitable identification marking in accordance with
details given on the Drawings or as instructed.

33
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.2.5.2 Gate Valves.

1. Size fifty (50) millimeter (two (2) inch) and smaller shall be to BS 5154 with
solid wedge disk, non-rising stem, and screwed bonnet.

2. Size sixty-five (65) millimeter (two and one-half (2½)inch) and larger shall be
to BS 5163 cast iron with inside screw, solid wedge, resilient seated, bolted bonnet and
non-rising stem suitable for NP 16.

Materials of component parts shall be from the basic or alternative materials listed
in BS 5163 Table 6.

Valves shall be supplied with either handwheels, valve caps or extension sockets
as shown.

8.02.2.5.3 Butterfly Valves.

Butterfly valves shall be to BS 5155, cast iron and carbon steel, double flanged,
resilient seated.

Operation key to be as indicated on the Drawings.

8.02.2.5.4 Globe Valves.

1. Size fifty (50) millimeter (two (2) inch) and smaller shall be to BS 5154 with
integral seat, revolving seat and disk, inside screw, rising stem and screwed bonnet.

2. Size sixty-five (65) millimeter (two and one-half (2½)inch) and larger shall be
to BS 5152 cast iron with bronze trim, renewable seat and disk, outside screw, rising
stem and flanged bonnet.

8.02.2.5.5 Silent Check Valves.

1. Silent check valves shall be non-slam, spring loaded, suitable for installation
in any position. They shall have straight guided disc with two-point bearing, wearing
parts including disc, seat and other guide bushing shall be replaceable. They shall also
have flow area in excess of pipe for minimum pressure drop.

2. Size fifty (50) millimeter (two (2) inch) and smaller shall be screwed, with
bronze body, seat and disc, 18-8 stainless steel spring, with body having three hundred
pounds per square inch (300 psi) working pressure rating.

3. Size sixty-five (65) millimeter (two and one-half (2½)inch) and larger shall be
flanged, with cast iron body, bronze seat and disc, 18-8 stainless steel spring, with body
having two hundred fifty pounds per square inch (250 psi) working pressure rating.

34
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.2.5.6 Remote Control Valves (RCV).

Remote control valves shall be provided with a twenty-four (24) volt, two (2) watt
solenoid coil for remote open/close operation and shall be normally closed. It shall
have a bleed off screw arranged to allow manual operation of the valve without
energizing the solenoid coil. It shall have an adjustable flow control with manual shut-
off.

Valves shall be of the slow-closing type suitable for the indicated low flow/low
operating capacity at an operating pressure of five-tenths (0.5) to ten (10) kilograms per
square centimeter.

Valves shall be fitted with nylon screens.

Valves shall be provided with all necessary pilot valves, copper tubes and contacts
for remote indication of the valve status position open or closed at the irrigation program
controller.

Valves shall be of corrosion resistant construction.

The valve body shall be glass filled nylon. The bonnet shall be A.B.S. The
diaphragm shall be reinforced nylon. Valves shall be fitted with a nylon screen.

8.02.2.5.7 Pressure Reducing Valves.

Pressure reducing valves (PRV) shall automatically reduce a higher inlet pressure
to a steady lower downstream pressure regardless of changing flow rate and/or varying
inlet pressure. They shall also prevent slamming or water hammer through effective
cushioning devices. Each PRV shall incorporate an orifice/strainer block and a plugged
outlet on the downstream end for measuring the reduced pressure.

Each PRV shall have a control accuracy of ± two and one-half percent (2½%) of
the preset reduced pressure value and shall have a drop tight shut-off, full face seating.
The PVR shall be hydraulically operated and of the self-contained differential piston or
pilot controlled diaphragm or piston type.

Setting of the controlled downstream pressure and its testing shall be done at the
factory. Field tests shall be carried out to confirm the controlled pressure. This
pressure is indicated on the Drawings. The maximum upstream pressure that the PVR
shall be able to reduce to the indicated downstream pressure shall not be less than ten
kilograms per square centimeter (10 kg/cm 2). The valve shall close drop tight when the
downstream pressure exceeds the inlet pressure.

The valve body brass or cast iron shall be tested at sixteen kilograms per square
centimeter (16 kg/cm2).

35
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The main valve shall be of the globe or angle type as specified. The pilot controls,
the trim or both main valve and pilot controls and all springs shall be of stainless steel
303. The diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced Buna-N.

Internal coating shall consist of epoxy resin.

One (1) portable pressure gauge suitable for fitting to the plugged outlet shall be
supplied with every batch of 25 PRV or fraction thereof exceeding twelve (12) units.
The number of pressure gauges thus supplied shall not be less than two (2) nor shall
it exceed five (5) units. Pressure gauges shall comply with the Specifications set forth
elsewhere in these General Specifications.

8.02.2.5.8 Remote Controlled Pressure Reducing Valves (RCPRV).

Remote Controlled Pressure Reducing Valves shall be solenoid valves each

provided with a pressure reducing module. Performance is similar to the pressure
reducing valve specified elsewhere in these General Specifications.

8.02.2.5.9 Pressure Relief Check Valves (Pump Control Valves).

This valve shall operate to automatically maintain a constant maximum system

pressure, regardless of varying demand rates, by relieving excess pressure to pump
suction. It shall also control excess pressure within the system and prevent back flow
in case of pressure reversal.

The valve shall operate when the system pressure exceeds a certain preset
maximum. This maximum pressure shall be coordinated with the pump characteristics,
particularly the shut-off head, to avoid over-heating of the pump motor at low demands.

The valve shall have a control accuracy of plus or minus two and one-half percent
(± 2.5 %) of the preset maximum system pressure and shall have a drop tight shut-off
whenever the system pressure is below the preset relief pressure. Setting of the relief
pressure and its testing shall be done at the factory. Field tests shall be carried out to
conform the relief pressure.

The main valve shall be of the globe type as specified. The pilot controls, the trim
of both main valve and pilot controls and all springs shall be of stainless steel 303. The
diagram shall be of nylon reinforced Buna-N.

Internal coating shall consist of epoxy resin.

8.02.2.5.10 Air Valves.

1. General.

Valves shall have cast iron body and bolted cover to BS 1452 Grade 14 minimum,
rubber outlet seat, plastic or ebonite ball, forged bronze screws and guide for ball
acting under pressure. Valves shall be of the dynamic type where there is no

36
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

possibility of the ball being drawing into the orifice due to high air velocities. Valves
shall be factor tested to sixteen kilograms per square centimeter (16 kg/cm2).

Air valves shall be isolated from the mainline with a brass or gunmetal male
screwed stop valve.

2. Combination air valves shall be used for relieving air under vacuum or pressure
and in bulk and shall consist of a large orifice to release or admit air during charging or
emptying of mains and of a small orifice to release air accumulated at summits of mains
under pressure. The large orifice area shall be equal to or greater than inlet of valve.
Each combination air valve shall be fitted with nitrile rubber lined butterfly valve with
nylon coated disc on stainless steel shaft operated by lever handle with indicator and
locking thumb screw.

3. Air and Vacuum Valves.

Type I (large orifice) shall be used for releasing or admitting air during filling or
emptying of pipes.

Type II (small orifice) shall be used for automatically releasing, under pressure,
accumulated air at summits of mains and where necessary at gradient changes.

8.02.2.5.11 Penstocks.

Penstocks shall be of sluice gate type to AWWA C501 non-rising stem having a
faced back, studded for connecting to the discharge pipe flange and suitable for on-
seating pressure with conventional closure and circular aperture. The stem shall be a
continuous single piece - no couplings will be allowed.

Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, any of the materials listed in Section
2 of the AWWA Standard may be used in manufacture except that materials identified
as being subject to dezincification or dealumination are not to be used.

Sluice gates are to be operated by a handwheel without gears. Maximum

operating head from surface of water to centerline of gate will not exceed ten (10)
millimeters.

A leakage test, meeting the requirements of Section 6.3 of the AWWA Standard,
is to be carried out at the factory on all sluice gates and test certificates and results
shall be supplied in triplicate.

Surfaces of castings shall be factory protected as specified for cast iron valves.

8.02.2.5.12 Jointing Materials.

Gaskets shall be elastomeric full face three (3) millimeters thick joint rings to BS
2494 with dimensions to BS 3063.

37
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Rings shall be elastomeric to BS 2494. Dimensions as per manufacturer's

recommendation to suit type of joint required.

Bolts and nuts shall be ISO metric black hexagon to BS 4190, minimum tensile
strength 433 KN per square meter maximum elongation seventeen percent (17%).
After fixing bolt projection is to be maximum six millimeters, minimum three (3)
millimeters.

Washers shall be black steel to BS 4320.

8.02.2.5.13 GRP Valve Boxes. GRP valve boxes are to be designed to suit the
site conditions and loadings.

The glass reinforced plastic is to be manufactured from E-glass type fibers and
thermosetting resin and is to incorporate a corrosion resistant liner. The glass fibers
are to be compatible with the resins used. The liner is to comprise an inner face being
a smooth hard suitably reinforced resin rich layer. The exterior surface of the valve box
is to be resin rich.

The inside surface of each valve box is to be hard, durable, free of tackiness and
free of bulges, dents, ridges or other defects that result in a variation of inside
dimensions of more than three (3) millimeters from that obtained in adjacent unaffected
portions of the surface.

No glass fiber reinforcement is to penetrate the interior surface of the valve box
wall, and any glass fiber reinforcement on the exterior surface must be thoroughly
impregnated with resin.

The glass content will be determined by ignition loss analysis in accordance with
Method D 2584 or ISO Recommendation R 11172.

8.02.2.5.14 Plastic Valve Boxes. Plastic valve boxes are to be high impact
resistant, acid resistant, high resistance to heat, self extinguishing, hard, durable, low
coefficient of expansion PVC compound.

Valve boxes are to be designed to suit the site conditions and loadings.

8.02.2.5.15 Valve Accessories.

1. Handwheels.

Handwheels shall be to BS 5163, cast iron to BS 1452 Grade 10. Handwheels

shall be marked "CLOSE" with an arrow to indicate clockwise direction of closure.
Diameters and other construction details shall be to the manufacturer's standards. One
(1) handwheel shall be supplied for each hand operated valve in pumping stations.

38
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Valve Caps and Operation Keys.

Valve caps shall be to BS 5163, cast iron or malleable iron to BS 1452 grade 12
or BS 310 respectively. Set screws of valve caps shall be mild steel M12.

Operation keys shall be of the combination prising bar and lifting key type, one
and one-half (1.5) meter vertical bar, one-half (0.5) meter horizontal bar. Keys shall be
supplied at rate of one (1) for every five (5) valves with a minimum of three (3) and a
maximum of ten (10).

3. Extension Spindles for Gate Valves.

Extension spindles shall be to BS 2470 - M12, hot dip galvanized to BS 1387, size
18 x 18 millimeters for valves up to two hundred (200) millimeter diameter and 24 x 24
millimeters for valves two hundred (250) millimeters to four hundred (400) millimeters
diameter. Length, for each valve size shall suit excavation requirements. Spindles
shall have cast iron or malleable iron caps and couplings to BS 1452 grade 12 and BS
310 respectively, on both ends of extension spindles (cap for operating spindle and
coupling for connecting to valve). Set screws of caps and couplings shall be mild steel
M12.

4. Protection Tubes.

Protection tubes shall be either uPVC or cast iron. Shape, sizes and other
construction details shall be to manufacturer's standards and/or as shown on the
Drawings. Tubes shall have caps encircling extension spindles.

5. Surface Boxes.

Surface boxes shall be to BS 1426. Frames and lids shall be cast iron to BS 1452
Grade 10. Studs, bolts, nuts and hinge pins shall be mild steel M12. Chains shall be
mild steel or wrought iron. Lids shall be of the medium grade type B.

Lifting keys shall be malleable iron, supplied at the rate of one (1) per five (5)
covers.

8.02.2.5.16 Workmanship.

Prior to installation, valves shall be inspected for cleanliness of bore, seating

surfaces, etc., and for handling damage, cracks, missing parts and tightness of
pressure containing bolting.

Valves, gates and hydrants shall be in closed position before installation.

Valves and hydrants shall be operated through one (1) complete opening and
closing cycle in the position in which they are to be installed to ensure proper
functioning.

39
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.2.5.17 Installation.

1. Valves. Valves shall be set and jointed to pipe in the manner specified for
laying and jointing pipe and/or to manufacturer's instructions.

Each valve shall be provided with concrete pad as shown on the Drawings so that
the pipe does not support the weight of the valve.

Valves shall not be used to bring misaligned pipe into alignment during installation.

All pressure-containing bolting (bonnet, seal plate and end connections) shall be
inspected for adequate tightness after installation but prior to field testing.

2. Penstocks. For each penstock, the wall thimble, operating mechanism, stem
and stem guides shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's drawings and
recommendations. Tolerances between seating faces shall be maintained and any
warping avoided.

Tapped holes in thimbles shall be protected during concreting and setting.

Surfaces of thimbles and gates shall be protected from concrete spillage, paint,
oil and debris. Thimbles shall be supported to prevent shifting during pouring and
braced horizontally and vertically to prevent distortion.

Nuts shall be tightened in sequence after setting.

The entire assembly shall be cleaned, adjusted and lubricated after installation.
Penstocks shall be operated through one (1) complete cycle on installation to
ensure proper functioning.

8.02.2.5.18 Field Protection.

Valves shall be protected against the action of external agents by a coat of

approved bituminous compound, applied cold by brush after pressure tests on pipelines
have been completed.

Penstocks shall be protected against action of external agents with one coat of
approved bituminous compound applied cold by brush after installation.

Buried bolts shall be protected against corrosion, with approved paint or by

polyethylene wrapping.

40
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.2.6 Irrigators.

8.02.2.6.1 Irrigation Program Controllers.

The irrigation program controller shall be of the computer type capable of fully
automatic or manual operation of the system. It shall be housed, as required, in either
a pedestal mounted or a wall mounted corrosion proof and weatherproof lockable
cabinet. The cabinet shall have a reset circuit breaker to protect it from power overload.

The controller shall be capable of operating the number of stations indicated in the
Bill of Quantities. Each station shall be capable of controlling three (3) No. 24 volt AC
remote control or remote control pressure reducing valves and shall have a time setting
control capable of being set for one-tenth (0.1) hour increments from zero (0) to nine
and nine-tenths (9.9) hours unless otherwise specifically indicated or set to omit the
station from the irrigation cycle.

The controller shall have a selector for not less than an eight (8) day program for
each station with up to twenty-three (23) start times per day on each program.

The controller shall have a switch for fully automatic or manual operation or to
allow valve power output to be interrupted without affecting the controller timers.

The controller shall have a remote pump start circuit to activate a remote pump
start relay to run the pump during the irrigation cycle. The controller shall allow for
opening the first remote control valve before operating the pump and also for closing
the last remote control valve within fifteen (15) seconds after stopping the pump. The
controller shall be suitable for receiving controlled signals from a remote computer-
assisted control center (through an interface to be installed at a later date by others) to
supervise the operation of the remote control valves.

8.02.2.6.2 Spray Heads (for spray and stream spray).

Each spray head shall be of the fixed, non-rotating spray or stream spray type and
adaptable for full circle or part circle wetting patterns. It shall be made of rugged brass
or durable heat resistant plastic as determined in the Bill of Quantities and suitable for
rough handling.

The spray nozzles shall be so manufactured as to provide a precise and uniform

spray pattern at the specified pressure and precipitation rate.

Spray head discharge rate, spray radius and operating nozzle pressure are
indicated on the Drawings.

- Shrub spray heads, shall be installed at a fixed height above the finished ground
level as indicated on the Drawings.

- Grass spray heads shall be of the pop-up type that retract flush with the finished
ground level when out of operation. During operating, the net pop-up height shall
be fifteen (15) centimeters. The pop-up extension shall be totally enclosed - when

41
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

out of operation - in a sealed plastic tube, and shall be so designed as to prevent

intrusion of debris, and its possible clogging or jamming.

The Contractor shall provide the test results carried out at the factory
substantiating the required performance (discharge and radius of throw at the
prescribed operating pressure and height above ground) and giving the actual
precipitation rate and its uniformity as obtained from the uniformity test carried out using
catch cans. The uniformity test shall be carried out on single spray heads selected at
the rate of one (1) out of every batch of one thousand (1000) spray heads.

The tested spray heads shall be so labelled and shall accompany the test results.

Every shipment of spray heads shall be accompanied by a statement from the

manufacturer certifying that the spray heads are manufactured in accordance with and
meet the requirements of the Specification and are similar to the tested spray heads.

The Contractor shall include in his rates for carrying out single uniformity tests on
a maximum of two (2) spray heads per shipment selected by the Engineer for every
type of spray head at an independent testing organization approved by the Engineer.
If the results of these tests prove to be in discordance with the results supplied by the
manufacturer, as the Engineer may judge, testing shall be carried out on another four
(4) spray heads at the Contractor's expense. Failure of any of these spray heads to
meet the manufacturer's results will be cause for rejection of the whole shipment.

8.02.2.6.3 Bubblers. Bubblers shall be of either the adjustable flow type or the
pressure compensating type, both constructed of hard durable heat resistant plastic.
The discharge rate and operating pressure shall be as indicated on the Drawings. The
bubblers shall have an inlet screen.

The adjustable flow bubbler shall be provided with a tamper proof adjusting brass
screw that allows throttling the flow down to complete shut-off.

The pressure compensating bubbler shall consist of an integral rubber device that
automatically modulates pressure and discharges the specified flow at varying
operating pressure conditions, within the range of one (1) to five (5) kilograms per
square centimeter.

8.02.2.6.4 Hose Bibs. Hose bibs shall be twenty-five (25) millimeters (one (1)
inch) brass bib taps to BS 1010 with stepped tapered hose connections, as shown on
the Drawings.

8.02.2.6.5 Drip Emitters and Tubing.

8.02.2.6.6 Polyethylene Tubing and Fittings.

Polyethylene manifold pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with BS 1972, low
density Type 32 and shall be Class C (nine kilograms per square centimeter (9 kg/cm 2).

42
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Pipe shall have welded or compression fittings to BS 864 Part 3, such that thrust
blocks are not required.

Polyethylene tubing for use as drip lateral shall be extruded from virgin low density
polyethylene resin, free of splits and kinds and resistant to stress cracking and rolling.
The working pressure shall be three kilograms per square centimeter (3 kg/cm2).

Drip lateral fittings shall be sturdy and durable construction with minimum flow
resistance. Couplings shall be of the compression type. Connection of lateral to
manifold shall be achieved using compression fittings or insert barbs with external
retaining champs or collars. The fitting shall attache to the manifold by solvent cement
for uPVC and by threaded connection or rubber grommet for polyethylene. Ends of
laterals shall be folded over and held in place by a slide collar.

8.02.2.6.7 Emitters. The emitter shall be of the multi outlet pressure

compensating type. It shall be of the continuous flushing type. The number of outlets
is as indicated on the drawings. Each outlet shall be individually chambered for uniform
flow. The pressure compensating feature shall be separate for each outlet and shall
allow the emitter to operate over the pressure range specified on the drawings with a
pressure - discharge response allowing a constant discharge over the operating
pressure range.

The emitter body shall be constructed of durable heat resistant plastic suitable for
direct burial or exposed application. Outlets shall have an internal barb appropriate for
the diameter of the distribution tubing.

Flow regulating diaphragm shall be of high consistency silicone resistant to dilute

Hydrochloric and Sulfuric acids. Flow orifices shall be able to pass one hundred fifty
(150) mesh particles and bioslime produced by soil-borne organisms.

8.02.2.7 Construction Requirements.

8.02.2.7.1 Earthworks.

1. Excavation. Excavation shall not be commenced on any section of work until

a full supply of pipes and fittings is available on site for that section.

Trench width up to three hundred (300) millimeters above crown of pipe shall not
exceed the following:

- for pipes not exceeding sixty-five (65) millimeters diameter: three hundred (300)
millimeters.

- for pipes over sixty-five (65) millimeters and not exceeding five hundred (500)
millimeters diameter: nominal diameter plus four hundred fifty (450) millimeters.

- for pipes over five hundred (500) millimeters diameter: nominal diameter plus six
hundred (600) millimeters.

43
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Where required by the Engineer, and due to excavation being taken wider than
specified, the Contractor shall provide at no additional cost an increased pipe strength
or additional pipe protection.

Where excavations have been taken deeper than required, the Contractor shall
bear the cost of this excessive excavation and its backfill with the required Subsection
5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor Structures" in these General Specifications unless
otherwise instructed.

Excavation with battered sides shall not be permitted in public highways, private
gardens or within thirty (30) meters of any building or other structure.

Embankments and other areas of fill shall be filled and compacted as specified to
a height of at least six hundred (600) millimeters above top of pipe before trench is
excavated.

Excavation in existing pavements shall be executed carefully and to minimum

widths. Methods which will give a straight and vertical face shall be used. Pavement
shall be maintained at original level.

In common trenches and where one (1) pipe is at a lower level than an adjacent
pipe in a common trench, the following shall apply:

- a sub-trench is permissible provided soil is stable.

- if a sub-trench is not permissible, the whole trench shall have a depth related
to the lower pipe, with increased thickness of bedding to upper pipe as
necessary.

- lower pipe shall be backfilled with thoroughly compacted granular material up

to a level not less than half way up the higher pipe.

2. Formation of Beds.

Excavation shall be carried out immediately before laying beds or pipes.

Unstable material, rock projections, boulders and hard spots shall be removed and
replaced with approved filling material, well consolidated.

Local soft spot shall be hardened by tamping in bedding material.

In rock, excavation shall be carried out to two hundred (200) millimeters below bed
level and replaced with granular material or Subsection 5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor
Structures" in these General Specifications as directed.

Excavated subsoil required for backfilling shall be stock-piled in temporary spoil

heaps along sides of excavations or elsewhere on the Site as instructed.

44
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

3. Bedding Materials.

Bedding shall be placed as indicated on the Drawings. Materials for bedding shall
consist of the following, the appropriate type to use being indicated on the Drawings:

- Graded aggregates - granular material

for pipes not exceeding one hundred (100) millimeters diameter: graded
fourteen (14) millimeters to five (5) millimeters with not more than twenty
percent (20%) passing five (5) millimeter sieve.

for pipes over one hundred (100) millimeters and not exceeding one thousand
two hundred (1200) millimeters diameter: graded twenty (20) millimeters to five
(5) millimeters with not more than twenty percent (20%) passing five (5)
millimeter sieve.

- Nominal single - sized aggregates - granular material

for pipes not exceeding one hundred (100) millimeters diameter: ten (10)
millimeter size.

for one hundred fifty (150) millimeter diameter pipe: ten (10) or fourteen (14)
millimeter size.

for two hundred (200) millimeter diameter pipe and over: ten (10), fourteen (14)
or twenty (20) millimeter size.

- Sand.

Sound, clean, uncontaminated granular material, uniformly graded from three

(3) millimeter maximum size, free from organic and deleterious matter, not
containing more than ten percent (10%) by weight of clay or silt individually or
in combination.

- Concrete Bedding, Surrounds, Arches and Haunches

In-situ concrete Subsection 5.03.9 "Concrete for Minor Structures" in these

General Specifications.

4. Workmanship.

Granular bedding shall be placed in bottom of prepared trench and carefully hand
tamped to minimum thicknesses. After pipe has been laid, additional material or
haunching shall be placed in successive layers not exceeding one hundred fifty (150)
millimeters thick on both sides simultaneously. Spaces between pipe and side of trench
shall be completely filled and carefully hand tamped without disturbing pipe.

Concrete as required shall be placed after pipe is placed, and shall be worked
under pipe and joint on both sides to provide a solid and uniform bedding.

45
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Vertical construction joints shall be formed in concrete beds, surrounds, etc., at

face of pipe joints with compressible board and shall be finished to profile of concrete
and pipe. Any gap between spigot and socket shall be filled with approved resilient
material.

5. Backfilling.

Materials shall be as specified on the Drawings.

Initial backfill shall be brought to the level indicted on the Drawings by laying and
hand compacting in one hundred fifty (150) millimeter layers.

Final backfill, unless otherwise specified, shall be material excavated from the
trench, laid and well compacted in layers not exceeding three hundred (300) millimeters
thick. Use of heavy compactors shall not be allowed until there is six hundred (600)
millimeters cover over pipes.

When backfilling to pipes with concrete beds and surrounds, the following shall be
observed:

- Backfilling shall not be started within twenty-four (24) hours of placing concrete.

- Heavy compactors and traffic loads shall be prevented within seventy-two (72)
hours of placing concrete.

Temporary bridges shall be provided over trenches to prevent construction traffic

damaging pipes after backfilling.

Where pipelines are laid in planted areas the upper forty-five hundredths (0.45)
meters backfilling shall be of Agricultural soil.

6. Reinstatement.

Reinstatement of asphalt, concrete and gravel pavements and the like shall be
with materials and to thicknesses to match the existing pavement. Materials and
workmanship shall be in accordance with local authority requirements and as directed
by the Engineer.

Existing pavement shall be made good and new pavement shall be the same level
and profile as the existing to provide a uniform surface.

In unsurfaced areas, surface of trench and any adjoining disturbed areas shall be
graded after backfilling to provide a level, smooth surface.

Reinstatement of surfaces shall be started as soon after completion of other work

as is practicable, but in no case more than ten (10) days after backfilling of trenches
and other excavated areas and shall be completed within a further twenty (20) days.

46
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

For road crossings reinstatement shall be initiated within twenty-four (24) hours of
backfilling.

Any settlement shall be made good by the Contractor to the Engineer's

satisfaction.

8.02.2.7.2 Pipe Laying and Jointing.

1. General.

Pipes shall not be lowered into trench until the pipe bed has been brought to
correct grade and approved.

Pipes two hundred fifty (250) millimeters in diameter and smaller may be lowered
into the trench by sliding, using two (2) ropes. Lowering shall be done using ropes, wire
slings, band slings, spreader beams, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer for
each type of pipe.

Before laying, pipes shall be carefully examined for damage, and tested for
soundness in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Damaged lining or
coating shall be made good or the material disposed of as directed.

Dirt and foreign mater shall be removed before lowering and construction debris
shall be cleared from the inside of each pipe before jointing.

Pipes shall be laid on even formation true to grade and line with sockets (where
applicable) facing up the gradient.

Bedding shall be scooped out locally to allow proper jointing and for the barrel of
each pipe to bear evenly on solid ground over its full length.

After field testing, further granular material shall be laid and compacted in one
hundred (100) millimeter layers to levels shown on the Drawings.

Where pipe is to be laid on a concrete bed or surround, rectangular blocks of

Concrete for Minor Structures made in approved molds at least fourteen (14) days
before use, shall be provided at the rate of two (2) blocks for each pipe. The blocks
shall then be set and boned to the correct level on the formation bottom and the pipe
shall then be properly centered and socketed. Two (2) approved hardwood folding
wedges of width equal to width of concrete block shall be inserted between the body
of pipe and block and driven together until pipe is brought to the exact level required.
Blocks and wedges shall be left undisturbed while pipes are being jointed and concrete
bed or surround is being placed. The blocks and wedges shall be of sufficient size and
strength to prevent settlement of pipes. Sufficient space shall be left to enable joints
to be made, tested and inspected.

When pipe laying is not in progress, open ends of pipes shall be closed with
properly fitted temporary wooden plugs or standard caps as directed.

47
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Jointing.

Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed regarding cleanliness of joint

surfaces, lubricant or solvent used, correct location of components, provision of correct
gaps between end of spigot and back of socket for flexible joints, etc.

Flexible joints shall not be deflected beyond maximum permissible angles given
by manufacturer and/or relevant standard, whichever is less.

Special instructions issued by a manufacturer of proprietary joints - e.g. patent

detachable flexible joints - shall be strictly complied with when laying and jointing.

Different pipe and fitting materials shall be jointed with appropriate adaptors as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

Unless otherwise detailed on the Drawings, joints on spigot and socket pipes other
than plastic pipes shall be flexible and sealed with a rubber ring or flexible gasket which
shall be approved by the Engineer's Representative and shall withstand the various
tests specified herein for pipelines. For pipes up to and including sixty-seven and one-
half (67.5) millimeters nominal bore, the joints shall be capable of withstanding a
deflection of not less than one and one-half degrees (1.5 o) in any direction and for pipes
over sixty-seven and six-tenths (67.6) millimeters nominal bore, one half degree (½o)
in any direction. All pipes shall be capable of withstanding a "draw" of thirteen (13)
millimeters over and above the initial jointing allowance. The initial jointing allowance
is the gap between the spigot and the shoulder of the socket measured parallel to the
center line of the pipeline and shall not be less than six (6) millimeters or greater than
thirteen (13) millimeters.

3. Line and Gradient.

In open excavation, sight rails and boning rods properly painted shall be provided
and maintained to ensure correct alignment of pipe runs. Sight rails shall be positioned
either vertically above the lines of pipes or immediately adjacent thereto. At no time
during pipe laying shall there be less than three (3) sight rails in position on each length
of pipeline to one (1) gradient.

A uniform gradient shall be achieved between consecutive air valves and/or

washouts.

4. Thrust Blocks.

At every fitting causing a change in the direction of flow, the Contractor shall
construct a thrust block of Subsection 5.03.9 "Concrete for Minor Structures" in these
General Specifications to the dimensions shown on the Drawings.

48
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Thrust blocks shall be provided for fittings of one hundred (100) millimeters in
diameter and over unless the manufacturer recommends thrust blocks for smaller
diameters giving the corresponding details and dimensions.

The additional excavation required to obtain a firm thrust face against undisturbed
soil shall be made after the pipeline has been jointed. The concrete for the thrust block
shall be placed the same day as the excavation is carried out.

No pressure is to be applied to thrust blocks until the concrete has matured for at
least three (3) days.

5. Floatation.

Where flotation of pipes may occur due to floodwater or otherwise, water shall be
excluded from the interior of the pipe and sufficient backfill shall be placed above the
pipe to prevent its flotation. Open trenches shall be kept clear of water.

Any pipe that has floated shall be removed and its bedding shall be corrected prior
to relaying.

6. Pipes Built into Structures.

The outside surfaces of pipes to be built-in shall be cleaned immediately before

installation. Protective coatings to metal pipes shall be removed as ordered. Plastic
pipes shall be painted with appropriate solvent cement and sprinkled with dry coarse
sand while wet.

Two (2) flexible joints or flexible patented joints shall be provided adjacent to
structures. The first joint shall be placed not more than one (1) pipe diameter from the
face of structure and the second not more than the following distances away from the
first:

- Two (2) pipe diameters or six hundred (600) millimeters minimum for pipe
diameters not exceeding four hundred fifty (450) millimeters.

- One and two-tenths (1.2) meters for pipe diameters over four hundred fifty (450)
and not exceeding one thousand (1000) millimeters.

8.02.3 MECHANICAL PLANT

8.02.3.1 Scope. The Mechanical Plant covers all mechanical equipment relevant to
the pumping station and water tanks, including pumping units, flow meters, extract fans,
control equipment, etc., that are not covered elsewhere in these General Specifications.

The pumping station is intended for the operation of the irrigation system and shall
be able to supply the design flow at the required discharge head.

49
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The specified duty of the pumping units is based on providing the reduced pressure
levels specified for the downstream end of the pressure reducing valves with a safety
margin of ten percent (10%) of the required pressure. The supplied pumping units shall
be able to actually provide these reduced pressure and safety margins. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to check the specified duty of the pumping units against the
actual hydraulic characteristics of the supplied valves, pipes and fittings taking into
consideration the final elevations of all components and to modify this duty, if need be,
prior to ordering the pumping units and after approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall coordinate the operation of all equipment and controls to ensure
the adequate running of the system.

8.02.3.2 Labels, Tags and Charts. Equipment, instruments, controls, electrical

devices, valves, etc., shall be labelled in both the Arabic and English languages as to
duty, service or function. Labels shall be of ivorine with black surface, white incised
lettering, and attached to equipment or to adjacent permanent surfaces in an approved
manner.

Aluminum tags (fifty (50) millimeters diameter, one and one-half (1.5) millimeters
thick) with stamped filled with black print and provided with heavy aluminum or brass
hooks and chains shall be provided in lieu of labels wherever the latter cannot easily
identify the equipment.

Charts indicating the schedules for equipment lubrication, maintenance and essential
operating instructions shall be prepared, mounted on protected wooden plaques or six
(6) millimeter Masonite boards, covered with heat bonded clear plastic laminate or
framed under glass. These charts shall be permanently fixed with four (4) brass screws
at approved locations to the approval of the Engineer.

Prior to preparing labels and tags, a schedule shall be submitted for approval,
showing the equipment to be labelled or tagged with suggested nomenclature.
Similarly a draft of the charts shall be submitted for approval.

8.02.3.3 Workmanship Generally. Work shall be executed in accordance with the

conditions of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers (IME) of Britain and with
equipment fully accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.

Manufacturer's recommendations on handling, loading, unloading, installing, testing

and other works shall be strictly followed.

The Contractor shall submit for approval a statement giving details of the proposed
method of installation prior to commencing installation.

Machinery shall be mounted on steel packings ground flat on both sides. Packing
thickness shall be so selected as to take up variations in concrete foundation level.
Packing shall be bedded by chipping or grinding concrete surfaces. One (1) steel
packing shall be used at each location adjacent to each holding down bolt.

50
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Machinery shall be aligned, levelled and secured by holding down bolts.

8.02.3.4 Equipment and Materials Generally. Should any equipment prove

unsatisfactory or not in compliance with the Specification and the Drawings, such
equipment shall be corrected, repaired or replaced at no extra expense to the
Employer. Subsequent tests shall be carried out until equipment is proved to fulfil
specified requirements to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Each piece of equipment shall have a certified nameplate at a conspicuous location,

permanently attached at the factory, printed or stamped clearly with the name and
address of the manufacturer, equipment model number, serial number, date of
manufacture, electrical characteristics, performance rating or duty, pressure,
temperature, or other limitations and other pertinent data.

Bearings shall be rated and sized to ensure satisfactory and stable running without
vibration under all conditions of operation for a minimum life of one hundred thousand
(100,000) hours running. They shall be lubricated and protected from ingress or
moisture and sand and from the climatic conditions prevalent at the site. Bearings shall
be to ISO standard SI unit dimensions where practicable.

Lubrication of bearings, etc. shall be by either splash or forced systems. Oil cooling
facilities shall be provided as necessary. The machinery supplier shall ensure the
lubricant used for initial filling and specified in the maintenance manual is adequate for
prolonged operation in the specified ambient temperatures without overheating.

The plant shall be designed to minimize routine lubrication. Lubrication intervals of

not less than seven (7) days are considered acceptable. Type of lubricant and intervals
of lubrication for each individual item of plant shall be entered on a working schedule,
forming part of the Operation and Maintenance Literature. A list of recommended
lubricants and their equivalents shall be entered in the Operation and Maintenance
Literature.

Flexible couplings shall be rated to cover full range of duty, and shall be of the
flexible multi pin and bush type having not less than six (6) bushes and each having an
inner sleeve to allow rotation on the pin (bushes shall not be in direct contact with pin).
Pins shall have shoulders for positive location and securing to bosses. Bosses shall
fit tight on the shafts and shall be secured with hand fitted keys.

Couplings shall be supplied in matching balanced sets and shall be machined,

balanced and marked before leaving the manufacturer's works.

Unless otherwise specified, flanges and connections provided on equipment and

associated piping shall be to BS 4504: Table 10.

Fixing bolts used for fixing steel to concrete shall be ordered and supplied with the
equipment and are to be self-drilling anchor bolts. Bolts, nuts and washers which will
be totally or periodically submerged shall be stainless steel unless otherwise specified
or shown on the Drawings.

51
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Electrical work shall comply with the appropriate requirements of the ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS Section of this General Specification.

Pipework, fittings, valves and other products not specifically mentioned shall comply
with the appropriate requirements of the PIPING AND APPURTENANCES Section of
this General Specification.

8.02.3.5 Spares. The Contractor shall provide spares suitable for a period of two (2)
years operation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor
shall hand-over these spares to the Ministry of Communications stores or as directed
upon the final handing-over of the works.

Lists of the spares for each pumping station shall accompany the Tender.

8.02.3.6 Pumping Units.

8.02.3.6.1 General.

1. Materials.

Materials for pumps shall be suitable for pump operating conditions and adequate
for total heads to which pumps are subjected. Corrosion resistant materials shall be
used. Assembly arrangements shall include isolation of dissimilar metals to avoid
galvanic interaction.

Pumps shall have factory plugged connections for casing vents, drains and
suction and discharge pressure gauges. Pumps shall have shaft packing or mechanical
seals compatible with pump design and nature of liquid pumped in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations or as specified.

Impellers and rotating assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced at

the factory.

Packing rings shall be installed in alternate layers to staggered ninety degrees

(90o). Packing shall be tightened to seal while permitting the prescribed amount of
leakage for lubrication.

Operating characteristics, pump point of specified flow and head shall fall near the
point of maximum efficiency as obtained from manufacturer's published data. The
pump shall be able to supply in head not exceeding fifty percent (50%) of the range
between specified and shut-off heads.

Horse power rating of pump drive motor shall ensure non-overloading of motor
throughout capacity range of pump for impeller diameter selected.

52
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Electric motors shall be suitable for the available electric voltage and frequency.
Motor speeds shall not exceed one thousand seven hundred fifty (1750) RPM for the
sixty (60) Hz.

Pumps shall be provided from the factory complete with electric motors mounted
on a common cast iron or steel base and properly aligned.

2. Installation.

Pumps and motor base shall be supported where applicable on an isolated

reinforced concrete foundation as detailed on the Drawings and shall be aligned and
level throughout their length and width.

Piping shall be supported independently of pump connections.

Drains for packing glands and machine bases shall be piped to the nearest floor
drain or sump.

Before operation the Contractor shall ensure that the pump is properly lubricated,
rotating element rotates freely by hand, casing is vented and full of water, direction of
rotation is correct, strainer is clean and suction and discharge valves are open.

3. Shop Drawings.

Shop drawings shall be submitted for each pump for approval prior to shipment
from the factory as follows:

- Certified performance curves showing job number, customer and customer

order number, pump designation number shown on the Drawings, date of
manufacture, model number, pump size, impeller diameter pump can
accommodate, speed, flow-head characteristic curve, consumed horsepower
curve, pump efficiency curve and NPSH curve.

- Pump cross-sectional drawings showing major components with parts numbers

and parts list.

- Pump outline dimensional drawing showing overall dimensions, location of

foundation bolt holes and sizes, location and rating of suction and discharge
nozzles.

- Recommended list of spare parts.

- Installation, operation and maintenance instruction manual.

- Details and wiring diagrams of factory supplied pump controllers, starters,

controls or other electrical devices or accessories.

53
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

- Special instructions for field installation and connection of each factory or field
supplied electrical device, control or accessory.

4. Shop Tests.

Certified results of shop tests made by the manufacturer for each pump shall be
submitted, prior to shipment from the factory, as follows:

- Performance test throughout capacity range of pump with specified design

operating point clearly indicated on the pump flow-head characteristic curve.

- Hydrostatic pressure test to one and one-half (1½)times the shut-off pressure
of the pump.

The pump test report shall include the following information:

- Pump data: pump designation number shown on the Drawings, model number,
serial number, customer order number, flow, suction and discharge pressures,
shut-off pressure, speed, and brake horsepower.

- Motor data: make, type, model number, serial number, horsepower rating,
speed, voltage, phase, frequency, class of insulation, allowable temperature
rise, full load amperes, locked rotor amperes and actual voltage and amperes
at all test points.

- Starter data: make, model number, size, heater size, ampere rating, line
voltage, control voltage and frequency.

8.02.3.6.2 Split Case Horizontal Pumping Unit.

1. Pump.

Pump shall be base mounted, double suction, single stage, centrifugal type,
directly connected to motor through a heavy duty flexible coupling, with heavy gauge
coupling guard.

Pump casing shall be high tensile strength alloy case iron, designated for a
working pressure of sixteen kilograms per square centimeter (16 kg/cm2), fitted with
easily removable bronze wear rings dowelled to casing. Casing shall be divided at the
horizontal centerline and the two (2) halves accurately machined, dowel aligned and
bolted together.

Impeller shall be bronze, enclosed double suction type, fastened to shaft by

stainless steel key and screw locked adjustable shaft sleeves.

Suction and discharge nozzles shall be of in-line piping design, cast integrally with
lower half of pump casing to allow rotating element to be removed without
disconnecting suction and discharge flanges.

54
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Shaft shall be high strength steel, sized to carry axial and radial thrust with
minimum deflection and protected against corrosion by full length bronze shaft sleeves.
Teflon gaskets shall be provided between impeller hub and shaft sleeves.

Pump rotating element shall be supported by two (2) heavy duty grease lubricated
ball bearings for both radial and thrust loads, mounted in machined moisture and
dustproof cast iron housings, bolted to pump casing with register fits to ensure
permanent alignment. Bearing housing supports shall be cast integrally with lower half
of pump casing. Bearings shall be provided with grease seals and water slingers to
protect bearings from contamination, and with easily accessible grease fittings for
positive bearing lubrication.

Mechanical seal shall be non-resist face, carbon washer and stainless steel parts.

Pump and motor shall be mounted on a common base reinforced against

deflection, with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole.

Impeller and pump outer casing shall be factory treated by shot blasting and
priming with epoxy. Casing shall then be given one (1) undercoat and one (1) top coat
of chlorinated rubber of approved color to three (3) mils thickness each coat.

2. Motor.

Motor shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the pumping equipment and shall
be specified for pump concerned and specifically rated for the available supply voltage
and frequency and for operational ambient temperature of fifty degrees Celsius (50 oC.).

Motor shall be to IEC 34 and shall have class F insulation. It shall be tropicalized
and derated for satisfactory operation.

Motor protection shall be not less than IP 54, to IEC 144.

Motor shall be sized to drive the pump without being overloaded throughout the
capacity range of the pump. Maximum continuous rating shall be not less than ten
percent (10%) above the calculated maximum power requirement. Efficiency and
power factor shall be high over a wide range of load conditions.

Motor shall be capable of delivering full rated power within voltage and frequency
fluctuations of plus or minus five percent (± 5%) of their value and for simultaneous
fluctuation of both within the specified range.

Starting and torque characteristics of the motor shall be as required by the driven
pump.

Motor shall be silent in operation, free from vibration. Rotors shall be perfectly
balanced both statically and dynamically. They shall run on ball or roller bearings with
the weight of the rotating unit carried out ball thrust bearings incorporated in the body.

55
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Noise level of pump-motor set in dBA at one (1) meter from the enclosure shall be
submitted prior to approval.

Terminal boxes shall be provided with suitable dimensions to accept incoming

cables with glands for PVC armored cable.

Final motor data shall be obtained from the equipment supplier and shall be
approved before any motor control center is ordered.

Motor nameplates shall be checked for full load current rating and allowable
temperature rise to select the proper overload heater element to be installed in each
starter.

8.02.3.6.3 Submersible Pumping Unit.

1. Pump.

The pump shall be of the submersible, centrifugal type that shall form with its
electric motor, one (1) single compact unit on a combined base and suction strainer.
A threaded discharge elbow shall form an integrally cast part of the pump casing. The
pump shall be provided with clamp for discharge pipe and with a watertight cable entry.

The pump shall be supplied from the factory complete with the necessary low level
cut-out switch, the electric control panel, all necessary lengths of durable multi-
conductor electric cables between the pump, level switch and control panel, special
holder for level switch and lifting chain.

The pump shall have cast iron casing, impeller, and motor starter housing. The
shaft and all bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel, the impeller shall be of bronze. The
pump shall have two (2) double face mechanical seals. An oil casing shall be provided
within the pump to lubricate and cool the seal rings. The pump shall be fitted with
bronze case wear rings and a bronze terminal cover.

The whole unit shall be externally finished in black, non-hardening, corrosion-

resistant, rubber-bitumen paint or in the manufacturer's standard finish, if approved by
the Engineer.

2. Motor.

The motor shall be as specified for the split case horizontal pumping unit except
that it shall be of the submersible type with a degree of protection not less than IP 68
to IEC 144.

56
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.3.6.4 End Suction Centrifugal Pump.

1. Pump.

The end suction centrifugal pump shall be horizontal, base mounted, end suction,
single stage, centrifugal type, directly connected to the motor through a heavy duty
flexible coupling, with heavy gauge coupling guard.

The pump and motor shall be mounted on a common cast iron base adequately
reinforced against deflection, with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole.

The pump casing shall be high tensile strength close grain cast iron with smooth
waterways, register fitted and bolted to the bearing frame for permanent alignment. It
is to be fitted with bronze wear rings and with tapped and plugged bottom drain and top
vent connections.

The impeller shall be cast iron, bronze, stainless steel, enclosed type, fitted to
shaft with a key and locked in place.

The shaft shall be one (1) piece stainless steel, sized to carry axial and radial
thrust with minimum deflection.

The mechanical seal shall be Ni-resist face, carbon washer and stainless steel
metal parts.

The pump rotating element shall be supported by two (2) heavy duty grease
lubricated ball bearings mounted in a heavy iron frame with adequate supports to the
base for maximum rigidity.

2. Motor.

The electric motor shall be totally enclosed, drip-proof, squirrel cage, induction
type, with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings.

8.02.3.6.5 Motor Control Panel.

The motor control panel shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
following:

1. Starters for the main and drainage pumps and for the exhaust fans.

2. Necessary control relays and timers

3. Indicating lamps for pump in operation and "TRIP" lamp for pump out of order

4. Rotary switches and relays

57
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

5. Distribution equipment of the MCCB pattern including a main earth leakage

circuit breaker to give individual circuits for pumps, lighting and LV socket outlets,
ventilation fans, etc.

6. Triple pole hand operated isolating switch mechanically interlocked in front

door

7. Stop/start push buttons mounted on the front door

8. Accessories required for automatic operation of pumps as described

9. Interconnecting and interlock wiring.

The panel shall be complete with all wiring and fitting with fixed terminals suitably
identified for all incoming/outgoing cables.

The panel shall be a purpose made heavy gauge welded sheet steel
manufactured item with protection to IP 51 as a minimum category. The panel shall be
fully vermin proof, with non lift-off front door, concealed hinges, weatherproof and
tropicalized construction, baked-on enamel finish and wall mounted.

The pumping system shall be interlocked with the irrigation controller, pump
control valve and low level switches in the water tanks.

Pump shall be started and stopped by the irrigation program controllers. Level
switches shall override the irrigation program controller to stop pump at preset minimum
water level in the tank(s) through the motor control center.

The controls shall prevent the stand-by pump being started, even manually, when
the duty pump is operating.

Starting sequence of pumps shall be automatically alternated through the action

of the change-over relay in the motor control panel. In the event of a fault in one (1)
pump, the controls shall switch off the defective pump and start stand-by pump and put
on the TRIP lamp to indicate that pump is out of order. Means shall be provided for
permitting manual selection of duty and stand-by pumps.

All starters shall be fitted with circuit breakers rated for the necessary short circuit
protection. The protection shall be independent of the controller and overload
projection.

The control voltage for all starters and for all control circuits shall not be higher
than one hundred twenty (120) volts. Step-down control transformers shall have two
(2) windings and be of the isolating type. HRC fuses shall be used for control circuitry
protection. Auxiliary supply for controls other than from the main power circuit, shall be
effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts on a main isolator.

58
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Contactors for star-delta starters shall comply with IEC 292 and shall be type AC-
3.

Overload relays for starters shall be to IEC 292-1, and inherently compensated for
variations in ambient temperature.

Unless otherwise required by the driven system, magnetic starters shall be as

follows:

- Three (3) phase motors above fifteen (15) horse power (up to and including fifty
(50) horse power) starter shall be star-delta, non-reversing magnetic type, with a
3-pole overload relay, and one (1) adjustable low voltage relay.

- Three (3) phase motors above fifty (50) horse power, starter shall be reduced
voltage, auto-transformer type.

Unless otherwise required by the driven equipment all starters shall be provided
with the following control devices:

- Start-stop push buttons

- One red pilot light
- One green pilot light
- One blue "TRIP" light
- One reset push button.

It shall not be possible to open the enclosure door without putting the isolator in
the open position.

8.02.3.7 Pressure Switches. Each pump other than the sump drainage pumps,
shall be provided with an independent pressure switch that overrides the regular
operation of the pump to shut off the pump when the system pressure has exceeded
the setting of the pressure relief - check valve or pump control valve by the accuracy
range of this valve, and before it reaches the shut-off head of the pump.

This switch shall be as specified by the pump manufacturer.

8.02.3.8 Water Level Controls. Level controls shall be of the fixed electrode type.

The level controls shall override the regular operation of the pump and stop all
pumping when the minimum water level has been reached and shall also give audible
warning of high water level. The control panel mounted button to turn off the audible
warning shall also automatically reset the warning system to operate next time the
water level rises above full level.

Drainage pump shall be controlled by float switches.

59
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.3.9 Electromagnet Flowmeters. Plant-mounting enclosures for signal

converters shall be to IEC 144, standard IP 65 or better. Rack mounting
enclosures shall be to IEC 144, standard IP 20 or better.

8.02.3.10 Pressure Gauges. Pressure gauges shall be to BS 1780, constructed

in stainless steel, bronze or other corrosion resistant material. No plastic materials
shall be used in construction.

Fixed pressure gauges shall be fitted with isolating valve. Gauges and transmitters
shall have over range protection.

Where compensation of more than two percent (2%) of the instrument span is
required for the difference in level between the instruments and the tapping point, the
reading shall be adjusted and the amount of compensation marked on the dial.

The sensitivity of the gauge shall be at least five-hundredths (0.05) bar. Every
pressure gauge whether forming part of the permanent works or supplied for used by
the Engineer's Representatives to test any item of the permanent works shall be
accompanied by a calibration and testing certificate from the manufacturer or from an
independent testing laboratory.

At each pressure gauge tapping point in pumping stations, a second tapping point
shall be provided to allow pressure measurement by an independent hand held
pressure gauge (for further re-calibration of the fixed gauge). One (1) hand held
pressure gauge shall be supplied unused in its original wrapping for each pumping
station.

8.02.3.11 Strainers. Size fifty (50) millimeter (two (2) inch) and smaller shall be
screwed Y-type, bronze body, one hundred fifty pounds per square inch (150 psi) steam
working pressure rating, with 20-mesh stainless steel screen and screwed cap with
one-half (½) inch tapped hole with blowdown valve installed.

Size sixty-five (65) millimeter (two and one-half (2½) inch) and larger shall be
flanged, basket type, cast iron body, one hundred twenty-three pounds per square inch
(123 psi) steam working pressure rating, with 20-mesh stainless steel basket screen,
bolted cap and three-fourths (3/4) inch tapped hole at the bottom with blowdown valve
installed.

8.02.3.12 Electrical Indicators and Integrators. Electrical indicators and

integrators shall be for use with analogue signal transmission systems and comply with
BS 89 with accuracy class index one (1.0). Indicator movements shall be critically
dampened (dead-beat).

Indicators shall have circular scales or shall be of the vertical edgewise type and
shall be designed to avoid parallax error. Scale shall be clearly marked in SI units and
shall comply with BS 3693. All instruments mounted on one (1) panel on board or in
adjacent groupings, shall have similar styles of figures and letters. Dials shall be white
with black scales and lettering, not subject to fading.

60
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The materials for scales shall be such that no peeling or discoloration will take place
with age under environmental conditions.

Major scale marks and numerals shall be of the same size and thickness and shall
be separated by more than twenty-five (25) minor marks. Pointers shall interpret to the
width of the minor scale marks.

Integrators shall be of the multi-digit cyclometer type. Each integrator shall have an
integral or separate current-to-pulse converter with sufficient adjustment of the pulse
rate to avoid the use of any multiplying factor except in integer power of ten (10). Each
integrator shall incorporate an adjustable limiter whereby any input below a preset value
is inoperative. Integrators shall have the number of digits shown on the appropriate
instrument data sheet. A decimal point shall be provided to the right of the units digit.

8.02.3.13 Fertilizer Injector Equipment. Fertilizer injection equipment shall be of

the Venturi type bypassed on the main pipeline and consist of a fertilizer tank with a
minimum capacity of one hundred kilograms (100 kg.) of dry chemical fertilizer, having
a hinged pressure-tight cover. The connections from the tank to the pipeline shall be
sized so as to allow twenty-five kilograms (25 kg.) of fertilizer to be dissolved and
dispersed in forty-five (45) minutes with normal pump operation.

All parts in contact with the fertilizer shall be in corrosion resistant material.

8.02.3.14 Axial In-Line Exhaust Fans. Axial in-line exhaust fans shall be direct
driven single stage cylindrical fans with bell-shaped inlets capable of changing air at the
rate shown on the Drawings. Housings shall be spun from heavy gauge aluminum or
hot-dip galvanized steel and be provided with heavy aluminum supporting brackets for
wall mounting. The impellers shall be aerofoil made of die-cast aluminum alloy. The
shaft shall be of hot rolled steel, ground polished and keyed to the wheel.

8.02.3.15 Roof Cowls. Roof cowls shall be of the spun dome type designed for roof
curb mounting. Relief vents shall be fully weatherproofed and of all aluminum
construction. All materials used in construction shall be solid non-ferrous.

The cowl cover shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum and shall comprise
a square spun hinged type dome. It shall be connected to the square curb with a
smooth spun venturi. The cowl cover shall be provided with wire mesh bird screen.

The damper shall be the multi-blade type.

8.02.3.16 Flexible Connectors. Flexible connectors shall be expansion joints of

the stainless steel packless bellows type suitable for sixteen (16) bar water pressure.
Sizes shall be the same as the pipes on which they are to be installed, with screwed
ends for sizes fifty (50) millimeters (two (2) inch) or smaller, and flanged ends for sizes
sixty-five (65) millimeters (two and one-half (2½) inch) and larger.

61
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.3.17 Filters. Filters shall be installed where required and as indicated on the
Drawings.

The purpose of the filters shall be the removal of suspended solids from the pumped
water at a flow rate equal to the capacity of the pumping station.

The capacity of each filter unit as well as the mesh size of the screen are indicated
on the Drawings and in the Bill of Quantities.

The filter unit shall be of the screen type and composed of the filter housing, the
screen or filter cartridge, the flush valves, the isolation valves and the pressure gauges.
The filter housing shall be of the type suitable for horizontal installation manufactured
from stainless steel.

The inlet and outlet connections shall be of a size and type suitable for connecting
to the pump(s) discharge header on which the filter unit is to be installed. Inlet and
outlet shall be provided with gate valves for isolating the filter unit from the system.

The screen or filter shall consist of a stainless steel screen for a perforation size
suitable for the proper performance of the used emitters and manufacturer's
recommendations. The support of the screen or filter shall consist of a stainless steel
cartridge that allows an easy field replacement of the screen or filter.

The flush port shall be controlled by a solenoid operated isolation valve linked to the
irrigation program controller and set to open for at least one (1) minute (or the smallest
time increment of the controller) at the beginning of every irrigation cycle, to thoroughly
flush the retained particles. Flushing of the filter unit shall also be automatically
operated when the pressure differential across the filter has reached or exceeded three-
tenths kilograms per square centimeter (0.3 kg/cm 2). This pressure differential shall be
sensed by a set of pressure gauges suitably located and adequately linked to the
solenoid operated valve of the flush port.

The discharge from the flush port shall be conveyed in a uPVC pipe, of adequate
size, to the sump of the pumping station.

8.02.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

8.02.4.1 Scope. This work shall consist of the complete electrical installation to be
supplied and installed for all components of the Works as detailed in the following
sections and shown on the Drawings.

Work shall include the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and putting into
satisfactory operation of the following:

- Pumping station electrical installation complete including electricity supply, cables

and level controls.

62
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

- Irrigation control equipment including all cables to pumping stations, irrigation

program controllers and remote control valves.

The work shall include the provision of shop drawings and the calculations required
by the specification, as well as the provision of all literature and samples in connection
with the approval of proposed equipment.

The equipment supplied shall include all necessary items for a complete installation
which will give satisfactory operation, notwithstanding errors and omissions. The
equipment listed in the document are therefore, indicative and not limitative.

8.02.4.2 Technical Requirements.

8.02.4.2.1 General.

All work carried out on the installation shall be carried out in a neat, workmanlike
and efficient manner, so as to be accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
The work shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Specification, so that its
true meaning and intent are fulfilled. This Specification and the Drawings are
complementary documents, intended for the selection of equipment having general and
specific characteristics as detailed in the documents.

8.02.4.2.2 Regulations and Standards.

All electrical work shall comply with the applicable government rules and
regulations in the requirements of the Electric Supply Authority and carried out in
accordance with the recommendations of the International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) with reference to the following:

- Relevant standards and specifications issued by the appropriate authorities in the

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.

- IEE Wiring regulations (UK) as published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers,

London.

- National Electrical Code (USA) as published by the National Fire Protection

Association.

- BSI as published by the British Standards Institution.

Acceptance tests shall conform with the above mentioned "Regulation" and
"Standard.”
8.02.4.3 Pumping Station Installation. The supply for each pumping station shall
be taken from the nearest substation/feeder pillar.

The pumping system shall be interlocked with the irrigation controller, pump control
valve and low level switches in water tanks.

63
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Wiring to motors and level switches shall be PVC/SWA/PVC multi-core cables

clipped to the concrete with copper clips. Cables shall terminate adjacent to the
equipment with galvanized adaptable boxes and final connections to equipment
enclosed in flexible conduit. All equipment shall be bonded to earth with a separate
earthing conductor. The flexible conduit shall not be used as the earthing conductor.

The lighting shall consist of waterproof bulkhead fluorescent type luminaries

controlled by a waterproof switch positioned adjacent to the access ladder. Wiring shall
be PVC/SWA/PVC multi-core cable. Wiring shall terminate in adaptable boxes with
fixed porcelain connectors and directly to the luminaries, with heat resistant cable
connecting the luminaries. Ventilation fans shall be operated by a micro switch fitted
to the pump room access hatch, such that on opening, the fans automatically switch on.
In addition, a timer incorporated in the panel shall operate the fans for fifteen (15)
minutes in every two (2) hours. The timer shall be capable of being adjusted to vary
running and operating time.

8.02.4.4 Irrigation Control. The twenty-four (24) volt electrically operated irrigation
remote control valves shall be controlled by the irrigation program controllers positioned
as shown on the Drawings. A separate electricity supply shall be taken from the
nearest sub-station/feeder pillar to operate each controller.

The controllers shall be interlocked with the pumping system to ensure that the
pumps operate when any of the irrigation valves is open.

The irrigation control electric cables, connecting the irrigation program controllers to
the remote control valves shall be single core copper wires PVC insulated and PVC
sheathed. The sizes of cables shall be commensurate with the distances between the
controllers and valves, operating pressure and the manufacturer's recommendations.
The cables shall be U/L approved for ground feeders directly buried and rated for six
hundred (600) volts. They shall be clipped to the water pipework where practicable.
Multi-runs of cables shall be tied together at one (1) meter intervals using PVC tape
and clipped to the underside of the water pipework at two (2) meter intervals using
plastic straps.

To allow full flexibility of the system, each valve shall have a separate control cable
such that any valve sequence control may be re-adjusted.

Where required, cable junction boxes shall be fitted. These shall be purpose made
boxes fitted with fixed connectors and suitable labelled. The boxes shall be fitted with
glands and gasketted lid to ensure fully waterproof and dust tight conditions.

Each remote control valve shall be fitted with a fixed connector inside a waterproof
box and suitable for cable tails from the valve to be connected.

All cable cores shall be fitted with marker ferrules at each end for each of
identification, and all valves shall be fitted with identification labels.

64
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

8.02.5 METALWORK, PAINT AND PAINTING AND WATER RETAINING

STRUCTURES

8.02.5.1 Metalwork.

8.02.5.1.1 General.

Metalwork covers all purpose-made items shown on the Drawings. These items
shall be fabricated to the design shown on the Drawings and according to the material
and Workmanship specified in Section 5.05 "Steel Structures and Miscellaneous
Metalwork" in these General Specifications.

8.02.5.1.2 Ladders and Safety Cages.

Ladders and safety cages shall be fabricated galvanized mild steel to BS 4211 or
aluminum alloy as approved.

8.02.5.1.3 Pipe Supports.

Piping shall be supported independently of equipment at close enough intervals

to avoid air pockets and dirt traps.

Supports shall be located in such a way as to carry weight of pipe, valves, fittings,
insulation, appurtenances and contents without sagging.

In addition to the maximum spans specified, location of supports and hangers

shall take into account concentrated loads, elimination of overhung sections or bends,
load reaction on terminal connections, pipe expansion and contraction, vibrations,
hydrostatic thrust, hydrostatic testing, water hammer and seismic forces.

Spacing of supports shall be reduced to less than three-quarters (3/4) of maximum

spans specified where changes in direction or branch connections occur.

Supports shall be located immediately adjacent to changes in direction of piping,

branch connections, and concentrated loads, irrespective of maximum spans specified.
Supports shall be fixed to structures with masonry expansion bolts without causing
overstress to the structure.

Risers shall be supported independently of adjacent horizontal hangers.

Intermediate steel shall be provided where required to transfer loads to areas of

the structure where they can be safely accommodated.

Masonry expansion bolts shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

65
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Where inverts of pipelines are approximately at time level multiple piping runs can
be supported in groups on trapeze hangers. Pipes shall be kept in position with U-
bolts. Lines subject to extreme thermal expansion shall be free to slide or roll.

For trapeze hangers, the maximum spacing shall be that for the smallest pipe
supported. Spring cushions shall be used where a horizontal pipe is subject to
considerable vertical movement or vibration.

Embedded inserts shall be installed during concreting.

U-bolts shall be welded to pipes at points of contact and bolted to structural angle
frame securely fixed to structure.

Temporary hangers and supports are not allowed. Wire, metal bands, rope, wood,
chain, strap, or perforated bar shall not be used.

8.02.5.2 Paint and Painting. Paint and painting shall comply with Section 5.13
"Painting of Structures" in these General Specifications unless otherwise specified in
the Special Specifications.

The color of the final paint shall be approved by the Engineer's Representative.

8.02.5.3 Excavation. Excavation shall conform with Section 2.09, "Structural

Excavation and Backfill" in these General Specifications.

8.02.5.4 Concrete. Concrete shall conform with Section 5.01, "Portland Cement
Concrete" and Section 5.03, "Concrete Structures" in these General Specifications.

8.02.5.5 Reinforcement. Reinforcement shall conform with Section 5.02,

"Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

8.02.5.6 Bituminous Primer to Buried Surfaces. Shall conform with Section 5.12,
"Waterproofing for Structures" in these General Specifications.

8.02.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

Irrigation pipework shall be measured by linear meter for the various types and sizes
of pipe specified, installed, tested, completed and accepted. Lengths of pipe shall be
measured along with their centerlines and shall include lengths occupied by valves and
accessories.

Valves and Irrigation Equipment. Valves and irrigation equipment shall be measured
by the number for the various types and sizes of valves and items of irrigation
equipment as specified, installed, completed, tested and accepted.

Electricity supply as specified shall be measured by linear meter for the various types
and sizes of cables specified or as a lump sum as specified in the Bill of Quantities.

66
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Mechanical plant for the irrigation pumping station and storage tanks including the
supply, installation, test and commission shall be measured by the sets.

Electrical installations for the irrigation pumping station and storage tanks including
the supply, installation, test and commission shall be measured by the set.

Civil works for the irrigation pumping station and storage tanks including the supply,
installation, test and commission shall be measured for the various items as specified
in the Bill of Quantities.

Suction and header pipes of the irrigation pumping station and storage tanks
including the supply, installation, test and commission shall be measured by the set.

Chain link fence around each pumping station and its appurtenant storage tank(s)
including the supply, erection, excavation, concrete work, one (1) double gate and one
(1) single gate and all other materials, equipment, labor maintenance, as shown on the
Drawings, shall be measured by linear meter.

Other irrigation items not appearing in the Bill of Quantities shall not be measured
but shall be considered subsidiary to other items in the Bill of Quantities.

8.02.7 PAYMENT. The quantities, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at
the contract unit prices for the several pay items as specified in the Bill of Quantities,
which prices shall be full compensation for furnishing, installing, handling and testing
all materials, for all labor and maintenance, equipment and all other items described in
the specifications necessary for the proper completion, acceptance and maintenance
of the work.

The supply of water required will not be paid for directly but shall be considered
subsidiary work pertaining to the several items contained in the landscape works.

The Contractor shall supply water for his own Contract and for any additional
adjacent Contracts which are served by his pumping station.

For guarantee of perfect maintenance of works according to Specification, an

amount equivalent to twenty-four percent (24%) of the total amount of irrigation items
shall be reserved to be paid during the maintenance period (twenty-four (24) months)
at equal annual payments of twelve percent (12%) according to performance of
maintenance of works as required at the end of each twelve (12) month period.

The above price and payment shall cover and be full compensation for furnishing
labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to completing all work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

67
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

80201 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 25 mm dia Linear Meter

80202 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 40 mm dia Linear Meter

80203 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 50 mm dia Linear Meter

80204 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 80 mm dia Linear Meter

80205 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 100 mm dia Linear Meter

80206 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 150 mm dia Linear Meter

80207 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 200 mm dia Linear Meter

80208 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 250 mm dia Linear Meter

80209 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, ___ mm dia Linear Meter

80215 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 50 mm dia Linear Meter

80216 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 80 mm dia Linear Meter

80217 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 100 mm dia Linear Meter

80218 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 150 mm dia Linear Meter

80219 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 200 mm dia Linear Meter

80220 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 250 mm dia Linear Meter

80221 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 300 mm dia Linear Meter

80222 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, ___ mm dia Linear Meter

80225 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 50 mm dia Linear Meter

80226 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 80 mm dia Linear Meter

80227 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 100 mm dia Linear Meter

80228 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 150 mm dia Linear Meter

80229 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 200 mm dia Linear Meter

80230 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 250 mm dia Linear Meter

80231 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 300 mm dia Linear Meter

80232 Steel Irrigation Pipe, ___ mm dia Linear Meter

80240 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 50 mm dia Linear Meter

80241 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 80 mm dia Linear Meter

68
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

80242 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 100 mm dia Linear Meter

80243 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 150 mm dia Linear Meter

80244 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 200 mm dia Linear Meter

80245 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 250 mm dia Linear Meter

80246 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 300 mm dia Linear Meter

80247 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, ___ mm dia Linear Meter

80301 Valve, Butterfly, 300 mm Unit

80302 Valve, Butterfly, 250 mm Unit

80303 Valve, Butterfly, 200 mm Unit

80304 Valve, Butterfly, 150 mm Unit

80305 Valve, Butterfly, 100 mm Unit

80306 Valve, Butterfly, 80 mm Unit

80307 Valve, Butterfly, 50 mm Unit

80308 Valve, Butterfly, 40 mm Unit

80309 Valve, Butterfly, 25 mm Unit

80310 Valve, Air-Type I, 300 mm Unit

80311 Valve, Air-Type I, 250 mm Unit

80312 Valve, Air-Type I, 200 mm Unit

80313 Valve, Air-Type I, 150 mm Unit

80314 Valve, Air-Type I, 100 mm Unit

80315 Valve, Air-Type I, 80 mm Unit

80316 Valve, Air-Type I, 50 mm Unit

80317 Valve, Air-Type I, 40 mm Unit

80318 Valve, Air-Type I, 25 mm Unit

80319 Valve, Air-Type II, 300 mm Unit

80320 Valve, Air-Type II, 250 mm Unit

80321 Valve, Air-Type II, 200 mm Unit

80322 Valve, Air-Type II, 150 mm Unit

80323 Valve, Air-Type II, 100 mm Unit

80324 Valve, Air-Type II, 80 mm Unit

69
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

80325 Valve, Air-Type II, 50 mm Unit

80326 Valve, Air-Type II, 40 mm Unit

80327 Valve, Air-Type II, 25 mm Unit

80328 Valve, Globe, 300 mm Unit

80329 Valve, Globe, 250 mm Unit

80330 Valve, Globe, 200 mm Unit

80331 Valve, Globe, 150 mm Unit

80332 Valve, Globe, 100mm Unit

80333 Valve, Globe, 80 mm Unit

80334 Valve, Globe, 50 mm Unit

80335 Valve, Globe, 25 mm Unit

80336 Valve, Silent Check, 300 mm Unit

80337 Valve, Silent Check, 250 mm Unit

80338 Valve, Silent Check, 200 mm Unit

80339 Valve, Silent Check, 150 mm Unit

80340 Valve, Silent Check, 100 mm Unit

80341 Valve, Silent Check, 80 mm Unit

80342 Valve, Silent Check, 50 mm Unit

80343 Valve, Silent Check, 40 mm Unit

80344 Valve, Silent Check, 25 mm Unit

80345 Valve, Remote Control, 300 mm Unit

80346 Valve, Remote Control, 250 mm Unit

80347 Valve, Remote Control, 200 mm Unit

80348 Valve, Remote Control, 150 mm Unit

80349 Valve, Remote Control, 100 mm Unit

80350 Valve, Remote Control, 80 mm Unit

80351 Valve, Remote Control, 50 mm Unit

80352 Valve, Remote Control, 40 mm Unit

80353 Valve, Remote Control, 25 mm Unit

80354 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 300 mm Unit

70
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

80355 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 250 mm Unit

80356 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 200 mm Unit

80357 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 150 mm Unit

80358 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 100 mm Unit

80359 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 80 mm Unit

80360 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 50 mm Unit

80361 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 40 mm Unit

80362 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 25 mm Unit

80363 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 300 mm Unit

80364 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 250 mm Unit

80365 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 200 mm Unit

80366 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 150 mm Unit

80367 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 100 mm Unit

80368 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 80 mm Unit

80369 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 50 mm Unit

80370 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 40 mm Unit

80371 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 25 mm Unit

80372 Valve, Penstock, 300 mm Unit

80373 Valve, Penstock, 250 mm Unit

80374 Valve, Penstock, 200 mm Unit

80375 Valve, Penstock, 150 mm Unit

80376 Valve, Penstock, 100 mm Unit

80377 Valve, Penstock, 80 mm Unit

80378 Valve, Penstock, 50 mm Unit

80379 Valve, Penstock, 40 mm Unit

80380 Valve, Penstock, 25 mm Unit

80381 Valve, Gate, 300 mm Unit

80382 Valve, Gate, 250 mm Unit

80383 Valve, Gate, 200 mm Unit

80384 Valve, Gate, 150 mm Unit

71
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

80385 Valve, Gate, 100 mm Unit

80386 Valve, Gate, 80 mm Unit

80387 Valve, Gate, 60 mm Unit

80388 Valve, Gate, 40 mm Unit

80389 Valve, Gate, 25 mm Unit

80390 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 300 mm Unit

80391 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 250 mm Unit

80392 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 200 mm Unit

80393 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 150 mm Unit

80394 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 100 mm Unit

80395 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 80 mm Unit

80396 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 60 mm Unit

80397 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 40 mm Unit

80398 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 25 mm Unit

80401 Electricity Supply, Pumping Station Linear Meter

80402 Electricity Supply, Irrigation Equipment Linear Meter

80403 Electricity Supply, Pumping Station Lump Sum

80404 Electricity Supply, Irrigation Equipment Lump Sum

80501 Mechanical Plant for Irrigation, Pumping Station Lump Sum

80502 Electrical Installations for Pumping Station Unit

80503 Civil Works for Pumping Station Lump Sum

80504 Suction and Header Pipes for Pumping Station Lump Sum

80601 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, 1 m Height Linear Meter

80602 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, 1.5 m Height Linear Meter

80603 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, 2 m Height Linear Meter

80604 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, 2.5 m Height Linear Meter

80605 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, 3.0 m Height Linear Meter

80606 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, ___ m Height Linear Meter

72
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PART 8 - LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

APPENDIX 1

COMMON NAMES AND SPECIES OF THE MOST POPULAR PLANTS WIDELY

PLANTED IN THE KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

Common names and species of the most popular plants widely planted in the Kingdom
of Saudi Arabia.

TREES

Acacia Arabica
Albizzia lebbek
Casuarina
Delonix regia
Eucalyptus camaldulensis
Prosopis juliflora
Schinus molle
Schinus terebinthifolius
Ficus nitida
Ficus altissima
Pithecellobium dulce
Ziziphus mauritiana

SHRUBS

Acacia farnesiana
Bougainvillea spectabilis
Bougainvillea glabra
Caesalpinia pulcherrima
Dodonia viscosa
Callistemon viminalis
Atriplex halimus
Tecoma stans
Thevitia nereifolia

73
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

GROUND COVER

Carissa grandiflora
Clerodendron inerme
Ipomoea pes-capre
Ipomoea carica

SUCCULENTS

Aloe vera
Agava americana
Opuntia
Yucca alofolia

PALMS

Phoenix dactylifera

74
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PART 8 - LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

APPENDIX 2

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTENANCE OF IRRIGATION AND

LANDSCAPING

Part One: Maintaining and Watering Trees, Earth Covering, and Irrigation Network

Plant Maintenance Section

1. Replacement of Plants

The replacement operation means changing the dead, weak, bent, or slow growing
plants with similar types of plants or any other type agreed on by the Ministry.

The most important reasons which require plants to be replaced are the following:

(1) Death of Plant

The Contractor has to preserve all plants and find the suitable method to guarantee
their safety whether the cause is weather conditions, vandalism, as a result for a third
party work in the site, or because of animals.

(2) Weakness of Some Plants, Slenderness, and their Inability for Continuous
Growth:

A disease might affect plants and cause their slenderness and slow down their
growth, or that the type of plant may not be suitable to the soil. Other reasons may also
lead to growth weakness. Therefore, it becomes better to replace certain plants with
another of the same type or any other type agreed on by the Ministry.

(3) There is a defect in the plant as a twist in the stock, irregular growth, or any
other reason lead to be removed.

2. Specifications of Replaced Plants

The Contractor is required to change dead or slow growing plants with new ones
of the same type or any other type agreed on by the Ministry including the following
specifications:

(1) Trees

1) After plantation, the main stock length has to be not less than one (1) meter
above earth level.

2) The main stock has to be straight and without twist and its diameter is not
less than three (3) centimeters.

75
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

3) It should be free of diseases and insects.

(2) Shrubs

1) After plantation, the shrubs length should be not less than seventy-five (75)
centimeters above earth level.

2) It has many branches.

3) The green growth has to be satisfying.

4) It has to be free from diseases and insects.

(3) Earth Cover

1) The level of greenery growth has to be satisfying.

2) It should be free from diseases and insects.

3) It has to be from the existing type or any other type agreed on by the
Ministry.

(4) Transplant Flowers

1) To grow the planted types in the site of the project transplant.

2) During plantation, it has to be almost flowering.

3) It has to be ready for plantation any time within the project duration.

(5) Palms

Period inspection of palms occurs every three (3) months to replace the dead
palms; and time has to be suitable for palm plantation. The dead palms have to be
removed one (1) week before plantation to enable soil airing and to remove the dead
roots and molds, if any. The planting should be performed by adding new sand around
the root area.

The planted palms shall be with the following specifications:

1) To choose Arabic palms.

2) The female palms should be not less than ninety percent (90%).

3) The stock should be free of defects and within the same length of the dead
palm, and not less than one (1) meter by any means. The diameter of the stock should
be not less than sixty (60) centimeters and without twists or bends.

76
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4) The palm ball diameter size is not less than one (1) meter and the roots
shall be vital; and its parts shall be cleaned before plantation.

5) The outsider leaves shall be green and within two (2) to three (3) meters of
length, and its number is not less than twelve (12). The inside leaves shall be green
and free of any mold.

6) Palms shall be free of diseases and insects.

7) To import the palms in the site after cleaning, and to perform the planting
operation. The palm shall be wrapped with sackcloth including stock and leaves to
protect the core from dryness and from the effect of heat and cold.

3. Obligations for the Replacement Operation

(1) The Contractor is required to prepare for the replacement operation as

excavation, filling, additional improvements, bitumen, and fertilizers.

(2) The Contractor is prohibited, by any means, to remove any plants from its spot
before informing the supervising engineer and obtaining his written approval. If the
Contractor removes a tree from its place without notifying the Ministry, he will pay the
estimated costs of the removed plan.

(3) During the replacement operation if it was found that some plants were not
planted in their sport because of the Contractor carelessness, the Contractor will
replace the plants in the right place, and the size shall equal the other plants.

(4) If the Contractor plants are different from the mentioned specifications, he will
be obligated to replace them with others in accordance to the mentioned specifications
on his own expense.

4. Tumbling

Tumbling operation is turning over the soil around the roots and airing it and
removing accumulations and leftovers. This operation is performed as follows:

(1) It occurs every sixty (60) days and the supervising engineer identifies the
tumbling and becomes included in the work schedule.

(2) The turning over is performed in the upper level in order not to hurt the roots.

(3) Remove the leftover and accumulated material before tumbling.

(4) The soil should be left without watering for two (2) days after the soil turning
over for the purpose of airing it.

(5) The Contractor has to fight back worms.

77
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

(6) To remove decayed plants during the tumbling operation or by using an

appropriate herbicide in accordance with the supervising engineer's instructions.

5. Fertilizing Operation

(1) Organic Fertilizers are fertilizers that originate from organic material. They are
important because they include the food elements needed for the plant and improve the
soil. The organic fertilizer is added once a year in early winter.

The rates for adding organic fertilizers:

1) Palms: Five (5) kilograms for each palm tree.

2) Trees: Two (2) kilograms for each tree.

3) Shrubs, flowers, and grass: Two (2) kilograms for each square meter.

The specifications of organic fertilizers:

1) It should be free of harmful material in plants or soil.

2) It should be free of decayed grass seeds.

3) Humidity shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%).

4) pH should be within six (6) to seven (7).

5) Each gram should include not less than 5000 million of bacteria.

(2) Chemical Fertilizers are divided into the following types:

1) Chemical fertilizer compounds:

It includes the main food elements as Nitrogen, Phosphore, Potassium, etc.

2) Monism fertilizers:

It includes one (1) element as uric, and is added to compensate for low iron.
This fertilizer is added when one (1) element appears to be low in big quantities. It
spreads out and compensates the low rate of food elements quickly.

(3) Times for Adding Chemical Fertilizers

1) The monism fertilizers shall be added when a specific soil element appears
to be low.

2) Chemical fertilizer compounds shall be added periodically once every

month and in accordance to the fertilizing schedule.

78
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

3) The azoic fertilizer shall be added if needed to encourage the greenery

growth.

4) The fertilizer shall be added to grass after mowing.

(4) Rates of Chemical Fertilizer

1) Palms: Two hundred (200) grams for each palm.

2) Trees: One hundred fifty (150) grams for each tree.

3) Grass, flowers, and shrubs: Fifteen (15) grams for each square meter.

(5) The Method for Adding Fertilizers

1) The fertilizer shall be spread under the stock in the area surrounding the
roots.

2) Organic fertilizer is added to flowers before it is planting. The chemical

fertilizer is added periodically and is turned over until flowering time.

6. Applying the Trimming and Forming Operations

(1) Trimming Trees and Shrubs is based on the plant type and its purpose. It is
prohibited to trim trees without obtaining the supervising engineer approval about the
trimming method including the following:

1) The Contractor has to trim one (1) tree as a sample and in accordance to
what is specified by the supervising engineer.

2) The trimmed sample shall be inspected, and needed modification shall be

done, if any.

3) The sample shall be photographed after performing the trimming operation

for the tree. The supervising engineer and the project manager shall sign on the
photograph.

4) The Contractor shall obtain the written agreement to complete trimming

operation to the rest of the trees in accordance with the sample.

5) Time for trimming trees:

1. Trees will falling leaves shall be trimmed after the falling by cutting the
diseased and dead branches only.

79
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Formation, smoothing, and removal of unusual growth shall be

performed any time in the year except for the periods when temperature reaches its
climax of either high or low degrees.

3. Old trees which appear to be slow in growth shall be identified and

inspected by the supervising engineer to obtain his approval for severe trimming for
growth renewal.

4. Shadow trees shall be trimmed very little and the branches shall be cut
when necessary.

5. As for trees hindering traffic movement, it should be trimmed by

removing the branches causing this problem, and after obtaining the written agreement
from the supervising engineer.

(2) Cutting and Forming Gates and Fences

Plants planted for this purpose will need continuous cutting to identify their form
because such cutting will renew its growth and preserve fence appearance. Plant
cutting is performed in accordance with the following:

1) It is prohibited to perform the cutting operation at a low temperature,

greenery slow growth during winter season, or when temperature degrees reaches its
highest rates.

2) Flowering fences shall be cut before blooming with an adequate period to

allow flowering buds to bloom. It should be cut after flowering in order not to form
seeds.

3) When perform cutting, the fence foot shall be thicker in comparison with the
top to enable reinforcing the fence.

4) Fences and gates shall be formed differently, straight and others; and
designs of different forms of cutting shall be prepared. These designs are shown to the
supervising engineer to choose the appropriate locations for such forms.

5) If there is a reason that affects the fences and weaken them that becomes
naked from the bottom part, in this case, the fence shall be cut unto half meter in early
spring, or in early autumn after the bad conditions cease. It is fertilized with organism
fertilizers to encourage bottom growth and forming new branches.

(3) Trimming Individual Shrubs

1) Individual shrubs shall be trimmed yearly and when needed for the
following reasons:

1. Reduce shrubs size and organize its form to suit the purpose of its
plantation.

80
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. To get rid of unwanted growth.

3. To remove diseased, dry, and dead branches.

4. To assist in making the sun light reaches all parts of the shrubs in order
to encourage flower blooming.

2) Trimming Time

1. Winter trimming shall be performed on shrubs which has flowers and

bloom at summer season.

2. Shrubs that have flowers on old branches and bloom in winter should
be trimmed late spring and early summer.

3. Small shrubs should not be trimmed, and it is enough to cut the dead
branches.

4. Cone shrubs should never be trimmed and are left for normal growth.

7. Trees Hold and Support

(1) Purpose of Holding and Supporting Operation

1) To assist in focusing trees vertical growth in full straightness and without

any twisting or bending in the main stock.

2) To assist the main stock, by different means, to carry the greenery weight
if the stock is unable of carrying it.

(2) Methods of Hold and Support

Hold and supporting are two (2) escorted operations performed on all trees. The
method is different in regard to the trees age, size, and purpose.

1) Trees Newly Planted

These trees would not be exceeding one (1) year of age. At this phase, there
is a need to encourage the main stock growth in thickness, straightness in regard to the
following:

1. Leave the lower branches without trimming and let them grown normally
unless it is extremely necessary. In case of disease, the branch shall be removed after
obtaining a written approval from the supervising engineer.

81
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. To support the plants by setting wood support in an appropriate way for

trees, and in regard to the tree's case, holder, type, numbers, and method of holding.
What follows is an explanation of this operation:

(1) Holders shall be made of a good type white Swedish wood that is
strong and dry; its measure is five by five (5 x 5) centimeters.

(2) Holders faces shall be soft to avoid harming the plant's stock when
it moves as a result of wind blowing.

(3) The wood, which the holder is made of, should not have branching
pose to avoid easy breaking.

(4) The supporting holder shall be pointed from the lower part in order
to get through the soil easily, and it shall be painted with the bitumen to protect the
wood from water.

(5) The upper part of the supporting holder shall be painted with a
green color.

(6) The supporting holders shall be of an appropriate length of the

tree's stock. These holders shall be replaced with others, when needed.

2) Tree Binding

1. The binding shall be simple, and the material shall be strong to avoid
continuous cutting or stock bending.

2. When binding, the stock shall be paralyzing the supporting holder, and
an appropriate space shall be in-between. The stock shall not be bound strongly to the
support holder to avoid hindering the stock growth.

3. Means of Binding

The binding shall be performed by the following method:

(1) A thin string of two (2) mm. and it is performed on newly planted
trees. This string is soft that would not hinder its growth or harm its stock. This string
is cut easily, and needs continuous rebinding.

(2) Polyethylene binders: This binder is performed for such purpose.

The binding opening shall be widened or control the binding circle around the stock.

(3) String bindings of three to five (3-5) mm. wrapped with a plastic
material to protect the stock. This string surrounds the stock in many ways in
accordance to the binding and supporting method. The supervising engineer shall
choose the best used materials in binding and in accordance to what he believes is
appropriate.

82
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

3) Method of Supporting

The method of supporting shall be identified by the stock length, number

of branches and the method approved by the supervising engineer.

4) Trees Newly Planted

1. A tree is supported by one holder placed during plantation and is

attached to the main stock. Three holes have to be made in the holder at top, middle,
and bottom with an equal distance. The stock shall be bound to the supporting holder
from these three locations.

2. To support with two wood holders limiting the tree in-between with an
adequate distance. In this case, three holes are made in each supporting holder and
with an appropriate distance. Binding shall be made with a wire covered by a plastic
cover and leaving an appropriate opening that the stock can get through during binding.

3. To support using three holders in a triangle method around the stock.

The stock is located in the middle with an equal distance from each holder. The
binding is made by a lean wire with a plastic cover that forms a ring around the stock
of three branches. Each of the three branches are fixed to each holder.

5) Medium Size Trees

These trees exceed one year of age and the top branches are huge that
the stock fails to carry them without a supporting holder. Wood holders will be broken
as a result of the heavy top weight.

In this case, an iron pipe of thirty eight to fifty (38-50) millimeters (1.5 to 2")
diameter and in accordance to the tree size, it should be fixed in the earth, and shall be
bound to the stock in a straight and paralyzed direction. The bottom part of the pipes
shall be painted with bitumen and a green color for the top.

6) Huge Trees

The main stock is unable to carry the greenery. Such trees should be
supported in regard to the following:

1. Minimize the top greenery weight by cutting the branches which cause
the bending of the stock.

2. Trees shall be bound with one iron wire or more in an opposite direction
to the bending wide, working on vertical appearance of the tree. The wire shall be fixed
to the appropriate spot in the earth.

3. Supporting and holding style shall be changed in the following

conditions:

83
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

(1) When the support holders are worn out.

(2) When the support holder is not suitable to the plant’s length.

(3) When the support holder is unable to assist the plant for vertical
growth.

(4) When the greenery growth of the plant reaches a size that such
method is not suitable for, or if the plant inclines in one of the directions. In this case
the contractor should perform the following:

1) To perform a study on a group of trees to choose the most

suitable supporting way to its case.

2) To work on a resupporting program in accordance to the needs

of every group, and to specify its final date.

3) To demonstrate the program for the supervising engineer.

After fulfilling the needed discussion and modification, the contractor shall perform the
work within the specified duration.

4) If the contractor is not committed to the program, he is subject

to cash deduction which is specified in the deduction statement as SR 5.00 for each
tree for each day of delay.

5) In case of broken trees and as a result for the carelessness of

the contractor to support the trees, the contractor has to pay the expenses of these
trees since plantation.

8. Fighting Insects and Diseases

Plants are sprayed with herbicide in the following cases:

(1) Protective Herbicide

The maintenance program has to include protective herbicides to spray the

insects and avoid diseases. The maintenance engineer shall perform this project in
regard to the following:

1) To specify the sprayed types of herbicide.

2) To specify the used percentage of herbicide.

3) To specify the protective spraying periods; it has to be not less than three
(3) yearly.

84
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4) To perform a schedule in accordance to the different project sites. The

supervising engineer shall study the protective schedule with the maintenance
engineer. He has to adjust the necessary modification and approve the program before
spraying. This operation has to be in regard to the special specifications and project
plans.

(2) Spraying in Case of Disease

The contractor shall be committed to the following in disease cases:

1) To specify disease type.

2) To specify the used herbicide.

3) To perform spraying diseased plants twice, and the second spray is fulfilled
after ten days.

4) To perform an immediate spraying program for all plants in the diseased

area. The contractor shall execute this operation after obtaining the supervising
engineer approval regarding the herbicide type and spray schedule.

9. Washing Operations

(1) Soil Washing

It is an operation to dissolve precipitation salt as a result of spray or drip

watering. This operation is summarized by overflowing the soil with clean washing
water for few days that the precipitation salt is removed. The percentage of salt in the
washing operation does not exceed more than one thousand (1000) parts per million.

The contractor has to perform this operation on separate periods in the

following cases:

1) To use spraying or dripping system.

2) The appearance of salt in soil, or in case of analyzing it and finding a high

percentage of salt. This operation has to be performed every two months in case of
using the spraying or the dripping water system, appearance of salt in the soil, and
when required by the supervising engineer in accordance to the project special
specification and construction plans.

(2) Washing Trees and Shrubs

Plants in streets and intersections are exposed to dust accumulations on

leaves as a result of dust spreading, wind blowing, soil falling on plants when crashed
with. In addition, there is the drizzle sprayed out from cars which include carbon. With
accumulation of all dust and harmful material on plants leaves causing the closure of
leaves openings and hindering the plants of performing vital physiological operations.

85
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Therefore, such accumulation shall be removed by washing the plants with a strong
water spray to remove the dust and to refresh the plants.

Plants shall be washed once every six months, or whenever necessary, such
as after wind blowing of dust or sand. The used water in the washing operation shall
be treated and clean. The operation is performed by motors that pushes the water
strongly towards the plants.

10. Specifying Soil Height

The height or level of soil toward the concrete barricade would cause hindering the
maintenance and the watering operations which will lead to the weakness of plant
growth. The soil level height below the top of the different types of concrete barricades
to provide for sufficient amounts of water; it shall be ten (10) cm. The maintenance
operation has to be performed simply and easily; and the contractor has to remove soil
if it exceeds the above mentioned limits, and he should add new soil if it becomes less
than the specified limits. In case of replacing some plants, the Ministry has the right to
ask the contractor to change the soil more or less and with a depth not exceeding
twenty (20) cm. The prices shall be carried on the maintenance item in a way that the
added soil is a mixture of agriculture and sand soil in accordance with the project
Special Specifications and construction plans.

11. Watering

(1) Watering Periods

Watering periods shall be specified for all of the four seasons. The
contractor shall present an annual and monthly program submitted five days before the
end of the Higri month. The supervising engineer shall review and discuss this program
with the contractor and approve it before the beginning of the next following month.

(2) Situations for Changing the Watering Schedule

1) Watering operation shall be stopped during the raining period of winter

and spring. Therefore, the watering schedule shall be subject to change during this
period. In this case, there is no need to obtain the supervising engineer approval to
change the schedule. Watering shall be stopped since commencing rain, and the
contractor has to coordinate with the supervising engineer in regard to the following:

1. To specify the retained period; and this is determined in regard to

adequate rain amounts for watering plants.

2. To receive the instructions regarding water pumping as a re sult of

floods.

2) If the hot temperature increases to its highest rates which will affect the
plants and harm them if things are not handled immediately.

86
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

In such case, the contractor is required to increase the watering

percentage to avoid damage. This will also obligate the contractor to change the
watering schedule in accordance with the new estimations regarding the weather
temperature, low moisture, and plants demand of water at this stage.

3) In case of reducing watering periods in regard to the Ministry request,

the contractor is obligated to perform this reduction. This reduction will cause modifying
the watering schedule.

4) As for the cases that the Ministry find it necessary to change the
watering schedule for any particular reason and in regard to the plant’s benefit, the
contractor has to be obligated to follow the Ministry instructions.

12. Maintaining Palms

Palms shall be provided with a special care in all operations, and in regard to its
vitality and growth.

(1) Watering

It is one of the important matters, and it should take care of the following:

1) Palms Newly Planted

Successful growth of new planted palms depend on the watering

method in accommodation to the following:

1. The watering operation shall continue daily and for the first forty
(40) days.

2. Palms shall be flooded with water to the area surrounding the roots
and to assure the nonexistence of air around the roots.

3. The watering operation shall occur in moderate weather

circumstances. Watering shall be avoided during hot noon time, and watering should
be at early morning or at night when temperature is high at summer time.

2) Palms at the Project Site

Palms shall be watered due to the earlier mentioned quantities and
periods and in accordance to the project watering schedule.

3) There are some periods that palms would demand more and special
care in regard to the watering operation. These periods are the following:

1. Before pollination season in order to activate the pollen and to

speed up early pollination.

87
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Immediately after flowering because palms need of water for dates

to ripen.

3. When performing the curving operation.

4. During date ripen.

5. After collecting dates because watering helps in palm vitality and

assist in forming new pollen.

4) Less watering is demanded in the following periods:

1. Palms planted in an area of high water rates.

2. After completion of the majority of date ripen because watering

after full ripen would lower its good qualities.

3. At winter season and during the decrease of temperature.

5) Watering operation shall not be overdone in order not to have bad

palms quality of causing roots to mold.

6) At summer time and during the hot weather, watering shall not be
performed during noon time when the temperature would be in its maximum. The
watering operation shall be performed during early morning or late evening.

(2) Palms Replacement

Dead or slow growing palms shall be replaced with new ones and in
accordance to these specification of size, greenery, and being free of insects and
diseases.

Under the supervision of the supervising engineer, the contractor shall

examine the palms once every three months to remove dead ones and to plant new
palms in accordance with the General Specifications.

The following shall be performed when replacing the palms:

1) To provide sufficient treatment before plantation in regard to the

following:

1. To clean the excavation hole and to remove the mold.

2. To leave the excavation hole exposed to the sun for the purpose
of cleaning and airing it.

2) Treatment during plantation is performed in accordance to the following:

88
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

1. The planted palm shall be addressed towards sunrise direction

and shall lean to sunset area.

2. Adding agriculture sand around the palm roots during plantation.

3. During the plantation, the contractor has to bury the roots and part
of the main stock under the soil level without burying the core to avoid causing mold.

4. To reserve the palm core and avoid its exposure to any hits during
transportation or plantation.

5. If the palms leaves are long and huge, a part shall be removed
and the rest shall be cut from the top in order not to cause palm bend.

(3) Protecting Newly Planted Palms

1) Protecting newly planted palms means to cover it in a sackcloth; the

area where the greenery group meet the main stock. This protection is performed for
the following reasons:

1. To protect the grown top (palm core) from dryness as a result of

high temperature caused by direct sun rays and therefore, its chances to live become
low.

2. To protect newly planted palms from severe cold weather during

the first phase of plantation.

2) Method of Protection

1. Cover fifty (50) cm. of height around the main stock and one
hundred (100) cm. of height around the greenery group to assure full protection for the
palm core.

2. To bind protected area, it shall be bound from top, middle, and

bottom, two un-tight binds in order to avoid affecting the palm core.

3) To remove the sackcloth cover from palms after the growth of new
leaves and being confident of successful plantation after the growth of new leaves. The
cover shall be removed so that the grown top is exposed to sun and air. Continuous
covering shall cause lots of damages as follows:

1. Slow growth of the top part as a result of not being exposed to sun
light.

2. Continuity of cover shall lead to insects gathering and which will

cause palm disease and death.

(4) Trimming of Palms

89
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Palms shall be trimmed once a year to remove dry leaves.

1) Periods for performing the trimming and smoothing operation.

There are two times to perform this operation and they are:

1. Before performing pollination.

2. After collecting dates at the end of the fruit season.

The trimming and smoothing shall be specified in accordance to work

schedule.

2) Trimming and Smoothing Provisions

1. The trimming operation shall be limited to dry leaves only which

have ceased to function. It is prohibited to remove any green leaves unless it is really
necessary and after obtaining the supervising engineer approval.

2. When trimming, the dry leaves shall be removed from the base
and the cutting shall be regular and in one level.

3. Dry leaves foot shall be trimmed and smoothed; this operation

shall form the palm and give it a good appearance.

(5) Palms Pollination

Work shall be performed on fertile palms at the project location by

transporting the male palm seeds to the female ones. Therefore, special care shall be
provided to make this operation successful at a very high percentage. The following
should be performed:

1) Pollination shall be performed under the sun rays.

2) This operation shall be avoided during rain falls, clouds, and fogs.

3) To put in the date bunch the pollination seeds which will pollinate the
female flowers in it.

4) The pollination seeds shall be taken from a male palm tree that has the
following specifications:

1. Pollination seeds shall be vital and of strong smell.

2. The male palm shall produce a number of big size flower sleeves.

90
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

3. The pollination shall be taken from a palm known of its fertility and
vitality.

4. The flowers shall not fall down when it dries.

5) Method of Pollination

1. After completion of the spadix growth, the pollination man shall

climb up to the palm to perform the pollination by putting an adequate quantity of the
pollination seeds from 1-5 in each female date bunch. It shall be put upside down to
enable the pollination seed to fall down on the female flowers, and it shall be bound
around the date bunch for a few days.

2. The pollination operation shall be performed immediately after the

opening of the female date bunch because any delay would cause less fertility.

(6) Palm Curving

This operation means to modify the palm case after completion of the
pollination and fruit clutch to take its normal position in curving down.

This operation is performed when dates begin to be big in order to avoid

disorder with the leaves which will hinder its growth and dates collection after ripen.

1) Curving Time

This curving operation shall be performed in accordance with the palm

case and with the following:

1. After the dates begin to be big.

2. Before the palm case is dry and becomes broken.

3. Before intertwisting with the leaves.

2) Curving Method

The date branch shall fall down and pull its neighboring leaves in
accordance to its case.

(7) To Adjust the Curved Palms

Some facts would cause the palm to bend and form a lean position as a
result of uneven growth or car accidents which will cause the palm inclination from its
straight position.

91
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Therefore, the contractor has to adjust curved palms, or he has to inform the
supervising engineer to adjust such palms to form a straight position without any
bending or inclination.

(8) Fertilizing Palms

A great care shall be provided to fertilization in order to substitute the soil

food elements by applying organic and chemical fertilizers that were mentioned before.

(9) Protection Against Insects and Diseases

1. Protective spraying in accordance to the project spraying schedule.

2. Treatment spraying in case of disease shall be done by spraying all the

palms in the area with the appropriate herbicide twice within an interval of seven or ten
days.

(10) To collect the palms dates and submit it to the Ministry under the supervision
of the supervising engineer.

13. The contractor has to remove the water which will be gathered in some of the
areas and which will hurt the plant that is caused by rain fall or any other.

Part Two: Irrigation System

The irrigation system contains several units; they are as follows:

1. Main Line

(1) To assure the nonexistence of any leaking; there are two types of leaking.

1) The First Type

Simple leaking, and it is usually found at the joints. This leaking would
not be clarified in the main water pressure of distribution.

2) The Second Type

Severe leaking is a result of a break in the main line, and this will be
clear in the pumping station that the pressure would go down less than the required
measure limits. The pumping machine will stop automatically as well as the substitute
one. An additional light shall be exposed to indicate low pressure and cease of the
pumping work.

(2) To be certain of the working of the valve air vacuous:

The leaking shall exist as a result of the blemish.

92
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Tube Boxes

(1) To be sure of the box safety of any break.

(2) To be sure of the good work (go back to the factoring instructions and the
design plans) and to be sure of reducing the pressure.

(3) The overall inside and outside cleaning of the box, and to be sure of no water
leaking to the inside of the box.

3. The Minor Line and Holders

(1) To be sure of the nonexistence of any leaking in the minor lines.

(2) To be sure of the right direction for the sprayers (go back to the design plans).

(3) To clean the filter periodically, and this filter is located inside the sprayers. As
for the water dripping, the following has to be noted:

1) To clean the main filter periodically and to assure it is clean and

undamaged.

2) To be sure of opening the dripping holes.

3) To be sure of the tubes joints safety between the dripping and the
plants.

4. Maintaining the Drippings

The contractor has to perform the periodical maintenance for the drippings, and
especially for the following:

(1) To be sure of nonexistence of any breaks in the dripping body and to replace
the damaged ones.

(2) To be sure of the nonexistence of any breaks in the tube (flexible tube) and to
replace the damaged one, if any. Also, to be sure the tube is clean and the
nonexistence of any obstructions.

(3) To disconnect the dripping from the main watering tube and then wash the
dripper with clean water and to remove the salt settled on it.

(4) To replace the damaged filter of drippers.

(5) To install the final drippers and make a test to be sure of the work accuracy
and the quantity of water coming out of each dripper.

93
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

5. Maintaining the Sprayers

The periodical maintaining schedule is performing the following:

(1) To assure the nonexistence of any leaking out from the sprayer. This is clear
if there is a water gathering around the sprayer area.

(2) To maintain the sprayer:

1) To disconnect the sprayer and clean the water drainage. It has to be

noted not to use an iron material as iron wires in cleaning the drainage which will cause
it to widen and lead to a change in the watering design. The cleaning is executed by
pressured air and water.

2) The sprayer filter shall be cleaned periodically to preserve the

appropriate water and that the sprayers shall last longer.

6. Maintaining the Operation Controlling Machines

The following shall be taken care of:

(1) To be sure of the control machine box safety and the nonexistence of any
damage or rust to the outside body and the box door.

(2) To be sure of the safety of all electrical joints and make sure of its good
condition and replacing the damaged ones.

(3) To be sure of the machine operating keys and its being in good condition and
that the machine is working accurately. Also, the damaged keys shall be replaced

94
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

November 1998

PART NINE
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
AND WORK ZONES
Table of Contents

PART NINE TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES AND WORK ZONES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 9.01 - INTENT OF THE CONTRACT ........................................................1

SECTION 9.02 - TRAFFIC CONTROL THROUGH WORK ZONES ...........................2

9.02.1 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................2
9.02.2 WORKSITE TRAFFIC SAFETY SUPERVISOR...................................2
9.02.3 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION...............................3
9.02.3.1 Sign Faces .............................................................................3
9.02.3.2 Sign Plates .............................................................................4
9.02.3.3 Sign Posts ..............................................................................4
9.02.3.4 Barricades ..............................................................................4
9.02.3.5 Traffic Cones and Tubular Markers ........................................4
9.02.3.6 Vertical Panels........................................................................4
9.02.3.7 Plastic Traffic Drums ..............................................................4
9.02.3.8 Temporary Guardrails..............................................................5
9.02.3.9 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barriers ....................................5
9.02.3.10 Moving Portable Crashworthy Safety Barriers ......................5
9.02.3.11 Remove and Reset Portable Impact Attenuators .................5
9.02.3.12 Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) .........................................5
9.02.3.13 Portable Impact Attenuators .................................................5
9.02.3.14 Battery Operated Warning and Delineation Lights ...............6
9.02.3.15 Warning Flashing Arrow Panels ...........................................6
9.02.3.16 Hazard Identification Beacon ................................................6
9.02.3.17 Temporary Variable Message Sign ......................................6
9.02.3.18 Temporary Raised Pavement Markers .................................7
9.02.3.19 Temporary Pavement Marking and Markers ........................7
9.02.3.20 Temporary Delineators .........................................................8
9.02.3.21 Temporary Speed Bumps and Type B Rumble Strips ..........8
9.02.3.22 Channelizing Devices on Flexible Supports ........................ 8
9.02.3.23 Detour Bridge Materials ..................................................... 10
9.02.3.24 Safety Vests ...................................................................... 10
9.02.3.25 Aggregate Subbase for Detours. ...................................... 10
9.02.3.26 Aggregate Base for Detours. ............................................. 10
9.02.3.27 Bituminous Concrete for Detours. ..................................... 10
9.02.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................ 10
9.02.4.1 General................................................................................ 10
9.02.4.2 Traffic Handling Responsibility ............................................ 11
9.02.4.3 Traffic Control Devices and Services................................... 12
9.02.4.3.1 General .................................................................. 12
9.02.4.3.2 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barriers .................... 12
9.02.4.3.3 Temporary Pavement Marking and Markers .......... 13
9.02.4.3.4 Signs and Barricades ............................................. 13
9.02.4.3.5 Detours .................................................................. 14
9.02.4.3.6 Flaggers and Pilot Car Operators .......................... 14
9.02.4.3.7 Hazard Identification Beacons ............................... 14
Table of Contents

9.02.4.4 Limitation of Operations....................................................... 14

9.02.4.5 Detour Bridges..................................................................... 15
9.02.4.6 Aggregate Subbase for Detours. ......................................... 15
9.02.4.7 Aggregate Base for Detours. ............................................... 16
9.02.4.8 Bituminous Concrete for Detours. ....................................... 16
9.02.5 MAINTAINING ROADWAYS DURING WORK.................................. 16
9.02.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................ 16
9.02.7 PAYMENT ......................................................................................... 18
9.02.7.1 General................................................................................ 18
9.02.7.2 Payment Schedule .............................................................. 18
9.02.7.3 Deductions for Noncompliance ............................................ 19

SECTION 9.03 - TRAFFIC MARKINGS................................................................... 23

9.03.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................. 23
9.03.2 MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 23
9.03.2.1 Retroreflectorized Traffic Lines ............................................ 23
9.03.2.2 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Lines .................... 23
9.03.2.3 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Lines
(ETP Lines) .......................................................................... 25
9.03.2.3.1 General .................................................................. 25
9.03.2.3.2 Epoxy Resins ......................................................... 25
9.03.2.3.3 Titanium Dioxide .................................................... 25
9.03.2.3.4 Calcium Carbonate ................................................ 26
9.03.2.3.5 Lead Chromate ...................................................... 26
9.03.2.3.6 Glass Beads .......................................................... 26
9.03.2.4 Retroreflectorized Traffic Control Markings, Retroreflectorized
Thermoplastic Traffic Control Markings and Retroreflectorized
Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Control Markings .................. 27
9.03.2.5 Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers .......................... 27
9.03.2.5.1 General .................................................................. 27
9.03.2.5.2 Type A Markers (Large Cateye Road Studs) ......... 27
9.03.2.5.3 Type B Markers (Small Cateye Road Studs) ......... 28
9.03.2.5.4 Type C Markers (Plain Prismatic Retroreflectors) .. 28
9.03.2.6 Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers .................................... 29
9.03.2.6.1 General .................................................................. 29
9.03.2.6.2 Finish ..................................................................... 30
9.03.2.6.3 Physical Requirements .......................................... 30
9.03.2.7 Adhesive.............................................................................. 30
9.03.3 EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................... 31
9.03.3.1 General................................................................................ 31
9.03.3.2 Retroreflectorized Traffic Lines and Markings Application
Equipment........................................................................... 31
9.03.3.3 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Lines and Markings
Application Equipment ........................................................... 32
9.03.3.4 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Lines and
Markings Application Equipment.............................................. 32
9.03.3.4.1 General .................................................................. 32
9.03.3.4.2 Pressure Tank ....................................................... 32
Table of Contents

9.03.3.4.3 Spray System ........................................................ 32

9.03.3.5 Retroreflective and Ceramic Raised Pavement Marker
Application Equipment ............................................................. 32
9.03.4 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. 33
9.03.4.1 General................................................................................ 33
9.03.4.2 Application ........................................................................... 34
9.03.4.2.1 Retroreflectorized Traffic Lines and Markings ....... 34
9.03.4.2.2 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Lines and
Markings ................................................................ 35
9.03.4.2.3 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Lines36
9.03.4.2.4 Retroreflective and Ceramic Raised Pavement
Markers ......................................................................... 36
9.03.4.3 Protection of Traffic Lines, Markings and Markers .............. 37
9.03.4.4 SurfaceTolerances and Appearance ................................... 38
9.03.5 SAMPLING AND TESTING............................................................... 38
9.03.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................ 38
9.03.7 PAYMENT ......................................................................................... 39

SECTION 9.04 - RUMBLE STRIPS AND SPEED BUMPS...................................... 40

9.04.1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION ................................................ 40
9.04.2 MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 40
9.04.2.1 Tack Coat ............................................................................ 40
9.04.2.2 Bituminous Mixture .............................................................. 40
9.04.2.3 Concrete .............................................................................. 40
9.04.2.4 Reinforcing Steel ................................................................. 40
9.04.2.5 Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers .................................... 40
9.04.2.6 Adhesive.............................................................................. 40
9.04.2.7 Retroreflective Traffic Paint ................................................. 40
9.04.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................ 41
9.04.3.1 Speed Bumps ...................................................................... 41
9.04.3.1.1 Surface Preparation ............................................... 41
9.04.3.1.2 Application of Tack Coat ........................................ 41
9.04.3.1.3 Placing Bituminous Mixture.................................... 41
9.04.3.1.4 Compaction of Bituminous Mixture ........................ 41
9.04.3.2 Type A Rumble Strips.......................................................... 41
9.04.3.2.1 Preparation ............................................................ 41
9.04.3.2.2 Concrete Rumble Strips ......................................... 42
9.04.3.2.3 Texturing ................................................................ 42
9.04.3.2.4 Edging.................................................................... 42
9.04.3.2.5 Curing .................................................................... 42
9.04.3.3 Type B Rumble Strips.......................................................... 42
9.04.3.4 Type C Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips, (Indented), and
Type D Scored Shoulder rumble Strips (Milled) ................... 42
9.04.3.4.1 Equipment.............................................................. 43
9.04.3.4.2 Roller Modification Options .................................... 43
9.04.3.4.3 Alignment Control .................................................. 43
9.04.3.4.4 General Requirements ........................................... 44
9.04.3.4.5 Placement Requirements ...................................... 44
Table of Contents

9.04.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 45

9.04.4.1 Speed Bumps, Type A Rumble Strips and Type B Rumble
Strips........................................................................................ 45
9.04.4.2 Type C Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips .............................. 45
9.04.4.3 Type D Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips .............................. 45
9.04.5 PAYMENT .......................................................................................... 45

SECTION 9.05 - HIGHWAY SIGNING..................................................................... 47

9.05.1 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................. 47
9.05.2 MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 47
9.05.2.1 Concrete .............................................................................. 47
9.05.2.2 Reinforcing Steel ................................................................. 47
9.05.2.3 Sign Supports ...................................................................... 47
9.05.2.4 Steel Channels .................................................................... 47
9.05.2.5 Standard Industrial Sign Supports ....................................... 47
9.05.2.6 Object Marker and Delineator Posts .................................... 48
9.05.2.6.1 Steel Posts............................................................. 48
9.05.2.6.2 Aluminum Posts ..................................................... 48
9.05.2.6.3 Plastic Posts .......................................................... 48
9.05.2.7 Galvanizing .......................................................................... 48
9.05.2.8 Sign Panel Materials............................................................ 48
9.05.2.8.1 Aluminum Alloy Panels, Sheets and Miscellaneous
Hardware ............................................................... 48
9.05.2.8.2 Extruded Aluminum Panels ................................... 48
9.05.2.8.3 Steel Sheet Panels ................................................ 49
9.05.2.8.4 Stainless Steel Bolts, Washers and Self-Locking Nuts
...................................................................................... 49
9.05.2.8.5 Vulcanized Fiber Washers ..................................... 49
9.05.2.8.6 Hard Rubber Washers ........................................... 49
9.05.2.8.7 Nylon and Neoprene Fittings ................................. 49
9.05.2.8.8 Porcelain Enamel Coatings ................................... 49
9.05.2.8.9 Letters, Numerals, Arrows, Symbols, etc ............... 49
9.05.2.8.10 Aluminum Sign Sections ...................................... 50
9.05.2.9 Retroreflective Sheeting ...................................................... 51
9.05.2.10 Delineators and Retroreflectors ......................................... 59
9.05.2.11 Object Markers .................................................................. 60
9.05.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS................................................. 60
9.05.3.1 Signs ................................................................................... 60
9.05.3.1.1 Design.................................................................... 60
9.05.3.1.2 Shop Drawings ...................................................... 60
9.05.3.2 Storage and Shipment of Signs ........................................... 60
9.05.3.3 Placement and Orientation .................................................. 61
9.05.3.4 Footings for Posts................................................................ 61
9.05.3.5 Sign Posts ........................................................................... 61
9.05.3.5.1 General .................................................................. 61
9.05.3.5.2 Painting .................................................................. 62
9.05.3.6 Fastening Signs to Sign Posts ............................................. 62
9.05.3.7 Delineators and Retroreflectors ........................................... 62
Table of Contents

9.05.3.8 Object Markers .................................................................... 63

9.05.4 REPLACEMENT SIGNS ................................................................... 63
9.05.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................ 63
9.05.6 PAYMENT ......................................................................................... 64
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PART NINE: TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES AND WORK ZONES

SECTION 9.01 - INTENT OF THE CONTRACT

Section 9.01 Intent of Contract. The intent of the contract is to provide for the safe
construction and completion of the work described. It is also the intent of the contract
that the work be performed in a manner that assures the safety and convenience of the
road users and protects the residents and property adjacent to the project.

The contract contains both temporary and permanent Traffic Control work items to
safely accommodate public traffic through construction and maintenance work zones
and upon completion of the construction and maintenance works.

1
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 9.02 - TRAFFIC CONTROL THROUGH WORK ZONES

9.02.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of the safe accommodation and
protection of traffic through or around construction and maintenance work zones; the
establishment, construction, maintenance, and obliteration of detours; and the
furnishing, erection, moving, replacing, cleaning, and removing of all traffic control
devices, in reasonably close conformity with these General Specifications, the Special
Specifications, the plans, including Traffic Control Plans (TCP's), the MOC Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices (M.U.T.C.D.), and Work Zone Traffic Control Handbook.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Traffic Control Management
Flashing Warning Arrow Panels
Barricades
Traffic Cones and Tubular Markers
Temporary Signs
Plastic Traffic Drums
Flaggers
Pilot Cars
Portable Crashworthy Safety Barriers
Moving Crashworthy Safety Barriers
Remove and Reset Portable Impact Attenuators
Temporary Guardrail
Truck Mounted Attenuators
Portable Impact Attenuators
Temporary Pavement Markings
Temporary Raised Pavement Markers
Temporary Rumble Strips
Temporary Speed Bumps
Pavement Marking Removal
Vertical Panels
Chevrons
Warning Lights
Hazard Identification Beacons
Temporary Variable Message Signs
Temporary Traffic Signals
Channelizing Devices on Flexible Supports
Detour Bridge

9.02.2 WORKSITE TRAFFIC SAFETY SUPERVISOR. The Contractor shall provide

a competent worksite traffic safety supervisor for the project who is someone other than
the Project Manager. This supervisor shall be identified no later than at the
preconstruction conference and the supervisor's address and phone numbers provided.
The worksite traffic safety supervisor shall be responsible for and coordinate the safe
handling of traffic through the work zone and shall have the following minimum
qualifications:

2
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

1. Have completed an approved training course in the safe handling of traffic

through highway work zones.

2. Understand the contract and M.U.T.C.D. requirements.

The worksite traffic safety supervisor shall perform the following:

1. Inspect and correct the condition and position of traffic control devices in use
each work day and night.

2. Review equipment operation and storage, and material handling and storage
relative to traffic safety.

3. Hold traffic safety meetings with the engineers and superintendents of the
Contractors prior to beginning Construction and periodically thereafter as necessary or
as directed by the Engineer.

4. Furnish a weekly written certification to the Engineer that daily and nightly
inspections were conducted and that project traffic control devices met or exceeded the
contract requirements. Report all changes or corrective actions taken to maintain and
protect traffic through the project.

5. Prepare and submit traffic control plans and working drawings and alternate
traffic control proposals according to Subsection 1.03.2, "Plans and Working Drawings”
in these General Specifications.

6. Prepare or obtain from Police and submit to the Engineer accident reports on
all accidents occurring within the Project limits for the duration of the project.

If the plans or Special Specifications do not contain traffic control plans and working
drawings, it is the contractor’s responsibility to prepare them, including geometric,
pavement structural section and cross section detour layouts, sign and other traffic
control device locations and traffic handling schemes. They shall be submitted to the
engineer and forwarded, with the consultant’s recommendations, to the Ministry Road
Services Department for final review and approval.

9.02.3 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION. Traffic control devices shall

conform to the material requirements in the contract provisions. Cases, conditions, and
details not covered in the plans, in these General Specifications or the Special
Specifications shall conform to the applicable provisions of the Ministry's latest
M.U.T.C.D., STANDARDS FOR ROAD SAFETY FEATURES, HIGHWAY DESIGN
MANUAL VOLUME 4 - STANDARD DRAWINGS, AND OTHER MINISTRY ROAD
SERVICES DEPARTMENT STANDARD APPLICATION MANUALS including their
Work Zone Traffic Control Handbook.

9.02.3.1 Sign Faces. All sign faces, barricades, vertical panels, tubular markers
and flaggers paddles shall use sheeting meeting the requirements of Paragraph
9.05.2.9, "Retro-reflective Sheeting" in these General Specifications. These devices

3
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

shall be maintained at no less than fifty percent (50%) of their original reflectivity
throughout the period of the contract. Installation shall be in accordance with
M.U.T.C.D. Section 5.02.

9.02.3.2 Sign Plates. Sign plates, one side of which is less than one and one-
tenth (1.1) meter, shall have a three (3) millimeter thickness. For plates, one side which
is more than one and one-tenth (1.1) meter, the thickness shall be five (5) millimeters.
All sign plates shall conform to the requirements of Paragraph 9.05.2.8 "Sign Panel
Materials" in these General Specifications.

9.02.3.3 Sign Posts. Sign posts for temporary signs may be standard industrial
billet or rail steel pipe, flanged U-channel, or I channel (I.P.E.) as detailed in Paragraphs
9.05.2.4 "Steel Channels," 9.05.2.5 "Standard Industrial Sign Supports" and 9.05.2.6
"Object Marker and Delineator Posts" in these General Specifications except that
galvanizing of sign posts for temporary signs is not required. Steel pipe and I.P.E. sign
supports shall have a slip base breakaway support in accordance with the M.O.C. Sign
Erection Standards Manual (TS-O2). Signs requiring two (2) or three (3) posts shall use
I.P.E. posts in accordance with the M.O.C. Road Services Department
"DIMENSIONING OF SIGN POSTS AND FOOTINGS FOR DIRECTIONAL SIGNS.”

9.02.3.4 Barricades. Type I or II barricades shall be constructed of wood, metal,

or plastic. The Type I barricades shall collapse when tipped over. Plastic pipe for Type
II barricades shall conform to ASTM D2729. Installation shall conform to M.U.T.C.D.
Section 5.03.

9.02.3.5 Traffic Cones and Tubular Markers. Cones and tubes shall be
manufactured of a material capable of withstanding vehicle impact without damage to
the cones or tubes. Red shall be the predominant color of cones and tubes. The cones
shall be a minimum of seven hundred (700) millimeters high and have a retro-
reflectorized yellow band at least one hundred fifty (150) millimeters in width placed no
more than seventy-five (75) millimeters from the top of the cone. This increased cone
height supersedes the shorter minimum cone height shown in the M.U.T.C.D.
Subsection 5.03 B. Cones and tubes shall be capable of remaining upright during
normal traffic flow and wind conditions in the area where they are used. Installation
shall conform to M.U.T.C.D. Sections 5.06 and 5.07.

9.02.3.6 Vertical Panels. Vertical panels shall be constructed of wood, metal or

plastic with retro-reflectorized red stripes on a retro-reflectorized yellow background.
They shall be three hundred (300) millimeters in width and shall have a vertical
dimension of nine hundred (900) millimeters. Installation shall be on a post or other
non-flexible support and conform to M.U.T.C.D. Subsection 5.03C.

9.02.3.7 Plastic Traffic Drums. Traffic Drums shall be commercially constructed

out of plastic. They shall be a minimum of approximately eight hundred (800)
millimeters high and a minimum of approximately five hundred (500) millimeters wide
with stepped taper shape for ease of stacking and transportation. The markings on
each drum shall consist of at least two horizontal retro-reflecting yellow and two red
bands which completely encircle the drum. Bands shall be between one hundred (100)

4
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

millimeters and two hundred (200) millimeters in width. Installation shall conform to
M.U.T.C.D. Subsection 5.03D. Metal barrels are not acceptable and are not to be used.

9.02.3.8 Temporary Guardrails. Temporary guardrail shall generally conform to

Section 6.01, "Crashworthy Safety Barriers" in these General Specifications and the
M.U.T.C.D. for posts and steel rail. Used guardrail material will be permitted providing
it is neat in appearance, straight and is approved by the Engineer. Certificates of
Guarantee will not be required for used rail if the rail apparently meets the dimensional
and other physical requirements of Section 6.01 "Crashworthy Safety Barriers" in these
General Specifications.

9.02.3.9 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barriers. Portable crashworthy safety

barriers shall conform to the requirements of Section 6.01, "Crashworthy Safety
Barriers" in these General Specifications and the M.U.T.C.D. for the Type specified;
modified, if necessary, for temporary installation. They may be new or used, provided
they are in good condition. Use and placement shall meet the requirements of the
M.U.T.C.D., Subsections 5.03F and 5.06D3. Polyethylene water-filled portable crash
worthy safety barriers may be used in lieu of concrete if approved by the engineer as
meeting all performance requirements.

In every case, individual Portable Crashworthy Safety Barriers shall have provisions
for full strength connection between adjacent barrier sections and proper crashworthy
end treatments such as portable impact attenuators, or safe tapers used in accordance
with the M.U.T.C.D. and safe clear zone requirements. These connection and end
treatments must be established in every installation of Portable Crashworthy Safety
Barriers.

9.02.3.10 Moving Portable Crashworthy Safety Barriers. Moving Portable

Crashworthy Safety Barriers must be done using equipment (transfer vehicle) that has
been inspected and demonstrated to produce satisfactory performance in a safe
manner.

9.02.3.11 Remove and Reset Portable Impact Attenuators. When portable

impact attenuators are no longer required as crashworthy end treatments for
crashworthy safety barriers or to shield other hazards they shall be removed and reset
as crashworthy end treatments on other temporary work zone crashworthy barriers or
hazards as directed by the engineer. New portable impact attenuators shall not be
used when existing portable impact attenuators can be removed and reset. The
removal and resetting shall be done in a safe manner and include the replacement of
any parts lost or damaged in the removal process.

9.02.3.12 Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA). Truck Mounted Attenuators which

meet the U.S. National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) 350
requirements for one hundred (100) kilometers per hour (kph) impacts shall be
provided.

9.02.3.13 Portable Impact Attenuators. Portable Impact Attenuators which meet

the U.S. NCHRP 350 requirements for one hundred (100) kilometers per hour (kph)

5
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

impacts shall be used at all barrier ends with tapers away from traffic of less than 15:1,
and when the end will not be outside the required clear zone. The majority of the
Portable Impact Attenuator must be reusable after a design impact.

9.02.3.14 Battery Operated Warning and Delineation Lights (Flashing or

Steady). Types A, B and C warning and delineation lights shall meet the minimum
requirements of and be used as specified in the M.U.T.C.D. Section 5.05. Steady lights
shall be used to outline intended traffic paths on safety barriers, plastic traffic drums and
other channelization devices.

9.02.3.15 Warning Flashing Arrow Panels. Types A, B and C Warning Flashing

Arrow Panels shall meet the minimum requirements and be installed to conform to
M.U.T.C.D. Subsection 5.05C.

9.02.3.16 Hazard Identification Beacon. The beacons shall be installed and have
a yellow lens with a visible diameter of at least two hundred (200) millimeters and
preferably three hundred (300) millimeters. It shall give a yellow round traffic signal
indication and flash at a rate of not less than fifty (50) or more than eighty (80) times per
minute in accordance with the M.U.T.C.D. Subsection 5.05B.

9.02.3.17 Temporary Variable Message Sign. The Contractor shall provide and
operate variable message signs where shown on the plans and as directed by the
Engineer. The signs shall be self-contained and trailer mounted.

The sign system shall consist of a three-line matrix panel assembly, controller,
power source and structural support system. The message display shall be visible and
legible from a distance of not less than three hundred (300) meters. Messages shall
be cycled so that three message cycles are displayed to the driver while approaching
the sign at ninety (90) kilometers per hour from three hundred (300) meters. The trailer
and sign support system shall be painted red and/or yellow.

The unit shall be capable of operating on a continuous basis for not less than five
days. The unit shall be capable of raising and lowering the message panel electrically
and manually in the vertical axis and rotating it thirty (30) degrees in a horizontal axis.
While in the raised position the bottom of the sign panel shall be a minimum of two and
four-tenths (2.4) meters above the pavement surface. The sign panel shall be capable
of rotating three hundred sixty (360) degrees and be stopped in any position.

The sign panel shall be three lines in height, and shall contain at least eight modular
and interchangeable matrix assemblies per line. Each modular matrix assembly shall
be capable of displaying a character.

The controller shall be easily located and accessible to allow the entry of all sign
and message functions from a control cabinet on the trailer mounted unit.

A keyboard shall be incorporated into the controller to allow the user to generate
and store a minimum of twenty (20) preprogrammed messages and any message

6
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

entered by operator. The controller shall have the capability of retrieving all messages
stored in the temporary memory for as long as the sign panel is in operation.

A START/STOP switch shall be provided on the controller to activate the power

supply and sign panel. An entry code shall be required to gain entry to the controller
to access the memory and display messages on the exterior sign panel.

The sign shall be either bulb or dot matrix. Other types such as flipdisk, LED and
fiberoptic will be considered for acceptance only if they meet all the sign system
requirements contained in this paragraph.

Bulb Matrix Variable Message Sign - The sign panel assembly shall contain eight
lamp bank matrices of a minimum of 7 X 5 lamps per line. The lamp bank shall display
up to eight characters minimum, forty-five (45) centimeters minimum in height.

The lamps shall be rugged, high performance, high fluorescent yellow, fifty (50)
millimeters in diameter, sealed beam units. The lamps shall be rated at twenty-four (24)
volts, twenty (20) watts with a light output of eight hundred (800) foot-candles minimum.

Dot Matrix Variable Message Sign - Each dot matrix assembly shall contain
electromagnetically activated dots. Dot color shall be fluorescent yellow. Illumination
of the sign panel shall be by internal backlight. Activation of the backlight system shall
be by photo cell system to measure both vertical and horizontal ambient lighting. A
manual over-ride switch shall be provided to deactivate the photo cell system.

The Contractor shall operate the variable message signs including setup, computer
program, placing (or moving as directed), and maintenance of the signs. All fuel or
refueling costs shall be included. The signs may be partially solar powered or even
totally solar powered if sufficient power can be generated and stored for day and
nighttime operation.

9.02.3.18 Temporary Raised Pavement Markers. Temporary raised pavement

markers shall be retro-reflective or non-reflective. The retro-reflective markers shall
comply with the requirements contained in Subparagraph 9.03.2.5.4, "Type C Markers"
(Plain Prismatic Retro-reflectors) in these General Specifications. The non-retro-
reflective markers shall comply with the requirements contained in Paragraph 9.03.2.6
"Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers" in these General Specifications. Installation and
application shall conform to Paragraph 9.03.3.5 "Retro-reflective and Ceramic Raised
Pavement Markers" and Subparagraph 9.03.4.2.4 "Retro-reflective and Ceramic Raised
Pavement Markers" in these General Specifications.

9.02.3.19 Temporary Pavement Marking and Markers. Temporary traffic

markings may be retro-reflectorized or thermoplastic retro-reflectorized or epoxy
thermoplastic retro-reflectorized traffic paint or pressure sensitive preformed marking
tape. It may also be supplemented with Type C temporary retro-reflective raised
pavement markers (Plain Prismatic Retro-reflectors). Preformed tapes shall be
removable or non-removable. Removable tape shall be capable of being removed
intact or in large strips. Non-removable tape is designed to remain in place. Tape shall

7
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

consist of glass spheres of a high optical quality imbedded into a binder on a suitable
backing that is precoated with a pressure sensitive adhesive. The spheres shall be of
uniform gradation and distributed evenly over the surface of the color standards for
pavement markings and shall be readily visible when viewed under automotive
headlights at night. The marking tape, when applied in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended procedures, shall be weather resistant and shall show no appreciable
fading, lifting, or shrinkage during the useful life of the marking. The tape, as applied,
shall be of good appearance, free of cracks, and the edges shall be true, straight, and
unbroken.

Temporary markings shall be placed each day before traffic is allowed to use the
section during nighttime. Very short sections may utilize temporary raised reflectorized
markers only, if approved by the engineer.

Painted markings shall conform to Section 9.03 "Traffic Markings" in these General
Specifications. Retro-reflective raised pavement markers shall also conform to Section
9.03, “T raffic Markings” i n these General Specifications. They shall be white (crystal),
yellow, or red, or a combination thereof, as required by the Plans or M.U.T.C.D.
Installation shall conform to M.U.T.C.D. Section 5.04.

9.02.3.20 Temporary Delineators. Temporary delineators shall conform to the

requirements of Section 9.05 "Highway Signing" in these General Specifications and
the M.U.T.C.D. Installation shall conform to M.U.T.C.D. Subsection 5.04C.

9.02.3.21 Temporary Speed Bumps and Type B Rumble Strips. Temporary

speed bumps and rumble strips shall comply with the materials and installation
requirements contained in Paragraphs 9.04.3.1, "Speed Bumps" and 9.04.3.3, "Type
B Rumble Strips" in these General Specifications.

9.02.3.22 Channelizing Devices on Flexible Supports. Channeling devices on

flexible supports shall be used in work zone areas where channelization devices are
frequently impacted by errant vehicles on high or low speed roadways. Theses devices
shall be fabricated to withstand repeated impacts with minimal maintenance to devices
and damage to vehicles. Devices shall be erected on a fixed, portable or driveable
flexible base as detailed in the traffic control plans (TCP) or as approved by the
Engineer. Fixed bases shall be surface mount or driveable type.

All sign panels for channeling devices on flexible supports shall be manufactured
from polyethylene that have excellent resistance to temperature extremes and
ultraviolet degradation.

Portable bases shall be fabricated from a flexible material such as virgin rubber
and/or recycled rubber with an approximate weight of seventeen (17) kilograms.

Pavement surfaces shall be prepared in a manner that will insure proper bonding
of adhesives and surface mount bases to the pavement surfaces. Adhesives shall be
prepared and applied as per manufacturers recommendations.

8
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Application and removal of devices shall not cause detrimental effects to the final
pavement surfaces including pavement surface discoloration or surface integrity.
Driveable bases shall not be permitted on final pavement surfaces. All application and
removal procedures of fixed bases shall be approved by the Engineer.

Channeling devices on flexible supports shall generally be of five (5) types:

Opposing Traffic Lane Divider, Construction Object Panel, Vertical Panel, Chevron
Alignment and Channelizer.

The Opposing Traffic Lane Dividers are delineation devices used as center lane
dividers to separate opposing traffic on a minimum two-lane, two-way operation. The
rectangle upright double panels shall be approximately three hundred (300) millimeters
wide by five hundred (500) millimeters set on a flexible support with the top
approximately one (1) meter above the road surface as shown in the M.O.C. Road
Services Department Work Zone Traffic Control Handbook. The legend on the panels
shall be two opposing retro-reflectorized arrows on a retro-reflectorized yellow
background with a red border similar to those on the two-way traffic sign (W18-1 in the
M.O.C. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices Subsection 5.02.F.3).

The Construction Object Panels (COP) are rectangular upright single or double
panels approximately three hundred (300) millimeters wide by five hundred (500)
millimeters high having one hundred (100) millimeter wide retro-reflectorized red stripes
on a retro-reflectorized yellow background set on a flexible support with the top of the
panel approximately one (1) meter above the road surface as shown in the M.O.C.
Road Services Department Work Zone Traffic Control Handbook. They shall be used
to delineate construction objects or areas such as gore areas.

The vertical panels are rectangular upright single panels approximately three
hundred (300) millimeters wide and nine hundred (900) millimeters high having the
same legend as those described in the M.O.C.M.U.T.C.D., paragraph 5.03.C except
that it shall be set on a flexible support with the top of panel approximately one and five-
tenths (1.5) meter above the road surface as shown in the M.O.C. Road Services
Department Work Zone Traffic Control Handbook.

The chevron alignment panels shall have the same legend and size as those
described in M.O.C.M.U.T.C.D. paragraph 5.02.F.11 except that it shall be set on a
flexible support with the top of the panel one and five-tenths (1.5) meters above the
road surface as shown in the M.O.C. Road Services Department Work Zone Traffic
Control Handbook. Chevron alignment panels may also be set on the top of plastic
traffic drums and concrete crashworthy safety barriers on shortened bases but with the
top of the panel still one and one-half (1½) meters above the ground surface.

The tubular channelizer is a flexible surface mounted tubular channelizer specifically

designed for channelization of construction work zone traffic through Two (2) Lane-Two
(2) Way detours. The vertical tubes shall be made of polymer alloy weighing a
minimum of one and seven-tenths (1.7) kilograms (with base). The tubes shall have a
diameter of seventy-five (75) millimeters and a minimum height of nine-tenths (0.9)
meters. They shall be of red color with a minimum of three (3) retro-reflective yellow

9
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

stripes with a height of seventy-five (75) millimeters each as shown in the M.O.C. Road
Services Department Work Zone Traffic Control Handbook.

9.02.3.23 Detour Bridge Materials. Detour bridge materials shall be as specified

in the plans and Special Specifications. Other than new materials may be used if
approved by the Engineer, provided they can be properly identified and exhibit no
detrimental damage.

9.02.3.24 Safety Vests. All workers, supervisory personnel, supervising

consultants and Ministry officials involved in work zone traffic control or work zone
construction operations must wear safety vests for their protection and identification by
passing traffic. The color of the vests shall be retro-reflective red.

9.02.3.25 Aggregate Subbase for Detours. The aggregate subbase materials

used in the construction of detours shall comply with the requirements for Grading I or
II in Subsection 3.02.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications.

9.02.3.26 Aggregate Base for Detours. The aggregate base materials used in
the construction of detours shall comply with the requirements for Grading I, II or III in
Subsection 3.03.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications.

9.02.3.27 Bituminous Concrete for Detours. The bituminous concrete used in

the construction of detours shall comply with the material requirements for Subsection
4.05.9, "Minor Bituminous Concrete" in these General Specifications.

9.02.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

9.02.4.1 General. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary traffic
control devices adjacent to and within the project according to the approved traffic
control plans and working drawings, the M.O.C. M.U.T.C.D and the M.O.C. Road
Services Department Work Zone Traffic Control Handbook. The Contractor shall install
and maintain traffic control devices as follows:

1. Furnish and place traffic control devices before the start of construction
operations.
2. Install only those traffic control devices needed for each stage or phase.
3. Relocate temporary traffic control devices as necessary.
4. Remove devices that no longer apply to the existing conditions.
5. Immediately replace any device that is lost, stolen, destroyed, inoperative, or
damaged or when its retro-reflectivity is reduced by fifty percent (50%) of its
required initial retro-reflectivity.
6. Keep temporary traffic control devices clean and their reflectivity well
maintained.
7. Remove all temporary traffic control devices upon contract completion or when
approved.
8. Cover or remove all conflicting permanent signs during the work period.
9. Provide acceptable Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) protection for all shadow
and barrier vehicles.

10
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The provision of an adequate supply of electrical power for the proper operation of
warning lights, flashing arrow boards, temporary traffic signals, and temporary lighting
in connection with the performance of the Work shall be the responsiblity of the
Contractor.

All costs involved in the supply of electrical power are to be included in the prices
entered in the Bill of Quantities relating to the Works, in which power is to be used. No
separate payment whatsoever shall be made for supply of electrical power or for
issuance of the necessary permits thereof.

The Contractor shall liaise and coordinate with the Municiplaities or other local
Authorities regarding approval procedures and other formalities related to supply of
power or shall provide the necessary electrical power by his own means. Whichever
the case, the source of power supply shall be approved by the Engineer.

9.02.4.2 Traffic Handling Responsibility. The M.U.T.C.D. includes standard

drawings which indicate typical layouts of the traffic control devices for various
situations. The plans include standard drawings of traffic control devices, and may also
include special drawings indicating a method of handling traffic through special work
areas or activities which are not covered by the M.U.T.C.D. The combination of the
M.U.T.C.D., the contract plans, General Specifications, and Special Specifications
relative to control of traffic through work zones will be referred to as the Traffic Control
Plan (TCP). It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to thoroughly understand the
requirements of the Traffic Control Plan for the project. The arrangement of traffic
control signs, markings, and devices shall be in accordance with the M.U.T.C.D. and
the contract, modified to meet actual field conditions and the Contractor's method of
operation. Such modifications shall be subject to the approval of the Road Services
Department, M.O.C. The Contractor may propose, in writing, alternate traffic control
proposals for the handling of traffic through and around the work zone. The Engineer
will recommend to the Road Service Department approval, disapproval or approval with
modification of the Contractor's proposal. Such alternative Traffic Control Plans shall
have the written approval of the Ministry, based on an equivalent level of service and
safety to the public, prior to their implementation.

Access across and through the construction area shall be provided at the minimum
necessary for the convenience of the public. Access shall be controlled or limited when
appropriate, by the barriers together with signs guiding the public to approved access
points. The Engineer shall be the final authority in approving or designating access
points.

The safe and satisfactory movement of traffic through the project is of paramount
importance and shall be a prime responsibility of the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for evaluating, planning for, and setting up all
traffic control arrangements in connection with each construction or maintenance
operation. The Contractor shall immediately recognize any extreme hazard to the
public and correct the hazard. The Engineer shall identify deficiencies in the

11
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Contractor's procedures and order correction, but the Contractor is primarily responsible
for managing the traffic control on the project.

9.02.4.3 Traffic Control Devices and Services.

9.02.4.3.1 General. Traffic control devices and services shall be provided and
maintained both inside and outside the project limits as needed to facilitate traffic
guidance in accordance with the fundamental principles contained in the M.O.C.
M.U.T.C.D. Part 5, "Traffic Controls For Work Areas.” All signs and devices shall be
kept in good repair. The Contractor shall keep reserve devices reflecting ten percent
(10%) of the devices in use with a minimum of one (1) each in order to quickly provide
replacements when needed.

Prior to start of construction or maintenance operations, the Contractor shall

place such signs, barricades, portable crashworthy safety barriers, markings, and other
traffic control devices as may be required by the Traffic Control Plan. During
nonworking hours and following completion of a particular construction or maintenance
operation, all warning signs, except those necessary for the safety of the public, shall
be removed or entirely covered with either black plastic sheeting or plywood sheets so
that the entire sign panel will not be visible.

Retro-reflective materials on signs, drums, barricades, and other devices shall

be kept clean, free from dirt, mud, and other roadway grime. Scratches, rips and tears
in sheeting shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor to the Engineer's satisfaction.
Retro-reflective sheeting material shall be replaced when the Engineer determines that
the reflectivity is less than fifty percent (50%) of the retro-reflectivity of new material.

Nighttime operations, if permitted by the Traffic Control Plan (TCP), shall be

illuminated by a lighting system approved by the Engineer. The lighting system shall
be positioned and operated to preclude glare to the approaching traveling public. The
lighting system shall not include incandescent lights. Floodlights shall be used to mark
flagger stations during the hours of darkness.

Gas or oil lanterns, or open-flame torches shall not be used on any construction
or maintenance project.

9.02.4.3.2 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barriers. Portable crashworthy

safety barriers shall be used to separate public traffic from construction and
maintenance equipment, workmen and work areas. They shall be placed end-to-end
and connected using acceptable pins or otherwise acceptable connectors to form a
continuous safe barrier with acceptable tapers or crashworthy end treatments on each
end. Isolated or unconnected barriers will not be permitted as they are safety hazards
by themselves. Portable crashworthy safety barriers shall not be used to form
channelization tapers of any less than fifteen to one (15:1).

Where two-way traffic must be maintained on one roadway of a normally divided

highway, opposing traffic shall be separated either with portable crashworthy safety
barriers, plastic drums, or opposing traffic lane dividers and tubular channelizers

12
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

throughout the length of two-way operations. Where possible the portable crashworthy
safety barrier shall be tied to an existing structure. Otherwise, the barrier shall be
tapered, and fitted with a terminal section, if this can be done safely, or fitted with a
portable impact attenuator.

9.02.4.3.3 Temporary Pavement Marking and Markers. Temporary

retroreflectorized pavement marking and markers shall be used in combination with
appropriate warning signs, channelizing devices, and delineation to clearly indicate the
required vehicle paths. When a paved temporary roadway (detour) is required to
reroute traffic to bypass a construction or maintenance zone, temporary
retroreflectorized pavement markings (paint lines symbols, letters and raised pavement
markers) and channelizing devices shall be placed on the approaches to and
throughout the length of the temporary pavement.

The Engineer shall direct removal by a specific method or may require an

overlay if he deems the Contractor's removal and obliteration unsatisfactory. Warning
signs with legend UNMARKED PAVEMENT AHEAD shall be used only on a short-term
basis when temporary or permanent pavement markings are obscured and new
markings have not been placed. It is intended that temporary markings or markers be
in place each day before traffic is allowed to use a section at night.

9.02.4.3.4 Signs and Barricades. All barricades and signs shall be placed for
best visibility and legibility, maintained in good condition, and kept clean and free of dirt
at all times. Contractor's and Engineer's vehicles and equipment must be parked so
that barricades and signs are visible to approaching traffic at all times.

Where traffic is maintained through or over any part of the project, the
Contractor will be required to mark all hazards within the limits of the project (including
connecting roads) with barricades, warning, regulatory and guide signs.

Warning signs are to be placed well in advance of the hazard; the distance
depending on topography and existing approach speeds.

Restricted speed zones, when authorized in the Traffic Control Plan (TCP), or
by the Engineer, shall be maintained over only the minimum length of road which is
practicable for the proper protection of traffic and the satisfactory prosecution of the
Work. Any reduction in speed should be consistent with the project requirements.

Signs with more than ninety (90) centimeters length of horizontal side shall be
mounted on two posts. Sign plates of more than two hundred twenty (220) and up to
three (300) centimeters horizontal length shall be fixed on three (3) posts with suitable
bracing. Sign plates of bigger widths than three hundred (300) centimeters shall be
constructed with one (1) extra post for each extra meter of width with suitable bracing's.
Crashworthy support posts are required.

Portable or removable mountings for signs which are frequently moved may be
used. Such mounting shall be heavy enough not to turn over in the wind, and the base

13
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

shall not be appreciably wider than the sign. The bottom of the sign shall be at least
two (2) meters above the ground.

Rocks, asphalt or concrete pieces, construction materials, or other debris shall

not be used as weighing device for portable signs, barricades or drums. Sandbags will
be permitted as long as they are not more than thirty (30) centimeters above the
ground.

9.02.4.3.5 Detours. Detours shall be constructed as shown on the plans or as

directed by the Engineer to the required lines and grades.

Prior to opening a detour to traffic, all warning signs, barricades, portable

crashworthy safety barriers, markings, channelizing devices, truck mounted attenuators
and other required traffic control devices shall be in place and approved by the
Engineer. Guide signs, detour signs, or route markers shall be installed throughout the
length of the detour to provide adequate guidance to the motoring public.

The Contractor shall maintain the detour and traffic control devices in a
satisfactory condition for traffic as directed by the Engineer,

9.02.4.3.6 Flaggers and Pilot Car Operators. Flaggers and pilot car
operators shall be physically and mentally qualified, trained in their duties, efficient, and
courteous, as outlined in the M.U.T.C.D. Each flagger on duty shall be identified with
appropriate and distinctive apparel, including red retroreflective vest and hat, and shall
be equipped with a highly visible, retroreflective "Stop/Slow" hand sign conforming to
the M.U.T.C.D. Flags will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.

Pilot cars shall be identified with an appropriate informative sign mounted on the
rear thereof and with a rotating amber beacon, and shall be operated at prudent
speeds. Strobe light beacons will not be permitted.

9.02.4.3.7 Hazard Identification Beacons. The hazard identification beacon

shall be used only to supplement an appropriate warning sign used in or in advance of
work areas.

9.02.4.4 Limitation of Operations. The Contractor's operations shall be limited

as follows:

1. No contract Work shall be performed during the hours of darkness unless

authorized by the Engineer.

2. The Contractor's equipment shall be operated in the direction of the traffic,

where practical.

3. The paving of adjacent traffic lanes shall be completed to the same elevation
each workday to the extent practicable.

14
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

4. The Contractor will coordinate his activities in such a way as to maintain traffic
flow on one lane of pavement on a two-lane road and on one-lane of pavement in each
direction of travel on a four-lane road. Two-way traffic shall be provided whenever
practicable and all operations shall be conducted in a sequence that will reduce the
necessity for one-way traffic to a minimum.

5. The Contractor will coordinate with the Engineer on a location for a storage and
parking area. Selection of all storage and parking areas is subject to the approval of
the Engineer. The boundary of all such areas shall be located at least ten (10) meters
from the edge of pavement. Access and egress from each area is subject to the
approval of the Engineer.

6. During nonwork hours, pavers and rollers shall be parked in the storage areas,
or at least ten (10) meters from the edge of any pavement open to traffic. When it is not
feasible to meet these restrictions due to land features or ROW restrictions, pavers and
rollers may be parked a minimum of three (3) meters from the pavement edge, as
approved by the Engineer. Three (3) or four (4) Type I barricades, with Type A warning
lights, shall be placed on the pavement side of the parked pavers and rollers. All other
equipment shall be stored at approved storage and parking areas. Points of access
and egress from all staging areas shall have adequate sight distance.

7. Contractor's material shall be stored only at the approved Contractor's storage

and parking area (or at locations approved by the Engineer).

8. During periods of inclement weather, or during periods of unusually heavy traffic,

the Engineer may require all affected operations to cease in order that traffic may be
adequately accommodated.

9. The Contractor shall not switch lane closure during a work shift to accommodate
changes in operations except as approved by the Engineer. Prior to switching traffic
to a completed lane, the Contractor shall have the following:

(1) Adequate personnel and equipment to remove and set up all traffic control
devices as required by the Traffic Control Plan (TCP).

(2) Adequate communications to safely control traffic.

(3) Paving and related equipment removed from the travel lane.

9.02.4.5 Detour Bridges. Detour bridges shall be constructed in accordance with

the Plans and Special Specifications. At the completion of the permanent bridge, the
detour bridge shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. The approaches
and footings to the detour bridge shall be leveled or restored as approved by the
Engineer to eliminate all visible evidence of its presence.

9.02.4.6 Aggregate Subbase for Detours. The aggregate subbase used for
detours shall be constructed in accordance with Subsection 3.02.5, "Construction" in
these General specifications.

15
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

9.02.4.7 Aggregate Base for Detours. The aggregate base used for detours shall
be constructed in accordance with Subsection 3.03.5, "Construction" in these General
Specifications.

9.02.4.8 Bituminous Concrete for Detours. The bituminous concrete used for
detours shall be constructed in accordance with Subsection 4.05.9, "Minor Bituminous
Concrete" including the placement of a prime coat in accordance with Section 4.02,
"Bituminous Prime Coat, Tack Coat and Fog Seal" in these General Specifications.

9.02.5 MAINTAINING ROADWAYS DURING WORK. The Contractor shall perform

roadway maintenance as follows:

1. Construct, maintain and remove detour roads and bridges.

2. Maintain intersections with trails, roads, streets, businesses, parking lots,
residences, garages, farms and other features.

3. Maintain public roadways for public traffic during all work suspensions.

4. Maintain a reasonably dust-free traveled way.

5. Remove piles of soil and other material from traveled way.

The Contractor shall maintain the roadway in a safe and acceptable condition. If
corrective action is requested by the Engineer and the corrective action is not taken to
provide a safe roadway situation, the Engineer shall impose Paragraph 9.02.7.3
"Deductions for Non-Compliance" in these General Specifications including issuing
"Stop Work" orders until the deficiency is corrected. The Contractor shall not be paid
for any work accomplished while the "Stop Work" order is in effect. Written notice of the
lifting of the "Stop Work" order shall be provided to the Contractor by the Engineer
before any work on the job is restarted.

If necessary to insure the safety of the motoring public, the Engineer shall arrange
for the correction of the deficiency in a manner he deems appropriate, the cost of which
will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

9.02.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Traffic control devices will be measured based

on the Items listed in the Bill of Quantities, which are furnished, accepted and verified
by the Engineer. These quantities are deemed the minimum numbers of each device
necessary for the handling of construction traffic and shall be the minimum furnished.
Should the character or magnitude of the Contractor's operations result in the need for
additional devices, the Engineer may order such additional devices.

The legends of all Temporary Signs shall be as required by the Traffic Control Plan
(TCP), modified based on the proposed character and magnitude of the Contractor's
operations. Such modifications shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
ordering the signs. Temporary Signs will be measured by the square meter of sign face
for the quantity actually installed and accepted which shall include all required signs,

16
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

sign posts, installation, maintenance, replacement, relocation, and removal as

necessary for the duration of the project.

Channelizing Devices on Flexible Supports, (Type), Barricades, Type I or II, Vertical

Panels, Plastic Traffic Drums, Traffic Cones and Tubular Markers, Temporary
Delineators, Chevrons, Warning Lights Type A, B or C, Flashing Warning Arrow Panels
Type A, B or C, Hazard Identification Beacons, Temporary Traffic Signals, Variable
Message Signs, Truck Mounted Attenuators and Portable Impact Attenuators will be
measured by the unit for the quantities actually installed and accepted which shall
include all required devices, supports, installation, maintenance, replacement,
relocation and removal as necessary for the duration of the project.

Temporary Guardrail and Portable Crashworthy Safety Barrier, Type ___ will be
measured by the linear meter along the face of the rail or barrier for the quantities
actually installed and accepted, which shall include all required devices, supports,
connections, installation, maintenance, replacement, and removal as necessary for the
duration of the project.

Temporary Pavement Markings will be measured by the linear meter of line placed
and accepted of the type(s) specified in the Traffic Control Plan (TCP), including
installation, maintenance, replacement, and removal as necessary for the duration of
the project. Gaps will not be measured. Pavement markings removal will be measured
by the linear meter of line removed. Gaps will not be measured.

Temporary Traffic Signal will be measured by the unit for each signal installation
required by the Traffic Control Plan (TCP) including the installation, maintenance,
replacement and removal as necessary for the duration of the project. The installation
will include all supports, brackets, controllers, signal heads along with providing the
necessary power to operate the signal.

Temporary Pavement Markings, Symbols and Letters will be measured by the

square meter or by the unit. Temporary retroreflective raised pavement markers will be
measured by the unit. Temporary Speed Bumps and Type B Rumble Strips will be
measured by the square meter which will also include the removal of these devices
after their function has been completed.

Flaggers will be measured by the hour for the actual number of hours flagging was
performed satisfactorily as ordered by the Engineer.

Pilot Car (including operators) will be measured by the hour for the actual number
of hours each vehicle was in operation as ordered by the Engineer.

Moving crashworthy safety barriers will be measured by the linear meter along the
face of the barrier as reinstalled at designated locations that are more than three (3)
meters from the point of initial installation.

The removal and resetting of portable impact attenuators will be measured by the
unit and include all work to reset the attenuator in place even including new

17
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

foundations, bases and parts lost, damaged or just needed to complete the new
installation. The repair of each portable impact attenuator damaged by public traffic
through no fault or negligence of the contractor shall be measured at fifty (50) percent
of the original bid item if such repair is directed by the Engineer.

Items of Work required for the construction of detours including pavement structure
layers shown on the plans will be inspected, tested, measured and accepted as
separate lots in accordance with the applicable sections of Part 2, "Earthwork," Part 3,
"Aggregate Subbase and Base Courses," and Part 4, "Bituminous Construction" in
these General Specifications. Traffic control devices used on several detours shall only
be measured for payment the first time they are delivered to the project.

All traffic control management, supervision, labor, equipment, and materials

required explicitly or implicitly to implement the Traffic Control Plan (TCP), including
these General Specifications and the Special Specifications, not measured individually
will be measured on a lump sum basis under the Traffic Control Management item.

Detour Bridge when included in the Bill of Quantities, will include all materials,
equipment, construction, labor, maintenance, and incidental items required by the plans
and Special Specifications. The square meter measurement for this Work will be all
inclusive for the Detour Bridge specified, constructed, maintained, and removed upon
completion of the permanent bridge, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Detour Aggregate Subbase, Detour Aggregate Base and Detour Bituminous

Concrete will be measured by the cubic meter, as placed and compacted to the
required density, within the lines, grades and thickness shown on the plans, specified
or directed by the engineer. No measurement will be made for overdepth on areas of
pavement placed outside authorized limits. Separate measurement for prime and tack
coats will not be made as they are considered subsidiary to the detour bituminous
concrete.

9.02.7 PAYMENT.

9.02.7.1 General. The amount of completed and accepted Work measured as

provided above will be paid for at the contract unit prices specified in the Bill of
Quantities for the various traffic control devices and detour construction, which prices
shall be full compensation for furnishing, installing, maintaining, relocating, replacing
and removing as necessary, and other items necessary for the proper completion of the
Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General
Specifications. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications, all temporary
traffic control devices shall become the property of the contractor upon the completion
of the work.

9.02.7.2 Payment Schedule. All traffic control devices, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer, shall be delivered to the project site prior to payment of the first
monthly certificate.

1. Traffic control management lump sum will be paid as follows:

18
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

(1) Fifty percent (50%) of the lump sum will be paid after all the traffic control
devices are installed on the project.

(2) Payment on the remaining fifty percent (50%) of the lump sum will be
prorated based on the total work completed.

2. Partial payments for all other traffic control devices, including detour aggregate
subbase, aggregate base and bituminous concrete, except those measured by the
hours, will be paid as follows:

(1) Fifty percent (50%) of the bid price will be paid when the item is installed on
the project.

(2) The remaining fifty percent (50%) of the bid price will be paid upon release
of the item from the project by the Engineer.

Detour Bridge, when included in the Bill of Quantities, will be paid by the square
meter. Seventy-five percent (75%) of the square meter price will be paid upon
completion of the Detour Bridge to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The remaining
twenty-five percent (25%) of the square meter price will be paid upon removal of the
bridge and restoration of the site to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Chevrons will be paid for, based upon its support, with fixed support chevrons being
paid under Pay Item No. 90222 and flexible support chevrons being paid under Pay
Item No. 9022704.

9.02.7.3 Deductions for Noncompliance. The following deductions from the

Contractor's payments will be made by the Engineer whenever deficiencies are
uncorrected. Deductions will continue until deficiencies are eliminated.

Isolated deficiencies in traffic control procedures occur when the Contractor fails to
maintain specific signs, replace missing, damaged or destroyed traffic control devices,
maintain detours properly, promptly remove pavement markings, or use safety vests.
Deduction per calendar day beginning the day after written notice is provided to the
Contractor to correct the isolated deficiencies: two thousand Saudi Riyals (SR 2000) for
a maximum of ten (10) days. If the isolated deficiencies have not been corrected by the
end of the ten (10) day period the Engineer shall issue a "Stop Work" order which will
not be rescinded until the deficiencies have been corrected. All deductions shall
continue to be assessed until the corrections are made.

Chronic deficiencies occur when the Contractor accumulates isolated deficiencies

along a single detour within the project or has repeated isolated deficiencies throughout
the project. Deduction per calendar day beginning the day after written notice is
provided to the Contractor: Five thousand Saudi Riyals (SR 5000) for a maximum of ten
(10) days. If the chronic deficiencies have not been corrected by the end of the ten (10)
day period the Engineer shall issue a "Stop Work" order which will not be rescinded until

19
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

the corrections have been made. All deductions will continue to be assessed until the
corrections are made.

A serious accident or life-threatening condition, such as failure to taper or place a

portable impact attenuator at a barrier terminal, or placing unconnected pieces or
sections of portable New Jersey or similar concrete barrier, is one within the
Contractor's control which the Contractor fails to recognize and correct immediately.
Deduction per day beginning on the day written notice is provided to the Contractor:
ten thousand Saudi Riyals (SR 10,000) for a maximum of four (4) days. If the serious
accident or life threatening condition has not been corrected by the end of the four (4)
day period the Engineer shall issue a "Stop Work" order which will not be rescinded until
the corrections have been made. All deductions will continue to be assessed until the
corrections are made.

Deductions will not be made to the contract items for traffic control but will be
applied against the total amount earned for the Work accomplished to date.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

90201 Traffic Control Management Lump Sum

90202 Flashing Warning Arrow Panel Unit

9020201 Flashing Warning Arrow Panel, Type A Unit

9020202 Flashing Warning Arrow Panel, Type B Unit

9020203 Flashing Warning Arrow Panel, Type C Unit

90203 Barricade Unit

9020301 Barricade, Type 1 Unit

9020302 Barricade, Type II Unit

90204 Traffic Cone and Tubular Markers Unit

90205 Temporary Sign Square Meter

90206 Plastic Traffic drum Unit

90207 Flagger Hour

90208 Pilot Car Hour

90209 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barrier Linear Meter

9020901 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barrier, Concrete Linear Meter

9020902 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barrier, Triton Linear Meter

9020903 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barrier, (Type), Linear Meter

20
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

90210 Moving Crashworthy Safety Barrier Linear Meter

90211 Remove and Reset Portable Impact Attenuator Unit

90212 Temporary Guardrail Linear Meter

90213 Truck Mounted Attenuator Unit

90214 Portable Impact Attenuator Unit

9021401 Portable Impact Attenuator, G.R.E.A.T. Unit

9021402 Portable Impact Attenuator, ET-2000 Unit

9021403 Portable Impact Attenuator, Sand barrels Unit

9021404 Portable Impact Attenuator, (type) Unit

90215 Temporary Pavement Markings Linear Meter

90216 Temporary Pavement Markings, Symbols and Letters Square Meter

90217 Temporary Pavement Markings, Symbols and Letters Unit

90218 Temporary Raised Pavement Markers Unit

90219 Temporary Rumble Strips, Type B Square Meter

90220 Temporary Speed Bumps Square Meter

90221 Vertical Panel Unit

90222 Chevron Unit

90223 Warning Light, Type A, B or C Unit

90224 Hazard Identification Beacon Unit

90225 Temporary Variable Message Sign Unit

90226 Temporary Traffic Signal Unit

90227 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support Unit

9022701 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support, Opposing Traffic Unit

Lane Divider

9022702 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support, Construction Unit

Object Panel

9022703 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support, Vertical Panel Unit

9022704 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support, Chevron Unit

Alignment

9022705 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support, Tubular Unit

Channelizer

90228 Detour Bridge Square Meter

21
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

90229 Aggregate Subbase for Detours Cubic Meter

90230 Aggregate Base for Detours Cubic Meter

90231 Bituminous Concrete for Detours Cubic Meter

22
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 9.03 - TRAFFIC MARKINGS

9.03.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of furnishing and applying

retroreflectorized white and yellow traffic paint lines; thermoplastic retroreflectorized
white and yellow traffic paint lines; epoxy thermoplastic retroreflectorized white and
yellow traffic paint lines; retroreflectorized painted, thermoplastic retroreflectorized
painted and preformed traffic control markings; and retroreflective and ceramic raised
pavement markers in accordance with these specifications, at the locations shown on
the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The paint and marker application equipment
shall be shielded with a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) or shadow vehicle equipped
with a TMA.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

White Traffic Lines
Yellow Traffic Lines
Traffic Control Markings
Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers
Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers

9.03.2 MATERIALS.

9.03.2.1 Retroreflectorized Traffic Lines. Retroreflectorized paint shall consist

of a ready-mixture of binder, white or yellow pigment, and filler specifically compounded
for application and adhesion to finished paved areas. The paint shall be
retroreflectorized by adding retroreflective glass spheres before the paint film dries or
sets, using drop-on or pressurized methods. Retroreflectorized white and yellow lines
shall be produced from paint conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 248, Type
F.
The surface application glass spheres shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 247, Type I.

9.03.2.2 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Lines. Retroreflectorized

thermoplastic lines shall consist of a mixture of binder, white or yellow pigment, glass
spheres, filler, and other materials in granular form such as light colored silica sand or
quartz specifically compounded for traffic paint that is to be applied to the pavement in
a molten state by mechanical means with surface application of glass beads. Upon
cooling to normal pavement temperature, this material shall produce an adherent
retroreflectorized paint line of specified thickness capable of resisting deformation by
traffic. The minimum softening point of the material shall exceed ninety-two degrees
Celsius (92o C).

White and yellow thermoplastic paint shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 249 except that the titanium dioxide content shall be ten percent (10%) maximum as
listed in Table 9.03-1.

23
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 9.03-1 COMPOSITION

COMPONENT WHITE YELLOW

Binder 18.0 min 18.0 min
Glass beads 30-40 30-40
Titanium dioxide 10.0 min -----
Calcium carbonate & inert fillers 42.0 max See Note
Yellow pigments ----- See Note

NOTE: Amount of yellow pigment, calcium carbonate and inert fillers shall be at the
option of the manufacturer, providing all other requirements of this specification are met.

Surface application glass spheres shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 247,
Type I, except the gradation shall conform to the following:

Standard Sieve SizePercent Passing by Weight

1.70 mm (No. 12)100
0.600 mm (No. 30)85-100
0.425 mm (No. 40)45-100
0.300 mm (No. 50)10-45
0.180 mm (No. 80) 0-20
0.150 mm (No. 100) 0-5

Pre-mix glass spheres shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Crushing Resistance. The chemical composition when tested in accordance with

the soda lime glass test - BS 6088 - 1981 shall yield a minimum one and five-tenths
(1.5) Refractive Index.

2. Roundness. A minimum of seventy-five percent (75%) shall be true spheres when

tested in accordance with ASTM D 1155. Not less than seventy percent (70%) of the
spheres of each sieve size shall be free from imperfections of all types, including film,
scratches, pits, clusters and opaqueness.

3. Index of Refraction. The spheres mixed into the material shall have a minimum index
of refraction of not less than one and fifty hundredths (1.50) when tested by the liquid
immersion method at twenty-five degrees Celsius (25o C), and the spheres
automatically applied to the surface of the stripe shall have a minimum index of
refraction of not less than one and five tenths (1.5) when tested by the liquid immersion
method at twenty-five degrees Celsius (25o C).

4. Gradation. When tested in accordance with ASTM D 1214, the beads used in the
thermoplastic material compounding shall conform to the following gradation:
24
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Standard Sieve SizePercent Passing by Weight

1.70 mm (No. 12)100
0.180 mm (No. 80) 0-5

5. Chemical Resistance. The glass spheres shall withstand immersion in water and
acids without undergoing noticeable corrosion or etching, and shall not be darkened or
otherwise noticeably decomposed by sulfides. The tests for chemical resistance shall
consist of one (1) hour immersion in water and in corrosive agents followed by
microscopic examination. A three (3) to five (5) gram sample shall be placed in each
of three (3) glass beakers or porcelain dishes and one (1) covered with distilled water,
one (1) with a three (3) N solution of sulfuric acid and the last with a solution of fifty
percent (50%) sodium sulfide, forty-eight percent (48%) distilled water, and two percent
(2%) Aerosol 1B or similar wetting agent. At the end of the one (1) hour immersion, no
darkening, hazing or other evidence of instability shall be noticeable when examined
microscopically.

6. Silica Content. The silica content (Si O 2) of the spheres shall be sixty percent (60%)
plus or minus five percent (5%) when tested in accordance with U.S. Federal Test
Method 141a.

9.03.2.3 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Lines (ETP Lines).

9.03.2.3.1 General. ETP lines shall consist of a formulation of two (2) epoxy
resins: one solid, one liquid in a sixty (60) to forty (40) ratio by weight; calcium
carbonate and inert fillers, glass beads, and either titanium dioxide pigment for the white
formulation or silica encapsulated lead chromate pigment for the yellow formulation.

9.03.2.3.2 Epoxy Resins. The liquid and solid resins shall be condensation
products of bisphenol A and epichlorohydrin having the properties listed in Table 9.03-2.

TABLE 9.03-2

Liquid Epoxy Resin Solid Epoxy Resin

Average Difference* Average Difference*
Viscosity, cps 48
degrees C, 20 RPM 680-810 10 - -
232 degrees C,
10 RPM - - 1300-2600 75
Epoxide Equiv.
Wt.(gm./equiv.) 180-196 10 1600-2300 50

*Between two replicates.

9.03.2.3.3 Titanium Dioxide. The titanium dioxide shall conform to ASTM D

476, Type II. The oil absorption shall be between thirteen (13) and thirty (30) grams oil

25
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

per one hundred (100) grams pigment, with a maximum deviation between replicate
samples of one (1.0).

9.03.2.3.4 Calcium Carbonate. The calcium carbonate shall conform to ASTM

D 1199, Type GC, Grade I, with a dry brightness no less than ninety-one percent (91%).
The oil absorption shall be between nine (9) and twenty-one (21) grams oil per one
hundred (100) grams pigment, with a maximum deviation between replicate samples
of one (1.0).

9.03.2.3.5 Lead Chromate. The lead chromate shall be refractory type, silica
encapsulated, and with no additive surface treatment. When tested in accordance with
ASTM D 1208 for determining the pH using two and five tenths (2.5) grams of pigment
in fifty (50) millimeters water and ASTM D 153 for determining the specific gravity of the
pigment and ASTM D 444 for determining the lead chromate shall have the properties
listed in Table 9.03-3.

TABLE 9.03 - 3

Maximum
Deviation Between
Minimum Maximum Replicates
pH in 5 degrees
water-slurry 7.0 9.0 0.2
Specific gravity 3.8 4.5 0.01
Lead, percent by
weight 44 50 0.5
Chromate (CrO4),
percent by weight 17 27 0.6
Chromium (CR),
percent by weight 7.6 12.1 0.5

9.03.2.3.6 Glass Beads. The glass beads shall conform to ASTM D 2205, Type
I, except that the gradation when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1214 shall be as
follows:

Standard Sieve SizePercent Passing by Weight

0.85 mm (No. 20) 100
0.60 mm (No. 30)79-100
0.30 mm (No. 50)15-60
0.18 mm (No. 80) 0-15

26
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

9.03.2.4 Retroreflectorized Traffic Control Markings, Retroreflectorized

Thermoplastic Traffic Control Markings and Retroreflectorized Epoxy
Thermoplastic Traffic Control Markings. Materials shall conform to the requirements
for Retroreflectorized Traffic Lines and Retroflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Lines and
Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Lines, respectively, as cited above.

9.03.2.5 Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers.

9.03.2.5.1 General. All Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers used in the

Kingdom shall be prequalified products, approved by the Ministry based on these
General Specifications and successful trial usage under extreme conditions. They shall
be applied in accordance with the M.O.C. Road Services Department standard marking
details for Raised Pavement Markers (RPM).

Color indications of Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers shall be as shown

on the plans or ordered by the Engineer.

Colormetric characteristics will be accepted based on comparison with MOC

standards. If there are doubts as to acceptability, characteristics will be tested by the
Ministry and approved based on standard required trichromatic coordinates tested in
accordance with ASTM E 308.

9.03.2.5.2 Type A Markers (Large Cateye Road Studs). Type A markers

shall consist of a mountable aluminum alloy (LM6 or LM24) casting approximately one
hundred fifty (150) millimeters by one hundred fifty (150) millimeters and twenty three
(23) millimeters high. The stud anchor shall be aluminum, approximately six (6)
centimeters long and two and five tenths (2.5) centimeters in diameter. The stud shall
be deformed or slotted to resist pullout and rotational displacement. The Type A
markers shall withstand a tensile stress of between two hundred seventy five and two
hundred eighty five (275-285) N/mm2 with a Brinell Hardness of between fifty five and
sixty (55-60).

Each marker shall have one (1) or two (2) retroreflecting faces as ordered. Each
retroreflecting surface shall have four (4) fifteen (15) millimeter diameter discs of seven
(7) bi-convex lenses or one stimsonite prismatic face totalling twenty one (21) square
centimeters in area. Each retroreflecting surface shall meet the minimum reflectance
requirements of Table 9.03-4.

27
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 9.03-4
Retroreflectance Requirements for
Types A and B Retroreflective
Raised Pavement Markers

Minimum Coefficient of (Retroreflected) Luminous Intensity (RI)

Candelas per footcandle (Millicandelas per lux)
Observation Entrance
Angle ° (rad) Angle ° (rad) White (a) Amber Red

0.2 (0.003) 0 (0) 3.0 (279) 1.8 (167) 0.75 (70)

0.2 (0.003) 20 (0.35) 1.2 (112) 0.72 (67) 0.30 (28)

(a)
Crystal, clear, or colorless are acceptable color designations.

Notes: 1Observation angle shall mean the angle at the retroreflector between the
observer's line of sight and the axis of the incident light beam. 2Entrance angle shall
mean the angle at the retroreflector between the direction of light incident on it and the
direction of the retroreflector axis.

9.03.2.5.3 Type B Markers (Small Cateye Road Studs). Type B markers

shall consist of an impact-resistant, smooth, pressure-molded mountable aluminum
alloy casting approximately one hundred fifteen (115) millimeters by one hundred fifteen
(115) millimeters and twenty three (23) millimeters high. The slope of the retroreflecting
face shall be thirty (30) degrees. The stud anchor shall be aluminum, a minimum of six
(6) centimeters long and three two and five tenths (2.5) centimeters in diameter. The
stud shall be deformed or slotted to resist pullout and rotational displacement. The
Type B markers shall withstand a tensile stress of between two hundred seventy five
and two hundred eighty five (275-285) N/mm2 with a Brinell hardness of between fifty
five and sixty (55-60).

Each marker shall have one (1) or two (2) retroreflecting faces as ordered. Each
reflecting face shall have three (3) 15 millimeter diameter discs of seven (7) bi-convex
lenses or one stimsonite prismatic face totaling twenty one (21) square centimeters in
area. Each retroreflecting face shall meet the minimum retroreflectance requirements
of Table 9.03-4.

9.03.2.5.4 Type C Markers (Plain Prismatic Retroreflectors). Type C

markers shall consist of a methyl methacrylate or suitably compounded acrylonitrile
butadiene styrene (ABS) shell filled with a mixture of an inert thermosetting compound
and filler material approximately ten (10) centimeters by ten (10) centimeters. The
exterior surface of the shell shall be smooth and contain one (1) or two (2) methyl
methacrylate prismatic retroreflector faces as required. The retroreflective lens shall
not contain any voids or air space and the back of the lens shall be metalized. The
shell shall be fabricated in a manner that will provide a mechanical interlock between
the thermosetting compound and the shell. The thermosetting compound shall bond
directly to the backside of the metalized lens surface. The base of the marker shall not
28
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

deviate from a flat surface by more than two (2) millimeters, shall be rough textured,
and free from gloss or substances which may reduce its bond to the adhesive.

The retroreflective markers shall withstand a load of one thousand (1000)

kilograms. Such test load shall be applied at the center of the marker by a two and five
tenths (2.5) centimeter diameter solid cylinder while the marker is supported on a seven
and five tenths (7.5) centimeter inside diameter hollow cylinder.

Type C markers shall meet the minimum retroreflectance requirements of Table

9.03-5.

TABLE 9.03-5
RETROREFLECTANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR
TYPE C Retroreflective
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
Minimum Coefficient of
Luminous Intensity (RI)
Milli Candelas per Lux)
Clear
or
Red White Amber
Observation Angle1 Entrance Angle2
0.22G 0G 280 70 170
0.22G 22G 110 28 67

Notes: 1Observation angle shall mean the angle at the retroreflector between the
observer's line of sight and the axis of the incident light beam. 2Entrance angle shall
mean the angle at the retroreflector between the direction of light incident on it and the
direction of the retroreflector axis.

9.03.2.6 Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers.

9.03.2.6.1 General. Ceramic raised pavement markers shall consist of a heat-

fired, vitreous, ceramic base, and a heat-fired, opaque, glazed surface to produce the
properties required in these specifications. The markers shall be produced from any
suitable combination of intimately mixed clays, shales, talcs, flints, feldspars, or other
inorganic material which will meet the properties herein required. The markers shall be
thoroughly and evenly marked and free from defects which effect appearance or
serviceability.

The bottoms of the ceramic markers shall be free from gloss or glaze and shall
have a number of integrally formed protrusions (comparable to a fine grained
sandpaper) projecting from the surface in a uniform pattern of parallel rows. The tips
of the protrusions shall not deviate more than one and three tenths (1.3) millimeters
from a flat surface. Each protrusion shall have a face parallel to the bottom of the

29
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

marker. To facilitate forming and mold release, the sides of each protrusion may be
tapered. This taper shall not exceed seventeen (17) grads from perpendicular to the
marker bottom.

9.03.2.6.2 Finish. The top surface of the marker shall be convex and the
radius of curvature shall be between nine (9) and fifteen (15) centimeters except that
the radius of the centimeter nearest the edge may be less. Any change in curvature
shall be gradual. The top and sides shall be smooth and free of mold marks, pits,
indentations, air bubbles, or other objectionable marks or discolorations.

9.03.2.6.3 Physical Requirements.

- Glaze Thickness 0.18 mm minimum

- Height (Total) 19 +/- 2 mm
- Height (Lip) 4.0 to 8 mm
- Hardness (Moh) 6 minimum
- Diameter 101 +/- 2 mm

- Directional retroreflectance
(white markers only)
Glazed surface 75 minimum
Body of marker 65 minimum

- Yellowness index
(white markers only)
Glazed surface 7 maximum
Body of marker 12 maximum

- Color (yellow markers only)

Purity 76% to 96%
Dominant wave length 0.579 to 0.585 mm
Total luminous
retroreflectance
(Y value X 100) 41 minimum

- Autoclave resistance
(ASTM C 424) Glaze shall not spall, craze, or peel

- Strength 680 Kilograms minimum

- Water absorption
(ASTM C-373) 2.0% maximum

9.03.2.7 Adhesive. The retroreflective and ceramic raised pavement markers

shall be secured by a bituminous compound for use in high temperature
climates. The bituminous compound shall be selected and used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

30
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Only bituminous adhesive, consisting of an asphaltic material with a

homogeneously mixed mineral filler, shall be used on new bituminous wearing
surfaces. The adhesive shall be suitable for application when the road surface and
marker temperatures are in the range of four to seventy degrees Celsius (4° to 70°
C). The adhesive properties shall not deteriorate when heated to and applied at
temperatures up to two hundred twenty degrees Celsius (220° C ), using either air
or oil jacketed melters. The material shall not contain rubber polymers, since the
necessary application temperatures may cause decomposition. Adhesive asphalt
and filler properties shall be the manufacturer’s standard for the intended purpose
and environment and subject to the Engineer’s approval. On stiffer (seasoned)
pavements, epoxy adhesives may be used if so recommended by the marker
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Two (2) component epoxy resin
adhesive, conforming to AASHTO M237, Class I shall be applicable.

In either case bituminous or epoxy adhesive, only materials recommended by the

marker manufacturer shall be used.

9.03.3 EQUIPMENT.

9.03.3.1 General. The applicating equipment to be used on roadway installations

shall consist of either truck-mounted units, motorized ride-on equipment, or manually
pushed equipment, depending on the type of lines or markings required. The truck-
mounted or motorized ride-on units for centerlines, lane lines, and edgelines shall
consist of a mobile self-contained unit carrying its own material capable of operating at
a minimum speed of eight (8) kilometers per hour while applying paint. The hand
applicator equipment shall be sufficiently maneuverable to install centerlines, lane lines,
edge lines, gore striping, turn lines, crosswalks, stop bars, arrows, and legends.

Spray equipment shall be capable of satisfactorily applying the paint under pressure
with a uniformity of feed through nozzles spraying directly upon the pavement. Each
paint tank shall be equipped with satisfactory cut-off valves which apply broken or skip
lines automatically. Each nozzle shall have a mechanical bead dispenser that will
operate simultaneously with the spray nozzle and distribute the beads in a uniform
pattern at the rate specified. Each nozzle also be equipped with suitable line guides
consisting of metallic shrouds or air blasts. The machine shall provide a method for
cleaning the surface of dust just prior to paint placement. The applicating equipment
shall be mobile and maneuverable to the extent that straight lines can be followed and
normal curves can be made in a true arc. The equipment operator shall be located in
such a position as to enable full visibility of the striping apparatus.

9.03.3.2 Retroreflectorized Traffic Lines and Markings Application Equipment.

The spray machine shall have an attachment that will permit accurate regulation of the
rate of application and a tachometer or other approved device to insure uniform paint
application at the designated rate.

It shall be adjustable for applying one (1) or two (2) adjacent lines simultaneously
along the centerline as may be required. The operation of the unit shall be such that

31
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

paint will not be spattered or blown on another stripe. The unit shall be so designed
that the paint will be properly agitated while in operation.

9.03.3.3 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Lines and Markings

Application Equipment. The application equipment shall be especially designed for
placing the plastic material in a hot molten state on the pavement, utilizing either an
extrusion or spray method. Equipment shall have the capability of providing continuous
mixing and agitation of the material while maintaining the material at the proper
placement temperature in a continuous stripe of uniform thickness and width. The use
of direct flame heat will not be allowed in any heating operation.

A glass sphere top dressing shall be applied to the completed thermoplastic stripe
by an automatic glass sphere dispenser attached to the stripping machine in such a
manner that the spheres are applied to the molten thermoplastic material immediately
after it has been applied. The sphere dispenser shall utilize pressure type spray guns
which will embed the spheres into the stripe surface to at least one-half (1/2) the sphere
diameter. The sphere dispenser shall be equipped with an automatic cut-off
synchronized with the cut-off of the thermoplastic material.

Hand equipment shall be permitted only for markings, including arrows, crosswalks,
stop bars, symbols, and legends, and have sufficient capacity to hold seven hundred
(700) kilograms of molten material and be as maneuverable as required.

9.03.3.4 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Lines and Markings

Application Equipment.

9.03.3.4.1 General. The equipment shall be constructed to provide continuous

mixing, agitation, and indirect oil jacketed heating of the material. The equipment shall
be designed to apply ETP marking material and retroreflective glass spheres in
continuous and skip line patterns.

9.03.3.4.2 Pressure Tank. The equipment shall be equipped with a pressure

tank, mixer(s), and heating equipment of such capacity to maintain the ETP at a
minimum temperature of two hundred twenty-five degrees Celsius (225o C). The
heating equipment shall surround the pressure tank and consist of a direct
thermostatically controlled heat transfer system medium. Heating by direct flame shall
not be allowed.

9.03.3.4.3 Spray System. The equipment shall be equipped with a low

pressure spray system. Atomizing air may be used provided it is heated to a minimum
of one hundred seventy-five degrees (175o C). All spray lines and appurtenances
leading from the heated pressure tank to the spray nozzle shall be fully insulated or
suitably heated so as to allow heated ETP material to leave the spray gun at a minimum
temperature of two hundred twenty-five degrees Celsius (225o C).

9.03.3.5 Retroreflective and Ceramic Raised Pavement Marker Application

Equipment. If epoxy or bituminous adhesive is to be hand-mixed, all containers and
stripping devices shall be clean before mixing is begun. Epoxy or bituminous adhesive

32
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

automatic mixing equipment shall be maintained in a sound mechanical condition, and

the mixing head shall be cleaned whenever the steady progress of the Work is halted
for any extended period of time. The allowable delays shall be consistent with the pot
life of the epoxy or bituminous adhesive system being used. Automatic mixing devices
shall be equipped in such a manner that the separate components are delivered to the
mixing head at the specified ratio by volume. The lines feeding the mixing head shall
be equipped with suitable valves that will allow samples to be taken for checking the
ratio of each component. The machine shall be capable of metering the amount of
adhesive required to affix each marker to the pavement.

9.03.4 CONSTRUCTION.

9.03.4.1 General. The portion of the highway surface to which the lines, markings,
or markers are to be attached shall be dry and free of dirt, existing paint lines, curing
compound, grease, oil, moisture, loose or unsound layers, and any other material which
would adversely affect the bond. The areas shall be thoroughly clean, using whatever
equipment is necessary to clean the pavement thoroughly without damaging the
surface, taking particular care to remove all vegetation, loose soil, and other foreign
substances from areas where edge stripping is to be applied. Where necessary, the
surface shall be wet with a water jet and scrubbed to dislodge all foreign material. After
washing, the surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly and any film of dried mud
apparent after surface drying shall be removed before application of paint. Lines,
markings, or markers shall be applied as closely as practicable after the surface has
been cleaned and dried and the Engineer has given the approval to proceed. Costs for
cleaning the surface and removing existing paint lines shall be included in the contract
unit prices of the traffic lines, markings, and markers pay items.

The Engineer will not give his permission to proceed when (1) there is any moisture
on the pavement surface or the air is misty, (2) the surface temperature of the
pavement is below ten degrees Celsius (10 degrees C), (3) wind or other conditions
cause a film of dust to be deposited on the surface after cleaning and before
installation, or (4) other conditions exist that, in the opinion of the Engineer, would
displace, damage, or affect the bonding of the material to the pavement surface. Any
installation placed in violation of the above conditions, or damaged due to water or rain
within fifteen (15) minutes after application, shall be removed and replaced without
additional compensation.

For temporary striping, the weather conditions noted above may be waived at the
Engineer's discretion to expedite installation and assure the safety of traffic handling.

Prior to striping two-way roadways, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed survey
of the roadway to identify the limits of no-passing zones in accordance with the
requirements of the M.U.T.C.D. Such zones shall be clearly marked for the striping
crew. A report of the survey shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least two
(2) weeks prior to scheduled striping. No centerline striping shall proceed until the
Engineer approves the no-passing zones or modifies them as applicable.

33
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

All lines, markings, and markers shall be placed in accordance with the
requirements of these General Specifications, the detailed plans, the Special
Specifications and the M.O.C. Standard Markings Manual (TS-03).

The centerline lines of the width shown on the plans shall be of six (6) meter length,
with a twelve (12) meter space between line segments, or as otherwise noted on the
plans or directed by the Engineer. No-passing lines shall be solid white of the width
shown on the plans, located as directed by the Engineer. Intersection markings, special
pavement markings, and obstruction hazard zone markings shall be as shown on the
plans and/or as directed by the Engineer. Edge lines, markings and markers shall not
be applied prior to completion of shoulders. The Contractor shall mark the control
points necessary for the placing of the new lines, markings, and markers based on
surveyed controls or other controls approved by the Engineer. On irregular sections of
roadway, the location of edge striping shall be adjusted so as to fall continuously and
uniformly on the pavement.

9.03.4.2 Application. All traffic line and marker application equipment shall be
shielded with a Truck Mounted Attenuator (TMA) or a shadow vehicle equipped with a
TMA. The Contractor shall demonstrate the capability of his equipment and operators
to produce acceptable lines and markings through the successful completion of a
preapplication test. The preapplication test shall be performed on roadway surfaces
other than those to receive the application to be paid for under the Bill of Quantities
Item(s). It shall include verification of the placement of lines and markings of
acceptable width, thickness and workmanship.

9.03.4.2.1 Retroreflectorized Traffic Lines and Markings. When the

roadway is open to traffic, painting shall be done only during daylight hours, and all
painted areas shall be dry enough, before sunset, to permit crossing by traffic without
tracking. All protective devices shall be removed no later than sunset to allow free
movement of traffic at night.

Traffic paint shall be thoroughly mixed in the shipping container before placing
in the machine tank. The paint machine tanks, connections, and spray nozzles shall
be thoroughly cleaned with thinner before starting each day's Work.

The minimum wet film thickness for all painted areas shall be four tenths (0.4)
millimeter (unbeaded).

The rate of application for ten (10) centimeter width paint lines shall be approved
by the Engineer subject to the following minimums:

Solid Traffic Paint Lines:

Rate of Application - forty (40) liters per kilometer minimum

(smooth surface)
- fifty (50) liters per kilometer minimum
(rough surface)

34
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Skip Traffic Paint Lines - six (6) meter line - twelve (12) meter gap

Rate of Application - fourteen and five tenths (14.5) liters per

kilometer minimum

Minimum rates shall be modified proportionately for varying widths and lengths
of stripes.

The measured application rate shall not vary from the approved rate by more
than five percent (5%) in any kilometer. At any point where a check indicates a
variation in excess of five percent (5%), the Work shall be stopped and the equipment
adjusted or replaced. Identifiable areas of deficiency shall be corrected.

Immediately following the application of the paint, a uniform application of glass

beads shall be applied at a rate of six tenths (0.6) to seven tenths (0.7) kilogram per liter
of paint.

9.03.4.2.2 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Lines and Markings.

If required by the Engineer, in addition to or in lieu of the pavement cleaning
requirements contained in Paragraph 9.02.4.1 "General" in these General
Specifications , the surface of new and existing asphalt concrete pavement shall be
washed with detergent solution followed by a water rinse to remove any clay coating or
accumulation of grease. On new and existing Portland cement concrete, the surface
shall be abrasive blast cleaned to remove laitance, curing seal, or other foreign
material.

The Contractor shall apply a binder-sealer material prior to the actual

thermoplastic installation on Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (PCCP). The binder-
sealer material shall form, when applied with conventional mobile paint spraying
equipment, a continuous film over the pavement surface which will dry rapidly and
adhere to the pavement surface. The binder-sealer shall be dry before the
thermoplastic materials are applied. The binder-sealer shall be a product currently used
and recommended by the thermoplastic material manufacturer.

To insure optimum adhesion, the thermoplastic material shall be installed in a

molten state when the pavement and air temperatures are above ten degrees Celsius
(10oC.) at temperatures between two hundred and two hundred twenty degrees Celsius
(200-220oC). Thermoplastic material shall not be applied to a new bituminous concrete
pavement before it has been exposed to at least fourteen (14) days of use.

The computed (measured volume of material applied divided by the measured

area of application) thickness in any section of sprayed thermoplastic lines shall be not
less than two (2) millimeters. The computed overall average thickness of extruded
thermoplastic lines shall be not less than three and five tenths (3.5) millimeters. The
computed overall average thickness of the sprayed thermoplastic markings shall be not
less than three (3) millimeters.

35
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The completed stripes shall have the specified cross section, shall be
continuous and uniform in shape, and shall have clean and sharp dimensions. The
width of paint line specified shall be applied to the completed thermoplastic paint by an
automatic glass sphere dispenser attached to the striping machine in such a manner
that the spheres are applied to the molten thermoplastic material immediately after it
has been placed. The sphere dispenser shall utilize pressure type spray guns which
will embed the spheres into the stripe surface to at least one-half (1/2) the diameter at
the rate not less than six-tenths (0.6) kilogram per square meter. The sphere dispenser
shall be equipped with an automatic cut-off synchronized with the cut-off of the
thermoplastic material.

9.03.4.2.3 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Lines. The

above requirements for the retroreflectorized spray thermoplastic traffic lines and
markings shall apply to ETP, except that ETP shall be heated and sprayed at material
temperatures between two hundred twenty-five and two hundred thirty-five degrees
Celsius (225-235o C.) at the spray nozzle. ETP lines shall be applied at a thickness of
forty-five hundredths (0.45) millimeter with a tolerance of plus or minus five hundredths
(0.05) millimeter.

No binder-sealer material is required prior to epoxy thermoplastic application on

clean bituminous concrete pavement surfaces.

9.03.4.2.4 Retroreflective and Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers. In lieu

of the pavement cleaning requirements contained in Paragraph 9.03.4.1, "General" in
these General Specifications, the pavement surface to which retroreflective and ceramic
raised pavement markers are to be placed shall be thoroughly blast cleaned to remove
all materials which could adversely affect the bond of the adhesive. For road stud
markers, the hole for the stud shall be drilled slightly wider and deeper than the stud.
All debris from the hole shall be removed and any damage to the pavement surface
around the hole shall be repaired before installation of the marker. The stud hole shall
be completely filled with adhesive. The adhesive shall be placed uniformly on the
cleaned pavement surface or on the bottom of the marker in a quantity sufficient to
result in complete coverage of the area of contact of the marker and the pavement, with
no voids present and with a slight excess after the marker has been pressed in place.
The marker shall be placed in position and pressure applied until firm contact is made
with the pavement. Excess adhesive around the edge of the marker, excessive
adhesive on the pavement, and adhesive on the exposed surfaces of the marker shall
be immediately removed. Kerosene or other approved solvent shall be used to remove
excess adhesive such that the pavement is not damaged. The marker shall be
protected against impact until the adhesive has hardened.

Mixing of adhesive shall be performed in limited quantities such that the markers
shall be aligned and pressed in place within five (5) minutes after mixing the adhesive
components. Any mixed batch of adhesion which becomes so viscous that the
adhesive is not readily extruded from under the marker on application of slight pressure
shall not be used.

36
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

All markers shall be placed to the lines shown on the plans or established by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall mark the location where each marker is to be placed
and the marks shall be approved by the Engineer prior to beginning mixing operations.
Retroreflective raised pavement markers shall be placed in such a manner that the axis
of the marker is parallel to the roadway centerline.

No pavement markers shall be placed over longitudinal or transverse joints of

the pavement surface.

9.03.4.3 Protection of Traffic Lines, Markings and Markers. Immediately

following the application of the paint lines and markings in areas under public traffic,
traffic cones or other approved devices shall be placed alongside or over the line at
intervals not exceeding fifteen (15) meters, to remain in place until the line has dried to
such an extent that it will not be damaged by the tires of vehicles. Traffic shall be
prevented from crossing a wet traffic paint line and the Contractor shall use a sufficient
number of flaggers, barricades, or other protection for the wet line, particularly at
crossings, to prevent traffic from crossing the wet line. Sections of traffic paint line
which have been marred by traffic crossing them before they have cured shall be
repaired by the Contractor and the pavement cleaned outside the line without
additional compensation.

Raised markers shall be protected from all traffic for at least three (3) hours after
placement, when the average ambient temperature is thirteen degrees Celsius (13 o C)
or above; at least twenty-four (24) hours when said temperature is between four
degrees Celsius and thirteen degrees Celsius (4 to 13 o C); and at least forty-eight (48)
hours when said temperature is four degrees Celsius (4 o C) or below. The Engineer will
determine when the adhesive has set sufficiently to bear traffic. Regardless of the type
of adhesive used, markers shall not be placed under any of the following conditions:

1. The pavement or air temperature is zero degrees Celsius (0o C) or below;

2. The relative humidity of the air is greater than eighty percent (80%);
3. The pavement is not surface dry;
4. Before a new bituminous concrete pavement has been exposed to at least
fourteen (14) days of use.

Temporary barricades of the design shown in the plans, or as otherwise designated,

together with the signs shown for use therewith, shall be placed as shown with
reference to the pavement edges at the beginning and end of the section which the
Contractor proposes to work in one operation. As soon as Work is complete in one
section, the temporary barricades and cones shall be moved ahead to the next section.
No barricades or cones shall be left overnight. The equipment shall be so operated
that it will be unnecessary for public traffic to cross the newly placed material behind the
equipment in order to safely pass the equipment.

All protective and warning traffic control devices shall be in accordance with the
Ministry's Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (M.U.T.C.D.).

37
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

9.03.4.4 Surface Tolerances and Appearance. A tolerance of twelve (12)

millimeters over, or three (3) millimeters under, the specified line width shall be allowed,
provided the variation is gradual and does not detract from the general appearance of
the line. Segments of broken line may vary up to thirty (30) centimeters from the
specified length. Segments shall be square at each end and without mist or distortion.
Deviations form the control line of up to twenty-five (25) millimeters on tangents and
fifty (50) millimeters on curves will be applied, provided the deviation does not increase
or decrease at a rate of more than fifteen (15) millimeters in ten (10) meters. Lines that
do not meet these tolerances shall be removed and replaced without additional
compensation.
In all instances, when it is necessary to remove paint, it shall be done by means
satisfactory to the Engineer, which will not damage the underlying surface of the
pavement. When necessary to correct a deviation which exceeds the permissible
tolerance in alignment, that portion of the stripe so affected shall be removed plus an
additional five (5) meters in each direction, and a new stripe then painted in accordance
with these specifications.

9.03.5 SAMPLING AND TESTING.

All materials shall be shipped to the job site in undamaged, sealed original
packaging, clearly identifying each material as to name, color, manufacturer, batch
number, and date of manufacture. All materials shall be accompanied by certified test
results verifying compliance with all physical and chemical requirements of these
specifications. Retroreflective raised pavement markers shall be tested for
retroreflectance at the minimum rate of one (1) retroreflector tested per five hundred
(500) shipped.

All paint products and other materials designated by the Engineer shall be sampled
for testing. Sampling shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer. Materials shall be sampled in their original containers, except that bulk
shipments may be sampled and resealed as approved by the Engineer. All samples
shall be packaged for shipment as approved by the Engineer. Samples shall be
transported to the Ministry's Central Laboratory, or an approved independent laboratory
as designated by the Engineer. No materials shall be used until approved by the
Ministry.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all testing including those tests
designated by the Engineer to be performed at an independent laboratory.

9.03.6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

Traffic Lines and Traffic Control Markings shall be measured by the square meter
based on the dimensions shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer for all areas
of each type authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer.

Retroreflective and Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers shall be measured by the

unit based on the number required by the plans or ordered by the Engineer for each
type of markers of each authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer.

38
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

9.03.7 PAYMENT.

The amount of authorized, completed, and accepted Work, as measured above, will
be paid at the contract unit prices in the Bill of Quantities, which price shall include all
required materials, equipment, tools, labor, and all other items necessary for the proper
completion of the Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these
General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

90301 Reflectorized Traffic Lines Square Meter

9030101 Reflectorized White Traffic Lines Square Meter

9030102 Reflectorized Yellow Traffic Lines Square Meter

90302 Reflectorized Traffic Control Markings Square Meter

90303 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Lines Square Meter

9030301 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic White Traffic Lines Square Meter

9030302 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Yellow Traffic Lines Square Meter

90304 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Control Markings Square Meter

90305 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Lines Square Meter

9030501 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic White Traffic Lines Square Meter

9030502 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Yellow Traffic Lines Square Meter

90306 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Control Markings Square Meter

90307 Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers Unit

9030701 Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers, Type A Unit

9030702 Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers, Type B Unit

9030703 Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers, Type C Unit

90308 Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers Unit

39
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 9.04 - RUMBLE STRIPS AND SPEED BUMPS

9.04.1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION. This Work shall consist of the

construction of Speed Bumps, Rumble Strips, and Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips at
locations shown on the plans, in accordance with the specifications and in conformity
with the lines and grades shown on the plans or established by the Engineer. Speed
Bumps shall be used only on roadways with a posted speed of sixty-five (65) kilometers
per hour. Rumble strips may be used on either low speed or high speed roadways.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Speed Bumps
Rumble Strips
Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips
Milled Shoulder Rumble Strips

9.04.2 MATERIALS.

9.04.2.1 Tack Coat. Bituminous material for tack coat shall be rapid-curing grades
RC-70 or as directed by the Engineer, and shall conform to the requirements specified
in Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials" in these General Specifications.

9.04.2.2 Bituminous Mixture. The bituminous mixture for speed bumps shall
conform to the requirements specified in Section 4.05, "Bituminous Concrete
Pavement" for Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Class "C" complete or an
equivalent mixture as may be approved by the Engineer.

9.04.2.3 Concrete. Portland cement concrete for the Type A Rumble Strip shall
conform to Subsection 5.03.9, "Concrete for Minor Structures" in these General
Specifications.

9.04.2.4 Reinforcing Steel. The steel mesh for the Type A Rumble Strip shall be
the size shown on the plans and conform to the requirements specified in Section 5.02,
"Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

9.04.2.5 Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers. The ceramic raised pavement

markers for the Type B Rumble Strips shall be the size shown on the plans. The
markers shall conform to the requirements of Paragraph 9.03.2.6, "Ceramic Raised
Pavement Markers" in these General Specifications.

9.04.2.6 Adhesive. The adhesive used to secure ceramic raised pavement

markers shall be bituminous compound for use in high temperatures and conforming
to the requirements of the manufacturer.

9.04.2.7 Retroreflective Traffic Paint. The white traffic paint used to distinguish
the Speed Bumps shall conform to the requirements of Section 9.03, "Traffic Markings"
in these General Specifications for Retroreflectorized Traffic Control Markings.

40
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

9.04.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

9.04.3.1 Speed Bumps.

9.04.3.1.1 Surface Preparation. Immediately prior to the application of the

tack coat, the bituminous surface shall be cleaned free of all dirt, dust, and other foreign
substances which, in the opinion of the Engineer, would prevent proper bonding of the
tack coat. Two five hundred (500) +/- fifty (50) millimeters trenches shall be cut
transversely across the roadway with a motor grinder to wedge the speed bump into the
existing pavement and the beginning end of each speed bump as detailed in Drawing
Number TCD-2 in the M.O.C. "Highway Design Manual, Volume 4."

9.04.3.1.2 Application of Tack Coat. Immediately after the surface has been
cleaned and approved by the Engineer, the tack coat shall be applied to the area to
receive speed bumps. The bituminous material shall be applied by means of an
approved pressure distributor, or when approved by the Engineer, by means of
approved hand-spraying equipment which achieves a uniform mist type coverage
without blotches or streaks. The rate of application shall be approximately two tenths
(0.2) to three tenths (0.3) liter per square meter unless otherwise ordered by the
Engineer.

9.04.3.1.3 Placing Bituminous Mixture. When the tack coat has set and has
been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall place a speed bump form
conforming to the cross section in Standard Drawing TCD-2 in position. The hot
bituminous mixture shall be placed in the forms by approved hand methods and
consolidated by approved hand methods and struck flush with the top of the form.

9.04.3.1.4 Compaction of Bituminous Mixture. After the bituminous mixture

has been placed in the form and consolidated, the form shall be carefully lifted and
removed from the roadway and rolling operations shall be immediately started. Rolling
shall be performed with an approved pneumatic roller traveling parallel to the roadway
centerline initially and finally perpendicularly to centerline until the speed bump is
compacted to uniform cross section. The height of the speed bumps above the
pavement surface shall not exceed one hundred (100) millimeters.

9.04.3.2 Type A Rumble Strips.

9.04.3.2.1 Preparation. Type A (Concrete) Rumble Strips shall be installed

after the paving has been completed in accordance with the details in M.O.C. Standard
Drawing Number TCD-2. Locations of installation shall be staked as shown on the
plans or ordered by the Engineer. The pavement structure shall be removed by saw
cutting to a minimum depth of two hundred (200) millimeters for a distance along the
centerline of one and eight-tenths (1.8) meters. Underlying subgrade or base course
material shall be compacted to Type 100 compaction and moistened immediately prior
to concrete installation.

41
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

9.04.3.2.2 Concrete Rumble Strips. (Type A Concrete) rumble strips shall be

placed, vibrated, and screeded in accordance with the requirements of Section 5.08,
"Concrete Pavement" in these General Specifications. Machine placing and finishing
will not be required; however, portable screeds shall extend the full one and eight-tenths
(1.8) meter width of the installation (parallel to roadway centerline). The installation
shall be checked with a full width (parallel to centerline) straightedge before texturing.

9.04.3.2.3 Texturing. Immediately after initial texturing performed in

accordance with Paragraph 5.08.4.4, "Placing and Finishing" in these General
Specifications. The rumble texture shall be achieved using a template which will
produce the size, shape, and pattern of scalloped depressions shown in the M.O.C.
Standard Drawing TCD-2. Depression molds may be vibrated or otherwise forced into
the surface of the fresh concrete. The template shall form uniform depressions twenty
(20) to thirty (30) millimeters deep and seventy-five (75) millimeters between peaks.
Molds shall be designed to be withdrawn without damaging the edges of the
depression. As texturing progresses, the Contractor shall periodically check the top
surface of the concrete with a straightedge to be sure the template is not displacing the
mass of concrete.

The Contractor may propose alternate procedures/equipment for achieving the

required depressions. Such alternate procedures/equipment will be approved only after
having been demonstrated as achieving the desired results.

9.04.3.2.4 Edging. Either before or immediately after the depressions are

formed, the edges of the installation shall be finished in accordance with Paragraph
5.08.4.4, "Placing and Finishing" in these General Specifications.

9.04.3.2.5 Curing. Immediately after concreting operations are completed, the

installation shall be cured in accordance with Subparagraph 5.08.4.4.7, "Curing" in
these General Specifications. If curing compound is used, additional care shall be
taken that all vertical surfaces of depressions are adequately coated.

9.04.3.3 Type B Rumble Strips. Type B Rumble Strips are constructed by placing
Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers on existing bituminous concrete pavement. Raised
ceramic pavement markers for Type B Rumble Strips shall be installed in the geometric
pattern shown in the Standard Drawing TCD-2 in the M.O.C. Highway Design Manual,
Volume 4, with Paragraph 9.03.2.6, "Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers" in these
General Specifications.

9.04.3.4 Type C Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips, (Indented), and Type D

Scored Shoulder rumble Strips (Milled).

Description: Scored rumble strips consist of a narrow, continuous rumble strip

pattern located on the shoulder just outside of the edge line, and are useful in alerting
drivers who are drifting off the roadway due to inattention or being sleepy. There are
two types, indented and milled.

42
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Indented Type: This type shall be constructed by rolling patterned indentations into
new bituminous concrete highway shoulders using a specially modified roller with steel
bars welded to the drum, as shown in the contract drawings.

Milled Type: This type shall be constructed by milling patterned indentations into
new or existing bituminous concrete shoulders using small milling machines.

9.04.3.4.1 Equipment. Equipment used for installing indented shoulder rumble

strips may be either a vibratory self-propelled steel wheeled roller or a combination
vibratory self-propelled steel wheel-rubber tired roller. Only rubber tires that have
smooth or "slick" tread design shall be used.

The roller shall be equipped with a water system to moisten the drums and tires
sufficiently to prevent picking up bituminous material and shall weigh a minimum or six
(6) tons.

9.04.3.4.2 Roller Modification Options. The Contractor has the option of

utilizing the following roller modifications, provided that the specified depth and pattern
of indented shoulder rumble strip are obtained.

1. Semicircular Pipe Segments Roller Modification Option 1. Semicircular pipe

segments of approximately twenty-five (25) millimeters (one-half of fifty (50) millimeter
diameter pipe) reinforced with properly sized reinforcing steel bars to prevent flattening,
shall be continuously welded to the drum at twenty (20) to twenty-two (22) centimeter
intervals, with the rounded side away from the drum.

2. Steel Rods Roller Modification Option 2. Steel rods approximately twenty-

five (25) millimeters in diameter shall be continuously welded to the drum on twenty (20)
to twenty-two (22) centimeter intervals. The weld shall fill in the area between the roller
drum and the outside edge of the rod.

The steel rod or pipe segments shall be of such length as to result in at least six-
tenths (0.6) meter of full depth indented shoulder rumble strip as specified in the
contract.

Steel rod or pipe segment ends, beyond the six-tenths (0.6) meter full section,
may be tapered out to a maximum of one hundred fifty (150) millimeters to prevent
pavement tearing.

The properly modified drum may be added to a conventional roller, mounted so

that it can be hydraulically forced down onto the bituminous shoulder as needed.

Alternate proposals will be considered for approval if it can be demonstrated to

the satisfaction of the Engineer that the specified depth and pattern of indented
shoulder rumble strip can be obtained.

9.04.3.4.3 Alignment Control. Each roller shall be equipped with a guide that
extends in front of the roller and is clearly visible to the operator in order that proper

43
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

alignment of the completed indented shoulder rumble strip is obtained. Other suitable
guidance which provides consistent alignment acceptable to the Engineer may be
proposed.

9.04.3.4.4 General Requirements. The indented shoulder rumble strips shall

be clearly incised grooves of the dimensions and pattern shown in the contract.

The rumble strip indentations shall only be placed where called for in the
contract. This may require positioning by using planking or other methods, unless a
separate hydraulically operated drum is used.

Extreme care shall be used to avoid placing indentations at other locations.

Should this occur, the Contractor shall remove or obliterate the indented rumble strip
and restore the pavement to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

9.04.3.4.5 Placement Requirements. Indented shoulder rumble strips shall

be formed in one (1) pass of the roller.

Indented shoulder rumble strips shall be formed only when the bituminous
shoulder material is at the proper temperature to ensure that tearing does not occur and
to ensure that the depth and pattern of the indentations are being provided as specified.

Milled Type: This type shall be constructed by milling (cutting) a continuous

pattern of depressions into new or existing paved highway shoulders, using special
milling equipment.

1. Equipment. The equipment shall consist of a rotary type cutting head with
a maximum outside diameter of sixty (60) cm and will be a minimum of forty (40) cm
long. The cutting head shall have the cutting tips arranged in such a pattern as to
provide a relatively smooth cut (approximately 0.15 cm between peaks and valleys).
The cutting head(s) shall be on its own independent suspension from that of the power
unit to allow the tool to self align with the slope of the shoulder and/or any irregularities
in the shoulder surface. The cutting tool shall be equipped with suitable guidance so
as to provide consistent alignment of each cut in relation to the roadway, and to provide
uniformity and consistency throughout the project.

2. Placement. The milled rumble strips shall be placed so as to have the

finished dimensions of eighteen (18) cm (+/- 1.3 cm) wide in the direction of travel and
shall be a minimum of forty (40) cm long measured perpendicular to the direction of
travel. The depressions shall have a concave circular shape with a minimum one and
three tenths (1.3) cm depth at center (maximum allowable depth one and six tenths
(1.6) cm). The rumble strips shall be placed in relation to the roadway according to the
patterns shown in the contract drawings.

Pavement material resulting from the operations will become the property of the
contractor to use at his option on the project or removed and disposed of in a manner
approved by the Engineer.

44
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

The milled rumble strips shall only be placed where called for in the contract.
Should they be placed at incorrect locations, the contractor shall remove them and
restore the pavement to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

At the end of each working day, all equipment shall be removed to a location
where it does not present a hazard to traffic, the pavement shall be cleaned by
sweeping or flushing and the work area reopened to traffic.

9.04.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT.

9.04.4.1 Speed Bumps, Type A Rumble Strips and Type B Rumble Strips.
Speed Bumps, Type A Rumble Strips, and Type B Rumble Strips shall be measured
by the square meter for all Work authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer
based on the horizontal dimensions of the installations as shown in Volume 4 of the
M.O.C. HIGHWAY DESIGN MANUAL or modified on the plans or ordered by the
Engineer.

There shall be no measurement for pavement excavation required to construct Type A

Rumble Strips nor will such quantities be deducted from previously paid quantities of
pavement structure items. There shall be no separate measurement of the ceramic
raised pavement markers included in Type B Rumble Strips.

9.04.4.2 Type C Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips. Type C Indented Scored

Shoulder Rumble Strips will be measured longitudinally, parallel to the traveled way, for
each side of the roadway where strips are placed. The rumble strip measurement shall
begin at the transverse center of the first score and proceed along the centerline of the
rumble strip pattern to the center of the final score in the pattern.

Breaks in the rumble strip pattern for exits, principal intersections and other
interruptions in normal shoulder width will not be included in the measurement for
payment.

9.04.4.3 Type D Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips. Type D Milled Scored

Shoulder Rumble Strips will be measured longitudinally, parallel to the traveled way, for
each side of the roadway where the stripe are milled. Breaks in the rumble strip pattern
will not be included in the measurement for payment.

9.04.5 PAYMENT.

Rumble Strip and Speed Bump Items of Work, measured as provided above, will be
paid for at the contract unit price(s) as specified in the Bill of Quantities, which price(s)
shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, construction and for all labor,
equipment, tools, supplies and all other items necessary for the proper completion of
Work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General
Specifications.

45
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

90401 Speed Bumps Square Meter

90402 Rumble Strips Square Meter

9040201 Rumble Strips, Type A Square Meter

9040202 Rumble Strips, Type B Square Meter

9040203 Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips, Type C - Indented Linear Meter

9040204 Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips, Type D - Milled Linear Meter

46
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

SECTION 9.05 - HIGHWAY SIGNING

9.05.1 DESCRIPTION. This Work shall consist of furnishing and installing highway
signs, delineators, object markers, kilometer posts and support assemblies as shown
on the plans and in accordance with the specification or as directed by the Engineer.
All sign faces and lettering shall be in accordance with the Ministry Standards for Road
Safety Features, the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (M.U.T.C.D.), as shown
on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise shown in the plans or
noted in the Special Specifications, all signs shall be lettered in both Arabic and English.
This shall also include construction of concrete foundations for sign supports, gantries
and cantilevers and the fabrication, erection and finishing of steel gantry and cantilever
sign structures. The Work shall also include the construction, erection and relocation
of all temporary signing works required prior to construction, during construction and
prior to opening.

ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES

Highway Signs, Ground-Mounted
Highway Signs, Overhead
Sign Support - (Breakaway)
Sign Support - Overhead
Kilometer Post
Delineators
Reflectors
Object Markers

All overhead signs shall be either internally illuminated or retroreflectorized through

the use of high intensity retroreflective sheeting as per the M.O.C. M.U.T.C.D.

9.05.2 MATERIALS. Materials shall conform to the following requirements:

9.05.2.1 Concrete. Concrete for reinforced concrete footings shall conform to

Class B as specified in Paragraph 5.01.1 "Description" in these General Specifications.
Concrete to support single posts of small signs shall conform to Subsection 5.03.9,
"Concrete for Minor Structures" in these General Specifications.

9.05.2.2 Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements

of Section 5.02, "Reinforcing Steel" in these General Specifications.

9.05.2.3 Sign Supports. Posts, gantries and cantilever sign supports shall
conform to the requirements of the M.O.C. "Standards for Road Safety Features" and
M.O.C. Circular No. 747 dated 2/4/1410 Hegira, unless otherwise shown on the plans.

9.05.2.4 Steel Channels. Steel channels shall conform to the requirements of

Section 5.05, "Steel Structures and Miscellaneous Metal Work" in these General
Specifications.

9.05.2.5 Standard Industrial Sign Supports. Standard industrial steel sign

supports shall be fabricated from billet or rail steel conforming to Schedule 40 ASTM

47
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

A-120. Pipe posts shall be hot dipped galvanized according to ASTM A 123 after
yielding holes are drilled or punched with an absolute minimum outside diameter of
seventy-three (73) millimeters ASTM-A-120. Steel pipe and I.P.E. sign supports shall
have a slip base breakaway support in accordance with the M.O.C. Sign Erection
Standards Manual (TS-02). Signs requiring two (2) or three (3) posts shall use I.P.E.
posts in accordance with the M.O.C. Road Services Department "DIMENSIONING OF
SIGN POSTS AND FOOTINGS FOR DIRECTIONAL SIGNS."

9.05.2.6 Object Marker and Delineator Posts. The Contractor shall fabricate
object marker and delineator posts from steel, aluminum or G.I. pipe of seventy-five (75)
millimeters as specified M.O.C. TCD-03. Delineator posts may also be fabricated from
plastic.

9.05.2.6.1 Steel Posts. Furnish flanged U-channel steel posts weighing

approximately three kilograms per meter (3 kg/m) that conform to ASTM A 36.
Galvanize the posts according to ASTM A 123.

9.05.2.6.2 Aluminum Posts. Furnish standard shaped three (3) millimeter

thick aluminum posts conforming to ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6.

9.05.2.6.3 Plastic Posts. Furnish flexible delineator posts made with high
impact resistant polymer reflective material with a minimum area of seven (7)
centimeters wide.

9.05.2.7 Galvanizing. All steel supports, bolts, nuts and washers shall be zinc
coated in accordance with ASTM A 123. All bolts, nuts and washers shall be
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153.

9.05.2.8 Sign Panel Materials. Signboard construction shall conform to the

requirements of M.O.C. Standard Details as shown on the plans or as otherwise
approved by the Engineer and shall meet the following requirements:

9.05.2.8.1 Aluminum Alloy Panels, Sheets and Miscellaneous Hardware.

Aluminum alloy panels, sheets and miscellaneous hardware shall conform to ASTM B
209 or B 211 as appropriate, using alloy 6061-T6 or 5052-h38. All aluminum alloys
shall have a minimum tensile strength of two thousand five hundred (2,500) kilograms
per square centimeter and a minimum yield strength of two thousand (2,000) kilograms
per square centimeter.

9.05.2.8.2 Extruded Aluminum Panels. Extruded Aluminum Panels shall be

fabricated from aluminum Alloy 6063-T6 conforming to the requirements of ASTM B221
Panels and shall have a minimum thickness of two millimeters for sizes up to 762 X 762
millimeters. Larger panels shall have a minimum thickness of three millimeters.

Sheets for plain sign plates shall have a minimum thickness of three (3)
millimeters unless otherwise specified.

48
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

9.05.2.8.3 Steel Sheet Panels. Steel sheet panels shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 525, minimum two (2) millimeters thickness, unless otherwise
noted on the plans.

9.05.2.8.4 Stainless Steel Bolts, Washers and Self-Locking Nuts. These

items shall conform to ASTM A 276, Chromium Nickel Grade with a minimum yield of
two thousand (2,000) kilograms per square centimeter.

9.05.2.8.5 Vulcanized Fiber Washers. Fiber washers shall conform to ASTM

D 710, Gray, Commercial Grade, when shown on the plans.

9.05.2.8.6 Hard Rubber Washers. Hard rubber washers, when shown on the
plans, shall be as approved by the Engineer.

9.05.2.8.7 Nylon and Neoprene Fittings. Nylon and/or neoprene washers,

spacers, sleeves, etc. when specified on the plans, shall be as approved by the
Engineer.

9.05.2.8.8 Porcelain Enamel Coatings. Porcelain enamel coatings for sign

faces shall be a minimum of four hundredths (0.04) millimeter in thickness. The coating
shall be applied by automatic spray equipment conforming to Porcelain Enamel Institute
specifications. The coating shall have a gloss reading of fifty (50) to seventy (70) units
at an angle of fifty (50) grads when measured in accordance with ASTM C 346.

Colors shall be in accordance with the M.U.T.C.D. Color samples

representative of all signs to be furnished shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to ordering.

Adherence of the coating shall be verified in accordance with the accelerated

spall test as specified by the Porcelain Enamel Institute.

The coating shall have a weight loss of less than one-half (½) milligrams per
square centimeter in boiling six percent (6%) citric acid when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 283.

All exposed surfaces of the coating shall be free of blemishes that may impair
the serviceability or detract from the appearance of the sign.

9.05.2.8.9 Letters, Numerals, Arrows, Symbols, Etc. Letters, numerals,

arrows, symbols, border and other features of the sign face shall conform to the
requirements of the M.U.T.C.D.

Spacing of mounting holes for screws, bolts, or rivets shall be determined by

character size and shape but in no case shall the spacing be more than twenty (20)
centimeters on center. Each character shall be secured to the sign with non-twist,
corrosion resistant screws, bolts, or rivets.

49
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Retroreflective letters, numerals, symbols, etc., cut from retroreflective sheeting,

shall be of the color and coefficient of retroreflectivity specified on the plans and applied
to the sign face in accordance with instructions of manufacturer of retroreflective
sheeting.

Porcelain enamel letters, numerals, borders, etc., shall consist of individual

embossed aluminum frames into which reflex retroreflectors are installed so as to be
an integral part of the character or otherwise securely affixed to prevent displacement
in handling or service. Mounting hole and fasteners requirement shall be as described
above.

9.05.2.8.10 Aluminum Sign Sections.

1. General. Aluminum sign sections shall be fabricated in accordance with the

plans, from standard widths of aluminum sheets, panels or other hardware and
materials as required.

Each section shall be provided with a perimeter frame. The extruded horizontal
top and bottom frame members shall have an integral retainer track for affixing
mounting bolts to provide for blind fastening of sign panel to post support. The
extruded vertical side frame members shall be a channel. An additional slot shall be
milled in the top and bottom frame for later field insertion of post clip posts. The
perimeter frame shall be assembled by means of self-tapping hex head stainless steel
screws. A sealant shall be used at the corner to prevent moisture penetration.

If the horizontal finished dimension of the sign exceeds eight (8) meters and
vertical panels are used, the vertical extruded frame members shall have an integral
retainer track for mounting bolts. The horizontal frame members shall be extruded
channels.

2. Honeycomb Sections. The front sheet of each sign shall be fabricated in one
piece from minimum one and sixth tenths (1.6) millimeter aluminum alloy conforming
to Subparagraph 9.05.2.8.1, "Aluminum Alloy Sheets and Miscellaneous Hardware" in
these General Specifications. The surface shall be treated with amorphous chromate
conversion coating conforming to the requirements of ASTM B 449, Class 2.

Core material shall be phenolic impregnated cellulose honeycomb. Core

material shall be resistant to fungus. The back sheet of each panel shall be fabricated
in one piece from minimum one (1) millimeter aluminum alloy conforming to
Subparagraph 9.05.2.8.1, "Aluminum Alloy Sheets and Miscellaneous Hardware" in
these General Specifications. The surface shall be treated with an amorphous
chromate conversion coating conforming to the requirements of ASTM B 449, Class 2.

The laminating adhesive shall be of the thermoplastic neoprene rubber base

solvent type exhibiting a resilient oil and water resistant bond. The solids content shall
be suitable for automatic spray application or roller coat application and yield a dry
weight of adhesive of fifty (50) grams per square meter minimum. A uniform film of
adhesive shall be applied to each surface and force dried at a temperature of eighty-two

50
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

degrees Celsius (82o C.) minimum. The final bond to be made while the glue line
temperature is a minimum of eighty-two degrees Celsius (82o C.) using sufficient
pressure to insure intimate mating of the surfaces. Minor amounts of adhesive
overspray on perimeter of back sheet or channel shall not be cause for rejection.

The tensile strength of the honeycomb laminate construction shall have a

minimum of one and one-half (1½) kilograms per square centimeter when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 297 and ASTM C 481, Cycle A.

Weep holes three (3) millimeters in diameter shall be drilled in the perimeter
frame at the bottom of each panel. Holes shall be spaced approximately ten (10)
millimeters in from either end and in the center of each panel.

3. Panel Sections. Extruded aluminum sign panels that require splicing shall be
spliced by rivets, bolts or other fasteners as shown on the plans or approved by the
Engineer. All splices shall be capable of developing the full strength of the section.
Rivets or other fasteners shall be flush with the face side. The aluminum panels shall
be fastened to frames, stiffeners, wind beams, or joint backing strips as shown on the
plans or approved by the Engineer. All fabrication of sign panels, including cutting and
drilling or punching of holes, except mounting holes for cutout letters, numbers,
symbols, etc., shall be completed prior to degreasing and application of coating or
retroreflective sheeting.

Seams of all multiple section signs shall be milled to a tolerance of plus or minus
eight tenths (0.8) millimeter from a straight plane so that when two adjoining panels are
assembled, no gap over one and one-half (1½) millimeters shall be visible between
panels. All sharp edges that would present a hazard in handling shall be smoothed.
Panels may be milled up to six (6) millimeters on each side in order to achieve edge
uniformity.

All adhesively bonded panels shall have exterior faces of such flatness that,
when measured at twenty-five degrees Celsius (25o C), the maximum slope of the
surface at any point measured from the nominal plane of the surface shall not exceed
one and five tenths (1.5%) percent.

At each corner on the face of each panel, one three (3) millimeter self-plugging
rivet shall be used to fasten the sheet to the perimeter panel. Rivets appearing on the
face side shall be a color similarly required for the face of the panel.

On multiple panel signs, the closure extrusions between panels shall be

provided by the manufacturer. Extrusions shall be set in from edge of panels for
clearance of rivets and frame.

9.05.2.9 Retroreflective Sheeting. Retroreflective sheeting shall consist of a

white or colored sheeting having a smooth outer surface and that essentially has the
property of a retroreflector over its entire surface. There are six (6) types and five (5)
classes of retroreflective sheeting.

51
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

1. Classification - Retroreflective sheeting shall be classified as follows:

Type I - A medium-intensity retroreflective sheeting referred to as "engineering

grade" and typically enclosed lens glass-bead sheeting.

Type II - A medium-intensity retroreflective sheeting sometimes referred to as

"super engineering grade" and typically enclosed lens glass-bead sheeting.

Type III - A high-intensity retroreflective sheeting that is typically encapsulated

glass-bead retroreflective material.

Type IV - A high-intensity retroreflective sheeting. This sheeting is typically an

unmetallized microprismatic retroreflective element material.

Type V - A super-high-intensity retroreflective sheeting. This sheeting is typically

a metallized microprismatic retroreflective element material.

Type VI - An elastomeric high-intensity retroreflective sheeting without adhesive.

This sheeting is typically a vinyl microprismatic retroreflective material.

2. Backing Classes - The backing required for retroreflective sheeting Types I

through V shall be classified as follows:

Class I - The adhesive backing shall be pressure-sensitive, require no heat, solvent,

or other preparation for adhesion to smooth, clean surfaces.

Class II - The adhesive backing shall have an adhesive that shall be activated by
applying heat and pressure to the material. The temperature necessary to form a
durable permanent bond shall be a minimum of sixty-six degrees Celsius (66o C).

The Class II material shall be respositionable under normal shop conditions and at
substrate temperatures up to thirty-eight degrees Celsius (38o C) and without damage
to the material. The Class II material may be perforated to facilitate removal of air in
heat-vacuum laminators, but the perforation must be of a size and frequency such that
they do not cause objectionable blemishes when the sheeting is printed.

Class III - The adhesive backing shall have a positionable low-tack pressure-
sensitive adhesive that requires no heat, solvent, or other preparation for adhesion to
smooth, clean surfaces. It shall be repositionable up to a temperature of thirty-eight
degrees Celsius (38o C) without damage to the material.

Class IV - The adhesive backing shall have a low-temperature pressure-sensitive

adhesive that permits sheeting applications at temperatures down to minus seven
degrees Celsius (-7o C) without the aid of heat, solvent, or other preparation for
adhesion to smooth, dry, clean surfaces.

52
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Class V - This shall be a nonadhesive backing made of material commercially used

for self-supporting products such as traffic cone collars, temporary roll-up warning signs,
and post bands.

3. Performance Requirements - This is a summary of the minimum performance

requirements for each type of retroreflective sheeting.

Type I - Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection - Table 9.05-1; Artificial Weathering

- 1000 h; Retroreflectance or daytime lightness - Table 9.05-2.

Type II - Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection - Table 9.05-3; Artificial Weathering

- 2200 h; Reflectance or daytime lightness - Table 9.05-2; Other requirements: When
the color orange is specified the artificial weathering will be 500 hours.

Type III - Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection - Table 9.05-4; Artificial Weathering

- 2200 h; Reflectance or daytime lightness - Table 9.05-2; Other Requirements: When
the color orange is specified the artificial weathering will be 500 hours.

Type IV - Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection - Table 9.05-5; Artificial Weathering

- 2200 h; Reflectance or daytime lightness - Table 9.05-6. Other Requirements: When
the color orange is specified the artificial weathering will be 500 hours.

Type V - Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection - Table 9.05-7; Artificial

Weathering-2200h; Reflectance or daytime lightness - Table 9.05-8.

Type VI - Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection-Table 9.05-9; Artificial Weathering-

250 h; Reflectance or daytime lightness-Table 9.05-2.

4. Coefficient of Retroreflection - The coefficient of retroreflection shall meet or

exceed the minimum requirements of Tables 9.05-1, 3, 4, 5, 7 and 9 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E810 Test Method.

5. Daytime Color - The color of the sheeting shall conform to requirements of Table
9.05-10 and one of the following Tables 9.05-2, 6, or 8 when tested in accordance with
Test Method ASTM E97, Method E308, Practice E805, and Practice E 991. Daytime
and nighttime color shall have substantially the same hue.

6. Artificial Weathering - The retroreflective sheeting shall be weather resistant and

show no appreciable cracking, scaling, pitting, blistering, edge lifting, or curling, or more
than eight-tenths (0.8) millimeter shrinkage or expansion when four (4) panels are
exposed the number of hours specified in Table 9.05-11 in accordance with ASTM
Practice G 123, Type E or FH, with humidifier Off, washing the panels with a five
percent (5%) HCl solution for forty-five (45) seconds, rinsing thoroughly with clean
water, blotting with a soft cloth, brushing to equilibrium at standard temperature and
testing for coefficient of retroreflection. The four (4) panel readings will be averaged.

53
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

7. Specular Gloss. The retroreflective sheeting shall have a ninety-four and four
tenths (94.4) grad specular gloss of not less than forty (40) when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 523.

8. Color Processing. Retroreflective sheeting shall permit cutting and color

processing with compatible transparent and opaque process inks in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation at temperatures of fifteen degrees Celsius (15o C.) to
forty degrees Celsius (40 o C) and relative humidity of twenty (20) to eighty (80) percent.
The sheeting shall be heat resistant and permit force curing without staining of applied
or unapplied sheeting at temperatures as recommended by the manufacturer. Color
process for High Intensity Retroreflective Sheeting shall be restricted to sheeting with
heat activated adhesive backing unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

9. Shrinkage. A twenty-three (23) centimeter square retroreflective sheeting

sample with liner shall be conditioned a minimum of one (1) hour at twenty-two degrees
Celsius (22o C.) and fifty (50) percent relative humidity. The liner shall be removed and
the sample placed on a flat surface with the adhesive side up. Ten (10) minutes after
liner is removed and again after twenty-four (24) hours, the specimen shall be
measured to determine the amount of dimensional change. The retroreflective sheeting
shall not shrink in any dimension more than eight tenths (0.8) millimeter in ten (10)
minutes nor more than three (3) millimeters in twenty-four (24) hours.

10. Application Requirements. Retroreflective sheeting shall be "Medium Intensity"

(Type I), Medium-High-Intensity (type II), or High-Intensity (Type III) unless a higher
intensity is specified in these General Specifications or the Special Specifications. All
retroreflective sheeting shall satisfy the tests contained in ASTM D4956 for the Type
specified. The Contractor shall supply a Certificate of Eligibility stating that the
retroreflective material has been specifically modified for use in Saudi Arabia.

TABLE 9.05-1
TYPE I SHEETING
Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection (RA)
(Candelas per lux per square meter)
Medium Intensity

Observation Entrance
Angle Angle White Red Orange Brown Yellow Gree Blue
n

0.20o -4.0o 70 14.0 25.0 2.0 50 9.0 4.0

0.20o +30o 30 6.0 7.0 1.0 22 3.5 1.7
0.55o -4.0o 30 7.5 13.5 1.0 25 4.5 2.0
0.55o +33o 15 3.0 4.0 0.5 13 2.2 0.8

54
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 9.05-2
SHEETING TYPES I, II, III AND IV
LUMINANCE FACTOR (Y%) (DAYTIME)

Color Minimum Maximum

White 27 ...
Yellow 15 45
Orange 14 30
Green 3.0 9.0
Red 2.5 12
Blue 1.0 10
Brown 4.0 9.0

TABLE 9.05-3
TYPE II SHEETING
Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection (RA)
Candelas per Lux Square Meter
Medium-High Intensity

Observation Entrance
Angle Angle White Yellow Orange Green Red Blue Brown

0.2o -4o 140 100 60 30 30 10 5.0

0.2o +30o 60 36 22 10 12 4.0 2.0
0.5o -4o 50 33 20 9.0 10 3.0 2.0
0.5o +30o 28 20 12 6.0 6.0 2.0 1.0

55
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 9.05-4
TYPE III SHEETING
Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection (RA)
(Candelas per lux per square meter)
High Intensity

Observation Entrance
Angle Angle White Red Orange Yellow Gree Blue
n

0.2o -4o 250 45 100 170 45 20.0

0.2o +30o 150 25 60 100 25 11.0
0.5o -4o 95 15 30 62 15 7.5
0.5o +30o 65 10 25 45 10 5.0

TABLE 9.05-5
TYPE IV SHEETING
Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection (RA)
(Candelas per lux per square meter)
High Intensity

Observation Entrance
Angle Angle White Yellow Orange Green Red Blu Brown
e

0.2o -4o 250 170 100 35 35 20 7.0

0.2o +30o 80 54 34 9 9 5.0 2.0
0.5o -4o 135 100 64 17 17 10 4.0
0.5o +30o 55 37 22 6.5 6.5 3.5 1.4

56
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 9.05-6
SHEETING TYPE IV
LUMINANCE FACTOR (Y%) DAYTIME

Color Minimum Maximum

White 50 ...
Yellow 30 45
Orange 15 30
Green 6.0 15
Red 6.0 15
Blue 3.0 8.0
Brown 1.0 6.0

TABLE 9.05-7
TYPE V SHEETING
Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection (RA)
(Candelas per lux per square meter)
Super-High-Intensity

Observation Entrance
Angle Angle White Yellow Orange Green Red Blue
0.2o -4o 700 470 280 120 120 56
0.2o +30o 400 270 160 72 72 32
0.5o -4o 160 110 64 28 28 13
0.5o +30o 75 51 30 13 13 6.0

57
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 9.05-8
SHEETING TYPE V
Luminance Factor (Y%) Daytime
Typically Metallized Microprismatic Delineator Material

Color Minimum Maximum

White 15 ...
Yellow 12 30
Orange 7.0 25
Green 2.5 11
Red 2.5 11
Blue 1.0 10
Brown 1.0 9.0

TABLE 9.05-9
TYPE VI SHEETING
Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection (RA)
(Candelas per lux per square meter)
Elastomeric-High-Intensity

Observation Entrance
Angle Angle White Yellow Orange Green Red Blue

0.2o -4o 250 170 70 30 35 20

0.2o +30o 95 64 26 11 13 7.6
0.5o -4o 200 136 56 24 28 18
0.5o +30o 60 40 17 7.2 8.4 4.8

58
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

TABLE 9.05-10
Color Specifications for
Retroreflective Sheeting (Daytime)
Chromaticity Coordinates*

1 2 3 4
Color X Y X Y X Y X Y
White .303 .287 .368 .353 .340 .380 .274 .316
Red .613 .297 .708 .292 .636 .364 .558 .352
Brown .445 .353 .604 .396 .556 .443 .445 .386
Yellow .498 .412 .567 .442 .479 .520 .438 .472
Green .030 .380 .168 .346 .286 .428 .201 .776
Blue .144 .030 .244 .202 .190 .247 .066 .208

*The four pairs of chromaticity coordinates determine the acceptable color in terms of
the CIE 1931 Standard Colorimetric System measured with Standard Illuminate source
C.

TABLE 9.05-11
Artificial Weathering Photometric Requirements

Type Hours Minimum Coefficient

of Retroreflection
(RA)
I 1000 50% of Table 9.05-1
II 2200A 65% of Table 9.05-3
III 2200A 80% of Table 9.05-4
IV 2200A 80% of Table 9.05-5
V 2200 80% of Table 9.05-7
VI 250 0% of Table 9.05-9

A
When the color orange is specified the artificial weathering will be 500 h.

9.05.2.10 Delineators and Retroreflectors. Delineator posts shall be steel,

aluminum or plastic as specified in Paragraph 9.05.2.6 "Object Markers and Delineator

59
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Posts" in these General Specifications of the dimensions and weights shown on the
plans or in the M.U.T.C.D.

Sheets for delineator panels shall conform to the requirements as specified above
in Paragraph 9.05.2.8 "Sign Panel Materials" in these General Specifications.

Retroreflective sheeting material shall be High-Intensity conforming to the

requirements of M.U.T.C.D. Section 3.04. When microprismatic retroreflectors are
specified, they shall conform to the requirements of Type V Super-High-Intensity
Retroreflective Sheeting and the standard drawings, as specified in Paragraph 9.05.2.9
"Retroreflective Sheeting" in these General Specifications.

Epoxy Resin Adhesive for bonding retroreflectors to hardened Portland cement

concrete shall conform to AASHTO M 237.

9.05.2.11 Object Markers. Materials for object markers, including sign posts, sign
face material, retroreflective sheeting, and retroreflectors as detailed in the Ministry of
Communications M.U.T.C.D., shall conform to the requirements as specified above in
Subsection 9.05.2, "Materials" in these General Specifications.

9.05.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.

9.05.3.1 Signs.

9.05.3.1.1 Design. All signs shall be of the type, color, design, and size
indicated on the plans. All signs shall conform to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices (M.U.T.C.D.) and M.O.C. Standard Designs.

For nomenclature purposes, the following designations shall be as defined unless

modified in the Special Specifications.

Type A Signs - Retroreflective sheeting on plain aluminum sheets.

Type B Signs - Retroreflective sheeting on extruded aluminum panel sections.

Type C Signs - Porcelain enamel coating on honeycomb aluminum sections.

9.05.3.1.2 Shop Drawings. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
approval, three (3) copies of drawings for all special sign faces and all sign faces
bearing messages, showing the design and/or arrangement and spacing of both the
Arabic and English sign messages. Official town names and their Arabic and English
spelling shall be as provided by the Engineer. Size and style of lettering shall be as
shown on the plans and in accordance with the M.U.T.C.D.

9.05.3.2 Storage and Shipment of Signs. Signs delivered for use on a project
shall be stored off ground and under cover in a manner approved by the Engineer. Any
sign damaged, discolored or defaced during transportation, storage or erection shall be

60
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

rejected. Shipment to the job site shall be accomplished with each sign separated by
heavy paper or cloth and the bundle bound with chord to prevent movement.

9.05.3.3 Placement and Orientation. The Engineer will establish and mark the
longitudinal location of each sign.

The sign shall be laterally positioned from the shoulder edge or curb as shown on
the plans or directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall stake the location of the sign supports.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper elevation, off-set, level, and
orientation of all signs he erects. He shall exercise due care in the preservation of
stakes for his and the Engineer's use. If any stakes are lost, damaged, displaced, or
removed the Contractor shall have them reset at his expense.

Unless otherwise shown on the plans, all signs shall be erected so that the edge
and face of the sign are truly vertical and the face is at an angle of ninety-three degrees
(93o) grads to the centerline; that is, facing slightly toward the centerline of the lane
which the sign serves. Where lanes divide or are on sharp curves, the Contractor shall
orient sign faces as indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer so that they
will be most effective both day and night and so as to avoid specular reflection and
glare. All sign supports shall be plumbed.

9.05.3.4 Footings for Posts. Footings shall be excavated to the minimum

dimensions shown in the Ministry of Communications Circular No. 747 dated 2/4/1410
Hegira. Footings shall be installed and backfilled flush with the finished ground surface.
Class B concrete shall be placed against the undisturbed excavated faces, except that
the top fifteen (15) centimeters of each footing shall be formed. Forming of the entire
footing will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. Concrete shall be
thoroughly vibrated. Tops of footings shall be finished with a wood float and all
exposed edges shall be rounded with an edger. Backfill shall be compacted to ninety
percent (90%) of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T
180. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to the finished concrete. Backfill shall be
brought up level with the finished ground line. The top of the foundation shall not
extend more than seventy-five (75) millimeters above the terrain.

9.05.3.5 Sign Posts.

9.05.3.5.1 General. The number and lengths of posts shown in the plans for
small signs are for bidding purposes only. When progress of the Work permits, the
Engineer will authorize the location of each sign, with the station and offset distance
from the edge of pavement. The Contractor shall be responsible for determination of
post lengths to provide the vertical clearance shown on the plans. Field cutting of posts
shall be performed by sawing of the bottom (to be embedded) end.

Sign supports shall be fabricated as detailed in the Ministry of Communications

Circular No. 747 dated 2/4/1410 Hegira unless modified by the plans. When

61
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

galvanizing is specified, assemblies shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. All

welds shall be mechanically cleaned before galvanizing. Galvanized materials on which
the galvanizing has been damaged in transporting, handling or erection will be rejected
or may, with the approval of the Engineer, be repaired in the field by the zinc alloy stick
method. Required field welds and adjacent areas on which the galvanizing has been
damaged shall be galvanized by this same method. The zinc alloy stick shall be cast
zinc, tin, and lead in combination with fluxing ingredients. The compound shall be
completely liquid at a temperature not lower than two-hundred forty degrees Celsius
(240o C). The area to be regalvanized shall be thoroughly cleaned, including the
removal of slag on welds. The surface shall be heated with an oxyacetylene torch to
approximately three hundred fifteen degrees Celsius (315 o C) and the alloy stick rubbed
over the surface to fix a deposit. While the alloy is still liquid, a clean wire brush shall
be used to smooth the deposit evenly over the entire area being galvanized. If a heavy
deposit or build-up is required to match the original coating, more alloy shall be added
immediately to the initial bond deposit and spread with a paddle or brush until the
required thickness is obtained. Edges of drilled holes shall be coated with commercially
available zinc-rich paint. Shop drawings will not be required for pipe posts greater than
fifty (50) millimeters in outside diameter showing the details of the breakaway feature.

The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, fabricator's certifications in

triplicate certifying that the material supplied conforms to all of the requirements
specified.

9.05.3.5.2 Painting. All exposed steel surfaces, except galvanized surfaces,

shall receive one (1) shop coat of Paint No. 1 and two (2) field coats consisting of Paint
No. 5 followed by Paint No. 4.

9.05.3.6 Fastening Signs to Sign Posts. Signs shall be fastened to sign supports
in accordance with the requirements of the plans, the recommendations of the sign
manufacturer, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Fasteners shall be vandal-anti-
thief resistant to the extent practical.

All bolt heads, screw heads, and washers used to install sign on support shall be
such that they do not protrude out from the surface of the sign. The heads of the bolts
or screws shall be as nearly as practical the same as the color of the background or
message area at the point where the hardware is exposed. To the extent practical,
fastener systems shall be designed so as not to require the drilling of the sign face.

When steel signs are mounted with aluminum hardware or where aluminum signs
are mounted with steel hardware or on steel posts, approved asphalt, nylon, or
neoprene insulation shall be installed at all points where dissimilar metals might come
in contact.

9.05.3.7 Delineators and Retroreflectors. Delineator posts shall be erected at

locations shown on the plans and set at elevations such that the delineator
retroreflectors will be at the indicated height above the ground surfaces. Posts shall be
set plumb and to the established lines and grades. The method of driving shall not
substantially alter the cross-sectional dimensions of the posts or damage the post.

62
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

Posts which are damaged by driving shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's
expense. Predrilling of post holes may be necessary to avoid damage to the posts.

Sheet metal panels shall be attached to posts as shown on the plans and
retroreflectors or retroreflective sheeting installed as specified.

9.05.3.8 Object Markers. Object markers shall be installed at the locations shown
on the plans or designated by the Engineer in accordance with the above requirements.

9.05.4 REPLACEMENT SIGNS. The Contractor shall furnish additional signs to be

used for maintenance purposes of the number and type as shown in the plans or
specified in the Special Specifications. The Contractor shall deliver these signs to the
Road District designated by the Ministry. The cost of transporting replacement signs
shall be considered subsidiary to other items in the Bill of Quantities.

9.05.5 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT. Ground-mounted and overhead highway signs

shall be measured by the face area to the nearest one-hundredth (1/100) square meter
for each highway sign and to the nearest one-tenth (1/10) square meter for the total of
each type of sign, as specified in the Bill of Quantities. The area of each sign shall be
that of the smallest rectangular, circular, triangular, trapezoidal, or other standard
Ministry sign shape that will encompass the sign panel. No measurement shall be
made of stiffeners, e.g., those needed to support smaller signs onto larger ones, as
these are considered subsidiary to the pay items(s) of signs appearing in the Bill of
Quantities.

Sign support, breakaway post, of the type specified in the Bill of Quantities, shall be
measured by the kilogram for I-beam or by the number of units for tubular as installed
and accepted, which shall include the sign post, hinged as required, brackets, coupling
bolts, breakaway couplings, nuts, etc., all as specified for the proper erection and
anchoring of the post onto the anchor plate; or the threaded reducer when a threaded
collar detail is applicable.

Overhead sign supports shall be measured by the metric ton as specified in the Bill
of Quantities, complete in place as determined from the Engineer’s computed weights
and as specified in the specifications under Subsection 5.05.8 “Method of
Measurement;” in these General Specifications except that all steel items in connection
with walkways on overhead signs, including rails, brackets and fasteners onto the
tubular support, gratings and all incidentals thereof, shall be measured by the metric
ton, complete in place, as determined by weighing in the presence of the Engineer on
an approved, accurate set of scales.

Sign support work shall include all structural excavation and backfill, foundation
concrete, reinforcement, structural steelwork, including sign support brackets fittings
and fixings and all incidentals associated with these items. See Standard Drawings SS-
1A, and SS-1C in the M.O.C. Highway Design Manual, Volume 4. Minor modifications
approved by the Engineer to expedite fabrication, will not result in changes to the
measure of quantities. There shall be no separate measurement of excavation, backfill,

63
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

concrete, reinforcing steel, or any other material or Work incidental to installation of sign
supports.

Delineators and Object Markers shall be measured by the unit for all work including
the posts and delineators or object markers of each type authorized, completed, and
accepted by the Engineer. Retroreflectors shall be measured by the unit of work
authorized, completed, and acceptably installed directly to guardrails, barriers and
fences when no posts are required.

Retroreflectors shall be measured by the number of units of the various types

placed and accepted, irrespective of color. This work shall include the furnishing of all
materials; surface preparation; application of the adhesive and/or fastening of the
reflective strips or reflectors onto existing elements; curing and cleaning.

Kilometer posts shall be measured by the number of units of each type of single -
or double-face assemblies installed and accepted, which shall include the sign plate(s)
regardless of size, the post and the post base, including all excavation and backfilling,
concrete, reinforcement, anchor bolts, plates, threaded reducer and all incidentals in
connection with these items.

All Temporary Signing shall be measured as described in the Bill of Quantities

under individual specific items contained in Section 9.02, "Traffic Control Through Work
Zones" in these General Specifications.

9.05.6 PAYMENT. Items of Work, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the
contract unit price(s) for each as specified in the Bill of Quantities, which price(s) shall
be full compensation for furnishing all materials, erection, and for all labor, equipment,
tools, supplies, and all other items necessary for the proper completion of the Work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment" in these General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

90501 Highway Signs, Ground-mounted Square Meter

9050101 Highway Signs, Ground-Mounted - Sheet Aluminum Square Meter

9050102 Highway Signs, Ground-Mounted - Aluminum Planking or Square Meter

Internally Double Skin Aluminum Sheet

90502 Highway Signs, Overhead Square Meter

9050201 Highway Signs, Overhead - Sheet Aluminum Square Meter

9050202 Highway Signs, Overhead - Aluminum Planking or Square Meter

Internally Double Skin Aluminum Sheet

90503 Sign Support, (Breakaway) I.P.E. Kilogram

64
 MOC General Specifications - November 1998
Table of Contents

9050301 Sign Support, (Breakaway) Single Post I.P.E. Kilogram

9050302 Sign Support, (Breakaway) Double Post I.P.E. Kilogram

9050303 Sign Support, (Breakaway) Triple Post I.P.E. Kilogram

90504 Sign Support, (Breakaway) Tubular Unit

90505 Sign Support-Overhead Ton

9050501 Sign Support-Gantry Ton

9050502 Sign Support-Cantilever Ton

90506 Delineators Unit

90507 Kilometer Post Uint

9050701 Kilometer Post, Single-face Unit

9050702 Kilometer Post, Double-face Unit

90508 Retroreflectors Unit

90509 Object Markers Unit

9050901 Object Markers, Type 1 or 3 Unit

9050902 Object Markers, Type 2 Unit

65
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
THE CONSTRUCTION OF AGRICULTURAL ROADS

NOVEMBER 1998
Table of Contents

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

AGRICULTURAL ROAD CONSTRUCTION

These Supplemental Specifications amend and supplement the Ministry of

Communications (M.O.C.) 1998 General Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction. They are applicable on all Agricultural Road Construction projects
administered by the Ministry of Communications. In case any differences between
these Supplemental Specifications and the 1998 M.O.C. General Specifications, these
Supplemental Specifications shall govern.

In case of any differences between these Supplemental Specifications and specific

project Special Specifications, the Special Specifications shall govern.

These Supplemental Specifications shall supplement, modify and/or replace the

General Specifications in respect to the following provisions only. All other unchanged
provisions shall remain in full effect.
Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL................................................................................................... 1
Subsection 1.01.2 Definitions .......................................................................... 1
Subsection 1.03.7 Cooperation With Utilities ................................................... 1
Subsection 1.05.16 Responsibility For Damage Claims .................................. 1
Subparagraph 1.06.2.6.5 CPM-PS Updates And CPM-PS Revisions ............. 2
Subsection 1.09.6 Survey Equipment Hardware ............................................. 2

PART 2 - EARTHWORK............................................................................................. 3
Subsection 2.03.3.6 Roadway Excavation in Cut Sections ............................. 3
Subsection 2.03.5 Quality Assurance Procedures ........................................... 3
Subsection 2.05.7.4 Embankment Finishing Tolerances And Requirements ..4
Subsection 2.06.2 Materials............................................................................. 5
Paragraph 2.06.3.6 Subgrade in Earth Cuts .................................................... 5
Paragraph 2.06.3.7 Subgrade in Rock Cuts .................................................... 6
Paragraph 2.06.3.8 Subgrade on Embankments ............................................. 6
Paragraph 2.09.2.1 General ............................................................................ 7

PART 3 - GRANULAR SUBBASE AND COURSES ................................................... 8

Paragraph 3.02.6.5 Surface Tolerances .......................................................... 8
Paragraph 3.03.6.5 Surface Tolerances .......................................................... 8
Paragraph 3.04.9.5 Surface Tolerances .......................................................... 9

PART 4 - BITUMINOUS CONSTRUCTION.............................................................. 10

Paragraph 4.05.2.2 Aggregate ...................................................................... 10
Section 4.04 - Bituminous Emulsion Treated Base For Agricultural Roads ...11
4.04.1 Description ......................................................................................... 11
4.04.2 Materials ............................................................................................ 11
4.04.3 Proportioning Bituminous Emulsion ................................................... 13
4.04.4 Equipment.......................................................................................... 15
4.04.5 Weather Limitations ........................................................................... 16
4.04.6 Construction....................................................................................... 16
4.04.7 Traffic Control .................................................................................... 20
4.04.8 Quality Assurance Procedures .......................................................... 20
4.04.9 Measurement ..................................................................................... 22
4.04.10 Payment............................................................................................ 22
Section 4.15 Bitumen Stabilization of Granular Earth Materials .................... 23
4.15.3 Proportioning Bituminous Stabiliz ...................................................... 25

PART 5 - CONCRETE, STEEL AND STRUCTURES .............................................. 36

Subsection 5.03.9.1 Description .................................................................... 36

PART 6 - INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION ............................................................... 37

Paragraph 6.02.2.1 Concrete......................................................................... 37
Paragraph 6.03.2.1 Concrete......................................................................... 37
Paragraph 6.04.2.1 Concrete......................................................................... 37
Paragraph 6.12.2.1 Concrete......................................................................... 37
Table of Contents

PART 9 - TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES AND WORK ZONES.............................. 38

Subsection 9.02.2 Worksite Traffic Safety Supervisor ................................... 38
Subsection 9.02.6 Method of Measurement .................................................. 38
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

AGRICULTURAL ROAD CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

---- PART 1 -- PAGES 5 and 12 ----

Subsection 1.01.2 Definitions for Contractor and Subgrade are eliminated and the
following substituted:

Contractor - The MOC Road District, firm, corporation or supplier contracting with the
MOC or executing an agreement within the MOC for performance of the Work
described in the Contract Documents.

Subgrade - A defined layer thickness of select material (normally twenty (20)

centimeters for agricultural roads) on which the pavement structure, including
shoulders, is constructed.

---- PART 1 -- PAGE 25 ----

Subsection 1.03.7 Cooperation With Utilities is supplemented as follows:

The Contractor shall consult authorities responsible for the overground services and
utilities prior to removal or realignment of the such utilities and the related items. Before
commencing of such works, the Contractor, the Authorities and MOC representatives
should prepare minutes of meeting stating the works and procedures to be undertaken.
After completion of the works, proper handover is to be made. The Contractor shall
ensure full compliance with their requirements and the protection of their works as well
as the handover of any such removed items to the concerned Department and record
the items handed over and the obtained proper clearances. Unless otherwise provided
in the Bill of Quantities, the Contractor will not be responsible for the removal or
relocation of underground utilities in the areas included under the scope of work of this
Contract. The Contractor shall, however, coordinate with the M.O.C. and the
concerned authorities, concerning the relocation of these utilities. Should any damage
be inflicted upon any of the utilities whether overground or underground due to
negligence or insufficient coordination with concerned authorities to identify the
locations or extent of utilities, the same will be repaired or replaced at the expense of
the Contractor.

---- PART 1 -- PAGE 45 ----

Subsection 1.05.16 Responsibility For Damage Claims is supplemented as follows:

Any compensations and liquidated damages recovered from a third party for traffic
accidents occurring during the construction and maintenance period of the project will
be deposited in the Income Account at the Ministry. The Contractor shall not have the
right to claim any of these compensations, as condition all the works remain under the
custody of the Contractor until they are finally handed over. The Contractor shall bear

1
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

the cost of repairing all damages to the work, except in the case of Force Majeure
where damage to the work is due to unforeseeable causes beyond his control.

---- PART 1 -- PAGE 59 ----

Subparagraph 1.06.2.6.5 CPM-PS Updates And CPM-PS Revisions - is

supplemented to provide that the updates shall be submitted quarterly (every three (3)
months) unless the percent of work accomplished falls more than one month behind the
percent of time elapsed. When that happens, the Contractor shall submit monthly
updates until such time as the percent work accomplished exceeds the percent time
elapsed.

---- PART 1 -- PAGE 109 ----

Subsection 1.09.6 Survey Equipment Hardware is supplemented to require half the

numbers of each piece of equipment specified in this Subsection in the General
Specifications.

2
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

AGRICULTURAL ROAD CONSTRUCTION

PART 2 - EARTHWORK

---- PART 2 -- PAGE 19 ----

Subsection 2.03.3.6 Roadway Excavation in Cut Sections is eliminated and the

following substituted:

2.03.3.6 Roadway Excavation in Cut Sections. In all areas of roadway excavation

in cut areas, rock and other materials in the planned subgrade layer (bottom twenty (20)
centimeters of the completed excavation) that do not conform to the requirements
specified in the Subsection 2.05.2 “Materials” in the General Specifications, shall be
excavated to a depth of twenty (20) centimeters or as may be specified. The excavated
materials shall be defined as Roadway Excavation - Unclassified and shall be
incorporated into the Embankment or disposed of as specified in Subsection 2.03.4
“Disposal of Surplus and Unsuitable Materials” in these General Specifications.

---- PART 2 -- PAGE 21 ----

Subsection 2.03.5 Quality Assurance Procedures is eliminated and the following

substituted:

2.03.5 Quality Assurance Procedures. The total quantity of roadway excavation shall
be evaluated and accepted in accordance with Subsection 1.08.4 “ Measured or Tested
Conformance” of the General Specifications. The Engineer shall perform or supervise
the performance of all quality assurance measuring and testing. Quality assurance
measuring or testing shall involve verification that the roadway excavation conforms to
the lines, grades and typical cross sections shown on the plans or established by the
Engineer within the following tolerances:

1. Slopes. Slopes shall be uniformly finished and no point on the slope shall
deviate from the staked slope by more than thirty (30) centimeters when measured at
right angles except in rock excavation where no point shall deviate more than fifty (50)
centimeters measured along any line perpendicular to the staked slope.

2. Width. The total width between the ditch lines shall not be deficient by more than
forty (40) centimeters from the deviations shown on the plans at any location.

3. Bottom of Excavation. The bottom of excavation shall be completed to within

plus two (2) centimeters of the designated grade except that in rock, the tolerance shall
be plus four (4) centimeters.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of any claims from property
owners for excavation quantities removed from beyond the staked slope and right-of-
way (R.O.W.) lines.

3
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

---- PART 2 -- PAGE 61 ----

Subsection 2.05.7.4 Embankment Finishing Tolerances And Requirements is

eliminated and the following substituted:

2.05.7.4 Embankment Finishing Tolerances and Requirements. Embankment

Quality Assurance measuring of testing shall involve verification that the embankments
are constructed, timely finished and trimmed in a neat, workmanlike manner to the lines,
grades and typical cross sections shown on the plans or staked by the Engineer within
the following tolerances and deadlines:

1. Embankment slopes shall be constructed in conformance with the lines and

grades established by the Engineer. The completed slopes within one meter of top of
embankment grade shall not vary by more than thirty (30) centimeters from the staked
slope measured at right angles to the slope. Slopes below one meter shall not vary
more than fifty (50) centimeters from the staked slope, measured at right angles to the
slope.

2. Median and side slopes which are on a one (1) vertical to six (6) horizontal (6:1)
or flatter slope in excavation as well as embankment shall be finished in accordance
with the lines and grades established by the Engineer. The completed slopes shall not
vary more than two (2) centimeters from the designated slope, measured at right angles
to the slope. Flowlines within medians shall be carefully graded to drain and shall not
vary more than five (5) centimeters from the grade line established by the Engineer.

3. Finished Grade of Top of Embankment. The elevation of the finished top of

embankment shall be checked under the supervision of the Engineer. Each cross
section shall be checked at each change in cross slope and intermediate points as
directed. Cross sections shall be established at maximum intervals of twenty-five (25)
meters with additional sections as directed by the Engineer. The allowable tolerance
of the finished embankment above the staked elevation shall be two (2) centimeters.

4. Variations above the design elevation shall not result in the diminished thickness
of any subsequent layer. The allowable tolerance of the finished embankment below
the staked elevation shall be four (4) centimeters. Isolated variations below the staked
elevation shall be compensated by additional thickness of the following subgrade layer.

5. Embankment slopes shall be finished in a timely manner preferable immediately

following the finishing of the roadbed.

4
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

---- PART 2 -- PAGE 64 ----

Subsection 2.06.2 Materials is eliminated and the following substituted:

2.06.2 Materials. Materials from roadway excavation, tunnel excavation or imported

borrow meeting the appropriate quality requirements shall be used to construct
subgrade in accordance with the typical sections contained in the plans or as staked
by the Engineer.

Subgrade layer materials shall be a minimum of twenty (20) centimeters (thirty (30)
centimeters in dune sand areas) thick after compaction in both embankment and cut
sections using materials meeting the following requirements:

1. Material classified by MRD TM 210 as A-1-a(0), A-1-b(0) and A-2-4(0) having no

rock fragments larger than ten (10) centimeters.

2. Material being reasonably well-graded with sufficient fines to permit compaction

and compaction testing.

---- PART 2 -- PAGE 67 ----

Paragraph 2.06.3.6 Subgrade in Earth Cuts is eliminated and the following

substituted:

2.06.3.6 Subgrade in Earth Cuts. The depth of subgrade in earth cuts shall be
twenty (20) centimeters. The material shall be Class A-1-a(0), A-1-b(0), or A-2-4(0) as
determined by MRDTM 210, and shall meet a minimum soaked CBR of twenty five (25)
as determined by MRDTM 213 when compacted to the specified density. If the natural
material in the cut meets these requirements, then the top twenty (20) centimeters shall
be scarified, brought to a uniform moisture content within the specified range, and
compacted to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density.

If the natural material in the cut does not meet the above requirements for subgrade,
then the subgrade shall be subexcavated to a depth of twenty (20) centimeters unless
additional excavation is ordered by the Engineer. The twenty (20) centimeters below
the excavated area shall be scarified, brought to a uniform moisture content within the
specified range, and compacted to Type 90 density. The excavated material shall be
replaced with material meeting the requirements of Class A-1-a(0), A-1-b(0), or A-2-
4(0), with a minimum soaked CBR of twenty five (25) at the maximum specified density.
The replacement material shall be brought to uniform moisture content within the
specified range and compacted in one (1) layer or two (2) approximately equal layers
to ninety-five (95%) of maximum dry density.

5
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

---- PART 2 -- PAGE 67 ----

Paragraph 2.06.3.7 Subgrade in Rock Cuts is eliminated and the following

substituted:

2.06.3.7 Subgrade in Rock Cuts. When a cut area is identified by the Engineer as
rock for purposes of subgrade preparation, the area shall be undercut to a depth of
twenty (20) centimeters below top of subgrade. The material excavated shall be placed
in embankments or disposed of as approved by the Engineer if there is a surplus of
embankment material. Care shall be taken that undrained pockets shall not be left in
the surface of the rock. Coarse aggregate material complying with the requirements
of AASHTO M43 - Sizes of Aggregates for Road and Bridge Construction - Size
numbers 1 through 467 shall be placed in the pockets or in the undercut rock surface
and consolidated. After consolidation, the undercut subgrade surface shall be in
substantial compliance with the grade and typical section shown on the plans.
Placement and consolidation of the coarse aggregate is required to fill the voids and
irregularities left in the subgrade from the Contractor’s excavation operation. This
operation will be considered subsidiary to the Excavation Item and the Contractor shall
not receive additional compensation for his Work.

The excavated material shall be replaced with material meeting the requirements
of Class A-1-a(0), A-1-b(0), or A-2-4(0), with a minimum soaked CBR of twenty five (25)
at the maximum specified density. The material shall be brought to uniform moisture
content within the specified range and compacted in one layer or two (2) approximately
equal layers to ninety-five (95) percent of maximum dry density.

---- PART 2 -- PAGE 68 ----

Paragraph 2.06.3.8 Subgrade on Embankments (Including Sand Dune Areas) is

eliminated and the following substituted:

2.06.3.8 Subgrade on Embankments (Including Sand Dune Areas). The twenty

(20) centimeters of material (thirty (30) centimeters on dunes and embankments) placed
on the embankment to form the subgrade layer shall meet the requirements of Class
A-1-a(0), A-1-b(0), or A-2-4 as determined by MRDTM 210, with a minimum soaked
CBR of twenty five (25) as determined by MRDTM 213 when compacted to ninety-five
percent (95%) of maximum dry density. The entire subgrade layer shall be compacted
to the specified density in one layer or two approximately equal layers.

6
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

---- PART 2 -- PAGE 89 ----

Paragraph 2.09.2.1 General is supplemented as follows:

The provision of dewatering equipment and all operations required to maintain a

water free excavation shall be carried out and considered as included in the contract
unit price for structural excavation.

Maintenance of natural waterways and allowance for the passage of surface water
during construction of the works is the Contractor’s responsibility and any damage
occurring in this respect shall be corrected at the Contractor’s expense.

7
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

AGRICULTURAL ROAD CONSTRUCTION

PART 3 - GRANULAR SUBBASE AND COURSES

---- PART 3 -- PAGE 15 ----

Paragraph 3.02.6.5 Surface Tolerances is eliminated and the following is substituted:

3.02.6.5 Surface Tolerances. The surface layer of the aggregate subbase shall be
evaluated for compliance with the following surface tolerances:

The cross section of the finished subbase surface shall be checked by the
Contractor in the presence of the Engineer at maximum intervals of twenty-five (25)
meters and at intermediate points as directed by the Engineer. The deviation of the
elevation of the surface above the design elevation shall be not more than twenty (20)
millimeters. Deviations above the design elevation shall not result in the diminished
thickness of any subsequent pavement course. The deviation of the elevation below
the design elevation shall not be more than thirty (30) millimeters. Isolated deviations
below the design elevation shall be compensated by additional thickness of the
subsequent pavement layer. Additional cost and materials resulting from deviations
from the design elevation shall be borne by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish all
devices necessary to check the surface, such as stringlines, straightedges, etc., and
the labor necessary to handle the task.

---- PART 3 -- PAGE 28 ----

Paragraph 3.03.6.5 Surface Tolerances is eliminated and the following is substituted:

3.03.6.5 Surface Tolerances. The surface layer of the aggregate base shall be
evaluated for compliance with the following surface tolerances:

1. The cross section of the finished aggregate base surface shall be checked by the
Contractor in the presence of the Engineer at maximum intervals of twenty-five (25)
meters and at intermediate points as directed by the Engineer. The deviation of the
elevation of the surface above the design elevation shall be not more than fifteen (15)
millimeters. Deviations above the design elevation shall not result in the diminished
thickness of any subsequent pavement course. The deviation of the elevation below
the design elevation shall not be more than fifteen (15) millimeters. Isolated deviations
below the design elevation shall be compensated by additional thickness of the
subsequent pavement layer. Additional cost and materials resulting from deviations
from the design elevation shall be borne by the Contractor.

2. The surface shall also be checked with a four (4) meter straightedge in all areas
of apparent roughness as directed by the Engineer. The finished surface of the base
course shall not deviate from the straightedge between any two contact points more
than fifteen (15) millimeters when the straightedge is placed parallel to centerline or

8
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

when the straightedge is placed perpendicular to centerline. The Contractor shall

furnish all devices necessary to check the surface, such as stringlines, straightedges,
etc., and the labor necessary to handle the task.

---- PART 3 -- PAGE 39 ----

Paragraph 3.04.9.5 Surface Tolerances is eliminated and the following substituted:

3.04.9.5 Surface Tolerances. The surface layer of the cement treated base shall
be evaluated for compliance with the following surface tolerances:

1. The cross section of the finished cement treated base surface shall be checked
by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer at maximum intervals of twenty-five
(25) meters and at intermediate points as directed by the Engineer. The deviation of
the elevation of the surface above the design elevation shall be not more than fifteen
(15) millimeters. Deviations above the design elevation shall not result in the
diminished thickness of any subsequent pavement course. The deviation of the
elevation below the design elevation shall not be more than fifteen (15) millimeters.
Isolated deviations below the design elevation shall be compensated by additional
thickness of the subsequent pavement layer. Additional cost and materials resulting
from deviations from the design elevation shall be borne by the Contractor.

2. The surface shall also be checked with a four (4) meter straightedge in all areas
of apparent roughness as directed by the Engineer. The finished surface of the base
course shall not deviate from the straightedge between any two contact points more
than fifteen (15) millimeters when the straightedge is placed parallel to centerline or
when the straightedge is placed perpendicular to centerline. The Contractor shall
furnish all devices necessary to check the surface, such as stringlines, straightedges,
etc., and the labor necessary to handle the task.

9
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

AGRICULTURAL ROAD CONSTRUCTION

PART 4 - BITUMINOUS CONSTRUCTION

---- PART 4 -- PAGE 49----

Paragraph 4.05.2.2 Aggregate is eliminated but Tables 4.05-1 and 4.05-2 are not
eliminated. The following narrative portion of Paragraph 4.05.2.2 Aggregate is
substituted:

4.05.2.2 Aggregate. All aggregate shall be hard durable particles or fragments free
from decomposed materials, organic materials and other deleterious substances.

Coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed gravel retained
on a 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve and containing no more than ten percent (10%) thin
or elongated particles which have a maximum dimension more than five (5) times the
minimum dimension as determined in accordance with ASTMD 4791 Standard Test
Method for Flat or Elongated Pieces. Fifty-five percent (55%) of the coarse aggregate
shall have at least one fractured face.

Fine aggregate shall be material passing the 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve and may
be produced from crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed gravel or manufactured
sand. Natural sand may not be used without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
If approved, the quantity of natural sand in the aggregate shall not exceed fifteen
percent (15%) of the weight passing the 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve and the quantity
of dune sand included shall not be more than fifty percent (50%) of the weight of natural
sand authorized by the Engineer.

Supplemental fine aggregate shall be mineral filler passing the 0.600 mm (No. 30)
sieve, including dust from the dust collection system. When furnished as supplemental
fine aggregate, mineral filler, at the time of use, shall be dry, free flowing, without lumps
or agglomerations and conform to the requirements of AASHTO M-17.

Unless otherwise specified in the Special Specifications, the combined aggregate

prior to the addition of bituminous material, shall conform to the gradation and quality
requirements contained in Table 4.05-1 for Grading III, Class C.

The grading limits specified are based on materials of uniform specific gravity and
shall be adjusted by the Engineer to compensate for any variations in specific gravity
of the individual sizes. The gradings may be varied by the Engineer on the basis of
Marshall Tests to obtain optimum stability and life of the completed Bituminous
Concrete Pavement.

10
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

Section 4.04 - Bituminous Emulsion Treated Base For Agricultural Roads

4.04.1 Description. This work consists of furnishing and cold-mixing aggregate and
emulsified bituminous material, hauling, spreading, compacting and finishing the
bituminous emulsion treated base to the lines, grades and thickness shown on the
plans, all in accordance with the specifications and as directed by the Engineer.

BITUMINOUS EMULSION TREATED BASE ITEMS IN BILL OF QUANTITIES:

Bituminous Emulsion Base
Type I Bituminous Emulsion Open-Graded Base
Type II Bituminous Emulsion Dense-Graded Base
Type III Bituminous Emulsion Sand Base

Type I bituminous emulsion treated base mixtures shall be produced at ambient

temperatures only by central-mixing in a continuous mixing pugmill. Types II and III
bituminous emulsion treated base mixtures shall be produced at ambient temperatures
by central-mixing in a continuous mixing pugmill or screenless batch plant or by road-
mixing using a travel plant or motor grader at the option of the Contractor.

4.04.2 Materials.

4.04.2.1 Bituminous Emulsion Material. Bituminous emulsion material for

bituminous emulsion treated base shall consist of MS-2, MS-2h, CMS-2, CMS-2h, SS-1,
SS-1h, CSS-1 or CSS-1h conforming to the requirements of Tables 4.01-4 and 4.01-5
in Section 4.01, "Bituminous Materials," in the General Specifications.

The type and grade of bituminous emulsion shall be specified in the Special
Specifications.

4.04.2.2 Aggregate. All aggregate shall be hard durable particles or fragments of

crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel or sand free from decomposed materials,
organic materials and other deleterious substances. The aggregate shall not contain
more than one percent (1.0%) by weight of particles having a specific gravity below
1.95. Aggregate for Open-Graded Base retained on the 4.75 millimeter (No. 4) sieve
shall not have more than one-tenth of one percent (0.1%) adherent material by
washing.

Unless otherwise specified in the Special Specifications, the aggregate for Types
I, II and III bituminous emulsion treated base, prior to the addition of bituminous
emulsion material, shall conform to the following gradation and quality requirements:

11
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

AGGREGATE GRADING REQUIREMENTS - MRDTM 419

Type I Type II Type III

Sieve Open-Graded Dense-Graded Sand
Size Base Base Base

37.5 mm (1 ½ inch) 100 100

25 mm (1 inch) 95-100 90-100
12.5 mm ( ½ inch) 25-60 60-80 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 0-10 25-60 75-100
2.36 mm (No. 8) 0-5 15-45
0.300 mm (No. 50) - 3-18 15-30
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-2 1-7 5-12

Bituminous Emulsion Material

Content - Percent 4.5-7.5 6.0-12.0 6.0-12.0

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

Sand Equivalent MRDTM

313 - Percent, Min. - 40 30
Stripping Loss MRDTM
413 - Percent, Max. 10 10 10
Abrasion Loss MRDTM -
Percent, Max. 40 40 -
Percent Fracture -
Min. 2 Face 75 75 -

Percent fracture shall be determined for the material retained on the 2.36 millimeter
(No. 8) sieve. The fractured faces shall have a minimum dimension from edge to edge
across each fractured face which is not less than one-third (1/3) the maximum
dimension of the aggregate particle.

4.04.2.3 Choke Stone for Open-Graded Emulsion Base. Choke stone shall be
clean sand, fine material remaining from production of the aggregate for open-graded
emulsion base, or other fine material conforming to the following gradation:

Sieve Percentage
Size Passing

9.5 mm ( 3/8 inch) 100

4.75 mm (No. 4) 85-100
0.300 mm (No. 50) 15-45
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0-4

12
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.04.2.4 Portland Cement. Portland cement shall be Type I or II conforming to the

requirements specified in Section 5.01, "Portland Cement Concrete," in the General
Specifications.

4.04.2.5 Water. Water shall be free of matter deleterious to the quality of the
bituminous emulsion treated mixture.

4.04.3 Proportioning Bituminous Emulsion Treated Base Mixtures.

4.04.3.1 Job Mix Design Proposal. A proposed Job Mix Formula (JMF) shall be
formulated by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. The JMF
shall be prepared by the Contractor in precise compliance with procedures and
requirements set forth in the MRD Manual of Materials and Tests and all current circular
letters issued by the Ministry of Communications.

The Contractor shall also use the Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual," MS-19,
published by the Asphalt Institute, Lexington, Kentucky, USA.

1. Type I Bituminous Emulsion Treated Base. Chapter XII Procedural Outline and
Design Criteria for the Asphalt Institute Design Method for Open-Graded Mixes.

2. Types II and III Bituminous Emulsion Treated Base. Chapter XIV Marshall
Method for Emulsified Asphalt-Aggregate Cold Mixture Design or, Chapter XI Modified
Hveem Mix Design.

The Contractor shall select his sources of aggregate and bituminous emulsion
material and, after sufficient quantities have been stockpiled or are available for use,
obtain representative samples of the materials and test to determine if they conform to
the requirements of these specifications.

The Contractor shall perform all testing required to establish the proportions of each
material to be combined to produce the specified base (JMF).

The Contractor shall submit the Job Formula Mix (JMF) with the following
information:

1. Pertinent data on the source of aggregate and test data on the fracture,
gradation and other quality treatments shown in Paragraph 4.04.2.2, "Aggregate," in the
General Specifications.

2. The type and grade of emulsified bituminous material to be used.

3. All laboratory trial mix test results.

4. The bituminous material content, based on total dry weight mixture. The
quantity of bituminous emulsion material to be added to the mixture, based on total dry
weight of material, shall be computed from the required bituminous material content and

13
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

the quantity of water in the bituminous emulsion material at the time it is removed from
the storage tank.

5. The percentage of Portland cement, when required, by total dry weight of

mixture.

6. The percentage of additional mixing water, based on total dry weight of mixture.

7. The percentage of total fluids (bituminous material and water) at compaction,

based on the total dry weight of mixture.

8. The theoretical maximum density based on ASTM D 2041 for fully cured
moisture free mixtures.

9. The type and location of each plant to be used for mixing each mix to be
furnished.

10. The beginning date for producing bituminous emulsion treated base mixtures.

The Engineer shall be provided access to the materials sampling and testing
operations at all times.

At the same time that the above information is provided, the Contractor shall supply
to the Engineer one hundred (100) kilogram samples of each individual aggregate size,
eight (8) liters of bituminous material and, when used, sufficient quantities of mineral
filler and chemical admixture to complete two (2) mix design checks, all representing
the materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish.

4.04.3.2 Acceptance of Job Mix Formula. The Engineer shall review the JMF to
determine that it contains all required information. If it does not contain all required
information, it shall be returned within seven (7) days to the Contractor for further action
and resubmission by the Contractor.

If the proposed JMF contains all required information but fails to meet all of the
requirements specified, it shall not be accepted by the Engineer and will be returned to
the Contractor within fourteen (14) days. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to
the Engineer a new JMF conforming to the requirements specified and propose a new
date for beginning production of the bituminous mixtures.

When the Engineer is satisfied that JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms to all
the requirements of the specifications, he shall order the Contractor to construct a two
hundred (200) meter long field control strip of bituminous emulsion treated base. The
Engineer shall evaluate the control strip as to its constructibility and the mix for
conformance to the laboratory tested JMF within the tolerances contained in Paragraph
4.04.6.1, "Contractor Process Quality Control," in the General Specifications. Split
samples of the cold bituminous mix and component raw materials along with the project
laboratory test results are to be sent to the Materials and Research Department Central
Laboratory for a one point check and documentation purposes. If the Engineer is not

14
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

satisfied with the control strip results, he shall state his objections in writing and request
a revised JMF and new control strip. The control strip may only be kept in place if the
results are satisfactory.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the JMF proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all requirements of the specifications and the control strip results are acceptable, he
will issue written acceptance to the Contractor to begin producing the mixes proposed.

Production of bituminous concrete mixtures shall not begin until the Engineer has
given written acceptance of the Job Mix Formula.

Acceptance of the JMF by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to produce bituminous concrete mixtures conforming to all specified
requirements.

4.04.3.3 Job Mix Formula Revisions. The Contractor shall not alter his methods
of crushing, screening, blending, or stockpiling from that used to produce materials for
the approved JMF. Changes to the JMF will not be permitted without retesting and
resubmission of a proposed (revised) JMF in accordance with all the steps in Paragraph
4.04.3.1, "Job Mix Design Proposal," in the General Specifications. Significant changes
may include, but not be limited to, changes in the amount of type of materials rejected
or wasted, changes in the amount of materials crushed, reductions in the amount of
crushed fines, changes in the amount and type of mineral filler and mineral and
chemical admixtures to be used.

Should the Contractor change his source of supply of aggregate and grade of
bituminous material, he shall furnish a new information and samples of materials, as
described in Paragraph 4.04.3.1, as determined by the Engineer to be necessary, at
least twenty-one (21) days before their intended use.

At any time after the JMF is approved the Contractor may submit a new JMF for
approval by the Engineer. If the revised JMF is approved it shall become the approved
JMF.

4.04.4 Equipment. The Contractor shall supply the proper type and sufficient numbers
of equipment to complete the work within the Contract time and in accordance with his
Program of Work as approved by the Engineer. The equipment shall also conform to
the following specific requirements:

1. Travel mixing plant shall not be used to produce open-graded base mixtures.

2. Water, when added to the mixture, shall be introduced into the mix by pumping
through a volumetric rate meter, registering in liters per minute, which will accurately
measure the flow of water. The flow of water shall be interlocked with the flow of
aggregate, bituminous emulsion material and additives, if required.

3. Portland cement, when added to the mixture, shall be introduced into the mixture
through a positive auger or belt feeder.

15
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

4. When batch plants are used for producing bituminous emulsion treated base, all
screens except an oversize scalping screen shall be removed.

5. Cold-feed proportioning controls shall be used.

4.04.5 Weather Limitations. Bituminous emulsion treated mixtures shall not be

placed on any wet or frozen surface, during dust or sand storms, or when the air
temperature is less than fifteen degrees Celsius (15o C.).

4.04.6 Construction.

4.04.6.1 Contractor Process Quality Control. Testing to control the quality of

bituminous emulsion treated base mixtures shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Copies of all test results shall be forwarded to the Engineer at the end of each working
day. The Engineer reserves the right to obtain samples of the materials at any point
during the production operations for his own use.

The Contractor shall perform the following minimum testing for each type of
bituminous emulsion treated base produced and each day's production.

1. Two samples of combined aggregate shall be obtained from the bin discharge
gate at random times during the day just prior to the addition of bituminous emulsion
material and the combined aggregate tested for gradation.

2. Two samples of the bituminous emulsion treated materials shall be obtained from
hauling vehicles, and the water and bituminous material contents determined by oven
drying and extraction testing.

Extracted aggregate shall be tested for gradation. The bituminous material content
as extracted from the mixture shall conform to the requirement in the approved JMF
within plus or minus four-tenths ("0.4) percentage points.

The combined aggregate, including Portland cement and other mineral additives,
shall conform to the approved JMF grading within the following tolerances:

9.75 mm (3/8") and larger sieves, + 8 percentage points

4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, + 7 percentage points
2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve and No. 50 sieves, + 6 percentage points
0.300 mm (No. 50) sieve + 4 percentage points
0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, + 2 percentage points

16
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.04.6.2 Preparation of Bituminous Emulsion Material. Bituminous emulsion

material shall be stored at temperatures within the following ranges:

SS-1, SS-1h, CSS-1, CSS-1h Minimum = 10 degrees Celsius

Maximum = 60 degrees Celsius
MS-2, MS-2h, CMS-2, CMS-2h Minimum = 50 degrees Celsius
Maximum = 85 degrees Celsius

The bituminous emulsion materials shall be protected from freezing and periodically
rolled or circulated to maintain uniformity. Forced air shall not be used for agitation.

4.04.6.3 Preparation of Aggregate. Aggregate shall be stockpiled and removed

from stockpiles as required in Section 3.01, "Production, Handling and Stockpiling
Aggregates," in the General Specifications.

4.04.6.4 Type I, Type II and Type III Bituminous Emulsion Treated Bases.
Type I, Type II and Type III Bituminous Emulsion Treated Bases may be produced at
centrally located continuous mixing plant. Aggregate, bituminous emulsion material,
added water, Portland cement and other additives, when required, may be proportioned
by weight or by volume.

The aggregate shall be fed from storage to the mixing chamber using a belt feeder
equipped with devices by which the rate of aggregate feed can be determined while the
plant is in full operation. Aggregate feed and the bituminous emulsion material
metering pump shall be mechanically or electrically interlocked in a manner that
maintains a constant ratio of aggregate and bituminous emulsion material.

Portland cement, when required, shall be introduced into the aggregate on the belt
feeder.

Mixing water, when required, shall be introduced into the aggregate through a spray
bar mounted at such a point that the water is added as the aggregate enters into the
mixing chamber.

The bituminous emulsion material shall be introduced into the mixing chamber
through a spray bar that can be adjusted to vary mixing times between five (5) and thirty
(30) seconds.

The aggregate, water and Portland cement as required, and bituminous emulsion
material shall be mixed until the aggregate has been coated and a uniform and
homogeneous mixture has been obtained.

Type I open-grade bituminous emulsion treated base shall be discharged directly

into hauling equipment or stored in bins or silos. Type I open-graded bituminous
emulsion treated base shall not be stored on the ground.

17
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion treated base may be discharged directly
into hauling equipment or stored. Type II and Type III base shall not be stored for
periods longer than forty-eight (48) hours without prior written approval from the
Engineer.

4.04.6.5 Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion treated base may be mixed
on the roadway using self-propelled travel mixing plant. Travel mixing plant may
be of three types:

1. A plant that moves along an appropriately sized aggregate windrow on the

roadbed, picking up the aggregate in the windrow, adding and mixing bituminous
emulsion material and discharging the completed mixture at the rear.

2. A plant that receives aggregate into its hopper from hauling equipment as it
moves forward along the roadbed, adding and mixing bituminous emulsion material and
discharging the completed mixture at the rear. The aggregate may be delivered into
the hopper directly from hauling equipment or by pickup equipment from aggregate
deposited into a windrow by hauling equipment.

3. A rotary type mixing plant that moves along the roadbed adding bituminous
emulsion material to aggregate situated in-place on the roadbed and mixing the
materials. The bituminous emulsion material may be added through a spray bar located
inside the rotary mixing chamber, or spread on the aggregate immediately in advance
of mixing.

Rotary mixers may be used to cut into and scarify the in-place aggregate, either
old bituminous concrete pavement or new aggregate, without introduction of bituminous
emulsion material. Bituminous emulsion material shall be delivered to the mixing plant
from hauling equipment traveling adjacent to the mixing plant.

The travel plant shall be capable of producing a uniform, properly coated, bituminous
emulsion material-aggregate mixture conforming to the requirements of the JMF.
Bituminous emulsion material and aggregate proportioning devices shall be keyed to
the rate of forward travel of the mixer, or interlocked to ensure a constant bituminous
emulsion material-aggregate blend.

Multiple passes of the travel plant may be required for higher bituminous emulsion
material contents to achieve required uniformity of mix.

4.04.6.6 Spreading and Compacting. The surface to receive bituminous emulsion

treated base shall conform to the compaction and other requirements for the material
involved.

When the surface to receive the bituminous emulsion treated base does not conform
to compaction and other requirements for the material involved, the Contractor, at his
own expense, shall correct all deviations.

18
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

When the surface to receive bituminous emulsion treated base is a soil subgrade,
aggregate subbase or aggregate base, and the total thickness of the bituminous
emulsion treated base and surface course is less than ten (10) centimeters, the surface
shall receive a prime coat in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
4.02, "Bituminous Prime and Tack Coat," in the General Specifications. The prime coat
shall be allowed to cure for at least forty-eight (48) hours before placement of
bituminous emulsion treated base.

Type I open-graded bituminous emulsion treated base shall be spread using a self-
propelled paving machine. The maximum thickness of one lift shall not exceed ten (10)
centimeters. Immediately after spreading, each lift shall be compacted with one
coverage of a steel-drum tandem roller weighing not less than ten thousand (10,000)
kilograms. After the initial coverage, choke stone shall be uniformly spread across the
surface of the open-grade base at a rate between seven (7) and thirteen (13) kilograms
per square meter using a self-propelled spreading device conforming to the
requirements specified in Section 4.02, "Bituminous Prime Coat Tack Coat and
Fogseal," the General Specifications immediately after spreading choke stone, the
open-graded base shall receive three additional coverages with a steel-drum tandem
roller weighing not less than ten thousand (10,000) kilograms. After completion of
compaction, surplus choke stone shall be removed by sweeping. Each lift of open-
graded base shall be allowed to cure for a period not less than seventy-two (72) hours
before spreading successive lifts.

Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion treated base may be spread using a self-
propelled paving machine, aggregate base spreader or other device which results in a
base that is smooth, has a uniform texture, conforms to planned and specified thickness
and is within the lines and grade shown on the plans. The maximum thickness of one
lift shall not exceed ten (10) centimeters unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Lift thicknesses greater than ten (10) centimeters may be approved by the Engineer
when sufficient Portland cement has been added to the mixture to accelerate curing
and the Contractor demonstrates that curing is effective.

Each lift shall be compacted using a steel-drum tandem roller weighing not less than
ten thousand (10,000) kilograms until the relative compaction of each lot of bituminous
emulsion treated base as described in Subsection 4.04.8, "Quality Assurance
Procedures," in the General Specifications is between ninety-one percent (91%) and
ninety-four percent (94%) of the theoretical maximum density determined from ASTM
D 2041.

Each lift of Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion base shall be allowed to cure
for the period specified in the Special Specifications, or for three (3) to five (5) days, or,
when Portland cement has been added to the mixture, for such shorter period as
approved by the Engineer.

Type II bituminous emulsion treated Base for Agricultural roads may be spread using
a self-propelled paving machine, aggregate base spreader, motor grader or other
device which results in a base that is smooth, has a uniform texture conforms to
planned and specified thickness and is within the lines and grades of the plans. The

19
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

maximum thickness of one lift shall not exceed ten (10) centimeters unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer. Lift thicknesses greater than ten (10) centimeters may be
approved by the Engineer when sufficient Portland cement has been added to the
mixture to accelerate curing and the Contractor demonstrates that the curing is
effective.

4.04.6.7 Finishing. When shown on the plans, or specified in the Special

Specifications, Type I, Type II and Type III bituminous emulsion treated base courses
shall be sealed with a Class C, Medium Fine, surface treatment conforming to the
requirements specified in Section 4.03, "Bituminous Surface Treatment," in the General
Specifications.

4.04.7 Traffic Control. Traffic control shall conform to the requirements specified for
traffic control in Section 9.02, "Traffic Control through Work Zones," in the General
Specifications.

4.04.8 Quality Assurance Procedures. The bituminous emulsion treated base shall
be accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Specifications, the lot size
shall be ten thousand (10,000) square meters for each layer constructed. The
bituminous emulsion treated base shall be sampled, tested, and evaluated in
accordance with Section 1.08, "Acceptance of Work," in the General Specifications.
The Engineer may, during the beginning of placement of bituminous emulsion treated
base, at times when test results indicate erratic characteristics, and at any other time,
reduce the lot size to sections of bituminous emulsion treated base with similar quality
characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and modification or replacement of
low-quality materials with materials of acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength
of the pavement structure.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and
testing for each lot shall include:

1. Compaction
2. Thickness
3. Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content
4. Surface Smoothness

4.04.8.1 Compaction. The specified range of acceptable compaction is between

91 and 94 percent. The bituminous emulsion treated base course compaction will be
sampled, tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph 4.05.8.1, "Compaction," in the
General Specifications.

Type I base may be accepted without density testing when the specified equipment
and operating procedures are verified and documented as being utilized.

20
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.04.8.2 Thickness. A lot shall be accepted when the average thickness is not
less than the planned thickness. The bituminous emulsion treated base course
thickness will be sampled, tested and evaluated as detailed in Paragraph 4.05.8.2,
"Thickness," in the General Specifications.

The Contractor shall backfill density and thickness test holes with bituminous
emulsion treated base or other material approved by the Engineer.

4.04.8.3 Aggregate Gradation and Bituminous Material Content. The upper and
lower specification units are the approved job-mix target values plus or minus the
allowable deviations shown in Paragraph 4.04.6.1, "Contractor Process Quantity
Control," in the General Specifications.

The bituminous material content of the bituminous emulsion treated base shall be
determined by extraction from five (5) randomly selected sample per lot taken from the
road after all mixing is complete and prior to compaction. The average bituminous
material content shall not vary from the approved job mix content by more than plus or
minus five-tenths percent (+ 0.5%). When the bituminous material content varies by
more than plus or minus five-tenths percent (+ 0.5%) the lot shall be removed, remixed
with other materials added as necessary and/or replaced with other materials approved
by the Engineer.

4.04.8.4 Surface Smoothness. When a straightedge four (4) meters in length is

laid on the finished surface of the base parallel with the centerline, the surface shall
have no depressions greater than five (5) millimeters from the lower edge of the
straightedge. When the straightedge is laid transverse to the centerline, the surface
shall have no depressions greater than eight (8) millimeters from the lower edge of the
straightedge.

4.04.8.5 Acceptance. Bituminous materials will be accepted under Subsection

1.08.3 "Certification of Compliance" in accordance with Subsection 4.01.4, "Acceptance
Procedures for Bituminous Materials," in the General Specifications.

Bituminous emulsion treated base construction including surface smoothness and

bituminous material content will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, "Measured or
Tested Conformance," in the General Specifications.

Bituminous emulsion treated base compaction, thickness and aggregate gradation,

will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.5, "Statistical Evaluation of Work for
Acceptance and Determination of Pay Factor (Value of Work)," in two stages as follows:

The first stage shall be the selection of the lowest of the two pay factors for the
quality of the bituminous emulsion treated base relating to aggregate gradation and
density. The second stage involves the selection and application of a quantity pay
factor based on the thickness of the bituminous emulsion treated base. The reduced
thickness pay factor for the lower courses of multiple course pavements will initially be
applied provisionally based on the results of the depths of the cores taken from the
lower courses. Additional cores will be taken of the total depth of all bituminous

21
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

courses within the lot represented by lower course reduced thickness pay factors. If the
total thickness cores show that the increased upper level course thickness has resulted
in total thickness acceptability, the lower level courses reduced thickness pay factor will
be adjusted accordingly. The second stage thickness quantity pay factor will be applied
to all the individual course lots in addition to the first stage lowest quality pay factor as
determined in accordance with Subsection 1.08.5 in the General Specifications.

4.04.9 Measurement. Each Type bituminous emulsion treated base shall be

measured by the cubic meter, as placed and compacted to the planned and specified
thickness and within the lines and grades shown on the plans, as specified or directed
by the Engineer. No measurement will be made for material placed outside authorized
limits.

Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures and asphalt modifiers used by the contractor to
meet the Job Mix Formula (JMF) requirements will be considered subsidiary to the
construction of the bituminous emulsion base course and will not be measured
separately unless specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill
of Quantities. When they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in the Special
Specifications they shall be measured in liters, kilograms, or tons in accordance with
Subsection 4.05.10 "Measurement" in the General Specifications.

Surface treatment shall be measured in square meters as specified in Section 4.02,

"Bituminous Prime, Tack Coat, and Fog Seal" in the General Specifications.

Choke stone will be considered subsidiary to the construction of bituminous

emulsion treated base and will not be measured.

4.04.10 Payment. Payment shall be made at the contract unit price, or adjusted
contract unit price, per cubic meter for each Type bituminous emulsion treated base
measured and calculated as described above for the pay items listed below that are
shown in the Bill of Quantities.

When a lot of bituminous emulsion treated base is accepted with a deficiency, the
adjusted contract unit price for said lot shall be the product of the contract unit price and
the lowest quality and quantity pay factors specified in Subsection 3.04.8, "Quality
Assurance Procedures," in the General Specifications.

Surface treatment shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter as
measured and listed in the Bill of Quantities.

Mineral fillers, chemical admixtures, and asphalt modifiers used by the contractor to
meet the Job Mix formula requirements will be considered subsidiary to the construction
of bituminous emulsion base course and shall not be paid for separately unless
specifically stated in the Special Specifications and listed in the Bill of Quantities. when
they are listed in the Bill of Quantities and specified in the Special Specifications they
shall be paid for as provided in Subsection 4.05.11 "Payment" in the General
specifications.

22
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

Choke stone shall be considered subsidiary to the construction of Type I Bituminous

Emulsion Open-Grade Base and separate payment shall not be made.

Such prices and payment shall cover and be compensation for furnishing labor,
materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary for completing the work as
specified in Subsection 1.07.2, "Scope of Payment," of the General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

ITEM NO PAY ITEM PAY UNIT

40401 Bituminous Emulsion Base Cubic Meter

4040101 Type I Bituminous Emulsion Open-Graded Base Cubic Meter

4040102 Type II Bituminous Emulsion Dense-Grade Base Cubic Meter

4040103 Type III Bituminous Emulsion Sand Base Cubic Meter

Section 4.15 Bitumen Stabilization of Granular Earth Materials is Added as

Follows:

---- PART 4 -- PAGE 134 ----

Section 4.15 Bitumen Stabilization of Granular Earth Materials

4.15.1 Description

This work shall consist of stabilization of granular sand or soils with cutback or
emulsified bituminous materials by pulverizing, mixing, spreading, compacting, and
curing to form a stabilized course of material. Stabilization shall be made at the
locations and in conformity to the lines, grades, thicknesses, and cross sections shown
on the plans or established by the Engineer.

Items in the Bill of Quantities

Bituminous Stabilized Sand
Bituminous Stabilized Granular Soil

4.15.2 Materials

4.15.2.1 Cut back Asphalt. Cutback shall be of uniform consistency, free from
water, show no separation or curdling prior to use, and shall not foam when heated to
the applicable temperature.

1. Rapid-Curing Cutback Asphalt (RC). These materials shall conform to the

requirements shown in Table 4.01-3A and 3B in Section 4.01 “Bituminous Materials”
in the General Specifications..

23
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

2. Medium-Curing Cutback Asphalt (MC). These materials shall conform to the

requirements in Table 4.01-2A or 2B in Section 4.01 “Bituminous Materials” in the
General Specifications.

3. Slow-Curing Cutback Asphalt (SC). These materials shall conform to the

requirements shown in ASTM D2026.

4.15.2.2 Asphaltic Emulsion. Asphaltic emulsion materials shall be slow setting

type (SS-1 or SS-1h conforming to the requirements of Table 4.01-4C in Section 4.01
“Bit uminous Materials” in the General Specifications, CSS-1 or CSS-1h conforming to
the requirements of Table 4.01-5 in Section 4.01 “ Bituminous Materials” in the General
Specifications) derived from a bituminous base of paving asphalt penetration Grade 60
- 70, uniformly emulsified with water and an emulsifying or stabilizing agent. When
tested in accordance with the standard method of test AASHTO Designation T-59, the
emulsion shall conform to the following requirements:

Viscosity at 25E C (77E F) 20-100 sec.

Modified miscibility with water-

difference of asphalt residue 4.5% max.

Cement mixing test 2% max.

Residue at 73E C (163E F) 57% min.

No separation within 30 days

4.15.2.3 Granular Earth Materials. Granular sand or soils for stabilization shall
conform to the requirements shown in the following Table 4.15-1:

TABLE 4.15-1

Sieve Size Granular Soil-Bitumen Sand-Bitumen

------------ % Passing % Passing

38 mm (1 ½ inch) 90-100
4.25 mm (# 4) 50-100 100
2.00 mm (#10) 50-100
.425 mm (#(40) 35-100 40-100
.075 mm (#200) 3-25 5-12

Liquid Limit (LL) and 30 max.

Plasticity Index (PI) 10 max. 10 max.
or
Sand Equivalent (SE) 20 min. 30 min.

Granular Earth Materials with a (SE) below the minimum listed may be used if the
(LL) and (PI) limits are met.

24
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.15.2.4 Water. Potable water shall be of such quality that the asphalt will not
separate from the emulsion before the material is in place. Brackish water, or water
containing salt or soluble salts shall not be used.

4.15.2.5 Suitable Types of Bituminous Materials.

The following table lists the appropriate asphalt type to be used to stabilize granular
earth materials depending on the gradation, temperature and moisture content of the
granular earth materials.

TABLE 4.15-2

Percent Soil Temperature, °F/°C Soil Moisture Content

Passing 40-55°F 55-75°F 75-100°F Wet 2-5% Dry 0-2%
#200 Sieve 4-13°C 13-24°C 24-38°C

0-5 RC-1 RC-2 RC-3 SS-1h SM-k

5-15 MC-1 MC-2 MC-3 SS-1, SS-1h SM-k
15-25 SC-1 SC-2 SC-3 SS-1 SM-k

The spraying and mixing temperatures for the above asphalt materials shall be as
shown in the following Table 4.15-3.

TABLE 4.15-3

Asphalt Material Temperature

Spraying Mixing
RC and MC 250 40 - 80°C/104-176°F 55 - 80° C/131-176° F
RC and MC 800 55 - 90°C/131-194°F 75 - 100° C/167-212° F
SS-1h and CSS-1h 20 - 70°C/68-158°F 10 - 70°C/50-158°F

4.15.3 Proportioning Bituminous Stabilized Granular Earth Materials.

4.15.3.1 Mix Design Proposal. A proposed Mix Design shall be formulated by the
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. The Mix Design shall be
prepared by the Contractor in precise compliance with procedures and requirements
set forth in the MRD Manual of Materials and Tests and all current circular letters issued
by the Ministry of Communications.

The Contractor shall also use the Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual," MS-19, and the
Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and other hot-mix types published by the
Asphalt Institute, Lexington, Kentucky, USA as follows:

Chapter XIV Marshall Method for Emulsified Asphalt-Aggregate Cold Mixture Design
or, Chapter XI Modified Hveem Mix Design.

The Contractor shall select his sources of granular soils and sand and bituminous
cutback or emulsion material and, after sufficient quantities have been stockpiled or are

25
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

available for use, take representative samples of the materials, and test them to verify
that they conform to the requirements of these Supplemental Specifications.

The Contractor shall perform all testing required to establish the proportions of each
material to be combined to produce his proposed Mix Design.

The Contractor shall submit the proposed Mix Design with the following information:

1. Pertinent data on the source of granular sand or soil and test data on the
fracture, gradation and other quality treatments shown in Paragraph 4.15.2.3, "Granular
Earth Materials," and this paragraph in these Supplemental Specifications.

2. The type and grade of cutback or emulsified bituminous material to be used.

3. All laboratory trial mix test results.

4. The bituminous material content, based on total dry weight mixture. The
quantity of bituminous emulsion material to be added to the mixture, based on total dry
weight of material, shall be computed from the required bituminous material content and
the quantity of water in the bituminous emulsion material at the time it is removed from
the storage tank.

5. The percentage of Portland cement, when required to meet the mix design
requirements, by total dry weight of mixture.

6. The percentage of additional mixing water, based on total dry weight of mixture.

7. The percentage of total fluids (bituminous material and water) at compaction,

based on the total dry weight of mixture.

8. The theoretical maximum density based on ASTM D 2041 for fully cured
moisture free mixtures.

9. The beginning date for producing bituminous stabilized granular earth material
mixtures.

10. Test data showing compliance with the following mix design requirements:

Hveem Stability 20 Minimum

or
Marshall Stability (Dry Condition) 500 Minimum
Air Voids 2-8 Percent
Estimated Asphalt Content* 6-15 percent

*Formula for Determination of Estimated Cutback Asphalt Content

P = 0.02A + 0.07B + 0.15C + 0.2D

26
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

Where P= Percent by weight of cutback asphalt based on weight of graded

granular earth material
A= Percent of material retained on the 0.300 mm (No. 50) sieve
B= Percent of material passing the 0.300 mm (No. 50) sieve and
retained on 0.150 mm (No. 100) sieve
C= Percent of material passing the 0.150 mm (No. 100) and retained on
0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve
D= Percent of material passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve

*Formula for Determination of Estimated Percent Asphalt Emulsion Requirement

(A) P = 0.5A + 0.1B + 0.5C

Where P= Percent by weight of asphalt emulsion based on weight of graded

mineral aggregate
A= Percent* of mineral aggregate retained on 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve
B= Percent* of mineral aggregate passing 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve,
retained on 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve
C= Percent of mineral aggregate passing 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve
OR (B) P = 0.06A + 0.01B

Where P= Percent by weight of asphalt emulsion based on weight graded

mineral aggregate
A = Percent* passing 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve
B = Percent* retained 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve
*Expressed as a whole number

The Engineer shall be provided access to the materials sampling and testing
operations at all times.

At the same time that the above information is provided, the Contractor shall supply
to the Engineer one hundred (100) kilogram samples of each individual aggregate size,
eight (8) liters of bituminous material and, when used, sufficient quantities of mineral
filler and chemical admixture to complete two (2) mix design checks, all representing
the materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish.

4.15.3.2 Acceptance of Mix Design. The Engineer shall review the proposed mix
design to determine that it contains all required information. If it does not contain all
required information, it shall be returned within seven (7) days to the Contractor for
further action and resubmission by the Contractor.

If the proposed mix design contains all required information but fails to meet all of
the requirements specified, it shall not be accepted by the Engineer and will be returned
to the Contractor within fourteen (14) days. The Contractor shall prepare and submit
to the Engineer a new mix design conforming to the requirements specified and
propose a new date for beginning production of the bituminous mixtures.

27
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

When the Engineer is satisfied that mix design proposed by the Contractor conforms
to all the requirements of the specifications, he shall order the Contractor to construct
a two hundred (200) meter long field control strip of bituminous stabilized granular earth
materials emulsion treated base. The Engineer shall evaluate the control strip as to its
constructibility and the mix for conformance to the laboratory tested mix design. Split
samples of the bituminous stabilized mixture and component raw materials along with
the project laboratory test results are to be sent to the Ministry Materials and Research
Department Central Laboratory for a one point check and documentation purposes. If
the Engineer is not satisfied with the control strip results, he shall state his objections
in writing and request a revised mix design and new control strip. The control strip may
only be kept in place if the results are satisfactory.

When the Engineer is satisfied that the mix design proposed by the Contractor
conforms to all requirements of the specifications and the control strip results are
acceptable, he will issue written acceptance to the Contractor to begin producing and
placing the proposed mixes.

Production of bituminous stabilized mixtures shall not begin until the Engineer has
given written acceptance of the proposed mix design. Acceptance of the mix design
by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of this obligation to produce bituminous
stabilized mixtures conforming to all specified requirements.

4.15.4 Equipment. The Contractor shall furnish the proper type and operate sufficient
numbers of equipment to complete the work within the Contract time in accordance with
his Program of Work as approved by the Engineer. Said equipment shall include
rollers, bituminous material distributors, motor graders and travel mixing plants for
Bituminous stabilized materials.

Distributor trucks shall be of the pressure type with insulated tanks. Spray bars shall
have a minimum length of two and seventy-five hundreds (2.75) meters and shall be
of the full circulating type.

The valves shall be operated by levers so that one or all valves may be quickly
opened or closed in one operation.

The spreading equipment shall be so designed and articulated that uniform

application of bituminous material, in controlled amounts, may be made from nine
hundreds (0.09) to four and six tenths (4.6) liters per square meter of surface and with
a range of pressure from one and seven tenths (1.7) to five and sixteen hundreds (5.16)
kilograms per square meter. If a spray bar extension is used to cover a greater width,
it shall be of the full circulating type. The distributor shall be equipped with a hose and
nozzle attachment to be used for spotting areas inaccessible to the distributor. The
distributor shall also be equipped with pressure gauges and an accurate thermometer
for determination of temperatures of the bituminous material. Distributor and booster
tanks shall be so maintained at all times as to prevent dripping of bituminous material
from any part of the equipment.

28
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.15.5 Construction Requirements

4.15.5.1 General Conditions and Sequence of Work

Asphalt materials shall be applied and road-mixed mixtures shall be placed only
when the temperature of the air in the shade is above five degrees Celsius (5E C) and
rising. No work shall be started if local conditions indicate that rain is imminent, or a
sandstorm is anticipated.

All surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, debris, and loose material prior to placing any
asphalt material or road-mixed mixture.

Rolling of the mixture shall be done with pneumatic tire rollers or a combination of
pneumatic tire and steel wheel.

The construction operations shall be undertaken in the following sequence:

1. Proportioning and placing granular soil or sand

2. Preparation of bituminous stabilized mixture
3. Aeration and spreading of bituminous mixture
4. Compaction of bituminous stabilized mixture

4.15.5.2 Proportioning and Placing of Granular Soil or Sand

The Contractor shall determine the proportions of the granular soil or sand required
to obtain a granular mixture uniformly graded within the limits specified, and shall
calculate the quantity per station of the granular materials that shall be placed in the
windrow.

If a single graded granular soil or sand is used for the mixture, it shall be placed in
a uniform windrow by means of an aggregate spreader.

If two or more gradations of granular sand or soil are blended for the mixture, each
gradation shall be placed in a uniform windrow with an aggregate spreader meeting the
approval of the Engineer and then mixed thoroughly and placed in a windrow. If small
quantities of aggregates are to be added to the windrow, and it is not feasible to use an
aggregate spreader, they shall be placed by methods approved by the Engineer.

Granular soil or sand shall not be hauled when the weather or road conditions are
such that the hauling operations will cause cutting up or rutting of the primed subgrade.

4.15.5.3 Preparation of Bituminous Stabilized Mixture

The granular mixture shall have less than five (5) percent moisture and preferably
less the two (2) percent moisture at the time of mixing with asphalt or materials. If
necessary to reduce the moisture content, the granular mixture shall be aerated by
laying the aggregate back and forth across the subgrade until the moisture content has
been reduced to the specified amount. Immediately before the application of the

29
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

asphalt material, the granular mixture shall be shaped with a windrow evener. The
windrow evener shall be adjusted so that the windrowed granular mixture will have the
desired uniform cross-section.

The granular sand or soil and asphalt material as outlined in Tables 4.15-2 and 4.15-
3 shall be mixed with road mixers, traveling plants, motor graders, or other equipment
approved by the Engineer. The granular sand or soil and asphalt material shall be
mixed so that a homogeneous mixture is obtained in which all granular particles are
coated uniformly.

4.15.5.3.1Traveling Plant Method

When traveling plants are used for mixing, the amount of asphalt material
applied shall be designated by the Contractor and may be adjusted by him as the work
progresses. Material which may fall outside, or which is not picked up by the conveyor
shall be picked up by hand labor and thrown directly into the elevating unit and not onto
the windrow ahead.

The use of a windrow evener may be omitted when mixing is done with a
traveling plant. The feed control of the traveling plant shall be calibrated and set by the
Contractor as directed by the Engineer.

If one operation of the traveling plant does not produce a uniform mixture, the
windrow shall be remixed with the traveling plant, motor grader, road mixer, or by other
methods approved by the Engineer, until the mixture is uniform in color consistency and
gradation. If the mixture does not contain the proper amount of liquid or emulsified
asphalt, additional asphaltic material or granular materials shall be added and the
windrow remixed as specified herein.

4.15.5.3.2Road-Mixing Methods

When road mixing equipment is used for mixing, the windrow of granular
material shall be flattened before applying the asphalt material. The asphalt material
shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor in at least three applications. The
first application shall not exceed of the total quantity required. In general, the mixing
operations shall be carried on in the central portion of the primed subgrade.

When road mixing equipment is used for mixing, the treated granular material
shall be mixed after each application of asphalt material. Mixing shall be continued until
the mixture is free from lumps, homogeneous, and of uniform color. When the total
amount of granular materials necessary to construct the surface to the specified width
and depth cannot be mixed at one time, it shall be mixed in portions and the mixed
material shall be mixed and blended with a grader until it is uniform in color,
consistency, and gradation.

The mixing shall be performed in such a manner as to prevent segregation of the

various granular materials or loss of the fine material, and to agitate the entire mixture

30
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

but not disturb the subgrade. The mixture shall be kept within the limits of the
subgrade, and no earth or other foreign matter shall be permitted in the mixture.

If, after mixing, it is the Engineer s decision that the mixture does not contain the
proper amount of asphalt material, more asphaltic material or granular material shall be
added at his discretion, and mixing continued until the mixture is homogeneous and
uniform in color. The application rate of asphalt material shall be that amount in the Mix
Design as proposed and accepted in accordance with Subsection 4.15.3 Proportioning
Bituminous Stabilized Granular Earth Materials in these Supplemental Specifications.

4.15.5.4 Aeration and Spreading of Mixture

After mixing, the mixture shall be aerated to the desired moisture and volatile
content. Proper aeration is achieved when the volatile content has been reduced, in
the judgment of the Engineer, to approximately fifty percent (50%) of that contained in
the original asphalt material and the moisture content does not exceed two percent by
weight of the total mixture. After aeration, the windrowed material shall be divided into
two equal parts with motor graders having end plates attached to the blades. One part
shall then be bladed across the centerline and spread uniformly upon the portion of the
subgrade. The remaining portion of the windrow shall be spread uniformly upon the
other portion of the primed subgrade.

Spreading shall be done in such a manner that segregation is kept to a minimum,

and the finished surface will be smooth and of uniform texture. The mixture shall be
spread to a true line along the edges of the pavement. Care shall be taken to smooth
out junctions of successive operations.

If after spreading the mixture, there are any portions which are not homogeneous,
do not contain sufficient asphaltic material or contain an excess of asphaltic material,
such portions shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer.

Unless the mixture can be spread to the final cross-section and rolled the same day
as mixed, it shall be left in the windrow. Should rain fall during road-mixing operations,
or after the mixture has been spread and before it has been rolled, the mixture shall be
windrowed and not disturbed until the area to be paved contains no visible moisture.
The mixture shall then be bladed back and forth across the subgrade until the moisture
in the mixture has been removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

4.15.5.5 Compaction of Bituminous Stabilized Mixtures

After the mixture has been spread and aerated and when it will bear the weight of
the roller without excess lateral movement, it shall be rolled longitudinally. Rolling shall
start at the edges and progress toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by
at least ½ the width of the roller. The entire surface shall be rolled in this manner until
the specified density has been achieved.

31
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

All roller wheels shall be moistened lightly with water to prevent the mixture from
sticking to them. If the surface mixture has absorbed moisture before rolling is
completed, it shall be scarified, broken up, bladed back and forth until dry and then
relaid.

The stabilized material shall be compacted to a density of not less than ninety-six
percent (96%) of maximum Marshall density (Marshall samples based on fifty (50)
blows of Marshall hammer to each side of the test specimen).

4.15.5.6 Contractor Process Quality Control. Testing to control the quality of

bituminous granular soil or sand mixtures shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Copies of all test results shall be forwarded to the Engineer at the end of each working
day. The Engineer reserves the right to obtain samples of the materials at any point
during production operations for his own use.

The Contractor shall perform the following minimum testing for each type of
bituminous granular mixture produced and each day’s production.

1. Two samples of combined granular sand or soil mixtures shall be obtained from
the Roadway Windrow at random times during the day just prior to the addition of
bituminous emulsion material and the combined aggregate tested for gradation.

2. Two samples of the bituminous granular mixture shall be obtained from the
Road after spreading and the water and bituminous material contents determined by
oven drying and extraction testing. Extracted aggregate shall be tested for gradation.
The bituminous material content as extracted from the mixture shall conform to the
requirement in the approved mix design within plus or minus one (1) percentage point.

4.15.5.7 Quality Assurance Procedures. The bituminous stabilized sand and

granular soil shall be accepted by lot. Unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the lot size shall be ten thousand (10,000) square meters for each layer
constructed. The bituminous stabilized mixtures shall be sampled, tested, and
evaluated in accordance with Section 1.08, “Acceptance of Work,” in the General
Specifications. The Engineer may, during the beginning of placement of bituminous
stabilized sand and granular soil, at times when test results indicate erratic
characteristics, and at any other time, reduce the lot size to sections with similar quality
characteristics. This should facilitate the isolation and modification or replacement of
low-quality materials with materials of acceptable quality to maintain the overall strength
of the pavement structure.

The Engineer shall perform or supervise the performance of all quality assurance
sampling and testing. The location of all samples and tests shall be recorded by
roadway, lane and centerline station (kilometer). Quality assurance sampling and
testing for each lot shall include:
1. Compaction
2. Thickness
3. Gradation and Bituminous Material Content
4. Surface Smoothness

32
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.15.5.7.1 Compaction. Bituminous stabilized mixtures shall be compacted to

the percent of maximum density detailed in Paragraph 4.15.5.5 “Compaction of
Bituminous Stabilized Mixtures” in these Supplemental Specifications.

The compacted density for each layer shall be determined by the sand cone
method, MRDTM 215, or by nuclear method, MRDTM 218, using full depth penetration,
at the option of the Engineer.

When the sand cone method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the tests shall be made at a minimum of five (5) randomly selected
locations in each lot.

When the nuclear method is used, unless otherwise stated in the Special
Specifications, the test shall be made at a minimum of eight (8) randomly selected
locations in each lot. Three (3) nuclear gauge readings shall be made at each test
location within a radius of two (2) meters. The three (3) readings shall be averaged and
the average considered to be the density for that test location.

Percent relative compaction shall be computed by comparing the average

actual in-place compacted density from the nuclear gauge or sand cone test results with
the maximum density determined as detailed in Paragraph 4.15.5.5 “Compaction of
Bituminous Stabilized Mixtures” in these Supplemental Specifications..

Any lot of subgrade that has a percent relative compaction below the minimum
percent compaction specified in Paragraph 4.15.8.5 “Compaction of Bituminous
Stabilized Mixtures” in these Supplemental Specifications shall be removed and
replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

4.15.5.7.2 Thickness. The thickness of each lot of bituminous stabilized

mixture complete as placed and compacted, shall be measured from test holes
obtained at a minimum of five (5) random locations within the lot. The thickness of each
hole shall be determined after it is determined that the compacted density is acceptable.
The average of the test hole thicknesses shall be reported as the thickness of the lot.

A lot shall be accepted when the average total thickness is not less than the
Plan thickness.

When the average thickness of a lot of subgrade is less than the plan thickness,
the Contractor, at his own expense, shall place and remix additional stabilized granular
material with the original material and recompact before new test holes are dug.

4.15.5.7.3 Gradation and Bituminous Material Content. The gradation shall

fall between upper and lower specification limits shown in Paragraph 4.15.2.3 “ Granular
Earth Materials” in these Supplemental Specifications. When the gradation does not
fall between these limits, granular materials shall be added and the mixture remixed to
bring the graduation to these limits while maintaining the bituminous material content
within its limits.

33
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

The bituminous material content of the bituminous emulsion treated base shall
be determined by the extraction from three (3) randomly selected samples per lot taken
from the road after all mixing is complete and prior to compaction. The average
bituminous material content shall not vary from the approved job mix content by more
than plus or minus one percent (" 1%). When the bituminous material content varies
by more than plus or minus one percent (" 1%) the lot shall be removed, remixed with
other materials added as necessary and/or replaced with other materials approved by
the Engineer.

4.15.5.7.4 Surface Smoothness. When a straightedge four (4) meters in

length is laid on the finished surface of the base parallel with the centerline, the surface
shall have no depressions greater than five (5) millimeters from the lower edge of the
straightedge. When the straightedge is laid transverse to the centerline, the surface
shall have no depressions greater than eight (8) millimeters from the lower edge of the
straightedge. Depression areas outside these tolerances shall be corrected.

4.15.5.7.5 Acceptance. Bituminous materials will be accepted under

Subsection 1.08.3 “ Certification of Compliance” in accordance with Subsection 4.01.4,
“Acceptance Procedures for Bituminous Materials,” in the General Specifications.

Bituminous stabilized granular soils and sand construction including

compaction, thickness, gradation surface smoothness and bituminous material content
will be accepted under Subsection 1.08.4, “Me asured or Tested Conformance,” in the
General Specifications.

4.15.6 Measurement

When the Bill of Quantities includes “Bituminous Stabilized Sand or Bituminous

Stabilized Granular Soil” measurement will be by the cubic meters for the volume of
stabilized material authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer based on the
minimum dimensions shown on the plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer. The
material to be stabilized will be included in the approved cross sections and therefore
measured separately and computed on a cubic meter basis.

34
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

4.15.7 Payment

When the Bill of Quantities includes “Bituminous Stabilized Sand - or Bituminous

Stabilized Granular Soil,” the amount of completed and accepted work, unit measured
as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price or adjusted unit price per
cubic meter, which price shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials, for all labor, equipment, tools and all other items necessary for the proper
completion of the work as specified in Subsection 1.07.2 “Scope of Payment” in the
General Specifications.

PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:

Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit
41501 Bituminous Stabilized Sand Cubic Meter
41502 Bituminous Stabilized Granular Soil Cubic Meter

35
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

AGRICULTURAL ROAD CONSTRUCTION

PART 5 - CONCRETE, STEEL AND STRUCTURES

---- PART 5 -- PAGE 77 ----

Subsection 5.03.9.1 Description is supplemented as follows:

This work includes all agricultural road concrete work except bridges and the top
slab of multiple span reinforced concrete box culverts unless otherwise stated in the
Special Specifications.

36
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

AGRICULTURAL ROAD CONSTRUCTION

PART 6 - INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION

--- PART 6 -- PAGE 17 ---

Paragraph 6.02.2.1 Concrete is eliminated and the following substituted:

6.02.2.1 Concrete. Portland cement concrete shall conform to Minor Concrete as

described in Subsection 5.03.9 “Concrete for Minor Structures” in the General
Specifications.

--- PART 6 -- PAGE 24 ---

Paragraph 6.03.2.1 Concrete is eliminated and the following substituted:

6.03.2.1 Concrete. Portland cement concrete shall conform to Minor Concrete as

described in Subsection 5.03.9 “Concrete for Minor Structures” in the General
Specifications.

--- PART 6 -- PAGE 75 ---

Paragraph 6.12.2.1 Concrete is eliminated and the following substituted:

6.12.2.1 Concrete. Portland cement concrete shall conform to Minor Concrete as

described in Subsection 5.03.9 “Concrete for Minor Structures” in the General
Specifications.

37
 MOC Supplemental Specifications Agricultural Road Construction - November 1998
Table of Contents

SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS

AGRICULTURAL ROAD CONSTRUCTION

PART 9 - TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES AND WORK ZONES

--- PART 9 -- PAGE 2 ---

Subsection 9.02.2 Worksite Traffic Safety Supervisor - is revised to permit the

Worksite Traffic Safety Supervisor for the project to be the Contractor’s Project
Manager Provided he meets the minimum, qualifications.

--- PART 9 -- PAGE 16 ---

Subsection 9.02.6 Method of Measurement, paragraph “Flaggers” and “Pilot Cars”

are eliminated and the following substituted:

Subsection 9.02.6 Method of Measurement

“ Flaggers” will be considered subsidiary to the Traffic Control Management Pay Item
and will not be measured for payment.

“Pilot Ca r” (inclu ding operators) will be considered subsidiary to the Traffic Control
Management Pay Item and will not be measured for payment.

38
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ISSUED IN 1998
MASTER LIST OF PAY ITEMS, NUMBERS, DESCRIPTIONS AND UNITS
November-98
New Construction Pay Items

PART 1: GENERAL

10601 Construction Schedule Lump Sum

10901 Supervision Staff Compound Lump Sum
10902 Supervision Staff Compound (Temporary) Lump Sum
10903 Project Laboratory Lump Sum
10904 Computers and Survey Equipment Lump Sum

PART 2: EARTHWORK

20101 Clearing and Grubbing Square Meter

20102 Individual Tree Removal Unit
20201 Removal of Existing Building Square Meter
20202 Removal of Boundary Wall, including Gate Linear Meter
20203 Removal of Bridge Structure Square Meter
20204 Removal of Bridge Component Cubic Meter
20205 Removal of Box Culvert & Pipe Culvert End Section Cubic Meter
20206 Removal of Metal Bearing Device Unit
20207 Removal of Elastomeric Bearing Device Unit
20208 Removal of Expansion Joint Linear Meter
20209 Removal of Aluminum Bridge Railing Linear Meter
20210 Removal of Steel Bridge Railing Linear Meter
20211 Removal of Concrete Bridge Parapet Linear Meter
20212 Removal of Structural Steel or Precast Concrete Member Ton
20213 Removal of Underground Utility Lines Linear Meter
2021301 Removal of Underground Utility Lines, Water Linear Meter
2021302 Removal of Underground Utility Lines, Electrical Linear Meter
2021303 Removal of Underground Utility Lines, Storm Drain Linear Meter
2021304 Removal of Underground Utility Lines, Sanitary Sewer Linear Meter
2021305 Removal of Underground Utility Lines, Telephone Linear Meter
20214 Removal of Aerial Utility Lines and Poles Linear Meter
2021401 Removal of Aerial Utility Lines and Poles, Electrical Linear Meter
2021402 Removal of Aerial Utility Lines and Poles, Telephone Linear Meter
20215 Removal of Curb Linear Meter
20216 Removal of Combined Curb & Gutter Linear Meter
20217 Removal of Gutter Linear Meter
20218 Removal of Septic Tank Unit
20219 Removal of Catch Basin or Manhole or Inlet Unit
20220 Removal of Well Unit
20221 Removal of Riprap, Wire-Enclosed Riprap & Gabion Slope Protection Cubic Meter
20222 Removal of Concrete, Paving Tile & Shotcrete Slope Protection Square Meter
20223 Removal of Pipe Culvert Linear Meter
20224 Removal of Fence, including Gate Linear Meter
20225 Removal of Dumped Rubbish Cubic Meter
20226 Removal of Sidewalk & Median Paving Square Meter
20227 Removal of Guardrail, Complete Linear Meter
20228 Removal of Guardrail Terminal Unit
20229 Removal of New Jersey Concrete Barrier Linear Meter
20230 Removal of Impact Attenuator Unit
20231 Removal of Steel Safety Railing Linear Meter
20232 Removal of Bituminous and Cement Concrete Pavement Square Meter
20233 Removal of Traffic Paint Line & Control Marking Square Meter

Page 1 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

20234 Removal of Ceramic & Retroreflective Raised Pavement Marker Unit

20235 Removal of Traffic Signal & Controller Unit
20236 Removal of Rumble Strip or Speed Bump Square Meter
20237 Removal of Sign Post Base Cubic Meter
20238 Removal of Sign (Any Type) Square Meter
20239 Removal of Breakaway Sign Post Unit
20240 Removal of Overhead Sign Support Ton
20241 Removal of Glare Screen Linear Meter
20242 Removal of Delineator Unit
20243 Removal of Telephone Cabinet Unit
20301 Roadway Excavation Cubic Meter
20302 Tunnel Excavation Cubic Meter
2030201 Tunnel Excavation - Main Line Cubic Meter
2030202 Tunnel Excavation - Cross Passage Cubic Meter
20401 Controlled Blastholes Linear Meter
20501 Embankment Cubic Meter
20601 Subgrade Cubic Meter
20602 Subgrade Preparation Square Meter
20701 Lime Treated Subgrade Cubic Meter
20702 Lime Ton
20801 Cement Treated Subgrade Cubic Meter
20802 Cement Ton
20901 Structural Excavation Cubic Meter
2090101 Structural Excavation-Bridges Cubic Meter
2090102 Structural Excavation-Other Structures Cubic Meter
20902 Temporary Shoring and Cribbing, Structure Lump Sum

PART 3: AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

30201 Aggregate Subbase Course Cubic Meter

3020101 Aggregate Subbase Course, Grading I Cubic Meter
3020102 Aggregate Subbase Course, Grading II Cubic Meter
3020103 Aggregate Subbase Course, Grading III Cubic Meter
30301 Aggregate Base Course Cubic Meter
3030101 Aggregate Base Course, Grading I Cubic Meter
3030102 Aggregate Base Course, Grading II Cubic Meter
3030103 Aggregate Base Course, Grading III Cubic Meter
30401 Cement Treated Base Course Cubic Meter
3040101 Cement Treated Base Course, Grading I Cubic Meter
3040102 Cement Treated Base Course, Grading II Cubic Meter
3040103 Cement Treated Base Course, Grading III Cubic Meter
30501 Earth Shoulders Cubic Meter
30502 Earth Laybys Cubic Meter
30503 Aggregate Shoulders Cubic Meter
3050301 Aggregate Shoulders, Grading I Cubic Meter
3050302 Aggregate Shoulders, Grading II Cubic Meter
3050303 Aggregate Shoulders, Grading III Cubic Meter
30504 Aggregate Laybys Cubic Meter
3050401 Aggregate Laybys, Grading I Cubic Meter
3050402 Aggregate Laybys, Grading II Cubic Meter
3050403 Aggregate Laybys, Grading III Cubic Meter

PART 4: BITUMINOUS CONSTRUCTION

40201 Bituminous Prime Coat Liter

4020101 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade MC-30 or MC-70 or MC-250 Liter
4020102 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade MC-1 or MC-2 or MC-3 Liter
4020103 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade RC-70 or RC-250 Liter
4020104 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade RC-1 or RC-2 or RC-3 Liter

Page 2 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

4020105 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade RS-1 or RS-2 Liter

4020106 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade SS-1 or SS-1h Liter
4020107 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade CRS-1 or CRS-2 Liter
4020108 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade CMS-2 or CMS-2h Liter
4020109 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade CSS-1 or CSS-1h Liter
4020110 Bituminous Prime Coat, Grade ____ Liter
40202 Bituminous Tack Coat Liter
4020201 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade RC-70 or RC-250 Liter
4020202 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade RC-1 or RC-2 Liter
4020203 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade RS-1 or RS-2 Liter
4020204 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade SS-1 or SS-1h Liter
4020205 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade CRS-1 or CRS-2 Liter
4020206 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade CMS-2 or CMS-2h Liter
4020207 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade CSS-1 or CSS-1h Liter
4020208 Bituminous Tack Coat, Grade ____ Liter
40203 Bituminous Fog Seal Liter
4020301 Bituminous Fog Seal, SS-1 or SS-1H Liter
4020302 Bituminous Fog Seal, CSS-1 or CSS-1H Liter
4020303 Bituminous Fog Seal, Grade ____ Liter
40301 Bituminous Seal Coat Square Meter
4030101 Bituminous Seal Coat-CM-B Square Meter
4030102 Bituminous Seal Coat-CM-C Square Meter
40302 Single Bituminous Surface Treatment Square Meter
4030201 Single Bituminous Surface Treatment-CM-A Square Meter
4030202 Single Bituminous Surface Treatment-CM-A-1 Square Meter
40303 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment Square Meter
4030301 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment, Class A, Grading I Square Meter
4030302 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment, Class A, Grading IV Square Meter
4030303 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment, Class B, Grading I Square Meter
4030304 Double Bituminous Surface Treatment, Class B, Grade IV Square Meter
40304 Precoating Aggregates Square Meter
40401 Bituminous Emulsion Base Course Cubic Meter
4040101 Bituminous Emulsion Open-Graded Base Course, Type I Cubic Meter
4040102 Bituminous Emulsion Dense-Graded Base Course, Type II Cubic Meter
4040103 Bituminous Emulsion Sand Base Course, Type III Cubic Meter
40501 Bituminous Concrete Base Course Cubic Meter
4050101 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4050102 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4050103 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4050104 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4050105 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4050106 Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
40502 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course Cubic Meter
4050201 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4050202 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4050203 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4050204 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4050205 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4050206 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4050207 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4050208 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4050209 Bituminous Concrete Leveling Course, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
40503 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Cubic Meter
4050301 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4050302 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4050303 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4050304 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4050305 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4050306 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter

Page 3 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

4050307 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4050308 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4050309 Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
40504 Asphalt Cement Liter
4050401 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-2.5 Liter
4050402 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-5 Liter
4050403 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-10 Liter
4050404 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-20 Liter
4050405 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-30 Liter
4050406 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-40 Liter
4050407 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC 40-50 Liter
4050408 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC 60-70 Liter
4050409 Asphalt Cement, Grade AC 85-100 Liter
40505 Modified Asphalt Cement Liter
4050501 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-2.5 Liter
4050502 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-5 Liter
4050503 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-10 Liter
4050504 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-20 Liter
4050505 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-30 Liter
4050506 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC-40 Liter
4050507 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC 40-50 Liter
4050508 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC 60-70 Liter
4050509 Modified Asphalt Cement, Grade AC 85-100 Liter
40506 Mineral Filler Ton
4050601 Mineral Filler, Portland Cement Ton
4050602 Mineral Filler, Hydraulic Cement Ton
4050603 Mineral Filler, Lime, Type N or S Ton
40507 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier Liter
4050701 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Anti-strip Liter
4050702 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Polymer Liter
40508 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier Kilogram
4050801 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Anti-strip Kilogram
4050802 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Polymer Kilogram
4050803 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Latex Kilogram
4050804 Chemical Admixture/Asphalt Modifier, Rubber Kilogram
40509 Minor Bituminous Concrete Cubic Meter
40601 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course Cubic Meter
4060101 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type I, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4060102 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type I, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4060103 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type I, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4060104 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type I, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4060105 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type I, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4060106 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type I, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4060107 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type I, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4060108 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type I, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4060109 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type I, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
4060110 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type II, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4060111 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type II, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4060112 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type II, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4060113 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type II, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4060114 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type II, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4060115 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type II, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4060116 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type II, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4060117 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type II, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4060118 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Base Course, Type II, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
40602 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course Cubic Meter
4060201 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type I, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4060202 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type I, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4060203 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type I, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter

Page 4 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

4060204 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type I, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4060205 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type I, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4060206 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type I, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4060207 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type I, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4060208 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type I, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4060209 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type I, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
4060210 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type II, Grading I, Class A Cubic Meter
4060211 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type II, Grading I, Class B Cubic Meter
4060212 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type II, Grading I, Class C Cubic Meter
4060213 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type II, Grading II, Class A Cubic Meter
4060214 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type II, Grading II, Class B Cubic Meter
4060215 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type II, Grading II, Class C Cubic Meter
4060216 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type II, Grading III, Class A Cubic Meter
4060217 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type II, Grading III, Class B Cubic Meter
4060218 Hot-Mix Recycled Bituminous Concrete Wearing Course, Type II, Grading III, Class C Cubic Meter
40603 Hot Mix Recycling Agent Liter
40701 Bituminous Concrete Friction Course Square Meter
40801 Bituminous-Rubber Membrane Kilogram
4080101 Bituminous-Rubber Membrane, Class I Kilogram
4080102 Bituminous-Rubber Membrane, Class II Kilogram
40901 Cold Mix Recycled Bituminous Base Course Cubic Meter
4090101 Cold Mix Recycled Bituminous Base Course, Class B Cubic Meter
4090102 Cold Mix Recycled Bituminous Base Course, Type II Cubic Meter
40902 Cold Mix Recycling Agent Liter
41001 Slurry Seal Square Meter
4100101 Slurry Seal, Type I Square Meter
4100102 Slurry Seal, Type II Square Meter
4100103 Slurry Seal, Type III Square Meter
41101 Cold Milling Bituminous Concrete Square Meter
41102 Cold Milling Bituminous Concrete Cubic Meter
41201 Surface Recycling of Bituminous Pavement Cubic Meter
41301 Saw Cutting and Joint Sealing Linear Meter
41302 Crack Cleaning and Sealing Linear Meter
49999
50000 PART 5: CONCRETE STEEL AND STRUCTURES
50001
50201 Reinforcing Steel, Grade 60 Ton
50202 Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel, Grade 60 Ton
50301 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure Cubic Meter
5030101 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class A Cubic Meter
5030102 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class B Cubic Meter
5030103 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class C Cubic Meter
5030104 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class D Cubic Meter
5030105 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class E Cubic Meter
5030106 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class K Cubic Meter
5030107 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class S Cubic Meter
5030108 Structural Concrete for Bridge Superstructure, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50302 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure Cubic Meter
5030201 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class A Cubic Meter
5030202 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class B Cubic Meter
5030203 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class C Cubic Meter
5030204 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class D Cubic Meter
5030205 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class E Cubic Meter
5030206 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class K Cubic Meter
5030207 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class S Cubic Meter
5030208 Structural Concrete for Bridge Substructure, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50303 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts Cubic Meter
5030301 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class A Cubic Meter
5030302 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class B Cubic Meter

Page 5 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

5030303 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class C Cubic Meter

5030304 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class D Cubic Meter
5030305 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class E Cubic Meter
5030306 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class K Cubic Meter
5030307 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class S Cubic Meter
5030308 Structural Concrete for Box Culverts, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50304 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls Cubic Meter
5030401 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class A Cubic Meter
5030402 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class B Cubic Meter
5030403 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class C Cubic Meter
5030404 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class D Cubic Meter
5030405 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class E Cubic Meter
5030406 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class K Cubic Meter
5030407 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class S Cubic Meter
5030408 Structural Concrete for Retaining Walls, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50305 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals Cubic Meter
5030501 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class A Cubic Meter
5030502 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class B Cubic Meter
5030503 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class C Cubic Meter
5030504 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class D Cubic Meter
5030505 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class E Cubic Meter
5030506 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class K Cubic Meter
5030507 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class S Cubic Meter
5030508 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Portals, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50306 Structural Concrete for Tunnel Lining Cubic Meter
5030601 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class A Cubic Meter
5030602 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class B Cubic Meter
5030603 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class C Cubic Meter
5030604 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class D Cubic Meter
5030605 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class E Cubic Meter
5030606 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class K Cubic Meter
5030607 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class S Cubic Meter
5030608 Structural Concrete for Mainline Tunnel Lining, Class ____ Cubic Meter
5030611 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class A Cubic Meter
5030612 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class B Cubic Meter
5030613 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class C Cubic Meter
5030614 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class D Cubic Meter
5030615 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class E Cubic Meter
5030616 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class K Cubic Meter
5030617 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class S Cubic Meter
5030618 Structural Concrete for Cross Passage Tunnel Lining, Class ____ Cubic Meter
50307 Concrete for Minor Structures Cubic Meter
50308 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed Unit
5030801 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 250 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030802 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 300 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030803 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 400 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030804 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 500 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030805 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 600 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030806 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 700 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030807 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 800 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030808 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 900 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030809 Bearing Devices, Pot, Fixed, 1000 Ton Maximum Load Unit
50309 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding Unit
5030901 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 250 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030902 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 300 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030903 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 400 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030904 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 500 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030905 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 600 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030906 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 700 Ton Maximum Load Unit

Page 6 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

5030907 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 800 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030908 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 900 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5030909 Bearing Devices, Pot, Sliding, 1000 Ton Maximum Load Unit
50310 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided Unit
5031001 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 250 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031002 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 300 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031003 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 400 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031004 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 500 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031005 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 600 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031006 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 700 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031007 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 800 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031008 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 900 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031009 Bearing Devices, Pot, Guided, 1000 Ton Maximum Load Unit
50311 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric Unit
5031101 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 60 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031102 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 90 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031103 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 100 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031104 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 120 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031105 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 140 Ton Maximum Load Unit
5031106 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric, 150 Ton Maximum Load Unit
50312 Bearing Devices, Elastomeric Cubic Decimeter
50313 Bearing Devices, Metal Unit
50314 Expansion Joints Linear Meter
5031401 Expansion Joints, Less than 50 mm Linear Meter
5031402 Expansion Joints, 50 mm to 100 mm Linear Meter
5031403 Expansion Joints, 100 mm to 200 mm Linear Meter
5031404 Expansion Joints, greater than 200 mm Linear Meter
50315 Water Stop Linear Meter
5031501 Water Stop, Rubber Linear Meter
5031502 Water Stop, Copper Linear Meter
5031503 Water Stop, Plastic Linear Meter
50316 Mineral Admixture Ton
50401 Prestressing Steel Ton
50402 Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Members Cubic Meter
5040201 Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Members, I-Beam, Standard Type Cubic Meter
5040202 Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Member, Slab, Standard Type Cubic Meter
5040203 Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Member, Box Beam, Standard Type Cubic Meter
5040204 Precast Prestressed Concrete Structural Member, ____, Standard Type Cubic Meter
50403 Cast-in-Place Prestressed Concrete Structural Members Cubic Meter
50501 Structural Steel Finished, Fabricated and Erected Ton
50502 Aluminum Bridge Railing Linear Meter
5050201 Aluminum Bridge Railing, One Rail Linear Meter
5050202 Aluminum Bridge Railing, Two Rail Linear Meter
5050203 Aluminum Bridge Railing, Three Rail Linear Meter
5050204 Aluminum Bridge Railing, W-Beam Linear Meter
5050205 Aluminum Bridge Railing, Thrie Beam Linear Meter
5050206 Aluminum Bridge Railing, (Type) Linear Meter
50503 Steel Bridge Railing Linear Meter
5050301 Steel Bridge Railing, One Rail Linear Meter
5050302 Steel Bridge Railing, Two Rail Linear Meter
5050303 Steel Bridge Railing, Three Rail Linear Meter
5050304 Steel Bridge Railing, W-Beam Linear Meter
5050305 Steel Bridge Railing, Thrie Beam Linear Meter
5050306 Steel Bridge Railing, (Type) Linear Meter
50601 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In-Place Linear Meter
5060101 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.6 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060102 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.8 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060103 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.0 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060104 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.2 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter

Page 7 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

5060105 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.4 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter

5060106 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.6 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060107 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.8 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060108 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 2.0 m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060109 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, ___ m dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060112 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.3 m x 1.1 m, In-Place Linear Meter
5060113 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.6 m x 2.2 m, In-Place Linear Meter
5060114 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, ___ m x ___ m, In-Place Linear Meter
50602 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In-Place Cubic Meter
50603 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060301 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.6 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060302 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 0.8 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060303 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.0 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060304 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.2 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060305 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.4 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060306 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.6 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060307 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 1.8 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060308 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, 2.0 m dia, In Steel Shells, In-Place Linear Meter
5060309 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, ___ m dia, In Steel Shells, In-place Linear Meter
50604 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles, In Steel Shells, In-Place Cubic Meter
50605 Precast Concrete Piles, Furnished Linear Meter
5060501 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.2 m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060502 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.3 m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060503 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.4 m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060504 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.5 m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060505 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.6 m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060506 Precast Concrete Piles, ___ m dia, Furnished Linear Meter
50606 Precast Concrete Piles, Furnished Cubic Meter
50607 Precast Concrete Piles, In-Place Linear Meter
5060701 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.2 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060702 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.3 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060703 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.4 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060704 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.5 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060705 Precast Concrete Piles, 0.6 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5060706 Precast Concrete Piles, ___ m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
50608 Precast Concrete Piles, In-Place Cubic Meter
50609 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, Furnished Linear Meter
5060901 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.2 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060902 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.3 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060903 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.4 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060904 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.5 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060905 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.6 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5060906 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, ___ m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
50610 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, Furnished Cubic Meter
50611 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, In-Place Linear Meter
5061101 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.2 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061102 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.3 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061103 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.4 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061104 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.5 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061105 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, 0.6 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061106 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, ___ m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
50612 Precast Concrete Hexagonal Piles, In-Place Cubic Meter
50613 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, Furnished Linear Meter
5061301 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.2 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5061302 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.3 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5061303 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.4 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5061304 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.5 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5061305 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.6 m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter
5061306 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, ___ m internal dia, Furnished Linear Meter

Page 8 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

50614 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, Furnished Cubic Meter

50615 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, In-Place Linear Meter
5061501 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.2 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061502 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.3 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061503 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.4 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061504 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.5 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061505 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, 0.6 m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
5061506 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, ___ m internal dia, In-Place Linear Meter
50616 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles, In-Place Cubic Meter
50617 Steel H-Piles, Furnished Ton
50618 Steel H-Piles, In Place Linear Meter
50619 Pile Load Test Unit
5061901 Working Pile Load Test Unit
5061902 Ultimate Pile Load Test Unit
5061903 Tension Pile Load Test Unit
5061904 Pile Integrity Testing Unit
50620 Pile Splices Unit
5062001 Pile Splices, Precast Concrete Unit
5062002 Pile Splices, Steel H-Piles Unit
50701 Lean Concrete Base Course Square Meter
50801 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Square Meter
50901 Spall Repair Square Meter
50902 Slab Repair Square Meter
50903 Pavement Grinding Square Meter
50904 Pavement Grooving Square Meter
50905 Joint and Crack Repair Linear Meter
50906 Edge Sealing Linear Meter
51001 Bridge Parapets Linear Meter
51101 Heavy Duty Gully Grates and Frames Unit
51102 Permeable Backing Square Meter
51103 Granular Backfill Cubic Meter
51104 Bridge Deck Drainage System Linear Meter
51201 Waterproof Membrane Square Meter
5120101 Waterproof Membrane, 2 Layer Square Meter
5120102 Waterproof Membrane, 3 Layer Square Meter
51301 Painting of Existing Concrete Structure No _____ Square Meter
51302 Painting of Existing Steel Structure No _____ Square Meter
51303 Protective Coating for Concrete Structure Square Meter
5130301 Protective Coating for Concrete Structure, Resistance to Weathering Square Meter
5130302 Protective Coating for Concrete Structure, Resistance to Chemicals, Impact and Abrasion Square Meter
5130303 Protective Coating for Concrete Structure, Resistance to Strong Caustics, Acids and Solvents Square Meter
51401 Epoxy Bonding Agent Square Meter
51402 Concrete Overlay, Latex Cubic Meter
51403 Concrete Overlay, Polymer Cubic Meter
51404 Concrete Overlay, Portland Cement Cubic Meter
51405 Epoxy-Sand Slurry Square Meter
51501 Removal of Epoxy, Bituminous and Foreign Surface Overlay Square Meter
51502 Removal of Structural Concrete Deck Surface Square Meter
51503 Breaking and Removal of Structural Concrete Cubic Meter
51504 Drilling and Grouting Anchors Cubic Decimeter
51505 Drilling and Grouting Anchors Unit
5150501 Drilling and Grouting Anchors, 50 cm Unit
5150502 Drilling and Grouting Anchors, 75 cm Unit
5150503 Drilling and Grouting Anchors, 100 cm Unit
5150504 Drilling and Grouting Anchors, ___ cm Unit
51506 Joint Sealing Linear Meter
51507 Miscellaneous Structural Steel Kilogram
51508 Special Expansion Joint Linear Meter
5150801 Special Expansion Joint-width less than 50 mm Linear Meter

Page 9 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

5150802 Special Expansion Joint-width 51 - 100 mm Linear Meter

5150803 Special Expansion Joint-width 101 - 200 mm Linear Meter
5150804 Special Expansion Joint-width 201 - 300 mm Linear Meter
5150805 Special Expansion Joint-width ___ - ___ mm Linear Meter
51509 Anti-Corrosion Primer Liter
51510 Replacement Concrete for Partial Depth Patching Cubic Meter
51511 Replacement Concrete for Full Depth Patching Cubic Meter
51512 Replacement Deck Concrete or Other Replacement Structural Concrete Cubic Meter
51601 Spall Repair Concrete Square Meter
51602 Slab Repair Concrete Square Meter
51603 Bridge Deck Grinding Square Meter
51604 Concrete Bridge Deck Joint and Crack Repair Linear Meter
59999
60000 PART 6: INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION
60001
60101 W-Beam Guardrail Linear Meter
6010101 W-Beam Guardrail, Standard Section Linear Meter
6010102 W-Beam Guardrail, Transition Section Linear Meter
60102 Thrie Beam Guardrail Linear Meter
6010201 Thrie Beam Guardrail, Standard Section Linear Meter
6010202 Thrie Beam Guardrail, Transition Section Linear Meter
60103 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Linear Meter
6010301 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail, Standard Section Linear Meter
6010302 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail, Transition Section Linear Meter
60104 (Type), Guardrail Linear Meter
6010401 (Type), Guardrail, Standard Section Linear Meter
6010402 (Type), Guardrail, Transition Section Linear Meter
60105 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End Unit
6010501 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, BCT (Type 1) Unit
6010502 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, SRT (Type 1A) Unit
6010503 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Cut Slope Buried End (Type 2) Unit
6010504 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, ET-2000/BEST Unit
6010505 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Median Anchor, (Type 4) Unit
6010506 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Anchor to Structural Element or Concrete Barrier, (Type Unit
6010507 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, (Type) Unit
60106 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End Unit
6010601 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Anchor Turndown 90o to Concrete Footing Unit
6010602 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Anchor (Type 3) Unit
6010603 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Cut Slope Buried End, (Type 2) Unit
6010604 W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, (Type) Unit
60107 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End Unit
6010701 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Connector (Thrie to W-Beam) Unit
6010702 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, SENTRE Unit
6010703 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Cut Slope Buried End (Type 2A) Unit
6010704 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Anchor to Structural Element or Concrete Barrier Unit
6010705 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, (Type) Unit
60108 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End Unit
6010801 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Anchor Turndown 90o to Concrete Footing Unit
6010802 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Cut Slope Buried End (Type 2A) Unit
6010803 Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, (Type) Unit
60109 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal Unit
6010901 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Anchor Block Unit
6010902 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Cut Slope Buried End Unit
6010903 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, (Type) Unit
6010904 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Anchor Block Unit
6010905 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Cut Slope Buried End Unit
6010906 Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Trailing, End, (Type) Unit
60110 Reinstallation of Guardrail Linear Meter
6011001 Reinstallation of Guardrail, W-Beam, Standard Section Linear Meter

Page 10 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

6011002 Reinstallation of Guardrail, W-Beam, Transition Section Linear Meter

6011003 Reinstallation of Guardrail, Thrie Beam, Standard Section Linear Meter
6011004 Reinstallation of Guardrail, Thrie Beam, Transition Section Linear Meter
6011005 Reinstallation of Guardrail, Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable, Standard Section Linear Meter
6011006 Reinstallation of Guardrail, Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable, Transition Section Linear Meter
6011007 Reinstallation of Guardrail, (Type), Standard Section Linear Meter
6011008 Reinstallation of Guardrail, (Type), Transition Section Linear Meter
60111 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Guardrail Terminal Unit
60112 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Guardrail Terminal, Approach End Unit
6011201 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, BCT (Type 1) Unit
6011202 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, SRT (Type 1A) Unit
6011203 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Cut Slope Buried End (Type 2) Unit
6011204 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, ET-2000/BEST Unit
6011205 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Anchor to Structural Element or Unit
6011206 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, (Type) Unit
6011210 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Connector (Thrie to W-Beam Unit
6011211 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, SENTRE Unit
6011212 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Cut Slope Buried End (Type Unit
6011213 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Anchor to Structural Element Unit
6011214 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, (Type) Unit
6011220 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Anchor Unit
6011221 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, Cut Sl Unit
6011222 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Approach End, (Type) Unit
60113 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End Unit
6011301 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Anchor Turndown 90o to Concret Unit
6011302 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Anchor (Type 3) Unit
6011303 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Cut Slope Buried End, (Type 2) Unit
6011304 Reinstallation/Retrofit of W-Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, (Type) Unit
6011310 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Anchor Turndown 90o to Concr Unit
6011311 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Cut Slope Buried End (Type 2A Unit
6011312 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Thrie Beam Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, (Type) Unit
6011320 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Anchor B Unit
6011321 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Trailing End, Cut Slop Unit
6011322 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Tensioned Four Wire Rope Cable Guardrail Terminal, Trailing, End, (Type) Unit
60114 New Jersey Concrete Barrier Linear Meter
6011401 New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Single Face Linear Meter
6011402 New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Double Face Linear Meter
60115 New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section Unit
6011501 New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section, Approach End Unit
6011502 New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section, Trailing End Unit
60116 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier Linear Meter
6011601 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Single Face Linear Meter
6011602 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Double Face Linear Meter
60117 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section Unit
6011701 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section, Approach End Unit
6011702 Reinstallation of New Jersey Concrete Barrier, Terminal Section, Trailing End Unit
60118 Impact Attenuator Unit
6011801 Impact Attenuator, GREAT Unit
6011802 Impact Attenuator, Sand-filled Plastic Containers Unit
6011803 Impact Attenuator, HY-DRI Unit
6011804 Impact Attenuator, HI-DRO Unit
6011805 Impact Attenuator, QUAD GUARD Unit
6011806 Impact Attenuator, (Type) Unit
60119 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator Unit
6011901 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, GREAT Unit
6011902 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, Sand Filled Plastic Containers Unit
6011903 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, HY-DRI Unit
6011904 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, HY-DRO Unit
6011905 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, QUAD GUARD Unit

Page 11 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

6011906 Reinstallation/Retrofit of Impact Attenuator, (Type) Unit

60120 Glare Screen Linear Meter
6012001 Glare Screen, Fabric, Type IA Linear Meter
6012002 Glare Screen, Fabric, Type IB Linear Meter
6012003 Glare Screen, Fabric, Type IC Linear Meter
6012004 Glare Screen, Slats, Type 2 Linear Meter
6012005 Glare Screen, (Type) Linear Meter
60121 Steel Safety Railing Linear Meter
60122 Reinstallation of Steel Safety Railing Linear Meter
60201 Precast Curb Linear Meter
6020101 Precast Channelization Curb, Type ____ Linear Meter
6020102 Precast Bridge Curb, Type ____ Linear Meter
60202 Concrete Curb Linear Meter
6020201 Concrete Curb, Type ____ Linear Meter
60203 Bituminous Curb Linear Meter
6020301 Bituminous Curb, Type ____ Linear Meter
60204 Combined Curb and Gutter Linear Meter
6020401 Combined Curb and Gutter, Type ____ Linear Meter
60205 Gutter Linear Meter
6020501 Gutter, Type ____ Linear Meter
60301 Catch Basin Unit
6030101 Catch Basin, Type A Unit
6030102 Catch Basin, Type ____ Unit
60302 Manhole Unit
6030201 Manhole, Type A Unit
6030202 Manhole, Type B Unit
6030203 Manhole, Type ___ Unit
60303 Inlet Unit
6030301 Inlet, Type 1 Unit
6030302 Inlet, Type 2 Unit
6030303 Inlet, Type 3 Unit
6030304 Inlet, Type ____ Unit
60304 Drainage Grate Kilogram
6030401 Drainage Grate RCBC Inlet and Outlet Pipe Runners Kilogram
6030402 Drainage Grate, Type 1 Kilogram
6030403 Drainage Grate, Type 2 Kilogram
6030404 Drainage Grate, Type 3 Kilogram
6030405 Drainage Grate, Type __ Kilogram
60305 Adjustment of Elevation of Manhole Cover and Drainage Grate Unit
60401 Plastic Pipe Underdrain, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
60402 Plastic Pipe Underdrain, 150 mm dia Linear Meter
60403 Plastic Pipe Underdrain, 200 mm dia Linear Meter
60404 Plastic Pipe Underdrain, 250 mm dia Linear Meter
60405 Plastic Pipe Underdrain, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
60406 Plastic Pipe Underdrain, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
60411 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
60412 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, 150 mm dia Linear Meter
60413 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, 200 mm dia Linear Meter
60414 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, 250 mm dia Linear Meter
60415 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
60416 Steel Coated Pipe Underdrain, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
60421 (Type) Underdrain, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
60422 (Type) Underdrain, 150 mm dia Linear Meter
60423 (Type) Underdrain, 200 mm dia Linear Meter
60424 (Type) Underdrain, 250 mm dia Linear Meter
60425 (Type) Underdrain, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
60426 (Type) Underdrain, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
60431 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
60432 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, ___ mm dia Linear Meter

Page 12 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

60441 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 300 mm dia Linear Meter

60442 Steel Irrigation Pipe, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
60501 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
60502 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 400 mm dia Linear Meter
60503 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 500 mm dia Linear Meter
60504 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 600 mm dia Linear Meter
60505 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 750 mm dia Linear Meter
60506 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 900 mm dia Linear Meter
60507 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 1000 mm dia Linear Meter
60508 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, 1200 mm dia Linear Meter
60509 Asbestos Cement Storm Sewer, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
60513 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
60514 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 400 mm dia Linear Meter
60515 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 500 mm dia Linear Meter
60516 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 600 mm dia Linear Meter
60517 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 750 mm dia Linear Meter
60518 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 900 mm dia Linear Meter
60519 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 1000 mm dia Linear Meter
60520 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, 1200 mm dia Linear Meter
60521 PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
60525 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
60526 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 400 mm dia Linear Meter
60527 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 500 mm dia Linear Meter
60528 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 600 mm dia Linear Meter
60529 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 750 mm dia Linear Meter
60530 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 900 mm dia Linear Meter
60531 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 1000 mm dia Linear Meter
60532 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, 1200 mm dia Linear Meter
60533 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
60536 (Type), Storm Sewer, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
60537 (Type), Storm Sewer, 400 mm dia Linear Meter
60538 (Type), Storm Sewer, 500 mm dia Linear Meter
60539 (Type), Storm Sewer, 600 mm dia Linear Meter
60540 (Type), Storm Sewer, 750 mm dia Linear Meter
60541 (Type), Storm Sewer, 900 mm dia Linear Meter
60542 (Type), Storm Sewer, 1000 mm dia Linear Meter
60543 (Type), Storm Sewer, 1200 mm dia Linear Meter
60544 (Type), Storm Sewer, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
60601 Loose Stone Riprap Cubic Meter
6060101 Loose Stone Riprap, Class A Cubic Meter
6060102 Loose Stone Riprap, Class B Cubic Meter
6060103 Loose Stone Riprap, Class C Cubic Meter
6060104 Loose Stone Riprap, Class D Cubic Meter
6060105 Loose Stone Riprap, Class ____ Cubic Meter
60602 Grouted Stone Riprap Cubic Meter
6060201 Grouted Stone Riprap, Class A Cubic Meter
6060202 Grouted Stone Riprap, Class B Cubic Meter
6060203 Grouted Stone Riprap, Class C Cubic Meter
6060204 Grouted Stone Riprap, Class D Cubic Meter
6060205 Grouted Stone Riprap, Class ____ Cubic Meter
60603 Sacked Concrete Revetment Cubic Meter
60604 Gabions Cubic Meter
60605 R.C. Slope Protection Square Meter
60606 Wire Mesh Slope Protection Square Meter
60607 Paving Tile Slope Protection Square Meter
60608 Wire Enclosed Riprap Slope Protection Cubic Meter
60701 Ditch Lining Square Meter
6070101 Concrete Ditch Lining Square Meter
6070102 Grouted Stone Ditch Lining Square Meter

Page 13 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

6070103 Paving Tile Ditch Lining Square Meter

6070104 (Type) Ditch Lining Square Meter
60702 Wash Check Linear Meter
6070201 Concrete Wash Check Linear Meter
6070202 Grouted Stone Riprap Wash Check Linear Meter
6070203 (Type) Wash Check Linear Meter
60703 Slope Drain Linear Meter
6070301 Concrete Embankment Slope Drain Linear Meter
6070302 Bituminous Embankment Slope Drain Linear Meter
6070303 Metal Embankment Slope Drain Linear Meter
6070304 Concrete Cut Slope Drain Linear Meter
6070305 Bituminous Cut Slope Drain Linear Meter
6070306 Metal Cut Slope Drain Linear Meter
60801 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 300 mm Linear Meter
60802 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 400 mm Linear Meter
60803 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 500 mm Linear Meter
60804 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 600 mm Linear Meter
60805 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 750 mm Linear Meter
60806 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 1000 mm Linear Meter
60807 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 1200 mm Linear Meter
60808 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), 1400 mm Linear Meter
60809 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Precast), ____ mm Linear Meter
60812 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 300 mm Linear Meter
60813 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 400 mm Linear Meter
60814 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 500 mm Linear Meter
60815 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 600 mm Linear Meter
60816 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 750 mm Linear Meter
60817 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 1000 mm Linear Meter
60818 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 1200 mm Linear Meter
60819 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 1400 mm Linear Meter
60820 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert (Cast-in-Place), ____ mm Linear Meter
60823 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 49 x 77 cm Linear Meter
60824 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 61 x 96 cm Linear Meter
60825 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 73 x 115 cm Linear Meter
60826 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 85.5 x 134.5 cm Linear Meter
60827 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 97.5 x 153.5 cm Linear Meter
60828 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 109.5 x 173 cm Linear Meter
60829 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 122 x 192 cm Linear Meter
60830 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), 134 x 211 cm Linear Meter
60831 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Precast), ___ x ___ cm Linear Meter
60835 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 49 x 77 cm Linear Meter
60836 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 61 x 96 cm Linear Meter
60837 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 73 x 115 cm Linear Meter
60838 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 85.5 x 134.5 cm Linear Meter
60839 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 97.5 x 153.5 cm Linear Meter
60840 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 109.5 x 173 cm Linear Meter
60841 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 122 x 192 cm Linear Meter
60842 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), 134 x 211 cm Linear Meter
60843 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert (Cast-in-Place), ___ x ___ cm Linear Meter
60901 Water Well Extensions Cubic Meter
61001 Reconstructing Existing Farm Dikes Linear Meter
61002 Spur Dike Linear Meter
61003 Diversion Dike Cubic Meter
61101 Chain Link Fence Linear Meter
6110101 Chain Link Fence, 1.0 m Height Linear Meter
6110102 Chain Link Fence, 1.2 m Height Linear Meter
6110103 Chain Link Fence, 1.4 m Height Linear Meter
6110104 Chain Link Fence, 1.6 m Height Linear Meter
6110105 Chain Link Fence, 1.8 m Height Linear Meter

Page 14 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

6110106 Chain Link Fence, 2.0 m Height Linear Meter

6110107 Chain Link Fence, 2.2 m Height Linear Meter
6110108 Chain Link Fence, 2.4 m Height Linear Meter
6110109 Chain Link Fence, 2.6 m Height Linear Meter
61102 Industrial Fence Linear Meter
6110201 Industrial Fence, 1.0 m Height Linear Meter
6110202 Industrial Fence, 1.2 m Height Linear Meter
6110203 Industrial Fence, 1.4 m Height Linear Meter
6110204 Industrial Fence, 1.6 m Height Linear Meter
6110205 Industrial Fence, 1.8 m Height Linear Meter
6110206 Industrial Fence, 2.0 m Height Linear Meter
6110207 Industrial Fence, 2.2 m Height Linear Meter
6110208 Industrial Fence, 2.4 m Height Linear Meter
6110209 Industrial Fence, 2.6 m Height Linear Meter
61103 Barbed Wire Fence Linear Meter
6110301 Barbed Wire Fence, 2 Strand Linear Meter
6110302 Barbed Wire Fence, 3 Strand Linear Meter
6110303 Barbed Wire Fence, 4 Strand Linear Meter
6110304 Barbed Wire Fence, 5 Strand Linear Meter
6110305 Barbed Wire Fence, 6 Strand Linear Meter
6110306 Barbed Wire Fence, 7 Strand Linear Meter
61104 Combination Wire Fence Linear Meter
6110401 Combination Wire Fence, 2 Wire Linear Meter
6110402 Combination Wire Fence, 3 Wire Linear Meter
6110403 Combination Wire Fence, 4 Wire Linear Meter
6110404 Combination Wire Fence, 5 Wire Linear Meter
6110405 Combination Wire Fence, 6 Wire Linear Meter
61105 High Tension Wire Fence Linear Meter
6110501 High Tension Wire Fence, Type 1 Linear Meter
6110502 High Tension Wire Fence, Type 2 Linear Meter
6110503 High Tension Wire Fence, Type 3 Linear Meter
6110504 High Tension Wire Fence, Type 4 Linear Meter
61106 Gate Unit
6110601 Chain Link Fence Gate Unit
6110602 Industrial Fence Gate Unit
6110603 Combination Fence Gate Unit
6110604 Metal Gate Unit
6110605 (Type) Gate Unit
61107 Animal Guard, 3 m Width Unit
61108 Animal Guard, 4 m Width Unit
61109 Animal Guard, 5 m Width Unit
61110 Animal Guard, 6 m Width Unit
61111 Animal Guard, 7 m Width Unit
61112 Animal Guard, 8 m Width Unit
61113 Animal Guard, 9 m Width Unit
61114 Animal Guard, 10 m Width Unit
61201 Sidewalk, Drive Pad or Median Paving Square Meter
6120101 Cast-in-Place Concrete Sidewalk, Drive Pad or Median Paving Square Meter
6120102 Precast Concrete (Tiled) Sidewalk, Drive Pad or Median Paving Square Meter
6120103 Bituminous Concrete Sidewalk, Drive Pad or Median Paving Square Meter
61301 Monument Unit
6130101 Right-of-Way Monument Unit
6130102 Survey Monument Unit
6130103 Reference Monument Unit
61401 Shotcrete, 25 mm Depth Square Meter
61402 Shotcrete, 50 mm Depth Square Meter
61403 Shotcrete, 75 mm Depth Square Meter
61404 Shotcrete, 100 mm Depth Square Meter
61405 Shotcrete, 125 mm Depth Square Meter

Page 15 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

61406 Shotcrete, 150 mm Depth Square Meter

61407 Shotcrete, 175 mm Depth Square Meter
61408 Shotcrete, 200 mm Depth Square Meter
61409 Shotcrete, ___ mm Depth Square Meter
61412 Shotcrete Cubic Meter
61413 Reinforced Shotcrete, 50 mm Depth Square Meter
61414 Reinforced Shotcrete, 75 mm Depth Square Meter
61415 Reinforced Shotcrete, 100 mm Depth Square Meter
61416 Reinforced Shotcrete, 125 mm Depth Square Meter
61417 Reinforced Shotcrete, 150 mm Depth Square Meter
61418 Reinforced Shotcrete, 175 mm Depth Square Meter
61419 Reinforced Shotcrete, 200 mm Depth Square Meter
61420 Reinforced Shotcrete, ___ mm Depth Square Meter
61423 Reinforced Shotcrete Cubic Meter
61424 Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete, 50 mm Depth Square Meter
61425 Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete, 75 mm Depth Square Meter
61426 Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete, 100 mm Depth Square Meter
61427 Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete, 125 mm Depth Square Meter
61428 Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete, 150 mm Depth Square Meter
61429 Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete, 175 mm Depth Square Meter
61430 Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete, 200 mm Depth Square Meter
61431 Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete, ___ mm Depth Square Meter
61434 Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete Cubic Meter
61501 Crib Wall Modular Retaining Wall Square Meter
61502 Binwall Modular Retaining Wall Square Meter
61503 Concrete Panel Modular Retaining Wall Square Meter
61504 (Type) Modular Retaining Wall Square Meter
61601 Geotextile Fabric, Type I Square Meter
61602 Geotextile Fabric, Type II Square Meter
61603 Geotextile Fabric, Type III Square Meter
61604 Geotextile Fabric, Type IV Square Meter
61605 Geotextile Fabric, Type V Square Meter
61606 Geotextile Fabric, Type ___ Square Meter
61701 Soil Nailed Wall, No. 1 Square Meter
61702 Soil Nailed Wall, No. 2 Square Meter
61703 Soil Nailed Wall, No. 3 Square Meter
61704 Soil Nailed Wall, No. __ Square Meter
61706 Additional Lengths of Nails Linear Meter
61801 Concrete Facing, 0.1 m thick Square Meter
61802 Concrete Facing, 0.15 m thick Square Meter
61803 Concrete Facing, 0.2 m thick Square Meter
61804 Concrete Facing, 0.25 m thick Square Meter
61805 Concrete Facing, 0.3 m thick Square Meter
61806 Concrete Facing, 0.35 m thick Square Meter
61807 Concrete Facing, 0.40 m thick Square Meter
61808 Concrete Facing, ____ m thick Square Meter
61811 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 1 mm Depth Linear Meter
61812 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 2 mm Depth Linear Meter
61813 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 3 mm Depth Linear Meter
61814 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 4 mm Depth Linear Meter
61815 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 5 mm Depth Linear Meter
61816 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 6 mm Depth Linear Meter
61817 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 7 mm Depth Linear Meter
61818 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 8 mm Depth Linear Meter
61819 Reinforcing Strips, 100 mm Width, 9 mm Depth Linear Meter
61820 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 1 mm Depth Linear Meter
61821 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 2 mm Depth Linear Meter
61822 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 3 mm Depth Linear Meter
61823 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 4 mm Depth Linear Meter

Page 16 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

61824 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 5 mm Depth Linear Meter

61825 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 6 mm Depth Linear Meter
61826 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 7 mm Depth Linear Meter
61827 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 8 mm Depth Linear Meter
61828 Reinforcing Strips, 150 mm Width, 9 mm Depth Linear Meter
61829 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 1 mm Depth Linear Meter
61830 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 2 mm Depth Linear Meter
61831 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 3 mm Depth Linear Meter
61832 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 4 mm Depth Linear Meter
61833 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 5 mm Depth Linear Meter
61834 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 6 mm Depth Linear Meter
61835 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 7 mm Depth Linear Meter
61836 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 8 mm Depth Linear Meter
61837 Reinforcing Strips, 200 mm Width, 9 mm Depth Linear Meter
61838 Reinforcing Strips, ___ mm Width, __ mm Depth Linear Meter
61901 Slope Cleaning and Scaling Square Meter
6190101 Slope Cleaning and Scaling, Slope Height less than 5 meters Square Meter
6190102 Slope Cleaning and Scaling, Slope Height 5 to 15 meters Square Meter
6190103 Slope Cleaning and Scaling, Slope Height 15 to 25 meters Square Meter
6190104 Slope Cleaning and Scaling, Slope Height more than 25 meters Square Meter
61902 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes Linear Meter
6190201 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia. on Slopes < 5 m high Linear Meter
6190202 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia. on Slopes 5-15 m high Linear Meter
6190203 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia. on Slopes 15-25 m high Linear Meter
6190204 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia. on Slopes more than 25 m high Linear Meter
6190205 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia. on Slopes < 5 m high Linear Meter
6190206 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia. on Slopes 5-15 m high Linear Meter
6190207 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia. on Slopes 15-25 m high Linear Meter
6190208 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia. on Slopes more than 25 m high Linear Meter
6190209 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia. on Slopes < 5 m high Linear Meter
6190210 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia. on Slopes 5-15 m high Linear Meter
6190211 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia. on Slopes 15-25 m high Linear Meter
6190212 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia. on Slopes more than 25 m high Linear Meter
6190213 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia. on Slopes < 5 m high Linear Meter
6190214 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia. on Slopes 5-15 m high Linear Meter
6190215 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia. on Slopes 15-25 m high Linear Meter
6190216 Initial Boring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia. on Slopes more than 25 m high Linear Meter
61903 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes Linear Meter
6190301 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia. on Slopes < 5 m hi Linear Meter
6190302 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia. on Slopes 5-15 m h Linear Meter
6190303 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia. on Slopes 15-25 m Linear Meter
6190304 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 50 mm dia. on Slopes more tha Linear Meter
6190305 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia. on Slopes < 5 m hi Linear Meter
6190306 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia. on Slopes 5-15 m h Linear Meter
6190307 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia. on Slopes 15-25 m Linear Meter
6190308 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 75 mm dia. on Slopes more tha Linear Meter
6190309 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia. on Slopes < 5 m h Linear Meter
6190310 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia. on Slopes 5-15 m Linear Meter
6190311 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia. on Slopes 15-25 Linear Meter
6190312 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 100 mm dia. on Slopes more th Linear Meter
6190313 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia. on Slopes < 5 m h Linear Meter
6190314 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia. on Slopes 5-15 m Linear Meter
6190315 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia. on Slopes 15-25 Linear Meter
6190316 Cementation and Reboring of Slope Reinforcement Installation Holes, 125 mm dia. on Slopes more th Linear Meter
61904 Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole Kilogram
6190401 Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole on Slopes < 5 m high Kilogram
6190402 Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole on Slopes 5-15 m high Kilogram
6190403 Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole on Slopes 15-25 m high Kilogram
6190404 Rock Grouting Around Installation Hole on Slopes more than 25 m high Kilogram

Page 17 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

61905 Tensioning of Rock Bolts or Cable Bolts including Tensioning Elements and Face Plates Unit
61906 Tensioning of Rock Anchors including Tensioning Elements and Face Plates Unit
61907 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor Linear Meter
6190701 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 50 kN Linear Meter
6190702 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 100 kN Linear Meter
6190703 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 200 kN Linear Meter
6190704 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 400 kN Linear Meter
6190705 Bare (Without Sheath) Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity ___ kN Linear Meter
61908 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor Linear Meter
6190801 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 50 kN Linear Meter
6190802 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 100 kN Linear Meter
6190803 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 200 kN Linear Meter
6190804 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity 400 kN Linear Meter
6190805 Sheathed Rock Bolt or Cable Bolt or Rock Anchor, Capacity ___ kN Linear Meter
61909 Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor Linear Meter
6190901 Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor, 50 mm dia. Linear Meter
6190902 Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor, 75 mm dia Linear Meter
6190903 Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor, 100 mm dia. Linear Meter
6190904 Corrugated Plastic Tube for Bolt or Anchor, ___ mm dia. Linear Meter
62001 Split Spoon Sampling of Soils Linear Meter
6200101 Split Spoon Sampling, 0-20 m depth Linear Meter
6200102 Split Spoon Sampling, 20-40 m depth Linear Meter
6200103 Split Spoon Sampling, over 40 m depth Linear Meter
62002 Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils Unit
62003 Rock Core Drilling NX Cores 53 mm min. dia., Double Barrel Linear Meter
62004 Rock Core Drilling NX Cores 53 mm min. dia., Triple Barrel Linear Meter
62101 Sheathing Material Cubic Meter
62102 Geocomposite Sheet Drain Square Meter
62103 Geocomposite Pavement Edge Drain Linear Meter
62104 Geogrid Square Meter
6210401 Geogrid Type A, Tensile Strength ___ kN/m Square Meter
6210405 Geogrid Type B, Tensile Strength ___ kN/m Square Meter
6210410 Geogrid Type C, Tensile Strength ___ kN/m Square Meter
6210415 Geogrid Type D, Tensile Strength ___ kN/m Square Meter
6210420 Geogrid Type ___, Tensile Strength ___ kN/m Square Meter
69999
70000 PART 7: ROADWAY LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS
70001
70201 33kV Overhead Electrical Line, Copper Conductor, 125 mm2 ACSR Penguin with Earth Cable, 85 m Linear Meter
70202 33kV Overhead Electrical Line, Copper Conductor, 255 mm2 ACSR Pelican with Earth Cable, 85 mm Linear Meter
70203 33kV Overhead Electrical Line, Aluminum Conductor, 125 mm2 ACSR Penguin with Earth Cable, 85 Linear Meter
70204 33kV Overhead Electrical Line, Aluminum Conductor, 255 mm2 ACSR Pelican with Earth Cable, 85 m Linear Meter
70205 33kV Overhead Electrical Line, Copper Conductor, ___ mm2 ACSR Penguin with Earth Cable, 85 m Linear Meter
70206 33kV Overhead Electrical Line, Copper Conductor, ___ mm2 ACSR Pelican with Earth Cable, 85 mm Linear Meter
70207 33kV Overhead Electrical Line, Aluminum Conductor, ___ mm2 ACSR Penguin with Earth Cable, 85 Linear Meter
70208 33kV Overhead Electrical Line, Aluminum Conductor, ___ mm2 ACSR Pelican with Earth Cable, 85 m Linear Meter
70301 33000/400 V (100) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70302 33000/400 V (160) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70303 33000/400 V (200) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70304 33000/400 V (300) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70305 33000/400 V (500) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70306 33000/400 V (600) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70307 33000/400 V (___) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70401 13.8 kVA Intake Switching Station including cells, service transformer, reinforced concrete building an Unit
70501 13,800/400 V (100) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70502 13,800/400 V (160) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70503 13,800/400 V (200) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70504 13,800/400 V (300) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70505 13,800/400 V (500) kVA Electrical Substation Unit

Page 18 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

70506 13,800/400 V (1000) kVA Electrical Substation Unit

70507 13,800/400 V (___) kVA Electrical Substation Unit
70601 13.8 kVA Medium Voltage Cable, single wire armored, PVC/XLPE Insulated, (3x185) mm2 Linear Meter
70602 13.8 kVA Medium Voltage Cable, single wire armored, PVC/XLPE Insulated, (3x95) mm2 Linear Meter
70603 13.8 kVA Medium Voltage Cable, single wire armored, PVC/XLPE Insulated, (3x1x95) mm2 Linear Meter
70604 13.8 kVA Medium Voltage Cable, single wire armored, PVC/XLPE Insulated, (Size) mm2 Linear Meter
70701 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insulated Stranded Copper Wires, (4x6) mm2 Linear Meter
70702 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insulated Stranded Copper Wires, (4x10) mm2 Linear Meter
70703 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insulated Stranded Copper Wires, (4x16) mm2 Linear Meter
70704 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insulated Stranded Copper Wires, (4x25) mm2 Linear Meter
70705 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insulated Stranded Copper Wires, (4x35) mm2 Linear Meter
70706 Low Voltage Cable, PVC/PVC Insulated Stranded Copper Wires, (Size) mm2 Linear Meter
70801 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (100) Amp Main C.B., (60) Amp Main Contactor Unit
70802 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (150) Amp Main C.B., (150) Amp Main Contactor Unit
70803 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (200) Amp Main C.B., (200) Amp Main Contactor Unit
70804 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (300) Amp Main C.B., (300) Amp Main Contactor Unit
70805 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (400) Amp Main C.B., (350) Amp Main Contactor Unit
70806 Low Voltage Feeder Pillar, IP54, (___) Amp Main C.B., (___) Amp Main Contactor Unit
70901 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaires, including control gear and power distribution box, 2 Unit
70902 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaires, including control gear and power distribution box, 2 Unit
70903 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 30 Unit
70904 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 35 Unit
70905 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 40 Unit
70906 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 2 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, __ Unit
70911 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 20 Unit
70912 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 25 Unit
70913 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 30 Unit
70914 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 35 Unit
70915 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 40 Unit
70916 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 4 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, __ Unit
70921 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box 20 Unit
70922 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box 25 Unit
70923 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box 30 Unit
70924 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box 35 Unit
70925 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 6 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box 40 Unit
70926 High Mast Lighting of fixing 6 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box ___ m heig Unit
70931 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 20 Unit
70932 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 25 Unit
70933 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 30 Unit
70934 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 35 Unit
70935 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, 40 Unit
70936 High Mast Lighting capable of fixing 9 luminaires including control gear and power distribution box, __ Unit
71001 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power distribution box, bolts and cables, 4 m height Unit
71002 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power distribution box, bolts and cables, 6 m height Unit
71003 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power distribution box, bolts and cables, 8 m height Unit
71004 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power distribution box, bolts and cables, 10 m height Unit
71005 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power distribution box, bolts and cables, 12 m height Unit
71006 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power distribution box, bolts and cables, 14 m height Unit
71007 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power distribution box, bolts and cables, 16 m height Unit
71008 Lighting Columns (Poles) complete with arms, power distribution box, bolts and cables, 18-19.9 m hei Unit
71101 Street Lighting Luminaire, IP54, complete with control gear and lamp, 150 W.H.P.S. Unit
71102 Street Lighting Luminaire, IP54, complete with control gear and lamp, 250 W.H.P.S. Unit
71103 Street Lighting Luminaire, IP54, complete with control gear and lamp, 400 W.H.P.S. Unit
71104 Street Lighting Luminaire, IP54, complete with control gear and lamp, 1000 W.H.P.S. Unit
71105 Street Lighting Luminaire, IP54, complete with control gear and lamp, ____ W.H.P.S. Unit
71201 Amenity Lighting Luminaires, IP 54, complete with lamp, 70 W.H.P.S. Unit
71202 Amenity Lighting Luminaires, IP 54, complete with lamp, 150 W.H.P.S. Unit
71203 Amenity Lighting Luminaires, IP 54, complete with lamp, 250 W.H.P.S. Unit
71204 Amenity Lighting Luminaires, IP 54, complete with lamp, 400 W.H.P.S. Unit

Page 19 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

71205 Amenity Lighting Luminaires, IP 54, complete with lamp, ___ W.H.P.S. Unit
71301 Overhead Sign Lighting Luminaires, IP 54, 250 Watt H.P.M.V., including fixtures, cables, distribution Unit
71401 Underbridge Fitting, IP54, complete with lamp, 70 W.H.P.S. Unit
71402 Underbridge Fitting, IP54, complete with lamp, 150 W.H.P.S. Unit
71403 Underbridge Fitting, IP54, complete with lamp, 250 W.H.P.S. Unit
71404 Underbridge Fitting, IP54, complete with lamp, 400 W.H.P.S. Unit
71405 Underbridge Fitting, IP54, complete with lamp, ___ W.H.P.S. Unit
71501 Underpass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, daytime lighting, complete with lamp, 150 W.H.P.S. Unit
71502 Underpass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, daytime lighting, complete with lamp, 2 x 150 W.H.P.S. Unit
71503 Underpass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, daytime lighting, complete with lamp, 250 W.H.P.S. Unit
71504 Underpass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, daytime lighting, complete with lamp, 2 x 250 W.H.P.S. Unit
71505 Underpass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, daytime lighting, complete with lamp, 400 W.H.P.S. Unit
71506 Underpass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, daytime lighting, complete with lamp, 2 x 400 W.H.P.S. Unit
71507 Underpass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, daytime lighting, complete with lamp, ___ W.H.P.S. Unit
71511 Under-pass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, nighttime lighting, complete with lamp, 40 Fluorescent Unit
71512 Under-pass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, nighttime lighting, complete with lamp, 58 Fluorescent Unit
71513 Under-pass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, nighttime lighting, complete with lamp, 65 Fluorescent Unit
71514 Under-pass Lighting Luminaires, IP65, nighttime lighting, complete with lamp, ___ Fluorescent Unit
71601 Earthing Installation, Highmast Unit
71602 Earthing Installation, Sub-Station Unit
71603 Earthing Installation, Switching Station Unit
71604 Earthing Installation, Columns and Amenity Lighting Unit
71605 Earthing Installation, Gantry Sign or Overhead Unit
71606 Earthing Installation, (Type) Unit
71901 uPVC Duct, installed, 50 mm dia Linear Meter
71902 uPVC Duct, installed, 80 mm dia Linear Meter
71903 uPVC Duct, installed, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
71904 uPVC Duct, installed, 150 mm dia Linear Meter
71905 uPVC Duct, installed, 200 mm dia Linear Meter
71906 uPVC Duct, installed, 250 mm dia Linear Meter
71907 uPVC Duct, installed, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
71908 uPVC Duct, installed, 350 mm dia Linear Meter
71909 uPVC Duct, installed, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
71915 Drawpit with Heavy Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 900 x 1200 mm Unit
71916 Drawpit with Heavy Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 1800 x 1200 mm Unit
71917 Drawpit with Heavy Duty Steel Cover, 600 x 600 x 1200 mm Unit
71918 Drawpit with Heavy Duty Steel Cover, ( Size ) mm Unit
71925 Drawpit with Medium Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 900 x 1200 mm Unit
71926 Drawpit with Medium Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 1800 x 1200 mm Unit
71927 Drawpit with Medium Duty Steel Cover, 600 x 600 x 1000 mm Unit
71928 Drawpit with Medium Duty Steel Cover, ( Size ) mm Unit
71935 Drawpit with Light Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 900 x 1200 mm Unit
71936 Drawpit with Light Duty Steel Cover, 900 x 1800 x 1200 mm Unit
71937 Drawpit with Light Duty Steel Cover, 600 x 600 x 1000 mm Unit
71938 Drawpit with Light Duty Steel Cover, ( Size ) mm Unit
71945 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (6) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71946 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (8) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71947 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (10) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71948 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (12) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71949 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (14) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71950 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (16) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71951 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (20 ) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71952 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (25) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71953 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (30) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71954 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (35) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71955 Reinforced Concrete Foundation for (___) meter high mast/lighting column Unit
71960 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (6) meter lighting column Unit
71961 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (8) meter lighting column Unit
71962 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (10) meter lighting column Unit

Page 20 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

71963 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (12) meter lighting column Unit
71964 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (14) meter lighting column Unit
71965 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (16) meter lighting column Unit
71966 Breakaway Support Coupling Assembly for (___) meter lighting column Unit
71970 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (6) meter lighting column Unit
71971 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (8) meter lighting column Unit
71972 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (10) meter lighting column Unit
71973 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (12) meter lighting column Unit
71974 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (14) meter lighting column Unit
71975 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (16) meter lighting column Unit
71976 Breakaway Multi-Direction Slip Base Assembly for (___) meter lighting column Unit
71980 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (6) meter lighting column Unit
71981 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (8) meter lighting column Unit
71982 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (10) meter lighting column Unit
71983 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (12) meter lighting column Unit
71984 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (14) meter lighting column Unit
71985 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (16) meter lighting column Unit
71986 Breakaway Cast Aluminum Transform Base Assembly for (___) meter lighting column Unit
71990 Reinforced Concrete Base for Substations in accordance with substation supplier design Unit
71991 Reinforced Concrete Base for Feeder Pillars Unit
72001 Signal Controller, 4 Phase Unit
72002 Signal Controller, 8 Phase Unit
72003 Signal Controller, 16 Phase Unit
72004 Signal Controller, 32 Phase Unit
72005 Signal Controller, (No.) Phase Unit
72010 Traffic Signal Head, Size 3 x 100 mm Unit
72011 Traffic Signal Head, Size 3 x 200 mm Unit
72012 Traffic Signal Head, Size 3 x 300 mm Unit
72013 Traffic Signal Head, Size __ x __ mm Unit
72020 Pedestrian Traffic Signal Head, Size 2 x 200 Unit
72021 Pedestrian Traffic Signal Head, Size 1 x 300 Unit
72022 Pedestrian Traffic Signal Head, Size 1 x 200, with Flashing Arrows Unit
72023 Pedestrian Traffic Signal Head, Size 1 x 200, with Flashing Arrows Unit
72024 Pedestrian Traffic Signal Push Button Unit
72025 Traffic Signal Support, Cantilever Unit
72026 Traffic Signal Support, Pedestal Unit
72027 Traffic Signal Support, Short Bracket Unit
72028 Traffic Loop Detectors Unit
79999
80000 PART 8: LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION
80001
80101 Trees, Acacia arabica Unit
80102 Trees, Albizzia lebbek Unit
80103 Trees, Casuarina Unit
80104 Trees, Delonix regia Unit
80105 Trees, Eucalyptus camaldulensis Unit
80106 Trees, Prosopis juliflora Unit
80107 Trees, Schinus molle Unit
80108 Trees, Schinus terebinthifolius Unit
80109 Trees, Ficus nitida Unit
80110 Trees, Ficus altissima Unit
80111 Trees, Pithecellobium dulce Unit
80112 Trees, Aiziphus mauritiana Unit
80113 Trees, (Type) Unit
80120 Palms, Phoenix dactylifera Unit
80121 Palms, (Type) Unit
80125 Shrubs, Acacia farnesiana Unit
80126 Shrubs, Bougainvillea spectabilis Unit
80127 Shrubs, Bougainvillea glabra Unit

Page 21 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

80128 Shrubs, Caesalpina pulcherrima Unit

80129 Shrubs, Dodonia viscosa Unit
80130 Shrubs, Callistermon viminalis Unit
80131 Shrubs, Atriplex halimus Unit
80132 Shrubs, Tecoma stans Unit
80133 Shrubs, Tehvitia nereifolia Unit
80134 Shrubs, (Type) Unit
80140 Creepers, (Type) Unit
80145 Ground Cover, Carissa grandiflora Unit
80146 Ground Cover, Clerodendron inerme Unit
80147 Ground Cover, Ipomoea pes-capre Unit
80148 Ground Cover, Ipomoea carica Unit
80149 Ground Cover, (Type) Unit
80155 Succulents, Aloe vera Unit
80156 Succulents, Agava americana Unit
80157 Succulents, Opuntia Unit
80158 Succulents, Yucca alofolia Unit
80159 Succulents, (Type) Unit
80165 Climbing Plants, (Type) Unit
80170 Grass, Bermuda Square Meter
80171 Grass, Cydomon Dactylon/Roa Annua Square Meter
80172 Grass, (Type) Square Meter
80175 Hydroseeding Mixes, Bermuda Square Meter
80176 Hydroseeding Mixes, (Type) Square Meter
80180 Gravel Mulch, Class 18-25 mm dia Square Meter
80181 Gravel Mulch, Class __ - __ mm dia Square Meter
80185 Precast Concrete Tiling Square Meter
80186 Sod Square Meter
80201 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 25 mm dia Linear Meter
80202 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 40 mm dia Linear Meter
80203 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 50 mm dia Linear Meter
80204 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 80 mm dia Linear Meter
80205 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
80206 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 150 mm dia Linear Meter
80207 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 200 mm dia Linear Meter
80208 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, 250 mm dia Linear Meter
80209 Irrigation Pipework, Cast Iron, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
80215 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 50 mm dia Linear Meter
80216 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 80 mm dia Linear Meter
80217 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
80218 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 150 mm dia Linear Meter
80219 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 200 mm dia Linear Meter
80220 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 250 mm dia Linear Meter
80221 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
80222 Plastic Irrigation Pipe, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
80225 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 50 mm dia Linear Meter
80226 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 80 mm dia Linear Meter
80227 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
80228 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 150 mm dia Linear Meter
80229 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 200 mm dia Linear Meter
80230 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 250 mm dia Linear Meter
80231 Steel Irrigation Pipe, 300 mm dia Linear Meter
80232 Steel Irrigation Pipe, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
80240 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 50 mm dia Linear Meter
80241 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 80 mm dia Linear Meter
80242 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 100 mm dia Linear Meter
80243 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 150 mm dia Linear Meter
80244 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 200 mm dia Linear Meter
80245 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 250 mm dia Linear Meter

Page 22 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

80246 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, 300 mm dia Linear Meter

80247 (Type), Irrigation Pipe, ___ mm dia Linear Meter
80301 Valve, Butterfly, 300 mm Unit
80302 Valve, Butterfly, 250 mm Unit
80303 Valve, Butterfly, 200 mm Unit
80304 Valve, Butterfly, 150 mm Unit
80305 Valve, Butterfly, 100 mm Unit
80306 Valve, Butterfly, 80 mm Unit
80307 Valve, Butterfly, 50 mm Unit
80308 Valve, Butterfly, 40 mm Unit
80309 Valve, Butterfly, 25 mm Unit
80310 Valve, Air-Type I, 300 mm Unit
80311 Valve, Air-Type I, 250 mm Unit
80312 Valve, Air-Type I, 200 mm Unit
80313 Valve, Air-Type I, 150 mm Unit
80314 Valve, Air-Type I, 100 mm Unit
80315 Valve, Air-Type I, 80 mm Unit
80316 Valve, Air-Type I, 50 mm Unit
80317 Valve, Air-Type I, 40 mm Unit
80318 Valve, Air Type I, 25 mm Unit
80319 Valve, Air-Type II, 300 mm Unit
80320 Valve Air-Type II, 250 mm Unit
80321 Valve Air-Type II, 200 mm Unit
80322 Valve Air-Type II, 150 mm Unit
80323 Valve Air-Type II, 100 mm Unit
80324 Valve Air-Type II, 80 mm Unit
80325 Valve Air-Type II, 50 mm Unit
80326 Valve Air-Type II, 40 mm Unit
80327 Valve Air-Type II, 25 mm Unit
80328 Valve, Globe, 300 mm Unit
80329 Valve, Globe, 250 mm Unit
80330 Valve, Globe, 200 mm Unit
80331 Valve, Globe, 150 mm Unit
80332 Valve, Globe, 100 mm Unit
80333 Valve, Globe, 80 mm Unit
80334 Valve, Globe, 50 mm Unit
80335 Valve, Globe, 25 mm Unit
80336 Valve, Silent Check, 300 mm Unit
80337 Valve, Silent Check, 250 mm Unit
80338 Valve, Silent Check, 200 mm Unit
80339 Valve, Silent Check, 150 mm Unit
80340 Valve, Silent Check, 100 mm Unit
80341 Valve, Silent Check, 80 mm Unit
80342 Valve, Silent Check, 50 mm Unit
80343 Valve, Silent Check, 40 mm Unit
80344 Valve, Silent Check, 25 mm Unit
80345 Valve, Remote Control, 300 mm Unit
80346 Valve, Remote Control, 250 mm Unit
80347 Valve, Remote Control, 200 mm Unit
80348 Valve, Remote Control, 150 mm Unit
80349 Valve, Remote Control, 100 mm Unit
80350 Valve, Remote Control, 80 mm Unit
80351 Valve, Remote Control, 50 mm Unit
80352 Valve, Remote Control, 40 mm Unit
80353 Valve, Remote Control, 25 mm Unit
80354 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 300 mm Unit
80355 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 250 mm Unit
80356 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 200 mm Unit
80357 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 150 mm Unit

Page 23 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

80358 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 100 mm Unit

80359 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 80 mm Unit
80360 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 50 mm Unit
80361 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 40 mm Unit
80362 Valve, Pressure Reducing, 25 mm Unit
80363 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 300 mm Unit
80364 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 250 mm Unit
80365 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 200 mm Unit
80366 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 150 mm Unit
80367 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 100 mm Unit
80368 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 80 mm Unit
80369 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 50 mm Unit
80370 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 40 mm Unit
80371 Valve, Pressure Relief Check, 25 mm Unit
80372 Valve, Penstock, 300 mm Unit
80373 Valve, Penstock, 250 mm Unit
80374 Valve, Penstock, 200 mm Unit
80375 Valve, Penstock, 150 mm Unit
80376 Valve, Penstock, 100 mm Unit
80377 Valve, Penstock, 80 mm Unit
80378 Valve, Penstock, 50 mm Unit
80379 Valve, Penstock, 40 mm Unit
80380 Valve, Penstock, 25 mm Unit
80381 Valve, Gate, 300 mm Unit
80382 Valve, Gate, 250 mm Unit
80383 Valve, Gate, 200 mm Unit
80384 Valve, Gate, 150 mm Unit
80385 Valve, Gate, 100 mm Unit
80386 Valve, Gate, 80 mm Unit
80387 Valve, Gate, 60 mm Unit
80388 Valve, Gate, 40 mm Unit
80389 Valve, Gage, 25 mm Unit
80390 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 300 mm Unit
80391 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 250 mm Unit
80392 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 200 mm Unit
80393 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 150 mm Unit
80394 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 100 mm Unit
80395 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 80 mm Unit
80396 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 60 mm Unit
80397 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 40 mm Unit
80398 Combination Valve, Pressure and Gate, 25 mm Unit
80401 Electricity Supply, Pumping Station Linear Meter
80402 Electricity Supply, Irrigation Equipment Linear Meter
80403 Electricity Supply, Pumping Station LPSM
80404 Electricity Supply, Irrigation Equipment LPSM
80501 Mechanical Plant for Irrigation, Pumping Station Lump Sum
80502 Electrical Installations for Pumping Station Unit
80503 Civil Works for Pumping Station Lump Sum
80504 Suction and Header Pipes for Pumping Station Lump Sum
80601 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, 1 m Height Linear Meter
80602 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, 1.5 m Height Linear Meter
80603 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, 2 m Height Linear Meter
80604 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, 2.5 m Height Linear Meter
80605 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, 3.0 m Height Linear Meter
80606 Pumping Station Chain Link Fence and Gates, __m Height Linear Meter
89999
90000 PART 9: TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES AND WORK ZONES
90001
90201 Traffic Control Management Lump Sum

Page 24 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

90202 Flashing Warning Arrow Panel Unit

9020201 Flashing Warning Arrow Panel, Type A Unit
9020202 Flashing Warning Arrow Panel, Type B Unit
9020203 Flashing Warning Arrow Panel, Type C Unit
90203 Barricade Unit
9020301 Barricade, Type I Unit
9020302 Barricade, Type II Unit
90204 Traffic Cone and Tubular Markers Unit
90205 Temporary Sign Square Meter
90206 Plastic Traffic Drum Unit
90207 Flagger Hour
90208 Pilot Car Hour
90209 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barrier Linear Meter
9020901 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barrier, Concrete Linear Meter
9020902 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barrier, Triton Linear Meter
9020903 Portable Crashworthy Safety Barrier, (Type), Linear Meter
90210 Moving Crashworthy Safety Barrier Linear Meter
90211 Remove and Reset Portable Impact Attenuator Unit
90212 Temporary Guardrail Linear Meter
90213 Truck Mounted Attenuator Unit
90214 Portable Impact Attenuator Unit
9021401 Portable Impact Attenuator, G.R.E.A.T. Unit
9021402 Portable Impact Attenuator, ET-2000 Unit
9021403 Portable Impact Attenuator, Sand barrels Unit
9021404 Portable Impact Attenuator, (Type) Unit
90215 Temporary Pavement Markings Linear Meter
90216 Temporary Pavement Markings, Symbols and Letters Square Meter
90217 Temporary Pavement Markings, Symbols and Letters Unit
90218 Temporary Raised Pavement Markers Unit
90219 Temporary Rumble Strips, Type B Square Meter
90220 Temporary Speed Bumps Square Meter
90221 Vertical Panel Unit
90222 Chevron Unit
90223 Warning Light, Type A, B or C Unit
90224 Hazard Identification Beacon Unit
90225 Temporary Variable Message Sign Unit
90226 Temporary Traffic Signal Unit
90227 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support Unit
9022701 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support, Opposing Traffic Lane Divider Unit
9022702 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support, Construction Object Panel Unit
9022703 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support, Vertical Panel Unit
9022704 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support, Chevron Alignment Unit
9022705 Channelizing Device on Flexible Support, Tubular Channelizer Unit
90228 Detour Bridge Square Meter
90229 Aggregate Subbase for Detours Cubic Meter
90230 Aggregate Base for Detours Cubic Meter
90231 Bituminous Concrete for Detours Cubic Meter
90301 Reflectorized Traffic Lines Square Meter
9030101 Reflectorized White Traffic Lines Square Meter
9030102 Reflectorized Yellow Traffic Lines Square Meter
90302 Reflectorized Traffic Control Markings Square Meter
90303 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Lines Square Meter
9030301 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic White Traffic Lines Square Meter
9030302 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Yellow Traffic Lines Square Meter
90304 Retroreflectorized Thermoplastic Traffic Control Markings Square Meter
90305 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Lines Square Meter
9030501 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic White Traffic Lines Square Meter
9030502 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Yellow Traffic Lines Square Meter
90306 Retroreflectorized Epoxy Thermoplastic Traffic Control Markings Square Meter

Page 25 of 26
 New Construction Pay Items
Table of Contents

90307 Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers Unit

9030701 Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers, Type A Unit
9030702 Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers, Type B Unit
9030703 Retroreflective Raised Pavement Markers, Type C Unit
90308 Ceramic Raised Pavement Markers Unit
90401 Speed Bumps Square Meter
90402 Rumble Strips Square Meter
9040201 Rumble Strips, Type A Square Meter
9040202 Rumble Strips, Type B Square Meter
9040203 Scored Shoulder Rumble Strips, Type C - Indented Linear Meter
9040204 Milled Shoulder Rumble Strips, Type D - Milled Linear Meter
90501 Highway Signs, Ground-Mounted Square Meter
9050101 Highway Signs, Ground-Mounted - Sheet Aluminum Square Meter
9050102 Highway Signs, Ground-Mounted - Aluminum Planking or Internally Double Skin Aluminum Sheet Square Meter
90502 Highway Signs, Overhead Square Meter
9050201 Highway Signs, Overhead - Sheet Aluminum Square Meter
9050202 Highway Signs, Overhead - Aluminum Planking or Internally Double Skin Aluminum Sheet Square Meter
90503 Sign Support, (Breakaway) I.P.E. Kilogram
9050301 Sign Support, (Breakaway) Single Post I.P.E. Kilogram
9050302 Sign Support, (Breakaway) Double Post I.P.E. Kilogram
9050303 Sign Support, (Breakaway) Triple Post I.P.E. Kilogram
90504 Sign Support, (Breakaway) Tubular Unit
90505 Sign Support-Overhead Ton
9050501 Sign Support-Gantry Ton
9050502 Sign Support-Cantilever Ton
90506 Delineators Unit
90507 Kilometer Posts Unit
9050701 Kilometer Posts, Single-Face Unit
9050702 Kilometer Posts, Double-Face Unit
90508 Retroreflectors Unit
90509 Object Markers Unit
9050901 Object Markers, Type 1 or 3 Unit
9050902 Object Markers, Type 2 Unit

Page 26 of 26